diff --git a/CHANGELOG.md b/CHANGELOG.md index 3e3395bb81e..bb937640beb 100644 --- a/CHANGELOG.md +++ b/CHANGELOG.md @@ -1,5 +1,63 @@ # Changelog +## [2.182.0](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/compare/v2.181.0...v2.182.0) (2025-09-16) + + +### Features + +* **aiplatform:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/e8eefdc62fb7bf1f8b70e6c670afa014208b5421 ([46a12bd](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/46a12bd7a803f46f13aa2764209a03009a9f8f1e)) +* **alloydb:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/b34a3254b1d84f3e3da4096ffcd66ae435d82375 ([c9e33f4](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/c9e33f4aee974b1512cc6a3ac0e1607917976f9d)) +* **analyticshub:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/67b3e55e7b36b6cdfdc324483ef019cb8c9072e4 ([46a12bd](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/46a12bd7a803f46f13aa2764209a03009a9f8f1e)) +* **androidpublisher:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/2e9b68d8cf6ec0075a73c5e4592aaa27e0d38ced ([46a12bd](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/46a12bd7a803f46f13aa2764209a03009a9f8f1e)) +* **apigee:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/bdb05bf2a5494979afc57a4f66bc5e78ac6172f1 ([c9e33f4](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/c9e33f4aee974b1512cc6a3ac0e1607917976f9d)) +* **apihub:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/9fea79faa088afde920c5c16d3c7ae3d14ba6d2f ([c9e33f4](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/c9e33f4aee974b1512cc6a3ac0e1607917976f9d)) +* **backupdr:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/b6465d09d94fb5b87eab86a858f697889d182426 ([c9e33f4](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/c9e33f4aee974b1512cc6a3ac0e1607917976f9d)) +* **cloudcommerceprocurement:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/e77e2707a7947e9412299ed8499490f002a2bd25 ([46a12bd](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/46a12bd7a803f46f13aa2764209a03009a9f8f1e)) +* **compute:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/d7ec4689bc525691ddb134ded1faed58eb1e3493 ([c9e33f4](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/c9e33f4aee974b1512cc6a3ac0e1607917976f9d)) +* **connectors:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/353b32550b03044840da559b8df504a1d866889e ([46a12bd](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/46a12bd7a803f46f13aa2764209a03009a9f8f1e)) +* **containeranalysis:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/c26d46fdcde6fb9682f72c8a12f3b57de312269e ([c9e33f4](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/c9e33f4aee974b1512cc6a3ac0e1607917976f9d)) +* **datamigration:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/e2078e6715a81d469aa15f5fcec722276a3ee895 ([46a12bd](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/46a12bd7a803f46f13aa2764209a03009a9f8f1e)) +* **datastream:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/cf2823439213374edb16eb612a998c5ce616fea5 ([46a12bd](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/46a12bd7a803f46f13aa2764209a03009a9f8f1e)) +* **dfareporting:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/12522ded727e54e031a25620166c026c4092e878 ([c9e33f4](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/c9e33f4aee974b1512cc6a3ac0e1607917976f9d)) +* **discoveryengine:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/1b200b2e5ae7f58a3ad1b4ffc75724515ac965e8 ([c9e33f4](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/c9e33f4aee974b1512cc6a3ac0e1607917976f9d)) +* **discoveryengine:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/500564eb8ee139f3944c9be63fdc80a474aeaeae ([46a12bd](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/46a12bd7a803f46f13aa2764209a03009a9f8f1e)) +* **drive:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/81e45356e2c95f69f15fc33d490d3d59775cd137 ([46a12bd](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/46a12bd7a803f46f13aa2764209a03009a9f8f1e)) +* **file:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/013fd0bb23681b5ca655ec1cbe2f27d3051310ee ([46a12bd](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/46a12bd7a803f46f13aa2764209a03009a9f8f1e)) +* **firebaseappcheck:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/da6b0fc6cda83448a47474b47f66576a42da7e1f ([46a12bd](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/46a12bd7a803f46f13aa2764209a03009a9f8f1e)) +* **firebaseappdistribution:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/e01005c385b869833d0a80a93bf0516445f81f08 ([46a12bd](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/46a12bd7a803f46f13aa2764209a03009a9f8f1e)) +* **firebaseapphosting:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/0cdaaf0bcdd09e3147d7177dcc86561becc2a294 ([c9e33f4](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/c9e33f4aee974b1512cc6a3ac0e1607917976f9d)) +* **firebasedataconnect:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/33c663201013272fc84d18aa48ad2e7c7a4c1fd3 ([c9e33f4](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/c9e33f4aee974b1512cc6a3ac0e1607917976f9d)) +* **firebaseml:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/81bf81b4fa39a94834f4f463cdfe8cce9757a06e ([46a12bd](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/46a12bd7a803f46f13aa2764209a03009a9f8f1e)) +* **gkehub:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/c4ac7b7034849f09b46681ebd36e0be84187137b ([c9e33f4](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/c9e33f4aee974b1512cc6a3ac0e1607917976f9d)) +* **gkeonprem:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/420db61e290051398ed0dea5350a36328af0f42f ([46a12bd](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/46a12bd7a803f46f13aa2764209a03009a9f8f1e)) +* **healthcare:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/4f92adbf7597e7463a8be582ed7fc5ccfcc4cad1 ([46a12bd](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/46a12bd7a803f46f13aa2764209a03009a9f8f1e)) +* **managedkafka:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/8a02a132170b01255592b8887f1eca90a37fbff2 ([46a12bd](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/46a12bd7a803f46f13aa2764209a03009a9f8f1e)) +* **merchantapi:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/4e23e8da47083368742fcb5c8a86248b38c20eb6 ([c9e33f4](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/c9e33f4aee974b1512cc6a3ac0e1607917976f9d)) +* **migrationcenter:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/58c96d87a16dd4c534e07a3891e2591396bfbe35 ([c9e33f4](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/c9e33f4aee974b1512cc6a3ac0e1607917976f9d)) +* **netapp:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/2a867165e170c6182696f988b024f989579b2e37 ([c9e33f4](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/c9e33f4aee974b1512cc6a3ac0e1607917976f9d)) +* **netapp:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/efea6f877e544a100d11e1fcc7cbe469fe861043 ([46a12bd](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/46a12bd7a803f46f13aa2764209a03009a9f8f1e)) +* **networkmanagement:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/08bd8ae0c81acc83a24c3cae983317f62ab6f436 ([46a12bd](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/46a12bd7a803f46f13aa2764209a03009a9f8f1e)) +* **networkmanagement:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/43996b53e74d5fc5881d46c655cf2a23f8bb37d0 ([c9e33f4](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/c9e33f4aee974b1512cc6a3ac0e1607917976f9d)) +* **oracledatabase:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/462d30e779a0dfd066cacd9f39c576b4ca7841d9 ([c9e33f4](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/c9e33f4aee974b1512cc6a3ac0e1607917976f9d)) +* **oracledatabase:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/8018b9785ee0d7009b4becdffd9e2018405e3d8e ([46a12bd](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/46a12bd7a803f46f13aa2764209a03009a9f8f1e)) +* **privateca:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/6a1651c96807edc2d7c6e6c47fa9c1b619104591 ([46a12bd](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/46a12bd7a803f46f13aa2764209a03009a9f8f1e)) +* **redis:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/6f72028bef5b5efcbb8d7d43d1533281da1ac3b2 ([c9e33f4](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/c9e33f4aee974b1512cc6a3ac0e1607917976f9d)) +* **redis:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/c54c46b3a3ae735c88bd69cf62eed963ceab0d4a ([46a12bd](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/46a12bd7a803f46f13aa2764209a03009a9f8f1e)) +* **securitycenter:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/5ee4c5f64ac6a88adaaad624c16f4a008bb11614 ([c9e33f4](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/c9e33f4aee974b1512cc6a3ac0e1607917976f9d)) +* **servicecontrol:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/0603894c36b32138db3ba2b8e470d72a289c82bf ([46a12bd](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/46a12bd7a803f46f13aa2764209a03009a9f8f1e)) +* **texttospeech:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/f6a6cbd92c14ec5eeb7168415ea0123974ebab96 ([46a12bd](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/46a12bd7a803f46f13aa2764209a03009a9f8f1e)) +* **tpu:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/d95473a5a5d7f637bc2afebb3498c054507ff2a7 ([46a12bd](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/46a12bd7a803f46f13aa2764209a03009a9f8f1e)) +* **vmmigration:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/1586ef7d83d260a282648a8ee1ccfe4093d84d70 ([c9e33f4](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/c9e33f4aee974b1512cc6a3ac0e1607917976f9d)) +* **walletobjects:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/219c17c0cb19a8e4b0338c60ac54926339725b76 ([c9e33f4](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/c9e33f4aee974b1512cc6a3ac0e1607917976f9d)) + + +### Bug Fixes + +* **datastore:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/cedc1462d934025db1a07ac013c323f395e53c16 ([c9e33f4](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/c9e33f4aee974b1512cc6a3ac0e1607917976f9d)) +* **firestore:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/32e30451aacd702a893f6b1a559f5b2b385da3a3 ([c9e33f4](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/c9e33f4aee974b1512cc6a3ac0e1607917976f9d)) +* **logging:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/7bb97eef03fb204dc55c7dd054d01dbb3662a664 ([46a12bd](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/46a12bd7a803f46f13aa2764209a03009a9f8f1e)) +* **run:** Update the api https://togithub.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/39edf0966aef1a8659840ee54b2f7445a871d58e ([c9e33f4](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/commit/c9e33f4aee974b1512cc6a3ac0e1607917976f9d)) + ## [2.181.0](https://github.com/googleapis/google-api-python-client/compare/v2.180.0...v2.181.0) (2025-09-02) diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.evaluationItems.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.evaluationItems.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..537b43aa2f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.evaluationItems.html @@ -0,0 +1,1095 @@ + + + +

Vertex AI API . projects . locations . evaluationItems

+

Instance Methods

+

+ close()

+

Close httplib2 connections.

+

+ create(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Creates an Evaluation Item.

+

+ delete(name, x__xgafv=None)

+

Deletes an Evaluation Item.

+

+ get(name, x__xgafv=None)

+

Gets an Evaluation Item.

+

+ list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Lists Evaluation Items.

+

+ list_next()

+

Retrieves the next page of results.

+

Method Details

+
+ close() +
Close httplib2 connections.
+
+ +
+ create(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Creates an Evaluation Item.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The resource name of the Location to create the Evaluation Item in. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}` (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # EvaluationItem is a single evaluation request or result. The content of an EvaluationItem is immutable - it cannot be updated once created. EvaluationItems can be deleted when no longer needed.
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when this item was created.
+  "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display name of the EvaluationItem.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # Output only. Error for the evaluation item.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "evaluationItemType": "A String", # Required. The type of the EvaluationItem.
+  "evaluationRequest": { # Single evaluation request. # The request to evaluate.
+    "candidateResponses": [ # Optional. Responses from model under test and other baseline models for comparison.
+      { # Responses from model or agent.
+        "candidate": "A String", # Required. The name of the candidate that produced the response.
+        "text": "A String", # Text response.
+        "value": "", # Fields and values that can be used to populate the response template.
+      },
+    ],
+    "goldenResponse": { # Responses from model or agent. # Optional. The Ideal response or ground truth.
+      "candidate": "A String", # Required. The name of the candidate that produced the response.
+      "text": "A String", # Text response.
+      "value": "", # Fields and values that can be used to populate the response template.
+    },
+    "prompt": { # Prompt to be evaluated. # Required. The request/prompt to evaluate.
+      "promptTemplateData": { # Message to hold a prompt template and the values to populate the template. # Prompt template data.
+        "values": { # The values for fields in the prompt template.
+          "a_key": { # The base structured datatype containing multi-part content of a message. A `Content` includes a `role` field designating the producer of the `Content` and a `parts` field containing multi-part data that contains the content of the message turn.
+            "parts": [ # Required. Ordered `Parts` that constitute a single message. Parts may have different IANA MIME types.
+              { # A datatype containing media that is part of a multi-part `Content` message. A `Part` consists of data which has an associated datatype. A `Part` can only contain one of the accepted types in `Part.data`. A `Part` must have a fixed IANA MIME type identifying the type and subtype of the media if `inline_data` or `file_data` field is filled with raw bytes.
+                "codeExecutionResult": { # Result of executing the [ExecutableCode]. Only generated when using the [CodeExecution] tool, and always follows a `part` containing the [ExecutableCode]. # Optional. Result of executing the [ExecutableCode].
+                  "outcome": "A String", # Required. Outcome of the code execution.
+                  "output": "A String", # Optional. Contains stdout when code execution is successful, stderr or other description otherwise.
+                },
+                "executableCode": { # Code generated by the model that is meant to be executed, and the result returned to the model. Generated when using the [CodeExecution] tool, in which the code will be automatically executed, and a corresponding [CodeExecutionResult] will also be generated. # Optional. Code generated by the model that is meant to be executed.
+                  "code": "A String", # Required. The code to be executed.
+                  "language": "A String", # Required. Programming language of the `code`.
+                },
+                "fileData": { # URI based data. # Optional. URI based data.
+                  "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the file data. Used to provide a label or filename to distinguish file datas. This field is only returned in PromptMessage for prompt management. It is currently used in the Gemini GenerateContent calls only when server side tools (code_execution, google_search, and url_context) are enabled.
+                  "fileUri": "A String", # Required. URI.
+                  "mimeType": "A String", # Required. The IANA standard MIME type of the source data.
+                },
+                "functionCall": { # A predicted [FunctionCall] returned from the model that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing the parameters and their values. # Optional. A predicted [FunctionCall] returned from the model that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] with the parameters and their values.
+                  "args": { # Optional. The function parameters and values in JSON object format. See [FunctionDeclaration.parameters] for parameter details.
+                    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+                  },
+                  "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name].
+                },
+                "functionResponse": { # The result output from a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function is used as context to the model. This should contain the result of a [FunctionCall] made based on model prediction. # Optional. The result output of a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function call. It is used as context to the model.
+                  "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name] and [FunctionCall.name].
+                  "response": { # Required. The function response in JSON object format. Use "output" key to specify function output and "error" key to specify error details (if any). If "output" and "error" keys are not specified, then whole "response" is treated as function output.
+                    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+                  },
+                },
+                "inlineData": { # Content blob. # Optional. Inlined bytes data.
+                  "data": "A String", # Required. Raw bytes.
+                  "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the blob. Used to provide a label or filename to distinguish blobs. This field is only returned in PromptMessage for prompt management. It is currently used in the Gemini GenerateContent calls only when server side tools (code_execution, google_search, and url_context) are enabled.
+                  "mimeType": "A String", # Required. The IANA standard MIME type of the source data.
+                },
+                "text": "A String", # Optional. Text part (can be code).
+                "thought": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the part is thought from the model.
+                "thoughtSignature": "A String", # Optional. An opaque signature for the thought so it can be reused in subsequent requests.
+                "videoMetadata": { # Metadata describes the input video content. # Optional. Video metadata. The metadata should only be specified while the video data is presented in inline_data or file_data.
+                  "endOffset": "A String", # Optional. The end offset of the video.
+                  "fps": 3.14, # Optional. The frame rate of the video sent to the model. If not specified, the default value will be 1.0. The fps range is (0.0, 24.0].
+                  "startOffset": "A String", # Optional. The start offset of the video.
+                },
+              },
+            ],
+            "role": "A String", # Optional. The producer of the content. Must be either 'user' or 'model'. Useful to set for multi-turn conversations, otherwise can be left blank or unset.
+          },
+        },
+      },
+      "text": "A String", # Text prompt.
+      "value": "", # Fields and values that can be used to populate the prompt template.
+    },
+    "rubrics": { # Optional. Named groups of rubrics associated with this prompt. The key is a user-defined name for the rubric group.
+      "a_key": { # A group of rubrics, used for grouping rubrics based on a metric or a version.
+        "displayName": "A String", # Human-readable name for the group. This should be unique within a given context if used for display or selection. Example: "Instruction Following V1", "Content Quality - Summarization Task".
+        "groupId": "A String", # Unique identifier for the group.
+        "rubrics": [ # Rubrics that are part of this group.
+          { # Message representing a single testable criterion for evaluation. One input prompt could have multiple rubrics.
+            "content": { # Content of the rubric, defining the testable criteria. # Required. The actual testable criteria for the rubric.
+              "property": { # Defines criteria based on a specific property. # Evaluation criteria based on a specific property.
+                "description": "A String", # Description of the property being evaluated. Example: "The model's response is grammatically correct."
+              },
+            },
+            "importance": "A String", # Optional. The relative importance of this rubric.
+            "rubricId": "A String", # Unique identifier for the rubric. This ID is used to refer to this rubric, e.g., in RubricVerdict.
+            "type": "A String", # Optional. A type designator for the rubric, which can inform how it's evaluated or interpreted by systems or users. It's recommended to use consistent, well-defined, upper snake_case strings. Examples: "SUMMARIZATION_QUALITY", "SAFETY_HARMFUL_CONTENT", "INSTRUCTION_ADHERENCE".
+          },
+        ],
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "evaluationResponse": { # Evaluation result. # Output only. The response from evaluation.
+    "candidateResults": [ # Optional. The results for the metric.
+      { # Result for a single candidate.
+        "additionalResults": "", # Optional. Additional results for the metric.
+        "candidate": "A String", # Required. The candidate that is being evaluated. The value is the same as the candidate name in the EvaluationRequest.
+        "explanation": "A String", # Optional. The explanation for the metric.
+        "metric": "A String", # Required. The metric that was evaluated.
+        "rubricVerdicts": [ # Optional. The rubric verdicts for the metric.
+          { # Represents the verdict of an evaluation against a single rubric.
+            "evaluatedRubric": { # Message representing a single testable criterion for evaluation. One input prompt could have multiple rubrics. # Required. The full rubric definition that was evaluated. Storing this ensures the verdict is self-contained and understandable, especially if the original rubric definition changes or was dynamically generated.
+              "content": { # Content of the rubric, defining the testable criteria. # Required. The actual testable criteria for the rubric.
+                "property": { # Defines criteria based on a specific property. # Evaluation criteria based on a specific property.
+                  "description": "A String", # Description of the property being evaluated. Example: "The model's response is grammatically correct."
+                },
+              },
+              "importance": "A String", # Optional. The relative importance of this rubric.
+              "rubricId": "A String", # Unique identifier for the rubric. This ID is used to refer to this rubric, e.g., in RubricVerdict.
+              "type": "A String", # Optional. A type designator for the rubric, which can inform how it's evaluated or interpreted by systems or users. It's recommended to use consistent, well-defined, upper snake_case strings. Examples: "SUMMARIZATION_QUALITY", "SAFETY_HARMFUL_CONTENT", "INSTRUCTION_ADHERENCE".
+            },
+            "reasoning": "A String", # Optional. Human-readable reasoning or explanation for the verdict. This can include specific examples or details from the evaluated content that justify the given verdict.
+            "verdict": True or False, # Required. Outcome of the evaluation against the rubric, represented as a boolean. `true` indicates a "Pass", `false` indicates a "Fail".
+          },
+        ],
+        "score": 3.14, # Optional. The score for the metric.
+      },
+    ],
+    "evaluationRequest": "A String", # Required. The request item that was evaluated. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationItems/{evaluation_item}
+    "evaluationRun": "A String", # Required. The evaluation run that was used to generate the result. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationRuns/{evaluation_run}
+    "metadata": "", # Optional. Metadata about the evaluation result.
+    "metric": "A String", # Required. The metric that was evaluated.
+    "request": { # Single evaluation request. # Required. The request that was evaluated.
+      "candidateResponses": [ # Optional. Responses from model under test and other baseline models for comparison.
+        { # Responses from model or agent.
+          "candidate": "A String", # Required. The name of the candidate that produced the response.
+          "text": "A String", # Text response.
+          "value": "", # Fields and values that can be used to populate the response template.
+        },
+      ],
+      "goldenResponse": { # Responses from model or agent. # Optional. The Ideal response or ground truth.
+        "candidate": "A String", # Required. The name of the candidate that produced the response.
+        "text": "A String", # Text response.
+        "value": "", # Fields and values that can be used to populate the response template.
+      },
+      "prompt": { # Prompt to be evaluated. # Required. The request/prompt to evaluate.
+        "promptTemplateData": { # Message to hold a prompt template and the values to populate the template. # Prompt template data.
+          "values": { # The values for fields in the prompt template.
+            "a_key": { # The base structured datatype containing multi-part content of a message. A `Content` includes a `role` field designating the producer of the `Content` and a `parts` field containing multi-part data that contains the content of the message turn.
+              "parts": [ # Required. Ordered `Parts` that constitute a single message. Parts may have different IANA MIME types.
+                { # A datatype containing media that is part of a multi-part `Content` message. A `Part` consists of data which has an associated datatype. A `Part` can only contain one of the accepted types in `Part.data`. A `Part` must have a fixed IANA MIME type identifying the type and subtype of the media if `inline_data` or `file_data` field is filled with raw bytes.
+                  "codeExecutionResult": { # Result of executing the [ExecutableCode]. Only generated when using the [CodeExecution] tool, and always follows a `part` containing the [ExecutableCode]. # Optional. Result of executing the [ExecutableCode].
+                    "outcome": "A String", # Required. Outcome of the code execution.
+                    "output": "A String", # Optional. Contains stdout when code execution is successful, stderr or other description otherwise.
+                  },
+                  "executableCode": { # Code generated by the model that is meant to be executed, and the result returned to the model. Generated when using the [CodeExecution] tool, in which the code will be automatically executed, and a corresponding [CodeExecutionResult] will also be generated. # Optional. Code generated by the model that is meant to be executed.
+                    "code": "A String", # Required. The code to be executed.
+                    "language": "A String", # Required. Programming language of the `code`.
+                  },
+                  "fileData": { # URI based data. # Optional. URI based data.
+                    "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the file data. Used to provide a label or filename to distinguish file datas. This field is only returned in PromptMessage for prompt management. It is currently used in the Gemini GenerateContent calls only when server side tools (code_execution, google_search, and url_context) are enabled.
+                    "fileUri": "A String", # Required. URI.
+                    "mimeType": "A String", # Required. The IANA standard MIME type of the source data.
+                  },
+                  "functionCall": { # A predicted [FunctionCall] returned from the model that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing the parameters and their values. # Optional. A predicted [FunctionCall] returned from the model that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] with the parameters and their values.
+                    "args": { # Optional. The function parameters and values in JSON object format. See [FunctionDeclaration.parameters] for parameter details.
+                      "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+                    },
+                    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name].
+                  },
+                  "functionResponse": { # The result output from a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function is used as context to the model. This should contain the result of a [FunctionCall] made based on model prediction. # Optional. The result output of a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function call. It is used as context to the model.
+                    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name] and [FunctionCall.name].
+                    "response": { # Required. The function response in JSON object format. Use "output" key to specify function output and "error" key to specify error details (if any). If "output" and "error" keys are not specified, then whole "response" is treated as function output.
+                      "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+                    },
+                  },
+                  "inlineData": { # Content blob. # Optional. Inlined bytes data.
+                    "data": "A String", # Required. Raw bytes.
+                    "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the blob. Used to provide a label or filename to distinguish blobs. This field is only returned in PromptMessage for prompt management. It is currently used in the Gemini GenerateContent calls only when server side tools (code_execution, google_search, and url_context) are enabled.
+                    "mimeType": "A String", # Required. The IANA standard MIME type of the source data.
+                  },
+                  "text": "A String", # Optional. Text part (can be code).
+                  "thought": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the part is thought from the model.
+                  "thoughtSignature": "A String", # Optional. An opaque signature for the thought so it can be reused in subsequent requests.
+                  "videoMetadata": { # Metadata describes the input video content. # Optional. Video metadata. The metadata should only be specified while the video data is presented in inline_data or file_data.
+                    "endOffset": "A String", # Optional. The end offset of the video.
+                    "fps": 3.14, # Optional. The frame rate of the video sent to the model. If not specified, the default value will be 1.0. The fps range is (0.0, 24.0].
+                    "startOffset": "A String", # Optional. The start offset of the video.
+                  },
+                },
+              ],
+              "role": "A String", # Optional. The producer of the content. Must be either 'user' or 'model'. Useful to set for multi-turn conversations, otherwise can be left blank or unset.
+            },
+          },
+        },
+        "text": "A String", # Text prompt.
+        "value": "", # Fields and values that can be used to populate the prompt template.
+      },
+      "rubrics": { # Optional. Named groups of rubrics associated with this prompt. The key is a user-defined name for the rubric group.
+        "a_key": { # A group of rubrics, used for grouping rubrics based on a metric or a version.
+          "displayName": "A String", # Human-readable name for the group. This should be unique within a given context if used for display or selection. Example: "Instruction Following V1", "Content Quality - Summarization Task".
+          "groupId": "A String", # Unique identifier for the group.
+          "rubrics": [ # Rubrics that are part of this group.
+            { # Message representing a single testable criterion for evaluation. One input prompt could have multiple rubrics.
+              "content": { # Content of the rubric, defining the testable criteria. # Required. The actual testable criteria for the rubric.
+                "property": { # Defines criteria based on a specific property. # Evaluation criteria based on a specific property.
+                  "description": "A String", # Description of the property being evaluated. Example: "The model's response is grammatically correct."
+                },
+              },
+              "importance": "A String", # Optional. The relative importance of this rubric.
+              "rubricId": "A String", # Unique identifier for the rubric. This ID is used to refer to this rubric, e.g., in RubricVerdict.
+              "type": "A String", # Optional. A type designator for the rubric, which can inform how it's evaluated or interpreted by systems or users. It's recommended to use consistent, well-defined, upper snake_case strings. Examples: "SUMMARIZATION_QUALITY", "SAFETY_HARMFUL_CONTENT", "INSTRUCTION_ADHERENCE".
+            },
+          ],
+        },
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "gcsUri": "A String", # The GCS object where the request or response is stored.
+  "labels": { # Optional. Labels for the EvaluationItem.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "metadata": "", # Optional. Metadata for the EvaluationItem.
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the EvaluationItem. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationItems/{evaluation_item}`
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # EvaluationItem is a single evaluation request or result. The content of an EvaluationItem is immutable - it cannot be updated once created. EvaluationItems can be deleted when no longer needed.
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when this item was created.
+  "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display name of the EvaluationItem.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # Output only. Error for the evaluation item.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "evaluationItemType": "A String", # Required. The type of the EvaluationItem.
+  "evaluationRequest": { # Single evaluation request. # The request to evaluate.
+    "candidateResponses": [ # Optional. Responses from model under test and other baseline models for comparison.
+      { # Responses from model or agent.
+        "candidate": "A String", # Required. The name of the candidate that produced the response.
+        "text": "A String", # Text response.
+        "value": "", # Fields and values that can be used to populate the response template.
+      },
+    ],
+    "goldenResponse": { # Responses from model or agent. # Optional. The Ideal response or ground truth.
+      "candidate": "A String", # Required. The name of the candidate that produced the response.
+      "text": "A String", # Text response.
+      "value": "", # Fields and values that can be used to populate the response template.
+    },
+    "prompt": { # Prompt to be evaluated. # Required. The request/prompt to evaluate.
+      "promptTemplateData": { # Message to hold a prompt template and the values to populate the template. # Prompt template data.
+        "values": { # The values for fields in the prompt template.
+          "a_key": { # The base structured datatype containing multi-part content of a message. A `Content` includes a `role` field designating the producer of the `Content` and a `parts` field containing multi-part data that contains the content of the message turn.
+            "parts": [ # Required. Ordered `Parts` that constitute a single message. Parts may have different IANA MIME types.
+              { # A datatype containing media that is part of a multi-part `Content` message. A `Part` consists of data which has an associated datatype. A `Part` can only contain one of the accepted types in `Part.data`. A `Part` must have a fixed IANA MIME type identifying the type and subtype of the media if `inline_data` or `file_data` field is filled with raw bytes.
+                "codeExecutionResult": { # Result of executing the [ExecutableCode]. Only generated when using the [CodeExecution] tool, and always follows a `part` containing the [ExecutableCode]. # Optional. Result of executing the [ExecutableCode].
+                  "outcome": "A String", # Required. Outcome of the code execution.
+                  "output": "A String", # Optional. Contains stdout when code execution is successful, stderr or other description otherwise.
+                },
+                "executableCode": { # Code generated by the model that is meant to be executed, and the result returned to the model. Generated when using the [CodeExecution] tool, in which the code will be automatically executed, and a corresponding [CodeExecutionResult] will also be generated. # Optional. Code generated by the model that is meant to be executed.
+                  "code": "A String", # Required. The code to be executed.
+                  "language": "A String", # Required. Programming language of the `code`.
+                },
+                "fileData": { # URI based data. # Optional. URI based data.
+                  "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the file data. Used to provide a label or filename to distinguish file datas. This field is only returned in PromptMessage for prompt management. It is currently used in the Gemini GenerateContent calls only when server side tools (code_execution, google_search, and url_context) are enabled.
+                  "fileUri": "A String", # Required. URI.
+                  "mimeType": "A String", # Required. The IANA standard MIME type of the source data.
+                },
+                "functionCall": { # A predicted [FunctionCall] returned from the model that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing the parameters and their values. # Optional. A predicted [FunctionCall] returned from the model that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] with the parameters and their values.
+                  "args": { # Optional. The function parameters and values in JSON object format. See [FunctionDeclaration.parameters] for parameter details.
+                    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+                  },
+                  "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name].
+                },
+                "functionResponse": { # The result output from a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function is used as context to the model. This should contain the result of a [FunctionCall] made based on model prediction. # Optional. The result output of a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function call. It is used as context to the model.
+                  "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name] and [FunctionCall.name].
+                  "response": { # Required. The function response in JSON object format. Use "output" key to specify function output and "error" key to specify error details (if any). If "output" and "error" keys are not specified, then whole "response" is treated as function output.
+                    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+                  },
+                },
+                "inlineData": { # Content blob. # Optional. Inlined bytes data.
+                  "data": "A String", # Required. Raw bytes.
+                  "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the blob. Used to provide a label or filename to distinguish blobs. This field is only returned in PromptMessage for prompt management. It is currently used in the Gemini GenerateContent calls only when server side tools (code_execution, google_search, and url_context) are enabled.
+                  "mimeType": "A String", # Required. The IANA standard MIME type of the source data.
+                },
+                "text": "A String", # Optional. Text part (can be code).
+                "thought": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the part is thought from the model.
+                "thoughtSignature": "A String", # Optional. An opaque signature for the thought so it can be reused in subsequent requests.
+                "videoMetadata": { # Metadata describes the input video content. # Optional. Video metadata. The metadata should only be specified while the video data is presented in inline_data or file_data.
+                  "endOffset": "A String", # Optional. The end offset of the video.
+                  "fps": 3.14, # Optional. The frame rate of the video sent to the model. If not specified, the default value will be 1.0. The fps range is (0.0, 24.0].
+                  "startOffset": "A String", # Optional. The start offset of the video.
+                },
+              },
+            ],
+            "role": "A String", # Optional. The producer of the content. Must be either 'user' or 'model'. Useful to set for multi-turn conversations, otherwise can be left blank or unset.
+          },
+        },
+      },
+      "text": "A String", # Text prompt.
+      "value": "", # Fields and values that can be used to populate the prompt template.
+    },
+    "rubrics": { # Optional. Named groups of rubrics associated with this prompt. The key is a user-defined name for the rubric group.
+      "a_key": { # A group of rubrics, used for grouping rubrics based on a metric or a version.
+        "displayName": "A String", # Human-readable name for the group. This should be unique within a given context if used for display or selection. Example: "Instruction Following V1", "Content Quality - Summarization Task".
+        "groupId": "A String", # Unique identifier for the group.
+        "rubrics": [ # Rubrics that are part of this group.
+          { # Message representing a single testable criterion for evaluation. One input prompt could have multiple rubrics.
+            "content": { # Content of the rubric, defining the testable criteria. # Required. The actual testable criteria for the rubric.
+              "property": { # Defines criteria based on a specific property. # Evaluation criteria based on a specific property.
+                "description": "A String", # Description of the property being evaluated. Example: "The model's response is grammatically correct."
+              },
+            },
+            "importance": "A String", # Optional. The relative importance of this rubric.
+            "rubricId": "A String", # Unique identifier for the rubric. This ID is used to refer to this rubric, e.g., in RubricVerdict.
+            "type": "A String", # Optional. A type designator for the rubric, which can inform how it's evaluated or interpreted by systems or users. It's recommended to use consistent, well-defined, upper snake_case strings. Examples: "SUMMARIZATION_QUALITY", "SAFETY_HARMFUL_CONTENT", "INSTRUCTION_ADHERENCE".
+          },
+        ],
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "evaluationResponse": { # Evaluation result. # Output only. The response from evaluation.
+    "candidateResults": [ # Optional. The results for the metric.
+      { # Result for a single candidate.
+        "additionalResults": "", # Optional. Additional results for the metric.
+        "candidate": "A String", # Required. The candidate that is being evaluated. The value is the same as the candidate name in the EvaluationRequest.
+        "explanation": "A String", # Optional. The explanation for the metric.
+        "metric": "A String", # Required. The metric that was evaluated.
+        "rubricVerdicts": [ # Optional. The rubric verdicts for the metric.
+          { # Represents the verdict of an evaluation against a single rubric.
+            "evaluatedRubric": { # Message representing a single testable criterion for evaluation. One input prompt could have multiple rubrics. # Required. The full rubric definition that was evaluated. Storing this ensures the verdict is self-contained and understandable, especially if the original rubric definition changes or was dynamically generated.
+              "content": { # Content of the rubric, defining the testable criteria. # Required. The actual testable criteria for the rubric.
+                "property": { # Defines criteria based on a specific property. # Evaluation criteria based on a specific property.
+                  "description": "A String", # Description of the property being evaluated. Example: "The model's response is grammatically correct."
+                },
+              },
+              "importance": "A String", # Optional. The relative importance of this rubric.
+              "rubricId": "A String", # Unique identifier for the rubric. This ID is used to refer to this rubric, e.g., in RubricVerdict.
+              "type": "A String", # Optional. A type designator for the rubric, which can inform how it's evaluated or interpreted by systems or users. It's recommended to use consistent, well-defined, upper snake_case strings. Examples: "SUMMARIZATION_QUALITY", "SAFETY_HARMFUL_CONTENT", "INSTRUCTION_ADHERENCE".
+            },
+            "reasoning": "A String", # Optional. Human-readable reasoning or explanation for the verdict. This can include specific examples or details from the evaluated content that justify the given verdict.
+            "verdict": True or False, # Required. Outcome of the evaluation against the rubric, represented as a boolean. `true` indicates a "Pass", `false` indicates a "Fail".
+          },
+        ],
+        "score": 3.14, # Optional. The score for the metric.
+      },
+    ],
+    "evaluationRequest": "A String", # Required. The request item that was evaluated. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationItems/{evaluation_item}
+    "evaluationRun": "A String", # Required. The evaluation run that was used to generate the result. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationRuns/{evaluation_run}
+    "metadata": "", # Optional. Metadata about the evaluation result.
+    "metric": "A String", # Required. The metric that was evaluated.
+    "request": { # Single evaluation request. # Required. The request that was evaluated.
+      "candidateResponses": [ # Optional. Responses from model under test and other baseline models for comparison.
+        { # Responses from model or agent.
+          "candidate": "A String", # Required. The name of the candidate that produced the response.
+          "text": "A String", # Text response.
+          "value": "", # Fields and values that can be used to populate the response template.
+        },
+      ],
+      "goldenResponse": { # Responses from model or agent. # Optional. The Ideal response or ground truth.
+        "candidate": "A String", # Required. The name of the candidate that produced the response.
+        "text": "A String", # Text response.
+        "value": "", # Fields and values that can be used to populate the response template.
+      },
+      "prompt": { # Prompt to be evaluated. # Required. The request/prompt to evaluate.
+        "promptTemplateData": { # Message to hold a prompt template and the values to populate the template. # Prompt template data.
+          "values": { # The values for fields in the prompt template.
+            "a_key": { # The base structured datatype containing multi-part content of a message. A `Content` includes a `role` field designating the producer of the `Content` and a `parts` field containing multi-part data that contains the content of the message turn.
+              "parts": [ # Required. Ordered `Parts` that constitute a single message. Parts may have different IANA MIME types.
+                { # A datatype containing media that is part of a multi-part `Content` message. A `Part` consists of data which has an associated datatype. A `Part` can only contain one of the accepted types in `Part.data`. A `Part` must have a fixed IANA MIME type identifying the type and subtype of the media if `inline_data` or `file_data` field is filled with raw bytes.
+                  "codeExecutionResult": { # Result of executing the [ExecutableCode]. Only generated when using the [CodeExecution] tool, and always follows a `part` containing the [ExecutableCode]. # Optional. Result of executing the [ExecutableCode].
+                    "outcome": "A String", # Required. Outcome of the code execution.
+                    "output": "A String", # Optional. Contains stdout when code execution is successful, stderr or other description otherwise.
+                  },
+                  "executableCode": { # Code generated by the model that is meant to be executed, and the result returned to the model. Generated when using the [CodeExecution] tool, in which the code will be automatically executed, and a corresponding [CodeExecutionResult] will also be generated. # Optional. Code generated by the model that is meant to be executed.
+                    "code": "A String", # Required. The code to be executed.
+                    "language": "A String", # Required. Programming language of the `code`.
+                  },
+                  "fileData": { # URI based data. # Optional. URI based data.
+                    "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the file data. Used to provide a label or filename to distinguish file datas. This field is only returned in PromptMessage for prompt management. It is currently used in the Gemini GenerateContent calls only when server side tools (code_execution, google_search, and url_context) are enabled.
+                    "fileUri": "A String", # Required. URI.
+                    "mimeType": "A String", # Required. The IANA standard MIME type of the source data.
+                  },
+                  "functionCall": { # A predicted [FunctionCall] returned from the model that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing the parameters and their values. # Optional. A predicted [FunctionCall] returned from the model that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] with the parameters and their values.
+                    "args": { # Optional. The function parameters and values in JSON object format. See [FunctionDeclaration.parameters] for parameter details.
+                      "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+                    },
+                    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name].
+                  },
+                  "functionResponse": { # The result output from a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function is used as context to the model. This should contain the result of a [FunctionCall] made based on model prediction. # Optional. The result output of a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function call. It is used as context to the model.
+                    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name] and [FunctionCall.name].
+                    "response": { # Required. The function response in JSON object format. Use "output" key to specify function output and "error" key to specify error details (if any). If "output" and "error" keys are not specified, then whole "response" is treated as function output.
+                      "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+                    },
+                  },
+                  "inlineData": { # Content blob. # Optional. Inlined bytes data.
+                    "data": "A String", # Required. Raw bytes.
+                    "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the blob. Used to provide a label or filename to distinguish blobs. This field is only returned in PromptMessage for prompt management. It is currently used in the Gemini GenerateContent calls only when server side tools (code_execution, google_search, and url_context) are enabled.
+                    "mimeType": "A String", # Required. The IANA standard MIME type of the source data.
+                  },
+                  "text": "A String", # Optional. Text part (can be code).
+                  "thought": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the part is thought from the model.
+                  "thoughtSignature": "A String", # Optional. An opaque signature for the thought so it can be reused in subsequent requests.
+                  "videoMetadata": { # Metadata describes the input video content. # Optional. Video metadata. The metadata should only be specified while the video data is presented in inline_data or file_data.
+                    "endOffset": "A String", # Optional. The end offset of the video.
+                    "fps": 3.14, # Optional. The frame rate of the video sent to the model. If not specified, the default value will be 1.0. The fps range is (0.0, 24.0].
+                    "startOffset": "A String", # Optional. The start offset of the video.
+                  },
+                },
+              ],
+              "role": "A String", # Optional. The producer of the content. Must be either 'user' or 'model'. Useful to set for multi-turn conversations, otherwise can be left blank or unset.
+            },
+          },
+        },
+        "text": "A String", # Text prompt.
+        "value": "", # Fields and values that can be used to populate the prompt template.
+      },
+      "rubrics": { # Optional. Named groups of rubrics associated with this prompt. The key is a user-defined name for the rubric group.
+        "a_key": { # A group of rubrics, used for grouping rubrics based on a metric or a version.
+          "displayName": "A String", # Human-readable name for the group. This should be unique within a given context if used for display or selection. Example: "Instruction Following V1", "Content Quality - Summarization Task".
+          "groupId": "A String", # Unique identifier for the group.
+          "rubrics": [ # Rubrics that are part of this group.
+            { # Message representing a single testable criterion for evaluation. One input prompt could have multiple rubrics.
+              "content": { # Content of the rubric, defining the testable criteria. # Required. The actual testable criteria for the rubric.
+                "property": { # Defines criteria based on a specific property. # Evaluation criteria based on a specific property.
+                  "description": "A String", # Description of the property being evaluated. Example: "The model's response is grammatically correct."
+                },
+              },
+              "importance": "A String", # Optional. The relative importance of this rubric.
+              "rubricId": "A String", # Unique identifier for the rubric. This ID is used to refer to this rubric, e.g., in RubricVerdict.
+              "type": "A String", # Optional. A type designator for the rubric, which can inform how it's evaluated or interpreted by systems or users. It's recommended to use consistent, well-defined, upper snake_case strings. Examples: "SUMMARIZATION_QUALITY", "SAFETY_HARMFUL_CONTENT", "INSTRUCTION_ADHERENCE".
+            },
+          ],
+        },
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "gcsUri": "A String", # The GCS object where the request or response is stored.
+  "labels": { # Optional. Labels for the EvaluationItem.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "metadata": "", # Optional. Metadata for the EvaluationItem.
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the EvaluationItem. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationItems/{evaluation_item}`
+}
+
+ +
+ delete(name, x__xgafv=None) +
Deletes an Evaluation Item.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The name of the EvaluationItem resource to be deleted. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationItems/{evaluation_item}` (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  "response": { # The normal, successful response of the operation. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}
+
+ +
+ get(name, x__xgafv=None) +
Gets an Evaluation Item.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The name of the EvaluationItem resource. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationItems/{evaluation_item}` (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # EvaluationItem is a single evaluation request or result. The content of an EvaluationItem is immutable - it cannot be updated once created. EvaluationItems can be deleted when no longer needed.
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when this item was created.
+  "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display name of the EvaluationItem.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # Output only. Error for the evaluation item.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "evaluationItemType": "A String", # Required. The type of the EvaluationItem.
+  "evaluationRequest": { # Single evaluation request. # The request to evaluate.
+    "candidateResponses": [ # Optional. Responses from model under test and other baseline models for comparison.
+      { # Responses from model or agent.
+        "candidate": "A String", # Required. The name of the candidate that produced the response.
+        "text": "A String", # Text response.
+        "value": "", # Fields and values that can be used to populate the response template.
+      },
+    ],
+    "goldenResponse": { # Responses from model or agent. # Optional. The Ideal response or ground truth.
+      "candidate": "A String", # Required. The name of the candidate that produced the response.
+      "text": "A String", # Text response.
+      "value": "", # Fields and values that can be used to populate the response template.
+    },
+    "prompt": { # Prompt to be evaluated. # Required. The request/prompt to evaluate.
+      "promptTemplateData": { # Message to hold a prompt template and the values to populate the template. # Prompt template data.
+        "values": { # The values for fields in the prompt template.
+          "a_key": { # The base structured datatype containing multi-part content of a message. A `Content` includes a `role` field designating the producer of the `Content` and a `parts` field containing multi-part data that contains the content of the message turn.
+            "parts": [ # Required. Ordered `Parts` that constitute a single message. Parts may have different IANA MIME types.
+              { # A datatype containing media that is part of a multi-part `Content` message. A `Part` consists of data which has an associated datatype. A `Part` can only contain one of the accepted types in `Part.data`. A `Part` must have a fixed IANA MIME type identifying the type and subtype of the media if `inline_data` or `file_data` field is filled with raw bytes.
+                "codeExecutionResult": { # Result of executing the [ExecutableCode]. Only generated when using the [CodeExecution] tool, and always follows a `part` containing the [ExecutableCode]. # Optional. Result of executing the [ExecutableCode].
+                  "outcome": "A String", # Required. Outcome of the code execution.
+                  "output": "A String", # Optional. Contains stdout when code execution is successful, stderr or other description otherwise.
+                },
+                "executableCode": { # Code generated by the model that is meant to be executed, and the result returned to the model. Generated when using the [CodeExecution] tool, in which the code will be automatically executed, and a corresponding [CodeExecutionResult] will also be generated. # Optional. Code generated by the model that is meant to be executed.
+                  "code": "A String", # Required. The code to be executed.
+                  "language": "A String", # Required. Programming language of the `code`.
+                },
+                "fileData": { # URI based data. # Optional. URI based data.
+                  "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the file data. Used to provide a label or filename to distinguish file datas. This field is only returned in PromptMessage for prompt management. It is currently used in the Gemini GenerateContent calls only when server side tools (code_execution, google_search, and url_context) are enabled.
+                  "fileUri": "A String", # Required. URI.
+                  "mimeType": "A String", # Required. The IANA standard MIME type of the source data.
+                },
+                "functionCall": { # A predicted [FunctionCall] returned from the model that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing the parameters and their values. # Optional. A predicted [FunctionCall] returned from the model that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] with the parameters and their values.
+                  "args": { # Optional. The function parameters and values in JSON object format. See [FunctionDeclaration.parameters] for parameter details.
+                    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+                  },
+                  "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name].
+                },
+                "functionResponse": { # The result output from a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function is used as context to the model. This should contain the result of a [FunctionCall] made based on model prediction. # Optional. The result output of a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function call. It is used as context to the model.
+                  "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name] and [FunctionCall.name].
+                  "response": { # Required. The function response in JSON object format. Use "output" key to specify function output and "error" key to specify error details (if any). If "output" and "error" keys are not specified, then whole "response" is treated as function output.
+                    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+                  },
+                },
+                "inlineData": { # Content blob. # Optional. Inlined bytes data.
+                  "data": "A String", # Required. Raw bytes.
+                  "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the blob. Used to provide a label or filename to distinguish blobs. This field is only returned in PromptMessage for prompt management. It is currently used in the Gemini GenerateContent calls only when server side tools (code_execution, google_search, and url_context) are enabled.
+                  "mimeType": "A String", # Required. The IANA standard MIME type of the source data.
+                },
+                "text": "A String", # Optional. Text part (can be code).
+                "thought": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the part is thought from the model.
+                "thoughtSignature": "A String", # Optional. An opaque signature for the thought so it can be reused in subsequent requests.
+                "videoMetadata": { # Metadata describes the input video content. # Optional. Video metadata. The metadata should only be specified while the video data is presented in inline_data or file_data.
+                  "endOffset": "A String", # Optional. The end offset of the video.
+                  "fps": 3.14, # Optional. The frame rate of the video sent to the model. If not specified, the default value will be 1.0. The fps range is (0.0, 24.0].
+                  "startOffset": "A String", # Optional. The start offset of the video.
+                },
+              },
+            ],
+            "role": "A String", # Optional. The producer of the content. Must be either 'user' or 'model'. Useful to set for multi-turn conversations, otherwise can be left blank or unset.
+          },
+        },
+      },
+      "text": "A String", # Text prompt.
+      "value": "", # Fields and values that can be used to populate the prompt template.
+    },
+    "rubrics": { # Optional. Named groups of rubrics associated with this prompt. The key is a user-defined name for the rubric group.
+      "a_key": { # A group of rubrics, used for grouping rubrics based on a metric or a version.
+        "displayName": "A String", # Human-readable name for the group. This should be unique within a given context if used for display or selection. Example: "Instruction Following V1", "Content Quality - Summarization Task".
+        "groupId": "A String", # Unique identifier for the group.
+        "rubrics": [ # Rubrics that are part of this group.
+          { # Message representing a single testable criterion for evaluation. One input prompt could have multiple rubrics.
+            "content": { # Content of the rubric, defining the testable criteria. # Required. The actual testable criteria for the rubric.
+              "property": { # Defines criteria based on a specific property. # Evaluation criteria based on a specific property.
+                "description": "A String", # Description of the property being evaluated. Example: "The model's response is grammatically correct."
+              },
+            },
+            "importance": "A String", # Optional. The relative importance of this rubric.
+            "rubricId": "A String", # Unique identifier for the rubric. This ID is used to refer to this rubric, e.g., in RubricVerdict.
+            "type": "A String", # Optional. A type designator for the rubric, which can inform how it's evaluated or interpreted by systems or users. It's recommended to use consistent, well-defined, upper snake_case strings. Examples: "SUMMARIZATION_QUALITY", "SAFETY_HARMFUL_CONTENT", "INSTRUCTION_ADHERENCE".
+          },
+        ],
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "evaluationResponse": { # Evaluation result. # Output only. The response from evaluation.
+    "candidateResults": [ # Optional. The results for the metric.
+      { # Result for a single candidate.
+        "additionalResults": "", # Optional. Additional results for the metric.
+        "candidate": "A String", # Required. The candidate that is being evaluated. The value is the same as the candidate name in the EvaluationRequest.
+        "explanation": "A String", # Optional. The explanation for the metric.
+        "metric": "A String", # Required. The metric that was evaluated.
+        "rubricVerdicts": [ # Optional. The rubric verdicts for the metric.
+          { # Represents the verdict of an evaluation against a single rubric.
+            "evaluatedRubric": { # Message representing a single testable criterion for evaluation. One input prompt could have multiple rubrics. # Required. The full rubric definition that was evaluated. Storing this ensures the verdict is self-contained and understandable, especially if the original rubric definition changes or was dynamically generated.
+              "content": { # Content of the rubric, defining the testable criteria. # Required. The actual testable criteria for the rubric.
+                "property": { # Defines criteria based on a specific property. # Evaluation criteria based on a specific property.
+                  "description": "A String", # Description of the property being evaluated. Example: "The model's response is grammatically correct."
+                },
+              },
+              "importance": "A String", # Optional. The relative importance of this rubric.
+              "rubricId": "A String", # Unique identifier for the rubric. This ID is used to refer to this rubric, e.g., in RubricVerdict.
+              "type": "A String", # Optional. A type designator for the rubric, which can inform how it's evaluated or interpreted by systems or users. It's recommended to use consistent, well-defined, upper snake_case strings. Examples: "SUMMARIZATION_QUALITY", "SAFETY_HARMFUL_CONTENT", "INSTRUCTION_ADHERENCE".
+            },
+            "reasoning": "A String", # Optional. Human-readable reasoning or explanation for the verdict. This can include specific examples or details from the evaluated content that justify the given verdict.
+            "verdict": True or False, # Required. Outcome of the evaluation against the rubric, represented as a boolean. `true` indicates a "Pass", `false` indicates a "Fail".
+          },
+        ],
+        "score": 3.14, # Optional. The score for the metric.
+      },
+    ],
+    "evaluationRequest": "A String", # Required. The request item that was evaluated. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationItems/{evaluation_item}
+    "evaluationRun": "A String", # Required. The evaluation run that was used to generate the result. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationRuns/{evaluation_run}
+    "metadata": "", # Optional. Metadata about the evaluation result.
+    "metric": "A String", # Required. The metric that was evaluated.
+    "request": { # Single evaluation request. # Required. The request that was evaluated.
+      "candidateResponses": [ # Optional. Responses from model under test and other baseline models for comparison.
+        { # Responses from model or agent.
+          "candidate": "A String", # Required. The name of the candidate that produced the response.
+          "text": "A String", # Text response.
+          "value": "", # Fields and values that can be used to populate the response template.
+        },
+      ],
+      "goldenResponse": { # Responses from model or agent. # Optional. The Ideal response or ground truth.
+        "candidate": "A String", # Required. The name of the candidate that produced the response.
+        "text": "A String", # Text response.
+        "value": "", # Fields and values that can be used to populate the response template.
+      },
+      "prompt": { # Prompt to be evaluated. # Required. The request/prompt to evaluate.
+        "promptTemplateData": { # Message to hold a prompt template and the values to populate the template. # Prompt template data.
+          "values": { # The values for fields in the prompt template.
+            "a_key": { # The base structured datatype containing multi-part content of a message. A `Content` includes a `role` field designating the producer of the `Content` and a `parts` field containing multi-part data that contains the content of the message turn.
+              "parts": [ # Required. Ordered `Parts` that constitute a single message. Parts may have different IANA MIME types.
+                { # A datatype containing media that is part of a multi-part `Content` message. A `Part` consists of data which has an associated datatype. A `Part` can only contain one of the accepted types in `Part.data`. A `Part` must have a fixed IANA MIME type identifying the type and subtype of the media if `inline_data` or `file_data` field is filled with raw bytes.
+                  "codeExecutionResult": { # Result of executing the [ExecutableCode]. Only generated when using the [CodeExecution] tool, and always follows a `part` containing the [ExecutableCode]. # Optional. Result of executing the [ExecutableCode].
+                    "outcome": "A String", # Required. Outcome of the code execution.
+                    "output": "A String", # Optional. Contains stdout when code execution is successful, stderr or other description otherwise.
+                  },
+                  "executableCode": { # Code generated by the model that is meant to be executed, and the result returned to the model. Generated when using the [CodeExecution] tool, in which the code will be automatically executed, and a corresponding [CodeExecutionResult] will also be generated. # Optional. Code generated by the model that is meant to be executed.
+                    "code": "A String", # Required. The code to be executed.
+                    "language": "A String", # Required. Programming language of the `code`.
+                  },
+                  "fileData": { # URI based data. # Optional. URI based data.
+                    "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the file data. Used to provide a label or filename to distinguish file datas. This field is only returned in PromptMessage for prompt management. It is currently used in the Gemini GenerateContent calls only when server side tools (code_execution, google_search, and url_context) are enabled.
+                    "fileUri": "A String", # Required. URI.
+                    "mimeType": "A String", # Required. The IANA standard MIME type of the source data.
+                  },
+                  "functionCall": { # A predicted [FunctionCall] returned from the model that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing the parameters and their values. # Optional. A predicted [FunctionCall] returned from the model that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] with the parameters and their values.
+                    "args": { # Optional. The function parameters and values in JSON object format. See [FunctionDeclaration.parameters] for parameter details.
+                      "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+                    },
+                    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name].
+                  },
+                  "functionResponse": { # The result output from a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function is used as context to the model. This should contain the result of a [FunctionCall] made based on model prediction. # Optional. The result output of a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function call. It is used as context to the model.
+                    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name] and [FunctionCall.name].
+                    "response": { # Required. The function response in JSON object format. Use "output" key to specify function output and "error" key to specify error details (if any). If "output" and "error" keys are not specified, then whole "response" is treated as function output.
+                      "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+                    },
+                  },
+                  "inlineData": { # Content blob. # Optional. Inlined bytes data.
+                    "data": "A String", # Required. Raw bytes.
+                    "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the blob. Used to provide a label or filename to distinguish blobs. This field is only returned in PromptMessage for prompt management. It is currently used in the Gemini GenerateContent calls only when server side tools (code_execution, google_search, and url_context) are enabled.
+                    "mimeType": "A String", # Required. The IANA standard MIME type of the source data.
+                  },
+                  "text": "A String", # Optional. Text part (can be code).
+                  "thought": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the part is thought from the model.
+                  "thoughtSignature": "A String", # Optional. An opaque signature for the thought so it can be reused in subsequent requests.
+                  "videoMetadata": { # Metadata describes the input video content. # Optional. Video metadata. The metadata should only be specified while the video data is presented in inline_data or file_data.
+                    "endOffset": "A String", # Optional. The end offset of the video.
+                    "fps": 3.14, # Optional. The frame rate of the video sent to the model. If not specified, the default value will be 1.0. The fps range is (0.0, 24.0].
+                    "startOffset": "A String", # Optional. The start offset of the video.
+                  },
+                },
+              ],
+              "role": "A String", # Optional. The producer of the content. Must be either 'user' or 'model'. Useful to set for multi-turn conversations, otherwise can be left blank or unset.
+            },
+          },
+        },
+        "text": "A String", # Text prompt.
+        "value": "", # Fields and values that can be used to populate the prompt template.
+      },
+      "rubrics": { # Optional. Named groups of rubrics associated with this prompt. The key is a user-defined name for the rubric group.
+        "a_key": { # A group of rubrics, used for grouping rubrics based on a metric or a version.
+          "displayName": "A String", # Human-readable name for the group. This should be unique within a given context if used for display or selection. Example: "Instruction Following V1", "Content Quality - Summarization Task".
+          "groupId": "A String", # Unique identifier for the group.
+          "rubrics": [ # Rubrics that are part of this group.
+            { # Message representing a single testable criterion for evaluation. One input prompt could have multiple rubrics.
+              "content": { # Content of the rubric, defining the testable criteria. # Required. The actual testable criteria for the rubric.
+                "property": { # Defines criteria based on a specific property. # Evaluation criteria based on a specific property.
+                  "description": "A String", # Description of the property being evaluated. Example: "The model's response is grammatically correct."
+                },
+              },
+              "importance": "A String", # Optional. The relative importance of this rubric.
+              "rubricId": "A String", # Unique identifier for the rubric. This ID is used to refer to this rubric, e.g., in RubricVerdict.
+              "type": "A String", # Optional. A type designator for the rubric, which can inform how it's evaluated or interpreted by systems or users. It's recommended to use consistent, well-defined, upper snake_case strings. Examples: "SUMMARIZATION_QUALITY", "SAFETY_HARMFUL_CONTENT", "INSTRUCTION_ADHERENCE".
+            },
+          ],
+        },
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "gcsUri": "A String", # The GCS object where the request or response is stored.
+  "labels": { # Optional. Labels for the EvaluationItem.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "metadata": "", # Optional. Metadata for the EvaluationItem.
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the EvaluationItem. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationItems/{evaluation_item}`
+}
+
+ +
+ list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Lists Evaluation Items.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The resource name of the Location from which to list the Evaluation Items. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}` (required)
+  filter: string, Optional. Filter expression that matches a subset of the EvaluationItems to show. For field names both snake_case and camelCase are supported. For more information about filter syntax, see [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160).
+  orderBy: string, Optional. A comma-separated list of fields to order by, sorted in ascending order by default. Use `desc` after a field name for descending.
+  pageSize: integer, Optional. The maximum number of Evaluation Items to return.
+  pageToken: string, Optional. A page token, received from a previous `ListEvaluationItems` call. Provide this to retrieve the subsequent page.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Response message for EvaluationManagementService.ListEvaluationItems.
+  "evaluationItems": [ # List of EvaluationItems in the requested page.
+    { # EvaluationItem is a single evaluation request or result. The content of an EvaluationItem is immutable - it cannot be updated once created. EvaluationItems can be deleted when no longer needed.
+      "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when this item was created.
+      "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display name of the EvaluationItem.
+      "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # Output only. Error for the evaluation item.
+        "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+        "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+          {
+            "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+          },
+        ],
+        "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+      },
+      "evaluationItemType": "A String", # Required. The type of the EvaluationItem.
+      "evaluationRequest": { # Single evaluation request. # The request to evaluate.
+        "candidateResponses": [ # Optional. Responses from model under test and other baseline models for comparison.
+          { # Responses from model or agent.
+            "candidate": "A String", # Required. The name of the candidate that produced the response.
+            "text": "A String", # Text response.
+            "value": "", # Fields and values that can be used to populate the response template.
+          },
+        ],
+        "goldenResponse": { # Responses from model or agent. # Optional. The Ideal response or ground truth.
+          "candidate": "A String", # Required. The name of the candidate that produced the response.
+          "text": "A String", # Text response.
+          "value": "", # Fields and values that can be used to populate the response template.
+        },
+        "prompt": { # Prompt to be evaluated. # Required. The request/prompt to evaluate.
+          "promptTemplateData": { # Message to hold a prompt template and the values to populate the template. # Prompt template data.
+            "values": { # The values for fields in the prompt template.
+              "a_key": { # The base structured datatype containing multi-part content of a message. A `Content` includes a `role` field designating the producer of the `Content` and a `parts` field containing multi-part data that contains the content of the message turn.
+                "parts": [ # Required. Ordered `Parts` that constitute a single message. Parts may have different IANA MIME types.
+                  { # A datatype containing media that is part of a multi-part `Content` message. A `Part` consists of data which has an associated datatype. A `Part` can only contain one of the accepted types in `Part.data`. A `Part` must have a fixed IANA MIME type identifying the type and subtype of the media if `inline_data` or `file_data` field is filled with raw bytes.
+                    "codeExecutionResult": { # Result of executing the [ExecutableCode]. Only generated when using the [CodeExecution] tool, and always follows a `part` containing the [ExecutableCode]. # Optional. Result of executing the [ExecutableCode].
+                      "outcome": "A String", # Required. Outcome of the code execution.
+                      "output": "A String", # Optional. Contains stdout when code execution is successful, stderr or other description otherwise.
+                    },
+                    "executableCode": { # Code generated by the model that is meant to be executed, and the result returned to the model. Generated when using the [CodeExecution] tool, in which the code will be automatically executed, and a corresponding [CodeExecutionResult] will also be generated. # Optional. Code generated by the model that is meant to be executed.
+                      "code": "A String", # Required. The code to be executed.
+                      "language": "A String", # Required. Programming language of the `code`.
+                    },
+                    "fileData": { # URI based data. # Optional. URI based data.
+                      "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the file data. Used to provide a label or filename to distinguish file datas. This field is only returned in PromptMessage for prompt management. It is currently used in the Gemini GenerateContent calls only when server side tools (code_execution, google_search, and url_context) are enabled.
+                      "fileUri": "A String", # Required. URI.
+                      "mimeType": "A String", # Required. The IANA standard MIME type of the source data.
+                    },
+                    "functionCall": { # A predicted [FunctionCall] returned from the model that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing the parameters and their values. # Optional. A predicted [FunctionCall] returned from the model that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] with the parameters and their values.
+                      "args": { # Optional. The function parameters and values in JSON object format. See [FunctionDeclaration.parameters] for parameter details.
+                        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+                      },
+                      "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name].
+                    },
+                    "functionResponse": { # The result output from a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function is used as context to the model. This should contain the result of a [FunctionCall] made based on model prediction. # Optional. The result output of a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function call. It is used as context to the model.
+                      "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name] and [FunctionCall.name].
+                      "response": { # Required. The function response in JSON object format. Use "output" key to specify function output and "error" key to specify error details (if any). If "output" and "error" keys are not specified, then whole "response" is treated as function output.
+                        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+                      },
+                    },
+                    "inlineData": { # Content blob. # Optional. Inlined bytes data.
+                      "data": "A String", # Required. Raw bytes.
+                      "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the blob. Used to provide a label or filename to distinguish blobs. This field is only returned in PromptMessage for prompt management. It is currently used in the Gemini GenerateContent calls only when server side tools (code_execution, google_search, and url_context) are enabled.
+                      "mimeType": "A String", # Required. The IANA standard MIME type of the source data.
+                    },
+                    "text": "A String", # Optional. Text part (can be code).
+                    "thought": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the part is thought from the model.
+                    "thoughtSignature": "A String", # Optional. An opaque signature for the thought so it can be reused in subsequent requests.
+                    "videoMetadata": { # Metadata describes the input video content. # Optional. Video metadata. The metadata should only be specified while the video data is presented in inline_data or file_data.
+                      "endOffset": "A String", # Optional. The end offset of the video.
+                      "fps": 3.14, # Optional. The frame rate of the video sent to the model. If not specified, the default value will be 1.0. The fps range is (0.0, 24.0].
+                      "startOffset": "A String", # Optional. The start offset of the video.
+                    },
+                  },
+                ],
+                "role": "A String", # Optional. The producer of the content. Must be either 'user' or 'model'. Useful to set for multi-turn conversations, otherwise can be left blank or unset.
+              },
+            },
+          },
+          "text": "A String", # Text prompt.
+          "value": "", # Fields and values that can be used to populate the prompt template.
+        },
+        "rubrics": { # Optional. Named groups of rubrics associated with this prompt. The key is a user-defined name for the rubric group.
+          "a_key": { # A group of rubrics, used for grouping rubrics based on a metric or a version.
+            "displayName": "A String", # Human-readable name for the group. This should be unique within a given context if used for display or selection. Example: "Instruction Following V1", "Content Quality - Summarization Task".
+            "groupId": "A String", # Unique identifier for the group.
+            "rubrics": [ # Rubrics that are part of this group.
+              { # Message representing a single testable criterion for evaluation. One input prompt could have multiple rubrics.
+                "content": { # Content of the rubric, defining the testable criteria. # Required. The actual testable criteria for the rubric.
+                  "property": { # Defines criteria based on a specific property. # Evaluation criteria based on a specific property.
+                    "description": "A String", # Description of the property being evaluated. Example: "The model's response is grammatically correct."
+                  },
+                },
+                "importance": "A String", # Optional. The relative importance of this rubric.
+                "rubricId": "A String", # Unique identifier for the rubric. This ID is used to refer to this rubric, e.g., in RubricVerdict.
+                "type": "A String", # Optional. A type designator for the rubric, which can inform how it's evaluated or interpreted by systems or users. It's recommended to use consistent, well-defined, upper snake_case strings. Examples: "SUMMARIZATION_QUALITY", "SAFETY_HARMFUL_CONTENT", "INSTRUCTION_ADHERENCE".
+              },
+            ],
+          },
+        },
+      },
+      "evaluationResponse": { # Evaluation result. # Output only. The response from evaluation.
+        "candidateResults": [ # Optional. The results for the metric.
+          { # Result for a single candidate.
+            "additionalResults": "", # Optional. Additional results for the metric.
+            "candidate": "A String", # Required. The candidate that is being evaluated. The value is the same as the candidate name in the EvaluationRequest.
+            "explanation": "A String", # Optional. The explanation for the metric.
+            "metric": "A String", # Required. The metric that was evaluated.
+            "rubricVerdicts": [ # Optional. The rubric verdicts for the metric.
+              { # Represents the verdict of an evaluation against a single rubric.
+                "evaluatedRubric": { # Message representing a single testable criterion for evaluation. One input prompt could have multiple rubrics. # Required. The full rubric definition that was evaluated. Storing this ensures the verdict is self-contained and understandable, especially if the original rubric definition changes or was dynamically generated.
+                  "content": { # Content of the rubric, defining the testable criteria. # Required. The actual testable criteria for the rubric.
+                    "property": { # Defines criteria based on a specific property. # Evaluation criteria based on a specific property.
+                      "description": "A String", # Description of the property being evaluated. Example: "The model's response is grammatically correct."
+                    },
+                  },
+                  "importance": "A String", # Optional. The relative importance of this rubric.
+                  "rubricId": "A String", # Unique identifier for the rubric. This ID is used to refer to this rubric, e.g., in RubricVerdict.
+                  "type": "A String", # Optional. A type designator for the rubric, which can inform how it's evaluated or interpreted by systems or users. It's recommended to use consistent, well-defined, upper snake_case strings. Examples: "SUMMARIZATION_QUALITY", "SAFETY_HARMFUL_CONTENT", "INSTRUCTION_ADHERENCE".
+                },
+                "reasoning": "A String", # Optional. Human-readable reasoning or explanation for the verdict. This can include specific examples or details from the evaluated content that justify the given verdict.
+                "verdict": True or False, # Required. Outcome of the evaluation against the rubric, represented as a boolean. `true` indicates a "Pass", `false` indicates a "Fail".
+              },
+            ],
+            "score": 3.14, # Optional. The score for the metric.
+          },
+        ],
+        "evaluationRequest": "A String", # Required. The request item that was evaluated. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationItems/{evaluation_item}
+        "evaluationRun": "A String", # Required. The evaluation run that was used to generate the result. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationRuns/{evaluation_run}
+        "metadata": "", # Optional. Metadata about the evaluation result.
+        "metric": "A String", # Required. The metric that was evaluated.
+        "request": { # Single evaluation request. # Required. The request that was evaluated.
+          "candidateResponses": [ # Optional. Responses from model under test and other baseline models for comparison.
+            { # Responses from model or agent.
+              "candidate": "A String", # Required. The name of the candidate that produced the response.
+              "text": "A String", # Text response.
+              "value": "", # Fields and values that can be used to populate the response template.
+            },
+          ],
+          "goldenResponse": { # Responses from model or agent. # Optional. The Ideal response or ground truth.
+            "candidate": "A String", # Required. The name of the candidate that produced the response.
+            "text": "A String", # Text response.
+            "value": "", # Fields and values that can be used to populate the response template.
+          },
+          "prompt": { # Prompt to be evaluated. # Required. The request/prompt to evaluate.
+            "promptTemplateData": { # Message to hold a prompt template and the values to populate the template. # Prompt template data.
+              "values": { # The values for fields in the prompt template.
+                "a_key": { # The base structured datatype containing multi-part content of a message. A `Content` includes a `role` field designating the producer of the `Content` and a `parts` field containing multi-part data that contains the content of the message turn.
+                  "parts": [ # Required. Ordered `Parts` that constitute a single message. Parts may have different IANA MIME types.
+                    { # A datatype containing media that is part of a multi-part `Content` message. A `Part` consists of data which has an associated datatype. A `Part` can only contain one of the accepted types in `Part.data`. A `Part` must have a fixed IANA MIME type identifying the type and subtype of the media if `inline_data` or `file_data` field is filled with raw bytes.
+                      "codeExecutionResult": { # Result of executing the [ExecutableCode]. Only generated when using the [CodeExecution] tool, and always follows a `part` containing the [ExecutableCode]. # Optional. Result of executing the [ExecutableCode].
+                        "outcome": "A String", # Required. Outcome of the code execution.
+                        "output": "A String", # Optional. Contains stdout when code execution is successful, stderr or other description otherwise.
+                      },
+                      "executableCode": { # Code generated by the model that is meant to be executed, and the result returned to the model. Generated when using the [CodeExecution] tool, in which the code will be automatically executed, and a corresponding [CodeExecutionResult] will also be generated. # Optional. Code generated by the model that is meant to be executed.
+                        "code": "A String", # Required. The code to be executed.
+                        "language": "A String", # Required. Programming language of the `code`.
+                      },
+                      "fileData": { # URI based data. # Optional. URI based data.
+                        "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the file data. Used to provide a label or filename to distinguish file datas. This field is only returned in PromptMessage for prompt management. It is currently used in the Gemini GenerateContent calls only when server side tools (code_execution, google_search, and url_context) are enabled.
+                        "fileUri": "A String", # Required. URI.
+                        "mimeType": "A String", # Required. The IANA standard MIME type of the source data.
+                      },
+                      "functionCall": { # A predicted [FunctionCall] returned from the model that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing the parameters and their values. # Optional. A predicted [FunctionCall] returned from the model that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] with the parameters and their values.
+                        "args": { # Optional. The function parameters and values in JSON object format. See [FunctionDeclaration.parameters] for parameter details.
+                          "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+                        },
+                        "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name].
+                      },
+                      "functionResponse": { # The result output from a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function is used as context to the model. This should contain the result of a [FunctionCall] made based on model prediction. # Optional. The result output of a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function call. It is used as context to the model.
+                        "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name] and [FunctionCall.name].
+                        "response": { # Required. The function response in JSON object format. Use "output" key to specify function output and "error" key to specify error details (if any). If "output" and "error" keys are not specified, then whole "response" is treated as function output.
+                          "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+                        },
+                      },
+                      "inlineData": { # Content blob. # Optional. Inlined bytes data.
+                        "data": "A String", # Required. Raw bytes.
+                        "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the blob. Used to provide a label or filename to distinguish blobs. This field is only returned in PromptMessage for prompt management. It is currently used in the Gemini GenerateContent calls only when server side tools (code_execution, google_search, and url_context) are enabled.
+                        "mimeType": "A String", # Required. The IANA standard MIME type of the source data.
+                      },
+                      "text": "A String", # Optional. Text part (can be code).
+                      "thought": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the part is thought from the model.
+                      "thoughtSignature": "A String", # Optional. An opaque signature for the thought so it can be reused in subsequent requests.
+                      "videoMetadata": { # Metadata describes the input video content. # Optional. Video metadata. The metadata should only be specified while the video data is presented in inline_data or file_data.
+                        "endOffset": "A String", # Optional. The end offset of the video.
+                        "fps": 3.14, # Optional. The frame rate of the video sent to the model. If not specified, the default value will be 1.0. The fps range is (0.0, 24.0].
+                        "startOffset": "A String", # Optional. The start offset of the video.
+                      },
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "role": "A String", # Optional. The producer of the content. Must be either 'user' or 'model'. Useful to set for multi-turn conversations, otherwise can be left blank or unset.
+                },
+              },
+            },
+            "text": "A String", # Text prompt.
+            "value": "", # Fields and values that can be used to populate the prompt template.
+          },
+          "rubrics": { # Optional. Named groups of rubrics associated with this prompt. The key is a user-defined name for the rubric group.
+            "a_key": { # A group of rubrics, used for grouping rubrics based on a metric or a version.
+              "displayName": "A String", # Human-readable name for the group. This should be unique within a given context if used for display or selection. Example: "Instruction Following V1", "Content Quality - Summarization Task".
+              "groupId": "A String", # Unique identifier for the group.
+              "rubrics": [ # Rubrics that are part of this group.
+                { # Message representing a single testable criterion for evaluation. One input prompt could have multiple rubrics.
+                  "content": { # Content of the rubric, defining the testable criteria. # Required. The actual testable criteria for the rubric.
+                    "property": { # Defines criteria based on a specific property. # Evaluation criteria based on a specific property.
+                      "description": "A String", # Description of the property being evaluated. Example: "The model's response is grammatically correct."
+                    },
+                  },
+                  "importance": "A String", # Optional. The relative importance of this rubric.
+                  "rubricId": "A String", # Unique identifier for the rubric. This ID is used to refer to this rubric, e.g., in RubricVerdict.
+                  "type": "A String", # Optional. A type designator for the rubric, which can inform how it's evaluated or interpreted by systems or users. It's recommended to use consistent, well-defined, upper snake_case strings. Examples: "SUMMARIZATION_QUALITY", "SAFETY_HARMFUL_CONTENT", "INSTRUCTION_ADHERENCE".
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+          },
+        },
+      },
+      "gcsUri": "A String", # The GCS object where the request or response is stored.
+      "labels": { # Optional. Labels for the EvaluationItem.
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+      "metadata": "", # Optional. Metadata for the EvaluationItem.
+      "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the EvaluationItem. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationItems/{evaluation_item}`
+    },
+  ],
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # A token to retrieve the next page of results.
+}
+
+ +
+ list_next() +
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        
+
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.evaluationRuns.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.evaluationRuns.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0be2d2ff604 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.evaluationRuns.html @@ -0,0 +1,3218 @@ + + + +

Vertex AI API . projects . locations . evaluationRuns

+

Instance Methods

+

+ cancel(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Cancels an Evaluation Run. Attempts to cancel a running Evaluation Run asynchronously. Status of run can be checked via GetEvaluationRun.

+

+ close()

+

Close httplib2 connections.

+

+ create(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Creates an Evaluation Run.

+

+ delete(name, x__xgafv=None)

+

Deletes an Evaluation Run.

+

+ get(name, x__xgafv=None)

+

Gets an Evaluation Run.

+

+ list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Lists Evaluation Runs.

+

+ list_next()

+

Retrieves the next page of results.

+

Method Details

+
+ cancel(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Cancels an Evaluation Run. Attempts to cancel a running Evaluation Run asynchronously. Status of run can be checked via GetEvaluationRun.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The name of the EvaluationRun resource to be cancelled. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationRuns/{evaluation_run}` (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Request message for EvaluationManagementService.CancelEvaluationRun.
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); }
+}
+
+ +
+ close() +
Close httplib2 connections.
+
+ +
+ create(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Creates an Evaluation Run.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The resource name of the Location to create the Evaluation Run in. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}` (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # EvaluationRun is a resource that represents a single evaluation run, which includes a set of prompts, model responses, evaluation configuration and the resulting metrics.
+  "completionTime": "A String", # Output only. Time when the evaluation run was completed.
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Time when the evaluation run was created.
+  "dataSource": { # The data source for the evaluation run. # Required. The data source for the evaluation run.
+    "bigqueryRequestSet": { # The request set for the evaluation run. # Evaluation data in bigquery.
+      "candidateResponseColumns": { # Optional. Map of candidate name to candidate response column name. The column will be in evaluation_item.CandidateResponse format.
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+      "promptColumn": "A String", # Optional. The name of the column that contains the requests to evaluate. This will be in evaluation_item.EvalPrompt format.
+      "rubricsColumn": "A String", # Optional. The name of the column that contains the rubrics. This will be in evaluation_rubric.RubricGroup format (cl/762595858).
+      "samplingConfig": { # The sampling config. # Optional. The sampling config for the bigquery resource.
+        "samplingCount": 42, # Optional. The total number of logged data to import. If available data is less than the sampling count, all data will be imported. Default is 100.
+        "samplingDuration": "A String", # Optional. How long to wait before sampling data from the BigQuery table. If not specified, defaults to 0.
+        "samplingMethod": "A String", # Optional. The sampling method to use.
+      },
+      "uri": "A String", # Required. The URI of a BigQuery table. e.g. bq://projectId.bqDatasetId.bqTableId
+    },
+    "evaluationSet": "A String", # The EvaluationSet resource name. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationSets/{evaluation_set}`
+  },
+  "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display name of the Evaluation Run.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # Output only. Only populated when the evaluation run's state is FAILED or CANCELLED.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "evaluationConfig": { # The Evalution configuration used for the evaluation run. # Required. The configuration used for the evaluation.
+    "autoraterConfig": { # The autorater config used for the evaluation run. # Optional. The autorater config for the evaluation run.
+      "autoraterModel": "A String", # Optional. The fully qualified name of the publisher model or tuned autorater endpoint to use. Publisher model format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/publishers/*/models/*` Tuned model endpoint format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/endpoints/{endpoint}`
+      "generationConfig": { # Generation config. # Optional. Configuration options for model generation and outputs.
+        "audioTimestamp": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, audio timestamp will be included in the request to the model.
+        "candidateCount": 42, # Optional. Number of candidates to generate.
+        "enableAffectiveDialog": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, the model will detect emotions and adapt its responses accordingly.
+        "frequencyPenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Frequency penalties.
+        "logprobs": 42, # Optional. Logit probabilities.
+        "maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message.
+        "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used.
+        "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties.
+        "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set.
+        "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response.
+        "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature.
+        "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "responseSchema": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. The `Schema` object allows the definition of input and output data types. These types can be objects, but also primitives and arrays. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema). If set, a compatible response_mime_type must also be set. Compatible mimetypes: `application/json`: Schema for JSON response.
+          "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties.
+          "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list.
+            # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+          ],
+          "default": "", # Optional. Default value of the data.
+          "defs": { # Optional. A map of definitions for use by `ref` Only allowed at the root of the schema.
+            "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+          },
+          "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the data.
+          "enum": [ # Optional. Possible values of the element of primitive type with enum format. Examples: 1. We can define direction as : {type:STRING, format:enum, enum:["EAST", NORTH", "SOUTH", "WEST"]} 2. We can define apartment number as : {type:INTEGER, format:enum, enum:["101", "201", "301"]}
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "example": "", # Optional. Example of the object. Will only populated when the object is the root.
+          "format": "A String", # Optional. The format of the data. Supported formats: for NUMBER type: "float", "double" for INTEGER type: "int32", "int64" for STRING type: "email", "byte", etc
+          "items": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE ARRAY Schema of the elements of Type.ARRAY.
+          "maxItems": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+          "maxLength": "A String", # Optional. Maximum length of the Type.STRING
+          "maxProperties": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+          "maximum": 3.14, # Optional. Maximum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+          "minItems": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+          "minLength": "A String", # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE STRING Minimum length of the Type.STRING
+          "minProperties": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+          "minimum": 3.14, # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE INTEGER and NUMBER Minimum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+          "nullable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the value may be null.
+          "pattern": "A String", # Optional. Pattern of the Type.STRING to restrict a string to a regular expression.
+          "properties": { # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE OBJECT Properties of Type.OBJECT.
+            "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+          },
+          "propertyOrdering": [ # Optional. The order of the properties. Not a standard field in open api spec. Only used to support the order of the properties.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "ref": "A String", # Optional. Allows indirect references between schema nodes. The value should be a valid reference to a child of the root `defs`. For example, the following schema defines a reference to a schema node named "Pet": type: object properties: pet: ref: #/defs/Pet defs: Pet: type: object properties: name: type: string The value of the "pet" property is a reference to the schema node named "Pet". See details in https://json-schema.org/understanding-json-schema/structuring
+          "required": [ # Optional. Required properties of Type.OBJECT.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema.
+          "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data.
+        },
+        "routingConfig": { # The configuration for routing the request to a specific model. # Optional. Routing configuration.
+          "autoMode": { # When automated routing is specified, the routing will be determined by the pretrained routing model and customer provided model routing preference. # Automated routing.
+            "modelRoutingPreference": "A String", # The model routing preference.
+          },
+          "manualMode": { # When manual routing is set, the specified model will be used directly. # Manual routing.
+            "modelName": "A String", # The model name to use. Only the public LLM models are accepted. See [Supported models](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/model-reference/inference#supported-models).
+          },
+        },
+        "seed": 42, # Optional. Seed.
+        "speechConfig": { # The speech generation config. # Optional. The speech generation config.
+          "languageCode": "A String", # Optional. Language code (ISO 639. e.g. en-US) for the speech synthesization.
+          "voiceConfig": { # The configuration for the voice to use. # The configuration for the speaker to use.
+            "prebuiltVoiceConfig": { # The configuration for the prebuilt speaker to use. # The configuration for the prebuilt voice to use.
+              "voiceName": "A String", # The name of the preset voice to use.
+            },
+          },
+        },
+        "stopSequences": [ # Optional. Stop sequences.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "temperature": 3.14, # Optional. Controls the randomness of predictions.
+        "thinkingConfig": { # Config for thinking features. # Optional. Config for thinking features. An error will be returned if this field is set for models that don't support thinking.
+          "includeThoughts": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether to include thoughts in the response. If true, thoughts are returned only when available.
+          "thinkingBudget": 42, # Optional. Indicates the thinking budget in tokens.
+        },
+        "topK": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, top-k sampling will be used.
+        "topP": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, nucleus sampling will be used.
+      },
+      "sampleCount": 42, # Optional. Number of samples for each instance in the dataset. If not specified, the default is 4. Minimum value is 1, maximum value is 32.
+    },
+    "metrics": [ # Required. The metrics to be calculated in the evaluation run.
+      { # The metric used for evaluation runs.
+        "computationBasedMetricSpec": { # Specification for a computation based metric. # Spec for a computation based metric.
+          "parameters": { # Optional. A map of parameters for the metric, e.g. {"rouge_type": "rougeL"}.
+            "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+          },
+          "type": "A String", # Required. The type of the computation based metric.
+        },
+        "llmBasedMetricSpec": { # Specification for an LLM based metric. # Spec for an LLM based metric.
+          "additionalConfig": { # Optional. Optional additional configuration for the metric.
+            "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+          },
+          "judgeAutoraterConfig": { # The autorater config used for the evaluation run. # Optional. Optional configuration for the judge LLM (Autorater).
+            "autoraterModel": "A String", # Optional. The fully qualified name of the publisher model or tuned autorater endpoint to use. Publisher model format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/publishers/*/models/*` Tuned model endpoint format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/endpoints/{endpoint}`
+            "generationConfig": { # Generation config. # Optional. Configuration options for model generation and outputs.
+              "audioTimestamp": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, audio timestamp will be included in the request to the model.
+              "candidateCount": 42, # Optional. Number of candidates to generate.
+              "enableAffectiveDialog": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, the model will detect emotions and adapt its responses accordingly.
+              "frequencyPenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Frequency penalties.
+              "logprobs": 42, # Optional. Logit probabilities.
+              "maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message.
+              "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used.
+              "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties.
+              "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set.
+              "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response.
+              "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature.
+              "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "responseSchema": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. The `Schema` object allows the definition of input and output data types. These types can be objects, but also primitives and arrays. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema). If set, a compatible response_mime_type must also be set. Compatible mimetypes: `application/json`: Schema for JSON response.
+                "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties.
+                "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list.
+                  # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                ],
+                "default": "", # Optional. Default value of the data.
+                "defs": { # Optional. A map of definitions for use by `ref` Only allowed at the root of the schema.
+                  "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                },
+                "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the data.
+                "enum": [ # Optional. Possible values of the element of primitive type with enum format. Examples: 1. We can define direction as : {type:STRING, format:enum, enum:["EAST", NORTH", "SOUTH", "WEST"]} 2. We can define apartment number as : {type:INTEGER, format:enum, enum:["101", "201", "301"]}
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "example": "", # Optional. Example of the object. Will only populated when the object is the root.
+                "format": "A String", # Optional. The format of the data. Supported formats: for NUMBER type: "float", "double" for INTEGER type: "int32", "int64" for STRING type: "email", "byte", etc
+                "items": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE ARRAY Schema of the elements of Type.ARRAY.
+                "maxItems": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                "maxLength": "A String", # Optional. Maximum length of the Type.STRING
+                "maxProperties": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                "maximum": 3.14, # Optional. Maximum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                "minItems": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                "minLength": "A String", # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE STRING Minimum length of the Type.STRING
+                "minProperties": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                "minimum": 3.14, # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE INTEGER and NUMBER Minimum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                "nullable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the value may be null.
+                "pattern": "A String", # Optional. Pattern of the Type.STRING to restrict a string to a regular expression.
+                "properties": { # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE OBJECT Properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                  "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                },
+                "propertyOrdering": [ # Optional. The order of the properties. Not a standard field in open api spec. Only used to support the order of the properties.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "ref": "A String", # Optional. Allows indirect references between schema nodes. The value should be a valid reference to a child of the root `defs`. For example, the following schema defines a reference to a schema node named "Pet": type: object properties: pet: ref: #/defs/Pet defs: Pet: type: object properties: name: type: string The value of the "pet" property is a reference to the schema node named "Pet". See details in https://json-schema.org/understanding-json-schema/structuring
+                "required": [ # Optional. Required properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema.
+                "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data.
+              },
+              "routingConfig": { # The configuration for routing the request to a specific model. # Optional. Routing configuration.
+                "autoMode": { # When automated routing is specified, the routing will be determined by the pretrained routing model and customer provided model routing preference. # Automated routing.
+                  "modelRoutingPreference": "A String", # The model routing preference.
+                },
+                "manualMode": { # When manual routing is set, the specified model will be used directly. # Manual routing.
+                  "modelName": "A String", # The model name to use. Only the public LLM models are accepted. See [Supported models](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/model-reference/inference#supported-models).
+                },
+              },
+              "seed": 42, # Optional. Seed.
+              "speechConfig": { # The speech generation config. # Optional. The speech generation config.
+                "languageCode": "A String", # Optional. Language code (ISO 639. e.g. en-US) for the speech synthesization.
+                "voiceConfig": { # The configuration for the voice to use. # The configuration for the speaker to use.
+                  "prebuiltVoiceConfig": { # The configuration for the prebuilt speaker to use. # The configuration for the prebuilt voice to use.
+                    "voiceName": "A String", # The name of the preset voice to use.
+                  },
+                },
+              },
+              "stopSequences": [ # Optional. Stop sequences.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "temperature": 3.14, # Optional. Controls the randomness of predictions.
+              "thinkingConfig": { # Config for thinking features. # Optional. Config for thinking features. An error will be returned if this field is set for models that don't support thinking.
+                "includeThoughts": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether to include thoughts in the response. If true, thoughts are returned only when available.
+                "thinkingBudget": 42, # Optional. Indicates the thinking budget in tokens.
+              },
+              "topK": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, top-k sampling will be used.
+              "topP": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, nucleus sampling will be used.
+            },
+            "sampleCount": 42, # Optional. Number of samples for each instance in the dataset. If not specified, the default is 4. Minimum value is 1, maximum value is 32.
+          },
+          "metricPromptTemplate": "A String", # Required. Template for the prompt sent to the judge model.
+          "predefinedRubricGenerationSpec": { # Specification for a pre-defined metric. # Dynamically generate rubrics using a predefined spec.
+            "metricSpecName": "A String", # Required. The name of a pre-defined metric, such as "instruction_following_v1" or "text_quality_v1".
+            "parameters": { # Optional. The parameters needed to run the pre-defined metric.
+              "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+            },
+          },
+          "rubricGenerationSpec": { # Specification for how rubrics should be generated. # Dynamically generate rubrics using this specification.
+            "modelConfig": { # The autorater config used for the evaluation run. # Optional. Configuration for the model used in rubric generation. Configs including sampling count and base model can be specified here. Flipping is not supported for rubric generation.
+              "autoraterModel": "A String", # Optional. The fully qualified name of the publisher model or tuned autorater endpoint to use. Publisher model format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/publishers/*/models/*` Tuned model endpoint format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/endpoints/{endpoint}`
+              "generationConfig": { # Generation config. # Optional. Configuration options for model generation and outputs.
+                "audioTimestamp": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, audio timestamp will be included in the request to the model.
+                "candidateCount": 42, # Optional. Number of candidates to generate.
+                "enableAffectiveDialog": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, the model will detect emotions and adapt its responses accordingly.
+                "frequencyPenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Frequency penalties.
+                "logprobs": 42, # Optional. Logit probabilities.
+                "maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message.
+                "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used.
+                "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties.
+                "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set.
+                "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response.
+                "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature.
+                "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "responseSchema": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. The `Schema` object allows the definition of input and output data types. These types can be objects, but also primitives and arrays. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema). If set, a compatible response_mime_type must also be set. Compatible mimetypes: `application/json`: Schema for JSON response.
+                  "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties.
+                  "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list.
+                    # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                  ],
+                  "default": "", # Optional. Default value of the data.
+                  "defs": { # Optional. A map of definitions for use by `ref` Only allowed at the root of the schema.
+                    "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                  },
+                  "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the data.
+                  "enum": [ # Optional. Possible values of the element of primitive type with enum format. Examples: 1. We can define direction as : {type:STRING, format:enum, enum:["EAST", NORTH", "SOUTH", "WEST"]} 2. We can define apartment number as : {type:INTEGER, format:enum, enum:["101", "201", "301"]}
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "example": "", # Optional. Example of the object. Will only populated when the object is the root.
+                  "format": "A String", # Optional. The format of the data. Supported formats: for NUMBER type: "float", "double" for INTEGER type: "int32", "int64" for STRING type: "email", "byte", etc
+                  "items": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE ARRAY Schema of the elements of Type.ARRAY.
+                  "maxItems": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                  "maxLength": "A String", # Optional. Maximum length of the Type.STRING
+                  "maxProperties": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                  "maximum": 3.14, # Optional. Maximum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                  "minItems": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                  "minLength": "A String", # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE STRING Minimum length of the Type.STRING
+                  "minProperties": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                  "minimum": 3.14, # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE INTEGER and NUMBER Minimum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                  "nullable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the value may be null.
+                  "pattern": "A String", # Optional. Pattern of the Type.STRING to restrict a string to a regular expression.
+                  "properties": { # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE OBJECT Properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                    "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                  },
+                  "propertyOrdering": [ # Optional. The order of the properties. Not a standard field in open api spec. Only used to support the order of the properties.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "ref": "A String", # Optional. Allows indirect references between schema nodes. The value should be a valid reference to a child of the root `defs`. For example, the following schema defines a reference to a schema node named "Pet": type: object properties: pet: ref: #/defs/Pet defs: Pet: type: object properties: name: type: string The value of the "pet" property is a reference to the schema node named "Pet". See details in https://json-schema.org/understanding-json-schema/structuring
+                  "required": [ # Optional. Required properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema.
+                  "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data.
+                },
+                "routingConfig": { # The configuration for routing the request to a specific model. # Optional. Routing configuration.
+                  "autoMode": { # When automated routing is specified, the routing will be determined by the pretrained routing model and customer provided model routing preference. # Automated routing.
+                    "modelRoutingPreference": "A String", # The model routing preference.
+                  },
+                  "manualMode": { # When manual routing is set, the specified model will be used directly. # Manual routing.
+                    "modelName": "A String", # The model name to use. Only the public LLM models are accepted. See [Supported models](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/model-reference/inference#supported-models).
+                  },
+                },
+                "seed": 42, # Optional. Seed.
+                "speechConfig": { # The speech generation config. # Optional. The speech generation config.
+                  "languageCode": "A String", # Optional. Language code (ISO 639. e.g. en-US) for the speech synthesization.
+                  "voiceConfig": { # The configuration for the voice to use. # The configuration for the speaker to use.
+                    "prebuiltVoiceConfig": { # The configuration for the prebuilt speaker to use. # The configuration for the prebuilt voice to use.
+                      "voiceName": "A String", # The name of the preset voice to use.
+                    },
+                  },
+                },
+                "stopSequences": [ # Optional. Stop sequences.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "temperature": 3.14, # Optional. Controls the randomness of predictions.
+                "thinkingConfig": { # Config for thinking features. # Optional. Config for thinking features. An error will be returned if this field is set for models that don't support thinking.
+                  "includeThoughts": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether to include thoughts in the response. If true, thoughts are returned only when available.
+                  "thinkingBudget": 42, # Optional. Indicates the thinking budget in tokens.
+                },
+                "topK": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, top-k sampling will be used.
+                "topP": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, nucleus sampling will be used.
+              },
+              "sampleCount": 42, # Optional. Number of samples for each instance in the dataset. If not specified, the default is 4. Minimum value is 1, maximum value is 32.
+            },
+            "promptTemplate": "A String", # Optional. Template for the prompt used to generate rubrics. The details should be updated based on the most-recent recipe requirements.
+            "rubricContentType": "A String", # Optional. The type of rubric content to be generated.
+            "rubricTypeOntology": [ # Optional. An optional, pre-defined list of allowed types for generated rubrics. If this field is provided, it implies `include_rubric_type` should be true, and the generated rubric types should be chosen from this ontology.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+          },
+          "rubricGroupKey": "A String", # Use a pre-defined group of rubrics associated with the input. Refers to a key in the rubric_groups map of EvaluationInstance.
+          "systemInstruction": "A String", # Optional. System instructions for the judge model.
+        },
+        "metric": "A String", # Required. The name of the metric.
+        "predefinedMetricSpec": { # Specification for a pre-defined metric. # Spec for a pre-defined metric.
+          "metricSpecName": "A String", # Required. The name of a pre-defined metric, such as "instruction_following_v1" or "text_quality_v1".
+          "parameters": { # Optional. The parameters needed to run the pre-defined metric.
+            "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+          },
+        },
+        "rubricBasedMetricSpec": { # Specification for a metric that is based on rubrics. # Spec for rubric based metric.
+          "inlineRubrics": { # Defines a list of rubrics, used when providing rubrics inline. # Use rubrics provided directly in the spec.
+            "rubrics": [ # The list of rubrics.
+              { # Message representing a single testable criterion for evaluation. One input prompt could have multiple rubrics.
+                "content": { # Content of the rubric, defining the testable criteria. # Required. The actual testable criteria for the rubric.
+                  "property": { # Defines criteria based on a specific property. # Evaluation criteria based on a specific property.
+                    "description": "A String", # Description of the property being evaluated. Example: "The model's response is grammatically correct."
+                  },
+                },
+                "importance": "A String", # Optional. The relative importance of this rubric.
+                "rubricId": "A String", # Unique identifier for the rubric. This ID is used to refer to this rubric, e.g., in RubricVerdict.
+                "type": "A String", # Optional. A type designator for the rubric, which can inform how it's evaluated or interpreted by systems or users. It's recommended to use consistent, well-defined, upper snake_case strings. Examples: "SUMMARIZATION_QUALITY", "SAFETY_HARMFUL_CONTENT", "INSTRUCTION_ADHERENCE".
+              },
+            ],
+          },
+          "judgeAutoraterConfig": { # The autorater config used for the evaluation run. # Optional. Optional configuration for the judge LLM (Autorater). The definition of AutoraterConfig needs to be provided.
+            "autoraterModel": "A String", # Optional. The fully qualified name of the publisher model or tuned autorater endpoint to use. Publisher model format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/publishers/*/models/*` Tuned model endpoint format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/endpoints/{endpoint}`
+            "generationConfig": { # Generation config. # Optional. Configuration options for model generation and outputs.
+              "audioTimestamp": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, audio timestamp will be included in the request to the model.
+              "candidateCount": 42, # Optional. Number of candidates to generate.
+              "enableAffectiveDialog": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, the model will detect emotions and adapt its responses accordingly.
+              "frequencyPenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Frequency penalties.
+              "logprobs": 42, # Optional. Logit probabilities.
+              "maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message.
+              "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used.
+              "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties.
+              "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set.
+              "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response.
+              "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature.
+              "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "responseSchema": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. The `Schema` object allows the definition of input and output data types. These types can be objects, but also primitives and arrays. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema). If set, a compatible response_mime_type must also be set. Compatible mimetypes: `application/json`: Schema for JSON response.
+                "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties.
+                "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list.
+                  # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                ],
+                "default": "", # Optional. Default value of the data.
+                "defs": { # Optional. A map of definitions for use by `ref` Only allowed at the root of the schema.
+                  "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                },
+                "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the data.
+                "enum": [ # Optional. Possible values of the element of primitive type with enum format. Examples: 1. We can define direction as : {type:STRING, format:enum, enum:["EAST", NORTH", "SOUTH", "WEST"]} 2. We can define apartment number as : {type:INTEGER, format:enum, enum:["101", "201", "301"]}
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "example": "", # Optional. Example of the object. Will only populated when the object is the root.
+                "format": "A String", # Optional. The format of the data. Supported formats: for NUMBER type: "float", "double" for INTEGER type: "int32", "int64" for STRING type: "email", "byte", etc
+                "items": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE ARRAY Schema of the elements of Type.ARRAY.
+                "maxItems": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                "maxLength": "A String", # Optional. Maximum length of the Type.STRING
+                "maxProperties": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                "maximum": 3.14, # Optional. Maximum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                "minItems": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                "minLength": "A String", # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE STRING Minimum length of the Type.STRING
+                "minProperties": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                "minimum": 3.14, # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE INTEGER and NUMBER Minimum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                "nullable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the value may be null.
+                "pattern": "A String", # Optional. Pattern of the Type.STRING to restrict a string to a regular expression.
+                "properties": { # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE OBJECT Properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                  "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                },
+                "propertyOrdering": [ # Optional. The order of the properties. Not a standard field in open api spec. Only used to support the order of the properties.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "ref": "A String", # Optional. Allows indirect references between schema nodes. The value should be a valid reference to a child of the root `defs`. For example, the following schema defines a reference to a schema node named "Pet": type: object properties: pet: ref: #/defs/Pet defs: Pet: type: object properties: name: type: string The value of the "pet" property is a reference to the schema node named "Pet". See details in https://json-schema.org/understanding-json-schema/structuring
+                "required": [ # Optional. Required properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema.
+                "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data.
+              },
+              "routingConfig": { # The configuration for routing the request to a specific model. # Optional. Routing configuration.
+                "autoMode": { # When automated routing is specified, the routing will be determined by the pretrained routing model and customer provided model routing preference. # Automated routing.
+                  "modelRoutingPreference": "A String", # The model routing preference.
+                },
+                "manualMode": { # When manual routing is set, the specified model will be used directly. # Manual routing.
+                  "modelName": "A String", # The model name to use. Only the public LLM models are accepted. See [Supported models](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/model-reference/inference#supported-models).
+                },
+              },
+              "seed": 42, # Optional. Seed.
+              "speechConfig": { # The speech generation config. # Optional. The speech generation config.
+                "languageCode": "A String", # Optional. Language code (ISO 639. e.g. en-US) for the speech synthesization.
+                "voiceConfig": { # The configuration for the voice to use. # The configuration for the speaker to use.
+                  "prebuiltVoiceConfig": { # The configuration for the prebuilt speaker to use. # The configuration for the prebuilt voice to use.
+                    "voiceName": "A String", # The name of the preset voice to use.
+                  },
+                },
+              },
+              "stopSequences": [ # Optional. Stop sequences.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "temperature": 3.14, # Optional. Controls the randomness of predictions.
+              "thinkingConfig": { # Config for thinking features. # Optional. Config for thinking features. An error will be returned if this field is set for models that don't support thinking.
+                "includeThoughts": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether to include thoughts in the response. If true, thoughts are returned only when available.
+                "thinkingBudget": 42, # Optional. Indicates the thinking budget in tokens.
+              },
+              "topK": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, top-k sampling will be used.
+              "topP": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, nucleus sampling will be used.
+            },
+            "sampleCount": 42, # Optional. Number of samples for each instance in the dataset. If not specified, the default is 4. Minimum value is 1, maximum value is 32.
+          },
+          "metricPromptTemplate": "A String", # Optional. Template for the prompt used by the judge model to evaluate against rubrics.
+          "rubricGenerationSpec": { # Specification for how rubrics should be generated. # Dynamically generate rubrics for evaluation using this specification.
+            "modelConfig": { # The autorater config used for the evaluation run. # Optional. Configuration for the model used in rubric generation. Configs including sampling count and base model can be specified here. Flipping is not supported for rubric generation.
+              "autoraterModel": "A String", # Optional. The fully qualified name of the publisher model or tuned autorater endpoint to use. Publisher model format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/publishers/*/models/*` Tuned model endpoint format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/endpoints/{endpoint}`
+              "generationConfig": { # Generation config. # Optional. Configuration options for model generation and outputs.
+                "audioTimestamp": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, audio timestamp will be included in the request to the model.
+                "candidateCount": 42, # Optional. Number of candidates to generate.
+                "enableAffectiveDialog": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, the model will detect emotions and adapt its responses accordingly.
+                "frequencyPenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Frequency penalties.
+                "logprobs": 42, # Optional. Logit probabilities.
+                "maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message.
+                "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used.
+                "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties.
+                "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set.
+                "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response.
+                "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature.
+                "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "responseSchema": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. The `Schema` object allows the definition of input and output data types. These types can be objects, but also primitives and arrays. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema). If set, a compatible response_mime_type must also be set. Compatible mimetypes: `application/json`: Schema for JSON response.
+                  "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties.
+                  "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list.
+                    # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                  ],
+                  "default": "", # Optional. Default value of the data.
+                  "defs": { # Optional. A map of definitions for use by `ref` Only allowed at the root of the schema.
+                    "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                  },
+                  "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the data.
+                  "enum": [ # Optional. Possible values of the element of primitive type with enum format. Examples: 1. We can define direction as : {type:STRING, format:enum, enum:["EAST", NORTH", "SOUTH", "WEST"]} 2. We can define apartment number as : {type:INTEGER, format:enum, enum:["101", "201", "301"]}
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "example": "", # Optional. Example of the object. Will only populated when the object is the root.
+                  "format": "A String", # Optional. The format of the data. Supported formats: for NUMBER type: "float", "double" for INTEGER type: "int32", "int64" for STRING type: "email", "byte", etc
+                  "items": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE ARRAY Schema of the elements of Type.ARRAY.
+                  "maxItems": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                  "maxLength": "A String", # Optional. Maximum length of the Type.STRING
+                  "maxProperties": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                  "maximum": 3.14, # Optional. Maximum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                  "minItems": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                  "minLength": "A String", # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE STRING Minimum length of the Type.STRING
+                  "minProperties": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                  "minimum": 3.14, # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE INTEGER and NUMBER Minimum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                  "nullable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the value may be null.
+                  "pattern": "A String", # Optional. Pattern of the Type.STRING to restrict a string to a regular expression.
+                  "properties": { # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE OBJECT Properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                    "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                  },
+                  "propertyOrdering": [ # Optional. The order of the properties. Not a standard field in open api spec. Only used to support the order of the properties.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "ref": "A String", # Optional. Allows indirect references between schema nodes. The value should be a valid reference to a child of the root `defs`. For example, the following schema defines a reference to a schema node named "Pet": type: object properties: pet: ref: #/defs/Pet defs: Pet: type: object properties: name: type: string The value of the "pet" property is a reference to the schema node named "Pet". See details in https://json-schema.org/understanding-json-schema/structuring
+                  "required": [ # Optional. Required properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema.
+                  "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data.
+                },
+                "routingConfig": { # The configuration for routing the request to a specific model. # Optional. Routing configuration.
+                  "autoMode": { # When automated routing is specified, the routing will be determined by the pretrained routing model and customer provided model routing preference. # Automated routing.
+                    "modelRoutingPreference": "A String", # The model routing preference.
+                  },
+                  "manualMode": { # When manual routing is set, the specified model will be used directly. # Manual routing.
+                    "modelName": "A String", # The model name to use. Only the public LLM models are accepted. See [Supported models](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/model-reference/inference#supported-models).
+                  },
+                },
+                "seed": 42, # Optional. Seed.
+                "speechConfig": { # The speech generation config. # Optional. The speech generation config.
+                  "languageCode": "A String", # Optional. Language code (ISO 639. e.g. en-US) for the speech synthesization.
+                  "voiceConfig": { # The configuration for the voice to use. # The configuration for the speaker to use.
+                    "prebuiltVoiceConfig": { # The configuration for the prebuilt speaker to use. # The configuration for the prebuilt voice to use.
+                      "voiceName": "A String", # The name of the preset voice to use.
+                    },
+                  },
+                },
+                "stopSequences": [ # Optional. Stop sequences.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "temperature": 3.14, # Optional. Controls the randomness of predictions.
+                "thinkingConfig": { # Config for thinking features. # Optional. Config for thinking features. An error will be returned if this field is set for models that don't support thinking.
+                  "includeThoughts": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether to include thoughts in the response. If true, thoughts are returned only when available.
+                  "thinkingBudget": 42, # Optional. Indicates the thinking budget in tokens.
+                },
+                "topK": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, top-k sampling will be used.
+                "topP": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, nucleus sampling will be used.
+              },
+              "sampleCount": 42, # Optional. Number of samples for each instance in the dataset. If not specified, the default is 4. Minimum value is 1, maximum value is 32.
+            },
+            "promptTemplate": "A String", # Optional. Template for the prompt used to generate rubrics. The details should be updated based on the most-recent recipe requirements.
+            "rubricContentType": "A String", # Optional. The type of rubric content to be generated.
+            "rubricTypeOntology": [ # Optional. An optional, pre-defined list of allowed types for generated rubrics. If this field is provided, it implies `include_rubric_type` should be true, and the generated rubric types should be chosen from this ontology.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+          },
+          "rubricGroupKey": "A String", # Use a pre-defined group of rubrics associated with the input content. This refers to a key in the `rubric_groups` map of `RubricEnhancedContents`.
+        },
+      },
+    ],
+    "outputConfig": { # The output config for the evaluation run. # Optional. The output config for the evaluation run.
+      "bigqueryDestination": { # The BigQuery location for the output content. # BigQuery destination for evaluation output.
+        "outputUri": "A String", # Required. BigQuery URI to a project or table, up to 2000 characters long. When only the project is specified, the Dataset and Table is created. When the full table reference is specified, the Dataset must exist and table must not exist. Accepted forms: * BigQuery path. For example: `bq://projectId` or `bq://projectId.bqDatasetId` or `bq://projectId.bqDatasetId.bqTableId`.
+      },
+      "gcsDestination": { # The Google Cloud Storage location where the output is to be written to. # Cloud Storage destination for evaluation output.
+        "outputUriPrefix": "A String", # Required. Google Cloud Storage URI to output directory. If the uri doesn't end with '/', a '/' will be automatically appended. The directory is created if it doesn't exist.
+      },
+    },
+    "promptTemplate": { # Prompt template used for inference. # The prompt template used for inference. The values for variables in the prompt template are defined in EvaluationItem.EvaluationPrompt.PromptTemplateData.values.
+      "gcsUri": "A String", # Prompt template stored in Cloud Storage. Format: "gs://my-bucket/file-name.txt".
+      "promptTemplate": "A String", # Inline prompt template. Template variables should be in the format "{var_name}". Example: "Translate the following from {source_lang} to {target_lang}: {text}"
+    },
+    "rubricConfigs": [ # Optional. The rubric configs for the evaluation run. They are used to generate rubrics which can be used by rubric-based metrics. Multiple rubric configs can be specified for rubric generation but only one rubric config can be used for a rubric-based metric. If more than one rubric config is provided, the evaluation metric must specify a rubric group key. Note that if a generation spec is specified on both a rubric config and an evaluation metric, the rubrics generated for the metric will be used for evaluation.
+      { # Configuration for a rubric group to be generated/saved for evaluation.
+        "predefinedRubricGenerationSpec": { # Specification for a pre-defined metric. # Dynamically generate rubrics using a predefined spec.
+          "metricSpecName": "A String", # Required. The name of a pre-defined metric, such as "instruction_following_v1" or "text_quality_v1".
+          "parameters": { # Optional. The parameters needed to run the pre-defined metric.
+            "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+          },
+        },
+        "rubricGenerationSpec": { # Specification for how rubrics should be generated. # Dynamically generate rubrics using this specification.
+          "modelConfig": { # The autorater config used for the evaluation run. # Optional. Configuration for the model used in rubric generation. Configs including sampling count and base model can be specified here. Flipping is not supported for rubric generation.
+            "autoraterModel": "A String", # Optional. The fully qualified name of the publisher model or tuned autorater endpoint to use. Publisher model format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/publishers/*/models/*` Tuned model endpoint format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/endpoints/{endpoint}`
+            "generationConfig": { # Generation config. # Optional. Configuration options for model generation and outputs.
+              "audioTimestamp": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, audio timestamp will be included in the request to the model.
+              "candidateCount": 42, # Optional. Number of candidates to generate.
+              "enableAffectiveDialog": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, the model will detect emotions and adapt its responses accordingly.
+              "frequencyPenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Frequency penalties.
+              "logprobs": 42, # Optional. Logit probabilities.
+              "maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message.
+              "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used.
+              "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties.
+              "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set.
+              "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response.
+              "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature.
+              "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "responseSchema": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. The `Schema` object allows the definition of input and output data types. These types can be objects, but also primitives and arrays. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema). If set, a compatible response_mime_type must also be set. Compatible mimetypes: `application/json`: Schema for JSON response.
+                "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties.
+                "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list.
+                  # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                ],
+                "default": "", # Optional. Default value of the data.
+                "defs": { # Optional. A map of definitions for use by `ref` Only allowed at the root of the schema.
+                  "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                },
+                "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the data.
+                "enum": [ # Optional. Possible values of the element of primitive type with enum format. Examples: 1. We can define direction as : {type:STRING, format:enum, enum:["EAST", NORTH", "SOUTH", "WEST"]} 2. We can define apartment number as : {type:INTEGER, format:enum, enum:["101", "201", "301"]}
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "example": "", # Optional. Example of the object. Will only populated when the object is the root.
+                "format": "A String", # Optional. The format of the data. Supported formats: for NUMBER type: "float", "double" for INTEGER type: "int32", "int64" for STRING type: "email", "byte", etc
+                "items": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE ARRAY Schema of the elements of Type.ARRAY.
+                "maxItems": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                "maxLength": "A String", # Optional. Maximum length of the Type.STRING
+                "maxProperties": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                "maximum": 3.14, # Optional. Maximum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                "minItems": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                "minLength": "A String", # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE STRING Minimum length of the Type.STRING
+                "minProperties": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                "minimum": 3.14, # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE INTEGER and NUMBER Minimum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                "nullable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the value may be null.
+                "pattern": "A String", # Optional. Pattern of the Type.STRING to restrict a string to a regular expression.
+                "properties": { # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE OBJECT Properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                  "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                },
+                "propertyOrdering": [ # Optional. The order of the properties. Not a standard field in open api spec. Only used to support the order of the properties.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "ref": "A String", # Optional. Allows indirect references between schema nodes. The value should be a valid reference to a child of the root `defs`. For example, the following schema defines a reference to a schema node named "Pet": type: object properties: pet: ref: #/defs/Pet defs: Pet: type: object properties: name: type: string The value of the "pet" property is a reference to the schema node named "Pet". See details in https://json-schema.org/understanding-json-schema/structuring
+                "required": [ # Optional. Required properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema.
+                "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data.
+              },
+              "routingConfig": { # The configuration for routing the request to a specific model. # Optional. Routing configuration.
+                "autoMode": { # When automated routing is specified, the routing will be determined by the pretrained routing model and customer provided model routing preference. # Automated routing.
+                  "modelRoutingPreference": "A String", # The model routing preference.
+                },
+                "manualMode": { # When manual routing is set, the specified model will be used directly. # Manual routing.
+                  "modelName": "A String", # The model name to use. Only the public LLM models are accepted. See [Supported models](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/model-reference/inference#supported-models).
+                },
+              },
+              "seed": 42, # Optional. Seed.
+              "speechConfig": { # The speech generation config. # Optional. The speech generation config.
+                "languageCode": "A String", # Optional. Language code (ISO 639. e.g. en-US) for the speech synthesization.
+                "voiceConfig": { # The configuration for the voice to use. # The configuration for the speaker to use.
+                  "prebuiltVoiceConfig": { # The configuration for the prebuilt speaker to use. # The configuration for the prebuilt voice to use.
+                    "voiceName": "A String", # The name of the preset voice to use.
+                  },
+                },
+              },
+              "stopSequences": [ # Optional. Stop sequences.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "temperature": 3.14, # Optional. Controls the randomness of predictions.
+              "thinkingConfig": { # Config for thinking features. # Optional. Config for thinking features. An error will be returned if this field is set for models that don't support thinking.
+                "includeThoughts": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether to include thoughts in the response. If true, thoughts are returned only when available.
+                "thinkingBudget": 42, # Optional. Indicates the thinking budget in tokens.
+              },
+              "topK": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, top-k sampling will be used.
+              "topP": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, nucleus sampling will be used.
+            },
+            "sampleCount": 42, # Optional. Number of samples for each instance in the dataset. If not specified, the default is 4. Minimum value is 1, maximum value is 32.
+          },
+          "promptTemplate": "A String", # Optional. Template for the prompt used to generate rubrics. The details should be updated based on the most-recent recipe requirements.
+          "rubricContentType": "A String", # Optional. The type of rubric content to be generated.
+          "rubricTypeOntology": [ # Optional. An optional, pre-defined list of allowed types for generated rubrics. If this field is provided, it implies `include_rubric_type` should be true, and the generated rubric types should be chosen from this ontology.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+        },
+        "rubricGroupKey": "A String", # Required. The key used to save the generated rubrics. If a generation spec is provided, this key will be used for the name of the generated rubric group. Otherwise, this key will be used to look up the existing rubric group on the evaluation item. Note that if a rubric group key is specified on both a rubric config and an evaluation metric, the key from the metric will be used to select the rubrics for evaluation.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "evaluationResults": { # The results of the evaluation run. # Output only. The results of the evaluation run. Only populated when the evaluation run's state is SUCCEEDED.
+    "evaluationSet": "A String", # The evaluation set where item level results are stored.
+    "summaryMetrics": { # The summary metrics for the evaluation run. # Optional. The summary metrics for the evaluation run.
+      "failedItems": 42, # Optional. The number of items that failed to be evaluated.
+      "metrics": { # Optional. Map of metric name to metric value.
+        "a_key": "",
+      },
+      "totalItems": 42, # Optional. The total number of items that were evaluated.
+    },
+  },
+  "evaluationSetSnapshot": "A String", # Output only. The specific evaluation set of the evaluation run. For runs with an evaluation set input, this will be that same set. For runs with BigQuery input, it's the sampled BigQuery dataset.
+  "inferenceConfigs": { # Optional. The candidate to inference config map for the evaluation run. The candidate can be up to 128 characters long and can consist of any UTF-8 characters.
+    "a_key": { # An inference config used for model inference during the evaluation run.
+      "generationConfig": { # Generation config. # Optional. Generation config.
+        "audioTimestamp": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, audio timestamp will be included in the request to the model.
+        "candidateCount": 42, # Optional. Number of candidates to generate.
+        "enableAffectiveDialog": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, the model will detect emotions and adapt its responses accordingly.
+        "frequencyPenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Frequency penalties.
+        "logprobs": 42, # Optional. Logit probabilities.
+        "maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message.
+        "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used.
+        "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties.
+        "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set.
+        "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response.
+        "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature.
+        "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "responseSchema": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. The `Schema` object allows the definition of input and output data types. These types can be objects, but also primitives and arrays. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema). If set, a compatible response_mime_type must also be set. Compatible mimetypes: `application/json`: Schema for JSON response.
+          "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties.
+          "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list.
+            # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+          ],
+          "default": "", # Optional. Default value of the data.
+          "defs": { # Optional. A map of definitions for use by `ref` Only allowed at the root of the schema.
+            "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+          },
+          "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the data.
+          "enum": [ # Optional. Possible values of the element of primitive type with enum format. Examples: 1. We can define direction as : {type:STRING, format:enum, enum:["EAST", NORTH", "SOUTH", "WEST"]} 2. We can define apartment number as : {type:INTEGER, format:enum, enum:["101", "201", "301"]}
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "example": "", # Optional. Example of the object. Will only populated when the object is the root.
+          "format": "A String", # Optional. The format of the data. Supported formats: for NUMBER type: "float", "double" for INTEGER type: "int32", "int64" for STRING type: "email", "byte", etc
+          "items": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE ARRAY Schema of the elements of Type.ARRAY.
+          "maxItems": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+          "maxLength": "A String", # Optional. Maximum length of the Type.STRING
+          "maxProperties": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+          "maximum": 3.14, # Optional. Maximum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+          "minItems": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+          "minLength": "A String", # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE STRING Minimum length of the Type.STRING
+          "minProperties": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+          "minimum": 3.14, # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE INTEGER and NUMBER Minimum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+          "nullable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the value may be null.
+          "pattern": "A String", # Optional. Pattern of the Type.STRING to restrict a string to a regular expression.
+          "properties": { # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE OBJECT Properties of Type.OBJECT.
+            "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+          },
+          "propertyOrdering": [ # Optional. The order of the properties. Not a standard field in open api spec. Only used to support the order of the properties.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "ref": "A String", # Optional. Allows indirect references between schema nodes. The value should be a valid reference to a child of the root `defs`. For example, the following schema defines a reference to a schema node named "Pet": type: object properties: pet: ref: #/defs/Pet defs: Pet: type: object properties: name: type: string The value of the "pet" property is a reference to the schema node named "Pet". See details in https://json-schema.org/understanding-json-schema/structuring
+          "required": [ # Optional. Required properties of Type.OBJECT.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema.
+          "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data.
+        },
+        "routingConfig": { # The configuration for routing the request to a specific model. # Optional. Routing configuration.
+          "autoMode": { # When automated routing is specified, the routing will be determined by the pretrained routing model and customer provided model routing preference. # Automated routing.
+            "modelRoutingPreference": "A String", # The model routing preference.
+          },
+          "manualMode": { # When manual routing is set, the specified model will be used directly. # Manual routing.
+            "modelName": "A String", # The model name to use. Only the public LLM models are accepted. See [Supported models](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/model-reference/inference#supported-models).
+          },
+        },
+        "seed": 42, # Optional. Seed.
+        "speechConfig": { # The speech generation config. # Optional. The speech generation config.
+          "languageCode": "A String", # Optional. Language code (ISO 639. e.g. en-US) for the speech synthesization.
+          "voiceConfig": { # The configuration for the voice to use. # The configuration for the speaker to use.
+            "prebuiltVoiceConfig": { # The configuration for the prebuilt speaker to use. # The configuration for the prebuilt voice to use.
+              "voiceName": "A String", # The name of the preset voice to use.
+            },
+          },
+        },
+        "stopSequences": [ # Optional. Stop sequences.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "temperature": 3.14, # Optional. Controls the randomness of predictions.
+        "thinkingConfig": { # Config for thinking features. # Optional. Config for thinking features. An error will be returned if this field is set for models that don't support thinking.
+          "includeThoughts": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether to include thoughts in the response. If true, thoughts are returned only when available.
+          "thinkingBudget": 42, # Optional. Indicates the thinking budget in tokens.
+        },
+        "topK": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, top-k sampling will be used.
+        "topP": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, nucleus sampling will be used.
+      },
+      "model": "A String", # Required. The fully qualified name of the publisher model or endpoint to use. Publisher model format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/publishers/*/models/*` Endpoint format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/endpoints/{endpoint}`
+    },
+  },
+  "labels": { # Optional. Labels for the evaluation run.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "metadata": "", # Optional. Metadata about the evaluation run, can be used by the caller to store additional tracking information about the evaluation run.
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the EvaluationRun. This is a unique identifier. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationRuns/{evaluation_run}`
+  "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the evaluation run.
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # EvaluationRun is a resource that represents a single evaluation run, which includes a set of prompts, model responses, evaluation configuration and the resulting metrics.
+  "completionTime": "A String", # Output only. Time when the evaluation run was completed.
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Time when the evaluation run was created.
+  "dataSource": { # The data source for the evaluation run. # Required. The data source for the evaluation run.
+    "bigqueryRequestSet": { # The request set for the evaluation run. # Evaluation data in bigquery.
+      "candidateResponseColumns": { # Optional. Map of candidate name to candidate response column name. The column will be in evaluation_item.CandidateResponse format.
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+      "promptColumn": "A String", # Optional. The name of the column that contains the requests to evaluate. This will be in evaluation_item.EvalPrompt format.
+      "rubricsColumn": "A String", # Optional. The name of the column that contains the rubrics. This will be in evaluation_rubric.RubricGroup format (cl/762595858).
+      "samplingConfig": { # The sampling config. # Optional. The sampling config for the bigquery resource.
+        "samplingCount": 42, # Optional. The total number of logged data to import. If available data is less than the sampling count, all data will be imported. Default is 100.
+        "samplingDuration": "A String", # Optional. How long to wait before sampling data from the BigQuery table. If not specified, defaults to 0.
+        "samplingMethod": "A String", # Optional. The sampling method to use.
+      },
+      "uri": "A String", # Required. The URI of a BigQuery table. e.g. bq://projectId.bqDatasetId.bqTableId
+    },
+    "evaluationSet": "A String", # The EvaluationSet resource name. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationSets/{evaluation_set}`
+  },
+  "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display name of the Evaluation Run.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # Output only. Only populated when the evaluation run's state is FAILED or CANCELLED.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "evaluationConfig": { # The Evalution configuration used for the evaluation run. # Required. The configuration used for the evaluation.
+    "autoraterConfig": { # The autorater config used for the evaluation run. # Optional. The autorater config for the evaluation run.
+      "autoraterModel": "A String", # Optional. The fully qualified name of the publisher model or tuned autorater endpoint to use. Publisher model format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/publishers/*/models/*` Tuned model endpoint format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/endpoints/{endpoint}`
+      "generationConfig": { # Generation config. # Optional. Configuration options for model generation and outputs.
+        "audioTimestamp": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, audio timestamp will be included in the request to the model.
+        "candidateCount": 42, # Optional. Number of candidates to generate.
+        "enableAffectiveDialog": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, the model will detect emotions and adapt its responses accordingly.
+        "frequencyPenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Frequency penalties.
+        "logprobs": 42, # Optional. Logit probabilities.
+        "maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message.
+        "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used.
+        "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties.
+        "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set.
+        "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response.
+        "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature.
+        "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "responseSchema": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. The `Schema` object allows the definition of input and output data types. These types can be objects, but also primitives and arrays. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema). If set, a compatible response_mime_type must also be set. Compatible mimetypes: `application/json`: Schema for JSON response.
+          "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties.
+          "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list.
+            # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+          ],
+          "default": "", # Optional. Default value of the data.
+          "defs": { # Optional. A map of definitions for use by `ref` Only allowed at the root of the schema.
+            "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+          },
+          "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the data.
+          "enum": [ # Optional. Possible values of the element of primitive type with enum format. Examples: 1. We can define direction as : {type:STRING, format:enum, enum:["EAST", NORTH", "SOUTH", "WEST"]} 2. We can define apartment number as : {type:INTEGER, format:enum, enum:["101", "201", "301"]}
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "example": "", # Optional. Example of the object. Will only populated when the object is the root.
+          "format": "A String", # Optional. The format of the data. Supported formats: for NUMBER type: "float", "double" for INTEGER type: "int32", "int64" for STRING type: "email", "byte", etc
+          "items": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE ARRAY Schema of the elements of Type.ARRAY.
+          "maxItems": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+          "maxLength": "A String", # Optional. Maximum length of the Type.STRING
+          "maxProperties": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+          "maximum": 3.14, # Optional. Maximum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+          "minItems": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+          "minLength": "A String", # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE STRING Minimum length of the Type.STRING
+          "minProperties": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+          "minimum": 3.14, # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE INTEGER and NUMBER Minimum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+          "nullable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the value may be null.
+          "pattern": "A String", # Optional. Pattern of the Type.STRING to restrict a string to a regular expression.
+          "properties": { # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE OBJECT Properties of Type.OBJECT.
+            "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+          },
+          "propertyOrdering": [ # Optional. The order of the properties. Not a standard field in open api spec. Only used to support the order of the properties.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "ref": "A String", # Optional. Allows indirect references between schema nodes. The value should be a valid reference to a child of the root `defs`. For example, the following schema defines a reference to a schema node named "Pet": type: object properties: pet: ref: #/defs/Pet defs: Pet: type: object properties: name: type: string The value of the "pet" property is a reference to the schema node named "Pet". See details in https://json-schema.org/understanding-json-schema/structuring
+          "required": [ # Optional. Required properties of Type.OBJECT.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema.
+          "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data.
+        },
+        "routingConfig": { # The configuration for routing the request to a specific model. # Optional. Routing configuration.
+          "autoMode": { # When automated routing is specified, the routing will be determined by the pretrained routing model and customer provided model routing preference. # Automated routing.
+            "modelRoutingPreference": "A String", # The model routing preference.
+          },
+          "manualMode": { # When manual routing is set, the specified model will be used directly. # Manual routing.
+            "modelName": "A String", # The model name to use. Only the public LLM models are accepted. See [Supported models](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/model-reference/inference#supported-models).
+          },
+        },
+        "seed": 42, # Optional. Seed.
+        "speechConfig": { # The speech generation config. # Optional. The speech generation config.
+          "languageCode": "A String", # Optional. Language code (ISO 639. e.g. en-US) for the speech synthesization.
+          "voiceConfig": { # The configuration for the voice to use. # The configuration for the speaker to use.
+            "prebuiltVoiceConfig": { # The configuration for the prebuilt speaker to use. # The configuration for the prebuilt voice to use.
+              "voiceName": "A String", # The name of the preset voice to use.
+            },
+          },
+        },
+        "stopSequences": [ # Optional. Stop sequences.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "temperature": 3.14, # Optional. Controls the randomness of predictions.
+        "thinkingConfig": { # Config for thinking features. # Optional. Config for thinking features. An error will be returned if this field is set for models that don't support thinking.
+          "includeThoughts": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether to include thoughts in the response. If true, thoughts are returned only when available.
+          "thinkingBudget": 42, # Optional. Indicates the thinking budget in tokens.
+        },
+        "topK": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, top-k sampling will be used.
+        "topP": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, nucleus sampling will be used.
+      },
+      "sampleCount": 42, # Optional. Number of samples for each instance in the dataset. If not specified, the default is 4. Minimum value is 1, maximum value is 32.
+    },
+    "metrics": [ # Required. The metrics to be calculated in the evaluation run.
+      { # The metric used for evaluation runs.
+        "computationBasedMetricSpec": { # Specification for a computation based metric. # Spec for a computation based metric.
+          "parameters": { # Optional. A map of parameters for the metric, e.g. {"rouge_type": "rougeL"}.
+            "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+          },
+          "type": "A String", # Required. The type of the computation based metric.
+        },
+        "llmBasedMetricSpec": { # Specification for an LLM based metric. # Spec for an LLM based metric.
+          "additionalConfig": { # Optional. Optional additional configuration for the metric.
+            "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+          },
+          "judgeAutoraterConfig": { # The autorater config used for the evaluation run. # Optional. Optional configuration for the judge LLM (Autorater).
+            "autoraterModel": "A String", # Optional. The fully qualified name of the publisher model or tuned autorater endpoint to use. Publisher model format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/publishers/*/models/*` Tuned model endpoint format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/endpoints/{endpoint}`
+            "generationConfig": { # Generation config. # Optional. Configuration options for model generation and outputs.
+              "audioTimestamp": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, audio timestamp will be included in the request to the model.
+              "candidateCount": 42, # Optional. Number of candidates to generate.
+              "enableAffectiveDialog": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, the model will detect emotions and adapt its responses accordingly.
+              "frequencyPenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Frequency penalties.
+              "logprobs": 42, # Optional. Logit probabilities.
+              "maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message.
+              "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used.
+              "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties.
+              "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set.
+              "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response.
+              "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature.
+              "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "responseSchema": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. The `Schema` object allows the definition of input and output data types. These types can be objects, but also primitives and arrays. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema). If set, a compatible response_mime_type must also be set. Compatible mimetypes: `application/json`: Schema for JSON response.
+                "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties.
+                "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list.
+                  # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                ],
+                "default": "", # Optional. Default value of the data.
+                "defs": { # Optional. A map of definitions for use by `ref` Only allowed at the root of the schema.
+                  "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                },
+                "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the data.
+                "enum": [ # Optional. Possible values of the element of primitive type with enum format. Examples: 1. We can define direction as : {type:STRING, format:enum, enum:["EAST", NORTH", "SOUTH", "WEST"]} 2. We can define apartment number as : {type:INTEGER, format:enum, enum:["101", "201", "301"]}
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "example": "", # Optional. Example of the object. Will only populated when the object is the root.
+                "format": "A String", # Optional. The format of the data. Supported formats: for NUMBER type: "float", "double" for INTEGER type: "int32", "int64" for STRING type: "email", "byte", etc
+                "items": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE ARRAY Schema of the elements of Type.ARRAY.
+                "maxItems": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                "maxLength": "A String", # Optional. Maximum length of the Type.STRING
+                "maxProperties": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                "maximum": 3.14, # Optional. Maximum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                "minItems": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                "minLength": "A String", # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE STRING Minimum length of the Type.STRING
+                "minProperties": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                "minimum": 3.14, # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE INTEGER and NUMBER Minimum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                "nullable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the value may be null.
+                "pattern": "A String", # Optional. Pattern of the Type.STRING to restrict a string to a regular expression.
+                "properties": { # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE OBJECT Properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                  "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                },
+                "propertyOrdering": [ # Optional. The order of the properties. Not a standard field in open api spec. Only used to support the order of the properties.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "ref": "A String", # Optional. Allows indirect references between schema nodes. The value should be a valid reference to a child of the root `defs`. For example, the following schema defines a reference to a schema node named "Pet": type: object properties: pet: ref: #/defs/Pet defs: Pet: type: object properties: name: type: string The value of the "pet" property is a reference to the schema node named "Pet". See details in https://json-schema.org/understanding-json-schema/structuring
+                "required": [ # Optional. Required properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema.
+                "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data.
+              },
+              "routingConfig": { # The configuration for routing the request to a specific model. # Optional. Routing configuration.
+                "autoMode": { # When automated routing is specified, the routing will be determined by the pretrained routing model and customer provided model routing preference. # Automated routing.
+                  "modelRoutingPreference": "A String", # The model routing preference.
+                },
+                "manualMode": { # When manual routing is set, the specified model will be used directly. # Manual routing.
+                  "modelName": "A String", # The model name to use. Only the public LLM models are accepted. See [Supported models](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/model-reference/inference#supported-models).
+                },
+              },
+              "seed": 42, # Optional. Seed.
+              "speechConfig": { # The speech generation config. # Optional. The speech generation config.
+                "languageCode": "A String", # Optional. Language code (ISO 639. e.g. en-US) for the speech synthesization.
+                "voiceConfig": { # The configuration for the voice to use. # The configuration for the speaker to use.
+                  "prebuiltVoiceConfig": { # The configuration for the prebuilt speaker to use. # The configuration for the prebuilt voice to use.
+                    "voiceName": "A String", # The name of the preset voice to use.
+                  },
+                },
+              },
+              "stopSequences": [ # Optional. Stop sequences.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "temperature": 3.14, # Optional. Controls the randomness of predictions.
+              "thinkingConfig": { # Config for thinking features. # Optional. Config for thinking features. An error will be returned if this field is set for models that don't support thinking.
+                "includeThoughts": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether to include thoughts in the response. If true, thoughts are returned only when available.
+                "thinkingBudget": 42, # Optional. Indicates the thinking budget in tokens.
+              },
+              "topK": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, top-k sampling will be used.
+              "topP": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, nucleus sampling will be used.
+            },
+            "sampleCount": 42, # Optional. Number of samples for each instance in the dataset. If not specified, the default is 4. Minimum value is 1, maximum value is 32.
+          },
+          "metricPromptTemplate": "A String", # Required. Template for the prompt sent to the judge model.
+          "predefinedRubricGenerationSpec": { # Specification for a pre-defined metric. # Dynamically generate rubrics using a predefined spec.
+            "metricSpecName": "A String", # Required. The name of a pre-defined metric, such as "instruction_following_v1" or "text_quality_v1".
+            "parameters": { # Optional. The parameters needed to run the pre-defined metric.
+              "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+            },
+          },
+          "rubricGenerationSpec": { # Specification for how rubrics should be generated. # Dynamically generate rubrics using this specification.
+            "modelConfig": { # The autorater config used for the evaluation run. # Optional. Configuration for the model used in rubric generation. Configs including sampling count and base model can be specified here. Flipping is not supported for rubric generation.
+              "autoraterModel": "A String", # Optional. The fully qualified name of the publisher model or tuned autorater endpoint to use. Publisher model format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/publishers/*/models/*` Tuned model endpoint format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/endpoints/{endpoint}`
+              "generationConfig": { # Generation config. # Optional. Configuration options for model generation and outputs.
+                "audioTimestamp": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, audio timestamp will be included in the request to the model.
+                "candidateCount": 42, # Optional. Number of candidates to generate.
+                "enableAffectiveDialog": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, the model will detect emotions and adapt its responses accordingly.
+                "frequencyPenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Frequency penalties.
+                "logprobs": 42, # Optional. Logit probabilities.
+                "maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message.
+                "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used.
+                "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties.
+                "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set.
+                "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response.
+                "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature.
+                "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "responseSchema": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. The `Schema` object allows the definition of input and output data types. These types can be objects, but also primitives and arrays. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema). If set, a compatible response_mime_type must also be set. Compatible mimetypes: `application/json`: Schema for JSON response.
+                  "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties.
+                  "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list.
+                    # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                  ],
+                  "default": "", # Optional. Default value of the data.
+                  "defs": { # Optional. A map of definitions for use by `ref` Only allowed at the root of the schema.
+                    "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                  },
+                  "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the data.
+                  "enum": [ # Optional. Possible values of the element of primitive type with enum format. Examples: 1. We can define direction as : {type:STRING, format:enum, enum:["EAST", NORTH", "SOUTH", "WEST"]} 2. We can define apartment number as : {type:INTEGER, format:enum, enum:["101", "201", "301"]}
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "example": "", # Optional. Example of the object. Will only populated when the object is the root.
+                  "format": "A String", # Optional. The format of the data. Supported formats: for NUMBER type: "float", "double" for INTEGER type: "int32", "int64" for STRING type: "email", "byte", etc
+                  "items": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE ARRAY Schema of the elements of Type.ARRAY.
+                  "maxItems": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                  "maxLength": "A String", # Optional. Maximum length of the Type.STRING
+                  "maxProperties": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                  "maximum": 3.14, # Optional. Maximum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                  "minItems": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                  "minLength": "A String", # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE STRING Minimum length of the Type.STRING
+                  "minProperties": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                  "minimum": 3.14, # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE INTEGER and NUMBER Minimum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                  "nullable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the value may be null.
+                  "pattern": "A String", # Optional. Pattern of the Type.STRING to restrict a string to a regular expression.
+                  "properties": { # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE OBJECT Properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                    "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                  },
+                  "propertyOrdering": [ # Optional. The order of the properties. Not a standard field in open api spec. Only used to support the order of the properties.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "ref": "A String", # Optional. Allows indirect references between schema nodes. The value should be a valid reference to a child of the root `defs`. For example, the following schema defines a reference to a schema node named "Pet": type: object properties: pet: ref: #/defs/Pet defs: Pet: type: object properties: name: type: string The value of the "pet" property is a reference to the schema node named "Pet". See details in https://json-schema.org/understanding-json-schema/structuring
+                  "required": [ # Optional. Required properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema.
+                  "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data.
+                },
+                "routingConfig": { # The configuration for routing the request to a specific model. # Optional. Routing configuration.
+                  "autoMode": { # When automated routing is specified, the routing will be determined by the pretrained routing model and customer provided model routing preference. # Automated routing.
+                    "modelRoutingPreference": "A String", # The model routing preference.
+                  },
+                  "manualMode": { # When manual routing is set, the specified model will be used directly. # Manual routing.
+                    "modelName": "A String", # The model name to use. Only the public LLM models are accepted. See [Supported models](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/model-reference/inference#supported-models).
+                  },
+                },
+                "seed": 42, # Optional. Seed.
+                "speechConfig": { # The speech generation config. # Optional. The speech generation config.
+                  "languageCode": "A String", # Optional. Language code (ISO 639. e.g. en-US) for the speech synthesization.
+                  "voiceConfig": { # The configuration for the voice to use. # The configuration for the speaker to use.
+                    "prebuiltVoiceConfig": { # The configuration for the prebuilt speaker to use. # The configuration for the prebuilt voice to use.
+                      "voiceName": "A String", # The name of the preset voice to use.
+                    },
+                  },
+                },
+                "stopSequences": [ # Optional. Stop sequences.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "temperature": 3.14, # Optional. Controls the randomness of predictions.
+                "thinkingConfig": { # Config for thinking features. # Optional. Config for thinking features. An error will be returned if this field is set for models that don't support thinking.
+                  "includeThoughts": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether to include thoughts in the response. If true, thoughts are returned only when available.
+                  "thinkingBudget": 42, # Optional. Indicates the thinking budget in tokens.
+                },
+                "topK": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, top-k sampling will be used.
+                "topP": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, nucleus sampling will be used.
+              },
+              "sampleCount": 42, # Optional. Number of samples for each instance in the dataset. If not specified, the default is 4. Minimum value is 1, maximum value is 32.
+            },
+            "promptTemplate": "A String", # Optional. Template for the prompt used to generate rubrics. The details should be updated based on the most-recent recipe requirements.
+            "rubricContentType": "A String", # Optional. The type of rubric content to be generated.
+            "rubricTypeOntology": [ # Optional. An optional, pre-defined list of allowed types for generated rubrics. If this field is provided, it implies `include_rubric_type` should be true, and the generated rubric types should be chosen from this ontology.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+          },
+          "rubricGroupKey": "A String", # Use a pre-defined group of rubrics associated with the input. Refers to a key in the rubric_groups map of EvaluationInstance.
+          "systemInstruction": "A String", # Optional. System instructions for the judge model.
+        },
+        "metric": "A String", # Required. The name of the metric.
+        "predefinedMetricSpec": { # Specification for a pre-defined metric. # Spec for a pre-defined metric.
+          "metricSpecName": "A String", # Required. The name of a pre-defined metric, such as "instruction_following_v1" or "text_quality_v1".
+          "parameters": { # Optional. The parameters needed to run the pre-defined metric.
+            "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+          },
+        },
+        "rubricBasedMetricSpec": { # Specification for a metric that is based on rubrics. # Spec for rubric based metric.
+          "inlineRubrics": { # Defines a list of rubrics, used when providing rubrics inline. # Use rubrics provided directly in the spec.
+            "rubrics": [ # The list of rubrics.
+              { # Message representing a single testable criterion for evaluation. One input prompt could have multiple rubrics.
+                "content": { # Content of the rubric, defining the testable criteria. # Required. The actual testable criteria for the rubric.
+                  "property": { # Defines criteria based on a specific property. # Evaluation criteria based on a specific property.
+                    "description": "A String", # Description of the property being evaluated. Example: "The model's response is grammatically correct."
+                  },
+                },
+                "importance": "A String", # Optional. The relative importance of this rubric.
+                "rubricId": "A String", # Unique identifier for the rubric. This ID is used to refer to this rubric, e.g., in RubricVerdict.
+                "type": "A String", # Optional. A type designator for the rubric, which can inform how it's evaluated or interpreted by systems or users. It's recommended to use consistent, well-defined, upper snake_case strings. Examples: "SUMMARIZATION_QUALITY", "SAFETY_HARMFUL_CONTENT", "INSTRUCTION_ADHERENCE".
+              },
+            ],
+          },
+          "judgeAutoraterConfig": { # The autorater config used for the evaluation run. # Optional. Optional configuration for the judge LLM (Autorater). The definition of AutoraterConfig needs to be provided.
+            "autoraterModel": "A String", # Optional. The fully qualified name of the publisher model or tuned autorater endpoint to use. Publisher model format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/publishers/*/models/*` Tuned model endpoint format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/endpoints/{endpoint}`
+            "generationConfig": { # Generation config. # Optional. Configuration options for model generation and outputs.
+              "audioTimestamp": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, audio timestamp will be included in the request to the model.
+              "candidateCount": 42, # Optional. Number of candidates to generate.
+              "enableAffectiveDialog": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, the model will detect emotions and adapt its responses accordingly.
+              "frequencyPenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Frequency penalties.
+              "logprobs": 42, # Optional. Logit probabilities.
+              "maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message.
+              "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used.
+              "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties.
+              "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set.
+              "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response.
+              "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature.
+              "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "responseSchema": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. The `Schema` object allows the definition of input and output data types. These types can be objects, but also primitives and arrays. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema). If set, a compatible response_mime_type must also be set. Compatible mimetypes: `application/json`: Schema for JSON response.
+                "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties.
+                "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list.
+                  # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                ],
+                "default": "", # Optional. Default value of the data.
+                "defs": { # Optional. A map of definitions for use by `ref` Only allowed at the root of the schema.
+                  "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                },
+                "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the data.
+                "enum": [ # Optional. Possible values of the element of primitive type with enum format. Examples: 1. We can define direction as : {type:STRING, format:enum, enum:["EAST", NORTH", "SOUTH", "WEST"]} 2. We can define apartment number as : {type:INTEGER, format:enum, enum:["101", "201", "301"]}
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "example": "", # Optional. Example of the object. Will only populated when the object is the root.
+                "format": "A String", # Optional. The format of the data. Supported formats: for NUMBER type: "float", "double" for INTEGER type: "int32", "int64" for STRING type: "email", "byte", etc
+                "items": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE ARRAY Schema of the elements of Type.ARRAY.
+                "maxItems": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                "maxLength": "A String", # Optional. Maximum length of the Type.STRING
+                "maxProperties": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                "maximum": 3.14, # Optional. Maximum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                "minItems": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                "minLength": "A String", # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE STRING Minimum length of the Type.STRING
+                "minProperties": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                "minimum": 3.14, # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE INTEGER and NUMBER Minimum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                "nullable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the value may be null.
+                "pattern": "A String", # Optional. Pattern of the Type.STRING to restrict a string to a regular expression.
+                "properties": { # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE OBJECT Properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                  "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                },
+                "propertyOrdering": [ # Optional. The order of the properties. Not a standard field in open api spec. Only used to support the order of the properties.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "ref": "A String", # Optional. Allows indirect references between schema nodes. The value should be a valid reference to a child of the root `defs`. For example, the following schema defines a reference to a schema node named "Pet": type: object properties: pet: ref: #/defs/Pet defs: Pet: type: object properties: name: type: string The value of the "pet" property is a reference to the schema node named "Pet". See details in https://json-schema.org/understanding-json-schema/structuring
+                "required": [ # Optional. Required properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema.
+                "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data.
+              },
+              "routingConfig": { # The configuration for routing the request to a specific model. # Optional. Routing configuration.
+                "autoMode": { # When automated routing is specified, the routing will be determined by the pretrained routing model and customer provided model routing preference. # Automated routing.
+                  "modelRoutingPreference": "A String", # The model routing preference.
+                },
+                "manualMode": { # When manual routing is set, the specified model will be used directly. # Manual routing.
+                  "modelName": "A String", # The model name to use. Only the public LLM models are accepted. See [Supported models](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/model-reference/inference#supported-models).
+                },
+              },
+              "seed": 42, # Optional. Seed.
+              "speechConfig": { # The speech generation config. # Optional. The speech generation config.
+                "languageCode": "A String", # Optional. Language code (ISO 639. e.g. en-US) for the speech synthesization.
+                "voiceConfig": { # The configuration for the voice to use. # The configuration for the speaker to use.
+                  "prebuiltVoiceConfig": { # The configuration for the prebuilt speaker to use. # The configuration for the prebuilt voice to use.
+                    "voiceName": "A String", # The name of the preset voice to use.
+                  },
+                },
+              },
+              "stopSequences": [ # Optional. Stop sequences.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "temperature": 3.14, # Optional. Controls the randomness of predictions.
+              "thinkingConfig": { # Config for thinking features. # Optional. Config for thinking features. An error will be returned if this field is set for models that don't support thinking.
+                "includeThoughts": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether to include thoughts in the response. If true, thoughts are returned only when available.
+                "thinkingBudget": 42, # Optional. Indicates the thinking budget in tokens.
+              },
+              "topK": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, top-k sampling will be used.
+              "topP": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, nucleus sampling will be used.
+            },
+            "sampleCount": 42, # Optional. Number of samples for each instance in the dataset. If not specified, the default is 4. Minimum value is 1, maximum value is 32.
+          },
+          "metricPromptTemplate": "A String", # Optional. Template for the prompt used by the judge model to evaluate against rubrics.
+          "rubricGenerationSpec": { # Specification for how rubrics should be generated. # Dynamically generate rubrics for evaluation using this specification.
+            "modelConfig": { # The autorater config used for the evaluation run. # Optional. Configuration for the model used in rubric generation. Configs including sampling count and base model can be specified here. Flipping is not supported for rubric generation.
+              "autoraterModel": "A String", # Optional. The fully qualified name of the publisher model or tuned autorater endpoint to use. Publisher model format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/publishers/*/models/*` Tuned model endpoint format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/endpoints/{endpoint}`
+              "generationConfig": { # Generation config. # Optional. Configuration options for model generation and outputs.
+                "audioTimestamp": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, audio timestamp will be included in the request to the model.
+                "candidateCount": 42, # Optional. Number of candidates to generate.
+                "enableAffectiveDialog": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, the model will detect emotions and adapt its responses accordingly.
+                "frequencyPenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Frequency penalties.
+                "logprobs": 42, # Optional. Logit probabilities.
+                "maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message.
+                "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used.
+                "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties.
+                "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set.
+                "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response.
+                "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature.
+                "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "responseSchema": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. The `Schema` object allows the definition of input and output data types. These types can be objects, but also primitives and arrays. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema). If set, a compatible response_mime_type must also be set. Compatible mimetypes: `application/json`: Schema for JSON response.
+                  "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties.
+                  "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list.
+                    # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                  ],
+                  "default": "", # Optional. Default value of the data.
+                  "defs": { # Optional. A map of definitions for use by `ref` Only allowed at the root of the schema.
+                    "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                  },
+                  "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the data.
+                  "enum": [ # Optional. Possible values of the element of primitive type with enum format. Examples: 1. We can define direction as : {type:STRING, format:enum, enum:["EAST", NORTH", "SOUTH", "WEST"]} 2. We can define apartment number as : {type:INTEGER, format:enum, enum:["101", "201", "301"]}
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "example": "", # Optional. Example of the object. Will only populated when the object is the root.
+                  "format": "A String", # Optional. The format of the data. Supported formats: for NUMBER type: "float", "double" for INTEGER type: "int32", "int64" for STRING type: "email", "byte", etc
+                  "items": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE ARRAY Schema of the elements of Type.ARRAY.
+                  "maxItems": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                  "maxLength": "A String", # Optional. Maximum length of the Type.STRING
+                  "maxProperties": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                  "maximum": 3.14, # Optional. Maximum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                  "minItems": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                  "minLength": "A String", # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE STRING Minimum length of the Type.STRING
+                  "minProperties": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                  "minimum": 3.14, # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE INTEGER and NUMBER Minimum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                  "nullable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the value may be null.
+                  "pattern": "A String", # Optional. Pattern of the Type.STRING to restrict a string to a regular expression.
+                  "properties": { # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE OBJECT Properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                    "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                  },
+                  "propertyOrdering": [ # Optional. The order of the properties. Not a standard field in open api spec. Only used to support the order of the properties.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "ref": "A String", # Optional. Allows indirect references between schema nodes. The value should be a valid reference to a child of the root `defs`. For example, the following schema defines a reference to a schema node named "Pet": type: object properties: pet: ref: #/defs/Pet defs: Pet: type: object properties: name: type: string The value of the "pet" property is a reference to the schema node named "Pet". See details in https://json-schema.org/understanding-json-schema/structuring
+                  "required": [ # Optional. Required properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema.
+                  "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data.
+                },
+                "routingConfig": { # The configuration for routing the request to a specific model. # Optional. Routing configuration.
+                  "autoMode": { # When automated routing is specified, the routing will be determined by the pretrained routing model and customer provided model routing preference. # Automated routing.
+                    "modelRoutingPreference": "A String", # The model routing preference.
+                  },
+                  "manualMode": { # When manual routing is set, the specified model will be used directly. # Manual routing.
+                    "modelName": "A String", # The model name to use. Only the public LLM models are accepted. See [Supported models](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/model-reference/inference#supported-models).
+                  },
+                },
+                "seed": 42, # Optional. Seed.
+                "speechConfig": { # The speech generation config. # Optional. The speech generation config.
+                  "languageCode": "A String", # Optional. Language code (ISO 639. e.g. en-US) for the speech synthesization.
+                  "voiceConfig": { # The configuration for the voice to use. # The configuration for the speaker to use.
+                    "prebuiltVoiceConfig": { # The configuration for the prebuilt speaker to use. # The configuration for the prebuilt voice to use.
+                      "voiceName": "A String", # The name of the preset voice to use.
+                    },
+                  },
+                },
+                "stopSequences": [ # Optional. Stop sequences.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "temperature": 3.14, # Optional. Controls the randomness of predictions.
+                "thinkingConfig": { # Config for thinking features. # Optional. Config for thinking features. An error will be returned if this field is set for models that don't support thinking.
+                  "includeThoughts": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether to include thoughts in the response. If true, thoughts are returned only when available.
+                  "thinkingBudget": 42, # Optional. Indicates the thinking budget in tokens.
+                },
+                "topK": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, top-k sampling will be used.
+                "topP": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, nucleus sampling will be used.
+              },
+              "sampleCount": 42, # Optional. Number of samples for each instance in the dataset. If not specified, the default is 4. Minimum value is 1, maximum value is 32.
+            },
+            "promptTemplate": "A String", # Optional. Template for the prompt used to generate rubrics. The details should be updated based on the most-recent recipe requirements.
+            "rubricContentType": "A String", # Optional. The type of rubric content to be generated.
+            "rubricTypeOntology": [ # Optional. An optional, pre-defined list of allowed types for generated rubrics. If this field is provided, it implies `include_rubric_type` should be true, and the generated rubric types should be chosen from this ontology.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+          },
+          "rubricGroupKey": "A String", # Use a pre-defined group of rubrics associated with the input content. This refers to a key in the `rubric_groups` map of `RubricEnhancedContents`.
+        },
+      },
+    ],
+    "outputConfig": { # The output config for the evaluation run. # Optional. The output config for the evaluation run.
+      "bigqueryDestination": { # The BigQuery location for the output content. # BigQuery destination for evaluation output.
+        "outputUri": "A String", # Required. BigQuery URI to a project or table, up to 2000 characters long. When only the project is specified, the Dataset and Table is created. When the full table reference is specified, the Dataset must exist and table must not exist. Accepted forms: * BigQuery path. For example: `bq://projectId` or `bq://projectId.bqDatasetId` or `bq://projectId.bqDatasetId.bqTableId`.
+      },
+      "gcsDestination": { # The Google Cloud Storage location where the output is to be written to. # Cloud Storage destination for evaluation output.
+        "outputUriPrefix": "A String", # Required. Google Cloud Storage URI to output directory. If the uri doesn't end with '/', a '/' will be automatically appended. The directory is created if it doesn't exist.
+      },
+    },
+    "promptTemplate": { # Prompt template used for inference. # The prompt template used for inference. The values for variables in the prompt template are defined in EvaluationItem.EvaluationPrompt.PromptTemplateData.values.
+      "gcsUri": "A String", # Prompt template stored in Cloud Storage. Format: "gs://my-bucket/file-name.txt".
+      "promptTemplate": "A String", # Inline prompt template. Template variables should be in the format "{var_name}". Example: "Translate the following from {source_lang} to {target_lang}: {text}"
+    },
+    "rubricConfigs": [ # Optional. The rubric configs for the evaluation run. They are used to generate rubrics which can be used by rubric-based metrics. Multiple rubric configs can be specified for rubric generation but only one rubric config can be used for a rubric-based metric. If more than one rubric config is provided, the evaluation metric must specify a rubric group key. Note that if a generation spec is specified on both a rubric config and an evaluation metric, the rubrics generated for the metric will be used for evaluation.
+      { # Configuration for a rubric group to be generated/saved for evaluation.
+        "predefinedRubricGenerationSpec": { # Specification for a pre-defined metric. # Dynamically generate rubrics using a predefined spec.
+          "metricSpecName": "A String", # Required. The name of a pre-defined metric, such as "instruction_following_v1" or "text_quality_v1".
+          "parameters": { # Optional. The parameters needed to run the pre-defined metric.
+            "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+          },
+        },
+        "rubricGenerationSpec": { # Specification for how rubrics should be generated. # Dynamically generate rubrics using this specification.
+          "modelConfig": { # The autorater config used for the evaluation run. # Optional. Configuration for the model used in rubric generation. Configs including sampling count and base model can be specified here. Flipping is not supported for rubric generation.
+            "autoraterModel": "A String", # Optional. The fully qualified name of the publisher model or tuned autorater endpoint to use. Publisher model format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/publishers/*/models/*` Tuned model endpoint format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/endpoints/{endpoint}`
+            "generationConfig": { # Generation config. # Optional. Configuration options for model generation and outputs.
+              "audioTimestamp": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, audio timestamp will be included in the request to the model.
+              "candidateCount": 42, # Optional. Number of candidates to generate.
+              "enableAffectiveDialog": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, the model will detect emotions and adapt its responses accordingly.
+              "frequencyPenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Frequency penalties.
+              "logprobs": 42, # Optional. Logit probabilities.
+              "maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message.
+              "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used.
+              "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties.
+              "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set.
+              "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response.
+              "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature.
+              "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "responseSchema": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. The `Schema` object allows the definition of input and output data types. These types can be objects, but also primitives and arrays. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema). If set, a compatible response_mime_type must also be set. Compatible mimetypes: `application/json`: Schema for JSON response.
+                "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties.
+                "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list.
+                  # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                ],
+                "default": "", # Optional. Default value of the data.
+                "defs": { # Optional. A map of definitions for use by `ref` Only allowed at the root of the schema.
+                  "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                },
+                "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the data.
+                "enum": [ # Optional. Possible values of the element of primitive type with enum format. Examples: 1. We can define direction as : {type:STRING, format:enum, enum:["EAST", NORTH", "SOUTH", "WEST"]} 2. We can define apartment number as : {type:INTEGER, format:enum, enum:["101", "201", "301"]}
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "example": "", # Optional. Example of the object. Will only populated when the object is the root.
+                "format": "A String", # Optional. The format of the data. Supported formats: for NUMBER type: "float", "double" for INTEGER type: "int32", "int64" for STRING type: "email", "byte", etc
+                "items": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE ARRAY Schema of the elements of Type.ARRAY.
+                "maxItems": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                "maxLength": "A String", # Optional. Maximum length of the Type.STRING
+                "maxProperties": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                "maximum": 3.14, # Optional. Maximum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                "minItems": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                "minLength": "A String", # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE STRING Minimum length of the Type.STRING
+                "minProperties": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                "minimum": 3.14, # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE INTEGER and NUMBER Minimum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                "nullable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the value may be null.
+                "pattern": "A String", # Optional. Pattern of the Type.STRING to restrict a string to a regular expression.
+                "properties": { # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE OBJECT Properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                  "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                },
+                "propertyOrdering": [ # Optional. The order of the properties. Not a standard field in open api spec. Only used to support the order of the properties.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "ref": "A String", # Optional. Allows indirect references between schema nodes. The value should be a valid reference to a child of the root `defs`. For example, the following schema defines a reference to a schema node named "Pet": type: object properties: pet: ref: #/defs/Pet defs: Pet: type: object properties: name: type: string The value of the "pet" property is a reference to the schema node named "Pet". See details in https://json-schema.org/understanding-json-schema/structuring
+                "required": [ # Optional. Required properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema.
+                "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data.
+              },
+              "routingConfig": { # The configuration for routing the request to a specific model. # Optional. Routing configuration.
+                "autoMode": { # When automated routing is specified, the routing will be determined by the pretrained routing model and customer provided model routing preference. # Automated routing.
+                  "modelRoutingPreference": "A String", # The model routing preference.
+                },
+                "manualMode": { # When manual routing is set, the specified model will be used directly. # Manual routing.
+                  "modelName": "A String", # The model name to use. Only the public LLM models are accepted. See [Supported models](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/model-reference/inference#supported-models).
+                },
+              },
+              "seed": 42, # Optional. Seed.
+              "speechConfig": { # The speech generation config. # Optional. The speech generation config.
+                "languageCode": "A String", # Optional. Language code (ISO 639. e.g. en-US) for the speech synthesization.
+                "voiceConfig": { # The configuration for the voice to use. # The configuration for the speaker to use.
+                  "prebuiltVoiceConfig": { # The configuration for the prebuilt speaker to use. # The configuration for the prebuilt voice to use.
+                    "voiceName": "A String", # The name of the preset voice to use.
+                  },
+                },
+              },
+              "stopSequences": [ # Optional. Stop sequences.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "temperature": 3.14, # Optional. Controls the randomness of predictions.
+              "thinkingConfig": { # Config for thinking features. # Optional. Config for thinking features. An error will be returned if this field is set for models that don't support thinking.
+                "includeThoughts": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether to include thoughts in the response. If true, thoughts are returned only when available.
+                "thinkingBudget": 42, # Optional. Indicates the thinking budget in tokens.
+              },
+              "topK": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, top-k sampling will be used.
+              "topP": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, nucleus sampling will be used.
+            },
+            "sampleCount": 42, # Optional. Number of samples for each instance in the dataset. If not specified, the default is 4. Minimum value is 1, maximum value is 32.
+          },
+          "promptTemplate": "A String", # Optional. Template for the prompt used to generate rubrics. The details should be updated based on the most-recent recipe requirements.
+          "rubricContentType": "A String", # Optional. The type of rubric content to be generated.
+          "rubricTypeOntology": [ # Optional. An optional, pre-defined list of allowed types for generated rubrics. If this field is provided, it implies `include_rubric_type` should be true, and the generated rubric types should be chosen from this ontology.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+        },
+        "rubricGroupKey": "A String", # Required. The key used to save the generated rubrics. If a generation spec is provided, this key will be used for the name of the generated rubric group. Otherwise, this key will be used to look up the existing rubric group on the evaluation item. Note that if a rubric group key is specified on both a rubric config and an evaluation metric, the key from the metric will be used to select the rubrics for evaluation.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "evaluationResults": { # The results of the evaluation run. # Output only. The results of the evaluation run. Only populated when the evaluation run's state is SUCCEEDED.
+    "evaluationSet": "A String", # The evaluation set where item level results are stored.
+    "summaryMetrics": { # The summary metrics for the evaluation run. # Optional. The summary metrics for the evaluation run.
+      "failedItems": 42, # Optional. The number of items that failed to be evaluated.
+      "metrics": { # Optional. Map of metric name to metric value.
+        "a_key": "",
+      },
+      "totalItems": 42, # Optional. The total number of items that were evaluated.
+    },
+  },
+  "evaluationSetSnapshot": "A String", # Output only. The specific evaluation set of the evaluation run. For runs with an evaluation set input, this will be that same set. For runs with BigQuery input, it's the sampled BigQuery dataset.
+  "inferenceConfigs": { # Optional. The candidate to inference config map for the evaluation run. The candidate can be up to 128 characters long and can consist of any UTF-8 characters.
+    "a_key": { # An inference config used for model inference during the evaluation run.
+      "generationConfig": { # Generation config. # Optional. Generation config.
+        "audioTimestamp": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, audio timestamp will be included in the request to the model.
+        "candidateCount": 42, # Optional. Number of candidates to generate.
+        "enableAffectiveDialog": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, the model will detect emotions and adapt its responses accordingly.
+        "frequencyPenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Frequency penalties.
+        "logprobs": 42, # Optional. Logit probabilities.
+        "maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message.
+        "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used.
+        "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties.
+        "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set.
+        "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response.
+        "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature.
+        "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "responseSchema": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. The `Schema` object allows the definition of input and output data types. These types can be objects, but also primitives and arrays. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema). If set, a compatible response_mime_type must also be set. Compatible mimetypes: `application/json`: Schema for JSON response.
+          "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties.
+          "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list.
+            # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+          ],
+          "default": "", # Optional. Default value of the data.
+          "defs": { # Optional. A map of definitions for use by `ref` Only allowed at the root of the schema.
+            "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+          },
+          "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the data.
+          "enum": [ # Optional. Possible values of the element of primitive type with enum format. Examples: 1. We can define direction as : {type:STRING, format:enum, enum:["EAST", NORTH", "SOUTH", "WEST"]} 2. We can define apartment number as : {type:INTEGER, format:enum, enum:["101", "201", "301"]}
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "example": "", # Optional. Example of the object. Will only populated when the object is the root.
+          "format": "A String", # Optional. The format of the data. Supported formats: for NUMBER type: "float", "double" for INTEGER type: "int32", "int64" for STRING type: "email", "byte", etc
+          "items": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE ARRAY Schema of the elements of Type.ARRAY.
+          "maxItems": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+          "maxLength": "A String", # Optional. Maximum length of the Type.STRING
+          "maxProperties": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+          "maximum": 3.14, # Optional. Maximum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+          "minItems": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+          "minLength": "A String", # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE STRING Minimum length of the Type.STRING
+          "minProperties": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+          "minimum": 3.14, # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE INTEGER and NUMBER Minimum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+          "nullable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the value may be null.
+          "pattern": "A String", # Optional. Pattern of the Type.STRING to restrict a string to a regular expression.
+          "properties": { # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE OBJECT Properties of Type.OBJECT.
+            "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+          },
+          "propertyOrdering": [ # Optional. The order of the properties. Not a standard field in open api spec. Only used to support the order of the properties.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "ref": "A String", # Optional. Allows indirect references between schema nodes. The value should be a valid reference to a child of the root `defs`. For example, the following schema defines a reference to a schema node named "Pet": type: object properties: pet: ref: #/defs/Pet defs: Pet: type: object properties: name: type: string The value of the "pet" property is a reference to the schema node named "Pet". See details in https://json-schema.org/understanding-json-schema/structuring
+          "required": [ # Optional. Required properties of Type.OBJECT.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema.
+          "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data.
+        },
+        "routingConfig": { # The configuration for routing the request to a specific model. # Optional. Routing configuration.
+          "autoMode": { # When automated routing is specified, the routing will be determined by the pretrained routing model and customer provided model routing preference. # Automated routing.
+            "modelRoutingPreference": "A String", # The model routing preference.
+          },
+          "manualMode": { # When manual routing is set, the specified model will be used directly. # Manual routing.
+            "modelName": "A String", # The model name to use. Only the public LLM models are accepted. See [Supported models](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/model-reference/inference#supported-models).
+          },
+        },
+        "seed": 42, # Optional. Seed.
+        "speechConfig": { # The speech generation config. # Optional. The speech generation config.
+          "languageCode": "A String", # Optional. Language code (ISO 639. e.g. en-US) for the speech synthesization.
+          "voiceConfig": { # The configuration for the voice to use. # The configuration for the speaker to use.
+            "prebuiltVoiceConfig": { # The configuration for the prebuilt speaker to use. # The configuration for the prebuilt voice to use.
+              "voiceName": "A String", # The name of the preset voice to use.
+            },
+          },
+        },
+        "stopSequences": [ # Optional. Stop sequences.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "temperature": 3.14, # Optional. Controls the randomness of predictions.
+        "thinkingConfig": { # Config for thinking features. # Optional. Config for thinking features. An error will be returned if this field is set for models that don't support thinking.
+          "includeThoughts": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether to include thoughts in the response. If true, thoughts are returned only when available.
+          "thinkingBudget": 42, # Optional. Indicates the thinking budget in tokens.
+        },
+        "topK": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, top-k sampling will be used.
+        "topP": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, nucleus sampling will be used.
+      },
+      "model": "A String", # Required. The fully qualified name of the publisher model or endpoint to use. Publisher model format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/publishers/*/models/*` Endpoint format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/endpoints/{endpoint}`
+    },
+  },
+  "labels": { # Optional. Labels for the evaluation run.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "metadata": "", # Optional. Metadata about the evaluation run, can be used by the caller to store additional tracking information about the evaluation run.
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the EvaluationRun. This is a unique identifier. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationRuns/{evaluation_run}`
+  "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the evaluation run.
+}
+
+ +
+ delete(name, x__xgafv=None) +
Deletes an Evaluation Run.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The name of the EvaluationRun resource to be deleted. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationRuns/{evaluation_run}` (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  "response": { # The normal, successful response of the operation. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}
+
+ +
+ get(name, x__xgafv=None) +
Gets an Evaluation Run.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The name of the EvaluationRun resource. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationRuns/{evaluation_run}` (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # EvaluationRun is a resource that represents a single evaluation run, which includes a set of prompts, model responses, evaluation configuration and the resulting metrics.
+  "completionTime": "A String", # Output only. Time when the evaluation run was completed.
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Time when the evaluation run was created.
+  "dataSource": { # The data source for the evaluation run. # Required. The data source for the evaluation run.
+    "bigqueryRequestSet": { # The request set for the evaluation run. # Evaluation data in bigquery.
+      "candidateResponseColumns": { # Optional. Map of candidate name to candidate response column name. The column will be in evaluation_item.CandidateResponse format.
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+      "promptColumn": "A String", # Optional. The name of the column that contains the requests to evaluate. This will be in evaluation_item.EvalPrompt format.
+      "rubricsColumn": "A String", # Optional. The name of the column that contains the rubrics. This will be in evaluation_rubric.RubricGroup format (cl/762595858).
+      "samplingConfig": { # The sampling config. # Optional. The sampling config for the bigquery resource.
+        "samplingCount": 42, # Optional. The total number of logged data to import. If available data is less than the sampling count, all data will be imported. Default is 100.
+        "samplingDuration": "A String", # Optional. How long to wait before sampling data from the BigQuery table. If not specified, defaults to 0.
+        "samplingMethod": "A String", # Optional. The sampling method to use.
+      },
+      "uri": "A String", # Required. The URI of a BigQuery table. e.g. bq://projectId.bqDatasetId.bqTableId
+    },
+    "evaluationSet": "A String", # The EvaluationSet resource name. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationSets/{evaluation_set}`
+  },
+  "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display name of the Evaluation Run.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # Output only. Only populated when the evaluation run's state is FAILED or CANCELLED.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "evaluationConfig": { # The Evalution configuration used for the evaluation run. # Required. The configuration used for the evaluation.
+    "autoraterConfig": { # The autorater config used for the evaluation run. # Optional. The autorater config for the evaluation run.
+      "autoraterModel": "A String", # Optional. The fully qualified name of the publisher model or tuned autorater endpoint to use. Publisher model format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/publishers/*/models/*` Tuned model endpoint format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/endpoints/{endpoint}`
+      "generationConfig": { # Generation config. # Optional. Configuration options for model generation and outputs.
+        "audioTimestamp": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, audio timestamp will be included in the request to the model.
+        "candidateCount": 42, # Optional. Number of candidates to generate.
+        "enableAffectiveDialog": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, the model will detect emotions and adapt its responses accordingly.
+        "frequencyPenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Frequency penalties.
+        "logprobs": 42, # Optional. Logit probabilities.
+        "maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message.
+        "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used.
+        "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties.
+        "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set.
+        "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response.
+        "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature.
+        "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "responseSchema": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. The `Schema` object allows the definition of input and output data types. These types can be objects, but also primitives and arrays. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema). If set, a compatible response_mime_type must also be set. Compatible mimetypes: `application/json`: Schema for JSON response.
+          "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties.
+          "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list.
+            # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+          ],
+          "default": "", # Optional. Default value of the data.
+          "defs": { # Optional. A map of definitions for use by `ref` Only allowed at the root of the schema.
+            "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+          },
+          "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the data.
+          "enum": [ # Optional. Possible values of the element of primitive type with enum format. Examples: 1. We can define direction as : {type:STRING, format:enum, enum:["EAST", NORTH", "SOUTH", "WEST"]} 2. We can define apartment number as : {type:INTEGER, format:enum, enum:["101", "201", "301"]}
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "example": "", # Optional. Example of the object. Will only populated when the object is the root.
+          "format": "A String", # Optional. The format of the data. Supported formats: for NUMBER type: "float", "double" for INTEGER type: "int32", "int64" for STRING type: "email", "byte", etc
+          "items": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE ARRAY Schema of the elements of Type.ARRAY.
+          "maxItems": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+          "maxLength": "A String", # Optional. Maximum length of the Type.STRING
+          "maxProperties": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+          "maximum": 3.14, # Optional. Maximum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+          "minItems": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+          "minLength": "A String", # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE STRING Minimum length of the Type.STRING
+          "minProperties": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+          "minimum": 3.14, # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE INTEGER and NUMBER Minimum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+          "nullable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the value may be null.
+          "pattern": "A String", # Optional. Pattern of the Type.STRING to restrict a string to a regular expression.
+          "properties": { # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE OBJECT Properties of Type.OBJECT.
+            "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+          },
+          "propertyOrdering": [ # Optional. The order of the properties. Not a standard field in open api spec. Only used to support the order of the properties.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "ref": "A String", # Optional. Allows indirect references between schema nodes. The value should be a valid reference to a child of the root `defs`. For example, the following schema defines a reference to a schema node named "Pet": type: object properties: pet: ref: #/defs/Pet defs: Pet: type: object properties: name: type: string The value of the "pet" property is a reference to the schema node named "Pet". See details in https://json-schema.org/understanding-json-schema/structuring
+          "required": [ # Optional. Required properties of Type.OBJECT.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema.
+          "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data.
+        },
+        "routingConfig": { # The configuration for routing the request to a specific model. # Optional. Routing configuration.
+          "autoMode": { # When automated routing is specified, the routing will be determined by the pretrained routing model and customer provided model routing preference. # Automated routing.
+            "modelRoutingPreference": "A String", # The model routing preference.
+          },
+          "manualMode": { # When manual routing is set, the specified model will be used directly. # Manual routing.
+            "modelName": "A String", # The model name to use. Only the public LLM models are accepted. See [Supported models](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/model-reference/inference#supported-models).
+          },
+        },
+        "seed": 42, # Optional. Seed.
+        "speechConfig": { # The speech generation config. # Optional. The speech generation config.
+          "languageCode": "A String", # Optional. Language code (ISO 639. e.g. en-US) for the speech synthesization.
+          "voiceConfig": { # The configuration for the voice to use. # The configuration for the speaker to use.
+            "prebuiltVoiceConfig": { # The configuration for the prebuilt speaker to use. # The configuration for the prebuilt voice to use.
+              "voiceName": "A String", # The name of the preset voice to use.
+            },
+          },
+        },
+        "stopSequences": [ # Optional. Stop sequences.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "temperature": 3.14, # Optional. Controls the randomness of predictions.
+        "thinkingConfig": { # Config for thinking features. # Optional. Config for thinking features. An error will be returned if this field is set for models that don't support thinking.
+          "includeThoughts": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether to include thoughts in the response. If true, thoughts are returned only when available.
+          "thinkingBudget": 42, # Optional. Indicates the thinking budget in tokens.
+        },
+        "topK": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, top-k sampling will be used.
+        "topP": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, nucleus sampling will be used.
+      },
+      "sampleCount": 42, # Optional. Number of samples for each instance in the dataset. If not specified, the default is 4. Minimum value is 1, maximum value is 32.
+    },
+    "metrics": [ # Required. The metrics to be calculated in the evaluation run.
+      { # The metric used for evaluation runs.
+        "computationBasedMetricSpec": { # Specification for a computation based metric. # Spec for a computation based metric.
+          "parameters": { # Optional. A map of parameters for the metric, e.g. {"rouge_type": "rougeL"}.
+            "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+          },
+          "type": "A String", # Required. The type of the computation based metric.
+        },
+        "llmBasedMetricSpec": { # Specification for an LLM based metric. # Spec for an LLM based metric.
+          "additionalConfig": { # Optional. Optional additional configuration for the metric.
+            "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+          },
+          "judgeAutoraterConfig": { # The autorater config used for the evaluation run. # Optional. Optional configuration for the judge LLM (Autorater).
+            "autoraterModel": "A String", # Optional. The fully qualified name of the publisher model or tuned autorater endpoint to use. Publisher model format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/publishers/*/models/*` Tuned model endpoint format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/endpoints/{endpoint}`
+            "generationConfig": { # Generation config. # Optional. Configuration options for model generation and outputs.
+              "audioTimestamp": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, audio timestamp will be included in the request to the model.
+              "candidateCount": 42, # Optional. Number of candidates to generate.
+              "enableAffectiveDialog": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, the model will detect emotions and adapt its responses accordingly.
+              "frequencyPenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Frequency penalties.
+              "logprobs": 42, # Optional. Logit probabilities.
+              "maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message.
+              "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used.
+              "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties.
+              "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set.
+              "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response.
+              "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature.
+              "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "responseSchema": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. The `Schema` object allows the definition of input and output data types. These types can be objects, but also primitives and arrays. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema). If set, a compatible response_mime_type must also be set. Compatible mimetypes: `application/json`: Schema for JSON response.
+                "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties.
+                "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list.
+                  # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                ],
+                "default": "", # Optional. Default value of the data.
+                "defs": { # Optional. A map of definitions for use by `ref` Only allowed at the root of the schema.
+                  "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                },
+                "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the data.
+                "enum": [ # Optional. Possible values of the element of primitive type with enum format. Examples: 1. We can define direction as : {type:STRING, format:enum, enum:["EAST", NORTH", "SOUTH", "WEST"]} 2. We can define apartment number as : {type:INTEGER, format:enum, enum:["101", "201", "301"]}
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "example": "", # Optional. Example of the object. Will only populated when the object is the root.
+                "format": "A String", # Optional. The format of the data. Supported formats: for NUMBER type: "float", "double" for INTEGER type: "int32", "int64" for STRING type: "email", "byte", etc
+                "items": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE ARRAY Schema of the elements of Type.ARRAY.
+                "maxItems": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                "maxLength": "A String", # Optional. Maximum length of the Type.STRING
+                "maxProperties": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                "maximum": 3.14, # Optional. Maximum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                "minItems": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                "minLength": "A String", # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE STRING Minimum length of the Type.STRING
+                "minProperties": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                "minimum": 3.14, # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE INTEGER and NUMBER Minimum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                "nullable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the value may be null.
+                "pattern": "A String", # Optional. Pattern of the Type.STRING to restrict a string to a regular expression.
+                "properties": { # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE OBJECT Properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                  "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                },
+                "propertyOrdering": [ # Optional. The order of the properties. Not a standard field in open api spec. Only used to support the order of the properties.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "ref": "A String", # Optional. Allows indirect references between schema nodes. The value should be a valid reference to a child of the root `defs`. For example, the following schema defines a reference to a schema node named "Pet": type: object properties: pet: ref: #/defs/Pet defs: Pet: type: object properties: name: type: string The value of the "pet" property is a reference to the schema node named "Pet". See details in https://json-schema.org/understanding-json-schema/structuring
+                "required": [ # Optional. Required properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema.
+                "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data.
+              },
+              "routingConfig": { # The configuration for routing the request to a specific model. # Optional. Routing configuration.
+                "autoMode": { # When automated routing is specified, the routing will be determined by the pretrained routing model and customer provided model routing preference. # Automated routing.
+                  "modelRoutingPreference": "A String", # The model routing preference.
+                },
+                "manualMode": { # When manual routing is set, the specified model will be used directly. # Manual routing.
+                  "modelName": "A String", # The model name to use. Only the public LLM models are accepted. See [Supported models](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/model-reference/inference#supported-models).
+                },
+              },
+              "seed": 42, # Optional. Seed.
+              "speechConfig": { # The speech generation config. # Optional. The speech generation config.
+                "languageCode": "A String", # Optional. Language code (ISO 639. e.g. en-US) for the speech synthesization.
+                "voiceConfig": { # The configuration for the voice to use. # The configuration for the speaker to use.
+                  "prebuiltVoiceConfig": { # The configuration for the prebuilt speaker to use. # The configuration for the prebuilt voice to use.
+                    "voiceName": "A String", # The name of the preset voice to use.
+                  },
+                },
+              },
+              "stopSequences": [ # Optional. Stop sequences.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "temperature": 3.14, # Optional. Controls the randomness of predictions.
+              "thinkingConfig": { # Config for thinking features. # Optional. Config for thinking features. An error will be returned if this field is set for models that don't support thinking.
+                "includeThoughts": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether to include thoughts in the response. If true, thoughts are returned only when available.
+                "thinkingBudget": 42, # Optional. Indicates the thinking budget in tokens.
+              },
+              "topK": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, top-k sampling will be used.
+              "topP": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, nucleus sampling will be used.
+            },
+            "sampleCount": 42, # Optional. Number of samples for each instance in the dataset. If not specified, the default is 4. Minimum value is 1, maximum value is 32.
+          },
+          "metricPromptTemplate": "A String", # Required. Template for the prompt sent to the judge model.
+          "predefinedRubricGenerationSpec": { # Specification for a pre-defined metric. # Dynamically generate rubrics using a predefined spec.
+            "metricSpecName": "A String", # Required. The name of a pre-defined metric, such as "instruction_following_v1" or "text_quality_v1".
+            "parameters": { # Optional. The parameters needed to run the pre-defined metric.
+              "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+            },
+          },
+          "rubricGenerationSpec": { # Specification for how rubrics should be generated. # Dynamically generate rubrics using this specification.
+            "modelConfig": { # The autorater config used for the evaluation run. # Optional. Configuration for the model used in rubric generation. Configs including sampling count and base model can be specified here. Flipping is not supported for rubric generation.
+              "autoraterModel": "A String", # Optional. The fully qualified name of the publisher model or tuned autorater endpoint to use. Publisher model format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/publishers/*/models/*` Tuned model endpoint format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/endpoints/{endpoint}`
+              "generationConfig": { # Generation config. # Optional. Configuration options for model generation and outputs.
+                "audioTimestamp": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, audio timestamp will be included in the request to the model.
+                "candidateCount": 42, # Optional. Number of candidates to generate.
+                "enableAffectiveDialog": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, the model will detect emotions and adapt its responses accordingly.
+                "frequencyPenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Frequency penalties.
+                "logprobs": 42, # Optional. Logit probabilities.
+                "maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message.
+                "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used.
+                "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties.
+                "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set.
+                "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response.
+                "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature.
+                "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "responseSchema": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. The `Schema` object allows the definition of input and output data types. These types can be objects, but also primitives and arrays. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema). If set, a compatible response_mime_type must also be set. Compatible mimetypes: `application/json`: Schema for JSON response.
+                  "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties.
+                  "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list.
+                    # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                  ],
+                  "default": "", # Optional. Default value of the data.
+                  "defs": { # Optional. A map of definitions for use by `ref` Only allowed at the root of the schema.
+                    "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                  },
+                  "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the data.
+                  "enum": [ # Optional. Possible values of the element of primitive type with enum format. Examples: 1. We can define direction as : {type:STRING, format:enum, enum:["EAST", NORTH", "SOUTH", "WEST"]} 2. We can define apartment number as : {type:INTEGER, format:enum, enum:["101", "201", "301"]}
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "example": "", # Optional. Example of the object. Will only populated when the object is the root.
+                  "format": "A String", # Optional. The format of the data. Supported formats: for NUMBER type: "float", "double" for INTEGER type: "int32", "int64" for STRING type: "email", "byte", etc
+                  "items": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE ARRAY Schema of the elements of Type.ARRAY.
+                  "maxItems": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                  "maxLength": "A String", # Optional. Maximum length of the Type.STRING
+                  "maxProperties": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                  "maximum": 3.14, # Optional. Maximum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                  "minItems": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                  "minLength": "A String", # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE STRING Minimum length of the Type.STRING
+                  "minProperties": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                  "minimum": 3.14, # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE INTEGER and NUMBER Minimum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                  "nullable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the value may be null.
+                  "pattern": "A String", # Optional. Pattern of the Type.STRING to restrict a string to a regular expression.
+                  "properties": { # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE OBJECT Properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                    "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                  },
+                  "propertyOrdering": [ # Optional. The order of the properties. Not a standard field in open api spec. Only used to support the order of the properties.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "ref": "A String", # Optional. Allows indirect references between schema nodes. The value should be a valid reference to a child of the root `defs`. For example, the following schema defines a reference to a schema node named "Pet": type: object properties: pet: ref: #/defs/Pet defs: Pet: type: object properties: name: type: string The value of the "pet" property is a reference to the schema node named "Pet". See details in https://json-schema.org/understanding-json-schema/structuring
+                  "required": [ # Optional. Required properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema.
+                  "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data.
+                },
+                "routingConfig": { # The configuration for routing the request to a specific model. # Optional. Routing configuration.
+                  "autoMode": { # When automated routing is specified, the routing will be determined by the pretrained routing model and customer provided model routing preference. # Automated routing.
+                    "modelRoutingPreference": "A String", # The model routing preference.
+                  },
+                  "manualMode": { # When manual routing is set, the specified model will be used directly. # Manual routing.
+                    "modelName": "A String", # The model name to use. Only the public LLM models are accepted. See [Supported models](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/model-reference/inference#supported-models).
+                  },
+                },
+                "seed": 42, # Optional. Seed.
+                "speechConfig": { # The speech generation config. # Optional. The speech generation config.
+                  "languageCode": "A String", # Optional. Language code (ISO 639. e.g. en-US) for the speech synthesization.
+                  "voiceConfig": { # The configuration for the voice to use. # The configuration for the speaker to use.
+                    "prebuiltVoiceConfig": { # The configuration for the prebuilt speaker to use. # The configuration for the prebuilt voice to use.
+                      "voiceName": "A String", # The name of the preset voice to use.
+                    },
+                  },
+                },
+                "stopSequences": [ # Optional. Stop sequences.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "temperature": 3.14, # Optional. Controls the randomness of predictions.
+                "thinkingConfig": { # Config for thinking features. # Optional. Config for thinking features. An error will be returned if this field is set for models that don't support thinking.
+                  "includeThoughts": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether to include thoughts in the response. If true, thoughts are returned only when available.
+                  "thinkingBudget": 42, # Optional. Indicates the thinking budget in tokens.
+                },
+                "topK": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, top-k sampling will be used.
+                "topP": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, nucleus sampling will be used.
+              },
+              "sampleCount": 42, # Optional. Number of samples for each instance in the dataset. If not specified, the default is 4. Minimum value is 1, maximum value is 32.
+            },
+            "promptTemplate": "A String", # Optional. Template for the prompt used to generate rubrics. The details should be updated based on the most-recent recipe requirements.
+            "rubricContentType": "A String", # Optional. The type of rubric content to be generated.
+            "rubricTypeOntology": [ # Optional. An optional, pre-defined list of allowed types for generated rubrics. If this field is provided, it implies `include_rubric_type` should be true, and the generated rubric types should be chosen from this ontology.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+          },
+          "rubricGroupKey": "A String", # Use a pre-defined group of rubrics associated with the input. Refers to a key in the rubric_groups map of EvaluationInstance.
+          "systemInstruction": "A String", # Optional. System instructions for the judge model.
+        },
+        "metric": "A String", # Required. The name of the metric.
+        "predefinedMetricSpec": { # Specification for a pre-defined metric. # Spec for a pre-defined metric.
+          "metricSpecName": "A String", # Required. The name of a pre-defined metric, such as "instruction_following_v1" or "text_quality_v1".
+          "parameters": { # Optional. The parameters needed to run the pre-defined metric.
+            "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+          },
+        },
+        "rubricBasedMetricSpec": { # Specification for a metric that is based on rubrics. # Spec for rubric based metric.
+          "inlineRubrics": { # Defines a list of rubrics, used when providing rubrics inline. # Use rubrics provided directly in the spec.
+            "rubrics": [ # The list of rubrics.
+              { # Message representing a single testable criterion for evaluation. One input prompt could have multiple rubrics.
+                "content": { # Content of the rubric, defining the testable criteria. # Required. The actual testable criteria for the rubric.
+                  "property": { # Defines criteria based on a specific property. # Evaluation criteria based on a specific property.
+                    "description": "A String", # Description of the property being evaluated. Example: "The model's response is grammatically correct."
+                  },
+                },
+                "importance": "A String", # Optional. The relative importance of this rubric.
+                "rubricId": "A String", # Unique identifier for the rubric. This ID is used to refer to this rubric, e.g., in RubricVerdict.
+                "type": "A String", # Optional. A type designator for the rubric, which can inform how it's evaluated or interpreted by systems or users. It's recommended to use consistent, well-defined, upper snake_case strings. Examples: "SUMMARIZATION_QUALITY", "SAFETY_HARMFUL_CONTENT", "INSTRUCTION_ADHERENCE".
+              },
+            ],
+          },
+          "judgeAutoraterConfig": { # The autorater config used for the evaluation run. # Optional. Optional configuration for the judge LLM (Autorater). The definition of AutoraterConfig needs to be provided.
+            "autoraterModel": "A String", # Optional. The fully qualified name of the publisher model or tuned autorater endpoint to use. Publisher model format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/publishers/*/models/*` Tuned model endpoint format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/endpoints/{endpoint}`
+            "generationConfig": { # Generation config. # Optional. Configuration options for model generation and outputs.
+              "audioTimestamp": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, audio timestamp will be included in the request to the model.
+              "candidateCount": 42, # Optional. Number of candidates to generate.
+              "enableAffectiveDialog": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, the model will detect emotions and adapt its responses accordingly.
+              "frequencyPenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Frequency penalties.
+              "logprobs": 42, # Optional. Logit probabilities.
+              "maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message.
+              "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used.
+              "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties.
+              "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set.
+              "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response.
+              "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature.
+              "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "responseSchema": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. The `Schema` object allows the definition of input and output data types. These types can be objects, but also primitives and arrays. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema). If set, a compatible response_mime_type must also be set. Compatible mimetypes: `application/json`: Schema for JSON response.
+                "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties.
+                "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list.
+                  # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                ],
+                "default": "", # Optional. Default value of the data.
+                "defs": { # Optional. A map of definitions for use by `ref` Only allowed at the root of the schema.
+                  "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                },
+                "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the data.
+                "enum": [ # Optional. Possible values of the element of primitive type with enum format. Examples: 1. We can define direction as : {type:STRING, format:enum, enum:["EAST", NORTH", "SOUTH", "WEST"]} 2. We can define apartment number as : {type:INTEGER, format:enum, enum:["101", "201", "301"]}
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "example": "", # Optional. Example of the object. Will only populated when the object is the root.
+                "format": "A String", # Optional. The format of the data. Supported formats: for NUMBER type: "float", "double" for INTEGER type: "int32", "int64" for STRING type: "email", "byte", etc
+                "items": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE ARRAY Schema of the elements of Type.ARRAY.
+                "maxItems": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                "maxLength": "A String", # Optional. Maximum length of the Type.STRING
+                "maxProperties": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                "maximum": 3.14, # Optional. Maximum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                "minItems": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                "minLength": "A String", # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE STRING Minimum length of the Type.STRING
+                "minProperties": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                "minimum": 3.14, # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE INTEGER and NUMBER Minimum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                "nullable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the value may be null.
+                "pattern": "A String", # Optional. Pattern of the Type.STRING to restrict a string to a regular expression.
+                "properties": { # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE OBJECT Properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                  "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                },
+                "propertyOrdering": [ # Optional. The order of the properties. Not a standard field in open api spec. Only used to support the order of the properties.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "ref": "A String", # Optional. Allows indirect references between schema nodes. The value should be a valid reference to a child of the root `defs`. For example, the following schema defines a reference to a schema node named "Pet": type: object properties: pet: ref: #/defs/Pet defs: Pet: type: object properties: name: type: string The value of the "pet" property is a reference to the schema node named "Pet". See details in https://json-schema.org/understanding-json-schema/structuring
+                "required": [ # Optional. Required properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema.
+                "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data.
+              },
+              "routingConfig": { # The configuration for routing the request to a specific model. # Optional. Routing configuration.
+                "autoMode": { # When automated routing is specified, the routing will be determined by the pretrained routing model and customer provided model routing preference. # Automated routing.
+                  "modelRoutingPreference": "A String", # The model routing preference.
+                },
+                "manualMode": { # When manual routing is set, the specified model will be used directly. # Manual routing.
+                  "modelName": "A String", # The model name to use. Only the public LLM models are accepted. See [Supported models](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/model-reference/inference#supported-models).
+                },
+              },
+              "seed": 42, # Optional. Seed.
+              "speechConfig": { # The speech generation config. # Optional. The speech generation config.
+                "languageCode": "A String", # Optional. Language code (ISO 639. e.g. en-US) for the speech synthesization.
+                "voiceConfig": { # The configuration for the voice to use. # The configuration for the speaker to use.
+                  "prebuiltVoiceConfig": { # The configuration for the prebuilt speaker to use. # The configuration for the prebuilt voice to use.
+                    "voiceName": "A String", # The name of the preset voice to use.
+                  },
+                },
+              },
+              "stopSequences": [ # Optional. Stop sequences.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "temperature": 3.14, # Optional. Controls the randomness of predictions.
+              "thinkingConfig": { # Config for thinking features. # Optional. Config for thinking features. An error will be returned if this field is set for models that don't support thinking.
+                "includeThoughts": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether to include thoughts in the response. If true, thoughts are returned only when available.
+                "thinkingBudget": 42, # Optional. Indicates the thinking budget in tokens.
+              },
+              "topK": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, top-k sampling will be used.
+              "topP": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, nucleus sampling will be used.
+            },
+            "sampleCount": 42, # Optional. Number of samples for each instance in the dataset. If not specified, the default is 4. Minimum value is 1, maximum value is 32.
+          },
+          "metricPromptTemplate": "A String", # Optional. Template for the prompt used by the judge model to evaluate against rubrics.
+          "rubricGenerationSpec": { # Specification for how rubrics should be generated. # Dynamically generate rubrics for evaluation using this specification.
+            "modelConfig": { # The autorater config used for the evaluation run. # Optional. Configuration for the model used in rubric generation. Configs including sampling count and base model can be specified here. Flipping is not supported for rubric generation.
+              "autoraterModel": "A String", # Optional. The fully qualified name of the publisher model or tuned autorater endpoint to use. Publisher model format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/publishers/*/models/*` Tuned model endpoint format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/endpoints/{endpoint}`
+              "generationConfig": { # Generation config. # Optional. Configuration options for model generation and outputs.
+                "audioTimestamp": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, audio timestamp will be included in the request to the model.
+                "candidateCount": 42, # Optional. Number of candidates to generate.
+                "enableAffectiveDialog": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, the model will detect emotions and adapt its responses accordingly.
+                "frequencyPenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Frequency penalties.
+                "logprobs": 42, # Optional. Logit probabilities.
+                "maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message.
+                "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used.
+                "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties.
+                "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set.
+                "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response.
+                "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature.
+                "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "responseSchema": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. The `Schema` object allows the definition of input and output data types. These types can be objects, but also primitives and arrays. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema). If set, a compatible response_mime_type must also be set. Compatible mimetypes: `application/json`: Schema for JSON response.
+                  "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties.
+                  "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list.
+                    # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                  ],
+                  "default": "", # Optional. Default value of the data.
+                  "defs": { # Optional. A map of definitions for use by `ref` Only allowed at the root of the schema.
+                    "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                  },
+                  "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the data.
+                  "enum": [ # Optional. Possible values of the element of primitive type with enum format. Examples: 1. We can define direction as : {type:STRING, format:enum, enum:["EAST", NORTH", "SOUTH", "WEST"]} 2. We can define apartment number as : {type:INTEGER, format:enum, enum:["101", "201", "301"]}
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "example": "", # Optional. Example of the object. Will only populated when the object is the root.
+                  "format": "A String", # Optional. The format of the data. Supported formats: for NUMBER type: "float", "double" for INTEGER type: "int32", "int64" for STRING type: "email", "byte", etc
+                  "items": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE ARRAY Schema of the elements of Type.ARRAY.
+                  "maxItems": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                  "maxLength": "A String", # Optional. Maximum length of the Type.STRING
+                  "maxProperties": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                  "maximum": 3.14, # Optional. Maximum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                  "minItems": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                  "minLength": "A String", # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE STRING Minimum length of the Type.STRING
+                  "minProperties": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                  "minimum": 3.14, # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE INTEGER and NUMBER Minimum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                  "nullable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the value may be null.
+                  "pattern": "A String", # Optional. Pattern of the Type.STRING to restrict a string to a regular expression.
+                  "properties": { # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE OBJECT Properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                    "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                  },
+                  "propertyOrdering": [ # Optional. The order of the properties. Not a standard field in open api spec. Only used to support the order of the properties.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "ref": "A String", # Optional. Allows indirect references between schema nodes. The value should be a valid reference to a child of the root `defs`. For example, the following schema defines a reference to a schema node named "Pet": type: object properties: pet: ref: #/defs/Pet defs: Pet: type: object properties: name: type: string The value of the "pet" property is a reference to the schema node named "Pet". See details in https://json-schema.org/understanding-json-schema/structuring
+                  "required": [ # Optional. Required properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema.
+                  "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data.
+                },
+                "routingConfig": { # The configuration for routing the request to a specific model. # Optional. Routing configuration.
+                  "autoMode": { # When automated routing is specified, the routing will be determined by the pretrained routing model and customer provided model routing preference. # Automated routing.
+                    "modelRoutingPreference": "A String", # The model routing preference.
+                  },
+                  "manualMode": { # When manual routing is set, the specified model will be used directly. # Manual routing.
+                    "modelName": "A String", # The model name to use. Only the public LLM models are accepted. See [Supported models](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/model-reference/inference#supported-models).
+                  },
+                },
+                "seed": 42, # Optional. Seed.
+                "speechConfig": { # The speech generation config. # Optional. The speech generation config.
+                  "languageCode": "A String", # Optional. Language code (ISO 639. e.g. en-US) for the speech synthesization.
+                  "voiceConfig": { # The configuration for the voice to use. # The configuration for the speaker to use.
+                    "prebuiltVoiceConfig": { # The configuration for the prebuilt speaker to use. # The configuration for the prebuilt voice to use.
+                      "voiceName": "A String", # The name of the preset voice to use.
+                    },
+                  },
+                },
+                "stopSequences": [ # Optional. Stop sequences.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "temperature": 3.14, # Optional. Controls the randomness of predictions.
+                "thinkingConfig": { # Config for thinking features. # Optional. Config for thinking features. An error will be returned if this field is set for models that don't support thinking.
+                  "includeThoughts": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether to include thoughts in the response. If true, thoughts are returned only when available.
+                  "thinkingBudget": 42, # Optional. Indicates the thinking budget in tokens.
+                },
+                "topK": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, top-k sampling will be used.
+                "topP": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, nucleus sampling will be used.
+              },
+              "sampleCount": 42, # Optional. Number of samples for each instance in the dataset. If not specified, the default is 4. Minimum value is 1, maximum value is 32.
+            },
+            "promptTemplate": "A String", # Optional. Template for the prompt used to generate rubrics. The details should be updated based on the most-recent recipe requirements.
+            "rubricContentType": "A String", # Optional. The type of rubric content to be generated.
+            "rubricTypeOntology": [ # Optional. An optional, pre-defined list of allowed types for generated rubrics. If this field is provided, it implies `include_rubric_type` should be true, and the generated rubric types should be chosen from this ontology.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+          },
+          "rubricGroupKey": "A String", # Use a pre-defined group of rubrics associated with the input content. This refers to a key in the `rubric_groups` map of `RubricEnhancedContents`.
+        },
+      },
+    ],
+    "outputConfig": { # The output config for the evaluation run. # Optional. The output config for the evaluation run.
+      "bigqueryDestination": { # The BigQuery location for the output content. # BigQuery destination for evaluation output.
+        "outputUri": "A String", # Required. BigQuery URI to a project or table, up to 2000 characters long. When only the project is specified, the Dataset and Table is created. When the full table reference is specified, the Dataset must exist and table must not exist. Accepted forms: * BigQuery path. For example: `bq://projectId` or `bq://projectId.bqDatasetId` or `bq://projectId.bqDatasetId.bqTableId`.
+      },
+      "gcsDestination": { # The Google Cloud Storage location where the output is to be written to. # Cloud Storage destination for evaluation output.
+        "outputUriPrefix": "A String", # Required. Google Cloud Storage URI to output directory. If the uri doesn't end with '/', a '/' will be automatically appended. The directory is created if it doesn't exist.
+      },
+    },
+    "promptTemplate": { # Prompt template used for inference. # The prompt template used for inference. The values for variables in the prompt template are defined in EvaluationItem.EvaluationPrompt.PromptTemplateData.values.
+      "gcsUri": "A String", # Prompt template stored in Cloud Storage. Format: "gs://my-bucket/file-name.txt".
+      "promptTemplate": "A String", # Inline prompt template. Template variables should be in the format "{var_name}". Example: "Translate the following from {source_lang} to {target_lang}: {text}"
+    },
+    "rubricConfigs": [ # Optional. The rubric configs for the evaluation run. They are used to generate rubrics which can be used by rubric-based metrics. Multiple rubric configs can be specified for rubric generation but only one rubric config can be used for a rubric-based metric. If more than one rubric config is provided, the evaluation metric must specify a rubric group key. Note that if a generation spec is specified on both a rubric config and an evaluation metric, the rubrics generated for the metric will be used for evaluation.
+      { # Configuration for a rubric group to be generated/saved for evaluation.
+        "predefinedRubricGenerationSpec": { # Specification for a pre-defined metric. # Dynamically generate rubrics using a predefined spec.
+          "metricSpecName": "A String", # Required. The name of a pre-defined metric, such as "instruction_following_v1" or "text_quality_v1".
+          "parameters": { # Optional. The parameters needed to run the pre-defined metric.
+            "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+          },
+        },
+        "rubricGenerationSpec": { # Specification for how rubrics should be generated. # Dynamically generate rubrics using this specification.
+          "modelConfig": { # The autorater config used for the evaluation run. # Optional. Configuration for the model used in rubric generation. Configs including sampling count and base model can be specified here. Flipping is not supported for rubric generation.
+            "autoraterModel": "A String", # Optional. The fully qualified name of the publisher model or tuned autorater endpoint to use. Publisher model format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/publishers/*/models/*` Tuned model endpoint format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/endpoints/{endpoint}`
+            "generationConfig": { # Generation config. # Optional. Configuration options for model generation and outputs.
+              "audioTimestamp": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, audio timestamp will be included in the request to the model.
+              "candidateCount": 42, # Optional. Number of candidates to generate.
+              "enableAffectiveDialog": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, the model will detect emotions and adapt its responses accordingly.
+              "frequencyPenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Frequency penalties.
+              "logprobs": 42, # Optional. Logit probabilities.
+              "maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message.
+              "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used.
+              "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties.
+              "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set.
+              "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response.
+              "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature.
+              "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "responseSchema": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. The `Schema` object allows the definition of input and output data types. These types can be objects, but also primitives and arrays. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema). If set, a compatible response_mime_type must also be set. Compatible mimetypes: `application/json`: Schema for JSON response.
+                "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties.
+                "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list.
+                  # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                ],
+                "default": "", # Optional. Default value of the data.
+                "defs": { # Optional. A map of definitions for use by `ref` Only allowed at the root of the schema.
+                  "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                },
+                "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the data.
+                "enum": [ # Optional. Possible values of the element of primitive type with enum format. Examples: 1. We can define direction as : {type:STRING, format:enum, enum:["EAST", NORTH", "SOUTH", "WEST"]} 2. We can define apartment number as : {type:INTEGER, format:enum, enum:["101", "201", "301"]}
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "example": "", # Optional. Example of the object. Will only populated when the object is the root.
+                "format": "A String", # Optional. The format of the data. Supported formats: for NUMBER type: "float", "double" for INTEGER type: "int32", "int64" for STRING type: "email", "byte", etc
+                "items": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE ARRAY Schema of the elements of Type.ARRAY.
+                "maxItems": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                "maxLength": "A String", # Optional. Maximum length of the Type.STRING
+                "maxProperties": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                "maximum": 3.14, # Optional. Maximum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                "minItems": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                "minLength": "A String", # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE STRING Minimum length of the Type.STRING
+                "minProperties": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                "minimum": 3.14, # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE INTEGER and NUMBER Minimum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                "nullable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the value may be null.
+                "pattern": "A String", # Optional. Pattern of the Type.STRING to restrict a string to a regular expression.
+                "properties": { # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE OBJECT Properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                  "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                },
+                "propertyOrdering": [ # Optional. The order of the properties. Not a standard field in open api spec. Only used to support the order of the properties.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "ref": "A String", # Optional. Allows indirect references between schema nodes. The value should be a valid reference to a child of the root `defs`. For example, the following schema defines a reference to a schema node named "Pet": type: object properties: pet: ref: #/defs/Pet defs: Pet: type: object properties: name: type: string The value of the "pet" property is a reference to the schema node named "Pet". See details in https://json-schema.org/understanding-json-schema/structuring
+                "required": [ # Optional. Required properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema.
+                "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data.
+              },
+              "routingConfig": { # The configuration for routing the request to a specific model. # Optional. Routing configuration.
+                "autoMode": { # When automated routing is specified, the routing will be determined by the pretrained routing model and customer provided model routing preference. # Automated routing.
+                  "modelRoutingPreference": "A String", # The model routing preference.
+                },
+                "manualMode": { # When manual routing is set, the specified model will be used directly. # Manual routing.
+                  "modelName": "A String", # The model name to use. Only the public LLM models are accepted. See [Supported models](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/model-reference/inference#supported-models).
+                },
+              },
+              "seed": 42, # Optional. Seed.
+              "speechConfig": { # The speech generation config. # Optional. The speech generation config.
+                "languageCode": "A String", # Optional. Language code (ISO 639. e.g. en-US) for the speech synthesization.
+                "voiceConfig": { # The configuration for the voice to use. # The configuration for the speaker to use.
+                  "prebuiltVoiceConfig": { # The configuration for the prebuilt speaker to use. # The configuration for the prebuilt voice to use.
+                    "voiceName": "A String", # The name of the preset voice to use.
+                  },
+                },
+              },
+              "stopSequences": [ # Optional. Stop sequences.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "temperature": 3.14, # Optional. Controls the randomness of predictions.
+              "thinkingConfig": { # Config for thinking features. # Optional. Config for thinking features. An error will be returned if this field is set for models that don't support thinking.
+                "includeThoughts": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether to include thoughts in the response. If true, thoughts are returned only when available.
+                "thinkingBudget": 42, # Optional. Indicates the thinking budget in tokens.
+              },
+              "topK": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, top-k sampling will be used.
+              "topP": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, nucleus sampling will be used.
+            },
+            "sampleCount": 42, # Optional. Number of samples for each instance in the dataset. If not specified, the default is 4. Minimum value is 1, maximum value is 32.
+          },
+          "promptTemplate": "A String", # Optional. Template for the prompt used to generate rubrics. The details should be updated based on the most-recent recipe requirements.
+          "rubricContentType": "A String", # Optional. The type of rubric content to be generated.
+          "rubricTypeOntology": [ # Optional. An optional, pre-defined list of allowed types for generated rubrics. If this field is provided, it implies `include_rubric_type` should be true, and the generated rubric types should be chosen from this ontology.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+        },
+        "rubricGroupKey": "A String", # Required. The key used to save the generated rubrics. If a generation spec is provided, this key will be used for the name of the generated rubric group. Otherwise, this key will be used to look up the existing rubric group on the evaluation item. Note that if a rubric group key is specified on both a rubric config and an evaluation metric, the key from the metric will be used to select the rubrics for evaluation.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "evaluationResults": { # The results of the evaluation run. # Output only. The results of the evaluation run. Only populated when the evaluation run's state is SUCCEEDED.
+    "evaluationSet": "A String", # The evaluation set where item level results are stored.
+    "summaryMetrics": { # The summary metrics for the evaluation run. # Optional. The summary metrics for the evaluation run.
+      "failedItems": 42, # Optional. The number of items that failed to be evaluated.
+      "metrics": { # Optional. Map of metric name to metric value.
+        "a_key": "",
+      },
+      "totalItems": 42, # Optional. The total number of items that were evaluated.
+    },
+  },
+  "evaluationSetSnapshot": "A String", # Output only. The specific evaluation set of the evaluation run. For runs with an evaluation set input, this will be that same set. For runs with BigQuery input, it's the sampled BigQuery dataset.
+  "inferenceConfigs": { # Optional. The candidate to inference config map for the evaluation run. The candidate can be up to 128 characters long and can consist of any UTF-8 characters.
+    "a_key": { # An inference config used for model inference during the evaluation run.
+      "generationConfig": { # Generation config. # Optional. Generation config.
+        "audioTimestamp": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, audio timestamp will be included in the request to the model.
+        "candidateCount": 42, # Optional. Number of candidates to generate.
+        "enableAffectiveDialog": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, the model will detect emotions and adapt its responses accordingly.
+        "frequencyPenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Frequency penalties.
+        "logprobs": 42, # Optional. Logit probabilities.
+        "maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message.
+        "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used.
+        "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties.
+        "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set.
+        "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response.
+        "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature.
+        "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "responseSchema": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. The `Schema` object allows the definition of input and output data types. These types can be objects, but also primitives and arrays. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema). If set, a compatible response_mime_type must also be set. Compatible mimetypes: `application/json`: Schema for JSON response.
+          "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties.
+          "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list.
+            # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+          ],
+          "default": "", # Optional. Default value of the data.
+          "defs": { # Optional. A map of definitions for use by `ref` Only allowed at the root of the schema.
+            "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+          },
+          "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the data.
+          "enum": [ # Optional. Possible values of the element of primitive type with enum format. Examples: 1. We can define direction as : {type:STRING, format:enum, enum:["EAST", NORTH", "SOUTH", "WEST"]} 2. We can define apartment number as : {type:INTEGER, format:enum, enum:["101", "201", "301"]}
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "example": "", # Optional. Example of the object. Will only populated when the object is the root.
+          "format": "A String", # Optional. The format of the data. Supported formats: for NUMBER type: "float", "double" for INTEGER type: "int32", "int64" for STRING type: "email", "byte", etc
+          "items": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE ARRAY Schema of the elements of Type.ARRAY.
+          "maxItems": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+          "maxLength": "A String", # Optional. Maximum length of the Type.STRING
+          "maxProperties": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+          "maximum": 3.14, # Optional. Maximum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+          "minItems": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+          "minLength": "A String", # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE STRING Minimum length of the Type.STRING
+          "minProperties": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+          "minimum": 3.14, # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE INTEGER and NUMBER Minimum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+          "nullable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the value may be null.
+          "pattern": "A String", # Optional. Pattern of the Type.STRING to restrict a string to a regular expression.
+          "properties": { # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE OBJECT Properties of Type.OBJECT.
+            "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+          },
+          "propertyOrdering": [ # Optional. The order of the properties. Not a standard field in open api spec. Only used to support the order of the properties.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "ref": "A String", # Optional. Allows indirect references between schema nodes. The value should be a valid reference to a child of the root `defs`. For example, the following schema defines a reference to a schema node named "Pet": type: object properties: pet: ref: #/defs/Pet defs: Pet: type: object properties: name: type: string The value of the "pet" property is a reference to the schema node named "Pet". See details in https://json-schema.org/understanding-json-schema/structuring
+          "required": [ # Optional. Required properties of Type.OBJECT.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema.
+          "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data.
+        },
+        "routingConfig": { # The configuration for routing the request to a specific model. # Optional. Routing configuration.
+          "autoMode": { # When automated routing is specified, the routing will be determined by the pretrained routing model and customer provided model routing preference. # Automated routing.
+            "modelRoutingPreference": "A String", # The model routing preference.
+          },
+          "manualMode": { # When manual routing is set, the specified model will be used directly. # Manual routing.
+            "modelName": "A String", # The model name to use. Only the public LLM models are accepted. See [Supported models](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/model-reference/inference#supported-models).
+          },
+        },
+        "seed": 42, # Optional. Seed.
+        "speechConfig": { # The speech generation config. # Optional. The speech generation config.
+          "languageCode": "A String", # Optional. Language code (ISO 639. e.g. en-US) for the speech synthesization.
+          "voiceConfig": { # The configuration for the voice to use. # The configuration for the speaker to use.
+            "prebuiltVoiceConfig": { # The configuration for the prebuilt speaker to use. # The configuration for the prebuilt voice to use.
+              "voiceName": "A String", # The name of the preset voice to use.
+            },
+          },
+        },
+        "stopSequences": [ # Optional. Stop sequences.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "temperature": 3.14, # Optional. Controls the randomness of predictions.
+        "thinkingConfig": { # Config for thinking features. # Optional. Config for thinking features. An error will be returned if this field is set for models that don't support thinking.
+          "includeThoughts": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether to include thoughts in the response. If true, thoughts are returned only when available.
+          "thinkingBudget": 42, # Optional. Indicates the thinking budget in tokens.
+        },
+        "topK": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, top-k sampling will be used.
+        "topP": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, nucleus sampling will be used.
+      },
+      "model": "A String", # Required. The fully qualified name of the publisher model or endpoint to use. Publisher model format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/publishers/*/models/*` Endpoint format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/endpoints/{endpoint}`
+    },
+  },
+  "labels": { # Optional. Labels for the evaluation run.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "metadata": "", # Optional. Metadata about the evaluation run, can be used by the caller to store additional tracking information about the evaluation run.
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the EvaluationRun. This is a unique identifier. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationRuns/{evaluation_run}`
+  "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the evaluation run.
+}
+
+ +
+ list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Lists Evaluation Runs.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The resource name of the Location from which to list the Evaluation Runs. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}` (required)
+  filter: string, Optional. Filter expression that matches a subset of the EvaluationRuns to show. For field names both snake_case and camelCase are supported. For more information about filter syntax, see [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160).
+  orderBy: string, Optional. A comma-separated list of fields to order by, sorted in ascending order by default. Use `desc` after a field name for descending.
+  pageSize: integer, Optional. The maximum number of Evaluation Runs to return.
+  pageToken: string, Optional. A page token, received from a previous `ListEvaluationRuns` call. Provide this to retrieve the subsequent page.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Response message for EvaluationManagementService.ListEvaluationRuns.
+  "evaluationRuns": [ # List of EvaluationRuns in the requested page.
+    { # EvaluationRun is a resource that represents a single evaluation run, which includes a set of prompts, model responses, evaluation configuration and the resulting metrics.
+      "completionTime": "A String", # Output only. Time when the evaluation run was completed.
+      "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Time when the evaluation run was created.
+      "dataSource": { # The data source for the evaluation run. # Required. The data source for the evaluation run.
+        "bigqueryRequestSet": { # The request set for the evaluation run. # Evaluation data in bigquery.
+          "candidateResponseColumns": { # Optional. Map of candidate name to candidate response column name. The column will be in evaluation_item.CandidateResponse format.
+            "a_key": "A String",
+          },
+          "promptColumn": "A String", # Optional. The name of the column that contains the requests to evaluate. This will be in evaluation_item.EvalPrompt format.
+          "rubricsColumn": "A String", # Optional. The name of the column that contains the rubrics. This will be in evaluation_rubric.RubricGroup format (cl/762595858).
+          "samplingConfig": { # The sampling config. # Optional. The sampling config for the bigquery resource.
+            "samplingCount": 42, # Optional. The total number of logged data to import. If available data is less than the sampling count, all data will be imported. Default is 100.
+            "samplingDuration": "A String", # Optional. How long to wait before sampling data from the BigQuery table. If not specified, defaults to 0.
+            "samplingMethod": "A String", # Optional. The sampling method to use.
+          },
+          "uri": "A String", # Required. The URI of a BigQuery table. e.g. bq://projectId.bqDatasetId.bqTableId
+        },
+        "evaluationSet": "A String", # The EvaluationSet resource name. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationSets/{evaluation_set}`
+      },
+      "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display name of the Evaluation Run.
+      "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # Output only. Only populated when the evaluation run's state is FAILED or CANCELLED.
+        "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+        "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+          {
+            "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+          },
+        ],
+        "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+      },
+      "evaluationConfig": { # The Evalution configuration used for the evaluation run. # Required. The configuration used for the evaluation.
+        "autoraterConfig": { # The autorater config used for the evaluation run. # Optional. The autorater config for the evaluation run.
+          "autoraterModel": "A String", # Optional. The fully qualified name of the publisher model or tuned autorater endpoint to use. Publisher model format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/publishers/*/models/*` Tuned model endpoint format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/endpoints/{endpoint}`
+          "generationConfig": { # Generation config. # Optional. Configuration options for model generation and outputs.
+            "audioTimestamp": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, audio timestamp will be included in the request to the model.
+            "candidateCount": 42, # Optional. Number of candidates to generate.
+            "enableAffectiveDialog": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, the model will detect emotions and adapt its responses accordingly.
+            "frequencyPenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Frequency penalties.
+            "logprobs": 42, # Optional. Logit probabilities.
+            "maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message.
+            "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used.
+            "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties.
+            "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set.
+            "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response.
+            "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature.
+            "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "responseSchema": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. The `Schema` object allows the definition of input and output data types. These types can be objects, but also primitives and arrays. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema). If set, a compatible response_mime_type must also be set. Compatible mimetypes: `application/json`: Schema for JSON response.
+              "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties.
+              "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list.
+                # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+              ],
+              "default": "", # Optional. Default value of the data.
+              "defs": { # Optional. A map of definitions for use by `ref` Only allowed at the root of the schema.
+                "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+              },
+              "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the data.
+              "enum": [ # Optional. Possible values of the element of primitive type with enum format. Examples: 1. We can define direction as : {type:STRING, format:enum, enum:["EAST", NORTH", "SOUTH", "WEST"]} 2. We can define apartment number as : {type:INTEGER, format:enum, enum:["101", "201", "301"]}
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "example": "", # Optional. Example of the object. Will only populated when the object is the root.
+              "format": "A String", # Optional. The format of the data. Supported formats: for NUMBER type: "float", "double" for INTEGER type: "int32", "int64" for STRING type: "email", "byte", etc
+              "items": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE ARRAY Schema of the elements of Type.ARRAY.
+              "maxItems": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+              "maxLength": "A String", # Optional. Maximum length of the Type.STRING
+              "maxProperties": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+              "maximum": 3.14, # Optional. Maximum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+              "minItems": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+              "minLength": "A String", # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE STRING Minimum length of the Type.STRING
+              "minProperties": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+              "minimum": 3.14, # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE INTEGER and NUMBER Minimum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+              "nullable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the value may be null.
+              "pattern": "A String", # Optional. Pattern of the Type.STRING to restrict a string to a regular expression.
+              "properties": { # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE OBJECT Properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+              },
+              "propertyOrdering": [ # Optional. The order of the properties. Not a standard field in open api spec. Only used to support the order of the properties.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "ref": "A String", # Optional. Allows indirect references between schema nodes. The value should be a valid reference to a child of the root `defs`. For example, the following schema defines a reference to a schema node named "Pet": type: object properties: pet: ref: #/defs/Pet defs: Pet: type: object properties: name: type: string The value of the "pet" property is a reference to the schema node named "Pet". See details in https://json-schema.org/understanding-json-schema/structuring
+              "required": [ # Optional. Required properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema.
+              "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data.
+            },
+            "routingConfig": { # The configuration for routing the request to a specific model. # Optional. Routing configuration.
+              "autoMode": { # When automated routing is specified, the routing will be determined by the pretrained routing model and customer provided model routing preference. # Automated routing.
+                "modelRoutingPreference": "A String", # The model routing preference.
+              },
+              "manualMode": { # When manual routing is set, the specified model will be used directly. # Manual routing.
+                "modelName": "A String", # The model name to use. Only the public LLM models are accepted. See [Supported models](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/model-reference/inference#supported-models).
+              },
+            },
+            "seed": 42, # Optional. Seed.
+            "speechConfig": { # The speech generation config. # Optional. The speech generation config.
+              "languageCode": "A String", # Optional. Language code (ISO 639. e.g. en-US) for the speech synthesization.
+              "voiceConfig": { # The configuration for the voice to use. # The configuration for the speaker to use.
+                "prebuiltVoiceConfig": { # The configuration for the prebuilt speaker to use. # The configuration for the prebuilt voice to use.
+                  "voiceName": "A String", # The name of the preset voice to use.
+                },
+              },
+            },
+            "stopSequences": [ # Optional. Stop sequences.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "temperature": 3.14, # Optional. Controls the randomness of predictions.
+            "thinkingConfig": { # Config for thinking features. # Optional. Config for thinking features. An error will be returned if this field is set for models that don't support thinking.
+              "includeThoughts": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether to include thoughts in the response. If true, thoughts are returned only when available.
+              "thinkingBudget": 42, # Optional. Indicates the thinking budget in tokens.
+            },
+            "topK": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, top-k sampling will be used.
+            "topP": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, nucleus sampling will be used.
+          },
+          "sampleCount": 42, # Optional. Number of samples for each instance in the dataset. If not specified, the default is 4. Minimum value is 1, maximum value is 32.
+        },
+        "metrics": [ # Required. The metrics to be calculated in the evaluation run.
+          { # The metric used for evaluation runs.
+            "computationBasedMetricSpec": { # Specification for a computation based metric. # Spec for a computation based metric.
+              "parameters": { # Optional. A map of parameters for the metric, e.g. {"rouge_type": "rougeL"}.
+                "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+              },
+              "type": "A String", # Required. The type of the computation based metric.
+            },
+            "llmBasedMetricSpec": { # Specification for an LLM based metric. # Spec for an LLM based metric.
+              "additionalConfig": { # Optional. Optional additional configuration for the metric.
+                "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+              },
+              "judgeAutoraterConfig": { # The autorater config used for the evaluation run. # Optional. Optional configuration for the judge LLM (Autorater).
+                "autoraterModel": "A String", # Optional. The fully qualified name of the publisher model or tuned autorater endpoint to use. Publisher model format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/publishers/*/models/*` Tuned model endpoint format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/endpoints/{endpoint}`
+                "generationConfig": { # Generation config. # Optional. Configuration options for model generation and outputs.
+                  "audioTimestamp": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, audio timestamp will be included in the request to the model.
+                  "candidateCount": 42, # Optional. Number of candidates to generate.
+                  "enableAffectiveDialog": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, the model will detect emotions and adapt its responses accordingly.
+                  "frequencyPenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Frequency penalties.
+                  "logprobs": 42, # Optional. Logit probabilities.
+                  "maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message.
+                  "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used.
+                  "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties.
+                  "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set.
+                  "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response.
+                  "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature.
+                  "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "responseSchema": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. The `Schema` object allows the definition of input and output data types. These types can be objects, but also primitives and arrays. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema). If set, a compatible response_mime_type must also be set. Compatible mimetypes: `application/json`: Schema for JSON response.
+                    "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties.
+                    "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list.
+                      # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                    ],
+                    "default": "", # Optional. Default value of the data.
+                    "defs": { # Optional. A map of definitions for use by `ref` Only allowed at the root of the schema.
+                      "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                    },
+                    "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the data.
+                    "enum": [ # Optional. Possible values of the element of primitive type with enum format. Examples: 1. We can define direction as : {type:STRING, format:enum, enum:["EAST", NORTH", "SOUTH", "WEST"]} 2. We can define apartment number as : {type:INTEGER, format:enum, enum:["101", "201", "301"]}
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "example": "", # Optional. Example of the object. Will only populated when the object is the root.
+                    "format": "A String", # Optional. The format of the data. Supported formats: for NUMBER type: "float", "double" for INTEGER type: "int32", "int64" for STRING type: "email", "byte", etc
+                    "items": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE ARRAY Schema of the elements of Type.ARRAY.
+                    "maxItems": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                    "maxLength": "A String", # Optional. Maximum length of the Type.STRING
+                    "maxProperties": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                    "maximum": 3.14, # Optional. Maximum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                    "minItems": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                    "minLength": "A String", # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE STRING Minimum length of the Type.STRING
+                    "minProperties": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                    "minimum": 3.14, # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE INTEGER and NUMBER Minimum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                    "nullable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the value may be null.
+                    "pattern": "A String", # Optional. Pattern of the Type.STRING to restrict a string to a regular expression.
+                    "properties": { # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE OBJECT Properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                      "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                    },
+                    "propertyOrdering": [ # Optional. The order of the properties. Not a standard field in open api spec. Only used to support the order of the properties.
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "ref": "A String", # Optional. Allows indirect references between schema nodes. The value should be a valid reference to a child of the root `defs`. For example, the following schema defines a reference to a schema node named "Pet": type: object properties: pet: ref: #/defs/Pet defs: Pet: type: object properties: name: type: string The value of the "pet" property is a reference to the schema node named "Pet". See details in https://json-schema.org/understanding-json-schema/structuring
+                    "required": [ # Optional. Required properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema.
+                    "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data.
+                  },
+                  "routingConfig": { # The configuration for routing the request to a specific model. # Optional. Routing configuration.
+                    "autoMode": { # When automated routing is specified, the routing will be determined by the pretrained routing model and customer provided model routing preference. # Automated routing.
+                      "modelRoutingPreference": "A String", # The model routing preference.
+                    },
+                    "manualMode": { # When manual routing is set, the specified model will be used directly. # Manual routing.
+                      "modelName": "A String", # The model name to use. Only the public LLM models are accepted. See [Supported models](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/model-reference/inference#supported-models).
+                    },
+                  },
+                  "seed": 42, # Optional. Seed.
+                  "speechConfig": { # The speech generation config. # Optional. The speech generation config.
+                    "languageCode": "A String", # Optional. Language code (ISO 639. e.g. en-US) for the speech synthesization.
+                    "voiceConfig": { # The configuration for the voice to use. # The configuration for the speaker to use.
+                      "prebuiltVoiceConfig": { # The configuration for the prebuilt speaker to use. # The configuration for the prebuilt voice to use.
+                        "voiceName": "A String", # The name of the preset voice to use.
+                      },
+                    },
+                  },
+                  "stopSequences": [ # Optional. Stop sequences.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "temperature": 3.14, # Optional. Controls the randomness of predictions.
+                  "thinkingConfig": { # Config for thinking features. # Optional. Config for thinking features. An error will be returned if this field is set for models that don't support thinking.
+                    "includeThoughts": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether to include thoughts in the response. If true, thoughts are returned only when available.
+                    "thinkingBudget": 42, # Optional. Indicates the thinking budget in tokens.
+                  },
+                  "topK": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, top-k sampling will be used.
+                  "topP": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, nucleus sampling will be used.
+                },
+                "sampleCount": 42, # Optional. Number of samples for each instance in the dataset. If not specified, the default is 4. Minimum value is 1, maximum value is 32.
+              },
+              "metricPromptTemplate": "A String", # Required. Template for the prompt sent to the judge model.
+              "predefinedRubricGenerationSpec": { # Specification for a pre-defined metric. # Dynamically generate rubrics using a predefined spec.
+                "metricSpecName": "A String", # Required. The name of a pre-defined metric, such as "instruction_following_v1" or "text_quality_v1".
+                "parameters": { # Optional. The parameters needed to run the pre-defined metric.
+                  "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+                },
+              },
+              "rubricGenerationSpec": { # Specification for how rubrics should be generated. # Dynamically generate rubrics using this specification.
+                "modelConfig": { # The autorater config used for the evaluation run. # Optional. Configuration for the model used in rubric generation. Configs including sampling count and base model can be specified here. Flipping is not supported for rubric generation.
+                  "autoraterModel": "A String", # Optional. The fully qualified name of the publisher model or tuned autorater endpoint to use. Publisher model format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/publishers/*/models/*` Tuned model endpoint format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/endpoints/{endpoint}`
+                  "generationConfig": { # Generation config. # Optional. Configuration options for model generation and outputs.
+                    "audioTimestamp": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, audio timestamp will be included in the request to the model.
+                    "candidateCount": 42, # Optional. Number of candidates to generate.
+                    "enableAffectiveDialog": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, the model will detect emotions and adapt its responses accordingly.
+                    "frequencyPenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Frequency penalties.
+                    "logprobs": 42, # Optional. Logit probabilities.
+                    "maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message.
+                    "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used.
+                    "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties.
+                    "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set.
+                    "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response.
+                    "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature.
+                    "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response.
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "responseSchema": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. The `Schema` object allows the definition of input and output data types. These types can be objects, but also primitives and arrays. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema). If set, a compatible response_mime_type must also be set. Compatible mimetypes: `application/json`: Schema for JSON response.
+                      "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties.
+                      "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list.
+                        # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                      ],
+                      "default": "", # Optional. Default value of the data.
+                      "defs": { # Optional. A map of definitions for use by `ref` Only allowed at the root of the schema.
+                        "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                      },
+                      "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the data.
+                      "enum": [ # Optional. Possible values of the element of primitive type with enum format. Examples: 1. We can define direction as : {type:STRING, format:enum, enum:["EAST", NORTH", "SOUTH", "WEST"]} 2. We can define apartment number as : {type:INTEGER, format:enum, enum:["101", "201", "301"]}
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                      "example": "", # Optional. Example of the object. Will only populated when the object is the root.
+                      "format": "A String", # Optional. The format of the data. Supported formats: for NUMBER type: "float", "double" for INTEGER type: "int32", "int64" for STRING type: "email", "byte", etc
+                      "items": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE ARRAY Schema of the elements of Type.ARRAY.
+                      "maxItems": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                      "maxLength": "A String", # Optional. Maximum length of the Type.STRING
+                      "maxProperties": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                      "maximum": 3.14, # Optional. Maximum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                      "minItems": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                      "minLength": "A String", # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE STRING Minimum length of the Type.STRING
+                      "minProperties": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                      "minimum": 3.14, # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE INTEGER and NUMBER Minimum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                      "nullable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the value may be null.
+                      "pattern": "A String", # Optional. Pattern of the Type.STRING to restrict a string to a regular expression.
+                      "properties": { # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE OBJECT Properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                        "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                      },
+                      "propertyOrdering": [ # Optional. The order of the properties. Not a standard field in open api spec. Only used to support the order of the properties.
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                      "ref": "A String", # Optional. Allows indirect references between schema nodes. The value should be a valid reference to a child of the root `defs`. For example, the following schema defines a reference to a schema node named "Pet": type: object properties: pet: ref: #/defs/Pet defs: Pet: type: object properties: name: type: string The value of the "pet" property is a reference to the schema node named "Pet". See details in https://json-schema.org/understanding-json-schema/structuring
+                      "required": [ # Optional. Required properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                      "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema.
+                      "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data.
+                    },
+                    "routingConfig": { # The configuration for routing the request to a specific model. # Optional. Routing configuration.
+                      "autoMode": { # When automated routing is specified, the routing will be determined by the pretrained routing model and customer provided model routing preference. # Automated routing.
+                        "modelRoutingPreference": "A String", # The model routing preference.
+                      },
+                      "manualMode": { # When manual routing is set, the specified model will be used directly. # Manual routing.
+                        "modelName": "A String", # The model name to use. Only the public LLM models are accepted. See [Supported models](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/model-reference/inference#supported-models).
+                      },
+                    },
+                    "seed": 42, # Optional. Seed.
+                    "speechConfig": { # The speech generation config. # Optional. The speech generation config.
+                      "languageCode": "A String", # Optional. Language code (ISO 639. e.g. en-US) for the speech synthesization.
+                      "voiceConfig": { # The configuration for the voice to use. # The configuration for the speaker to use.
+                        "prebuiltVoiceConfig": { # The configuration for the prebuilt speaker to use. # The configuration for the prebuilt voice to use.
+                          "voiceName": "A String", # The name of the preset voice to use.
+                        },
+                      },
+                    },
+                    "stopSequences": [ # Optional. Stop sequences.
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "temperature": 3.14, # Optional. Controls the randomness of predictions.
+                    "thinkingConfig": { # Config for thinking features. # Optional. Config for thinking features. An error will be returned if this field is set for models that don't support thinking.
+                      "includeThoughts": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether to include thoughts in the response. If true, thoughts are returned only when available.
+                      "thinkingBudget": 42, # Optional. Indicates the thinking budget in tokens.
+                    },
+                    "topK": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, top-k sampling will be used.
+                    "topP": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, nucleus sampling will be used.
+                  },
+                  "sampleCount": 42, # Optional. Number of samples for each instance in the dataset. If not specified, the default is 4. Minimum value is 1, maximum value is 32.
+                },
+                "promptTemplate": "A String", # Optional. Template for the prompt used to generate rubrics. The details should be updated based on the most-recent recipe requirements.
+                "rubricContentType": "A String", # Optional. The type of rubric content to be generated.
+                "rubricTypeOntology": [ # Optional. An optional, pre-defined list of allowed types for generated rubrics. If this field is provided, it implies `include_rubric_type` should be true, and the generated rubric types should be chosen from this ontology.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+              },
+              "rubricGroupKey": "A String", # Use a pre-defined group of rubrics associated with the input. Refers to a key in the rubric_groups map of EvaluationInstance.
+              "systemInstruction": "A String", # Optional. System instructions for the judge model.
+            },
+            "metric": "A String", # Required. The name of the metric.
+            "predefinedMetricSpec": { # Specification for a pre-defined metric. # Spec for a pre-defined metric.
+              "metricSpecName": "A String", # Required. The name of a pre-defined metric, such as "instruction_following_v1" or "text_quality_v1".
+              "parameters": { # Optional. The parameters needed to run the pre-defined metric.
+                "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+              },
+            },
+            "rubricBasedMetricSpec": { # Specification for a metric that is based on rubrics. # Spec for rubric based metric.
+              "inlineRubrics": { # Defines a list of rubrics, used when providing rubrics inline. # Use rubrics provided directly in the spec.
+                "rubrics": [ # The list of rubrics.
+                  { # Message representing a single testable criterion for evaluation. One input prompt could have multiple rubrics.
+                    "content": { # Content of the rubric, defining the testable criteria. # Required. The actual testable criteria for the rubric.
+                      "property": { # Defines criteria based on a specific property. # Evaluation criteria based on a specific property.
+                        "description": "A String", # Description of the property being evaluated. Example: "The model's response is grammatically correct."
+                      },
+                    },
+                    "importance": "A String", # Optional. The relative importance of this rubric.
+                    "rubricId": "A String", # Unique identifier for the rubric. This ID is used to refer to this rubric, e.g., in RubricVerdict.
+                    "type": "A String", # Optional. A type designator for the rubric, which can inform how it's evaluated or interpreted by systems or users. It's recommended to use consistent, well-defined, upper snake_case strings. Examples: "SUMMARIZATION_QUALITY", "SAFETY_HARMFUL_CONTENT", "INSTRUCTION_ADHERENCE".
+                  },
+                ],
+              },
+              "judgeAutoraterConfig": { # The autorater config used for the evaluation run. # Optional. Optional configuration for the judge LLM (Autorater). The definition of AutoraterConfig needs to be provided.
+                "autoraterModel": "A String", # Optional. The fully qualified name of the publisher model or tuned autorater endpoint to use. Publisher model format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/publishers/*/models/*` Tuned model endpoint format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/endpoints/{endpoint}`
+                "generationConfig": { # Generation config. # Optional. Configuration options for model generation and outputs.
+                  "audioTimestamp": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, audio timestamp will be included in the request to the model.
+                  "candidateCount": 42, # Optional. Number of candidates to generate.
+                  "enableAffectiveDialog": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, the model will detect emotions and adapt its responses accordingly.
+                  "frequencyPenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Frequency penalties.
+                  "logprobs": 42, # Optional. Logit probabilities.
+                  "maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message.
+                  "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used.
+                  "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties.
+                  "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set.
+                  "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response.
+                  "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature.
+                  "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "responseSchema": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. The `Schema` object allows the definition of input and output data types. These types can be objects, but also primitives and arrays. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema). If set, a compatible response_mime_type must also be set. Compatible mimetypes: `application/json`: Schema for JSON response.
+                    "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties.
+                    "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list.
+                      # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                    ],
+                    "default": "", # Optional. Default value of the data.
+                    "defs": { # Optional. A map of definitions for use by `ref` Only allowed at the root of the schema.
+                      "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                    },
+                    "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the data.
+                    "enum": [ # Optional. Possible values of the element of primitive type with enum format. Examples: 1. We can define direction as : {type:STRING, format:enum, enum:["EAST", NORTH", "SOUTH", "WEST"]} 2. We can define apartment number as : {type:INTEGER, format:enum, enum:["101", "201", "301"]}
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "example": "", # Optional. Example of the object. Will only populated when the object is the root.
+                    "format": "A String", # Optional. The format of the data. Supported formats: for NUMBER type: "float", "double" for INTEGER type: "int32", "int64" for STRING type: "email", "byte", etc
+                    "items": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE ARRAY Schema of the elements of Type.ARRAY.
+                    "maxItems": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                    "maxLength": "A String", # Optional. Maximum length of the Type.STRING
+                    "maxProperties": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                    "maximum": 3.14, # Optional. Maximum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                    "minItems": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                    "minLength": "A String", # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE STRING Minimum length of the Type.STRING
+                    "minProperties": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                    "minimum": 3.14, # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE INTEGER and NUMBER Minimum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                    "nullable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the value may be null.
+                    "pattern": "A String", # Optional. Pattern of the Type.STRING to restrict a string to a regular expression.
+                    "properties": { # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE OBJECT Properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                      "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                    },
+                    "propertyOrdering": [ # Optional. The order of the properties. Not a standard field in open api spec. Only used to support the order of the properties.
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "ref": "A String", # Optional. Allows indirect references between schema nodes. The value should be a valid reference to a child of the root `defs`. For example, the following schema defines a reference to a schema node named "Pet": type: object properties: pet: ref: #/defs/Pet defs: Pet: type: object properties: name: type: string The value of the "pet" property is a reference to the schema node named "Pet". See details in https://json-schema.org/understanding-json-schema/structuring
+                    "required": [ # Optional. Required properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema.
+                    "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data.
+                  },
+                  "routingConfig": { # The configuration for routing the request to a specific model. # Optional. Routing configuration.
+                    "autoMode": { # When automated routing is specified, the routing will be determined by the pretrained routing model and customer provided model routing preference. # Automated routing.
+                      "modelRoutingPreference": "A String", # The model routing preference.
+                    },
+                    "manualMode": { # When manual routing is set, the specified model will be used directly. # Manual routing.
+                      "modelName": "A String", # The model name to use. Only the public LLM models are accepted. See [Supported models](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/model-reference/inference#supported-models).
+                    },
+                  },
+                  "seed": 42, # Optional. Seed.
+                  "speechConfig": { # The speech generation config. # Optional. The speech generation config.
+                    "languageCode": "A String", # Optional. Language code (ISO 639. e.g. en-US) for the speech synthesization.
+                    "voiceConfig": { # The configuration for the voice to use. # The configuration for the speaker to use.
+                      "prebuiltVoiceConfig": { # The configuration for the prebuilt speaker to use. # The configuration for the prebuilt voice to use.
+                        "voiceName": "A String", # The name of the preset voice to use.
+                      },
+                    },
+                  },
+                  "stopSequences": [ # Optional. Stop sequences.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "temperature": 3.14, # Optional. Controls the randomness of predictions.
+                  "thinkingConfig": { # Config for thinking features. # Optional. Config for thinking features. An error will be returned if this field is set for models that don't support thinking.
+                    "includeThoughts": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether to include thoughts in the response. If true, thoughts are returned only when available.
+                    "thinkingBudget": 42, # Optional. Indicates the thinking budget in tokens.
+                  },
+                  "topK": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, top-k sampling will be used.
+                  "topP": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, nucleus sampling will be used.
+                },
+                "sampleCount": 42, # Optional. Number of samples for each instance in the dataset. If not specified, the default is 4. Minimum value is 1, maximum value is 32.
+              },
+              "metricPromptTemplate": "A String", # Optional. Template for the prompt used by the judge model to evaluate against rubrics.
+              "rubricGenerationSpec": { # Specification for how rubrics should be generated. # Dynamically generate rubrics for evaluation using this specification.
+                "modelConfig": { # The autorater config used for the evaluation run. # Optional. Configuration for the model used in rubric generation. Configs including sampling count and base model can be specified here. Flipping is not supported for rubric generation.
+                  "autoraterModel": "A String", # Optional. The fully qualified name of the publisher model or tuned autorater endpoint to use. Publisher model format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/publishers/*/models/*` Tuned model endpoint format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/endpoints/{endpoint}`
+                  "generationConfig": { # Generation config. # Optional. Configuration options for model generation and outputs.
+                    "audioTimestamp": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, audio timestamp will be included in the request to the model.
+                    "candidateCount": 42, # Optional. Number of candidates to generate.
+                    "enableAffectiveDialog": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, the model will detect emotions and adapt its responses accordingly.
+                    "frequencyPenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Frequency penalties.
+                    "logprobs": 42, # Optional. Logit probabilities.
+                    "maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message.
+                    "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used.
+                    "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties.
+                    "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set.
+                    "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response.
+                    "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature.
+                    "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response.
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "responseSchema": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. The `Schema` object allows the definition of input and output data types. These types can be objects, but also primitives and arrays. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema). If set, a compatible response_mime_type must also be set. Compatible mimetypes: `application/json`: Schema for JSON response.
+                      "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties.
+                      "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list.
+                        # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                      ],
+                      "default": "", # Optional. Default value of the data.
+                      "defs": { # Optional. A map of definitions for use by `ref` Only allowed at the root of the schema.
+                        "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                      },
+                      "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the data.
+                      "enum": [ # Optional. Possible values of the element of primitive type with enum format. Examples: 1. We can define direction as : {type:STRING, format:enum, enum:["EAST", NORTH", "SOUTH", "WEST"]} 2. We can define apartment number as : {type:INTEGER, format:enum, enum:["101", "201", "301"]}
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                      "example": "", # Optional. Example of the object. Will only populated when the object is the root.
+                      "format": "A String", # Optional. The format of the data. Supported formats: for NUMBER type: "float", "double" for INTEGER type: "int32", "int64" for STRING type: "email", "byte", etc
+                      "items": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE ARRAY Schema of the elements of Type.ARRAY.
+                      "maxItems": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                      "maxLength": "A String", # Optional. Maximum length of the Type.STRING
+                      "maxProperties": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                      "maximum": 3.14, # Optional. Maximum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                      "minItems": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                      "minLength": "A String", # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE STRING Minimum length of the Type.STRING
+                      "minProperties": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                      "minimum": 3.14, # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE INTEGER and NUMBER Minimum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                      "nullable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the value may be null.
+                      "pattern": "A String", # Optional. Pattern of the Type.STRING to restrict a string to a regular expression.
+                      "properties": { # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE OBJECT Properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                        "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                      },
+                      "propertyOrdering": [ # Optional. The order of the properties. Not a standard field in open api spec. Only used to support the order of the properties.
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                      "ref": "A String", # Optional. Allows indirect references between schema nodes. The value should be a valid reference to a child of the root `defs`. For example, the following schema defines a reference to a schema node named "Pet": type: object properties: pet: ref: #/defs/Pet defs: Pet: type: object properties: name: type: string The value of the "pet" property is a reference to the schema node named "Pet". See details in https://json-schema.org/understanding-json-schema/structuring
+                      "required": [ # Optional. Required properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                      "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema.
+                      "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data.
+                    },
+                    "routingConfig": { # The configuration for routing the request to a specific model. # Optional. Routing configuration.
+                      "autoMode": { # When automated routing is specified, the routing will be determined by the pretrained routing model and customer provided model routing preference. # Automated routing.
+                        "modelRoutingPreference": "A String", # The model routing preference.
+                      },
+                      "manualMode": { # When manual routing is set, the specified model will be used directly. # Manual routing.
+                        "modelName": "A String", # The model name to use. Only the public LLM models are accepted. See [Supported models](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/model-reference/inference#supported-models).
+                      },
+                    },
+                    "seed": 42, # Optional. Seed.
+                    "speechConfig": { # The speech generation config. # Optional. The speech generation config.
+                      "languageCode": "A String", # Optional. Language code (ISO 639. e.g. en-US) for the speech synthesization.
+                      "voiceConfig": { # The configuration for the voice to use. # The configuration for the speaker to use.
+                        "prebuiltVoiceConfig": { # The configuration for the prebuilt speaker to use. # The configuration for the prebuilt voice to use.
+                          "voiceName": "A String", # The name of the preset voice to use.
+                        },
+                      },
+                    },
+                    "stopSequences": [ # Optional. Stop sequences.
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "temperature": 3.14, # Optional. Controls the randomness of predictions.
+                    "thinkingConfig": { # Config for thinking features. # Optional. Config for thinking features. An error will be returned if this field is set for models that don't support thinking.
+                      "includeThoughts": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether to include thoughts in the response. If true, thoughts are returned only when available.
+                      "thinkingBudget": 42, # Optional. Indicates the thinking budget in tokens.
+                    },
+                    "topK": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, top-k sampling will be used.
+                    "topP": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, nucleus sampling will be used.
+                  },
+                  "sampleCount": 42, # Optional. Number of samples for each instance in the dataset. If not specified, the default is 4. Minimum value is 1, maximum value is 32.
+                },
+                "promptTemplate": "A String", # Optional. Template for the prompt used to generate rubrics. The details should be updated based on the most-recent recipe requirements.
+                "rubricContentType": "A String", # Optional. The type of rubric content to be generated.
+                "rubricTypeOntology": [ # Optional. An optional, pre-defined list of allowed types for generated rubrics. If this field is provided, it implies `include_rubric_type` should be true, and the generated rubric types should be chosen from this ontology.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+              },
+              "rubricGroupKey": "A String", # Use a pre-defined group of rubrics associated with the input content. This refers to a key in the `rubric_groups` map of `RubricEnhancedContents`.
+            },
+          },
+        ],
+        "outputConfig": { # The output config for the evaluation run. # Optional. The output config for the evaluation run.
+          "bigqueryDestination": { # The BigQuery location for the output content. # BigQuery destination for evaluation output.
+            "outputUri": "A String", # Required. BigQuery URI to a project or table, up to 2000 characters long. When only the project is specified, the Dataset and Table is created. When the full table reference is specified, the Dataset must exist and table must not exist. Accepted forms: * BigQuery path. For example: `bq://projectId` or `bq://projectId.bqDatasetId` or `bq://projectId.bqDatasetId.bqTableId`.
+          },
+          "gcsDestination": { # The Google Cloud Storage location where the output is to be written to. # Cloud Storage destination for evaluation output.
+            "outputUriPrefix": "A String", # Required. Google Cloud Storage URI to output directory. If the uri doesn't end with '/', a '/' will be automatically appended. The directory is created if it doesn't exist.
+          },
+        },
+        "promptTemplate": { # Prompt template used for inference. # The prompt template used for inference. The values for variables in the prompt template are defined in EvaluationItem.EvaluationPrompt.PromptTemplateData.values.
+          "gcsUri": "A String", # Prompt template stored in Cloud Storage. Format: "gs://my-bucket/file-name.txt".
+          "promptTemplate": "A String", # Inline prompt template. Template variables should be in the format "{var_name}". Example: "Translate the following from {source_lang} to {target_lang}: {text}"
+        },
+        "rubricConfigs": [ # Optional. The rubric configs for the evaluation run. They are used to generate rubrics which can be used by rubric-based metrics. Multiple rubric configs can be specified for rubric generation but only one rubric config can be used for a rubric-based metric. If more than one rubric config is provided, the evaluation metric must specify a rubric group key. Note that if a generation spec is specified on both a rubric config and an evaluation metric, the rubrics generated for the metric will be used for evaluation.
+          { # Configuration for a rubric group to be generated/saved for evaluation.
+            "predefinedRubricGenerationSpec": { # Specification for a pre-defined metric. # Dynamically generate rubrics using a predefined spec.
+              "metricSpecName": "A String", # Required. The name of a pre-defined metric, such as "instruction_following_v1" or "text_quality_v1".
+              "parameters": { # Optional. The parameters needed to run the pre-defined metric.
+                "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+              },
+            },
+            "rubricGenerationSpec": { # Specification for how rubrics should be generated. # Dynamically generate rubrics using this specification.
+              "modelConfig": { # The autorater config used for the evaluation run. # Optional. Configuration for the model used in rubric generation. Configs including sampling count and base model can be specified here. Flipping is not supported for rubric generation.
+                "autoraterModel": "A String", # Optional. The fully qualified name of the publisher model or tuned autorater endpoint to use. Publisher model format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/publishers/*/models/*` Tuned model endpoint format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/endpoints/{endpoint}`
+                "generationConfig": { # Generation config. # Optional. Configuration options for model generation and outputs.
+                  "audioTimestamp": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, audio timestamp will be included in the request to the model.
+                  "candidateCount": 42, # Optional. Number of candidates to generate.
+                  "enableAffectiveDialog": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, the model will detect emotions and adapt its responses accordingly.
+                  "frequencyPenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Frequency penalties.
+                  "logprobs": 42, # Optional. Logit probabilities.
+                  "maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message.
+                  "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used.
+                  "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties.
+                  "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set.
+                  "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response.
+                  "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature.
+                  "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "responseSchema": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. The `Schema` object allows the definition of input and output data types. These types can be objects, but also primitives and arrays. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema). If set, a compatible response_mime_type must also be set. Compatible mimetypes: `application/json`: Schema for JSON response.
+                    "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties.
+                    "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list.
+                      # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                    ],
+                    "default": "", # Optional. Default value of the data.
+                    "defs": { # Optional. A map of definitions for use by `ref` Only allowed at the root of the schema.
+                      "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                    },
+                    "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the data.
+                    "enum": [ # Optional. Possible values of the element of primitive type with enum format. Examples: 1. We can define direction as : {type:STRING, format:enum, enum:["EAST", NORTH", "SOUTH", "WEST"]} 2. We can define apartment number as : {type:INTEGER, format:enum, enum:["101", "201", "301"]}
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "example": "", # Optional. Example of the object. Will only populated when the object is the root.
+                    "format": "A String", # Optional. The format of the data. Supported formats: for NUMBER type: "float", "double" for INTEGER type: "int32", "int64" for STRING type: "email", "byte", etc
+                    "items": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE ARRAY Schema of the elements of Type.ARRAY.
+                    "maxItems": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                    "maxLength": "A String", # Optional. Maximum length of the Type.STRING
+                    "maxProperties": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                    "maximum": 3.14, # Optional. Maximum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                    "minItems": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+                    "minLength": "A String", # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE STRING Minimum length of the Type.STRING
+                    "minProperties": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+                    "minimum": 3.14, # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE INTEGER and NUMBER Minimum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+                    "nullable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the value may be null.
+                    "pattern": "A String", # Optional. Pattern of the Type.STRING to restrict a string to a regular expression.
+                    "properties": { # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE OBJECT Properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                      "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+                    },
+                    "propertyOrdering": [ # Optional. The order of the properties. Not a standard field in open api spec. Only used to support the order of the properties.
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "ref": "A String", # Optional. Allows indirect references between schema nodes. The value should be a valid reference to a child of the root `defs`. For example, the following schema defines a reference to a schema node named "Pet": type: object properties: pet: ref: #/defs/Pet defs: Pet: type: object properties: name: type: string The value of the "pet" property is a reference to the schema node named "Pet". See details in https://json-schema.org/understanding-json-schema/structuring
+                    "required": [ # Optional. Required properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema.
+                    "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data.
+                  },
+                  "routingConfig": { # The configuration for routing the request to a specific model. # Optional. Routing configuration.
+                    "autoMode": { # When automated routing is specified, the routing will be determined by the pretrained routing model and customer provided model routing preference. # Automated routing.
+                      "modelRoutingPreference": "A String", # The model routing preference.
+                    },
+                    "manualMode": { # When manual routing is set, the specified model will be used directly. # Manual routing.
+                      "modelName": "A String", # The model name to use. Only the public LLM models are accepted. See [Supported models](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/model-reference/inference#supported-models).
+                    },
+                  },
+                  "seed": 42, # Optional. Seed.
+                  "speechConfig": { # The speech generation config. # Optional. The speech generation config.
+                    "languageCode": "A String", # Optional. Language code (ISO 639. e.g. en-US) for the speech synthesization.
+                    "voiceConfig": { # The configuration for the voice to use. # The configuration for the speaker to use.
+                      "prebuiltVoiceConfig": { # The configuration for the prebuilt speaker to use. # The configuration for the prebuilt voice to use.
+                        "voiceName": "A String", # The name of the preset voice to use.
+                      },
+                    },
+                  },
+                  "stopSequences": [ # Optional. Stop sequences.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "temperature": 3.14, # Optional. Controls the randomness of predictions.
+                  "thinkingConfig": { # Config for thinking features. # Optional. Config for thinking features. An error will be returned if this field is set for models that don't support thinking.
+                    "includeThoughts": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether to include thoughts in the response. If true, thoughts are returned only when available.
+                    "thinkingBudget": 42, # Optional. Indicates the thinking budget in tokens.
+                  },
+                  "topK": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, top-k sampling will be used.
+                  "topP": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, nucleus sampling will be used.
+                },
+                "sampleCount": 42, # Optional. Number of samples for each instance in the dataset. If not specified, the default is 4. Minimum value is 1, maximum value is 32.
+              },
+              "promptTemplate": "A String", # Optional. Template for the prompt used to generate rubrics. The details should be updated based on the most-recent recipe requirements.
+              "rubricContentType": "A String", # Optional. The type of rubric content to be generated.
+              "rubricTypeOntology": [ # Optional. An optional, pre-defined list of allowed types for generated rubrics. If this field is provided, it implies `include_rubric_type` should be true, and the generated rubric types should be chosen from this ontology.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+            },
+            "rubricGroupKey": "A String", # Required. The key used to save the generated rubrics. If a generation spec is provided, this key will be used for the name of the generated rubric group. Otherwise, this key will be used to look up the existing rubric group on the evaluation item. Note that if a rubric group key is specified on both a rubric config and an evaluation metric, the key from the metric will be used to select the rubrics for evaluation.
+          },
+        ],
+      },
+      "evaluationResults": { # The results of the evaluation run. # Output only. The results of the evaluation run. Only populated when the evaluation run's state is SUCCEEDED.
+        "evaluationSet": "A String", # The evaluation set where item level results are stored.
+        "summaryMetrics": { # The summary metrics for the evaluation run. # Optional. The summary metrics for the evaluation run.
+          "failedItems": 42, # Optional. The number of items that failed to be evaluated.
+          "metrics": { # Optional. Map of metric name to metric value.
+            "a_key": "",
+          },
+          "totalItems": 42, # Optional. The total number of items that were evaluated.
+        },
+      },
+      "evaluationSetSnapshot": "A String", # Output only. The specific evaluation set of the evaluation run. For runs with an evaluation set input, this will be that same set. For runs with BigQuery input, it's the sampled BigQuery dataset.
+      "inferenceConfigs": { # Optional. The candidate to inference config map for the evaluation run. The candidate can be up to 128 characters long and can consist of any UTF-8 characters.
+        "a_key": { # An inference config used for model inference during the evaluation run.
+          "generationConfig": { # Generation config. # Optional. Generation config.
+            "audioTimestamp": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, audio timestamp will be included in the request to the model.
+            "candidateCount": 42, # Optional. Number of candidates to generate.
+            "enableAffectiveDialog": True or False, # Optional. If enabled, the model will detect emotions and adapt its responses accordingly.
+            "frequencyPenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Frequency penalties.
+            "logprobs": 42, # Optional. Logit probabilities.
+            "maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message.
+            "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used.
+            "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties.
+            "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set.
+            "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response.
+            "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature.
+            "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "responseSchema": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. The `Schema` object allows the definition of input and output data types. These types can be objects, but also primitives and arrays. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema). If set, a compatible response_mime_type must also be set. Compatible mimetypes: `application/json`: Schema for JSON response.
+              "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties.
+              "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list.
+                # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+              ],
+              "default": "", # Optional. Default value of the data.
+              "defs": { # Optional. A map of definitions for use by `ref` Only allowed at the root of the schema.
+                "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+              },
+              "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the data.
+              "enum": [ # Optional. Possible values of the element of primitive type with enum format. Examples: 1. We can define direction as : {type:STRING, format:enum, enum:["EAST", NORTH", "SOUTH", "WEST"]} 2. We can define apartment number as : {type:INTEGER, format:enum, enum:["101", "201", "301"]}
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "example": "", # Optional. Example of the object. Will only populated when the object is the root.
+              "format": "A String", # Optional. The format of the data. Supported formats: for NUMBER type: "float", "double" for INTEGER type: "int32", "int64" for STRING type: "email", "byte", etc
+              "items": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE ARRAY Schema of the elements of Type.ARRAY.
+              "maxItems": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+              "maxLength": "A String", # Optional. Maximum length of the Type.STRING
+              "maxProperties": "A String", # Optional. Maximum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+              "maximum": 3.14, # Optional. Maximum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+              "minItems": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the elements for Type.ARRAY.
+              "minLength": "A String", # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE STRING Minimum length of the Type.STRING
+              "minProperties": "A String", # Optional. Minimum number of the properties for Type.OBJECT.
+              "minimum": 3.14, # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE INTEGER and NUMBER Minimum value of the Type.INTEGER and Type.NUMBER
+              "nullable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the value may be null.
+              "pattern": "A String", # Optional. Pattern of the Type.STRING to restrict a string to a regular expression.
+              "properties": { # Optional. SCHEMA FIELDS FOR TYPE OBJECT Properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                "a_key": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema
+              },
+              "propertyOrdering": [ # Optional. The order of the properties. Not a standard field in open api spec. Only used to support the order of the properties.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "ref": "A String", # Optional. Allows indirect references between schema nodes. The value should be a valid reference to a child of the root `defs`. For example, the following schema defines a reference to a schema node named "Pet": type: object properties: pet: ref: #/defs/Pet defs: Pet: type: object properties: name: type: string The value of the "pet" property is a reference to the schema node named "Pet". See details in https://json-schema.org/understanding-json-schema/structuring
+              "required": [ # Optional. Required properties of Type.OBJECT.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema.
+              "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data.
+            },
+            "routingConfig": { # The configuration for routing the request to a specific model. # Optional. Routing configuration.
+              "autoMode": { # When automated routing is specified, the routing will be determined by the pretrained routing model and customer provided model routing preference. # Automated routing.
+                "modelRoutingPreference": "A String", # The model routing preference.
+              },
+              "manualMode": { # When manual routing is set, the specified model will be used directly. # Manual routing.
+                "modelName": "A String", # The model name to use. Only the public LLM models are accepted. See [Supported models](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/model-reference/inference#supported-models).
+              },
+            },
+            "seed": 42, # Optional. Seed.
+            "speechConfig": { # The speech generation config. # Optional. The speech generation config.
+              "languageCode": "A String", # Optional. Language code (ISO 639. e.g. en-US) for the speech synthesization.
+              "voiceConfig": { # The configuration for the voice to use. # The configuration for the speaker to use.
+                "prebuiltVoiceConfig": { # The configuration for the prebuilt speaker to use. # The configuration for the prebuilt voice to use.
+                  "voiceName": "A String", # The name of the preset voice to use.
+                },
+              },
+            },
+            "stopSequences": [ # Optional. Stop sequences.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "temperature": 3.14, # Optional. Controls the randomness of predictions.
+            "thinkingConfig": { # Config for thinking features. # Optional. Config for thinking features. An error will be returned if this field is set for models that don't support thinking.
+              "includeThoughts": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether to include thoughts in the response. If true, thoughts are returned only when available.
+              "thinkingBudget": 42, # Optional. Indicates the thinking budget in tokens.
+            },
+            "topK": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, top-k sampling will be used.
+            "topP": 3.14, # Optional. If specified, nucleus sampling will be used.
+          },
+          "model": "A String", # Required. The fully qualified name of the publisher model or endpoint to use. Publisher model format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/publishers/*/models/*` Endpoint format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/endpoints/{endpoint}`
+        },
+      },
+      "labels": { # Optional. Labels for the evaluation run.
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+      "metadata": "", # Optional. Metadata about the evaluation run, can be used by the caller to store additional tracking information about the evaluation run.
+      "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the EvaluationRun. This is a unique identifier. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationRuns/{evaluation_run}`
+      "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the evaluation run.
+    },
+  ],
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # A token to retrieve the next page of results.
+}
+
+ +
+ list_next() +
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        
+
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.evaluationSets.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.evaluationSets.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c53aefb4b94 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.evaluationSets.html @@ -0,0 +1,295 @@ + + + +

Vertex AI API . projects . locations . evaluationSets

+

Instance Methods

+

+ close()

+

Close httplib2 connections.

+

+ create(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Creates an Evaluation Set.

+

+ delete(name, x__xgafv=None)

+

Deletes an Evaluation Set.

+

+ get(name, x__xgafv=None)

+

Gets an Evaluation Set.

+

+ list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Lists Evaluation Sets.

+

+ list_next()

+

Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+ patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Updates an Evaluation Set.

+

Method Details

+
+ close() +
Close httplib2 connections.
+
+ +
+ create(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Creates an Evaluation Set.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The resource name of the Location to create the Evaluation Set in. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}` (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # EvaluationSet is a collection of related EvaluationItems that are evaluated together.
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when this item was created.
+  "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display name of the EvaluationSet.
+  "evaluationItems": [ # Required. The EvaluationItems that are part of this dataset.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "metadata": "", # Optional. Metadata for the EvaluationSet.
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the EvaluationSet. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationSets/{evaluation_set}`
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when this item was last updated.
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # EvaluationSet is a collection of related EvaluationItems that are evaluated together.
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when this item was created.
+  "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display name of the EvaluationSet.
+  "evaluationItems": [ # Required. The EvaluationItems that are part of this dataset.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "metadata": "", # Optional. Metadata for the EvaluationSet.
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the EvaluationSet. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationSets/{evaluation_set}`
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when this item was last updated.
+}
+
+ +
+ delete(name, x__xgafv=None) +
Deletes an Evaluation Set.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The name of the EvaluationSet resource to be deleted. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationSets/{evaluation_set}` (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  "response": { # The normal, successful response of the operation. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}
+
+ +
+ get(name, x__xgafv=None) +
Gets an Evaluation Set.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The name of the EvaluationSet resource. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationSets/{evaluation_set}` (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # EvaluationSet is a collection of related EvaluationItems that are evaluated together.
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when this item was created.
+  "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display name of the EvaluationSet.
+  "evaluationItems": [ # Required. The EvaluationItems that are part of this dataset.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "metadata": "", # Optional. Metadata for the EvaluationSet.
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the EvaluationSet. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationSets/{evaluation_set}`
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when this item was last updated.
+}
+
+ +
+ list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Lists Evaluation Sets.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The resource name of the Location from which to list the Evaluation Sets. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}` (required)
+  filter: string, Optional. Filter expression that matches a subset of the EvaluationSets to show. For field names both snake_case and camelCase are supported. For more information about filter syntax, see [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160).
+  orderBy: string, Optional. A comma-separated list of fields to order by, sorted in ascending order by default. Use `desc` after a field name for descending.
+  pageSize: integer, Optional. The maximum number of Evaluation Sets to return.
+  pageToken: string, Optional. A page token, received from a previous `ListEvaluationSets` call. Provide this to retrieve the subsequent page.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Response message for EvaluationManagementService.ListEvaluationSets.
+  "evaluationSets": [ # List of EvaluationSets in the requested page.
+    { # EvaluationSet is a collection of related EvaluationItems that are evaluated together.
+      "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when this item was created.
+      "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display name of the EvaluationSet.
+      "evaluationItems": [ # Required. The EvaluationItems that are part of this dataset.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "metadata": "", # Optional. Metadata for the EvaluationSet.
+      "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the EvaluationSet. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationSets/{evaluation_set}`
+      "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when this item was last updated.
+    },
+  ],
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # A token to retrieve the next page of results.
+}
+
+ +
+ list_next() +
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        
+
+ +
+ patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Updates an Evaluation Set.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Identifier. The resource name of the EvaluationSet. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationSets/{evaluation_set}` (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # EvaluationSet is a collection of related EvaluationItems that are evaluated together.
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when this item was created.
+  "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display name of the EvaluationSet.
+  "evaluationItems": [ # Required. The EvaluationItems that are part of this dataset.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "metadata": "", # Optional. Metadata for the EvaluationSet.
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the EvaluationSet. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationSets/{evaluation_set}`
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when this item was last updated.
+}
+
+  updateMask: string, Optional. The update mask applies to the resource. For the `FieldMask` definition, see google.protobuf.FieldMask.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # EvaluationSet is a collection of related EvaluationItems that are evaluated together.
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when this item was created.
+  "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display name of the EvaluationSet.
+  "evaluationItems": [ # Required. The EvaluationItems that are part of this dataset.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "metadata": "", # Optional. Metadata for the EvaluationSet.
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the EvaluationSet. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationSets/{evaluation_set}`
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when this item was last updated.
+}
+
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.html index 237c4ca1753..e1324fb929f 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.html @@ -109,6 +109,21 @@

Instance Methods

Returns the endpoints Resource.

+

+ evaluationItems() +

+

Returns the evaluationItems Resource.

+ +

+ evaluationRuns() +

+

Returns the evaluationRuns Resource.

+ +

+ evaluationSets() +

+

Returns the evaluationSets Resource.

+

featureGroups()

@@ -265,6 +280,9 @@

Instance Methods

generateInstanceRubrics(location, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

Generates rubrics for a given prompt. A rubric represents a single testable criterion for evaluation. One input prompt could have multiple rubrics This RPC allows users to get suggested rubrics based on provided prompt, which can then be reviewed and used for subsequent evaluations.

+

+ generateSyntheticData(location, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Generates synthetic data based on the provided configuration.

get(name, x__xgafv=None)

Gets information about a location.

@@ -1732,8 +1750,17 @@

Method Details

}, "metricResults": [ # Metric results for each instance. The order of the metric results is guaranteed to be the same as the order of the instances in the request. { # Result for a single metric on a single instance. - "explanation": "A String", # The explanation for the metric result. - "rubricVerdicts": [ # For rubric-based metrics, the verdicts for each rubric. + "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # Output only. The error status for the metric result. + "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code. + "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use. + { + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL. + }, + ], + "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client. + }, + "explanation": "A String", # Output only. The explanation for the metric result. + "rubricVerdicts": [ # Output only. For rubric-based metrics, the verdicts for each rubric. { # Represents the verdict of an evaluation against a single rubric. "evaluatedRubric": { # Message representing a single testable criterion for evaluation. One input prompt could have multiple rubrics. # Required. The full rubric definition that was evaluated. Storing this ensures the verdict is self-contained and understandable, especially if the original rubric definition changes or was dynamically generated. "content": { # Content of the rubric, defining the testable criteria. # Required. The actual testable criteria for the rubric. @@ -1749,7 +1776,7 @@

Method Details

"verdict": True or False, # Required. Outcome of the evaluation against the rubric, represented as a boolean. `true` indicates a "Pass", `false` indicates a "Fail". }, ], - "score": 3.14, # The score for the metric. Please refer to each metric's documentation for the meaning of the score. + "score": 3.14, # Output only. The score for the metric. Please refer to each metric's documentation for the meaning of the score. }, ], "metricxResult": { # Spec for MetricX result - calculates the MetricX score for the given instance using the version specified in the spec. # Result for Metricx metric. @@ -2017,6 +2044,149 @@

Method Details

} +
+ generateSyntheticData(location, body=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Generates synthetic data based on the provided configuration.
+
+Args:
+  location: string, Required. The resource name of the Location to run the job. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}` (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Request message for DataFoundryService.GenerateSyntheticData.
+  "count": 42, # Required. The number of synthetic examples to generate. For this stateless API, the count is limited to a small number.
+  "examples": [ # Optional. A list of few-shot examples to guide the model's output style and format.
+    { # Represents a single synthetic example, composed of multiple fields. Used for providing few-shot examples in the request and for returning generated examples in the response.
+      "fields": [ # Required. A list of fields that constitute an example.
+        { # Represents a single named field within a SyntheticExample.
+          "content": { # The base structured datatype containing multi-part content of a message. A `Content` includes a `role` field designating the producer of the `Content` and a `parts` field containing multi-part data that contains the content of the message turn. # Required. The content of the field.
+            "parts": [ # Required. Ordered `Parts` that constitute a single message. Parts may have different IANA MIME types.
+              { # A datatype containing media that is part of a multi-part `Content` message. A `Part` consists of data which has an associated datatype. A `Part` can only contain one of the accepted types in `Part.data`. A `Part` must have a fixed IANA MIME type identifying the type and subtype of the media if `inline_data` or `file_data` field is filled with raw bytes.
+                "codeExecutionResult": { # Result of executing the [ExecutableCode]. Only generated when using the [CodeExecution] tool, and always follows a `part` containing the [ExecutableCode]. # Optional. Result of executing the [ExecutableCode].
+                  "outcome": "A String", # Required. Outcome of the code execution.
+                  "output": "A String", # Optional. Contains stdout when code execution is successful, stderr or other description otherwise.
+                },
+                "executableCode": { # Code generated by the model that is meant to be executed, and the result returned to the model. Generated when using the [CodeExecution] tool, in which the code will be automatically executed, and a corresponding [CodeExecutionResult] will also be generated. # Optional. Code generated by the model that is meant to be executed.
+                  "code": "A String", # Required. The code to be executed.
+                  "language": "A String", # Required. Programming language of the `code`.
+                },
+                "fileData": { # URI based data. # Optional. URI based data.
+                  "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the file data. Used to provide a label or filename to distinguish file datas. This field is only returned in PromptMessage for prompt management. It is currently used in the Gemini GenerateContent calls only when server side tools (code_execution, google_search, and url_context) are enabled.
+                  "fileUri": "A String", # Required. URI.
+                  "mimeType": "A String", # Required. The IANA standard MIME type of the source data.
+                },
+                "functionCall": { # A predicted [FunctionCall] returned from the model that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing the parameters and their values. # Optional. A predicted [FunctionCall] returned from the model that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] with the parameters and their values.
+                  "args": { # Optional. The function parameters and values in JSON object format. See [FunctionDeclaration.parameters] for parameter details.
+                    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+                  },
+                  "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name].
+                },
+                "functionResponse": { # The result output from a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function is used as context to the model. This should contain the result of a [FunctionCall] made based on model prediction. # Optional. The result output of a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function call. It is used as context to the model.
+                  "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name] and [FunctionCall.name].
+                  "response": { # Required. The function response in JSON object format. Use "output" key to specify function output and "error" key to specify error details (if any). If "output" and "error" keys are not specified, then whole "response" is treated as function output.
+                    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+                  },
+                },
+                "inlineData": { # Content blob. # Optional. Inlined bytes data.
+                  "data": "A String", # Required. Raw bytes.
+                  "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the blob. Used to provide a label or filename to distinguish blobs. This field is only returned in PromptMessage for prompt management. It is currently used in the Gemini GenerateContent calls only when server side tools (code_execution, google_search, and url_context) are enabled.
+                  "mimeType": "A String", # Required. The IANA standard MIME type of the source data.
+                },
+                "text": "A String", # Optional. Text part (can be code).
+                "thought": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the part is thought from the model.
+                "thoughtSignature": "A String", # Optional. An opaque signature for the thought so it can be reused in subsequent requests.
+                "videoMetadata": { # Metadata describes the input video content. # Optional. Video metadata. The metadata should only be specified while the video data is presented in inline_data or file_data.
+                  "endOffset": "A String", # Optional. The end offset of the video.
+                  "fps": 3.14, # Optional. The frame rate of the video sent to the model. If not specified, the default value will be 1.0. The fps range is (0.0, 24.0].
+                  "startOffset": "A String", # Optional. The start offset of the video.
+                },
+              },
+            ],
+            "role": "A String", # Optional. The producer of the content. Must be either 'user' or 'model'. Useful to set for multi-turn conversations, otherwise can be left blank or unset.
+          },
+          "fieldName": "A String", # Optional. The name of the field.
+        },
+      ],
+    },
+  ],
+  "outputFieldSpecs": [ # Required. The schema of the desired output, defined by a list of fields.
+    { # Defines a specification for a single output field.
+      "fieldName": "A String", # Required. The name of the output field.
+      "fieldType": "A String", # Optional. The data type of the field. Defaults to CONTENT if not set.
+      "guidance": "A String", # Optional. Optional, but recommended. Additional guidance specific to this field to provide targeted instructions for the LLM to generate the content of a single output field. While the LLM can sometimes infer content from the field name, providing explicit guidance is preferred.
+    },
+  ],
+  "taskDescription": { # Defines a generation strategy based on a high-level task description. # Generate data from a high-level task description.
+    "taskDescription": "A String", # Required. A high-level description of the synthetic data to be generated.
+  },
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The response containing the generated data.
+  "syntheticExamples": [ # A list of generated synthetic examples.
+    { # Represents a single synthetic example, composed of multiple fields. Used for providing few-shot examples in the request and for returning generated examples in the response.
+      "fields": [ # Required. A list of fields that constitute an example.
+        { # Represents a single named field within a SyntheticExample.
+          "content": { # The base structured datatype containing multi-part content of a message. A `Content` includes a `role` field designating the producer of the `Content` and a `parts` field containing multi-part data that contains the content of the message turn. # Required. The content of the field.
+            "parts": [ # Required. Ordered `Parts` that constitute a single message. Parts may have different IANA MIME types.
+              { # A datatype containing media that is part of a multi-part `Content` message. A `Part` consists of data which has an associated datatype. A `Part` can only contain one of the accepted types in `Part.data`. A `Part` must have a fixed IANA MIME type identifying the type and subtype of the media if `inline_data` or `file_data` field is filled with raw bytes.
+                "codeExecutionResult": { # Result of executing the [ExecutableCode]. Only generated when using the [CodeExecution] tool, and always follows a `part` containing the [ExecutableCode]. # Optional. Result of executing the [ExecutableCode].
+                  "outcome": "A String", # Required. Outcome of the code execution.
+                  "output": "A String", # Optional. Contains stdout when code execution is successful, stderr or other description otherwise.
+                },
+                "executableCode": { # Code generated by the model that is meant to be executed, and the result returned to the model. Generated when using the [CodeExecution] tool, in which the code will be automatically executed, and a corresponding [CodeExecutionResult] will also be generated. # Optional. Code generated by the model that is meant to be executed.
+                  "code": "A String", # Required. The code to be executed.
+                  "language": "A String", # Required. Programming language of the `code`.
+                },
+                "fileData": { # URI based data. # Optional. URI based data.
+                  "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the file data. Used to provide a label or filename to distinguish file datas. This field is only returned in PromptMessage for prompt management. It is currently used in the Gemini GenerateContent calls only when server side tools (code_execution, google_search, and url_context) are enabled.
+                  "fileUri": "A String", # Required. URI.
+                  "mimeType": "A String", # Required. The IANA standard MIME type of the source data.
+                },
+                "functionCall": { # A predicted [FunctionCall] returned from the model that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing the parameters and their values. # Optional. A predicted [FunctionCall] returned from the model that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] with the parameters and their values.
+                  "args": { # Optional. The function parameters and values in JSON object format. See [FunctionDeclaration.parameters] for parameter details.
+                    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+                  },
+                  "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name].
+                },
+                "functionResponse": { # The result output from a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function is used as context to the model. This should contain the result of a [FunctionCall] made based on model prediction. # Optional. The result output of a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function call. It is used as context to the model.
+                  "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name] and [FunctionCall.name].
+                  "response": { # Required. The function response in JSON object format. Use "output" key to specify function output and "error" key to specify error details (if any). If "output" and "error" keys are not specified, then whole "response" is treated as function output.
+                    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+                  },
+                },
+                "inlineData": { # Content blob. # Optional. Inlined bytes data.
+                  "data": "A String", # Required. Raw bytes.
+                  "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the blob. Used to provide a label or filename to distinguish blobs. This field is only returned in PromptMessage for prompt management. It is currently used in the Gemini GenerateContent calls only when server side tools (code_execution, google_search, and url_context) are enabled.
+                  "mimeType": "A String", # Required. The IANA standard MIME type of the source data.
+                },
+                "text": "A String", # Optional. Text part (can be code).
+                "thought": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the part is thought from the model.
+                "thoughtSignature": "A String", # Optional. An opaque signature for the thought so it can be reused in subsequent requests.
+                "videoMetadata": { # Metadata describes the input video content. # Optional. Video metadata. The metadata should only be specified while the video data is presented in inline_data or file_data.
+                  "endOffset": "A String", # Optional. The end offset of the video.
+                  "fps": 3.14, # Optional. The frame rate of the video sent to the model. If not specified, the default value will be 1.0. The fps range is (0.0, 24.0].
+                  "startOffset": "A String", # Optional. The start offset of the video.
+                },
+              },
+            ],
+            "role": "A String", # Optional. The producer of the content. Must be either 'user' or 'model'. Useful to set for multi-turn conversations, otherwise can be left blank or unset.
+          },
+          "fieldName": "A String", # Optional. The name of the field.
+        },
+      ],
+    },
+  ],
+}
+
+
get(name, x__xgafv=None)
Gets information about a location.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.html
index ad70427756b..47efd6971ad 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.html
@@ -129,6 +129,9 @@ 

Method Details

"kmsKeyName": "A String", # Required. The Cloud KMS resource identifier of the customer managed encryption key used to protect a resource. Has the form: `projects/my-project/locations/my-region/keyRings/my-kr/cryptoKeys/my-key`. The key needs to be in the same region as where the compute resource is created. }, "etag": "A String", # Optional. Used to perform consistent read-modify-write updates. If not set, a blind "overwrite" update happens. + "labels": { # Labels for the ReasoningEngine. + "a_key": "A String", + }, "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the ReasoningEngine. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/reasoningEngines/{reasoning_engine}` "spec": { # ReasoningEngine configurations # Optional. Configurations of the ReasoningEngine "agentFramework": "A String", # Optional. The OSS agent framework used to develop the agent. Currently supported values: "google-adk", "langchain", "langgraph", "ag2", "llama-index", "custom". @@ -268,6 +271,9 @@

Method Details

"kmsKeyName": "A String", # Required. The Cloud KMS resource identifier of the customer managed encryption key used to protect a resource. Has the form: `projects/my-project/locations/my-region/keyRings/my-kr/cryptoKeys/my-key`. The key needs to be in the same region as where the compute resource is created. }, "etag": "A String", # Optional. Used to perform consistent read-modify-write updates. If not set, a blind "overwrite" update happens. + "labels": { # Labels for the ReasoningEngine. + "a_key": "A String", + }, "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the ReasoningEngine. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/reasoningEngines/{reasoning_engine}` "spec": { # ReasoningEngine configurations # Optional. Configurations of the ReasoningEngine "agentFramework": "A String", # Optional. The OSS agent framework used to develop the agent. Currently supported values: "google-adk", "langchain", "langgraph", "ag2", "llama-index", "custom". @@ -349,6 +355,9 @@

Method Details

"kmsKeyName": "A String", # Required. The Cloud KMS resource identifier of the customer managed encryption key used to protect a resource. Has the form: `projects/my-project/locations/my-region/keyRings/my-kr/cryptoKeys/my-key`. The key needs to be in the same region as where the compute resource is created. }, "etag": "A String", # Optional. Used to perform consistent read-modify-write updates. If not set, a blind "overwrite" update happens. + "labels": { # Labels for the ReasoningEngine. + "a_key": "A String", + }, "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the ReasoningEngine. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/reasoningEngines/{reasoning_engine}` "spec": { # ReasoningEngine configurations # Optional. Configurations of the ReasoningEngine "agentFramework": "A String", # Optional. The OSS agent framework used to develop the agent. Currently supported values: "google-adk", "langchain", "langgraph", "ag2", "llama-index", "custom". @@ -435,6 +444,9 @@

Method Details

"kmsKeyName": "A String", # Required. The Cloud KMS resource identifier of the customer managed encryption key used to protect a resource. Has the form: `projects/my-project/locations/my-region/keyRings/my-kr/cryptoKeys/my-key`. The key needs to be in the same region as where the compute resource is created. }, "etag": "A String", # Optional. Used to perform consistent read-modify-write updates. If not set, a blind "overwrite" update happens. + "labels": { # Labels for the ReasoningEngine. + "a_key": "A String", + }, "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the ReasoningEngine. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/reasoningEngines/{reasoning_engine}` "spec": { # ReasoningEngine configurations # Optional. Configurations of the ReasoningEngine "agentFramework": "A String", # Optional. The OSS agent framework used to develop the agent. Currently supported values: "google-adk", "langchain", "langgraph", "ag2", "llama-index", "custom". diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.reasoningEngines.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.reasoningEngines.html index 7116864cab2..389a4ccff45 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.reasoningEngines.html +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.reasoningEngines.html @@ -123,6 +123,9 @@

Method Details

"kmsKeyName": "A String", # Required. The Cloud KMS resource identifier of the customer managed encryption key used to protect a resource. Has the form: `projects/my-project/locations/my-region/keyRings/my-kr/cryptoKeys/my-key`. The key needs to be in the same region as where the compute resource is created. }, "etag": "A String", # Optional. Used to perform consistent read-modify-write updates. If not set, a blind "overwrite" update happens. + "labels": { # Labels for the ReasoningEngine. + "a_key": "A String", + }, "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the ReasoningEngine. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/reasoningEngines/{reasoning_engine}` "spec": { # ReasoningEngine configurations # Optional. Configurations of the ReasoningEngine "agentFramework": "A String", # Optional. The OSS agent framework used to develop the agent. Currently supported values: "google-adk", "langchain", "langgraph", "ag2", "llama-index", "custom". @@ -263,6 +266,9 @@

Method Details

"kmsKeyName": "A String", # Required. The Cloud KMS resource identifier of the customer managed encryption key used to protect a resource. Has the form: `projects/my-project/locations/my-region/keyRings/my-kr/cryptoKeys/my-key`. The key needs to be in the same region as where the compute resource is created. }, "etag": "A String", # Optional. Used to perform consistent read-modify-write updates. If not set, a blind "overwrite" update happens. + "labels": { # Labels for the ReasoningEngine. + "a_key": "A String", + }, "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the ReasoningEngine. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/reasoningEngines/{reasoning_engine}` "spec": { # ReasoningEngine configurations # Optional. Configurations of the ReasoningEngine "agentFramework": "A String", # Optional. The OSS agent framework used to develop the agent. Currently supported values: "google-adk", "langchain", "langgraph", "ag2", "llama-index", "custom". @@ -344,6 +350,9 @@

Method Details

"kmsKeyName": "A String", # Required. The Cloud KMS resource identifier of the customer managed encryption key used to protect a resource. Has the form: `projects/my-project/locations/my-region/keyRings/my-kr/cryptoKeys/my-key`. The key needs to be in the same region as where the compute resource is created. }, "etag": "A String", # Optional. Used to perform consistent read-modify-write updates. If not set, a blind "overwrite" update happens. + "labels": { # Labels for the ReasoningEngine. + "a_key": "A String", + }, "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the ReasoningEngine. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/reasoningEngines/{reasoning_engine}` "spec": { # ReasoningEngine configurations # Optional. Configurations of the ReasoningEngine "agentFramework": "A String", # Optional. The OSS agent framework used to develop the agent. Currently supported values: "google-adk", "langchain", "langgraph", "ag2", "llama-index", "custom". @@ -430,6 +439,9 @@

Method Details

"kmsKeyName": "A String", # Required. The Cloud KMS resource identifier of the customer managed encryption key used to protect a resource. Has the form: `projects/my-project/locations/my-region/keyRings/my-kr/cryptoKeys/my-key`. The key needs to be in the same region as where the compute resource is created. }, "etag": "A String", # Optional. Used to perform consistent read-modify-write updates. If not set, a blind "overwrite" update happens. + "labels": { # Labels for the ReasoningEngine. + "a_key": "A String", + }, "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the ReasoningEngine. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/reasoningEngines/{reasoning_engine}` "spec": { # ReasoningEngine configurations # Optional. Configurations of the ReasoningEngine "agentFramework": "A String", # Optional. The OSS agent framework used to develop the agent. Currently supported values: "google-adk", "langchain", "langgraph", "ag2", "llama-index", "custom". diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.deploymentResourcePools.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.deploymentResourcePools.html index bc3d7e295a0..65341810955 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.deploymentResourcePools.html +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.deploymentResourcePools.html @@ -523,6 +523,7 @@

Method Details

"requiredReplicaCount": 42, # Optional. Number of required available replicas for the deployment to succeed. This field is only needed when partial deployment/mutation is desired. If set, the deploy/mutate operation will succeed once available_replica_count reaches required_replica_count, and the rest of the replicas will be retried. If not set, the default required_replica_count will be min_replica_count. "spot": True or False, # Optional. If true, schedule the deployment workload on [spot VMs](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/spot-vms). }, + "disableContainerLogging": True or False, # For custom-trained Models and AutoML Tabular Models, the container of the DeployedModel instances will send `stderr` and `stdout` streams to Cloud Logging by default. Please note that the logs incur cost, which are subject to [Cloud Logging pricing](https://cloud.google.com/logging/pricing). User can disable container logging by setting this flag to true. "disableExplanations": True or False, # If true, deploy the model without explainable feature, regardless the existence of Model.explanation_spec or explanation_spec. "displayName": "A String", # The display name of the DeployedModel. If not provided upon creation, the Model's display_name is used. "enableAccessLogging": True or False, # If true, online prediction access logs are sent to Cloud Logging. These logs are like standard server access logs, containing information like timestamp and latency for each prediction request. Note that logs may incur a cost, especially if your project receives prediction requests at a high queries per second rate (QPS). Estimate your costs before enabling this option. diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.endpoints.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.endpoints.html index c27806b555b..30b81327ec3 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.endpoints.html +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.endpoints.html @@ -735,6 +735,7 @@

Method Details

"requiredReplicaCount": 42, # Optional. Number of required available replicas for the deployment to succeed. This field is only needed when partial deployment/mutation is desired. If set, the deploy/mutate operation will succeed once available_replica_count reaches required_replica_count, and the rest of the replicas will be retried. If not set, the default required_replica_count will be min_replica_count. "spot": True or False, # Optional. If true, schedule the deployment workload on [spot VMs](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/spot-vms). }, + "disableContainerLogging": True or False, # For custom-trained Models and AutoML Tabular Models, the container of the DeployedModel instances will send `stderr` and `stdout` streams to Cloud Logging by default. Please note that the logs incur cost, which are subject to [Cloud Logging pricing](https://cloud.google.com/logging/pricing). User can disable container logging by setting this flag to true. "disableExplanations": True or False, # If true, deploy the model without explainable feature, regardless the existence of Model.explanation_spec or explanation_spec. "displayName": "A String", # The display name of the DeployedModel. If not provided upon creation, the Model's display_name is used. "enableAccessLogging": True or False, # If true, online prediction access logs are sent to Cloud Logging. These logs are like standard server access logs, containing information like timestamp and latency for each prediction request. Note that logs may incur a cost, especially if your project receives prediction requests at a high queries per second rate (QPS). Estimate your costs before enabling this option. @@ -1065,6 +1066,7 @@

Method Details

"requiredReplicaCount": 42, # Optional. Number of required available replicas for the deployment to succeed. This field is only needed when partial deployment/mutation is desired. If set, the deploy/mutate operation will succeed once available_replica_count reaches required_replica_count, and the rest of the replicas will be retried. If not set, the default required_replica_count will be min_replica_count. "spot": True or False, # Optional. If true, schedule the deployment workload on [spot VMs](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/spot-vms). }, + "disableContainerLogging": True or False, # For custom-trained Models and AutoML Tabular Models, the container of the DeployedModel instances will send `stderr` and `stdout` streams to Cloud Logging by default. Please note that the logs incur cost, which are subject to [Cloud Logging pricing](https://cloud.google.com/logging/pricing). User can disable container logging by setting this flag to true. "disableExplanations": True or False, # If true, deploy the model without explainable feature, regardless the existence of Model.explanation_spec or explanation_spec. "displayName": "A String", # The display name of the DeployedModel. If not provided upon creation, the Model's display_name is used. "enableAccessLogging": True or False, # If true, online prediction access logs are sent to Cloud Logging. These logs are like standard server access logs, containing information like timestamp and latency for each prediction request. Note that logs may incur a cost, especially if your project receives prediction requests at a high queries per second rate (QPS). Estimate your costs before enabling this option. @@ -2523,6 +2525,7 @@

Method Details

"requiredReplicaCount": 42, # Optional. Number of required available replicas for the deployment to succeed. This field is only needed when partial deployment/mutation is desired. If set, the deploy/mutate operation will succeed once available_replica_count reaches required_replica_count, and the rest of the replicas will be retried. If not set, the default required_replica_count will be min_replica_count. "spot": True or False, # Optional. If true, schedule the deployment workload on [spot VMs](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/spot-vms). }, + "disableContainerLogging": True or False, # For custom-trained Models and AutoML Tabular Models, the container of the DeployedModel instances will send `stderr` and `stdout` streams to Cloud Logging by default. Please note that the logs incur cost, which are subject to [Cloud Logging pricing](https://cloud.google.com/logging/pricing). User can disable container logging by setting this flag to true. "disableExplanations": True or False, # If true, deploy the model without explainable feature, regardless the existence of Model.explanation_spec or explanation_spec. "displayName": "A String", # The display name of the DeployedModel. If not provided upon creation, the Model's display_name is used. "enableAccessLogging": True or False, # If true, online prediction access logs are sent to Cloud Logging. These logs are like standard server access logs, containing information like timestamp and latency for each prediction request. Note that logs may incur a cost, especially if your project receives prediction requests at a high queries per second rate (QPS). Estimate your costs before enabling this option. @@ -2843,6 +2846,7 @@

Method Details

"requiredReplicaCount": 42, # Optional. Number of required available replicas for the deployment to succeed. This field is only needed when partial deployment/mutation is desired. If set, the deploy/mutate operation will succeed once available_replica_count reaches required_replica_count, and the rest of the replicas will be retried. If not set, the default required_replica_count will be min_replica_count. "spot": True or False, # Optional. If true, schedule the deployment workload on [spot VMs](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/spot-vms). }, + "disableContainerLogging": True or False, # For custom-trained Models and AutoML Tabular Models, the container of the DeployedModel instances will send `stderr` and `stdout` streams to Cloud Logging by default. Please note that the logs incur cost, which are subject to [Cloud Logging pricing](https://cloud.google.com/logging/pricing). User can disable container logging by setting this flag to true. "disableExplanations": True or False, # If true, deploy the model without explainable feature, regardless the existence of Model.explanation_spec or explanation_spec. "displayName": "A String", # The display name of the DeployedModel. If not provided upon creation, the Model's display_name is used. "enableAccessLogging": True or False, # If true, online prediction access logs are sent to Cloud Logging. These logs are like standard server access logs, containing information like timestamp and latency for each prediction request. Note that logs may incur a cost, especially if your project receives prediction requests at a high queries per second rate (QPS). Estimate your costs before enabling this option. @@ -3126,6 +3130,7 @@

Method Details

"requiredReplicaCount": 42, # Optional. Number of required available replicas for the deployment to succeed. This field is only needed when partial deployment/mutation is desired. If set, the deploy/mutate operation will succeed once available_replica_count reaches required_replica_count, and the rest of the replicas will be retried. If not set, the default required_replica_count will be min_replica_count. "spot": True or False, # Optional. If true, schedule the deployment workload on [spot VMs](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/spot-vms). }, + "disableContainerLogging": True or False, # For custom-trained Models and AutoML Tabular Models, the container of the DeployedModel instances will send `stderr` and `stdout` streams to Cloud Logging by default. Please note that the logs incur cost, which are subject to [Cloud Logging pricing](https://cloud.google.com/logging/pricing). User can disable container logging by setting this flag to true. "disableExplanations": True or False, # If true, deploy the model without explainable feature, regardless the existence of Model.explanation_spec or explanation_spec. "displayName": "A String", # The display name of the DeployedModel. If not provided upon creation, the Model's display_name is used. "enableAccessLogging": True or False, # If true, online prediction access logs are sent to Cloud Logging. These logs are like standard server access logs, containing information like timestamp and latency for each prediction request. Note that logs may incur a cost, especially if your project receives prediction requests at a high queries per second rate (QPS). Estimate your costs before enabling this option. @@ -3373,6 +3378,7 @@

Method Details

"requiredReplicaCount": 42, # Optional. Number of required available replicas for the deployment to succeed. This field is only needed when partial deployment/mutation is desired. If set, the deploy/mutate operation will succeed once available_replica_count reaches required_replica_count, and the rest of the replicas will be retried. If not set, the default required_replica_count will be min_replica_count. "spot": True or False, # Optional. If true, schedule the deployment workload on [spot VMs](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/spot-vms). }, + "disableContainerLogging": True or False, # For custom-trained Models and AutoML Tabular Models, the container of the DeployedModel instances will send `stderr` and `stdout` streams to Cloud Logging by default. Please note that the logs incur cost, which are subject to [Cloud Logging pricing](https://cloud.google.com/logging/pricing). User can disable container logging by setting this flag to true. "disableExplanations": True or False, # If true, deploy the model without explainable feature, regardless the existence of Model.explanation_spec or explanation_spec. "displayName": "A String", # The display name of the DeployedModel. If not provided upon creation, the Model's display_name is used. "enableAccessLogging": True or False, # If true, online prediction access logs are sent to Cloud Logging. These logs are like standard server access logs, containing information like timestamp and latency for each prediction request. Note that logs may incur a cost, especially if your project receives prediction requests at a high queries per second rate (QPS). Estimate your costs before enabling this option. @@ -3645,6 +3651,7 @@

Method Details

"requiredReplicaCount": 42, # Optional. Number of required available replicas for the deployment to succeed. This field is only needed when partial deployment/mutation is desired. If set, the deploy/mutate operation will succeed once available_replica_count reaches required_replica_count, and the rest of the replicas will be retried. If not set, the default required_replica_count will be min_replica_count. "spot": True or False, # Optional. If true, schedule the deployment workload on [spot VMs](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/spot-vms). }, + "disableContainerLogging": True or False, # For custom-trained Models and AutoML Tabular Models, the container of the DeployedModel instances will send `stderr` and `stdout` streams to Cloud Logging by default. Please note that the logs incur cost, which are subject to [Cloud Logging pricing](https://cloud.google.com/logging/pricing). User can disable container logging by setting this flag to true. "disableExplanations": True or False, # If true, deploy the model without explainable feature, regardless the existence of Model.explanation_spec or explanation_spec. "displayName": "A String", # The display name of the DeployedModel. If not provided upon creation, the Model's display_name is used. "enableAccessLogging": True or False, # If true, online prediction access logs are sent to Cloud Logging. These logs are like standard server access logs, containing information like timestamp and latency for each prediction request. Note that logs may incur a cost, especially if your project receives prediction requests at a high queries per second rate (QPS). Estimate your costs before enabling this option. @@ -5067,6 +5074,7 @@

Method Details

"requiredReplicaCount": 42, # Optional. Number of required available replicas for the deployment to succeed. This field is only needed when partial deployment/mutation is desired. If set, the deploy/mutate operation will succeed once available_replica_count reaches required_replica_count, and the rest of the replicas will be retried. If not set, the default required_replica_count will be min_replica_count. "spot": True or False, # Optional. If true, schedule the deployment workload on [spot VMs](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/spot-vms). }, + "disableContainerLogging": True or False, # For custom-trained Models and AutoML Tabular Models, the container of the DeployedModel instances will send `stderr` and `stdout` streams to Cloud Logging by default. Please note that the logs incur cost, which are subject to [Cloud Logging pricing](https://cloud.google.com/logging/pricing). User can disable container logging by setting this flag to true. "disableExplanations": True or False, # If true, deploy the model without explainable feature, regardless the existence of Model.explanation_spec or explanation_spec. "displayName": "A String", # The display name of the DeployedModel. If not provided upon creation, the Model's display_name is used. "enableAccessLogging": True or False, # If true, online prediction access logs are sent to Cloud Logging. These logs are like standard server access logs, containing information like timestamp and latency for each prediction request. Note that logs may incur a cost, especially if your project receives prediction requests at a high queries per second rate (QPS). Estimate your costs before enabling this option. diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.html index a45ba7916b1..c22dfe7cea9 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.html @@ -1917,8 +1917,17 @@

Method Details

}, "metricResults": [ # Metric results for each instance. The order of the metric results is guaranteed to be the same as the order of the instances in the request. { # Result for a single metric on a single instance. - "explanation": "A String", # The explanation for the metric result. - "rubricVerdicts": [ # For rubric-based metrics, the verdicts for each rubric. + "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # Output only. The error status for the metric result. + "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code. + "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use. + { + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL. + }, + ], + "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client. + }, + "explanation": "A String", # Output only. The explanation for the metric result. + "rubricVerdicts": [ # Output only. For rubric-based metrics, the verdicts for each rubric. { # Represents the verdict of an evaluation against a single rubric. "evaluatedRubric": { # Message representing a single testable criterion for evaluation. One input prompt could have multiple rubrics. # Required. The full rubric definition that was evaluated. Storing this ensures the verdict is self-contained and understandable, especially if the original rubric definition changes or was dynamically generated. "content": { # Content of the rubric, defining the testable criteria. # Required. The actual testable criteria for the rubric. @@ -1934,7 +1943,7 @@

Method Details

"verdict": True or False, # Required. Outcome of the evaluation against the rubric, represented as a boolean. `true` indicates a "Pass", `false` indicates a "Fail". }, ], - "score": 3.14, # The score for the metric. Please refer to each metric's documentation for the meaning of the score. + "score": 3.14, # Output only. The score for the metric. Please refer to each metric's documentation for the meaning of the score. }, ], "metricxResult": { # Spec for MetricX result - calculates the MetricX score for the given instance using the version specified in the spec. # Result for Metricx metric. diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.html index df4cf7fecef..fc80c1fba26 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.html +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.html @@ -247,6 +247,9 @@

Method Details

"kmsKeyName": "A String", # Required. The Cloud KMS resource identifier of the customer managed encryption key used to protect a resource. Has the form: `projects/my-project/locations/my-region/keyRings/my-kr/cryptoKeys/my-key`. The key needs to be in the same region as where the compute resource is created. }, "etag": "A String", # Optional. Used to perform consistent read-modify-write updates. If not set, a blind "overwrite" update happens. + "labels": { # Labels for the ReasoningEngine. + "a_key": "A String", + }, "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the ReasoningEngine. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/reasoningEngines/{reasoning_engine}` "spec": { # ReasoningEngine configurations # Optional. Configurations of the ReasoningEngine "agentFramework": "A String", # Optional. The OSS agent framework used to develop the agent. Currently supported values: "google-adk", "langchain", "langgraph", "ag2", "llama-index", "custom". @@ -485,6 +488,9 @@

Method Details

"kmsKeyName": "A String", # Required. The Cloud KMS resource identifier of the customer managed encryption key used to protect a resource. Has the form: `projects/my-project/locations/my-region/keyRings/my-kr/cryptoKeys/my-key`. The key needs to be in the same region as where the compute resource is created. }, "etag": "A String", # Optional. Used to perform consistent read-modify-write updates. If not set, a blind "overwrite" update happens. + "labels": { # Labels for the ReasoningEngine. + "a_key": "A String", + }, "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the ReasoningEngine. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/reasoningEngines/{reasoning_engine}` "spec": { # ReasoningEngine configurations # Optional. Configurations of the ReasoningEngine "agentFramework": "A String", # Optional. The OSS agent framework used to develop the agent. Currently supported values: "google-adk", "langchain", "langgraph", "ag2", "llama-index", "custom". @@ -665,6 +671,9 @@

Method Details

"kmsKeyName": "A String", # Required. The Cloud KMS resource identifier of the customer managed encryption key used to protect a resource. Has the form: `projects/my-project/locations/my-region/keyRings/my-kr/cryptoKeys/my-key`. The key needs to be in the same region as where the compute resource is created. }, "etag": "A String", # Optional. Used to perform consistent read-modify-write updates. If not set, a blind "overwrite" update happens. + "labels": { # Labels for the ReasoningEngine. + "a_key": "A String", + }, "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the ReasoningEngine. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/reasoningEngines/{reasoning_engine}` "spec": { # ReasoningEngine configurations # Optional. Configurations of the ReasoningEngine "agentFramework": "A String", # Optional. The OSS agent framework used to develop the agent. Currently supported values: "google-adk", "langchain", "langgraph", "ag2", "llama-index", "custom". @@ -850,6 +859,9 @@

Method Details

"kmsKeyName": "A String", # Required. The Cloud KMS resource identifier of the customer managed encryption key used to protect a resource. Has the form: `projects/my-project/locations/my-region/keyRings/my-kr/cryptoKeys/my-key`. The key needs to be in the same region as where the compute resource is created. }, "etag": "A String", # Optional. Used to perform consistent read-modify-write updates. If not set, a blind "overwrite" update happens. + "labels": { # Labels for the ReasoningEngine. + "a_key": "A String", + }, "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the ReasoningEngine. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/reasoningEngines/{reasoning_engine}` "spec": { # ReasoningEngine configurations # Optional. Configurations of the ReasoningEngine "agentFramework": "A String", # Optional. The OSS agent framework used to develop the agent. Currently supported values: "google-adk", "langchain", "langgraph", "ag2", "llama-index", "custom". diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.memories.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.memories.html index b3300c825e0..0088c38407d 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.memories.html +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.memories.html @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@

Instance Methods

get(name, x__xgafv=None)

Get a Memory.

- list(parent, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+ list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

List Memories.

list_next()

@@ -125,7 +125,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when this Memory was created. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the Memory. "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the Memory. - "expireTime": "A String", # Optional. Timestamp of when this resource is considered expired. This is *always* provided on output, regardless of what `expiration` was sent on input. + "expireTime": "A String", # Optional. Timestamp of when this resource is considered expired. This is *always* provided on output when `expiration` is set on input, regardless of whether `expire_time` or `ttl` was provided. "fact": "A String", # Required. Semantic knowledge extracted from the source content. "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the Memory. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/reasoningEngines/{reasoning_engine}/memories/{memory}` "scope": { # Required. Immutable. The scope of the Memory. Memories are isolated within their scope. The scope is defined when creating or generating memories. Scope values cannot contain the wildcard character '*'. @@ -327,7 +327,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when this Memory was created. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the Memory. "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the Memory. - "expireTime": "A String", # Optional. Timestamp of when this resource is considered expired. This is *always* provided on output, regardless of what `expiration` was sent on input. + "expireTime": "A String", # Optional. Timestamp of when this resource is considered expired. This is *always* provided on output when `expiration` is set on input, regardless of whether `expire_time` or `ttl` was provided. "fact": "A String", # Required. Semantic knowledge extracted from the source content. "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the Memory. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/reasoningEngines/{reasoning_engine}/memories/{memory}` "scope": { # Required. Immutable. The scope of the Memory. Memories are isolated within their scope. The scope is defined when creating or generating memories. Scope values cannot contain the wildcard character '*'. @@ -339,12 +339,13 @@

Method Details

- list(parent, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None) + list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)
List Memories.
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The resource name of the ReasoningEngine to list the Memories under. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/reasoningEngines/{reasoning_engine}` (required)
   filter: string, Optional. The standard list filter. More detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). Supported fields (equality match only): * `scope` (as a JSON string)
+  orderBy: string, Optional. The standard list order by string. If not specified, the default order is `create_time desc`. If specified, the default sorting order of provided fields is ascending. More detail in [AIP-132](https://google.aip.dev/132). Supported fields: * `create_time` * `update_time`
   pageSize: integer, Optional. The standard list page size.
   pageToken: string, Optional. The standard list page token.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
@@ -361,7 +362,7 @@ 

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when this Memory was created. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the Memory. "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the Memory. - "expireTime": "A String", # Optional. Timestamp of when this resource is considered expired. This is *always* provided on output, regardless of what `expiration` was sent on input. + "expireTime": "A String", # Optional. Timestamp of when this resource is considered expired. This is *always* provided on output when `expiration` is set on input, regardless of whether `expire_time` or `ttl` was provided. "fact": "A String", # Required. Semantic knowledge extracted from the source content. "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the Memory. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/reasoningEngines/{reasoning_engine}/memories/{memory}` "scope": { # Required. Immutable. The scope of the Memory. Memories are isolated within their scope. The scope is defined when creating or generating memories. Scope values cannot contain the wildcard character '*'. @@ -402,7 +403,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when this Memory was created. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the Memory. "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the Memory. - "expireTime": "A String", # Optional. Timestamp of when this resource is considered expired. This is *always* provided on output, regardless of what `expiration` was sent on input. + "expireTime": "A String", # Optional. Timestamp of when this resource is considered expired. This is *always* provided on output when `expiration` is set on input, regardless of whether `expire_time` or `ttl` was provided. "fact": "A String", # Required. Semantic knowledge extracted from the source content. "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the Memory. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/reasoningEngines/{reasoning_engine}/memories/{memory}` "scope": { # Required. Immutable. The scope of the Memory. Memories are isolated within their scope. The scope is defined when creating or generating memories. Scope values cannot contain the wildcard character '*'. @@ -482,7 +483,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when this Memory was created. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the Memory. "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the Memory. - "expireTime": "A String", # Optional. Timestamp of when this resource is considered expired. This is *always* provided on output, regardless of what `expiration` was sent on input. + "expireTime": "A String", # Optional. Timestamp of when this resource is considered expired. This is *always* provided on output when `expiration` is set on input, regardless of whether `expire_time` or `ttl` was provided. "fact": "A String", # Required. Semantic knowledge extracted from the source content. "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the Memory. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/reasoningEngines/{reasoning_engine}/memories/{memory}` "scope": { # Required. Immutable. The scope of the Memory. Memories are isolated within their scope. The scope is defined when creating or generating memories. Scope values cannot contain the wildcard character '*'. diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.sandboxEnvironments.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.sandboxEnvironments.html index bfb55a75d79..35dfa1d353d 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.sandboxEnvironments.html +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.sandboxEnvironments.html @@ -118,20 +118,10 @@

Method Details

{ # SandboxEnvironment is a containerized environment that provides a customizable secure execution runtime for AI agents. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when this SandboxEnvironment was created. "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display name of the SandboxEnvironment. - "metadata": "", # Output only. Additional information about the SandboxEnvironment. "name": "A String", # Identifier. The name of the SandboxEnvironment. "spec": { # The specification of a SandboxEnvironment. # Optional. The configuration of the SandboxEnvironment. "codeExecutionEnvironment": { # The code execution environment with customized settings. # Optional. The code execution environment. "codeLanguage": "A String", # The coding language supported in this environment. - "dependencies": [ # Optional. The additional dependencies to install in the code execution environment. For example, "pandas==2.2.3". - "A String", - ], - "env": [ # Optional. The environment variables to set in the code execution environment. - { # Represents an environment variable present in a Container or Python Module. - "name": "A String", # Required. Name of the environment variable. Must be a valid C identifier. - "value": "A String", # Required. Variables that reference a $(VAR_NAME) are expanded using the previous defined environment variables in the container and any service environment variables. If a variable cannot be resolved, the reference in the input string will be unchanged. The $(VAR_NAME) syntax can be escaped with a double $$, ie: $$(VAR_NAME). Escaped references will never be expanded, regardless of whether the variable exists or not. - }, - ], "machineConfig": "A String", # The machine config of the code execution environment. }, }, @@ -266,20 +256,10 @@

Method Details

{ # SandboxEnvironment is a containerized environment that provides a customizable secure execution runtime for AI agents. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when this SandboxEnvironment was created. "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display name of the SandboxEnvironment. - "metadata": "", # Output only. Additional information about the SandboxEnvironment. "name": "A String", # Identifier. The name of the SandboxEnvironment. "spec": { # The specification of a SandboxEnvironment. # Optional. The configuration of the SandboxEnvironment. "codeExecutionEnvironment": { # The code execution environment with customized settings. # Optional. The code execution environment. "codeLanguage": "A String", # The coding language supported in this environment. - "dependencies": [ # Optional. The additional dependencies to install in the code execution environment. For example, "pandas==2.2.3". - "A String", - ], - "env": [ # Optional. The environment variables to set in the code execution environment. - { # Represents an environment variable present in a Container or Python Module. - "name": "A String", # Required. Name of the environment variable. Must be a valid C identifier. - "value": "A String", # Required. Variables that reference a $(VAR_NAME) are expanded using the previous defined environment variables in the container and any service environment variables. If a variable cannot be resolved, the reference in the input string will be unchanged. The $(VAR_NAME) syntax can be escaped with a double $$, ie: $$(VAR_NAME). Escaped references will never be expanded, regardless of whether the variable exists or not. - }, - ], "machineConfig": "A String", # The machine config of the code execution environment. }, }, @@ -311,20 +291,10 @@

Method Details

{ # SandboxEnvironment is a containerized environment that provides a customizable secure execution runtime for AI agents. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when this SandboxEnvironment was created. "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display name of the SandboxEnvironment. - "metadata": "", # Output only. Additional information about the SandboxEnvironment. "name": "A String", # Identifier. The name of the SandboxEnvironment. "spec": { # The specification of a SandboxEnvironment. # Optional. The configuration of the SandboxEnvironment. "codeExecutionEnvironment": { # The code execution environment with customized settings. # Optional. The code execution environment. "codeLanguage": "A String", # The coding language supported in this environment. - "dependencies": [ # Optional. The additional dependencies to install in the code execution environment. For example, "pandas==2.2.3". - "A String", - ], - "env": [ # Optional. The environment variables to set in the code execution environment. - { # Represents an environment variable present in a Container or Python Module. - "name": "A String", # Required. Name of the environment variable. Must be a valid C identifier. - "value": "A String", # Required. Variables that reference a $(VAR_NAME) are expanded using the previous defined environment variables in the container and any service environment variables. If a variable cannot be resolved, the reference in the input string will be unchanged. The $(VAR_NAME) syntax can be escaped with a double $$, ie: $$(VAR_NAME). Escaped references will never be expanded, regardless of whether the variable exists or not. - }, - ], "machineConfig": "A String", # The machine config of the code execution environment. }, }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.tuningJobs.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.tuningJobs.html index cf3119ce0a5..5af15df7597 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.tuningJobs.html +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.tuningJobs.html @@ -312,6 +312,7 @@

Method Details

}, }, }, + "exportLastCheckpointOnly": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, disable intermediate checkpoints for Preference Optimization and only the last checkpoint will be exported. Otherwise, enable intermediate checkpoints for Preference Optimization. Default is false. "hyperParameters": { # Hyperparameters for Preference Optimization. # Optional. Hyperparameters for Preference Optimization. "adapterSize": "A String", # Optional. Adapter size for preference optimization. "beta": 3.14, # Optional. Weight for KL Divergence regularization. @@ -1001,6 +1002,7 @@

Method Details

}, }, }, + "exportLastCheckpointOnly": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, disable intermediate checkpoints for Preference Optimization and only the last checkpoint will be exported. Otherwise, enable intermediate checkpoints for Preference Optimization. Default is false. "hyperParameters": { # Hyperparameters for Preference Optimization. # Optional. Hyperparameters for Preference Optimization. "adapterSize": "A String", # Optional. Adapter size for preference optimization. "beta": 3.14, # Optional. Weight for KL Divergence regularization. @@ -1697,6 +1699,7 @@

Method Details

}, }, }, + "exportLastCheckpointOnly": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, disable intermediate checkpoints for Preference Optimization and only the last checkpoint will be exported. Otherwise, enable intermediate checkpoints for Preference Optimization. Default is false. "hyperParameters": { # Hyperparameters for Preference Optimization. # Optional. Hyperparameters for Preference Optimization. "adapterSize": "A String", # Optional. Adapter size for preference optimization. "beta": 3.14, # Optional. Weight for KL Divergence regularization. @@ -2399,6 +2402,7 @@

Method Details

}, }, }, + "exportLastCheckpointOnly": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, disable intermediate checkpoints for Preference Optimization and only the last checkpoint will be exported. Otherwise, enable intermediate checkpoints for Preference Optimization. Default is false. "hyperParameters": { # Hyperparameters for Preference Optimization. # Optional. Hyperparameters for Preference Optimization. "adapterSize": "A String", # Optional. Adapter size for preference optimization. "beta": 3.14, # Optional. Weight for KL Divergence regularization. @@ -3234,6 +3238,7 @@

Method Details

}, }, }, + "exportLastCheckpointOnly": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, disable intermediate checkpoints for Preference Optimization and only the last checkpoint will be exported. Otherwise, enable intermediate checkpoints for Preference Optimization. Default is false. "hyperParameters": { # Hyperparameters for Preference Optimization. # Optional. Hyperparameters for Preference Optimization. "adapterSize": "A String", # Optional. Adapter size for preference optimization. "beta": 3.14, # Optional. Weight for KL Divergence regularization. diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.reasoningEngines.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.reasoningEngines.html index 5991fa31b52..75fead300de 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.reasoningEngines.html +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.reasoningEngines.html @@ -231,6 +231,9 @@

Method Details

"kmsKeyName": "A String", # Required. The Cloud KMS resource identifier of the customer managed encryption key used to protect a resource. Has the form: `projects/my-project/locations/my-region/keyRings/my-kr/cryptoKeys/my-key`. The key needs to be in the same region as where the compute resource is created. }, "etag": "A String", # Optional. Used to perform consistent read-modify-write updates. If not set, a blind "overwrite" update happens. + "labels": { # Labels for the ReasoningEngine. + "a_key": "A String", + }, "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the ReasoningEngine. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/reasoningEngines/{reasoning_engine}` "spec": { # ReasoningEngine configurations # Optional. Configurations of the ReasoningEngine "agentFramework": "A String", # Optional. The OSS agent framework used to develop the agent. Currently supported values: "google-adk", "langchain", "langgraph", "ag2", "llama-index", "custom". @@ -470,6 +473,9 @@

Method Details

"kmsKeyName": "A String", # Required. The Cloud KMS resource identifier of the customer managed encryption key used to protect a resource. Has the form: `projects/my-project/locations/my-region/keyRings/my-kr/cryptoKeys/my-key`. The key needs to be in the same region as where the compute resource is created. }, "etag": "A String", # Optional. Used to perform consistent read-modify-write updates. If not set, a blind "overwrite" update happens. + "labels": { # Labels for the ReasoningEngine. + "a_key": "A String", + }, "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the ReasoningEngine. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/reasoningEngines/{reasoning_engine}` "spec": { # ReasoningEngine configurations # Optional. Configurations of the ReasoningEngine "agentFramework": "A String", # Optional. The OSS agent framework used to develop the agent. Currently supported values: "google-adk", "langchain", "langgraph", "ag2", "llama-index", "custom". @@ -650,6 +656,9 @@

Method Details

"kmsKeyName": "A String", # Required. The Cloud KMS resource identifier of the customer managed encryption key used to protect a resource. Has the form: `projects/my-project/locations/my-region/keyRings/my-kr/cryptoKeys/my-key`. The key needs to be in the same region as where the compute resource is created. }, "etag": "A String", # Optional. Used to perform consistent read-modify-write updates. If not set, a blind "overwrite" update happens. + "labels": { # Labels for the ReasoningEngine. + "a_key": "A String", + }, "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the ReasoningEngine. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/reasoningEngines/{reasoning_engine}` "spec": { # ReasoningEngine configurations # Optional. Configurations of the ReasoningEngine "agentFramework": "A String", # Optional. The OSS agent framework used to develop the agent. Currently supported values: "google-adk", "langchain", "langgraph", "ag2", "llama-index", "custom". @@ -835,6 +844,9 @@

Method Details

"kmsKeyName": "A String", # Required. The Cloud KMS resource identifier of the customer managed encryption key used to protect a resource. Has the form: `projects/my-project/locations/my-region/keyRings/my-kr/cryptoKeys/my-key`. The key needs to be in the same region as where the compute resource is created. }, "etag": "A String", # Optional. Used to perform consistent read-modify-write updates. If not set, a blind "overwrite" update happens. + "labels": { # Labels for the ReasoningEngine. + "a_key": "A String", + }, "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the ReasoningEngine. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/reasoningEngines/{reasoning_engine}` "spec": { # ReasoningEngine configurations # Optional. Configurations of the ReasoningEngine "agentFramework": "A String", # Optional. The OSS agent framework used to develop the agent. Currently supported values: "google-adk", "langchain", "langgraph", "ag2", "llama-index", "custom". diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.reasoningEngines.memories.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.reasoningEngines.memories.html index 64fa4e179a8..f7d53e66596 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.reasoningEngines.memories.html +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.reasoningEngines.memories.html @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@

Instance Methods

get(name, x__xgafv=None)

Get a Memory.

- list(parent, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+ list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

List Memories.

list_next()

@@ -120,7 +120,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when this Memory was created. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the Memory. "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the Memory. - "expireTime": "A String", # Optional. Timestamp of when this resource is considered expired. This is *always* provided on output, regardless of what `expiration` was sent on input. + "expireTime": "A String", # Optional. Timestamp of when this resource is considered expired. This is *always* provided on output when `expiration` is set on input, regardless of whether `expire_time` or `ttl` was provided. "fact": "A String", # Required. Semantic knowledge extracted from the source content. "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the Memory. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/reasoningEngines/{reasoning_engine}/memories/{memory}` "scope": { # Required. Immutable. The scope of the Memory. Memories are isolated within their scope. The scope is defined when creating or generating memories. Scope values cannot contain the wildcard character '*'. @@ -322,7 +322,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when this Memory was created. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the Memory. "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the Memory. - "expireTime": "A String", # Optional. Timestamp of when this resource is considered expired. This is *always* provided on output, regardless of what `expiration` was sent on input. + "expireTime": "A String", # Optional. Timestamp of when this resource is considered expired. This is *always* provided on output when `expiration` is set on input, regardless of whether `expire_time` or `ttl` was provided. "fact": "A String", # Required. Semantic knowledge extracted from the source content. "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the Memory. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/reasoningEngines/{reasoning_engine}/memories/{memory}` "scope": { # Required. Immutable. The scope of the Memory. Memories are isolated within their scope. The scope is defined when creating or generating memories. Scope values cannot contain the wildcard character '*'. @@ -334,12 +334,13 @@

Method Details

- list(parent, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None) + list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)
List Memories.
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The resource name of the ReasoningEngine to list the Memories under. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/reasoningEngines/{reasoning_engine}` (required)
   filter: string, Optional. The standard list filter. More detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). Supported fields (equality match only): * `scope` (as a JSON string)
+  orderBy: string, Optional. The standard list order by string. If not specified, the default order is `create_time desc`. If specified, the default sorting order of provided fields is ascending. More detail in [AIP-132](https://google.aip.dev/132). Supported fields: * `create_time` * `update_time`
   pageSize: integer, Optional. The standard list page size.
   pageToken: string, Optional. The standard list page token.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
@@ -356,7 +357,7 @@ 

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when this Memory was created. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the Memory. "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the Memory. - "expireTime": "A String", # Optional. Timestamp of when this resource is considered expired. This is *always* provided on output, regardless of what `expiration` was sent on input. + "expireTime": "A String", # Optional. Timestamp of when this resource is considered expired. This is *always* provided on output when `expiration` is set on input, regardless of whether `expire_time` or `ttl` was provided. "fact": "A String", # Required. Semantic knowledge extracted from the source content. "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the Memory. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/reasoningEngines/{reasoning_engine}/memories/{memory}` "scope": { # Required. Immutable. The scope of the Memory. Memories are isolated within their scope. The scope is defined when creating or generating memories. Scope values cannot contain the wildcard character '*'. @@ -397,7 +398,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when this Memory was created. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the Memory. "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the Memory. - "expireTime": "A String", # Optional. Timestamp of when this resource is considered expired. This is *always* provided on output, regardless of what `expiration` was sent on input. + "expireTime": "A String", # Optional. Timestamp of when this resource is considered expired. This is *always* provided on output when `expiration` is set on input, regardless of whether `expire_time` or `ttl` was provided. "fact": "A String", # Required. Semantic knowledge extracted from the source content. "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the Memory. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/reasoningEngines/{reasoning_engine}/memories/{memory}` "scope": { # Required. Immutable. The scope of the Memory. Memories are isolated within their scope. The scope is defined when creating or generating memories. Scope values cannot contain the wildcard character '*'. @@ -477,7 +478,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when this Memory was created. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the Memory. "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the Memory. - "expireTime": "A String", # Optional. Timestamp of when this resource is considered expired. This is *always* provided on output, regardless of what `expiration` was sent on input. + "expireTime": "A String", # Optional. Timestamp of when this resource is considered expired. This is *always* provided on output when `expiration` is set on input, regardless of whether `expire_time` or `ttl` was provided. "fact": "A String", # Required. Semantic knowledge extracted from the source content. "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the Memory. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/reasoningEngines/{reasoning_engine}/memories/{memory}` "scope": { # Required. Immutable. The scope of the Memory. Memories are isolated within their scope. The scope is defined when creating or generating memories. Scope values cannot contain the wildcard character '*'. diff --git a/docs/dyn/alloydb_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/alloydb_v1.projects.locations.html index 84a81a23edd..163bb541f0a 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/alloydb_v1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/alloydb_v1.projects.locations.html @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/alloydb_v1alpha.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/alloydb_v1alpha.projects.locations.html index 2234500c30b..f995e6090b8 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/alloydb_v1alpha.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/alloydb_v1alpha.projects.locations.html @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/alloydb_v1beta.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/alloydb_v1beta.projects.locations.html index 7a5ea1573b9..6979f2b817b 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/alloydb_v1beta.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/alloydb_v1beta.projects.locations.html @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/analyticshub_v1.projects.locations.dataExchanges.html b/docs/dyn/analyticshub_v1.projects.locations.dataExchanges.html index 0a6132b6bed..bbd430460bd 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/analyticshub_v1.projects.locations.dataExchanges.html +++ b/docs/dyn/analyticshub_v1.projects.locations.dataExchanges.html @@ -378,6 +378,9 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "location": "A String", # Required. The geographic location where the dataset should reside. See https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/locations for supported locations. + "replicaLocations": [ # Optional. The geographic locations where the dataset should be replicated. See [BigQuery locations](https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/locations) for supported locations. + "A String", + ], }, "lastModifyTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when the subscription was last modified. "linkedDatasetMap": { # Output only. Map of listing resource names to associated linked resource, e.g. projects/123/locations/us/dataExchanges/456/listings/789 -> projects/123/datasets/my_dataset For listing-level subscriptions, this is a map of size 1. Only contains values if state == STATE_ACTIVE. @@ -601,6 +604,9 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "location": "A String", # Required. The geographic location where the dataset should reside. See https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/locations for supported locations. + "replicaLocations": [ # Optional. The geographic locations where the dataset should be replicated. See [BigQuery locations](https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/locations) for supported locations. + "A String", + ], }, "subscriberContact": "A String", # Email of the subscriber. "subscription": "A String", # Required. Name of the subscription to create. e.g. `subscription1` diff --git a/docs/dyn/analyticshub_v1.projects.locations.dataExchanges.listings.html b/docs/dyn/analyticshub_v1.projects.locations.dataExchanges.listings.html index 9e1f3348b26..ef329a79139 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/analyticshub_v1.projects.locations.dataExchanges.listings.html +++ b/docs/dyn/analyticshub_v1.projects.locations.dataExchanges.listings.html @@ -132,6 +132,16 @@

Method Details

"allowOnlyMetadataSharing": True or False, # Optional. If true, the listing is only available to get the resource metadata. Listing is non subscribable. "bigqueryDataset": { # A reference to a shared dataset. It is an existing BigQuery dataset with a collection of objects such as tables and views that you want to share with subscribers. When subscriber's subscribe to a listing, Analytics Hub creates a linked dataset in the subscriber's project. A Linked dataset is an opaque, read-only BigQuery dataset that serves as a _symbolic link_ to a shared dataset. # Shared dataset i.e. BigQuery dataset source. "dataset": "A String", # Optional. Resource name of the dataset source for this listing. e.g. `projects/myproject/datasets/123` + "effectiveReplicas": [ # Output only. Server-owned effective state of replicas. Contains both primary and secondary replicas. Each replica includes a system-computed (output-only) state and primary designation. + { # Represents the state of a replica of a shared dataset. It includes the geographic location of the replica and system-computed, output-only fields indicating its replication state and whether it is the primary replica. + "location": "A String", # Output only. The geographic location where the replica resides. See [BigQuery locations](https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/locations) for supported locations. Eg. "us-central1". + "primaryState": "A String", # Output only. Indicates that this replica is the primary replica. + "replicaState": "A String", # Output only. Assigned by Analytics Hub based on real BigQuery replication state. + }, + ], + "replicaLocations": [ # Optional. A list of regions where the publisher has created shared dataset replicas. + "A String", + ], "restrictedExportPolicy": { # Restricted export policy used to configure restricted export on linked dataset. # Optional. If set, restricted export policy will be propagated and enforced on the linked dataset. "enabled": True or False, # Optional. If true, enable restricted export. "restrictDirectTableAccess": True or False, # Optional. If true, restrict direct table access (read api/tabledata.list) on linked table. @@ -198,6 +208,16 @@

Method Details

"allowOnlyMetadataSharing": True or False, # Optional. If true, the listing is only available to get the resource metadata. Listing is non subscribable. "bigqueryDataset": { # A reference to a shared dataset. It is an existing BigQuery dataset with a collection of objects such as tables and views that you want to share with subscribers. When subscriber's subscribe to a listing, Analytics Hub creates a linked dataset in the subscriber's project. A Linked dataset is an opaque, read-only BigQuery dataset that serves as a _symbolic link_ to a shared dataset. # Shared dataset i.e. BigQuery dataset source. "dataset": "A String", # Optional. Resource name of the dataset source for this listing. e.g. `projects/myproject/datasets/123` + "effectiveReplicas": [ # Output only. Server-owned effective state of replicas. Contains both primary and secondary replicas. Each replica includes a system-computed (output-only) state and primary designation. + { # Represents the state of a replica of a shared dataset. It includes the geographic location of the replica and system-computed, output-only fields indicating its replication state and whether it is the primary replica. + "location": "A String", # Output only. The geographic location where the replica resides. See [BigQuery locations](https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/locations) for supported locations. Eg. "us-central1". + "primaryState": "A String", # Output only. Indicates that this replica is the primary replica. + "replicaState": "A String", # Output only. Assigned by Analytics Hub based on real BigQuery replication state. + }, + ], + "replicaLocations": [ # Optional. A list of regions where the publisher has created shared dataset replicas. + "A String", + ], "restrictedExportPolicy": { # Restricted export policy used to configure restricted export on linked dataset. # Optional. If set, restricted export policy will be propagated and enforced on the linked dataset. "enabled": True or False, # Optional. If true, enable restricted export. "restrictDirectTableAccess": True or False, # Optional. If true, restrict direct table access (read api/tabledata.list) on linked table. @@ -289,6 +309,16 @@

Method Details

"allowOnlyMetadataSharing": True or False, # Optional. If true, the listing is only available to get the resource metadata. Listing is non subscribable. "bigqueryDataset": { # A reference to a shared dataset. It is an existing BigQuery dataset with a collection of objects such as tables and views that you want to share with subscribers. When subscriber's subscribe to a listing, Analytics Hub creates a linked dataset in the subscriber's project. A Linked dataset is an opaque, read-only BigQuery dataset that serves as a _symbolic link_ to a shared dataset. # Shared dataset i.e. BigQuery dataset source. "dataset": "A String", # Optional. Resource name of the dataset source for this listing. e.g. `projects/myproject/datasets/123` + "effectiveReplicas": [ # Output only. Server-owned effective state of replicas. Contains both primary and secondary replicas. Each replica includes a system-computed (output-only) state and primary designation. + { # Represents the state of a replica of a shared dataset. It includes the geographic location of the replica and system-computed, output-only fields indicating its replication state and whether it is the primary replica. + "location": "A String", # Output only. The geographic location where the replica resides. See [BigQuery locations](https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/locations) for supported locations. Eg. "us-central1". + "primaryState": "A String", # Output only. Indicates that this replica is the primary replica. + "replicaState": "A String", # Output only. Assigned by Analytics Hub based on real BigQuery replication state. + }, + ], + "replicaLocations": [ # Optional. A list of regions where the publisher has created shared dataset replicas. + "A String", + ], "restrictedExportPolicy": { # Restricted export policy used to configure restricted export on linked dataset. # Optional. If set, restricted export policy will be propagated and enforced on the linked dataset. "enabled": True or False, # Optional. If true, enable restricted export. "restrictDirectTableAccess": True or False, # Optional. If true, restrict direct table access (read api/tabledata.list) on linked table. @@ -421,6 +451,16 @@

Method Details

"allowOnlyMetadataSharing": True or False, # Optional. If true, the listing is only available to get the resource metadata. Listing is non subscribable. "bigqueryDataset": { # A reference to a shared dataset. It is an existing BigQuery dataset with a collection of objects such as tables and views that you want to share with subscribers. When subscriber's subscribe to a listing, Analytics Hub creates a linked dataset in the subscriber's project. A Linked dataset is an opaque, read-only BigQuery dataset that serves as a _symbolic link_ to a shared dataset. # Shared dataset i.e. BigQuery dataset source. "dataset": "A String", # Optional. Resource name of the dataset source for this listing. e.g. `projects/myproject/datasets/123` + "effectiveReplicas": [ # Output only. Server-owned effective state of replicas. Contains both primary and secondary replicas. Each replica includes a system-computed (output-only) state and primary designation. + { # Represents the state of a replica of a shared dataset. It includes the geographic location of the replica and system-computed, output-only fields indicating its replication state and whether it is the primary replica. + "location": "A String", # Output only. The geographic location where the replica resides. See [BigQuery locations](https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/locations) for supported locations. Eg. "us-central1". + "primaryState": "A String", # Output only. Indicates that this replica is the primary replica. + "replicaState": "A String", # Output only. Assigned by Analytics Hub based on real BigQuery replication state. + }, + ], + "replicaLocations": [ # Optional. A list of regions where the publisher has created shared dataset replicas. + "A String", + ], "restrictedExportPolicy": { # Restricted export policy used to configure restricted export on linked dataset. # Optional. If set, restricted export policy will be propagated and enforced on the linked dataset. "enabled": True or False, # Optional. If true, enable restricted export. "restrictDirectTableAccess": True or False, # Optional. If true, restrict direct table access (read api/tabledata.list) on linked table. @@ -517,6 +557,9 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "location": "A String", # Required. The geographic location where the dataset should reside. See https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/locations for supported locations. + "replicaLocations": [ # Optional. The geographic locations where the dataset should be replicated. See [BigQuery locations](https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/locations) for supported locations. + "A String", + ], }, "lastModifyTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when the subscription was last modified. "linkedDatasetMap": { # Output only. Map of listing resource names to associated linked resource, e.g. projects/123/locations/us/dataExchanges/456/listings/789 -> projects/123/datasets/my_dataset For listing-level subscriptions, this is a map of size 1. Only contains values if state == STATE_ACTIVE. @@ -587,6 +630,16 @@

Method Details

"allowOnlyMetadataSharing": True or False, # Optional. If true, the listing is only available to get the resource metadata. Listing is non subscribable. "bigqueryDataset": { # A reference to a shared dataset. It is an existing BigQuery dataset with a collection of objects such as tables and views that you want to share with subscribers. When subscriber's subscribe to a listing, Analytics Hub creates a linked dataset in the subscriber's project. A Linked dataset is an opaque, read-only BigQuery dataset that serves as a _symbolic link_ to a shared dataset. # Shared dataset i.e. BigQuery dataset source. "dataset": "A String", # Optional. Resource name of the dataset source for this listing. e.g. `projects/myproject/datasets/123` + "effectiveReplicas": [ # Output only. Server-owned effective state of replicas. Contains both primary and secondary replicas. Each replica includes a system-computed (output-only) state and primary designation. + { # Represents the state of a replica of a shared dataset. It includes the geographic location of the replica and system-computed, output-only fields indicating its replication state and whether it is the primary replica. + "location": "A String", # Output only. The geographic location where the replica resides. See [BigQuery locations](https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/locations) for supported locations. Eg. "us-central1". + "primaryState": "A String", # Output only. Indicates that this replica is the primary replica. + "replicaState": "A String", # Output only. Assigned by Analytics Hub based on real BigQuery replication state. + }, + ], + "replicaLocations": [ # Optional. A list of regions where the publisher has created shared dataset replicas. + "A String", + ], "restrictedExportPolicy": { # Restricted export policy used to configure restricted export on linked dataset. # Optional. If set, restricted export policy will be propagated and enforced on the linked dataset. "enabled": True or False, # Optional. If true, enable restricted export. "restrictDirectTableAccess": True or False, # Optional. If true, restrict direct table access (read api/tabledata.list) on linked table. @@ -653,6 +706,16 @@

Method Details

"allowOnlyMetadataSharing": True or False, # Optional. If true, the listing is only available to get the resource metadata. Listing is non subscribable. "bigqueryDataset": { # A reference to a shared dataset. It is an existing BigQuery dataset with a collection of objects such as tables and views that you want to share with subscribers. When subscriber's subscribe to a listing, Analytics Hub creates a linked dataset in the subscriber's project. A Linked dataset is an opaque, read-only BigQuery dataset that serves as a _symbolic link_ to a shared dataset. # Shared dataset i.e. BigQuery dataset source. "dataset": "A String", # Optional. Resource name of the dataset source for this listing. e.g. `projects/myproject/datasets/123` + "effectiveReplicas": [ # Output only. Server-owned effective state of replicas. Contains both primary and secondary replicas. Each replica includes a system-computed (output-only) state and primary designation. + { # Represents the state of a replica of a shared dataset. It includes the geographic location of the replica and system-computed, output-only fields indicating its replication state and whether it is the primary replica. + "location": "A String", # Output only. The geographic location where the replica resides. See [BigQuery locations](https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/locations) for supported locations. Eg. "us-central1". + "primaryState": "A String", # Output only. Indicates that this replica is the primary replica. + "replicaState": "A String", # Output only. Assigned by Analytics Hub based on real BigQuery replication state. + }, + ], + "replicaLocations": [ # Optional. A list of regions where the publisher has created shared dataset replicas. + "A String", + ], "restrictedExportPolicy": { # Restricted export policy used to configure restricted export on linked dataset. # Optional. If set, restricted export policy will be propagated and enforced on the linked dataset. "enabled": True or False, # Optional. If true, enable restricted export. "restrictDirectTableAccess": True or False, # Optional. If true, restrict direct table access (read api/tabledata.list) on linked table. @@ -813,6 +876,9 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "location": "A String", # Required. The geographic location where the dataset should reside. See https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/locations for supported locations. + "replicaLocations": [ # Optional. The geographic locations where the dataset should be replicated. See [BigQuery locations](https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/locations) for supported locations. + "A String", + ], }, "destinationPubsubSubscription": { # Defines the destination Pub/Sub subscription. # Input only. Destination Pub/Sub subscription to create for the subscriber. "pubsubSubscription": { # Defines the destination Pub/Sub subscription. If none of `push_config`, `bigquery_config`, `cloud_storage_config`, `pubsub_export_config`, or `pubsublite_export_config` is set, then the subscriber will pull and ack messages using API methods. At most one of these fields may be set. # Required. Destination Pub/Sub subscription resource. @@ -919,6 +985,9 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "location": "A String", # Required. The geographic location where the dataset should reside. See https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/locations for supported locations. + "replicaLocations": [ # Optional. The geographic locations where the dataset should be replicated. See [BigQuery locations](https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/locations) for supported locations. + "A String", + ], }, "lastModifyTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when the subscription was last modified. "linkedDatasetMap": { # Output only. Map of listing resource names to associated linked resource, e.g. projects/123/locations/us/dataExchanges/456/listings/789 -> projects/123/datasets/my_dataset For listing-level subscriptions, this is a map of size 1. Only contains values if state == STATE_ACTIVE. diff --git a/docs/dyn/analyticshub_v1.projects.locations.subscriptions.html b/docs/dyn/analyticshub_v1.projects.locations.subscriptions.html index 8d41798fdd8..294515338a6 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/analyticshub_v1.projects.locations.subscriptions.html +++ b/docs/dyn/analyticshub_v1.projects.locations.subscriptions.html @@ -175,6 +175,9 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "location": "A String", # Required. The geographic location where the dataset should reside. See https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/locations for supported locations. + "replicaLocations": [ # Optional. The geographic locations where the dataset should be replicated. See [BigQuery locations](https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/locations) for supported locations. + "A String", + ], }, "lastModifyTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when the subscription was last modified. "linkedDatasetMap": { # Output only. Map of listing resource names to associated linked resource, e.g. projects/123/locations/us/dataExchanges/456/listings/789 -> projects/123/datasets/my_dataset For listing-level subscriptions, this is a map of size 1. Only contains values if state == STATE_ACTIVE. @@ -297,6 +300,9 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "location": "A String", # Required. The geographic location where the dataset should reside. See https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/locations for supported locations. + "replicaLocations": [ # Optional. The geographic locations where the dataset should be replicated. See [BigQuery locations](https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/locations) for supported locations. + "A String", + ], }, "lastModifyTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when the subscription was last modified. "linkedDatasetMap": { # Output only. Map of listing resource names to associated linked resource, e.g. projects/123/locations/us/dataExchanges/456/listings/789 -> projects/123/datasets/my_dataset For listing-level subscriptions, this is a map of size 1. Only contains values if state == STATE_ACTIVE. diff --git a/docs/dyn/androidmanagement_v1.enterprises.devices.html b/docs/dyn/androidmanagement_v1.enterprises.devices.html index 331de6d9977..05918af8c22 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/androidmanagement_v1.enterprises.devices.html +++ b/docs/dyn/androidmanagement_v1.enterprises.devices.html @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@

Method Details

"versionName": "A String", # The app version as displayed to the user. }, ], - "appliedPasswordPolicies": [ # The password requirements currently applied to the device. The applied requirements may be slightly different from those specified in passwordPolicies in some cases. fieldPath is set based on passwordPolicies. + "appliedPasswordPolicies": [ # The password requirements currently applied to the device. This field exists because the applied requirements may be slightly different from those specified in passwordPolicies in some cases. Note that this field does not provide information about password compliance. For non-compliance information, see nonComplianceDetails. NonComplianceDetail.fieldPath, is set based on passwordPolicies, not based on this field. { # Requirements for the password used to unlock a device. "maximumFailedPasswordsForWipe": 42, # Number of incorrect device-unlock passwords that can be entered before a device is wiped. A value of 0 means there is no restriction. "passwordExpirationTimeout": "A String", # Password expiration timeout. @@ -267,7 +267,7 @@

Method Details

"hardware": "A String", # Name of the hardware. For example, Angler. "manufacturer": "A String", # Manufacturer. For example, Motorola. "model": "A String", # The model of the device. For example, Asus Nexus 7. - "serialNumber": "A String", # The device serial number. + "serialNumber": "A String", # The device serial number. However, for personally-owned devices running Android 12 and above, this is the same as the enterpriseSpecificId. "skinShutdownTemperatures": [ # Device skin shutdown temperature thresholds in Celsius. 3.14, ], @@ -596,7 +596,7 @@

Method Details

"versionName": "A String", # The app version as displayed to the user. }, ], - "appliedPasswordPolicies": [ # The password requirements currently applied to the device. The applied requirements may be slightly different from those specified in passwordPolicies in some cases. fieldPath is set based on passwordPolicies. + "appliedPasswordPolicies": [ # The password requirements currently applied to the device. This field exists because the applied requirements may be slightly different from those specified in passwordPolicies in some cases. Note that this field does not provide information about password compliance. For non-compliance information, see nonComplianceDetails. NonComplianceDetail.fieldPath, is set based on passwordPolicies, not based on this field. { # Requirements for the password used to unlock a device. "maximumFailedPasswordsForWipe": 42, # Number of incorrect device-unlock passwords that can be entered before a device is wiped. A value of 0 means there is no restriction. "passwordExpirationTimeout": "A String", # Password expiration timeout. @@ -684,7 +684,7 @@

Method Details

"hardware": "A String", # Name of the hardware. For example, Angler. "manufacturer": "A String", # Manufacturer. For example, Motorola. "model": "A String", # The model of the device. For example, Asus Nexus 7. - "serialNumber": "A String", # The device serial number. + "serialNumber": "A String", # The device serial number. However, for personally-owned devices running Android 12 and above, this is the same as the enterpriseSpecificId. "skinShutdownTemperatures": [ # Device skin shutdown temperature thresholds in Celsius. 3.14, ], @@ -881,7 +881,7 @@

Method Details

"versionName": "A String", # The app version as displayed to the user. }, ], - "appliedPasswordPolicies": [ # The password requirements currently applied to the device. The applied requirements may be slightly different from those specified in passwordPolicies in some cases. fieldPath is set based on passwordPolicies. + "appliedPasswordPolicies": [ # The password requirements currently applied to the device. This field exists because the applied requirements may be slightly different from those specified in passwordPolicies in some cases. Note that this field does not provide information about password compliance. For non-compliance information, see nonComplianceDetails. NonComplianceDetail.fieldPath, is set based on passwordPolicies, not based on this field. { # Requirements for the password used to unlock a device. "maximumFailedPasswordsForWipe": 42, # Number of incorrect device-unlock passwords that can be entered before a device is wiped. A value of 0 means there is no restriction. "passwordExpirationTimeout": "A String", # Password expiration timeout. @@ -969,7 +969,7 @@

Method Details

"hardware": "A String", # Name of the hardware. For example, Angler. "manufacturer": "A String", # Manufacturer. For example, Motorola. "model": "A String", # The model of the device. For example, Asus Nexus 7. - "serialNumber": "A String", # The device serial number. + "serialNumber": "A String", # The device serial number. However, for personally-owned devices running Android 12 and above, this is the same as the enterpriseSpecificId. "skinShutdownTemperatures": [ # Device skin shutdown temperature thresholds in Celsius. 3.14, ], @@ -1148,7 +1148,7 @@

Method Details

"versionName": "A String", # The app version as displayed to the user. }, ], - "appliedPasswordPolicies": [ # The password requirements currently applied to the device. The applied requirements may be slightly different from those specified in passwordPolicies in some cases. fieldPath is set based on passwordPolicies. + "appliedPasswordPolicies": [ # The password requirements currently applied to the device. This field exists because the applied requirements may be slightly different from those specified in passwordPolicies in some cases. Note that this field does not provide information about password compliance. For non-compliance information, see nonComplianceDetails. NonComplianceDetail.fieldPath, is set based on passwordPolicies, not based on this field. { # Requirements for the password used to unlock a device. "maximumFailedPasswordsForWipe": 42, # Number of incorrect device-unlock passwords that can be entered before a device is wiped. A value of 0 means there is no restriction. "passwordExpirationTimeout": "A String", # Password expiration timeout. @@ -1236,7 +1236,7 @@

Method Details

"hardware": "A String", # Name of the hardware. For example, Angler. "manufacturer": "A String", # Manufacturer. For example, Motorola. "model": "A String", # The model of the device. For example, Asus Nexus 7. - "serialNumber": "A String", # The device serial number. + "serialNumber": "A String", # The device serial number. However, for personally-owned devices running Android 12 and above, this is the same as the enterpriseSpecificId. "skinShutdownTemperatures": [ # Device skin shutdown temperature thresholds in Celsius. 3.14, ], diff --git a/docs/dyn/androidpublisher_v3.purchases.subscriptionsv2.html b/docs/dyn/androidpublisher_v3.purchases.subscriptionsv2.html index a999e6ebe90..aa0722c9bf4 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/androidpublisher_v3.purchases.subscriptionsv2.html +++ b/docs/dyn/androidpublisher_v3.purchases.subscriptionsv2.html @@ -74,6 +74,9 @@

Google Play Android Developer API . purchases . subscriptionsv2

Instance Methods

+

+ cancel(packageName, token, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Cancel a subscription purchase for the user.

close()

Close httplib2 connections.

@@ -84,6 +87,34 @@

Instance Methods

revoke(packageName, token, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

Revoke a subscription purchase for the user.

Method Details

+
+ cancel(packageName, token, body=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Cancel a subscription purchase for the user.
+
+Args:
+  packageName: string, Required. The package of the application for which this subscription was purchased (for example, 'com.some.thing'). (required)
+  token: string, Required. The token provided to the user's device when the subscription was purchased. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Request for the purchases.subscriptionsv2.cancel API.
+  "cancellationContext": { # Cancellation context of the purchases.subscriptionsv2.cancel API. # Required. Additional details around the subscription revocation.
+    "cancellationType": "A String", # Required. The type of cancellation for the purchased subscription.
+  },
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Response for the purchases.subscriptionsv2.cancel API.
+}
+
+
close()
Close httplib2 connections.
@@ -149,6 +180,15 @@

Method Details

"priceChangeMode": "A String", # Price change mode specifies how the subscription item price is changing. "priceChangeState": "A String", # State the price change is currently in. }, + "priceStepUpConsentDetails": { # Information related to a price step-up that requires user consent. # The information of the latest price step-up consent. + "consentDeadlineTime": "A String", # The deadline by which the user must provide consent. If consent is not provided by this time, the subscription will be canceled. + "newPrice": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # The new price which requires user consent. + "currencyCode": "A String", # The three-letter currency code defined in ISO 4217. + "nanos": 42, # Number of nano (10^-9) units of the amount. The value must be between -999,999,999 and +999,999,999 inclusive. If `units` is positive, `nanos` must be positive or zero. If `units` is zero, `nanos` can be positive, zero, or negative. If `units` is negative, `nanos` must be negative or zero. For example $-1.75 is represented as `units`=-1 and `nanos`=-750,000,000. + "units": "A String", # The whole units of the amount. For example if `currencyCode` is `"USD"`, then 1 unit is one US dollar. + }, + "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the price step-up consent. + }, "recurringPrice": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # The current recurring price of the auto renewing plan. Note that the price does not take into account discounts and does not include taxes for tax-exclusive pricing, please call orders.get API instead if transaction details are needed. "currencyCode": "A String", # The three-letter currency code defined in ISO 4217. "nanos": 42, # Number of nano (10^-9) units of the amount. The value must be between -999,999,999 and +999,999,999 inclusive. If `units` is positive, `nanos` must be positive or zero. If `units` is zero, `nanos` can be positive, zero, or negative. If `units` is negative, `nanos` must be negative or zero. For example $-1.75 is represented as `units`=-1 and `nanos`=-750,000,000. diff --git a/docs/dyn/apigee_v1.organizations.developers.balance.html b/docs/dyn/apigee_v1.organizations.developers.balance.html index f65beff1084..5c2f86fe84c 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/apigee_v1.organizations.developers.balance.html +++ b/docs/dyn/apigee_v1.organizations.developers.balance.html @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@

Method Details

The object takes the form of: { # Request for AdjustDeveloperBalance. - "adjustment": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # * A positive value of `adjustment` means that that the API provider wants to adjust the balance for an under-charged developer i.e. the balance of the developer will decrease. * A negative value of `adjustment` means that that the API provider wants to adjust the balance for an over-charged developer i.e. the balance of the developer will increase. + "adjustment": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # * A positive value of `adjustment` means that that the API provider wants to adjust the balance for an under-charged developer i.e. the balance of the developer will decrease. * A negative value of `adjustment` means that that the API provider wants to adjust the balance for an over-charged developer i.e. the balance of the developer will increase. NOTE: An adjustment cannot increase the balance of the developer beyond the balance as of the most recent credit. For example, if a developer's balance is updated to be $100, and they spend $10, a negative adjustment can only increase the balance of the developer to $100. "currencyCode": "A String", # The three-letter currency code defined in ISO 4217. "nanos": 42, # Number of nano (10^-9) units of the amount. The value must be between -999,999,999 and +999,999,999 inclusive. If `units` is positive, `nanos` must be positive or zero. If `units` is zero, `nanos` can be positive, zero, or negative. If `units` is negative, `nanos` must be negative or zero. For example $-1.75 is represented as `units`=-1 and `nanos`=-750,000,000. "units": "A String", # The whole units of the amount. For example if `currencyCode` is `"USD"`, then 1 unit is one US dollar. diff --git a/docs/dyn/apigee_v1.organizations.html b/docs/dyn/apigee_v1.organizations.html index 0ff4e7cb0ca..f899c165f44 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/apigee_v1.organizations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/apigee_v1.organizations.html @@ -179,6 +179,11 @@

Instance Methods

Returns the securityAssessmentResults Resource.

+

+ securityFeedback() +

+

Returns the securityFeedback Resource.

+

securityMonitoringConditions()

diff --git a/docs/dyn/apigee_v1.organizations.securityAssessmentResults.html b/docs/dyn/apigee_v1.organizations.securityAssessmentResults.html index 72d86c4e856..db24120fe7a 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/apigee_v1.organizations.securityAssessmentResults.html +++ b/docs/dyn/apigee_v1.organizations.securityAssessmentResults.html @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@

Method Details

"pageSize": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of results to return. The service may return fewer than this value. If unspecified, at most 50 results will be returned. "pageToken": "A String", # Optional. A page token, received from a previous `BatchComputeSecurityAssessmentResults` call. Provide this to retrieve the subsequent page. "profile": "A String", # Required. Name of the profile that is used for computation. - "scope": "A String", # Required. Scope of the resources for the computation. For Apigee, the environment is the scope of the resources. + "scope": "A String", # Optional. Scope of the resources for the computation. For Apigee, the environment is the scope of the resources. } x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. diff --git a/docs/dyn/apigee_v1.organizations.securityFeedback.html b/docs/dyn/apigee_v1.organizations.securityFeedback.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3014b0381e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/dyn/apigee_v1.organizations.securityFeedback.html @@ -0,0 +1,319 @@ + + + +

Apigee API . organizations . securityFeedback

+

Instance Methods

+

+ close()

+

Close httplib2 connections.

+

+ create(parent, body=None, securityFeedbackId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Creates a new report containing customer feedback.

+

+ delete(name, x__xgafv=None)

+

Deletes a specific feedback report. Used for "undo" of a feedback submission.

+

+ get(name, x__xgafv=None)

+

Gets a specific customer feedback report.

+

+ list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Lists all feedback reports which have already been submitted.

+

+ list_next()

+

Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+ patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Updates a specific feedback report.

+

Method Details

+
+ close() +
Close httplib2 connections.
+
+ +
+ create(parent, body=None, securityFeedbackId=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Creates a new report containing customer feedback.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. Name of the organization. Use the following structure in your request: `organizations/{org}`. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Represents a feedback report from an Advanced API Security customer.
+  "comment": "A String", # Optional. Optional text the user can provide for additional, unstructured context.
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when this specific feedback id was created.
+  "displayName": "A String", # Optional. The display name of the feedback.
+  "feedbackContexts": [ # Required. One or more attribute/value pairs for constraining the feedback.
+    { # FeedbackContext captures the intent of the submitted feedback.
+      "attribute": "A String", # Required. The attribute the user is providing feedback about.
+      "values": [ # Required. The values of the attribute the user is providing feedback about.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+    },
+  ],
+  "feedbackType": "A String", # Required. The type of feedback being submitted.
+  "name": "A String", # Output only. Identifier. The feedback name is intended to be a system-generated uuid.
+  "reason": "A String", # Optional. The reason for the feedback.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when this specific feedback id was updated.
+}
+
+  securityFeedbackId: string, Optional. The id for this feedback report. If not provided, it will be set to a system-generated UUID.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents a feedback report from an Advanced API Security customer.
+  "comment": "A String", # Optional. Optional text the user can provide for additional, unstructured context.
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when this specific feedback id was created.
+  "displayName": "A String", # Optional. The display name of the feedback.
+  "feedbackContexts": [ # Required. One or more attribute/value pairs for constraining the feedback.
+    { # FeedbackContext captures the intent of the submitted feedback.
+      "attribute": "A String", # Required. The attribute the user is providing feedback about.
+      "values": [ # Required. The values of the attribute the user is providing feedback about.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+    },
+  ],
+  "feedbackType": "A String", # Required. The type of feedback being submitted.
+  "name": "A String", # Output only. Identifier. The feedback name is intended to be a system-generated uuid.
+  "reason": "A String", # Optional. The reason for the feedback.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when this specific feedback id was updated.
+}
+
+ +
+ delete(name, x__xgafv=None) +
Deletes a specific feedback report. Used for "undo" of a feedback submission.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. Name of the SecurityFeedback to delete. Use the following structure in your request: `organizations/{org}/securityFeedback/{feedback_id}` (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); }
+}
+
+ +
+ get(name, x__xgafv=None) +
Gets a specific customer feedback report.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. Name of the SecurityFeedback. Format: `organizations/{org}/securityFeedback/{feedback_id}` Example: organizations/apigee-organization-name/securityFeedback/feedback-id (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents a feedback report from an Advanced API Security customer.
+  "comment": "A String", # Optional. Optional text the user can provide for additional, unstructured context.
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when this specific feedback id was created.
+  "displayName": "A String", # Optional. The display name of the feedback.
+  "feedbackContexts": [ # Required. One or more attribute/value pairs for constraining the feedback.
+    { # FeedbackContext captures the intent of the submitted feedback.
+      "attribute": "A String", # Required. The attribute the user is providing feedback about.
+      "values": [ # Required. The values of the attribute the user is providing feedback about.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+    },
+  ],
+  "feedbackType": "A String", # Required. The type of feedback being submitted.
+  "name": "A String", # Output only. Identifier. The feedback name is intended to be a system-generated uuid.
+  "reason": "A String", # Optional. The reason for the feedback.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when this specific feedback id was updated.
+}
+
+ +
+ list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Lists all feedback reports which have already been submitted.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. Name of the organization. Format: `organizations/{org}`. Example: organizations/apigee-organization-name/securityFeedback (required)
+  pageSize: integer, Optional. The maximum number of feedback reports to return. The service may return fewer than this value. LINT.IfChange(documented_page_size_limits) If unspecified, at most 10 feedback reports will be returned. The maximum value is 100; values above 100 will be coerced to 100. LINT.ThenChange( //depot/google3/edge/sense/boq/service/v1/securityfeedback/securityfeedback_rpc.go:page_size_limits )
+  pageToken: string, Optional. A page token, received from a previous `ListSecurityFeedback` call. Provide this to retrieve the subsequent page. When paginating, all other parameters provided to `ListSecurityFeedback` must match the call that provided the page token.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Response for ListSecurityFeedback
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # A token that can be sent as `page_token` in `ListSecurityFeedbackRequest` to retrieve the next page. If this field is omitted, there are no subsequent pages.
+  "securityFeedback": [ # List of SecurityFeedback reports.
+    { # Represents a feedback report from an Advanced API Security customer.
+      "comment": "A String", # Optional. Optional text the user can provide for additional, unstructured context.
+      "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when this specific feedback id was created.
+      "displayName": "A String", # Optional. The display name of the feedback.
+      "feedbackContexts": [ # Required. One or more attribute/value pairs for constraining the feedback.
+        { # FeedbackContext captures the intent of the submitted feedback.
+          "attribute": "A String", # Required. The attribute the user is providing feedback about.
+          "values": [ # Required. The values of the attribute the user is providing feedback about.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+        },
+      ],
+      "feedbackType": "A String", # Required. The type of feedback being submitted.
+      "name": "A String", # Output only. Identifier. The feedback name is intended to be a system-generated uuid.
+      "reason": "A String", # Optional. The reason for the feedback.
+      "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when this specific feedback id was updated.
+    },
+  ],
+}
+
+ +
+ list_next() +
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        
+
+ +
+ patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Updates a specific feedback report.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Output only. Identifier. The feedback name is intended to be a system-generated uuid. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Represents a feedback report from an Advanced API Security customer.
+  "comment": "A String", # Optional. Optional text the user can provide for additional, unstructured context.
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when this specific feedback id was created.
+  "displayName": "A String", # Optional. The display name of the feedback.
+  "feedbackContexts": [ # Required. One or more attribute/value pairs for constraining the feedback.
+    { # FeedbackContext captures the intent of the submitted feedback.
+      "attribute": "A String", # Required. The attribute the user is providing feedback about.
+      "values": [ # Required. The values of the attribute the user is providing feedback about.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+    },
+  ],
+  "feedbackType": "A String", # Required. The type of feedback being submitted.
+  "name": "A String", # Output only. Identifier. The feedback name is intended to be a system-generated uuid.
+  "reason": "A String", # Optional. The reason for the feedback.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when this specific feedback id was updated.
+}
+
+  updateMask: string, Optional. The list of fields to update.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents a feedback report from an Advanced API Security customer.
+  "comment": "A String", # Optional. Optional text the user can provide for additional, unstructured context.
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when this specific feedback id was created.
+  "displayName": "A String", # Optional. The display name of the feedback.
+  "feedbackContexts": [ # Required. One or more attribute/value pairs for constraining the feedback.
+    { # FeedbackContext captures the intent of the submitted feedback.
+      "attribute": "A String", # Required. The attribute the user is providing feedback about.
+      "values": [ # Required. The values of the attribute the user is providing feedback about.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+    },
+  ],
+  "feedbackType": "A String", # Required. The type of feedback being submitted.
+  "name": "A String", # Output only. Identifier. The feedback name is intended to be a system-generated uuid.
+  "reason": "A String", # Optional. The reason for the feedback.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when this specific feedback id was updated.
+}
+
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/apigee_v1.organizations.securityMonitoringConditions.html b/docs/dyn/apigee_v1.organizations.securityMonitoringConditions.html index 8382b6c9e64..fa6bb044ebf 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/apigee_v1.organizations.securityMonitoringConditions.html +++ b/docs/dyn/apigee_v1.organizations.securityMonitoringConditions.html @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@

Method Details

}, "name": "A String", # Identifier. Name of the security monitoring condition resource. Format: organizations/{org}/securityMonitoringConditions/{security_monitoring_condition} "profile": "A String", # Required. ID of security profile of the security monitoring condition. - "scope": "A String", # Required. Scope of the security monitoring condition. For Apigee, the environment is the scope of the resources. + "scope": "A String", # Optional. Scope of the security monitoring condition. For Apigee, the environment is the scope of the resources. "totalDeployedResources": 42, # Output only. Total number of deployed resources within scope. "totalMonitoredResources": 42, # Output only. Total number of monitored resources within this condition. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time of the security monitoring condition update. @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@

Method Details

}, "name": "A String", # Identifier. Name of the security monitoring condition resource. Format: organizations/{org}/securityMonitoringConditions/{security_monitoring_condition} "profile": "A String", # Required. ID of security profile of the security monitoring condition. - "scope": "A String", # Required. Scope of the security monitoring condition. For Apigee, the environment is the scope of the resources. + "scope": "A String", # Optional. Scope of the security monitoring condition. For Apigee, the environment is the scope of the resources. "totalDeployedResources": 42, # Output only. Total number of deployed resources within scope. "totalMonitoredResources": 42, # Output only. Total number of monitored resources within this condition. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time of the security monitoring condition update. @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@

Method Details

}, "name": "A String", # Identifier. Name of the security monitoring condition resource. Format: organizations/{org}/securityMonitoringConditions/{security_monitoring_condition} "profile": "A String", # Required. ID of security profile of the security monitoring condition. - "scope": "A String", # Required. Scope of the security monitoring condition. For Apigee, the environment is the scope of the resources. + "scope": "A String", # Optional. Scope of the security monitoring condition. For Apigee, the environment is the scope of the resources. "totalDeployedResources": 42, # Output only. Total number of deployed resources within scope. "totalMonitoredResources": 42, # Output only. Total number of monitored resources within this condition. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time of the security monitoring condition update. @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@

Method Details

}, "name": "A String", # Identifier. Name of the security monitoring condition resource. Format: organizations/{org}/securityMonitoringConditions/{security_monitoring_condition} "profile": "A String", # Required. ID of security profile of the security monitoring condition. - "scope": "A String", # Required. Scope of the security monitoring condition. For Apigee, the environment is the scope of the resources. + "scope": "A String", # Optional. Scope of the security monitoring condition. For Apigee, the environment is the scope of the resources. "totalDeployedResources": 42, # Output only. Total number of deployed resources within scope. "totalMonitoredResources": 42, # Output only. Total number of monitored resources within this condition. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time of the security monitoring condition update. @@ -293,7 +293,7 @@

Method Details

}, "name": "A String", # Identifier. Name of the security monitoring condition resource. Format: organizations/{org}/securityMonitoringConditions/{security_monitoring_condition} "profile": "A String", # Required. ID of security profile of the security monitoring condition. - "scope": "A String", # Required. Scope of the security monitoring condition. For Apigee, the environment is the scope of the resources. + "scope": "A String", # Optional. Scope of the security monitoring condition. For Apigee, the environment is the scope of the resources. "totalDeployedResources": 42, # Output only. Total number of deployed resources within scope. "totalMonitoredResources": 42, # Output only. Total number of monitored resources within this condition. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time of the security monitoring condition update. @@ -322,7 +322,7 @@

Method Details

}, "name": "A String", # Identifier. Name of the security monitoring condition resource. Format: organizations/{org}/securityMonitoringConditions/{security_monitoring_condition} "profile": "A String", # Required. ID of security profile of the security monitoring condition. - "scope": "A String", # Required. Scope of the security monitoring condition. For Apigee, the environment is the scope of the resources. + "scope": "A String", # Optional. Scope of the security monitoring condition. For Apigee, the environment is the scope of the resources. "totalDeployedResources": 42, # Output only. Total number of deployed resources within scope. "totalMonitoredResources": 42, # Output only. Total number of monitored resources within this condition. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time of the security monitoring condition update. diff --git a/docs/dyn/apihub_v1.projects.locations.apiHubInstances.html b/docs/dyn/apihub_v1.projects.locations.apiHubInstances.html index 918a0b2894d..f4a57a5592f 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/apihub_v1.projects.locations.apiHubInstances.html +++ b/docs/dyn/apihub_v1.projects.locations.apiHubInstances.html @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@

Instance Methods

Provisions instance resources for the API Hub.

delete(name, x__xgafv=None)

-

Deletes the API hub instance.

+

Deletes the API hub instance. Deleting the API hub instance will also result in the removal of all associated runtime project attachments and the host project registration.

get(name, x__xgafv=None)

Gets details of a single API Hub instance.

@@ -154,7 +154,7 @@

Method Details

delete(name, x__xgafv=None) -
Deletes the API hub instance.
+  
Deletes the API hub instance. Deleting the API hub instance will also result in the removal of all associated runtime project attachments and the host project registration.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The name of the Api Hub instance to delete. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/apiHubInstances/{apiHubInstance}`. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/apihub_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/apihub_v1.projects.locations.html
index 618ec6585e1..bee6b7afaaf 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/apihub_v1.projects.locations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/apihub_v1.projects.locations.html
@@ -1036,7 +1036,7 @@ 

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/apihub_v1.projects.locations.plugins.html b/docs/dyn/apihub_v1.projects.locations.plugins.html index f9f1e573d6f..7b474421740 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/apihub_v1.projects.locations.plugins.html +++ b/docs/dyn/apihub_v1.projects.locations.plugins.html @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@

Method Details

The object takes the form of: { # A plugin resource in the API Hub. - "actionsConfig": [ # Required. The configuration of actions supported by the plugin. + "actionsConfig": [ # Optional. The configuration of actions supported by the plugin. **REQUIRED**: This field must be provided when creating or updating a Plugin. The server will reject requests if this field is missing. { # PluginActionConfig represents the configuration of an action supported by a plugin. "description": "A String", # Required. The description of the operation performed by the action. "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display name of the action. @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # A plugin resource in the API Hub. - "actionsConfig": [ # Required. The configuration of actions supported by the plugin. + "actionsConfig": [ # Optional. The configuration of actions supported by the plugin. **REQUIRED**: This field must be provided when creating or updating a Plugin. The server will reject requests if this field is missing. { # PluginActionConfig represents the configuration of an action supported by a plugin. "description": "A String", # Required. The description of the operation performed by the action. "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display name of the action. @@ -369,7 +369,7 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # A plugin resource in the API Hub. - "actionsConfig": [ # Required. The configuration of actions supported by the plugin. + "actionsConfig": [ # Optional. The configuration of actions supported by the plugin. **REQUIRED**: This field must be provided when creating or updating a Plugin. The server will reject requests if this field is missing. { # PluginActionConfig represents the configuration of an action supported by a plugin. "description": "A String", # Required. The description of the operation performed by the action. "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display name of the action. @@ -477,7 +477,7 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # A plugin resource in the API Hub. - "actionsConfig": [ # Required. The configuration of actions supported by the plugin. + "actionsConfig": [ # Optional. The configuration of actions supported by the plugin. **REQUIRED**: This field must be provided when creating or updating a Plugin. The server will reject requests if this field is missing. { # PluginActionConfig represents the configuration of an action supported by a plugin. "description": "A String", # Required. The description of the operation performed by the action. "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display name of the action. @@ -579,7 +579,7 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # A plugin resource in the API Hub. - "actionsConfig": [ # Required. The configuration of actions supported by the plugin. + "actionsConfig": [ # Optional. The configuration of actions supported by the plugin. **REQUIRED**: This field must be provided when creating or updating a Plugin. The server will reject requests if this field is missing. { # PluginActionConfig represents the configuration of an action supported by a plugin. "description": "A String", # Required. The description of the operation performed by the action. "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display name of the action. @@ -711,7 +711,7 @@

Method Details

"nextPageToken": "A String", # A token, which can be sent as `page_token` to retrieve the next page. If this field is omitted, there are no subsequent pages. "plugins": [ # The plugins from the specified parent resource. { # A plugin resource in the API Hub. - "actionsConfig": [ # Required. The configuration of actions supported by the plugin. + "actionsConfig": [ # Optional. The configuration of actions supported by the plugin. **REQUIRED**: This field must be provided when creating or updating a Plugin. The server will reject requests if this field is missing. { # PluginActionConfig represents the configuration of an action supported by a plugin. "description": "A String", # Required. The description of the operation performed by the action. "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display name of the action. diff --git a/docs/dyn/apihub_v1.projects.locations.plugins.instances.html b/docs/dyn/apihub_v1.projects.locations.plugins.instances.html index bb9f08c8cc7..221d4305e00 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/apihub_v1.projects.locations.plugins.instances.html +++ b/docs/dyn/apihub_v1.projects.locations.plugins.instances.html @@ -101,6 +101,9 @@

Instance Methods

list_next()

Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+ manageSourceData(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Manages data for a given plugin instance.

patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)

Updates a plugin instance in the API hub. The following fields in the plugin_instance can be updated currently: * display_name * schedule_cron_expression The update_mask should be used to specify the fields being updated. To update the auth_config and additional_config of the plugin instance, use the ApplyPluginInstanceConfig method.

@@ -658,6 +661,34 @@

Method Details

+
+ manageSourceData(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Manages data for a given plugin instance.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The name of the plugin instance for which data needs to be managed. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/plugins/{plugin}/instances/{instance}` (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # The ManagePluginInstanceSourceData method's request.
+  "action": "A String", # Required. Action to be performed.
+  "data": "A String", # Required. Data to be managed.
+  "dataType": "A String", # Required. Type of data to be managed.
+  "relativePath": "A String", # Required. Relative path of data being managed for a given plugin instance.
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The ManagePluginInstanceSourceData method's response.
+}
+
+
patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)
Updates a plugin instance in the API hub. The following fields in the plugin_instance can be updated currently: * display_name * schedule_cron_expression The update_mask should be used to specify the fields being updated. To update the auth_config and additional_config of the plugin instance, use the ApplyPluginInstanceConfig method.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/authorizedbuyersmarketplace_v1alpha.buyers.dataSegments.html b/docs/dyn/authorizedbuyersmarketplace_v1alpha.buyers.dataSegments.html
index 7aa12545def..19177d57aea 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/authorizedbuyersmarketplace_v1alpha.buyers.dataSegments.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/authorizedbuyersmarketplace_v1alpha.buyers.dataSegments.html
@@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ 

Method Details

An object of the form: { # Defines an identifier for a segment of inventory that can be targeted by curators or media planners in the deals or auction packages UI. Curation of inventory is done by curators on external platforms. - "cpmFee": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # Required. This will be charged when other accounts use this data segment. For example, when other accounts add this data segment to a deal or auction package. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed. + "cpmFee": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # Optional. A fixed fee charged per thousand impressions. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed. "currencyCode": "A String", # The three-letter currency code defined in ISO 4217. "nanos": 42, # Number of nano (10^-9) units of the amount. The value must be between -999,999,999 and +999,999,999 inclusive. If `units` is positive, `nanos` must be positive or zero. If `units` is zero, `nanos` can be positive, zero, or negative. If `units` is negative, `nanos` must be negative or zero. For example $-1.75 is represented as `units`=-1 and `nanos`=-750,000,000. "units": "A String", # The whole units of the amount. For example if `currencyCode` is `"USD"`, then 1 unit is one US dollar. @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@

Method Details

The object takes the form of: { # Defines an identifier for a segment of inventory that can be targeted by curators or media planners in the deals or auction packages UI. Curation of inventory is done by curators on external platforms. - "cpmFee": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # Required. This will be charged when other accounts use this data segment. For example, when other accounts add this data segment to a deal or auction package. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed. + "cpmFee": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # Optional. A fixed fee charged per thousand impressions. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed. "currencyCode": "A String", # The three-letter currency code defined in ISO 4217. "nanos": 42, # Number of nano (10^-9) units of the amount. The value must be between -999,999,999 and +999,999,999 inclusive. If `units` is positive, `nanos` must be positive or zero. If `units` is zero, `nanos` can be positive, zero, or negative. If `units` is negative, `nanos` must be negative or zero. For example $-1.75 is represented as `units`=-1 and `nanos`=-750,000,000. "units": "A String", # The whole units of the amount. For example if `currencyCode` is `"USD"`, then 1 unit is one US dollar. @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # Defines an identifier for a segment of inventory that can be targeted by curators or media planners in the deals or auction packages UI. Curation of inventory is done by curators on external platforms. - "cpmFee": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # Required. This will be charged when other accounts use this data segment. For example, when other accounts add this data segment to a deal or auction package. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed. + "cpmFee": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # Optional. A fixed fee charged per thousand impressions. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed. "currencyCode": "A String", # The three-letter currency code defined in ISO 4217. "nanos": 42, # Number of nano (10^-9) units of the amount. The value must be between -999,999,999 and +999,999,999 inclusive. If `units` is positive, `nanos` must be positive or zero. If `units` is zero, `nanos` can be positive, zero, or negative. If `units` is negative, `nanos` must be negative or zero. For example $-1.75 is represented as `units`=-1 and `nanos`=-750,000,000. "units": "A String", # The whole units of the amount. For example if `currencyCode` is `"USD"`, then 1 unit is one US dollar. @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # Defines an identifier for a segment of inventory that can be targeted by curators or media planners in the deals or auction packages UI. Curation of inventory is done by curators on external platforms. - "cpmFee": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # Required. This will be charged when other accounts use this data segment. For example, when other accounts add this data segment to a deal or auction package. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed. + "cpmFee": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # Optional. A fixed fee charged per thousand impressions. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed. "currencyCode": "A String", # The three-letter currency code defined in ISO 4217. "nanos": 42, # Number of nano (10^-9) units of the amount. The value must be between -999,999,999 and +999,999,999 inclusive. If `units` is positive, `nanos` must be positive or zero. If `units` is zero, `nanos` can be positive, zero, or negative. If `units` is negative, `nanos` must be negative or zero. For example $-1.75 is represented as `units`=-1 and `nanos`=-750,000,000. "units": "A String", # The whole units of the amount. For example if `currencyCode` is `"USD"`, then 1 unit is one US dollar. @@ -227,7 +227,7 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # Defines an identifier for a segment of inventory that can be targeted by curators or media planners in the deals or auction packages UI. Curation of inventory is done by curators on external platforms. - "cpmFee": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # Required. This will be charged when other accounts use this data segment. For example, when other accounts add this data segment to a deal or auction package. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed. + "cpmFee": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # Optional. A fixed fee charged per thousand impressions. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed. "currencyCode": "A String", # The three-letter currency code defined in ISO 4217. "nanos": 42, # Number of nano (10^-9) units of the amount. The value must be between -999,999,999 and +999,999,999 inclusive. If `units` is positive, `nanos` must be positive or zero. If `units` is zero, `nanos` can be positive, zero, or negative. If `units` is negative, `nanos` must be negative or zero. For example $-1.75 is represented as `units`=-1 and `nanos`=-750,000,000. "units": "A String", # The whole units of the amount. For example if `currencyCode` is `"USD"`, then 1 unit is one US dollar. @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Response message for listing data segments. "dataSegments": [ # The list of data segments. { # Defines an identifier for a segment of inventory that can be targeted by curators or media planners in the deals or auction packages UI. Curation of inventory is done by curators on external platforms. - "cpmFee": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # Required. This will be charged when other accounts use this data segment. For example, when other accounts add this data segment to a deal or auction package. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed. + "cpmFee": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # Optional. A fixed fee charged per thousand impressions. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed. "currencyCode": "A String", # The three-letter currency code defined in ISO 4217. "nanos": 42, # Number of nano (10^-9) units of the amount. The value must be between -999,999,999 and +999,999,999 inclusive. If `units` is positive, `nanos` must be positive or zero. If `units` is zero, `nanos` can be positive, zero, or negative. If `units` is negative, `nanos` must be negative or zero. For example $-1.75 is represented as `units`=-1 and `nanos`=-750,000,000. "units": "A String", # The whole units of the amount. For example if `currencyCode` is `"USD"`, then 1 unit is one US dollar. @@ -297,7 +297,7 @@

Method Details

The object takes the form of: { # Defines an identifier for a segment of inventory that can be targeted by curators or media planners in the deals or auction packages UI. Curation of inventory is done by curators on external platforms. - "cpmFee": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # Required. This will be charged when other accounts use this data segment. For example, when other accounts add this data segment to a deal or auction package. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed. + "cpmFee": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # Optional. A fixed fee charged per thousand impressions. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed. "currencyCode": "A String", # The three-letter currency code defined in ISO 4217. "nanos": 42, # Number of nano (10^-9) units of the amount. The value must be between -999,999,999 and +999,999,999 inclusive. If `units` is positive, `nanos` must be positive or zero. If `units` is zero, `nanos` can be positive, zero, or negative. If `units` is negative, `nanos` must be negative or zero. For example $-1.75 is represented as `units`=-1 and `nanos`=-750,000,000. "units": "A String", # The whole units of the amount. For example if `currencyCode` is `"USD"`, then 1 unit is one US dollar. @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # Defines an identifier for a segment of inventory that can be targeted by curators or media planners in the deals or auction packages UI. Curation of inventory is done by curators on external platforms. - "cpmFee": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # Required. This will be charged when other accounts use this data segment. For example, when other accounts add this data segment to a deal or auction package. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed. + "cpmFee": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # Optional. A fixed fee charged per thousand impressions. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed. "currencyCode": "A String", # The three-letter currency code defined in ISO 4217. "nanos": 42, # Number of nano (10^-9) units of the amount. The value must be between -999,999,999 and +999,999,999 inclusive. If `units` is positive, `nanos` must be positive or zero. If `units` is zero, `nanos` can be positive, zero, or negative. If `units` is negative, `nanos` must be negative or zero. For example $-1.75 is represented as `units`=-1 and `nanos`=-750,000,000. "units": "A String", # The whole units of the amount. For example if `currencyCode` is `"USD"`, then 1 unit is one US dollar. diff --git a/docs/dyn/authorizedbuyersmarketplace_v1beta.curators.dataSegments.html b/docs/dyn/authorizedbuyersmarketplace_v1beta.curators.dataSegments.html index abdc5f20c74..9c300d9ef9d 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/authorizedbuyersmarketplace_v1beta.curators.dataSegments.html +++ b/docs/dyn/authorizedbuyersmarketplace_v1beta.curators.dataSegments.html @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # Defines an identifier for a segment of inventory that can be targeted by curators or media planners in the deals or auction packages UI. Curation of inventory is done by curators on external platforms. - "cpmFee": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # Required. This will be charged when other accounts use this data segment. For example, when other accounts add this data segment to a deal or auction package. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed. + "cpmFee": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # Optional. A fixed fee charged per thousand impressions. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed. "currencyCode": "A String", # The three-letter currency code defined in ISO 4217. "nanos": 42, # Number of nano (10^-9) units of the amount. The value must be between -999,999,999 and +999,999,999 inclusive. If `units` is positive, `nanos` must be positive or zero. If `units` is zero, `nanos` can be positive, zero, or negative. If `units` is negative, `nanos` must be negative or zero. For example $-1.75 is represented as `units`=-1 and `nanos`=-750,000,000. "units": "A String", # The whole units of the amount. For example if `currencyCode` is `"USD"`, then 1 unit is one US dollar. @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@

Method Details

The object takes the form of: { # Defines an identifier for a segment of inventory that can be targeted by curators or media planners in the deals or auction packages UI. Curation of inventory is done by curators on external platforms. - "cpmFee": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # Required. This will be charged when other accounts use this data segment. For example, when other accounts add this data segment to a deal or auction package. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed. + "cpmFee": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # Optional. A fixed fee charged per thousand impressions. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed. "currencyCode": "A String", # The three-letter currency code defined in ISO 4217. "nanos": 42, # Number of nano (10^-9) units of the amount. The value must be between -999,999,999 and +999,999,999 inclusive. If `units` is positive, `nanos` must be positive or zero. If `units` is zero, `nanos` can be positive, zero, or negative. If `units` is negative, `nanos` must be negative or zero. For example $-1.75 is represented as `units`=-1 and `nanos`=-750,000,000. "units": "A String", # The whole units of the amount. For example if `currencyCode` is `"USD"`, then 1 unit is one US dollar. @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # Defines an identifier for a segment of inventory that can be targeted by curators or media planners in the deals or auction packages UI. Curation of inventory is done by curators on external platforms. - "cpmFee": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # Required. This will be charged when other accounts use this data segment. For example, when other accounts add this data segment to a deal or auction package. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed. + "cpmFee": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # Optional. A fixed fee charged per thousand impressions. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed. "currencyCode": "A String", # The three-letter currency code defined in ISO 4217. "nanos": 42, # Number of nano (10^-9) units of the amount. The value must be between -999,999,999 and +999,999,999 inclusive. If `units` is positive, `nanos` must be positive or zero. If `units` is zero, `nanos` can be positive, zero, or negative. If `units` is negative, `nanos` must be negative or zero. For example $-1.75 is represented as `units`=-1 and `nanos`=-750,000,000. "units": "A String", # The whole units of the amount. For example if `currencyCode` is `"USD"`, then 1 unit is one US dollar. @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # Defines an identifier for a segment of inventory that can be targeted by curators or media planners in the deals or auction packages UI. Curation of inventory is done by curators on external platforms. - "cpmFee": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # Required. This will be charged when other accounts use this data segment. For example, when other accounts add this data segment to a deal or auction package. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed. + "cpmFee": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # Optional. A fixed fee charged per thousand impressions. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed. "currencyCode": "A String", # The three-letter currency code defined in ISO 4217. "nanos": 42, # Number of nano (10^-9) units of the amount. The value must be between -999,999,999 and +999,999,999 inclusive. If `units` is positive, `nanos` must be positive or zero. If `units` is zero, `nanos` can be positive, zero, or negative. If `units` is negative, `nanos` must be negative or zero. For example $-1.75 is represented as `units`=-1 and `nanos`=-750,000,000. "units": "A String", # The whole units of the amount. For example if `currencyCode` is `"USD"`, then 1 unit is one US dollar. @@ -227,7 +227,7 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # Defines an identifier for a segment of inventory that can be targeted by curators or media planners in the deals or auction packages UI. Curation of inventory is done by curators on external platforms. - "cpmFee": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # Required. This will be charged when other accounts use this data segment. For example, when other accounts add this data segment to a deal or auction package. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed. + "cpmFee": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # Optional. A fixed fee charged per thousand impressions. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed. "currencyCode": "A String", # The three-letter currency code defined in ISO 4217. "nanos": 42, # Number of nano (10^-9) units of the amount. The value must be between -999,999,999 and +999,999,999 inclusive. If `units` is positive, `nanos` must be positive or zero. If `units` is zero, `nanos` can be positive, zero, or negative. If `units` is negative, `nanos` must be negative or zero. For example $-1.75 is represented as `units`=-1 and `nanos`=-750,000,000. "units": "A String", # The whole units of the amount. For example if `currencyCode` is `"USD"`, then 1 unit is one US dollar. @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Response message for listing data segments. "dataSegments": [ # The list of data segments. { # Defines an identifier for a segment of inventory that can be targeted by curators or media planners in the deals or auction packages UI. Curation of inventory is done by curators on external platforms. - "cpmFee": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # Required. This will be charged when other accounts use this data segment. For example, when other accounts add this data segment to a deal or auction package. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed. + "cpmFee": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # Optional. A fixed fee charged per thousand impressions. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed. "currencyCode": "A String", # The three-letter currency code defined in ISO 4217. "nanos": 42, # Number of nano (10^-9) units of the amount. The value must be between -999,999,999 and +999,999,999 inclusive. If `units` is positive, `nanos` must be positive or zero. If `units` is zero, `nanos` can be positive, zero, or negative. If `units` is negative, `nanos` must be negative or zero. For example $-1.75 is represented as `units`=-1 and `nanos`=-750,000,000. "units": "A String", # The whole units of the amount. For example if `currencyCode` is `"USD"`, then 1 unit is one US dollar. @@ -297,7 +297,7 @@

Method Details

The object takes the form of: { # Defines an identifier for a segment of inventory that can be targeted by curators or media planners in the deals or auction packages UI. Curation of inventory is done by curators on external platforms. - "cpmFee": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # Required. This will be charged when other accounts use this data segment. For example, when other accounts add this data segment to a deal or auction package. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed. + "cpmFee": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # Optional. A fixed fee charged per thousand impressions. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed. "currencyCode": "A String", # The three-letter currency code defined in ISO 4217. "nanos": 42, # Number of nano (10^-9) units of the amount. The value must be between -999,999,999 and +999,999,999 inclusive. If `units` is positive, `nanos` must be positive or zero. If `units` is zero, `nanos` can be positive, zero, or negative. If `units` is negative, `nanos` must be negative or zero. For example $-1.75 is represented as `units`=-1 and `nanos`=-750,000,000. "units": "A String", # The whole units of the amount. For example if `currencyCode` is `"USD"`, then 1 unit is one US dollar. @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # Defines an identifier for a segment of inventory that can be targeted by curators or media planners in the deals or auction packages UI. Curation of inventory is done by curators on external platforms. - "cpmFee": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # Required. This will be charged when other accounts use this data segment. For example, when other accounts add this data segment to a deal or auction package. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed. + "cpmFee": { # Represents an amount of money with its currency type. # Optional. A fixed fee charged per thousand impressions. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed. "currencyCode": "A String", # The three-letter currency code defined in ISO 4217. "nanos": 42, # Number of nano (10^-9) units of the amount. The value must be between -999,999,999 and +999,999,999 inclusive. If `units` is positive, `nanos` must be positive or zero. If `units` is zero, `nanos` can be positive, zero, or negative. If `units` is negative, `nanos` must be negative or zero. For example $-1.75 is represented as `units`=-1 and `nanos`=-750,000,000. "units": "A String", # The whole units of the amount. For example if `currencyCode` is `"USD"`, then 1 unit is one US dollar. diff --git a/docs/dyn/backupdr_v1.projects.locations.backupPlans.html b/docs/dyn/backupdr_v1.projects.locations.backupPlans.html index 19196f15cc7..455cf896e3a 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/backupdr_v1.projects.locations.backupPlans.html +++ b/docs/dyn/backupdr_v1.projects.locations.backupPlans.html @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@

Method Details

{ # A `BackupPlan` specifies some common fields, such as `description` as well as one or more `BackupRule` messages. Each `BackupRule` has a retention policy and defines a schedule by which the system is to perform backup workloads. "backupRules": [ # Optional. The backup rules for this `BackupPlan`. { # `BackupRule` binds the backup schedule to a retention policy. - "backupRetentionDays": 42, # Required. Configures the duration for which backup data will be kept. It is defined in “days”. The value should be greater than or equal to minimum enforced retention of the backup vault. Minimum value is 1 and maximum value is 36159 for custom retention on-demand backup. Minimum and maximum values are workload specific for all other rules. + "backupRetentionDays": 42, # Required. Configures the duration for which backup data will be kept. It is defined in “days”. The value should be greater than or equal to minimum enforced retention of the backup vault. Minimum value is 1 and maximum value is 36159 for custom retention on-demand backup. Minimum and maximum values are workload specific for all other rules. Note: Longer retention can lead to higher storage costs post introductory trial. We recommend starting with a short duration of 3 days or less. "ruleId": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The unique id of this `BackupRule`. The `rule_id` is unique per `BackupPlan`.The `rule_id` must start with a lowercase letter followed by up to 62 lowercase letters, numbers, or hyphens. Pattern, /a-z{,62}/. "standardSchedule": { # `StandardSchedule` defines a schedule that run within the confines of a defined window of days. We can define recurrence type for schedule as HOURLY, DAILY, WEEKLY, MONTHLY or YEARLY. # Optional. Defines a schedule that runs within the confines of a defined window of time. "backupWindow": { # `BackupWindow` defines a window of the day during which backup jobs will run. # Required. A BackupWindow defines the window of day during which backup jobs will run. Jobs are queued at the beginning of the window and will be marked as `NOT_RUN` if they do not start by the end of the window. Note: running jobs will not be cancelled at the end of the window. @@ -248,7 +248,7 @@

Method Details

{ # A `BackupPlan` specifies some common fields, such as `description` as well as one or more `BackupRule` messages. Each `BackupRule` has a retention policy and defines a schedule by which the system is to perform backup workloads. "backupRules": [ # Optional. The backup rules for this `BackupPlan`. { # `BackupRule` binds the backup schedule to a retention policy. - "backupRetentionDays": 42, # Required. Configures the duration for which backup data will be kept. It is defined in “days”. The value should be greater than or equal to minimum enforced retention of the backup vault. Minimum value is 1 and maximum value is 36159 for custom retention on-demand backup. Minimum and maximum values are workload specific for all other rules. + "backupRetentionDays": 42, # Required. Configures the duration for which backup data will be kept. It is defined in “days”. The value should be greater than or equal to minimum enforced retention of the backup vault. Minimum value is 1 and maximum value is 36159 for custom retention on-demand backup. Minimum and maximum values are workload specific for all other rules. Note: Longer retention can lead to higher storage costs post introductory trial. We recommend starting with a short duration of 3 days or less. "ruleId": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The unique id of this `BackupRule`. The `rule_id` is unique per `BackupPlan`.The `rule_id` must start with a lowercase letter followed by up to 62 lowercase letters, numbers, or hyphens. Pattern, /a-z{,62}/. "standardSchedule": { # `StandardSchedule` defines a schedule that run within the confines of a defined window of days. We can define recurrence type for schedule as HOURLY, DAILY, WEEKLY, MONTHLY or YEARLY. # Optional. Defines a schedule that runs within the confines of a defined window of time. "backupWindow": { # `BackupWindow` defines a window of the day during which backup jobs will run. # Required. A BackupWindow defines the window of day during which backup jobs will run. Jobs are queued at the beginning of the window and will be marked as `NOT_RUN` if they do not start by the end of the window. Note: running jobs will not be cancelled at the end of the window. @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@

Method Details

{ # A `BackupPlan` specifies some common fields, such as `description` as well as one or more `BackupRule` messages. Each `BackupRule` has a retention policy and defines a schedule by which the system is to perform backup workloads. "backupRules": [ # Optional. The backup rules for this `BackupPlan`. { # `BackupRule` binds the backup schedule to a retention policy. - "backupRetentionDays": 42, # Required. Configures the duration for which backup data will be kept. It is defined in “days”. The value should be greater than or equal to minimum enforced retention of the backup vault. Minimum value is 1 and maximum value is 36159 for custom retention on-demand backup. Minimum and maximum values are workload specific for all other rules. + "backupRetentionDays": 42, # Required. Configures the duration for which backup data will be kept. It is defined in “days”. The value should be greater than or equal to minimum enforced retention of the backup vault. Minimum value is 1 and maximum value is 36159 for custom retention on-demand backup. Minimum and maximum values are workload specific for all other rules. Note: Longer retention can lead to higher storage costs post introductory trial. We recommend starting with a short duration of 3 days or less. "ruleId": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The unique id of this `BackupRule`. The `rule_id` is unique per `BackupPlan`.The `rule_id` must start with a lowercase letter followed by up to 62 lowercase letters, numbers, or hyphens. Pattern, /a-z{,62}/. "standardSchedule": { # `StandardSchedule` defines a schedule that run within the confines of a defined window of days. We can define recurrence type for schedule as HOURLY, DAILY, WEEKLY, MONTHLY or YEARLY. # Optional. Defines a schedule that runs within the confines of a defined window of time. "backupWindow": { # `BackupWindow` defines a window of the day during which backup jobs will run. # Required. A BackupWindow defines the window of day during which backup jobs will run. Jobs are queued at the beginning of the window and will be marked as `NOT_RUN` if they do not start by the end of the window. Note: running jobs will not be cancelled at the end of the window. @@ -397,7 +397,7 @@

Method Details

{ # A `BackupPlan` specifies some common fields, such as `description` as well as one or more `BackupRule` messages. Each `BackupRule` has a retention policy and defines a schedule by which the system is to perform backup workloads. "backupRules": [ # Optional. The backup rules for this `BackupPlan`. { # `BackupRule` binds the backup schedule to a retention policy. - "backupRetentionDays": 42, # Required. Configures the duration for which backup data will be kept. It is defined in “days”. The value should be greater than or equal to minimum enforced retention of the backup vault. Minimum value is 1 and maximum value is 36159 for custom retention on-demand backup. Minimum and maximum values are workload specific for all other rules. + "backupRetentionDays": 42, # Required. Configures the duration for which backup data will be kept. It is defined in “days”. The value should be greater than or equal to minimum enforced retention of the backup vault. Minimum value is 1 and maximum value is 36159 for custom retention on-demand backup. Minimum and maximum values are workload specific for all other rules. Note: Longer retention can lead to higher storage costs post introductory trial. We recommend starting with a short duration of 3 days or less. "ruleId": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The unique id of this `BackupRule`. The `rule_id` is unique per `BackupPlan`.The `rule_id` must start with a lowercase letter followed by up to 62 lowercase letters, numbers, or hyphens. Pattern, /a-z{,62}/. "standardSchedule": { # `StandardSchedule` defines a schedule that run within the confines of a defined window of days. We can define recurrence type for schedule as HOURLY, DAILY, WEEKLY, MONTHLY or YEARLY. # Optional. Defines a schedule that runs within the confines of a defined window of time. "backupWindow": { # `BackupWindow` defines a window of the day during which backup jobs will run. # Required. A BackupWindow defines the window of day during which backup jobs will run. Jobs are queued at the beginning of the window and will be marked as `NOT_RUN` if they do not start by the end of the window. Note: running jobs will not be cancelled at the end of the window. diff --git a/docs/dyn/backupdr_v1.projects.locations.backupPlans.revisions.html b/docs/dyn/backupdr_v1.projects.locations.backupPlans.revisions.html index 6fc00d1855d..0e4ce9900ec 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/backupdr_v1.projects.locations.backupPlans.revisions.html +++ b/docs/dyn/backupdr_v1.projects.locations.backupPlans.revisions.html @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@

Method Details

"backupPlanSnapshot": { # A `BackupPlan` specifies some common fields, such as `description` as well as one or more `BackupRule` messages. Each `BackupRule` has a retention policy and defines a schedule by which the system is to perform backup workloads. # The Backup Plan being encompassed by this revision. "backupRules": [ # Optional. The backup rules for this `BackupPlan`. { # `BackupRule` binds the backup schedule to a retention policy. - "backupRetentionDays": 42, # Required. Configures the duration for which backup data will be kept. It is defined in “days”. The value should be greater than or equal to minimum enforced retention of the backup vault. Minimum value is 1 and maximum value is 36159 for custom retention on-demand backup. Minimum and maximum values are workload specific for all other rules. + "backupRetentionDays": 42, # Required. Configures the duration for which backup data will be kept. It is defined in “days”. The value should be greater than or equal to minimum enforced retention of the backup vault. Minimum value is 1 and maximum value is 36159 for custom retention on-demand backup. Minimum and maximum values are workload specific for all other rules. Note: Longer retention can lead to higher storage costs post introductory trial. We recommend starting with a short duration of 3 days or less. "ruleId": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The unique id of this `BackupRule`. The `rule_id` is unique per `BackupPlan`.The `rule_id` must start with a lowercase letter followed by up to 62 lowercase letters, numbers, or hyphens. Pattern, /a-z{,62}/. "standardSchedule": { # `StandardSchedule` defines a schedule that run within the confines of a defined window of days. We can define recurrence type for schedule as HOURLY, DAILY, WEEKLY, MONTHLY or YEARLY. # Optional. Defines a schedule that runs within the confines of a defined window of time. "backupWindow": { # `BackupWindow` defines a window of the day during which backup jobs will run. # Required. A BackupWindow defines the window of day during which backup jobs will run. Jobs are queued at the beginning of the window and will be marked as `NOT_RUN` if they do not start by the end of the window. Note: running jobs will not be cancelled at the end of the window. @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@

Method Details

"backupPlanSnapshot": { # A `BackupPlan` specifies some common fields, such as `description` as well as one or more `BackupRule` messages. Each `BackupRule` has a retention policy and defines a schedule by which the system is to perform backup workloads. # The Backup Plan being encompassed by this revision. "backupRules": [ # Optional. The backup rules for this `BackupPlan`. { # `BackupRule` binds the backup schedule to a retention policy. - "backupRetentionDays": 42, # Required. Configures the duration for which backup data will be kept. It is defined in “days”. The value should be greater than or equal to minimum enforced retention of the backup vault. Minimum value is 1 and maximum value is 36159 for custom retention on-demand backup. Minimum and maximum values are workload specific for all other rules. + "backupRetentionDays": 42, # Required. Configures the duration for which backup data will be kept. It is defined in “days”. The value should be greater than or equal to minimum enforced retention of the backup vault. Minimum value is 1 and maximum value is 36159 for custom retention on-demand backup. Minimum and maximum values are workload specific for all other rules. Note: Longer retention can lead to higher storage costs post introductory trial. We recommend starting with a short duration of 3 days or less. "ruleId": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The unique id of this `BackupRule`. The `rule_id` is unique per `BackupPlan`.The `rule_id` must start with a lowercase letter followed by up to 62 lowercase letters, numbers, or hyphens. Pattern, /a-z{,62}/. "standardSchedule": { # `StandardSchedule` defines a schedule that run within the confines of a defined window of days. We can define recurrence type for schedule as HOURLY, DAILY, WEEKLY, MONTHLY or YEARLY. # Optional. Defines a schedule that runs within the confines of a defined window of time. "backupWindow": { # `BackupWindow` defines a window of the day during which backup jobs will run. # Required. A BackupWindow defines the window of day during which backup jobs will run. Jobs are queued at the beginning of the window and will be marked as `NOT_RUN` if they do not start by the end of the window. Note: running jobs will not be cancelled at the end of the window. diff --git a/docs/dyn/backupdr_v1.projects.locations.backupVaults.html b/docs/dyn/backupdr_v1.projects.locations.backupVaults.html index 65f784384c1..8f314278f9f 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/backupdr_v1.projects.locations.backupVaults.html +++ b/docs/dyn/backupdr_v1.projects.locations.backupVaults.html @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "backupCount": "A String", # Output only. The number of backups in this backup vault. - "backupMinimumEnforcedRetentionDuration": "A String", # Required. The default and minimum enforced retention for each backup within the backup vault. The enforced retention for each backup can be extended. + "backupMinimumEnforcedRetentionDuration": "A String", # Required. The default and minimum enforced retention for each backup within the backup vault. The enforced retention for each backup can be extended. Note: Longer minimum enforced retention period impacts potential storage costs post introductory trial. We recommend starting with a short duration of 3 days or less. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the instance was created. "deletable": True or False, # Output only. Set to true when there are no backups nested under this resource. "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the BackupVault instance (2048 characters or less). @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "backupCount": "A String", # Output only. The number of backups in this backup vault. - "backupMinimumEnforcedRetentionDuration": "A String", # Required. The default and minimum enforced retention for each backup within the backup vault. The enforced retention for each backup can be extended. + "backupMinimumEnforcedRetentionDuration": "A String", # Required. The default and minimum enforced retention for each backup within the backup vault. The enforced retention for each backup can be extended. Note: Longer minimum enforced retention period impacts potential storage costs post introductory trial. We recommend starting with a short duration of 3 days or less. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the instance was created. "deletable": True or False, # Output only. Set to true when there are no backups nested under this resource. "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the BackupVault instance (2048 characters or less). @@ -309,7 +309,7 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "backupCount": "A String", # Output only. The number of backups in this backup vault. - "backupMinimumEnforcedRetentionDuration": "A String", # Required. The default and minimum enforced retention for each backup within the backup vault. The enforced retention for each backup can be extended. + "backupMinimumEnforcedRetentionDuration": "A String", # Required. The default and minimum enforced retention for each backup within the backup vault. The enforced retention for each backup can be extended. Note: Longer minimum enforced retention period impacts potential storage costs post introductory trial. We recommend starting with a short duration of 3 days or less. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the instance was created. "deletable": True or False, # Output only. Set to true when there are no backups nested under this resource. "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the BackupVault instance (2048 characters or less). @@ -358,7 +358,7 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "backupCount": "A String", # Output only. The number of backups in this backup vault. - "backupMinimumEnforcedRetentionDuration": "A String", # Required. The default and minimum enforced retention for each backup within the backup vault. The enforced retention for each backup can be extended. + "backupMinimumEnforcedRetentionDuration": "A String", # Required. The default and minimum enforced retention for each backup within the backup vault. The enforced retention for each backup can be extended. Note: Longer minimum enforced retention period impacts potential storage costs post introductory trial. We recommend starting with a short duration of 3 days or less. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the instance was created. "deletable": True or False, # Output only. Set to true when there are no backups nested under this resource. "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the BackupVault instance (2048 characters or less). @@ -411,7 +411,7 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "backupCount": "A String", # Output only. The number of backups in this backup vault. - "backupMinimumEnforcedRetentionDuration": "A String", # Required. The default and minimum enforced retention for each backup within the backup vault. The enforced retention for each backup can be extended. + "backupMinimumEnforcedRetentionDuration": "A String", # Required. The default and minimum enforced retention for each backup within the backup vault. The enforced retention for each backup can be extended. Note: Longer minimum enforced retention period impacts potential storage costs post introductory trial. We recommend starting with a short duration of 3 days or less. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the instance was created. "deletable": True or False, # Output only. Set to true when there are no backups nested under this resource. "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the BackupVault instance (2048 characters or less). diff --git a/docs/dyn/backupdr_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/backupdr_v1.projects.locations.html index f45fca047d6..ece1123bbfd 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/backupdr_v1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/backupdr_v1.projects.locations.html @@ -182,6 +182,7 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # Represents a Trial for a project. + "endReason": "A String", # Output only. The reason for ending the trial. "endTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the trial will expire. "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the trial. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/trial "startTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the trial was subscribed. diff --git a/docs/dyn/backupdr_v1.projects.locations.trial.html b/docs/dyn/backupdr_v1.projects.locations.trial.html index 01c562291b6..caca1e91569 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/backupdr_v1.projects.locations.trial.html +++ b/docs/dyn/backupdr_v1.projects.locations.trial.html @@ -107,6 +107,7 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # Represents a Trial for a project. + "endReason": "A String", # Output only. The reason for ending the trial. "endTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the trial will expire. "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the trial. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/trial "startTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the trial was subscribed. diff --git a/docs/dyn/bigquerydatatransfer_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/bigquerydatatransfer_v1.projects.locations.html index b328ad6694d..da6dc4c755c 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/bigquerydatatransfer_v1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/bigquerydatatransfer_v1.projects.locations.html @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/bigqueryreservation_v1.projects.locations.reservations.html b/docs/dyn/bigqueryreservation_v1.projects.locations.reservations.html index bd9b33990aa..38fe9d256a4 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/bigqueryreservation_v1.projects.locations.reservations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/bigqueryreservation_v1.projects.locations.reservations.html @@ -241,7 +241,7 @@

Method Details

The object takes the form of: { # The request for ReservationService.FailoverReservation. - "failoverMode": "A String", # Optional. failover mode for the failover operation. + "failoverMode": "A String", # Optional. A parameter that determines how writes that are pending replication are handled after a failover is initiated. If not specified, HARD failover mode is used by default. } x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. diff --git a/docs/dyn/bigtableadmin_v2.projects.instances.materializedViews.html b/docs/dyn/bigtableadmin_v2.projects.instances.materializedViews.html index e700092d789..69d9ecf9439 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/bigtableadmin_v2.projects.instances.materializedViews.html +++ b/docs/dyn/bigtableadmin_v2.projects.instances.materializedViews.html @@ -120,10 +120,10 @@

Method Details

The object takes the form of: { # A materialized view object that can be referenced in SQL queries. - "deletionProtection": True or False, # Set to true to make the MaterializedView protected against deletion. - "etag": "A String", # Optional. The etag for this materialized view. This may be sent on update requests to ensure that the client has an up-to-date value before proceeding. The server returns an ABORTED error on a mismatched etag. - "name": "A String", # Identifier. The unique name of the materialized view. Format: `projects/{project}/instances/{instance}/materializedViews/{materialized_view}` - "query": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The materialized view's select query. + "deletionProtection": True or False, # Set to true to make the MaterializedView protected against deletion. Views: `SCHEMA_VIEW`, `REPLICATION_VIEW`, `FULL`. + "etag": "A String", # Optional. The etag for this materialized view. This may be sent on update requests to ensure that the client has an up-to-date value before proceeding. The server returns an ABORTED error on a mismatched etag. Views: `SCHEMA_VIEW`, `REPLICATION_VIEW`, `FULL`. + "name": "A String", # Identifier. The unique name of the materialized view. Format: `projects/{project}/instances/{instance}/materializedViews/{materialized_view}` Views: `SCHEMA_VIEW`, `REPLICATION_VIEW`, `FULL`. + "query": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The materialized view's select query. Views: `SCHEMA_VIEW`, `FULL`. } materializedViewId: string, Required. The ID to use for the materialized view, which will become the final component of the materialized view's resource name. @@ -190,10 +190,10 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # A materialized view object that can be referenced in SQL queries. - "deletionProtection": True or False, # Set to true to make the MaterializedView protected against deletion. - "etag": "A String", # Optional. The etag for this materialized view. This may be sent on update requests to ensure that the client has an up-to-date value before proceeding. The server returns an ABORTED error on a mismatched etag. - "name": "A String", # Identifier. The unique name of the materialized view. Format: `projects/{project}/instances/{instance}/materializedViews/{materialized_view}` - "query": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The materialized view's select query. + "deletionProtection": True or False, # Set to true to make the MaterializedView protected against deletion. Views: `SCHEMA_VIEW`, `REPLICATION_VIEW`, `FULL`. + "etag": "A String", # Optional. The etag for this materialized view. This may be sent on update requests to ensure that the client has an up-to-date value before proceeding. The server returns an ABORTED error on a mismatched etag. Views: `SCHEMA_VIEW`, `REPLICATION_VIEW`, `FULL`. + "name": "A String", # Identifier. The unique name of the materialized view. Format: `projects/{project}/instances/{instance}/materializedViews/{materialized_view}` Views: `SCHEMA_VIEW`, `REPLICATION_VIEW`, `FULL`. + "query": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The materialized view's select query. Views: `SCHEMA_VIEW`, `FULL`. }
@@ -272,10 +272,10 @@

Method Details

{ # Response message for BigtableInstanceAdmin.ListMaterializedViews. "materializedViews": [ # The list of requested materialized views. { # A materialized view object that can be referenced in SQL queries. - "deletionProtection": True or False, # Set to true to make the MaterializedView protected against deletion. - "etag": "A String", # Optional. The etag for this materialized view. This may be sent on update requests to ensure that the client has an up-to-date value before proceeding. The server returns an ABORTED error on a mismatched etag. - "name": "A String", # Identifier. The unique name of the materialized view. Format: `projects/{project}/instances/{instance}/materializedViews/{materialized_view}` - "query": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The materialized view's select query. + "deletionProtection": True or False, # Set to true to make the MaterializedView protected against deletion. Views: `SCHEMA_VIEW`, `REPLICATION_VIEW`, `FULL`. + "etag": "A String", # Optional. The etag for this materialized view. This may be sent on update requests to ensure that the client has an up-to-date value before proceeding. The server returns an ABORTED error on a mismatched etag. Views: `SCHEMA_VIEW`, `REPLICATION_VIEW`, `FULL`. + "name": "A String", # Identifier. The unique name of the materialized view. Format: `projects/{project}/instances/{instance}/materializedViews/{materialized_view}` Views: `SCHEMA_VIEW`, `REPLICATION_VIEW`, `FULL`. + "query": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The materialized view's select query. Views: `SCHEMA_VIEW`, `FULL`. }, ], "nextPageToken": "A String", # A token, which can be sent as `page_token` to retrieve the next page. If this field is omitted, there are no subsequent pages. @@ -301,15 +301,15 @@

Method Details

Updates a materialized view within an instance.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Identifier. The unique name of the materialized view. Format: `projects/{project}/instances/{instance}/materializedViews/{materialized_view}` (required)
+  name: string, Identifier. The unique name of the materialized view. Format: `projects/{project}/instances/{instance}/materializedViews/{materialized_view}` Views: `SCHEMA_VIEW`, `REPLICATION_VIEW`, `FULL`. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # A materialized view object that can be referenced in SQL queries.
-  "deletionProtection": True or False, # Set to true to make the MaterializedView protected against deletion.
-  "etag": "A String", # Optional. The etag for this materialized view. This may be sent on update requests to ensure that the client has an up-to-date value before proceeding. The server returns an ABORTED error on a mismatched etag.
-  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The unique name of the materialized view. Format: `projects/{project}/instances/{instance}/materializedViews/{materialized_view}`
-  "query": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The materialized view's select query.
+  "deletionProtection": True or False, # Set to true to make the MaterializedView protected against deletion. Views: `SCHEMA_VIEW`, `REPLICATION_VIEW`, `FULL`.
+  "etag": "A String", # Optional. The etag for this materialized view. This may be sent on update requests to ensure that the client has an up-to-date value before proceeding. The server returns an ABORTED error on a mismatched etag. Views: `SCHEMA_VIEW`, `REPLICATION_VIEW`, `FULL`.
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The unique name of the materialized view. Format: `projects/{project}/instances/{instance}/materializedViews/{materialized_view}` Views: `SCHEMA_VIEW`, `REPLICATION_VIEW`, `FULL`.
+  "query": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The materialized view's select query. Views: `SCHEMA_VIEW`, `FULL`.
 }
 
   updateMask: string, Optional. The list of fields to update.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/classroom_v1.courses.announcements.html b/docs/dyn/classroom_v1.courses.announcements.html
index d7a64bc8ead..42c0371b10c 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/classroom_v1.courses.announcements.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/classroom_v1.courses.announcements.html
@@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ 

Instance Methods

Retrieves the next page of results.

modifyAssignees(courseId, id, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Modifies assignee mode and options of an announcement. Only a teacher of the course that contains the announcement may call this method. This method returns the following error codes: * `PERMISSION_DENIED` if the requesting user is not permitted to access the requested course or course work or for access errors. * `INVALID_ARGUMENT` if the request is malformed. * `NOT_FOUND` if the requested course or course work does not exist.

+

Modifies assignee mode and options of an announcement. Only a teacher of the course that contains the announcement may call this method. This method returns the following error codes: * `PERMISSION_DENIED` if the requesting user is not permitted to access the requested course or course work or for access errors. * `INVALID_ARGUMENT` if the request is malformed. * `NOT_FOUND` if the requested course or course work does not exist. * `FAILED_PRECONDITION` for the following request error: * EmptyAssignees

patch(courseId, id, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)

Updates one or more fields of an announcement. This method returns the following error codes: * `PERMISSION_DENIED` if the requesting developer project did not create the corresponding announcement or for access errors. * `INVALID_ARGUMENT` if the request is malformed. * `FAILED_PRECONDITION` if the requested announcement has already been deleted. * `NOT_FOUND` if the requested course or announcement does not exist

@@ -473,7 +473,7 @@

Method Details

modifyAssignees(courseId, id, body=None, x__xgafv=None) -
Modifies assignee mode and options of an announcement. Only a teacher of the course that contains the announcement may call this method. This method returns the following error codes: * `PERMISSION_DENIED` if the requesting user is not permitted to access the requested course or course work or for access errors. * `INVALID_ARGUMENT` if the request is malformed. * `NOT_FOUND` if the requested course or course work does not exist.
+  
Modifies assignee mode and options of an announcement. Only a teacher of the course that contains the announcement may call this method. This method returns the following error codes: * `PERMISSION_DENIED` if the requesting user is not permitted to access the requested course or course work or for access errors. * `INVALID_ARGUMENT` if the request is malformed. * `NOT_FOUND` if the requested course or course work does not exist. * `FAILED_PRECONDITION` for the following request error: * EmptyAssignees
 
 Args:
   courseId: string, Identifier of the course. This identifier can be either the Classroom-assigned identifier or an alias. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/classroom_v1.courses.courseWork.html b/docs/dyn/classroom_v1.courses.courseWork.html
index 47c597c5dc3..9bd10ff2ac9 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/classroom_v1.courses.courseWork.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/classroom_v1.courses.courseWork.html
@@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ 

Instance Methods

Retrieves the next page of results.

modifyAssignees(courseId, id, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Modifies assignee mode and options of a coursework. Only a teacher of the course that contains the coursework may call this method. This method returns the following error codes: * `PERMISSION_DENIED` if the requesting user is not permitted to access the requested course or course work or for access errors. * `INVALID_ARGUMENT` if the request is malformed. * `NOT_FOUND` if the requested course or course work does not exist.

+

Modifies assignee mode and options of a coursework. Only a teacher of the course that contains the coursework may call this method. This method returns the following error codes: * `PERMISSION_DENIED` if the requesting user is not permitted to access the requested course or course work or for access errors. * `INVALID_ARGUMENT` if the request is malformed. * `NOT_FOUND` if the requested course or course work does not exist. * `FAILED_PRECONDITION` for the following request error: * EmptyAssignees

patch(courseId, id, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)

Updates one or more fields of a course work. See google.classroom.v1.CourseWork for details of which fields may be updated and who may change them. This request must be made by the Developer Console project of the [OAuth client ID](https://support.google.com/cloud/answer/6158849) used to create the corresponding course work item. This method returns the following error codes: * `PERMISSION_DENIED` if the requesting developer project did not create the corresponding course work, if the user is not permitted to make the requested modification to the student submission, or for access errors. * `INVALID_ARGUMENT` if the request is malformed. * `FAILED_PRECONDITION` if the requested course work has already been deleted. * `NOT_FOUND` if the requested course or course work does not exist.

@@ -630,7 +630,7 @@

Method Details

modifyAssignees(courseId, id, body=None, x__xgafv=None) -
Modifies assignee mode and options of a coursework. Only a teacher of the course that contains the coursework may call this method. This method returns the following error codes: * `PERMISSION_DENIED` if the requesting user is not permitted to access the requested course or course work or for access errors. * `INVALID_ARGUMENT` if the request is malformed. * `NOT_FOUND` if the requested course or course work does not exist.
+  
Modifies assignee mode and options of a coursework. Only a teacher of the course that contains the coursework may call this method. This method returns the following error codes: * `PERMISSION_DENIED` if the requesting user is not permitted to access the requested course or course work or for access errors. * `INVALID_ARGUMENT` if the request is malformed. * `NOT_FOUND` if the requested course or course work does not exist. * `FAILED_PRECONDITION` for the following request error: * EmptyAssignees
 
 Args:
   courseId: string, Identifier of the course. This identifier can be either the Classroom-assigned identifier or an alias. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/cloudbuild_v1.projects.builds.html b/docs/dyn/cloudbuild_v1.projects.builds.html
index ccfc3e054ca..c64407a5886 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/cloudbuild_v1.projects.builds.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/cloudbuild_v1.projects.builds.html
@@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ 

Method Details

], "npmPackages": [ # A list of npm packages to be uploaded to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. Npm packages in the specified paths will be uploaded to the specified Artifact Registry repository using the builder service account's credentials. If any packages fail to be pushed, the build is marked FAILURE. { # Npm package to upload to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. - "packagePath": "A String", # Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package + "packagePath": "A String", # Optional. Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package Only one of `archive` or `package_path` can be specified. "repository": "A String", # Artifact Registry repository, in the form "https://$REGION-npm.pkg.dev/$PROJECT/$REPOSITORY" Npm package in the workspace specified by path will be zipped and uploaded to Artifact Registry with this location as a prefix. }, ], @@ -624,7 +624,7 @@

Method Details

], "npmPackages": [ # A list of npm packages to be uploaded to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. Npm packages in the specified paths will be uploaded to the specified Artifact Registry repository using the builder service account's credentials. If any packages fail to be pushed, the build is marked FAILURE. { # Npm package to upload to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. - "packagePath": "A String", # Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package + "packagePath": "A String", # Optional. Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package Only one of `archive` or `package_path` can be specified. "repository": "A String", # Artifact Registry repository, in the form "https://$REGION-npm.pkg.dev/$PROJECT/$REPOSITORY" Npm package in the workspace specified by path will be zipped and uploaded to Artifact Registry with this location as a prefix. }, ], @@ -1069,7 +1069,7 @@

Method Details

], "npmPackages": [ # A list of npm packages to be uploaded to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. Npm packages in the specified paths will be uploaded to the specified Artifact Registry repository using the builder service account's credentials. If any packages fail to be pushed, the build is marked FAILURE. { # Npm package to upload to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. - "packagePath": "A String", # Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package + "packagePath": "A String", # Optional. Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package Only one of `archive` or `package_path` can be specified. "repository": "A String", # Artifact Registry repository, in the form "https://$REGION-npm.pkg.dev/$PROJECT/$REPOSITORY" Npm package in the workspace specified by path will be zipped and uploaded to Artifact Registry with this location as a prefix. }, ], @@ -1489,7 +1489,7 @@

Method Details

], "npmPackages": [ # A list of npm packages to be uploaded to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. Npm packages in the specified paths will be uploaded to the specified Artifact Registry repository using the builder service account's credentials. If any packages fail to be pushed, the build is marked FAILURE. { # Npm package to upload to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. - "packagePath": "A String", # Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package + "packagePath": "A String", # Optional. Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package Only one of `archive` or `package_path` can be specified. "repository": "A String", # Artifact Registry repository, in the form "https://$REGION-npm.pkg.dev/$PROJECT/$REPOSITORY" Npm package in the workspace specified by path will be zipped and uploaded to Artifact Registry with this location as a prefix. }, ], diff --git a/docs/dyn/cloudbuild_v1.projects.locations.builds.html b/docs/dyn/cloudbuild_v1.projects.locations.builds.html index 3e230f77a99..e821d41095e 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/cloudbuild_v1.projects.locations.builds.html +++ b/docs/dyn/cloudbuild_v1.projects.locations.builds.html @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@

Method Details

], "npmPackages": [ # A list of npm packages to be uploaded to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. Npm packages in the specified paths will be uploaded to the specified Artifact Registry repository using the builder service account's credentials. If any packages fail to be pushed, the build is marked FAILURE. { # Npm package to upload to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. - "packagePath": "A String", # Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package + "packagePath": "A String", # Optional. Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package Only one of `archive` or `package_path` can be specified. "repository": "A String", # Artifact Registry repository, in the form "https://$REGION-npm.pkg.dev/$PROJECT/$REPOSITORY" Npm package in the workspace specified by path will be zipped and uploaded to Artifact Registry with this location as a prefix. }, ], @@ -623,7 +623,7 @@

Method Details

], "npmPackages": [ # A list of npm packages to be uploaded to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. Npm packages in the specified paths will be uploaded to the specified Artifact Registry repository using the builder service account's credentials. If any packages fail to be pushed, the build is marked FAILURE. { # Npm package to upload to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. - "packagePath": "A String", # Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package + "packagePath": "A String", # Optional. Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package Only one of `archive` or `package_path` can be specified. "repository": "A String", # Artifact Registry repository, in the form "https://$REGION-npm.pkg.dev/$PROJECT/$REPOSITORY" Npm package in the workspace specified by path will be zipped and uploaded to Artifact Registry with this location as a prefix. }, ], @@ -1068,7 +1068,7 @@

Method Details

], "npmPackages": [ # A list of npm packages to be uploaded to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. Npm packages in the specified paths will be uploaded to the specified Artifact Registry repository using the builder service account's credentials. If any packages fail to be pushed, the build is marked FAILURE. { # Npm package to upload to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. - "packagePath": "A String", # Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package + "packagePath": "A String", # Optional. Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package Only one of `archive` or `package_path` can be specified. "repository": "A String", # Artifact Registry repository, in the form "https://$REGION-npm.pkg.dev/$PROJECT/$REPOSITORY" Npm package in the workspace specified by path will be zipped and uploaded to Artifact Registry with this location as a prefix. }, ], @@ -1488,7 +1488,7 @@

Method Details

], "npmPackages": [ # A list of npm packages to be uploaded to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. Npm packages in the specified paths will be uploaded to the specified Artifact Registry repository using the builder service account's credentials. If any packages fail to be pushed, the build is marked FAILURE. { # Npm package to upload to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. - "packagePath": "A String", # Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package + "packagePath": "A String", # Optional. Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package Only one of `archive` or `package_path` can be specified. "repository": "A String", # Artifact Registry repository, in the form "https://$REGION-npm.pkg.dev/$PROJECT/$REPOSITORY" Npm package in the workspace specified by path will be zipped and uploaded to Artifact Registry with this location as a prefix. }, ], diff --git a/docs/dyn/cloudbuild_v1.projects.locations.triggers.html b/docs/dyn/cloudbuild_v1.projects.locations.triggers.html index 36a0b388647..f7dbc864b69 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/cloudbuild_v1.projects.locations.triggers.html +++ b/docs/dyn/cloudbuild_v1.projects.locations.triggers.html @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@

Method Details

], "npmPackages": [ # A list of npm packages to be uploaded to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. Npm packages in the specified paths will be uploaded to the specified Artifact Registry repository using the builder service account's credentials. If any packages fail to be pushed, the build is marked FAILURE. { # Npm package to upload to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. - "packagePath": "A String", # Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package + "packagePath": "A String", # Optional. Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package Only one of `archive` or `package_path` can be specified. "repository": "A String", # Artifact Registry repository, in the form "https://$REGION-npm.pkg.dev/$PROJECT/$REPOSITORY" Npm package in the workspace specified by path will be zipped and uploaded to Artifact Registry with this location as a prefix. }, ], @@ -795,7 +795,7 @@

Method Details

], "npmPackages": [ # A list of npm packages to be uploaded to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. Npm packages in the specified paths will be uploaded to the specified Artifact Registry repository using the builder service account's credentials. If any packages fail to be pushed, the build is marked FAILURE. { # Npm package to upload to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. - "packagePath": "A String", # Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package + "packagePath": "A String", # Optional. Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package Only one of `archive` or `package_path` can be specified. "repository": "A String", # Artifact Registry repository, in the form "https://$REGION-npm.pkg.dev/$PROJECT/$REPOSITORY" Npm package in the workspace specified by path will be zipped and uploaded to Artifact Registry with this location as a prefix. }, ], @@ -1420,7 +1420,7 @@

Method Details

], "npmPackages": [ # A list of npm packages to be uploaded to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. Npm packages in the specified paths will be uploaded to the specified Artifact Registry repository using the builder service account's credentials. If any packages fail to be pushed, the build is marked FAILURE. { # Npm package to upload to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. - "packagePath": "A String", # Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package + "packagePath": "A String", # Optional. Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package Only one of `archive` or `package_path` can be specified. "repository": "A String", # Artifact Registry repository, in the form "https://$REGION-npm.pkg.dev/$PROJECT/$REPOSITORY" Npm package in the workspace specified by path will be zipped and uploaded to Artifact Registry with this location as a prefix. }, ], @@ -2029,7 +2029,7 @@

Method Details

], "npmPackages": [ # A list of npm packages to be uploaded to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. Npm packages in the specified paths will be uploaded to the specified Artifact Registry repository using the builder service account's credentials. If any packages fail to be pushed, the build is marked FAILURE. { # Npm package to upload to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. - "packagePath": "A String", # Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package + "packagePath": "A String", # Optional. Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package Only one of `archive` or `package_path` can be specified. "repository": "A String", # Artifact Registry repository, in the form "https://$REGION-npm.pkg.dev/$PROJECT/$REPOSITORY" Npm package in the workspace specified by path will be zipped and uploaded to Artifact Registry with this location as a prefix. }, ], @@ -2643,7 +2643,7 @@

Method Details

], "npmPackages": [ # A list of npm packages to be uploaded to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. Npm packages in the specified paths will be uploaded to the specified Artifact Registry repository using the builder service account's credentials. If any packages fail to be pushed, the build is marked FAILURE. { # Npm package to upload to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. - "packagePath": "A String", # Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package + "packagePath": "A String", # Optional. Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package Only one of `archive` or `package_path` can be specified. "repository": "A String", # Artifact Registry repository, in the form "https://$REGION-npm.pkg.dev/$PROJECT/$REPOSITORY" Npm package in the workspace specified by path will be zipped and uploaded to Artifact Registry with this location as a prefix. }, ], @@ -3242,7 +3242,7 @@

Method Details

], "npmPackages": [ # A list of npm packages to be uploaded to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. Npm packages in the specified paths will be uploaded to the specified Artifact Registry repository using the builder service account's credentials. If any packages fail to be pushed, the build is marked FAILURE. { # Npm package to upload to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. - "packagePath": "A String", # Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package + "packagePath": "A String", # Optional. Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package Only one of `archive` or `package_path` can be specified. "repository": "A String", # Artifact Registry repository, in the form "https://$REGION-npm.pkg.dev/$PROJECT/$REPOSITORY" Npm package in the workspace specified by path will be zipped and uploaded to Artifact Registry with this location as a prefix. }, ], diff --git a/docs/dyn/cloudbuild_v1.projects.triggers.html b/docs/dyn/cloudbuild_v1.projects.triggers.html index 0fb97c33134..c8f0171c8c7 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/cloudbuild_v1.projects.triggers.html +++ b/docs/dyn/cloudbuild_v1.projects.triggers.html @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@

Method Details

], "npmPackages": [ # A list of npm packages to be uploaded to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. Npm packages in the specified paths will be uploaded to the specified Artifact Registry repository using the builder service account's credentials. If any packages fail to be pushed, the build is marked FAILURE. { # Npm package to upload to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. - "packagePath": "A String", # Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package + "packagePath": "A String", # Optional. Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package Only one of `archive` or `package_path` can be specified. "repository": "A String", # Artifact Registry repository, in the form "https://$REGION-npm.pkg.dev/$PROJECT/$REPOSITORY" Npm package in the workspace specified by path will be zipped and uploaded to Artifact Registry with this location as a prefix. }, ], @@ -795,7 +795,7 @@

Method Details

], "npmPackages": [ # A list of npm packages to be uploaded to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. Npm packages in the specified paths will be uploaded to the specified Artifact Registry repository using the builder service account's credentials. If any packages fail to be pushed, the build is marked FAILURE. { # Npm package to upload to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. - "packagePath": "A String", # Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package + "packagePath": "A String", # Optional. Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package Only one of `archive` or `package_path` can be specified. "repository": "A String", # Artifact Registry repository, in the form "https://$REGION-npm.pkg.dev/$PROJECT/$REPOSITORY" Npm package in the workspace specified by path will be zipped and uploaded to Artifact Registry with this location as a prefix. }, ], @@ -1420,7 +1420,7 @@

Method Details

], "npmPackages": [ # A list of npm packages to be uploaded to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. Npm packages in the specified paths will be uploaded to the specified Artifact Registry repository using the builder service account's credentials. If any packages fail to be pushed, the build is marked FAILURE. { # Npm package to upload to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. - "packagePath": "A String", # Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package + "packagePath": "A String", # Optional. Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package Only one of `archive` or `package_path` can be specified. "repository": "A String", # Artifact Registry repository, in the form "https://$REGION-npm.pkg.dev/$PROJECT/$REPOSITORY" Npm package in the workspace specified by path will be zipped and uploaded to Artifact Registry with this location as a prefix. }, ], @@ -2029,7 +2029,7 @@

Method Details

], "npmPackages": [ # A list of npm packages to be uploaded to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. Npm packages in the specified paths will be uploaded to the specified Artifact Registry repository using the builder service account's credentials. If any packages fail to be pushed, the build is marked FAILURE. { # Npm package to upload to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. - "packagePath": "A String", # Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package + "packagePath": "A String", # Optional. Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package Only one of `archive` or `package_path` can be specified. "repository": "A String", # Artifact Registry repository, in the form "https://$REGION-npm.pkg.dev/$PROJECT/$REPOSITORY" Npm package in the workspace specified by path will be zipped and uploaded to Artifact Registry with this location as a prefix. }, ], @@ -2644,7 +2644,7 @@

Method Details

], "npmPackages": [ # A list of npm packages to be uploaded to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. Npm packages in the specified paths will be uploaded to the specified Artifact Registry repository using the builder service account's credentials. If any packages fail to be pushed, the build is marked FAILURE. { # Npm package to upload to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. - "packagePath": "A String", # Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package + "packagePath": "A String", # Optional. Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package Only one of `archive` or `package_path` can be specified. "repository": "A String", # Artifact Registry repository, in the form "https://$REGION-npm.pkg.dev/$PROJECT/$REPOSITORY" Npm package in the workspace specified by path will be zipped and uploaded to Artifact Registry with this location as a prefix. }, ], @@ -3241,7 +3241,7 @@

Method Details

], "npmPackages": [ # A list of npm packages to be uploaded to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. Npm packages in the specified paths will be uploaded to the specified Artifact Registry repository using the builder service account's credentials. If any packages fail to be pushed, the build is marked FAILURE. { # Npm package to upload to Artifact Registry upon successful completion of all build steps. - "packagePath": "A String", # Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package + "packagePath": "A String", # Optional. Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package Only one of `archive` or `package_path` can be specified. "repository": "A String", # Artifact Registry repository, in the form "https://$REGION-npm.pkg.dev/$PROJECT/$REPOSITORY" Npm package in the workspace specified by path will be zipped and uploaded to Artifact Registry with this location as a prefix. }, ], diff --git a/docs/dyn/cloudbuild_v2.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/cloudbuild_v2.projects.locations.html index 61128fb3c0d..8a7e902b525 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/cloudbuild_v2.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/cloudbuild_v2.projects.locations.html @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/cloudcommerceprocurement_v1.html b/docs/dyn/cloudcommerceprocurement_v1.html index 034452a4a5b..45c192ef4a6 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/cloudcommerceprocurement_v1.html +++ b/docs/dyn/cloudcommerceprocurement_v1.html @@ -95,17 +95,17 @@

Method Details

new_batch_http_request()
Create a BatchHttpRequest object based on the discovery document.
 
-        Args:
-          callback: callable, A callback to be called for each response, of the
-            form callback(id, response, exception). The first parameter is the
-            request id, and the second is the deserialized response object. The
-            third is an apiclient.errors.HttpError exception object if an HTTP
-            error occurred while processing the request, or None if no error
-            occurred.
-
-        Returns:
-          A BatchHttpRequest object based on the discovery document.
-        
+ Args: + callback: callable, A callback to be called for each response, of the + form callback(id, response, exception). The first parameter is the + request id, and the second is the deserialized response object. The + third is an apiclient.errors.HttpError exception object if an HTTP + error occurred while processing the request, or None if no error + occurred. + + Returns: + A BatchHttpRequest object based on the discovery document. +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/cloudcommerceprocurement_v1.providers.accounts.html b/docs/dyn/cloudcommerceprocurement_v1.providers.accounts.html index 6f84bcc6734..7451a8c79a0 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/cloudcommerceprocurement_v1.providers.accounts.html +++ b/docs/dyn/cloudcommerceprocurement_v1.providers.accounts.html @@ -87,21 +87,21 @@

Instance Methods

list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

Lists Accounts that the provider has access to.

- list_next(previous_request, previous_response)

+ list_next()

Retrieves the next page of results.

reject(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

Rejects an approval on an Account.

reset(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Resets an Account and cancel all associated Entitlements. Partner can only reset accounts they own rather than customer accounts.

+

Resets an Account and cancels all associated Entitlements. Partner can only reset accounts they own rather than customer accounts.

Method Details

approve(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
Grants an approval on an Account.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, The resource name of the account. Required. (required)
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the account, with the format `providers/{providerId}/accounts/{accountId}`. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ 

Method Details

Returns: An object of the form: - { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } The JSON representation for `Empty` is empty JSON object `{}`. + { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } }
@@ -135,7 +135,7 @@

Method Details

Gets a requested Account resource.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, The name of the account to retrieve. (required)
+  name: string, Required. The name of the account to retrieve. (required)
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -169,8 +169,8 @@ 

Method Details

Lists Accounts that the provider has access to.
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, The parent resource name. (required)
-  pageSize: integer, The maximum number of entries that are requested. Default size is 200.
+  parent: string, Required. The parent resource name. (required)
+  pageSize: integer, The maximum number of entries that are requested. The default page size is 25 and the maximum page size is 200.
   pageToken: string, The token for fetching the next page.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
@@ -206,17 +206,17 @@ 

Method Details

- list_next(previous_request, previous_response) + list_next()
Retrieves the next page of results.
 
-Args:
-  previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
-  previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
 
-Returns:
-  A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
-  page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
-    
+ Returns: + A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next + page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection. +
@@ -224,7 +224,7 @@

Method Details

Rejects an approval on an Account.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, The resource name of the account. Required. (required)
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the account. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -241,20 +241,20 @@ 

Method Details

Returns: An object of the form: - { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } The JSON representation for `Empty` is empty JSON object `{}`. + { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } }
reset(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None) -
Resets an Account and cancel all associated Entitlements. Partner can only reset accounts they own rather than customer accounts.
+  
Resets an Account and cancels all associated Entitlements. Partner can only reset accounts they own rather than customer accounts.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, The resource name of the account. Required. (required)
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the account. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # Request message for for PartnerProcurementService.ResetAccount.
+{ # Request message for PartnerProcurementService.ResetAccount.
 }
 
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
@@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ 

Method Details

Returns: An object of the form: - { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } The JSON representation for `Empty` is empty JSON object `{}`. + { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } }
diff --git a/docs/dyn/cloudcommerceprocurement_v1.providers.entitlements.html b/docs/dyn/cloudcommerceprocurement_v1.providers.entitlements.html index b7a241c086a..40e746af565 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/cloudcommerceprocurement_v1.providers.entitlements.html +++ b/docs/dyn/cloudcommerceprocurement_v1.providers.entitlements.html @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@

Instance Methods

list(parent, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

Lists Entitlements for which the provider has read access.

- list_next(previous_request, previous_response)

+ list_next()

Retrieves the next page of results.

patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)

@@ -110,11 +110,12 @@

Method Details

Approves an entitlement that is in the EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED state. This method is invoked by the provider to approve the creation of the entitlement resource.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, The resource name of the entitlement. Required. (required)
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the entitlement, with the format `providers/{providerId}/entitlements/{entitlementId}`. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # Request message for [PartnerProcurementService.ApproveEntitlement[].
+  "entitlementMigrated": "A String", # Optional. The resource name of the entitlement that was migrated, with the format `providers/{provider_id}/entitlements/{entitlement_id}`. Should only be sent when resources have been migrated from entitlement_migrated to the new entitlement. Optional.
   "properties": { # Set of properties that should be associated with the entitlement. Optional.
     "a_key": "A String",
   },
@@ -128,7 +129,7 @@ 

Method Details

Returns: An object of the form: - { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } The JSON representation for `Empty` is empty JSON object `{}`. + { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } }
@@ -137,12 +138,12 @@

Method Details

Approves an entitlement plan change that is in the EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL state. This method is invoked by the provider to approve the plan change on the entitlement resource.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, The resource name of the entitlement. Required. (required)
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the entitlement. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # Request message for [PartnerProcurementService.ApproveEntitlementPlanChange[].
-  "pendingPlanName": "A String", # Name of the pending plan that is being approved. Required.
+  "pendingPlanName": "A String", # Required. Name of the pending plan that's being approved.
 }
 
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
@@ -153,7 +154,7 @@ 

Method Details

Returns: An object of the form: - { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } The JSON representation for `Empty` is empty JSON object `{}`. + { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } }
@@ -167,7 +168,7 @@

Method Details

Gets a requested Entitlement resource.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, The name of the entitlement to retrieve. (required)
+  name: string, Required. The name of the entitlement to retrieve. (required)
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -176,25 +177,34 @@ 

Method Details

Returns: An object of the form: - { # Represents a procured product of a customer. Next Id: 23 + { # Represents a procured product of a customer. "account": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the account that this entitlement is based on, if any. + "cancellationReason": "A String", # Output only. The reason the entitlement was cancelled. If this entitlement wasn't cancelled, this field is empty. Possible values include "unknown", "expired", "user-cancelled", "account-closed", "billing-disabled" (if the customer has manually disabled billing to their resources), "user-aborted", and "migrated" (if the entitlement has migrated across products). Values of this field are subject to change, and we recommend that you don't build your technical integration to rely on these fields. "consumers": [ # Output only. The resources using this entitlement, if applicable. { # A resource using (consuming) this entitlement. "project": "A String", # A project name with format `projects/`. }, ], "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp. + "entitlementBenefitIds": [ # Output only. The entitlement benefit IDs associated with the purchase. + "A String", + ], "inputProperties": { # Output only. The custom properties that were collected from the user to create this entitlement. "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. }, "messageToUser": "A String", # Provider-supplied message that is displayed to the end user. Currently this is used to communicate progress and ETA for provisioning. This field can be updated only when a user is waiting for an action from the provider, i.e. entitlement state is EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED or EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL. This field is cleared automatically when the entitlement state changes. "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the entitlement. Entitlement names have the form `providers/{provider_id}/entitlements/{entitlement_id}`. - "newPendingOffer": "A String", # Output only. The name of the offer the entitlement is switching to upon a pending plan change. Only exists if the pending plan change is moving to an offer. Format: 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/privateOffers/{offer-id}' OR 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/standardOffers/{offer-id}', depending on whether the offer is private or public. + "newOfferEndTime": "A String", # Output only. The end time of the new offer. If the offer was has a term duration instead of a specified end date, this field is empty. This field is populated even if the entitlement isn't active yet. If there's no upcoming offer, the field is empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED, ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE, or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION state, then this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE state, then this field will be populated with the expected end time of the upcoming offer (in the future) if the upcoming offer has a specified end date. Otherwise, this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this field will be empty. + "newOfferStartTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the new offer becomes effective. This field is populated even if the entitlement isn't active yet. If there's no upcoming offer, the field is empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED state, this field will not be populated when the entitlement is not yet approved. But after the entitlement is approved, then this field will be populated with effective time of the upcoming offer. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION state, this field will not be populated. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL state, this field will not be populated since the entitlement change is waiting on approval. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE state, this field will be populated with the expected effective time of the upcoming offer (in the future). * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this field will be empty. + "newPendingOffer": "A String", # Output only. The name of the offer the entitlement is switching to upon a pending plan change. Only exists if the pending plan change is moving to an offer. This field isn't populated for entitlements which aren't active yet. Format: 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/privateOffers/{offer}' OR 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/standardOffers/{offer}', depending on whether the offer is private or public. The {service} in the name is the listing service of the offer. It could be either the product service that the offer is referencing, or a generic private offer parent service. We recommend that you don't build your integration to rely on the meaning of this {service} part. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED, ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION state, then this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE state, then this field will be populated with the upcoming offer. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this will be empty. + "newPendingOfferDuration": "A String", # Output only. The duration of the new offer, in ISO 8601 duration format. This field isn't populated for entitlements which aren't active yet, only for pending offer changes. If the offer was has a specified end date instead of a duration, this field is empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED, ENTITLEENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE, or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION state, then this field is empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE state, then this field will be populated with the duration of the upcoming offer, if the upcoming offer is does not have a specified end date. Otherwise, this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this field will be empty. "newPendingPlan": "A String", # Output only. The identifier of the pending new plan. Required if the product has plans and the entitlement has a pending plan change. - "offer": "A String", # Output only. The name of the offer that was procured. Field is empty if order was not made using an offer. Format: 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/privateOffers/{offer-id}' OR 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/standardOffers/{offer-id}', depending on whether the offer is private or public. - "offerEndTime": "A String", # Output only. End time for the Offer association corresponding to this entitlement. The field is only populated if the entitlement is currently associated with an Offer. + "offer": "A String", # Output only. The name of the offer that was procured. Field is empty if order was not made using an offer. Format: 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/privateOffers/{offer}' OR 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/standardOffers/{offer}', depending on whether the offer is private or public. The {service} in the name is the listing service of the offer. It could be either the product service that the offer is referencing, or a generic private offer parent service. We recommend that you don't build your integration to rely on the meaning of this {service} part. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED state, this field will be populated with the upcoming offer. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE, ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION, ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE, or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL state, this field will be populated with the current offer. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this field will be populated with the latest offer the order was associated with. + "offerDuration": "A String", # Output only. The offer duration of the current offer in ISO 8601 duration format. Field is empty if entitlement was not made using an offer. If the offer has a specified end date instead of a duration, this field is empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED state, then this field will be populated with the duration of the upcoming offer, if the upcoming offer does not have a specified end date. Otherwise, this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE, ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION, ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE, or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL state, then this field will be populated with the duration of the current offer if the current offer is does not have a specific end date. Otherwise, this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this field will be populated with the duration of the latest offer the order was associated with if that offer does not have a specific end date. Otherwise, this field will be empty. + "offerEndTime": "A String", # Output only. End time for the Offer associated with this entitlement. Note that this field value can change over time. This occurs naturally even if the offer is not changed, due to auto renewal. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED state, then: * If the entitlement is not yet approved, then this field will be populated with the expected end time of the upcoming offer (in the future) if the upcoming offer has a specified end date. Otherwise this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is approved, then this field will always be populated with the expected end time of the upcoming offer (in the future). This means both this field, and the offer_duration field, can co-exist. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION state, then this field will be populated with the actual expected end time of the current offer (in the futre). Meaning, this field will be set, regardless of whether the offer has a specific end date or a duration. This means both this field, and the offer_duration field, can co-exist. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE state: * If the current offer has already ended and became pure PAYG, then this field reflects the ACTUAL end time of the current offer (in the past). * Otherwise, then this is the EXPECTED end date of the current offer (in the future). * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this field will be populated with the ACTUAL end time of the latest offer the order was associated with (in the past). If the entitlement was cancelled before any offer started, then this field will be empty. + "orderId": "A String", # Output only. The order ID of this entitlement, without any `orders/` resource name prefix. "plan": "A String", # Output only. The identifier of the plan that was procured. Required if the product has plans. - "product": "A String", # Output only. The identifier of the entity that was purchased. This may actually represent a product, quote, or offer. + "product": "A String", # Output only. The identifier of the entity that was purchased. This may actually represent a product, quote, or offer. We strongly recommend that you use the following more explicit fields: productExternalName, quoteExternalName, or offer. "productExternalName": "A String", # Output only. The identifier of the product that was procured. "provider": "A String", # Output only. The identifier of the service provider that this entitlement was created against. Each service provider is assigned a unique provider value when they onboard with Cloud Commerce platform. "quoteExternalName": "A String", # Output only. The identifier of the quote that was used to procure. Empty if the order is not purchased using a quote. @@ -210,9 +220,9 @@

Method Details

Lists Entitlements for which the provider has read access.
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, The parent resource name. (required)
-  filter: string, The filter that can be used to limit the list request. The filter is a query string that can match a selected set of attributes with string values. For example `account=E-1234-5678-ABCD-EFGH`, `state=pending_cancellation`, and `plan!=foo-plan`. Supported query attributes are * `account` * `customer_billing_account` with value in the format of: `billingAccounts/{id}` * `product_external_name` * `quote_external_name` * `offer` * `new_pending_offer` * `plan` * `newPendingPlan` or `new_pending_plan` * `state` * `consumers.project` Note that the consumers match works on repeated structures, so equality (`consumers.project=projects/123456789`) is not supported. Set membership can be expressed with the `:` operator. For example, `consumers.project:projects/123456789` finds entitlements with at least one consumer with project field equal to `projects/123456789`. Also note that the state name match is case-insensitive and query can omit the prefix "ENTITLEMENT_". For example, `state=active` is equivalent to `state=ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE`. If the query contains some special characters other than letters, underscore, or digits, the phrase must be quoted with double quotes. For example, `product="providerId:productId"`, where the product name needs to be quoted because it contains special character colon. Queries can be combined with `AND`, `OR`, and `NOT` to form more complex queries. They can also be grouped to force a desired evaluation order. For example, `state=active AND (account=E-1234 OR account=5678) AND NOT (product=foo-product)`. Connective `AND` can be omitted between two predicates. For example `account=E-1234 state=active` is equivalent to `account=E-1234 AND state=active`.
-  pageSize: integer, The maximum number of entries that are requested.
+  parent: string, Required. The parent resource name. (required)
+  filter: string, The filter that can be used to limit the list request. The filter is a query string that can match a selected set of attributes with string values. For example `account=E-1234-5678-ABCD-EFGH`, `state=pending_cancellation`, and `plan!=foo-plan`. Supported query attributes are * `account` * `customer_billing_account` with value in the format of: `billingAccounts/{id}` * `product_external_name` * `quote_external_name` * `offer` * `new_pending_offer` * `plan` * `newPendingPlan` or `new_pending_plan` * `state` * `services` * `consumers.project` * `change_history.new_offer` Note that the consumers and change_history.new_offer match works on repeated structures, so equality (`consumers.project=projects/123456789`) is not supported. Set membership can be expressed with the `:` operator. For example, `consumers.project:projects/123456789` finds entitlements with at least one consumer with project field equal to `projects/123456789`. `change_history.new_offer` retrieves all entitlements that were once associated or are currently active with the offer. Also note that the state name match is case-insensitive and query can omit the prefix "ENTITLEMENT_". For example, `state=active` is equivalent to `state=ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE`. If the query contains some special characters other than letters, underscore, or digits, the phrase must be quoted with double quotes. For example, `product="providerId:productId"`, where the product name needs to be quoted because it contains special character colon. Queries can be combined with `AND`, `OR`, and `NOT` to form more complex queries. They can also be grouped to force a desired evaluation order. For example, `state=active AND (account=E-1234 OR account=5678) AND NOT (product=foo-product)`. Connective `AND` can be omitted between two predicates. For example `account=E-1234 state=active` is equivalent to `account=E-1234 AND state=active`.
+  pageSize: integer, The maximum number of entries that are requested. The default page size is 200.
   pageToken: string, The token for fetching the next page.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
@@ -224,25 +234,34 @@ 

Method Details

{ # Response message for PartnerProcurementService.ListEntitlements. "entitlements": [ # The list of entitlements in this response. - { # Represents a procured product of a customer. Next Id: 23 + { # Represents a procured product of a customer. "account": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the account that this entitlement is based on, if any. + "cancellationReason": "A String", # Output only. The reason the entitlement was cancelled. If this entitlement wasn't cancelled, this field is empty. Possible values include "unknown", "expired", "user-cancelled", "account-closed", "billing-disabled" (if the customer has manually disabled billing to their resources), "user-aborted", and "migrated" (if the entitlement has migrated across products). Values of this field are subject to change, and we recommend that you don't build your technical integration to rely on these fields. "consumers": [ # Output only. The resources using this entitlement, if applicable. { # A resource using (consuming) this entitlement. "project": "A String", # A project name with format `projects/`. }, ], "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp. + "entitlementBenefitIds": [ # Output only. The entitlement benefit IDs associated with the purchase. + "A String", + ], "inputProperties": { # Output only. The custom properties that were collected from the user to create this entitlement. "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. }, "messageToUser": "A String", # Provider-supplied message that is displayed to the end user. Currently this is used to communicate progress and ETA for provisioning. This field can be updated only when a user is waiting for an action from the provider, i.e. entitlement state is EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED or EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL. This field is cleared automatically when the entitlement state changes. "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the entitlement. Entitlement names have the form `providers/{provider_id}/entitlements/{entitlement_id}`. - "newPendingOffer": "A String", # Output only. The name of the offer the entitlement is switching to upon a pending plan change. Only exists if the pending plan change is moving to an offer. Format: 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/privateOffers/{offer-id}' OR 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/standardOffers/{offer-id}', depending on whether the offer is private or public. + "newOfferEndTime": "A String", # Output only. The end time of the new offer. If the offer was has a term duration instead of a specified end date, this field is empty. This field is populated even if the entitlement isn't active yet. If there's no upcoming offer, the field is empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED, ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE, or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION state, then this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE state, then this field will be populated with the expected end time of the upcoming offer (in the future) if the upcoming offer has a specified end date. Otherwise, this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this field will be empty. + "newOfferStartTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the new offer becomes effective. This field is populated even if the entitlement isn't active yet. If there's no upcoming offer, the field is empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED state, this field will not be populated when the entitlement is not yet approved. But after the entitlement is approved, then this field will be populated with effective time of the upcoming offer. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION state, this field will not be populated. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL state, this field will not be populated since the entitlement change is waiting on approval. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE state, this field will be populated with the expected effective time of the upcoming offer (in the future). * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this field will be empty. + "newPendingOffer": "A String", # Output only. The name of the offer the entitlement is switching to upon a pending plan change. Only exists if the pending plan change is moving to an offer. This field isn't populated for entitlements which aren't active yet. Format: 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/privateOffers/{offer}' OR 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/standardOffers/{offer}', depending on whether the offer is private or public. The {service} in the name is the listing service of the offer. It could be either the product service that the offer is referencing, or a generic private offer parent service. We recommend that you don't build your integration to rely on the meaning of this {service} part. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED, ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION state, then this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE state, then this field will be populated with the upcoming offer. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this will be empty. + "newPendingOfferDuration": "A String", # Output only. The duration of the new offer, in ISO 8601 duration format. This field isn't populated for entitlements which aren't active yet, only for pending offer changes. If the offer was has a specified end date instead of a duration, this field is empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED, ENTITLEENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE, or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION state, then this field is empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE state, then this field will be populated with the duration of the upcoming offer, if the upcoming offer is does not have a specified end date. Otherwise, this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this field will be empty. "newPendingPlan": "A String", # Output only. The identifier of the pending new plan. Required if the product has plans and the entitlement has a pending plan change. - "offer": "A String", # Output only. The name of the offer that was procured. Field is empty if order was not made using an offer. Format: 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/privateOffers/{offer-id}' OR 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/standardOffers/{offer-id}', depending on whether the offer is private or public. - "offerEndTime": "A String", # Output only. End time for the Offer association corresponding to this entitlement. The field is only populated if the entitlement is currently associated with an Offer. + "offer": "A String", # Output only. The name of the offer that was procured. Field is empty if order was not made using an offer. Format: 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/privateOffers/{offer}' OR 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/standardOffers/{offer}', depending on whether the offer is private or public. The {service} in the name is the listing service of the offer. It could be either the product service that the offer is referencing, or a generic private offer parent service. We recommend that you don't build your integration to rely on the meaning of this {service} part. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED state, this field will be populated with the upcoming offer. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE, ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION, ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE, or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL state, this field will be populated with the current offer. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this field will be populated with the latest offer the order was associated with. + "offerDuration": "A String", # Output only. The offer duration of the current offer in ISO 8601 duration format. Field is empty if entitlement was not made using an offer. If the offer has a specified end date instead of a duration, this field is empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED state, then this field will be populated with the duration of the upcoming offer, if the upcoming offer does not have a specified end date. Otherwise, this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE, ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION, ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE, or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL state, then this field will be populated with the duration of the current offer if the current offer is does not have a specific end date. Otherwise, this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this field will be populated with the duration of the latest offer the order was associated with if that offer does not have a specific end date. Otherwise, this field will be empty. + "offerEndTime": "A String", # Output only. End time for the Offer associated with this entitlement. Note that this field value can change over time. This occurs naturally even if the offer is not changed, due to auto renewal. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED state, then: * If the entitlement is not yet approved, then this field will be populated with the expected end time of the upcoming offer (in the future) if the upcoming offer has a specified end date. Otherwise this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is approved, then this field will always be populated with the expected end time of the upcoming offer (in the future). This means both this field, and the offer_duration field, can co-exist. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION state, then this field will be populated with the actual expected end time of the current offer (in the futre). Meaning, this field will be set, regardless of whether the offer has a specific end date or a duration. This means both this field, and the offer_duration field, can co-exist. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE state: * If the current offer has already ended and became pure PAYG, then this field reflects the ACTUAL end time of the current offer (in the past). * Otherwise, then this is the EXPECTED end date of the current offer (in the future). * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this field will be populated with the ACTUAL end time of the latest offer the order was associated with (in the past). If the entitlement was cancelled before any offer started, then this field will be empty. + "orderId": "A String", # Output only. The order ID of this entitlement, without any `orders/` resource name prefix. "plan": "A String", # Output only. The identifier of the plan that was procured. Required if the product has plans. - "product": "A String", # Output only. The identifier of the entity that was purchased. This may actually represent a product, quote, or offer. + "product": "A String", # Output only. The identifier of the entity that was purchased. This may actually represent a product, quote, or offer. We strongly recommend that you use the following more explicit fields: productExternalName, quoteExternalName, or offer. "productExternalName": "A String", # Output only. The identifier of the product that was procured. "provider": "A String", # Output only. The identifier of the service provider that this entitlement was created against. Each service provider is assigned a unique provider value when they onboard with Cloud Commerce platform. "quoteExternalName": "A String", # Output only. The identifier of the quote that was used to procure. Empty if the order is not purchased using a quote. @@ -257,17 +276,17 @@

Method Details

- list_next(previous_request, previous_response) + list_next()
Retrieves the next page of results.
 
-Args:
-  previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
-  previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
 
-Returns:
-  A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
-  page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
-    
+ Returns: + A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next + page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection. +
@@ -275,29 +294,38 @@

Method Details

Updates an existing Entitlement.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, The name of the entitlement to update. (required)
+  name: string, Required. The name of the entitlement to update. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # Represents a procured product of a customer. Next Id: 23
+{ # Represents a procured product of a customer.
   "account": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the account that this entitlement is based on, if any.
+  "cancellationReason": "A String", # Output only. The reason the entitlement was cancelled. If this entitlement wasn't cancelled, this field is empty. Possible values include "unknown", "expired", "user-cancelled", "account-closed", "billing-disabled" (if the customer has manually disabled billing to their resources), "user-aborted", and "migrated" (if the entitlement has migrated across products). Values of this field are subject to change, and we recommend that you don't build your technical integration to rely on these fields.
   "consumers": [ # Output only. The resources using this entitlement, if applicable.
     { # A resource using (consuming) this entitlement.
       "project": "A String", # A project name with format `projects/`.
     },
   ],
   "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp.
+  "entitlementBenefitIds": [ # Output only. The entitlement benefit IDs associated with the purchase.
+    "A String",
+  ],
   "inputProperties": { # Output only. The custom properties that were collected from the user to create this entitlement.
     "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
   },
   "messageToUser": "A String", # Provider-supplied message that is displayed to the end user. Currently this is used to communicate progress and ETA for provisioning. This field can be updated only when a user is waiting for an action from the provider, i.e. entitlement state is EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED or EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL. This field is cleared automatically when the entitlement state changes.
   "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the entitlement. Entitlement names have the form `providers/{provider_id}/entitlements/{entitlement_id}`.
-  "newPendingOffer": "A String", # Output only. The name of the offer the entitlement is switching to upon a pending plan change. Only exists if the pending plan change is moving to an offer. Format: 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/privateOffers/{offer-id}' OR 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/standardOffers/{offer-id}', depending on whether the offer is private or public.
+  "newOfferEndTime": "A String", # Output only. The end time of the new offer. If the offer was has a term duration instead of a specified end date, this field is empty. This field is populated even if the entitlement isn't active yet. If there's no upcoming offer, the field is empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED, ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE, or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION state, then this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE state, then this field will be populated with the expected end time of the upcoming offer (in the future) if the upcoming offer has a specified end date. Otherwise, this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this field will be empty.
+  "newOfferStartTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the new offer becomes effective. This field is populated even if the entitlement isn't active yet. If there's no upcoming offer, the field is empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED state, this field will not be populated when the entitlement is not yet approved. But after the entitlement is approved, then this field will be populated with effective time of the upcoming offer. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION state, this field will not be populated. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL state, this field will not be populated since the entitlement change is waiting on approval. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE state, this field will be populated with the expected effective time of the upcoming offer (in the future). * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this field will be empty.
+  "newPendingOffer": "A String", # Output only. The name of the offer the entitlement is switching to upon a pending plan change. Only exists if the pending plan change is moving to an offer. This field isn't populated for entitlements which aren't active yet. Format: 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/privateOffers/{offer}' OR 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/standardOffers/{offer}', depending on whether the offer is private or public. The {service} in the name is the listing service of the offer. It could be either the product service that the offer is referencing, or a generic private offer parent service. We recommend that you don't build your integration to rely on the meaning of this {service} part. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED, ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION state, then this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE state, then this field will be populated with the upcoming offer. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this will be empty.
+  "newPendingOfferDuration": "A String", # Output only. The duration of the new offer, in ISO 8601 duration format. This field isn't populated for entitlements which aren't active yet, only for pending offer changes. If the offer was has a specified end date instead of a duration, this field is empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED, ENTITLEENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE, or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION state, then this field is empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE state, then this field will be populated with the duration of the upcoming offer, if the upcoming offer is does not have a specified end date. Otherwise, this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this field will be empty.
   "newPendingPlan": "A String", # Output only. The identifier of the pending new plan. Required if the product has plans and the entitlement has a pending plan change.
-  "offer": "A String", # Output only. The name of the offer that was procured. Field is empty if order was not made using an offer. Format: 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/privateOffers/{offer-id}' OR 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/standardOffers/{offer-id}', depending on whether the offer is private or public.
-  "offerEndTime": "A String", # Output only. End time for the Offer association corresponding to this entitlement. The field is only populated if the entitlement is currently associated with an Offer.
+  "offer": "A String", # Output only. The name of the offer that was procured. Field is empty if order was not made using an offer. Format: 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/privateOffers/{offer}' OR 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/standardOffers/{offer}', depending on whether the offer is private or public. The {service} in the name is the listing service of the offer. It could be either the product service that the offer is referencing, or a generic private offer parent service. We recommend that you don't build your integration to rely on the meaning of this {service} part. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED state, this field will be populated with the upcoming offer. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE, ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION, ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE, or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL state, this field will be populated with the current offer. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this field will be populated with the latest offer the order was associated with.
+  "offerDuration": "A String", # Output only. The offer duration of the current offer in ISO 8601 duration format. Field is empty if entitlement was not made using an offer. If the offer has a specified end date instead of a duration, this field is empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED state, then this field will be populated with the duration of the upcoming offer, if the upcoming offer does not have a specified end date. Otherwise, this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE, ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION, ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE, or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL state, then this field will be populated with the duration of the current offer if the current offer is does not have a specific end date. Otherwise, this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this field will be populated with the duration of the latest offer the order was associated with if that offer does not have a specific end date. Otherwise, this field will be empty.
+  "offerEndTime": "A String", # Output only. End time for the Offer associated with this entitlement. Note that this field value can change over time. This occurs naturally even if the offer is not changed, due to auto renewal. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED state, then: * If the entitlement is not yet approved, then this field will be populated with the expected end time of the upcoming offer (in the future) if the upcoming offer has a specified end date. Otherwise this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is approved, then this field will always be populated with the expected end time of the upcoming offer (in the future). This means both this field, and the offer_duration field, can co-exist. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION state, then this field will be populated with the actual expected end time of the current offer (in the futre). Meaning, this field will be set, regardless of whether the offer has a specific end date or a duration. This means both this field, and the offer_duration field, can co-exist. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE state: * If the current offer has already ended and became pure PAYG, then this field reflects the ACTUAL end time of the current offer (in the past). * Otherwise, then this is the EXPECTED end date of the current offer (in the future). * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this field will be populated with the ACTUAL end time of the latest offer the order was associated with (in the past). If the entitlement was cancelled before any offer started, then this field will be empty.
+  "orderId": "A String", # Output only. The order ID of this entitlement, without any `orders/` resource name prefix.
   "plan": "A String", # Output only. The identifier of the plan that was procured. Required if the product has plans.
-  "product": "A String", # Output only. The identifier of the entity that was purchased. This may actually represent a product, quote, or offer.
+  "product": "A String", # Output only. The identifier of the entity that was purchased. This may actually represent a product, quote, or offer. We strongly recommend that you use the following more explicit fields: productExternalName, quoteExternalName, or offer.
   "productExternalName": "A String", # Output only. The identifier of the product that was procured.
   "provider": "A String", # Output only. The identifier of the service provider that this entitlement was created against. Each service provider is assigned a unique provider value when they onboard with Cloud Commerce platform.
   "quoteExternalName": "A String", # Output only. The identifier of the quote that was used to procure. Empty if the order is not purchased using a quote.
@@ -316,25 +344,34 @@ 

Method Details

Returns: An object of the form: - { # Represents a procured product of a customer. Next Id: 23 + { # Represents a procured product of a customer. "account": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the account that this entitlement is based on, if any. + "cancellationReason": "A String", # Output only. The reason the entitlement was cancelled. If this entitlement wasn't cancelled, this field is empty. Possible values include "unknown", "expired", "user-cancelled", "account-closed", "billing-disabled" (if the customer has manually disabled billing to their resources), "user-aborted", and "migrated" (if the entitlement has migrated across products). Values of this field are subject to change, and we recommend that you don't build your technical integration to rely on these fields. "consumers": [ # Output only. The resources using this entitlement, if applicable. { # A resource using (consuming) this entitlement. "project": "A String", # A project name with format `projects/`. }, ], "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp. + "entitlementBenefitIds": [ # Output only. The entitlement benefit IDs associated with the purchase. + "A String", + ], "inputProperties": { # Output only. The custom properties that were collected from the user to create this entitlement. "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. }, "messageToUser": "A String", # Provider-supplied message that is displayed to the end user. Currently this is used to communicate progress and ETA for provisioning. This field can be updated only when a user is waiting for an action from the provider, i.e. entitlement state is EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED or EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL. This field is cleared automatically when the entitlement state changes. "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the entitlement. Entitlement names have the form `providers/{provider_id}/entitlements/{entitlement_id}`. - "newPendingOffer": "A String", # Output only. The name of the offer the entitlement is switching to upon a pending plan change. Only exists if the pending plan change is moving to an offer. Format: 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/privateOffers/{offer-id}' OR 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/standardOffers/{offer-id}', depending on whether the offer is private or public. + "newOfferEndTime": "A String", # Output only. The end time of the new offer. If the offer was has a term duration instead of a specified end date, this field is empty. This field is populated even if the entitlement isn't active yet. If there's no upcoming offer, the field is empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED, ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE, or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION state, then this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE state, then this field will be populated with the expected end time of the upcoming offer (in the future) if the upcoming offer has a specified end date. Otherwise, this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this field will be empty. + "newOfferStartTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the new offer becomes effective. This field is populated even if the entitlement isn't active yet. If there's no upcoming offer, the field is empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED state, this field will not be populated when the entitlement is not yet approved. But after the entitlement is approved, then this field will be populated with effective time of the upcoming offer. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION state, this field will not be populated. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL state, this field will not be populated since the entitlement change is waiting on approval. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE state, this field will be populated with the expected effective time of the upcoming offer (in the future). * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this field will be empty. + "newPendingOffer": "A String", # Output only. The name of the offer the entitlement is switching to upon a pending plan change. Only exists if the pending plan change is moving to an offer. This field isn't populated for entitlements which aren't active yet. Format: 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/privateOffers/{offer}' OR 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/standardOffers/{offer}', depending on whether the offer is private or public. The {service} in the name is the listing service of the offer. It could be either the product service that the offer is referencing, or a generic private offer parent service. We recommend that you don't build your integration to rely on the meaning of this {service} part. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED, ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION state, then this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE state, then this field will be populated with the upcoming offer. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this will be empty. + "newPendingOfferDuration": "A String", # Output only. The duration of the new offer, in ISO 8601 duration format. This field isn't populated for entitlements which aren't active yet, only for pending offer changes. If the offer was has a specified end date instead of a duration, this field is empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED, ENTITLEENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE, or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION state, then this field is empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE state, then this field will be populated with the duration of the upcoming offer, if the upcoming offer is does not have a specified end date. Otherwise, this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this field will be empty. "newPendingPlan": "A String", # Output only. The identifier of the pending new plan. Required if the product has plans and the entitlement has a pending plan change. - "offer": "A String", # Output only. The name of the offer that was procured. Field is empty if order was not made using an offer. Format: 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/privateOffers/{offer-id}' OR 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/standardOffers/{offer-id}', depending on whether the offer is private or public. - "offerEndTime": "A String", # Output only. End time for the Offer association corresponding to this entitlement. The field is only populated if the entitlement is currently associated with an Offer. + "offer": "A String", # Output only. The name of the offer that was procured. Field is empty if order was not made using an offer. Format: 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/privateOffers/{offer}' OR 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/standardOffers/{offer}', depending on whether the offer is private or public. The {service} in the name is the listing service of the offer. It could be either the product service that the offer is referencing, or a generic private offer parent service. We recommend that you don't build your integration to rely on the meaning of this {service} part. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED state, this field will be populated with the upcoming offer. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE, ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION, ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE, or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL state, this field will be populated with the current offer. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this field will be populated with the latest offer the order was associated with. + "offerDuration": "A String", # Output only. The offer duration of the current offer in ISO 8601 duration format. Field is empty if entitlement was not made using an offer. If the offer has a specified end date instead of a duration, this field is empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED state, then this field will be populated with the duration of the upcoming offer, if the upcoming offer does not have a specified end date. Otherwise, this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE, ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION, ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE, or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL state, then this field will be populated with the duration of the current offer if the current offer is does not have a specific end date. Otherwise, this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this field will be populated with the duration of the latest offer the order was associated with if that offer does not have a specific end date. Otherwise, this field will be empty. + "offerEndTime": "A String", # Output only. End time for the Offer associated with this entitlement. Note that this field value can change over time. This occurs naturally even if the offer is not changed, due to auto renewal. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED state, then: * If the entitlement is not yet approved, then this field will be populated with the expected end time of the upcoming offer (in the future) if the upcoming offer has a specified end date. Otherwise this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is approved, then this field will always be populated with the expected end time of the upcoming offer (in the future). This means both this field, and the offer_duration field, can co-exist. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION state, then this field will be populated with the actual expected end time of the current offer (in the futre). Meaning, this field will be set, regardless of whether the offer has a specific end date or a duration. This means both this field, and the offer_duration field, can co-exist. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE state: * If the current offer has already ended and became pure PAYG, then this field reflects the ACTUAL end time of the current offer (in the past). * Otherwise, then this is the EXPECTED end date of the current offer (in the future). * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this field will be populated with the ACTUAL end time of the latest offer the order was associated with (in the past). If the entitlement was cancelled before any offer started, then this field will be empty. + "orderId": "A String", # Output only. The order ID of this entitlement, without any `orders/` resource name prefix. "plan": "A String", # Output only. The identifier of the plan that was procured. Required if the product has plans. - "product": "A String", # Output only. The identifier of the entity that was purchased. This may actually represent a product, quote, or offer. + "product": "A String", # Output only. The identifier of the entity that was purchased. This may actually represent a product, quote, or offer. We strongly recommend that you use the following more explicit fields: productExternalName, quoteExternalName, or offer. "productExternalName": "A String", # Output only. The identifier of the product that was procured. "provider": "A String", # Output only. The identifier of the service provider that this entitlement was created against. Each service provider is assigned a unique provider value when they onboard with Cloud Commerce platform. "quoteExternalName": "A String", # Output only. The identifier of the quote that was used to procure. Empty if the order is not purchased using a quote. @@ -350,7 +387,7 @@

Method Details

Rejects an entitlement that is in the EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED state. This method is invoked by the provider to reject the creation of the entitlement resource.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, The resource name of the entitlement. Required. (required)
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the entitlement. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -366,7 +403,7 @@ 

Method Details

Returns: An object of the form: - { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } The JSON representation for `Empty` is empty JSON object `{}`. + { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } }
@@ -375,12 +412,12 @@

Method Details

Rejects an entitlement plan change that is in the EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL state. This method is invoked by the provider to reject the plan change on the entitlement resource.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, The resource name of the entitlement. Required. (required)
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the entitlement. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # Request message for PartnerProcurementService.RejectEntitlementPlanChange.
-  "pendingPlanName": "A String", # Name of the pending plan that is being rejected. Required.
+  "pendingPlanName": "A String", # Required. Name of the pending plan that is being rejected.
   "reason": "A String", # Free form text string explaining the rejection reason. Max allowed length: 256 bytes. Longer strings will be truncated.
 }
 
@@ -392,7 +429,7 @@ 

Method Details

Returns: An object of the form: - { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } The JSON representation for `Empty` is empty JSON object `{}`. + { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } }
@@ -401,7 +438,7 @@

Method Details

Requests suspension of an active Entitlement. This is not yet supported.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, The name of the entitlement to suspend. (required)
+  name: string, Required. The name of the entitlement to suspend. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -417,7 +454,7 @@ 

Method Details

Returns: An object of the form: - { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } The JSON representation for `Empty` is empty JSON object `{}`. + { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } }
diff --git a/docs/dyn/cloudfunctions_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/cloudfunctions_v1.projects.locations.html index b35d255b4c9..87dd68140a8 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/cloudfunctions_v1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/cloudfunctions_v1.projects.locations.html @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/cloudfunctions_v2.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/cloudfunctions_v2.projects.locations.html index e08cc4f21c1..2c61beb635a 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/cloudfunctions_v2.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/cloudfunctions_v2.projects.locations.html @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/cloudfunctions_v2alpha.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/cloudfunctions_v2alpha.projects.locations.html index 153f4327eea..e8ab65ca64e 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/cloudfunctions_v2alpha.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/cloudfunctions_v2alpha.projects.locations.html @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/cloudfunctions_v2beta.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/cloudfunctions_v2beta.projects.locations.html index 3cec56fc176..a8c81a74853 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/cloudfunctions_v2beta.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/cloudfunctions_v2beta.projects.locations.html @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/cloudlocationfinder_v1.html b/docs/dyn/cloudlocationfinder_v1.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..91ddb7c55fd --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/dyn/cloudlocationfinder_v1.html @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + +

Cloud Location Finder API

+

Instance Methods

+

+ projects() +

+

Returns the projects Resource.

+ +

+ close()

+

Close httplib2 connections.

+

+ new_batch_http_request()

+

Create a BatchHttpRequest object based on the discovery document.

+

Method Details

+
+ close() +
Close httplib2 connections.
+
+ +
+ new_batch_http_request() +
Create a BatchHttpRequest object based on the discovery document.
+
+                Args:
+                  callback: callable, A callback to be called for each response, of the
+                    form callback(id, response, exception). The first parameter is the
+                    request id, and the second is the deserialized response object. The
+                    third is an apiclient.errors.HttpError exception object if an HTTP
+                    error occurred while processing the request, or None if no error
+                    occurred.
+
+                Returns:
+                  A BatchHttpRequest object based on the discovery document.
+                
+
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/cloudlocationfinder_v1.projects.html b/docs/dyn/cloudlocationfinder_v1.projects.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..56e4c361ce3 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/dyn/cloudlocationfinder_v1.projects.html @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + +

Cloud Location Finder API . projects

+

Instance Methods

+

+ locations() +

+

Returns the locations Resource.

+ +

+ close()

+

Close httplib2 connections.

+

Method Details

+
+ close() +
Close httplib2 connections.
+
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/cloudlocationfinder_v1.projects.locations.cloudLocations.html b/docs/dyn/cloudlocationfinder_v1.projects.locations.cloudLocations.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ca231ee99e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/dyn/cloudlocationfinder_v1.projects.locations.cloudLocations.html @@ -0,0 +1,221 @@ + + + +

Cloud Location Finder API . projects . locations . cloudLocations

+

Instance Methods

+

+ close()

+

Close httplib2 connections.

+

+ get(name, x__xgafv=None)

+

Retrieves a resource containing information about a cloud location.

+

+ list(parent, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Lists cloud locations under a given project and location.

+

+ list_next()

+

Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+ search(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, query=None, sourceCloudLocation=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Searches for cloud locations from a given source location.

+

+ search_next()

+

Retrieves the next page of results.

+

Method Details

+
+ close() +
Close httplib2 connections.
+
+ +
+ get(name, x__xgafv=None) +
Retrieves a resource containing information about a cloud location.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. Name of the resource. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents resource cloud locations.
+  "carbonFreeEnergyPercentage": 3.14, # Optional. The carbon free energy percentage of the cloud location. This represents the average percentage of time customers' application will be running on carbon-free energy. See https://cloud.google.com/sustainability/region-carbon for more details. There is a difference between default value 0 and unset value. 0 means the carbon free energy percentage is 0%, while unset value means the carbon footprint data is not available.
+  "cloudLocationType": "A String", # Optional. The type of the cloud location.
+  "cloudProvider": "A String", # Optional. The provider of the cloud location. Values can be Google Cloud or third-party providers, including AWS, Azure, or Oracle Cloud Infrastructure.
+  "containingCloudLocation": "A String", # Output only. The containing cloud location in the strict nesting hierarchy. For example, the containing cloud location of a zone is a region.
+  "displayName": "A String", # Optional. The human-readable name of the cloud location. Example: us-east-2, us-east1.
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. Name of the cloud location. Unique name of the cloud location including project and location using the form: `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location}/cloudLocations/{cloud_location}`
+  "territoryCode": "A String", # Optional. The two-letter ISO 3166-1 alpha-2 code of the cloud location. Examples: US, JP, KR.
+}
+
+ +
+ list(parent, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Lists cloud locations under a given project and location.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent, which owns this collection of cloud locations. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location} (required)
+  filter: string, Optional. A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. The expression is in the form of field=value. For example, 'cloud_location_type=CLOUD_LOCATION_TYPE_REGION'. Multiple filter queries are space-separated. For example, 'cloud_location_type=CLOUD_LOCATION_TYPE_REGION territory_code="US"' By default, each expression is an AND expression. However, you can include AND and OR expressions explicitly.
+  pageSize: integer, Optional. The maximum number of cloud locations to return per page. The service might return fewer cloud locations than this value. If unspecified, server will pick an appropriate default.
+  pageToken: string, Optional. A token identifying a page of results the server should return. Provide page token returned by a previous 'ListCloudLocations' call to retrieve the next page of results. When paginating, all other parameters provided to 'ListCloudLocations' must match the call that provided the page token.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Message for response to listing cloud locations.
+  "cloudLocations": [ # Output only. List of cloud locations.
+    { # Represents resource cloud locations.
+      "carbonFreeEnergyPercentage": 3.14, # Optional. The carbon free energy percentage of the cloud location. This represents the average percentage of time customers' application will be running on carbon-free energy. See https://cloud.google.com/sustainability/region-carbon for more details. There is a difference between default value 0 and unset value. 0 means the carbon free energy percentage is 0%, while unset value means the carbon footprint data is not available.
+      "cloudLocationType": "A String", # Optional. The type of the cloud location.
+      "cloudProvider": "A String", # Optional. The provider of the cloud location. Values can be Google Cloud or third-party providers, including AWS, Azure, or Oracle Cloud Infrastructure.
+      "containingCloudLocation": "A String", # Output only. The containing cloud location in the strict nesting hierarchy. For example, the containing cloud location of a zone is a region.
+      "displayName": "A String", # Optional. The human-readable name of the cloud location. Example: us-east-2, us-east1.
+      "name": "A String", # Identifier. Name of the cloud location. Unique name of the cloud location including project and location using the form: `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location}/cloudLocations/{cloud_location}`
+      "territoryCode": "A String", # Optional. The two-letter ISO 3166-1 alpha-2 code of the cloud location. Examples: US, JP, KR.
+    },
+  ],
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # Output only. The continuation token, used to page through large result sets. Provide this value in a subsequent request as page_token in subsequent requests to retrieve the next page. If this field is not present, there are no subsequent results.
+}
+
+ +
+ list_next() +
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        
+
+ +
+ search(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, query=None, sourceCloudLocation=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Searches for cloud locations from a given source location.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent, which owns this collection of cloud locations. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location} (required)
+  pageSize: integer, Optional. The maximum number of cloud locations to return. The service might return fewer cloud locations than this value. If unspecified, server will pick an appropriate default.
+  pageToken: string, Optional. A token identifying a page of results the server should return. Provide Page token returned by a previous 'ListCloudLocations' call to retrieve the next page of results. When paginating, all other parameters provided to 'ListCloudLocations' must match the call that provided the page token.
+  query: string, Optional. The query string in search query syntax. While filter is used to filter the search results by attributes, query is used to specify the search requirements.
+  sourceCloudLocation: string, Required. The source cloud location to search from. Example search can be searching nearby cloud locations from the source cloud location by latency.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Message for response to searching cloud locations.
+  "cloudLocations": [ # Output only. List of cloud locations.
+    { # Represents resource cloud locations.
+      "carbonFreeEnergyPercentage": 3.14, # Optional. The carbon free energy percentage of the cloud location. This represents the average percentage of time customers' application will be running on carbon-free energy. See https://cloud.google.com/sustainability/region-carbon for more details. There is a difference between default value 0 and unset value. 0 means the carbon free energy percentage is 0%, while unset value means the carbon footprint data is not available.
+      "cloudLocationType": "A String", # Optional. The type of the cloud location.
+      "cloudProvider": "A String", # Optional. The provider of the cloud location. Values can be Google Cloud or third-party providers, including AWS, Azure, or Oracle Cloud Infrastructure.
+      "containingCloudLocation": "A String", # Output only. The containing cloud location in the strict nesting hierarchy. For example, the containing cloud location of a zone is a region.
+      "displayName": "A String", # Optional. The human-readable name of the cloud location. Example: us-east-2, us-east1.
+      "name": "A String", # Identifier. Name of the cloud location. Unique name of the cloud location including project and location using the form: `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location}/cloudLocations/{cloud_location}`
+      "territoryCode": "A String", # Optional. The two-letter ISO 3166-1 alpha-2 code of the cloud location. Examples: US, JP, KR.
+    },
+  ],
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # Output only. The continuation token, used to page through large result sets. Provide this value in a subsequent request as page_token in subsequent requests to retrieve the next page. If this field is not present, there are no subsequent results.
+}
+
+ +
+ search_next() +
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        
+
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/cloudlocationfinder_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/cloudlocationfinder_v1.projects.locations.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..23d5ab7d1f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/dyn/cloudlocationfinder_v1.projects.locations.html @@ -0,0 +1,177 @@ + + + +

Cloud Location Finder API . projects . locations

+

Instance Methods

+

+ cloudLocations() +

+

Returns the cloudLocations Resource.

+ +

+ close()

+

Close httplib2 connections.

+

+ get(name, x__xgafv=None)

+

Gets information about a location.

+

+ list(name, extraLocationTypes=None, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Lists information about the supported locations for this service.

+

+ list_next()

+

Retrieves the next page of results.

+

Method Details

+
+ close() +
Close httplib2 connections.
+
+ +
+ get(name, x__xgafv=None) +
Gets information about a location.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Resource name for the location. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A resource that represents a Google Cloud location.
+  "displayName": "A String", # The friendly name for this location, typically a nearby city name. For example, "Tokyo".
+  "labels": { # Cross-service attributes for the location. For example {"cloud.googleapis.com/region": "us-east1"}
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "locationId": "A String", # The canonical id for this location. For example: `"us-east1"`.
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata. For example the available capacity at the given location.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Resource name for the location, which may vary between implementations. For example: `"projects/example-project/locations/us-east1"`
+}
+
+ +
+ list(name, extraLocationTypes=None, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Lists information about the supported locations for this service.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required)
+  extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated)
+  filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160).
+  pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default.
+  pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The response message for Locations.ListLocations.
+  "locations": [ # A list of locations that matches the specified filter in the request.
+    { # A resource that represents a Google Cloud location.
+      "displayName": "A String", # The friendly name for this location, typically a nearby city name. For example, "Tokyo".
+      "labels": { # Cross-service attributes for the location. For example {"cloud.googleapis.com/region": "us-east1"}
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+      "locationId": "A String", # The canonical id for this location. For example: `"us-east1"`.
+      "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata. For example the available capacity at the given location.
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+      "name": "A String", # Resource name for the location, which may vary between implementations. For example: `"projects/example-project/locations/us-east1"`
+    },
+  ],
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # The standard List next-page token.
+}
+
+ +
+ list_next() +
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        
+
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/cloudlocationfinder_v1alpha.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/cloudlocationfinder_v1alpha.projects.locations.html index cf4c6e5cf85..1197d3c3fdd 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/cloudlocationfinder_v1alpha.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/cloudlocationfinder_v1alpha.projects.locations.html @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.advice.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.advice.html index 6d8020ceb8e..9f6d9bb2820 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.advice.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.advice.html @@ -214,7 +214,8 @@

Method Details

{ "scores": { # The Scores message groups information about a shard of capacity. "obtainability": 3.14, # The obtainability score indicates the likelihood of successfully obtaining (provisioning) the requested number of VMs. The score range is 0.0 through 1.0. Higher is better. - "spotPreemption": 3.14, # The preemption score indicates the likelihood that your Spot VMs is preempted. For more information about the preemption process, see Preemption of Spot VMs. The score range is 0.0 through 1.0. Higher is better. + "spotPreemption": 3.14, # [Deprecated] Use uptime_score field instead. The preemption score indicates the likelihood that your Spot VMs is preempted. For more information about the preemption process, see Preemption of Spot VMs. The score range is 0.0 through 1.0. Higher is better. + "uptimeScore": 3.14, # The uptime score indicates the availability of your Spot VMs. For more information about the preemption process, see Preemption of Spot VMs. The score range is 0.0 through 1.0. Higher is better. }, "shards": [ { # Shards represent blocks of uniform capacity in recommendations. Each shard is for a single zone, single instance selection, and a single machine shape. Each shard defines a size expressed as the number of VMs. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.backendBuckets.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.backendBuckets.html index a414fda6453..89843f95837 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.backendBuckets.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.backendBuckets.html @@ -77,6 +77,12 @@

Instance Methods

addSignedUrlKey(project, backendBucket, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

Adds a key for validating requests with signed URLs for this backend bucket.

+

+ aggregatedList(project, filter=None, includeAllScopes=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, serviceProjectNumber=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Retrieves the list of all BackendBucket resources, regional and global, available to the specified project. To prevent failure, Google recommends that you set the `returnPartialSuccess` parameter to `true`.

+

+ aggregatedList_next()

+

Retrieves the next page of results.

close()

Close httplib2 connections.

@@ -256,6 +262,135 @@

Method Details

}
+
+ aggregatedList(project, filter=None, includeAllScopes=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, serviceProjectNumber=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Retrieves the list of all BackendBucket resources, regional and global, available to the specified project. To prevent failure, Google recommends that you set the `returnPartialSuccess` parameter to `true`.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Name of the project scoping this request. (required)
+  filter: string, A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. These two types of filter expressions cannot be mixed in one request. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `>`, `<`, `<=`, `>=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = "Intel Skylake") ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = "Intel Skylake") OR (cpuPlatform = "Intel Broadwell") AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq 'single quoted literal'` `fieldname eq "double quoted literal"` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne "literal")` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name "instance", you would use `name ne .*instance`. You cannot combine constraints on multiple fields using regular expressions.
+  includeAllScopes: boolean, Indicates whether every visible scope for each scope type (zone, region, global) should be included in the response. For new resource types added after this field, the flag has no effect as new resource types will always include every visible scope for each scope type in response. For resource types which predate this field, if this flag is omitted or false, only scopes of the scope types where the resource type is expected to be found will be included.
+  maxResults: integer, The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)
+  orderBy: string, Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy="creationTimestamp desc"`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.
+  pageToken: string, Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.
+  returnPartialSuccess: boolean, Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false. For example, when partial success behavior is enabled, aggregatedList for a single zone scope either returns all resources in the zone or no resources, with an error code.
+  serviceProjectNumber: string, The Shared VPC service project id or service project number for which aggregated list request is invoked for subnetworks list-usable api.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    {
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.
+  "items": { # A list of BackendBucketsScopedList resources.
+    "a_key": { # Name of the scope containing this set of BackendBuckets.
+      "backendBuckets": [ # A list of BackendBuckets contained in this scope.
+        { # Represents a Cloud Storage Bucket resource. This Cloud Storage bucket resource is referenced by a URL map of a load balancer. For more information, read Backend Buckets.
+          "bucketName": "A String", # Cloud Storage bucket name.
+          "cdnPolicy": { # Message containing Cloud CDN configuration for a backend bucket. # Cloud CDN configuration for this BackendBucket.
+            "bypassCacheOnRequestHeaders": [ # Bypass the cache when the specified request headers are matched - e.g. Pragma or Authorization headers. Up to 5 headers can be specified. The cache is bypassed for all cdnPolicy.cacheMode settings.
+              { # Bypass the cache when the specified request headers are present, e.g. Pragma or Authorization headers. Values are case insensitive. The presence of such a header overrides the cache_mode setting.
+                "headerName": "A String", # The header field name to match on when bypassing cache. Values are case-insensitive.
+              },
+            ],
+            "cacheKeyPolicy": { # Message containing what to include in the cache key for a request for Cloud CDN. # The CacheKeyPolicy for this CdnPolicy.
+              "includeHttpHeaders": [ # Allows HTTP request headers (by name) to be used in the cache key.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "queryStringWhitelist": [ # Names of query string parameters to include in cache keys. Default parameters are always included. '&' and '=' will be percent encoded and not treated as delimiters.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+            },
+            "cacheMode": "A String", # Specifies the cache setting for all responses from this backend. The possible values are: USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS Requires the origin to set valid caching headers to cache content. Responses without these headers will not be cached at Google's edge, and will require a full trip to the origin on every request, potentially impacting performance and increasing load on the origin server. FORCE_CACHE_ALL Cache all content, ignoring any "private", "no-store" or "no-cache" directives in Cache-Control response headers. Warning: this may result in Cloud CDN caching private, per-user (user identifiable) content. CACHE_ALL_STATIC Automatically cache static content, including common image formats, media (video and audio), and web assets (JavaScript and CSS). Requests and responses that are marked as uncacheable, as well as dynamic content (including HTML), will not be cached. If no value is provided for cdnPolicy.cacheMode, it defaults to CACHE_ALL_STATIC.
+            "clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year).
+            "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL.
+            "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL.
+            "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy.
+            "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists.
+              { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes.
+                "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once.
+                "ttl": 42, # The TTL (in seconds) for which to cache responses with the corresponding status code. The maximum allowed value is 1800s (30 minutes), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL.
+              },
+            ],
+            "requestCoalescing": True or False, # If true then Cloud CDN will combine multiple concurrent cache fill requests into a small number of requests to the origin.
+            "serveWhileStale": 42, # Serve existing content from the cache (if available) when revalidating content with the origin, or when an error is encountered when refreshing the cache. This setting defines the default "max-stale" duration for any cached responses that do not specify a max-stale directive. Stale responses that exceed the TTL configured here will not be served. The default limit (max-stale) is 86400s (1 day), which will allow stale content to be served up to this limit beyond the max-age (or s-maxage) of a cached response. The maximum allowed value is 604800 (1 week). Set this to zero (0) to disable serve-while-stale.
+            "signedUrlCacheMaxAgeSec": "A String", # Maximum number of seconds the response to a signed URL request will be considered fresh. After this time period, the response will be revalidated before being served. Defaults to 1hr (3600s). When serving responses to signed URL requests, Cloud CDN will internally behave as though all responses from this backend had a "Cache-Control: public, max-age=[TTL]" header, regardless of any existing Cache-Control header. The actual headers served in responses will not be altered.
+            "signedUrlKeyNames": [ # [Output Only] Names of the keys for signing request URLs.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+          },
+          "compressionMode": "A String", # Compress text responses using Brotli or gzip compression, based on the client's Accept-Encoding header.
+          "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+          "customResponseHeaders": [ # Headers that the Application Load Balancer should add to proxied responses.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "description": "A String", # An optional textual description of the resource; provided by the client when the resource is created.
+          "edgeSecurityPolicy": "A String", # [Output Only] The resource URL for the edge security policy associated with this backend bucket.
+          "enableCdn": True or False, # If true, enable Cloud CDN for this BackendBucket.
+          "id": "A String", # [Output Only] Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.
+          "kind": "compute#backendBucket", # Type of the resource.
+          "loadBalancingScheme": "A String", # The value can only be INTERNAL_MANAGED for cross-region internal layer 7 load balancer. If loadBalancingScheme is not specified, the backend bucket can be used by classic global external load balancers, or global application external load balancers, or both.
+          "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+          "params": { # Additional Backend Bucket parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
+            "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid.
+              "a_key": "A String",
+            },
+          },
+          "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional backend bucket resides. This field is not applicable to global backend buckets. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
+          "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+          "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
+          "usedBy": [ # [Output Only] List of resources referencing that backend bucket.
+            {
+              "reference": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for UrlMaps referencing that BackendBucket.
+            },
+          ],
+        },
+      ],
+      "warning": { # Informational warning which replaces the list of backend services when the list is empty.
+        "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+        "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+          {
+            "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+            "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+          },
+        ],
+        "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "kind": "compute#backendBucketAggregatedList", # Type of resource.
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # [Output Only] This token allows you to get the next page of results for list requests. If the number of results is larger than maxResults, use the nextPageToken as a value for the query parameter pageToken in the next list request. Subsequent list requests will have their own nextPageToken to continue paging through the results.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.
+  "warning": { # [Output Only] Informational warning message.
+    "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+    "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+      {
+        "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+        "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+  },
+}
+
+ +
+ aggregatedList_next() +
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        
+
+
close()
Close httplib2 connections.
@@ -547,7 +682,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -667,7 +802,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -868,7 +1003,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -967,7 +1102,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -1082,7 +1217,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -1534,7 +1669,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.backendServices.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.backendServices.html index 15039e474b3..d127b5e1536 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.backendServices.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.backendServices.html @@ -355,7 +355,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -1163,7 +1163,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -1740,7 +1740,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -1859,7 +1859,7 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # Type of the redirect action. Possible values are: - GOOGLE_RECAPTCHA: redirect to reCAPTCHA for manual challenge assessment. - EXTERNAL_302: redirect to a different URL via a 302 response. }, "redirectTarget": "A String", # This must be specified for redirect actions. Cannot be specified for any other actions. - "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum managed protection tier required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. + "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum Cloud Armor subscription required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. "ruleNumber": "A String", # Identifier for the rule. This is only unique within the given security policy. This can only be set during rule creation, if rule number is not specified it will be generated by the server. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall security policy rule. "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. This field may only be specified when versioned_expr is set to FIREWALL. @@ -2051,7 +2051,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -2683,7 +2683,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -3213,7 +3213,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -3759,7 +3759,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -4774,7 +4774,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.disks.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.disks.html index 1cd3ab9411b..fd8f0270272 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.disks.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.disks.html @@ -143,6 +143,9 @@

Instance Methods

update(project, zone, disk, body=None, paths=None, requestId=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)

Updates the specified disk with the data included in the request. The update is performed only on selected fields included as part of update-mask. Only the following fields can be modified: user_license.

+

+ updateKmskey(project, zone, disk, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Rotates the customer-managed encryption key to the latest version for the specified persistent disk.

waitForReplicationCatchUp(project, zone, disk, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

Wait for replication to catch up on the secondary disk.

@@ -2994,6 +2997,132 @@

Method Details

}
+
+ updateKmskey(project, zone, disk, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Rotates the customer-managed encryption key to the latest version for the specified persistent disk.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  zone: string, The name of the zone for this request. (required)
+  disk: string, Name of the Disk resource, should conform to RFC1035. (required)
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zoneOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources. Note that completed Operation resources have a limited retention period.
+  "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
+  "description": "A String", # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
+  "endTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "error": { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    "errors": [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
+      {
+        "code": "A String", # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
+        "errorDetails": [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
+          {
+            "errorInfo": { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the "pubsub.googleapis.com" API when it is not enabled: { "reason": "API_DISABLED" "domain": "googleapis.com" "metadata": { "resource": "projects/123", "service": "pubsub.googleapis.com" } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { "reason": "STOCKOUT" "domain": "spanner.googleapis.com", "metadata": { "availableRegions": "us-central1,us-east2" } }
+              "domain": "A String", # The logical grouping to which the "reason" belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: "pubsub.googleapis.com". If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is "googleapis.com".
+              "metadatas": { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys must match a regular expression of `a-z+` but should ideally be lowerCamelCase. Also, they must be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than `{"instanceLimit": "100/request"}`, should be returned as, `{"instanceLimitPerRequest": "100"}`, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "reason": "A String", # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
+            },
+            "help": { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn't enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
+              "links": [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
+                { # Describes a URL link.
+                  "description": "A String", # Describes what the link offers.
+                  "url": "A String", # The URL of the link.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            "localizedMessage": { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
+              "locale": "A String", # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: "en-US", "fr-CH", "es-MX"
+              "message": "A String", # The localized error message in the above locale.
+            },
+            "quotaInfo": { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
+              "dimensions": { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "futureLimit": 3.14, # Future quota limit being rolled out. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limit": 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limitName": "A String", # The name of the quota limit.
+              "metricName": "A String", # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
+              "rolloutStatus": "A String", # Rollout status of the future quota limit.
+            },
+          },
+        ],
+        "location": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
+        "message": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "httpErrorMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
+  "httpErrorStatusCode": 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  "insertTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "instancesBulkInsertOperationMetadata": {
+    "perLocationStatus": { # Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "createdVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs successfully created so far.
+        "deletedVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that got deleted during rollback.
+        "failedToCreateVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that started creating but encountered an error.
+        "status": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation status of BulkInsert operation - information if the flow is rolling forward or rolling back.
+        "targetVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs originally planned to be created.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "kind": "compute#operation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
+  "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
+  "operationGroupId": "A String", # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
+  "operationType": "A String", # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
+  "progress": 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
+  "setCommonInstanceMetadataOperationMetadata": { # [Output Only] If the operation is for projects.setCommonInstanceMetadata, this field will contain information on all underlying zonal actions and their state.
+    "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The client operation id.
+    "perLocationOperations": { # [Output Only] Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # [Output Only] If state is `ABANDONED` or `FAILED`, this field is populated.
+          "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+          "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+            {
+              "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+            },
+          ],
+          "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+        },
+        "state": "A String", # [Output Only] Status of the action, which can be one of the following: `PROPAGATING`, `PROPAGATED`, `ABANDONED`, `FAILED`, or `DONE`.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "startTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "status": "A String", # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
+  "statusMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
+  "targetId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
+  "targetLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the disk that the snapshot was created from.
+  "user": "A String", # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com` or `alice_smith_identifier (global/workforcePools/example-com-us-employees)`.
+  "warnings": [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    {
+      "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+      "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+        {
+          "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+          "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+    },
+  ],
+  "zone": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
+}
+
+
waitForReplicationCatchUp(project, zone, disk, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)
Wait for replication to catch up on the secondary disk.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.firewallPolicies.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.firewallPolicies.html
index 140abb397ed..15001cc3e4c 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.firewallPolicies.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.firewallPolicies.html
@@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ 

Instance Methods

list(filter=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, parentId=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, x__xgafv=None)

Lists all the policies that have been configured for the specified folder or organization.

- listAssociations(targetResource=None, x__xgafv=None)

+ listAssociations(includeInheritedPolicies=None, targetResource=None, x__xgafv=None)

Lists associations of a specified target, i.e., organization or folder.

list_next()

@@ -1201,6 +1201,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies. + "policySource": "A String", # [Output Only] Source of this Firewall Policy. USER_DEFINED if created by a Cloud user, or SYSTEM if created by managed services like GKE. "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used. "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples. @@ -1677,6 +1678,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies. + "policySource": "A String", # [Output Only] Source of this Firewall Policy. USER_DEFINED if created by a Cloud user, or SYSTEM if created by managed services like GKE. "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used. "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples. @@ -2014,6 +2016,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies. + "policySource": "A String", # [Output Only] Source of this Firewall Policy. USER_DEFINED if created by a Cloud user, or SYSTEM if created by managed services like GKE. "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used. "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples. @@ -2123,10 +2126,11 @@

Method Details

- listAssociations(targetResource=None, x__xgafv=None) + listAssociations(includeInheritedPolicies=None, targetResource=None, x__xgafv=None)
Lists associations of a specified target, i.e., organization or folder.
 
 Args:
+  includeInheritedPolicies: boolean, If set to "true", the response will contain a list of all associations for the containing folders and the containing organization of the target. The parameter has no effect if the target is an organization.
   targetResource: string, The target resource to list associations. It is an organization, or a folder.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
@@ -2402,6 +2406,7 @@ 

Method Details

}, ], "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies. + "policySource": "A String", # [Output Only] Source of this Firewall Policy. USER_DEFINED if created by a Cloud user, or SYSTEM if created by managed services like GKE. "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used. "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.globalFolderOperations.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.globalFolderOperations.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..93182665f79 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.globalFolderOperations.html @@ -0,0 +1,379 @@ + + + +

Compute Engine API . globalFolderOperations

+

Instance Methods

+

+ close()

+

Close httplib2 connections.

+

+ get(folder, operation, x__xgafv=None)

+

Retrieves the specified Operations resource.

+

+ list(folder, filter=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Retrieves a list of Operation resources contained within the specified folder.

+

+ list_next()

+

Retrieves the next page of results.

+

Method Details

+
+ close() +
Close httplib2 connections.
+
+ +
+ get(folder, operation, x__xgafv=None) +
Retrieves the specified Operations resource.
+
+Args:
+  folder: string, Folder ID for this request. (required)
+  operation: string, Name of the Operations resource to return. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zoneOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources. Note that completed Operation resources have a limited retention period.
+  "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
+  "description": "A String", # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
+  "endTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "error": { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    "errors": [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
+      {
+        "code": "A String", # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
+        "errorDetails": [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
+          {
+            "errorInfo": { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the "pubsub.googleapis.com" API when it is not enabled: { "reason": "API_DISABLED" "domain": "googleapis.com" "metadata": { "resource": "projects/123", "service": "pubsub.googleapis.com" } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { "reason": "STOCKOUT" "domain": "spanner.googleapis.com", "metadata": { "availableRegions": "us-central1,us-east2" } }
+              "domain": "A String", # The logical grouping to which the "reason" belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: "pubsub.googleapis.com". If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is "googleapis.com".
+              "metadatas": { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys must match a regular expression of `a-z+` but should ideally be lowerCamelCase. Also, they must be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than `{"instanceLimit": "100/request"}`, should be returned as, `{"instanceLimitPerRequest": "100"}`, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "reason": "A String", # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
+            },
+            "help": { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn't enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
+              "links": [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
+                { # Describes a URL link.
+                  "description": "A String", # Describes what the link offers.
+                  "url": "A String", # The URL of the link.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            "localizedMessage": { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
+              "locale": "A String", # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: "en-US", "fr-CH", "es-MX"
+              "message": "A String", # The localized error message in the above locale.
+            },
+            "quotaInfo": { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
+              "dimensions": { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "futureLimit": 3.14, # Future quota limit being rolled out. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limit": 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limitName": "A String", # The name of the quota limit.
+              "metricName": "A String", # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
+              "rolloutStatus": "A String", # Rollout status of the future quota limit.
+            },
+          },
+        ],
+        "location": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
+        "message": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "httpErrorMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
+  "httpErrorStatusCode": 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  "insertTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "instancesBulkInsertOperationMetadata": {
+    "perLocationStatus": { # Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "createdVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs successfully created so far.
+        "deletedVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that got deleted during rollback.
+        "failedToCreateVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that started creating but encountered an error.
+        "status": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation status of BulkInsert operation - information if the flow is rolling forward or rolling back.
+        "targetVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs originally planned to be created.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "kind": "compute#operation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
+  "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
+  "operationGroupId": "A String", # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
+  "operationType": "A String", # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
+  "progress": 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
+  "setCommonInstanceMetadataOperationMetadata": { # [Output Only] If the operation is for projects.setCommonInstanceMetadata, this field will contain information on all underlying zonal actions and their state.
+    "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The client operation id.
+    "perLocationOperations": { # [Output Only] Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # [Output Only] If state is `ABANDONED` or `FAILED`, this field is populated.
+          "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+          "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+            {
+              "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+            },
+          ],
+          "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+        },
+        "state": "A String", # [Output Only] Status of the action, which can be one of the following: `PROPAGATING`, `PROPAGATED`, `ABANDONED`, `FAILED`, or `DONE`.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "startTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "status": "A String", # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
+  "statusMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
+  "targetId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
+  "targetLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the disk that the snapshot was created from.
+  "user": "A String", # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com` or `alice_smith_identifier (global/workforcePools/example-com-us-employees)`.
+  "warnings": [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    {
+      "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+      "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+        {
+          "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+          "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+    },
+  ],
+  "zone": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
+}
+
+ +
+ list(folder, filter=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Retrieves a list of Operation resources contained within the specified folder.
+
+Args:
+  folder: string, Folder ID for this request. (required)
+  filter: string, A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. These two types of filter expressions cannot be mixed in one request. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `>`, `<`, `<=`, `>=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = "Intel Skylake") ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = "Intel Skylake") OR (cpuPlatform = "Intel Broadwell") AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq 'single quoted literal'` `fieldname eq "double quoted literal"` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne "literal")` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name "instance", you would use `name ne .*instance`. You cannot combine constraints on multiple fields using regular expressions.
+  maxResults: integer, The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)
+  orderBy: string, Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy="creationTimestamp desc"`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.
+  pageToken: string, Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.
+  returnPartialSuccess: boolean, Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false. For example, when partial success behavior is enabled, aggregatedList for a single zone scope either returns all resources in the zone or no resources, with an error code.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Contains a list of Operation resources.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  "items": [ # [Output Only] A list of Operation resources.
+    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zoneOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources. Note that completed Operation resources have a limited retention period.
+      "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
+      "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
+      "description": "A String", # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
+      "endTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+      "error": { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+        "errors": [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
+          {
+            "code": "A String", # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
+            "errorDetails": [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
+              {
+                "errorInfo": { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the "pubsub.googleapis.com" API when it is not enabled: { "reason": "API_DISABLED" "domain": "googleapis.com" "metadata": { "resource": "projects/123", "service": "pubsub.googleapis.com" } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { "reason": "STOCKOUT" "domain": "spanner.googleapis.com", "metadata": { "availableRegions": "us-central1,us-east2" } }
+                  "domain": "A String", # The logical grouping to which the "reason" belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: "pubsub.googleapis.com". If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is "googleapis.com".
+                  "metadatas": { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys must match a regular expression of `a-z+` but should ideally be lowerCamelCase. Also, they must be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than `{"instanceLimit": "100/request"}`, should be returned as, `{"instanceLimitPerRequest": "100"}`, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
+                    "a_key": "A String",
+                  },
+                  "reason": "A String", # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
+                },
+                "help": { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn't enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
+                  "links": [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
+                    { # Describes a URL link.
+                      "description": "A String", # Describes what the link offers.
+                      "url": "A String", # The URL of the link.
+                    },
+                  ],
+                },
+                "localizedMessage": { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
+                  "locale": "A String", # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: "en-US", "fr-CH", "es-MX"
+                  "message": "A String", # The localized error message in the above locale.
+                },
+                "quotaInfo": { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
+                  "dimensions": { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
+                    "a_key": "A String",
+                  },
+                  "futureLimit": 3.14, # Future quota limit being rolled out. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+                  "limit": 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+                  "limitName": "A String", # The name of the quota limit.
+                  "metricName": "A String", # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
+                  "rolloutStatus": "A String", # Rollout status of the future quota limit.
+                },
+              },
+            ],
+            "location": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
+            "message": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
+          },
+        ],
+      },
+      "httpErrorMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
+      "httpErrorStatusCode": 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
+      "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
+      "insertTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+      "instancesBulkInsertOperationMetadata": {
+        "perLocationStatus": { # Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+          "a_key": {
+            "createdVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs successfully created so far.
+            "deletedVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that got deleted during rollback.
+            "failedToCreateVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that started creating but encountered an error.
+            "status": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation status of BulkInsert operation - information if the flow is rolling forward or rolling back.
+            "targetVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs originally planned to be created.
+          },
+        },
+      },
+      "kind": "compute#operation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
+      "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
+      "operationGroupId": "A String", # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
+      "operationType": "A String", # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
+      "progress": 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
+      "region": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
+      "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+      "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
+      "setCommonInstanceMetadataOperationMetadata": { # [Output Only] If the operation is for projects.setCommonInstanceMetadata, this field will contain information on all underlying zonal actions and their state.
+        "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The client operation id.
+        "perLocationOperations": { # [Output Only] Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+          "a_key": {
+            "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # [Output Only] If state is `ABANDONED` or `FAILED`, this field is populated.
+              "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+              "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+                {
+                  "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+                },
+              ],
+              "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+            },
+            "state": "A String", # [Output Only] Status of the action, which can be one of the following: `PROPAGATING`, `PROPAGATED`, `ABANDONED`, `FAILED`, or `DONE`.
+          },
+        },
+      },
+      "startTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+      "status": "A String", # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
+      "statusMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
+      "targetId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
+      "targetLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the disk that the snapshot was created from.
+      "user": "A String", # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com` or `alice_smith_identifier (global/workforcePools/example-com-us-employees)`.
+      "warnings": [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+        {
+          "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+          "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+            {
+              "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+              "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+            },
+          ],
+          "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+        },
+      ],
+      "zone": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
+    },
+  ],
+  "kind": "compute#operationList", # [Output Only] Type of resource. Always `compute#operations` for Operations resource.
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # [Output Only] This token allows you to get the next page of results for list requests. If the number of results is larger than `maxResults`, use the `nextPageToken` as a value for the query parameter `pageToken` in the next list request. Subsequent list requests will have their own `nextPageToken` to continue paging through the results.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.
+  "warning": { # [Output Only] Informational warning message.
+    "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+    "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+      {
+        "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+        "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+  },
+}
+
+ +
+ list_next() +
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        
+
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.globalVmExtensionPolicies.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.globalVmExtensionPolicies.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..de12e65c909 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.globalVmExtensionPolicies.html @@ -0,0 +1,872 @@ + + + +

Compute Engine API . globalVmExtensionPolicies

+

Instance Methods

+

+ aggregatedList(project, filter=None, includeAllScopes=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, serviceProjectNumber=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Retrieves the list of all VM Extension Policy resources available to the specified project. To prevent failure, it's recommended that you set the `returnPartialSuccess` parameter to `true`.

+

+ aggregatedList_next()

+

Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+ close()

+

Close httplib2 connections.

+

+ delete(project, globalVmExtensionPolicy, requestId=None, rolloutInput_conflictBehavior=None, rolloutInput_name=None, rolloutInput_predefinedRolloutPlan=None, rolloutInput_retryUuid=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Purge scoped resources (zonal policies) from a global VM extension policy, and then delete the global VM extension policy. Purge of the scoped resources is a pre-condition of the global VM extension policy deletion. The deletion of the global VM extension policy happens after the purge rollout is done, so it's not a part of the LRO. It's an automatic process that triggers in the backend.

+

+ get(project, globalVmExtensionPolicy, x__xgafv=None)

+

Gets details of a global VM extension policy.

+

+ insert(project, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Creates a new project level GlobalVmExtensionPolicy.

+

+ list(project, filter=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Lists global VM extension policies.

+

+ list_next()

+

Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+ update(project, globalVmExtensionPolicy, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Updates a global VM extension policy.

+

Method Details

+
+ aggregatedList(project, filter=None, includeAllScopes=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, serviceProjectNumber=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Retrieves the list of all VM Extension Policy resources available to the specified project. To prevent failure, it's recommended that you set the `returnPartialSuccess` parameter to `true`.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Name of the project scoping this request. (required)
+  filter: string, A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. These two types of filter expressions cannot be mixed in one request. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `>`, `<`, `<=`, `>=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = "Intel Skylake") ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = "Intel Skylake") OR (cpuPlatform = "Intel Broadwell") AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq 'single quoted literal'` `fieldname eq "double quoted literal"` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne "literal")` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name "instance", you would use `name ne .*instance`. You cannot combine constraints on multiple fields using regular expressions.
+  includeAllScopes: boolean, Indicates whether every visible scope for each scope type (zone, region, global) should be included in the response. For new resource types added after this field, the flag has no effect as new resource types will always include every visible scope for each scope type in response. For resource types which predate this field, if this flag is omitted or false, only scopes of the scope types where the resource type is expected to be found will be included.
+  maxResults: integer, The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)
+  orderBy: string, Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy="creationTimestamp desc"`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.
+  pageToken: string, Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.
+  returnPartialSuccess: boolean, Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false. For example, when partial success behavior is enabled, aggregatedList for a single zone scope either returns all resources in the zone or no resources, with an error code.
+  serviceProjectNumber: string, The Shared VPC service project id or service project number for which aggregated list request is invoked for subnetworks list-usable api.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Response for the aggregated list of VM extension policies.
+  "etag": "A String",
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.
+  "items": { # A list of VmExtensionPoliciesScopedList resources.
+    "a_key": { # Name of the scope containing this set of VmExtensionPolicies.
+      "vmExtensionPolicies": [ # List of VmExtensionPolicy resources contained in this scope.
+        { # Represents a VM extension policy.
+          "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+          "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource.
+          "extensionPolicies": { # Required. A map of extension names (e.g., "cloudops") to their corresponding policy configurations.
+            "a_key": { # Configuration for a specific VM extension.
+              "pinnedVersion": "A String", # Optional. The specific version of the extension to install. If not set, the latest version is used.
+              "stringConfig": "A String", # Optional. String-based configuration data for the extension.
+            },
+          },
+          "globalResourceLink": "A String", # Optional. [Output Only] Link to the global policy that manages this zone policy, if applicable.
+          "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
+          "instanceSelectors": [ # Optional. Selectors to target VMs for this policy. VMs are selected if they match *any* of the provided selectors (logical OR). If this list is empty, the policy applies to all VMs.
+            { # Defines how to select VMs to apply a zone VM extension policy.
+              "labelSelector": { # A LabelSelector is applied to a VM only if it matches all the specified labels. # Optional. LabelSelector selects VMs based on their labels.
+                "inclusionLabels": { # Optional. A map of key-value pairs representing VM labels. VMs must have all of the labels specified in this map to be selected (logical AND). e.g. If the `inclusion_labels` are {("key1", "value1"), ("key2", "value2")}, the VM labels must contain both ("key1", "value1") and ("key2", "value2") to be selected. If the VM labels are ("key1", "value1") and ("something", "else"), it will not be selected. If the map is empty, it's considered a match.
+                  "a_key": "A String",
+                },
+              },
+            },
+          ],
+          "kind": "compute#vmExtensionPolicy", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#vmExtensionPolicy.
+          "managedByGlobal": True or False, # Optional. [Output Only] Indicates if this policy is managed by a global policy.
+          "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+          "priority": 42, # Optional. Priority of this policy. Used to resolve conflicts when multiple policies apply to the same extension. The policy priority is an integer from 0 to 65535, inclusive. Lower integers indicate higher priorities. If you do not specify a priority when creating a rule, it is assigned a priority of 1000. If priorities are equal, the policy with the more recent creation timestamp takes precedence.
+          "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined fully-qualified URL for this resource.
+          "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource's resource id.
+          "state": "A String", # Optional. [Output Only] Current state of the policy: ACTIVE or DELETING.
+          "updateTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Update timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+        },
+      ],
+      "warning": { # Informational warning which replaces the list of backend services when the list is empty.
+        "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+        "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+          {
+            "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+            "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+          },
+        ],
+        "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "kind": "compute#VmExtensionPolicyAggregatedList", # [Output Only] Type of resource. Always compute#VmExtensionPolicyAggregatedList for lists of VmExtensionPolicies.
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # [Output Only] This token allows you to get the next page of results for list requests. If the number of results is larger than maxResults, use the nextPageToken as a value for the query parameter pageToken in the next list request. Subsequent list requests will have their own nextPageToken to continue paging through the results.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.
+  "unreachables": [ # [Output Only] Unreachable resources.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "warning": { # [Output Only] Informational warning message.
+    "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+    "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+      {
+        "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+        "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+  },
+}
+
+ +
+ aggregatedList_next() +
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        
+
+ +
+ close() +
Close httplib2 connections.
+
+ +
+ delete(project, globalVmExtensionPolicy, requestId=None, rolloutInput_conflictBehavior=None, rolloutInput_name=None, rolloutInput_predefinedRolloutPlan=None, rolloutInput_retryUuid=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Purge scoped resources (zonal policies) from a global VM extension policy, and then delete the global VM extension policy. Purge of the scoped resources is a pre-condition of the global VM extension policy deletion. The deletion of the global VM extension policy happens after the purge rollout is done, so it's not a part of the LRO. It's an automatic process that triggers in the backend.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  globalVmExtensionPolicy: string, Name of the global VM extension policy to purge scoped resources for. (required)
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  rolloutInput_conflictBehavior: string, Optional. [Optional] Specifies the behavior of the Rollout if a conflict is detected in a project during a Rollout. It can be one of the following values: 1) empty : don't overwrite the local value if conflict happens. This is the default behavior. 2) "overwrite" : Overwrite the local value with the rollout value. The concept of "conflict" applies to: 1) Insert action. If the zonal policy already exists when Insert happens, it's a conflict. 2) Update action. If the zonal policy was updated out of band by a zonal API, it's a conflict.
+  rolloutInput_name: string, Optional. The name of the rollout plan. Ex. projects//locations/global/rolloutPlans/.
+  rolloutInput_predefinedRolloutPlan: string, Optional. Predefined rollout plan.
+    Allowed values
+      FAST_ROLLOUT - 
+      ROLLOUT_PLAN_UNSPECIFIED - 
+      SLOW_ROLLOUT - 
+  rolloutInput_retryUuid: string, Optional. The UUID of the retry action. Only set it if this is a retry for an existing resource. This is for the user re-populate the resource without changes. An error will be returned if the retry_uuid is set but the resource get modified.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zoneOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources. Note that completed Operation resources have a limited retention period.
+  "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
+  "description": "A String", # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
+  "endTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "error": { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    "errors": [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
+      {
+        "code": "A String", # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
+        "errorDetails": [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
+          {
+            "errorInfo": { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the "pubsub.googleapis.com" API when it is not enabled: { "reason": "API_DISABLED" "domain": "googleapis.com" "metadata": { "resource": "projects/123", "service": "pubsub.googleapis.com" } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { "reason": "STOCKOUT" "domain": "spanner.googleapis.com", "metadata": { "availableRegions": "us-central1,us-east2" } }
+              "domain": "A String", # The logical grouping to which the "reason" belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: "pubsub.googleapis.com". If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is "googleapis.com".
+              "metadatas": { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys must match a regular expression of `a-z+` but should ideally be lowerCamelCase. Also, they must be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than `{"instanceLimit": "100/request"}`, should be returned as, `{"instanceLimitPerRequest": "100"}`, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "reason": "A String", # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
+            },
+            "help": { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn't enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
+              "links": [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
+                { # Describes a URL link.
+                  "description": "A String", # Describes what the link offers.
+                  "url": "A String", # The URL of the link.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            "localizedMessage": { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
+              "locale": "A String", # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: "en-US", "fr-CH", "es-MX"
+              "message": "A String", # The localized error message in the above locale.
+            },
+            "quotaInfo": { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
+              "dimensions": { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "futureLimit": 3.14, # Future quota limit being rolled out. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limit": 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limitName": "A String", # The name of the quota limit.
+              "metricName": "A String", # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
+              "rolloutStatus": "A String", # Rollout status of the future quota limit.
+            },
+          },
+        ],
+        "location": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
+        "message": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "httpErrorMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
+  "httpErrorStatusCode": 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  "insertTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "instancesBulkInsertOperationMetadata": {
+    "perLocationStatus": { # Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "createdVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs successfully created so far.
+        "deletedVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that got deleted during rollback.
+        "failedToCreateVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that started creating but encountered an error.
+        "status": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation status of BulkInsert operation - information if the flow is rolling forward or rolling back.
+        "targetVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs originally planned to be created.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "kind": "compute#operation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
+  "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
+  "operationGroupId": "A String", # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
+  "operationType": "A String", # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
+  "progress": 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
+  "setCommonInstanceMetadataOperationMetadata": { # [Output Only] If the operation is for projects.setCommonInstanceMetadata, this field will contain information on all underlying zonal actions and their state.
+    "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The client operation id.
+    "perLocationOperations": { # [Output Only] Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # [Output Only] If state is `ABANDONED` or `FAILED`, this field is populated.
+          "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+          "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+            {
+              "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+            },
+          ],
+          "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+        },
+        "state": "A String", # [Output Only] Status of the action, which can be one of the following: `PROPAGATING`, `PROPAGATED`, `ABANDONED`, `FAILED`, or `DONE`.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "startTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "status": "A String", # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
+  "statusMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
+  "targetId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
+  "targetLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the disk that the snapshot was created from.
+  "user": "A String", # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com` or `alice_smith_identifier (global/workforcePools/example-com-us-employees)`.
+  "warnings": [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    {
+      "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+      "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+        {
+          "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+          "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+    },
+  ],
+  "zone": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
+}
+
+ +
+ get(project, globalVmExtensionPolicy, x__xgafv=None) +
Gets details of a global VM extension policy.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  globalVmExtensionPolicy: string, Name of the GlobalVmExtensionPolicy resource to return. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Message describing GlobalVmExtensionPolicy object.
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+  "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
+  "extensionPolicies": { # Required. Map from extension (eg: "cloudops") to its policy configuration. The key is the name of the extension.
+    "a_key": { # Policy for a single extension.
+      "pinnedVersion": "A String", # Optional. The version pinning for the extension. If empty, the extension will be installed with the latest version released by the extension producer.
+      "stringConfig": "A String", # Optional. String configuration. Any string payload that the extension understands.
+    },
+  },
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  "instanceSelectors": [ # Optional. Selector to target VMs for a policy. There is a logical "AND" between instance_selectors.
+    { # Selector to target VMs for a zone VM extension policy.
+      "labelSelector": { # A LabelSelector is applicable for a VM only if it matches all labels in the LabelSelector. # Optional. Labels within the LabelSelector are OR'd.
+        "inclusionLabels": { # Optional. Labels as key value pairs. A VM should contain all the pairs specified in this map to be selected; Labels within the LabelSelector are OR'ed.
+          "a_key": "A String",
+        },
+      },
+    },
+  ],
+  "kind": "compute#globalVmExtensionPolicy", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#globalVmExtensionPolicy for globalVmExtensionPolicies.
+  "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+  "priority": 42, # Optional. Used to resolve conflicts when multiple policies are active for the same extension. Defaults to 0. Larger the number, higher the priority. When the priority is the same, the policy with the newer create time has higher priority.
+  "rolloutOperation": { # Represents the rollout operation # Required. The rollout strategy and status.
+    "rolloutInput": { # Required. The rollout input which defines the rollout plan.
+      "conflictBehavior": "A String", # Optional. [Optional] Specifies the behavior of the Rollout if a conflict is detected in a project during a Rollout. It can be one of the following values: 1) empty : don't overwrite the local value if conflict happens. This is the default behavior. 2) "overwrite" : Overwrite the local value with the rollout value. The concept of "conflict" applies to: 1) Insert action. If the zonal policy already exists when Insert happens, it's a conflict. 2) Update action. If the zonal policy was updated out of band by a zonal API, it's a conflict.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. The name of the rollout plan. Ex. projects//locations/global/rolloutPlans/.
+      "predefinedRolloutPlan": "A String", # Optional. Predefined rollout plan.
+      "retryUuid": "A String", # Optional. The UUID of the retry action. Only set it if this is a retry for an existing resource. This is for the user re-populate the resource without changes. An error will be returned if the retry_uuid is set but the resource get modified.
+    },
+    "rolloutStatus": { # [Output Only] The rollout status of the policy.
+      "currentRollouts": [ # [Output Only] The current rollouts for the latest version of the resource. There should be only one current rollout, but for scalability, we make it repeated.
+        {
+          "rollout": "A String", # [Output Only] The name of the rollout. Ex. projects//locations/global/rollouts/.
+          "rolloutPlan": "A String", # [Output Only] The name of the rollout plan. Ex. projects//locations/global/rolloutPlans/.
+          "state": "A String", # [Output Only] The overall state of the rollout.
+        },
+      ],
+      "previousRollout": { # [Output Only] The last completed rollout resource. This field will not be populated until the first rollout is completed.
+        "rollout": "A String", # [Output Only] The name of the rollout. Ex. projects//locations/global/rollouts/.
+        "rolloutPlan": "A String", # [Output Only] The name of the rollout plan. Ex. projects//locations/global/rolloutPlans/.
+        "state": "A String", # [Output Only] The overall state of the rollout.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "scopedResourceStatus": "A String", # [Output Only] The scoped resource status. It's only for tracking the purging status of the policy.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined fully-qualified URL for this resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource's resource id.
+  "updateTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Update timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+}
+
+ +
+ insert(project, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Creates a new project level GlobalVmExtensionPolicy.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Message describing GlobalVmExtensionPolicy object.
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+  "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
+  "extensionPolicies": { # Required. Map from extension (eg: "cloudops") to its policy configuration. The key is the name of the extension.
+    "a_key": { # Policy for a single extension.
+      "pinnedVersion": "A String", # Optional. The version pinning for the extension. If empty, the extension will be installed with the latest version released by the extension producer.
+      "stringConfig": "A String", # Optional. String configuration. Any string payload that the extension understands.
+    },
+  },
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  "instanceSelectors": [ # Optional. Selector to target VMs for a policy. There is a logical "AND" between instance_selectors.
+    { # Selector to target VMs for a zone VM extension policy.
+      "labelSelector": { # A LabelSelector is applicable for a VM only if it matches all labels in the LabelSelector. # Optional. Labels within the LabelSelector are OR'd.
+        "inclusionLabels": { # Optional. Labels as key value pairs. A VM should contain all the pairs specified in this map to be selected; Labels within the LabelSelector are OR'ed.
+          "a_key": "A String",
+        },
+      },
+    },
+  ],
+  "kind": "compute#globalVmExtensionPolicy", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#globalVmExtensionPolicy for globalVmExtensionPolicies.
+  "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+  "priority": 42, # Optional. Used to resolve conflicts when multiple policies are active for the same extension. Defaults to 0. Larger the number, higher the priority. When the priority is the same, the policy with the newer create time has higher priority.
+  "rolloutOperation": { # Represents the rollout operation # Required. The rollout strategy and status.
+    "rolloutInput": { # Required. The rollout input which defines the rollout plan.
+      "conflictBehavior": "A String", # Optional. [Optional] Specifies the behavior of the Rollout if a conflict is detected in a project during a Rollout. It can be one of the following values: 1) empty : don't overwrite the local value if conflict happens. This is the default behavior. 2) "overwrite" : Overwrite the local value with the rollout value. The concept of "conflict" applies to: 1) Insert action. If the zonal policy already exists when Insert happens, it's a conflict. 2) Update action. If the zonal policy was updated out of band by a zonal API, it's a conflict.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. The name of the rollout plan. Ex. projects//locations/global/rolloutPlans/.
+      "predefinedRolloutPlan": "A String", # Optional. Predefined rollout plan.
+      "retryUuid": "A String", # Optional. The UUID of the retry action. Only set it if this is a retry for an existing resource. This is for the user re-populate the resource without changes. An error will be returned if the retry_uuid is set but the resource get modified.
+    },
+    "rolloutStatus": { # [Output Only] The rollout status of the policy.
+      "currentRollouts": [ # [Output Only] The current rollouts for the latest version of the resource. There should be only one current rollout, but for scalability, we make it repeated.
+        {
+          "rollout": "A String", # [Output Only] The name of the rollout. Ex. projects//locations/global/rollouts/.
+          "rolloutPlan": "A String", # [Output Only] The name of the rollout plan. Ex. projects//locations/global/rolloutPlans/.
+          "state": "A String", # [Output Only] The overall state of the rollout.
+        },
+      ],
+      "previousRollout": { # [Output Only] The last completed rollout resource. This field will not be populated until the first rollout is completed.
+        "rollout": "A String", # [Output Only] The name of the rollout. Ex. projects//locations/global/rollouts/.
+        "rolloutPlan": "A String", # [Output Only] The name of the rollout plan. Ex. projects//locations/global/rolloutPlans/.
+        "state": "A String", # [Output Only] The overall state of the rollout.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "scopedResourceStatus": "A String", # [Output Only] The scoped resource status. It's only for tracking the purging status of the policy.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined fully-qualified URL for this resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource's resource id.
+  "updateTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Update timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+}
+
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zoneOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources. Note that completed Operation resources have a limited retention period.
+  "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
+  "description": "A String", # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
+  "endTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "error": { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    "errors": [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
+      {
+        "code": "A String", # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
+        "errorDetails": [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
+          {
+            "errorInfo": { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the "pubsub.googleapis.com" API when it is not enabled: { "reason": "API_DISABLED" "domain": "googleapis.com" "metadata": { "resource": "projects/123", "service": "pubsub.googleapis.com" } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { "reason": "STOCKOUT" "domain": "spanner.googleapis.com", "metadata": { "availableRegions": "us-central1,us-east2" } }
+              "domain": "A String", # The logical grouping to which the "reason" belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: "pubsub.googleapis.com". If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is "googleapis.com".
+              "metadatas": { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys must match a regular expression of `a-z+` but should ideally be lowerCamelCase. Also, they must be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than `{"instanceLimit": "100/request"}`, should be returned as, `{"instanceLimitPerRequest": "100"}`, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "reason": "A String", # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
+            },
+            "help": { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn't enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
+              "links": [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
+                { # Describes a URL link.
+                  "description": "A String", # Describes what the link offers.
+                  "url": "A String", # The URL of the link.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            "localizedMessage": { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
+              "locale": "A String", # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: "en-US", "fr-CH", "es-MX"
+              "message": "A String", # The localized error message in the above locale.
+            },
+            "quotaInfo": { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
+              "dimensions": { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "futureLimit": 3.14, # Future quota limit being rolled out. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limit": 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limitName": "A String", # The name of the quota limit.
+              "metricName": "A String", # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
+              "rolloutStatus": "A String", # Rollout status of the future quota limit.
+            },
+          },
+        ],
+        "location": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
+        "message": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "httpErrorMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
+  "httpErrorStatusCode": 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  "insertTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "instancesBulkInsertOperationMetadata": {
+    "perLocationStatus": { # Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "createdVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs successfully created so far.
+        "deletedVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that got deleted during rollback.
+        "failedToCreateVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that started creating but encountered an error.
+        "status": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation status of BulkInsert operation - information if the flow is rolling forward or rolling back.
+        "targetVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs originally planned to be created.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "kind": "compute#operation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
+  "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
+  "operationGroupId": "A String", # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
+  "operationType": "A String", # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
+  "progress": 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
+  "setCommonInstanceMetadataOperationMetadata": { # [Output Only] If the operation is for projects.setCommonInstanceMetadata, this field will contain information on all underlying zonal actions and their state.
+    "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The client operation id.
+    "perLocationOperations": { # [Output Only] Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # [Output Only] If state is `ABANDONED` or `FAILED`, this field is populated.
+          "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+          "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+            {
+              "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+            },
+          ],
+          "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+        },
+        "state": "A String", # [Output Only] Status of the action, which can be one of the following: `PROPAGATING`, `PROPAGATED`, `ABANDONED`, `FAILED`, or `DONE`.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "startTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "status": "A String", # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
+  "statusMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
+  "targetId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
+  "targetLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the disk that the snapshot was created from.
+  "user": "A String", # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com` or `alice_smith_identifier (global/workforcePools/example-com-us-employees)`.
+  "warnings": [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    {
+      "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+      "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+        {
+          "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+          "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+    },
+  ],
+  "zone": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
+}
+
+ +
+ list(project, filter=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Lists global VM extension policies.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  filter: string, A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. These two types of filter expressions cannot be mixed in one request. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `>`, `<`, `<=`, `>=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = "Intel Skylake") ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = "Intel Skylake") OR (cpuPlatform = "Intel Broadwell") AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq 'single quoted literal'` `fieldname eq "double quoted literal"` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne "literal")` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name "instance", you would use `name ne .*instance`. You cannot combine constraints on multiple fields using regular expressions.
+  maxResults: integer, The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)
+  orderBy: string, Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy="creationTimestamp desc"`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.
+  pageToken: string, Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.
+  returnPartialSuccess: boolean, Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false. For example, when partial success behavior is enabled, aggregatedList for a single zone scope either returns all resources in the zone or no resources, with an error code.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Response to list global VM extension policy resources.
+  "etag": "A String",
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.
+  "items": [ # A list of GlobalVmExtensionPolicy resources.
+    { # Message describing GlobalVmExtensionPolicy object.
+      "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+      "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
+      "extensionPolicies": { # Required. Map from extension (eg: "cloudops") to its policy configuration. The key is the name of the extension.
+        "a_key": { # Policy for a single extension.
+          "pinnedVersion": "A String", # Optional. The version pinning for the extension. If empty, the extension will be installed with the latest version released by the extension producer.
+          "stringConfig": "A String", # Optional. String configuration. Any string payload that the extension understands.
+        },
+      },
+      "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
+      "instanceSelectors": [ # Optional. Selector to target VMs for a policy. There is a logical "AND" between instance_selectors.
+        { # Selector to target VMs for a zone VM extension policy.
+          "labelSelector": { # A LabelSelector is applicable for a VM only if it matches all labels in the LabelSelector. # Optional. Labels within the LabelSelector are OR'd.
+            "inclusionLabels": { # Optional. Labels as key value pairs. A VM should contain all the pairs specified in this map to be selected; Labels within the LabelSelector are OR'ed.
+              "a_key": "A String",
+            },
+          },
+        },
+      ],
+      "kind": "compute#globalVmExtensionPolicy", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#globalVmExtensionPolicy for globalVmExtensionPolicies.
+      "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+      "priority": 42, # Optional. Used to resolve conflicts when multiple policies are active for the same extension. Defaults to 0. Larger the number, higher the priority. When the priority is the same, the policy with the newer create time has higher priority.
+      "rolloutOperation": { # Represents the rollout operation # Required. The rollout strategy and status.
+        "rolloutInput": { # Required. The rollout input which defines the rollout plan.
+          "conflictBehavior": "A String", # Optional. [Optional] Specifies the behavior of the Rollout if a conflict is detected in a project during a Rollout. It can be one of the following values: 1) empty : don't overwrite the local value if conflict happens. This is the default behavior. 2) "overwrite" : Overwrite the local value with the rollout value. The concept of "conflict" applies to: 1) Insert action. If the zonal policy already exists when Insert happens, it's a conflict. 2) Update action. If the zonal policy was updated out of band by a zonal API, it's a conflict.
+          "name": "A String", # Optional. The name of the rollout plan. Ex. projects//locations/global/rolloutPlans/.
+          "predefinedRolloutPlan": "A String", # Optional. Predefined rollout plan.
+          "retryUuid": "A String", # Optional. The UUID of the retry action. Only set it if this is a retry for an existing resource. This is for the user re-populate the resource without changes. An error will be returned if the retry_uuid is set but the resource get modified.
+        },
+        "rolloutStatus": { # [Output Only] The rollout status of the policy.
+          "currentRollouts": [ # [Output Only] The current rollouts for the latest version of the resource. There should be only one current rollout, but for scalability, we make it repeated.
+            {
+              "rollout": "A String", # [Output Only] The name of the rollout. Ex. projects//locations/global/rollouts/.
+              "rolloutPlan": "A String", # [Output Only] The name of the rollout plan. Ex. projects//locations/global/rolloutPlans/.
+              "state": "A String", # [Output Only] The overall state of the rollout.
+            },
+          ],
+          "previousRollout": { # [Output Only] The last completed rollout resource. This field will not be populated until the first rollout is completed.
+            "rollout": "A String", # [Output Only] The name of the rollout. Ex. projects//locations/global/rollouts/.
+            "rolloutPlan": "A String", # [Output Only] The name of the rollout plan. Ex. projects//locations/global/rolloutPlans/.
+            "state": "A String", # [Output Only] The overall state of the rollout.
+          },
+        },
+      },
+      "scopedResourceStatus": "A String", # [Output Only] The scoped resource status. It's only for tracking the purging status of the policy.
+      "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined fully-qualified URL for this resource.
+      "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource's resource id.
+      "updateTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Update timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+    },
+  ],
+  "kind": "compute#globalVmExtensionPolicyList", # Type of resource.
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # [Output Only] This token allows you to get the next page of results for list requests. If the number of results is larger than maxResults, use the nextPageToken as a value for the query parameter pageToken in the next list request. Subsequent list requests will have their own nextPageToken to continue paging through the results.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.
+  "unreachables": [ # [Output Only] Unreachable resources.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "warning": { # [Output Only] Informational warning message.
+    "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+    "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+      {
+        "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+        "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+  },
+}
+
+ +
+ list_next() +
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        
+
+ +
+ update(project, globalVmExtensionPolicy, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Updates a global VM extension policy.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  globalVmExtensionPolicy: string, Name of the global VM extension policy to update. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Message describing GlobalVmExtensionPolicy object.
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+  "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
+  "extensionPolicies": { # Required. Map from extension (eg: "cloudops") to its policy configuration. The key is the name of the extension.
+    "a_key": { # Policy for a single extension.
+      "pinnedVersion": "A String", # Optional. The version pinning for the extension. If empty, the extension will be installed with the latest version released by the extension producer.
+      "stringConfig": "A String", # Optional. String configuration. Any string payload that the extension understands.
+    },
+  },
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  "instanceSelectors": [ # Optional. Selector to target VMs for a policy. There is a logical "AND" between instance_selectors.
+    { # Selector to target VMs for a zone VM extension policy.
+      "labelSelector": { # A LabelSelector is applicable for a VM only if it matches all labels in the LabelSelector. # Optional. Labels within the LabelSelector are OR'd.
+        "inclusionLabels": { # Optional. Labels as key value pairs. A VM should contain all the pairs specified in this map to be selected; Labels within the LabelSelector are OR'ed.
+          "a_key": "A String",
+        },
+      },
+    },
+  ],
+  "kind": "compute#globalVmExtensionPolicy", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#globalVmExtensionPolicy for globalVmExtensionPolicies.
+  "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+  "priority": 42, # Optional. Used to resolve conflicts when multiple policies are active for the same extension. Defaults to 0. Larger the number, higher the priority. When the priority is the same, the policy with the newer create time has higher priority.
+  "rolloutOperation": { # Represents the rollout operation # Required. The rollout strategy and status.
+    "rolloutInput": { # Required. The rollout input which defines the rollout plan.
+      "conflictBehavior": "A String", # Optional. [Optional] Specifies the behavior of the Rollout if a conflict is detected in a project during a Rollout. It can be one of the following values: 1) empty : don't overwrite the local value if conflict happens. This is the default behavior. 2) "overwrite" : Overwrite the local value with the rollout value. The concept of "conflict" applies to: 1) Insert action. If the zonal policy already exists when Insert happens, it's a conflict. 2) Update action. If the zonal policy was updated out of band by a zonal API, it's a conflict.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. The name of the rollout plan. Ex. projects//locations/global/rolloutPlans/.
+      "predefinedRolloutPlan": "A String", # Optional. Predefined rollout plan.
+      "retryUuid": "A String", # Optional. The UUID of the retry action. Only set it if this is a retry for an existing resource. This is for the user re-populate the resource without changes. An error will be returned if the retry_uuid is set but the resource get modified.
+    },
+    "rolloutStatus": { # [Output Only] The rollout status of the policy.
+      "currentRollouts": [ # [Output Only] The current rollouts for the latest version of the resource. There should be only one current rollout, but for scalability, we make it repeated.
+        {
+          "rollout": "A String", # [Output Only] The name of the rollout. Ex. projects//locations/global/rollouts/.
+          "rolloutPlan": "A String", # [Output Only] The name of the rollout plan. Ex. projects//locations/global/rolloutPlans/.
+          "state": "A String", # [Output Only] The overall state of the rollout.
+        },
+      ],
+      "previousRollout": { # [Output Only] The last completed rollout resource. This field will not be populated until the first rollout is completed.
+        "rollout": "A String", # [Output Only] The name of the rollout. Ex. projects//locations/global/rollouts/.
+        "rolloutPlan": "A String", # [Output Only] The name of the rollout plan. Ex. projects//locations/global/rolloutPlans/.
+        "state": "A String", # [Output Only] The overall state of the rollout.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "scopedResourceStatus": "A String", # [Output Only] The scoped resource status. It's only for tracking the purging status of the policy.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined fully-qualified URL for this resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource's resource id.
+  "updateTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Update timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+}
+
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zoneOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources. Note that completed Operation resources have a limited retention period.
+  "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
+  "description": "A String", # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
+  "endTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "error": { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    "errors": [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
+      {
+        "code": "A String", # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
+        "errorDetails": [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
+          {
+            "errorInfo": { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the "pubsub.googleapis.com" API when it is not enabled: { "reason": "API_DISABLED" "domain": "googleapis.com" "metadata": { "resource": "projects/123", "service": "pubsub.googleapis.com" } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { "reason": "STOCKOUT" "domain": "spanner.googleapis.com", "metadata": { "availableRegions": "us-central1,us-east2" } }
+              "domain": "A String", # The logical grouping to which the "reason" belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: "pubsub.googleapis.com". If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is "googleapis.com".
+              "metadatas": { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys must match a regular expression of `a-z+` but should ideally be lowerCamelCase. Also, they must be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than `{"instanceLimit": "100/request"}`, should be returned as, `{"instanceLimitPerRequest": "100"}`, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "reason": "A String", # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
+            },
+            "help": { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn't enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
+              "links": [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
+                { # Describes a URL link.
+                  "description": "A String", # Describes what the link offers.
+                  "url": "A String", # The URL of the link.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            "localizedMessage": { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
+              "locale": "A String", # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: "en-US", "fr-CH", "es-MX"
+              "message": "A String", # The localized error message in the above locale.
+            },
+            "quotaInfo": { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
+              "dimensions": { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "futureLimit": 3.14, # Future quota limit being rolled out. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limit": 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limitName": "A String", # The name of the quota limit.
+              "metricName": "A String", # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
+              "rolloutStatus": "A String", # Rollout status of the future quota limit.
+            },
+          },
+        ],
+        "location": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
+        "message": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "httpErrorMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
+  "httpErrorStatusCode": 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  "insertTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "instancesBulkInsertOperationMetadata": {
+    "perLocationStatus": { # Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "createdVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs successfully created so far.
+        "deletedVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that got deleted during rollback.
+        "failedToCreateVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that started creating but encountered an error.
+        "status": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation status of BulkInsert operation - information if the flow is rolling forward or rolling back.
+        "targetVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs originally planned to be created.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "kind": "compute#operation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
+  "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
+  "operationGroupId": "A String", # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
+  "operationType": "A String", # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
+  "progress": 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
+  "setCommonInstanceMetadataOperationMetadata": { # [Output Only] If the operation is for projects.setCommonInstanceMetadata, this field will contain information on all underlying zonal actions and their state.
+    "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The client operation id.
+    "perLocationOperations": { # [Output Only] Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # [Output Only] If state is `ABANDONED` or `FAILED`, this field is populated.
+          "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+          "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+            {
+              "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+            },
+          ],
+          "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+        },
+        "state": "A String", # [Output Only] Status of the action, which can be one of the following: `PROPAGATING`, `PROPAGATED`, `ABANDONED`, `FAILED`, or `DONE`.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "startTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "status": "A String", # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
+  "statusMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
+  "targetId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
+  "targetLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the disk that the snapshot was created from.
+  "user": "A String", # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com` or `alice_smith_identifier (global/workforcePools/example-com-us-employees)`.
+  "warnings": [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    {
+      "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+      "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+        {
+          "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+          "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+    },
+  ],
+  "zone": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
+}
+
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.haControllers.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.haControllers.html index a8993913dba..972c62eaed0 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.haControllers.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.haControllers.html @@ -380,6 +380,9 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # HaController handles failover for a VM Instance. + "backendServices": [ # Advanced configuration option. If specified, these Backend Services need to be pre-created and configured as managed. + "A String", + ], "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format. "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource. "failoverInitiation": "A String", # Indicates how failover should be initiated. @@ -387,12 +390,70 @@

Method Details

"instanceName": "A String", # Name of the instance that HaController is in charge of. If not specified the HaController's resource name will be used instead. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash. "kind": "compute#HaController", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#haController for HaControllers. "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash. + "networkingAutoConfiguration": { # Basic networking configuration. Required backend services and forwarding rules will be automatically created with default parameters. # Basic networking configuration. Required backend services and forwarding rules will be automatically created with default parameters. + "internal": { # Internal networking configuration # Internal networking configuration + "ipAddress": "A String", # Optional. IP addresses will be automatically allocated according to StackType if not provided. + "ipv6Address": "A String", + "stackType": "A String", # Determine which IP addresses to automatically create. Field and option naming consistent with NetworkInterface configuration on Instances. + }, + }, "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the resource resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "secondaryZoneCapacity": "A String", # Indicates the capacity guarantees in the secondary zone. "selfLink": "A String", # [Output only] Server-defined URL for the resource. "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id. "status": { # Contains information about current status of the HaController. # [Output Only] Status information for the HaController resource. "failoverProgress": { # Contains information about the current failover operation. # [Output Only] Contains the details of the ongoing failover. This message is not displayed if failover is NOT in progress. + "failoverCompleteTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Timestamp of the failover completion. Filled only if the failover is completed, in lastFailoverInfo. + "failoverTrigger": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates if failover has been triggered automatically or manually. + "failoverTriggerTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Timestamp of the last failover trigger. + "lastFailoverAttempt": { # [Output Only] Contains details of the last failed failover. This field is filled only if the current failover is failing + "errors": { # [Output Only] Encountered errors during the last attempt to process failover. + "errors": [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation. + { + "code": "A String", # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error. + "errorDetails": [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED. + { + "errorInfo": { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the "pubsub.googleapis.com" API when it is not enabled: { "reason": "API_DISABLED" "domain": "googleapis.com" "metadata": { "resource": "projects/123", "service": "pubsub.googleapis.com" } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { "reason": "STOCKOUT" "domain": "spanner.googleapis.com", "metadata": { "availableRegions": "us-central1,us-east2" } } + "domain": "A String", # The logical grouping to which the "reason" belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: "pubsub.googleapis.com". If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is "googleapis.com". + "metadatas": { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys must match a regular expression of `a-z+` but should ideally be lowerCamelCase. Also, they must be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than `{"instanceLimit": "100/request"}`, should be returned as, `{"instanceLimitPerRequest": "100"}`, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "reason": "A String", # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE. + }, + "help": { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn't enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit. + "links": [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error. + { # Describes a URL link. + "description": "A String", # Describes what the link offers. + "url": "A String", # The URL of the link. + }, + ], + }, + "localizedMessage": { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error. + "locale": "A String", # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: "en-US", "fr-CH", "es-MX" + "message": "A String", # The localized error message in the above locale. + }, + "quotaInfo": { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota. + "dimensions": { # The map holding related quota dimensions. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "futureLimit": 3.14, # Future quota limit being rolled out. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric. + "limit": 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric. + "limitName": "A String", # The name of the quota limit. + "metricName": "A String", # The Compute Engine quota metric name. + "rolloutStatus": "A String", # Rollout status of the future quota limit. + }, + }, + ], + "location": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional. + "message": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message. + }, + ], + }, + "timestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Show timestamp only if there is an error. RFC3339 text format. + }, + }, + "lastFailoverInfo": { # Contains information about the current failover operation. # [Output Only] Contains the details of the last successful failover. + "failoverCompleteTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Timestamp of the failover completion. Filled only if the failover is completed, in lastFailoverInfo. "failoverTrigger": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates if failover has been triggered automatically or manually. "failoverTriggerTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Timestamp of the last failover trigger. "lastFailoverAttempt": { # [Output Only] Contains details of the last failed failover. This field is filled only if the current failover is failing @@ -531,6 +592,9 @@

Method Details

The object takes the form of: { # HaController handles failover for a VM Instance. + "backendServices": [ # Advanced configuration option. If specified, these Backend Services need to be pre-created and configured as managed. + "A String", + ], "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format. "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource. "failoverInitiation": "A String", # Indicates how failover should be initiated. @@ -538,12 +602,70 @@

Method Details

"instanceName": "A String", # Name of the instance that HaController is in charge of. If not specified the HaController's resource name will be used instead. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash. "kind": "compute#HaController", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#haController for HaControllers. "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash. + "networkingAutoConfiguration": { # Basic networking configuration. Required backend services and forwarding rules will be automatically created with default parameters. # Basic networking configuration. Required backend services and forwarding rules will be automatically created with default parameters. + "internal": { # Internal networking configuration # Internal networking configuration + "ipAddress": "A String", # Optional. IP addresses will be automatically allocated according to StackType if not provided. + "ipv6Address": "A String", + "stackType": "A String", # Determine which IP addresses to automatically create. Field and option naming consistent with NetworkInterface configuration on Instances. + }, + }, "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the resource resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "secondaryZoneCapacity": "A String", # Indicates the capacity guarantees in the secondary zone. "selfLink": "A String", # [Output only] Server-defined URL for the resource. "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id. "status": { # Contains information about current status of the HaController. # [Output Only] Status information for the HaController resource. "failoverProgress": { # Contains information about the current failover operation. # [Output Only] Contains the details of the ongoing failover. This message is not displayed if failover is NOT in progress. + "failoverCompleteTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Timestamp of the failover completion. Filled only if the failover is completed, in lastFailoverInfo. + "failoverTrigger": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates if failover has been triggered automatically or manually. + "failoverTriggerTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Timestamp of the last failover trigger. + "lastFailoverAttempt": { # [Output Only] Contains details of the last failed failover. This field is filled only if the current failover is failing + "errors": { # [Output Only] Encountered errors during the last attempt to process failover. + "errors": [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation. + { + "code": "A String", # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error. + "errorDetails": [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED. + { + "errorInfo": { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the "pubsub.googleapis.com" API when it is not enabled: { "reason": "API_DISABLED" "domain": "googleapis.com" "metadata": { "resource": "projects/123", "service": "pubsub.googleapis.com" } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { "reason": "STOCKOUT" "domain": "spanner.googleapis.com", "metadata": { "availableRegions": "us-central1,us-east2" } } + "domain": "A String", # The logical grouping to which the "reason" belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: "pubsub.googleapis.com". If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is "googleapis.com". + "metadatas": { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys must match a regular expression of `a-z+` but should ideally be lowerCamelCase. Also, they must be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than `{"instanceLimit": "100/request"}`, should be returned as, `{"instanceLimitPerRequest": "100"}`, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "reason": "A String", # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE. + }, + "help": { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn't enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit. + "links": [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error. + { # Describes a URL link. + "description": "A String", # Describes what the link offers. + "url": "A String", # The URL of the link. + }, + ], + }, + "localizedMessage": { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error. + "locale": "A String", # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: "en-US", "fr-CH", "es-MX" + "message": "A String", # The localized error message in the above locale. + }, + "quotaInfo": { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota. + "dimensions": { # The map holding related quota dimensions. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "futureLimit": 3.14, # Future quota limit being rolled out. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric. + "limit": 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric. + "limitName": "A String", # The name of the quota limit. + "metricName": "A String", # The Compute Engine quota metric name. + "rolloutStatus": "A String", # Rollout status of the future quota limit. + }, + }, + ], + "location": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional. + "message": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message. + }, + ], + }, + "timestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Show timestamp only if there is an error. RFC3339 text format. + }, + }, + "lastFailoverInfo": { # Contains information about the current failover operation. # [Output Only] Contains the details of the last successful failover. + "failoverCompleteTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Timestamp of the failover completion. Filled only if the failover is completed, in lastFailoverInfo. "failoverTrigger": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates if failover has been triggered automatically or manually. "failoverTriggerTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Timestamp of the last failover trigger. "lastFailoverAttempt": { # [Output Only] Contains details of the last failed failover. This field is filled only if the current failover is failing @@ -813,6 +935,9 @@

Method Details

"id": "A String", # Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server. "items": [ # A list of HaControllers in the specified project and region. { # HaController handles failover for a VM Instance. + "backendServices": [ # Advanced configuration option. If specified, these Backend Services need to be pre-created and configured as managed. + "A String", + ], "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format. "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource. "failoverInitiation": "A String", # Indicates how failover should be initiated. @@ -820,12 +945,70 @@

Method Details

"instanceName": "A String", # Name of the instance that HaController is in charge of. If not specified the HaController's resource name will be used instead. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash. "kind": "compute#HaController", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#haController for HaControllers. "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash. + "networkingAutoConfiguration": { # Basic networking configuration. Required backend services and forwarding rules will be automatically created with default parameters. # Basic networking configuration. Required backend services and forwarding rules will be automatically created with default parameters. + "internal": { # Internal networking configuration # Internal networking configuration + "ipAddress": "A String", # Optional. IP addresses will be automatically allocated according to StackType if not provided. + "ipv6Address": "A String", + "stackType": "A String", # Determine which IP addresses to automatically create. Field and option naming consistent with NetworkInterface configuration on Instances. + }, + }, "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the resource resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "secondaryZoneCapacity": "A String", # Indicates the capacity guarantees in the secondary zone. "selfLink": "A String", # [Output only] Server-defined URL for the resource. "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id. "status": { # Contains information about current status of the HaController. # [Output Only] Status information for the HaController resource. "failoverProgress": { # Contains information about the current failover operation. # [Output Only] Contains the details of the ongoing failover. This message is not displayed if failover is NOT in progress. + "failoverCompleteTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Timestamp of the failover completion. Filled only if the failover is completed, in lastFailoverInfo. + "failoverTrigger": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates if failover has been triggered automatically or manually. + "failoverTriggerTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Timestamp of the last failover trigger. + "lastFailoverAttempt": { # [Output Only] Contains details of the last failed failover. This field is filled only if the current failover is failing + "errors": { # [Output Only] Encountered errors during the last attempt to process failover. + "errors": [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation. + { + "code": "A String", # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error. + "errorDetails": [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED. + { + "errorInfo": { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the "pubsub.googleapis.com" API when it is not enabled: { "reason": "API_DISABLED" "domain": "googleapis.com" "metadata": { "resource": "projects/123", "service": "pubsub.googleapis.com" } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { "reason": "STOCKOUT" "domain": "spanner.googleapis.com", "metadata": { "availableRegions": "us-central1,us-east2" } } + "domain": "A String", # The logical grouping to which the "reason" belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: "pubsub.googleapis.com". If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is "googleapis.com". + "metadatas": { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys must match a regular expression of `a-z+` but should ideally be lowerCamelCase. Also, they must be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than `{"instanceLimit": "100/request"}`, should be returned as, `{"instanceLimitPerRequest": "100"}`, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "reason": "A String", # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE. + }, + "help": { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn't enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit. + "links": [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error. + { # Describes a URL link. + "description": "A String", # Describes what the link offers. + "url": "A String", # The URL of the link. + }, + ], + }, + "localizedMessage": { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error. + "locale": "A String", # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: "en-US", "fr-CH", "es-MX" + "message": "A String", # The localized error message in the above locale. + }, + "quotaInfo": { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota. + "dimensions": { # The map holding related quota dimensions. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "futureLimit": 3.14, # Future quota limit being rolled out. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric. + "limit": 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric. + "limitName": "A String", # The name of the quota limit. + "metricName": "A String", # The Compute Engine quota metric name. + "rolloutStatus": "A String", # Rollout status of the future quota limit. + }, + }, + ], + "location": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional. + "message": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message. + }, + ], + }, + "timestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Show timestamp only if there is an error. RFC3339 text format. + }, + }, + "lastFailoverInfo": { # Contains information about the current failover operation. # [Output Only] Contains the details of the last successful failover. + "failoverCompleteTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Timestamp of the failover completion. Filled only if the failover is completed, in lastFailoverInfo. "failoverTrigger": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates if failover has been triggered automatically or manually. "failoverTriggerTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Timestamp of the last failover trigger. "lastFailoverAttempt": { # [Output Only] Contains details of the last failed failover. This field is filled only if the current failover is failing @@ -996,6 +1179,9 @@

Method Details

The object takes the form of: { # HaController handles failover for a VM Instance. + "backendServices": [ # Advanced configuration option. If specified, these Backend Services need to be pre-created and configured as managed. + "A String", + ], "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format. "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource. "failoverInitiation": "A String", # Indicates how failover should be initiated. @@ -1003,12 +1189,70 @@

Method Details

"instanceName": "A String", # Name of the instance that HaController is in charge of. If not specified the HaController's resource name will be used instead. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash. "kind": "compute#HaController", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#haController for HaControllers. "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash. + "networkingAutoConfiguration": { # Basic networking configuration. Required backend services and forwarding rules will be automatically created with default parameters. # Basic networking configuration. Required backend services and forwarding rules will be automatically created with default parameters. + "internal": { # Internal networking configuration # Internal networking configuration + "ipAddress": "A String", # Optional. IP addresses will be automatically allocated according to StackType if not provided. + "ipv6Address": "A String", + "stackType": "A String", # Determine which IP addresses to automatically create. Field and option naming consistent with NetworkInterface configuration on Instances. + }, + }, "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the resource resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "secondaryZoneCapacity": "A String", # Indicates the capacity guarantees in the secondary zone. "selfLink": "A String", # [Output only] Server-defined URL for the resource. "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id. "status": { # Contains information about current status of the HaController. # [Output Only] Status information for the HaController resource. "failoverProgress": { # Contains information about the current failover operation. # [Output Only] Contains the details of the ongoing failover. This message is not displayed if failover is NOT in progress. + "failoverCompleteTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Timestamp of the failover completion. Filled only if the failover is completed, in lastFailoverInfo. + "failoverTrigger": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates if failover has been triggered automatically or manually. + "failoverTriggerTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Timestamp of the last failover trigger. + "lastFailoverAttempt": { # [Output Only] Contains details of the last failed failover. This field is filled only if the current failover is failing + "errors": { # [Output Only] Encountered errors during the last attempt to process failover. + "errors": [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation. + { + "code": "A String", # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error. + "errorDetails": [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED. + { + "errorInfo": { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the "pubsub.googleapis.com" API when it is not enabled: { "reason": "API_DISABLED" "domain": "googleapis.com" "metadata": { "resource": "projects/123", "service": "pubsub.googleapis.com" } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { "reason": "STOCKOUT" "domain": "spanner.googleapis.com", "metadata": { "availableRegions": "us-central1,us-east2" } } + "domain": "A String", # The logical grouping to which the "reason" belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: "pubsub.googleapis.com". If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is "googleapis.com". + "metadatas": { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys must match a regular expression of `a-z+` but should ideally be lowerCamelCase. Also, they must be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than `{"instanceLimit": "100/request"}`, should be returned as, `{"instanceLimitPerRequest": "100"}`, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "reason": "A String", # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE. + }, + "help": { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn't enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit. + "links": [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error. + { # Describes a URL link. + "description": "A String", # Describes what the link offers. + "url": "A String", # The URL of the link. + }, + ], + }, + "localizedMessage": { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error. + "locale": "A String", # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: "en-US", "fr-CH", "es-MX" + "message": "A String", # The localized error message in the above locale. + }, + "quotaInfo": { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota. + "dimensions": { # The map holding related quota dimensions. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "futureLimit": 3.14, # Future quota limit being rolled out. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric. + "limit": 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric. + "limitName": "A String", # The name of the quota limit. + "metricName": "A String", # The Compute Engine quota metric name. + "rolloutStatus": "A String", # Rollout status of the future quota limit. + }, + }, + ], + "location": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional. + "message": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message. + }, + ], + }, + "timestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Show timestamp only if there is an error. RFC3339 text format. + }, + }, + "lastFailoverInfo": { # Contains information about the current failover operation. # [Output Only] Contains the details of the last successful failover. + "failoverCompleteTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Timestamp of the failover completion. Filled only if the failover is completed, in lastFailoverInfo. "failoverTrigger": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates if failover has been triggered automatically or manually. "failoverTriggerTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Timestamp of the last failover trigger. "lastFailoverAttempt": { # [Output Only] Contains details of the last failed failover. This field is filled only if the current failover is failing diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.html index 52e9cae2509..eea162a1aeb 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.html @@ -154,6 +154,11 @@

Instance Methods

Returns the globalAddresses Resource.

+

+ globalFolderOperations() +

+

Returns the globalFolderOperations Resource.

+

globalForwardingRules()

@@ -179,6 +184,11 @@

Instance Methods

Returns the globalPublicDelegatedPrefixes Resource.

+

+ globalVmExtensionPolicies() +

+

Returns the globalVmExtensionPolicies Resource.

+

haControllers()

@@ -494,6 +504,11 @@

Instance Methods

Returns the regionNetworkFirewallPolicies Resource.

+

+ regionNetworkPolicies() +

+

Returns the regionNetworkPolicies Resource.

+

regionNotificationEndpoints()

diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.instanceGroupManagers.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.instanceGroupManagers.html index 45cbe35e29d..d2ade903c63 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.instanceGroupManagers.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.instanceGroupManagers.html @@ -104,6 +104,9 @@

Instance Methods

get(project, zone, instanceGroupManager, x__xgafv=None)

Returns all of the details about the specified managed instance group.

+

+ getAvailableAcceleratorTopologies(project, zone, resourceId, x__xgafv=None)

+

Returns information about available accelerator topologies for a given MIG.

insert(project, zone, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

Creates a managed instance group using the information that you specify in the request. After the group is created, instances in the group are created using the specified instance template. This operation is marked as DONE when the group is created even if the instances in the group have not yet been created. You must separately verify the status of the individual instances with the listmanagedinstances method. A managed instance group can have up to 1000 VM instances per group. Please contact Cloud Support if you need an increase in this limit.

@@ -1605,6 +1608,32 @@

Method Details

}
+
+ getAvailableAcceleratorTopologies(project, zone, resourceId, x__xgafv=None) +
Returns information about available accelerator topologies for a given MIG.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Required. Project ID for this request. (required)
+  zone: string, Required. The name of the zone where the managed instance group is located. Name should conform to RFC1035. (required)
+  resourceId: string, Required. The name of the managed instance group. It should conform to RFC1035. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    {
+  "acceleratorTopologiesInfo": { # The accelerator topology information returned per id of the topology location.
+    "a_key": {
+      "acceleratorTopology": "A String", # Topology in the format of: "16x16", "4x4x4", etc.
+      "acceleratorTopologyHealth": "A String",
+    },
+  },
+}
+
+
insert(project, zone, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)
Creates a managed instance group using the information that you specify in the request. After the group is created, instances in the group are created using the specified instance template. This operation is marked as DONE when the group is created even if the instances in the group have not yet been created. You must separately verify the status of the individual instances with the listmanagedinstances method. A managed instance group can have up to 1000 VM instances per group. Please contact Cloud Support if you need an increase in this limit.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.instanceTemplates.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.instanceTemplates.html
index a68b2f83729..923213e3d9f 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.instanceTemplates.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.instanceTemplates.html
@@ -435,6 +435,10 @@ 

Method Details

"discardLocalSsd": True or False, # If true, the contents of any attached Local SSD disks will be discarded else, the Local SSD data will be preserved when the instance is stopped at the end of the run duration/termination time. }, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. + "preemptionNoticeDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the Metadata Service preemption notice duration before the GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off signal is triggered for Spot VMs only. If not specified, there will be no wait before the G2 Soft Off signal is triggered. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. "shutdownTimeout": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # DEPRECATED: please use skipGuestOsShutdown. Timeout between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off during shutdown operation of VM. For Standard VMs values between 0s and 120s are allowed. For Spot and Preemptible VMs supported values are between 0s and 30s. If no value is specified for shutdownDuration, default values are 90s for Standard VMs and 30s for Spot/Preemptible VMs. "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. @@ -988,6 +992,10 @@

Method Details

"discardLocalSsd": True or False, # If true, the contents of any attached Local SSD disks will be discarded else, the Local SSD data will be preserved when the instance is stopped at the end of the run duration/termination time. }, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. + "preemptionNoticeDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the Metadata Service preemption notice duration before the GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off signal is triggered for Spot VMs only. If not specified, there will be no wait before the G2 Soft Off signal is triggered. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. "shutdownTimeout": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # DEPRECATED: please use skipGuestOsShutdown. Timeout between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off during shutdown operation of VM. For Standard VMs values between 0s and 120s are allowed. For Spot and Preemptible VMs supported values are between 0s and 30s. If no value is specified for shutdownDuration, default values are 90s for Standard VMs and 30s for Spot/Preemptible VMs. "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. @@ -1408,6 +1416,10 @@

Method Details

"discardLocalSsd": True or False, # If true, the contents of any attached Local SSD disks will be discarded else, the Local SSD data will be preserved when the instance is stopped at the end of the run duration/termination time. }, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. + "preemptionNoticeDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the Metadata Service preemption notice duration before the GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off signal is triggered for Spot VMs only. If not specified, there will be no wait before the G2 Soft Off signal is triggered. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. "shutdownTimeout": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # DEPRECATED: please use skipGuestOsShutdown. Timeout between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off during shutdown operation of VM. For Standard VMs values between 0s and 120s are allowed. For Spot and Preemptible VMs supported values are between 0s and 30s. If no value is specified for shutdownDuration, default values are 90s for Standard VMs and 30s for Spot/Preemptible VMs. "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. @@ -1914,6 +1926,10 @@

Method Details

"discardLocalSsd": True or False, # If true, the contents of any attached Local SSD disks will be discarded else, the Local SSD data will be preserved when the instance is stopped at the end of the run duration/termination time. }, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. + "preemptionNoticeDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the Metadata Service preemption notice duration before the GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off signal is triggered for Spot VMs only. If not specified, there will be no wait before the G2 Soft Off signal is triggered. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. "shutdownTimeout": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # DEPRECATED: please use skipGuestOsShutdown. Timeout between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off during shutdown operation of VM. For Standard VMs values between 0s and 120s are allowed. For Spot and Preemptible VMs supported values are between 0s and 30s. If no value is specified for shutdownDuration, default values are 90s for Standard VMs and 30s for Spot/Preemptible VMs. "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.instances.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.instances.html index f70ba726aad..5e06bda76c9 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.instances.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.instances.html @@ -1083,6 +1083,11 @@

Method Details

"host": "A String", # [Output Only] The ID of the host on which the running instance is located. Instances on the same host experience the lowest possible network latency. "subblock": "A String", # [Output Only] The ID of the sub-block in which the running instance is located. Instances in the same sub-block experience lower network latency than instances in the same block. }, + "reservationConsumptionInfo": { # [Output Only] Reservation information that the instance is consuming from. + "consumedReservation": "A String", # The full resource name of the reservation that this instance is consuming from. + "consumedReservationBlock": "A String", # The full resource name of the reservation block that this instance is consuming from. + "consumedReservationSubBlock": "A String", # The full resource name of the reservation sub-block that this instance is consuming from. + }, "scheduling": { "availabilityDomain": 42, # Specifies the availability domain to place the instance in. The value must be a number between 1 and the number of availability domains specified in the spread placement policy attached to the instance. "terminationTimestamp": "A String", # Time in future when the instance will be terminated in RFC3339 text format. @@ -1166,6 +1171,10 @@

Method Details

"discardLocalSsd": True or False, # If true, the contents of any attached Local SSD disks will be discarded else, the Local SSD data will be preserved when the instance is stopped at the end of the run duration/termination time. }, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. + "preemptionNoticeDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the Metadata Service preemption notice duration before the GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off signal is triggered for Spot VMs only. If not specified, there will be no wait before the G2 Soft Off signal is triggered. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. "shutdownTimeout": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # DEPRECATED: please use skipGuestOsShutdown. Timeout between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off during shutdown operation of VM. For Standard VMs values between 0s and 120s are allowed. For Spot and Preemptible VMs supported values are between 0s and 30s. If no value is specified for shutdownDuration, default values are 90s for Standard VMs and 30s for Spot/Preemptible VMs. "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. @@ -1968,6 +1977,10 @@

Method Details

"discardLocalSsd": True or False, # If true, the contents of any attached Local SSD disks will be discarded else, the Local SSD data will be preserved when the instance is stopped at the end of the run duration/termination time. }, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. + "preemptionNoticeDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the Metadata Service preemption notice duration before the GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off signal is triggered for Spot VMs only. If not specified, there will be no wait before the G2 Soft Off signal is triggered. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. "shutdownTimeout": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # DEPRECATED: please use skipGuestOsShutdown. Timeout between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off during shutdown operation of VM. For Standard VMs values between 0s and 120s are allowed. For Spot and Preemptible VMs supported values are between 0s and 30s. If no value is specified for shutdownDuration, default values are 90s for Standard VMs and 30s for Spot/Preemptible VMs. "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. @@ -3018,6 +3031,11 @@

Method Details

"host": "A String", # [Output Only] The ID of the host on which the running instance is located. Instances on the same host experience the lowest possible network latency. "subblock": "A String", # [Output Only] The ID of the sub-block in which the running instance is located. Instances in the same sub-block experience lower network latency than instances in the same block. }, + "reservationConsumptionInfo": { # [Output Only] Reservation information that the instance is consuming from. + "consumedReservation": "A String", # The full resource name of the reservation that this instance is consuming from. + "consumedReservationBlock": "A String", # The full resource name of the reservation block that this instance is consuming from. + "consumedReservationSubBlock": "A String", # The full resource name of the reservation sub-block that this instance is consuming from. + }, "scheduling": { "availabilityDomain": 42, # Specifies the availability domain to place the instance in. The value must be a number between 1 and the number of availability domains specified in the spread placement policy attached to the instance. "terminationTimestamp": "A String", # Time in future when the instance will be terminated in RFC3339 text format. @@ -3101,6 +3119,10 @@

Method Details

"discardLocalSsd": True or False, # If true, the contents of any attached Local SSD disks will be discarded else, the Local SSD data will be preserved when the instance is stopped at the end of the run duration/termination time. }, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. + "preemptionNoticeDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the Metadata Service preemption notice duration before the GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off signal is triggered for Spot VMs only. If not specified, there will be no wait before the G2 Soft Off signal is triggered. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. "shutdownTimeout": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # DEPRECATED: please use skipGuestOsShutdown. Timeout between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off during shutdown operation of VM. For Standard VMs values between 0s and 120s are allowed. For Spot and Preemptible VMs supported values are between 0s and 30s. If no value is specified for shutdownDuration, default values are 90s for Standard VMs and 30s for Spot/Preemptible VMs. "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. @@ -3482,7 +3504,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -3601,7 +3623,7 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # Type of the redirect action. Possible values are: - GOOGLE_RECAPTCHA: redirect to reCAPTCHA for manual challenge assessment. - EXTERNAL_302: redirect to a different URL via a 302 response. }, "redirectTarget": "A String", # This must be specified for redirect actions. Cannot be specified for any other actions. - "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum managed protection tier required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. + "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum Cloud Armor subscription required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. "ruleNumber": "A String", # Identifier for the rule. This is only unique within the given security policy. This can only be set during rule creation, if rule number is not specified it will be generated by the server. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall security policy rule. "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. This field may only be specified when versioned_expr is set to FIREWALL. @@ -4185,6 +4207,11 @@

Method Details

"host": "A String", # [Output Only] The ID of the host on which the running instance is located. Instances on the same host experience the lowest possible network latency. "subblock": "A String", # [Output Only] The ID of the sub-block in which the running instance is located. Instances in the same sub-block experience lower network latency than instances in the same block. }, + "reservationConsumptionInfo": { # [Output Only] Reservation information that the instance is consuming from. + "consumedReservation": "A String", # The full resource name of the reservation that this instance is consuming from. + "consumedReservationBlock": "A String", # The full resource name of the reservation block that this instance is consuming from. + "consumedReservationSubBlock": "A String", # The full resource name of the reservation sub-block that this instance is consuming from. + }, "scheduling": { "availabilityDomain": 42, # Specifies the availability domain to place the instance in. The value must be a number between 1 and the number of availability domains specified in the spread placement policy attached to the instance. "terminationTimestamp": "A String", # Time in future when the instance will be terminated in RFC3339 text format. @@ -4268,6 +4295,10 @@

Method Details

"discardLocalSsd": True or False, # If true, the contents of any attached Local SSD disks will be discarded else, the Local SSD data will be preserved when the instance is stopped at the end of the run duration/termination time. }, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. + "preemptionNoticeDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the Metadata Service preemption notice duration before the GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off signal is triggered for Spot VMs only. If not specified, there will be no wait before the G2 Soft Off signal is triggered. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. "shutdownTimeout": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # DEPRECATED: please use skipGuestOsShutdown. Timeout between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off during shutdown operation of VM. For Standard VMs values between 0s and 120s are allowed. For Spot and Preemptible VMs supported values are between 0s and 30s. If no value is specified for shutdownDuration, default values are 90s for Standard VMs and 30s for Spot/Preemptible VMs. "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. @@ -4827,6 +4858,11 @@

Method Details

"host": "A String", # [Output Only] The ID of the host on which the running instance is located. Instances on the same host experience the lowest possible network latency. "subblock": "A String", # [Output Only] The ID of the sub-block in which the running instance is located. Instances in the same sub-block experience lower network latency than instances in the same block. }, + "reservationConsumptionInfo": { # [Output Only] Reservation information that the instance is consuming from. + "consumedReservation": "A String", # The full resource name of the reservation that this instance is consuming from. + "consumedReservationBlock": "A String", # The full resource name of the reservation block that this instance is consuming from. + "consumedReservationSubBlock": "A String", # The full resource name of the reservation sub-block that this instance is consuming from. + }, "scheduling": { "availabilityDomain": 42, # Specifies the availability domain to place the instance in. The value must be a number between 1 and the number of availability domains specified in the spread placement policy attached to the instance. "terminationTimestamp": "A String", # Time in future when the instance will be terminated in RFC3339 text format. @@ -4910,6 +4946,10 @@

Method Details

"discardLocalSsd": True or False, # If true, the contents of any attached Local SSD disks will be discarded else, the Local SSD data will be preserved when the instance is stopped at the end of the run duration/termination time. }, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. + "preemptionNoticeDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the Metadata Service preemption notice duration before the GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off signal is triggered for Spot VMs only. If not specified, there will be no wait before the G2 Soft Off signal is triggered. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. "shutdownTimeout": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # DEPRECATED: please use skipGuestOsShutdown. Timeout between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off during shutdown operation of VM. For Standard VMs values between 0s and 120s are allowed. For Spot and Preemptible VMs supported values are between 0s and 30s. If no value is specified for shutdownDuration, default values are 90s for Standard VMs and 30s for Spot/Preemptible VMs. "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. @@ -7139,6 +7179,10 @@

Method Details

"discardLocalSsd": True or False, # If true, the contents of any attached Local SSD disks will be discarded else, the Local SSD data will be preserved when the instance is stopped at the end of the run duration/termination time. }, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. + "preemptionNoticeDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the Metadata Service preemption notice duration before the GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off signal is triggered for Spot VMs only. If not specified, there will be no wait before the G2 Soft Off signal is triggered. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. "shutdownTimeout": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # DEPRECATED: please use skipGuestOsShutdown. Timeout between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off during shutdown operation of VM. For Standard VMs values between 0s and 120s are allowed. For Spot and Preemptible VMs supported values are between 0s and 30s. If no value is specified for shutdownDuration, default values are 90s for Standard VMs and 30s for Spot/Preemptible VMs. "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. @@ -8971,6 +9015,11 @@

Method Details

"host": "A String", # [Output Only] The ID of the host on which the running instance is located. Instances on the same host experience the lowest possible network latency. "subblock": "A String", # [Output Only] The ID of the sub-block in which the running instance is located. Instances in the same sub-block experience lower network latency than instances in the same block. }, + "reservationConsumptionInfo": { # [Output Only] Reservation information that the instance is consuming from. + "consumedReservation": "A String", # The full resource name of the reservation that this instance is consuming from. + "consumedReservationBlock": "A String", # The full resource name of the reservation block that this instance is consuming from. + "consumedReservationSubBlock": "A String", # The full resource name of the reservation sub-block that this instance is consuming from. + }, "scheduling": { "availabilityDomain": 42, # Specifies the availability domain to place the instance in. The value must be a number between 1 and the number of availability domains specified in the spread placement policy attached to the instance. "terminationTimestamp": "A String", # Time in future when the instance will be terminated in RFC3339 text format. @@ -9054,6 +9103,10 @@

Method Details

"discardLocalSsd": True or False, # If true, the contents of any attached Local SSD disks will be discarded else, the Local SSD data will be preserved when the instance is stopped at the end of the run duration/termination time. }, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. + "preemptionNoticeDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the Metadata Service preemption notice duration before the GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off signal is triggered for Spot VMs only. If not specified, there will be no wait before the G2 Soft Off signal is triggered. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. "shutdownTimeout": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # DEPRECATED: please use skipGuestOsShutdown. Timeout between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off during shutdown operation of VM. For Standard VMs values between 0s and 120s are allowed. For Spot and Preemptible VMs supported values are between 0s and 30s. If no value is specified for shutdownDuration, default values are 90s for Standard VMs and 30s for Spot/Preemptible VMs. "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.interconnectAttachmentGroups.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.interconnectAttachmentGroups.html index a350a276af3..7480ab8fa60 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.interconnectAttachmentGroups.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.interconnectAttachmentGroups.html @@ -654,7 +654,7 @@

Method Details

"adminEnabled": True or False, # Whether this Attachment is enabled. This becomes false when the customer drains their Attachment. "attachment": "A String", # The URL of the Attachment being described. "isActive": "A String", # Whether this Attachment is participating in the redundant configuration. This will be ACTIVE if and only if the status below is CONNECTION_UP. Any INACTIVE Attachments are excluded from the analysis that generates operational.availabilitySLA. - "status": "A String", # Whether this Attachment is active, and if so, whether BGP is up. This is based on the statuses available in the Pantheon UI here: http://google3/java/com/google/cloud/boq/clientapi/gce/hybrid/api/interconnect_models.proto + "status": "A String", # Whether this Attachment is active, and if so, whether BGP is up. }, ], "configured": { # [Output Only] The redundancy this group is configured to support. The way a user queries what SLA their Attachment gets is by looking at this field of the Attachment's AttachmentGroup. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.interconnectRemoteLocations.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.interconnectRemoteLocations.html index abbbd12887c..7af898f624d 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.interconnectRemoteLocations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.interconnectRemoteLocations.html @@ -137,6 +137,7 @@

Method Details

"lacp": "A String", # [Output Only] Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) constraints, which can take one of the following values: LACP_SUPPORTED, LACP_UNSUPPORTED "maxLagSize100Gbps": 42, # [Output Only] The maximum number of 100 Gbps ports supported in a link aggregation group (LAG). When linkType is 100 Gbps, requestedLinkCount cannot exceed max_lag_size_100_gbps. "maxLagSize10Gbps": 42, # [Output Only] The maximum number of 10 Gbps ports supported in a link aggregation group (LAG). When linkType is 10 Gbps, requestedLinkCount cannot exceed max_lag_size_10_gbps. + "maxLagSize400Gbps": 42, # [Output Only] The maximum number of 400 Gbps ports supported in a link aggregation group (LAG). When linkType is 400 Gbps, requestedLinkCount cannot exceed max_lag_size_400_gbps. "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the resource. "peeringdbFacilityId": "A String", # [Output Only] The peeringdb identifier for this facility (corresponding with a netfac type in peeringdb). "permittedConnections": [ # [Output Only] Permitted connections. @@ -203,6 +204,7 @@

Method Details

"lacp": "A String", # [Output Only] Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) constraints, which can take one of the following values: LACP_SUPPORTED, LACP_UNSUPPORTED "maxLagSize100Gbps": 42, # [Output Only] The maximum number of 100 Gbps ports supported in a link aggregation group (LAG). When linkType is 100 Gbps, requestedLinkCount cannot exceed max_lag_size_100_gbps. "maxLagSize10Gbps": 42, # [Output Only] The maximum number of 10 Gbps ports supported in a link aggregation group (LAG). When linkType is 10 Gbps, requestedLinkCount cannot exceed max_lag_size_10_gbps. + "maxLagSize400Gbps": 42, # [Output Only] The maximum number of 400 Gbps ports supported in a link aggregation group (LAG). When linkType is 400 Gbps, requestedLinkCount cannot exceed max_lag_size_400_gbps. "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the resource. "peeringdbFacilityId": "A String", # [Output Only] The peeringdb identifier for this facility (corresponding with a netfac type in peeringdb). "permittedConnections": [ # [Output Only] Permitted connections. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.machineImages.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.machineImages.html index 1afb0a5f074..49396f9a9c9 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.machineImages.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.machineImages.html @@ -550,6 +550,10 @@

Method Details

"discardLocalSsd": True or False, # If true, the contents of any attached Local SSD disks will be discarded else, the Local SSD data will be preserved when the instance is stopped at the end of the run duration/termination time. }, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. + "preemptionNoticeDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the Metadata Service preemption notice duration before the GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off signal is triggered for Spot VMs only. If not specified, there will be no wait before the G2 Soft Off signal is triggered. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. "shutdownTimeout": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # DEPRECATED: please use skipGuestOsShutdown. Timeout between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off during shutdown operation of VM. For Standard VMs values between 0s and 120s are allowed. For Spot and Preemptible VMs supported values are between 0s and 30s. If no value is specified for shutdownDuration, default values are 90s for Standard VMs and 30s for Spot/Preemptible VMs. "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. @@ -807,6 +811,10 @@

Method Details

"discardLocalSsd": True or False, # If true, the contents of any attached Local SSD disks will be discarded else, the Local SSD data will be preserved when the instance is stopped at the end of the run duration/termination time. }, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. + "preemptionNoticeDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the Metadata Service preemption notice duration before the GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off signal is triggered for Spot VMs only. If not specified, there will be no wait before the G2 Soft Off signal is triggered. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. "shutdownTimeout": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # DEPRECATED: please use skipGuestOsShutdown. Timeout between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off during shutdown operation of VM. For Standard VMs values between 0s and 120s are allowed. For Spot and Preemptible VMs supported values are between 0s and 30s. If no value is specified for shutdownDuration, default values are 90s for Standard VMs and 30s for Spot/Preemptible VMs. "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. @@ -1197,6 +1205,10 @@

Method Details

"discardLocalSsd": True or False, # If true, the contents of any attached Local SSD disks will be discarded else, the Local SSD data will be preserved when the instance is stopped at the end of the run duration/termination time. }, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. + "preemptionNoticeDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the Metadata Service preemption notice duration before the GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off signal is triggered for Spot VMs only. If not specified, there will be no wait before the G2 Soft Off signal is triggered. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. "shutdownTimeout": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # DEPRECATED: please use skipGuestOsShutdown. Timeout between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off during shutdown operation of VM. For Standard VMs values between 0s and 120s are allowed. For Spot and Preemptible VMs supported values are between 0s and 30s. If no value is specified for shutdownDuration, default values are 90s for Standard VMs and 30s for Spot/Preemptible VMs. "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. @@ -1454,6 +1466,10 @@

Method Details

"discardLocalSsd": True or False, # If true, the contents of any attached Local SSD disks will be discarded else, the Local SSD data will be preserved when the instance is stopped at the end of the run duration/termination time. }, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. + "preemptionNoticeDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the Metadata Service preemption notice duration before the GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off signal is triggered for Spot VMs only. If not specified, there will be no wait before the G2 Soft Off signal is triggered. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. "shutdownTimeout": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # DEPRECATED: please use skipGuestOsShutdown. Timeout between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off during shutdown operation of VM. For Standard VMs values between 0s and 120s are allowed. For Spot and Preemptible VMs supported values are between 0s and 30s. If no value is specified for shutdownDuration, default values are 90s for Standard VMs and 30s for Spot/Preemptible VMs. "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. @@ -1926,6 +1942,10 @@

Method Details

"discardLocalSsd": True or False, # If true, the contents of any attached Local SSD disks will be discarded else, the Local SSD data will be preserved when the instance is stopped at the end of the run duration/termination time. }, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. + "preemptionNoticeDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the Metadata Service preemption notice duration before the GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off signal is triggered for Spot VMs only. If not specified, there will be no wait before the G2 Soft Off signal is triggered. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. "shutdownTimeout": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # DEPRECATED: please use skipGuestOsShutdown. Timeout between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off during shutdown operation of VM. For Standard VMs values between 0s and 120s are allowed. For Spot and Preemptible VMs supported values are between 0s and 30s. If no value is specified for shutdownDuration, default values are 90s for Standard VMs and 30s for Spot/Preemptible VMs. "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. @@ -2183,6 +2203,10 @@

Method Details

"discardLocalSsd": True or False, # If true, the contents of any attached Local SSD disks will be discarded else, the Local SSD data will be preserved when the instance is stopped at the end of the run duration/termination time. }, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. + "preemptionNoticeDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the Metadata Service preemption notice duration before the GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off signal is triggered for Spot VMs only. If not specified, there will be no wait before the G2 Soft Off signal is triggered. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. "shutdownTimeout": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # DEPRECATED: please use skipGuestOsShutdown. Timeout between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off during shutdown operation of VM. For Standard VMs values between 0s and 120s are allowed. For Spot and Preemptible VMs supported values are between 0s and 30s. If no value is specified for shutdownDuration, default values are 90s for Standard VMs and 30s for Spot/Preemptible VMs. "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.networkFirewallPolicies.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.networkFirewallPolicies.html index c8b29554177..2fc9f4b82f4 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.networkFirewallPolicies.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.networkFirewallPolicies.html @@ -844,6 +844,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies. + "policySource": "A String", # [Output Only] Source of this Firewall Policy. USER_DEFINED if created by a Cloud user, or SYSTEM if created by managed services like GKE. "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used. "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples. @@ -1356,6 +1357,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies. + "policySource": "A String", # [Output Only] Source of this Firewall Policy. USER_DEFINED if created by a Cloud user, or SYSTEM if created by managed services like GKE. "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used. "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples. @@ -1837,6 +1839,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies. + "policySource": "A String", # [Output Only] Source of this Firewall Policy. USER_DEFINED if created by a Cloud user, or SYSTEM if created by managed services like GKE. "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used. "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples. @@ -2173,6 +2176,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies. + "policySource": "A String", # [Output Only] Source of this Firewall Policy. USER_DEFINED if created by a Cloud user, or SYSTEM if created by managed services like GKE. "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used. "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples. @@ -2408,6 +2412,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies. + "policySource": "A String", # [Output Only] Source of this Firewall Policy. USER_DEFINED if created by a Cloud user, or SYSTEM if created by managed services like GKE. "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used. "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.networks.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.networks.html index bd2126390a2..184bd3616de 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.networks.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.networks.html @@ -810,7 +810,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -929,7 +929,7 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # Type of the redirect action. Possible values are: - GOOGLE_RECAPTCHA: redirect to reCAPTCHA for manual challenge assessment. - EXTERNAL_302: redirect to a different URL via a 302 response. }, "redirectTarget": "A String", # This must be specified for redirect actions. Cannot be specified for any other actions. - "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum managed protection tier required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. + "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum Cloud Armor subscription required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. "ruleNumber": "A String", # Identifier for the rule. This is only unique within the given security policy. This can only be set during rule creation, if rule number is not specified it will be generated by the server. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall security policy rule. "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. This field may only be specified when versioned_expr is set to FIREWALL. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.organizationSecurityPolicies.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.organizationSecurityPolicies.html index b6e149baa09..cf743ab9f9f 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.organizationSecurityPolicies.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.organizationSecurityPolicies.html @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -438,7 +438,7 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # Type of the redirect action. Possible values are: - GOOGLE_RECAPTCHA: redirect to reCAPTCHA for manual challenge assessment. - EXTERNAL_302: redirect to a different URL via a 302 response. }, "redirectTarget": "A String", # This must be specified for redirect actions. Cannot be specified for any other actions. - "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum managed protection tier required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. + "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum Cloud Armor subscription required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. "ruleNumber": "A String", # Identifier for the rule. This is only unique within the given security policy. This can only be set during rule creation, if rule number is not specified it will be generated by the server. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall security policy rule. "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. This field may only be specified when versioned_expr is set to FIREWALL. @@ -960,7 +960,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -1079,7 +1079,7 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # Type of the redirect action. Possible values are: - GOOGLE_RECAPTCHA: redirect to reCAPTCHA for manual challenge assessment. - EXTERNAL_302: redirect to a different URL via a 302 response. }, "redirectTarget": "A String", # This must be specified for redirect actions. Cannot be specified for any other actions. - "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum managed protection tier required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. + "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum Cloud Armor subscription required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. "ruleNumber": "A String", # Identifier for the rule. This is only unique within the given security policy. This can only be set during rule creation, if rule number is not specified it will be generated by the server. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall security policy rule. "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. This field may only be specified when versioned_expr is set to FIREWALL. @@ -1190,7 +1190,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -1309,7 +1309,7 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # Type of the redirect action. Possible values are: - GOOGLE_RECAPTCHA: redirect to reCAPTCHA for manual challenge assessment. - EXTERNAL_302: redirect to a different URL via a 302 response. }, "redirectTarget": "A String", # This must be specified for redirect actions. Cannot be specified for any other actions. - "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum managed protection tier required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. + "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum Cloud Armor subscription required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. "ruleNumber": "A String", # Identifier for the rule. This is only unique within the given security policy. This can only be set during rule creation, if rule number is not specified it will be generated by the server. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall security policy rule. "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. This field may only be specified when versioned_expr is set to FIREWALL. @@ -1454,7 +1454,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -1573,7 +1573,7 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # Type of the redirect action. Possible values are: - GOOGLE_RECAPTCHA: redirect to reCAPTCHA for manual challenge assessment. - EXTERNAL_302: redirect to a different URL via a 302 response. }, "redirectTarget": "A String", # This must be specified for redirect actions. Cannot be specified for any other actions. - "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum managed protection tier required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. + "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum Cloud Armor subscription required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. "ruleNumber": "A String", # Identifier for the rule. This is only unique within the given security policy. This can only be set during rule creation, if rule number is not specified it will be generated by the server. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall security policy rule. "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. This field may only be specified when versioned_expr is set to FIREWALL. @@ -1866,7 +1866,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -1985,7 +1985,7 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # Type of the redirect action. Possible values are: - GOOGLE_RECAPTCHA: redirect to reCAPTCHA for manual challenge assessment. - EXTERNAL_302: redirect to a different URL via a 302 response. }, "redirectTarget": "A String", # This must be specified for redirect actions. Cannot be specified for any other actions. - "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum managed protection tier required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. + "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum Cloud Armor subscription required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. "ruleNumber": "A String", # Identifier for the rule. This is only unique within the given security policy. This can only be set during rule creation, if rule number is not specified it will be generated by the server. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall security policy rule. "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. This field may only be specified when versioned_expr is set to FIREWALL. @@ -2377,7 +2377,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -2496,7 +2496,7 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # Type of the redirect action. Possible values are: - GOOGLE_RECAPTCHA: redirect to reCAPTCHA for manual challenge assessment. - EXTERNAL_302: redirect to a different URL via a 302 response. }, "redirectTarget": "A String", # This must be specified for redirect actions. Cannot be specified for any other actions. - "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum managed protection tier required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. + "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum Cloud Armor subscription required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. "ruleNumber": "A String", # Identifier for the rule. This is only unique within the given security policy. This can only be set during rule creation, if rule number is not specified it will be generated by the server. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall security policy rule. "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. This field may only be specified when versioned_expr is set to FIREWALL. @@ -2688,7 +2688,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -2807,7 +2807,7 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # Type of the redirect action. Possible values are: - GOOGLE_RECAPTCHA: redirect to reCAPTCHA for manual challenge assessment. - EXTERNAL_302: redirect to a different URL via a 302 response. }, "redirectTarget": "A String", # This must be specified for redirect actions. Cannot be specified for any other actions. - "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum managed protection tier required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. + "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum Cloud Armor subscription required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. "ruleNumber": "A String", # Identifier for the rule. This is only unique within the given security policy. This can only be set during rule creation, if rule number is not specified it will be generated by the server. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall security policy rule. "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. This field may only be specified when versioned_expr is set to FIREWALL. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionBackendBuckets.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionBackendBuckets.html index e63673a3201..e77a4ab8138 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionBackendBuckets.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionBackendBuckets.html @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -401,7 +401,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -603,7 +603,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -703,7 +703,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -819,7 +819,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionBackendServices.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionBackendServices.html index 4770dbe8ee8..39df7981c10 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionBackendServices.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionBackendServices.html @@ -325,7 +325,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -926,7 +926,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -1559,7 +1559,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -2090,7 +2090,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -2637,7 +2637,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -3524,7 +3524,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionDisks.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionDisks.html index 1dd9bb724d7..0bef42b015c 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionDisks.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionDisks.html @@ -134,6 +134,9 @@

Instance Methods

update(project, region, disk, body=None, paths=None, requestId=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)

Update the specified disk with the data included in the request. Update is performed only on selected fields included as part of update-mask. Only the following fields can be modified: user_license.

+

+ updateKmsKey(project, region, disk, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Rotates the customer-managed encryption key to the latest version for the specified persistent disk.

waitForReplicationCatchUp(project, region, disk, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

Wait for replication to catch up on the secondary disk.

@@ -2640,6 +2643,132 @@

Method Details

}
+
+ updateKmsKey(project, region, disk, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Rotates the customer-managed encryption key to the latest version for the specified persistent disk.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  region: string, The name of the region for this request. (required)
+  disk: string, Name of the Disk resource, should conform to RFC1035. (required)
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zoneOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources. Note that completed Operation resources have a limited retention period.
+  "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
+  "description": "A String", # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
+  "endTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "error": { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    "errors": [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
+      {
+        "code": "A String", # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
+        "errorDetails": [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
+          {
+            "errorInfo": { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the "pubsub.googleapis.com" API when it is not enabled: { "reason": "API_DISABLED" "domain": "googleapis.com" "metadata": { "resource": "projects/123", "service": "pubsub.googleapis.com" } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { "reason": "STOCKOUT" "domain": "spanner.googleapis.com", "metadata": { "availableRegions": "us-central1,us-east2" } }
+              "domain": "A String", # The logical grouping to which the "reason" belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: "pubsub.googleapis.com". If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is "googleapis.com".
+              "metadatas": { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys must match a regular expression of `a-z+` but should ideally be lowerCamelCase. Also, they must be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than `{"instanceLimit": "100/request"}`, should be returned as, `{"instanceLimitPerRequest": "100"}`, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "reason": "A String", # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
+            },
+            "help": { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn't enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
+              "links": [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
+                { # Describes a URL link.
+                  "description": "A String", # Describes what the link offers.
+                  "url": "A String", # The URL of the link.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            "localizedMessage": { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
+              "locale": "A String", # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: "en-US", "fr-CH", "es-MX"
+              "message": "A String", # The localized error message in the above locale.
+            },
+            "quotaInfo": { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
+              "dimensions": { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "futureLimit": 3.14, # Future quota limit being rolled out. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limit": 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limitName": "A String", # The name of the quota limit.
+              "metricName": "A String", # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
+              "rolloutStatus": "A String", # Rollout status of the future quota limit.
+            },
+          },
+        ],
+        "location": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
+        "message": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "httpErrorMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
+  "httpErrorStatusCode": 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  "insertTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "instancesBulkInsertOperationMetadata": {
+    "perLocationStatus": { # Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "createdVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs successfully created so far.
+        "deletedVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that got deleted during rollback.
+        "failedToCreateVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that started creating but encountered an error.
+        "status": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation status of BulkInsert operation - information if the flow is rolling forward or rolling back.
+        "targetVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs originally planned to be created.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "kind": "compute#operation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
+  "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
+  "operationGroupId": "A String", # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
+  "operationType": "A String", # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
+  "progress": 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
+  "setCommonInstanceMetadataOperationMetadata": { # [Output Only] If the operation is for projects.setCommonInstanceMetadata, this field will contain information on all underlying zonal actions and their state.
+    "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The client operation id.
+    "perLocationOperations": { # [Output Only] Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # [Output Only] If state is `ABANDONED` or `FAILED`, this field is populated.
+          "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+          "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+            {
+              "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+            },
+          ],
+          "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+        },
+        "state": "A String", # [Output Only] Status of the action, which can be one of the following: `PROPAGATING`, `PROPAGATED`, `ABANDONED`, `FAILED`, or `DONE`.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "startTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "status": "A String", # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
+  "statusMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
+  "targetId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
+  "targetLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the disk that the snapshot was created from.
+  "user": "A String", # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com` or `alice_smith_identifier (global/workforcePools/example-com-us-employees)`.
+  "warnings": [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    {
+      "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+      "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+        {
+          "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+          "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+    },
+  ],
+  "zone": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
+}
+
+
waitForReplicationCatchUp(project, region, disk, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)
Wait for replication to catch up on the secondary disk.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionInstanceTemplates.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionInstanceTemplates.html
index 1fcfcbf1899..110e347b97e 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionInstanceTemplates.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionInstanceTemplates.html
@@ -546,6 +546,10 @@ 

Method Details

"discardLocalSsd": True or False, # If true, the contents of any attached Local SSD disks will be discarded else, the Local SSD data will be preserved when the instance is stopped at the end of the run duration/termination time. }, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. + "preemptionNoticeDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the Metadata Service preemption notice duration before the GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off signal is triggered for Spot VMs only. If not specified, there will be no wait before the G2 Soft Off signal is triggered. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. "shutdownTimeout": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # DEPRECATED: please use skipGuestOsShutdown. Timeout between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off during shutdown operation of VM. For Standard VMs values between 0s and 120s are allowed. For Spot and Preemptible VMs supported values are between 0s and 30s. If no value is specified for shutdownDuration, default values are 90s for Standard VMs and 30s for Spot/Preemptible VMs. "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. @@ -918,6 +922,10 @@

Method Details

"discardLocalSsd": True or False, # If true, the contents of any attached Local SSD disks will be discarded else, the Local SSD data will be preserved when the instance is stopped at the end of the run duration/termination time. }, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. + "preemptionNoticeDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the Metadata Service preemption notice duration before the GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off signal is triggered for Spot VMs only. If not specified, there will be no wait before the G2 Soft Off signal is triggered. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. "shutdownTimeout": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # DEPRECATED: please use skipGuestOsShutdown. Timeout between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off during shutdown operation of VM. For Standard VMs values between 0s and 120s are allowed. For Spot and Preemptible VMs supported values are between 0s and 30s. If no value is specified for shutdownDuration, default values are 90s for Standard VMs and 30s for Spot/Preemptible VMs. "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. @@ -1425,6 +1433,10 @@

Method Details

"discardLocalSsd": True or False, # If true, the contents of any attached Local SSD disks will be discarded else, the Local SSD data will be preserved when the instance is stopped at the end of the run duration/termination time. }, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. + "preemptionNoticeDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the Metadata Service preemption notice duration before the GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off signal is triggered for Spot VMs only. If not specified, there will be no wait before the G2 Soft Off signal is triggered. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. "shutdownTimeout": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # DEPRECATED: please use skipGuestOsShutdown. Timeout between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off during shutdown operation of VM. For Standard VMs values between 0s and 120s are allowed. For Spot and Preemptible VMs supported values are between 0s and 30s. If no value is specified for shutdownDuration, default values are 90s for Standard VMs and 30s for Spot/Preemptible VMs. "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionInstances.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionInstances.html index db15e225ec9..da90c3efa5b 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionInstances.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionInstances.html @@ -512,6 +512,10 @@

Method Details

"discardLocalSsd": True or False, # If true, the contents of any attached Local SSD disks will be discarded else, the Local SSD data will be preserved when the instance is stopped at the end of the run duration/termination time. }, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. + "preemptionNoticeDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the Metadata Service preemption notice duration before the GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off signal is triggered for Spot VMs only. If not specified, there will be no wait before the G2 Soft Off signal is triggered. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. "shutdownTimeout": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # DEPRECATED: please use skipGuestOsShutdown. Timeout between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off during shutdown operation of VM. For Standard VMs values between 0s and 120s are allowed. For Spot and Preemptible VMs supported values are between 0s and 30s. If no value is specified for shutdownDuration, default values are 90s for Standard VMs and 30s for Spot/Preemptible VMs. "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionNetworkFirewallPolicies.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionNetworkFirewallPolicies.html index 42b0e08b465..570f4012eec 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionNetworkFirewallPolicies.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionNetworkFirewallPolicies.html @@ -866,6 +866,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies. + "policySource": "A String", # [Output Only] Source of this Firewall Policy. USER_DEFINED if created by a Cloud user, or SYSTEM if created by managed services like GKE. "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used. "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples. @@ -1506,6 +1507,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies. + "policySource": "A String", # [Output Only] Source of this Firewall Policy. USER_DEFINED if created by a Cloud user, or SYSTEM if created by managed services like GKE. "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used. "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples. @@ -1843,6 +1845,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies. + "policySource": "A String", # [Output Only] Source of this Firewall Policy. USER_DEFINED if created by a Cloud user, or SYSTEM if created by managed services like GKE. "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used. "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples. @@ -2079,6 +2082,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies. + "policySource": "A String", # [Output Only] Source of this Firewall Policy. USER_DEFINED if created by a Cloud user, or SYSTEM if created by managed services like GKE. "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used. "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionNetworkPolicies.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionNetworkPolicies.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8a45d8b8645 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionNetworkPolicies.html @@ -0,0 +1,1749 @@ + + + +

Compute Engine API . regionNetworkPolicies

+

Instance Methods

+

+ addAssociation(project, region, networkPolicy, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Inserts an association for the specified network policy.

+

+ addTrafficClassificationRule(project, region, networkPolicy, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Inserts a rule into a network policy.

+

+ aggregatedList(project, filter=None, includeAllScopes=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, serviceProjectNumber=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Retrieves an aggregated list of network policies. To prevent failure, Google recommends that you set the `returnPartialSuccess` parameter to `true`.

+

+ aggregatedList_next()

+

Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+ close()

+

Close httplib2 connections.

+

+ delete(project, region, networkPolicy, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Deletes the specified policy.

+

+ get(project, region, networkPolicy, x__xgafv=None)

+

Returns the specified network policy.

+

+ getAssociation(project, region, networkPolicy, name=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Gets an association with the specified name.

+

+ getTrafficClassificationRule(project, region, networkPolicy, priority=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Gets a rule of the specified priority.

+

+ insert(project, region, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Creates a new policy in the specified project using the data included in the request.

+

+ list(project, region, filter=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Lists all the policies that have been configured for the specified project in the given region.

+

+ list_next()

+

Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+ patch(project, region, networkPolicy, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Patches the specified policy with the data included in the request.

+

+ patchTrafficClassificationRule(project, region, networkPolicy, body=None, priority=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Patches a rule of the specified priority.

+

+ removeAssociation(project, region, networkPolicy, name=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Removes an association for the specified network policy.

+

+ removeTrafficClassificationRule(project, region, networkPolicy, priority=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Deletes a rule of the specified priority.

+

Method Details

+
+ addAssociation(project, region, networkPolicy, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Inserts an association for the specified network policy.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  region: string, Name of the region of this request. (required)
+  networkPolicy: string, Name of the network policy resource to update. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{
+  "attachmentTarget": "A String", # The target that the network policy is attached to.
+  "name": "A String", # The name for an association.
+}
+
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zoneOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources. Note that completed Operation resources have a limited retention period.
+  "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
+  "description": "A String", # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
+  "endTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "error": { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    "errors": [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
+      {
+        "code": "A String", # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
+        "errorDetails": [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
+          {
+            "errorInfo": { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the "pubsub.googleapis.com" API when it is not enabled: { "reason": "API_DISABLED" "domain": "googleapis.com" "metadata": { "resource": "projects/123", "service": "pubsub.googleapis.com" } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { "reason": "STOCKOUT" "domain": "spanner.googleapis.com", "metadata": { "availableRegions": "us-central1,us-east2" } }
+              "domain": "A String", # The logical grouping to which the "reason" belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: "pubsub.googleapis.com". If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is "googleapis.com".
+              "metadatas": { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys must match a regular expression of `a-z+` but should ideally be lowerCamelCase. Also, they must be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than `{"instanceLimit": "100/request"}`, should be returned as, `{"instanceLimitPerRequest": "100"}`, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "reason": "A String", # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
+            },
+            "help": { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn't enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
+              "links": [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
+                { # Describes a URL link.
+                  "description": "A String", # Describes what the link offers.
+                  "url": "A String", # The URL of the link.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            "localizedMessage": { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
+              "locale": "A String", # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: "en-US", "fr-CH", "es-MX"
+              "message": "A String", # The localized error message in the above locale.
+            },
+            "quotaInfo": { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
+              "dimensions": { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "futureLimit": 3.14, # Future quota limit being rolled out. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limit": 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limitName": "A String", # The name of the quota limit.
+              "metricName": "A String", # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
+              "rolloutStatus": "A String", # Rollout status of the future quota limit.
+            },
+          },
+        ],
+        "location": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
+        "message": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "httpErrorMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
+  "httpErrorStatusCode": 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  "insertTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "instancesBulkInsertOperationMetadata": {
+    "perLocationStatus": { # Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "createdVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs successfully created so far.
+        "deletedVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that got deleted during rollback.
+        "failedToCreateVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that started creating but encountered an error.
+        "status": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation status of BulkInsert operation - information if the flow is rolling forward or rolling back.
+        "targetVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs originally planned to be created.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "kind": "compute#operation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
+  "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
+  "operationGroupId": "A String", # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
+  "operationType": "A String", # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
+  "progress": 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
+  "setCommonInstanceMetadataOperationMetadata": { # [Output Only] If the operation is for projects.setCommonInstanceMetadata, this field will contain information on all underlying zonal actions and their state.
+    "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The client operation id.
+    "perLocationOperations": { # [Output Only] Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # [Output Only] If state is `ABANDONED` or `FAILED`, this field is populated.
+          "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+          "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+            {
+              "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+            },
+          ],
+          "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+        },
+        "state": "A String", # [Output Only] Status of the action, which can be one of the following: `PROPAGATING`, `PROPAGATED`, `ABANDONED`, `FAILED`, or `DONE`.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "startTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "status": "A String", # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
+  "statusMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
+  "targetId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
+  "targetLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the disk that the snapshot was created from.
+  "user": "A String", # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com` or `alice_smith_identifier (global/workforcePools/example-com-us-employees)`.
+  "warnings": [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    {
+      "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+      "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+        {
+          "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+          "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+    },
+  ],
+  "zone": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
+}
+
+ +
+ addTrafficClassificationRule(project, region, networkPolicy, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Inserts a rule into a network policy.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  region: string, Name of the region of this request. (required)
+  networkPolicy: string, Name of the network policy resource to update. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Represents a traffic classification rule that describes one or more match conditions along with the action to be taken when traffic matches this condition.
+  "action": { # The Action to perform when the client connection triggers the rule.
+    "fieldType": "A String", # The field type could be one of: TRAFFIC_CLASS or DSCP.
+    "fieldValue": 42, # For field_type = TRAFFIC_CLASS: 1 to 6. For field_type = DSCP: 0 to 63.
+    "type": "A String", # Always "apply_traffic_classification" for traffic classification rules.
+  },
+  "description": "A String", # An optional description for this resource.
+  "disabled": True or False, # Denotes whether the network policy rule is disabled. When set to true, the network policy rule is not enforced and traffic behaves as if it did not exist. If this is unspecified, the network policy rule will be enabled.
+  "kind": "compute#networkPolicyTrafficClassificationRule", # [Output only] Type of the resource. Always compute#networkPolicyTrafficClassificationRule for network policy traffic classification rules
+  "match": { # Represents a match condition that incoming traffic is evaluated against. Exactly one field must be specified. # A match condition that outgoing traffic is evaluated against. If it evaluates to true, the corresponding 'action' is enforced.
+    "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
+      "A String",
+    ],
+    "layer4Configs": [ # Pairs of IP protocols and ports that the rule should match.
+      {
+        "ipProtocol": "A String", # The IP protocol to which this rule applies. The protocol type is required when creating a traffic classification rule. This value can either be one of the following well known protocol strings (tcp, udp, icmp, esp, ah, ipip, sctp), or the IP protocol number.
+        "ports": [ # An optional list of ports to which this rule applies. This field is only applicable for UDP or TCP protocol. Each entry must be either an integer or a range. If not specified, this rule applies to connections through any port. Example inputs include: ["22"], ["80","443"], and ["12345-12349"].
+          "A String",
+        ],
+      },
+    ],
+    "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
+      "A String",
+    ],
+  },
+  "priority": 42, # An integer indicating the priority of a rule in the list. The priority must be a positive value between 1 and 2147482647. The priority values from 2147482648 to 2147483647 (1000) are reserved for system default network policy rules. Rules are evaluated from highest to lowest priority where 1 is the highest priority and 2147483647 is the lowest priority.
+  "ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated.
+  "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single network policy rule.
+  "targetSecureTags": [ # A list of secure tags that controls which instances the traffic classification rule applies to. If targetSecureTag are specified, then the traffic classification rule applies only to instances in the VPC network that have one of those EFFECTIVE secure tags, if all the targetSecureTag are in INEFFECTIVE state, then this rule will be ignored. targetSecureTag may not be set at the same time as targetServiceAccounts. If neither targetServiceAccounts nor targetSecureTag are specified, the traffic classification rule applies to all instances on the specified network. Maximum number of target label tags allowed is 256.
+    {
+      "name": "A String", # Name of the secure tag, created with TagManager's TagValue API.
+      "state": "A String", # [Output Only] State of the secure tag, either `EFFECTIVE` or `INEFFECTIVE`. A secure tag is `INEFFECTIVE` when it is deleted or its network is deleted.
+    },
+  ],
+  "targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+}
+
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zoneOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources. Note that completed Operation resources have a limited retention period.
+  "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
+  "description": "A String", # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
+  "endTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "error": { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    "errors": [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
+      {
+        "code": "A String", # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
+        "errorDetails": [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
+          {
+            "errorInfo": { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the "pubsub.googleapis.com" API when it is not enabled: { "reason": "API_DISABLED" "domain": "googleapis.com" "metadata": { "resource": "projects/123", "service": "pubsub.googleapis.com" } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { "reason": "STOCKOUT" "domain": "spanner.googleapis.com", "metadata": { "availableRegions": "us-central1,us-east2" } }
+              "domain": "A String", # The logical grouping to which the "reason" belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: "pubsub.googleapis.com". If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is "googleapis.com".
+              "metadatas": { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys must match a regular expression of `a-z+` but should ideally be lowerCamelCase. Also, they must be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than `{"instanceLimit": "100/request"}`, should be returned as, `{"instanceLimitPerRequest": "100"}`, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "reason": "A String", # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
+            },
+            "help": { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn't enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
+              "links": [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
+                { # Describes a URL link.
+                  "description": "A String", # Describes what the link offers.
+                  "url": "A String", # The URL of the link.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            "localizedMessage": { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
+              "locale": "A String", # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: "en-US", "fr-CH", "es-MX"
+              "message": "A String", # The localized error message in the above locale.
+            },
+            "quotaInfo": { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
+              "dimensions": { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "futureLimit": 3.14, # Future quota limit being rolled out. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limit": 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limitName": "A String", # The name of the quota limit.
+              "metricName": "A String", # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
+              "rolloutStatus": "A String", # Rollout status of the future quota limit.
+            },
+          },
+        ],
+        "location": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
+        "message": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "httpErrorMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
+  "httpErrorStatusCode": 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  "insertTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "instancesBulkInsertOperationMetadata": {
+    "perLocationStatus": { # Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "createdVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs successfully created so far.
+        "deletedVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that got deleted during rollback.
+        "failedToCreateVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that started creating but encountered an error.
+        "status": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation status of BulkInsert operation - information if the flow is rolling forward or rolling back.
+        "targetVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs originally planned to be created.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "kind": "compute#operation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
+  "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
+  "operationGroupId": "A String", # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
+  "operationType": "A String", # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
+  "progress": 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
+  "setCommonInstanceMetadataOperationMetadata": { # [Output Only] If the operation is for projects.setCommonInstanceMetadata, this field will contain information on all underlying zonal actions and their state.
+    "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The client operation id.
+    "perLocationOperations": { # [Output Only] Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # [Output Only] If state is `ABANDONED` or `FAILED`, this field is populated.
+          "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+          "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+            {
+              "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+            },
+          ],
+          "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+        },
+        "state": "A String", # [Output Only] Status of the action, which can be one of the following: `PROPAGATING`, `PROPAGATED`, `ABANDONED`, `FAILED`, or `DONE`.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "startTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "status": "A String", # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
+  "statusMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
+  "targetId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
+  "targetLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the disk that the snapshot was created from.
+  "user": "A String", # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com` or `alice_smith_identifier (global/workforcePools/example-com-us-employees)`.
+  "warnings": [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    {
+      "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+      "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+        {
+          "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+          "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+    },
+  ],
+  "zone": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
+}
+
+ +
+ aggregatedList(project, filter=None, includeAllScopes=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, serviceProjectNumber=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Retrieves an aggregated list of network policies. To prevent failure, Google recommends that you set the `returnPartialSuccess` parameter to `true`.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  filter: string, A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. These two types of filter expressions cannot be mixed in one request. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `>`, `<`, `<=`, `>=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = "Intel Skylake") ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = "Intel Skylake") OR (cpuPlatform = "Intel Broadwell") AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq 'single quoted literal'` `fieldname eq "double quoted literal"` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne "literal")` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name "instance", you would use `name ne .*instance`. You cannot combine constraints on multiple fields using regular expressions.
+  includeAllScopes: boolean, Indicates whether every visible scope for each scope type (zone, region, global) should be included in the response. For new resource types added after this field, the flag has no effect as new resource types will always include every visible scope for each scope type in response. For resource types which predate this field, if this flag is omitted or false, only scopes of the scope types where the resource type is expected to be found will be included.
+  maxResults: integer, The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)
+  orderBy: string, Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy="creationTimestamp desc"`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.
+  pageToken: string, Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.
+  returnPartialSuccess: boolean, Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false. For example, when partial success behavior is enabled, aggregatedList for a single zone scope either returns all resources in the zone or no resources, with an error code.
+  serviceProjectNumber: string, The Shared VPC service project id or service project number for which aggregated list request is invoked for subnetworks list-usable api.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    {
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.
+  "items": { # A list of NetworkPoliciesScopedList resources.
+    "a_key": { # Name of the scope containing this set of addresses.
+      "networkPolicies": [ # A list of network policies contained in this scope.
+        { # Represents a Network Policy resource.
+          "associations": [ # [Output Only] A list of associations that belong to this network policy.
+            {
+              "attachmentTarget": "A String", # The target that the network policy is attached to.
+              "name": "A String", # The name for an association.
+            },
+          ],
+          "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+          "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
+          "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
+          "kind": "compute#networkPolicy", # [Output only] Type of the resource. Always compute#networkPolicy for network policies
+          "name": "A String", # Name of the resource.
+          "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional network policy resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
+          "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all network policy rule tuples. A network policy can not exceed a set number of tuples.
+          "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+          "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
+          "trafficClassificationRules": [ # [Output Only] A list of traffic classification rules that belong to this policy.
+            { # Represents a traffic classification rule that describes one or more match conditions along with the action to be taken when traffic matches this condition.
+              "action": { # The Action to perform when the client connection triggers the rule.
+                "fieldType": "A String", # The field type could be one of: TRAFFIC_CLASS or DSCP.
+                "fieldValue": 42, # For field_type = TRAFFIC_CLASS: 1 to 6. For field_type = DSCP: 0 to 63.
+                "type": "A String", # Always "apply_traffic_classification" for traffic classification rules.
+              },
+              "description": "A String", # An optional description for this resource.
+              "disabled": True or False, # Denotes whether the network policy rule is disabled. When set to true, the network policy rule is not enforced and traffic behaves as if it did not exist. If this is unspecified, the network policy rule will be enabled.
+              "kind": "compute#networkPolicyTrafficClassificationRule", # [Output only] Type of the resource. Always compute#networkPolicyTrafficClassificationRule for network policy traffic classification rules
+              "match": { # Represents a match condition that incoming traffic is evaluated against. Exactly one field must be specified. # A match condition that outgoing traffic is evaluated against. If it evaluates to true, the corresponding 'action' is enforced.
+                "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+                "layer4Configs": [ # Pairs of IP protocols and ports that the rule should match.
+                  {
+                    "ipProtocol": "A String", # The IP protocol to which this rule applies. The protocol type is required when creating a traffic classification rule. This value can either be one of the following well known protocol strings (tcp, udp, icmp, esp, ah, ipip, sctp), or the IP protocol number.
+                    "ports": [ # An optional list of ports to which this rule applies. This field is only applicable for UDP or TCP protocol. Each entry must be either an integer or a range. If not specified, this rule applies to connections through any port. Example inputs include: ["22"], ["80","443"], and ["12345-12349"].
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                  },
+                ],
+                "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+              },
+              "priority": 42, # An integer indicating the priority of a rule in the list. The priority must be a positive value between 1 and 2147482647. The priority values from 2147482648 to 2147483647 (1000) are reserved for system default network policy rules. Rules are evaluated from highest to lowest priority where 1 is the highest priority and 2147483647 is the lowest priority.
+              "ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated.
+              "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single network policy rule.
+              "targetSecureTags": [ # A list of secure tags that controls which instances the traffic classification rule applies to. If targetSecureTag are specified, then the traffic classification rule applies only to instances in the VPC network that have one of those EFFECTIVE secure tags, if all the targetSecureTag are in INEFFECTIVE state, then this rule will be ignored. targetSecureTag may not be set at the same time as targetServiceAccounts. If neither targetServiceAccounts nor targetSecureTag are specified, the traffic classification rule applies to all instances on the specified network. Maximum number of target label tags allowed is 256.
+                {
+                  "name": "A String", # Name of the secure tag, created with TagManager's TagValue API.
+                  "state": "A String", # [Output Only] State of the secure tag, either `EFFECTIVE` or `INEFFECTIVE`. A secure tag is `INEFFECTIVE` when it is deleted or its network is deleted.
+                },
+              ],
+              "targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+            },
+          ],
+        },
+      ],
+      "warning": { # Informational warning which replaces the list of network policies when the list is empty.
+        "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+        "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+          {
+            "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+            "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+          },
+        ],
+        "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "kind": "compute#networkPolicyAggregatedList", # [Output Only] Type of resource. Always compute#networkPolicyAggregatedList for lists of network policies.
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # [Output Only] This token allows you to get the next page of results for list requests. If the number of results is larger than maxResults, use the nextPageToken as a value for the query parameter pageToken in the next list request. Subsequent list requests will have their own nextPageToken to continue paging through the results.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.
+  "unreachables": [ # [Output Only] Unreachable resources.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "warning": { # [Output Only] Informational warning message.
+    "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+    "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+      {
+        "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+        "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+  },
+}
+
+ +
+ aggregatedList_next() +
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        
+
+ +
+ close() +
Close httplib2 connections.
+
+ +
+ delete(project, region, networkPolicy, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Deletes the specified policy.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  region: string, Name of the region of this request. (required)
+  networkPolicy: string, Name of the network policy resource to delete. (required)
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zoneOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources. Note that completed Operation resources have a limited retention period.
+  "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
+  "description": "A String", # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
+  "endTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "error": { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    "errors": [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
+      {
+        "code": "A String", # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
+        "errorDetails": [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
+          {
+            "errorInfo": { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the "pubsub.googleapis.com" API when it is not enabled: { "reason": "API_DISABLED" "domain": "googleapis.com" "metadata": { "resource": "projects/123", "service": "pubsub.googleapis.com" } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { "reason": "STOCKOUT" "domain": "spanner.googleapis.com", "metadata": { "availableRegions": "us-central1,us-east2" } }
+              "domain": "A String", # The logical grouping to which the "reason" belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: "pubsub.googleapis.com". If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is "googleapis.com".
+              "metadatas": { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys must match a regular expression of `a-z+` but should ideally be lowerCamelCase. Also, they must be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than `{"instanceLimit": "100/request"}`, should be returned as, `{"instanceLimitPerRequest": "100"}`, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "reason": "A String", # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
+            },
+            "help": { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn't enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
+              "links": [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
+                { # Describes a URL link.
+                  "description": "A String", # Describes what the link offers.
+                  "url": "A String", # The URL of the link.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            "localizedMessage": { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
+              "locale": "A String", # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: "en-US", "fr-CH", "es-MX"
+              "message": "A String", # The localized error message in the above locale.
+            },
+            "quotaInfo": { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
+              "dimensions": { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "futureLimit": 3.14, # Future quota limit being rolled out. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limit": 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limitName": "A String", # The name of the quota limit.
+              "metricName": "A String", # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
+              "rolloutStatus": "A String", # Rollout status of the future quota limit.
+            },
+          },
+        ],
+        "location": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
+        "message": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "httpErrorMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
+  "httpErrorStatusCode": 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  "insertTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "instancesBulkInsertOperationMetadata": {
+    "perLocationStatus": { # Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "createdVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs successfully created so far.
+        "deletedVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that got deleted during rollback.
+        "failedToCreateVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that started creating but encountered an error.
+        "status": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation status of BulkInsert operation - information if the flow is rolling forward or rolling back.
+        "targetVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs originally planned to be created.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "kind": "compute#operation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
+  "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
+  "operationGroupId": "A String", # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
+  "operationType": "A String", # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
+  "progress": 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
+  "setCommonInstanceMetadataOperationMetadata": { # [Output Only] If the operation is for projects.setCommonInstanceMetadata, this field will contain information on all underlying zonal actions and their state.
+    "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The client operation id.
+    "perLocationOperations": { # [Output Only] Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # [Output Only] If state is `ABANDONED` or `FAILED`, this field is populated.
+          "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+          "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+            {
+              "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+            },
+          ],
+          "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+        },
+        "state": "A String", # [Output Only] Status of the action, which can be one of the following: `PROPAGATING`, `PROPAGATED`, `ABANDONED`, `FAILED`, or `DONE`.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "startTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "status": "A String", # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
+  "statusMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
+  "targetId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
+  "targetLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the disk that the snapshot was created from.
+  "user": "A String", # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com` or `alice_smith_identifier (global/workforcePools/example-com-us-employees)`.
+  "warnings": [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    {
+      "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+      "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+        {
+          "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+          "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+    },
+  ],
+  "zone": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
+}
+
+ +
+ get(project, region, networkPolicy, x__xgafv=None) +
Returns the specified network policy.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  region: string, Name of the region of this request. (required)
+  networkPolicy: string, Name of the network policy resource to return. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents a Network Policy resource.
+  "associations": [ # [Output Only] A list of associations that belong to this network policy.
+    {
+      "attachmentTarget": "A String", # The target that the network policy is attached to.
+      "name": "A String", # The name for an association.
+    },
+  ],
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+  "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  "kind": "compute#networkPolicy", # [Output only] Type of the resource. Always compute#networkPolicy for network policies
+  "name": "A String", # Name of the resource.
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional network policy resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
+  "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all network policy rule tuples. A network policy can not exceed a set number of tuples.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
+  "trafficClassificationRules": [ # [Output Only] A list of traffic classification rules that belong to this policy.
+    { # Represents a traffic classification rule that describes one or more match conditions along with the action to be taken when traffic matches this condition.
+      "action": { # The Action to perform when the client connection triggers the rule.
+        "fieldType": "A String", # The field type could be one of: TRAFFIC_CLASS or DSCP.
+        "fieldValue": 42, # For field_type = TRAFFIC_CLASS: 1 to 6. For field_type = DSCP: 0 to 63.
+        "type": "A String", # Always "apply_traffic_classification" for traffic classification rules.
+      },
+      "description": "A String", # An optional description for this resource.
+      "disabled": True or False, # Denotes whether the network policy rule is disabled. When set to true, the network policy rule is not enforced and traffic behaves as if it did not exist. If this is unspecified, the network policy rule will be enabled.
+      "kind": "compute#networkPolicyTrafficClassificationRule", # [Output only] Type of the resource. Always compute#networkPolicyTrafficClassificationRule for network policy traffic classification rules
+      "match": { # Represents a match condition that incoming traffic is evaluated against. Exactly one field must be specified. # A match condition that outgoing traffic is evaluated against. If it evaluates to true, the corresponding 'action' is enforced.
+        "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "layer4Configs": [ # Pairs of IP protocols and ports that the rule should match.
+          {
+            "ipProtocol": "A String", # The IP protocol to which this rule applies. The protocol type is required when creating a traffic classification rule. This value can either be one of the following well known protocol strings (tcp, udp, icmp, esp, ah, ipip, sctp), or the IP protocol number.
+            "ports": [ # An optional list of ports to which this rule applies. This field is only applicable for UDP or TCP protocol. Each entry must be either an integer or a range. If not specified, this rule applies to connections through any port. Example inputs include: ["22"], ["80","443"], and ["12345-12349"].
+              "A String",
+            ],
+          },
+        ],
+        "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+      },
+      "priority": 42, # An integer indicating the priority of a rule in the list. The priority must be a positive value between 1 and 2147482647. The priority values from 2147482648 to 2147483647 (1000) are reserved for system default network policy rules. Rules are evaluated from highest to lowest priority where 1 is the highest priority and 2147483647 is the lowest priority.
+      "ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated.
+      "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single network policy rule.
+      "targetSecureTags": [ # A list of secure tags that controls which instances the traffic classification rule applies to. If targetSecureTag are specified, then the traffic classification rule applies only to instances in the VPC network that have one of those EFFECTIVE secure tags, if all the targetSecureTag are in INEFFECTIVE state, then this rule will be ignored. targetSecureTag may not be set at the same time as targetServiceAccounts. If neither targetServiceAccounts nor targetSecureTag are specified, the traffic classification rule applies to all instances on the specified network. Maximum number of target label tags allowed is 256.
+        {
+          "name": "A String", # Name of the secure tag, created with TagManager's TagValue API.
+          "state": "A String", # [Output Only] State of the secure tag, either `EFFECTIVE` or `INEFFECTIVE`. A secure tag is `INEFFECTIVE` when it is deleted or its network is deleted.
+        },
+      ],
+      "targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+    },
+  ],
+}
+
+ +
+ getAssociation(project, region, networkPolicy, name=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Gets an association with the specified name.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  region: string, Name of the region of this request. (required)
+  networkPolicy: string, Name of the network policy to which the queried association belongs. (required)
+  name: string, The name of the association to get from the network policy.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    {
+  "attachmentTarget": "A String", # The target that the network policy is attached to.
+  "name": "A String", # The name for an association.
+}
+
+ +
+ getTrafficClassificationRule(project, region, networkPolicy, priority=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Gets a rule of the specified priority.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  region: string, Name of the region of this request. (required)
+  networkPolicy: string, Name of the network policy to which the queried rule belongs. (required)
+  priority: integer, The priority of the rule to get from the network policy.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents a traffic classification rule that describes one or more match conditions along with the action to be taken when traffic matches this condition.
+  "action": { # The Action to perform when the client connection triggers the rule.
+    "fieldType": "A String", # The field type could be one of: TRAFFIC_CLASS or DSCP.
+    "fieldValue": 42, # For field_type = TRAFFIC_CLASS: 1 to 6. For field_type = DSCP: 0 to 63.
+    "type": "A String", # Always "apply_traffic_classification" for traffic classification rules.
+  },
+  "description": "A String", # An optional description for this resource.
+  "disabled": True or False, # Denotes whether the network policy rule is disabled. When set to true, the network policy rule is not enforced and traffic behaves as if it did not exist. If this is unspecified, the network policy rule will be enabled.
+  "kind": "compute#networkPolicyTrafficClassificationRule", # [Output only] Type of the resource. Always compute#networkPolicyTrafficClassificationRule for network policy traffic classification rules
+  "match": { # Represents a match condition that incoming traffic is evaluated against. Exactly one field must be specified. # A match condition that outgoing traffic is evaluated against. If it evaluates to true, the corresponding 'action' is enforced.
+    "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
+      "A String",
+    ],
+    "layer4Configs": [ # Pairs of IP protocols and ports that the rule should match.
+      {
+        "ipProtocol": "A String", # The IP protocol to which this rule applies. The protocol type is required when creating a traffic classification rule. This value can either be one of the following well known protocol strings (tcp, udp, icmp, esp, ah, ipip, sctp), or the IP protocol number.
+        "ports": [ # An optional list of ports to which this rule applies. This field is only applicable for UDP or TCP protocol. Each entry must be either an integer or a range. If not specified, this rule applies to connections through any port. Example inputs include: ["22"], ["80","443"], and ["12345-12349"].
+          "A String",
+        ],
+      },
+    ],
+    "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
+      "A String",
+    ],
+  },
+  "priority": 42, # An integer indicating the priority of a rule in the list. The priority must be a positive value between 1 and 2147482647. The priority values from 2147482648 to 2147483647 (1000) are reserved for system default network policy rules. Rules are evaluated from highest to lowest priority where 1 is the highest priority and 2147483647 is the lowest priority.
+  "ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated.
+  "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single network policy rule.
+  "targetSecureTags": [ # A list of secure tags that controls which instances the traffic classification rule applies to. If targetSecureTag are specified, then the traffic classification rule applies only to instances in the VPC network that have one of those EFFECTIVE secure tags, if all the targetSecureTag are in INEFFECTIVE state, then this rule will be ignored. targetSecureTag may not be set at the same time as targetServiceAccounts. If neither targetServiceAccounts nor targetSecureTag are specified, the traffic classification rule applies to all instances on the specified network. Maximum number of target label tags allowed is 256.
+    {
+      "name": "A String", # Name of the secure tag, created with TagManager's TagValue API.
+      "state": "A String", # [Output Only] State of the secure tag, either `EFFECTIVE` or `INEFFECTIVE`. A secure tag is `INEFFECTIVE` when it is deleted or its network is deleted.
+    },
+  ],
+  "targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+}
+
+ +
+ insert(project, region, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Creates a new policy in the specified project using the data included in the request.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  region: string, Name of the region of this request. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Represents a Network Policy resource.
+  "associations": [ # [Output Only] A list of associations that belong to this network policy.
+    {
+      "attachmentTarget": "A String", # The target that the network policy is attached to.
+      "name": "A String", # The name for an association.
+    },
+  ],
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+  "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  "kind": "compute#networkPolicy", # [Output only] Type of the resource. Always compute#networkPolicy for network policies
+  "name": "A String", # Name of the resource.
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional network policy resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
+  "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all network policy rule tuples. A network policy can not exceed a set number of tuples.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
+  "trafficClassificationRules": [ # [Output Only] A list of traffic classification rules that belong to this policy.
+    { # Represents a traffic classification rule that describes one or more match conditions along with the action to be taken when traffic matches this condition.
+      "action": { # The Action to perform when the client connection triggers the rule.
+        "fieldType": "A String", # The field type could be one of: TRAFFIC_CLASS or DSCP.
+        "fieldValue": 42, # For field_type = TRAFFIC_CLASS: 1 to 6. For field_type = DSCP: 0 to 63.
+        "type": "A String", # Always "apply_traffic_classification" for traffic classification rules.
+      },
+      "description": "A String", # An optional description for this resource.
+      "disabled": True or False, # Denotes whether the network policy rule is disabled. When set to true, the network policy rule is not enforced and traffic behaves as if it did not exist. If this is unspecified, the network policy rule will be enabled.
+      "kind": "compute#networkPolicyTrafficClassificationRule", # [Output only] Type of the resource. Always compute#networkPolicyTrafficClassificationRule for network policy traffic classification rules
+      "match": { # Represents a match condition that incoming traffic is evaluated against. Exactly one field must be specified. # A match condition that outgoing traffic is evaluated against. If it evaluates to true, the corresponding 'action' is enforced.
+        "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "layer4Configs": [ # Pairs of IP protocols and ports that the rule should match.
+          {
+            "ipProtocol": "A String", # The IP protocol to which this rule applies. The protocol type is required when creating a traffic classification rule. This value can either be one of the following well known protocol strings (tcp, udp, icmp, esp, ah, ipip, sctp), or the IP protocol number.
+            "ports": [ # An optional list of ports to which this rule applies. This field is only applicable for UDP or TCP protocol. Each entry must be either an integer or a range. If not specified, this rule applies to connections through any port. Example inputs include: ["22"], ["80","443"], and ["12345-12349"].
+              "A String",
+            ],
+          },
+        ],
+        "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+      },
+      "priority": 42, # An integer indicating the priority of a rule in the list. The priority must be a positive value between 1 and 2147482647. The priority values from 2147482648 to 2147483647 (1000) are reserved for system default network policy rules. Rules are evaluated from highest to lowest priority where 1 is the highest priority and 2147483647 is the lowest priority.
+      "ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated.
+      "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single network policy rule.
+      "targetSecureTags": [ # A list of secure tags that controls which instances the traffic classification rule applies to. If targetSecureTag are specified, then the traffic classification rule applies only to instances in the VPC network that have one of those EFFECTIVE secure tags, if all the targetSecureTag are in INEFFECTIVE state, then this rule will be ignored. targetSecureTag may not be set at the same time as targetServiceAccounts. If neither targetServiceAccounts nor targetSecureTag are specified, the traffic classification rule applies to all instances on the specified network. Maximum number of target label tags allowed is 256.
+        {
+          "name": "A String", # Name of the secure tag, created with TagManager's TagValue API.
+          "state": "A String", # [Output Only] State of the secure tag, either `EFFECTIVE` or `INEFFECTIVE`. A secure tag is `INEFFECTIVE` when it is deleted or its network is deleted.
+        },
+      ],
+      "targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+    },
+  ],
+}
+
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zoneOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources. Note that completed Operation resources have a limited retention period.
+  "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
+  "description": "A String", # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
+  "endTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "error": { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    "errors": [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
+      {
+        "code": "A String", # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
+        "errorDetails": [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
+          {
+            "errorInfo": { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the "pubsub.googleapis.com" API when it is not enabled: { "reason": "API_DISABLED" "domain": "googleapis.com" "metadata": { "resource": "projects/123", "service": "pubsub.googleapis.com" } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { "reason": "STOCKOUT" "domain": "spanner.googleapis.com", "metadata": { "availableRegions": "us-central1,us-east2" } }
+              "domain": "A String", # The logical grouping to which the "reason" belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: "pubsub.googleapis.com". If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is "googleapis.com".
+              "metadatas": { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys must match a regular expression of `a-z+` but should ideally be lowerCamelCase. Also, they must be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than `{"instanceLimit": "100/request"}`, should be returned as, `{"instanceLimitPerRequest": "100"}`, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "reason": "A String", # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
+            },
+            "help": { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn't enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
+              "links": [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
+                { # Describes a URL link.
+                  "description": "A String", # Describes what the link offers.
+                  "url": "A String", # The URL of the link.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            "localizedMessage": { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
+              "locale": "A String", # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: "en-US", "fr-CH", "es-MX"
+              "message": "A String", # The localized error message in the above locale.
+            },
+            "quotaInfo": { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
+              "dimensions": { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "futureLimit": 3.14, # Future quota limit being rolled out. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limit": 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limitName": "A String", # The name of the quota limit.
+              "metricName": "A String", # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
+              "rolloutStatus": "A String", # Rollout status of the future quota limit.
+            },
+          },
+        ],
+        "location": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
+        "message": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "httpErrorMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
+  "httpErrorStatusCode": 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  "insertTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "instancesBulkInsertOperationMetadata": {
+    "perLocationStatus": { # Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "createdVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs successfully created so far.
+        "deletedVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that got deleted during rollback.
+        "failedToCreateVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that started creating but encountered an error.
+        "status": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation status of BulkInsert operation - information if the flow is rolling forward or rolling back.
+        "targetVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs originally planned to be created.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "kind": "compute#operation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
+  "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
+  "operationGroupId": "A String", # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
+  "operationType": "A String", # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
+  "progress": 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
+  "setCommonInstanceMetadataOperationMetadata": { # [Output Only] If the operation is for projects.setCommonInstanceMetadata, this field will contain information on all underlying zonal actions and their state.
+    "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The client operation id.
+    "perLocationOperations": { # [Output Only] Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # [Output Only] If state is `ABANDONED` or `FAILED`, this field is populated.
+          "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+          "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+            {
+              "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+            },
+          ],
+          "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+        },
+        "state": "A String", # [Output Only] Status of the action, which can be one of the following: `PROPAGATING`, `PROPAGATED`, `ABANDONED`, `FAILED`, or `DONE`.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "startTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "status": "A String", # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
+  "statusMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
+  "targetId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
+  "targetLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the disk that the snapshot was created from.
+  "user": "A String", # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com` or `alice_smith_identifier (global/workforcePools/example-com-us-employees)`.
+  "warnings": [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    {
+      "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+      "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+        {
+          "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+          "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+    },
+  ],
+  "zone": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
+}
+
+ +
+ list(project, region, filter=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Lists all the policies that have been configured for the specified project in the given region.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  region: string, Name of the region of this request. (required)
+  filter: string, A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. These two types of filter expressions cannot be mixed in one request. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `>`, `<`, `<=`, `>=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = "Intel Skylake") ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = "Intel Skylake") OR (cpuPlatform = "Intel Broadwell") AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq 'single quoted literal'` `fieldname eq "double quoted literal"` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne "literal")` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name "instance", you would use `name ne .*instance`. You cannot combine constraints on multiple fields using regular expressions.
+  maxResults: integer, The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)
+  orderBy: string, Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy="creationTimestamp desc"`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.
+  pageToken: string, Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.
+  returnPartialSuccess: boolean, Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false. For example, when partial success behavior is enabled, aggregatedList for a single zone scope either returns all resources in the zone or no resources, with an error code.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    {
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.
+  "items": [ # A list of NetworkPolicy resources.
+    { # Represents a Network Policy resource.
+      "associations": [ # [Output Only] A list of associations that belong to this network policy.
+        {
+          "attachmentTarget": "A String", # The target that the network policy is attached to.
+          "name": "A String", # The name for an association.
+        },
+      ],
+      "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+      "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
+      "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
+      "kind": "compute#networkPolicy", # [Output only] Type of the resource. Always compute#networkPolicy for network policies
+      "name": "A String", # Name of the resource.
+      "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional network policy resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
+      "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all network policy rule tuples. A network policy can not exceed a set number of tuples.
+      "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+      "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
+      "trafficClassificationRules": [ # [Output Only] A list of traffic classification rules that belong to this policy.
+        { # Represents a traffic classification rule that describes one or more match conditions along with the action to be taken when traffic matches this condition.
+          "action": { # The Action to perform when the client connection triggers the rule.
+            "fieldType": "A String", # The field type could be one of: TRAFFIC_CLASS or DSCP.
+            "fieldValue": 42, # For field_type = TRAFFIC_CLASS: 1 to 6. For field_type = DSCP: 0 to 63.
+            "type": "A String", # Always "apply_traffic_classification" for traffic classification rules.
+          },
+          "description": "A String", # An optional description for this resource.
+          "disabled": True or False, # Denotes whether the network policy rule is disabled. When set to true, the network policy rule is not enforced and traffic behaves as if it did not exist. If this is unspecified, the network policy rule will be enabled.
+          "kind": "compute#networkPolicyTrafficClassificationRule", # [Output only] Type of the resource. Always compute#networkPolicyTrafficClassificationRule for network policy traffic classification rules
+          "match": { # Represents a match condition that incoming traffic is evaluated against. Exactly one field must be specified. # A match condition that outgoing traffic is evaluated against. If it evaluates to true, the corresponding 'action' is enforced.
+            "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "layer4Configs": [ # Pairs of IP protocols and ports that the rule should match.
+              {
+                "ipProtocol": "A String", # The IP protocol to which this rule applies. The protocol type is required when creating a traffic classification rule. This value can either be one of the following well known protocol strings (tcp, udp, icmp, esp, ah, ipip, sctp), or the IP protocol number.
+                "ports": [ # An optional list of ports to which this rule applies. This field is only applicable for UDP or TCP protocol. Each entry must be either an integer or a range. If not specified, this rule applies to connections through any port. Example inputs include: ["22"], ["80","443"], and ["12345-12349"].
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+              },
+            ],
+            "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+          },
+          "priority": 42, # An integer indicating the priority of a rule in the list. The priority must be a positive value between 1 and 2147482647. The priority values from 2147482648 to 2147483647 (1000) are reserved for system default network policy rules. Rules are evaluated from highest to lowest priority where 1 is the highest priority and 2147483647 is the lowest priority.
+          "ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated.
+          "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single network policy rule.
+          "targetSecureTags": [ # A list of secure tags that controls which instances the traffic classification rule applies to. If targetSecureTag are specified, then the traffic classification rule applies only to instances in the VPC network that have one of those EFFECTIVE secure tags, if all the targetSecureTag are in INEFFECTIVE state, then this rule will be ignored. targetSecureTag may not be set at the same time as targetServiceAccounts. If neither targetServiceAccounts nor targetSecureTag are specified, the traffic classification rule applies to all instances on the specified network. Maximum number of target label tags allowed is 256.
+            {
+              "name": "A String", # Name of the secure tag, created with TagManager's TagValue API.
+              "state": "A String", # [Output Only] State of the secure tag, either `EFFECTIVE` or `INEFFECTIVE`. A secure tag is `INEFFECTIVE` when it is deleted or its network is deleted.
+            },
+          ],
+          "targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+        },
+      ],
+    },
+  ],
+  "kind": "compute#networkPolicyList", # [Output Only] Type of resource. Always compute#networkPolicyList for lists of network policies.
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # [Output Only] This token allows you to get the next page of results for list requests. If the number of results is larger than maxResults, use the nextPageToken as a value for the query parameter pageToken in the next list request. Subsequent list requests will have their own nextPageToken to continue paging through the results.
+  "warning": { # [Output Only] Informational warning message.
+    "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+    "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+      {
+        "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+        "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+  },
+}
+
+ +
+ list_next() +
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        
+
+ +
+ patch(project, region, networkPolicy, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Patches the specified policy with the data included in the request.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  region: string, Name of the region of this request. (required)
+  networkPolicy: string, Name of the network policy resource to update. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Represents a Network Policy resource.
+  "associations": [ # [Output Only] A list of associations that belong to this network policy.
+    {
+      "attachmentTarget": "A String", # The target that the network policy is attached to.
+      "name": "A String", # The name for an association.
+    },
+  ],
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+  "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  "kind": "compute#networkPolicy", # [Output only] Type of the resource. Always compute#networkPolicy for network policies
+  "name": "A String", # Name of the resource.
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional network policy resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
+  "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all network policy rule tuples. A network policy can not exceed a set number of tuples.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
+  "trafficClassificationRules": [ # [Output Only] A list of traffic classification rules that belong to this policy.
+    { # Represents a traffic classification rule that describes one or more match conditions along with the action to be taken when traffic matches this condition.
+      "action": { # The Action to perform when the client connection triggers the rule.
+        "fieldType": "A String", # The field type could be one of: TRAFFIC_CLASS or DSCP.
+        "fieldValue": 42, # For field_type = TRAFFIC_CLASS: 1 to 6. For field_type = DSCP: 0 to 63.
+        "type": "A String", # Always "apply_traffic_classification" for traffic classification rules.
+      },
+      "description": "A String", # An optional description for this resource.
+      "disabled": True or False, # Denotes whether the network policy rule is disabled. When set to true, the network policy rule is not enforced and traffic behaves as if it did not exist. If this is unspecified, the network policy rule will be enabled.
+      "kind": "compute#networkPolicyTrafficClassificationRule", # [Output only] Type of the resource. Always compute#networkPolicyTrafficClassificationRule for network policy traffic classification rules
+      "match": { # Represents a match condition that incoming traffic is evaluated against. Exactly one field must be specified. # A match condition that outgoing traffic is evaluated against. If it evaluates to true, the corresponding 'action' is enforced.
+        "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "layer4Configs": [ # Pairs of IP protocols and ports that the rule should match.
+          {
+            "ipProtocol": "A String", # The IP protocol to which this rule applies. The protocol type is required when creating a traffic classification rule. This value can either be one of the following well known protocol strings (tcp, udp, icmp, esp, ah, ipip, sctp), or the IP protocol number.
+            "ports": [ # An optional list of ports to which this rule applies. This field is only applicable for UDP or TCP protocol. Each entry must be either an integer or a range. If not specified, this rule applies to connections through any port. Example inputs include: ["22"], ["80","443"], and ["12345-12349"].
+              "A String",
+            ],
+          },
+        ],
+        "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+      },
+      "priority": 42, # An integer indicating the priority of a rule in the list. The priority must be a positive value between 1 and 2147482647. The priority values from 2147482648 to 2147483647 (1000) are reserved for system default network policy rules. Rules are evaluated from highest to lowest priority where 1 is the highest priority and 2147483647 is the lowest priority.
+      "ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated.
+      "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single network policy rule.
+      "targetSecureTags": [ # A list of secure tags that controls which instances the traffic classification rule applies to. If targetSecureTag are specified, then the traffic classification rule applies only to instances in the VPC network that have one of those EFFECTIVE secure tags, if all the targetSecureTag are in INEFFECTIVE state, then this rule will be ignored. targetSecureTag may not be set at the same time as targetServiceAccounts. If neither targetServiceAccounts nor targetSecureTag are specified, the traffic classification rule applies to all instances on the specified network. Maximum number of target label tags allowed is 256.
+        {
+          "name": "A String", # Name of the secure tag, created with TagManager's TagValue API.
+          "state": "A String", # [Output Only] State of the secure tag, either `EFFECTIVE` or `INEFFECTIVE`. A secure tag is `INEFFECTIVE` when it is deleted or its network is deleted.
+        },
+      ],
+      "targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+    },
+  ],
+}
+
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zoneOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources. Note that completed Operation resources have a limited retention period.
+  "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
+  "description": "A String", # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
+  "endTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "error": { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    "errors": [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
+      {
+        "code": "A String", # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
+        "errorDetails": [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
+          {
+            "errorInfo": { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the "pubsub.googleapis.com" API when it is not enabled: { "reason": "API_DISABLED" "domain": "googleapis.com" "metadata": { "resource": "projects/123", "service": "pubsub.googleapis.com" } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { "reason": "STOCKOUT" "domain": "spanner.googleapis.com", "metadata": { "availableRegions": "us-central1,us-east2" } }
+              "domain": "A String", # The logical grouping to which the "reason" belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: "pubsub.googleapis.com". If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is "googleapis.com".
+              "metadatas": { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys must match a regular expression of `a-z+` but should ideally be lowerCamelCase. Also, they must be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than `{"instanceLimit": "100/request"}`, should be returned as, `{"instanceLimitPerRequest": "100"}`, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "reason": "A String", # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
+            },
+            "help": { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn't enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
+              "links": [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
+                { # Describes a URL link.
+                  "description": "A String", # Describes what the link offers.
+                  "url": "A String", # The URL of the link.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            "localizedMessage": { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
+              "locale": "A String", # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: "en-US", "fr-CH", "es-MX"
+              "message": "A String", # The localized error message in the above locale.
+            },
+            "quotaInfo": { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
+              "dimensions": { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "futureLimit": 3.14, # Future quota limit being rolled out. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limit": 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limitName": "A String", # The name of the quota limit.
+              "metricName": "A String", # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
+              "rolloutStatus": "A String", # Rollout status of the future quota limit.
+            },
+          },
+        ],
+        "location": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
+        "message": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "httpErrorMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
+  "httpErrorStatusCode": 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  "insertTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "instancesBulkInsertOperationMetadata": {
+    "perLocationStatus": { # Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "createdVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs successfully created so far.
+        "deletedVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that got deleted during rollback.
+        "failedToCreateVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that started creating but encountered an error.
+        "status": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation status of BulkInsert operation - information if the flow is rolling forward or rolling back.
+        "targetVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs originally planned to be created.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "kind": "compute#operation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
+  "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
+  "operationGroupId": "A String", # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
+  "operationType": "A String", # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
+  "progress": 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
+  "setCommonInstanceMetadataOperationMetadata": { # [Output Only] If the operation is for projects.setCommonInstanceMetadata, this field will contain information on all underlying zonal actions and their state.
+    "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The client operation id.
+    "perLocationOperations": { # [Output Only] Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # [Output Only] If state is `ABANDONED` or `FAILED`, this field is populated.
+          "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+          "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+            {
+              "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+            },
+          ],
+          "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+        },
+        "state": "A String", # [Output Only] Status of the action, which can be one of the following: `PROPAGATING`, `PROPAGATED`, `ABANDONED`, `FAILED`, or `DONE`.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "startTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "status": "A String", # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
+  "statusMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
+  "targetId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
+  "targetLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the disk that the snapshot was created from.
+  "user": "A String", # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com` or `alice_smith_identifier (global/workforcePools/example-com-us-employees)`.
+  "warnings": [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    {
+      "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+      "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+        {
+          "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+          "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+    },
+  ],
+  "zone": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
+}
+
+ +
+ patchTrafficClassificationRule(project, region, networkPolicy, body=None, priority=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Patches a rule of the specified priority.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  region: string, Name of the region of this request. (required)
+  networkPolicy: string, Name of the network policy resource to update. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Represents a traffic classification rule that describes one or more match conditions along with the action to be taken when traffic matches this condition.
+  "action": { # The Action to perform when the client connection triggers the rule.
+    "fieldType": "A String", # The field type could be one of: TRAFFIC_CLASS or DSCP.
+    "fieldValue": 42, # For field_type = TRAFFIC_CLASS: 1 to 6. For field_type = DSCP: 0 to 63.
+    "type": "A String", # Always "apply_traffic_classification" for traffic classification rules.
+  },
+  "description": "A String", # An optional description for this resource.
+  "disabled": True or False, # Denotes whether the network policy rule is disabled. When set to true, the network policy rule is not enforced and traffic behaves as if it did not exist. If this is unspecified, the network policy rule will be enabled.
+  "kind": "compute#networkPolicyTrafficClassificationRule", # [Output only] Type of the resource. Always compute#networkPolicyTrafficClassificationRule for network policy traffic classification rules
+  "match": { # Represents a match condition that incoming traffic is evaluated against. Exactly one field must be specified. # A match condition that outgoing traffic is evaluated against. If it evaluates to true, the corresponding 'action' is enforced.
+    "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
+      "A String",
+    ],
+    "layer4Configs": [ # Pairs of IP protocols and ports that the rule should match.
+      {
+        "ipProtocol": "A String", # The IP protocol to which this rule applies. The protocol type is required when creating a traffic classification rule. This value can either be one of the following well known protocol strings (tcp, udp, icmp, esp, ah, ipip, sctp), or the IP protocol number.
+        "ports": [ # An optional list of ports to which this rule applies. This field is only applicable for UDP or TCP protocol. Each entry must be either an integer or a range. If not specified, this rule applies to connections through any port. Example inputs include: ["22"], ["80","443"], and ["12345-12349"].
+          "A String",
+        ],
+      },
+    ],
+    "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
+      "A String",
+    ],
+  },
+  "priority": 42, # An integer indicating the priority of a rule in the list. The priority must be a positive value between 1 and 2147482647. The priority values from 2147482648 to 2147483647 (1000) are reserved for system default network policy rules. Rules are evaluated from highest to lowest priority where 1 is the highest priority and 2147483647 is the lowest priority.
+  "ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated.
+  "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single network policy rule.
+  "targetSecureTags": [ # A list of secure tags that controls which instances the traffic classification rule applies to. If targetSecureTag are specified, then the traffic classification rule applies only to instances in the VPC network that have one of those EFFECTIVE secure tags, if all the targetSecureTag are in INEFFECTIVE state, then this rule will be ignored. targetSecureTag may not be set at the same time as targetServiceAccounts. If neither targetServiceAccounts nor targetSecureTag are specified, the traffic classification rule applies to all instances on the specified network. Maximum number of target label tags allowed is 256.
+    {
+      "name": "A String", # Name of the secure tag, created with TagManager's TagValue API.
+      "state": "A String", # [Output Only] State of the secure tag, either `EFFECTIVE` or `INEFFECTIVE`. A secure tag is `INEFFECTIVE` when it is deleted or its network is deleted.
+    },
+  ],
+  "targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+}
+
+  priority: integer, The priority of the rule to patch.
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zoneOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources. Note that completed Operation resources have a limited retention period.
+  "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
+  "description": "A String", # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
+  "endTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "error": { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    "errors": [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
+      {
+        "code": "A String", # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
+        "errorDetails": [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
+          {
+            "errorInfo": { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the "pubsub.googleapis.com" API when it is not enabled: { "reason": "API_DISABLED" "domain": "googleapis.com" "metadata": { "resource": "projects/123", "service": "pubsub.googleapis.com" } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { "reason": "STOCKOUT" "domain": "spanner.googleapis.com", "metadata": { "availableRegions": "us-central1,us-east2" } }
+              "domain": "A String", # The logical grouping to which the "reason" belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: "pubsub.googleapis.com". If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is "googleapis.com".
+              "metadatas": { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys must match a regular expression of `a-z+` but should ideally be lowerCamelCase. Also, they must be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than `{"instanceLimit": "100/request"}`, should be returned as, `{"instanceLimitPerRequest": "100"}`, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "reason": "A String", # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
+            },
+            "help": { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn't enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
+              "links": [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
+                { # Describes a URL link.
+                  "description": "A String", # Describes what the link offers.
+                  "url": "A String", # The URL of the link.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            "localizedMessage": { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
+              "locale": "A String", # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: "en-US", "fr-CH", "es-MX"
+              "message": "A String", # The localized error message in the above locale.
+            },
+            "quotaInfo": { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
+              "dimensions": { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "futureLimit": 3.14, # Future quota limit being rolled out. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limit": 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limitName": "A String", # The name of the quota limit.
+              "metricName": "A String", # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
+              "rolloutStatus": "A String", # Rollout status of the future quota limit.
+            },
+          },
+        ],
+        "location": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
+        "message": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "httpErrorMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
+  "httpErrorStatusCode": 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  "insertTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "instancesBulkInsertOperationMetadata": {
+    "perLocationStatus": { # Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "createdVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs successfully created so far.
+        "deletedVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that got deleted during rollback.
+        "failedToCreateVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that started creating but encountered an error.
+        "status": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation status of BulkInsert operation - information if the flow is rolling forward or rolling back.
+        "targetVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs originally planned to be created.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "kind": "compute#operation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
+  "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
+  "operationGroupId": "A String", # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
+  "operationType": "A String", # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
+  "progress": 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
+  "setCommonInstanceMetadataOperationMetadata": { # [Output Only] If the operation is for projects.setCommonInstanceMetadata, this field will contain information on all underlying zonal actions and their state.
+    "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The client operation id.
+    "perLocationOperations": { # [Output Only] Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # [Output Only] If state is `ABANDONED` or `FAILED`, this field is populated.
+          "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+          "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+            {
+              "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+            },
+          ],
+          "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+        },
+        "state": "A String", # [Output Only] Status of the action, which can be one of the following: `PROPAGATING`, `PROPAGATED`, `ABANDONED`, `FAILED`, or `DONE`.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "startTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "status": "A String", # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
+  "statusMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
+  "targetId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
+  "targetLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the disk that the snapshot was created from.
+  "user": "A String", # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com` or `alice_smith_identifier (global/workforcePools/example-com-us-employees)`.
+  "warnings": [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    {
+      "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+      "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+        {
+          "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+          "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+    },
+  ],
+  "zone": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
+}
+
+ +
+ removeAssociation(project, region, networkPolicy, name=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Removes an association for the specified network policy.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  region: string, Name of the region of this request. (required)
+  networkPolicy: string, Name of the network policy resource to update. (required)
+  name: string, Name for the association that will be removed.
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zoneOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources. Note that completed Operation resources have a limited retention period.
+  "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
+  "description": "A String", # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
+  "endTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "error": { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    "errors": [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
+      {
+        "code": "A String", # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
+        "errorDetails": [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
+          {
+            "errorInfo": { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the "pubsub.googleapis.com" API when it is not enabled: { "reason": "API_DISABLED" "domain": "googleapis.com" "metadata": { "resource": "projects/123", "service": "pubsub.googleapis.com" } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { "reason": "STOCKOUT" "domain": "spanner.googleapis.com", "metadata": { "availableRegions": "us-central1,us-east2" } }
+              "domain": "A String", # The logical grouping to which the "reason" belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: "pubsub.googleapis.com". If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is "googleapis.com".
+              "metadatas": { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys must match a regular expression of `a-z+` but should ideally be lowerCamelCase. Also, they must be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than `{"instanceLimit": "100/request"}`, should be returned as, `{"instanceLimitPerRequest": "100"}`, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "reason": "A String", # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
+            },
+            "help": { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn't enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
+              "links": [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
+                { # Describes a URL link.
+                  "description": "A String", # Describes what the link offers.
+                  "url": "A String", # The URL of the link.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            "localizedMessage": { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
+              "locale": "A String", # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: "en-US", "fr-CH", "es-MX"
+              "message": "A String", # The localized error message in the above locale.
+            },
+            "quotaInfo": { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
+              "dimensions": { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "futureLimit": 3.14, # Future quota limit being rolled out. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limit": 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limitName": "A String", # The name of the quota limit.
+              "metricName": "A String", # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
+              "rolloutStatus": "A String", # Rollout status of the future quota limit.
+            },
+          },
+        ],
+        "location": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
+        "message": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "httpErrorMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
+  "httpErrorStatusCode": 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  "insertTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "instancesBulkInsertOperationMetadata": {
+    "perLocationStatus": { # Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "createdVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs successfully created so far.
+        "deletedVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that got deleted during rollback.
+        "failedToCreateVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that started creating but encountered an error.
+        "status": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation status of BulkInsert operation - information if the flow is rolling forward or rolling back.
+        "targetVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs originally planned to be created.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "kind": "compute#operation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
+  "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
+  "operationGroupId": "A String", # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
+  "operationType": "A String", # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
+  "progress": 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
+  "setCommonInstanceMetadataOperationMetadata": { # [Output Only] If the operation is for projects.setCommonInstanceMetadata, this field will contain information on all underlying zonal actions and their state.
+    "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The client operation id.
+    "perLocationOperations": { # [Output Only] Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # [Output Only] If state is `ABANDONED` or `FAILED`, this field is populated.
+          "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+          "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+            {
+              "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+            },
+          ],
+          "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+        },
+        "state": "A String", # [Output Only] Status of the action, which can be one of the following: `PROPAGATING`, `PROPAGATED`, `ABANDONED`, `FAILED`, or `DONE`.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "startTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "status": "A String", # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
+  "statusMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
+  "targetId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
+  "targetLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the disk that the snapshot was created from.
+  "user": "A String", # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com` or `alice_smith_identifier (global/workforcePools/example-com-us-employees)`.
+  "warnings": [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    {
+      "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+      "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+        {
+          "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+          "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+    },
+  ],
+  "zone": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
+}
+
+ +
+ removeTrafficClassificationRule(project, region, networkPolicy, priority=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Deletes a rule of the specified priority.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  region: string, Name of the region of this request. (required)
+  networkPolicy: string, Name of the network policy resource to update. (required)
+  priority: integer, The priority of the rule to remove from the network policy.
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zoneOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources. Note that completed Operation resources have a limited retention period.
+  "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
+  "description": "A String", # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
+  "endTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "error": { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    "errors": [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
+      {
+        "code": "A String", # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
+        "errorDetails": [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
+          {
+            "errorInfo": { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the "pubsub.googleapis.com" API when it is not enabled: { "reason": "API_DISABLED" "domain": "googleapis.com" "metadata": { "resource": "projects/123", "service": "pubsub.googleapis.com" } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { "reason": "STOCKOUT" "domain": "spanner.googleapis.com", "metadata": { "availableRegions": "us-central1,us-east2" } }
+              "domain": "A String", # The logical grouping to which the "reason" belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: "pubsub.googleapis.com". If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is "googleapis.com".
+              "metadatas": { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys must match a regular expression of `a-z+` but should ideally be lowerCamelCase. Also, they must be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than `{"instanceLimit": "100/request"}`, should be returned as, `{"instanceLimitPerRequest": "100"}`, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "reason": "A String", # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
+            },
+            "help": { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn't enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
+              "links": [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
+                { # Describes a URL link.
+                  "description": "A String", # Describes what the link offers.
+                  "url": "A String", # The URL of the link.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            "localizedMessage": { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
+              "locale": "A String", # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: "en-US", "fr-CH", "es-MX"
+              "message": "A String", # The localized error message in the above locale.
+            },
+            "quotaInfo": { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
+              "dimensions": { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "futureLimit": 3.14, # Future quota limit being rolled out. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limit": 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limitName": "A String", # The name of the quota limit.
+              "metricName": "A String", # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
+              "rolloutStatus": "A String", # Rollout status of the future quota limit.
+            },
+          },
+        ],
+        "location": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
+        "message": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "httpErrorMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
+  "httpErrorStatusCode": 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  "insertTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "instancesBulkInsertOperationMetadata": {
+    "perLocationStatus": { # Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "createdVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs successfully created so far.
+        "deletedVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that got deleted during rollback.
+        "failedToCreateVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that started creating but encountered an error.
+        "status": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation status of BulkInsert operation - information if the flow is rolling forward or rolling back.
+        "targetVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs originally planned to be created.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "kind": "compute#operation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
+  "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
+  "operationGroupId": "A String", # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
+  "operationType": "A String", # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
+  "progress": 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
+  "setCommonInstanceMetadataOperationMetadata": { # [Output Only] If the operation is for projects.setCommonInstanceMetadata, this field will contain information on all underlying zonal actions and their state.
+    "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The client operation id.
+    "perLocationOperations": { # [Output Only] Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # [Output Only] If state is `ABANDONED` or `FAILED`, this field is populated.
+          "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+          "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+            {
+              "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+            },
+          ],
+          "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+        },
+        "state": "A String", # [Output Only] Status of the action, which can be one of the following: `PROPAGATING`, `PROPAGATED`, `ABANDONED`, `FAILED`, or `DONE`.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "startTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "status": "A String", # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
+  "statusMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
+  "targetId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
+  "targetLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the disk that the snapshot was created from.
+  "user": "A String", # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com` or `alice_smith_identifier (global/workforcePools/example-com-us-employees)`.
+  "warnings": [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    {
+      "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+      "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+        {
+          "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+          "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+    },
+  ],
+  "zone": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
+}
+
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionSecurityPolicies.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionSecurityPolicies.html index 4d38093053d..9048e827b54 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionSecurityPolicies.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionSecurityPolicies.html @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -280,7 +280,7 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # Type of the redirect action. Possible values are: - GOOGLE_RECAPTCHA: redirect to reCAPTCHA for manual challenge assessment. - EXTERNAL_302: redirect to a different URL via a 302 response. }, "redirectTarget": "A String", # This must be specified for redirect actions. Cannot be specified for any other actions. - "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum managed protection tier required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. + "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum Cloud Armor subscription required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. "ruleNumber": "A String", # Identifier for the rule. This is only unique within the given security policy. This can only be set during rule creation, if rule number is not specified it will be generated by the server. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall security policy rule. "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. This field may only be specified when versioned_expr is set to FIREWALL. @@ -681,7 +681,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -800,7 +800,7 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # Type of the redirect action. Possible values are: - GOOGLE_RECAPTCHA: redirect to reCAPTCHA for manual challenge assessment. - EXTERNAL_302: redirect to a different URL via a 302 response. }, "redirectTarget": "A String", # This must be specified for redirect actions. Cannot be specified for any other actions. - "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum managed protection tier required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. + "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum Cloud Armor subscription required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. "ruleNumber": "A String", # Identifier for the rule. This is only unique within the given security policy. This can only be set during rule creation, if rule number is not specified it will be generated by the server. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall security policy rule. "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. This field may only be specified when versioned_expr is set to FIREWALL. @@ -883,7 +883,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -1002,7 +1002,7 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # Type of the redirect action. Possible values are: - GOOGLE_RECAPTCHA: redirect to reCAPTCHA for manual challenge assessment. - EXTERNAL_302: redirect to a different URL via a 302 response. }, "redirectTarget": "A String", # This must be specified for redirect actions. Cannot be specified for any other actions. - "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum managed protection tier required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. + "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum Cloud Armor subscription required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. "ruleNumber": "A String", # Identifier for the rule. This is only unique within the given security policy. This can only be set during rule creation, if rule number is not specified it will be generated by the server. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall security policy rule. "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. This field may only be specified when versioned_expr is set to FIREWALL. @@ -1149,7 +1149,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -1268,7 +1268,7 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # Type of the redirect action. Possible values are: - GOOGLE_RECAPTCHA: redirect to reCAPTCHA for manual challenge assessment. - EXTERNAL_302: redirect to a different URL via a 302 response. }, "redirectTarget": "A String", # This must be specified for redirect actions. Cannot be specified for any other actions. - "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum managed protection tier required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. + "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum Cloud Armor subscription required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. "ruleNumber": "A String", # Identifier for the rule. This is only unique within the given security policy. This can only be set during rule creation, if rule number is not specified it will be generated by the server. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall security policy rule. "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. This field may only be specified when versioned_expr is set to FIREWALL. @@ -1562,7 +1562,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -1681,7 +1681,7 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # Type of the redirect action. Possible values are: - GOOGLE_RECAPTCHA: redirect to reCAPTCHA for manual challenge assessment. - EXTERNAL_302: redirect to a different URL via a 302 response. }, "redirectTarget": "A String", # This must be specified for redirect actions. Cannot be specified for any other actions. - "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum managed protection tier required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. + "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum Cloud Armor subscription required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. "ruleNumber": "A String", # Identifier for the rule. This is only unique within the given security policy. This can only be set during rule creation, if rule number is not specified it will be generated by the server. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall security policy rule. "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. This field may only be specified when versioned_expr is set to FIREWALL. @@ -1875,7 +1875,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -1994,7 +1994,7 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # Type of the redirect action. Possible values are: - GOOGLE_RECAPTCHA: redirect to reCAPTCHA for manual challenge assessment. - EXTERNAL_302: redirect to a different URL via a 302 response. }, "redirectTarget": "A String", # This must be specified for redirect actions. Cannot be specified for any other actions. - "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum managed protection tier required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. + "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum Cloud Armor subscription required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. "ruleNumber": "A String", # Identifier for the rule. This is only unique within the given security policy. This can only be set during rule creation, if rule number is not specified it will be generated by the server. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall security policy rule. "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. This field may only be specified when versioned_expr is set to FIREWALL. @@ -2190,7 +2190,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -2309,7 +2309,7 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # Type of the redirect action. Possible values are: - GOOGLE_RECAPTCHA: redirect to reCAPTCHA for manual challenge assessment. - EXTERNAL_302: redirect to a different URL via a 302 response. }, "redirectTarget": "A String", # This must be specified for redirect actions. Cannot be specified for any other actions. - "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum managed protection tier required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. + "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum Cloud Armor subscription required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. "ruleNumber": "A String", # Identifier for the rule. This is only unique within the given security policy. This can only be set during rule creation, if rule number is not specified it will be generated by the server. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall security policy rule. "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. This field may only be specified when versioned_expr is set to FIREWALL. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionSnapshots.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionSnapshots.html index ddb1c0fd43e..9eee23f6249 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionSnapshots.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionSnapshots.html @@ -104,6 +104,9 @@

Instance Methods

testIamPermissions(project, region, resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource.

+

+ updateKmsKey(project, region, snapshot, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Rotates the customer-managed encryption key to the latest version for the specified snapshot.

Method Details

close() @@ -1011,4 +1014,130 @@

Method Details

}
+
+ updateKmsKey(project, region, snapshot, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Rotates the customer-managed encryption key to the latest version for the specified snapshot.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  region: string, Name of the region for this request. (required)
+  snapshot: string, Name of the snapshot resource to update. Should conform to RFC1035. (required)
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zoneOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources. Note that completed Operation resources have a limited retention period.
+  "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
+  "description": "A String", # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
+  "endTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "error": { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    "errors": [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
+      {
+        "code": "A String", # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
+        "errorDetails": [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
+          {
+            "errorInfo": { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the "pubsub.googleapis.com" API when it is not enabled: { "reason": "API_DISABLED" "domain": "googleapis.com" "metadata": { "resource": "projects/123", "service": "pubsub.googleapis.com" } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { "reason": "STOCKOUT" "domain": "spanner.googleapis.com", "metadata": { "availableRegions": "us-central1,us-east2" } }
+              "domain": "A String", # The logical grouping to which the "reason" belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: "pubsub.googleapis.com". If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is "googleapis.com".
+              "metadatas": { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys must match a regular expression of `a-z+` but should ideally be lowerCamelCase. Also, they must be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than `{"instanceLimit": "100/request"}`, should be returned as, `{"instanceLimitPerRequest": "100"}`, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "reason": "A String", # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
+            },
+            "help": { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn't enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
+              "links": [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
+                { # Describes a URL link.
+                  "description": "A String", # Describes what the link offers.
+                  "url": "A String", # The URL of the link.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            "localizedMessage": { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
+              "locale": "A String", # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: "en-US", "fr-CH", "es-MX"
+              "message": "A String", # The localized error message in the above locale.
+            },
+            "quotaInfo": { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
+              "dimensions": { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "futureLimit": 3.14, # Future quota limit being rolled out. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limit": 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limitName": "A String", # The name of the quota limit.
+              "metricName": "A String", # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
+              "rolloutStatus": "A String", # Rollout status of the future quota limit.
+            },
+          },
+        ],
+        "location": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
+        "message": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "httpErrorMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
+  "httpErrorStatusCode": 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  "insertTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "instancesBulkInsertOperationMetadata": {
+    "perLocationStatus": { # Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "createdVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs successfully created so far.
+        "deletedVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that got deleted during rollback.
+        "failedToCreateVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that started creating but encountered an error.
+        "status": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation status of BulkInsert operation - information if the flow is rolling forward or rolling back.
+        "targetVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs originally planned to be created.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "kind": "compute#operation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
+  "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
+  "operationGroupId": "A String", # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
+  "operationType": "A String", # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
+  "progress": 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
+  "setCommonInstanceMetadataOperationMetadata": { # [Output Only] If the operation is for projects.setCommonInstanceMetadata, this field will contain information on all underlying zonal actions and their state.
+    "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The client operation id.
+    "perLocationOperations": { # [Output Only] Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # [Output Only] If state is `ABANDONED` or `FAILED`, this field is populated.
+          "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+          "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+            {
+              "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+            },
+          ],
+          "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+        },
+        "state": "A String", # [Output Only] Status of the action, which can be one of the following: `PROPAGATING`, `PROPAGATED`, `ABANDONED`, `FAILED`, or `DONE`.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "startTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "status": "A String", # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
+  "statusMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
+  "targetId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
+  "targetLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the disk that the snapshot was created from.
+  "user": "A String", # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com` or `alice_smith_identifier (global/workforcePools/example-com-us-employees)`.
+  "warnings": [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    {
+      "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+      "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+        {
+          "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+          "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+    },
+  ],
+  "zone": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
+}
+
+ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.routers.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.routers.html index f3fe5bffd01..504e4c1cda9 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.routers.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.routers.html @@ -355,7 +355,7 @@

Method Details

"nccGateway": "A String", # URI of the ncc_gateway to which this router associated. "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs. "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. - "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. "a_key": "A String", }, }, @@ -974,7 +974,7 @@

Method Details

"nccGateway": "A String", # URI of the ncc_gateway to which this router associated. "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs. "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. - "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. "a_key": "A String", }, }, @@ -1693,7 +1693,7 @@

Method Details

"nccGateway": "A String", # URI of the ncc_gateway to which this router associated. "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs. "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. - "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. "a_key": "A String", }, }, @@ -2007,7 +2007,7 @@

Method Details

"nccGateway": "A String", # URI of the ncc_gateway to which this router associated. "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs. "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. - "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. "a_key": "A String", }, }, @@ -2471,7 +2471,7 @@

Method Details

"nccGateway": "A String", # URI of the ncc_gateway to which this router associated. "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs. "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. - "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. "a_key": "A String", }, }, @@ -3071,7 +3071,7 @@

Method Details

"nccGateway": "A String", # URI of the ncc_gateway to which this router associated. "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs. "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. - "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. "a_key": "A String", }, }, @@ -3253,7 +3253,7 @@

Method Details

"nccGateway": "A String", # URI of the ncc_gateway to which this router associated. "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs. "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. - "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. "a_key": "A String", }, }, @@ -3471,7 +3471,7 @@

Method Details

"nccGateway": "A String", # URI of the ncc_gateway to which this router associated. "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs. "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. - "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. "a_key": "A String", }, }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.securityPolicies.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.securityPolicies.html index 29d1d690774..22867c56a31 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.securityPolicies.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.securityPolicies.html @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -291,7 +291,7 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # Type of the redirect action. Possible values are: - GOOGLE_RECAPTCHA: redirect to reCAPTCHA for manual challenge assessment. - EXTERNAL_302: redirect to a different URL via a 302 response. }, "redirectTarget": "A String", # This must be specified for redirect actions. Cannot be specified for any other actions. - "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum managed protection tier required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. + "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum Cloud Armor subscription required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. "ruleNumber": "A String", # Identifier for the rule. This is only unique within the given security policy. This can only be set during rule creation, if rule number is not specified it will be generated by the server. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall security policy rule. "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. This field may only be specified when versioned_expr is set to FIREWALL. @@ -572,7 +572,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -691,7 +691,7 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # Type of the redirect action. Possible values are: - GOOGLE_RECAPTCHA: redirect to reCAPTCHA for manual challenge assessment. - EXTERNAL_302: redirect to a different URL via a 302 response. }, "redirectTarget": "A String", # This must be specified for redirect actions. Cannot be specified for any other actions. - "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum managed protection tier required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. + "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum Cloud Armor subscription required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. "ruleNumber": "A String", # Identifier for the rule. This is only unique within the given security policy. This can only be set during rule creation, if rule number is not specified it will be generated by the server. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall security policy rule. "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. This field may only be specified when versioned_expr is set to FIREWALL. @@ -1032,7 +1032,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -1151,7 +1151,7 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # Type of the redirect action. Possible values are: - GOOGLE_RECAPTCHA: redirect to reCAPTCHA for manual challenge assessment. - EXTERNAL_302: redirect to a different URL via a 302 response. }, "redirectTarget": "A String", # This must be specified for redirect actions. Cannot be specified for any other actions. - "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum managed protection tier required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. + "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum Cloud Armor subscription required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. "ruleNumber": "A String", # Identifier for the rule. This is only unique within the given security policy. This can only be set during rule creation, if rule number is not specified it will be generated by the server. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall security policy rule. "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. This field may only be specified when versioned_expr is set to FIREWALL. @@ -1233,7 +1233,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -1352,7 +1352,7 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # Type of the redirect action. Possible values are: - GOOGLE_RECAPTCHA: redirect to reCAPTCHA for manual challenge assessment. - EXTERNAL_302: redirect to a different URL via a 302 response. }, "redirectTarget": "A String", # This must be specified for redirect actions. Cannot be specified for any other actions. - "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum managed protection tier required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. + "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum Cloud Armor subscription required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. "ruleNumber": "A String", # Identifier for the rule. This is only unique within the given security policy. This can only be set during rule creation, if rule number is not specified it will be generated by the server. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall security policy rule. "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. This field may only be specified when versioned_expr is set to FIREWALL. @@ -1498,7 +1498,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -1617,7 +1617,7 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # Type of the redirect action. Possible values are: - GOOGLE_RECAPTCHA: redirect to reCAPTCHA for manual challenge assessment. - EXTERNAL_302: redirect to a different URL via a 302 response. }, "redirectTarget": "A String", # This must be specified for redirect actions. Cannot be specified for any other actions. - "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum managed protection tier required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. + "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum Cloud Armor subscription required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. "ruleNumber": "A String", # Identifier for the rule. This is only unique within the given security policy. This can only be set during rule creation, if rule number is not specified it will be generated by the server. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall security policy rule. "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. This field may only be specified when versioned_expr is set to FIREWALL. @@ -1910,7 +1910,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -2029,7 +2029,7 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # Type of the redirect action. Possible values are: - GOOGLE_RECAPTCHA: redirect to reCAPTCHA for manual challenge assessment. - EXTERNAL_302: redirect to a different URL via a 302 response. }, "redirectTarget": "A String", # This must be specified for redirect actions. Cannot be specified for any other actions. - "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum managed protection tier required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. + "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum Cloud Armor subscription required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. "ruleNumber": "A String", # Identifier for the rule. This is only unique within the given security policy. This can only be set during rule creation, if rule number is not specified it will be generated by the server. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall security policy rule. "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. This field may only be specified when versioned_expr is set to FIREWALL. @@ -2263,7 +2263,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -2382,7 +2382,7 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # Type of the redirect action. Possible values are: - GOOGLE_RECAPTCHA: redirect to reCAPTCHA for manual challenge assessment. - EXTERNAL_302: redirect to a different URL via a 302 response. }, "redirectTarget": "A String", # This must be specified for redirect actions. Cannot be specified for any other actions. - "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum managed protection tier required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. + "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum Cloud Armor subscription required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. "ruleNumber": "A String", # Identifier for the rule. This is only unique within the given security policy. This can only be set during rule creation, if rule number is not specified it will be generated by the server. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall security policy rule. "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. This field may only be specified when versioned_expr is set to FIREWALL. @@ -2577,7 +2577,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -2696,7 +2696,7 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # Type of the redirect action. Possible values are: - GOOGLE_RECAPTCHA: redirect to reCAPTCHA for manual challenge assessment. - EXTERNAL_302: redirect to a different URL via a 302 response. }, "redirectTarget": "A String", # This must be specified for redirect actions. Cannot be specified for any other actions. - "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum managed protection tier required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. + "ruleManagedProtectionTier": "A String", # [Output Only] The minimum Cloud Armor subscription required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead. "ruleNumber": "A String", # Identifier for the rule. This is only unique within the given security policy. This can only be set during rule creation, if rule number is not specified it will be generated by the server. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall security policy rule. "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. This field may only be specified when versioned_expr is set to FIREWALL. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.serviceAttachments.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.serviceAttachments.html index 54a60f52b0c..7593f142ed5 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.serviceAttachments.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.serviceAttachments.html @@ -142,6 +142,7 @@

Method Details

{ # [Output Only] A connection connected to this service attachment. "consumerNetwork": "A String", # The url of the consumer network. "endpoint": "A String", # The url of a connected endpoint. + "endpointWithId": "A String", # The url of a connected endpoint with resource id. "natIps": [ # NAT IPs of the connected PSC endpoint and those of other endpoints propagated from it. "A String", ], @@ -154,6 +155,7 @@

Method Details

"consumerAcceptLists": [ # Specifies which consumer projects or networks are allowed to connect to the service attachment. Each project or network has a connection limit. A given service attachment can manage connections at either the project or network level. Therefore, both the accept and reject lists for a given service attachment must contain either only projects or only networks or only endpoints. { "connectionLimit": 42, # The value of the limit to set. For endpoint_url, the limit should be no more than 1. + "endpointUrl": "A String", # The URL for the PSC endpoint to accept "networkUrl": "A String", # The network URL for the network to set the limit for. "projectIdOrNum": "A String", # The project id or number for the project to set the limit for. }, @@ -391,6 +393,7 @@

Method Details

{ # [Output Only] A connection connected to this service attachment. "consumerNetwork": "A String", # The url of the consumer network. "endpoint": "A String", # The url of a connected endpoint. + "endpointWithId": "A String", # The url of a connected endpoint with resource id. "natIps": [ # NAT IPs of the connected PSC endpoint and those of other endpoints propagated from it. "A String", ], @@ -403,6 +406,7 @@

Method Details

"consumerAcceptLists": [ # Specifies which consumer projects or networks are allowed to connect to the service attachment. Each project or network has a connection limit. A given service attachment can manage connections at either the project or network level. Therefore, both the accept and reject lists for a given service attachment must contain either only projects or only networks or only endpoints. { "connectionLimit": 42, # The value of the limit to set. For endpoint_url, the limit should be no more than 1. + "endpointUrl": "A String", # The URL for the PSC endpoint to accept "networkUrl": "A String", # The network URL for the network to set the limit for. "projectIdOrNum": "A String", # The project id or number for the project to set the limit for. }, @@ -508,6 +512,7 @@

Method Details

{ # [Output Only] A connection connected to this service attachment. "consumerNetwork": "A String", # The url of the consumer network. "endpoint": "A String", # The url of a connected endpoint. + "endpointWithId": "A String", # The url of a connected endpoint with resource id. "natIps": [ # NAT IPs of the connected PSC endpoint and those of other endpoints propagated from it. "A String", ], @@ -520,6 +525,7 @@

Method Details

"consumerAcceptLists": [ # Specifies which consumer projects or networks are allowed to connect to the service attachment. Each project or network has a connection limit. A given service attachment can manage connections at either the project or network level. Therefore, both the accept and reject lists for a given service attachment must contain either only projects or only networks or only endpoints. { "connectionLimit": 42, # The value of the limit to set. For endpoint_url, the limit should be no more than 1. + "endpointUrl": "A String", # The URL for the PSC endpoint to accept "networkUrl": "A String", # The network URL for the network to set the limit for. "projectIdOrNum": "A String", # The project id or number for the project to set the limit for. }, @@ -705,6 +711,7 @@

Method Details

{ # [Output Only] A connection connected to this service attachment. "consumerNetwork": "A String", # The url of the consumer network. "endpoint": "A String", # The url of a connected endpoint. + "endpointWithId": "A String", # The url of a connected endpoint with resource id. "natIps": [ # NAT IPs of the connected PSC endpoint and those of other endpoints propagated from it. "A String", ], @@ -717,6 +724,7 @@

Method Details

"consumerAcceptLists": [ # Specifies which consumer projects or networks are allowed to connect to the service attachment. Each project or network has a connection limit. A given service attachment can manage connections at either the project or network level. Therefore, both the accept and reject lists for a given service attachment must contain either only projects or only networks or only endpoints. { "connectionLimit": 42, # The value of the limit to set. For endpoint_url, the limit should be no more than 1. + "endpointUrl": "A String", # The URL for the PSC endpoint to accept "networkUrl": "A String", # The network URL for the network to set the limit for. "projectIdOrNum": "A String", # The project id or number for the project to set the limit for. }, @@ -802,6 +810,7 @@

Method Details

{ # [Output Only] A connection connected to this service attachment. "consumerNetwork": "A String", # The url of the consumer network. "endpoint": "A String", # The url of a connected endpoint. + "endpointWithId": "A String", # The url of a connected endpoint with resource id. "natIps": [ # NAT IPs of the connected PSC endpoint and those of other endpoints propagated from it. "A String", ], @@ -814,6 +823,7 @@

Method Details

"consumerAcceptLists": [ # Specifies which consumer projects or networks are allowed to connect to the service attachment. Each project or network has a connection limit. A given service attachment can manage connections at either the project or network level. Therefore, both the accept and reject lists for a given service attachment must contain either only projects or only networks or only endpoints. { "connectionLimit": 42, # The value of the limit to set. For endpoint_url, the limit should be no more than 1. + "endpointUrl": "A String", # The URL for the PSC endpoint to accept "networkUrl": "A String", # The network URL for the network to set the limit for. "projectIdOrNum": "A String", # The project id or number for the project to set the limit for. }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.snapshots.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.snapshots.html index 8407ef9c7e6..f876bd8000d 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.snapshots.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.snapshots.html @@ -110,6 +110,9 @@

Instance Methods

testIamPermissions(project, resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource.

+

+ updateKmsKey(project, snapshot, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Rotates the customer-managed encryption key to the latest version for the specified snapshot.

Method Details

aggregatedList(project, filter=None, includeAllScopes=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, serviceProjectNumber=None, x__xgafv=None) @@ -1166,4 +1169,129 @@

Method Details

}
+
+ updateKmsKey(project, snapshot, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Rotates the customer-managed encryption key to the latest version for the specified snapshot.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  snapshot: string, Name of the snapshot resource to update. Should conform to RFC1035. (required)
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zoneOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources. Note that completed Operation resources have a limited retention period.
+  "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
+  "description": "A String", # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
+  "endTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "error": { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    "errors": [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
+      {
+        "code": "A String", # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
+        "errorDetails": [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
+          {
+            "errorInfo": { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the "pubsub.googleapis.com" API when it is not enabled: { "reason": "API_DISABLED" "domain": "googleapis.com" "metadata": { "resource": "projects/123", "service": "pubsub.googleapis.com" } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { "reason": "STOCKOUT" "domain": "spanner.googleapis.com", "metadata": { "availableRegions": "us-central1,us-east2" } }
+              "domain": "A String", # The logical grouping to which the "reason" belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: "pubsub.googleapis.com". If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is "googleapis.com".
+              "metadatas": { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys must match a regular expression of `a-z+` but should ideally be lowerCamelCase. Also, they must be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than `{"instanceLimit": "100/request"}`, should be returned as, `{"instanceLimitPerRequest": "100"}`, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "reason": "A String", # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
+            },
+            "help": { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn't enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
+              "links": [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
+                { # Describes a URL link.
+                  "description": "A String", # Describes what the link offers.
+                  "url": "A String", # The URL of the link.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            "localizedMessage": { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
+              "locale": "A String", # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: "en-US", "fr-CH", "es-MX"
+              "message": "A String", # The localized error message in the above locale.
+            },
+            "quotaInfo": { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
+              "dimensions": { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "futureLimit": 3.14, # Future quota limit being rolled out. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limit": 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limitName": "A String", # The name of the quota limit.
+              "metricName": "A String", # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
+              "rolloutStatus": "A String", # Rollout status of the future quota limit.
+            },
+          },
+        ],
+        "location": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
+        "message": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "httpErrorMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
+  "httpErrorStatusCode": 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  "insertTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "instancesBulkInsertOperationMetadata": {
+    "perLocationStatus": { # Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "createdVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs successfully created so far.
+        "deletedVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that got deleted during rollback.
+        "failedToCreateVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that started creating but encountered an error.
+        "status": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation status of BulkInsert operation - information if the flow is rolling forward or rolling back.
+        "targetVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs originally planned to be created.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "kind": "compute#operation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
+  "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
+  "operationGroupId": "A String", # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
+  "operationType": "A String", # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
+  "progress": 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
+  "setCommonInstanceMetadataOperationMetadata": { # [Output Only] If the operation is for projects.setCommonInstanceMetadata, this field will contain information on all underlying zonal actions and their state.
+    "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The client operation id.
+    "perLocationOperations": { # [Output Only] Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # [Output Only] If state is `ABANDONED` or `FAILED`, this field is populated.
+          "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+          "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+            {
+              "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+            },
+          ],
+          "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+        },
+        "state": "A String", # [Output Only] Status of the action, which can be one of the following: `PROPAGATING`, `PROPAGATED`, `ABANDONED`, `FAILED`, or `DONE`.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "startTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "status": "A String", # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
+  "statusMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
+  "targetId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
+  "targetLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the disk that the snapshot was created from.
+  "user": "A String", # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com` or `alice_smith_identifier (global/workforcePools/example-com-us-employees)`.
+  "warnings": [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    {
+      "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+      "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+        {
+          "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+          "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+    },
+  ],
+  "zone": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
+}
+
+ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.wireGroups.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.wireGroups.html index 16a8ed6e584..13de1188bcc 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.wireGroups.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.wireGroups.html @@ -283,7 +283,7 @@

Method Details

"a_key": { # Optional settings for individual wires. Allows wire-level control that can be useful for migration purposes. If you use this field, you opt-out of the SLA for the wire group. "adminEnabled": True or False, # Indicates whether the wire is enabled. When false, the wire is disabled. When true and when the wire group of the wire is also enabled, the wire is enabled. Defaults to true. "wirePropertyOverrides": { # The properties of a wire. # The overridden properties for the wire. Any properties that are not overridden are omitted from the object. Review the following guidelines: - If you apply wire overrides to a wire and its wire group bandwidth configuration is set to `SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP`, the `meteredBandwidth` and `unmeteredBandwidth` properties must not differ from the wire group. - Overrides generate a `configurationNotice`. Ensure that differences in wire configuration are temporary. An example use case for wire overrides is slowly rolling out configuration changes to individual wires in a wire group. - "bandwidthAllocation": "A String", # The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. For example, with a four-wire box-and-cross group, when one Interconnect connection is down, the unmetered bandwidth of the two down wires is reallocated to the remaining up wires. + "bandwidthAllocation": "A String", # The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: this is the default behavior, which configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. "bandwidthMetered": "A String", # The metered bandwidth in Gigabits per second, using decimal units. `10` is 10 Gbps, `100` is 100 Gbps. The default value is `0`. You can specify unlimited bandwidth by entering `-1`. However, actual data transfer is limited by the port speed. "bandwidthUnmetered": "A String", # The unmetered bandwidth in Gigabits per second, using decimal units. `10` is 10 Gbps, `100` is 100 Gbps. "faultResponse": "A String", # Response when a fault is detected in a pseudowire: - NONE: default. - DISABLE_PORT: set the port line protocol down when inline probes detect a fault. This setting is only permitted on port mode pseudowires. @@ -292,7 +292,7 @@

Method Details

}, }, "wireProperties": { # The properties of a wire. # Properties for all wires in the wire group. - "bandwidthAllocation": "A String", # The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. For example, with a four-wire box-and-cross group, when one Interconnect connection is down, the unmetered bandwidth of the two down wires is reallocated to the remaining up wires. + "bandwidthAllocation": "A String", # The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: this is the default behavior, which configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. "bandwidthMetered": "A String", # The metered bandwidth in Gigabits per second, using decimal units. `10` is 10 Gbps, `100` is 100 Gbps. The default value is `0`. You can specify unlimited bandwidth by entering `-1`. However, actual data transfer is limited by the port speed. "bandwidthUnmetered": "A String", # The unmetered bandwidth in Gigabits per second, using decimal units. `10` is 10 Gbps, `100` is 100 Gbps. "faultResponse": "A String", # Response when a fault is detected in a pseudowire: - NONE: default. - DISABLE_PORT: set the port line protocol down when inline probes detect a fault. This setting is only permitted on port mode pseudowires. @@ -309,7 +309,7 @@

Method Details

], "label": "A String", # [Output Only] A label that identifies the wire. The format of this label combines the existing labels of the wire group endpoints and Interconnect connections used by this wire in alphabetical order as follows: `ENDPOINT_A+CONNECTION_A1,ENDPOINT_B+CONNECTION_B1`, where: - ENDPOINT_A and ENDPOINT_B: are the labels that you entered as map keys when you specified the wire group endpoint objects. - CONNECTION_A1 and CONNECTION_B1: are the labels that you entered as map keys when you specified the wire group Interconnect objects. "wireProperties": { # The properties of a wire. # [Output Only] Properties of the wire. - "bandwidthAllocation": "A String", # The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. For example, with a four-wire box-and-cross group, when one Interconnect connection is down, the unmetered bandwidth of the two down wires is reallocated to the remaining up wires. + "bandwidthAllocation": "A String", # The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: this is the default behavior, which configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. "bandwidthMetered": "A String", # The metered bandwidth in Gigabits per second, using decimal units. `10` is 10 Gbps, `100` is 100 Gbps. The default value is `0`. You can specify unlimited bandwidth by entering `-1`. However, actual data transfer is limited by the port speed. "bandwidthUnmetered": "A String", # The unmetered bandwidth in Gigabits per second, using decimal units. `10` is 10 Gbps, `100` is 100 Gbps. "faultResponse": "A String", # Response when a fault is detected in a pseudowire: - NONE: default. - DISABLE_PORT: set the port line protocol down when inline probes detect a fault. This setting is only permitted on port mode pseudowires. @@ -370,7 +370,7 @@

Method Details

"a_key": { # Optional settings for individual wires. Allows wire-level control that can be useful for migration purposes. If you use this field, you opt-out of the SLA for the wire group. "adminEnabled": True or False, # Indicates whether the wire is enabled. When false, the wire is disabled. When true and when the wire group of the wire is also enabled, the wire is enabled. Defaults to true. "wirePropertyOverrides": { # The properties of a wire. # The overridden properties for the wire. Any properties that are not overridden are omitted from the object. Review the following guidelines: - If you apply wire overrides to a wire and its wire group bandwidth configuration is set to `SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP`, the `meteredBandwidth` and `unmeteredBandwidth` properties must not differ from the wire group. - Overrides generate a `configurationNotice`. Ensure that differences in wire configuration are temporary. An example use case for wire overrides is slowly rolling out configuration changes to individual wires in a wire group. - "bandwidthAllocation": "A String", # The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. For example, with a four-wire box-and-cross group, when one Interconnect connection is down, the unmetered bandwidth of the two down wires is reallocated to the remaining up wires. + "bandwidthAllocation": "A String", # The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: this is the default behavior, which configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. "bandwidthMetered": "A String", # The metered bandwidth in Gigabits per second, using decimal units. `10` is 10 Gbps, `100` is 100 Gbps. The default value is `0`. You can specify unlimited bandwidth by entering `-1`. However, actual data transfer is limited by the port speed. "bandwidthUnmetered": "A String", # The unmetered bandwidth in Gigabits per second, using decimal units. `10` is 10 Gbps, `100` is 100 Gbps. "faultResponse": "A String", # Response when a fault is detected in a pseudowire: - NONE: default. - DISABLE_PORT: set the port line protocol down when inline probes detect a fault. This setting is only permitted on port mode pseudowires. @@ -379,7 +379,7 @@

Method Details

}, }, "wireProperties": { # The properties of a wire. # Properties for all wires in the wire group. - "bandwidthAllocation": "A String", # The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. For example, with a four-wire box-and-cross group, when one Interconnect connection is down, the unmetered bandwidth of the two down wires is reallocated to the remaining up wires. + "bandwidthAllocation": "A String", # The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: this is the default behavior, which configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. "bandwidthMetered": "A String", # The metered bandwidth in Gigabits per second, using decimal units. `10` is 10 Gbps, `100` is 100 Gbps. The default value is `0`. You can specify unlimited bandwidth by entering `-1`. However, actual data transfer is limited by the port speed. "bandwidthUnmetered": "A String", # The unmetered bandwidth in Gigabits per second, using decimal units. `10` is 10 Gbps, `100` is 100 Gbps. "faultResponse": "A String", # Response when a fault is detected in a pseudowire: - NONE: default. - DISABLE_PORT: set the port line protocol down when inline probes detect a fault. This setting is only permitted on port mode pseudowires. @@ -396,7 +396,7 @@

Method Details

], "label": "A String", # [Output Only] A label that identifies the wire. The format of this label combines the existing labels of the wire group endpoints and Interconnect connections used by this wire in alphabetical order as follows: `ENDPOINT_A+CONNECTION_A1,ENDPOINT_B+CONNECTION_B1`, where: - ENDPOINT_A and ENDPOINT_B: are the labels that you entered as map keys when you specified the wire group endpoint objects. - CONNECTION_A1 and CONNECTION_B1: are the labels that you entered as map keys when you specified the wire group Interconnect objects. "wireProperties": { # The properties of a wire. # [Output Only] Properties of the wire. - "bandwidthAllocation": "A String", # The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. For example, with a four-wire box-and-cross group, when one Interconnect connection is down, the unmetered bandwidth of the two down wires is reallocated to the remaining up wires. + "bandwidthAllocation": "A String", # The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: this is the default behavior, which configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. "bandwidthMetered": "A String", # The metered bandwidth in Gigabits per second, using decimal units. `10` is 10 Gbps, `100` is 100 Gbps. The default value is `0`. You can specify unlimited bandwidth by entering `-1`. However, actual data transfer is limited by the port speed. "bandwidthUnmetered": "A String", # The unmetered bandwidth in Gigabits per second, using decimal units. `10` is 10 Gbps, `100` is 100 Gbps. "faultResponse": "A String", # Response when a fault is detected in a pseudowire: - NONE: default. - DISABLE_PORT: set the port line protocol down when inline probes detect a fault. This setting is only permitted on port mode pseudowires. @@ -589,7 +589,7 @@

Method Details

"a_key": { # Optional settings for individual wires. Allows wire-level control that can be useful for migration purposes. If you use this field, you opt-out of the SLA for the wire group. "adminEnabled": True or False, # Indicates whether the wire is enabled. When false, the wire is disabled. When true and when the wire group of the wire is also enabled, the wire is enabled. Defaults to true. "wirePropertyOverrides": { # The properties of a wire. # The overridden properties for the wire. Any properties that are not overridden are omitted from the object. Review the following guidelines: - If you apply wire overrides to a wire and its wire group bandwidth configuration is set to `SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP`, the `meteredBandwidth` and `unmeteredBandwidth` properties must not differ from the wire group. - Overrides generate a `configurationNotice`. Ensure that differences in wire configuration are temporary. An example use case for wire overrides is slowly rolling out configuration changes to individual wires in a wire group. - "bandwidthAllocation": "A String", # The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. For example, with a four-wire box-and-cross group, when one Interconnect connection is down, the unmetered bandwidth of the two down wires is reallocated to the remaining up wires. + "bandwidthAllocation": "A String", # The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: this is the default behavior, which configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. "bandwidthMetered": "A String", # The metered bandwidth in Gigabits per second, using decimal units. `10` is 10 Gbps, `100` is 100 Gbps. The default value is `0`. You can specify unlimited bandwidth by entering `-1`. However, actual data transfer is limited by the port speed. "bandwidthUnmetered": "A String", # The unmetered bandwidth in Gigabits per second, using decimal units. `10` is 10 Gbps, `100` is 100 Gbps. "faultResponse": "A String", # Response when a fault is detected in a pseudowire: - NONE: default. - DISABLE_PORT: set the port line protocol down when inline probes detect a fault. This setting is only permitted on port mode pseudowires. @@ -598,7 +598,7 @@

Method Details

}, }, "wireProperties": { # The properties of a wire. # Properties for all wires in the wire group. - "bandwidthAllocation": "A String", # The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. For example, with a four-wire box-and-cross group, when one Interconnect connection is down, the unmetered bandwidth of the two down wires is reallocated to the remaining up wires. + "bandwidthAllocation": "A String", # The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: this is the default behavior, which configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. "bandwidthMetered": "A String", # The metered bandwidth in Gigabits per second, using decimal units. `10` is 10 Gbps, `100` is 100 Gbps. The default value is `0`. You can specify unlimited bandwidth by entering `-1`. However, actual data transfer is limited by the port speed. "bandwidthUnmetered": "A String", # The unmetered bandwidth in Gigabits per second, using decimal units. `10` is 10 Gbps, `100` is 100 Gbps. "faultResponse": "A String", # Response when a fault is detected in a pseudowire: - NONE: default. - DISABLE_PORT: set the port line protocol down when inline probes detect a fault. This setting is only permitted on port mode pseudowires. @@ -615,7 +615,7 @@

Method Details

], "label": "A String", # [Output Only] A label that identifies the wire. The format of this label combines the existing labels of the wire group endpoints and Interconnect connections used by this wire in alphabetical order as follows: `ENDPOINT_A+CONNECTION_A1,ENDPOINT_B+CONNECTION_B1`, where: - ENDPOINT_A and ENDPOINT_B: are the labels that you entered as map keys when you specified the wire group endpoint objects. - CONNECTION_A1 and CONNECTION_B1: are the labels that you entered as map keys when you specified the wire group Interconnect objects. "wireProperties": { # The properties of a wire. # [Output Only] Properties of the wire. - "bandwidthAllocation": "A String", # The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. For example, with a four-wire box-and-cross group, when one Interconnect connection is down, the unmetered bandwidth of the two down wires is reallocated to the remaining up wires. + "bandwidthAllocation": "A String", # The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: this is the default behavior, which configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. "bandwidthMetered": "A String", # The metered bandwidth in Gigabits per second, using decimal units. `10` is 10 Gbps, `100` is 100 Gbps. The default value is `0`. You can specify unlimited bandwidth by entering `-1`. However, actual data transfer is limited by the port speed. "bandwidthUnmetered": "A String", # The unmetered bandwidth in Gigabits per second, using decimal units. `10` is 10 Gbps, `100` is 100 Gbps. "faultResponse": "A String", # Response when a fault is detected in a pseudowire: - NONE: default. - DISABLE_PORT: set the port line protocol down when inline probes detect a fault. This setting is only permitted on port mode pseudowires. @@ -709,7 +709,7 @@

Method Details

"a_key": { # Optional settings for individual wires. Allows wire-level control that can be useful for migration purposes. If you use this field, you opt-out of the SLA for the wire group. "adminEnabled": True or False, # Indicates whether the wire is enabled. When false, the wire is disabled. When true and when the wire group of the wire is also enabled, the wire is enabled. Defaults to true. "wirePropertyOverrides": { # The properties of a wire. # The overridden properties for the wire. Any properties that are not overridden are omitted from the object. Review the following guidelines: - If you apply wire overrides to a wire and its wire group bandwidth configuration is set to `SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP`, the `meteredBandwidth` and `unmeteredBandwidth` properties must not differ from the wire group. - Overrides generate a `configurationNotice`. Ensure that differences in wire configuration are temporary. An example use case for wire overrides is slowly rolling out configuration changes to individual wires in a wire group. - "bandwidthAllocation": "A String", # The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. For example, with a four-wire box-and-cross group, when one Interconnect connection is down, the unmetered bandwidth of the two down wires is reallocated to the remaining up wires. + "bandwidthAllocation": "A String", # The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: this is the default behavior, which configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. "bandwidthMetered": "A String", # The metered bandwidth in Gigabits per second, using decimal units. `10` is 10 Gbps, `100` is 100 Gbps. The default value is `0`. You can specify unlimited bandwidth by entering `-1`. However, actual data transfer is limited by the port speed. "bandwidthUnmetered": "A String", # The unmetered bandwidth in Gigabits per second, using decimal units. `10` is 10 Gbps, `100` is 100 Gbps. "faultResponse": "A String", # Response when a fault is detected in a pseudowire: - NONE: default. - DISABLE_PORT: set the port line protocol down when inline probes detect a fault. This setting is only permitted on port mode pseudowires. @@ -718,7 +718,7 @@

Method Details

}, }, "wireProperties": { # The properties of a wire. # Properties for all wires in the wire group. - "bandwidthAllocation": "A String", # The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. For example, with a four-wire box-and-cross group, when one Interconnect connection is down, the unmetered bandwidth of the two down wires is reallocated to the remaining up wires. + "bandwidthAllocation": "A String", # The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: this is the default behavior, which configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. "bandwidthMetered": "A String", # The metered bandwidth in Gigabits per second, using decimal units. `10` is 10 Gbps, `100` is 100 Gbps. The default value is `0`. You can specify unlimited bandwidth by entering `-1`. However, actual data transfer is limited by the port speed. "bandwidthUnmetered": "A String", # The unmetered bandwidth in Gigabits per second, using decimal units. `10` is 10 Gbps, `100` is 100 Gbps. "faultResponse": "A String", # Response when a fault is detected in a pseudowire: - NONE: default. - DISABLE_PORT: set the port line protocol down when inline probes detect a fault. This setting is only permitted on port mode pseudowires. @@ -735,7 +735,7 @@

Method Details

], "label": "A String", # [Output Only] A label that identifies the wire. The format of this label combines the existing labels of the wire group endpoints and Interconnect connections used by this wire in alphabetical order as follows: `ENDPOINT_A+CONNECTION_A1,ENDPOINT_B+CONNECTION_B1`, where: - ENDPOINT_A and ENDPOINT_B: are the labels that you entered as map keys when you specified the wire group endpoint objects. - CONNECTION_A1 and CONNECTION_B1: are the labels that you entered as map keys when you specified the wire group Interconnect objects. "wireProperties": { # The properties of a wire. # [Output Only] Properties of the wire. - "bandwidthAllocation": "A String", # The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. For example, with a four-wire box-and-cross group, when one Interconnect connection is down, the unmetered bandwidth of the two down wires is reallocated to the remaining up wires. + "bandwidthAllocation": "A String", # The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: this is the default behavior, which configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. "bandwidthMetered": "A String", # The metered bandwidth in Gigabits per second, using decimal units. `10` is 10 Gbps, `100` is 100 Gbps. The default value is `0`. You can specify unlimited bandwidth by entering `-1`. However, actual data transfer is limited by the port speed. "bandwidthUnmetered": "A String", # The unmetered bandwidth in Gigabits per second, using decimal units. `10` is 10 Gbps, `100` is 100 Gbps. "faultResponse": "A String", # Response when a fault is detected in a pseudowire: - NONE: default. - DISABLE_PORT: set the port line protocol down when inline probes detect a fault. This setting is only permitted on port mode pseudowires. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.zoneQueuedResources.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.zoneQueuedResources.html index a85f8b6ba0f..334db930cf0 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.zoneQueuedResources.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.zoneQueuedResources.html @@ -550,6 +550,10 @@

Method Details

"discardLocalSsd": True or False, # If true, the contents of any attached Local SSD disks will be discarded else, the Local SSD data will be preserved when the instance is stopped at the end of the run duration/termination time. }, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. + "preemptionNoticeDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the Metadata Service preemption notice duration before the GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off signal is triggered for Spot VMs only. If not specified, there will be no wait before the G2 Soft Off signal is triggered. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. "shutdownTimeout": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # DEPRECATED: please use skipGuestOsShutdown. Timeout between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off during shutdown operation of VM. For Standard VMs values between 0s and 120s are allowed. For Spot and Preemptible VMs supported values are between 0s and 30s. If no value is specified for shutdownDuration, default values are 90s for Standard VMs and 30s for Spot/Preemptible VMs. "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. @@ -1432,6 +1436,10 @@

Method Details

"discardLocalSsd": True or False, # If true, the contents of any attached Local SSD disks will be discarded else, the Local SSD data will be preserved when the instance is stopped at the end of the run duration/termination time. }, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. + "preemptionNoticeDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the Metadata Service preemption notice duration before the GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off signal is triggered for Spot VMs only. If not specified, there will be no wait before the G2 Soft Off signal is triggered. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. "shutdownTimeout": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # DEPRECATED: please use skipGuestOsShutdown. Timeout between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off during shutdown operation of VM. For Standard VMs values between 0s and 120s are allowed. For Spot and Preemptible VMs supported values are between 0s and 30s. If no value is specified for shutdownDuration, default values are 90s for Standard VMs and 30s for Spot/Preemptible VMs. "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. @@ -2007,6 +2015,10 @@

Method Details

"discardLocalSsd": True or False, # If true, the contents of any attached Local SSD disks will be discarded else, the Local SSD data will be preserved when the instance is stopped at the end of the run duration/termination time. }, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. + "preemptionNoticeDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the Metadata Service preemption notice duration before the GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off signal is triggered for Spot VMs only. If not specified, there will be no wait before the G2 Soft Off signal is triggered. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. "shutdownTimeout": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # DEPRECATED: please use skipGuestOsShutdown. Timeout between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off during shutdown operation of VM. For Standard VMs values between 0s and 120s are allowed. For Spot and Preemptible VMs supported values are between 0s and 30s. If no value is specified for shutdownDuration, default values are 90s for Standard VMs and 30s for Spot/Preemptible VMs. "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. @@ -2712,6 +2724,10 @@

Method Details

"discardLocalSsd": True or False, # If true, the contents of any attached Local SSD disks will be discarded else, the Local SSD data will be preserved when the instance is stopped at the end of the run duration/termination time. }, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. + "preemptionNoticeDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Specifies the Metadata Service preemption notice duration before the GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off signal is triggered for Spot VMs only. If not specified, there will be no wait before the G2 Soft Off signal is triggered. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. "shutdownTimeout": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # DEPRECATED: please use skipGuestOsShutdown. Timeout between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off during shutdown operation of VM. For Standard VMs values between 0s and 120s are allowed. For Spot and Preemptible VMs supported values are between 0s and 30s. If no value is specified for shutdownDuration, default values are 90s for Standard VMs and 30s for Spot/Preemptible VMs. "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.backendBuckets.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.backendBuckets.html index 82e3581cda4..3aee86cb497 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.backendBuckets.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.backendBuckets.html @@ -544,7 +544,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -662,7 +662,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -860,7 +860,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -957,7 +957,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -1070,7 +1070,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -1518,7 +1518,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.backendServices.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.backendServices.html index ada00c40c04..b008d5135f5 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.backendServices.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.backendServices.html @@ -353,7 +353,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -935,7 +935,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -1276,7 +1276,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -1580,7 +1580,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -1987,7 +1987,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -2293,7 +2293,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -2615,7 +2615,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -3403,7 +3403,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.firewallPolicies.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.firewallPolicies.html index 3fc6d9c145e..5c3251ee11d 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.firewallPolicies.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.firewallPolicies.html @@ -356,6 +356,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -368,6 +371,7 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. } @@ -561,6 +565,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -573,6 +580,7 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. } @@ -1042,6 +1050,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -1054,10 +1065,12 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. }, ], "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies. + "policySource": "A String", # [Output Only] Source of this Firewall Policy. USER_DEFINED if created by a Cloud user, or SYSTEM if created by managed services like GKE. "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used. "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples. @@ -1126,6 +1139,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -1138,6 +1154,7 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. }, ], @@ -1299,6 +1316,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -1311,6 +1331,7 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. } @@ -1394,6 +1415,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -1406,6 +1430,7 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. } @@ -1501,6 +1526,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -1513,10 +1541,12 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. }, ], "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies. + "policySource": "A String", # [Output Only] Source of this Firewall Policy. USER_DEFINED if created by a Cloud user, or SYSTEM if created by managed services like GKE. "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used. "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples. @@ -1585,6 +1615,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -1597,6 +1630,7 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. }, ], @@ -1828,6 +1862,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -1840,10 +1877,12 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. }, ], "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies. + "policySource": "A String", # [Output Only] Source of this Firewall Policy. USER_DEFINED if created by a Cloud user, or SYSTEM if created by managed services like GKE. "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used. "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples. @@ -1912,6 +1951,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -1924,6 +1966,7 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. }, ], @@ -2206,6 +2249,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -2218,10 +2264,12 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. }, ], "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies. + "policySource": "A String", # [Output Only] Source of this Firewall Policy. USER_DEFINED if created by a Cloud user, or SYSTEM if created by managed services like GKE. "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used. "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples. @@ -2290,6 +2338,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -2302,6 +2353,7 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. }, ], @@ -2500,6 +2552,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -2512,6 +2567,7 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. } @@ -2706,6 +2762,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -2718,6 +2777,7 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. } diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.futureReservations.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.futureReservations.html index ea77458863f..c42200ee79a 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.futureReservations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.futureReservations.html @@ -134,6 +134,9 @@

Method Details

"futureReservations": [ # A list of future reservations contained in this scope. { "aggregateReservation": { # This reservation type is specified by total resource amounts (e.g. total count of CPUs) and can account for multiple instance SKUs. In other words, one can create instances of varying shapes against this reservation. # Aggregate reservation details for the future reservation. + "hostCount": 42, # Count of reserved hosts of specified VM family. The host has fixed number of accelerators based on the accelerator/vm-family selected. + "inUseHostCount": 42, # Number of hosts currently in use. If there is one or more Instances running on the host, it is considered in use. + "inUseInstanceCount": 42, # Number of instances currently in use in this reservation. "inUseResources": [ # [Output only] List of resources currently in use. { "accelerator": { # Properties of accelerator resources in this reservation. @@ -173,6 +176,7 @@

Method Details

"name": "A String", # The name of the resource, provided by the client when initially creating the resource. The resource name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash. "namePrefix": "A String", # Name prefix for the reservations to be created at the time of delivery. The name prefix must comply with RFC1035. Maximum allowed length for name prefix is 20. Automatically created reservations name format will be -date-####. "planningStatus": "A String", # Planning state before being submitted for evaluation + "protectionTier": "A String", # Protection tier for the workload. "reservationMode": "A String", # The reservation mode which determines reservation-termination behavior and expected pricing. "reservationName": "A String", # Name of reservations where the capacity is provisioned at the time of delivery of future reservations. If the reservation with the given name does not exist already, it is created automatically at the time of Approval with INACTIVE state till specified start-time. Either provide the reservation_name or a name_prefix. "schedulingType": "A String", # Maintenance information for this reservation @@ -612,6 +616,9 @@

Method Details

{ "aggregateReservation": { # This reservation type is specified by total resource amounts (e.g. total count of CPUs) and can account for multiple instance SKUs. In other words, one can create instances of varying shapes against this reservation. # Aggregate reservation details for the future reservation. + "hostCount": 42, # Count of reserved hosts of specified VM family. The host has fixed number of accelerators based on the accelerator/vm-family selected. + "inUseHostCount": 42, # Number of hosts currently in use. If there is one or more Instances running on the host, it is considered in use. + "inUseInstanceCount": 42, # Number of instances currently in use in this reservation. "inUseResources": [ # [Output only] List of resources currently in use. { "accelerator": { # Properties of accelerator resources in this reservation. @@ -651,6 +658,7 @@

Method Details

"name": "A String", # The name of the resource, provided by the client when initially creating the resource. The resource name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash. "namePrefix": "A String", # Name prefix for the reservations to be created at the time of delivery. The name prefix must comply with RFC1035. Maximum allowed length for name prefix is 20. Automatically created reservations name format will be -date-####. "planningStatus": "A String", # Planning state before being submitted for evaluation + "protectionTier": "A String", # Protection tier for the workload. "reservationMode": "A String", # The reservation mode which determines reservation-termination behavior and expected pricing. "reservationName": "A String", # Name of reservations where the capacity is provisioned at the time of delivery of future reservations. If the reservation with the given name does not exist already, it is created automatically at the time of Approval with INACTIVE state till specified start-time. Either provide the reservation_name or a name_prefix. "schedulingType": "A String", # Maintenance information for this reservation @@ -785,6 +793,9 @@

Method Details

{ "aggregateReservation": { # This reservation type is specified by total resource amounts (e.g. total count of CPUs) and can account for multiple instance SKUs. In other words, one can create instances of varying shapes against this reservation. # Aggregate reservation details for the future reservation. + "hostCount": 42, # Count of reserved hosts of specified VM family. The host has fixed number of accelerators based on the accelerator/vm-family selected. + "inUseHostCount": 42, # Number of hosts currently in use. If there is one or more Instances running on the host, it is considered in use. + "inUseInstanceCount": 42, # Number of instances currently in use in this reservation. "inUseResources": [ # [Output only] List of resources currently in use. { "accelerator": { # Properties of accelerator resources in this reservation. @@ -824,6 +835,7 @@

Method Details

"name": "A String", # The name of the resource, provided by the client when initially creating the resource. The resource name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash. "namePrefix": "A String", # Name prefix for the reservations to be created at the time of delivery. The name prefix must comply with RFC1035. Maximum allowed length for name prefix is 20. Automatically created reservations name format will be -date-####. "planningStatus": "A String", # Planning state before being submitted for evaluation + "protectionTier": "A String", # Protection tier for the workload. "reservationMode": "A String", # The reservation mode which determines reservation-termination behavior and expected pricing. "reservationName": "A String", # Name of reservations where the capacity is provisioned at the time of delivery of future reservations. If the reservation with the given name does not exist already, it is created automatically at the time of Approval with INACTIVE state till specified start-time. Either provide the reservation_name or a name_prefix. "schedulingType": "A String", # Maintenance information for this reservation @@ -1088,6 +1100,9 @@

Method Details

"items": [ # [Output Only] A list of future reservation resources. { "aggregateReservation": { # This reservation type is specified by total resource amounts (e.g. total count of CPUs) and can account for multiple instance SKUs. In other words, one can create instances of varying shapes against this reservation. # Aggregate reservation details for the future reservation. + "hostCount": 42, # Count of reserved hosts of specified VM family. The host has fixed number of accelerators based on the accelerator/vm-family selected. + "inUseHostCount": 42, # Number of hosts currently in use. If there is one or more Instances running on the host, it is considered in use. + "inUseInstanceCount": 42, # Number of instances currently in use in this reservation. "inUseResources": [ # [Output only] List of resources currently in use. { "accelerator": { # Properties of accelerator resources in this reservation. @@ -1127,6 +1142,7 @@

Method Details

"name": "A String", # The name of the resource, provided by the client when initially creating the resource. The resource name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash. "namePrefix": "A String", # Name prefix for the reservations to be created at the time of delivery. The name prefix must comply with RFC1035. Maximum allowed length for name prefix is 20. Automatically created reservations name format will be -date-####. "planningStatus": "A String", # Planning state before being submitted for evaluation + "protectionTier": "A String", # Protection tier for the workload. "reservationMode": "A String", # The reservation mode which determines reservation-termination behavior and expected pricing. "reservationName": "A String", # Name of reservations where the capacity is provisioned at the time of delivery of future reservations. If the reservation with the given name does not exist already, it is created automatically at the time of Approval with INACTIVE state till specified start-time. Either provide the reservation_name or a name_prefix. "schedulingType": "A String", # Maintenance information for this reservation @@ -1294,6 +1310,9 @@

Method Details

{ "aggregateReservation": { # This reservation type is specified by total resource amounts (e.g. total count of CPUs) and can account for multiple instance SKUs. In other words, one can create instances of varying shapes against this reservation. # Aggregate reservation details for the future reservation. + "hostCount": 42, # Count of reserved hosts of specified VM family. The host has fixed number of accelerators based on the accelerator/vm-family selected. + "inUseHostCount": 42, # Number of hosts currently in use. If there is one or more Instances running on the host, it is considered in use. + "inUseInstanceCount": 42, # Number of instances currently in use in this reservation. "inUseResources": [ # [Output only] List of resources currently in use. { "accelerator": { # Properties of accelerator resources in this reservation. @@ -1333,6 +1352,7 @@

Method Details

"name": "A String", # The name of the resource, provided by the client when initially creating the resource. The resource name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash. "namePrefix": "A String", # Name prefix for the reservations to be created at the time of delivery. The name prefix must comply with RFC1035. Maximum allowed length for name prefix is 20. Automatically created reservations name format will be -date-####. "planningStatus": "A String", # Planning state before being submitted for evaluation + "protectionTier": "A String", # Protection tier for the workload. "reservationMode": "A String", # The reservation mode which determines reservation-termination behavior and expected pricing. "reservationName": "A String", # Name of reservations where the capacity is provisioned at the time of delivery of future reservations. If the reservation with the given name does not exist already, it is created automatically at the time of Approval with INACTIVE state till specified start-time. Either provide the reservation_name or a name_prefix. "schedulingType": "A String", # Maintenance information for this reservation diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.instances.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.instances.html index 56bc0eefe84..9ed4358a3b6 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.instances.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.instances.html @@ -966,6 +966,10 @@

Method Details

"totalEgressBandwidthTier": "A String", }, "params": { # Additional instance params. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "requestValidForDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Relative deadline for waiting for capacity. Relevant only for Instances.Insert API. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the instance. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty. "a_key": "A String", }, @@ -2611,6 +2615,10 @@

Method Details

"totalEgressBandwidthTier": "A String", }, "params": { # Additional instance params. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "requestValidForDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Relative deadline for waiting for capacity. Relevant only for Instances.Insert API. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the instance. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty. "a_key": "A String", }, @@ -2855,6 +2863,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -2867,6 +2878,7 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. }, ], @@ -2936,6 +2948,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -2948,6 +2963,7 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. }, ], @@ -3048,7 +3064,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -3637,6 +3653,10 @@

Method Details

"totalEgressBandwidthTier": "A String", }, "params": { # Additional instance params. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "requestValidForDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Relative deadline for waiting for capacity. Relevant only for Instances.Insert API. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the instance. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty. "a_key": "A String", }, @@ -4168,6 +4188,10 @@

Method Details

"totalEgressBandwidthTier": "A String", }, "params": { # Additional instance params. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "requestValidForDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Relative deadline for waiting for capacity. Relevant only for Instances.Insert API. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the instance. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty. "a_key": "A String", }, @@ -8161,6 +8185,10 @@

Method Details

"totalEgressBandwidthTier": "A String", }, "params": { # Additional instance params. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "requestValidForDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Relative deadline for waiting for capacity. Relevant only for Instances.Insert API. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the instance. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty. "a_key": "A String", }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.interconnectAttachmentGroups.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.interconnectAttachmentGroups.html index 606f96c2539..38970de0a19 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.interconnectAttachmentGroups.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.interconnectAttachmentGroups.html @@ -393,7 +393,7 @@

Method Details

"adminEnabled": True or False, # Whether this Attachment is enabled. This becomes false when the customer drains their Attachment. "attachment": "A String", # The URL of the Attachment being described. "isActive": "A String", # Whether this Attachment is participating in the redundant configuration. This will be ACTIVE if and only if the status below is CONNECTION_UP. Any INACTIVE Attachments are excluded from the analysis that generates operational.availabilitySLA. - "status": "A String", # Whether this Attachment is active, and if so, whether BGP is up. This is based on the statuses available in the Pantheon UI here: http://google3/java/com/google/cloud/boq/clientapi/gce/hybrid/api/interconnect_models.proto + "status": "A String", # Whether this Attachment is active, and if so, whether BGP is up. }, ], "configured": { # [Output Only] The redundancy this group is configured to support. The way a user queries what SLA their Attachment gets is by looking at this field of the Attachment's AttachmentGroup. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.interconnectRemoteLocations.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.interconnectRemoteLocations.html index ca06f340e54..314295c23cc 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.interconnectRemoteLocations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.interconnectRemoteLocations.html @@ -137,6 +137,7 @@

Method Details

"lacp": "A String", # [Output Only] Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) constraints, which can take one of the following values: LACP_SUPPORTED, LACP_UNSUPPORTED "maxLagSize100Gbps": 42, # [Output Only] The maximum number of 100 Gbps ports supported in a link aggregation group (LAG). When linkType is 100 Gbps, requestedLinkCount cannot exceed max_lag_size_100_gbps. "maxLagSize10Gbps": 42, # [Output Only] The maximum number of 10 Gbps ports supported in a link aggregation group (LAG). When linkType is 10 Gbps, requestedLinkCount cannot exceed max_lag_size_10_gbps. + "maxLagSize400Gbps": 42, # [Output Only] The maximum number of 400 Gbps ports supported in a link aggregation group (LAG). When linkType is 400 Gbps, requestedLinkCount cannot exceed max_lag_size_400_gbps. "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the resource. "peeringdbFacilityId": "A String", # [Output Only] The peeringdb identifier for this facility (corresponding with a netfac type in peeringdb). "permittedConnections": [ # [Output Only] Permitted connections. @@ -202,6 +203,7 @@

Method Details

"lacp": "A String", # [Output Only] Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) constraints, which can take one of the following values: LACP_SUPPORTED, LACP_UNSUPPORTED "maxLagSize100Gbps": 42, # [Output Only] The maximum number of 100 Gbps ports supported in a link aggregation group (LAG). When linkType is 100 Gbps, requestedLinkCount cannot exceed max_lag_size_100_gbps. "maxLagSize10Gbps": 42, # [Output Only] The maximum number of 10 Gbps ports supported in a link aggregation group (LAG). When linkType is 10 Gbps, requestedLinkCount cannot exceed max_lag_size_10_gbps. + "maxLagSize400Gbps": 42, # [Output Only] The maximum number of 400 Gbps ports supported in a link aggregation group (LAG). When linkType is 400 Gbps, requestedLinkCount cannot exceed max_lag_size_400_gbps. "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the resource. "peeringdbFacilityId": "A String", # [Output Only] The peeringdb identifier for this facility (corresponding with a netfac type in peeringdb). "permittedConnections": [ # [Output Only] Permitted connections. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.networkFirewallPolicies.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.networkFirewallPolicies.html index 18bdc56de5a..cd4628ed515 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.networkFirewallPolicies.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.networkFirewallPolicies.html @@ -358,6 +358,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -370,6 +373,7 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. } @@ -566,6 +570,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -578,6 +585,7 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. } @@ -809,6 +817,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -821,10 +832,12 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. }, ], "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies. + "policySource": "A String", # [Output Only] Source of this Firewall Policy. USER_DEFINED if created by a Cloud user, or SYSTEM if created by managed services like GKE. "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used. "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples. @@ -893,6 +906,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -905,6 +921,7 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. }, ], @@ -1310,6 +1327,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -1322,10 +1342,12 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. }, ], "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies. + "policySource": "A String", # [Output Only] Source of this Firewall Policy. USER_DEFINED if created by a Cloud user, or SYSTEM if created by managed services like GKE. "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used. "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples. @@ -1394,6 +1416,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -1406,6 +1431,7 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. }, ], @@ -1570,6 +1596,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -1582,6 +1611,7 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. } @@ -1666,6 +1696,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -1678,6 +1711,7 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. } @@ -1774,6 +1808,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -1786,10 +1823,12 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. }, ], "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies. + "policySource": "A String", # [Output Only] Source of this Firewall Policy. USER_DEFINED if created by a Cloud user, or SYSTEM if created by managed services like GKE. "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used. "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples. @@ -1858,6 +1897,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -1870,6 +1912,7 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. }, ], @@ -2100,6 +2143,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -2112,10 +2158,12 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. }, ], "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies. + "policySource": "A String", # [Output Only] Source of this Firewall Policy. USER_DEFINED if created by a Cloud user, or SYSTEM if created by managed services like GKE. "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used. "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples. @@ -2184,6 +2232,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -2196,6 +2247,7 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. }, ], @@ -2326,6 +2378,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -2338,10 +2393,12 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. }, ], "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies. + "policySource": "A String", # [Output Only] Source of this Firewall Policy. USER_DEFINED if created by a Cloud user, or SYSTEM if created by managed services like GKE. "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used. "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples. @@ -2410,6 +2467,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -2422,6 +2482,7 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. }, ], @@ -2621,6 +2682,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -2633,6 +2697,7 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. } @@ -2828,6 +2893,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -2840,6 +2908,7 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. } diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.networkProfiles.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.networkProfiles.html index f689c51640c..5029dfa1b4c 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.networkProfiles.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.networkProfiles.html @@ -159,6 +159,12 @@

Method Details

"scope": "A String", }, "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the resource. + "profileType": { # [Output Only] Type of the network profile. + "networkType": "A String", + "rdmaSubtype": "A String", + "ullSubtype": "A String", + "vpcSubtype": "A String", + }, "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource. "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id. } @@ -239,6 +245,12 @@

Method Details

"scope": "A String", }, "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the resource. + "profileType": { # [Output Only] Type of the network profile. + "networkType": "A String", + "rdmaSubtype": "A String", + "ullSubtype": "A String", + "vpcSubtype": "A String", + }, "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource. "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id. }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.networks.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.networks.html index 5ce66658615..271de6d494a 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.networks.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.networks.html @@ -581,6 +581,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -593,6 +596,7 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. }, ], @@ -662,6 +666,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -674,6 +681,7 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. }, ], @@ -774,7 +782,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.organizationSecurityPolicies.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.organizationSecurityPolicies.html index b0157368cd3..0645da84eac 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.organizationSecurityPolicies.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.organizationSecurityPolicies.html @@ -310,7 +310,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -929,7 +929,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -1145,7 +1145,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -1390,7 +1390,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -1781,7 +1781,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -2269,7 +2269,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -2565,7 +2565,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionBackendServices.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionBackendServices.html index 3f6e56738c6..e32e88c1975 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionBackendServices.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionBackendServices.html @@ -323,7 +323,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -700,7 +700,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -1108,7 +1108,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -1415,7 +1415,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -1738,7 +1738,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -2399,7 +2399,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionCommitments.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionCommitments.html index 5763d0df119..0170cb1c2cf 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionCommitments.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionCommitments.html @@ -160,6 +160,9 @@

Method Details

"reservationOperationalMode": "A String", # Indicates chosen reservation operational mode for the reservation. }, "aggregateReservation": { # This reservation type is specified by total resource amounts (e.g. total count of CPUs) and can account for multiple instance SKUs. In other words, one can create instances of varying shapes against this reservation. # Reservation for aggregated resources, providing shape flexibility. + "hostCount": 42, # Count of reserved hosts of specified VM family. The host has fixed number of accelerators based on the accelerator/vm-family selected. + "inUseHostCount": 42, # Number of hosts currently in use. If there is one or more Instances running on the host, it is considered in use. + "inUseInstanceCount": 42, # Number of instances currently in use in this reservation. "inUseResources": [ # [Output only] List of resources currently in use. { "accelerator": { # Properties of accelerator resources in this reservation. @@ -395,6 +398,9 @@

Method Details

"reservationOperationalMode": "A String", # Indicates chosen reservation operational mode for the reservation. }, "aggregateReservation": { # This reservation type is specified by total resource amounts (e.g. total count of CPUs) and can account for multiple instance SKUs. In other words, one can create instances of varying shapes against this reservation. # Reservation for aggregated resources, providing shape flexibility. + "hostCount": 42, # Count of reserved hosts of specified VM family. The host has fixed number of accelerators based on the accelerator/vm-family selected. + "inUseHostCount": 42, # Number of hosts currently in use. If there is one or more Instances running on the host, it is considered in use. + "inUseInstanceCount": 42, # Number of instances currently in use in this reservation. "inUseResources": [ # [Output only] List of resources currently in use. { "accelerator": { # Properties of accelerator resources in this reservation. @@ -575,6 +581,9 @@

Method Details

"reservationOperationalMode": "A String", # Indicates chosen reservation operational mode for the reservation. }, "aggregateReservation": { # This reservation type is specified by total resource amounts (e.g. total count of CPUs) and can account for multiple instance SKUs. In other words, one can create instances of varying shapes against this reservation. # Reservation for aggregated resources, providing shape flexibility. + "hostCount": 42, # Count of reserved hosts of specified VM family. The host has fixed number of accelerators based on the accelerator/vm-family selected. + "inUseHostCount": 42, # Number of hosts currently in use. If there is one or more Instances running on the host, it is considered in use. + "inUseInstanceCount": 42, # Number of instances currently in use in this reservation. "inUseResources": [ # [Output only] List of resources currently in use. { "accelerator": { # Properties of accelerator resources in this reservation. @@ -884,6 +893,9 @@

Method Details

"reservationOperationalMode": "A String", # Indicates chosen reservation operational mode for the reservation. }, "aggregateReservation": { # This reservation type is specified by total resource amounts (e.g. total count of CPUs) and can account for multiple instance SKUs. In other words, one can create instances of varying shapes against this reservation. # Reservation for aggregated resources, providing shape flexibility. + "hostCount": 42, # Count of reserved hosts of specified VM family. The host has fixed number of accelerators based on the accelerator/vm-family selected. + "inUseHostCount": 42, # Number of hosts currently in use. If there is one or more Instances running on the host, it is considered in use. + "inUseInstanceCount": 42, # Number of instances currently in use in this reservation. "inUseResources": [ # [Output only] List of resources currently in use. { "accelerator": { # Properties of accelerator resources in this reservation. @@ -1126,6 +1138,9 @@

Method Details

"reservationOperationalMode": "A String", # Indicates chosen reservation operational mode for the reservation. }, "aggregateReservation": { # This reservation type is specified by total resource amounts (e.g. total count of CPUs) and can account for multiple instance SKUs. In other words, one can create instances of varying shapes against this reservation. # Reservation for aggregated resources, providing shape flexibility. + "hostCount": 42, # Count of reserved hosts of specified VM family. The host has fixed number of accelerators based on the accelerator/vm-family selected. + "inUseHostCount": 42, # Number of hosts currently in use. If there is one or more Instances running on the host, it is considered in use. + "inUseInstanceCount": 42, # Number of instances currently in use in this reservation. "inUseResources": [ # [Output only] List of resources currently in use. { "accelerator": { # Properties of accelerator resources in this reservation. @@ -1403,6 +1418,9 @@

Method Details

"reservationOperationalMode": "A String", # Indicates chosen reservation operational mode for the reservation. }, "aggregateReservation": { # This reservation type is specified by total resource amounts (e.g. total count of CPUs) and can account for multiple instance SKUs. In other words, one can create instances of varying shapes against this reservation. # Reservation for aggregated resources, providing shape flexibility. + "hostCount": 42, # Count of reserved hosts of specified VM family. The host has fixed number of accelerators based on the accelerator/vm-family selected. + "inUseHostCount": 42, # Number of hosts currently in use. If there is one or more Instances running on the host, it is considered in use. + "inUseInstanceCount": 42, # Number of instances currently in use in this reservation. "inUseResources": [ # [Output only] List of resources currently in use. { "accelerator": { # Properties of accelerator resources in this reservation. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionNetworkFirewallPolicies.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionNetworkFirewallPolicies.html index eaebb0b4a45..238aa24a771 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionNetworkFirewallPolicies.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionNetworkFirewallPolicies.html @@ -349,6 +349,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -361,6 +364,7 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. } @@ -838,6 +842,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -850,10 +857,12 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. }, ], "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies. + "policySource": "A String", # [Output Only] Source of this Firewall Policy. USER_DEFINED if created by a Cloud user, or SYSTEM if created by managed services like GKE. "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used. "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples. @@ -922,6 +931,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -934,6 +946,7 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. }, ], @@ -1056,6 +1069,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -1068,6 +1084,7 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. }, ], @@ -1137,6 +1154,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -1149,6 +1169,7 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. }, ], @@ -1347,6 +1368,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -1359,6 +1383,7 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. } @@ -1456,6 +1481,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -1468,10 +1496,12 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. }, ], "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies. + "policySource": "A String", # [Output Only] Source of this Firewall Policy. USER_DEFINED if created by a Cloud user, or SYSTEM if created by managed services like GKE. "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used. "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples. @@ -1540,6 +1570,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -1552,6 +1585,7 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. }, ], @@ -1783,6 +1817,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -1795,10 +1832,12 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. }, ], "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies. + "policySource": "A String", # [Output Only] Source of this Firewall Policy. USER_DEFINED if created by a Cloud user, or SYSTEM if created by managed services like GKE. "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used. "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples. @@ -1867,6 +1906,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -1879,6 +1921,7 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. }, ], @@ -2010,6 +2053,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -2022,10 +2068,12 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. }, ], "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies. + "policySource": "A String", # [Output Only] Source of this Firewall Policy. USER_DEFINED if created by a Cloud user, or SYSTEM if created by managed services like GKE. "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used. "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples. @@ -2094,6 +2142,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -2106,6 +2157,7 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. }, ], @@ -2443,6 +2495,9 @@

Method Details

"ruleName": "A String", # An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated. "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single firewall policy rule. "securityProfileGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions. + "targetForwardingRules": [ # A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule + "A String", + ], "targetResources": [ # A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule. "A String", ], @@ -2455,6 +2510,7 @@

Method Details

"targetServiceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule. "A String", ], + "targetType": "A String", # Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES. "tlsInspect": True or False, # Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions. } diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionSecurityPolicies.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionSecurityPolicies.html index f5c4f82b257..38fc1ef8490 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionSecurityPolicies.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionSecurityPolicies.html @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -652,7 +652,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -840,7 +840,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -1087,7 +1087,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -1479,7 +1479,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -1770,7 +1770,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -2069,7 +2069,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.reservationBlocks.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.reservationBlocks.html index 0b4a632139d..6339d8a843f 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.reservationBlocks.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.reservationBlocks.html @@ -128,6 +128,7 @@

Method Details

}, "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server. "inUseCount": 42, # [Output Only] The number of instances that are currently in use on this reservation block. + "inUseHostCount": 42, # Number of hosts currently in use. If there is one or more Instances running on the host, it is considered in use. "kind": "compute#reservationBlock", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservationBlock for reservation blocks. "name": "A String", # [Output Only] The name of this reservation block generated by Google Compute Engine. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035 @pattern [a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])? "physicalTopology": { # [Output Only] The physical topology of the reservation block. @@ -209,6 +210,7 @@

Method Details

}, "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server. "inUseCount": 42, # [Output Only] The number of instances that are currently in use on this reservation block. + "inUseHostCount": 42, # Number of hosts currently in use. If there is one or more Instances running on the host, it is considered in use. "kind": "compute#reservationBlock", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservationBlock for reservation blocks. "name": "A String", # [Output Only] The name of this reservation block generated by Google Compute Engine. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035 @pattern [a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])? "physicalTopology": { # [Output Only] The physical topology of the reservation block. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.reservationSubBlocks.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.reservationSubBlocks.html index a15bc77b17d..0672700312a 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.reservationSubBlocks.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.reservationSubBlocks.html @@ -125,6 +125,7 @@

Method Details

}, "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server. "inUseCount": 42, # [Output Only] The number of instances that are currently in use on this reservation subBlock. + "inUseHostCount": 42, # Number of hosts currently in use. If there is one or more Instances running on the host, it is considered in use. "kind": "compute#reservationSubBlock", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservationSubBlock for reservation subBlocks. "name": "A String", # [Output Only] The name of this reservation subBlock generated by Google Compute Engine. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035 @pattern [a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])? "physicalTopology": { # [Output Only] The physical topology of the reservation subBlock. @@ -197,6 +198,7 @@

Method Details

}, "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server. "inUseCount": 42, # [Output Only] The number of instances that are currently in use on this reservation subBlock. + "inUseHostCount": 42, # Number of hosts currently in use. If there is one or more Instances running on the host, it is considered in use. "kind": "compute#reservationSubBlock", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservationSubBlock for reservation subBlocks. "name": "A String", # [Output Only] The name of this reservation subBlock generated by Google Compute Engine. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035 @pattern [a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])? "physicalTopology": { # [Output Only] The physical topology of the reservation subBlock. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.reservations.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.reservations.html index c25ed42bb9b..d08a099b6f1 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.reservations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.reservations.html @@ -148,6 +148,9 @@

Method Details

"reservationOperationalMode": "A String", # Indicates chosen reservation operational mode for the reservation. }, "aggregateReservation": { # This reservation type is specified by total resource amounts (e.g. total count of CPUs) and can account for multiple instance SKUs. In other words, one can create instances of varying shapes against this reservation. # Reservation for aggregated resources, providing shape flexibility. + "hostCount": 42, # Count of reserved hosts of specified VM family. The host has fixed number of accelerators based on the accelerator/vm-family selected. + "inUseHostCount": 42, # Number of hosts currently in use. If there is one or more Instances running on the host, it is considered in use. + "inUseInstanceCount": 42, # Number of instances currently in use in this reservation. "inUseResources": [ # [Output only] List of resources currently in use. { "accelerator": { # Properties of accelerator resources in this reservation. @@ -466,6 +469,9 @@

Method Details

"reservationOperationalMode": "A String", # Indicates chosen reservation operational mode for the reservation. }, "aggregateReservation": { # This reservation type is specified by total resource amounts (e.g. total count of CPUs) and can account for multiple instance SKUs. In other words, one can create instances of varying shapes against this reservation. # Reservation for aggregated resources, providing shape flexibility. + "hostCount": 42, # Count of reserved hosts of specified VM family. The host has fixed number of accelerators based on the accelerator/vm-family selected. + "inUseHostCount": 42, # Number of hosts currently in use. If there is one or more Instances running on the host, it is considered in use. + "inUseInstanceCount": 42, # Number of instances currently in use in this reservation. "inUseResources": [ # [Output only] List of resources currently in use. { "accelerator": { # Properties of accelerator resources in this reservation. @@ -654,6 +660,9 @@

Method Details

"reservationOperationalMode": "A String", # Indicates chosen reservation operational mode for the reservation. }, "aggregateReservation": { # This reservation type is specified by total resource amounts (e.g. total count of CPUs) and can account for multiple instance SKUs. In other words, one can create instances of varying shapes against this reservation. # Reservation for aggregated resources, providing shape flexibility. + "hostCount": 42, # Count of reserved hosts of specified VM family. The host has fixed number of accelerators based on the accelerator/vm-family selected. + "inUseHostCount": 42, # Number of hosts currently in use. If there is one or more Instances running on the host, it is considered in use. + "inUseInstanceCount": 42, # Number of instances currently in use in this reservation. "inUseResources": [ # [Output only] List of resources currently in use. { "accelerator": { # Properties of accelerator resources in this reservation. @@ -921,6 +930,9 @@

Method Details

"reservationOperationalMode": "A String", # Indicates chosen reservation operational mode for the reservation. }, "aggregateReservation": { # This reservation type is specified by total resource amounts (e.g. total count of CPUs) and can account for multiple instance SKUs. In other words, one can create instances of varying shapes against this reservation. # Reservation for aggregated resources, providing shape flexibility. + "hostCount": 42, # Count of reserved hosts of specified VM family. The host has fixed number of accelerators based on the accelerator/vm-family selected. + "inUseHostCount": 42, # Number of hosts currently in use. If there is one or more Instances running on the host, it is considered in use. + "inUseInstanceCount": 42, # Number of instances currently in use in this reservation. "inUseResources": [ # [Output only] List of resources currently in use. { "accelerator": { # Properties of accelerator resources in this reservation. @@ -1486,6 +1498,9 @@

Method Details

"reservationOperationalMode": "A String", # Indicates chosen reservation operational mode for the reservation. }, "aggregateReservation": { # This reservation type is specified by total resource amounts (e.g. total count of CPUs) and can account for multiple instance SKUs. In other words, one can create instances of varying shapes against this reservation. # Reservation for aggregated resources, providing shape flexibility. + "hostCount": 42, # Count of reserved hosts of specified VM family. The host has fixed number of accelerators based on the accelerator/vm-family selected. + "inUseHostCount": 42, # Number of hosts currently in use. If there is one or more Instances running on the host, it is considered in use. + "inUseInstanceCount": 42, # Number of instances currently in use in this reservation. "inUseResources": [ # [Output only] List of resources currently in use. { "accelerator": { # Properties of accelerator resources in this reservation. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.routers.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.routers.html index 3e8ddd6ca06..f6bf94ea720 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.routers.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.routers.html @@ -334,7 +334,7 @@

Method Details

"nccGateway": "A String", # URI of the ncc_gateway to which this router associated. "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs. "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. - "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. "a_key": "A String", }, }, @@ -820,7 +820,7 @@

Method Details

"nccGateway": "A String", # URI of the ncc_gateway to which this router associated. "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs. "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. - "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. "a_key": "A String", }, }, @@ -1472,7 +1472,7 @@

Method Details

"nccGateway": "A String", # URI of the ncc_gateway to which this router associated. "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs. "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. - "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. "a_key": "A String", }, }, @@ -1781,7 +1781,7 @@

Method Details

"nccGateway": "A String", # URI of the ncc_gateway to which this router associated. "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs. "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. - "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. "a_key": "A String", }, }, @@ -1851,6 +1851,9 @@

Method Details

"asns": [ # [Output only] ASNs in the path segment. When type is SEQUENCE, these are ordered. 42, ], + "asns32": [ # [Output only] ASNs in the path segment. This field is for better support of 32 bit ASNs as the other asns field suffers from overflow when the ASN is larger. When type is SEQUENCE, these are ordered. + 42, + ], "type": "A String", # [Output only] Type of AS-PATH segment (SEQUENCE or SET) }, ], @@ -2166,7 +2169,7 @@

Method Details

"nccGateway": "A String", # URI of the ncc_gateway to which this router associated. "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs. "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. - "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. "a_key": "A String", }, }, @@ -2617,7 +2620,7 @@

Method Details

"nccGateway": "A String", # URI of the ncc_gateway to which this router associated. "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs. "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. - "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. "a_key": "A String", }, }, @@ -2795,7 +2798,7 @@

Method Details

"nccGateway": "A String", # URI of the ncc_gateway to which this router associated. "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs. "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. - "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. "a_key": "A String", }, }, @@ -3009,7 +3012,7 @@

Method Details

"nccGateway": "A String", # URI of the ncc_gateway to which this router associated. "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs. "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. - "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. "a_key": "A String", }, }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.securityPolicies.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.securityPolicies.html index 3937e600c33..208a6a792cd 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.securityPolicies.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.securityPolicies.html @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -544,7 +544,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -984,7 +984,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -1171,7 +1171,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -1417,7 +1417,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -1808,7 +1808,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -2139,7 +2139,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -2437,7 +2437,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.serviceAttachments.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.serviceAttachments.html index d8306e6a350..1b8e13b8b6d 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.serviceAttachments.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.serviceAttachments.html @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@

Instance Methods

delete(project, region, serviceAttachment, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

Deletes the specified ServiceAttachment in the given scope

- get(project, region, serviceAttachment, x__xgafv=None)

+ get(project, region, serviceAttachment, showNatIps=None, x__xgafv=None)

Returns the specified ServiceAttachment resource in the given scope.

getIamPolicy(project, region, resource, optionsRequestedPolicyVersion=None, x__xgafv=None)

@@ -142,6 +142,9 @@

Method Details

{ # [Output Only] A connection connected to this service attachment. "consumerNetwork": "A String", # The url of the consumer network. "endpoint": "A String", # The url of a connected endpoint. + "natIps": [ # NAT IPs of the connected PSC endpoint and those of other endpoints propagated from it. + "A String", + ], "propagatedConnectionCount": 42, # The number of consumer Network Connectivity Center spokes that the connected Private Service Connect endpoint has propagated to. "pscConnectionId": "A String", # The PSC connection id of the connected endpoint. "status": "A String", # The status of a connected endpoint to this service attachment. @@ -366,13 +369,14 @@

Method Details

- get(project, region, serviceAttachment, x__xgafv=None) + get(project, region, serviceAttachment, showNatIps=None, x__xgafv=None)
Returns the specified ServiceAttachment resource in the given scope.
 
 Args:
   project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
   region: string, Name of the region of this request. (required)
   serviceAttachment: string, Name of the ServiceAttachment resource to return. (required)
+  showNatIps: boolean, Indicates whether NAT IPs should be included in the response.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -386,6 +390,9 @@ 

Method Details

{ # [Output Only] A connection connected to this service attachment. "consumerNetwork": "A String", # The url of the consumer network. "endpoint": "A String", # The url of a connected endpoint. + "natIps": [ # NAT IPs of the connected PSC endpoint and those of other endpoints propagated from it. + "A String", + ], "propagatedConnectionCount": 42, # The number of consumer Network Connectivity Center spokes that the connected Private Service Connect endpoint has propagated to. "pscConnectionId": "A String", # The PSC connection id of the connected endpoint. "status": "A String", # The status of a connected endpoint to this service attachment. @@ -500,6 +507,9 @@

Method Details

{ # [Output Only] A connection connected to this service attachment. "consumerNetwork": "A String", # The url of the consumer network. "endpoint": "A String", # The url of a connected endpoint. + "natIps": [ # NAT IPs of the connected PSC endpoint and those of other endpoints propagated from it. + "A String", + ], "propagatedConnectionCount": 42, # The number of consumer Network Connectivity Center spokes that the connected Private Service Connect endpoint has propagated to. "pscConnectionId": "A String", # The PSC connection id of the connected endpoint. "status": "A String", # The status of a connected endpoint to this service attachment. @@ -693,6 +703,9 @@

Method Details

{ # [Output Only] A connection connected to this service attachment. "consumerNetwork": "A String", # The url of the consumer network. "endpoint": "A String", # The url of a connected endpoint. + "natIps": [ # NAT IPs of the connected PSC endpoint and those of other endpoints propagated from it. + "A String", + ], "propagatedConnectionCount": 42, # The number of consumer Network Connectivity Center spokes that the connected Private Service Connect endpoint has propagated to. "pscConnectionId": "A String", # The PSC connection id of the connected endpoint. "status": "A String", # The status of a connected endpoint to this service attachment. @@ -787,6 +800,9 @@

Method Details

{ # [Output Only] A connection connected to this service attachment. "consumerNetwork": "A String", # The url of the consumer network. "endpoint": "A String", # The url of a connected endpoint. + "natIps": [ # NAT IPs of the connected PSC endpoint and those of other endpoints propagated from it. + "A String", + ], "propagatedConnectionCount": 42, # The number of consumer Network Connectivity Center spokes that the connected Private Service Connect endpoint has propagated to. "pscConnectionId": "A String", # The PSC connection id of the connected endpoint. "status": "A String", # The status of a connected endpoint to this service attachment. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.wireGroups.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.wireGroups.html index 3e0adc0ecab..649a2591869 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.wireGroups.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.wireGroups.html @@ -275,6 +275,7 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # The type of the wire group, one of the following: - WIRE: a single pseudowire over two Interconnect connections with no redundancy. - REDUNDANT: two pseudowires over four Interconnect connections, with two connections in one metro and two connections in another metro. Each redundant pair of Interconnect connections spans both edge availability domains of the metro. Each pseudowire connects Interconnect connections in matching edge availability domains of the two metros. - BOX_AND_CROSS: four pseudowires over four Interconnect connections, with two connections in one metro and two connections in another metro. Each redundant pair of Interconnect connections spans both edge availability domains of the metro. Two pseudowires connect Interconnect connections in matching edge availability domains of the two metros. Two additional pseudowires connect the non-matching edge availability domains of the two metros. }, "wireProperties": { # The properties of a wire. # Properties for all wires in the wire group. + "bandwidthAllocation": "A String", # The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: this is the default behavior, which configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. "bandwidthUnmetered": "A String", # The unmetered bandwidth in Gigabits per second, using decimal units. `10` is 10 Gbps, `100` is 100 Gbps. "faultResponse": "A String", # Response when a fault is detected in a pseudowire: - NONE: default. - DISABLE_PORT: set the port line protocol down when inline probes detect a fault. This setting is only permitted on port mode pseudowires. }, @@ -289,6 +290,7 @@

Method Details

], "label": "A String", # [Output Only] A label that identifies the wire. The format of this label combines the existing labels of the wire group endpoints and Interconnect connections used by this wire in alphabetical order as follows: `ENDPOINT_A+CONNECTION_A1,ENDPOINT_B+CONNECTION_B1`, where: - ENDPOINT_A and ENDPOINT_B: are the labels that you entered as map keys when you specified the wire group endpoint objects. - CONNECTION_A1 and CONNECTION_B1: are the labels that you entered as map keys when you specified the wire group Interconnect objects. "wireProperties": { # The properties of a wire. # [Output Only] Properties of the wire. + "bandwidthAllocation": "A String", # The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: this is the default behavior, which configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. "bandwidthUnmetered": "A String", # The unmetered bandwidth in Gigabits per second, using decimal units. `10` is 10 Gbps, `100` is 100 Gbps. "faultResponse": "A String", # Response when a fault is detected in a pseudowire: - NONE: default. - DISABLE_PORT: set the port line protocol down when inline probes detect a fault. This setting is only permitted on port mode pseudowires. }, @@ -340,6 +342,7 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # The type of the wire group, one of the following: - WIRE: a single pseudowire over two Interconnect connections with no redundancy. - REDUNDANT: two pseudowires over four Interconnect connections, with two connections in one metro and two connections in another metro. Each redundant pair of Interconnect connections spans both edge availability domains of the metro. Each pseudowire connects Interconnect connections in matching edge availability domains of the two metros. - BOX_AND_CROSS: four pseudowires over four Interconnect connections, with two connections in one metro and two connections in another metro. Each redundant pair of Interconnect connections spans both edge availability domains of the metro. Two pseudowires connect Interconnect connections in matching edge availability domains of the two metros. Two additional pseudowires connect the non-matching edge availability domains of the two metros. }, "wireProperties": { # The properties of a wire. # Properties for all wires in the wire group. + "bandwidthAllocation": "A String", # The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: this is the default behavior, which configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. "bandwidthUnmetered": "A String", # The unmetered bandwidth in Gigabits per second, using decimal units. `10` is 10 Gbps, `100` is 100 Gbps. "faultResponse": "A String", # Response when a fault is detected in a pseudowire: - NONE: default. - DISABLE_PORT: set the port line protocol down when inline probes detect a fault. This setting is only permitted on port mode pseudowires. }, @@ -354,6 +357,7 @@

Method Details

], "label": "A String", # [Output Only] A label that identifies the wire. The format of this label combines the existing labels of the wire group endpoints and Interconnect connections used by this wire in alphabetical order as follows: `ENDPOINT_A+CONNECTION_A1,ENDPOINT_B+CONNECTION_B1`, where: - ENDPOINT_A and ENDPOINT_B: are the labels that you entered as map keys when you specified the wire group endpoint objects. - CONNECTION_A1 and CONNECTION_B1: are the labels that you entered as map keys when you specified the wire group Interconnect objects. "wireProperties": { # The properties of a wire. # [Output Only] Properties of the wire. + "bandwidthAllocation": "A String", # The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: this is the default behavior, which configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. "bandwidthUnmetered": "A String", # The unmetered bandwidth in Gigabits per second, using decimal units. `10` is 10 Gbps, `100` is 100 Gbps. "faultResponse": "A String", # Response when a fault is detected in a pseudowire: - NONE: default. - DISABLE_PORT: set the port line protocol down when inline probes detect a fault. This setting is only permitted on port mode pseudowires. }, @@ -536,6 +540,7 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # The type of the wire group, one of the following: - WIRE: a single pseudowire over two Interconnect connections with no redundancy. - REDUNDANT: two pseudowires over four Interconnect connections, with two connections in one metro and two connections in another metro. Each redundant pair of Interconnect connections spans both edge availability domains of the metro. Each pseudowire connects Interconnect connections in matching edge availability domains of the two metros. - BOX_AND_CROSS: four pseudowires over four Interconnect connections, with two connections in one metro and two connections in another metro. Each redundant pair of Interconnect connections spans both edge availability domains of the metro. Two pseudowires connect Interconnect connections in matching edge availability domains of the two metros. Two additional pseudowires connect the non-matching edge availability domains of the two metros. }, "wireProperties": { # The properties of a wire. # Properties for all wires in the wire group. + "bandwidthAllocation": "A String", # The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: this is the default behavior, which configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. "bandwidthUnmetered": "A String", # The unmetered bandwidth in Gigabits per second, using decimal units. `10` is 10 Gbps, `100` is 100 Gbps. "faultResponse": "A String", # Response when a fault is detected in a pseudowire: - NONE: default. - DISABLE_PORT: set the port line protocol down when inline probes detect a fault. This setting is only permitted on port mode pseudowires. }, @@ -550,6 +555,7 @@

Method Details

], "label": "A String", # [Output Only] A label that identifies the wire. The format of this label combines the existing labels of the wire group endpoints and Interconnect connections used by this wire in alphabetical order as follows: `ENDPOINT_A+CONNECTION_A1,ENDPOINT_B+CONNECTION_B1`, where: - ENDPOINT_A and ENDPOINT_B: are the labels that you entered as map keys when you specified the wire group endpoint objects. - CONNECTION_A1 and CONNECTION_B1: are the labels that you entered as map keys when you specified the wire group Interconnect objects. "wireProperties": { # The properties of a wire. # [Output Only] Properties of the wire. + "bandwidthAllocation": "A String", # The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: this is the default behavior, which configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. "bandwidthUnmetered": "A String", # The unmetered bandwidth in Gigabits per second, using decimal units. `10` is 10 Gbps, `100` is 100 Gbps. "faultResponse": "A String", # Response when a fault is detected in a pseudowire: - NONE: default. - DISABLE_PORT: set the port line protocol down when inline probes detect a fault. This setting is only permitted on port mode pseudowires. }, @@ -634,6 +640,7 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # The type of the wire group, one of the following: - WIRE: a single pseudowire over two Interconnect connections with no redundancy. - REDUNDANT: two pseudowires over four Interconnect connections, with two connections in one metro and two connections in another metro. Each redundant pair of Interconnect connections spans both edge availability domains of the metro. Each pseudowire connects Interconnect connections in matching edge availability domains of the two metros. - BOX_AND_CROSS: four pseudowires over four Interconnect connections, with two connections in one metro and two connections in another metro. Each redundant pair of Interconnect connections spans both edge availability domains of the metro. Two pseudowires connect Interconnect connections in matching edge availability domains of the two metros. Two additional pseudowires connect the non-matching edge availability domains of the two metros. }, "wireProperties": { # The properties of a wire. # Properties for all wires in the wire group. + "bandwidthAllocation": "A String", # The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: this is the default behavior, which configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. "bandwidthUnmetered": "A String", # The unmetered bandwidth in Gigabits per second, using decimal units. `10` is 10 Gbps, `100` is 100 Gbps. "faultResponse": "A String", # Response when a fault is detected in a pseudowire: - NONE: default. - DISABLE_PORT: set the port line protocol down when inline probes detect a fault. This setting is only permitted on port mode pseudowires. }, @@ -648,6 +655,7 @@

Method Details

], "label": "A String", # [Output Only] A label that identifies the wire. The format of this label combines the existing labels of the wire group endpoints and Interconnect connections used by this wire in alphabetical order as follows: `ENDPOINT_A+CONNECTION_A1,ENDPOINT_B+CONNECTION_B1`, where: - ENDPOINT_A and ENDPOINT_B: are the labels that you entered as map keys when you specified the wire group endpoint objects. - CONNECTION_A1 and CONNECTION_B1: are the labels that you entered as map keys when you specified the wire group Interconnect objects. "wireProperties": { # The properties of a wire. # [Output Only] Properties of the wire. + "bandwidthAllocation": "A String", # The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: this is the default behavior, which configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. "bandwidthUnmetered": "A String", # The unmetered bandwidth in Gigabits per second, using decimal units. `10` is 10 Gbps, `100` is 100 Gbps. "faultResponse": "A String", # Response when a fault is detected in a pseudowire: - NONE: default. - DISABLE_PORT: set the port line protocol down when inline probes detect a fault. This setting is only permitted on port mode pseudowires. }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.addresses.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.addresses.html index 764f86fc70e..c86e457ca19 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.addresses.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.addresses.html @@ -104,6 +104,9 @@

Instance Methods

setLabels(project, region, resource, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

Sets the labels on an Address. To learn more about labels, read the Labeling Resources documentation.

+

+ testIamPermissions(project, region, resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource.

Method Details

aggregatedList(project, filter=None, includeAllScopes=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, serviceProjectNumber=None, x__xgafv=None) @@ -879,4 +882,36 @@

Method Details

}
+
+ testIamPermissions(project, region, resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  region: string, The name of the region for this request. (required)
+  resource: string, Name or id of the resource for this request. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{
+  "permissions": [ # The set of permissions to check for the 'resource'. Permissions with wildcards (such as '*' or 'storage.*') are not allowed.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    {
+  "permissions": [ # A subset of `TestPermissionsRequest.permissions` that the caller is allowed.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+}
+
+ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.backendBuckets.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.backendBuckets.html index de365733867..4dc0ae3df04 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.backendBuckets.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.backendBuckets.html @@ -538,7 +538,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -656,7 +656,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -854,7 +854,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -953,7 +953,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -1401,7 +1401,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.backendServices.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.backendServices.html index f6c26cb01ae..7b199c547ea 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.backendServices.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.backendServices.html @@ -346,7 +346,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -907,7 +907,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -1260,7 +1260,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -1646,7 +1646,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -1931,7 +1931,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -2232,7 +2232,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -2999,7 +2999,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.globalAddresses.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.globalAddresses.html index 6255a2ae58f..fff45ba060a 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.globalAddresses.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.globalAddresses.html @@ -98,6 +98,9 @@

Instance Methods

setLabels(project, resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

Sets the labels on a GlobalAddress. To learn more about labels, read the Labeling Resources documentation.

+

+ testIamPermissions(project, resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource.

Method Details

close() @@ -768,4 +771,35 @@

Method Details

}
+
+ testIamPermissions(project, resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  resource: string, Name or id of the resource for this request. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{
+  "permissions": [ # The set of permissions to check for the 'resource'. Permissions with wildcards (such as '*' or 'storage.*') are not allowed.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    {
+  "permissions": [ # A subset of `TestPermissionsRequest.permissions` that the caller is allowed.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+}
+
+ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.instanceGroups.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.instanceGroups.html index 6afb26b85cd..a8a8a8ab2b6 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.instanceGroups.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.instanceGroups.html @@ -113,6 +113,9 @@

Instance Methods

setNamedPorts(project, zone, instanceGroup, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

Sets the named ports for the specified instance group.

+

+ testIamPermissions(project, zone, resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource.

Method Details

addInstances(project, zone, instanceGroup, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None) @@ -1078,4 +1081,36 @@

Method Details

}
+
+ testIamPermissions(project, zone, resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  zone: string, The name of the zone for this request. (required)
+  resource: string, Name or id of the resource for this request. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{
+  "permissions": [ # The set of permissions to check for the 'resource'. Permissions with wildcards (such as '*' or 'storage.*') are not allowed.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    {
+  "permissions": [ # A subset of `TestPermissionsRequest.permissions` that the caller is allowed.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+}
+
+ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.instanceTemplates.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.instanceTemplates.html index 70ab3abae3a..17e7cf6144b 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.instanceTemplates.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.instanceTemplates.html @@ -322,9 +322,11 @@

Method Details

"networkAttachment": "A String", # The URL of the network attachment that this interface should connect to in the following format: projects/{project_number}/regions/{region_name}/networkAttachments/{network_attachment_name}. "networkIP": "A String", # An IPv4 internal IP address to assign to the instance for this network interface. If not specified by the user, an unused internal IP is assigned by the system. "nicType": "A String", # The type of vNIC to be used on this interface. This may be gVNIC or VirtioNet. + "parentNicName": "A String", # Name of the parent network interface of a dynamic network interface. "queueCount": 42, # The networking queue count that's specified by users for the network interface. Both Rx and Tx queues will be set to this number. It'll be empty if not specified by the users. "stackType": "A String", # The stack type for this network interface. To assign only IPv4 addresses, use IPV4_ONLY. To assign both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, use IPV4_IPV6. If not specified, IPV4_ONLY is used. This field can be both set at instance creation and update network interface operations. "subnetwork": "A String", # The URL of the Subnetwork resource for this instance. If the network resource is in legacy mode, do not specify this field. If the network is in auto subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is optional. If the network is in custom subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is required. If you specify this field, you can specify the subnetwork as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /subnetworks/subnetwork - regions/region/subnetworks/subnetwork + "vlan": 42, # VLAN tag of a dynamic network interface, must be an integer in the range from 2 to 255 inclusively. }, ], "networkPerformanceConfig": { # Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet. @@ -374,6 +376,7 @@

Method Details

}, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. }, "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances. @@ -785,9 +788,11 @@

Method Details

"networkAttachment": "A String", # The URL of the network attachment that this interface should connect to in the following format: projects/{project_number}/regions/{region_name}/networkAttachments/{network_attachment_name}. "networkIP": "A String", # An IPv4 internal IP address to assign to the instance for this network interface. If not specified by the user, an unused internal IP is assigned by the system. "nicType": "A String", # The type of vNIC to be used on this interface. This may be gVNIC or VirtioNet. + "parentNicName": "A String", # Name of the parent network interface of a dynamic network interface. "queueCount": 42, # The networking queue count that's specified by users for the network interface. Both Rx and Tx queues will be set to this number. It'll be empty if not specified by the users. "stackType": "A String", # The stack type for this network interface. To assign only IPv4 addresses, use IPV4_ONLY. To assign both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, use IPV4_IPV6. If not specified, IPV4_ONLY is used. This field can be both set at instance creation and update network interface operations. "subnetwork": "A String", # The URL of the Subnetwork resource for this instance. If the network resource is in legacy mode, do not specify this field. If the network is in auto subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is optional. If the network is in custom subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is required. If you specify this field, you can specify the subnetwork as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /subnetworks/subnetwork - regions/region/subnetworks/subnetwork + "vlan": 42, # VLAN tag of a dynamic network interface, must be an integer in the range from 2 to 255 inclusively. }, ], "networkPerformanceConfig": { # Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet. @@ -837,6 +842,7 @@

Method Details

}, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. }, "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances. @@ -1121,9 +1127,11 @@

Method Details

"networkAttachment": "A String", # The URL of the network attachment that this interface should connect to in the following format: projects/{project_number}/regions/{region_name}/networkAttachments/{network_attachment_name}. "networkIP": "A String", # An IPv4 internal IP address to assign to the instance for this network interface. If not specified by the user, an unused internal IP is assigned by the system. "nicType": "A String", # The type of vNIC to be used on this interface. This may be gVNIC or VirtioNet. + "parentNicName": "A String", # Name of the parent network interface of a dynamic network interface. "queueCount": 42, # The networking queue count that's specified by users for the network interface. Both Rx and Tx queues will be set to this number. It'll be empty if not specified by the users. "stackType": "A String", # The stack type for this network interface. To assign only IPv4 addresses, use IPV4_ONLY. To assign both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, use IPV4_IPV6. If not specified, IPV4_ONLY is used. This field can be both set at instance creation and update network interface operations. "subnetwork": "A String", # The URL of the Subnetwork resource for this instance. If the network resource is in legacy mode, do not specify this field. If the network is in auto subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is optional. If the network is in custom subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is required. If you specify this field, you can specify the subnetwork as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /subnetworks/subnetwork - regions/region/subnetworks/subnetwork + "vlan": 42, # VLAN tag of a dynamic network interface, must be an integer in the range from 2 to 255 inclusively. }, ], "networkPerformanceConfig": { # Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet. @@ -1173,6 +1181,7 @@

Method Details

}, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. }, "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances. @@ -1537,9 +1546,11 @@

Method Details

"networkAttachment": "A String", # The URL of the network attachment that this interface should connect to in the following format: projects/{project_number}/regions/{region_name}/networkAttachments/{network_attachment_name}. "networkIP": "A String", # An IPv4 internal IP address to assign to the instance for this network interface. If not specified by the user, an unused internal IP is assigned by the system. "nicType": "A String", # The type of vNIC to be used on this interface. This may be gVNIC or VirtioNet. + "parentNicName": "A String", # Name of the parent network interface of a dynamic network interface. "queueCount": 42, # The networking queue count that's specified by users for the network interface. Both Rx and Tx queues will be set to this number. It'll be empty if not specified by the users. "stackType": "A String", # The stack type for this network interface. To assign only IPv4 addresses, use IPV4_ONLY. To assign both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, use IPV4_IPV6. If not specified, IPV4_ONLY is used. This field can be both set at instance creation and update network interface operations. "subnetwork": "A String", # The URL of the Subnetwork resource for this instance. If the network resource is in legacy mode, do not specify this field. If the network is in auto subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is optional. If the network is in custom subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is required. If you specify this field, you can specify the subnetwork as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /subnetworks/subnetwork - regions/region/subnetworks/subnetwork + "vlan": 42, # VLAN tag of a dynamic network interface, must be an integer in the range from 2 to 255 inclusively. }, ], "networkPerformanceConfig": { # Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet. @@ -1589,6 +1600,7 @@

Method Details

}, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. }, "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.instances.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.instances.html index e533c9c4c9f..218f38fc737 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.instances.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.instances.html @@ -77,6 +77,9 @@

Instance Methods

addAccessConfig(project, zone, instance, networkInterface, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

Adds an access config to an instance's network interface.

+

+ addNetworkInterface(project, zone, instance, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Adds one dynamic network interface to an active instance.

addResourcePolicies(project, zone, instance, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

Adds existing resource policies to an instance. You can only add one policy right now which will be applied to this instance for scheduling live migrations.

@@ -101,6 +104,9 @@

Instance Methods

deleteAccessConfig(project, zone, instance, accessConfig, networkInterface, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

Deletes an access config from an instance's network interface.

+

+ deleteNetworkInterface(project, zone, instance, networkInterfaceName, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Deletes one dynamic network interface from an active instance. InstancesDeleteNetworkInterfaceRequest indicates: - instance from which to delete, using project+zone+resource_id fields; - dynamic network interface to be deleted, using network_interface_name field;

detachDisk(project, zone, instance, deviceName, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

Detaches a disk from an instance.

@@ -376,6 +382,186 @@

Method Details

} +
+ addNetworkInterface(project, zone, instance, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Adds one dynamic network interface to an active instance.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  zone: string, The name of the zone for this request. (required)
+  instance: string, The instance name for this request stored as resource_id. Name should conform to RFC1035 or be an unsigned long integer. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # A network interface resource attached to an instance.
+  "accessConfigs": [ # An array of configurations for this interface. Currently, only one access config, ONE_TO_ONE_NAT, is supported. If there are no accessConfigs specified, then this instance will have no external internet access.
+    { # An access configuration attached to an instance's network interface. Only one access config per instance is supported.
+      "externalIpv6": "A String", # Applies to ipv6AccessConfigs only. The first IPv6 address of the external IPv6 range associated with this instance, prefix length is stored in externalIpv6PrefixLength in ipv6AccessConfig. To use a static external IP address, it must be unused and in the same region as the instance's zone. If not specified, Google Cloud will automatically assign an external IPv6 address from the instance's subnetwork.
+      "externalIpv6PrefixLength": 42, # Applies to ipv6AccessConfigs only. The prefix length of the external IPv6 range.
+      "kind": "compute#accessConfig", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#accessConfig for access configs.
+      "name": "A String", # The name of this access configuration. In accessConfigs (IPv4), the default and recommended name is External NAT, but you can use any arbitrary string, such as My external IP or Network Access. In ipv6AccessConfigs, the recommend name is External IPv6.
+      "natIP": "A String", # Applies to accessConfigs (IPv4) only. An external IP address associated with this instance. Specify an unused static external IP address available to the project or leave this field undefined to use an IP from a shared ephemeral IP address pool. If you specify a static external IP address, it must live in the same region as the zone of the instance.
+      "networkTier": "A String", # This signifies the networking tier used for configuring this access configuration and can only take the following values: PREMIUM, STANDARD. If an AccessConfig is specified without a valid external IP address, an ephemeral IP will be created with this networkTier. If an AccessConfig with a valid external IP address is specified, it must match that of the networkTier associated with the Address resource owning that IP.
+      "publicPtrDomainName": "A String", # The DNS domain name for the public PTR record. You can set this field only if the `setPublicPtr` field is enabled in accessConfig. If this field is unspecified in ipv6AccessConfig, a default PTR record will be created for first IP in associated external IPv6 range.
+      "securityPolicy": "A String", # The resource URL for the security policy associated with this access config.
+      "setPublicPtr": True or False, # Specifies whether a public DNS 'PTR' record should be created to map the external IP address of the instance to a DNS domain name. This field is not used in ipv6AccessConfig. A default PTR record will be created if the VM has external IPv6 range associated.
+      "type": "A String", # The type of configuration. In accessConfigs (IPv4), the default and only option is ONE_TO_ONE_NAT. In ipv6AccessConfigs, the default and only option is DIRECT_IPV6.
+    },
+  ],
+  "aliasIpRanges": [ # An array of alias IP ranges for this network interface. You can only specify this field for network interfaces in VPC networks.
+    { # An alias IP range attached to an instance's network interface.
+      "ipCidrRange": "A String", # The IP alias ranges to allocate for this interface. This IP CIDR range must belong to the specified subnetwork and cannot contain IP addresses reserved by system or used by other network interfaces. This range may be a single IP address (such as 10.2.3.4), a netmask (such as /24) or a CIDR-formatted string (such as 10.1.2.0/24).
+      "subnetworkRangeName": "A String", # The name of a subnetwork secondary IP range from which to allocate an IP alias range. If not specified, the primary range of the subnetwork is used.
+    },
+  ],
+  "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint hash of contents stored in this network interface. This field will be ignored when inserting an Instance or adding a NetworkInterface. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the NetworkInterface. The request will fail with error 400 Bad Request if the fingerprint is not provided, or 412 Precondition Failed if the fingerprint is out of date.
+  "internalIpv6PrefixLength": 42, # The prefix length of the primary internal IPv6 range.
+  "ipv6AccessConfigs": [ # An array of IPv6 access configurations for this interface. Currently, only one IPv6 access config, DIRECT_IPV6, is supported. If there is no ipv6AccessConfig specified, then this instance will have no external IPv6 Internet access.
+    { # An access configuration attached to an instance's network interface. Only one access config per instance is supported.
+      "externalIpv6": "A String", # Applies to ipv6AccessConfigs only. The first IPv6 address of the external IPv6 range associated with this instance, prefix length is stored in externalIpv6PrefixLength in ipv6AccessConfig. To use a static external IP address, it must be unused and in the same region as the instance's zone. If not specified, Google Cloud will automatically assign an external IPv6 address from the instance's subnetwork.
+      "externalIpv6PrefixLength": 42, # Applies to ipv6AccessConfigs only. The prefix length of the external IPv6 range.
+      "kind": "compute#accessConfig", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#accessConfig for access configs.
+      "name": "A String", # The name of this access configuration. In accessConfigs (IPv4), the default and recommended name is External NAT, but you can use any arbitrary string, such as My external IP or Network Access. In ipv6AccessConfigs, the recommend name is External IPv6.
+      "natIP": "A String", # Applies to accessConfigs (IPv4) only. An external IP address associated with this instance. Specify an unused static external IP address available to the project or leave this field undefined to use an IP from a shared ephemeral IP address pool. If you specify a static external IP address, it must live in the same region as the zone of the instance.
+      "networkTier": "A String", # This signifies the networking tier used for configuring this access configuration and can only take the following values: PREMIUM, STANDARD. If an AccessConfig is specified without a valid external IP address, an ephemeral IP will be created with this networkTier. If an AccessConfig with a valid external IP address is specified, it must match that of the networkTier associated with the Address resource owning that IP.
+      "publicPtrDomainName": "A String", # The DNS domain name for the public PTR record. You can set this field only if the `setPublicPtr` field is enabled in accessConfig. If this field is unspecified in ipv6AccessConfig, a default PTR record will be created for first IP in associated external IPv6 range.
+      "securityPolicy": "A String", # The resource URL for the security policy associated with this access config.
+      "setPublicPtr": True or False, # Specifies whether a public DNS 'PTR' record should be created to map the external IP address of the instance to a DNS domain name. This field is not used in ipv6AccessConfig. A default PTR record will be created if the VM has external IPv6 range associated.
+      "type": "A String", # The type of configuration. In accessConfigs (IPv4), the default and only option is ONE_TO_ONE_NAT. In ipv6AccessConfigs, the default and only option is DIRECT_IPV6.
+    },
+  ],
+  "ipv6AccessType": "A String", # [Output Only] One of EXTERNAL, INTERNAL to indicate whether the IP can be accessed from the Internet. This field is always inherited from its subnetwork. Valid only if stackType is IPV4_IPV6.
+  "ipv6Address": "A String", # An IPv6 internal network address for this network interface. To use a static internal IP address, it must be unused and in the same region as the instance's zone. If not specified, Google Cloud will automatically assign an internal IPv6 address from the instance's subnetwork.
+  "kind": "compute#networkInterface", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#networkInterface for network interfaces.
+  "name": "A String", # [Output Only] The name of the network interface, which is generated by the server. For a VM, the network interface uses the nicN naming format. Where N is a value between 0 and 7. The default interface value is nic0.
+  "network": "A String", # URL of the VPC network resource for this instance. When creating an instance, if neither the network nor the subnetwork is specified, the default network global/networks/default is used. If the selected project doesn't have the default network, you must specify a network or subnet. If the network is not specified but the subnetwork is specified, the network is inferred. If you specify this property, you can specify the network as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/global/networks/ network - projects/project/global/networks/network - global/networks/default
+  "networkAttachment": "A String", # The URL of the network attachment that this interface should connect to in the following format: projects/{project_number}/regions/{region_name}/networkAttachments/{network_attachment_name}.
+  "networkIP": "A String", # An IPv4 internal IP address to assign to the instance for this network interface. If not specified by the user, an unused internal IP is assigned by the system.
+  "nicType": "A String", # The type of vNIC to be used on this interface. This may be gVNIC or VirtioNet.
+  "parentNicName": "A String", # Name of the parent network interface of a dynamic network interface.
+  "queueCount": 42, # The networking queue count that's specified by users for the network interface. Both Rx and Tx queues will be set to this number. It'll be empty if not specified by the users.
+  "stackType": "A String", # The stack type for this network interface. To assign only IPv4 addresses, use IPV4_ONLY. To assign both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, use IPV4_IPV6. If not specified, IPV4_ONLY is used. This field can be both set at instance creation and update network interface operations.
+  "subnetwork": "A String", # The URL of the Subnetwork resource for this instance. If the network resource is in legacy mode, do not specify this field. If the network is in auto subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is optional. If the network is in custom subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is required. If you specify this field, you can specify the subnetwork as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /subnetworks/subnetwork - regions/region/subnetworks/subnetwork
+  "vlan": 42, # VLAN tag of a dynamic network interface, must be an integer in the range from 2 to 255 inclusively.
+}
+
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zoneOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources. Note that completed Operation resources have a limited retention period.
+  "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
+  "description": "A String", # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
+  "endTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "error": { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    "errors": [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
+      {
+        "code": "A String", # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
+        "errorDetails": [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
+          {
+            "errorInfo": { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the "pubsub.googleapis.com" API when it is not enabled: { "reason": "API_DISABLED" "domain": "googleapis.com" "metadata": { "resource": "projects/123", "service": "pubsub.googleapis.com" } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { "reason": "STOCKOUT" "domain": "spanner.googleapis.com", "metadata": { "availableRegions": "us-central1,us-east2" } }
+              "domain": "A String", # The logical grouping to which the "reason" belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: "pubsub.googleapis.com". If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is "googleapis.com".
+              "metadatas": { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys must match a regular expression of `a-z+` but should ideally be lowerCamelCase. Also, they must be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than `{"instanceLimit": "100/request"}`, should be returned as, `{"instanceLimitPerRequest": "100"}`, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "reason": "A String", # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
+            },
+            "help": { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn't enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
+              "links": [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
+                { # Describes a URL link.
+                  "description": "A String", # Describes what the link offers.
+                  "url": "A String", # The URL of the link.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            "localizedMessage": { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
+              "locale": "A String", # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: "en-US", "fr-CH", "es-MX"
+              "message": "A String", # The localized error message in the above locale.
+            },
+            "quotaInfo": { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
+              "dimensions": { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "futureLimit": 3.14, # Future quota limit being rolled out. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limit": 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limitName": "A String", # The name of the quota limit.
+              "metricName": "A String", # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
+              "rolloutStatus": "A String", # Rollout status of the future quota limit.
+            },
+          },
+        ],
+        "location": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
+        "message": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "httpErrorMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
+  "httpErrorStatusCode": 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  "insertTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "instancesBulkInsertOperationMetadata": {
+    "perLocationStatus": { # Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "createdVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs successfully created so far.
+        "deletedVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that got deleted during rollback.
+        "failedToCreateVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that started creating but encountered an error.
+        "status": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation status of BulkInsert operation - information if the flow is rolling forward or rolling back.
+        "targetVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs originally planned to be created.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "kind": "compute#operation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
+  "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
+  "operationGroupId": "A String", # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
+  "operationType": "A String", # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
+  "progress": 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "setCommonInstanceMetadataOperationMetadata": { # [Output Only] If the operation is for projects.setCommonInstanceMetadata, this field will contain information on all underlying zonal actions and their state.
+    "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The client operation id.
+    "perLocationOperations": { # [Output Only] Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # [Output Only] If state is `ABANDONED` or `FAILED`, this field is populated.
+          "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+          "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+            {
+              "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+            },
+          ],
+          "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+        },
+        "state": "A String", # [Output Only] Status of the action, which can be one of the following: `PROPAGATING`, `PROPAGATED`, `ABANDONED`, `FAILED`, or `DONE`.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "startTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "status": "A String", # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
+  "statusMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
+  "targetId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
+  "targetLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the disk that the snapshot was created from.
+  "user": "A String", # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com` or `alice_smith_identifier (global/workforcePools/example-com-us-employees)`.
+  "warnings": [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    {
+      "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+      "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+        {
+          "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+          "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+    },
+  ],
+  "zone": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
+}
+
+
addResourcePolicies(project, zone, instance, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)
Adds existing resource policies to an instance. You can only add one policy right now which will be applied to this instance for scheduling live migrations.
@@ -740,15 +926,21 @@ 

Method Details

"networkAttachment": "A String", # The URL of the network attachment that this interface should connect to in the following format: projects/{project_number}/regions/{region_name}/networkAttachments/{network_attachment_name}. "networkIP": "A String", # An IPv4 internal IP address to assign to the instance for this network interface. If not specified by the user, an unused internal IP is assigned by the system. "nicType": "A String", # The type of vNIC to be used on this interface. This may be gVNIC or VirtioNet. + "parentNicName": "A String", # Name of the parent network interface of a dynamic network interface. "queueCount": 42, # The networking queue count that's specified by users for the network interface. Both Rx and Tx queues will be set to this number. It'll be empty if not specified by the users. "stackType": "A String", # The stack type for this network interface. To assign only IPv4 addresses, use IPV4_ONLY. To assign both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, use IPV4_IPV6. If not specified, IPV4_ONLY is used. This field can be both set at instance creation and update network interface operations. "subnetwork": "A String", # The URL of the Subnetwork resource for this instance. If the network resource is in legacy mode, do not specify this field. If the network is in auto subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is optional. If the network is in custom subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is required. If you specify this field, you can specify the subnetwork as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /subnetworks/subnetwork - regions/region/subnetworks/subnetwork + "vlan": 42, # VLAN tag of a dynamic network interface, must be an integer in the range from 2 to 255 inclusively. }, ], "networkPerformanceConfig": { "totalEgressBandwidthTier": "A String", }, "params": { # Additional instance params. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "requestValidForDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Relative deadline for waiting for capacity. Relevant only for Instances.Insert API. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the instance. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty. "a_key": "A String", }, @@ -830,6 +1022,7 @@

Method Details

}, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. }, "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource. @@ -1335,9 +1528,11 @@

Method Details

"networkAttachment": "A String", # The URL of the network attachment that this interface should connect to in the following format: projects/{project_number}/regions/{region_name}/networkAttachments/{network_attachment_name}. "networkIP": "A String", # An IPv4 internal IP address to assign to the instance for this network interface. If not specified by the user, an unused internal IP is assigned by the system. "nicType": "A String", # The type of vNIC to be used on this interface. This may be gVNIC or VirtioNet. + "parentNicName": "A String", # Name of the parent network interface of a dynamic network interface. "queueCount": 42, # The networking queue count that's specified by users for the network interface. Both Rx and Tx queues will be set to this number. It'll be empty if not specified by the users. "stackType": "A String", # The stack type for this network interface. To assign only IPv4 addresses, use IPV4_ONLY. To assign both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, use IPV4_IPV6. If not specified, IPV4_ONLY is used. This field can be both set at instance creation and update network interface operations. "subnetwork": "A String", # The URL of the Subnetwork resource for this instance. If the network resource is in legacy mode, do not specify this field. If the network is in auto subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is optional. If the network is in custom subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is required. If you specify this field, you can specify the subnetwork as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /subnetworks/subnetwork - regions/region/subnetworks/subnetwork + "vlan": 42, # VLAN tag of a dynamic network interface, must be an integer in the range from 2 to 255 inclusively. }, ], "networkPerformanceConfig": { # Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet. @@ -1387,6 +1582,7 @@

Method Details

}, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. }, "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances. @@ -1805,6 +2001,132 @@

Method Details

}
+
+ deleteNetworkInterface(project, zone, instance, networkInterfaceName, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Deletes one dynamic network interface from an active instance. InstancesDeleteNetworkInterfaceRequest indicates: - instance from which to delete, using project+zone+resource_id fields; - dynamic network interface to be deleted, using network_interface_name field;
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  zone: string, The name of the zone for this request. (required)
+  instance: string, The instance name for this request stored as resource_id. Name should conform to RFC1035 or be an unsigned long integer. (required)
+  networkInterfaceName: string, The name of the dynamic network interface to be deleted from the instance. (required)
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zoneOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources. Note that completed Operation resources have a limited retention period.
+  "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
+  "description": "A String", # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
+  "endTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "error": { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    "errors": [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
+      {
+        "code": "A String", # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
+        "errorDetails": [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
+          {
+            "errorInfo": { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the "pubsub.googleapis.com" API when it is not enabled: { "reason": "API_DISABLED" "domain": "googleapis.com" "metadata": { "resource": "projects/123", "service": "pubsub.googleapis.com" } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { "reason": "STOCKOUT" "domain": "spanner.googleapis.com", "metadata": { "availableRegions": "us-central1,us-east2" } }
+              "domain": "A String", # The logical grouping to which the "reason" belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: "pubsub.googleapis.com". If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is "googleapis.com".
+              "metadatas": { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys must match a regular expression of `a-z+` but should ideally be lowerCamelCase. Also, they must be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than `{"instanceLimit": "100/request"}`, should be returned as, `{"instanceLimitPerRequest": "100"}`, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "reason": "A String", # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
+            },
+            "help": { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn't enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
+              "links": [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
+                { # Describes a URL link.
+                  "description": "A String", # Describes what the link offers.
+                  "url": "A String", # The URL of the link.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            "localizedMessage": { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
+              "locale": "A String", # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: "en-US", "fr-CH", "es-MX"
+              "message": "A String", # The localized error message in the above locale.
+            },
+            "quotaInfo": { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
+              "dimensions": { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "futureLimit": 3.14, # Future quota limit being rolled out. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limit": 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limitName": "A String", # The name of the quota limit.
+              "metricName": "A String", # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
+              "rolloutStatus": "A String", # Rollout status of the future quota limit.
+            },
+          },
+        ],
+        "location": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
+        "message": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "httpErrorMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
+  "httpErrorStatusCode": 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  "insertTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "instancesBulkInsertOperationMetadata": {
+    "perLocationStatus": { # Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "createdVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs successfully created so far.
+        "deletedVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that got deleted during rollback.
+        "failedToCreateVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that started creating but encountered an error.
+        "status": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation status of BulkInsert operation - information if the flow is rolling forward or rolling back.
+        "targetVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs originally planned to be created.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "kind": "compute#operation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
+  "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
+  "operationGroupId": "A String", # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
+  "operationType": "A String", # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
+  "progress": 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "setCommonInstanceMetadataOperationMetadata": { # [Output Only] If the operation is for projects.setCommonInstanceMetadata, this field will contain information on all underlying zonal actions and their state.
+    "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The client operation id.
+    "perLocationOperations": { # [Output Only] Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # [Output Only] If state is `ABANDONED` or `FAILED`, this field is populated.
+          "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+          "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+            {
+              "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+            },
+          ],
+          "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+        },
+        "state": "A String", # [Output Only] Status of the action, which can be one of the following: `PROPAGATING`, `PROPAGATED`, `ABANDONED`, `FAILED`, or `DONE`.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "startTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "status": "A String", # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
+  "statusMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
+  "targetId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
+  "targetLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the disk that the snapshot was created from.
+  "user": "A String", # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com` or `alice_smith_identifier (global/workforcePools/example-com-us-employees)`.
+  "warnings": [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    {
+      "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+      "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+        {
+          "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+          "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+    },
+  ],
+  "zone": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
+}
+
+
detachDisk(project, zone, instance, deviceName, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)
Detaches a disk from an instance.
@@ -2151,15 +2473,21 @@ 

Method Details

"networkAttachment": "A String", # The URL of the network attachment that this interface should connect to in the following format: projects/{project_number}/regions/{region_name}/networkAttachments/{network_attachment_name}. "networkIP": "A String", # An IPv4 internal IP address to assign to the instance for this network interface. If not specified by the user, an unused internal IP is assigned by the system. "nicType": "A String", # The type of vNIC to be used on this interface. This may be gVNIC or VirtioNet. + "parentNicName": "A String", # Name of the parent network interface of a dynamic network interface. "queueCount": 42, # The networking queue count that's specified by users for the network interface. Both Rx and Tx queues will be set to this number. It'll be empty if not specified by the users. "stackType": "A String", # The stack type for this network interface. To assign only IPv4 addresses, use IPV4_ONLY. To assign both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, use IPV4_IPV6. If not specified, IPV4_ONLY is used. This field can be both set at instance creation and update network interface operations. "subnetwork": "A String", # The URL of the Subnetwork resource for this instance. If the network resource is in legacy mode, do not specify this field. If the network is in auto subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is optional. If the network is in custom subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is required. If you specify this field, you can specify the subnetwork as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /subnetworks/subnetwork - regions/region/subnetworks/subnetwork + "vlan": 42, # VLAN tag of a dynamic network interface, must be an integer in the range from 2 to 255 inclusively. }, ], "networkPerformanceConfig": { "totalEgressBandwidthTier": "A String", }, "params": { # Additional instance params. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "requestValidForDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Relative deadline for waiting for capacity. Relevant only for Instances.Insert API. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the instance. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty. "a_key": "A String", }, @@ -2241,6 +2569,7 @@

Method Details

}, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. }, "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource. @@ -2902,15 +3231,21 @@

Method Details

"networkAttachment": "A String", # The URL of the network attachment that this interface should connect to in the following format: projects/{project_number}/regions/{region_name}/networkAttachments/{network_attachment_name}. "networkIP": "A String", # An IPv4 internal IP address to assign to the instance for this network interface. If not specified by the user, an unused internal IP is assigned by the system. "nicType": "A String", # The type of vNIC to be used on this interface. This may be gVNIC or VirtioNet. + "parentNicName": "A String", # Name of the parent network interface of a dynamic network interface. "queueCount": 42, # The networking queue count that's specified by users for the network interface. Both Rx and Tx queues will be set to this number. It'll be empty if not specified by the users. "stackType": "A String", # The stack type for this network interface. To assign only IPv4 addresses, use IPV4_ONLY. To assign both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, use IPV4_IPV6. If not specified, IPV4_ONLY is used. This field can be both set at instance creation and update network interface operations. "subnetwork": "A String", # The URL of the Subnetwork resource for this instance. If the network resource is in legacy mode, do not specify this field. If the network is in auto subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is optional. If the network is in custom subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is required. If you specify this field, you can specify the subnetwork as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /subnetworks/subnetwork - regions/region/subnetworks/subnetwork + "vlan": 42, # VLAN tag of a dynamic network interface, must be an integer in the range from 2 to 255 inclusively. }, ], "networkPerformanceConfig": { "totalEgressBandwidthTier": "A String", }, "params": { # Additional instance params. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "requestValidForDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Relative deadline for waiting for capacity. Relevant only for Instances.Insert API. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the instance. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty. "a_key": "A String", }, @@ -2992,6 +3327,7 @@

Method Details

}, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. }, "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource. @@ -3377,15 +3713,21 @@

Method Details

"networkAttachment": "A String", # The URL of the network attachment that this interface should connect to in the following format: projects/{project_number}/regions/{region_name}/networkAttachments/{network_attachment_name}. "networkIP": "A String", # An IPv4 internal IP address to assign to the instance for this network interface. If not specified by the user, an unused internal IP is assigned by the system. "nicType": "A String", # The type of vNIC to be used on this interface. This may be gVNIC or VirtioNet. + "parentNicName": "A String", # Name of the parent network interface of a dynamic network interface. "queueCount": 42, # The networking queue count that's specified by users for the network interface. Both Rx and Tx queues will be set to this number. It'll be empty if not specified by the users. "stackType": "A String", # The stack type for this network interface. To assign only IPv4 addresses, use IPV4_ONLY. To assign both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, use IPV4_IPV6. If not specified, IPV4_ONLY is used. This field can be both set at instance creation and update network interface operations. "subnetwork": "A String", # The URL of the Subnetwork resource for this instance. If the network resource is in legacy mode, do not specify this field. If the network is in auto subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is optional. If the network is in custom subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is required. If you specify this field, you can specify the subnetwork as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /subnetworks/subnetwork - regions/region/subnetworks/subnetwork + "vlan": 42, # VLAN tag of a dynamic network interface, must be an integer in the range from 2 to 255 inclusively. }, ], "networkPerformanceConfig": { "totalEgressBandwidthTier": "A String", }, "params": { # Additional instance params. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "requestValidForDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Relative deadline for waiting for capacity. Relevant only for Instances.Insert API. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the instance. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty. "a_key": "A String", }, @@ -3467,6 +3809,7 @@

Method Details

}, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. }, "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource. @@ -5462,6 +5805,7 @@

Method Details

}, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. } @@ -7012,15 +7356,21 @@

Method Details

"networkAttachment": "A String", # The URL of the network attachment that this interface should connect to in the following format: projects/{project_number}/regions/{region_name}/networkAttachments/{network_attachment_name}. "networkIP": "A String", # An IPv4 internal IP address to assign to the instance for this network interface. If not specified by the user, an unused internal IP is assigned by the system. "nicType": "A String", # The type of vNIC to be used on this interface. This may be gVNIC or VirtioNet. + "parentNicName": "A String", # Name of the parent network interface of a dynamic network interface. "queueCount": 42, # The networking queue count that's specified by users for the network interface. Both Rx and Tx queues will be set to this number. It'll be empty if not specified by the users. "stackType": "A String", # The stack type for this network interface. To assign only IPv4 addresses, use IPV4_ONLY. To assign both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, use IPV4_IPV6. If not specified, IPV4_ONLY is used. This field can be both set at instance creation and update network interface operations. "subnetwork": "A String", # The URL of the Subnetwork resource for this instance. If the network resource is in legacy mode, do not specify this field. If the network is in auto subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is optional. If the network is in custom subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is required. If you specify this field, you can specify the subnetwork as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /subnetworks/subnetwork - regions/region/subnetworks/subnetwork + "vlan": 42, # VLAN tag of a dynamic network interface, must be an integer in the range from 2 to 255 inclusively. }, ], "networkPerformanceConfig": { "totalEgressBandwidthTier": "A String", }, "params": { # Additional instance params. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "requestValidForDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Relative deadline for waiting for capacity. Relevant only for Instances.Insert API. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the instance. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty. "a_key": "A String", }, @@ -7102,6 +7452,7 @@

Method Details

}, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. }, "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource. @@ -7601,9 +7952,11 @@

Method Details

"networkAttachment": "A String", # The URL of the network attachment that this interface should connect to in the following format: projects/{project_number}/regions/{region_name}/networkAttachments/{network_attachment_name}. "networkIP": "A String", # An IPv4 internal IP address to assign to the instance for this network interface. If not specified by the user, an unused internal IP is assigned by the system. "nicType": "A String", # The type of vNIC to be used on this interface. This may be gVNIC or VirtioNet. + "parentNicName": "A String", # Name of the parent network interface of a dynamic network interface. "queueCount": 42, # The networking queue count that's specified by users for the network interface. Both Rx and Tx queues will be set to this number. It'll be empty if not specified by the users. "stackType": "A String", # The stack type for this network interface. To assign only IPv4 addresses, use IPV4_ONLY. To assign both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, use IPV4_IPV6. If not specified, IPV4_ONLY is used. This field can be both set at instance creation and update network interface operations. "subnetwork": "A String", # The URL of the Subnetwork resource for this instance. If the network resource is in legacy mode, do not specify this field. If the network is in auto subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is optional. If the network is in custom subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is required. If you specify this field, you can specify the subnetwork as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /subnetworks/subnetwork - regions/region/subnetworks/subnetwork + "vlan": 42, # VLAN tag of a dynamic network interface, must be an integer in the range from 2 to 255 inclusively. } requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.interconnectAttachmentGroups.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.interconnectAttachmentGroups.html index 1f538bf1530..a9eb5320226 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.interconnectAttachmentGroups.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.interconnectAttachmentGroups.html @@ -393,7 +393,7 @@

Method Details

"adminEnabled": True or False, # Whether this Attachment is enabled. This becomes false when the customer drains their Attachment. "attachment": "A String", # The URL of the Attachment being described. "isActive": "A String", # Whether this Attachment is participating in the redundant configuration. This will be ACTIVE if and only if the status below is CONNECTION_UP. Any INACTIVE Attachments are excluded from the analysis that generates operational.availabilitySLA. - "status": "A String", # Whether this Attachment is active, and if so, whether BGP is up. This is based on the statuses available in the Pantheon UI here: http://google3/java/com/google/cloud/boq/clientapi/gce/hybrid/api/interconnect_models.proto + "status": "A String", # Whether this Attachment is active, and if so, whether BGP is up. }, ], "configured": { # [Output Only] The redundancy this group is configured to support. The way a user queries what SLA their Attachment gets is by looking at this field of the Attachment's AttachmentGroup. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.machineImages.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.machineImages.html index 4c7a04ed3cf..3859a916e79 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.machineImages.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.machineImages.html @@ -436,9 +436,11 @@

Method Details

"networkAttachment": "A String", # The URL of the network attachment that this interface should connect to in the following format: projects/{project_number}/regions/{region_name}/networkAttachments/{network_attachment_name}. "networkIP": "A String", # An IPv4 internal IP address to assign to the instance for this network interface. If not specified by the user, an unused internal IP is assigned by the system. "nicType": "A String", # The type of vNIC to be used on this interface. This may be gVNIC or VirtioNet. + "parentNicName": "A String", # Name of the parent network interface of a dynamic network interface. "queueCount": 42, # The networking queue count that's specified by users for the network interface. Both Rx and Tx queues will be set to this number. It'll be empty if not specified by the users. "stackType": "A String", # The stack type for this network interface. To assign only IPv4 addresses, use IPV4_ONLY. To assign both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, use IPV4_IPV6. If not specified, IPV4_ONLY is used. This field can be both set at instance creation and update network interface operations. "subnetwork": "A String", # The URL of the Subnetwork resource for this instance. If the network resource is in legacy mode, do not specify this field. If the network is in auto subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is optional. If the network is in custom subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is required. If you specify this field, you can specify the subnetwork as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /subnetworks/subnetwork - regions/region/subnetworks/subnetwork + "vlan": 42, # VLAN tag of a dynamic network interface, must be an integer in the range from 2 to 255 inclusively. }, ], "networkPerformanceConfig": { # Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet. @@ -488,6 +490,7 @@

Method Details

}, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. }, "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances. @@ -652,9 +655,11 @@

Method Details

"networkAttachment": "A String", # The URL of the network attachment that this interface should connect to in the following format: projects/{project_number}/regions/{region_name}/networkAttachments/{network_attachment_name}. "networkIP": "A String", # An IPv4 internal IP address to assign to the instance for this network interface. If not specified by the user, an unused internal IP is assigned by the system. "nicType": "A String", # The type of vNIC to be used on this interface. This may be gVNIC or VirtioNet. + "parentNicName": "A String", # Name of the parent network interface of a dynamic network interface. "queueCount": 42, # The networking queue count that's specified by users for the network interface. Both Rx and Tx queues will be set to this number. It'll be empty if not specified by the users. "stackType": "A String", # The stack type for this network interface. To assign only IPv4 addresses, use IPV4_ONLY. To assign both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, use IPV4_IPV6. If not specified, IPV4_ONLY is used. This field can be both set at instance creation and update network interface operations. "subnetwork": "A String", # The URL of the Subnetwork resource for this instance. If the network resource is in legacy mode, do not specify this field. If the network is in auto subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is optional. If the network is in custom subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is required. If you specify this field, you can specify the subnetwork as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /subnetworks/subnetwork - regions/region/subnetworks/subnetwork + "vlan": 42, # VLAN tag of a dynamic network interface, must be an integer in the range from 2 to 255 inclusively. }, ], "scheduling": { # Sets the scheduling options for an Instance. # Specifies the scheduling options for the instances that are created from this machine image. @@ -687,6 +692,7 @@

Method Details

}, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. }, "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from this machine image. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances. @@ -957,9 +963,11 @@

Method Details

"networkAttachment": "A String", # The URL of the network attachment that this interface should connect to in the following format: projects/{project_number}/regions/{region_name}/networkAttachments/{network_attachment_name}. "networkIP": "A String", # An IPv4 internal IP address to assign to the instance for this network interface. If not specified by the user, an unused internal IP is assigned by the system. "nicType": "A String", # The type of vNIC to be used on this interface. This may be gVNIC or VirtioNet. + "parentNicName": "A String", # Name of the parent network interface of a dynamic network interface. "queueCount": 42, # The networking queue count that's specified by users for the network interface. Both Rx and Tx queues will be set to this number. It'll be empty if not specified by the users. "stackType": "A String", # The stack type for this network interface. To assign only IPv4 addresses, use IPV4_ONLY. To assign both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, use IPV4_IPV6. If not specified, IPV4_ONLY is used. This field can be both set at instance creation and update network interface operations. "subnetwork": "A String", # The URL of the Subnetwork resource for this instance. If the network resource is in legacy mode, do not specify this field. If the network is in auto subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is optional. If the network is in custom subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is required. If you specify this field, you can specify the subnetwork as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /subnetworks/subnetwork - regions/region/subnetworks/subnetwork + "vlan": 42, # VLAN tag of a dynamic network interface, must be an integer in the range from 2 to 255 inclusively. }, ], "networkPerformanceConfig": { # Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet. @@ -1009,6 +1017,7 @@

Method Details

}, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. }, "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances. @@ -1173,9 +1182,11 @@

Method Details

"networkAttachment": "A String", # The URL of the network attachment that this interface should connect to in the following format: projects/{project_number}/regions/{region_name}/networkAttachments/{network_attachment_name}. "networkIP": "A String", # An IPv4 internal IP address to assign to the instance for this network interface. If not specified by the user, an unused internal IP is assigned by the system. "nicType": "A String", # The type of vNIC to be used on this interface. This may be gVNIC or VirtioNet. + "parentNicName": "A String", # Name of the parent network interface of a dynamic network interface. "queueCount": 42, # The networking queue count that's specified by users for the network interface. Both Rx and Tx queues will be set to this number. It'll be empty if not specified by the users. "stackType": "A String", # The stack type for this network interface. To assign only IPv4 addresses, use IPV4_ONLY. To assign both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, use IPV4_IPV6. If not specified, IPV4_ONLY is used. This field can be both set at instance creation and update network interface operations. "subnetwork": "A String", # The URL of the Subnetwork resource for this instance. If the network resource is in legacy mode, do not specify this field. If the network is in auto subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is optional. If the network is in custom subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is required. If you specify this field, you can specify the subnetwork as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /subnetworks/subnetwork - regions/region/subnetworks/subnetwork + "vlan": 42, # VLAN tag of a dynamic network interface, must be an integer in the range from 2 to 255 inclusively. }, ], "scheduling": { # Sets the scheduling options for an Instance. # Specifies the scheduling options for the instances that are created from this machine image. @@ -1208,6 +1219,7 @@

Method Details

}, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. }, "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from this machine image. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances. @@ -1559,9 +1571,11 @@

Method Details

"networkAttachment": "A String", # The URL of the network attachment that this interface should connect to in the following format: projects/{project_number}/regions/{region_name}/networkAttachments/{network_attachment_name}. "networkIP": "A String", # An IPv4 internal IP address to assign to the instance for this network interface. If not specified by the user, an unused internal IP is assigned by the system. "nicType": "A String", # The type of vNIC to be used on this interface. This may be gVNIC or VirtioNet. + "parentNicName": "A String", # Name of the parent network interface of a dynamic network interface. "queueCount": 42, # The networking queue count that's specified by users for the network interface. Both Rx and Tx queues will be set to this number. It'll be empty if not specified by the users. "stackType": "A String", # The stack type for this network interface. To assign only IPv4 addresses, use IPV4_ONLY. To assign both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, use IPV4_IPV6. If not specified, IPV4_ONLY is used. This field can be both set at instance creation and update network interface operations. "subnetwork": "A String", # The URL of the Subnetwork resource for this instance. If the network resource is in legacy mode, do not specify this field. If the network is in auto subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is optional. If the network is in custom subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is required. If you specify this field, you can specify the subnetwork as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /subnetworks/subnetwork - regions/region/subnetworks/subnetwork + "vlan": 42, # VLAN tag of a dynamic network interface, must be an integer in the range from 2 to 255 inclusively. }, ], "networkPerformanceConfig": { # Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet. @@ -1611,6 +1625,7 @@

Method Details

}, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. }, "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances. @@ -1775,9 +1790,11 @@

Method Details

"networkAttachment": "A String", # The URL of the network attachment that this interface should connect to in the following format: projects/{project_number}/regions/{region_name}/networkAttachments/{network_attachment_name}. "networkIP": "A String", # An IPv4 internal IP address to assign to the instance for this network interface. If not specified by the user, an unused internal IP is assigned by the system. "nicType": "A String", # The type of vNIC to be used on this interface. This may be gVNIC or VirtioNet. + "parentNicName": "A String", # Name of the parent network interface of a dynamic network interface. "queueCount": 42, # The networking queue count that's specified by users for the network interface. Both Rx and Tx queues will be set to this number. It'll be empty if not specified by the users. "stackType": "A String", # The stack type for this network interface. To assign only IPv4 addresses, use IPV4_ONLY. To assign both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, use IPV4_IPV6. If not specified, IPV4_ONLY is used. This field can be both set at instance creation and update network interface operations. "subnetwork": "A String", # The URL of the Subnetwork resource for this instance. If the network resource is in legacy mode, do not specify this field. If the network is in auto subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is optional. If the network is in custom subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is required. If you specify this field, you can specify the subnetwork as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /subnetworks/subnetwork - regions/region/subnetworks/subnetwork + "vlan": 42, # VLAN tag of a dynamic network interface, must be an integer in the range from 2 to 255 inclusively. }, ], "scheduling": { # Sets the scheduling options for an Instance. # Specifies the scheduling options for the instances that are created from this machine image. @@ -1810,6 +1827,7 @@

Method Details

}, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. }, "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from this machine image. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.networkProfiles.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.networkProfiles.html index 8ea97fe32a4..fa4a75dca25 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.networkProfiles.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.networkProfiles.html @@ -159,6 +159,12 @@

Method Details

"scope": "A String", }, "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the resource. + "profileType": { # [Output Only] Type of the network profile. + "networkType": "A String", + "rdmaSubtype": "A String", + "ullSubtype": "A String", + "vpcSubtype": "A String", + }, "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource. "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id. }
@@ -239,6 +245,12 @@

Method Details

"scope": "A String", }, "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the resource. + "profileType": { # [Output Only] Type of the network profile. + "networkType": "A String", + "rdmaSubtype": "A String", + "ullSubtype": "A String", + "vpcSubtype": "A String", + }, "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource. "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id. }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionBackendServices.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionBackendServices.html index 41f9d80ded0..521cd33ba9a 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionBackendServices.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionBackendServices.html @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -675,7 +675,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -1062,7 +1062,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -1348,7 +1348,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -1650,7 +1650,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. @@ -2290,7 +2290,7 @@

Method Details

"clientTtl": 42, # Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a "public" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a "public" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year). "defaultTtl": 42, # Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. "maxTtl": 42, # Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of "0" means "always revalidate". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL. - "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. + "negativeCaching": True or False, # Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy. "negativeCachingPolicy": [ # Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists. { # Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes. "code": 42, # The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionInstanceGroups.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionInstanceGroups.html index c9253eb6dd2..d7bff6ab3e9 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionInstanceGroups.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionInstanceGroups.html @@ -95,6 +95,9 @@

Instance Methods

setNamedPorts(project, region, instanceGroup, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

Sets the named ports for the specified regional instance group.

+

+ testIamPermissions(project, region, resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource.

Method Details

close() @@ -424,4 +427,36 @@

Method Details

}
+
+ testIamPermissions(project, region, resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  region: string, The name of the region for this request. (required)
+  resource: string, Name or id of the resource for this request. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{
+  "permissions": [ # The set of permissions to check for the 'resource'. Permissions with wildcards (such as '*' or 'storage.*') are not allowed.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    {
+  "permissions": [ # A subset of `TestPermissionsRequest.permissions` that the caller is allowed.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+}
+
+ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionInstanceTemplates.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionInstanceTemplates.html index fdb13e423d9..0f1e0a5cc10 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionInstanceTemplates.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionInstanceTemplates.html @@ -427,9 +427,11 @@

Method Details

"networkAttachment": "A String", # The URL of the network attachment that this interface should connect to in the following format: projects/{project_number}/regions/{region_name}/networkAttachments/{network_attachment_name}. "networkIP": "A String", # An IPv4 internal IP address to assign to the instance for this network interface. If not specified by the user, an unused internal IP is assigned by the system. "nicType": "A String", # The type of vNIC to be used on this interface. This may be gVNIC or VirtioNet. + "parentNicName": "A String", # Name of the parent network interface of a dynamic network interface. "queueCount": 42, # The networking queue count that's specified by users for the network interface. Both Rx and Tx queues will be set to this number. It'll be empty if not specified by the users. "stackType": "A String", # The stack type for this network interface. To assign only IPv4 addresses, use IPV4_ONLY. To assign both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, use IPV4_IPV6. If not specified, IPV4_ONLY is used. This field can be both set at instance creation and update network interface operations. "subnetwork": "A String", # The URL of the Subnetwork resource for this instance. If the network resource is in legacy mode, do not specify this field. If the network is in auto subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is optional. If the network is in custom subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is required. If you specify this field, you can specify the subnetwork as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /subnetworks/subnetwork - regions/region/subnetworks/subnetwork + "vlan": 42, # VLAN tag of a dynamic network interface, must be an integer in the range from 2 to 255 inclusively. }, ], "networkPerformanceConfig": { # Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet. @@ -479,6 +481,7 @@

Method Details

}, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. }, "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances. @@ -715,9 +718,11 @@

Method Details

"networkAttachment": "A String", # The URL of the network attachment that this interface should connect to in the following format: projects/{project_number}/regions/{region_name}/networkAttachments/{network_attachment_name}. "networkIP": "A String", # An IPv4 internal IP address to assign to the instance for this network interface. If not specified by the user, an unused internal IP is assigned by the system. "nicType": "A String", # The type of vNIC to be used on this interface. This may be gVNIC or VirtioNet. + "parentNicName": "A String", # Name of the parent network interface of a dynamic network interface. "queueCount": 42, # The networking queue count that's specified by users for the network interface. Both Rx and Tx queues will be set to this number. It'll be empty if not specified by the users. "stackType": "A String", # The stack type for this network interface. To assign only IPv4 addresses, use IPV4_ONLY. To assign both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, use IPV4_IPV6. If not specified, IPV4_ONLY is used. This field can be both set at instance creation and update network interface operations. "subnetwork": "A String", # The URL of the Subnetwork resource for this instance. If the network resource is in legacy mode, do not specify this field. If the network is in auto subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is optional. If the network is in custom subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is required. If you specify this field, you can specify the subnetwork as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /subnetworks/subnetwork - regions/region/subnetworks/subnetwork + "vlan": 42, # VLAN tag of a dynamic network interface, must be an integer in the range from 2 to 255 inclusively. }, ], "networkPerformanceConfig": { # Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet. @@ -767,6 +772,7 @@

Method Details

}, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. }, "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances. @@ -1132,9 +1138,11 @@

Method Details

"networkAttachment": "A String", # The URL of the network attachment that this interface should connect to in the following format: projects/{project_number}/regions/{region_name}/networkAttachments/{network_attachment_name}. "networkIP": "A String", # An IPv4 internal IP address to assign to the instance for this network interface. If not specified by the user, an unused internal IP is assigned by the system. "nicType": "A String", # The type of vNIC to be used on this interface. This may be gVNIC or VirtioNet. + "parentNicName": "A String", # Name of the parent network interface of a dynamic network interface. "queueCount": 42, # The networking queue count that's specified by users for the network interface. Both Rx and Tx queues will be set to this number. It'll be empty if not specified by the users. "stackType": "A String", # The stack type for this network interface. To assign only IPv4 addresses, use IPV4_ONLY. To assign both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, use IPV4_IPV6. If not specified, IPV4_ONLY is used. This field can be both set at instance creation and update network interface operations. "subnetwork": "A String", # The URL of the Subnetwork resource for this instance. If the network resource is in legacy mode, do not specify this field. If the network is in auto subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is optional. If the network is in custom subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is required. If you specify this field, you can specify the subnetwork as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /subnetworks/subnetwork - regions/region/subnetworks/subnetwork + "vlan": 42, # VLAN tag of a dynamic network interface, must be an integer in the range from 2 to 255 inclusively. }, ], "networkPerformanceConfig": { # Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet. @@ -1184,6 +1192,7 @@

Method Details

}, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. }, "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionInstances.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionInstances.html index 34c578b9ab9..6f41babb350 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionInstances.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionInstances.html @@ -275,9 +275,11 @@

Method Details

"networkAttachment": "A String", # The URL of the network attachment that this interface should connect to in the following format: projects/{project_number}/regions/{region_name}/networkAttachments/{network_attachment_name}. "networkIP": "A String", # An IPv4 internal IP address to assign to the instance for this network interface. If not specified by the user, an unused internal IP is assigned by the system. "nicType": "A String", # The type of vNIC to be used on this interface. This may be gVNIC or VirtioNet. + "parentNicName": "A String", # Name of the parent network interface of a dynamic network interface. "queueCount": 42, # The networking queue count that's specified by users for the network interface. Both Rx and Tx queues will be set to this number. It'll be empty if not specified by the users. "stackType": "A String", # The stack type for this network interface. To assign only IPv4 addresses, use IPV4_ONLY. To assign both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, use IPV4_IPV6. If not specified, IPV4_ONLY is used. This field can be both set at instance creation and update network interface operations. "subnetwork": "A String", # The URL of the Subnetwork resource for this instance. If the network resource is in legacy mode, do not specify this field. If the network is in auto subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is optional. If the network is in custom subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is required. If you specify this field, you can specify the subnetwork as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /subnetworks/subnetwork - regions/region/subnetworks/subnetwork + "vlan": 42, # VLAN tag of a dynamic network interface, must be an integer in the range from 2 to 255 inclusively. }, ], "networkPerformanceConfig": { # Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet. @@ -327,6 +329,7 @@

Method Details

}, "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states. "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance. + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. }, "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionSecurityPolicies.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionSecurityPolicies.html index 271c29cd6b7..c9dece9af92 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionSecurityPolicies.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionSecurityPolicies.html @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -593,7 +593,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -758,7 +758,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -959,7 +959,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -1303,7 +1303,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -1546,7 +1546,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -1822,7 +1822,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.routers.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.routers.html index 473dd55e149..1ea66c4b70a 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.routers.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.routers.html @@ -329,6 +329,11 @@

Method Details

}, ], "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs. + "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + }, "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URI of the region where the router resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource. }, @@ -809,6 +814,11 @@

Method Details

}, ], "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs. + "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + }, "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URI of the region where the router resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource. } @@ -1451,6 +1461,11 @@

Method Details

}, ], "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs. + "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + }, "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URI of the region where the router resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource. } @@ -1754,6 +1769,11 @@

Method Details

}, ], "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs. + "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + }, "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URI of the region where the router resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource. }, @@ -2133,6 +2153,11 @@

Method Details

}, ], "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs. + "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + }, "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URI of the region where the router resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource. } @@ -2578,6 +2603,11 @@

Method Details

}, ], "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs. + "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + }, "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URI of the region where the router resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource. } @@ -2750,6 +2780,11 @@

Method Details

}, ], "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs. + "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + }, "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URI of the region where the router resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource. }, @@ -2926,6 +2961,11 @@

Method Details

}, ], "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs. + "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + }, "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URI of the region where the router resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource. } diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.securityPolicies.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.securityPolicies.html index 474f687ec8e..7524876e524 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.securityPolicies.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.securityPolicies.html @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -482,7 +482,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -874,7 +874,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -1038,7 +1038,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -1238,7 +1238,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -1581,7 +1581,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -1864,7 +1864,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. @@ -2139,7 +2139,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], }, - "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies. + "expr": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI. "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax. "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.serviceAttachments.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.serviceAttachments.html index b23e5a9aca6..56200118afc 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.serviceAttachments.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.serviceAttachments.html @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@

Instance Methods

delete(project, region, serviceAttachment, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

Deletes the specified ServiceAttachment in the given scope

- get(project, region, serviceAttachment, x__xgafv=None)

+ get(project, region, serviceAttachment, showNatIps=None, x__xgafv=None)

Returns the specified ServiceAttachment resource in the given scope.

getIamPolicy(project, region, resource, optionsRequestedPolicyVersion=None, x__xgafv=None)

@@ -142,6 +142,9 @@

Method Details

{ # [Output Only] A connection connected to this service attachment. "consumerNetwork": "A String", # The url of the consumer network. "endpoint": "A String", # The url of a connected endpoint. + "natIps": [ # NAT IPs of the connected PSC endpoint and those of other endpoints propagated from it. + "A String", + ], "propagatedConnectionCount": 42, # The number of consumer Network Connectivity Center spokes that the connected Private Service Connect endpoint has propagated to. "pscConnectionId": "A String", # The PSC connection id of the connected endpoint. "status": "A String", # The status of a connected endpoint to this service attachment. @@ -362,13 +365,14 @@

Method Details

- get(project, region, serviceAttachment, x__xgafv=None) + get(project, region, serviceAttachment, showNatIps=None, x__xgafv=None)
Returns the specified ServiceAttachment resource in the given scope.
 
 Args:
   project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
   region: string, Name of the region of this request. (required)
   serviceAttachment: string, Name of the ServiceAttachment resource to return. (required)
+  showNatIps: boolean, Indicates whether NAT IPs should be included in the response.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -382,6 +386,9 @@ 

Method Details

{ # [Output Only] A connection connected to this service attachment. "consumerNetwork": "A String", # The url of the consumer network. "endpoint": "A String", # The url of a connected endpoint. + "natIps": [ # NAT IPs of the connected PSC endpoint and those of other endpoints propagated from it. + "A String", + ], "propagatedConnectionCount": 42, # The number of consumer Network Connectivity Center spokes that the connected Private Service Connect endpoint has propagated to. "pscConnectionId": "A String", # The PSC connection id of the connected endpoint. "status": "A String", # The status of a connected endpoint to this service attachment. @@ -492,6 +499,9 @@

Method Details

{ # [Output Only] A connection connected to this service attachment. "consumerNetwork": "A String", # The url of the consumer network. "endpoint": "A String", # The url of a connected endpoint. + "natIps": [ # NAT IPs of the connected PSC endpoint and those of other endpoints propagated from it. + "A String", + ], "propagatedConnectionCount": 42, # The number of consumer Network Connectivity Center spokes that the connected Private Service Connect endpoint has propagated to. "pscConnectionId": "A String", # The PSC connection id of the connected endpoint. "status": "A String", # The status of a connected endpoint to this service attachment. @@ -681,6 +691,9 @@

Method Details

{ # [Output Only] A connection connected to this service attachment. "consumerNetwork": "A String", # The url of the consumer network. "endpoint": "A String", # The url of a connected endpoint. + "natIps": [ # NAT IPs of the connected PSC endpoint and those of other endpoints propagated from it. + "A String", + ], "propagatedConnectionCount": 42, # The number of consumer Network Connectivity Center spokes that the connected Private Service Connect endpoint has propagated to. "pscConnectionId": "A String", # The PSC connection id of the connected endpoint. "status": "A String", # The status of a connected endpoint to this service attachment. @@ -771,6 +784,9 @@

Method Details

{ # [Output Only] A connection connected to this service attachment. "consumerNetwork": "A String", # The url of the consumer network. "endpoint": "A String", # The url of a connected endpoint. + "natIps": [ # NAT IPs of the connected PSC endpoint and those of other endpoints propagated from it. + "A String", + ], "propagatedConnectionCount": 42, # The number of consumer Network Connectivity Center spokes that the connected Private Service Connect endpoint has propagated to. "pscConnectionId": "A String", # The PSC connection id of the connected endpoint. "status": "A String", # The status of a connected endpoint to this service attachment. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.targetInstances.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.targetInstances.html index 57899af5e49..bb83f5da481 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.targetInstances.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.targetInstances.html @@ -101,6 +101,9 @@

Instance Methods

setSecurityPolicy(project, zone, targetInstance, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

Sets the Google Cloud Armor security policy for the specified target instance. For more information, see Google Cloud Armor Overview

+

+ testIamPermissions(project, zone, resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource.

Method Details

aggregatedList(project, filter=None, includeAllScopes=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, serviceProjectNumber=None, x__xgafv=None) @@ -688,4 +691,36 @@

Method Details

}
+
+ testIamPermissions(project, zone, resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  zone: string, The name of the zone for this request. (required)
+  resource: string, Name or id of the resource for this request. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{
+  "permissions": [ # The set of permissions to check for the 'resource'. Permissions with wildcards (such as '*' or 'storage.*') are not allowed.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    {
+  "permissions": [ # A subset of `TestPermissionsRequest.permissions` that the caller is allowed.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+}
+
+ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.targetPools.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.targetPools.html index 699a738b9cc..af29d3e73d5 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.targetPools.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.targetPools.html @@ -119,6 +119,9 @@

Instance Methods

setSecurityPolicy(project, region, targetPool, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

Sets the Google Cloud Armor security policy for the specified target pool. For more information, see Google Cloud Armor Overview

+

+ testIamPermissions(project, region, resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource.

Method Details

addHealthCheck(project, region, targetPool, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None) @@ -1452,4 +1455,36 @@

Method Details

}
+
+ testIamPermissions(project, region, resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  region: string, The name of the region for this request. (required)
+  resource: string, Name or id of the resource for this request. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{
+  "permissions": [ # The set of permissions to check for the 'resource'. Permissions with wildcards (such as '*' or 'storage.*') are not allowed.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    {
+  "permissions": [ # A subset of `TestPermissionsRequest.permissions` that the caller is allowed.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+}
+
+ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.vpnTunnels.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.vpnTunnels.html index 1053616e428..16f3703d8f9 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.vpnTunnels.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.vpnTunnels.html @@ -129,6 +129,33 @@

Method Details

"a_key": { # Name of the scope containing this set of VPN tunnels. "vpnTunnels": [ # A list of VPN tunnels contained in this scope. { # Represents a Cloud VPN Tunnel resource. For more information about VPN, read the the Cloud VPN Overview. + "cipherSuite": { # User specified list of ciphers to use for the phase 1 and phase 2 of the IKE protocol. + "phase1": { + "dh": [ + "A String", + ], + "encryption": [ + "A String", + ], + "integrity": [ + "A String", + ], + "prf": [ + "A String", + ], + }, + "phase2": { + "encryption": [ + "A String", + ], + "integrity": [ + "A String", + ], + "pfs": [ + "A String", + ], + }, + }, "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format. "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource. "detailedStatus": "A String", # [Output Only] Detailed status message for the VPN tunnel. @@ -353,6 +380,33 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # Represents a Cloud VPN Tunnel resource. For more information about VPN, read the the Cloud VPN Overview. + "cipherSuite": { # User specified list of ciphers to use for the phase 1 and phase 2 of the IKE protocol. + "phase1": { + "dh": [ + "A String", + ], + "encryption": [ + "A String", + ], + "integrity": [ + "A String", + ], + "prf": [ + "A String", + ], + }, + "phase2": { + "encryption": [ + "A String", + ], + "integrity": [ + "A String", + ], + "pfs": [ + "A String", + ], + }, + }, "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format. "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource. "detailedStatus": "A String", # [Output Only] Detailed status message for the VPN tunnel. @@ -397,6 +451,33 @@

Method Details

The object takes the form of: { # Represents a Cloud VPN Tunnel resource. For more information about VPN, read the the Cloud VPN Overview. + "cipherSuite": { # User specified list of ciphers to use for the phase 1 and phase 2 of the IKE protocol. + "phase1": { + "dh": [ + "A String", + ], + "encryption": [ + "A String", + ], + "integrity": [ + "A String", + ], + "prf": [ + "A String", + ], + }, + "phase2": { + "encryption": [ + "A String", + ], + "integrity": [ + "A String", + ], + "pfs": [ + "A String", + ], + }, + }, "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format. "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource. "detailedStatus": "A String", # [Output Only] Detailed status message for the VPN tunnel. @@ -570,6 +651,33 @@

Method Details

"id": "A String", # [Output Only] Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server. "items": [ # A list of VpnTunnel resources. { # Represents a Cloud VPN Tunnel resource. For more information about VPN, read the the Cloud VPN Overview. + "cipherSuite": { # User specified list of ciphers to use for the phase 1 and phase 2 of the IKE protocol. + "phase1": { + "dh": [ + "A String", + ], + "encryption": [ + "A String", + ], + "integrity": [ + "A String", + ], + "prf": [ + "A String", + ], + }, + "phase2": { + "encryption": [ + "A String", + ], + "integrity": [ + "A String", + ], + "pfs": [ + "A String", + ], + }, + }, "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format. "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource. "detailedStatus": "A String", # [Output Only] Detailed status message for the VPN tunnel. diff --git a/docs/dyn/connectors_v1.projects.locations.global_.customConnectors.customConnectorVersions.html b/docs/dyn/connectors_v1.projects.locations.global_.customConnectors.customConnectorVersions.html index 8fff3f6e297..dbf40a76ebc 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/connectors_v1.projects.locations.global_.customConnectors.customConnectorVersions.html +++ b/docs/dyn/connectors_v1.projects.locations.global_.customConnectors.customConnectorVersions.html @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@

Method Details

"enumSource": "A String", # Optional. enum source denotes the source of api to fill the enum options "isAdvanced": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if current template is part of advanced settings "key": "A String", # Optional. Key of the config variable. - "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Tyep denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. + "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Type denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. "multipleSelectConfig": { # MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. # Optional. MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. "allowCustomValues": True or False, # Optional. Allow custom values. "multipleSelectOptions": [ # Required. Multiple select options. @@ -283,7 +283,7 @@

Method Details

"enumSource": "A String", # Optional. enum source denotes the source of api to fill the enum options "isAdvanced": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if current template is part of advanced settings "key": "A String", # Optional. Key of the config variable. - "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Tyep denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. + "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Type denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. "multipleSelectConfig": { # MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. # Optional. MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. "allowCustomValues": True or False, # Optional. Allow custom values. "multipleSelectOptions": [ # Required. Multiple select options. @@ -527,7 +527,7 @@

Method Details

"enumSource": "A String", # Optional. enum source denotes the source of api to fill the enum options "isAdvanced": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if current template is part of advanced settings "key": "A String", # Optional. Key of the config variable. - "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Tyep denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. + "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Type denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. "multipleSelectConfig": { # MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. # Optional. MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. "allowCustomValues": True or False, # Optional. Allow custom values. "multipleSelectOptions": [ # Required. Multiple select options. @@ -603,7 +603,7 @@

Method Details

"enumSource": "A String", # Optional. enum source denotes the source of api to fill the enum options "isAdvanced": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if current template is part of advanced settings "key": "A String", # Optional. Key of the config variable. - "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Tyep denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. + "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Type denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. "multipleSelectConfig": { # MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. # Optional. MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. "allowCustomValues": True or False, # Optional. Allow custom values. "multipleSelectOptions": [ # Required. Multiple select options. @@ -822,7 +822,7 @@

Method Details

"enumSource": "A String", # Optional. enum source denotes the source of api to fill the enum options "isAdvanced": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if current template is part of advanced settings "key": "A String", # Optional. Key of the config variable. - "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Tyep denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. + "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Type denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. "multipleSelectConfig": { # MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. # Optional. MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. "allowCustomValues": True or False, # Optional. Allow custom values. "multipleSelectOptions": [ # Required. Multiple select options. @@ -898,7 +898,7 @@

Method Details

"enumSource": "A String", # Optional. enum source denotes the source of api to fill the enum options "isAdvanced": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if current template is part of advanced settings "key": "A String", # Optional. Key of the config variable. - "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Tyep denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. + "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Type denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. "multipleSelectConfig": { # MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. # Optional. MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. "allowCustomValues": True or False, # Optional. Allow custom values. "multipleSelectOptions": [ # Required. Multiple select options. diff --git a/docs/dyn/connectors_v1.projects.locations.providers.connectors.versions.html b/docs/dyn/connectors_v1.projects.locations.providers.connectors.versions.html index 5b7e27efc68..8fe95ed13d3 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/connectors_v1.projects.locations.providers.connectors.versions.html +++ b/docs/dyn/connectors_v1.projects.locations.providers.connectors.versions.html @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@

Method Details

"enumSource": "A String", # Optional. enum source denotes the source of api to fill the enum options "isAdvanced": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if current template is part of advanced settings "key": "A String", # Optional. Key of the config variable. - "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Tyep denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. + "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Type denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. "multipleSelectConfig": { # MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. # Optional. MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. "allowCustomValues": True or False, # Optional. Allow custom values. "multipleSelectOptions": [ # Required. Multiple select options. @@ -284,7 +284,7 @@

Method Details

"enumSource": "A String", # Optional. enum source denotes the source of api to fill the enum options "isAdvanced": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if current template is part of advanced settings "key": "A String", # Optional. Key of the config variable. - "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Tyep denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. + "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Type denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. "multipleSelectConfig": { # MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. # Optional. MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. "allowCustomValues": True or False, # Optional. Allow custom values. "multipleSelectOptions": [ # Required. Multiple select options. @@ -418,7 +418,7 @@

Method Details

"enumSource": "A String", # Optional. enum source denotes the source of api to fill the enum options "isAdvanced": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if current template is part of advanced settings "key": "A String", # Optional. Key of the config variable. - "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Tyep denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. + "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Type denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. "multipleSelectConfig": { # MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. # Optional. MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. "allowCustomValues": True or False, # Optional. Allow custom values. "multipleSelectOptions": [ # Required. Multiple select options. @@ -492,7 +492,7 @@

Method Details

"enumSource": "A String", # Optional. enum source denotes the source of api to fill the enum options "isAdvanced": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if current template is part of advanced settings "key": "A String", # Optional. Key of the config variable. - "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Tyep denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. + "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Type denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. "multipleSelectConfig": { # MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. # Optional. MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. "allowCustomValues": True or False, # Optional. Allow custom values. "multipleSelectOptions": [ # Required. Multiple select options. @@ -568,7 +568,7 @@

Method Details

"enumSource": "A String", # Optional. enum source denotes the source of api to fill the enum options "isAdvanced": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if current template is part of advanced settings "key": "A String", # Optional. Key of the config variable. - "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Tyep denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. + "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Type denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. "multipleSelectConfig": { # MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. # Optional. MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. "allowCustomValues": True or False, # Optional. Allow custom values. "multipleSelectOptions": [ # Required. Multiple select options. @@ -644,7 +644,7 @@

Method Details

"enumSource": "A String", # Optional. enum source denotes the source of api to fill the enum options "isAdvanced": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if current template is part of advanced settings "key": "A String", # Optional. Key of the config variable. - "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Tyep denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. + "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Type denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. "multipleSelectConfig": { # MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. # Optional. MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. "allowCustomValues": True or False, # Optional. Allow custom values. "multipleSelectOptions": [ # Required. Multiple select options. @@ -748,7 +748,7 @@

Method Details

"enumSource": "A String", # Optional. enum source denotes the source of api to fill the enum options "isAdvanced": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if current template is part of advanced settings "key": "A String", # Optional. Key of the config variable. - "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Tyep denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. + "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Type denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. "multipleSelectConfig": { # MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. # Optional. MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. "allowCustomValues": True or False, # Optional. Allow custom values. "multipleSelectOptions": [ # Required. Multiple select options. @@ -827,7 +827,7 @@

Method Details

"enumSource": "A String", # Optional. enum source denotes the source of api to fill the enum options "isAdvanced": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if current template is part of advanced settings "key": "A String", # Optional. Key of the config variable. - "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Tyep denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. + "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Type denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. "multipleSelectConfig": { # MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. # Optional. MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. "allowCustomValues": True or False, # Optional. Allow custom values. "multipleSelectOptions": [ # Required. Multiple select options. @@ -935,7 +935,7 @@

Method Details

"enumSource": "A String", # Optional. enum source denotes the source of api to fill the enum options "isAdvanced": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if current template is part of advanced settings "key": "A String", # Optional. Key of the config variable. - "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Tyep denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. + "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Type denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. "multipleSelectConfig": { # MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. # Optional. MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. "allowCustomValues": True or False, # Optional. Allow custom values. "multipleSelectOptions": [ # Required. Multiple select options. @@ -1071,7 +1071,7 @@

Method Details

"enumSource": "A String", # Optional. enum source denotes the source of api to fill the enum options "isAdvanced": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if current template is part of advanced settings "key": "A String", # Optional. Key of the config variable. - "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Tyep denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. + "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Type denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. "multipleSelectConfig": { # MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. # Optional. MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. "allowCustomValues": True or False, # Optional. Allow custom values. "multipleSelectOptions": [ # Required. Multiple select options. @@ -1147,7 +1147,7 @@

Method Details

"enumSource": "A String", # Optional. enum source denotes the source of api to fill the enum options "isAdvanced": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if current template is part of advanced settings "key": "A String", # Optional. Key of the config variable. - "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Tyep denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. + "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Type denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. "multipleSelectConfig": { # MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. # Optional. MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. "allowCustomValues": True or False, # Optional. Allow custom values. "multipleSelectOptions": [ # Required. Multiple select options. @@ -1281,7 +1281,7 @@

Method Details

"enumSource": "A String", # Optional. enum source denotes the source of api to fill the enum options "isAdvanced": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if current template is part of advanced settings "key": "A String", # Optional. Key of the config variable. - "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Tyep denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. + "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Type denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. "multipleSelectConfig": { # MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. # Optional. MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. "allowCustomValues": True or False, # Optional. Allow custom values. "multipleSelectOptions": [ # Required. Multiple select options. @@ -1355,7 +1355,7 @@

Method Details

"enumSource": "A String", # Optional. enum source denotes the source of api to fill the enum options "isAdvanced": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if current template is part of advanced settings "key": "A String", # Optional. Key of the config variable. - "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Tyep denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. + "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Type denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. "multipleSelectConfig": { # MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. # Optional. MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. "allowCustomValues": True or False, # Optional. Allow custom values. "multipleSelectOptions": [ # Required. Multiple select options. @@ -1431,7 +1431,7 @@

Method Details

"enumSource": "A String", # Optional. enum source denotes the source of api to fill the enum options "isAdvanced": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if current template is part of advanced settings "key": "A String", # Optional. Key of the config variable. - "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Tyep denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. + "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Type denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. "multipleSelectConfig": { # MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. # Optional. MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. "allowCustomValues": True or False, # Optional. Allow custom values. "multipleSelectOptions": [ # Required. Multiple select options. @@ -1507,7 +1507,7 @@

Method Details

"enumSource": "A String", # Optional. enum source denotes the source of api to fill the enum options "isAdvanced": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if current template is part of advanced settings "key": "A String", # Optional. Key of the config variable. - "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Tyep denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. + "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Type denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. "multipleSelectConfig": { # MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. # Optional. MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. "allowCustomValues": True or False, # Optional. Allow custom values. "multipleSelectOptions": [ # Required. Multiple select options. @@ -1611,7 +1611,7 @@

Method Details

"enumSource": "A String", # Optional. enum source denotes the source of api to fill the enum options "isAdvanced": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if current template is part of advanced settings "key": "A String", # Optional. Key of the config variable. - "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Tyep denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. + "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Type denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. "multipleSelectConfig": { # MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. # Optional. MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. "allowCustomValues": True or False, # Optional. Allow custom values. "multipleSelectOptions": [ # Required. Multiple select options. @@ -1690,7 +1690,7 @@

Method Details

"enumSource": "A String", # Optional. enum source denotes the source of api to fill the enum options "isAdvanced": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if current template is part of advanced settings "key": "A String", # Optional. Key of the config variable. - "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Tyep denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. + "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Type denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. "multipleSelectConfig": { # MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. # Optional. MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. "allowCustomValues": True or False, # Optional. Allow custom values. "multipleSelectOptions": [ # Required. Multiple select options. @@ -1798,7 +1798,7 @@

Method Details

"enumSource": "A String", # Optional. enum source denotes the source of api to fill the enum options "isAdvanced": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if current template is part of advanced settings "key": "A String", # Optional. Key of the config variable. - "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Tyep denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. + "locationType": "A String", # Optional. Location Type denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections. "multipleSelectConfig": { # MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. # Optional. MultipleSelectConfig represents the multiple options for a config variable. "allowCustomValues": True or False, # Optional. Allow custom values. "multipleSelectOptions": [ # Required. Multiple select options. diff --git a/docs/dyn/connectors_v2.projects.locations.connections.tools.html b/docs/dyn/connectors_v2.projects.locations.connections.tools.html index ef99af21f85..c0938adf23f 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/connectors_v2.projects.locations.connections.tools.html +++ b/docs/dyn/connectors_v2.projects.locations.connections.tools.html @@ -142,6 +142,9 @@

Method Details

"nextPageToken": "A String", # Next page token. "tools": [ # List of available tools. { # Message representing a single tool. + "dependsOn": [ # List of tool names that this tool depends on. + "A String", + ], "description": "A String", # Description of the tool. "inputSchema": { # JsonSchema representation of schema metadata # JSON schema for the input parameters of the tool. "additionalDetails": { # Additional details apart from standard json schema fields, this gives flexibility to store metadata about the schema diff --git a/docs/dyn/contactcenterinsights_v1.projects.locations.authorizedViewSets.authorizedViews.html b/docs/dyn/contactcenterinsights_v1.projects.locations.authorizedViewSets.authorizedViews.html index d29b3469370..79079e2a93f 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/contactcenterinsights_v1.projects.locations.authorizedViewSets.authorizedViews.html +++ b/docs/dyn/contactcenterinsights_v1.projects.locations.authorizedViewSets.authorizedViews.html @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@

Method Details

"updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The most recent time at which the authorized view was updated. } - authorizedViewId: string, Optional. A unique ID for the new AuthorizedView. This ID will become the final component of the AuthorizedView's resource name. If no ID is specified, a server-generated ID will be used. This value should be 4-64 characters and must match the regular expression `^[a-z]([a-z0-9-]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?$`. See aip.dev/122#resource-id-segments + authorizedViewId: string, Optional. A unique ID for the new AuthorizedView. This ID will become the final component of the AuthorizedView's resource name. If no ID is specified, a server-generated ID will be used. This value should be 4-64 characters and must match the regular expression `^[a-z]([a-z0-9-]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?$`. See https://google.aip.dev/122#resource-id-segments x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. Allowed values 1 - v1 error format diff --git a/docs/dyn/contactcenterinsights_v1.projects.locations.authorizedViewSets.html b/docs/dyn/contactcenterinsights_v1.projects.locations.authorizedViewSets.html index 006c8a568cc..02b47ea2308 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/contactcenterinsights_v1.projects.locations.authorizedViewSets.html +++ b/docs/dyn/contactcenterinsights_v1.projects.locations.authorizedViewSets.html @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@

Method Details

"updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Update time. } - authorizedViewSetId: string, Optional. A unique ID for the new AuthorizedViewSet. This ID will become the final component of the AuthorizedViewSet's resource name. If no ID is specified, a server-generated ID will be used. This value should be 4-64 characters and must match the regular expression `^[a-z]([a-z0-9-]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?$`. See aip.dev/122#resource-id-segments + authorizedViewSetId: string, Optional. A unique ID for the new AuthorizedViewSet. This ID will become the final component of the AuthorizedViewSet's resource name. If no ID is specified, a server-generated ID will be used. This value should be 4-64 characters and must match the regular expression `^[a-z]([a-z0-9-]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?$`. See https://google.aip.dev/122#resource-id-segments x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. Allowed values 1 - v1 error format diff --git a/docs/dyn/contactcenterinsights_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/contactcenterinsights_v1.projects.locations.html index 46e00cb82d8..d54f686d9b0 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/contactcenterinsights_v1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/contactcenterinsights_v1.projects.locations.html @@ -402,7 +402,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the settings was created. "languageCode": "A String", # A language code to be applied to each transcript segment unless the segment already specifies a language code. Language code defaults to "en-US" if it is neither specified on the segment nor here. "name": "A String", # Immutable. The resource name of the settings resource. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/settings - "pubsubNotificationSettings": { # A map that maps a notification trigger to a Pub/Sub topic. Each time a specified trigger occurs, Insights will notify the corresponding Pub/Sub topic. Keys are notification triggers. Supported keys are: * "all-triggers": Notify each time any of the supported triggers occurs. * "create-analysis": Notify each time an analysis is created. * "create-conversation": Notify each time a conversation is created. * "export-insights-data": Notify each time an export is complete. * "ingest-conversations": Notify each time an IngestConversations LRO is complete. * "update-conversation": Notify each time a conversation is updated via UpdateConversation. * "upload-conversation": Notify when an UploadConversation LRO is complete. Values are Pub/Sub topics. The format of each Pub/Sub topic is: projects/{project}/topics/{topic} + "pubsubNotificationSettings": { # A map that maps a notification trigger to a Pub/Sub topic. Each time a specified trigger occurs, Insights will notify the corresponding Pub/Sub topic. Keys are notification triggers. Supported keys are: * "all-triggers": Notify each time any of the supported triggers occurs. * "create-analysis": Notify each time an analysis is created. * "create-conversation": Notify each time a conversation is created. * "export-insights-data": Notify each time an export is complete. * "ingest-conversations": Notify each time an IngestConversations LRO is complete. * "update-conversation": Notify each time a conversation is updated via UpdateConversation. * "upload-conversation": Notify when an UploadConversation LRO is complete. * "update-or-analyze-conversation": Notify when an analysis for a conversation is completed or when the conversation is updated. The message will contain the conversation with transcript, analysis and other metadata. Values are Pub/Sub topics. The format of each Pub/Sub topic is: projects/{project}/topics/{topic} "a_key": "A String", }, "redactionConfig": { # DLP resources used for redaction while ingesting conversations. DLP settings are applied to conversations ingested from the `UploadConversation` and `IngestConversations` endpoints, including conversation coming from CCAI Platform. They are not applied to conversations ingested from the `CreateConversation` endpoint or the Dialogflow / Agent Assist runtime integrations. When using Dialogflow / Agent Assist runtime integrations, redaction should be performed in Dialogflow / Agent Assist. # Default DLP redaction resources to be applied while ingesting conversations. This applies to conversations ingested from the `UploadConversation` and `IngestConversations` endpoints, including conversations coming from CCAI Platform. @@ -642,7 +642,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the settings was created. "languageCode": "A String", # A language code to be applied to each transcript segment unless the segment already specifies a language code. Language code defaults to "en-US" if it is neither specified on the segment nor here. "name": "A String", # Immutable. The resource name of the settings resource. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/settings - "pubsubNotificationSettings": { # A map that maps a notification trigger to a Pub/Sub topic. Each time a specified trigger occurs, Insights will notify the corresponding Pub/Sub topic. Keys are notification triggers. Supported keys are: * "all-triggers": Notify each time any of the supported triggers occurs. * "create-analysis": Notify each time an analysis is created. * "create-conversation": Notify each time a conversation is created. * "export-insights-data": Notify each time an export is complete. * "ingest-conversations": Notify each time an IngestConversations LRO is complete. * "update-conversation": Notify each time a conversation is updated via UpdateConversation. * "upload-conversation": Notify when an UploadConversation LRO is complete. Values are Pub/Sub topics. The format of each Pub/Sub topic is: projects/{project}/topics/{topic} + "pubsubNotificationSettings": { # A map that maps a notification trigger to a Pub/Sub topic. Each time a specified trigger occurs, Insights will notify the corresponding Pub/Sub topic. Keys are notification triggers. Supported keys are: * "all-triggers": Notify each time any of the supported triggers occurs. * "create-analysis": Notify each time an analysis is created. * "create-conversation": Notify each time a conversation is created. * "export-insights-data": Notify each time an export is complete. * "ingest-conversations": Notify each time an IngestConversations LRO is complete. * "update-conversation": Notify each time a conversation is updated via UpdateConversation. * "upload-conversation": Notify when an UploadConversation LRO is complete. * "update-or-analyze-conversation": Notify when an analysis for a conversation is completed or when the conversation is updated. The message will contain the conversation with transcript, analysis and other metadata. Values are Pub/Sub topics. The format of each Pub/Sub topic is: projects/{project}/topics/{topic} "a_key": "A String", }, "redactionConfig": { # DLP resources used for redaction while ingesting conversations. DLP settings are applied to conversations ingested from the `UploadConversation` and `IngestConversations` endpoints, including conversation coming from CCAI Platform. They are not applied to conversations ingested from the `CreateConversation` endpoint or the Dialogflow / Agent Assist runtime integrations. When using Dialogflow / Agent Assist runtime integrations, redaction should be performed in Dialogflow / Agent Assist. # Default DLP redaction resources to be applied while ingesting conversations. This applies to conversations ingested from the `UploadConversation` and `IngestConversations` endpoints, including conversations coming from CCAI Platform. @@ -702,7 +702,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the settings was created. "languageCode": "A String", # A language code to be applied to each transcript segment unless the segment already specifies a language code. Language code defaults to "en-US" if it is neither specified on the segment nor here. "name": "A String", # Immutable. The resource name of the settings resource. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/settings - "pubsubNotificationSettings": { # A map that maps a notification trigger to a Pub/Sub topic. Each time a specified trigger occurs, Insights will notify the corresponding Pub/Sub topic. Keys are notification triggers. Supported keys are: * "all-triggers": Notify each time any of the supported triggers occurs. * "create-analysis": Notify each time an analysis is created. * "create-conversation": Notify each time a conversation is created. * "export-insights-data": Notify each time an export is complete. * "ingest-conversations": Notify each time an IngestConversations LRO is complete. * "update-conversation": Notify each time a conversation is updated via UpdateConversation. * "upload-conversation": Notify when an UploadConversation LRO is complete. Values are Pub/Sub topics. The format of each Pub/Sub topic is: projects/{project}/topics/{topic} + "pubsubNotificationSettings": { # A map that maps a notification trigger to a Pub/Sub topic. Each time a specified trigger occurs, Insights will notify the corresponding Pub/Sub topic. Keys are notification triggers. Supported keys are: * "all-triggers": Notify each time any of the supported triggers occurs. * "create-analysis": Notify each time an analysis is created. * "create-conversation": Notify each time a conversation is created. * "export-insights-data": Notify each time an export is complete. * "ingest-conversations": Notify each time an IngestConversations LRO is complete. * "update-conversation": Notify each time a conversation is updated via UpdateConversation. * "upload-conversation": Notify when an UploadConversation LRO is complete. * "update-or-analyze-conversation": Notify when an analysis for a conversation is completed or when the conversation is updated. The message will contain the conversation with transcript, analysis and other metadata. Values are Pub/Sub topics. The format of each Pub/Sub topic is: projects/{project}/topics/{topic} "a_key": "A String", }, "redactionConfig": { # DLP resources used for redaction while ingesting conversations. DLP settings are applied to conversations ingested from the `UploadConversation` and `IngestConversations` endpoints, including conversation coming from CCAI Platform. They are not applied to conversations ingested from the `CreateConversation` endpoint or the Dialogflow / Agent Assist runtime integrations. When using Dialogflow / Agent Assist runtime integrations, redaction should be performed in Dialogflow / Agent Assist. # Default DLP redaction resources to be applied while ingesting conversations. This applies to conversations ingested from the `UploadConversation` and `IngestConversations` endpoints, including conversations coming from CCAI Platform. diff --git a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.locations.notes.html b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.locations.notes.html index 10c8ced96f6..fa465420766 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.locations.notes.html +++ b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.locations.notes.html @@ -250,6 +250,8 @@

Method Details

"format": "A String", # The format that SBOM takes. E.g. may be spdx, cyclonedx, etc... "version": "A String", # The version of the format that the SBOM takes. E.g. if the format is spdx, the version may be 2.3. }, + "secret": { # The note representing a secret. # A note describing a secret. + }, "shortDescription": "A String", # A one sentence description of this note. "spdxFile": { # FileNote represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # A note describing an SPDX File. "checksum": [ # Provide a unique identifier to match analysis information on each specific file in a package @@ -566,6 +568,8 @@

Method Details

"format": "A String", # The format that SBOM takes. E.g. may be spdx, cyclonedx, etc... "version": "A String", # The version of the format that the SBOM takes. E.g. if the format is spdx, the version may be 2.3. }, + "secret": { # The note representing a secret. # A note describing a secret. + }, "shortDescription": "A String", # A one sentence description of this note. "spdxFile": { # FileNote represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # A note describing an SPDX File. "checksum": [ # Provide a unique identifier to match analysis information on each specific file in a package @@ -887,6 +891,8 @@

Method Details

"format": "A String", # The format that SBOM takes. E.g. may be spdx, cyclonedx, etc... "version": "A String", # The version of the format that the SBOM takes. E.g. if the format is spdx, the version may be 2.3. }, + "secret": { # The note representing a secret. # A note describing a secret. + }, "shortDescription": "A String", # A one sentence description of this note. "spdxFile": { # FileNote represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # A note describing an SPDX File. "checksum": [ # Provide a unique identifier to match analysis information on each specific file in a package @@ -1200,6 +1206,8 @@

Method Details

"format": "A String", # The format that SBOM takes. E.g. may be spdx, cyclonedx, etc... "version": "A String", # The version of the format that the SBOM takes. E.g. if the format is spdx, the version may be 2.3. }, + "secret": { # The note representing a secret. # A note describing a secret. + }, "shortDescription": "A String", # A one sentence description of this note. "spdxFile": { # FileNote represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # A note describing an SPDX File. "checksum": [ # Provide a unique identifier to match analysis information on each specific file in a package @@ -1537,6 +1545,8 @@

Method Details

"format": "A String", # The format that SBOM takes. E.g. may be spdx, cyclonedx, etc... "version": "A String", # The version of the format that the SBOM takes. E.g. if the format is spdx, the version may be 2.3. }, + "secret": { # The note representing a secret. # A note describing a secret. + }, "shortDescription": "A String", # A one sentence description of this note. "spdxFile": { # FileNote represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # A note describing an SPDX File. "checksum": [ # Provide a unique identifier to match analysis information on each specific file in a package @@ -1906,6 +1916,8 @@

Method Details

"format": "A String", # The format that SBOM takes. E.g. may be spdx, cyclonedx, etc... "version": "A String", # The version of the format that the SBOM takes. E.g. if the format is spdx, the version may be 2.3. }, + "secret": { # The note representing a secret. # A note describing a secret. + }, "shortDescription": "A String", # A one sentence description of this note. "spdxFile": { # FileNote represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # A note describing an SPDX File. "checksum": [ # Provide a unique identifier to match analysis information on each specific file in a package @@ -2239,6 +2251,8 @@

Method Details

"format": "A String", # The format that SBOM takes. E.g. may be spdx, cyclonedx, etc... "version": "A String", # The version of the format that the SBOM takes. E.g. if the format is spdx, the version may be 2.3. }, + "secret": { # The note representing a secret. # A note describing a secret. + }, "shortDescription": "A String", # A one sentence description of this note. "spdxFile": { # FileNote represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # A note describing an SPDX File. "checksum": [ # Provide a unique identifier to match analysis information on each specific file in a package @@ -2552,6 +2566,8 @@

Method Details

"format": "A String", # The format that SBOM takes. E.g. may be spdx, cyclonedx, etc... "version": "A String", # The version of the format that the SBOM takes. E.g. if the format is spdx, the version may be 2.3. }, + "secret": { # The note representing a secret. # A note describing a secret. + }, "shortDescription": "A String", # A one sentence description of this note. "spdxFile": { # FileNote represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # A note describing an SPDX File. "checksum": [ # Provide a unique identifier to match analysis information on each specific file in a package diff --git a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.locations.notes.occurrences.html b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.locations.notes.occurrences.html index a019f524a11..6656a730662 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.locations.notes.occurrences.html +++ b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.locations.notes.occurrences.html @@ -546,6 +546,23 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, + "secret": { # The occurrence provides details of a secret. # Describes a secret. + "kind": "A String", # Required. Type of secret. + "locations": [ # Optional. Locations where the secret is detected. + { # The location of the secret. + "fileLocation": { # Indicates the location at which a package was found. # The secret is found from a file. + "filePath": "A String", # For jars that are contained inside .war files, this filepath can indicate the path to war file combined with the path to jar file. + }, + }, + ], + "statuses": [ # Optional. Status of the secret. + { # The status of the secret with a timestamp. + "message": "A String", # Optional. Optional message about the status code. + "status": "A String", # Optional. The status of the secret. + "updateTime": "A String", # Optional. The time the secret status was last updated. + }, + ], + }, "spdxFile": { # FileOccurrence represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # Describes a specific SPDX File. "attributions": [ # This field provides a place for the SPDX data creator to record, at the file level, acknowledgements that may be needed to be communicated in some contexts "A String", diff --git a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.locations.occurrences.html b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.locations.occurrences.html index 5b8eae69f31..a23e3a3adc0 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.locations.occurrences.html +++ b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.locations.occurrences.html @@ -562,6 +562,23 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, + "secret": { # The occurrence provides details of a secret. # Describes a secret. + "kind": "A String", # Required. Type of secret. + "locations": [ # Optional. Locations where the secret is detected. + { # The location of the secret. + "fileLocation": { # Indicates the location at which a package was found. # The secret is found from a file. + "filePath": "A String", # For jars that are contained inside .war files, this filepath can indicate the path to war file combined with the path to jar file. + }, + }, + ], + "statuses": [ # Optional. Status of the secret. + { # The status of the secret with a timestamp. + "message": "A String", # Optional. Optional message about the status code. + "status": "A String", # Optional. The status of the secret. + "updateTime": "A String", # Optional. The time the secret status was last updated. + }, + ], + }, "spdxFile": { # FileOccurrence represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # Describes a specific SPDX File. "attributions": [ # This field provides a place for the SPDX data creator to record, at the file level, acknowledgements that may be needed to be communicated in some contexts "A String", @@ -1156,6 +1173,23 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, + "secret": { # The occurrence provides details of a secret. # Describes a secret. + "kind": "A String", # Required. Type of secret. + "locations": [ # Optional. Locations where the secret is detected. + { # The location of the secret. + "fileLocation": { # Indicates the location at which a package was found. # The secret is found from a file. + "filePath": "A String", # For jars that are contained inside .war files, this filepath can indicate the path to war file combined with the path to jar file. + }, + }, + ], + "statuses": [ # Optional. Status of the secret. + { # The status of the secret with a timestamp. + "message": "A String", # Optional. Optional message about the status code. + "status": "A String", # Optional. The status of the secret. + "updateTime": "A String", # Optional. The time the secret status was last updated. + }, + ], + }, "spdxFile": { # FileOccurrence represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # Describes a specific SPDX File. "attributions": [ # This field provides a place for the SPDX data creator to record, at the file level, acknowledgements that may be needed to be communicated in some contexts "A String", @@ -1755,6 +1789,23 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, + "secret": { # The occurrence provides details of a secret. # Describes a secret. + "kind": "A String", # Required. Type of secret. + "locations": [ # Optional. Locations where the secret is detected. + { # The location of the secret. + "fileLocation": { # Indicates the location at which a package was found. # The secret is found from a file. + "filePath": "A String", # For jars that are contained inside .war files, this filepath can indicate the path to war file combined with the path to jar file. + }, + }, + ], + "statuses": [ # Optional. Status of the secret. + { # The status of the secret with a timestamp. + "message": "A String", # Optional. Optional message about the status code. + "status": "A String", # Optional. The status of the secret. + "updateTime": "A String", # Optional. The time the secret status was last updated. + }, + ], + }, "spdxFile": { # FileOccurrence represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # Describes a specific SPDX File. "attributions": [ # This field provides a place for the SPDX data creator to record, at the file level, acknowledgements that may be needed to be communicated in some contexts "A String", @@ -2345,6 +2396,23 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, + "secret": { # The occurrence provides details of a secret. # Describes a secret. + "kind": "A String", # Required. Type of secret. + "locations": [ # Optional. Locations where the secret is detected. + { # The location of the secret. + "fileLocation": { # Indicates the location at which a package was found. # The secret is found from a file. + "filePath": "A String", # For jars that are contained inside .war files, this filepath can indicate the path to war file combined with the path to jar file. + }, + }, + ], + "statuses": [ # Optional. Status of the secret. + { # The status of the secret with a timestamp. + "message": "A String", # Optional. Optional message about the status code. + "status": "A String", # Optional. The status of the secret. + "updateTime": "A String", # Optional. The time the secret status was last updated. + }, + ], + }, "spdxFile": { # FileOccurrence represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # Describes a specific SPDX File. "attributions": [ # This field provides a place for the SPDX data creator to record, at the file level, acknowledgements that may be needed to be communicated in some contexts "A String", @@ -2960,6 +3028,23 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, + "secret": { # The occurrence provides details of a secret. # Describes a secret. + "kind": "A String", # Required. Type of secret. + "locations": [ # Optional. Locations where the secret is detected. + { # The location of the secret. + "fileLocation": { # Indicates the location at which a package was found. # The secret is found from a file. + "filePath": "A String", # For jars that are contained inside .war files, this filepath can indicate the path to war file combined with the path to jar file. + }, + }, + ], + "statuses": [ # Optional. Status of the secret. + { # The status of the secret with a timestamp. + "message": "A String", # Optional. Optional message about the status code. + "status": "A String", # Optional. The status of the secret. + "updateTime": "A String", # Optional. The time the secret status was last updated. + }, + ], + }, "spdxFile": { # FileOccurrence represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # Describes a specific SPDX File. "attributions": [ # This field provides a place for the SPDX data creator to record, at the file level, acknowledgements that may be needed to be communicated in some contexts "A String", @@ -3289,6 +3374,8 @@

Method Details

"format": "A String", # The format that SBOM takes. E.g. may be spdx, cyclonedx, etc... "version": "A String", # The version of the format that the SBOM takes. E.g. if the format is spdx, the version may be 2.3. }, + "secret": { # The note representing a secret. # A note describing a secret. + }, "shortDescription": "A String", # A one sentence description of this note. "spdxFile": { # FileNote represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # A note describing an SPDX File. "checksum": [ # Provide a unique identifier to match analysis information on each specific file in a package @@ -3964,6 +4051,23 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, + "secret": { # The occurrence provides details of a secret. # Describes a secret. + "kind": "A String", # Required. Type of secret. + "locations": [ # Optional. Locations where the secret is detected. + { # The location of the secret. + "fileLocation": { # Indicates the location at which a package was found. # The secret is found from a file. + "filePath": "A String", # For jars that are contained inside .war files, this filepath can indicate the path to war file combined with the path to jar file. + }, + }, + ], + "statuses": [ # Optional. Status of the secret. + { # The status of the secret with a timestamp. + "message": "A String", # Optional. Optional message about the status code. + "status": "A String", # Optional. The status of the secret. + "updateTime": "A String", # Optional. The time the secret status was last updated. + }, + ], + }, "spdxFile": { # FileOccurrence represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # Describes a specific SPDX File. "attributions": [ # This field provides a place for the SPDX data creator to record, at the file level, acknowledgements that may be needed to be communicated in some contexts "A String", @@ -4575,6 +4679,23 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, + "secret": { # The occurrence provides details of a secret. # Describes a secret. + "kind": "A String", # Required. Type of secret. + "locations": [ # Optional. Locations where the secret is detected. + { # The location of the secret. + "fileLocation": { # Indicates the location at which a package was found. # The secret is found from a file. + "filePath": "A String", # For jars that are contained inside .war files, this filepath can indicate the path to war file combined with the path to jar file. + }, + }, + ], + "statuses": [ # Optional. Status of the secret. + { # The status of the secret with a timestamp. + "message": "A String", # Optional. Optional message about the status code. + "status": "A String", # Optional. The status of the secret. + "updateTime": "A String", # Optional. The time the secret status was last updated. + }, + ], + }, "spdxFile": { # FileOccurrence represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # Describes a specific SPDX File. "attributions": [ # This field provides a place for the SPDX data creator to record, at the file level, acknowledgements that may be needed to be communicated in some contexts "A String", @@ -5166,6 +5287,23 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, + "secret": { # The occurrence provides details of a secret. # Describes a secret. + "kind": "A String", # Required. Type of secret. + "locations": [ # Optional. Locations where the secret is detected. + { # The location of the secret. + "fileLocation": { # Indicates the location at which a package was found. # The secret is found from a file. + "filePath": "A String", # For jars that are contained inside .war files, this filepath can indicate the path to war file combined with the path to jar file. + }, + }, + ], + "statuses": [ # Optional. Status of the secret. + { # The status of the secret with a timestamp. + "message": "A String", # Optional. Optional message about the status code. + "status": "A String", # Optional. The status of the secret. + "updateTime": "A String", # Optional. The time the secret status was last updated. + }, + ], + }, "spdxFile": { # FileOccurrence represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # Describes a specific SPDX File. "attributions": [ # This field provides a place for the SPDX data creator to record, at the file level, acknowledgements that may be needed to be communicated in some contexts "A String", diff --git a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.notes.html b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.notes.html index 5f8cdc4504a..f8414703507 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.notes.html +++ b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.notes.html @@ -250,6 +250,8 @@

Method Details

"format": "A String", # The format that SBOM takes. E.g. may be spdx, cyclonedx, etc... "version": "A String", # The version of the format that the SBOM takes. E.g. if the format is spdx, the version may be 2.3. }, + "secret": { # The note representing a secret. # A note describing a secret. + }, "shortDescription": "A String", # A one sentence description of this note. "spdxFile": { # FileNote represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # A note describing an SPDX File. "checksum": [ # Provide a unique identifier to match analysis information on each specific file in a package @@ -566,6 +568,8 @@

Method Details

"format": "A String", # The format that SBOM takes. E.g. may be spdx, cyclonedx, etc... "version": "A String", # The version of the format that the SBOM takes. E.g. if the format is spdx, the version may be 2.3. }, + "secret": { # The note representing a secret. # A note describing a secret. + }, "shortDescription": "A String", # A one sentence description of this note. "spdxFile": { # FileNote represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # A note describing an SPDX File. "checksum": [ # Provide a unique identifier to match analysis information on each specific file in a package @@ -887,6 +891,8 @@

Method Details

"format": "A String", # The format that SBOM takes. E.g. may be spdx, cyclonedx, etc... "version": "A String", # The version of the format that the SBOM takes. E.g. if the format is spdx, the version may be 2.3. }, + "secret": { # The note representing a secret. # A note describing a secret. + }, "shortDescription": "A String", # A one sentence description of this note. "spdxFile": { # FileNote represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # A note describing an SPDX File. "checksum": [ # Provide a unique identifier to match analysis information on each specific file in a package @@ -1200,6 +1206,8 @@

Method Details

"format": "A String", # The format that SBOM takes. E.g. may be spdx, cyclonedx, etc... "version": "A String", # The version of the format that the SBOM takes. E.g. if the format is spdx, the version may be 2.3. }, + "secret": { # The note representing a secret. # A note describing a secret. + }, "shortDescription": "A String", # A one sentence description of this note. "spdxFile": { # FileNote represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # A note describing an SPDX File. "checksum": [ # Provide a unique identifier to match analysis information on each specific file in a package @@ -1537,6 +1545,8 @@

Method Details

"format": "A String", # The format that SBOM takes. E.g. may be spdx, cyclonedx, etc... "version": "A String", # The version of the format that the SBOM takes. E.g. if the format is spdx, the version may be 2.3. }, + "secret": { # The note representing a secret. # A note describing a secret. + }, "shortDescription": "A String", # A one sentence description of this note. "spdxFile": { # FileNote represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # A note describing an SPDX File. "checksum": [ # Provide a unique identifier to match analysis information on each specific file in a package @@ -1906,6 +1916,8 @@

Method Details

"format": "A String", # The format that SBOM takes. E.g. may be spdx, cyclonedx, etc... "version": "A String", # The version of the format that the SBOM takes. E.g. if the format is spdx, the version may be 2.3. }, + "secret": { # The note representing a secret. # A note describing a secret. + }, "shortDescription": "A String", # A one sentence description of this note. "spdxFile": { # FileNote represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # A note describing an SPDX File. "checksum": [ # Provide a unique identifier to match analysis information on each specific file in a package @@ -2239,6 +2251,8 @@

Method Details

"format": "A String", # The format that SBOM takes. E.g. may be spdx, cyclonedx, etc... "version": "A String", # The version of the format that the SBOM takes. E.g. if the format is spdx, the version may be 2.3. }, + "secret": { # The note representing a secret. # A note describing a secret. + }, "shortDescription": "A String", # A one sentence description of this note. "spdxFile": { # FileNote represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # A note describing an SPDX File. "checksum": [ # Provide a unique identifier to match analysis information on each specific file in a package @@ -2552,6 +2566,8 @@

Method Details

"format": "A String", # The format that SBOM takes. E.g. may be spdx, cyclonedx, etc... "version": "A String", # The version of the format that the SBOM takes. E.g. if the format is spdx, the version may be 2.3. }, + "secret": { # The note representing a secret. # A note describing a secret. + }, "shortDescription": "A String", # A one sentence description of this note. "spdxFile": { # FileNote represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # A note describing an SPDX File. "checksum": [ # Provide a unique identifier to match analysis information on each specific file in a package diff --git a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.notes.occurrences.html b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.notes.occurrences.html index ce9b039243c..1c7c05d7e07 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.notes.occurrences.html +++ b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.notes.occurrences.html @@ -546,6 +546,23 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, + "secret": { # The occurrence provides details of a secret. # Describes a secret. + "kind": "A String", # Required. Type of secret. + "locations": [ # Optional. Locations where the secret is detected. + { # The location of the secret. + "fileLocation": { # Indicates the location at which a package was found. # The secret is found from a file. + "filePath": "A String", # For jars that are contained inside .war files, this filepath can indicate the path to war file combined with the path to jar file. + }, + }, + ], + "statuses": [ # Optional. Status of the secret. + { # The status of the secret with a timestamp. + "message": "A String", # Optional. Optional message about the status code. + "status": "A String", # Optional. The status of the secret. + "updateTime": "A String", # Optional. The time the secret status was last updated. + }, + ], + }, "spdxFile": { # FileOccurrence represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # Describes a specific SPDX File. "attributions": [ # This field provides a place for the SPDX data creator to record, at the file level, acknowledgements that may be needed to be communicated in some contexts "A String", diff --git a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.occurrences.html b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.occurrences.html index 53ed4a641b0..85ef1da7078 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.occurrences.html +++ b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.occurrences.html @@ -562,6 +562,23 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, + "secret": { # The occurrence provides details of a secret. # Describes a secret. + "kind": "A String", # Required. Type of secret. + "locations": [ # Optional. Locations where the secret is detected. + { # The location of the secret. + "fileLocation": { # Indicates the location at which a package was found. # The secret is found from a file. + "filePath": "A String", # For jars that are contained inside .war files, this filepath can indicate the path to war file combined with the path to jar file. + }, + }, + ], + "statuses": [ # Optional. Status of the secret. + { # The status of the secret with a timestamp. + "message": "A String", # Optional. Optional message about the status code. + "status": "A String", # Optional. The status of the secret. + "updateTime": "A String", # Optional. The time the secret status was last updated. + }, + ], + }, "spdxFile": { # FileOccurrence represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # Describes a specific SPDX File. "attributions": [ # This field provides a place for the SPDX data creator to record, at the file level, acknowledgements that may be needed to be communicated in some contexts "A String", @@ -1156,6 +1173,23 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, + "secret": { # The occurrence provides details of a secret. # Describes a secret. + "kind": "A String", # Required. Type of secret. + "locations": [ # Optional. Locations where the secret is detected. + { # The location of the secret. + "fileLocation": { # Indicates the location at which a package was found. # The secret is found from a file. + "filePath": "A String", # For jars that are contained inside .war files, this filepath can indicate the path to war file combined with the path to jar file. + }, + }, + ], + "statuses": [ # Optional. Status of the secret. + { # The status of the secret with a timestamp. + "message": "A String", # Optional. Optional message about the status code. + "status": "A String", # Optional. The status of the secret. + "updateTime": "A String", # Optional. The time the secret status was last updated. + }, + ], + }, "spdxFile": { # FileOccurrence represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # Describes a specific SPDX File. "attributions": [ # This field provides a place for the SPDX data creator to record, at the file level, acknowledgements that may be needed to be communicated in some contexts "A String", @@ -1755,6 +1789,23 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, + "secret": { # The occurrence provides details of a secret. # Describes a secret. + "kind": "A String", # Required. Type of secret. + "locations": [ # Optional. Locations where the secret is detected. + { # The location of the secret. + "fileLocation": { # Indicates the location at which a package was found. # The secret is found from a file. + "filePath": "A String", # For jars that are contained inside .war files, this filepath can indicate the path to war file combined with the path to jar file. + }, + }, + ], + "statuses": [ # Optional. Status of the secret. + { # The status of the secret with a timestamp. + "message": "A String", # Optional. Optional message about the status code. + "status": "A String", # Optional. The status of the secret. + "updateTime": "A String", # Optional. The time the secret status was last updated. + }, + ], + }, "spdxFile": { # FileOccurrence represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # Describes a specific SPDX File. "attributions": [ # This field provides a place for the SPDX data creator to record, at the file level, acknowledgements that may be needed to be communicated in some contexts "A String", @@ -2345,6 +2396,23 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, + "secret": { # The occurrence provides details of a secret. # Describes a secret. + "kind": "A String", # Required. Type of secret. + "locations": [ # Optional. Locations where the secret is detected. + { # The location of the secret. + "fileLocation": { # Indicates the location at which a package was found. # The secret is found from a file. + "filePath": "A String", # For jars that are contained inside .war files, this filepath can indicate the path to war file combined with the path to jar file. + }, + }, + ], + "statuses": [ # Optional. Status of the secret. + { # The status of the secret with a timestamp. + "message": "A String", # Optional. Optional message about the status code. + "status": "A String", # Optional. The status of the secret. + "updateTime": "A String", # Optional. The time the secret status was last updated. + }, + ], + }, "spdxFile": { # FileOccurrence represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # Describes a specific SPDX File. "attributions": [ # This field provides a place for the SPDX data creator to record, at the file level, acknowledgements that may be needed to be communicated in some contexts "A String", @@ -2960,6 +3028,23 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, + "secret": { # The occurrence provides details of a secret. # Describes a secret. + "kind": "A String", # Required. Type of secret. + "locations": [ # Optional. Locations where the secret is detected. + { # The location of the secret. + "fileLocation": { # Indicates the location at which a package was found. # The secret is found from a file. + "filePath": "A String", # For jars that are contained inside .war files, this filepath can indicate the path to war file combined with the path to jar file. + }, + }, + ], + "statuses": [ # Optional. Status of the secret. + { # The status of the secret with a timestamp. + "message": "A String", # Optional. Optional message about the status code. + "status": "A String", # Optional. The status of the secret. + "updateTime": "A String", # Optional. The time the secret status was last updated. + }, + ], + }, "spdxFile": { # FileOccurrence represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # Describes a specific SPDX File. "attributions": [ # This field provides a place for the SPDX data creator to record, at the file level, acknowledgements that may be needed to be communicated in some contexts "A String", @@ -3289,6 +3374,8 @@

Method Details

"format": "A String", # The format that SBOM takes. E.g. may be spdx, cyclonedx, etc... "version": "A String", # The version of the format that the SBOM takes. E.g. if the format is spdx, the version may be 2.3. }, + "secret": { # The note representing a secret. # A note describing a secret. + }, "shortDescription": "A String", # A one sentence description of this note. "spdxFile": { # FileNote represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # A note describing an SPDX File. "checksum": [ # Provide a unique identifier to match analysis information on each specific file in a package @@ -3964,6 +4051,23 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, + "secret": { # The occurrence provides details of a secret. # Describes a secret. + "kind": "A String", # Required. Type of secret. + "locations": [ # Optional. Locations where the secret is detected. + { # The location of the secret. + "fileLocation": { # Indicates the location at which a package was found. # The secret is found from a file. + "filePath": "A String", # For jars that are contained inside .war files, this filepath can indicate the path to war file combined with the path to jar file. + }, + }, + ], + "statuses": [ # Optional. Status of the secret. + { # The status of the secret with a timestamp. + "message": "A String", # Optional. Optional message about the status code. + "status": "A String", # Optional. The status of the secret. + "updateTime": "A String", # Optional. The time the secret status was last updated. + }, + ], + }, "spdxFile": { # FileOccurrence represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # Describes a specific SPDX File. "attributions": [ # This field provides a place for the SPDX data creator to record, at the file level, acknowledgements that may be needed to be communicated in some contexts "A String", @@ -4575,6 +4679,23 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, + "secret": { # The occurrence provides details of a secret. # Describes a secret. + "kind": "A String", # Required. Type of secret. + "locations": [ # Optional. Locations where the secret is detected. + { # The location of the secret. + "fileLocation": { # Indicates the location at which a package was found. # The secret is found from a file. + "filePath": "A String", # For jars that are contained inside .war files, this filepath can indicate the path to war file combined with the path to jar file. + }, + }, + ], + "statuses": [ # Optional. Status of the secret. + { # The status of the secret with a timestamp. + "message": "A String", # Optional. Optional message about the status code. + "status": "A String", # Optional. The status of the secret. + "updateTime": "A String", # Optional. The time the secret status was last updated. + }, + ], + }, "spdxFile": { # FileOccurrence represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # Describes a specific SPDX File. "attributions": [ # This field provides a place for the SPDX data creator to record, at the file level, acknowledgements that may be needed to be communicated in some contexts "A String", @@ -5166,6 +5287,23 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, + "secret": { # The occurrence provides details of a secret. # Describes a secret. + "kind": "A String", # Required. Type of secret. + "locations": [ # Optional. Locations where the secret is detected. + { # The location of the secret. + "fileLocation": { # Indicates the location at which a package was found. # The secret is found from a file. + "filePath": "A String", # For jars that are contained inside .war files, this filepath can indicate the path to war file combined with the path to jar file. + }, + }, + ], + "statuses": [ # Optional. Status of the secret. + { # The status of the secret with a timestamp. + "message": "A String", # Optional. Optional message about the status code. + "status": "A String", # Optional. The status of the secret. + "updateTime": "A String", # Optional. The time the secret status was last updated. + }, + ], + }, "spdxFile": { # FileOccurrence represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/ # Describes a specific SPDX File. "attributions": [ # This field provides a place for the SPDX data creator to record, at the file level, acknowledgements that may be needed to be communicated in some contexts "A String", diff --git a/docs/dyn/dataform_v1beta1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/dataform_v1beta1.projects.locations.html index 9472c9aa4c2..d59b6f92574 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/dataform_v1beta1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/dataform_v1beta1.projects.locations.html @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/datafusion_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/datafusion_v1.projects.locations.html index 15ab08f8549..a4a8a08a2f8 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/datafusion_v1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/datafusion_v1.projects.locations.html @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. A list of extra location types that should be used as conditions for controlling the visibility of the locations. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/datafusion_v1beta1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/datafusion_v1beta1.projects.locations.html index ae2f87c89ef..67fbfd58ded 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/datafusion_v1beta1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/datafusion_v1beta1.projects.locations.html @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. A list of extra location types that should be used as conditions for controlling the visibility of the locations. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/datamigration_v1.projects.locations.connectionProfiles.html b/docs/dyn/datamigration_v1.projects.locations.connectionProfiles.html index bb2d17c2ea0..23fb84c4f23 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/datamigration_v1.projects.locations.connectionProfiles.html +++ b/docs/dyn/datamigration_v1.projects.locations.connectionProfiles.html @@ -327,7 +327,9 @@

Method Details

"gcsPrefix": "A String", # Optional. Cloud Storage path inside the bucket that stores backups. }, "cloudSqlId": "A String", # If the source is a Cloud SQL database, use this field to provide the Cloud SQL instance ID of the source. + "cloudSqlProjectId": "A String", # Optional. The project id of the Cloud SQL instance. If not provided, the project id of the connection profile will be used. "database": "A String", # Required. The name of the specific database within the host. + "dbmPort": 42, # Optional. The Database Mirroring (DBM) port of the source SQL Server instance. "forwardSshConnectivity": { # Forward SSH Tunnel connectivity. # Forward SSH tunnel connectivity. "hostname": "A String", # Required. Hostname for the SSH tunnel. "password": "A String", # Input only. SSH password. @@ -654,7 +656,9 @@

Method Details

"gcsPrefix": "A String", # Optional. Cloud Storage path inside the bucket that stores backups. }, "cloudSqlId": "A String", # If the source is a Cloud SQL database, use this field to provide the Cloud SQL instance ID of the source. + "cloudSqlProjectId": "A String", # Optional. The project id of the Cloud SQL instance. If not provided, the project id of the connection profile will be used. "database": "A String", # Required. The name of the specific database within the host. + "dbmPort": 42, # Optional. The Database Mirroring (DBM) port of the source SQL Server instance. "forwardSshConnectivity": { # Forward SSH Tunnel connectivity. # Forward SSH tunnel connectivity. "hostname": "A String", # Required. Hostname for the SSH tunnel. "password": "A String", # Input only. SSH password. @@ -966,7 +970,9 @@

Method Details

"gcsPrefix": "A String", # Optional. Cloud Storage path inside the bucket that stores backups. }, "cloudSqlId": "A String", # If the source is a Cloud SQL database, use this field to provide the Cloud SQL instance ID of the source. + "cloudSqlProjectId": "A String", # Optional. The project id of the Cloud SQL instance. If not provided, the project id of the connection profile will be used. "database": "A String", # Required. The name of the specific database within the host. + "dbmPort": 42, # Optional. The Database Mirroring (DBM) port of the source SQL Server instance. "forwardSshConnectivity": { # Forward SSH Tunnel connectivity. # Forward SSH tunnel connectivity. "hostname": "A String", # Required. Hostname for the SSH tunnel. "password": "A String", # Input only. SSH password. @@ -1239,7 +1245,9 @@

Method Details

"gcsPrefix": "A String", # Optional. Cloud Storage path inside the bucket that stores backups. }, "cloudSqlId": "A String", # If the source is a Cloud SQL database, use this field to provide the Cloud SQL instance ID of the source. + "cloudSqlProjectId": "A String", # Optional. The project id of the Cloud SQL instance. If not provided, the project id of the connection profile will be used. "database": "A String", # Required. The name of the specific database within the host. + "dbmPort": 42, # Optional. The Database Mirroring (DBM) port of the source SQL Server instance. "forwardSshConnectivity": { # Forward SSH Tunnel connectivity. # Forward SSH tunnel connectivity. "hostname": "A String", # Required. Hostname for the SSH tunnel. "password": "A String", # Input only. SSH password. diff --git a/docs/dyn/datamigration_v1.projects.locations.migrationJobs.html b/docs/dyn/datamigration_v1.projects.locations.migrationJobs.html index c9f34b8099e..c21e2e0c69a 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/datamigration_v1.projects.locations.migrationJobs.html +++ b/docs/dyn/datamigration_v1.projects.locations.migrationJobs.html @@ -249,6 +249,10 @@

Method Details

}, "sqlserverHomogeneousMigrationJobConfig": { # Configuration for homogeneous migration to Cloud SQL for SQL Server. # Optional. Configuration for SQL Server homogeneous migration. "backupFilePattern": "A String", # Required. Pattern that describes the default backup naming strategy. The specified pattern should ensure lexicographical order of backups. The pattern must define one of the following capture group sets: Capture group set #1 yy/yyyy - year, 2 or 4 digits mm - month number, 1-12 dd - day of month, 1-31 hh - hour of day, 00-23 mi - minutes, 00-59 ss - seconds, 00-59 Example: For backup file TestDB_20230802_155400.trn, use pattern: (?.*)_backup_(?\d{4})(?\d{2})(?\d{2})_(?\d{2})(?\d{2})(?\d{2}).trn Capture group set #2 timestamp - unix timestamp Example: For backup file TestDB.1691448254.trn, use pattern: (?.*)\.(?\d*).trn or (?.*)\.(?\d*).trn + "dagConfig": { # Configuration for distributed availability group (DAG) for the SQL Server homogeneous migration. # Optional. Configuration for distributed availability group (DAG) for the SQL Server homogeneous migration. + "linkedServer": "A String", # Required. The name of the linked server that points to the source SQL Server instance. Only used by DAG migrations. + "sourceAg": "A String", # Required. The name of the source availability group. Only used by DAG migrations. + }, "databaseBackups": [ # Required. Backup details per database in Cloud Storage. { # Specifies the backup details for a single database in Cloud Storage for homogeneous migration to Cloud SQL for SQL Server. "database": "A String", # Required. Name of a SQL Server database for which to define backup configuration. @@ -601,6 +605,10 @@

Method Details

}, "sqlserverHomogeneousMigrationJobConfig": { # Configuration for homogeneous migration to Cloud SQL for SQL Server. # Optional. Configuration for SQL Server homogeneous migration. "backupFilePattern": "A String", # Required. Pattern that describes the default backup naming strategy. The specified pattern should ensure lexicographical order of backups. The pattern must define one of the following capture group sets: Capture group set #1 yy/yyyy - year, 2 or 4 digits mm - month number, 1-12 dd - day of month, 1-31 hh - hour of day, 00-23 mi - minutes, 00-59 ss - seconds, 00-59 Example: For backup file TestDB_20230802_155400.trn, use pattern: (?.*)_backup_(?\d{4})(?\d{2})(?\d{2})_(?\d{2})(?\d{2})(?\d{2}).trn Capture group set #2 timestamp - unix timestamp Example: For backup file TestDB.1691448254.trn, use pattern: (?.*)\.(?\d*).trn or (?.*)\.(?\d*).trn + "dagConfig": { # Configuration for distributed availability group (DAG) for the SQL Server homogeneous migration. # Optional. Configuration for distributed availability group (DAG) for the SQL Server homogeneous migration. + "linkedServer": "A String", # Required. The name of the linked server that points to the source SQL Server instance. Only used by DAG migrations. + "sourceAg": "A String", # Required. The name of the source availability group. Only used by DAG migrations. + }, "databaseBackups": [ # Required. Backup details per database in Cloud Storage. { # Specifies the backup details for a single database in Cloud Storage for homogeneous migration to Cloud SQL for SQL Server. "database": "A String", # Required. Name of a SQL Server database for which to define backup configuration. @@ -800,6 +808,10 @@

Method Details

}, "sqlserverHomogeneousMigrationJobConfig": { # Configuration for homogeneous migration to Cloud SQL for SQL Server. # Optional. Configuration for SQL Server homogeneous migration. "backupFilePattern": "A String", # Required. Pattern that describes the default backup naming strategy. The specified pattern should ensure lexicographical order of backups. The pattern must define one of the following capture group sets: Capture group set #1 yy/yyyy - year, 2 or 4 digits mm - month number, 1-12 dd - day of month, 1-31 hh - hour of day, 00-23 mi - minutes, 00-59 ss - seconds, 00-59 Example: For backup file TestDB_20230802_155400.trn, use pattern: (?.*)_backup_(?\d{4})(?\d{2})(?\d{2})_(?\d{2})(?\d{2})(?\d{2}).trn Capture group set #2 timestamp - unix timestamp Example: For backup file TestDB.1691448254.trn, use pattern: (?.*)\.(?\d*).trn or (?.*)\.(?\d*).trn + "dagConfig": { # Configuration for distributed availability group (DAG) for the SQL Server homogeneous migration. # Optional. Configuration for distributed availability group (DAG) for the SQL Server homogeneous migration. + "linkedServer": "A String", # Required. The name of the linked server that points to the source SQL Server instance. Only used by DAG migrations. + "sourceAg": "A String", # Required. The name of the source availability group. Only used by DAG migrations. + }, "databaseBackups": [ # Required. Backup details per database in Cloud Storage. { # Specifies the backup details for a single database in Cloud Storage for homogeneous migration to Cloud SQL for SQL Server. "database": "A String", # Required. Name of a SQL Server database for which to define backup configuration. @@ -960,6 +972,10 @@

Method Details

}, "sqlserverHomogeneousMigrationJobConfig": { # Configuration for homogeneous migration to Cloud SQL for SQL Server. # Optional. Configuration for SQL Server homogeneous migration. "backupFilePattern": "A String", # Required. Pattern that describes the default backup naming strategy. The specified pattern should ensure lexicographical order of backups. The pattern must define one of the following capture group sets: Capture group set #1 yy/yyyy - year, 2 or 4 digits mm - month number, 1-12 dd - day of month, 1-31 hh - hour of day, 00-23 mi - minutes, 00-59 ss - seconds, 00-59 Example: For backup file TestDB_20230802_155400.trn, use pattern: (?.*)_backup_(?\d{4})(?\d{2})(?\d{2})_(?\d{2})(?\d{2})(?\d{2}).trn Capture group set #2 timestamp - unix timestamp Example: For backup file TestDB.1691448254.trn, use pattern: (?.*)\.(?\d*).trn or (?.*)\.(?\d*).trn + "dagConfig": { # Configuration for distributed availability group (DAG) for the SQL Server homogeneous migration. # Optional. Configuration for distributed availability group (DAG) for the SQL Server homogeneous migration. + "linkedServer": "A String", # Required. The name of the linked server that points to the source SQL Server instance. Only used by DAG migrations. + "sourceAg": "A String", # Required. The name of the source availability group. Only used by DAG migrations. + }, "databaseBackups": [ # Required. Backup details per database in Cloud Storage. { # Specifies the backup details for a single database in Cloud Storage for homogeneous migration to Cloud SQL for SQL Server. "database": "A String", # Required. Name of a SQL Server database for which to define backup configuration. @@ -1485,6 +1501,10 @@

Method Details

}, "sqlserverHomogeneousMigrationJobConfig": { # Configuration for homogeneous migration to Cloud SQL for SQL Server. # Optional. Configuration for SQL Server homogeneous migration. "backupFilePattern": "A String", # Required. Pattern that describes the default backup naming strategy. The specified pattern should ensure lexicographical order of backups. The pattern must define one of the following capture group sets: Capture group set #1 yy/yyyy - year, 2 or 4 digits mm - month number, 1-12 dd - day of month, 1-31 hh - hour of day, 00-23 mi - minutes, 00-59 ss - seconds, 00-59 Example: For backup file TestDB_20230802_155400.trn, use pattern: (?.*)_backup_(?\d{4})(?\d{2})(?\d{2})_(?\d{2})(?\d{2})(?\d{2}).trn Capture group set #2 timestamp - unix timestamp Example: For backup file TestDB.1691448254.trn, use pattern: (?.*)\.(?\d*).trn or (?.*)\.(?\d*).trn + "dagConfig": { # Configuration for distributed availability group (DAG) for the SQL Server homogeneous migration. # Optional. Configuration for distributed availability group (DAG) for the SQL Server homogeneous migration. + "linkedServer": "A String", # Required. The name of the linked server that points to the source SQL Server instance. Only used by DAG migrations. + "sourceAg": "A String", # Required. The name of the source availability group. Only used by DAG migrations. + }, "databaseBackups": [ # Required. Backup details per database in Cloud Storage. { # Specifies the backup details for a single database in Cloud Storage for homogeneous migration to Cloud SQL for SQL Server. "database": "A String", # Required. Name of a SQL Server database for which to define backup configuration. diff --git a/docs/dyn/dataplex_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/dataplex_v1.projects.locations.html index 1a76c90f3b4..e167f9dbfa2 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/dataplex_v1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/dataplex_v1.projects.locations.html @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like "displayName=tokyo", and is documented in more detail in AIP-160 (https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the next_page_token field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/datastream_v1.projects.locations.streams.html b/docs/dyn/datastream_v1.projects.locations.streams.html index ff79ce3ddac..d0e1e209601 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/datastream_v1.projects.locations.streams.html +++ b/docs/dyn/datastream_v1.projects.locations.streams.html @@ -2317,6 +2317,9 @@

Method Details

"nextAvailableStartPosition": { # CDC strategy to resume replication from the next available position in the source. # Optional. Resume replication from the next available position in the source. }, "specificStartPosition": { # CDC strategy to start replicating from a specific position in the source. # Optional. Start replicating from a specific position in the source. + "mongodbChangeStreamPosition": { # MongoDB change stream position # MongoDB change stream position to start replicating from. + "startTime": "A String", # Required. The timestamp (in epoch seconds) to start change stream from. + }, "mysqlGtidPosition": { # MySQL GTID position # MySQL GTID set to start replicating from. "gtidSet": "A String", # Required. The gtid set to start replication from. }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/deploymentmanager_alpha.deployments.html b/docs/dyn/deploymentmanager_alpha.deployments.html index 19d5682f0fe..48dd93fcac0 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/deploymentmanager_alpha.deployments.html +++ b/docs/dyn/deploymentmanager_alpha.deployments.html @@ -1640,7 +1640,7 @@

Method Details

"etag": "A String", # `etag` is used for optimistic concurrency control as a way to help prevent simultaneous updates of a policy from overwriting each other. It is strongly suggested that systems make use of the `etag` in the read-modify-write cycle to perform policy updates in order to avoid race conditions: An `etag` is returned in the response to `getIamPolicy`, and systems are expected to put that etag in the request to `setIamPolicy` to ensure that their change will be applied to the same version of the policy. **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost. "version": 42, # Specifies the format of the policy. Valid values are `0`, `1`, and `3`. Requests that specify an invalid value are rejected. Any operation that affects conditional role bindings must specify version `3`. This requirement applies to the following operations: * Getting a policy that includes a conditional role binding * Adding a conditional role binding to a policy * Changing a conditional role binding in a policy * Removing any role binding, with or without a condition, from a policy that includes conditions **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost. If a policy does not include any conditions, operations on that policy may specify any valid version or leave the field unset. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies). }, - "updateMask": "A String", + "updateMask": "A String", # Update mask for the policy. } x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. diff --git a/docs/dyn/deploymentmanager_v2.deployments.html b/docs/dyn/deploymentmanager_v2.deployments.html index 919d038f753..e90b0637b10 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/deploymentmanager_v2.deployments.html +++ b/docs/dyn/deploymentmanager_v2.deployments.html @@ -1534,7 +1534,7 @@

Method Details

"etag": "A String", # `etag` is used for optimistic concurrency control as a way to help prevent simultaneous updates of a policy from overwriting each other. It is strongly suggested that systems make use of the `etag` in the read-modify-write cycle to perform policy updates in order to avoid race conditions: An `etag` is returned in the response to `getIamPolicy`, and systems are expected to put that etag in the request to `setIamPolicy` to ensure that their change will be applied to the same version of the policy. **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost. "version": 42, # Specifies the format of the policy. Valid values are `0`, `1`, and `3`. Requests that specify an invalid value are rejected. Any operation that affects conditional role bindings must specify version `3`. This requirement applies to the following operations: * Getting a policy that includes a conditional role binding * Adding a conditional role binding to a policy * Changing a conditional role binding in a policy * Removing any role binding, with or without a condition, from a policy that includes conditions **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost. If a policy does not include any conditions, operations on that policy may specify any valid version or leave the field unset. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies). }, - "updateMask": "A String", + "updateMask": "A String", # Update mask for the policy. } x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. diff --git a/docs/dyn/deploymentmanager_v2beta.deployments.html b/docs/dyn/deploymentmanager_v2beta.deployments.html index e24eb674c9b..f8f1350aae1 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/deploymentmanager_v2beta.deployments.html +++ b/docs/dyn/deploymentmanager_v2beta.deployments.html @@ -1536,7 +1536,7 @@

Method Details

"etag": "A String", # `etag` is used for optimistic concurrency control as a way to help prevent simultaneous updates of a policy from overwriting each other. It is strongly suggested that systems make use of the `etag` in the read-modify-write cycle to perform policy updates in order to avoid race conditions: An `etag` is returned in the response to `getIamPolicy`, and systems are expected to put that etag in the request to `setIamPolicy` to ensure that their change will be applied to the same version of the policy. **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost. "version": 42, # Specifies the format of the policy. Valid values are `0`, `1`, and `3`. Requests that specify an invalid value are rejected. Any operation that affects conditional role bindings must specify version `3`. This requirement applies to the following operations: * Getting a policy that includes a conditional role binding * Adding a conditional role binding to a policy * Changing a conditional role binding in a policy * Removing any role binding, with or without a condition, from a policy that includes conditions **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost. If a policy does not include any conditions, operations on that policy may specify any valid version or leave the field unset. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies). }, - "updateMask": "A String", + "updateMask": "A String", # Update mask for the policy. } x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. diff --git a/docs/dyn/developerconnect_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/developerconnect_v1.projects.locations.html index a41b0ad5ab5..deda2e98489 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/developerconnect_v1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/developerconnect_v1.projects.locations.html @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v4.placements.html b/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v4.placements.html index 34ac5949730..30e82eabfbc 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v4.placements.html +++ b/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v4.placements.html @@ -199,6 +199,7 @@

Method Details

"matchType": "A String", # Determines how the 'value' field is matched when filtering. If not specified, defaults to EXACT. If set to WILDCARD_EXPRESSION, '*' is allowed as a placeholder for variable length character sequences, and it can be escaped with a backslash. Note, only paid search dimensions ('dfa:paidSearch*') allow a matchType other than EXACT. "value": "A String", # The value of the dimension. }, + "allowOnYoutube": True or False, # Optional. Whether the placement is enabled for YouTube integration. "campaignId": "A String", # Campaign ID of this placement. This field is a required field on insertion. "campaignIdDimensionValue": { # Represents a DimensionValue resource. # Dimension value for the ID of the campaign. This is a read-only, auto-generated field. "dimensionName": "A String", # The name of the dimension. @@ -379,6 +380,24 @@

Method Details

}, "vpaidAdapterChoice": "A String", # VPAID adapter setting for this placement. Controls which VPAID format the measurement adapter will use for in-stream video creatives assigned to this placement. *Note:* Flash is no longer supported. This field now defaults to HTML5 when the following values are provided: FLASH, BOTH. "wrappingOptOut": True or False, # Whether this placement opts out of tag wrapping. + "youtubeSettings": { # Contains the YouTube settings. # Optional. YouTube settings for the placement. The placement must be enabled for YouTube to use this field. + "businessLogoCreativeIds": [ # Optional. The IDs of the creatives to use for the business logo. Currently only one creative is supported. + "A String", + ], + "businessName": "A String", # Optional. The business name. + "callToActions": [ # Optional. The call to actions. Currently only one call to action is supported. + "A String", + ], + "descriptions": [ # Optional. The descriptions. Currently only one description is supported. + "A String", + ], + "headlines": [ # Optional. The headlines associated with the call to actions. Currently only one headline is supported. + "A String", + ], + "longHeadlines": [ # Optional. The long headlines. Currently only one long headline is supported. + "A String", + ], + }, } @@ -414,6 +433,7 @@

Method Details

"matchType": "A String", # Determines how the 'value' field is matched when filtering. If not specified, defaults to EXACT. If set to WILDCARD_EXPRESSION, '*' is allowed as a placeholder for variable length character sequences, and it can be escaped with a backslash. Note, only paid search dimensions ('dfa:paidSearch*') allow a matchType other than EXACT. "value": "A String", # The value of the dimension. }, + "allowOnYoutube": True or False, # Optional. Whether the placement is enabled for YouTube integration. "campaignId": "A String", # Campaign ID of this placement. This field is a required field on insertion. "campaignIdDimensionValue": { # Represents a DimensionValue resource. # Dimension value for the ID of the campaign. This is a read-only, auto-generated field. "dimensionName": "A String", # The name of the dimension. @@ -594,6 +614,24 @@

Method Details

}, "vpaidAdapterChoice": "A String", # VPAID adapter setting for this placement. Controls which VPAID format the measurement adapter will use for in-stream video creatives assigned to this placement. *Note:* Flash is no longer supported. This field now defaults to HTML5 when the following values are provided: FLASH, BOTH. "wrappingOptOut": True or False, # Whether this placement opts out of tag wrapping. + "youtubeSettings": { # Contains the YouTube settings. # Optional. YouTube settings for the placement. The placement must be enabled for YouTube to use this field. + "businessLogoCreativeIds": [ # Optional. The IDs of the creatives to use for the business logo. Currently only one creative is supported. + "A String", + ], + "businessName": "A String", # Optional. The business name. + "callToActions": [ # Optional. The call to actions. Currently only one call to action is supported. + "A String", + ], + "descriptions": [ # Optional. The descriptions. Currently only one description is supported. + "A String", + ], + "headlines": [ # Optional. The headlines associated with the call to actions. Currently only one headline is supported. + "A String", + ], + "longHeadlines": [ # Optional. The long headlines. Currently only one long headline is supported. + "A String", + ], + }, } x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. @@ -627,6 +665,7 @@

Method Details

"matchType": "A String", # Determines how the 'value' field is matched when filtering. If not specified, defaults to EXACT. If set to WILDCARD_EXPRESSION, '*' is allowed as a placeholder for variable length character sequences, and it can be escaped with a backslash. Note, only paid search dimensions ('dfa:paidSearch*') allow a matchType other than EXACT. "value": "A String", # The value of the dimension. }, + "allowOnYoutube": True or False, # Optional. Whether the placement is enabled for YouTube integration. "campaignId": "A String", # Campaign ID of this placement. This field is a required field on insertion. "campaignIdDimensionValue": { # Represents a DimensionValue resource. # Dimension value for the ID of the campaign. This is a read-only, auto-generated field. "dimensionName": "A String", # The name of the dimension. @@ -807,6 +846,24 @@

Method Details

}, "vpaidAdapterChoice": "A String", # VPAID adapter setting for this placement. Controls which VPAID format the measurement adapter will use for in-stream video creatives assigned to this placement. *Note:* Flash is no longer supported. This field now defaults to HTML5 when the following values are provided: FLASH, BOTH. "wrappingOptOut": True or False, # Whether this placement opts out of tag wrapping. + "youtubeSettings": { # Contains the YouTube settings. # Optional. YouTube settings for the placement. The placement must be enabled for YouTube to use this field. + "businessLogoCreativeIds": [ # Optional. The IDs of the creatives to use for the business logo. Currently only one creative is supported. + "A String", + ], + "businessName": "A String", # Optional. The business name. + "callToActions": [ # Optional. The call to actions. Currently only one call to action is supported. + "A String", + ], + "descriptions": [ # Optional. The descriptions. Currently only one description is supported. + "A String", + ], + "headlines": [ # Optional. The headlines associated with the call to actions. Currently only one headline is supported. + "A String", + ], + "longHeadlines": [ # Optional. The long headlines. Currently only one long headline is supported. + "A String", + ], + }, } @@ -902,6 +959,7 @@

Method Details

"matchType": "A String", # Determines how the 'value' field is matched when filtering. If not specified, defaults to EXACT. If set to WILDCARD_EXPRESSION, '*' is allowed as a placeholder for variable length character sequences, and it can be escaped with a backslash. Note, only paid search dimensions ('dfa:paidSearch*') allow a matchType other than EXACT. "value": "A String", # The value of the dimension. }, + "allowOnYoutube": True or False, # Optional. Whether the placement is enabled for YouTube integration. "campaignId": "A String", # Campaign ID of this placement. This field is a required field on insertion. "campaignIdDimensionValue": { # Represents a DimensionValue resource. # Dimension value for the ID of the campaign. This is a read-only, auto-generated field. "dimensionName": "A String", # The name of the dimension. @@ -1082,6 +1140,24 @@

Method Details

}, "vpaidAdapterChoice": "A String", # VPAID adapter setting for this placement. Controls which VPAID format the measurement adapter will use for in-stream video creatives assigned to this placement. *Note:* Flash is no longer supported. This field now defaults to HTML5 when the following values are provided: FLASH, BOTH. "wrappingOptOut": True or False, # Whether this placement opts out of tag wrapping. + "youtubeSettings": { # Contains the YouTube settings. # Optional. YouTube settings for the placement. The placement must be enabled for YouTube to use this field. + "businessLogoCreativeIds": [ # Optional. The IDs of the creatives to use for the business logo. Currently only one creative is supported. + "A String", + ], + "businessName": "A String", # Optional. The business name. + "callToActions": [ # Optional. The call to actions. Currently only one call to action is supported. + "A String", + ], + "descriptions": [ # Optional. The descriptions. Currently only one description is supported. + "A String", + ], + "headlines": [ # Optional. The headlines associated with the call to actions. Currently only one headline is supported. + "A String", + ], + "longHeadlines": [ # Optional. The long headlines. Currently only one long headline is supported. + "A String", + ], + }, }, ], } @@ -1134,6 +1210,7 @@

Method Details

"matchType": "A String", # Determines how the 'value' field is matched when filtering. If not specified, defaults to EXACT. If set to WILDCARD_EXPRESSION, '*' is allowed as a placeholder for variable length character sequences, and it can be escaped with a backslash. Note, only paid search dimensions ('dfa:paidSearch*') allow a matchType other than EXACT. "value": "A String", # The value of the dimension. }, + "allowOnYoutube": True or False, # Optional. Whether the placement is enabled for YouTube integration. "campaignId": "A String", # Campaign ID of this placement. This field is a required field on insertion. "campaignIdDimensionValue": { # Represents a DimensionValue resource. # Dimension value for the ID of the campaign. This is a read-only, auto-generated field. "dimensionName": "A String", # The name of the dimension. @@ -1314,6 +1391,24 @@

Method Details

}, "vpaidAdapterChoice": "A String", # VPAID adapter setting for this placement. Controls which VPAID format the measurement adapter will use for in-stream video creatives assigned to this placement. *Note:* Flash is no longer supported. This field now defaults to HTML5 when the following values are provided: FLASH, BOTH. "wrappingOptOut": True or False, # Whether this placement opts out of tag wrapping. + "youtubeSettings": { # Contains the YouTube settings. # Optional. YouTube settings for the placement. The placement must be enabled for YouTube to use this field. + "businessLogoCreativeIds": [ # Optional. The IDs of the creatives to use for the business logo. Currently only one creative is supported. + "A String", + ], + "businessName": "A String", # Optional. The business name. + "callToActions": [ # Optional. The call to actions. Currently only one call to action is supported. + "A String", + ], + "descriptions": [ # Optional. The descriptions. Currently only one description is supported. + "A String", + ], + "headlines": [ # Optional. The headlines associated with the call to actions. Currently only one headline is supported. + "A String", + ], + "longHeadlines": [ # Optional. The long headlines. Currently only one long headline is supported. + "A String", + ], + }, } x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. @@ -1347,6 +1442,7 @@

Method Details

"matchType": "A String", # Determines how the 'value' field is matched when filtering. If not specified, defaults to EXACT. If set to WILDCARD_EXPRESSION, '*' is allowed as a placeholder for variable length character sequences, and it can be escaped with a backslash. Note, only paid search dimensions ('dfa:paidSearch*') allow a matchType other than EXACT. "value": "A String", # The value of the dimension. }, + "allowOnYoutube": True or False, # Optional. Whether the placement is enabled for YouTube integration. "campaignId": "A String", # Campaign ID of this placement. This field is a required field on insertion. "campaignIdDimensionValue": { # Represents a DimensionValue resource. # Dimension value for the ID of the campaign. This is a read-only, auto-generated field. "dimensionName": "A String", # The name of the dimension. @@ -1527,6 +1623,24 @@

Method Details

}, "vpaidAdapterChoice": "A String", # VPAID adapter setting for this placement. Controls which VPAID format the measurement adapter will use for in-stream video creatives assigned to this placement. *Note:* Flash is no longer supported. This field now defaults to HTML5 when the following values are provided: FLASH, BOTH. "wrappingOptOut": True or False, # Whether this placement opts out of tag wrapping. + "youtubeSettings": { # Contains the YouTube settings. # Optional. YouTube settings for the placement. The placement must be enabled for YouTube to use this field. + "businessLogoCreativeIds": [ # Optional. The IDs of the creatives to use for the business logo. Currently only one creative is supported. + "A String", + ], + "businessName": "A String", # Optional. The business name. + "callToActions": [ # Optional. The call to actions. Currently only one call to action is supported. + "A String", + ], + "descriptions": [ # Optional. The descriptions. Currently only one description is supported. + "A String", + ], + "headlines": [ # Optional. The headlines associated with the call to actions. Currently only one headline is supported. + "A String", + ], + "longHeadlines": [ # Optional. The long headlines. Currently only one long headline is supported. + "A String", + ], + }, } @@ -1562,6 +1676,7 @@

Method Details

"matchType": "A String", # Determines how the 'value' field is matched when filtering. If not specified, defaults to EXACT. If set to WILDCARD_EXPRESSION, '*' is allowed as a placeholder for variable length character sequences, and it can be escaped with a backslash. Note, only paid search dimensions ('dfa:paidSearch*') allow a matchType other than EXACT. "value": "A String", # The value of the dimension. }, + "allowOnYoutube": True or False, # Optional. Whether the placement is enabled for YouTube integration. "campaignId": "A String", # Campaign ID of this placement. This field is a required field on insertion. "campaignIdDimensionValue": { # Represents a DimensionValue resource. # Dimension value for the ID of the campaign. This is a read-only, auto-generated field. "dimensionName": "A String", # The name of the dimension. @@ -1742,6 +1857,24 @@

Method Details

}, "vpaidAdapterChoice": "A String", # VPAID adapter setting for this placement. Controls which VPAID format the measurement adapter will use for in-stream video creatives assigned to this placement. *Note:* Flash is no longer supported. This field now defaults to HTML5 when the following values are provided: FLASH, BOTH. "wrappingOptOut": True or False, # Whether this placement opts out of tag wrapping. + "youtubeSettings": { # Contains the YouTube settings. # Optional. YouTube settings for the placement. The placement must be enabled for YouTube to use this field. + "businessLogoCreativeIds": [ # Optional. The IDs of the creatives to use for the business logo. Currently only one creative is supported. + "A String", + ], + "businessName": "A String", # Optional. The business name. + "callToActions": [ # Optional. The call to actions. Currently only one call to action is supported. + "A String", + ], + "descriptions": [ # Optional. The descriptions. Currently only one description is supported. + "A String", + ], + "headlines": [ # Optional. The headlines associated with the call to actions. Currently only one headline is supported. + "A String", + ], + "longHeadlines": [ # Optional. The long headlines. Currently only one long headline is supported. + "A String", + ], + }, } x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. @@ -1775,6 +1908,7 @@

Method Details

"matchType": "A String", # Determines how the 'value' field is matched when filtering. If not specified, defaults to EXACT. If set to WILDCARD_EXPRESSION, '*' is allowed as a placeholder for variable length character sequences, and it can be escaped with a backslash. Note, only paid search dimensions ('dfa:paidSearch*') allow a matchType other than EXACT. "value": "A String", # The value of the dimension. }, + "allowOnYoutube": True or False, # Optional. Whether the placement is enabled for YouTube integration. "campaignId": "A String", # Campaign ID of this placement. This field is a required field on insertion. "campaignIdDimensionValue": { # Represents a DimensionValue resource. # Dimension value for the ID of the campaign. This is a read-only, auto-generated field. "dimensionName": "A String", # The name of the dimension. @@ -1955,6 +2089,24 @@

Method Details

}, "vpaidAdapterChoice": "A String", # VPAID adapter setting for this placement. Controls which VPAID format the measurement adapter will use for in-stream video creatives assigned to this placement. *Note:* Flash is no longer supported. This field now defaults to HTML5 when the following values are provided: FLASH, BOTH. "wrappingOptOut": True or False, # Whether this placement opts out of tag wrapping. + "youtubeSettings": { # Contains the YouTube settings. # Optional. YouTube settings for the placement. The placement must be enabled for YouTube to use this field. + "businessLogoCreativeIds": [ # Optional. The IDs of the creatives to use for the business logo. Currently only one creative is supported. + "A String", + ], + "businessName": "A String", # Optional. The business name. + "callToActions": [ # Optional. The call to actions. Currently only one call to action is supported. + "A String", + ], + "descriptions": [ # Optional. The descriptions. Currently only one description is supported. + "A String", + ], + "headlines": [ # Optional. The headlines associated with the call to actions. Currently only one headline is supported. + "A String", + ], + "longHeadlines": [ # Optional. The long headlines. Currently only one long headline is supported. + "A String", + ], + }, } diff --git a/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v5.placements.html b/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v5.placements.html index 43ba4a2b5ce..396890e3b86 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v5.placements.html +++ b/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v5.placements.html @@ -199,6 +199,7 @@

Method Details

"matchType": "A String", # Determines how the 'value' field is matched when filtering. If not specified, defaults to EXACT. If set to WILDCARD_EXPRESSION, '*' is allowed as a placeholder for variable length character sequences, and it can be escaped with a backslash. Note, only paid search dimensions ('dfa:paidSearch*') allow a matchType other than EXACT. "value": "A String", # The value of the dimension. }, + "allowOnYoutube": True or False, # Optional. Whether the placement is enabled for YouTube integration. "campaignId": "A String", # Campaign ID of this placement. This field is a required field on insertion. "campaignIdDimensionValue": { # Represents a DimensionValue resource. # Dimension value for the ID of the campaign. This is a read-only, auto-generated field. "dimensionName": "A String", # The name of the dimension. @@ -379,6 +380,24 @@

Method Details

}, "vpaidAdapterChoice": "A String", # VPAID adapter setting for this placement. Controls which VPAID format the measurement adapter will use for in-stream video creatives assigned to this placement. *Note:* Flash is no longer supported. This field now defaults to HTML5 when the following values are provided: FLASH, BOTH. "wrappingOptOut": True or False, # Whether this placement opts out of tag wrapping. + "youtubeSettings": { # Contains the YouTube settings. # Optional. YouTube settings for the placement. The placement must be enabled for YouTube to use this field. + "businessLogoCreativeIds": [ # Optional. The IDs of the creatives to use for the business logo. Currently only one creative is supported. + "A String", + ], + "businessName": "A String", # Optional. The business name. + "callToActions": [ # Optional. The call to actions. Currently only one call to action is supported. + "A String", + ], + "descriptions": [ # Optional. The descriptions. Currently only one description is supported. + "A String", + ], + "headlines": [ # Optional. The headlines associated with the call to actions. Currently only one headline is supported. + "A String", + ], + "longHeadlines": [ # Optional. The long headlines. Currently only one long headline is supported. + "A String", + ], + }, } @@ -414,6 +433,7 @@

Method Details

"matchType": "A String", # Determines how the 'value' field is matched when filtering. If not specified, defaults to EXACT. If set to WILDCARD_EXPRESSION, '*' is allowed as a placeholder for variable length character sequences, and it can be escaped with a backslash. Note, only paid search dimensions ('dfa:paidSearch*') allow a matchType other than EXACT. "value": "A String", # The value of the dimension. }, + "allowOnYoutube": True or False, # Optional. Whether the placement is enabled for YouTube integration. "campaignId": "A String", # Campaign ID of this placement. This field is a required field on insertion. "campaignIdDimensionValue": { # Represents a DimensionValue resource. # Dimension value for the ID of the campaign. This is a read-only, auto-generated field. "dimensionName": "A String", # The name of the dimension. @@ -594,6 +614,24 @@

Method Details

}, "vpaidAdapterChoice": "A String", # VPAID adapter setting for this placement. Controls which VPAID format the measurement adapter will use for in-stream video creatives assigned to this placement. *Note:* Flash is no longer supported. This field now defaults to HTML5 when the following values are provided: FLASH, BOTH. "wrappingOptOut": True or False, # Whether this placement opts out of tag wrapping. + "youtubeSettings": { # Contains the YouTube settings. # Optional. YouTube settings for the placement. The placement must be enabled for YouTube to use this field. + "businessLogoCreativeIds": [ # Optional. The IDs of the creatives to use for the business logo. Currently only one creative is supported. + "A String", + ], + "businessName": "A String", # Optional. The business name. + "callToActions": [ # Optional. The call to actions. Currently only one call to action is supported. + "A String", + ], + "descriptions": [ # Optional. The descriptions. Currently only one description is supported. + "A String", + ], + "headlines": [ # Optional. The headlines associated with the call to actions. Currently only one headline is supported. + "A String", + ], + "longHeadlines": [ # Optional. The long headlines. Currently only one long headline is supported. + "A String", + ], + }, } x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. @@ -627,6 +665,7 @@

Method Details

"matchType": "A String", # Determines how the 'value' field is matched when filtering. If not specified, defaults to EXACT. If set to WILDCARD_EXPRESSION, '*' is allowed as a placeholder for variable length character sequences, and it can be escaped with a backslash. Note, only paid search dimensions ('dfa:paidSearch*') allow a matchType other than EXACT. "value": "A String", # The value of the dimension. }, + "allowOnYoutube": True or False, # Optional. Whether the placement is enabled for YouTube integration. "campaignId": "A String", # Campaign ID of this placement. This field is a required field on insertion. "campaignIdDimensionValue": { # Represents a DimensionValue resource. # Dimension value for the ID of the campaign. This is a read-only, auto-generated field. "dimensionName": "A String", # The name of the dimension. @@ -807,6 +846,24 @@

Method Details

}, "vpaidAdapterChoice": "A String", # VPAID adapter setting for this placement. Controls which VPAID format the measurement adapter will use for in-stream video creatives assigned to this placement. *Note:* Flash is no longer supported. This field now defaults to HTML5 when the following values are provided: FLASH, BOTH. "wrappingOptOut": True or False, # Whether this placement opts out of tag wrapping. + "youtubeSettings": { # Contains the YouTube settings. # Optional. YouTube settings for the placement. The placement must be enabled for YouTube to use this field. + "businessLogoCreativeIds": [ # Optional. The IDs of the creatives to use for the business logo. Currently only one creative is supported. + "A String", + ], + "businessName": "A String", # Optional. The business name. + "callToActions": [ # Optional. The call to actions. Currently only one call to action is supported. + "A String", + ], + "descriptions": [ # Optional. The descriptions. Currently only one description is supported. + "A String", + ], + "headlines": [ # Optional. The headlines associated with the call to actions. Currently only one headline is supported. + "A String", + ], + "longHeadlines": [ # Optional. The long headlines. Currently only one long headline is supported. + "A String", + ], + }, } @@ -902,6 +959,7 @@

Method Details

"matchType": "A String", # Determines how the 'value' field is matched when filtering. If not specified, defaults to EXACT. If set to WILDCARD_EXPRESSION, '*' is allowed as a placeholder for variable length character sequences, and it can be escaped with a backslash. Note, only paid search dimensions ('dfa:paidSearch*') allow a matchType other than EXACT. "value": "A String", # The value of the dimension. }, + "allowOnYoutube": True or False, # Optional. Whether the placement is enabled for YouTube integration. "campaignId": "A String", # Campaign ID of this placement. This field is a required field on insertion. "campaignIdDimensionValue": { # Represents a DimensionValue resource. # Dimension value for the ID of the campaign. This is a read-only, auto-generated field. "dimensionName": "A String", # The name of the dimension. @@ -1082,6 +1140,24 @@

Method Details

}, "vpaidAdapterChoice": "A String", # VPAID adapter setting for this placement. Controls which VPAID format the measurement adapter will use for in-stream video creatives assigned to this placement. *Note:* Flash is no longer supported. This field now defaults to HTML5 when the following values are provided: FLASH, BOTH. "wrappingOptOut": True or False, # Whether this placement opts out of tag wrapping. + "youtubeSettings": { # Contains the YouTube settings. # Optional. YouTube settings for the placement. The placement must be enabled for YouTube to use this field. + "businessLogoCreativeIds": [ # Optional. The IDs of the creatives to use for the business logo. Currently only one creative is supported. + "A String", + ], + "businessName": "A String", # Optional. The business name. + "callToActions": [ # Optional. The call to actions. Currently only one call to action is supported. + "A String", + ], + "descriptions": [ # Optional. The descriptions. Currently only one description is supported. + "A String", + ], + "headlines": [ # Optional. The headlines associated with the call to actions. Currently only one headline is supported. + "A String", + ], + "longHeadlines": [ # Optional. The long headlines. Currently only one long headline is supported. + "A String", + ], + }, }, ], } @@ -1134,6 +1210,7 @@

Method Details

"matchType": "A String", # Determines how the 'value' field is matched when filtering. If not specified, defaults to EXACT. If set to WILDCARD_EXPRESSION, '*' is allowed as a placeholder for variable length character sequences, and it can be escaped with a backslash. Note, only paid search dimensions ('dfa:paidSearch*') allow a matchType other than EXACT. "value": "A String", # The value of the dimension. }, + "allowOnYoutube": True or False, # Optional. Whether the placement is enabled for YouTube integration. "campaignId": "A String", # Campaign ID of this placement. This field is a required field on insertion. "campaignIdDimensionValue": { # Represents a DimensionValue resource. # Dimension value for the ID of the campaign. This is a read-only, auto-generated field. "dimensionName": "A String", # The name of the dimension. @@ -1314,6 +1391,24 @@

Method Details

}, "vpaidAdapterChoice": "A String", # VPAID adapter setting for this placement. Controls which VPAID format the measurement adapter will use for in-stream video creatives assigned to this placement. *Note:* Flash is no longer supported. This field now defaults to HTML5 when the following values are provided: FLASH, BOTH. "wrappingOptOut": True or False, # Whether this placement opts out of tag wrapping. + "youtubeSettings": { # Contains the YouTube settings. # Optional. YouTube settings for the placement. The placement must be enabled for YouTube to use this field. + "businessLogoCreativeIds": [ # Optional. The IDs of the creatives to use for the business logo. Currently only one creative is supported. + "A String", + ], + "businessName": "A String", # Optional. The business name. + "callToActions": [ # Optional. The call to actions. Currently only one call to action is supported. + "A String", + ], + "descriptions": [ # Optional. The descriptions. Currently only one description is supported. + "A String", + ], + "headlines": [ # Optional. The headlines associated with the call to actions. Currently only one headline is supported. + "A String", + ], + "longHeadlines": [ # Optional. The long headlines. Currently only one long headline is supported. + "A String", + ], + }, } x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. @@ -1347,6 +1442,7 @@

Method Details

"matchType": "A String", # Determines how the 'value' field is matched when filtering. If not specified, defaults to EXACT. If set to WILDCARD_EXPRESSION, '*' is allowed as a placeholder for variable length character sequences, and it can be escaped with a backslash. Note, only paid search dimensions ('dfa:paidSearch*') allow a matchType other than EXACT. "value": "A String", # The value of the dimension. }, + "allowOnYoutube": True or False, # Optional. Whether the placement is enabled for YouTube integration. "campaignId": "A String", # Campaign ID of this placement. This field is a required field on insertion. "campaignIdDimensionValue": { # Represents a DimensionValue resource. # Dimension value for the ID of the campaign. This is a read-only, auto-generated field. "dimensionName": "A String", # The name of the dimension. @@ -1527,6 +1623,24 @@

Method Details

}, "vpaidAdapterChoice": "A String", # VPAID adapter setting for this placement. Controls which VPAID format the measurement adapter will use for in-stream video creatives assigned to this placement. *Note:* Flash is no longer supported. This field now defaults to HTML5 when the following values are provided: FLASH, BOTH. "wrappingOptOut": True or False, # Whether this placement opts out of tag wrapping. + "youtubeSettings": { # Contains the YouTube settings. # Optional. YouTube settings for the placement. The placement must be enabled for YouTube to use this field. + "businessLogoCreativeIds": [ # Optional. The IDs of the creatives to use for the business logo. Currently only one creative is supported. + "A String", + ], + "businessName": "A String", # Optional. The business name. + "callToActions": [ # Optional. The call to actions. Currently only one call to action is supported. + "A String", + ], + "descriptions": [ # Optional. The descriptions. Currently only one description is supported. + "A String", + ], + "headlines": [ # Optional. The headlines associated with the call to actions. Currently only one headline is supported. + "A String", + ], + "longHeadlines": [ # Optional. The long headlines. Currently only one long headline is supported. + "A String", + ], + }, } @@ -1562,6 +1676,7 @@

Method Details

"matchType": "A String", # Determines how the 'value' field is matched when filtering. If not specified, defaults to EXACT. If set to WILDCARD_EXPRESSION, '*' is allowed as a placeholder for variable length character sequences, and it can be escaped with a backslash. Note, only paid search dimensions ('dfa:paidSearch*') allow a matchType other than EXACT. "value": "A String", # The value of the dimension. }, + "allowOnYoutube": True or False, # Optional. Whether the placement is enabled for YouTube integration. "campaignId": "A String", # Campaign ID of this placement. This field is a required field on insertion. "campaignIdDimensionValue": { # Represents a DimensionValue resource. # Dimension value for the ID of the campaign. This is a read-only, auto-generated field. "dimensionName": "A String", # The name of the dimension. @@ -1742,6 +1857,24 @@

Method Details

}, "vpaidAdapterChoice": "A String", # VPAID adapter setting for this placement. Controls which VPAID format the measurement adapter will use for in-stream video creatives assigned to this placement. *Note:* Flash is no longer supported. This field now defaults to HTML5 when the following values are provided: FLASH, BOTH. "wrappingOptOut": True or False, # Whether this placement opts out of tag wrapping. + "youtubeSettings": { # Contains the YouTube settings. # Optional. YouTube settings for the placement. The placement must be enabled for YouTube to use this field. + "businessLogoCreativeIds": [ # Optional. The IDs of the creatives to use for the business logo. Currently only one creative is supported. + "A String", + ], + "businessName": "A String", # Optional. The business name. + "callToActions": [ # Optional. The call to actions. Currently only one call to action is supported. + "A String", + ], + "descriptions": [ # Optional. The descriptions. Currently only one description is supported. + "A String", + ], + "headlines": [ # Optional. The headlines associated with the call to actions. Currently only one headline is supported. + "A String", + ], + "longHeadlines": [ # Optional. The long headlines. Currently only one long headline is supported. + "A String", + ], + }, } x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. @@ -1775,6 +1908,7 @@

Method Details

"matchType": "A String", # Determines how the 'value' field is matched when filtering. If not specified, defaults to EXACT. If set to WILDCARD_EXPRESSION, '*' is allowed as a placeholder for variable length character sequences, and it can be escaped with a backslash. Note, only paid search dimensions ('dfa:paidSearch*') allow a matchType other than EXACT. "value": "A String", # The value of the dimension. }, + "allowOnYoutube": True or False, # Optional. Whether the placement is enabled for YouTube integration. "campaignId": "A String", # Campaign ID of this placement. This field is a required field on insertion. "campaignIdDimensionValue": { # Represents a DimensionValue resource. # Dimension value for the ID of the campaign. This is a read-only, auto-generated field. "dimensionName": "A String", # The name of the dimension. @@ -1955,6 +2089,24 @@

Method Details

}, "vpaidAdapterChoice": "A String", # VPAID adapter setting for this placement. Controls which VPAID format the measurement adapter will use for in-stream video creatives assigned to this placement. *Note:* Flash is no longer supported. This field now defaults to HTML5 when the following values are provided: FLASH, BOTH. "wrappingOptOut": True or False, # Whether this placement opts out of tag wrapping. + "youtubeSettings": { # Contains the YouTube settings. # Optional. YouTube settings for the placement. The placement must be enabled for YouTube to use this field. + "businessLogoCreativeIds": [ # Optional. The IDs of the creatives to use for the business logo. Currently only one creative is supported. + "A String", + ], + "businessName": "A String", # Optional. The business name. + "callToActions": [ # Optional. The call to actions. Currently only one call to action is supported. + "A String", + ], + "descriptions": [ # Optional. The descriptions. Currently only one description is supported. + "A String", + ], + "headlines": [ # Optional. The headlines associated with the call to actions. Currently only one headline is supported. + "A String", + ], + "longHeadlines": [ # Optional. The long headlines. Currently only one long headline is supported. + "A String", + ], + }, } diff --git a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v2.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v2.projects.locations.html index 4b2df8ae12e..51005c158c0 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v2.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v2.projects.locations.html @@ -272,7 +272,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. A list of extra location types that should be used as conditions for controlling the visibility of the locations. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.html index a9bed8eca5f..0ce5e9d198c 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.html @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. A list of extra location types that should be used as conditions for controlling the visibility of the locations. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.collections.engines.assistants.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.collections.engines.assistants.html index fd073b0c6f8..f2056c0a6a9 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.collections.engines.assistants.html +++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.collections.engines.assistants.html @@ -115,6 +115,11 @@

Method Details

"phrase": "A String", # Required. The raw string content to be banned. }, ], + "modelArmorConfig": { # Configuration for customer defined Model Armor templates to be used for sanitizing user prompts and assistant responses. # Optional. Model Armor configuration to be used for sanitizing user prompts and assistant responses. + "failureMode": "A String", # Optional. Defines the failure mode for Model Armor sanitization. + "responseTemplate": "A String", # Optional. The resource name of the Model Armor template for sanitizing assistant responses. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/templates/{template_id}` If not specified, no sanitization will be applied to the assistant response. + "userPromptTemplate": "A String", # Optional. The resource name of the Model Armor template for sanitizing user prompts. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/templates/{template_id}` If not specified, no sanitization will be applied to the user prompt. + }, }, "enabledTools": { # Optional. Note: not implemented yet. Use enabled_actions instead. The enabled tools on this assistant. The keys are connector name, for example "projects/{projectId}/locations/{locationId}/collections/{collectionId}/dataconnector The values consist of admin enabled tools towards the connector instance. Admin can selectively enable multiple tools on any of the connector instances that they created in the project. For example {"jira1ConnectorName": [(toolId1, "createTicket"), (toolId2, "transferTicket")], "gmail1ConnectorName": [(toolId3, "sendEmail"),..] } "a_key": { # The enabled tools on a connector @@ -155,6 +160,11 @@

Method Details

"phrase": "A String", # Required. The raw string content to be banned. }, ], + "modelArmorConfig": { # Configuration for customer defined Model Armor templates to be used for sanitizing user prompts and assistant responses. # Optional. Model Armor configuration to be used for sanitizing user prompts and assistant responses. + "failureMode": "A String", # Optional. Defines the failure mode for Model Armor sanitization. + "responseTemplate": "A String", # Optional. The resource name of the Model Armor template for sanitizing assistant responses. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/templates/{template_id}` If not specified, no sanitization will be applied to the assistant response. + "userPromptTemplate": "A String", # Optional. The resource name of the Model Armor template for sanitizing user prompts. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/templates/{template_id}` If not specified, no sanitization will be applied to the user prompt. + }, }, "enabledTools": { # Optional. Note: not implemented yet. Use enabled_actions instead. The enabled tools on this assistant. The keys are connector name, for example "projects/{projectId}/locations/{locationId}/collections/{collectionId}/dataconnector The values consist of admin enabled tools towards the connector instance. Admin can selectively enable multiple tools on any of the connector instances that they created in the project. For example {"jira1ConnectorName": [(toolId1, "createTicket"), (toolId2, "transferTicket")], "gmail1ConnectorName": [(toolId3, "sendEmail"),..] } "a_key": { # The enabled tools on a connector @@ -194,6 +204,11 @@

Method Details

"phrase": "A String", # Required. The raw string content to be banned. }, ], + "modelArmorConfig": { # Configuration for customer defined Model Armor templates to be used for sanitizing user prompts and assistant responses. # Optional. Model Armor configuration to be used for sanitizing user prompts and assistant responses. + "failureMode": "A String", # Optional. Defines the failure mode for Model Armor sanitization. + "responseTemplate": "A String", # Optional. The resource name of the Model Armor template for sanitizing assistant responses. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/templates/{template_id}` If not specified, no sanitization will be applied to the assistant response. + "userPromptTemplate": "A String", # Optional. The resource name of the Model Armor template for sanitizing user prompts. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/templates/{template_id}` If not specified, no sanitization will be applied to the user prompt. + }, }, "enabledTools": { # Optional. Note: not implemented yet. Use enabled_actions instead. The enabled tools on this assistant. The keys are connector name, for example "projects/{projectId}/locations/{locationId}/collections/{collectionId}/dataconnector The values consist of admin enabled tools towards the connector instance. Admin can selectively enable multiple tools on any of the connector instances that they created in the project. For example {"jira1ConnectorName": [(toolId1, "createTicket"), (toolId2, "transferTicket")], "gmail1ConnectorName": [(toolId3, "sendEmail"),..] } "a_key": { # The enabled tools on a connector @@ -290,6 +305,30 @@

Method Details

"assistSkippedReasons": [ # Reasons for not answering the assist call. "A String", ], + "customerPolicyEnforcementResult": { # Customer policy enforcement results. Contains the results of the various policy checks, like the banned phrases or the Model Armor checks. # Optional. The field contains information about the various policy checks' results like the banned phrases or the Model Armor checks. This field is populated only if the assist call was skipped due to a policy violation. + "policyResults": [ # Customer policy enforcement results. Populated only if the assist call was skipped due to a policy violation. It contains results from those filters that blocked the processing of the query. + { # Customer policy enforcement result for a single policy type. + "bannedPhraseEnforcementResult": { # Customer policy enforcement result for the banned phrase policy. # The policy enforcement result for the banned phrase policy. + "bannedPhrases": [ # The banned phrases that were found in the query or the answer. + "A String", + ], + }, + "modelArmorEnforcementResult": { # Customer policy enforcement result for the Model Armor policy. # The policy enforcement result for the Model Armor policy. + "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error returned by Model Armor if the policy enforcement failed for some reason. + "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code. + "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use. + { + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL. + }, + ], + "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client. + }, + "modelArmorViolation": "A String", # The Model Armor violation that was found. + }, + }, + ], + "verdict": "A String", # Final verdict of the customer policy enforcement. If only one policy blocked the processing, the verdict is BLOCK. + }, "name": "A String", # Immutable. Identifier. Resource name of the `AssistAnswer`. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/collections/{collection}/engines/{engine}/sessions/{session}/assistAnswers/{assist_answer}` This field must be a UTF-8 encoded string with a length limit of 1024 characters. "replies": [ # Replies of the assistant. { # One part of the multi-part response of the assist call. diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.widgetConfigs.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.widgetConfigs.html index c9889b36aae..33ebb3ab7e6 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.widgetConfigs.html +++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.widgetConfigs.html @@ -118,6 +118,7 @@

Method Details

], "assistantSettings": { # Describes the assistant settings of the widget. # Optional. Output only. Describes the assistant settings of the widget. "defaultWebGroundingToggleOff": True or False, # Output only. This field controls the default web grounding toggle for end users if `web_grounding_type` is set to `WEB_GROUNDING_TYPE_GOOGLE_SEARCH` or `WEB_GROUNDING_TYPE_ENTERPRISE_WEB_SEARCH`. By default, this field is set to false. If `web_grounding_type` is `WEB_GROUNDING_TYPE_GOOGLE_SEARCH` or `WEB_GROUNDING_TYPE_ENTERPRISE_WEB_SEARCH`, end users will have web grounding enabled by default on UI. If true, grounding toggle will be disabled by default on UI. End users can still enable web grounding in the UI if web grounding is enabled. + "disableLocationContext": True or False, # Optional. Output only. Whether to disable user location context. "googleSearchGroundingEnabled": True or False, # Whether or not the Google search grounding toggle is shown. Deprecated. Use web_grounding_type instead. "webGroundingType": "A String", # Optional. The type of web grounding to use. }, @@ -129,6 +130,7 @@

Method Details

"dataStoreComponents": [ # For the data store collection, list of the children data stores. { # Read-only data store component that contains data stores fields that may be used for filtering, it's the child of `CollectionComponent`. "contentConfig": "A String", # Output only. The content config of the data store. + "dataStoreConfigType": "A String", # Output only. The type of the data store config. "displayName": "A String", # The display name of the data store. "entityName": "A String", # The name of the entity, retrieved from `Collection.data_connector.entities.entityName`. "id": "A String", # Output only. the identifier of the data store, used for widget service. For now it refers to data_store_id, in the future we will migrate the field to encrypted data store name UUID. diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.engines.assistants.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.engines.assistants.html index 9efb071723e..f8933a37609 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.engines.assistants.html +++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.engines.assistants.html @@ -115,6 +115,11 @@

Method Details

"phrase": "A String", # Required. The raw string content to be banned. }, ], + "modelArmorConfig": { # Configuration for customer defined Model Armor templates to be used for sanitizing user prompts and assistant responses. # Optional. Model Armor configuration to be used for sanitizing user prompts and assistant responses. + "failureMode": "A String", # Optional. Defines the failure mode for Model Armor sanitization. + "responseTemplate": "A String", # Optional. The resource name of the Model Armor template for sanitizing assistant responses. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/templates/{template_id}` If not specified, no sanitization will be applied to the assistant response. + "userPromptTemplate": "A String", # Optional. The resource name of the Model Armor template for sanitizing user prompts. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/templates/{template_id}` If not specified, no sanitization will be applied to the user prompt. + }, }, "enabledTools": { # Optional. Note: not implemented yet. Use enabled_actions instead. The enabled tools on this assistant. The keys are connector name, for example "projects/{projectId}/locations/{locationId}/collections/{collectionId}/dataconnector The values consist of admin enabled tools towards the connector instance. Admin can selectively enable multiple tools on any of the connector instances that they created in the project. For example {"jira1ConnectorName": [(toolId1, "createTicket"), (toolId2, "transferTicket")], "gmail1ConnectorName": [(toolId3, "sendEmail"),..] } "a_key": { # The enabled tools on a connector @@ -155,6 +160,11 @@

Method Details

"phrase": "A String", # Required. The raw string content to be banned. }, ], + "modelArmorConfig": { # Configuration for customer defined Model Armor templates to be used for sanitizing user prompts and assistant responses. # Optional. Model Armor configuration to be used for sanitizing user prompts and assistant responses. + "failureMode": "A String", # Optional. Defines the failure mode for Model Armor sanitization. + "responseTemplate": "A String", # Optional. The resource name of the Model Armor template for sanitizing assistant responses. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/templates/{template_id}` If not specified, no sanitization will be applied to the assistant response. + "userPromptTemplate": "A String", # Optional. The resource name of the Model Armor template for sanitizing user prompts. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/templates/{template_id}` If not specified, no sanitization will be applied to the user prompt. + }, }, "enabledTools": { # Optional. Note: not implemented yet. Use enabled_actions instead. The enabled tools on this assistant. The keys are connector name, for example "projects/{projectId}/locations/{locationId}/collections/{collectionId}/dataconnector The values consist of admin enabled tools towards the connector instance. Admin can selectively enable multiple tools on any of the connector instances that they created in the project. For example {"jira1ConnectorName": [(toolId1, "createTicket"), (toolId2, "transferTicket")], "gmail1ConnectorName": [(toolId3, "sendEmail"),..] } "a_key": { # The enabled tools on a connector @@ -194,6 +204,11 @@

Method Details

"phrase": "A String", # Required. The raw string content to be banned. }, ], + "modelArmorConfig": { # Configuration for customer defined Model Armor templates to be used for sanitizing user prompts and assistant responses. # Optional. Model Armor configuration to be used for sanitizing user prompts and assistant responses. + "failureMode": "A String", # Optional. Defines the failure mode for Model Armor sanitization. + "responseTemplate": "A String", # Optional. The resource name of the Model Armor template for sanitizing assistant responses. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/templates/{template_id}` If not specified, no sanitization will be applied to the assistant response. + "userPromptTemplate": "A String", # Optional. The resource name of the Model Armor template for sanitizing user prompts. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/templates/{template_id}` If not specified, no sanitization will be applied to the user prompt. + }, }, "enabledTools": { # Optional. Note: not implemented yet. Use enabled_actions instead. The enabled tools on this assistant. The keys are connector name, for example "projects/{projectId}/locations/{locationId}/collections/{collectionId}/dataconnector The values consist of admin enabled tools towards the connector instance. Admin can selectively enable multiple tools on any of the connector instances that they created in the project. For example {"jira1ConnectorName": [(toolId1, "createTicket"), (toolId2, "transferTicket")], "gmail1ConnectorName": [(toolId3, "sendEmail"),..] } "a_key": { # The enabled tools on a connector @@ -290,6 +305,30 @@

Method Details

"assistSkippedReasons": [ # Reasons for not answering the assist call. "A String", ], + "customerPolicyEnforcementResult": { # Customer policy enforcement results. Contains the results of the various policy checks, like the banned phrases or the Model Armor checks. # Optional. The field contains information about the various policy checks' results like the banned phrases or the Model Armor checks. This field is populated only if the assist call was skipped due to a policy violation. + "policyResults": [ # Customer policy enforcement results. Populated only if the assist call was skipped due to a policy violation. It contains results from those filters that blocked the processing of the query. + { # Customer policy enforcement result for a single policy type. + "bannedPhraseEnforcementResult": { # Customer policy enforcement result for the banned phrase policy. # The policy enforcement result for the banned phrase policy. + "bannedPhrases": [ # The banned phrases that were found in the query or the answer. + "A String", + ], + }, + "modelArmorEnforcementResult": { # Customer policy enforcement result for the Model Armor policy. # The policy enforcement result for the Model Armor policy. + "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error returned by Model Armor if the policy enforcement failed for some reason. + "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code. + "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use. + { + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL. + }, + ], + "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client. + }, + "modelArmorViolation": "A String", # The Model Armor violation that was found. + }, + }, + ], + "verdict": "A String", # Final verdict of the customer policy enforcement. If only one policy blocked the processing, the verdict is BLOCK. + }, "name": "A String", # Immutable. Identifier. Resource name of the `AssistAnswer`. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/collections/{collection}/engines/{engine}/sessions/{session}/assistAnswers/{assist_answer}` This field must be a UTF-8 encoded string with a length limit of 1024 characters. "replies": [ # Replies of the assistant. { # One part of the multi-part response of the assist call. diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.engines.widgetConfigs.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.engines.widgetConfigs.html index 66ce6149fa9..2d4effb6b2d 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.engines.widgetConfigs.html +++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.engines.widgetConfigs.html @@ -118,6 +118,7 @@

Method Details

], "assistantSettings": { # Describes the assistant settings of the widget. # Optional. Output only. Describes the assistant settings of the widget. "defaultWebGroundingToggleOff": True or False, # Output only. This field controls the default web grounding toggle for end users if `web_grounding_type` is set to `WEB_GROUNDING_TYPE_GOOGLE_SEARCH` or `WEB_GROUNDING_TYPE_ENTERPRISE_WEB_SEARCH`. By default, this field is set to false. If `web_grounding_type` is `WEB_GROUNDING_TYPE_GOOGLE_SEARCH` or `WEB_GROUNDING_TYPE_ENTERPRISE_WEB_SEARCH`, end users will have web grounding enabled by default on UI. If true, grounding toggle will be disabled by default on UI. End users can still enable web grounding in the UI if web grounding is enabled. + "disableLocationContext": True or False, # Optional. Output only. Whether to disable user location context. "googleSearchGroundingEnabled": True or False, # Whether or not the Google search grounding toggle is shown. Deprecated. Use web_grounding_type instead. "webGroundingType": "A String", # Optional. The type of web grounding to use. }, @@ -129,6 +130,7 @@

Method Details

"dataStoreComponents": [ # For the data store collection, list of the children data stores. { # Read-only data store component that contains data stores fields that may be used for filtering, it's the child of `CollectionComponent`. "contentConfig": "A String", # Output only. The content config of the data store. + "dataStoreConfigType": "A String", # Output only. The type of the data store config. "displayName": "A String", # The display name of the data store. "entityName": "A String", # The name of the entity, retrieved from `Collection.data_connector.entities.entityName`. "id": "A String", # Output only. the identifier of the data store, used for widget service. For now it refers to data_store_id, in the future we will migrate the field to encrypted data store name UUID. diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.html index 1eea4803077..2e0ab101208 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.html +++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.html @@ -294,6 +294,14 @@

Method Details

"message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client. }, ], + "federatedConfig": { # Any params and credentials used specifically for hybrid connectors supporting FEDERATED mode. # Optional. Any params and credentials used specifically for hybrid connectors supporting FEDERATED mode. This field should only be set if the connector is a hybrid connector and we want to enable FEDERATED mode. + "additionalParams": { # Optional. Any additional parameters needed for FEDERATED. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "authParams": { # Optional. Any authentication parameters specific to FEDERATED. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, "hybridIngestionDisabled": True or False, # Optional. If the connector is a hybrid connector, determines whether ingestion is enabled and appropriate resources are provisioned during connector creation. If the connector is not a hybrid connector, this field is ignored. "identityRefreshInterval": "A String", # The refresh interval to sync the Access Control List information for the documents ingested by this connector. If not set, the access control list will be refreshed at the default interval of 30 minutes. The identity refresh interval can be at least 30 minutes and at most 7 days. "identityScheduleConfig": { # The configuration for the identity data synchronization runs. # The configuration for the identity data synchronization runs. This contains the refresh interval to sync the Access Control List information for the documents ingested by this connector. @@ -355,6 +363,9 @@

Method Details

"webhookUri": "A String", # Optional. Webhook url for the connector to specify additional params for realtime sync. }, "refreshInterval": "A String", # Required. The refresh interval for data sync. If duration is set to 0, the data will be synced in real time. The streaming feature is not supported yet. The minimum is 30 minutes and maximum is 7 days. When the refresh interval is set to the same value as the incremental refresh interval, incremental sync will be disabled. + "removeParamKeys": [ # Optional. Specifies keys to be removed from the 'params' field. This is only active when 'params' is included in the 'update_mask' in an UpdateDataConnectorRequest. Deletion takes precedence if a key is both in 'remove_param_keys' and present in the 'params' field of the request. + "A String", + ], "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the connector. "staticIpAddresses": [ # Output only. The static IP addresses used by this connector. "A String", @@ -501,6 +512,14 @@

Method Details

"message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client. }, ], + "federatedConfig": { # Any params and credentials used specifically for hybrid connectors supporting FEDERATED mode. # Optional. Any params and credentials used specifically for hybrid connectors supporting FEDERATED mode. This field should only be set if the connector is a hybrid connector and we want to enable FEDERATED mode. + "additionalParams": { # Optional. Any additional parameters needed for FEDERATED. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "authParams": { # Optional. Any authentication parameters specific to FEDERATED. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, "hybridIngestionDisabled": True or False, # Optional. If the connector is a hybrid connector, determines whether ingestion is enabled and appropriate resources are provisioned during connector creation. If the connector is not a hybrid connector, this field is ignored. "identityRefreshInterval": "A String", # The refresh interval to sync the Access Control List information for the documents ingested by this connector. If not set, the access control list will be refreshed at the default interval of 30 minutes. The identity refresh interval can be at least 30 minutes and at most 7 days. "identityScheduleConfig": { # The configuration for the identity data synchronization runs. # The configuration for the identity data synchronization runs. This contains the refresh interval to sync the Access Control List information for the documents ingested by this connector. @@ -562,6 +581,9 @@

Method Details

"webhookUri": "A String", # Optional. Webhook url for the connector to specify additional params for realtime sync. }, "refreshInterval": "A String", # Required. The refresh interval for data sync. If duration is set to 0, the data will be synced in real time. The streaming feature is not supported yet. The minimum is 30 minutes and maximum is 7 days. When the refresh interval is set to the same value as the incremental refresh interval, incremental sync will be disabled. + "removeParamKeys": [ # Optional. Specifies keys to be removed from the 'params' field. This is only active when 'params' is included in the 'update_mask' in an UpdateDataConnectorRequest. Deletion takes precedence if a key is both in 'remove_param_keys' and present in the 'params' field of the request. + "A String", + ], "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the connector. "staticIpAddresses": [ # Output only. The static IP addresses used by this connector. "A String", @@ -712,6 +734,14 @@

Method Details

"message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client. }, ], + "federatedConfig": { # Any params and credentials used specifically for hybrid connectors supporting FEDERATED mode. # Optional. Any params and credentials used specifically for hybrid connectors supporting FEDERATED mode. This field should only be set if the connector is a hybrid connector and we want to enable FEDERATED mode. + "additionalParams": { # Optional. Any additional parameters needed for FEDERATED. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "authParams": { # Optional. Any authentication parameters specific to FEDERATED. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, "hybridIngestionDisabled": True or False, # Optional. If the connector is a hybrid connector, determines whether ingestion is enabled and appropriate resources are provisioned during connector creation. If the connector is not a hybrid connector, this field is ignored. "identityRefreshInterval": "A String", # The refresh interval to sync the Access Control List information for the documents ingested by this connector. If not set, the access control list will be refreshed at the default interval of 30 minutes. The identity refresh interval can be at least 30 minutes and at most 7 days. "identityScheduleConfig": { # The configuration for the identity data synchronization runs. # The configuration for the identity data synchronization runs. This contains the refresh interval to sync the Access Control List information for the documents ingested by this connector. @@ -773,6 +803,9 @@

Method Details

"webhookUri": "A String", # Optional. Webhook url for the connector to specify additional params for realtime sync. }, "refreshInterval": "A String", # Required. The refresh interval for data sync. If duration is set to 0, the data will be synced in real time. The streaming feature is not supported yet. The minimum is 30 minutes and maximum is 7 days. When the refresh interval is set to the same value as the incremental refresh interval, incremental sync will be disabled. + "removeParamKeys": [ # Optional. Specifies keys to be removed from the 'params' field. This is only active when 'params' is included in the 'update_mask' in an UpdateDataConnectorRequest. Deletion takes precedence if a key is both in 'remove_param_keys' and present in the 'params' field of the request. + "A String", + ], "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the connector. "staticIpAddresses": [ # Output only. The static IP addresses used by this connector. "A String", @@ -933,6 +966,14 @@

Method Details

"message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client. }, ], + "federatedConfig": { # Any params and credentials used specifically for hybrid connectors supporting FEDERATED mode. # Optional. Any params and credentials used specifically for hybrid connectors supporting FEDERATED mode. This field should only be set if the connector is a hybrid connector and we want to enable FEDERATED mode. + "additionalParams": { # Optional. Any additional parameters needed for FEDERATED. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "authParams": { # Optional. Any authentication parameters specific to FEDERATED. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, "hybridIngestionDisabled": True or False, # Optional. If the connector is a hybrid connector, determines whether ingestion is enabled and appropriate resources are provisioned during connector creation. If the connector is not a hybrid connector, this field is ignored. "identityRefreshInterval": "A String", # The refresh interval to sync the Access Control List information for the documents ingested by this connector. If not set, the access control list will be refreshed at the default interval of 30 minutes. The identity refresh interval can be at least 30 minutes and at most 7 days. "identityScheduleConfig": { # The configuration for the identity data synchronization runs. # The configuration for the identity data synchronization runs. This contains the refresh interval to sync the Access Control List information for the documents ingested by this connector. @@ -994,6 +1035,9 @@

Method Details

"webhookUri": "A String", # Optional. Webhook url for the connector to specify additional params for realtime sync. }, "refreshInterval": "A String", # Required. The refresh interval for data sync. If duration is set to 0, the data will be synced in real time. The streaming feature is not supported yet. The minimum is 30 minutes and maximum is 7 days. When the refresh interval is set to the same value as the incremental refresh interval, incremental sync will be disabled. + "removeParamKeys": [ # Optional. Specifies keys to be removed from the 'params' field. This is only active when 'params' is included in the 'update_mask' in an UpdateDataConnectorRequest. Deletion takes precedence if a key is both in 'remove_param_keys' and present in the 'params' field of the request. + "A String", + ], "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the connector. "staticIpAddresses": [ # Output only. The static IP addresses used by this connector. "A String", @@ -1164,6 +1208,14 @@

Method Details

"message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client. }, ], + "federatedConfig": { # Any params and credentials used specifically for hybrid connectors supporting FEDERATED mode. # Optional. Any params and credentials used specifically for hybrid connectors supporting FEDERATED mode. This field should only be set if the connector is a hybrid connector and we want to enable FEDERATED mode. + "additionalParams": { # Optional. Any additional parameters needed for FEDERATED. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "authParams": { # Optional. Any authentication parameters specific to FEDERATED. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, "hybridIngestionDisabled": True or False, # Optional. If the connector is a hybrid connector, determines whether ingestion is enabled and appropriate resources are provisioned during connector creation. If the connector is not a hybrid connector, this field is ignored. "identityRefreshInterval": "A String", # The refresh interval to sync the Access Control List information for the documents ingested by this connector. If not set, the access control list will be refreshed at the default interval of 30 minutes. The identity refresh interval can be at least 30 minutes and at most 7 days. "identityScheduleConfig": { # The configuration for the identity data synchronization runs. # The configuration for the identity data synchronization runs. This contains the refresh interval to sync the Access Control List information for the documents ingested by this connector. @@ -1225,6 +1277,9 @@

Method Details

"webhookUri": "A String", # Optional. Webhook url for the connector to specify additional params for realtime sync. }, "refreshInterval": "A String", # Required. The refresh interval for data sync. If duration is set to 0, the data will be synced in real time. The streaming feature is not supported yet. The minimum is 30 minutes and maximum is 7 days. When the refresh interval is set to the same value as the incremental refresh interval, incremental sync will be disabled. + "removeParamKeys": [ # Optional. Specifies keys to be removed from the 'params' field. This is only active when 'params' is included in the 'update_mask' in an UpdateDataConnectorRequest. Deletion takes precedence if a key is both in 'remove_param_keys' and present in the 'params' field of the request. + "A String", + ], "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the connector. "staticIpAddresses": [ # Output only. The static IP addresses used by this connector. "A String", @@ -1362,6 +1417,14 @@

Method Details

"message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client. }, ], + "federatedConfig": { # Any params and credentials used specifically for hybrid connectors supporting FEDERATED mode. # Optional. Any params and credentials used specifically for hybrid connectors supporting FEDERATED mode. This field should only be set if the connector is a hybrid connector and we want to enable FEDERATED mode. + "additionalParams": { # Optional. Any additional parameters needed for FEDERATED. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "authParams": { # Optional. Any authentication parameters specific to FEDERATED. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, "hybridIngestionDisabled": True or False, # Optional. If the connector is a hybrid connector, determines whether ingestion is enabled and appropriate resources are provisioned during connector creation. If the connector is not a hybrid connector, this field is ignored. "identityRefreshInterval": "A String", # The refresh interval to sync the Access Control List information for the documents ingested by this connector. If not set, the access control list will be refreshed at the default interval of 30 minutes. The identity refresh interval can be at least 30 minutes and at most 7 days. "identityScheduleConfig": { # The configuration for the identity data synchronization runs. # The configuration for the identity data synchronization runs. This contains the refresh interval to sync the Access Control List information for the documents ingested by this connector. @@ -1423,6 +1486,9 @@

Method Details

"webhookUri": "A String", # Optional. Webhook url for the connector to specify additional params for realtime sync. }, "refreshInterval": "A String", # Required. The refresh interval for data sync. If duration is set to 0, the data will be synced in real time. The streaming feature is not supported yet. The minimum is 30 minutes and maximum is 7 days. When the refresh interval is set to the same value as the incremental refresh interval, incremental sync will be disabled. + "removeParamKeys": [ # Optional. Specifies keys to be removed from the 'params' field. This is only active when 'params' is included in the 'update_mask' in an UpdateDataConnectorRequest. Deletion takes precedence if a key is both in 'remove_param_keys' and present in the 'params' field of the request. + "A String", + ], "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the connector. "staticIpAddresses": [ # Output only. The static IP addresses used by this connector. "A String", diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.dataStores.widgetConfigs.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.dataStores.widgetConfigs.html index 2b657818e40..4617fc25c53 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.dataStores.widgetConfigs.html +++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.dataStores.widgetConfigs.html @@ -118,6 +118,7 @@

Method Details

], "assistantSettings": { # Describes the assistant settings of the widget. # Optional. Output only. Describes the assistant settings of the widget. "defaultWebGroundingToggleOff": True or False, # Output only. This field controls the default web grounding toggle for end users if `web_grounding_type` is set to `WEB_GROUNDING_TYPE_GOOGLE_SEARCH` or `WEB_GROUNDING_TYPE_ENTERPRISE_WEB_SEARCH`. By default, this field is set to false. If `web_grounding_type` is `WEB_GROUNDING_TYPE_GOOGLE_SEARCH` or `WEB_GROUNDING_TYPE_ENTERPRISE_WEB_SEARCH`, end users will have web grounding enabled by default on UI. If true, grounding toggle will be disabled by default on UI. End users can still enable web grounding in the UI if web grounding is enabled. + "disableLocationContext": True or False, # Optional. Output only. Whether to disable user location context. "googleSearchGroundingEnabled": True or False, # Whether or not the Google search grounding toggle is shown. Deprecated. Use web_grounding_type instead. "webGroundingType": "A String", # Optional. The type of web grounding to use. }, @@ -129,6 +130,7 @@

Method Details

"dataStoreComponents": [ # For the data store collection, list of the children data stores. { # Read-only data store component that contains data stores fields that may be used for filtering, it's the child of `CollectionComponent`. "contentConfig": "A String", # Output only. The content config of the data store. + "dataStoreConfigType": "A String", # Output only. The type of the data store config. "displayName": "A String", # The display name of the data store. "entityName": "A String", # The name of the entity, retrieved from `Collection.data_connector.entities.entityName`. "id": "A String", # Output only. the identifier of the data store, used for widget service. For now it refers to data_store_id, in the future we will migrate the field to encrypted data store name UUID. diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.html index 40d406a9e8d..c032825d8c0 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.html @@ -1054,6 +1054,14 @@

Method Details

"message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client. }, ], + "federatedConfig": { # Any params and credentials used specifically for hybrid connectors supporting FEDERATED mode. # Optional. Any params and credentials used specifically for hybrid connectors supporting FEDERATED mode. This field should only be set if the connector is a hybrid connector and we want to enable FEDERATED mode. + "additionalParams": { # Optional. Any additional parameters needed for FEDERATED. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "authParams": { # Optional. Any authentication parameters specific to FEDERATED. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, "hybridIngestionDisabled": True or False, # Optional. If the connector is a hybrid connector, determines whether ingestion is enabled and appropriate resources are provisioned during connector creation. If the connector is not a hybrid connector, this field is ignored. "identityRefreshInterval": "A String", # The refresh interval to sync the Access Control List information for the documents ingested by this connector. If not set, the access control list will be refreshed at the default interval of 30 minutes. The identity refresh interval can be at least 30 minutes and at most 7 days. "identityScheduleConfig": { # The configuration for the identity data synchronization runs. # The configuration for the identity data synchronization runs. This contains the refresh interval to sync the Access Control List information for the documents ingested by this connector. @@ -1115,6 +1123,9 @@

Method Details

"webhookUri": "A String", # Optional. Webhook url for the connector to specify additional params for realtime sync. }, "refreshInterval": "A String", # Required. The refresh interval for data sync. If duration is set to 0, the data will be synced in real time. The streaming feature is not supported yet. The minimum is 30 minutes and maximum is 7 days. When the refresh interval is set to the same value as the incremental refresh interval, incremental sync will be disabled. + "removeParamKeys": [ # Optional. Specifies keys to be removed from the 'params' field. This is only active when 'params' is included in the 'update_mask' in an UpdateDataConnectorRequest. Deletion takes precedence if a key is both in 'remove_param_keys' and present in the 'params' field of the request. + "A String", + ], "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the connector. "staticIpAddresses": [ # Output only. The static IP addresses used by this connector. "A String", diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.notebooks.audioOverviews.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.notebooks.audioOverviews.html index 525961e4547..b473a699d39 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.notebooks.audioOverviews.html +++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.notebooks.audioOverviews.html @@ -79,10 +79,10 @@

Instance Methods

Close httplib2 connections.

create(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Generates a new audio overview. Needs a side channel with the user's EUC.

+

Generates a new audio overview.

delete(name, x__xgafv=None)

-

Deletes an audio overview. Needs a side channel with the user's EUC.

+

Deletes an audio overview.

Method Details

close() @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@

Method Details

create(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None) -
Generates a new audio overview. Needs a side channel with the user's EUC.
+  
Generates a new audio overview.
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The parent resource where this notebook will be created. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/notebooks/{notebook} (required)
@@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ 

Method Details

"audioOverview": { # An audio overview of a notebook. This is a summary of the notebook in audio format. # The generated audio overview. "audio": "A String", # The audio overview in wav format. This is only present if the status is AUDIO_OVERVIEW_STATUS_COMPLETE. "audioOverviewId": "A String", # Output only. Unique ID of the audio overview. - "languageCode": "A String", # The language code of the generated audio overview. Use the BCP 47 language code (e.g. "en", "es", "hi", etc.). Examples: google3/i18n/identifiers/tools/language_code_constants.txt + "languageCode": "A String", # The language code of the generated audio overview. Use the BCP 47 language code (e.g. "en", "es", "hi", etc.). "mimeType": "A String", # The mime type of the audio overview. "name": "A String", # Identifier. The full resource name of the notebook. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/notebooks/{notebook}/audioOverviews/{audio_overview_id}`. This field must be a UTF-8 encoded string with a length limit of 1024 characters. "playbackUrl": "A String", # The url used to play the audio overview. @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@

Method Details

delete(name, x__xgafv=None) -
Deletes an audio overview. Needs a side channel with the user's EUC.
+  
Deletes an audio overview.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The full resource name of the AudioOverview, such as `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/notebooks/{notebook}/audioOverviews/{audio_overview_id}`. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.notebooks.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.notebooks.html
index e62d449c64e..f4bb9b03224 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.notebooks.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.notebooks.html
@@ -86,29 +86,29 @@ 

Instance Methods

batchDelete(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Batch deletes Notebooks. Needs a side channel with the user's EUC.

+

Batch deletes Notebooks.

close()

Close httplib2 connections.

create(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Creates a notebook. Needs a side channel with the user's EUC.

+

Creates a notebook.

get(name, x__xgafv=None)

-

Gets a notebook. Needs a side channel with the user's EUC.

+

Gets a notebook.

listRecentlyViewed(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Lists the recently viewed notebooks. Needs a side channel with the user's EUC.

+

Lists the notebooks ordered by last view time.

listRecentlyViewed_next()

Retrieves the next page of results.

share(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Shares a notebook to other accounts. Needs a side channel with the user's EUC.

+

Shares a notebook to other accounts.

Method Details

batchDelete(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None) -
Batch deletes Notebooks. Needs a side channel with the user's EUC.
+  
Batch deletes Notebooks.
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The parent branch resource name, such as `projects/{project}/locations/{location}`. (required)
@@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ 

Method Details

create(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None) -
Creates a notebook. Needs a side channel with the user's EUC.
+  
Creates a notebook.
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The parent resource name, such as `projects/{project}/locations/{location}`. (required)
@@ -152,14 +152,80 @@ 

Method Details

"kmsKey": "A String", # Required. KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`. }, "emoji": "A String", # Output only. The emoji of the notebook. - "metadata": { # Metadata for a notebook. # The metadata of the notebook. + "metadata": { # Metadata for a notebook. # Output only. The metadata of the notebook. "createTime": "A String", # The time at which this project was created. "isShareable": True or False, # True if the project is shareable. "isShared": True or False, # True if this project is currently shared with other people, false otherwise. "lastViewed": "A String", # A timestamp indicating the time that the current in session user has last viewed the project. }, "name": "A String", # Identifier. The identifier of the notebook. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/notebooks/{notebook_id}`. This field must be a UTF-8 encoded string. - "notebookId": "A String", # Optional. Notebook id, which is the last segment of the notebook's resource name. This is to make it similar with notebooklm API. + "notebookId": "A String", # Output only. Notebook id, which is the last segment of the notebook's resource name. + "sources": [ # Output only. List of sources in the notebook. This is an output only field. + { # Source represents a single source of content. + "metadata": { # Represents the metadata of a source and some additional information. # Output only. Metadata about the source. + "agentspaceMetadata": { # Metadata about an agentspace source. # Metadata for an agentspace source. + "documentName": "A String", # Output only. The full document name in Agentspace. + "documentTitle": "A String", # Output only. The title of the document. + }, + "googleDocsMetadata": { # Metadata about a google doc source. # Metadata for a google doc source. + "documentId": "A String", # Output only. The document id of the google doc. + "revisionId": "A String", # Output only. Revision id for the doc. + }, + "sourceAddedTimestamp": "A String", # The timestamp the source was added. + "tokenCount": 42, # The number of tokens in the source. + "wordCount": 42, # The word count of the source. + "youtubeMetadata": { # Metadata about a youtube video source. # Metadata for a youtube video source. + "channelName": "A String", # Output only. The channel name of the youtube video. + "videoId": "A String", # Output only. The id of the youtube video. + }, + }, + "name": "A String", # Identifier. The full resource name of the source. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/notebooks/{notebook}/sources/{source_id}`. This field must be a UTF-8 encoded string with a length limit of 1024 characters. + "settings": { # Allows extension of Source Settings in the BatchCreateSources (Formerly AddSource request). # Output only. Status of the source, and any failure reasons. + "failureReason": { # Failure reason containing details about why a source failed to ingest. # Failure reason containing details about why a source failed to ingest. + "audioTranscriptionError": { # An audio file transcription specific error. # An audio file transcription specific error. + "languageDetectionFailed": { # Could not detect language of the file (it may not be speech). # Could not detect language of the file (it may not be speech). + }, + "noAudioDetected": { # No audio was detected in the input file. # No audio was detected in the input file (it may have been a video). + }, + }, + "domainBlocked": { # Error to indicate that the source was removed because the domain was blocked. # Error if the user tries to add a source from a blocked domain. + }, + "googleDriveError": { # A google drive specific error. # A google drive specific error. + "downloadPrevented": { # The user was prevented from downloading the file. # The user was prevented from downloading the file. + }, + }, + "ingestionError": { # Indicates an error occurred while ingesting the source. # Indicates an error occurred while ingesting the source. + }, + "paywallError": { # Indicates that the source is paywalled and cannot be ingested. # Indicates that the source is paywalled and cannot be ingested. + }, + "sourceEmpty": { # Indicates that the source is empty. # Indicates that the source is empty. + }, + "sourceLimitExceeded": { # Indicates that the user does not have space for this source. # Error if the user tries to update beyond their limits. + }, + "sourceTooLong": { # Indicates source word count exceeded the user's limit. # Indicates source word count exceeded the user's limit. + "wordCount": 42, # The number of words in the source. + "wordLimit": 42, # The word count limit for the current user at the time of the upload. + }, + "sourceUnreachable": { # Indicates that the source is unreachable. This is primarily used for sources that are added via URL. # Indicates that the source is unreachable. + "errorDetails": "A String", # Describes why the source is unreachable. + }, + "unknown": { # Indicates an unknown error occurred. # Indicates an unknown error occurred. + }, + "uploadError": { # Indicates an error occurred while uploading the source. # Indicates an error occurred while uploading the source. + }, + "youtubeError": { # A youtube specific error. # A youtube specific error. + "videoDeleted": { # Error to indicate that the source was removed because the video was deleted. # Error to indicate that the source was removed because the video was deleted. + }, + }, + }, + "status": "A String", # Status of the source. + }, + "sourceId": { # SourceId is the last segment of the source's resource name. # Optional. Output only. Source id, which is the last segment of the source's resource name. + "id": "A String", # The id of the source. + }, + "title": "A String", # Optional. Title of the source. + }, + ], "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the notebook. } @@ -176,21 +242,87 @@

Method Details

"kmsKey": "A String", # Required. KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`. }, "emoji": "A String", # Output only. The emoji of the notebook. - "metadata": { # Metadata for a notebook. # The metadata of the notebook. + "metadata": { # Metadata for a notebook. # Output only. The metadata of the notebook. "createTime": "A String", # The time at which this project was created. "isShareable": True or False, # True if the project is shareable. "isShared": True or False, # True if this project is currently shared with other people, false otherwise. "lastViewed": "A String", # A timestamp indicating the time that the current in session user has last viewed the project. }, "name": "A String", # Identifier. The identifier of the notebook. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/notebooks/{notebook_id}`. This field must be a UTF-8 encoded string. - "notebookId": "A String", # Optional. Notebook id, which is the last segment of the notebook's resource name. This is to make it similar with notebooklm API. + "notebookId": "A String", # Output only. Notebook id, which is the last segment of the notebook's resource name. + "sources": [ # Output only. List of sources in the notebook. This is an output only field. + { # Source represents a single source of content. + "metadata": { # Represents the metadata of a source and some additional information. # Output only. Metadata about the source. + "agentspaceMetadata": { # Metadata about an agentspace source. # Metadata for an agentspace source. + "documentName": "A String", # Output only. The full document name in Agentspace. + "documentTitle": "A String", # Output only. The title of the document. + }, + "googleDocsMetadata": { # Metadata about a google doc source. # Metadata for a google doc source. + "documentId": "A String", # Output only. The document id of the google doc. + "revisionId": "A String", # Output only. Revision id for the doc. + }, + "sourceAddedTimestamp": "A String", # The timestamp the source was added. + "tokenCount": 42, # The number of tokens in the source. + "wordCount": 42, # The word count of the source. + "youtubeMetadata": { # Metadata about a youtube video source. # Metadata for a youtube video source. + "channelName": "A String", # Output only. The channel name of the youtube video. + "videoId": "A String", # Output only. The id of the youtube video. + }, + }, + "name": "A String", # Identifier. The full resource name of the source. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/notebooks/{notebook}/sources/{source_id}`. This field must be a UTF-8 encoded string with a length limit of 1024 characters. + "settings": { # Allows extension of Source Settings in the BatchCreateSources (Formerly AddSource request). # Output only. Status of the source, and any failure reasons. + "failureReason": { # Failure reason containing details about why a source failed to ingest. # Failure reason containing details about why a source failed to ingest. + "audioTranscriptionError": { # An audio file transcription specific error. # An audio file transcription specific error. + "languageDetectionFailed": { # Could not detect language of the file (it may not be speech). # Could not detect language of the file (it may not be speech). + }, + "noAudioDetected": { # No audio was detected in the input file. # No audio was detected in the input file (it may have been a video). + }, + }, + "domainBlocked": { # Error to indicate that the source was removed because the domain was blocked. # Error if the user tries to add a source from a blocked domain. + }, + "googleDriveError": { # A google drive specific error. # A google drive specific error. + "downloadPrevented": { # The user was prevented from downloading the file. # The user was prevented from downloading the file. + }, + }, + "ingestionError": { # Indicates an error occurred while ingesting the source. # Indicates an error occurred while ingesting the source. + }, + "paywallError": { # Indicates that the source is paywalled and cannot be ingested. # Indicates that the source is paywalled and cannot be ingested. + }, + "sourceEmpty": { # Indicates that the source is empty. # Indicates that the source is empty. + }, + "sourceLimitExceeded": { # Indicates that the user does not have space for this source. # Error if the user tries to update beyond their limits. + }, + "sourceTooLong": { # Indicates source word count exceeded the user's limit. # Indicates source word count exceeded the user's limit. + "wordCount": 42, # The number of words in the source. + "wordLimit": 42, # The word count limit for the current user at the time of the upload. + }, + "sourceUnreachable": { # Indicates that the source is unreachable. This is primarily used for sources that are added via URL. # Indicates that the source is unreachable. + "errorDetails": "A String", # Describes why the source is unreachable. + }, + "unknown": { # Indicates an unknown error occurred. # Indicates an unknown error occurred. + }, + "uploadError": { # Indicates an error occurred while uploading the source. # Indicates an error occurred while uploading the source. + }, + "youtubeError": { # A youtube specific error. # A youtube specific error. + "videoDeleted": { # Error to indicate that the source was removed because the video was deleted. # Error to indicate that the source was removed because the video was deleted. + }, + }, + }, + "status": "A String", # Status of the source. + }, + "sourceId": { # SourceId is the last segment of the source's resource name. # Optional. Output only. Source id, which is the last segment of the source's resource name. + "id": "A String", # The id of the source. + }, + "title": "A String", # Optional. Title of the source. + }, + ], "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the notebook. }
get(name, x__xgafv=None) -
Gets a notebook. Needs a side channel with the user's EUC.
+  
Gets a notebook.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. Full resource name of Notebook, such as `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/notebooks/{notebook_id}`. (required)
@@ -207,25 +339,91 @@ 

Method Details

"kmsKey": "A String", # Required. KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`. }, "emoji": "A String", # Output only. The emoji of the notebook. - "metadata": { # Metadata for a notebook. # The metadata of the notebook. + "metadata": { # Metadata for a notebook. # Output only. The metadata of the notebook. "createTime": "A String", # The time at which this project was created. "isShareable": True or False, # True if the project is shareable. "isShared": True or False, # True if this project is currently shared with other people, false otherwise. "lastViewed": "A String", # A timestamp indicating the time that the current in session user has last viewed the project. }, "name": "A String", # Identifier. The identifier of the notebook. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/notebooks/{notebook_id}`. This field must be a UTF-8 encoded string. - "notebookId": "A String", # Optional. Notebook id, which is the last segment of the notebook's resource name. This is to make it similar with notebooklm API. + "notebookId": "A String", # Output only. Notebook id, which is the last segment of the notebook's resource name. + "sources": [ # Output only. List of sources in the notebook. This is an output only field. + { # Source represents a single source of content. + "metadata": { # Represents the metadata of a source and some additional information. # Output only. Metadata about the source. + "agentspaceMetadata": { # Metadata about an agentspace source. # Metadata for an agentspace source. + "documentName": "A String", # Output only. The full document name in Agentspace. + "documentTitle": "A String", # Output only. The title of the document. + }, + "googleDocsMetadata": { # Metadata about a google doc source. # Metadata for a google doc source. + "documentId": "A String", # Output only. The document id of the google doc. + "revisionId": "A String", # Output only. Revision id for the doc. + }, + "sourceAddedTimestamp": "A String", # The timestamp the source was added. + "tokenCount": 42, # The number of tokens in the source. + "wordCount": 42, # The word count of the source. + "youtubeMetadata": { # Metadata about a youtube video source. # Metadata for a youtube video source. + "channelName": "A String", # Output only. The channel name of the youtube video. + "videoId": "A String", # Output only. The id of the youtube video. + }, + }, + "name": "A String", # Identifier. The full resource name of the source. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/notebooks/{notebook}/sources/{source_id}`. This field must be a UTF-8 encoded string with a length limit of 1024 characters. + "settings": { # Allows extension of Source Settings in the BatchCreateSources (Formerly AddSource request). # Output only. Status of the source, and any failure reasons. + "failureReason": { # Failure reason containing details about why a source failed to ingest. # Failure reason containing details about why a source failed to ingest. + "audioTranscriptionError": { # An audio file transcription specific error. # An audio file transcription specific error. + "languageDetectionFailed": { # Could not detect language of the file (it may not be speech). # Could not detect language of the file (it may not be speech). + }, + "noAudioDetected": { # No audio was detected in the input file. # No audio was detected in the input file (it may have been a video). + }, + }, + "domainBlocked": { # Error to indicate that the source was removed because the domain was blocked. # Error if the user tries to add a source from a blocked domain. + }, + "googleDriveError": { # A google drive specific error. # A google drive specific error. + "downloadPrevented": { # The user was prevented from downloading the file. # The user was prevented from downloading the file. + }, + }, + "ingestionError": { # Indicates an error occurred while ingesting the source. # Indicates an error occurred while ingesting the source. + }, + "paywallError": { # Indicates that the source is paywalled and cannot be ingested. # Indicates that the source is paywalled and cannot be ingested. + }, + "sourceEmpty": { # Indicates that the source is empty. # Indicates that the source is empty. + }, + "sourceLimitExceeded": { # Indicates that the user does not have space for this source. # Error if the user tries to update beyond their limits. + }, + "sourceTooLong": { # Indicates source word count exceeded the user's limit. # Indicates source word count exceeded the user's limit. + "wordCount": 42, # The number of words in the source. + "wordLimit": 42, # The word count limit for the current user at the time of the upload. + }, + "sourceUnreachable": { # Indicates that the source is unreachable. This is primarily used for sources that are added via URL. # Indicates that the source is unreachable. + "errorDetails": "A String", # Describes why the source is unreachable. + }, + "unknown": { # Indicates an unknown error occurred. # Indicates an unknown error occurred. + }, + "uploadError": { # Indicates an error occurred while uploading the source. # Indicates an error occurred while uploading the source. + }, + "youtubeError": { # A youtube specific error. # A youtube specific error. + "videoDeleted": { # Error to indicate that the source was removed because the video was deleted. # Error to indicate that the source was removed because the video was deleted. + }, + }, + }, + "status": "A String", # Status of the source. + }, + "sourceId": { # SourceId is the last segment of the source's resource name. # Optional. Output only. Source id, which is the last segment of the source's resource name. + "id": "A String", # The id of the source. + }, + "title": "A String", # Optional. Title of the source. + }, + ], "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the notebook. }
listRecentlyViewed(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None) -
Lists the recently viewed notebooks. Needs a side channel with the user's EUC.
+  
Lists the notebooks ordered by last view time.
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The parent branch resource name, such as `projects/{project}/locations/{location}`. (required)
-  pageSize: integer, Optional. Maximum number of Notebooks to return. If unspecified, defaults to "200". The maximum allowed value is "500". If this field is negative, will use the default value.
+  pageSize: integer, Optional. Maximum number of Notebooks to return. If unspecified, defaults to "500". The maximum allowed value is "500". If this field is negative, will use the default value.
   pageToken: string, Optional. The page token, provide this to retrieve the subsequent page.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
@@ -243,14 +441,80 @@ 

Method Details

"kmsKey": "A String", # Required. KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`. }, "emoji": "A String", # Output only. The emoji of the notebook. - "metadata": { # Metadata for a notebook. # The metadata of the notebook. + "metadata": { # Metadata for a notebook. # Output only. The metadata of the notebook. "createTime": "A String", # The time at which this project was created. "isShareable": True or False, # True if the project is shareable. "isShared": True or False, # True if this project is currently shared with other people, false otherwise. "lastViewed": "A String", # A timestamp indicating the time that the current in session user has last viewed the project. }, "name": "A String", # Identifier. The identifier of the notebook. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/notebooks/{notebook_id}`. This field must be a UTF-8 encoded string. - "notebookId": "A String", # Optional. Notebook id, which is the last segment of the notebook's resource name. This is to make it similar with notebooklm API. + "notebookId": "A String", # Output only. Notebook id, which is the last segment of the notebook's resource name. + "sources": [ # Output only. List of sources in the notebook. This is an output only field. + { # Source represents a single source of content. + "metadata": { # Represents the metadata of a source and some additional information. # Output only. Metadata about the source. + "agentspaceMetadata": { # Metadata about an agentspace source. # Metadata for an agentspace source. + "documentName": "A String", # Output only. The full document name in Agentspace. + "documentTitle": "A String", # Output only. The title of the document. + }, + "googleDocsMetadata": { # Metadata about a google doc source. # Metadata for a google doc source. + "documentId": "A String", # Output only. The document id of the google doc. + "revisionId": "A String", # Output only. Revision id for the doc. + }, + "sourceAddedTimestamp": "A String", # The timestamp the source was added. + "tokenCount": 42, # The number of tokens in the source. + "wordCount": 42, # The word count of the source. + "youtubeMetadata": { # Metadata about a youtube video source. # Metadata for a youtube video source. + "channelName": "A String", # Output only. The channel name of the youtube video. + "videoId": "A String", # Output only. The id of the youtube video. + }, + }, + "name": "A String", # Identifier. The full resource name of the source. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/notebooks/{notebook}/sources/{source_id}`. This field must be a UTF-8 encoded string with a length limit of 1024 characters. + "settings": { # Allows extension of Source Settings in the BatchCreateSources (Formerly AddSource request). # Output only. Status of the source, and any failure reasons. + "failureReason": { # Failure reason containing details about why a source failed to ingest. # Failure reason containing details about why a source failed to ingest. + "audioTranscriptionError": { # An audio file transcription specific error. # An audio file transcription specific error. + "languageDetectionFailed": { # Could not detect language of the file (it may not be speech). # Could not detect language of the file (it may not be speech). + }, + "noAudioDetected": { # No audio was detected in the input file. # No audio was detected in the input file (it may have been a video). + }, + }, + "domainBlocked": { # Error to indicate that the source was removed because the domain was blocked. # Error if the user tries to add a source from a blocked domain. + }, + "googleDriveError": { # A google drive specific error. # A google drive specific error. + "downloadPrevented": { # The user was prevented from downloading the file. # The user was prevented from downloading the file. + }, + }, + "ingestionError": { # Indicates an error occurred while ingesting the source. # Indicates an error occurred while ingesting the source. + }, + "paywallError": { # Indicates that the source is paywalled and cannot be ingested. # Indicates that the source is paywalled and cannot be ingested. + }, + "sourceEmpty": { # Indicates that the source is empty. # Indicates that the source is empty. + }, + "sourceLimitExceeded": { # Indicates that the user does not have space for this source. # Error if the user tries to update beyond their limits. + }, + "sourceTooLong": { # Indicates source word count exceeded the user's limit. # Indicates source word count exceeded the user's limit. + "wordCount": 42, # The number of words in the source. + "wordLimit": 42, # The word count limit for the current user at the time of the upload. + }, + "sourceUnreachable": { # Indicates that the source is unreachable. This is primarily used for sources that are added via URL. # Indicates that the source is unreachable. + "errorDetails": "A String", # Describes why the source is unreachable. + }, + "unknown": { # Indicates an unknown error occurred. # Indicates an unknown error occurred. + }, + "uploadError": { # Indicates an error occurred while uploading the source. # Indicates an error occurred while uploading the source. + }, + "youtubeError": { # A youtube specific error. # A youtube specific error. + "videoDeleted": { # Error to indicate that the source was removed because the video was deleted. # Error to indicate that the source was removed because the video was deleted. + }, + }, + }, + "status": "A String", # Status of the source. + }, + "sourceId": { # SourceId is the last segment of the source's resource name. # Optional. Output only. Source id, which is the last segment of the source's resource name. + "id": "A String", # The id of the source. + }, + "title": "A String", # Optional. Title of the source. + }, + ], "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the notebook. }, ], @@ -273,7 +537,7 @@

Method Details

share(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None) -
Shares a notebook to other accounts. Needs a side channel with the user's EUC.
+  
Shares a notebook to other accounts.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. Full resource name of Notebook, such as `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/notebooks/{notebook_id}`. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.notebooks.sources.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.notebooks.sources.html
index 3ae3a76315c..fccded39f56 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.notebooks.sources.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.notebooks.sources.html
@@ -109,18 +109,18 @@ 

Method Details

}, "googleDriveContent": { # The content from Google Drive. # The content from Google Drive. "documentId": "A String", # The document id of the selected document. - "mimeType": "A String", # The mime type of the selected document. This can be used to differentiate type of content selected in the drive picker. - "sourceName": "A String", # Should track this from Drive Picker. + "mimeType": "A String", # The mime type of the selected document. This can be used to differentiate type of content selected in the drive picker. Use application/vnd.google-apps.document for Google Docs or application/vnd.google-apps.presentation for Google Slides. + "sourceName": "A String", # The name to be displayed for the source. }, "textContent": { # The text content uploaded as source. # The text content uploaded as source. - "content": "A String", # The content of the text source. - "sourceName": "A String", # The name of the text source. + "content": "A String", # The name to be displayed for the source. + "sourceName": "A String", # The display name of the text source. }, "videoContent": { # Video content uploaded as source. # The video content uploaded as source. "youtubeUrl": "A String", # The youtube url of the video content. }, "webContent": { # The web content uploaded as source. # The web content uploaded as source. - "sourceName": "A String", # The name of the web source. + "sourceName": "A String", # The name to be displayed for the source. "url": "A String", # If URL is supplied, will fetch the webpage in the backend. }, }, @@ -138,17 +138,65 @@

Method Details

{ # Response for SourceService.BatchCreateSources method. "sources": [ # The Sources. { # Source represents a single source of content. - "metadata": { # Represents the metadata of a source and some additional information. # Metadata about the source. + "metadata": { # Represents the metadata of a source and some additional information. # Output only. Metadata about the source. "agentspaceMetadata": { # Metadata about an agentspace source. # Metadata for an agentspace source. "documentName": "A String", # Output only. The full document name in Agentspace. "documentTitle": "A String", # Output only. The title of the document. }, + "googleDocsMetadata": { # Metadata about a google doc source. # Metadata for a google doc source. + "documentId": "A String", # Output only. The document id of the google doc. + "revisionId": "A String", # Output only. Revision id for the doc. + }, "sourceAddedTimestamp": "A String", # The timestamp the source was added. "tokenCount": 42, # The number of tokens in the source. "wordCount": 42, # The word count of the source. + "youtubeMetadata": { # Metadata about a youtube video source. # Metadata for a youtube video source. + "channelName": "A String", # Output only. The channel name of the youtube video. + "videoId": "A String", # Output only. The id of the youtube video. + }, }, "name": "A String", # Identifier. The full resource name of the source. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/notebooks/{notebook}/sources/{source_id}`. This field must be a UTF-8 encoded string with a length limit of 1024 characters. - "sourceId": { # SourceId is the last segment of the source's resource name. # Optional. Source id, which is the last segment of the source's resource name. This is to make it similar with notebooklm API. + "settings": { # Allows extension of Source Settings in the BatchCreateSources (Formerly AddSource request). # Output only. Status of the source, and any failure reasons. + "failureReason": { # Failure reason containing details about why a source failed to ingest. # Failure reason containing details about why a source failed to ingest. + "audioTranscriptionError": { # An audio file transcription specific error. # An audio file transcription specific error. + "languageDetectionFailed": { # Could not detect language of the file (it may not be speech). # Could not detect language of the file (it may not be speech). + }, + "noAudioDetected": { # No audio was detected in the input file. # No audio was detected in the input file (it may have been a video). + }, + }, + "domainBlocked": { # Error to indicate that the source was removed because the domain was blocked. # Error if the user tries to add a source from a blocked domain. + }, + "googleDriveError": { # A google drive specific error. # A google drive specific error. + "downloadPrevented": { # The user was prevented from downloading the file. # The user was prevented from downloading the file. + }, + }, + "ingestionError": { # Indicates an error occurred while ingesting the source. # Indicates an error occurred while ingesting the source. + }, + "paywallError": { # Indicates that the source is paywalled and cannot be ingested. # Indicates that the source is paywalled and cannot be ingested. + }, + "sourceEmpty": { # Indicates that the source is empty. # Indicates that the source is empty. + }, + "sourceLimitExceeded": { # Indicates that the user does not have space for this source. # Error if the user tries to update beyond their limits. + }, + "sourceTooLong": { # Indicates source word count exceeded the user's limit. # Indicates source word count exceeded the user's limit. + "wordCount": 42, # The number of words in the source. + "wordLimit": 42, # The word count limit for the current user at the time of the upload. + }, + "sourceUnreachable": { # Indicates that the source is unreachable. This is primarily used for sources that are added via URL. # Indicates that the source is unreachable. + "errorDetails": "A String", # Describes why the source is unreachable. + }, + "unknown": { # Indicates an unknown error occurred. # Indicates an unknown error occurred. + }, + "uploadError": { # Indicates an error occurred while uploading the source. # Indicates an error occurred while uploading the source. + }, + "youtubeError": { # A youtube specific error. # A youtube specific error. + "videoDeleted": { # Error to indicate that the source was removed because the video was deleted. # Error to indicate that the source was removed because the video was deleted. + }, + }, + }, + "status": "A String", # Status of the source. + }, + "sourceId": { # SourceId is the last segment of the source's resource name. # Optional. Output only. Source id, which is the last segment of the source's resource name. "id": "A String", # The id of the source. }, "title": "A String", # Optional. Title of the source. @@ -204,17 +252,65 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # Source represents a single source of content. - "metadata": { # Represents the metadata of a source and some additional information. # Metadata about the source. + "metadata": { # Represents the metadata of a source and some additional information. # Output only. Metadata about the source. "agentspaceMetadata": { # Metadata about an agentspace source. # Metadata for an agentspace source. "documentName": "A String", # Output only. The full document name in Agentspace. "documentTitle": "A String", # Output only. The title of the document. }, + "googleDocsMetadata": { # Metadata about a google doc source. # Metadata for a google doc source. + "documentId": "A String", # Output only. The document id of the google doc. + "revisionId": "A String", # Output only. Revision id for the doc. + }, "sourceAddedTimestamp": "A String", # The timestamp the source was added. "tokenCount": 42, # The number of tokens in the source. "wordCount": 42, # The word count of the source. + "youtubeMetadata": { # Metadata about a youtube video source. # Metadata for a youtube video source. + "channelName": "A String", # Output only. The channel name of the youtube video. + "videoId": "A String", # Output only. The id of the youtube video. + }, }, "name": "A String", # Identifier. The full resource name of the source. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/notebooks/{notebook}/sources/{source_id}`. This field must be a UTF-8 encoded string with a length limit of 1024 characters. - "sourceId": { # SourceId is the last segment of the source's resource name. # Optional. Source id, which is the last segment of the source's resource name. This is to make it similar with notebooklm API. + "settings": { # Allows extension of Source Settings in the BatchCreateSources (Formerly AddSource request). # Output only. Status of the source, and any failure reasons. + "failureReason": { # Failure reason containing details about why a source failed to ingest. # Failure reason containing details about why a source failed to ingest. + "audioTranscriptionError": { # An audio file transcription specific error. # An audio file transcription specific error. + "languageDetectionFailed": { # Could not detect language of the file (it may not be speech). # Could not detect language of the file (it may not be speech). + }, + "noAudioDetected": { # No audio was detected in the input file. # No audio was detected in the input file (it may have been a video). + }, + }, + "domainBlocked": { # Error to indicate that the source was removed because the domain was blocked. # Error if the user tries to add a source from a blocked domain. + }, + "googleDriveError": { # A google drive specific error. # A google drive specific error. + "downloadPrevented": { # The user was prevented from downloading the file. # The user was prevented from downloading the file. + }, + }, + "ingestionError": { # Indicates an error occurred while ingesting the source. # Indicates an error occurred while ingesting the source. + }, + "paywallError": { # Indicates that the source is paywalled and cannot be ingested. # Indicates that the source is paywalled and cannot be ingested. + }, + "sourceEmpty": { # Indicates that the source is empty. # Indicates that the source is empty. + }, + "sourceLimitExceeded": { # Indicates that the user does not have space for this source. # Error if the user tries to update beyond their limits. + }, + "sourceTooLong": { # Indicates source word count exceeded the user's limit. # Indicates source word count exceeded the user's limit. + "wordCount": 42, # The number of words in the source. + "wordLimit": 42, # The word count limit for the current user at the time of the upload. + }, + "sourceUnreachable": { # Indicates that the source is unreachable. This is primarily used for sources that are added via URL. # Indicates that the source is unreachable. + "errorDetails": "A String", # Describes why the source is unreachable. + }, + "unknown": { # Indicates an unknown error occurred. # Indicates an unknown error occurred. + }, + "uploadError": { # Indicates an error occurred while uploading the source. # Indicates an error occurred while uploading the source. + }, + "youtubeError": { # A youtube specific error. # A youtube specific error. + "videoDeleted": { # Error to indicate that the source was removed because the video was deleted. # Error to indicate that the source was removed because the video was deleted. + }, + }, + }, + "status": "A String", # Status of the source. + }, + "sourceId": { # SourceId is the last segment of the source's resource name. # Optional. Output only. Source id, which is the last segment of the source's resource name. "id": "A String", # The id of the source. }, "title": "A String", # Optional. Title of the source. diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.collections.engines.assistants.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.collections.engines.assistants.html index 75f34603fbd..ad74e79202e 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.collections.engines.assistants.html +++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.collections.engines.assistants.html @@ -115,6 +115,11 @@

Method Details

"phrase": "A String", # Required. The raw string content to be banned. }, ], + "modelArmorConfig": { # Configuration for customer defined Model Armor templates to be used for sanitizing user prompts and assistant responses. # Optional. Model Armor configuration to be used for sanitizing user prompts and assistant responses. + "failureMode": "A String", # Optional. Defines the failure mode for Model Armor sanitization. + "responseTemplate": "A String", # Optional. The resource name of the Model Armor template for sanitizing assistant responses. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/templates/{template_id}` If not specified, no sanitization will be applied to the assistant response. + "userPromptTemplate": "A String", # Optional. The resource name of the Model Armor template for sanitizing user prompts. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/templates/{template_id}` If not specified, no sanitization will be applied to the user prompt. + }, }, "enabledTools": { # Optional. Note: not implemented yet. Use enabled_actions instead. The enabled tools on this assistant. The keys are connector name, for example "projects/{projectId}/locations/{locationId}/collections/{collectionId}/dataconnector The values consist of admin enabled tools towards the connector instance. Admin can selectively enable multiple tools on any of the connector instances that they created in the project. For example {"jira1ConnectorName": [(toolId1, "createTicket"), (toolId2, "transferTicket")], "gmail1ConnectorName": [(toolId3, "sendEmail"),..] } "a_key": { # The enabled tools on a connector @@ -155,6 +160,11 @@

Method Details

"phrase": "A String", # Required. The raw string content to be banned. }, ], + "modelArmorConfig": { # Configuration for customer defined Model Armor templates to be used for sanitizing user prompts and assistant responses. # Optional. Model Armor configuration to be used for sanitizing user prompts and assistant responses. + "failureMode": "A String", # Optional. Defines the failure mode for Model Armor sanitization. + "responseTemplate": "A String", # Optional. The resource name of the Model Armor template for sanitizing assistant responses. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/templates/{template_id}` If not specified, no sanitization will be applied to the assistant response. + "userPromptTemplate": "A String", # Optional. The resource name of the Model Armor template for sanitizing user prompts. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/templates/{template_id}` If not specified, no sanitization will be applied to the user prompt. + }, }, "enabledTools": { # Optional. Note: not implemented yet. Use enabled_actions instead. The enabled tools on this assistant. The keys are connector name, for example "projects/{projectId}/locations/{locationId}/collections/{collectionId}/dataconnector The values consist of admin enabled tools towards the connector instance. Admin can selectively enable multiple tools on any of the connector instances that they created in the project. For example {"jira1ConnectorName": [(toolId1, "createTicket"), (toolId2, "transferTicket")], "gmail1ConnectorName": [(toolId3, "sendEmail"),..] } "a_key": { # The enabled tools on a connector @@ -194,6 +204,11 @@

Method Details

"phrase": "A String", # Required. The raw string content to be banned. }, ], + "modelArmorConfig": { # Configuration for customer defined Model Armor templates to be used for sanitizing user prompts and assistant responses. # Optional. Model Armor configuration to be used for sanitizing user prompts and assistant responses. + "failureMode": "A String", # Optional. Defines the failure mode for Model Armor sanitization. + "responseTemplate": "A String", # Optional. The resource name of the Model Armor template for sanitizing assistant responses. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/templates/{template_id}` If not specified, no sanitization will be applied to the assistant response. + "userPromptTemplate": "A String", # Optional. The resource name of the Model Armor template for sanitizing user prompts. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/templates/{template_id}` If not specified, no sanitization will be applied to the user prompt. + }, }, "enabledTools": { # Optional. Note: not implemented yet. Use enabled_actions instead. The enabled tools on this assistant. The keys are connector name, for example "projects/{projectId}/locations/{locationId}/collections/{collectionId}/dataconnector The values consist of admin enabled tools towards the connector instance. Admin can selectively enable multiple tools on any of the connector instances that they created in the project. For example {"jira1ConnectorName": [(toolId1, "createTicket"), (toolId2, "transferTicket")], "gmail1ConnectorName": [(toolId3, "sendEmail"),..] } "a_key": { # The enabled tools on a connector @@ -290,6 +305,30 @@

Method Details

"assistSkippedReasons": [ # Reasons for not answering the assist call. "A String", ], + "customerPolicyEnforcementResult": { # Customer policy enforcement results. Contains the results of the various policy checks, like the banned phrases or the Model Armor checks. # Optional. The field contains information about the various policy checks' results like the banned phrases or the Model Armor checks. This field is populated only if the assist call was skipped due to a policy violation. + "policyResults": [ # Customer policy enforcement results. Populated only if the assist call was skipped due to a policy violation. It contains results from those filters that blocked the processing of the query. + { # Customer policy enforcement result for a single policy type. + "bannedPhraseEnforcementResult": { # Customer policy enforcement result for the banned phrase policy. # The policy enforcement result for the banned phrase policy. + "bannedPhrases": [ # The banned phrases that were found in the query or the answer. + "A String", + ], + }, + "modelArmorEnforcementResult": { # Customer policy enforcement result for the Model Armor policy. # The policy enforcement result for the Model Armor policy. + "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error returned by Model Armor if the policy enforcement failed for some reason. + "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code. + "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use. + { + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL. + }, + ], + "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client. + }, + "modelArmorViolation": "A String", # The Model Armor violation that was found. + }, + }, + ], + "verdict": "A String", # Final verdict of the customer policy enforcement. If only one policy blocked the processing, the verdict is BLOCK. + }, "name": "A String", # Immutable. Identifier. Resource name of the `AssistAnswer`. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/collections/{collection}/engines/{engine}/sessions/{session}/assistAnswers/{assist_answer}` This field must be a UTF-8 encoded string with a length limit of 1024 characters. "replies": [ # Replies of the assistant. { # One part of the multi-part response of the assist call. diff --git a/docs/dyn/dns_v1.policies.html b/docs/dyn/dns_v1.policies.html index bb9789dcdbb..14c279acf97 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/dns_v1.policies.html +++ b/docs/dyn/dns_v1.policies.html @@ -79,25 +79,25 @@

Instance Methods

Close httplib2 connections.

create(project, body=None, clientOperationId=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Creates a new Policy.

+

Creates a new policy.

delete(project, policy, clientOperationId=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Deletes a previously created Policy. Fails if the policy is still being referenced by a network.

+

Deletes a previously created policy. Fails if the policy is still being referenced by a network.

get(project, policy, clientOperationId=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Fetches the representation of an existing Policy.

+

Fetches the representation of an existing policy.

list(project, maxResults=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Enumerates all Policies associated with a project.

+

Enumerates all policies associated with a project.

list_next()

Retrieves the next page of results.

patch(project, policy, body=None, clientOperationId=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Applies a partial update to an existing Policy.

+

Applies a partial update to an existing policy.

update(project, policy, body=None, clientOperationId=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Updates an existing Policy.

+

Updates an existing policy.

Method Details

close() @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@

Method Details

create(project, body=None, clientOperationId=None, x__xgafv=None) -
Creates a new Policy.
+  
Creates a new policy.
 
 Args:
   project: string, Identifies the project addressed by this request. (required)
@@ -126,10 +126,10 @@ 

Method Details

], }, "description": "A String", # A mutable string of at most 1024 characters associated with this resource for the user's convenience. Has no effect on the policy's function. - "dns64Config": { # DNS64 policies # Configurations related to DNS64 for this Policy. + "dns64Config": { # DNS64 policies # Configurations related to DNS64 for this policy. "kind": "dns#policyDns64Config", "scope": { # The scope to which DNS64 config will be applied to. - "allQueries": True or False, # Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally at the network level. + "allQueries": True or False, # Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally for all networks bound to the policy. "kind": "dns#policyDns64ConfigScope", }, }, @@ -168,10 +168,10 @@

Method Details

], }, "description": "A String", # A mutable string of at most 1024 characters associated with this resource for the user's convenience. Has no effect on the policy's function. - "dns64Config": { # DNS64 policies # Configurations related to DNS64 for this Policy. + "dns64Config": { # DNS64 policies # Configurations related to DNS64 for this policy. "kind": "dns#policyDns64Config", "scope": { # The scope to which DNS64 config will be applied to. - "allQueries": True or False, # Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally at the network level. + "allQueries": True or False, # Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally for all networks bound to the policy. "kind": "dns#policyDns64ConfigScope", }, }, @@ -191,7 +191,7 @@

Method Details

delete(project, policy, clientOperationId=None, x__xgafv=None) -
Deletes a previously created Policy. Fails if the policy is still being referenced by a network.
+  
Deletes a previously created policy. Fails if the policy is still being referenced by a network.
 
 Args:
   project: string, Identifies the project addressed by this request. (required)
@@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ 

Method Details

get(project, policy, clientOperationId=None, x__xgafv=None) -
Fetches the representation of an existing Policy.
+  
Fetches the representation of an existing policy.
 
 Args:
   project: string, Identifies the project addressed by this request. (required)
@@ -233,10 +233,10 @@ 

Method Details

], }, "description": "A String", # A mutable string of at most 1024 characters associated with this resource for the user's convenience. Has no effect on the policy's function. - "dns64Config": { # DNS64 policies # Configurations related to DNS64 for this Policy. + "dns64Config": { # DNS64 policies # Configurations related to DNS64 for this policy. "kind": "dns#policyDns64Config", "scope": { # The scope to which DNS64 config will be applied to. - "allQueries": True or False, # Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally at the network level. + "allQueries": True or False, # Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally for all networks bound to the policy. "kind": "dns#policyDns64ConfigScope", }, }, @@ -256,7 +256,7 @@

Method Details

list(project, maxResults=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None) -
Enumerates all Policies associated with a project.
+  
Enumerates all policies associated with a project.
 
 Args:
   project: string, Identifies the project addressed by this request. (required)
@@ -287,10 +287,10 @@ 

Method Details

], }, "description": "A String", # A mutable string of at most 1024 characters associated with this resource for the user's convenience. Has no effect on the policy's function. - "dns64Config": { # DNS64 policies # Configurations related to DNS64 for this Policy. + "dns64Config": { # DNS64 policies # Configurations related to DNS64 for this policy. "kind": "dns#policyDns64Config", "scope": { # The scope to which DNS64 config will be applied to. - "allQueries": True or False, # Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally at the network level. + "allQueries": True or False, # Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally for all networks bound to the policy. "kind": "dns#policyDns64ConfigScope", }, }, @@ -326,7 +326,7 @@

Method Details

patch(project, policy, body=None, clientOperationId=None, x__xgafv=None) -
Applies a partial update to an existing Policy.
+  
Applies a partial update to an existing policy.
 
 Args:
   project: string, Identifies the project addressed by this request. (required)
@@ -347,10 +347,10 @@ 

Method Details

], }, "description": "A String", # A mutable string of at most 1024 characters associated with this resource for the user's convenience. Has no effect on the policy's function. - "dns64Config": { # DNS64 policies # Configurations related to DNS64 for this Policy. + "dns64Config": { # DNS64 policies # Configurations related to DNS64 for this policy. "kind": "dns#policyDns64Config", "scope": { # The scope to which DNS64 config will be applied to. - "allQueries": True or False, # Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally at the network level. + "allQueries": True or False, # Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally for all networks bound to the policy. "kind": "dns#policyDns64ConfigScope", }, }, @@ -390,10 +390,10 @@

Method Details

], }, "description": "A String", # A mutable string of at most 1024 characters associated with this resource for the user's convenience. Has no effect on the policy's function. - "dns64Config": { # DNS64 policies # Configurations related to DNS64 for this Policy. + "dns64Config": { # DNS64 policies # Configurations related to DNS64 for this policy. "kind": "dns#policyDns64Config", "scope": { # The scope to which DNS64 config will be applied to. - "allQueries": True or False, # Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally at the network level. + "allQueries": True or False, # Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally for all networks bound to the policy. "kind": "dns#policyDns64ConfigScope", }, }, @@ -414,7 +414,7 @@

Method Details

update(project, policy, body=None, clientOperationId=None, x__xgafv=None) -
Updates an existing Policy.
+  
Updates an existing policy.
 
 Args:
   project: string, Identifies the project addressed by this request. (required)
@@ -435,10 +435,10 @@ 

Method Details

], }, "description": "A String", # A mutable string of at most 1024 characters associated with this resource for the user's convenience. Has no effect on the policy's function. - "dns64Config": { # DNS64 policies # Configurations related to DNS64 for this Policy. + "dns64Config": { # DNS64 policies # Configurations related to DNS64 for this policy. "kind": "dns#policyDns64Config", "scope": { # The scope to which DNS64 config will be applied to. - "allQueries": True or False, # Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally at the network level. + "allQueries": True or False, # Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally for all networks bound to the policy. "kind": "dns#policyDns64ConfigScope", }, }, @@ -478,10 +478,10 @@

Method Details

], }, "description": "A String", # A mutable string of at most 1024 characters associated with this resource for the user's convenience. Has no effect on the policy's function. - "dns64Config": { # DNS64 policies # Configurations related to DNS64 for this Policy. + "dns64Config": { # DNS64 policies # Configurations related to DNS64 for this policy. "kind": "dns#policyDns64Config", "scope": { # The scope to which DNS64 config will be applied to. - "allQueries": True or False, # Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally at the network level. + "allQueries": True or False, # Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally for all networks bound to the policy. "kind": "dns#policyDns64ConfigScope", }, }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/dns_v1.resourceRecordSets.html b/docs/dyn/dns_v1.resourceRecordSets.html index 31041ac3086..92aefaab9bb 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/dns_v1.resourceRecordSets.html +++ b/docs/dyn/dns_v1.resourceRecordSets.html @@ -578,9 +578,9 @@

Method Details

project: string, Identifies the project addressed by this request. (required) managedZone: string, Identifies the managed zone addressed by this request. Can be the managed zone name or ID. (required) maxResults: integer, Optional. Maximum number of results to be returned. If unspecified, the server decides how many results to return. - name: string, Restricts the list to return only records with this fully qualified domain name. + name: string, Restricts the list to return only records with this fully qualified domain name. Mutually exclusive with the {@code filter} field. pageToken: string, Optional. A tag returned by a previous list request that was truncated. Use this parameter to continue a previous list request. - type: string, Restricts the list to return only records of this type. If present, the "name" parameter must also be present. + type: string, Restricts the list to return only records of this type. If present, the "name" parameter must also be present. Mutually exclusive with the {@code filter} field. x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. Allowed values 1 - v1 error format diff --git a/docs/dyn/dns_v1beta2.policies.html b/docs/dyn/dns_v1beta2.policies.html index 1c177ebb121..2518f700413 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/dns_v1beta2.policies.html +++ b/docs/dyn/dns_v1beta2.policies.html @@ -79,25 +79,25 @@

Instance Methods

Close httplib2 connections.

create(project, body=None, clientOperationId=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Creates a new Policy.

+

Creates a new policy.

delete(project, policy, clientOperationId=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Deletes a previously created Policy. Fails if the policy is still being referenced by a network.

+

Deletes a previously created policy. Fails if the policy is still being referenced by a network.

get(project, policy, clientOperationId=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Fetches the representation of an existing Policy.

+

Fetches the representation of an existing policy.

list(project, maxResults=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Enumerates all Policies associated with a project.

+

Enumerates all policies associated with a project.

list_next()

Retrieves the next page of results.

patch(project, policy, body=None, clientOperationId=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Applies a partial update to an existing Policy.

+

Applies a partial update to an existing policy.

update(project, policy, body=None, clientOperationId=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Updates an existing Policy.

+

Updates an existing policy.

Method Details

close() @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@

Method Details

create(project, body=None, clientOperationId=None, x__xgafv=None) -
Creates a new Policy.
+  
Creates a new policy.
 
 Args:
   project: string, Identifies the project addressed by this request. (required)
@@ -126,10 +126,10 @@ 

Method Details

], }, "description": "A String", # A mutable string of at most 1024 characters associated with this resource for the user's convenience. Has no effect on the policy's function. - "dns64Config": { # DNS64 policies # Configurations related to DNS64 for this Policy. + "dns64Config": { # DNS64 policies # Configurations related to DNS64 for this policy. "kind": "dns#policyDns64Config", "scope": { # The scope to which DNS64 config will be applied to. - "allQueries": True or False, # Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally at the network level. + "allQueries": True or False, # Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally for all networks bound to the policy. "kind": "dns#policyDns64ConfigScope", }, }, @@ -168,10 +168,10 @@

Method Details

], }, "description": "A String", # A mutable string of at most 1024 characters associated with this resource for the user's convenience. Has no effect on the policy's function. - "dns64Config": { # DNS64 policies # Configurations related to DNS64 for this Policy. + "dns64Config": { # DNS64 policies # Configurations related to DNS64 for this policy. "kind": "dns#policyDns64Config", "scope": { # The scope to which DNS64 config will be applied to. - "allQueries": True or False, # Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally at the network level. + "allQueries": True or False, # Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally for all networks bound to the policy. "kind": "dns#policyDns64ConfigScope", }, }, @@ -191,7 +191,7 @@

Method Details

delete(project, policy, clientOperationId=None, x__xgafv=None) -
Deletes a previously created Policy. Fails if the policy is still being referenced by a network.
+  
Deletes a previously created policy. Fails if the policy is still being referenced by a network.
 
 Args:
   project: string, Identifies the project addressed by this request. (required)
@@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ 

Method Details

get(project, policy, clientOperationId=None, x__xgafv=None) -
Fetches the representation of an existing Policy.
+  
Fetches the representation of an existing policy.
 
 Args:
   project: string, Identifies the project addressed by this request. (required)
@@ -233,10 +233,10 @@ 

Method Details

], }, "description": "A String", # A mutable string of at most 1024 characters associated with this resource for the user's convenience. Has no effect on the policy's function. - "dns64Config": { # DNS64 policies # Configurations related to DNS64 for this Policy. + "dns64Config": { # DNS64 policies # Configurations related to DNS64 for this policy. "kind": "dns#policyDns64Config", "scope": { # The scope to which DNS64 config will be applied to. - "allQueries": True or False, # Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally at the network level. + "allQueries": True or False, # Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally for all networks bound to the policy. "kind": "dns#policyDns64ConfigScope", }, }, @@ -256,7 +256,7 @@

Method Details

list(project, maxResults=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None) -
Enumerates all Policies associated with a project.
+  
Enumerates all policies associated with a project.
 
 Args:
   project: string, Identifies the project addressed by this request. (required)
@@ -287,10 +287,10 @@ 

Method Details

], }, "description": "A String", # A mutable string of at most 1024 characters associated with this resource for the user's convenience. Has no effect on the policy's function. - "dns64Config": { # DNS64 policies # Configurations related to DNS64 for this Policy. + "dns64Config": { # DNS64 policies # Configurations related to DNS64 for this policy. "kind": "dns#policyDns64Config", "scope": { # The scope to which DNS64 config will be applied to. - "allQueries": True or False, # Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally at the network level. + "allQueries": True or False, # Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally for all networks bound to the policy. "kind": "dns#policyDns64ConfigScope", }, }, @@ -326,7 +326,7 @@

Method Details

patch(project, policy, body=None, clientOperationId=None, x__xgafv=None) -
Applies a partial update to an existing Policy.
+  
Applies a partial update to an existing policy.
 
 Args:
   project: string, Identifies the project addressed by this request. (required)
@@ -347,10 +347,10 @@ 

Method Details

], }, "description": "A String", # A mutable string of at most 1024 characters associated with this resource for the user's convenience. Has no effect on the policy's function. - "dns64Config": { # DNS64 policies # Configurations related to DNS64 for this Policy. + "dns64Config": { # DNS64 policies # Configurations related to DNS64 for this policy. "kind": "dns#policyDns64Config", "scope": { # The scope to which DNS64 config will be applied to. - "allQueries": True or False, # Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally at the network level. + "allQueries": True or False, # Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally for all networks bound to the policy. "kind": "dns#policyDns64ConfigScope", }, }, @@ -390,10 +390,10 @@

Method Details

], }, "description": "A String", # A mutable string of at most 1024 characters associated with this resource for the user's convenience. Has no effect on the policy's function. - "dns64Config": { # DNS64 policies # Configurations related to DNS64 for this Policy. + "dns64Config": { # DNS64 policies # Configurations related to DNS64 for this policy. "kind": "dns#policyDns64Config", "scope": { # The scope to which DNS64 config will be applied to. - "allQueries": True or False, # Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally at the network level. + "allQueries": True or False, # Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally for all networks bound to the policy. "kind": "dns#policyDns64ConfigScope", }, }, @@ -414,7 +414,7 @@

Method Details

update(project, policy, body=None, clientOperationId=None, x__xgafv=None) -
Updates an existing Policy.
+  
Updates an existing policy.
 
 Args:
   project: string, Identifies the project addressed by this request. (required)
@@ -435,10 +435,10 @@ 

Method Details

], }, "description": "A String", # A mutable string of at most 1024 characters associated with this resource for the user's convenience. Has no effect on the policy's function. - "dns64Config": { # DNS64 policies # Configurations related to DNS64 for this Policy. + "dns64Config": { # DNS64 policies # Configurations related to DNS64 for this policy. "kind": "dns#policyDns64Config", "scope": { # The scope to which DNS64 config will be applied to. - "allQueries": True or False, # Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally at the network level. + "allQueries": True or False, # Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally for all networks bound to the policy. "kind": "dns#policyDns64ConfigScope", }, }, @@ -478,10 +478,10 @@

Method Details

], }, "description": "A String", # A mutable string of at most 1024 characters associated with this resource for the user's convenience. Has no effect on the policy's function. - "dns64Config": { # DNS64 policies # Configurations related to DNS64 for this Policy. + "dns64Config": { # DNS64 policies # Configurations related to DNS64 for this policy. "kind": "dns#policyDns64Config", "scope": { # The scope to which DNS64 config will be applied to. - "allQueries": True or False, # Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally at the network level. + "allQueries": True or False, # Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally for all networks bound to the policy. "kind": "dns#policyDns64ConfigScope", }, }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/dns_v1beta2.resourceRecordSets.html b/docs/dyn/dns_v1beta2.resourceRecordSets.html index 33774a27825..2613496da93 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/dns_v1beta2.resourceRecordSets.html +++ b/docs/dyn/dns_v1beta2.resourceRecordSets.html @@ -768,9 +768,9 @@

Method Details

project: string, Identifies the project addressed by this request. (required) managedZone: string, Identifies the managed zone addressed by this request. Can be the managed zone name or ID. (required) maxResults: integer, Optional. Maximum number of results to be returned. If unspecified, the server decides how many results to return. - name: string, Restricts the list to return only records with this fully qualified domain name. + name: string, Restricts the list to return only records with this fully qualified domain name. Mutually exclusive with the {@code filter} field. pageToken: string, Optional. A tag returned by a previous list request that was truncated. Use this parameter to continue a previous list request. - type: string, Restricts the list to return only records of this type. If present, the "name" parameter must also be present. + type: string, Restricts the list to return only records of this type. If present, the "name" parameter must also be present. Mutually exclusive with the {@code filter} field. x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. Allowed values 1 - v1 error format diff --git a/docs/dyn/documentai_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/documentai_v1.projects.locations.html index bcb78d588de..babedf32580 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/documentai_v1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/documentai_v1.projects.locations.html @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/documentai_v1beta3.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/documentai_v1beta3.projects.locations.html index 28f55422285..61892218ae4 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/documentai_v1beta3.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/documentai_v1beta3.projects.locations.html @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/drive_v2.files.html b/docs/dyn/drive_v2.files.html index ec89a0c2806..f331274a7b4 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/drive_v2.files.html +++ b/docs/dyn/drive_v2.files.html @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@

Instance Methods

Inserts a new file. This method supports an */upload* URI and accepts uploaded media with the following characteristics: - *Maximum file size:* 5,120 GB - *Accepted Media MIME types:*`*/*` Note: Specify a valid MIME type, rather than the literal `*/*` value. The literal `*/*` is only used to indicate that any valid MIME type can be uploaded. For more information on uploading files, see [Upload file data](/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-uploads). Apps creating shortcuts with `files.insert` must specify the MIME type `application/vnd.google-apps.shortcut`. Apps should specify a file extension in the `title` property when inserting files with the API. For example, an operation to insert a JPEG file should specify something like `"title": "cat.jpg"` in the metadata. Subsequent `GET` requests include the read-only `fileExtension` property populated with the extension originally specified in the `title` property. When a Google Drive user requests to download a file, or when the file is downloaded through the sync client, Drive builds a full filename (with extension) based on the title. In cases where the extension is missing, Drive attempts to determine the extension based on the file's MIME type.

list(corpora=None, corpus=None, driveId=None, includeItemsFromAllDrives=None, includeLabels=None, includePermissionsForView=None, includeTeamDriveItems=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, projection=None, q=None, spaces=None, supportsAllDrives=None, supportsTeamDrives=None, teamDriveId=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Lists the user's files. This method accepts the `q` parameter, which is a search query combining one or more search terms. For more information, see the [Search for files & folders](/workspace/drive/api/guides/search-files) guide. *Note:* This method returns *all* files by default, including trashed files. If you don't want trashed files to appear in the list, use the `trashed=false` query parameter to remove trashed files from the results.

+

Lists the user's files. For more information, see [Search for files and folders](/workspace/drive/api/guides/search-files). This method accepts the `q` parameter, which is a search query combining one or more search terms. This method returns *all* files by default, including trashed files. If you don't want trashed files to appear in the list, use the `trashed=false` query parameter to remove trashed files from the results.

listLabels(fileId, maxResults=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

Lists the labels on a file.

@@ -133,7 +133,7 @@

Instance Methods

Restores a file from the trash. The currently authenticated user must own the file or be at least a `fileOrganizer` on the parent for shared drive files.

update(fileId, addParents=None, body=None, convert=None, enforceSingleParent=None, includeLabels=None, includePermissionsForView=None, media_body=None, media_mime_type=None, modifiedDateBehavior=None, newRevision=None, ocr=None, ocrLanguage=None, pinned=None, removeParents=None, setModifiedDate=None, supportsAllDrives=None, supportsTeamDrives=None, timedTextLanguage=None, timedTextTrackName=None, updateViewedDate=None, useContentAsIndexableText=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Updates a file's metadata and/or content. When calling this method, only populate fields in the request that you want to modify. When updating fields, some fields might be changed automatically, such as `modifiedDate`. This method supports patch semantics. This method supports an */upload* URI and accepts uploaded media with the following characteristics: - *Maximum file size:* 5,120 GB - *Accepted Media MIME types:*`*/*` Note: Specify a valid MIME type, rather than the literal `*/*` value. The literal `*/*` is only used to indicate that any valid MIME type can be uploaded. For more information on uploading files, see [Upload file data](/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-uploads).

+

Updates a file's metadata, content, or both. When calling this method, only populate fields in the request that you want to modify. When updating fields, some fields might be changed automatically, such as `modifiedDate`. This method supports patch semantics. This method supports an */upload* URI and accepts uploaded media with the following characteristics: - *Maximum file size:* 5,120 GB - *Accepted Media MIME types:* `*/*` (Specify a valid MIME type, rather than the literal `*/*` value. The literal `*/*` is only used to indicate that any valid MIME type can be uploaded. For more information, see [Google Workspace and Google Drive supported MIME types](/workspace/drive/api/guides/mime-types).) For more information on uploading files, see [Upload file data](/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-uploads).

watch(fileId, acknowledgeAbuse=None, body=None, includeLabels=None, includePermissionsForView=None, projection=None, revisionId=None, supportsAllDrives=None, supportsTeamDrives=None, updateViewedDate=None, x__xgafv=None)

Subscribes to changes to a file.

@@ -2275,7 +2275,7 @@

Method Details

list(corpora=None, corpus=None, driveId=None, includeItemsFromAllDrives=None, includeLabels=None, includePermissionsForView=None, includeTeamDriveItems=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, projection=None, q=None, spaces=None, supportsAllDrives=None, supportsTeamDrives=None, teamDriveId=None, x__xgafv=None) -
 Lists the user's files. This method accepts the `q` parameter, which is a search query combining one or more search terms. For more information, see the [Search for files & folders](/workspace/drive/api/guides/search-files) guide. *Note:* This method returns *all* files by default, including trashed files. If you don't want trashed files to appear in the list, use the `trashed=false` query parameter to remove trashed files from the results.
+  
 Lists the user's files. For more information, see [Search for files and folders](/workspace/drive/api/guides/search-files). This method accepts the `q` parameter, which is a search query combining one or more search terms. This method returns *all* files by default, including trashed files. If you don't want trashed files to appear in the list, use the `trashed=false` query parameter to remove trashed files from the results.
 
 Args:
   corpora: string, Bodies of items (files/documents) to which the query applies. Supported bodies are `default`, `domain`, `drive` and `allDrives`. Prefer `default` or `drive` to `allDrives` for efficiency.
@@ -4912,7 +4912,7 @@ 

Method Details

update(fileId, addParents=None, body=None, convert=None, enforceSingleParent=None, includeLabels=None, includePermissionsForView=None, media_body=None, media_mime_type=None, modifiedDateBehavior=None, newRevision=None, ocr=None, ocrLanguage=None, pinned=None, removeParents=None, setModifiedDate=None, supportsAllDrives=None, supportsTeamDrives=None, timedTextLanguage=None, timedTextTrackName=None, updateViewedDate=None, useContentAsIndexableText=None, x__xgafv=None) -
 Updates a file's metadata and/or content. When calling this method, only populate fields in the request that you want to modify. When updating fields, some fields might be changed automatically, such as `modifiedDate`. This method supports patch semantics. This method supports an */upload* URI and accepts uploaded media with the following characteristics: - *Maximum file size:* 5,120 GB - *Accepted Media MIME types:*`*/*` Note: Specify a valid MIME type, rather than the literal `*/*` value. The literal `*/*` is only used to indicate that any valid MIME type can be uploaded. For more information on uploading files, see [Upload file data](/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-uploads).
+  
 Updates a file's metadata, content, or both. When calling this method, only populate fields in the request that you want to modify. When updating fields, some fields might be changed automatically, such as `modifiedDate`. This method supports patch semantics. This method supports an */upload* URI and accepts uploaded media with the following characteristics: - *Maximum file size:* 5,120 GB - *Accepted Media MIME types:* `*/*` (Specify a valid MIME type, rather than the literal `*/*` value. The literal `*/*` is only used to indicate that any valid MIME type can be uploaded. For more information, see [Google Workspace and Google Drive supported MIME types](/workspace/drive/api/guides/mime-types).) For more information on uploading files, see [Upload file data](/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-uploads).
 
 Args:
   fileId: string, The ID of the file to update. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/drive_v3.changes.html b/docs/dyn/drive_v3.changes.html
index 85e85af4be8..eccf95d4677 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/drive_v3.changes.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/drive_v3.changes.html
@@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ 

Method Details

"domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this shared drive and items inside this shared drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this shared drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this shared drive. "downloadRestriction": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # Download restrictions applied by shared drive managers. "restrictedForReaders": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for readers. - "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers. + "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers. }, "driveMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this shared drive is restricted to its members. "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders. @@ -206,56 +206,56 @@

Method Details

# Entries with null values are cleared in update and copy requests. These properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties. "a_key": "A String", }, - "capabilities": { # Output only. Capabilities the current user has on this file. Each capability corresponds to a fine-grained action that a user may take. + "capabilities": { # Output only. Capabilities the current user has on this file. Each capability corresponds to a fine-grained action that a user may take. For more information, see [Understand file capabilities](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-sharing#capabilities). "canAcceptOwnership": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user is the pending owner of the file. Not populated for shared drive files. - "canAddChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add children to this folder. This is always false when the item is not a folder. - "canAddFolderFromAnotherDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add a folder from another drive (different shared drive or My Drive) to this folder. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canAddChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add children to this folder. This is always `false` when the item isn't a folder. + "canAddFolderFromAnotherDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add a folder from another drive (different shared drive or My Drive) to this folder. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canAddMyDriveParent": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add a parent for the item without removing an existing parent in the same request. Not populated for shared drive files. "canChangeCopyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the `copyRequiresWriterPermission` restriction of this file. "canChangeItemDownloadRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the owner or organizer-applied download restrictions of the file. - "canChangeSecurityUpdateEnabled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the securityUpdateEnabled field on link share metadata. + "canChangeSecurityUpdateEnabled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the `securityUpdateEnabled` field on link share metadata. "canChangeViewersCanCopyContent": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. "canComment": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can comment on this file. - "canCopy": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can copy this file. For an item in a shared drive, whether the current user can copy non-folder descendants of this item, or this item itself if it is not a folder. + "canCopy": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can copy this file. For an item in a shared drive, whether the current user can copy non-folder descendants of this item, or this item if it's not a folder. "canDelete": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can delete this file. - "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can delete children of this folder. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can delete children of this folder. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canDisableInheritedPermissions": True or False, # Whether a user can disable inherited permissions. "canDownload": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can download this file. "canEdit": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can edit this file. Other factors may limit the type of changes a user can make to a file. For example, see `canChangeCopyRequiresWriterPermission` or `canModifyContent`. "canEnableInheritedPermissions": True or False, # Whether a user can re-enable inherited permissions. - "canListChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can list the children of this folder. This is always false when the item is not a folder. + "canListChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can list the children of this folder. This is always `false` when the item isn't a folder. "canModifyContent": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can modify the content of this file. - "canModifyContentRestriction": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use one of `canModifyEditorContentRestriction`, `canModifyOwnerContentRestriction` or `canRemoveContentRestriction`. + "canModifyContentRestriction": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use one of `canModifyEditorContentRestriction`, `canModifyOwnerContentRestriction`, or `canRemoveContentRestriction`. "canModifyEditorContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add or modify content restrictions on the file which are editor restricted. "canModifyLabels": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can modify the labels on the file. "canModifyOwnerContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add or modify content restrictions which are owner restricted. - "canMoveChildrenOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder outside of the shared drive. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canMoveChildrenOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder outside of the shared drive. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canMoveChildrenOutOfTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveChildrenOutOfDrive` instead. - "canMoveChildrenWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder within this drive. This is false when the item is not a folder. Note that a request to move the child may still fail depending on the current user's access to the child and to the destination folder. + "canMoveChildrenWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder within this drive. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Note that a request to move the child may still fail depending on the current user's access to the child and to the destination folder. "canMoveChildrenWithinTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveChildrenWithinDrive` instead. "canMoveItemIntoTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemOutOfDrive` instead. - "canMoveItemOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item outside of this drive by changing its parent. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that is being added. + "canMoveItemOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item outside of this drive by changing its parent. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that's being added. "canMoveItemOutOfTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemOutOfDrive` instead. - "canMoveItemWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item within this drive. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that is being added and the parent that is being removed. + "canMoveItemWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item within this drive. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that's being added and the parent that is being removed. "canMoveItemWithinTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemWithinDrive` instead. "canMoveTeamDriveItem": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemWithinDrive` or `canMoveItemOutOfDrive` instead. "canReadDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the shared drive to which this file belongs. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canReadLabels": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the labels on the file. - "canReadRevisions": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the revisions resource of this file. For a shared drive item, whether revisions of non-folder descendants of this item, or this item itself if it is not a folder, can be read. + "canReadRevisions": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the revisions resource of this file. For a shared drive item, whether revisions of non-folder descendants of this item, or this item if it's not a folder, can be read. "canReadTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canReadDrive` instead. - "canRemoveChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can remove children from this folder. This is always false when the item is not a folder. For a folder in a shared drive, use `canDeleteChildren` or `canTrashChildren` instead. - "canRemoveContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether there is a content restriction on the file that can be removed by the current user. + "canRemoveChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can remove children from this folder. This is always `false` when the item isn't a folder. For a folder in a shared drive, use `canDeleteChildren` or `canTrashChildren` instead. + "canRemoveContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether there's a content restriction on the file that can be removed by the current user. "canRemoveMyDriveParent": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can remove a parent from the item without adding another parent in the same request. Not populated for shared drive files. "canRename": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can rename this file. "canShare": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can modify the sharing settings for this file. "canTrash": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this file to trash. - "canTrashChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can trash children of this folder. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canTrashChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can trash children of this folder. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canUntrash": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can restore this file from trash. }, "contentHints": { # Additional information about the content of the file. These fields are never populated in responses. - "indexableText": "A String", # Text to be indexed for the file to improve fullText queries. This is limited to 128KB in length and may contain HTML elements. + "indexableText": "A String", # Text to be indexed for the file to improve fullText queries. This is limited to 128 KB in length and may contain HTML elements. "thumbnail": { # A thumbnail for the file. This will only be used if Google Drive cannot generate a standard thumbnail. - "image": "A String", # The thumbnail data encoded with URL-safe Base64 (RFC 4648 section 5). + "image": "A String", # The thumbnail data encoded with URL-safe Base64 ([RFC 4648 section 5](https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc4648#section-5)). "mimeType": "A String", # The MIME type of the thumbnail. }, }, @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@

Method Details

"ownerRestricted": True or False, # Whether the content restriction can only be modified or removed by a user who owns the file. For files in shared drives, any user with `organizer` capabilities can modify or remove this content restriction. "readOnly": True or False, # Whether the content of the file is read-only. If a file is read-only, a new revision of the file may not be added, comments may not be added or modified, and the title of the file may not be modified. "reason": "A String", # Reason for why the content of the file is restricted. This is only mutable on requests that also set `readOnly=true`. - "restrictingUser": { # Information about a Drive user. # Output only. The user who set the content restriction. Only populated if `readOnly` is true. + "restrictingUser": { # Information about a Drive user. # Output only. The user who set the content restriction. Only populated if `readOnly=true`. "displayName": "A String", # Output only. A plain text displayable name for this user. "emailAddress": "A String", # Output only. The email address of the user. This may not be present in certain contexts if the user has not made their email address visible to the requester. "kind": "drive#user", # Output only. Identifies what kind of resource this is. Value: the fixed string `drive#user`. @@ -277,17 +277,17 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # Output only. The type of the content restriction. Currently the only possible value is `globalContentRestriction`. }, ], - "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download this file, should be disabled for readers and commenters. + "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download this file should be disabled for readers and commenters. "createdTime": "A String", # The time at which the file was created (RFC 3339 date-time). "description": "A String", # A short description of the file. "downloadRestrictions": { # Download restrictions applied to the file. # Download restrictions applied on the file. "effectiveDownloadRestrictionWithContext": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # Output only. The effective download restriction applied to this file. This considers all restriction settings and DLP rules. "restrictedForReaders": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for readers. - "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers. + "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers. }, - "itemDownloadRestriction": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # The download restriction of the file applied directly by the owner or organizer. This does not take into account shared drive settings or DLP rules. + "itemDownloadRestriction": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # The download restriction of the file applied directly by the owner or organizer. This doesn't take into account shared drive settings or DLP rules. "restrictedForReaders": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for readers. - "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers. + "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers. }, }, "driveId": "A String", # Output only. ID of the shared drive the file resides in. Only populated for items in shared drives. @@ -296,10 +296,10 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "fileExtension": "A String", # Output only. The final component of `fullFileExtension`. This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. - "folderColorRgb": "A String", # The color for a folder or a shortcut to a folder as an RGB hex string. The supported colors are published in the `folderColorPalette` field of the About resource. If an unsupported color is specified, the closest color in the palette is used instead. - "fullFileExtension": "A String", # Output only. The full file extension extracted from the `name` field. May contain multiple concatenated extensions, such as "tar.gz". This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. This is automatically updated when the `name` field changes, however it is not cleared if the new name does not contain a valid extension. + "folderColorRgb": "A String", # The color for a folder or a shortcut to a folder as an RGB hex string. The supported colors are published in the `folderColorPalette` field of the [`about`](/workspace/drive/api/reference/rest/v3/about) resource. If an unsupported color is specified, the closest color in the palette is used instead. + "fullFileExtension": "A String", # Output only. The full file extension extracted from the `name` field. May contain multiple concatenated extensions, such as "tar.gz". This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. This is automatically updated when the `name` field changes, however it's not cleared if the new name doesn't contain a valid extension. "hasAugmentedPermissions": True or False, # Output only. Whether there are permissions directly on this file. This field is only populated for items in shared drives. - "hasThumbnail": True or False, # Output only. Whether this file has a thumbnail. This does not indicate whether the requesting app has access to the thumbnail. To check access, look for the presence of the thumbnailLink field. + "hasThumbnail": True or False, # Output only. Whether this file has a thumbnail. This doesn't indicate whether the requesting app has access to the thumbnail. To check access, look for the presence of the thumbnailLink field. "headRevisionId": "A String", # Output only. The ID of the file's head revision. This is currently only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. "iconLink": "A String", # Output only. A static, unauthenticated link to the file's icon. "id": "A String", # The ID of the file. @@ -384,11 +384,11 @@

Method Details

"securityUpdateEnabled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the security update is enabled for this file. }, "md5Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The MD5 checksum for the content of the file. This is only applicable to files with binary content in Google Drive. - "mimeType": "A String", # The MIME type of the file. Google Drive attempts to automatically detect an appropriate value from uploaded content, if no value is provided. The value cannot be changed unless a new revision is uploaded. If a file is created with a Google Doc MIME type, the uploaded content is imported, if possible. The supported import formats are published in the About resource. + "mimeType": "A String", # The MIME type of the file. Google Drive attempts to automatically detect an appropriate value from uploaded content, if no value is provided. The value cannot be changed unless a new revision is uploaded. If a file is created with a Google Doc MIME type, the uploaded content is imported, if possible. The supported import formats are published in the [`about`](/workspace/drive/api/reference/rest/v3/about) resource. "modifiedByMe": True or False, # Output only. Whether the file has been modified by this user. "modifiedByMeTime": "A String", # The last time the file was modified by the user (RFC 3339 date-time). "modifiedTime": "A String", # he last time the file was modified by anyone (RFC 3339 date-time). Note that setting modifiedTime will also update modifiedByMeTime for the user. - "name": "A String", # The name of the file. This is not necessarily unique within a folder. Note that for immutable items such as the top level folders of shared drives, My Drive root folder, and Application Data folder the name is constant. + "name": "A String", # The name of the file. This isn't necessarily unique within a folder. Note that for immutable items such as the top-level folders of shared drives, the My Drive root folder, and the Application Data folder, the name is constant. "originalFilename": "A String", # The original filename of the uploaded content if available, or else the original value of the `name` field. This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. "ownedByMe": True or False, # Output only. Whether the user owns the file. Not populated for items in shared drives. "owners": [ # Output only. The owner of this file. Only certain legacy files may have more than one owner. This field isn't populated for items in shared drives. @@ -447,8 +447,8 @@

Method Details

}, "quotaBytesUsed": "A String", # Output only. The number of storage quota bytes used by the file. This includes the head revision as well as previous revisions with `keepForever` enabled. "resourceKey": "A String", # Output only. A key needed to access the item via a shared link. - "sha1Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA1 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it is not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. - "sha256Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA256 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it is not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. + "sha1Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA1 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it's not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. + "sha256Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA256 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it's not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. "shared": True or False, # Output only. Whether the file has been shared. Not populated for items in shared drives. "sharedWithMeTime": "A String", # The time at which the file was shared with the user, if applicable (RFC 3339 date-time). "sharingUser": { # Information about a Drive user. # Output only. The user who shared the file with the requesting user, if applicable. @@ -462,15 +462,15 @@

Method Details

"shortcutDetails": { # Shortcut file details. Only populated for shortcut files, which have the mimeType field set to `application/vnd.google-apps.shortcut`. Can only be set on `files.create` requests. "targetId": "A String", # The ID of the file that this shortcut points to. Can only be set on `files.create` requests. "targetMimeType": "A String", # Output only. The MIME type of the file that this shortcut points to. The value of this field is a snapshot of the target's MIME type, captured when the shortcut is created. - "targetResourceKey": "A String", # Output only. The ResourceKey for the target file. + "targetResourceKey": "A String", # Output only. The `resourceKey` for the target file. }, - "size": "A String", # Output only. Size in bytes of blobs and first party editor files. Won't be populated for files that have no size, like shortcuts and folders. - "spaces": [ # Output only. The list of spaces which contain the file. The currently supported values are 'drive', 'appDataFolder' and 'photos'. + "size": "A String", # Output only. Size in bytes of blobs and Google Workspace editor files. Won't be populated for files that have no size, like shortcuts and folders. + "spaces": [ # Output only. The list of spaces which contain the file. The currently supported values are `drive`, `appDataFolder`, and `photos`. "A String", ], "starred": True or False, # Whether the user has starred the file. "teamDriveId": "A String", # Deprecated: Output only. Use `driveId` instead. - "thumbnailLink": "A String", # Output only. A short-lived link to the file's thumbnail, if available. Typically lasts on the order of hours. Not intended for direct usage on web applications due to [Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS)](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/CORS) policies, consider using a proxy server. Only populated when the requesting app can access the file's content. If the file isn't shared publicly, the URL returned in `Files.thumbnailLink` must be fetched using a credentialed request. + "thumbnailLink": "A String", # Output only. A short-lived link to the file's thumbnail, if available. Typically lasts on the order of hours. Not intended for direct usage on web applications due to [Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS)](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/CORS) policies. Consider using a proxy server. Only populated when the requesting app can access the file's content. If the file isn't shared publicly, the URL returned in `files.thumbnailLink` must be fetched using a credentialed request. "thumbnailVersion": "A String", # Output only. The thumbnail version for use in thumbnail cache invalidation. "trashed": True or False, # Whether the file has been trashed, either explicitly or from a trashed parent folder. Only the owner may trash a file, and other users cannot see files in the owner's trash. "trashedTime": "A String", # The time that the item was trashed (RFC 3339 date-time). Only populated for items in shared drives. @@ -542,7 +542,7 @@

Method Details

"domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this Team Drive and items inside this Team Drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this Team Drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this Team Drive. "downloadRestriction": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # Download restrictions applied by shared drive managers. "restrictedForReaders": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for readers. - "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers. + "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers. }, "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders. "teamMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this Team Drive is restricted to members of this Team Drive. diff --git a/docs/dyn/drive_v3.drives.html b/docs/dyn/drive_v3.drives.html index f67b77adebd..d4f84e46fd7 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/drive_v3.drives.html +++ b/docs/dyn/drive_v3.drives.html @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@

Method Details

"domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this shared drive and items inside this shared drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this shared drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this shared drive. "downloadRestriction": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # Download restrictions applied by shared drive managers. "restrictedForReaders": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for readers. - "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers. + "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers. }, "driveMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this shared drive is restricted to its members. "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders. @@ -220,7 +220,7 @@

Method Details

"domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this shared drive and items inside this shared drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this shared drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this shared drive. "downloadRestriction": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # Download restrictions applied by shared drive managers. "restrictedForReaders": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for readers. - "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers. + "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers. }, "driveMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this shared drive is restricted to its members. "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders. @@ -303,7 +303,7 @@

Method Details

"domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this shared drive and items inside this shared drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this shared drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this shared drive. "downloadRestriction": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # Download restrictions applied by shared drive managers. "restrictedForReaders": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for readers. - "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers. + "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers. }, "driveMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this shared drive is restricted to its members. "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders. @@ -370,7 +370,7 @@

Method Details

"domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this shared drive and items inside this shared drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this shared drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this shared drive. "downloadRestriction": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # Download restrictions applied by shared drive managers. "restrictedForReaders": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for readers. - "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers. + "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers. }, "driveMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this shared drive is restricted to its members. "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders. @@ -442,7 +442,7 @@

Method Details

"domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this shared drive and items inside this shared drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this shared drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this shared drive. "downloadRestriction": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # Download restrictions applied by shared drive managers. "restrictedForReaders": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for readers. - "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers. + "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers. }, "driveMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this shared drive is restricted to its members. "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders. @@ -527,7 +527,7 @@

Method Details

"domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this shared drive and items inside this shared drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this shared drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this shared drive. "downloadRestriction": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # Download restrictions applied by shared drive managers. "restrictedForReaders": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for readers. - "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers. + "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers. }, "driveMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this shared drive is restricted to its members. "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders. @@ -589,7 +589,7 @@

Method Details

"domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this shared drive and items inside this shared drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this shared drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this shared drive. "downloadRestriction": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # Download restrictions applied by shared drive managers. "restrictedForReaders": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for readers. - "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers. + "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers. }, "driveMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this shared drive is restricted to its members. "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders. @@ -650,7 +650,7 @@

Method Details

"domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this shared drive and items inside this shared drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this shared drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this shared drive. "downloadRestriction": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # Download restrictions applied by shared drive managers. "restrictedForReaders": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for readers. - "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers. + "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers. }, "driveMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this shared drive is restricted to its members. "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders. diff --git a/docs/dyn/drive_v3.files.html b/docs/dyn/drive_v3.files.html index af90854c012..3411ac555f0 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/drive_v3.files.html +++ b/docs/dyn/drive_v3.files.html @@ -79,40 +79,40 @@

Instance Methods

Close httplib2 connections.

copy(fileId, body=None, enforceSingleParent=None, ignoreDefaultVisibility=None, includeLabels=None, includePermissionsForView=None, keepRevisionForever=None, ocrLanguage=None, supportsAllDrives=None, supportsTeamDrives=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Creates a copy of a file and applies any requested updates with patch semantics.

+

Creates a copy of a file and applies any requested updates with patch semantics. For more information, see [Create and manage files](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/create-file).

create(body=None, enforceSingleParent=None, ignoreDefaultVisibility=None, includeLabels=None, includePermissionsForView=None, keepRevisionForever=None, media_body=None, media_mime_type=None, ocrLanguage=None, supportsAllDrives=None, supportsTeamDrives=None, useContentAsIndexableText=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Creates a new file. This method supports an */upload* URI and accepts uploaded media with the following characteristics: - *Maximum file size:* 5,120 GB - *Accepted Media MIME types:*`*/*` Note: Specify a valid MIME type, rather than the literal `*/*` value. The literal `*/*` is only used to indicate that any valid MIME type can be uploaded. For more information on uploading files, see [Upload file data](/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-uploads). Apps creating shortcuts with `files.create` must specify the MIME type `application/vnd.google-apps.shortcut`. Apps should specify a file extension in the `name` property when inserting files with the API. For example, an operation to insert a JPEG file should specify something like `"name": "cat.jpg"` in the metadata. Subsequent `GET` requests include the read-only `fileExtension` property populated with the extension originally specified in the `title` property. When a Google Drive user requests to download a file, or when the file is downloaded through the sync client, Drive builds a full filename (with extension) based on the title. In cases where the extension is missing, Drive attempts to determine the extension based on the file's MIME type.

+

Creates a file. For more information, see [Create and manage files](/workspace/drive/api/guides/create-file). This method supports an */upload* URI and accepts uploaded media with the following characteristics: - *Maximum file size:* 5,120 GB - *Accepted Media MIME types:* `*/*` (Specify a valid MIME type, rather than the literal `*/*` value. The literal `*/*` is only used to indicate that any valid MIME type can be uploaded. For more information, see [Google Workspace and Google Drive supported MIME types](/workspace/drive/api/guides/mime-types).) For more information on uploading files, see [Upload file data](/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-uploads). Apps creating shortcuts with the `create` method must specify the MIME type `application/vnd.google-apps.shortcut`. Apps should specify a file extension in the `name` property when inserting files with the API. For example, an operation to insert a JPEG file should specify something like `"name": "cat.jpg"` in the metadata. Subsequent `GET` requests include the read-only `fileExtension` property populated with the extension originally specified in the `name` property. When a Google Drive user requests to download a file, or when the file is downloaded through the sync client, Drive builds a full filename (with extension) based on the name. In cases where the extension is missing, Drive attempts to determine the extension based on the file's MIME type.

delete(fileId, enforceSingleParent=None, supportsAllDrives=None, supportsTeamDrives=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Permanently deletes a file owned by the user without moving it to the trash. If the file belongs to a shared drive, the user must be an `organizer` on the parent folder. If the target is a folder, all descendants owned by the user are also deleted.

+

Permanently deletes a file owned by the user without moving it to the trash. For more information, see [Trash or delete files and folders](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/delete). If the file belongs to a shared drive, the user must be an `organizer` on the parent folder. If the target is a folder, all descendants owned by the user are also deleted.

download(fileId, mimeType=None, revisionId=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Downloads content of a file. Operations are valid for 24 hours from the time of creation.

+

Downloads the content of a file. For more information, see [Download and export files](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-downloads). Operations are valid for 24 hours from the time of creation.

emptyTrash(driveId=None, enforceSingleParent=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Permanently deletes all of the user's trashed files.

+

Permanently deletes all of the user's trashed files. For more information, see [Trash or delete files and folders](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/delete).

export(fileId, mimeType, x__xgafv=None)

-

Exports a Google Workspace document to the requested MIME type and returns exported byte content. Note that the exported content is limited to 10MB.

+

Exports a Google Workspace document to the requested MIME type and returns exported byte content. For more information, see [Download and export files](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-downloads). Note that the exported content is limited to 10 MB.

export_media(fileId, mimeType, x__xgafv=None)

-

Exports a Google Workspace document to the requested MIME type and returns exported byte content. Note that the exported content is limited to 10MB.

+

Exports a Google Workspace document to the requested MIME type and returns exported byte content. For more information, see [Download and export files](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-downloads). Note that the exported content is limited to 10 MB.

generateIds(count=None, space=None, type=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Generates a set of file IDs which can be provided in create or copy requests.

+

Generates a set of file IDs which can be provided in create or copy requests. For more information, see [Create and manage files](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/create-file).

get(fileId, acknowledgeAbuse=None, includeLabels=None, includePermissionsForView=None, supportsAllDrives=None, supportsTeamDrives=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Gets a file's metadata or content by ID. If you provide the URL parameter `alt=media`, then the response includes the file contents in the response body. Downloading content with `alt=media` only works if the file is stored in Drive. To download Google Docs, Sheets, and Slides use [`files.export`](/workspace/drive/api/reference/rest/v3/files/export) instead. For more information, see [Download & export files](/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-downloads).

+

Gets a file's metadata or content by ID. For more information, see [Search for files and folders](/workspace/drive/api/guides/search-files). If you provide the URL parameter `alt=media`, then the response includes the file contents in the response body. Downloading content with `alt=media` only works if the file is stored in Drive. To download Google Docs, Sheets, and Slides use [`files.export`](/workspace/drive/api/reference/rest/v3/files/export) instead. For more information, see [Download and export files](/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-downloads).

get_media(fileId, acknowledgeAbuse=None, includeLabels=None, includePermissionsForView=None, supportsAllDrives=None, supportsTeamDrives=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Gets a file's metadata or content by ID. If you provide the URL parameter `alt=media`, then the response includes the file contents in the response body. Downloading content with `alt=media` only works if the file is stored in Drive. To download Google Docs, Sheets, and Slides use [`files.export`](/workspace/drive/api/reference/rest/v3/files/export) instead. For more information, see [Download & export files](/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-downloads).

+

Gets a file's metadata or content by ID. For more information, see [Search for files and folders](/workspace/drive/api/guides/search-files). If you provide the URL parameter `alt=media`, then the response includes the file contents in the response body. Downloading content with `alt=media` only works if the file is stored in Drive. To download Google Docs, Sheets, and Slides use [`files.export`](/workspace/drive/api/reference/rest/v3/files/export) instead. For more information, see [Download and export files](/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-downloads).

list(corpora=None, corpus=None, driveId=None, includeItemsFromAllDrives=None, includeLabels=None, includePermissionsForView=None, includeTeamDriveItems=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, q=None, spaces=None, supportsAllDrives=None, supportsTeamDrives=None, teamDriveId=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Lists the user's files. This method accepts the `q` parameter, which is a search query combining one or more search terms. For more information, see the [Search for files & folders](/workspace/drive/api/guides/search-files) guide. *Note:* This method returns *all* files by default, including trashed files. If you don't want trashed files to appear in the list, use the `trashed=false` query parameter to remove trashed files from the results.

+

Lists the user's files. For more information, see [Search for files and folders](/workspace/drive/api/guides/search-files). This method accepts the `q` parameter, which is a search query combining one or more search terms. This method returns *all* files by default, including trashed files. If you don't want trashed files to appear in the list, use the `trashed=false` query parameter to remove trashed files from the results.

listLabels(fileId, maxResults=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Lists the labels on a file.

+

Lists the labels on a file. For more information, see [List labels on a file](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/list-labels).

listLabels_next()

Retrieves the next page of results.

@@ -121,13 +121,13 @@

Instance Methods

Retrieves the next page of results.

modifyLabels(fileId, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Modifies the set of labels applied to a file. Returns a list of the labels that were added or modified.

+

Modifies the set of labels applied to a file. For more information, see [Set a label field on a file](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/set-label). Returns a list of the labels that were added or modified.

update(fileId, addParents=None, body=None, enforceSingleParent=None, includeLabels=None, includePermissionsForView=None, keepRevisionForever=None, media_body=None, media_mime_type=None, ocrLanguage=None, removeParents=None, supportsAllDrives=None, supportsTeamDrives=None, useContentAsIndexableText=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Updates a file's metadata and/or content. When calling this method, only populate fields in the request that you want to modify. When updating fields, some fields might be changed automatically, such as `modifiedDate`. This method supports patch semantics. This method supports an */upload* URI and accepts uploaded media with the following characteristics: - *Maximum file size:* 5,120 GB - *Accepted Media MIME types:*`*/*` Note: Specify a valid MIME type, rather than the literal `*/*` value. The literal `*/*` is only used to indicate that any valid MIME type can be uploaded. For more information on uploading files, see [Upload file data](/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-uploads).

+

Updates a file's metadata, content, or both. When calling this method, only populate fields in the request that you want to modify. When updating fields, some fields might be changed automatically, such as `modifiedDate`. This method supports patch semantics. This method supports an */upload* URI and accepts uploaded media with the following characteristics: - *Maximum file size:* 5,120 GB - *Accepted Media MIME types:* `*/*` (Specify a valid MIME type, rather than the literal `*/*` value. The literal `*/*` is only used to indicate that any valid MIME type can be uploaded. For more information, see [Google Workspace and Google Drive supported MIME types](/workspace/drive/api/guides/mime-types).) For more information on uploading files, see [Upload file data](/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-uploads).

watch(fileId, acknowledgeAbuse=None, body=None, includeLabels=None, includePermissionsForView=None, supportsAllDrives=None, supportsTeamDrives=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Subscribes to changes to a file.

+

Subscribes to changes to a file. For more information, see [Notifications for resource changes](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/push).

Method Details

close() @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@

Method Details

copy(fileId, body=None, enforceSingleParent=None, ignoreDefaultVisibility=None, includeLabels=None, includePermissionsForView=None, keepRevisionForever=None, ocrLanguage=None, supportsAllDrives=None, supportsTeamDrives=None, x__xgafv=None) -
Creates a copy of a file and applies any requested updates with patch semantics.
+  
Creates a copy of a file and applies any requested updates with patch semantics. For more information, see [Create and manage files](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/create-file).
 
 Args:
   fileId: string, The ID of the file. (required)
@@ -148,56 +148,56 @@ 

Method Details

# Entries with null values are cleared in update and copy requests. These properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties. "a_key": "A String", }, - "capabilities": { # Output only. Capabilities the current user has on this file. Each capability corresponds to a fine-grained action that a user may take. + "capabilities": { # Output only. Capabilities the current user has on this file. Each capability corresponds to a fine-grained action that a user may take. For more information, see [Understand file capabilities](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-sharing#capabilities). "canAcceptOwnership": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user is the pending owner of the file. Not populated for shared drive files. - "canAddChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add children to this folder. This is always false when the item is not a folder. - "canAddFolderFromAnotherDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add a folder from another drive (different shared drive or My Drive) to this folder. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canAddChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add children to this folder. This is always `false` when the item isn't a folder. + "canAddFolderFromAnotherDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add a folder from another drive (different shared drive or My Drive) to this folder. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canAddMyDriveParent": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add a parent for the item without removing an existing parent in the same request. Not populated for shared drive files. "canChangeCopyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the `copyRequiresWriterPermission` restriction of this file. "canChangeItemDownloadRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the owner or organizer-applied download restrictions of the file. - "canChangeSecurityUpdateEnabled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the securityUpdateEnabled field on link share metadata. + "canChangeSecurityUpdateEnabled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the `securityUpdateEnabled` field on link share metadata. "canChangeViewersCanCopyContent": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. "canComment": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can comment on this file. - "canCopy": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can copy this file. For an item in a shared drive, whether the current user can copy non-folder descendants of this item, or this item itself if it is not a folder. + "canCopy": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can copy this file. For an item in a shared drive, whether the current user can copy non-folder descendants of this item, or this item if it's not a folder. "canDelete": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can delete this file. - "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can delete children of this folder. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can delete children of this folder. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canDisableInheritedPermissions": True or False, # Whether a user can disable inherited permissions. "canDownload": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can download this file. "canEdit": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can edit this file. Other factors may limit the type of changes a user can make to a file. For example, see `canChangeCopyRequiresWriterPermission` or `canModifyContent`. "canEnableInheritedPermissions": True or False, # Whether a user can re-enable inherited permissions. - "canListChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can list the children of this folder. This is always false when the item is not a folder. + "canListChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can list the children of this folder. This is always `false` when the item isn't a folder. "canModifyContent": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can modify the content of this file. - "canModifyContentRestriction": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use one of `canModifyEditorContentRestriction`, `canModifyOwnerContentRestriction` or `canRemoveContentRestriction`. + "canModifyContentRestriction": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use one of `canModifyEditorContentRestriction`, `canModifyOwnerContentRestriction`, or `canRemoveContentRestriction`. "canModifyEditorContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add or modify content restrictions on the file which are editor restricted. "canModifyLabels": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can modify the labels on the file. "canModifyOwnerContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add or modify content restrictions which are owner restricted. - "canMoveChildrenOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder outside of the shared drive. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canMoveChildrenOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder outside of the shared drive. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canMoveChildrenOutOfTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveChildrenOutOfDrive` instead. - "canMoveChildrenWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder within this drive. This is false when the item is not a folder. Note that a request to move the child may still fail depending on the current user's access to the child and to the destination folder. + "canMoveChildrenWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder within this drive. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Note that a request to move the child may still fail depending on the current user's access to the child and to the destination folder. "canMoveChildrenWithinTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveChildrenWithinDrive` instead. "canMoveItemIntoTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemOutOfDrive` instead. - "canMoveItemOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item outside of this drive by changing its parent. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that is being added. + "canMoveItemOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item outside of this drive by changing its parent. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that's being added. "canMoveItemOutOfTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemOutOfDrive` instead. - "canMoveItemWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item within this drive. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that is being added and the parent that is being removed. + "canMoveItemWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item within this drive. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that's being added and the parent that is being removed. "canMoveItemWithinTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemWithinDrive` instead. "canMoveTeamDriveItem": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemWithinDrive` or `canMoveItemOutOfDrive` instead. "canReadDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the shared drive to which this file belongs. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canReadLabels": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the labels on the file. - "canReadRevisions": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the revisions resource of this file. For a shared drive item, whether revisions of non-folder descendants of this item, or this item itself if it is not a folder, can be read. + "canReadRevisions": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the revisions resource of this file. For a shared drive item, whether revisions of non-folder descendants of this item, or this item if it's not a folder, can be read. "canReadTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canReadDrive` instead. - "canRemoveChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can remove children from this folder. This is always false when the item is not a folder. For a folder in a shared drive, use `canDeleteChildren` or `canTrashChildren` instead. - "canRemoveContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether there is a content restriction on the file that can be removed by the current user. + "canRemoveChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can remove children from this folder. This is always `false` when the item isn't a folder. For a folder in a shared drive, use `canDeleteChildren` or `canTrashChildren` instead. + "canRemoveContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether there's a content restriction on the file that can be removed by the current user. "canRemoveMyDriveParent": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can remove a parent from the item without adding another parent in the same request. Not populated for shared drive files. "canRename": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can rename this file. "canShare": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can modify the sharing settings for this file. "canTrash": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this file to trash. - "canTrashChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can trash children of this folder. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canTrashChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can trash children of this folder. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canUntrash": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can restore this file from trash. }, "contentHints": { # Additional information about the content of the file. These fields are never populated in responses. - "indexableText": "A String", # Text to be indexed for the file to improve fullText queries. This is limited to 128KB in length and may contain HTML elements. + "indexableText": "A String", # Text to be indexed for the file to improve fullText queries. This is limited to 128 KB in length and may contain HTML elements. "thumbnail": { # A thumbnail for the file. This will only be used if Google Drive cannot generate a standard thumbnail. - "image": "A String", # The thumbnail data encoded with URL-safe Base64 (RFC 4648 section 5). + "image": "A String", # The thumbnail data encoded with URL-safe Base64 ([RFC 4648 section 5](https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc4648#section-5)). "mimeType": "A String", # The MIME type of the thumbnail. }, }, @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@

Method Details

"ownerRestricted": True or False, # Whether the content restriction can only be modified or removed by a user who owns the file. For files in shared drives, any user with `organizer` capabilities can modify or remove this content restriction. "readOnly": True or False, # Whether the content of the file is read-only. If a file is read-only, a new revision of the file may not be added, comments may not be added or modified, and the title of the file may not be modified. "reason": "A String", # Reason for why the content of the file is restricted. This is only mutable on requests that also set `readOnly=true`. - "restrictingUser": { # Information about a Drive user. # Output only. The user who set the content restriction. Only populated if `readOnly` is true. + "restrictingUser": { # Information about a Drive user. # Output only. The user who set the content restriction. Only populated if `readOnly=true`. "displayName": "A String", # Output only. A plain text displayable name for this user. "emailAddress": "A String", # Output only. The email address of the user. This may not be present in certain contexts if the user has not made their email address visible to the requester. "kind": "drive#user", # Output only. Identifies what kind of resource this is. Value: the fixed string `drive#user`. @@ -219,17 +219,17 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # Output only. The type of the content restriction. Currently the only possible value is `globalContentRestriction`. }, ], - "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download this file, should be disabled for readers and commenters. + "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download this file should be disabled for readers and commenters. "createdTime": "A String", # The time at which the file was created (RFC 3339 date-time). "description": "A String", # A short description of the file. "downloadRestrictions": { # Download restrictions applied to the file. # Download restrictions applied on the file. "effectiveDownloadRestrictionWithContext": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # Output only. The effective download restriction applied to this file. This considers all restriction settings and DLP rules. "restrictedForReaders": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for readers. - "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers. + "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers. }, - "itemDownloadRestriction": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # The download restriction of the file applied directly by the owner or organizer. This does not take into account shared drive settings or DLP rules. + "itemDownloadRestriction": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # The download restriction of the file applied directly by the owner or organizer. This doesn't take into account shared drive settings or DLP rules. "restrictedForReaders": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for readers. - "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers. + "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers. }, }, "driveId": "A String", # Output only. ID of the shared drive the file resides in. Only populated for items in shared drives. @@ -238,10 +238,10 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "fileExtension": "A String", # Output only. The final component of `fullFileExtension`. This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. - "folderColorRgb": "A String", # The color for a folder or a shortcut to a folder as an RGB hex string. The supported colors are published in the `folderColorPalette` field of the About resource. If an unsupported color is specified, the closest color in the palette is used instead. - "fullFileExtension": "A String", # Output only. The full file extension extracted from the `name` field. May contain multiple concatenated extensions, such as "tar.gz". This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. This is automatically updated when the `name` field changes, however it is not cleared if the new name does not contain a valid extension. + "folderColorRgb": "A String", # The color for a folder or a shortcut to a folder as an RGB hex string. The supported colors are published in the `folderColorPalette` field of the [`about`](/workspace/drive/api/reference/rest/v3/about) resource. If an unsupported color is specified, the closest color in the palette is used instead. + "fullFileExtension": "A String", # Output only. The full file extension extracted from the `name` field. May contain multiple concatenated extensions, such as "tar.gz". This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. This is automatically updated when the `name` field changes, however it's not cleared if the new name doesn't contain a valid extension. "hasAugmentedPermissions": True or False, # Output only. Whether there are permissions directly on this file. This field is only populated for items in shared drives. - "hasThumbnail": True or False, # Output only. Whether this file has a thumbnail. This does not indicate whether the requesting app has access to the thumbnail. To check access, look for the presence of the thumbnailLink field. + "hasThumbnail": True or False, # Output only. Whether this file has a thumbnail. This doesn't indicate whether the requesting app has access to the thumbnail. To check access, look for the presence of the thumbnailLink field. "headRevisionId": "A String", # Output only. The ID of the file's head revision. This is currently only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. "iconLink": "A String", # Output only. A static, unauthenticated link to the file's icon. "id": "A String", # The ID of the file. @@ -326,11 +326,11 @@

Method Details

"securityUpdateEnabled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the security update is enabled for this file. }, "md5Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The MD5 checksum for the content of the file. This is only applicable to files with binary content in Google Drive. - "mimeType": "A String", # The MIME type of the file. Google Drive attempts to automatically detect an appropriate value from uploaded content, if no value is provided. The value cannot be changed unless a new revision is uploaded. If a file is created with a Google Doc MIME type, the uploaded content is imported, if possible. The supported import formats are published in the About resource. + "mimeType": "A String", # The MIME type of the file. Google Drive attempts to automatically detect an appropriate value from uploaded content, if no value is provided. The value cannot be changed unless a new revision is uploaded. If a file is created with a Google Doc MIME type, the uploaded content is imported, if possible. The supported import formats are published in the [`about`](/workspace/drive/api/reference/rest/v3/about) resource. "modifiedByMe": True or False, # Output only. Whether the file has been modified by this user. "modifiedByMeTime": "A String", # The last time the file was modified by the user (RFC 3339 date-time). "modifiedTime": "A String", # he last time the file was modified by anyone (RFC 3339 date-time). Note that setting modifiedTime will also update modifiedByMeTime for the user. - "name": "A String", # The name of the file. This is not necessarily unique within a folder. Note that for immutable items such as the top level folders of shared drives, My Drive root folder, and Application Data folder the name is constant. + "name": "A String", # The name of the file. This isn't necessarily unique within a folder. Note that for immutable items such as the top-level folders of shared drives, the My Drive root folder, and the Application Data folder, the name is constant. "originalFilename": "A String", # The original filename of the uploaded content if available, or else the original value of the `name` field. This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. "ownedByMe": True or False, # Output only. Whether the user owns the file. Not populated for items in shared drives. "owners": [ # Output only. The owner of this file. Only certain legacy files may have more than one owner. This field isn't populated for items in shared drives. @@ -389,8 +389,8 @@

Method Details

}, "quotaBytesUsed": "A String", # Output only. The number of storage quota bytes used by the file. This includes the head revision as well as previous revisions with `keepForever` enabled. "resourceKey": "A String", # Output only. A key needed to access the item via a shared link. - "sha1Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA1 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it is not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. - "sha256Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA256 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it is not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. + "sha1Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA1 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it's not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. + "sha256Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA256 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it's not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. "shared": True or False, # Output only. Whether the file has been shared. Not populated for items in shared drives. "sharedWithMeTime": "A String", # The time at which the file was shared with the user, if applicable (RFC 3339 date-time). "sharingUser": { # Information about a Drive user. # Output only. The user who shared the file with the requesting user, if applicable. @@ -404,15 +404,15 @@

Method Details

"shortcutDetails": { # Shortcut file details. Only populated for shortcut files, which have the mimeType field set to `application/vnd.google-apps.shortcut`. Can only be set on `files.create` requests. "targetId": "A String", # The ID of the file that this shortcut points to. Can only be set on `files.create` requests. "targetMimeType": "A String", # Output only. The MIME type of the file that this shortcut points to. The value of this field is a snapshot of the target's MIME type, captured when the shortcut is created. - "targetResourceKey": "A String", # Output only. The ResourceKey for the target file. + "targetResourceKey": "A String", # Output only. The `resourceKey` for the target file. }, - "size": "A String", # Output only. Size in bytes of blobs and first party editor files. Won't be populated for files that have no size, like shortcuts and folders. - "spaces": [ # Output only. The list of spaces which contain the file. The currently supported values are 'drive', 'appDataFolder' and 'photos'. + "size": "A String", # Output only. Size in bytes of blobs and Google Workspace editor files. Won't be populated for files that have no size, like shortcuts and folders. + "spaces": [ # Output only. The list of spaces which contain the file. The currently supported values are `drive`, `appDataFolder`, and `photos`. "A String", ], "starred": True or False, # Whether the user has starred the file. "teamDriveId": "A String", # Deprecated: Output only. Use `driveId` instead. - "thumbnailLink": "A String", # Output only. A short-lived link to the file's thumbnail, if available. Typically lasts on the order of hours. Not intended for direct usage on web applications due to [Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS)](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/CORS) policies, consider using a proxy server. Only populated when the requesting app can access the file's content. If the file isn't shared publicly, the URL returned in `Files.thumbnailLink` must be fetched using a credentialed request. + "thumbnailLink": "A String", # Output only. A short-lived link to the file's thumbnail, if available. Typically lasts on the order of hours. Not intended for direct usage on web applications due to [Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS)](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/CORS) policies. Consider using a proxy server. Only populated when the requesting app can access the file's content. If the file isn't shared publicly, the URL returned in `files.thumbnailLink` must be fetched using a credentialed request. "thumbnailVersion": "A String", # Output only. The thumbnail version for use in thumbnail cache invalidation. "trashed": True or False, # Whether the file has been trashed, either explicitly or from a trashed parent folder. Only the owner may trash a file, and other users cannot see files in the owner's trash. "trashedTime": "A String", # The time that the item was trashed (RFC 3339 date-time). Only populated for items in shared drives. @@ -438,11 +438,11 @@

Method Details

"writersCanShare": True or False, # Whether users with only `writer` permission can modify the file's permissions. Not populated for items in shared drives. } - enforceSingleParent: boolean, Deprecated. Copying files into multiple folders is no longer supported. Use shortcuts instead. + enforceSingleParent: boolean, Deprecated: Copying files into multiple folders is no longer supported. Use shortcuts instead. ignoreDefaultVisibility: boolean, Whether to ignore the domain's default visibility settings for the created file. Domain administrators can choose to make all uploaded files visible to the domain by default; this parameter bypasses that behavior for the request. Permissions are still inherited from parent folders. includeLabels: string, A comma-separated list of IDs of labels to include in the `labelInfo` part of the response. - includePermissionsForView: string, Specifies which additional view's permissions to include in the response. Only 'published' is supported. - keepRevisionForever: boolean, Whether to set the 'keepForever' field in the new head revision. This is only applicable to files with binary content in Google Drive. Only 200 revisions for the file can be kept forever. If the limit is reached, try deleting pinned revisions. + includePermissionsForView: string, Specifies which additional view's permissions to include in the response. Only `published` is supported. + keepRevisionForever: boolean, Whether to set the `keepForever` field in the new head revision. This is only applicable to files with binary content in Google Drive. Only 200 revisions for the file can be kept forever. If the limit is reached, try deleting pinned revisions. ocrLanguage: string, A language hint for OCR processing during image import (ISO 639-1 code). supportsAllDrives: boolean, Whether the requesting application supports both My Drives and shared drives. supportsTeamDrives: boolean, Deprecated: Use `supportsAllDrives` instead. @@ -459,56 +459,56 @@

Method Details

# Entries with null values are cleared in update and copy requests. These properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties. "a_key": "A String", }, - "capabilities": { # Output only. Capabilities the current user has on this file. Each capability corresponds to a fine-grained action that a user may take. + "capabilities": { # Output only. Capabilities the current user has on this file. Each capability corresponds to a fine-grained action that a user may take. For more information, see [Understand file capabilities](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-sharing#capabilities). "canAcceptOwnership": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user is the pending owner of the file. Not populated for shared drive files. - "canAddChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add children to this folder. This is always false when the item is not a folder. - "canAddFolderFromAnotherDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add a folder from another drive (different shared drive or My Drive) to this folder. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canAddChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add children to this folder. This is always `false` when the item isn't a folder. + "canAddFolderFromAnotherDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add a folder from another drive (different shared drive or My Drive) to this folder. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canAddMyDriveParent": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add a parent for the item without removing an existing parent in the same request. Not populated for shared drive files. "canChangeCopyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the `copyRequiresWriterPermission` restriction of this file. "canChangeItemDownloadRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the owner or organizer-applied download restrictions of the file. - "canChangeSecurityUpdateEnabled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the securityUpdateEnabled field on link share metadata. + "canChangeSecurityUpdateEnabled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the `securityUpdateEnabled` field on link share metadata. "canChangeViewersCanCopyContent": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. "canComment": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can comment on this file. - "canCopy": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can copy this file. For an item in a shared drive, whether the current user can copy non-folder descendants of this item, or this item itself if it is not a folder. + "canCopy": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can copy this file. For an item in a shared drive, whether the current user can copy non-folder descendants of this item, or this item if it's not a folder. "canDelete": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can delete this file. - "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can delete children of this folder. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can delete children of this folder. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canDisableInheritedPermissions": True or False, # Whether a user can disable inherited permissions. "canDownload": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can download this file. "canEdit": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can edit this file. Other factors may limit the type of changes a user can make to a file. For example, see `canChangeCopyRequiresWriterPermission` or `canModifyContent`. "canEnableInheritedPermissions": True or False, # Whether a user can re-enable inherited permissions. - "canListChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can list the children of this folder. This is always false when the item is not a folder. + "canListChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can list the children of this folder. This is always `false` when the item isn't a folder. "canModifyContent": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can modify the content of this file. - "canModifyContentRestriction": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use one of `canModifyEditorContentRestriction`, `canModifyOwnerContentRestriction` or `canRemoveContentRestriction`. + "canModifyContentRestriction": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use one of `canModifyEditorContentRestriction`, `canModifyOwnerContentRestriction`, or `canRemoveContentRestriction`. "canModifyEditorContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add or modify content restrictions on the file which are editor restricted. "canModifyLabels": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can modify the labels on the file. "canModifyOwnerContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add or modify content restrictions which are owner restricted. - "canMoveChildrenOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder outside of the shared drive. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canMoveChildrenOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder outside of the shared drive. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canMoveChildrenOutOfTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveChildrenOutOfDrive` instead. - "canMoveChildrenWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder within this drive. This is false when the item is not a folder. Note that a request to move the child may still fail depending on the current user's access to the child and to the destination folder. + "canMoveChildrenWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder within this drive. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Note that a request to move the child may still fail depending on the current user's access to the child and to the destination folder. "canMoveChildrenWithinTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveChildrenWithinDrive` instead. "canMoveItemIntoTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemOutOfDrive` instead. - "canMoveItemOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item outside of this drive by changing its parent. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that is being added. + "canMoveItemOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item outside of this drive by changing its parent. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that's being added. "canMoveItemOutOfTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemOutOfDrive` instead. - "canMoveItemWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item within this drive. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that is being added and the parent that is being removed. + "canMoveItemWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item within this drive. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that's being added and the parent that is being removed. "canMoveItemWithinTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemWithinDrive` instead. "canMoveTeamDriveItem": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemWithinDrive` or `canMoveItemOutOfDrive` instead. "canReadDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the shared drive to which this file belongs. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canReadLabels": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the labels on the file. - "canReadRevisions": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the revisions resource of this file. For a shared drive item, whether revisions of non-folder descendants of this item, or this item itself if it is not a folder, can be read. + "canReadRevisions": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the revisions resource of this file. For a shared drive item, whether revisions of non-folder descendants of this item, or this item if it's not a folder, can be read. "canReadTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canReadDrive` instead. - "canRemoveChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can remove children from this folder. This is always false when the item is not a folder. For a folder in a shared drive, use `canDeleteChildren` or `canTrashChildren` instead. - "canRemoveContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether there is a content restriction on the file that can be removed by the current user. + "canRemoveChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can remove children from this folder. This is always `false` when the item isn't a folder. For a folder in a shared drive, use `canDeleteChildren` or `canTrashChildren` instead. + "canRemoveContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether there's a content restriction on the file that can be removed by the current user. "canRemoveMyDriveParent": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can remove a parent from the item without adding another parent in the same request. Not populated for shared drive files. "canRename": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can rename this file. "canShare": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can modify the sharing settings for this file. "canTrash": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this file to trash. - "canTrashChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can trash children of this folder. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canTrashChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can trash children of this folder. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canUntrash": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can restore this file from trash. }, "contentHints": { # Additional information about the content of the file. These fields are never populated in responses. - "indexableText": "A String", # Text to be indexed for the file to improve fullText queries. This is limited to 128KB in length and may contain HTML elements. + "indexableText": "A String", # Text to be indexed for the file to improve fullText queries. This is limited to 128 KB in length and may contain HTML elements. "thumbnail": { # A thumbnail for the file. This will only be used if Google Drive cannot generate a standard thumbnail. - "image": "A String", # The thumbnail data encoded with URL-safe Base64 (RFC 4648 section 5). + "image": "A String", # The thumbnail data encoded with URL-safe Base64 ([RFC 4648 section 5](https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc4648#section-5)). "mimeType": "A String", # The MIME type of the thumbnail. }, }, @@ -517,7 +517,7 @@

Method Details

"ownerRestricted": True or False, # Whether the content restriction can only be modified or removed by a user who owns the file. For files in shared drives, any user with `organizer` capabilities can modify or remove this content restriction. "readOnly": True or False, # Whether the content of the file is read-only. If a file is read-only, a new revision of the file may not be added, comments may not be added or modified, and the title of the file may not be modified. "reason": "A String", # Reason for why the content of the file is restricted. This is only mutable on requests that also set `readOnly=true`. - "restrictingUser": { # Information about a Drive user. # Output only. The user who set the content restriction. Only populated if `readOnly` is true. + "restrictingUser": { # Information about a Drive user. # Output only. The user who set the content restriction. Only populated if `readOnly=true`. "displayName": "A String", # Output only. A plain text displayable name for this user. "emailAddress": "A String", # Output only. The email address of the user. This may not be present in certain contexts if the user has not made their email address visible to the requester. "kind": "drive#user", # Output only. Identifies what kind of resource this is. Value: the fixed string `drive#user`. @@ -530,17 +530,17 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # Output only. The type of the content restriction. Currently the only possible value is `globalContentRestriction`. }, ], - "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download this file, should be disabled for readers and commenters. + "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download this file should be disabled for readers and commenters. "createdTime": "A String", # The time at which the file was created (RFC 3339 date-time). "description": "A String", # A short description of the file. "downloadRestrictions": { # Download restrictions applied to the file. # Download restrictions applied on the file. "effectiveDownloadRestrictionWithContext": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # Output only. The effective download restriction applied to this file. This considers all restriction settings and DLP rules. "restrictedForReaders": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for readers. - "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers. + "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers. }, - "itemDownloadRestriction": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # The download restriction of the file applied directly by the owner or organizer. This does not take into account shared drive settings or DLP rules. + "itemDownloadRestriction": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # The download restriction of the file applied directly by the owner or organizer. This doesn't take into account shared drive settings or DLP rules. "restrictedForReaders": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for readers. - "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers. + "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers. }, }, "driveId": "A String", # Output only. ID of the shared drive the file resides in. Only populated for items in shared drives. @@ -549,10 +549,10 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "fileExtension": "A String", # Output only. The final component of `fullFileExtension`. This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. - "folderColorRgb": "A String", # The color for a folder or a shortcut to a folder as an RGB hex string. The supported colors are published in the `folderColorPalette` field of the About resource. If an unsupported color is specified, the closest color in the palette is used instead. - "fullFileExtension": "A String", # Output only. The full file extension extracted from the `name` field. May contain multiple concatenated extensions, such as "tar.gz". This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. This is automatically updated when the `name` field changes, however it is not cleared if the new name does not contain a valid extension. + "folderColorRgb": "A String", # The color for a folder or a shortcut to a folder as an RGB hex string. The supported colors are published in the `folderColorPalette` field of the [`about`](/workspace/drive/api/reference/rest/v3/about) resource. If an unsupported color is specified, the closest color in the palette is used instead. + "fullFileExtension": "A String", # Output only. The full file extension extracted from the `name` field. May contain multiple concatenated extensions, such as "tar.gz". This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. This is automatically updated when the `name` field changes, however it's not cleared if the new name doesn't contain a valid extension. "hasAugmentedPermissions": True or False, # Output only. Whether there are permissions directly on this file. This field is only populated for items in shared drives. - "hasThumbnail": True or False, # Output only. Whether this file has a thumbnail. This does not indicate whether the requesting app has access to the thumbnail. To check access, look for the presence of the thumbnailLink field. + "hasThumbnail": True or False, # Output only. Whether this file has a thumbnail. This doesn't indicate whether the requesting app has access to the thumbnail. To check access, look for the presence of the thumbnailLink field. "headRevisionId": "A String", # Output only. The ID of the file's head revision. This is currently only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. "iconLink": "A String", # Output only. A static, unauthenticated link to the file's icon. "id": "A String", # The ID of the file. @@ -637,11 +637,11 @@

Method Details

"securityUpdateEnabled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the security update is enabled for this file. }, "md5Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The MD5 checksum for the content of the file. This is only applicable to files with binary content in Google Drive. - "mimeType": "A String", # The MIME type of the file. Google Drive attempts to automatically detect an appropriate value from uploaded content, if no value is provided. The value cannot be changed unless a new revision is uploaded. If a file is created with a Google Doc MIME type, the uploaded content is imported, if possible. The supported import formats are published in the About resource. + "mimeType": "A String", # The MIME type of the file. Google Drive attempts to automatically detect an appropriate value from uploaded content, if no value is provided. The value cannot be changed unless a new revision is uploaded. If a file is created with a Google Doc MIME type, the uploaded content is imported, if possible. The supported import formats are published in the [`about`](/workspace/drive/api/reference/rest/v3/about) resource. "modifiedByMe": True or False, # Output only. Whether the file has been modified by this user. "modifiedByMeTime": "A String", # The last time the file was modified by the user (RFC 3339 date-time). "modifiedTime": "A String", # he last time the file was modified by anyone (RFC 3339 date-time). Note that setting modifiedTime will also update modifiedByMeTime for the user. - "name": "A String", # The name of the file. This is not necessarily unique within a folder. Note that for immutable items such as the top level folders of shared drives, My Drive root folder, and Application Data folder the name is constant. + "name": "A String", # The name of the file. This isn't necessarily unique within a folder. Note that for immutable items such as the top-level folders of shared drives, the My Drive root folder, and the Application Data folder, the name is constant. "originalFilename": "A String", # The original filename of the uploaded content if available, or else the original value of the `name` field. This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. "ownedByMe": True or False, # Output only. Whether the user owns the file. Not populated for items in shared drives. "owners": [ # Output only. The owner of this file. Only certain legacy files may have more than one owner. This field isn't populated for items in shared drives. @@ -700,8 +700,8 @@

Method Details

}, "quotaBytesUsed": "A String", # Output only. The number of storage quota bytes used by the file. This includes the head revision as well as previous revisions with `keepForever` enabled. "resourceKey": "A String", # Output only. A key needed to access the item via a shared link. - "sha1Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA1 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it is not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. - "sha256Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA256 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it is not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. + "sha1Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA1 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it's not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. + "sha256Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA256 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it's not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. "shared": True or False, # Output only. Whether the file has been shared. Not populated for items in shared drives. "sharedWithMeTime": "A String", # The time at which the file was shared with the user, if applicable (RFC 3339 date-time). "sharingUser": { # Information about a Drive user. # Output only. The user who shared the file with the requesting user, if applicable. @@ -715,15 +715,15 @@

Method Details

"shortcutDetails": { # Shortcut file details. Only populated for shortcut files, which have the mimeType field set to `application/vnd.google-apps.shortcut`. Can only be set on `files.create` requests. "targetId": "A String", # The ID of the file that this shortcut points to. Can only be set on `files.create` requests. "targetMimeType": "A String", # Output only. The MIME type of the file that this shortcut points to. The value of this field is a snapshot of the target's MIME type, captured when the shortcut is created. - "targetResourceKey": "A String", # Output only. The ResourceKey for the target file. + "targetResourceKey": "A String", # Output only. The `resourceKey` for the target file. }, - "size": "A String", # Output only. Size in bytes of blobs and first party editor files. Won't be populated for files that have no size, like shortcuts and folders. - "spaces": [ # Output only. The list of spaces which contain the file. The currently supported values are 'drive', 'appDataFolder' and 'photos'. + "size": "A String", # Output only. Size in bytes of blobs and Google Workspace editor files. Won't be populated for files that have no size, like shortcuts and folders. + "spaces": [ # Output only. The list of spaces which contain the file. The currently supported values are `drive`, `appDataFolder`, and `photos`. "A String", ], "starred": True or False, # Whether the user has starred the file. "teamDriveId": "A String", # Deprecated: Output only. Use `driveId` instead. - "thumbnailLink": "A String", # Output only. A short-lived link to the file's thumbnail, if available. Typically lasts on the order of hours. Not intended for direct usage on web applications due to [Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS)](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/CORS) policies, consider using a proxy server. Only populated when the requesting app can access the file's content. If the file isn't shared publicly, the URL returned in `Files.thumbnailLink` must be fetched using a credentialed request. + "thumbnailLink": "A String", # Output only. A short-lived link to the file's thumbnail, if available. Typically lasts on the order of hours. Not intended for direct usage on web applications due to [Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS)](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/CORS) policies. Consider using a proxy server. Only populated when the requesting app can access the file's content. If the file isn't shared publicly, the URL returned in `files.thumbnailLink` must be fetched using a credentialed request. "thumbnailVersion": "A String", # Output only. The thumbnail version for use in thumbnail cache invalidation. "trashed": True or False, # Whether the file has been trashed, either explicitly or from a trashed parent folder. Only the owner may trash a file, and other users cannot see files in the owner's trash. "trashedTime": "A String", # The time that the item was trashed (RFC 3339 date-time). Only populated for items in shared drives. @@ -752,7 +752,7 @@

Method Details

create(body=None, enforceSingleParent=None, ignoreDefaultVisibility=None, includeLabels=None, includePermissionsForView=None, keepRevisionForever=None, media_body=None, media_mime_type=None, ocrLanguage=None, supportsAllDrives=None, supportsTeamDrives=None, useContentAsIndexableText=None, x__xgafv=None) -
 Creates a new file. This method supports an */upload* URI and accepts uploaded media with the following characteristics: - *Maximum file size:* 5,120 GB - *Accepted Media MIME types:*`*/*` Note: Specify a valid MIME type, rather than the literal `*/*` value. The literal `*/*` is only used to indicate that any valid MIME type can be uploaded. For more information on uploading files, see [Upload file data](/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-uploads). Apps creating shortcuts with `files.create` must specify the MIME type `application/vnd.google-apps.shortcut`. Apps should specify a file extension in the `name` property when inserting files with the API. For example, an operation to insert a JPEG file should specify something like `"name": "cat.jpg"` in the metadata. Subsequent `GET` requests include the read-only `fileExtension` property populated with the extension originally specified in the `title` property. When a Google Drive user requests to download a file, or when the file is downloaded through the sync client, Drive builds a full filename (with extension) based on the title. In cases where the extension is missing, Drive attempts to determine the extension based on the file's MIME type.
+  
 Creates a file. For more information, see [Create and manage files](/workspace/drive/api/guides/create-file). This method supports an */upload* URI and accepts uploaded media with the following characteristics: - *Maximum file size:* 5,120 GB - *Accepted Media MIME types:* `*/*` (Specify a valid MIME type, rather than the literal `*/*` value. The literal `*/*` is only used to indicate that any valid MIME type can be uploaded. For more information, see [Google Workspace and Google Drive supported MIME types](/workspace/drive/api/guides/mime-types).) For more information on uploading files, see [Upload file data](/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-uploads). Apps creating shortcuts with the `create` method must specify the MIME type `application/vnd.google-apps.shortcut`. Apps should specify a file extension in the `name` property when inserting files with the API. For example, an operation to insert a JPEG file should specify something like `"name": "cat.jpg"` in the metadata. Subsequent `GET` requests include the read-only `fileExtension` property populated with the extension originally specified in the `name` property. When a Google Drive user requests to download a file, or when the file is downloaded through the sync client, Drive builds a full filename (with extension) based on the name. In cases where the extension is missing, Drive attempts to determine the extension based on the file's MIME type.
 
 Args:
   body: object, The request body.
@@ -763,56 +763,56 @@ 

Method Details

# Entries with null values are cleared in update and copy requests. These properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties. "a_key": "A String", }, - "capabilities": { # Output only. Capabilities the current user has on this file. Each capability corresponds to a fine-grained action that a user may take. + "capabilities": { # Output only. Capabilities the current user has on this file. Each capability corresponds to a fine-grained action that a user may take. For more information, see [Understand file capabilities](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-sharing#capabilities). "canAcceptOwnership": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user is the pending owner of the file. Not populated for shared drive files. - "canAddChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add children to this folder. This is always false when the item is not a folder. - "canAddFolderFromAnotherDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add a folder from another drive (different shared drive or My Drive) to this folder. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canAddChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add children to this folder. This is always `false` when the item isn't a folder. + "canAddFolderFromAnotherDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add a folder from another drive (different shared drive or My Drive) to this folder. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canAddMyDriveParent": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add a parent for the item without removing an existing parent in the same request. Not populated for shared drive files. "canChangeCopyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the `copyRequiresWriterPermission` restriction of this file. "canChangeItemDownloadRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the owner or organizer-applied download restrictions of the file. - "canChangeSecurityUpdateEnabled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the securityUpdateEnabled field on link share metadata. + "canChangeSecurityUpdateEnabled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the `securityUpdateEnabled` field on link share metadata. "canChangeViewersCanCopyContent": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. "canComment": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can comment on this file. - "canCopy": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can copy this file. For an item in a shared drive, whether the current user can copy non-folder descendants of this item, or this item itself if it is not a folder. + "canCopy": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can copy this file. For an item in a shared drive, whether the current user can copy non-folder descendants of this item, or this item if it's not a folder. "canDelete": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can delete this file. - "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can delete children of this folder. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can delete children of this folder. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canDisableInheritedPermissions": True or False, # Whether a user can disable inherited permissions. "canDownload": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can download this file. "canEdit": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can edit this file. Other factors may limit the type of changes a user can make to a file. For example, see `canChangeCopyRequiresWriterPermission` or `canModifyContent`. "canEnableInheritedPermissions": True or False, # Whether a user can re-enable inherited permissions. - "canListChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can list the children of this folder. This is always false when the item is not a folder. + "canListChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can list the children of this folder. This is always `false` when the item isn't a folder. "canModifyContent": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can modify the content of this file. - "canModifyContentRestriction": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use one of `canModifyEditorContentRestriction`, `canModifyOwnerContentRestriction` or `canRemoveContentRestriction`. + "canModifyContentRestriction": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use one of `canModifyEditorContentRestriction`, `canModifyOwnerContentRestriction`, or `canRemoveContentRestriction`. "canModifyEditorContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add or modify content restrictions on the file which are editor restricted. "canModifyLabels": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can modify the labels on the file. "canModifyOwnerContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add or modify content restrictions which are owner restricted. - "canMoveChildrenOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder outside of the shared drive. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canMoveChildrenOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder outside of the shared drive. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canMoveChildrenOutOfTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveChildrenOutOfDrive` instead. - "canMoveChildrenWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder within this drive. This is false when the item is not a folder. Note that a request to move the child may still fail depending on the current user's access to the child and to the destination folder. + "canMoveChildrenWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder within this drive. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Note that a request to move the child may still fail depending on the current user's access to the child and to the destination folder. "canMoveChildrenWithinTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveChildrenWithinDrive` instead. "canMoveItemIntoTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemOutOfDrive` instead. - "canMoveItemOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item outside of this drive by changing its parent. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that is being added. + "canMoveItemOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item outside of this drive by changing its parent. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that's being added. "canMoveItemOutOfTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemOutOfDrive` instead. - "canMoveItemWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item within this drive. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that is being added and the parent that is being removed. + "canMoveItemWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item within this drive. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that's being added and the parent that is being removed. "canMoveItemWithinTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemWithinDrive` instead. "canMoveTeamDriveItem": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemWithinDrive` or `canMoveItemOutOfDrive` instead. "canReadDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the shared drive to which this file belongs. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canReadLabels": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the labels on the file. - "canReadRevisions": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the revisions resource of this file. For a shared drive item, whether revisions of non-folder descendants of this item, or this item itself if it is not a folder, can be read. + "canReadRevisions": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the revisions resource of this file. For a shared drive item, whether revisions of non-folder descendants of this item, or this item if it's not a folder, can be read. "canReadTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canReadDrive` instead. - "canRemoveChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can remove children from this folder. This is always false when the item is not a folder. For a folder in a shared drive, use `canDeleteChildren` or `canTrashChildren` instead. - "canRemoveContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether there is a content restriction on the file that can be removed by the current user. + "canRemoveChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can remove children from this folder. This is always `false` when the item isn't a folder. For a folder in a shared drive, use `canDeleteChildren` or `canTrashChildren` instead. + "canRemoveContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether there's a content restriction on the file that can be removed by the current user. "canRemoveMyDriveParent": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can remove a parent from the item without adding another parent in the same request. Not populated for shared drive files. "canRename": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can rename this file. "canShare": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can modify the sharing settings for this file. "canTrash": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this file to trash. - "canTrashChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can trash children of this folder. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canTrashChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can trash children of this folder. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canUntrash": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can restore this file from trash. }, "contentHints": { # Additional information about the content of the file. These fields are never populated in responses. - "indexableText": "A String", # Text to be indexed for the file to improve fullText queries. This is limited to 128KB in length and may contain HTML elements. + "indexableText": "A String", # Text to be indexed for the file to improve fullText queries. This is limited to 128 KB in length and may contain HTML elements. "thumbnail": { # A thumbnail for the file. This will only be used if Google Drive cannot generate a standard thumbnail. - "image": "A String", # The thumbnail data encoded with URL-safe Base64 (RFC 4648 section 5). + "image": "A String", # The thumbnail data encoded with URL-safe Base64 ([RFC 4648 section 5](https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc4648#section-5)). "mimeType": "A String", # The MIME type of the thumbnail. }, }, @@ -821,7 +821,7 @@

Method Details

"ownerRestricted": True or False, # Whether the content restriction can only be modified or removed by a user who owns the file. For files in shared drives, any user with `organizer` capabilities can modify or remove this content restriction. "readOnly": True or False, # Whether the content of the file is read-only. If a file is read-only, a new revision of the file may not be added, comments may not be added or modified, and the title of the file may not be modified. "reason": "A String", # Reason for why the content of the file is restricted. This is only mutable on requests that also set `readOnly=true`. - "restrictingUser": { # Information about a Drive user. # Output only. The user who set the content restriction. Only populated if `readOnly` is true. + "restrictingUser": { # Information about a Drive user. # Output only. The user who set the content restriction. Only populated if `readOnly=true`. "displayName": "A String", # Output only. A plain text displayable name for this user. "emailAddress": "A String", # Output only. The email address of the user. This may not be present in certain contexts if the user has not made their email address visible to the requester. "kind": "drive#user", # Output only. Identifies what kind of resource this is. Value: the fixed string `drive#user`. @@ -834,17 +834,17 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # Output only. The type of the content restriction. Currently the only possible value is `globalContentRestriction`. }, ], - "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download this file, should be disabled for readers and commenters. + "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download this file should be disabled for readers and commenters. "createdTime": "A String", # The time at which the file was created (RFC 3339 date-time). "description": "A String", # A short description of the file. "downloadRestrictions": { # Download restrictions applied to the file. # Download restrictions applied on the file. "effectiveDownloadRestrictionWithContext": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # Output only. The effective download restriction applied to this file. This considers all restriction settings and DLP rules. "restrictedForReaders": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for readers. - "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers. + "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers. }, - "itemDownloadRestriction": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # The download restriction of the file applied directly by the owner or organizer. This does not take into account shared drive settings or DLP rules. + "itemDownloadRestriction": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # The download restriction of the file applied directly by the owner or organizer. This doesn't take into account shared drive settings or DLP rules. "restrictedForReaders": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for readers. - "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers. + "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers. }, }, "driveId": "A String", # Output only. ID of the shared drive the file resides in. Only populated for items in shared drives. @@ -853,10 +853,10 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "fileExtension": "A String", # Output only. The final component of `fullFileExtension`. This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. - "folderColorRgb": "A String", # The color for a folder or a shortcut to a folder as an RGB hex string. The supported colors are published in the `folderColorPalette` field of the About resource. If an unsupported color is specified, the closest color in the palette is used instead. - "fullFileExtension": "A String", # Output only. The full file extension extracted from the `name` field. May contain multiple concatenated extensions, such as "tar.gz". This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. This is automatically updated when the `name` field changes, however it is not cleared if the new name does not contain a valid extension. + "folderColorRgb": "A String", # The color for a folder or a shortcut to a folder as an RGB hex string. The supported colors are published in the `folderColorPalette` field of the [`about`](/workspace/drive/api/reference/rest/v3/about) resource. If an unsupported color is specified, the closest color in the palette is used instead. + "fullFileExtension": "A String", # Output only. The full file extension extracted from the `name` field. May contain multiple concatenated extensions, such as "tar.gz". This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. This is automatically updated when the `name` field changes, however it's not cleared if the new name doesn't contain a valid extension. "hasAugmentedPermissions": True or False, # Output only. Whether there are permissions directly on this file. This field is only populated for items in shared drives. - "hasThumbnail": True or False, # Output only. Whether this file has a thumbnail. This does not indicate whether the requesting app has access to the thumbnail. To check access, look for the presence of the thumbnailLink field. + "hasThumbnail": True or False, # Output only. Whether this file has a thumbnail. This doesn't indicate whether the requesting app has access to the thumbnail. To check access, look for the presence of the thumbnailLink field. "headRevisionId": "A String", # Output only. The ID of the file's head revision. This is currently only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. "iconLink": "A String", # Output only. A static, unauthenticated link to the file's icon. "id": "A String", # The ID of the file. @@ -941,11 +941,11 @@

Method Details

"securityUpdateEnabled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the security update is enabled for this file. }, "md5Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The MD5 checksum for the content of the file. This is only applicable to files with binary content in Google Drive. - "mimeType": "A String", # The MIME type of the file. Google Drive attempts to automatically detect an appropriate value from uploaded content, if no value is provided. The value cannot be changed unless a new revision is uploaded. If a file is created with a Google Doc MIME type, the uploaded content is imported, if possible. The supported import formats are published in the About resource. + "mimeType": "A String", # The MIME type of the file. Google Drive attempts to automatically detect an appropriate value from uploaded content, if no value is provided. The value cannot be changed unless a new revision is uploaded. If a file is created with a Google Doc MIME type, the uploaded content is imported, if possible. The supported import formats are published in the [`about`](/workspace/drive/api/reference/rest/v3/about) resource. "modifiedByMe": True or False, # Output only. Whether the file has been modified by this user. "modifiedByMeTime": "A String", # The last time the file was modified by the user (RFC 3339 date-time). "modifiedTime": "A String", # he last time the file was modified by anyone (RFC 3339 date-time). Note that setting modifiedTime will also update modifiedByMeTime for the user. - "name": "A String", # The name of the file. This is not necessarily unique within a folder. Note that for immutable items such as the top level folders of shared drives, My Drive root folder, and Application Data folder the name is constant. + "name": "A String", # The name of the file. This isn't necessarily unique within a folder. Note that for immutable items such as the top-level folders of shared drives, the My Drive root folder, and the Application Data folder, the name is constant. "originalFilename": "A String", # The original filename of the uploaded content if available, or else the original value of the `name` field. This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. "ownedByMe": True or False, # Output only. Whether the user owns the file. Not populated for items in shared drives. "owners": [ # Output only. The owner of this file. Only certain legacy files may have more than one owner. This field isn't populated for items in shared drives. @@ -1004,8 +1004,8 @@

Method Details

}, "quotaBytesUsed": "A String", # Output only. The number of storage quota bytes used by the file. This includes the head revision as well as previous revisions with `keepForever` enabled. "resourceKey": "A String", # Output only. A key needed to access the item via a shared link. - "sha1Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA1 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it is not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. - "sha256Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA256 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it is not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. + "sha1Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA1 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it's not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. + "sha256Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA256 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it's not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. "shared": True or False, # Output only. Whether the file has been shared. Not populated for items in shared drives. "sharedWithMeTime": "A String", # The time at which the file was shared with the user, if applicable (RFC 3339 date-time). "sharingUser": { # Information about a Drive user. # Output only. The user who shared the file with the requesting user, if applicable. @@ -1019,15 +1019,15 @@

Method Details

"shortcutDetails": { # Shortcut file details. Only populated for shortcut files, which have the mimeType field set to `application/vnd.google-apps.shortcut`. Can only be set on `files.create` requests. "targetId": "A String", # The ID of the file that this shortcut points to. Can only be set on `files.create` requests. "targetMimeType": "A String", # Output only. The MIME type of the file that this shortcut points to. The value of this field is a snapshot of the target's MIME type, captured when the shortcut is created. - "targetResourceKey": "A String", # Output only. The ResourceKey for the target file. + "targetResourceKey": "A String", # Output only. The `resourceKey` for the target file. }, - "size": "A String", # Output only. Size in bytes of blobs and first party editor files. Won't be populated for files that have no size, like shortcuts and folders. - "spaces": [ # Output only. The list of spaces which contain the file. The currently supported values are 'drive', 'appDataFolder' and 'photos'. + "size": "A String", # Output only. Size in bytes of blobs and Google Workspace editor files. Won't be populated for files that have no size, like shortcuts and folders. + "spaces": [ # Output only. The list of spaces which contain the file. The currently supported values are `drive`, `appDataFolder`, and `photos`. "A String", ], "starred": True or False, # Whether the user has starred the file. "teamDriveId": "A String", # Deprecated: Output only. Use `driveId` instead. - "thumbnailLink": "A String", # Output only. A short-lived link to the file's thumbnail, if available. Typically lasts on the order of hours. Not intended for direct usage on web applications due to [Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS)](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/CORS) policies, consider using a proxy server. Only populated when the requesting app can access the file's content. If the file isn't shared publicly, the URL returned in `Files.thumbnailLink` must be fetched using a credentialed request. + "thumbnailLink": "A String", # Output only. A short-lived link to the file's thumbnail, if available. Typically lasts on the order of hours. Not intended for direct usage on web applications due to [Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS)](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/CORS) policies. Consider using a proxy server. Only populated when the requesting app can access the file's content. If the file isn't shared publicly, the URL returned in `files.thumbnailLink` must be fetched using a credentialed request. "thumbnailVersion": "A String", # Output only. The thumbnail version for use in thumbnail cache invalidation. "trashed": True or False, # Whether the file has been trashed, either explicitly or from a trashed parent folder. Only the owner may trash a file, and other users cannot see files in the owner's trash. "trashedTime": "A String", # The time that the item was trashed (RFC 3339 date-time). Only populated for items in shared drives. @@ -1053,11 +1053,11 @@

Method Details

"writersCanShare": True or False, # Whether users with only `writer` permission can modify the file's permissions. Not populated for items in shared drives. } - enforceSingleParent: boolean, Deprecated. Creating files in multiple folders is no longer supported. + enforceSingleParent: boolean, Deprecated: Creating files in multiple folders is no longer supported. ignoreDefaultVisibility: boolean, Whether to ignore the domain's default visibility settings for the created file. Domain administrators can choose to make all uploaded files visible to the domain by default; this parameter bypasses that behavior for the request. Permissions are still inherited from parent folders. includeLabels: string, A comma-separated list of IDs of labels to include in the `labelInfo` part of the response. - includePermissionsForView: string, Specifies which additional view's permissions to include in the response. Only 'published' is supported. - keepRevisionForever: boolean, Whether to set the 'keepForever' field in the new head revision. This is only applicable to files with binary content in Google Drive. Only 200 revisions for the file can be kept forever. If the limit is reached, try deleting pinned revisions. + includePermissionsForView: string, Specifies which additional view's permissions to include in the response. Only `published` is supported. + keepRevisionForever: boolean, Whether to set the `keepForever` field in the new head revision. This is only applicable to files with binary content in Google Drive. Only 200 revisions for the file can be kept forever. If the limit is reached, try deleting pinned revisions. media_body: string, The filename of the media request body, or an instance of a MediaUpload object. media_mime_type: string, The MIME type of the media request body, or an instance of a MediaUpload object. ocrLanguage: string, A language hint for OCR processing during image import (ISO 639-1 code). @@ -1077,56 +1077,56 @@

Method Details

# Entries with null values are cleared in update and copy requests. These properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties. "a_key": "A String", }, - "capabilities": { # Output only. Capabilities the current user has on this file. Each capability corresponds to a fine-grained action that a user may take. + "capabilities": { # Output only. Capabilities the current user has on this file. Each capability corresponds to a fine-grained action that a user may take. For more information, see [Understand file capabilities](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-sharing#capabilities). "canAcceptOwnership": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user is the pending owner of the file. Not populated for shared drive files. - "canAddChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add children to this folder. This is always false when the item is not a folder. - "canAddFolderFromAnotherDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add a folder from another drive (different shared drive or My Drive) to this folder. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canAddChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add children to this folder. This is always `false` when the item isn't a folder. + "canAddFolderFromAnotherDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add a folder from another drive (different shared drive or My Drive) to this folder. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canAddMyDriveParent": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add a parent for the item without removing an existing parent in the same request. Not populated for shared drive files. "canChangeCopyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the `copyRequiresWriterPermission` restriction of this file. "canChangeItemDownloadRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the owner or organizer-applied download restrictions of the file. - "canChangeSecurityUpdateEnabled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the securityUpdateEnabled field on link share metadata. + "canChangeSecurityUpdateEnabled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the `securityUpdateEnabled` field on link share metadata. "canChangeViewersCanCopyContent": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. "canComment": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can comment on this file. - "canCopy": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can copy this file. For an item in a shared drive, whether the current user can copy non-folder descendants of this item, or this item itself if it is not a folder. + "canCopy": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can copy this file. For an item in a shared drive, whether the current user can copy non-folder descendants of this item, or this item if it's not a folder. "canDelete": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can delete this file. - "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can delete children of this folder. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can delete children of this folder. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canDisableInheritedPermissions": True or False, # Whether a user can disable inherited permissions. "canDownload": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can download this file. "canEdit": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can edit this file. Other factors may limit the type of changes a user can make to a file. For example, see `canChangeCopyRequiresWriterPermission` or `canModifyContent`. "canEnableInheritedPermissions": True or False, # Whether a user can re-enable inherited permissions. - "canListChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can list the children of this folder. This is always false when the item is not a folder. + "canListChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can list the children of this folder. This is always `false` when the item isn't a folder. "canModifyContent": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can modify the content of this file. - "canModifyContentRestriction": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use one of `canModifyEditorContentRestriction`, `canModifyOwnerContentRestriction` or `canRemoveContentRestriction`. + "canModifyContentRestriction": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use one of `canModifyEditorContentRestriction`, `canModifyOwnerContentRestriction`, or `canRemoveContentRestriction`. "canModifyEditorContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add or modify content restrictions on the file which are editor restricted. "canModifyLabels": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can modify the labels on the file. "canModifyOwnerContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add or modify content restrictions which are owner restricted. - "canMoveChildrenOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder outside of the shared drive. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canMoveChildrenOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder outside of the shared drive. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canMoveChildrenOutOfTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveChildrenOutOfDrive` instead. - "canMoveChildrenWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder within this drive. This is false when the item is not a folder. Note that a request to move the child may still fail depending on the current user's access to the child and to the destination folder. + "canMoveChildrenWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder within this drive. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Note that a request to move the child may still fail depending on the current user's access to the child and to the destination folder. "canMoveChildrenWithinTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveChildrenWithinDrive` instead. "canMoveItemIntoTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemOutOfDrive` instead. - "canMoveItemOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item outside of this drive by changing its parent. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that is being added. + "canMoveItemOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item outside of this drive by changing its parent. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that's being added. "canMoveItemOutOfTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemOutOfDrive` instead. - "canMoveItemWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item within this drive. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that is being added and the parent that is being removed. + "canMoveItemWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item within this drive. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that's being added and the parent that is being removed. "canMoveItemWithinTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemWithinDrive` instead. "canMoveTeamDriveItem": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemWithinDrive` or `canMoveItemOutOfDrive` instead. "canReadDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the shared drive to which this file belongs. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canReadLabels": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the labels on the file. - "canReadRevisions": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the revisions resource of this file. For a shared drive item, whether revisions of non-folder descendants of this item, or this item itself if it is not a folder, can be read. + "canReadRevisions": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the revisions resource of this file. For a shared drive item, whether revisions of non-folder descendants of this item, or this item if it's not a folder, can be read. "canReadTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canReadDrive` instead. - "canRemoveChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can remove children from this folder. This is always false when the item is not a folder. For a folder in a shared drive, use `canDeleteChildren` or `canTrashChildren` instead. - "canRemoveContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether there is a content restriction on the file that can be removed by the current user. + "canRemoveChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can remove children from this folder. This is always `false` when the item isn't a folder. For a folder in a shared drive, use `canDeleteChildren` or `canTrashChildren` instead. + "canRemoveContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether there's a content restriction on the file that can be removed by the current user. "canRemoveMyDriveParent": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can remove a parent from the item without adding another parent in the same request. Not populated for shared drive files. "canRename": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can rename this file. "canShare": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can modify the sharing settings for this file. "canTrash": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this file to trash. - "canTrashChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can trash children of this folder. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canTrashChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can trash children of this folder. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canUntrash": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can restore this file from trash. }, "contentHints": { # Additional information about the content of the file. These fields are never populated in responses. - "indexableText": "A String", # Text to be indexed for the file to improve fullText queries. This is limited to 128KB in length and may contain HTML elements. + "indexableText": "A String", # Text to be indexed for the file to improve fullText queries. This is limited to 128 KB in length and may contain HTML elements. "thumbnail": { # A thumbnail for the file. This will only be used if Google Drive cannot generate a standard thumbnail. - "image": "A String", # The thumbnail data encoded with URL-safe Base64 (RFC 4648 section 5). + "image": "A String", # The thumbnail data encoded with URL-safe Base64 ([RFC 4648 section 5](https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc4648#section-5)). "mimeType": "A String", # The MIME type of the thumbnail. }, }, @@ -1135,7 +1135,7 @@

Method Details

"ownerRestricted": True or False, # Whether the content restriction can only be modified or removed by a user who owns the file. For files in shared drives, any user with `organizer` capabilities can modify or remove this content restriction. "readOnly": True or False, # Whether the content of the file is read-only. If a file is read-only, a new revision of the file may not be added, comments may not be added or modified, and the title of the file may not be modified. "reason": "A String", # Reason for why the content of the file is restricted. This is only mutable on requests that also set `readOnly=true`. - "restrictingUser": { # Information about a Drive user. # Output only. The user who set the content restriction. Only populated if `readOnly` is true. + "restrictingUser": { # Information about a Drive user. # Output only. The user who set the content restriction. Only populated if `readOnly=true`. "displayName": "A String", # Output only. A plain text displayable name for this user. "emailAddress": "A String", # Output only. The email address of the user. This may not be present in certain contexts if the user has not made their email address visible to the requester. "kind": "drive#user", # Output only. Identifies what kind of resource this is. Value: the fixed string `drive#user`. @@ -1148,17 +1148,17 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # Output only. The type of the content restriction. Currently the only possible value is `globalContentRestriction`. }, ], - "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download this file, should be disabled for readers and commenters. + "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download this file should be disabled for readers and commenters. "createdTime": "A String", # The time at which the file was created (RFC 3339 date-time). "description": "A String", # A short description of the file. "downloadRestrictions": { # Download restrictions applied to the file. # Download restrictions applied on the file. "effectiveDownloadRestrictionWithContext": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # Output only. The effective download restriction applied to this file. This considers all restriction settings and DLP rules. "restrictedForReaders": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for readers. - "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers. + "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers. }, - "itemDownloadRestriction": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # The download restriction of the file applied directly by the owner or organizer. This does not take into account shared drive settings or DLP rules. + "itemDownloadRestriction": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # The download restriction of the file applied directly by the owner or organizer. This doesn't take into account shared drive settings or DLP rules. "restrictedForReaders": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for readers. - "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers. + "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers. }, }, "driveId": "A String", # Output only. ID of the shared drive the file resides in. Only populated for items in shared drives. @@ -1167,10 +1167,10 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "fileExtension": "A String", # Output only. The final component of `fullFileExtension`. This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. - "folderColorRgb": "A String", # The color for a folder or a shortcut to a folder as an RGB hex string. The supported colors are published in the `folderColorPalette` field of the About resource. If an unsupported color is specified, the closest color in the palette is used instead. - "fullFileExtension": "A String", # Output only. The full file extension extracted from the `name` field. May contain multiple concatenated extensions, such as "tar.gz". This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. This is automatically updated when the `name` field changes, however it is not cleared if the new name does not contain a valid extension. + "folderColorRgb": "A String", # The color for a folder or a shortcut to a folder as an RGB hex string. The supported colors are published in the `folderColorPalette` field of the [`about`](/workspace/drive/api/reference/rest/v3/about) resource. If an unsupported color is specified, the closest color in the palette is used instead. + "fullFileExtension": "A String", # Output only. The full file extension extracted from the `name` field. May contain multiple concatenated extensions, such as "tar.gz". This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. This is automatically updated when the `name` field changes, however it's not cleared if the new name doesn't contain a valid extension. "hasAugmentedPermissions": True or False, # Output only. Whether there are permissions directly on this file. This field is only populated for items in shared drives. - "hasThumbnail": True or False, # Output only. Whether this file has a thumbnail. This does not indicate whether the requesting app has access to the thumbnail. To check access, look for the presence of the thumbnailLink field. + "hasThumbnail": True or False, # Output only. Whether this file has a thumbnail. This doesn't indicate whether the requesting app has access to the thumbnail. To check access, look for the presence of the thumbnailLink field. "headRevisionId": "A String", # Output only. The ID of the file's head revision. This is currently only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. "iconLink": "A String", # Output only. A static, unauthenticated link to the file's icon. "id": "A String", # The ID of the file. @@ -1255,11 +1255,11 @@

Method Details

"securityUpdateEnabled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the security update is enabled for this file. }, "md5Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The MD5 checksum for the content of the file. This is only applicable to files with binary content in Google Drive. - "mimeType": "A String", # The MIME type of the file. Google Drive attempts to automatically detect an appropriate value from uploaded content, if no value is provided. The value cannot be changed unless a new revision is uploaded. If a file is created with a Google Doc MIME type, the uploaded content is imported, if possible. The supported import formats are published in the About resource. + "mimeType": "A String", # The MIME type of the file. Google Drive attempts to automatically detect an appropriate value from uploaded content, if no value is provided. The value cannot be changed unless a new revision is uploaded. If a file is created with a Google Doc MIME type, the uploaded content is imported, if possible. The supported import formats are published in the [`about`](/workspace/drive/api/reference/rest/v3/about) resource. "modifiedByMe": True or False, # Output only. Whether the file has been modified by this user. "modifiedByMeTime": "A String", # The last time the file was modified by the user (RFC 3339 date-time). "modifiedTime": "A String", # he last time the file was modified by anyone (RFC 3339 date-time). Note that setting modifiedTime will also update modifiedByMeTime for the user. - "name": "A String", # The name of the file. This is not necessarily unique within a folder. Note that for immutable items such as the top level folders of shared drives, My Drive root folder, and Application Data folder the name is constant. + "name": "A String", # The name of the file. This isn't necessarily unique within a folder. Note that for immutable items such as the top-level folders of shared drives, the My Drive root folder, and the Application Data folder, the name is constant. "originalFilename": "A String", # The original filename of the uploaded content if available, or else the original value of the `name` field. This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. "ownedByMe": True or False, # Output only. Whether the user owns the file. Not populated for items in shared drives. "owners": [ # Output only. The owner of this file. Only certain legacy files may have more than one owner. This field isn't populated for items in shared drives. @@ -1318,8 +1318,8 @@

Method Details

}, "quotaBytesUsed": "A String", # Output only. The number of storage quota bytes used by the file. This includes the head revision as well as previous revisions with `keepForever` enabled. "resourceKey": "A String", # Output only. A key needed to access the item via a shared link. - "sha1Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA1 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it is not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. - "sha256Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA256 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it is not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. + "sha1Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA1 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it's not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. + "sha256Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA256 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it's not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. "shared": True or False, # Output only. Whether the file has been shared. Not populated for items in shared drives. "sharedWithMeTime": "A String", # The time at which the file was shared with the user, if applicable (RFC 3339 date-time). "sharingUser": { # Information about a Drive user. # Output only. The user who shared the file with the requesting user, if applicable. @@ -1333,15 +1333,15 @@

Method Details

"shortcutDetails": { # Shortcut file details. Only populated for shortcut files, which have the mimeType field set to `application/vnd.google-apps.shortcut`. Can only be set on `files.create` requests. "targetId": "A String", # The ID of the file that this shortcut points to. Can only be set on `files.create` requests. "targetMimeType": "A String", # Output only. The MIME type of the file that this shortcut points to. The value of this field is a snapshot of the target's MIME type, captured when the shortcut is created. - "targetResourceKey": "A String", # Output only. The ResourceKey for the target file. + "targetResourceKey": "A String", # Output only. The `resourceKey` for the target file. }, - "size": "A String", # Output only. Size in bytes of blobs and first party editor files. Won't be populated for files that have no size, like shortcuts and folders. - "spaces": [ # Output only. The list of spaces which contain the file. The currently supported values are 'drive', 'appDataFolder' and 'photos'. + "size": "A String", # Output only. Size in bytes of blobs and Google Workspace editor files. Won't be populated for files that have no size, like shortcuts and folders. + "spaces": [ # Output only. The list of spaces which contain the file. The currently supported values are `drive`, `appDataFolder`, and `photos`. "A String", ], "starred": True or False, # Whether the user has starred the file. "teamDriveId": "A String", # Deprecated: Output only. Use `driveId` instead. - "thumbnailLink": "A String", # Output only. A short-lived link to the file's thumbnail, if available. Typically lasts on the order of hours. Not intended for direct usage on web applications due to [Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS)](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/CORS) policies, consider using a proxy server. Only populated when the requesting app can access the file's content. If the file isn't shared publicly, the URL returned in `Files.thumbnailLink` must be fetched using a credentialed request. + "thumbnailLink": "A String", # Output only. A short-lived link to the file's thumbnail, if available. Typically lasts on the order of hours. Not intended for direct usage on web applications due to [Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS)](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/CORS) policies. Consider using a proxy server. Only populated when the requesting app can access the file's content. If the file isn't shared publicly, the URL returned in `files.thumbnailLink` must be fetched using a credentialed request. "thumbnailVersion": "A String", # Output only. The thumbnail version for use in thumbnail cache invalidation. "trashed": True or False, # Whether the file has been trashed, either explicitly or from a trashed parent folder. Only the owner may trash a file, and other users cannot see files in the owner's trash. "trashedTime": "A String", # The time that the item was trashed (RFC 3339 date-time). Only populated for items in shared drives. @@ -1370,11 +1370,11 @@

Method Details

delete(fileId, enforceSingleParent=None, supportsAllDrives=None, supportsTeamDrives=None, x__xgafv=None) -
Permanently deletes a file owned by the user without moving it to the trash. If the file belongs to a shared drive, the user must be an `organizer` on the parent folder. If the target is a folder, all descendants owned by the user are also deleted.
+  
Permanently deletes a file owned by the user without moving it to the trash. For more information, see [Trash or delete files and folders](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/delete). If the file belongs to a shared drive, the user must be an `organizer` on the parent folder. If the target is a folder, all descendants owned by the user are also deleted.
 
 Args:
   fileId: string, The ID of the file. (required)
-  enforceSingleParent: boolean, Deprecated: If an item is not in a shared drive and its last parent is deleted but the item itself is not, the item will be placed under its owner's root.
+  enforceSingleParent: boolean, Deprecated: If an item isn't in a shared drive and its last parent is deleted but the item itself isn't, the item will be placed under its owner's root.
   supportsAllDrives: boolean, Whether the requesting application supports both My Drives and shared drives.
   supportsTeamDrives: boolean, Deprecated: Use `supportsAllDrives` instead.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
@@ -1386,11 +1386,11 @@ 

Method Details

download(fileId, mimeType=None, revisionId=None, x__xgafv=None) -
Downloads content of a file. Operations are valid for 24 hours from the time of creation.
+  
Downloads the content of a file. For more information, see [Download and export files](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-downloads). Operations are valid for 24 hours from the time of creation.
 
 Args:
   fileId: string, Required. The ID of the file to download. (required)
-  mimeType: string, Optional. The MIME type the file should be downloaded as. This field can only be set when downloading Google Workspace documents. See [Export MIME types for Google Workspace documents](/drive/api/guides/ref-export-formats) for the list of supported MIME types. If not set, a Google Workspace document is downloaded with a default MIME type. The default MIME type might change in the future.
+  mimeType: string, Optional. The MIME type the file should be downloaded as. This field can only be set when downloading Google Workspace documents. For a list of supported MIME types, see [Export MIME types for Google Workspace documents](/workspace/drive/api/guides/ref-export-formats). If not set, a Google Workspace document is downloaded with a default MIME type. The default MIME type might change in the future.
   revisionId: string, Optional. The revision ID of the file to download. This field can only be set when downloading blob files, Google Docs, and Google Sheets. Returns `INVALID_ARGUMENT` if downloading a specific revision on the file is unsupported.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
@@ -1423,11 +1423,11 @@ 

Method Details

emptyTrash(driveId=None, enforceSingleParent=None, x__xgafv=None) -
Permanently deletes all of the user's trashed files.
+  
Permanently deletes all of the user's trashed files. For more information, see [Trash or delete files and folders](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/delete).
 
 Args:
   driveId: string, If set, empties the trash of the provided shared drive.
-  enforceSingleParent: boolean, Deprecated: If an item is not in a shared drive and its last parent is deleted but the item itself is not, the item will be placed under its owner's root.
+  enforceSingleParent: boolean, Deprecated: If an item isn't in a shared drive and its last parent is deleted but the item itself isn't, the item will be placed under its owner's root.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -1437,11 +1437,11 @@ 

Method Details

export(fileId, mimeType, x__xgafv=None) -
Exports a Google Workspace document to the requested MIME type and returns exported byte content. Note that the exported content is limited to 10MB.
+  
Exports a Google Workspace document to the requested MIME type and returns exported byte content. For more information, see [Download and export files](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-downloads). Note that the exported content is limited to 10 MB.
 
 Args:
   fileId: string, The ID of the file. (required)
-  mimeType: string, Required. The MIME type of the format requested for this export. (required)
+  mimeType: string, Required. The MIME type of the format requested for this export. For a list of supported MIME types, see [Export MIME types for Google Workspace documents](/workspace/drive/api/guides/ref-export-formats). (required)
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -1451,11 +1451,11 @@ 

Method Details

export_media(fileId, mimeType, x__xgafv=None) -
Exports a Google Workspace document to the requested MIME type and returns exported byte content. Note that the exported content is limited to 10MB.
+  
Exports a Google Workspace document to the requested MIME type and returns exported byte content. For more information, see [Download and export files](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-downloads). Note that the exported content is limited to 10 MB.
 
 Args:
   fileId: string, The ID of the file. (required)
-  mimeType: string, Required. The MIME type of the format requested for this export. (required)
+  mimeType: string, Required. The MIME type of the format requested for this export. For a list of supported MIME types, see [Export MIME types for Google Workspace documents](/workspace/drive/api/guides/ref-export-formats). (required)
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -1465,12 +1465,12 @@ 

Method Details

generateIds(count=None, space=None, type=None, x__xgafv=None) -
Generates a set of file IDs which can be provided in create or copy requests.
+  
Generates a set of file IDs which can be provided in create or copy requests. For more information, see [Create and manage files](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/create-file).
 
 Args:
   count: integer, The number of IDs to return.
-  space: string, The space in which the IDs can be used to create new files. Supported values are 'drive' and 'appDataFolder'. (Default: 'drive')
-  type: string, The type of items which the IDs can be used for. Supported values are 'files' and 'shortcuts'. Note that 'shortcuts' are only supported in the `drive` 'space'. (Default: 'files')
+  space: string, The space in which the IDs can be used to create files. Supported values are `drive` and `appDataFolder`. (Default: `drive`.) For more information, see [File organization](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/about-files#file-organization).
+  type: string, The type of items which the IDs can be used for. Supported values are `files` and `shortcuts`. Note that `shortcuts` are only supported in the `drive` `space`. (Default: `files`.) For more information, see [File organization](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/about-files#file-organization).
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -1490,13 +1490,13 @@ 

Method Details

get(fileId, acknowledgeAbuse=None, includeLabels=None, includePermissionsForView=None, supportsAllDrives=None, supportsTeamDrives=None, x__xgafv=None) -
 Gets a file's metadata or content by ID. If you provide the URL parameter `alt=media`, then the response includes the file contents in the response body. Downloading content with `alt=media` only works if the file is stored in Drive. To download Google Docs, Sheets, and Slides use [`files.export`](/workspace/drive/api/reference/rest/v3/files/export) instead. For more information, see [Download & export files](/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-downloads).
+  
 Gets a file's metadata or content by ID. For more information, see [Search for files and folders](/workspace/drive/api/guides/search-files). If you provide the URL parameter `alt=media`, then the response includes the file contents in the response body. Downloading content with `alt=media` only works if the file is stored in Drive. To download Google Docs, Sheets, and Slides use [`files.export`](/workspace/drive/api/reference/rest/v3/files/export) instead. For more information, see [Download and export files](/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-downloads).
 
 Args:
   fileId: string, The ID of the file. (required)
   acknowledgeAbuse: boolean, Whether the user is acknowledging the risk of downloading known malware or other abusive files. This is only applicable when the `alt` parameter is set to `media` and the user is the owner of the file or an organizer of the shared drive in which the file resides.
   includeLabels: string, A comma-separated list of IDs of labels to include in the `labelInfo` part of the response.
-  includePermissionsForView: string, Specifies which additional view's permissions to include in the response. Only 'published' is supported.
+  includePermissionsForView: string, Specifies which additional view's permissions to include in the response. Only `published` is supported.
   supportsAllDrives: boolean, Whether the requesting application supports both My Drives and shared drives.
   supportsTeamDrives: boolean, Deprecated: Use `supportsAllDrives` instead.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
@@ -1512,56 +1512,56 @@ 

Method Details

# Entries with null values are cleared in update and copy requests. These properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties. "a_key": "A String", }, - "capabilities": { # Output only. Capabilities the current user has on this file. Each capability corresponds to a fine-grained action that a user may take. + "capabilities": { # Output only. Capabilities the current user has on this file. Each capability corresponds to a fine-grained action that a user may take. For more information, see [Understand file capabilities](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-sharing#capabilities). "canAcceptOwnership": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user is the pending owner of the file. Not populated for shared drive files. - "canAddChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add children to this folder. This is always false when the item is not a folder. - "canAddFolderFromAnotherDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add a folder from another drive (different shared drive or My Drive) to this folder. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canAddChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add children to this folder. This is always `false` when the item isn't a folder. + "canAddFolderFromAnotherDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add a folder from another drive (different shared drive or My Drive) to this folder. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canAddMyDriveParent": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add a parent for the item without removing an existing parent in the same request. Not populated for shared drive files. "canChangeCopyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the `copyRequiresWriterPermission` restriction of this file. "canChangeItemDownloadRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the owner or organizer-applied download restrictions of the file. - "canChangeSecurityUpdateEnabled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the securityUpdateEnabled field on link share metadata. + "canChangeSecurityUpdateEnabled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the `securityUpdateEnabled` field on link share metadata. "canChangeViewersCanCopyContent": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. "canComment": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can comment on this file. - "canCopy": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can copy this file. For an item in a shared drive, whether the current user can copy non-folder descendants of this item, or this item itself if it is not a folder. + "canCopy": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can copy this file. For an item in a shared drive, whether the current user can copy non-folder descendants of this item, or this item if it's not a folder. "canDelete": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can delete this file. - "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can delete children of this folder. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can delete children of this folder. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canDisableInheritedPermissions": True or False, # Whether a user can disable inherited permissions. "canDownload": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can download this file. "canEdit": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can edit this file. Other factors may limit the type of changes a user can make to a file. For example, see `canChangeCopyRequiresWriterPermission` or `canModifyContent`. "canEnableInheritedPermissions": True or False, # Whether a user can re-enable inherited permissions. - "canListChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can list the children of this folder. This is always false when the item is not a folder. + "canListChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can list the children of this folder. This is always `false` when the item isn't a folder. "canModifyContent": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can modify the content of this file. - "canModifyContentRestriction": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use one of `canModifyEditorContentRestriction`, `canModifyOwnerContentRestriction` or `canRemoveContentRestriction`. + "canModifyContentRestriction": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use one of `canModifyEditorContentRestriction`, `canModifyOwnerContentRestriction`, or `canRemoveContentRestriction`. "canModifyEditorContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add or modify content restrictions on the file which are editor restricted. "canModifyLabels": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can modify the labels on the file. "canModifyOwnerContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add or modify content restrictions which are owner restricted. - "canMoveChildrenOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder outside of the shared drive. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canMoveChildrenOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder outside of the shared drive. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canMoveChildrenOutOfTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveChildrenOutOfDrive` instead. - "canMoveChildrenWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder within this drive. This is false when the item is not a folder. Note that a request to move the child may still fail depending on the current user's access to the child and to the destination folder. + "canMoveChildrenWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder within this drive. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Note that a request to move the child may still fail depending on the current user's access to the child and to the destination folder. "canMoveChildrenWithinTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveChildrenWithinDrive` instead. "canMoveItemIntoTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemOutOfDrive` instead. - "canMoveItemOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item outside of this drive by changing its parent. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that is being added. + "canMoveItemOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item outside of this drive by changing its parent. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that's being added. "canMoveItemOutOfTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemOutOfDrive` instead. - "canMoveItemWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item within this drive. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that is being added and the parent that is being removed. + "canMoveItemWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item within this drive. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that's being added and the parent that is being removed. "canMoveItemWithinTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemWithinDrive` instead. "canMoveTeamDriveItem": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemWithinDrive` or `canMoveItemOutOfDrive` instead. "canReadDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the shared drive to which this file belongs. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canReadLabels": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the labels on the file. - "canReadRevisions": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the revisions resource of this file. For a shared drive item, whether revisions of non-folder descendants of this item, or this item itself if it is not a folder, can be read. + "canReadRevisions": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the revisions resource of this file. For a shared drive item, whether revisions of non-folder descendants of this item, or this item if it's not a folder, can be read. "canReadTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canReadDrive` instead. - "canRemoveChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can remove children from this folder. This is always false when the item is not a folder. For a folder in a shared drive, use `canDeleteChildren` or `canTrashChildren` instead. - "canRemoveContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether there is a content restriction on the file that can be removed by the current user. + "canRemoveChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can remove children from this folder. This is always `false` when the item isn't a folder. For a folder in a shared drive, use `canDeleteChildren` or `canTrashChildren` instead. + "canRemoveContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether there's a content restriction on the file that can be removed by the current user. "canRemoveMyDriveParent": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can remove a parent from the item without adding another parent in the same request. Not populated for shared drive files. "canRename": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can rename this file. "canShare": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can modify the sharing settings for this file. "canTrash": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this file to trash. - "canTrashChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can trash children of this folder. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canTrashChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can trash children of this folder. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canUntrash": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can restore this file from trash. }, "contentHints": { # Additional information about the content of the file. These fields are never populated in responses. - "indexableText": "A String", # Text to be indexed for the file to improve fullText queries. This is limited to 128KB in length and may contain HTML elements. + "indexableText": "A String", # Text to be indexed for the file to improve fullText queries. This is limited to 128 KB in length and may contain HTML elements. "thumbnail": { # A thumbnail for the file. This will only be used if Google Drive cannot generate a standard thumbnail. - "image": "A String", # The thumbnail data encoded with URL-safe Base64 (RFC 4648 section 5). + "image": "A String", # The thumbnail data encoded with URL-safe Base64 ([RFC 4648 section 5](https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc4648#section-5)). "mimeType": "A String", # The MIME type of the thumbnail. }, }, @@ -1570,7 +1570,7 @@

Method Details

"ownerRestricted": True or False, # Whether the content restriction can only be modified or removed by a user who owns the file. For files in shared drives, any user with `organizer` capabilities can modify or remove this content restriction. "readOnly": True or False, # Whether the content of the file is read-only. If a file is read-only, a new revision of the file may not be added, comments may not be added or modified, and the title of the file may not be modified. "reason": "A String", # Reason for why the content of the file is restricted. This is only mutable on requests that also set `readOnly=true`. - "restrictingUser": { # Information about a Drive user. # Output only. The user who set the content restriction. Only populated if `readOnly` is true. + "restrictingUser": { # Information about a Drive user. # Output only. The user who set the content restriction. Only populated if `readOnly=true`. "displayName": "A String", # Output only. A plain text displayable name for this user. "emailAddress": "A String", # Output only. The email address of the user. This may not be present in certain contexts if the user has not made their email address visible to the requester. "kind": "drive#user", # Output only. Identifies what kind of resource this is. Value: the fixed string `drive#user`. @@ -1583,17 +1583,17 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # Output only. The type of the content restriction. Currently the only possible value is `globalContentRestriction`. }, ], - "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download this file, should be disabled for readers and commenters. + "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download this file should be disabled for readers and commenters. "createdTime": "A String", # The time at which the file was created (RFC 3339 date-time). "description": "A String", # A short description of the file. "downloadRestrictions": { # Download restrictions applied to the file. # Download restrictions applied on the file. "effectiveDownloadRestrictionWithContext": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # Output only. The effective download restriction applied to this file. This considers all restriction settings and DLP rules. "restrictedForReaders": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for readers. - "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers. + "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers. }, - "itemDownloadRestriction": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # The download restriction of the file applied directly by the owner or organizer. This does not take into account shared drive settings or DLP rules. + "itemDownloadRestriction": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # The download restriction of the file applied directly by the owner or organizer. This doesn't take into account shared drive settings or DLP rules. "restrictedForReaders": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for readers. - "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers. + "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers. }, }, "driveId": "A String", # Output only. ID of the shared drive the file resides in. Only populated for items in shared drives. @@ -1602,10 +1602,10 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "fileExtension": "A String", # Output only. The final component of `fullFileExtension`. This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. - "folderColorRgb": "A String", # The color for a folder or a shortcut to a folder as an RGB hex string. The supported colors are published in the `folderColorPalette` field of the About resource. If an unsupported color is specified, the closest color in the palette is used instead. - "fullFileExtension": "A String", # Output only. The full file extension extracted from the `name` field. May contain multiple concatenated extensions, such as "tar.gz". This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. This is automatically updated when the `name` field changes, however it is not cleared if the new name does not contain a valid extension. + "folderColorRgb": "A String", # The color for a folder or a shortcut to a folder as an RGB hex string. The supported colors are published in the `folderColorPalette` field of the [`about`](/workspace/drive/api/reference/rest/v3/about) resource. If an unsupported color is specified, the closest color in the palette is used instead. + "fullFileExtension": "A String", # Output only. The full file extension extracted from the `name` field. May contain multiple concatenated extensions, such as "tar.gz". This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. This is automatically updated when the `name` field changes, however it's not cleared if the new name doesn't contain a valid extension. "hasAugmentedPermissions": True or False, # Output only. Whether there are permissions directly on this file. This field is only populated for items in shared drives. - "hasThumbnail": True or False, # Output only. Whether this file has a thumbnail. This does not indicate whether the requesting app has access to the thumbnail. To check access, look for the presence of the thumbnailLink field. + "hasThumbnail": True or False, # Output only. Whether this file has a thumbnail. This doesn't indicate whether the requesting app has access to the thumbnail. To check access, look for the presence of the thumbnailLink field. "headRevisionId": "A String", # Output only. The ID of the file's head revision. This is currently only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. "iconLink": "A String", # Output only. A static, unauthenticated link to the file's icon. "id": "A String", # The ID of the file. @@ -1690,11 +1690,11 @@

Method Details

"securityUpdateEnabled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the security update is enabled for this file. }, "md5Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The MD5 checksum for the content of the file. This is only applicable to files with binary content in Google Drive. - "mimeType": "A String", # The MIME type of the file. Google Drive attempts to automatically detect an appropriate value from uploaded content, if no value is provided. The value cannot be changed unless a new revision is uploaded. If a file is created with a Google Doc MIME type, the uploaded content is imported, if possible. The supported import formats are published in the About resource. + "mimeType": "A String", # The MIME type of the file. Google Drive attempts to automatically detect an appropriate value from uploaded content, if no value is provided. The value cannot be changed unless a new revision is uploaded. If a file is created with a Google Doc MIME type, the uploaded content is imported, if possible. The supported import formats are published in the [`about`](/workspace/drive/api/reference/rest/v3/about) resource. "modifiedByMe": True or False, # Output only. Whether the file has been modified by this user. "modifiedByMeTime": "A String", # The last time the file was modified by the user (RFC 3339 date-time). "modifiedTime": "A String", # he last time the file was modified by anyone (RFC 3339 date-time). Note that setting modifiedTime will also update modifiedByMeTime for the user. - "name": "A String", # The name of the file. This is not necessarily unique within a folder. Note that for immutable items such as the top level folders of shared drives, My Drive root folder, and Application Data folder the name is constant. + "name": "A String", # The name of the file. This isn't necessarily unique within a folder. Note that for immutable items such as the top-level folders of shared drives, the My Drive root folder, and the Application Data folder, the name is constant. "originalFilename": "A String", # The original filename of the uploaded content if available, or else the original value of the `name` field. This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. "ownedByMe": True or False, # Output only. Whether the user owns the file. Not populated for items in shared drives. "owners": [ # Output only. The owner of this file. Only certain legacy files may have more than one owner. This field isn't populated for items in shared drives. @@ -1753,8 +1753,8 @@

Method Details

}, "quotaBytesUsed": "A String", # Output only. The number of storage quota bytes used by the file. This includes the head revision as well as previous revisions with `keepForever` enabled. "resourceKey": "A String", # Output only. A key needed to access the item via a shared link. - "sha1Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA1 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it is not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. - "sha256Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA256 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it is not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. + "sha1Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA1 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it's not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. + "sha256Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA256 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it's not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. "shared": True or False, # Output only. Whether the file has been shared. Not populated for items in shared drives. "sharedWithMeTime": "A String", # The time at which the file was shared with the user, if applicable (RFC 3339 date-time). "sharingUser": { # Information about a Drive user. # Output only. The user who shared the file with the requesting user, if applicable. @@ -1768,15 +1768,15 @@

Method Details

"shortcutDetails": { # Shortcut file details. Only populated for shortcut files, which have the mimeType field set to `application/vnd.google-apps.shortcut`. Can only be set on `files.create` requests. "targetId": "A String", # The ID of the file that this shortcut points to. Can only be set on `files.create` requests. "targetMimeType": "A String", # Output only. The MIME type of the file that this shortcut points to. The value of this field is a snapshot of the target's MIME type, captured when the shortcut is created. - "targetResourceKey": "A String", # Output only. The ResourceKey for the target file. + "targetResourceKey": "A String", # Output only. The `resourceKey` for the target file. }, - "size": "A String", # Output only. Size in bytes of blobs and first party editor files. Won't be populated for files that have no size, like shortcuts and folders. - "spaces": [ # Output only. The list of spaces which contain the file. The currently supported values are 'drive', 'appDataFolder' and 'photos'. + "size": "A String", # Output only. Size in bytes of blobs and Google Workspace editor files. Won't be populated for files that have no size, like shortcuts and folders. + "spaces": [ # Output only. The list of spaces which contain the file. The currently supported values are `drive`, `appDataFolder`, and `photos`. "A String", ], "starred": True or False, # Whether the user has starred the file. "teamDriveId": "A String", # Deprecated: Output only. Use `driveId` instead. - "thumbnailLink": "A String", # Output only. A short-lived link to the file's thumbnail, if available. Typically lasts on the order of hours. Not intended for direct usage on web applications due to [Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS)](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/CORS) policies, consider using a proxy server. Only populated when the requesting app can access the file's content. If the file isn't shared publicly, the URL returned in `Files.thumbnailLink` must be fetched using a credentialed request. + "thumbnailLink": "A String", # Output only. A short-lived link to the file's thumbnail, if available. Typically lasts on the order of hours. Not intended for direct usage on web applications due to [Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS)](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/CORS) policies. Consider using a proxy server. Only populated when the requesting app can access the file's content. If the file isn't shared publicly, the URL returned in `files.thumbnailLink` must be fetched using a credentialed request. "thumbnailVersion": "A String", # Output only. The thumbnail version for use in thumbnail cache invalidation. "trashed": True or False, # Whether the file has been trashed, either explicitly or from a trashed parent folder. Only the owner may trash a file, and other users cannot see files in the owner's trash. "trashedTime": "A String", # The time that the item was trashed (RFC 3339 date-time). Only populated for items in shared drives. @@ -1805,13 +1805,13 @@

Method Details

get_media(fileId, acknowledgeAbuse=None, includeLabels=None, includePermissionsForView=None, supportsAllDrives=None, supportsTeamDrives=None, x__xgafv=None) -
 Gets a file's metadata or content by ID. If you provide the URL parameter `alt=media`, then the response includes the file contents in the response body. Downloading content with `alt=media` only works if the file is stored in Drive. To download Google Docs, Sheets, and Slides use [`files.export`](/workspace/drive/api/reference/rest/v3/files/export) instead. For more information, see [Download & export files](/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-downloads).
+  
 Gets a file's metadata or content by ID. For more information, see [Search for files and folders](/workspace/drive/api/guides/search-files). If you provide the URL parameter `alt=media`, then the response includes the file contents in the response body. Downloading content with `alt=media` only works if the file is stored in Drive. To download Google Docs, Sheets, and Slides use [`files.export`](/workspace/drive/api/reference/rest/v3/files/export) instead. For more information, see [Download and export files](/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-downloads).
 
 Args:
   fileId: string, The ID of the file. (required)
   acknowledgeAbuse: boolean, Whether the user is acknowledging the risk of downloading known malware or other abusive files. This is only applicable when the `alt` parameter is set to `media` and the user is the owner of the file or an organizer of the shared drive in which the file resides.
   includeLabels: string, A comma-separated list of IDs of labels to include in the `labelInfo` part of the response.
-  includePermissionsForView: string, Specifies which additional view's permissions to include in the response. Only 'published' is supported.
+  includePermissionsForView: string, Specifies which additional view's permissions to include in the response. Only `published` is supported.
   supportsAllDrives: boolean, Whether the requesting application supports both My Drives and shared drives.
   supportsTeamDrives: boolean, Deprecated: Use `supportsAllDrives` instead.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
@@ -1827,24 +1827,24 @@ 

Method Details

list(corpora=None, corpus=None, driveId=None, includeItemsFromAllDrives=None, includeLabels=None, includePermissionsForView=None, includeTeamDriveItems=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, q=None, spaces=None, supportsAllDrives=None, supportsTeamDrives=None, teamDriveId=None, x__xgafv=None) -
 Lists the user's files. This method accepts the `q` parameter, which is a search query combining one or more search terms. For more information, see the [Search for files & folders](/workspace/drive/api/guides/search-files) guide. *Note:* This method returns *all* files by default, including trashed files. If you don't want trashed files to appear in the list, use the `trashed=false` query parameter to remove trashed files from the results.
+  
 Lists the user's files. For more information, see [Search for files and folders](/workspace/drive/api/guides/search-files). This method accepts the `q` parameter, which is a search query combining one or more search terms. This method returns *all* files by default, including trashed files. If you don't want trashed files to appear in the list, use the `trashed=false` query parameter to remove trashed files from the results.
 
 Args:
-  corpora: string, Bodies of items (files/documents) to which the query applies. Supported bodies are 'user', 'domain', 'drive', and 'allDrives'. Prefer 'user' or 'drive' to 'allDrives' for efficiency. By default, corpora is set to 'user'. However, this can change depending on the filter set through the 'q' parameter.
-  corpus: string, Deprecated: The source of files to list. Use 'corpora' instead.
+  corpora: string, Bodies of items (files or documents) to which the query applies. Supported bodies are: * `user` * `domain` * `drive` * `allDrives` Prefer `user` or `drive` to `allDrives` for efficiency. By default, corpora is set to `user`. However, this can change depending on the filter set through the `q` parameter. For more information, see [File organization](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/about-files#file-organization).
+  corpus: string, Deprecated: The source of files to list. Use `corpora` instead.
     Allowed values
       domain - Files shared to the user's domain.
       user - Files owned by or shared to the user.
   driveId: string, ID of the shared drive to search.
   includeItemsFromAllDrives: boolean, Whether both My Drive and shared drive items should be included in results.
   includeLabels: string, A comma-separated list of IDs of labels to include in the `labelInfo` part of the response.
-  includePermissionsForView: string, Specifies which additional view's permissions to include in the response. Only 'published' is supported.
+  includePermissionsForView: string, Specifies which additional view's permissions to include in the response. Only `published` is supported.
   includeTeamDriveItems: boolean, Deprecated: Use `includeItemsFromAllDrives` instead.
-  orderBy: string, A comma-separated list of sort keys. Valid keys are: * `createdTime`: When the file was created. * `folder`: The folder ID. This field is sorted using alphabetical ordering. * `modifiedByMeTime`: The last time the file was modified by the user. * `modifiedTime`: The last time the file was modified by anyone. * `name`: The name of the file. This field is sorted using alphabetical ordering, so 1, 12, 2, 22. * `name_natural`: The name of the file. This field is sorted using natural sort ordering, so 1, 2, 12, 22. * `quotaBytesUsed`: The number of storage quota bytes used by the file. * `recency`: The most recent timestamp from the file's date-time fields. * `sharedWithMeTime`: When the file was shared with the user, if applicable. * `starred`: Whether the user has starred the file. * `viewedByMeTime`: The last time the file was viewed by the user. Each key sorts ascending by default, but can be reversed with the 'desc' modifier. Example usage: `?orderBy=folder,modifiedTime desc,name`.
+  orderBy: string, A comma-separated list of sort keys. Valid keys are: * `createdTime`: When the file was created. * `folder`: The folder ID. This field is sorted using alphabetical ordering. * `modifiedByMeTime`: The last time the file was modified by the user. * `modifiedTime`: The last time the file was modified by anyone. * `name`: The name of the file. This field is sorted using alphabetical ordering, so 1, 12, 2, 22. * `name_natural`: The name of the file. This field is sorted using natural sort ordering, so 1, 2, 12, 22. * `quotaBytesUsed`: The number of storage quota bytes used by the file. * `recency`: The most recent timestamp from the file's date-time fields. * `sharedWithMeTime`: When the file was shared with the user, if applicable. * `starred`: Whether the user has starred the file. * `viewedByMeTime`: The last time the file was viewed by the user. Each key sorts ascending by default, but can be reversed with the `desc` modifier. Example usage: `?orderBy=folder,modifiedTime desc,name`.
   pageSize: integer, The maximum number of files to return per page. Partial or empty result pages are possible even before the end of the files list has been reached.
-  pageToken: string, The token for continuing a previous list request on the next page. This should be set to the value of 'nextPageToken' from the previous response.
-  q: string, A query for filtering the file results. See the "Search for files & folders" guide for supported syntax.
-  spaces: string, A comma-separated list of spaces to query within the corpora. Supported values are 'drive' and 'appDataFolder'.
+  pageToken: string, The token for continuing a previous list request on the next page. This should be set to the value of `nextPageToken` from the previous response.
+  q: string, A query for filtering the file results. For supported syntax, see [Search for files and folders](/workspace/drive/api/guides/search-files).
+  spaces: string, A comma-separated list of spaces to query within the corpora. Supported values are `drive` and `appDataFolder`. For more information, see [File organization](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/about-files#file-organization).
   supportsAllDrives: boolean, Whether the requesting application supports both My Drives and shared drives.
   supportsTeamDrives: boolean, Deprecated: Use `supportsAllDrives` instead.
   teamDriveId: string, Deprecated: Use `driveId` instead.
@@ -1857,62 +1857,62 @@ 

Method Details

An object of the form: { # A list of files. - "files": [ # The list of files. If nextPageToken is populated, then this list may be incomplete and an additional page of results should be fetched. + "files": [ # The list of files. If `nextPageToken` is populated, then this list may be incomplete and an additional page of results should be fetched. { # The metadata for a file. Some resource methods (such as `files.update`) require a `fileId`. Use the `files.list` method to retrieve the ID for a file. "appProperties": { # A collection of arbitrary key-value pairs which are private to the requesting app. # Entries with null values are cleared in update and copy requests. These properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties. "a_key": "A String", }, - "capabilities": { # Output only. Capabilities the current user has on this file. Each capability corresponds to a fine-grained action that a user may take. + "capabilities": { # Output only. Capabilities the current user has on this file. Each capability corresponds to a fine-grained action that a user may take. For more information, see [Understand file capabilities](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-sharing#capabilities). "canAcceptOwnership": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user is the pending owner of the file. Not populated for shared drive files. - "canAddChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add children to this folder. This is always false when the item is not a folder. - "canAddFolderFromAnotherDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add a folder from another drive (different shared drive or My Drive) to this folder. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canAddChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add children to this folder. This is always `false` when the item isn't a folder. + "canAddFolderFromAnotherDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add a folder from another drive (different shared drive or My Drive) to this folder. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canAddMyDriveParent": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add a parent for the item without removing an existing parent in the same request. Not populated for shared drive files. "canChangeCopyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the `copyRequiresWriterPermission` restriction of this file. "canChangeItemDownloadRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the owner or organizer-applied download restrictions of the file. - "canChangeSecurityUpdateEnabled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the securityUpdateEnabled field on link share metadata. + "canChangeSecurityUpdateEnabled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the `securityUpdateEnabled` field on link share metadata. "canChangeViewersCanCopyContent": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. "canComment": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can comment on this file. - "canCopy": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can copy this file. For an item in a shared drive, whether the current user can copy non-folder descendants of this item, or this item itself if it is not a folder. + "canCopy": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can copy this file. For an item in a shared drive, whether the current user can copy non-folder descendants of this item, or this item if it's not a folder. "canDelete": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can delete this file. - "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can delete children of this folder. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can delete children of this folder. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canDisableInheritedPermissions": True or False, # Whether a user can disable inherited permissions. "canDownload": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can download this file. "canEdit": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can edit this file. Other factors may limit the type of changes a user can make to a file. For example, see `canChangeCopyRequiresWriterPermission` or `canModifyContent`. "canEnableInheritedPermissions": True or False, # Whether a user can re-enable inherited permissions. - "canListChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can list the children of this folder. This is always false when the item is not a folder. + "canListChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can list the children of this folder. This is always `false` when the item isn't a folder. "canModifyContent": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can modify the content of this file. - "canModifyContentRestriction": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use one of `canModifyEditorContentRestriction`, `canModifyOwnerContentRestriction` or `canRemoveContentRestriction`. + "canModifyContentRestriction": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use one of `canModifyEditorContentRestriction`, `canModifyOwnerContentRestriction`, or `canRemoveContentRestriction`. "canModifyEditorContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add or modify content restrictions on the file which are editor restricted. "canModifyLabels": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can modify the labels on the file. "canModifyOwnerContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add or modify content restrictions which are owner restricted. - "canMoveChildrenOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder outside of the shared drive. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canMoveChildrenOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder outside of the shared drive. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canMoveChildrenOutOfTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveChildrenOutOfDrive` instead. - "canMoveChildrenWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder within this drive. This is false when the item is not a folder. Note that a request to move the child may still fail depending on the current user's access to the child and to the destination folder. + "canMoveChildrenWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder within this drive. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Note that a request to move the child may still fail depending on the current user's access to the child and to the destination folder. "canMoveChildrenWithinTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveChildrenWithinDrive` instead. "canMoveItemIntoTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemOutOfDrive` instead. - "canMoveItemOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item outside of this drive by changing its parent. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that is being added. + "canMoveItemOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item outside of this drive by changing its parent. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that's being added. "canMoveItemOutOfTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemOutOfDrive` instead. - "canMoveItemWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item within this drive. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that is being added and the parent that is being removed. + "canMoveItemWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item within this drive. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that's being added and the parent that is being removed. "canMoveItemWithinTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemWithinDrive` instead. "canMoveTeamDriveItem": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemWithinDrive` or `canMoveItemOutOfDrive` instead. "canReadDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the shared drive to which this file belongs. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canReadLabels": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the labels on the file. - "canReadRevisions": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the revisions resource of this file. For a shared drive item, whether revisions of non-folder descendants of this item, or this item itself if it is not a folder, can be read. + "canReadRevisions": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the revisions resource of this file. For a shared drive item, whether revisions of non-folder descendants of this item, or this item if it's not a folder, can be read. "canReadTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canReadDrive` instead. - "canRemoveChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can remove children from this folder. This is always false when the item is not a folder. For a folder in a shared drive, use `canDeleteChildren` or `canTrashChildren` instead. - "canRemoveContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether there is a content restriction on the file that can be removed by the current user. + "canRemoveChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can remove children from this folder. This is always `false` when the item isn't a folder. For a folder in a shared drive, use `canDeleteChildren` or `canTrashChildren` instead. + "canRemoveContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether there's a content restriction on the file that can be removed by the current user. "canRemoveMyDriveParent": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can remove a parent from the item without adding another parent in the same request. Not populated for shared drive files. "canRename": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can rename this file. "canShare": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can modify the sharing settings for this file. "canTrash": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this file to trash. - "canTrashChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can trash children of this folder. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canTrashChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can trash children of this folder. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canUntrash": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can restore this file from trash. }, "contentHints": { # Additional information about the content of the file. These fields are never populated in responses. - "indexableText": "A String", # Text to be indexed for the file to improve fullText queries. This is limited to 128KB in length and may contain HTML elements. + "indexableText": "A String", # Text to be indexed for the file to improve fullText queries. This is limited to 128 KB in length and may contain HTML elements. "thumbnail": { # A thumbnail for the file. This will only be used if Google Drive cannot generate a standard thumbnail. - "image": "A String", # The thumbnail data encoded with URL-safe Base64 (RFC 4648 section 5). + "image": "A String", # The thumbnail data encoded with URL-safe Base64 ([RFC 4648 section 5](https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc4648#section-5)). "mimeType": "A String", # The MIME type of the thumbnail. }, }, @@ -1921,7 +1921,7 @@

Method Details

"ownerRestricted": True or False, # Whether the content restriction can only be modified or removed by a user who owns the file. For files in shared drives, any user with `organizer` capabilities can modify or remove this content restriction. "readOnly": True or False, # Whether the content of the file is read-only. If a file is read-only, a new revision of the file may not be added, comments may not be added or modified, and the title of the file may not be modified. "reason": "A String", # Reason for why the content of the file is restricted. This is only mutable on requests that also set `readOnly=true`. - "restrictingUser": { # Information about a Drive user. # Output only. The user who set the content restriction. Only populated if `readOnly` is true. + "restrictingUser": { # Information about a Drive user. # Output only. The user who set the content restriction. Only populated if `readOnly=true`. "displayName": "A String", # Output only. A plain text displayable name for this user. "emailAddress": "A String", # Output only. The email address of the user. This may not be present in certain contexts if the user has not made their email address visible to the requester. "kind": "drive#user", # Output only. Identifies what kind of resource this is. Value: the fixed string `drive#user`. @@ -1934,17 +1934,17 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # Output only. The type of the content restriction. Currently the only possible value is `globalContentRestriction`. }, ], - "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download this file, should be disabled for readers and commenters. + "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download this file should be disabled for readers and commenters. "createdTime": "A String", # The time at which the file was created (RFC 3339 date-time). "description": "A String", # A short description of the file. "downloadRestrictions": { # Download restrictions applied to the file. # Download restrictions applied on the file. "effectiveDownloadRestrictionWithContext": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # Output only. The effective download restriction applied to this file. This considers all restriction settings and DLP rules. "restrictedForReaders": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for readers. - "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers. + "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers. }, - "itemDownloadRestriction": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # The download restriction of the file applied directly by the owner or organizer. This does not take into account shared drive settings or DLP rules. + "itemDownloadRestriction": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # The download restriction of the file applied directly by the owner or organizer. This doesn't take into account shared drive settings or DLP rules. "restrictedForReaders": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for readers. - "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers. + "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers. }, }, "driveId": "A String", # Output only. ID of the shared drive the file resides in. Only populated for items in shared drives. @@ -1953,10 +1953,10 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "fileExtension": "A String", # Output only. The final component of `fullFileExtension`. This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. - "folderColorRgb": "A String", # The color for a folder or a shortcut to a folder as an RGB hex string. The supported colors are published in the `folderColorPalette` field of the About resource. If an unsupported color is specified, the closest color in the palette is used instead. - "fullFileExtension": "A String", # Output only. The full file extension extracted from the `name` field. May contain multiple concatenated extensions, such as "tar.gz". This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. This is automatically updated when the `name` field changes, however it is not cleared if the new name does not contain a valid extension. + "folderColorRgb": "A String", # The color for a folder or a shortcut to a folder as an RGB hex string. The supported colors are published in the `folderColorPalette` field of the [`about`](/workspace/drive/api/reference/rest/v3/about) resource. If an unsupported color is specified, the closest color in the palette is used instead. + "fullFileExtension": "A String", # Output only. The full file extension extracted from the `name` field. May contain multiple concatenated extensions, such as "tar.gz". This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. This is automatically updated when the `name` field changes, however it's not cleared if the new name doesn't contain a valid extension. "hasAugmentedPermissions": True or False, # Output only. Whether there are permissions directly on this file. This field is only populated for items in shared drives. - "hasThumbnail": True or False, # Output only. Whether this file has a thumbnail. This does not indicate whether the requesting app has access to the thumbnail. To check access, look for the presence of the thumbnailLink field. + "hasThumbnail": True or False, # Output only. Whether this file has a thumbnail. This doesn't indicate whether the requesting app has access to the thumbnail. To check access, look for the presence of the thumbnailLink field. "headRevisionId": "A String", # Output only. The ID of the file's head revision. This is currently only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. "iconLink": "A String", # Output only. A static, unauthenticated link to the file's icon. "id": "A String", # The ID of the file. @@ -2041,11 +2041,11 @@

Method Details

"securityUpdateEnabled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the security update is enabled for this file. }, "md5Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The MD5 checksum for the content of the file. This is only applicable to files with binary content in Google Drive. - "mimeType": "A String", # The MIME type of the file. Google Drive attempts to automatically detect an appropriate value from uploaded content, if no value is provided. The value cannot be changed unless a new revision is uploaded. If a file is created with a Google Doc MIME type, the uploaded content is imported, if possible. The supported import formats are published in the About resource. + "mimeType": "A String", # The MIME type of the file. Google Drive attempts to automatically detect an appropriate value from uploaded content, if no value is provided. The value cannot be changed unless a new revision is uploaded. If a file is created with a Google Doc MIME type, the uploaded content is imported, if possible. The supported import formats are published in the [`about`](/workspace/drive/api/reference/rest/v3/about) resource. "modifiedByMe": True or False, # Output only. Whether the file has been modified by this user. "modifiedByMeTime": "A String", # The last time the file was modified by the user (RFC 3339 date-time). "modifiedTime": "A String", # he last time the file was modified by anyone (RFC 3339 date-time). Note that setting modifiedTime will also update modifiedByMeTime for the user. - "name": "A String", # The name of the file. This is not necessarily unique within a folder. Note that for immutable items such as the top level folders of shared drives, My Drive root folder, and Application Data folder the name is constant. + "name": "A String", # The name of the file. This isn't necessarily unique within a folder. Note that for immutable items such as the top-level folders of shared drives, the My Drive root folder, and the Application Data folder, the name is constant. "originalFilename": "A String", # The original filename of the uploaded content if available, or else the original value of the `name` field. This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. "ownedByMe": True or False, # Output only. Whether the user owns the file. Not populated for items in shared drives. "owners": [ # Output only. The owner of this file. Only certain legacy files may have more than one owner. This field isn't populated for items in shared drives. @@ -2104,8 +2104,8 @@

Method Details

}, "quotaBytesUsed": "A String", # Output only. The number of storage quota bytes used by the file. This includes the head revision as well as previous revisions with `keepForever` enabled. "resourceKey": "A String", # Output only. A key needed to access the item via a shared link. - "sha1Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA1 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it is not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. - "sha256Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA256 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it is not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. + "sha1Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA1 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it's not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. + "sha256Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA256 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it's not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. "shared": True or False, # Output only. Whether the file has been shared. Not populated for items in shared drives. "sharedWithMeTime": "A String", # The time at which the file was shared with the user, if applicable (RFC 3339 date-time). "sharingUser": { # Information about a Drive user. # Output only. The user who shared the file with the requesting user, if applicable. @@ -2119,15 +2119,15 @@

Method Details

"shortcutDetails": { # Shortcut file details. Only populated for shortcut files, which have the mimeType field set to `application/vnd.google-apps.shortcut`. Can only be set on `files.create` requests. "targetId": "A String", # The ID of the file that this shortcut points to. Can only be set on `files.create` requests. "targetMimeType": "A String", # Output only. The MIME type of the file that this shortcut points to. The value of this field is a snapshot of the target's MIME type, captured when the shortcut is created. - "targetResourceKey": "A String", # Output only. The ResourceKey for the target file. + "targetResourceKey": "A String", # Output only. The `resourceKey` for the target file. }, - "size": "A String", # Output only. Size in bytes of blobs and first party editor files. Won't be populated for files that have no size, like shortcuts and folders. - "spaces": [ # Output only. The list of spaces which contain the file. The currently supported values are 'drive', 'appDataFolder' and 'photos'. + "size": "A String", # Output only. Size in bytes of blobs and Google Workspace editor files. Won't be populated for files that have no size, like shortcuts and folders. + "spaces": [ # Output only. The list of spaces which contain the file. The currently supported values are `drive`, `appDataFolder`, and `photos`. "A String", ], "starred": True or False, # Whether the user has starred the file. "teamDriveId": "A String", # Deprecated: Output only. Use `driveId` instead. - "thumbnailLink": "A String", # Output only. A short-lived link to the file's thumbnail, if available. Typically lasts on the order of hours. Not intended for direct usage on web applications due to [Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS)](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/CORS) policies, consider using a proxy server. Only populated when the requesting app can access the file's content. If the file isn't shared publicly, the URL returned in `Files.thumbnailLink` must be fetched using a credentialed request. + "thumbnailLink": "A String", # Output only. A short-lived link to the file's thumbnail, if available. Typically lasts on the order of hours. Not intended for direct usage on web applications due to [Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS)](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/CORS) policies. Consider using a proxy server. Only populated when the requesting app can access the file's content. If the file isn't shared publicly, the URL returned in `files.thumbnailLink` must be fetched using a credentialed request. "thumbnailVersion": "A String", # Output only. The thumbnail version for use in thumbnail cache invalidation. "trashed": True or False, # Whether the file has been trashed, either explicitly or from a trashed parent folder. Only the owner may trash a file, and other users cannot see files in the owner's trash. "trashedTime": "A String", # The time that the item was trashed (RFC 3339 date-time). Only populated for items in shared drives. @@ -2153,7 +2153,7 @@

Method Details

"writersCanShare": True or False, # Whether users with only `writer` permission can modify the file's permissions. Not populated for items in shared drives. }, ], - "incompleteSearch": True or False, # Whether the search process was incomplete. If true, then some search results might be missing, since all documents were not searched. This can occur when searching multiple drives with the 'allDrives' corpora, but all corpora couldn't be searched. When this happens, it's suggested that clients narrow their query by choosing a different corpus such as 'user' or 'drive'. + "incompleteSearch": True or False, # Whether the search process was incomplete. If true, then some search results might be missing, since all documents were not searched. This can occur when searching multiple drives with the `allDrives` corpora, but all corpora couldn't be searched. When this happens, it's suggested that clients narrow their query by choosing a different corpus such as `user` or `drive`. "kind": "drive#fileList", # Identifies what kind of resource this is. Value: the fixed string `"drive#fileList"`. "nextPageToken": "A String", # The page token for the next page of files. This will be absent if the end of the files list has been reached. If the token is rejected for any reason, it should be discarded, and pagination should be restarted from the first page of results. The page token is typically valid for several hours. However, if new items are added or removed, your expected results might differ. }
@@ -2161,12 +2161,12 @@

Method Details

listLabels(fileId, maxResults=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None) -
Lists the labels on a file.
+  
Lists the labels on a file. For more information, see [List labels on a file](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/list-labels).
 
 Args:
   fileId: string, The ID for the file. (required)
   maxResults: integer, The maximum number of labels to return per page. When not set, defaults to 100.
-  pageToken: string, The token for continuing a previous list request on the next page. This should be set to the value of 'nextPageToken' from the previous response.
+  pageToken: string, The token for continuing a previous list request on the next page. This should be set to the value of `nextPageToken` from the previous response.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -2176,7 +2176,7 @@ 

Method Details

An object of the form: { # A list of labels applied to a file. - "kind": "A String", # This is always drive#labelList + "kind": "A String", # This is always `"drive#labelList"`. "labels": [ # The list of labels. { # Representation of label and label fields. "fields": { # A map of the fields on the label, keyed by the field's ID. @@ -2247,7 +2247,7 @@

Method Details

modifyLabels(fileId, body=None, x__xgafv=None) -
Modifies the set of labels applied to a file. Returns a list of the labels that were added or modified.
+  
Modifies the set of labels applied to a file. For more information, see [Set a label field on a file](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/set-label). Returns a list of the labels that were added or modified.
 
 Args:
   fileId: string, The ID of the file to which the labels belong. (required)
@@ -2255,13 +2255,13 @@ 

Method Details

The object takes the form of: { # A request to modify the set of labels on a file. This request may contain many modifications that will either all succeed or all fail atomically. - "kind": "A String", # This is always drive#modifyLabelsRequest. + "kind": "A String", # This is always `"drive#modifyLabelsRequest"`. "labelModifications": [ # The list of modifications to apply to the labels on the file. - { # A modification to a label on a file. A LabelModification can be used to apply a label to a file, update an existing label on a file, or remove a label from a file. + { # A modification to a label on a file. A `LabelModification` can be used to apply a label to a file, update an existing label on a file, or remove a label from a file. "fieldModifications": [ # The list of modifications to this label's fields. { # A modification to a label's field. "fieldId": "A String", # The ID of the field to be modified. - "kind": "A String", # This is always drive#labelFieldModification. + "kind": "A String", # This is always `"drive#labelFieldModification"`. "setDateValues": [ # Replaces the value of a dateString Field with these new values. The string must be in the RFC 3339 full-date format: YYYY-MM-DD. "A String", ], @@ -2274,13 +2274,13 @@

Method Details

"setTextValues": [ # Sets the value of a `text` field. "A String", ], - "setUserValues": [ # Replaces a `user` field with these new values. The values must be valid email addresses. + "setUserValues": [ # Replaces a `user` field with these new values. The values must be a valid email addresses. "A String", ], "unsetValues": True or False, # Unsets the values for this field. }, ], - "kind": "A String", # This is always drive#labelModification. + "kind": "A String", # This is always `"drive#labelModification"`. "labelId": "A String", # The ID of the label to modify. "removeLabel": True or False, # If true, the label will be removed from the file. }, @@ -2295,8 +2295,8 @@

Method Details

Returns: An object of the form: - { # Response to a ModifyLabels request. This contains only those labels which were added or updated by the request. - "kind": "A String", # This is always drive#modifyLabelsResponse + { # Response to a `ModifyLabels` request. This contains only those labels which were added or updated by the request. + "kind": "A String", # This is always `"drive#modifyLabelsResponse"`. "modifiedLabels": [ # The list of labels which were added or updated by the request. { # Representation of label and label fields. "fields": { # A map of the fields on the label, keyed by the field's ID. @@ -2338,7 +2338,7 @@

Method Details

update(fileId, addParents=None, body=None, enforceSingleParent=None, includeLabels=None, includePermissionsForView=None, keepRevisionForever=None, media_body=None, media_mime_type=None, ocrLanguage=None, removeParents=None, supportsAllDrives=None, supportsTeamDrives=None, useContentAsIndexableText=None, x__xgafv=None) -
 Updates a file's metadata and/or content. When calling this method, only populate fields in the request that you want to modify. When updating fields, some fields might be changed automatically, such as `modifiedDate`. This method supports patch semantics. This method supports an */upload* URI and accepts uploaded media with the following characteristics: - *Maximum file size:* 5,120 GB - *Accepted Media MIME types:*`*/*` Note: Specify a valid MIME type, rather than the literal `*/*` value. The literal `*/*` is only used to indicate that any valid MIME type can be uploaded. For more information on uploading files, see [Upload file data](/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-uploads).
+  
 Updates a file's metadata, content, or both. When calling this method, only populate fields in the request that you want to modify. When updating fields, some fields might be changed automatically, such as `modifiedDate`. This method supports patch semantics. This method supports an */upload* URI and accepts uploaded media with the following characteristics: - *Maximum file size:* 5,120 GB - *Accepted Media MIME types:* `*/*` (Specify a valid MIME type, rather than the literal `*/*` value. The literal `*/*` is only used to indicate that any valid MIME type can be uploaded. For more information, see [Google Workspace and Google Drive supported MIME types](/workspace/drive/api/guides/mime-types).) For more information on uploading files, see [Upload file data](/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-uploads).
 
 Args:
   fileId: string, The ID of the file. (required)
@@ -2350,56 +2350,56 @@ 

Method Details

# Entries with null values are cleared in update and copy requests. These properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties. "a_key": "A String", }, - "capabilities": { # Output only. Capabilities the current user has on this file. Each capability corresponds to a fine-grained action that a user may take. + "capabilities": { # Output only. Capabilities the current user has on this file. Each capability corresponds to a fine-grained action that a user may take. For more information, see [Understand file capabilities](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-sharing#capabilities). "canAcceptOwnership": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user is the pending owner of the file. Not populated for shared drive files. - "canAddChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add children to this folder. This is always false when the item is not a folder. - "canAddFolderFromAnotherDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add a folder from another drive (different shared drive or My Drive) to this folder. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canAddChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add children to this folder. This is always `false` when the item isn't a folder. + "canAddFolderFromAnotherDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add a folder from another drive (different shared drive or My Drive) to this folder. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canAddMyDriveParent": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add a parent for the item without removing an existing parent in the same request. Not populated for shared drive files. "canChangeCopyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the `copyRequiresWriterPermission` restriction of this file. "canChangeItemDownloadRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the owner or organizer-applied download restrictions of the file. - "canChangeSecurityUpdateEnabled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the securityUpdateEnabled field on link share metadata. + "canChangeSecurityUpdateEnabled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the `securityUpdateEnabled` field on link share metadata. "canChangeViewersCanCopyContent": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. "canComment": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can comment on this file. - "canCopy": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can copy this file. For an item in a shared drive, whether the current user can copy non-folder descendants of this item, or this item itself if it is not a folder. + "canCopy": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can copy this file. For an item in a shared drive, whether the current user can copy non-folder descendants of this item, or this item if it's not a folder. "canDelete": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can delete this file. - "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can delete children of this folder. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can delete children of this folder. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canDisableInheritedPermissions": True or False, # Whether a user can disable inherited permissions. "canDownload": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can download this file. "canEdit": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can edit this file. Other factors may limit the type of changes a user can make to a file. For example, see `canChangeCopyRequiresWriterPermission` or `canModifyContent`. "canEnableInheritedPermissions": True or False, # Whether a user can re-enable inherited permissions. - "canListChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can list the children of this folder. This is always false when the item is not a folder. + "canListChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can list the children of this folder. This is always `false` when the item isn't a folder. "canModifyContent": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can modify the content of this file. - "canModifyContentRestriction": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use one of `canModifyEditorContentRestriction`, `canModifyOwnerContentRestriction` or `canRemoveContentRestriction`. + "canModifyContentRestriction": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use one of `canModifyEditorContentRestriction`, `canModifyOwnerContentRestriction`, or `canRemoveContentRestriction`. "canModifyEditorContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add or modify content restrictions on the file which are editor restricted. "canModifyLabels": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can modify the labels on the file. "canModifyOwnerContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add or modify content restrictions which are owner restricted. - "canMoveChildrenOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder outside of the shared drive. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canMoveChildrenOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder outside of the shared drive. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canMoveChildrenOutOfTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveChildrenOutOfDrive` instead. - "canMoveChildrenWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder within this drive. This is false when the item is not a folder. Note that a request to move the child may still fail depending on the current user's access to the child and to the destination folder. + "canMoveChildrenWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder within this drive. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Note that a request to move the child may still fail depending on the current user's access to the child and to the destination folder. "canMoveChildrenWithinTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveChildrenWithinDrive` instead. "canMoveItemIntoTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemOutOfDrive` instead. - "canMoveItemOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item outside of this drive by changing its parent. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that is being added. + "canMoveItemOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item outside of this drive by changing its parent. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that's being added. "canMoveItemOutOfTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemOutOfDrive` instead. - "canMoveItemWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item within this drive. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that is being added and the parent that is being removed. + "canMoveItemWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item within this drive. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that's being added and the parent that is being removed. "canMoveItemWithinTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemWithinDrive` instead. "canMoveTeamDriveItem": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemWithinDrive` or `canMoveItemOutOfDrive` instead. "canReadDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the shared drive to which this file belongs. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canReadLabels": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the labels on the file. - "canReadRevisions": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the revisions resource of this file. For a shared drive item, whether revisions of non-folder descendants of this item, or this item itself if it is not a folder, can be read. + "canReadRevisions": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the revisions resource of this file. For a shared drive item, whether revisions of non-folder descendants of this item, or this item if it's not a folder, can be read. "canReadTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canReadDrive` instead. - "canRemoveChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can remove children from this folder. This is always false when the item is not a folder. For a folder in a shared drive, use `canDeleteChildren` or `canTrashChildren` instead. - "canRemoveContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether there is a content restriction on the file that can be removed by the current user. + "canRemoveChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can remove children from this folder. This is always `false` when the item isn't a folder. For a folder in a shared drive, use `canDeleteChildren` or `canTrashChildren` instead. + "canRemoveContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether there's a content restriction on the file that can be removed by the current user. "canRemoveMyDriveParent": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can remove a parent from the item without adding another parent in the same request. Not populated for shared drive files. "canRename": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can rename this file. "canShare": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can modify the sharing settings for this file. "canTrash": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this file to trash. - "canTrashChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can trash children of this folder. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canTrashChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can trash children of this folder. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canUntrash": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can restore this file from trash. }, "contentHints": { # Additional information about the content of the file. These fields are never populated in responses. - "indexableText": "A String", # Text to be indexed for the file to improve fullText queries. This is limited to 128KB in length and may contain HTML elements. + "indexableText": "A String", # Text to be indexed for the file to improve fullText queries. This is limited to 128 KB in length and may contain HTML elements. "thumbnail": { # A thumbnail for the file. This will only be used if Google Drive cannot generate a standard thumbnail. - "image": "A String", # The thumbnail data encoded with URL-safe Base64 (RFC 4648 section 5). + "image": "A String", # The thumbnail data encoded with URL-safe Base64 ([RFC 4648 section 5](https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc4648#section-5)). "mimeType": "A String", # The MIME type of the thumbnail. }, }, @@ -2408,7 +2408,7 @@

Method Details

"ownerRestricted": True or False, # Whether the content restriction can only be modified or removed by a user who owns the file. For files in shared drives, any user with `organizer` capabilities can modify or remove this content restriction. "readOnly": True or False, # Whether the content of the file is read-only. If a file is read-only, a new revision of the file may not be added, comments may not be added or modified, and the title of the file may not be modified. "reason": "A String", # Reason for why the content of the file is restricted. This is only mutable on requests that also set `readOnly=true`. - "restrictingUser": { # Information about a Drive user. # Output only. The user who set the content restriction. Only populated if `readOnly` is true. + "restrictingUser": { # Information about a Drive user. # Output only. The user who set the content restriction. Only populated if `readOnly=true`. "displayName": "A String", # Output only. A plain text displayable name for this user. "emailAddress": "A String", # Output only. The email address of the user. This may not be present in certain contexts if the user has not made their email address visible to the requester. "kind": "drive#user", # Output only. Identifies what kind of resource this is. Value: the fixed string `drive#user`. @@ -2421,17 +2421,17 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # Output only. The type of the content restriction. Currently the only possible value is `globalContentRestriction`. }, ], - "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download this file, should be disabled for readers and commenters. + "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download this file should be disabled for readers and commenters. "createdTime": "A String", # The time at which the file was created (RFC 3339 date-time). "description": "A String", # A short description of the file. "downloadRestrictions": { # Download restrictions applied to the file. # Download restrictions applied on the file. "effectiveDownloadRestrictionWithContext": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # Output only. The effective download restriction applied to this file. This considers all restriction settings and DLP rules. "restrictedForReaders": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for readers. - "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers. + "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers. }, - "itemDownloadRestriction": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # The download restriction of the file applied directly by the owner or organizer. This does not take into account shared drive settings or DLP rules. + "itemDownloadRestriction": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # The download restriction of the file applied directly by the owner or organizer. This doesn't take into account shared drive settings or DLP rules. "restrictedForReaders": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for readers. - "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers. + "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers. }, }, "driveId": "A String", # Output only. ID of the shared drive the file resides in. Only populated for items in shared drives. @@ -2440,10 +2440,10 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "fileExtension": "A String", # Output only. The final component of `fullFileExtension`. This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. - "folderColorRgb": "A String", # The color for a folder or a shortcut to a folder as an RGB hex string. The supported colors are published in the `folderColorPalette` field of the About resource. If an unsupported color is specified, the closest color in the palette is used instead. - "fullFileExtension": "A String", # Output only. The full file extension extracted from the `name` field. May contain multiple concatenated extensions, such as "tar.gz". This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. This is automatically updated when the `name` field changes, however it is not cleared if the new name does not contain a valid extension. + "folderColorRgb": "A String", # The color for a folder or a shortcut to a folder as an RGB hex string. The supported colors are published in the `folderColorPalette` field of the [`about`](/workspace/drive/api/reference/rest/v3/about) resource. If an unsupported color is specified, the closest color in the palette is used instead. + "fullFileExtension": "A String", # Output only. The full file extension extracted from the `name` field. May contain multiple concatenated extensions, such as "tar.gz". This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. This is automatically updated when the `name` field changes, however it's not cleared if the new name doesn't contain a valid extension. "hasAugmentedPermissions": True or False, # Output only. Whether there are permissions directly on this file. This field is only populated for items in shared drives. - "hasThumbnail": True or False, # Output only. Whether this file has a thumbnail. This does not indicate whether the requesting app has access to the thumbnail. To check access, look for the presence of the thumbnailLink field. + "hasThumbnail": True or False, # Output only. Whether this file has a thumbnail. This doesn't indicate whether the requesting app has access to the thumbnail. To check access, look for the presence of the thumbnailLink field. "headRevisionId": "A String", # Output only. The ID of the file's head revision. This is currently only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. "iconLink": "A String", # Output only. A static, unauthenticated link to the file's icon. "id": "A String", # The ID of the file. @@ -2528,11 +2528,11 @@

Method Details

"securityUpdateEnabled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the security update is enabled for this file. }, "md5Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The MD5 checksum for the content of the file. This is only applicable to files with binary content in Google Drive. - "mimeType": "A String", # The MIME type of the file. Google Drive attempts to automatically detect an appropriate value from uploaded content, if no value is provided. The value cannot be changed unless a new revision is uploaded. If a file is created with a Google Doc MIME type, the uploaded content is imported, if possible. The supported import formats are published in the About resource. + "mimeType": "A String", # The MIME type of the file. Google Drive attempts to automatically detect an appropriate value from uploaded content, if no value is provided. The value cannot be changed unless a new revision is uploaded. If a file is created with a Google Doc MIME type, the uploaded content is imported, if possible. The supported import formats are published in the [`about`](/workspace/drive/api/reference/rest/v3/about) resource. "modifiedByMe": True or False, # Output only. Whether the file has been modified by this user. "modifiedByMeTime": "A String", # The last time the file was modified by the user (RFC 3339 date-time). "modifiedTime": "A String", # he last time the file was modified by anyone (RFC 3339 date-time). Note that setting modifiedTime will also update modifiedByMeTime for the user. - "name": "A String", # The name of the file. This is not necessarily unique within a folder. Note that for immutable items such as the top level folders of shared drives, My Drive root folder, and Application Data folder the name is constant. + "name": "A String", # The name of the file. This isn't necessarily unique within a folder. Note that for immutable items such as the top-level folders of shared drives, the My Drive root folder, and the Application Data folder, the name is constant. "originalFilename": "A String", # The original filename of the uploaded content if available, or else the original value of the `name` field. This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. "ownedByMe": True or False, # Output only. Whether the user owns the file. Not populated for items in shared drives. "owners": [ # Output only. The owner of this file. Only certain legacy files may have more than one owner. This field isn't populated for items in shared drives. @@ -2591,8 +2591,8 @@

Method Details

}, "quotaBytesUsed": "A String", # Output only. The number of storage quota bytes used by the file. This includes the head revision as well as previous revisions with `keepForever` enabled. "resourceKey": "A String", # Output only. A key needed to access the item via a shared link. - "sha1Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA1 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it is not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. - "sha256Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA256 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it is not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. + "sha1Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA1 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it's not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. + "sha256Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA256 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it's not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. "shared": True or False, # Output only. Whether the file has been shared. Not populated for items in shared drives. "sharedWithMeTime": "A String", # The time at which the file was shared with the user, if applicable (RFC 3339 date-time). "sharingUser": { # Information about a Drive user. # Output only. The user who shared the file with the requesting user, if applicable. @@ -2606,15 +2606,15 @@

Method Details

"shortcutDetails": { # Shortcut file details. Only populated for shortcut files, which have the mimeType field set to `application/vnd.google-apps.shortcut`. Can only be set on `files.create` requests. "targetId": "A String", # The ID of the file that this shortcut points to. Can only be set on `files.create` requests. "targetMimeType": "A String", # Output only. The MIME type of the file that this shortcut points to. The value of this field is a snapshot of the target's MIME type, captured when the shortcut is created. - "targetResourceKey": "A String", # Output only. The ResourceKey for the target file. + "targetResourceKey": "A String", # Output only. The `resourceKey` for the target file. }, - "size": "A String", # Output only. Size in bytes of blobs and first party editor files. Won't be populated for files that have no size, like shortcuts and folders. - "spaces": [ # Output only. The list of spaces which contain the file. The currently supported values are 'drive', 'appDataFolder' and 'photos'. + "size": "A String", # Output only. Size in bytes of blobs and Google Workspace editor files. Won't be populated for files that have no size, like shortcuts and folders. + "spaces": [ # Output only. The list of spaces which contain the file. The currently supported values are `drive`, `appDataFolder`, and `photos`. "A String", ], "starred": True or False, # Whether the user has starred the file. "teamDriveId": "A String", # Deprecated: Output only. Use `driveId` instead. - "thumbnailLink": "A String", # Output only. A short-lived link to the file's thumbnail, if available. Typically lasts on the order of hours. Not intended for direct usage on web applications due to [Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS)](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/CORS) policies, consider using a proxy server. Only populated when the requesting app can access the file's content. If the file isn't shared publicly, the URL returned in `Files.thumbnailLink` must be fetched using a credentialed request. + "thumbnailLink": "A String", # Output only. A short-lived link to the file's thumbnail, if available. Typically lasts on the order of hours. Not intended for direct usage on web applications due to [Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS)](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/CORS) policies. Consider using a proxy server. Only populated when the requesting app can access the file's content. If the file isn't shared publicly, the URL returned in `files.thumbnailLink` must be fetched using a credentialed request. "thumbnailVersion": "A String", # Output only. The thumbnail version for use in thumbnail cache invalidation. "trashed": True or False, # Whether the file has been trashed, either explicitly or from a trashed parent folder. Only the owner may trash a file, and other users cannot see files in the owner's trash. "trashedTime": "A String", # The time that the item was trashed (RFC 3339 date-time). Only populated for items in shared drives. @@ -2643,8 +2643,8 @@

Method Details

addParents: string, A comma-separated list of parent IDs to add. enforceSingleParent: boolean, Deprecated: Adding files to multiple folders is no longer supported. Use shortcuts instead. includeLabels: string, A comma-separated list of IDs of labels to include in the `labelInfo` part of the response. - includePermissionsForView: string, Specifies which additional view's permissions to include in the response. Only 'published' is supported. - keepRevisionForever: boolean, Whether to set the 'keepForever' field in the new head revision. This is only applicable to files with binary content in Google Drive. Only 200 revisions for the file can be kept forever. If the limit is reached, try deleting pinned revisions. + includePermissionsForView: string, Specifies which additional view's permissions to include in the response. Only `published` is supported. + keepRevisionForever: boolean, Whether to set the `keepForever` field in the new head revision. This is only applicable to files with binary content in Google Drive. Only 200 revisions for the file can be kept forever. If the limit is reached, try deleting pinned revisions. media_body: string, The filename of the media request body, or an instance of a MediaUpload object. media_mime_type: string, The MIME type of the media request body, or an instance of a MediaUpload object. ocrLanguage: string, A language hint for OCR processing during image import (ISO 639-1 code). @@ -2665,56 +2665,56 @@

Method Details

# Entries with null values are cleared in update and copy requests. These properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties. "a_key": "A String", }, - "capabilities": { # Output only. Capabilities the current user has on this file. Each capability corresponds to a fine-grained action that a user may take. + "capabilities": { # Output only. Capabilities the current user has on this file. Each capability corresponds to a fine-grained action that a user may take. For more information, see [Understand file capabilities](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-sharing#capabilities). "canAcceptOwnership": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user is the pending owner of the file. Not populated for shared drive files. - "canAddChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add children to this folder. This is always false when the item is not a folder. - "canAddFolderFromAnotherDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add a folder from another drive (different shared drive or My Drive) to this folder. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canAddChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add children to this folder. This is always `false` when the item isn't a folder. + "canAddFolderFromAnotherDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add a folder from another drive (different shared drive or My Drive) to this folder. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canAddMyDriveParent": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add a parent for the item without removing an existing parent in the same request. Not populated for shared drive files. "canChangeCopyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the `copyRequiresWriterPermission` restriction of this file. "canChangeItemDownloadRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the owner or organizer-applied download restrictions of the file. - "canChangeSecurityUpdateEnabled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the securityUpdateEnabled field on link share metadata. + "canChangeSecurityUpdateEnabled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can change the `securityUpdateEnabled` field on link share metadata. "canChangeViewersCanCopyContent": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. "canComment": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can comment on this file. - "canCopy": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can copy this file. For an item in a shared drive, whether the current user can copy non-folder descendants of this item, or this item itself if it is not a folder. + "canCopy": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can copy this file. For an item in a shared drive, whether the current user can copy non-folder descendants of this item, or this item if it's not a folder. "canDelete": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can delete this file. - "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can delete children of this folder. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canDeleteChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can delete children of this folder. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canDisableInheritedPermissions": True or False, # Whether a user can disable inherited permissions. "canDownload": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can download this file. "canEdit": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can edit this file. Other factors may limit the type of changes a user can make to a file. For example, see `canChangeCopyRequiresWriterPermission` or `canModifyContent`. "canEnableInheritedPermissions": True or False, # Whether a user can re-enable inherited permissions. - "canListChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can list the children of this folder. This is always false when the item is not a folder. + "canListChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can list the children of this folder. This is always `false` when the item isn't a folder. "canModifyContent": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can modify the content of this file. - "canModifyContentRestriction": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use one of `canModifyEditorContentRestriction`, `canModifyOwnerContentRestriction` or `canRemoveContentRestriction`. + "canModifyContentRestriction": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use one of `canModifyEditorContentRestriction`, `canModifyOwnerContentRestriction`, or `canRemoveContentRestriction`. "canModifyEditorContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add or modify content restrictions on the file which are editor restricted. "canModifyLabels": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can modify the labels on the file. "canModifyOwnerContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can add or modify content restrictions which are owner restricted. - "canMoveChildrenOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder outside of the shared drive. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canMoveChildrenOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder outside of the shared drive. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canMoveChildrenOutOfTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveChildrenOutOfDrive` instead. - "canMoveChildrenWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder within this drive. This is false when the item is not a folder. Note that a request to move the child may still fail depending on the current user's access to the child and to the destination folder. + "canMoveChildrenWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder within this drive. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Note that a request to move the child may still fail depending on the current user's access to the child and to the destination folder. "canMoveChildrenWithinTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveChildrenWithinDrive` instead. "canMoveItemIntoTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemOutOfDrive` instead. - "canMoveItemOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item outside of this drive by changing its parent. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that is being added. + "canMoveItemOutOfDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item outside of this drive by changing its parent. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that's being added. "canMoveItemOutOfTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemOutOfDrive` instead. - "canMoveItemWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item within this drive. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that is being added and the parent that is being removed. + "canMoveItemWithinDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this item within this drive. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that's being added and the parent that is being removed. "canMoveItemWithinTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemWithinDrive` instead. "canMoveTeamDriveItem": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canMoveItemWithinDrive` or `canMoveItemOutOfDrive` instead. "canReadDrive": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the shared drive to which this file belongs. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canReadLabels": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the labels on the file. - "canReadRevisions": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the revisions resource of this file. For a shared drive item, whether revisions of non-folder descendants of this item, or this item itself if it is not a folder, can be read. + "canReadRevisions": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can read the revisions resource of this file. For a shared drive item, whether revisions of non-folder descendants of this item, or this item if it's not a folder, can be read. "canReadTeamDrive": True or False, # Deprecated: Output only. Use `canReadDrive` instead. - "canRemoveChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can remove children from this folder. This is always false when the item is not a folder. For a folder in a shared drive, use `canDeleteChildren` or `canTrashChildren` instead. - "canRemoveContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether there is a content restriction on the file that can be removed by the current user. + "canRemoveChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can remove children from this folder. This is always `false` when the item isn't a folder. For a folder in a shared drive, use `canDeleteChildren` or `canTrashChildren` instead. + "canRemoveContentRestriction": True or False, # Output only. Whether there's a content restriction on the file that can be removed by the current user. "canRemoveMyDriveParent": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can remove a parent from the item without adding another parent in the same request. Not populated for shared drive files. "canRename": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can rename this file. "canShare": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can modify the sharing settings for this file. "canTrash": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can move this file to trash. - "canTrashChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can trash children of this folder. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. + "canTrashChildren": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can trash children of this folder. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives. "canUntrash": True or False, # Output only. Whether the current user can restore this file from trash. }, "contentHints": { # Additional information about the content of the file. These fields are never populated in responses. - "indexableText": "A String", # Text to be indexed for the file to improve fullText queries. This is limited to 128KB in length and may contain HTML elements. + "indexableText": "A String", # Text to be indexed for the file to improve fullText queries. This is limited to 128 KB in length and may contain HTML elements. "thumbnail": { # A thumbnail for the file. This will only be used if Google Drive cannot generate a standard thumbnail. - "image": "A String", # The thumbnail data encoded with URL-safe Base64 (RFC 4648 section 5). + "image": "A String", # The thumbnail data encoded with URL-safe Base64 ([RFC 4648 section 5](https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc4648#section-5)). "mimeType": "A String", # The MIME type of the thumbnail. }, }, @@ -2723,7 +2723,7 @@

Method Details

"ownerRestricted": True or False, # Whether the content restriction can only be modified or removed by a user who owns the file. For files in shared drives, any user with `organizer` capabilities can modify or remove this content restriction. "readOnly": True or False, # Whether the content of the file is read-only. If a file is read-only, a new revision of the file may not be added, comments may not be added or modified, and the title of the file may not be modified. "reason": "A String", # Reason for why the content of the file is restricted. This is only mutable on requests that also set `readOnly=true`. - "restrictingUser": { # Information about a Drive user. # Output only. The user who set the content restriction. Only populated if `readOnly` is true. + "restrictingUser": { # Information about a Drive user. # Output only. The user who set the content restriction. Only populated if `readOnly=true`. "displayName": "A String", # Output only. A plain text displayable name for this user. "emailAddress": "A String", # Output only. The email address of the user. This may not be present in certain contexts if the user has not made their email address visible to the requester. "kind": "drive#user", # Output only. Identifies what kind of resource this is. Value: the fixed string `drive#user`. @@ -2736,17 +2736,17 @@

Method Details

"type": "A String", # Output only. The type of the content restriction. Currently the only possible value is `globalContentRestriction`. }, ], - "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download this file, should be disabled for readers and commenters. + "copyRequiresWriterPermission": True or False, # Whether the options to copy, print, or download this file should be disabled for readers and commenters. "createdTime": "A String", # The time at which the file was created (RFC 3339 date-time). "description": "A String", # A short description of the file. "downloadRestrictions": { # Download restrictions applied to the file. # Download restrictions applied on the file. "effectiveDownloadRestrictionWithContext": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # Output only. The effective download restriction applied to this file. This considers all restriction settings and DLP rules. "restrictedForReaders": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for readers. - "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers. + "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers. }, - "itemDownloadRestriction": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # The download restriction of the file applied directly by the owner or organizer. This does not take into account shared drive settings or DLP rules. + "itemDownloadRestriction": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # The download restriction of the file applied directly by the owner or organizer. This doesn't take into account shared drive settings or DLP rules. "restrictedForReaders": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for readers. - "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers. + "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers. }, }, "driveId": "A String", # Output only. ID of the shared drive the file resides in. Only populated for items in shared drives. @@ -2755,10 +2755,10 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "fileExtension": "A String", # Output only. The final component of `fullFileExtension`. This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. - "folderColorRgb": "A String", # The color for a folder or a shortcut to a folder as an RGB hex string. The supported colors are published in the `folderColorPalette` field of the About resource. If an unsupported color is specified, the closest color in the palette is used instead. - "fullFileExtension": "A String", # Output only. The full file extension extracted from the `name` field. May contain multiple concatenated extensions, such as "tar.gz". This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. This is automatically updated when the `name` field changes, however it is not cleared if the new name does not contain a valid extension. + "folderColorRgb": "A String", # The color for a folder or a shortcut to a folder as an RGB hex string. The supported colors are published in the `folderColorPalette` field of the [`about`](/workspace/drive/api/reference/rest/v3/about) resource. If an unsupported color is specified, the closest color in the palette is used instead. + "fullFileExtension": "A String", # Output only. The full file extension extracted from the `name` field. May contain multiple concatenated extensions, such as "tar.gz". This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. This is automatically updated when the `name` field changes, however it's not cleared if the new name doesn't contain a valid extension. "hasAugmentedPermissions": True or False, # Output only. Whether there are permissions directly on this file. This field is only populated for items in shared drives. - "hasThumbnail": True or False, # Output only. Whether this file has a thumbnail. This does not indicate whether the requesting app has access to the thumbnail. To check access, look for the presence of the thumbnailLink field. + "hasThumbnail": True or False, # Output only. Whether this file has a thumbnail. This doesn't indicate whether the requesting app has access to the thumbnail. To check access, look for the presence of the thumbnailLink field. "headRevisionId": "A String", # Output only. The ID of the file's head revision. This is currently only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. "iconLink": "A String", # Output only. A static, unauthenticated link to the file's icon. "id": "A String", # The ID of the file. @@ -2843,11 +2843,11 @@

Method Details

"securityUpdateEnabled": True or False, # Output only. Whether the security update is enabled for this file. }, "md5Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The MD5 checksum for the content of the file. This is only applicable to files with binary content in Google Drive. - "mimeType": "A String", # The MIME type of the file. Google Drive attempts to automatically detect an appropriate value from uploaded content, if no value is provided. The value cannot be changed unless a new revision is uploaded. If a file is created with a Google Doc MIME type, the uploaded content is imported, if possible. The supported import formats are published in the About resource. + "mimeType": "A String", # The MIME type of the file. Google Drive attempts to automatically detect an appropriate value from uploaded content, if no value is provided. The value cannot be changed unless a new revision is uploaded. If a file is created with a Google Doc MIME type, the uploaded content is imported, if possible. The supported import formats are published in the [`about`](/workspace/drive/api/reference/rest/v3/about) resource. "modifiedByMe": True or False, # Output only. Whether the file has been modified by this user. "modifiedByMeTime": "A String", # The last time the file was modified by the user (RFC 3339 date-time). "modifiedTime": "A String", # he last time the file was modified by anyone (RFC 3339 date-time). Note that setting modifiedTime will also update modifiedByMeTime for the user. - "name": "A String", # The name of the file. This is not necessarily unique within a folder. Note that for immutable items such as the top level folders of shared drives, My Drive root folder, and Application Data folder the name is constant. + "name": "A String", # The name of the file. This isn't necessarily unique within a folder. Note that for immutable items such as the top-level folders of shared drives, the My Drive root folder, and the Application Data folder, the name is constant. "originalFilename": "A String", # The original filename of the uploaded content if available, or else the original value of the `name` field. This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. "ownedByMe": True or False, # Output only. Whether the user owns the file. Not populated for items in shared drives. "owners": [ # Output only. The owner of this file. Only certain legacy files may have more than one owner. This field isn't populated for items in shared drives. @@ -2906,8 +2906,8 @@

Method Details

}, "quotaBytesUsed": "A String", # Output only. The number of storage quota bytes used by the file. This includes the head revision as well as previous revisions with `keepForever` enabled. "resourceKey": "A String", # Output only. A key needed to access the item via a shared link. - "sha1Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA1 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it is not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. - "sha256Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA256 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it is not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. + "sha1Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA1 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it's not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. + "sha256Checksum": "A String", # Output only. The SHA256 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it's not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files. "shared": True or False, # Output only. Whether the file has been shared. Not populated for items in shared drives. "sharedWithMeTime": "A String", # The time at which the file was shared with the user, if applicable (RFC 3339 date-time). "sharingUser": { # Information about a Drive user. # Output only. The user who shared the file with the requesting user, if applicable. @@ -2921,15 +2921,15 @@

Method Details

"shortcutDetails": { # Shortcut file details. Only populated for shortcut files, which have the mimeType field set to `application/vnd.google-apps.shortcut`. Can only be set on `files.create` requests. "targetId": "A String", # The ID of the file that this shortcut points to. Can only be set on `files.create` requests. "targetMimeType": "A String", # Output only. The MIME type of the file that this shortcut points to. The value of this field is a snapshot of the target's MIME type, captured when the shortcut is created. - "targetResourceKey": "A String", # Output only. The ResourceKey for the target file. + "targetResourceKey": "A String", # Output only. The `resourceKey` for the target file. }, - "size": "A String", # Output only. Size in bytes of blobs and first party editor files. Won't be populated for files that have no size, like shortcuts and folders. - "spaces": [ # Output only. The list of spaces which contain the file. The currently supported values are 'drive', 'appDataFolder' and 'photos'. + "size": "A String", # Output only. Size in bytes of blobs and Google Workspace editor files. Won't be populated for files that have no size, like shortcuts and folders. + "spaces": [ # Output only. The list of spaces which contain the file. The currently supported values are `drive`, `appDataFolder`, and `photos`. "A String", ], "starred": True or False, # Whether the user has starred the file. "teamDriveId": "A String", # Deprecated: Output only. Use `driveId` instead. - "thumbnailLink": "A String", # Output only. A short-lived link to the file's thumbnail, if available. Typically lasts on the order of hours. Not intended for direct usage on web applications due to [Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS)](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/CORS) policies, consider using a proxy server. Only populated when the requesting app can access the file's content. If the file isn't shared publicly, the URL returned in `Files.thumbnailLink` must be fetched using a credentialed request. + "thumbnailLink": "A String", # Output only. A short-lived link to the file's thumbnail, if available. Typically lasts on the order of hours. Not intended for direct usage on web applications due to [Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS)](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/CORS) policies. Consider using a proxy server. Only populated when the requesting app can access the file's content. If the file isn't shared publicly, the URL returned in `files.thumbnailLink` must be fetched using a credentialed request. "thumbnailVersion": "A String", # Output only. The thumbnail version for use in thumbnail cache invalidation. "trashed": True or False, # Whether the file has been trashed, either explicitly or from a trashed parent folder. Only the owner may trash a file, and other users cannot see files in the owner's trash. "trashedTime": "A String", # The time that the item was trashed (RFC 3339 date-time). Only populated for items in shared drives. @@ -2958,7 +2958,7 @@

Method Details

watch(fileId, acknowledgeAbuse=None, body=None, includeLabels=None, includePermissionsForView=None, supportsAllDrives=None, supportsTeamDrives=None, x__xgafv=None) -
Subscribes to changes to a file.
+  
Subscribes to changes to a file. For more information, see [Notifications for resource changes](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/push).
 
 Args:
   fileId: string, The ID of the file. (required)
@@ -2982,7 +2982,7 @@ 

Method Details

acknowledgeAbuse: boolean, Whether the user is acknowledging the risk of downloading known malware or other abusive files. This is only applicable when the `alt` parameter is set to `media` and the user is the owner of the file or an organizer of the shared drive in which the file resides. includeLabels: string, A comma-separated list of IDs of labels to include in the `labelInfo` part of the response. - includePermissionsForView: string, Specifies which additional view's permissions to include in the response. Only 'published' is supported. + includePermissionsForView: string, Specifies which additional view's permissions to include in the response. Only `published` is supported. supportsAllDrives: boolean, Whether the requesting application supports both My Drives and shared drives. supportsTeamDrives: boolean, Deprecated: Use `supportsAllDrives` instead. x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. diff --git a/docs/dyn/drive_v3.permissions.html b/docs/dyn/drive_v3.permissions.html index 5f4a994c1d1..07ae86babc6 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/drive_v3.permissions.html +++ b/docs/dyn/drive_v3.permissions.html @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@

Method Details

enforceExpansiveAccess: boolean, Whether the request should enforce expansive access rules. enforceSingleParent: boolean, Deprecated: See `moveToNewOwnersRoot` for details. moveToNewOwnersRoot: boolean, This parameter will only take effect if the item is not in a shared drive and the request is attempting to transfer the ownership of the item. If set to `true`, the item will be moved to the new owner's My Drive root folder and all prior parents removed. If set to `false`, parents are not changed. - sendNotificationEmail: boolean, Whether to send a notification email when sharing to users or groups. This defaults to true for users and groups, and is not allowed for other requests. It must not be disabled for ownership transfers. + sendNotificationEmail: boolean, Whether to send a notification email when sharing to users or groups. This defaults to `true` for users and groups, and is not allowed for other requests. It must not be disabled for ownership transfers. supportsAllDrives: boolean, Whether the requesting application supports both My Drives and shared drives. supportsTeamDrives: boolean, Deprecated: Use `supportsAllDrives` instead. transferOwnership: boolean, Whether to transfer ownership to the specified user and downgrade the current owner to a writer. This parameter is required as an acknowledgement of the side effect. diff --git a/docs/dyn/drive_v3.teamdrives.html b/docs/dyn/drive_v3.teamdrives.html index ec89f0b2b97..898c3dcc696 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/drive_v3.teamdrives.html +++ b/docs/dyn/drive_v3.teamdrives.html @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@

Method Details

"domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this Team Drive and items inside this Team Drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this Team Drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this Team Drive. "downloadRestriction": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # Download restrictions applied by shared drive managers. "restrictedForReaders": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for readers. - "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers. + "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers. }, "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders. "teamMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this Team Drive is restricted to members of this Team Drive. @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@

Method Details

"domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this Team Drive and items inside this Team Drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this Team Drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this Team Drive. "downloadRestriction": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # Download restrictions applied by shared drive managers. "restrictedForReaders": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for readers. - "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers. + "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers. }, "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders. "teamMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this Team Drive is restricted to members of this Team Drive. @@ -295,7 +295,7 @@

Method Details

"domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this Team Drive and items inside this Team Drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this Team Drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this Team Drive. "downloadRestriction": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # Download restrictions applied by shared drive managers. "restrictedForReaders": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for readers. - "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers. + "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers. }, "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders. "teamMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this Team Drive is restricted to members of this Team Drive. @@ -369,7 +369,7 @@

Method Details

"domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this Team Drive and items inside this Team Drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this Team Drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this Team Drive. "downloadRestriction": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # Download restrictions applied by shared drive managers. "restrictedForReaders": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for readers. - "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers. + "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers. }, "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders. "teamMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this Team Drive is restricted to members of this Team Drive. @@ -447,7 +447,7 @@

Method Details

"domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this Team Drive and items inside this Team Drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this Team Drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this Team Drive. "downloadRestriction": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # Download restrictions applied by shared drive managers. "restrictedForReaders": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for readers. - "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers. + "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers. }, "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders. "teamMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this Team Drive is restricted to members of this Team Drive. @@ -508,7 +508,7 @@

Method Details

"domainUsersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to this Team Drive and items inside this Team Drive is restricted to users of the domain to which this Team Drive belongs. This restriction may be overridden by other sharing policies controlled outside of this Team Drive. "downloadRestriction": { # A restriction for copy and download of the file. # Download restrictions applied by shared drive managers. "restrictedForReaders": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for readers. - "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers. + "restrictedForWriters": True or False, # Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers. }, "sharingFoldersRequiresOrganizerPermission": True or False, # If true, only users with the organizer role can share folders. If false, users with either the organizer role or the file organizer role can share folders. "teamMembersOnly": True or False, # Whether access to items inside this Team Drive is restricted to members of this Team Drive. diff --git a/docs/dyn/eventarc_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/eventarc_v1.projects.locations.html index d1efcdbb23f..9ed70c67af9 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/eventarc_v1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/eventarc_v1.projects.locations.html @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/eventarc_v1.projects.locations.pipelines.html b/docs/dyn/eventarc_v1.projects.locations.pipelines.html index a87e42ac871..45ef0cc3b37 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/eventarc_v1.projects.locations.pipelines.html +++ b/docs/dyn/eventarc_v1.projects.locations.pipelines.html @@ -127,8 +127,8 @@

Method Details

"cryptoKeyName": "A String", # Optional. Resource name of a KMS crypto key (managed by the user) used to encrypt/decrypt the event data. If not set, an internal Google-owned key will be used to encrypt messages. It must match the pattern "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyring}/cryptoKeys/{key}". "destinations": [ # Required. List of destinations to which messages will be forwarded. Currently, exactly one destination is supported per Pipeline. { # Represents a target of an invocation over HTTP. - "authenticationConfig": { # Represents a config used to authenticate message requests. # Optional. An authentication config used to authenticate message requests, such that destinations can verify the source. For example, this can be used with private GCP destinations that require GCP credentials to access like Cloud Run. This field is optional and should be set only by users interested in authenticated push - "googleOidc": { # Represents a config used to authenticate with a Google OIDC token using a GCP service account. Use this authentication method to invoke your Cloud Run and Cloud Functions destinations or HTTP endpoints that support Google OIDC. # Optional. This authenticate method will apply Google OIDC tokens signed by a GCP service account to the requests. + "authenticationConfig": { # Represents a config used to authenticate message requests. # Optional. An authentication config used to authenticate message requests, such that destinations can verify the source. For example, this can be used with private Google Cloud destinations that require Google Cloud credentials for access like Cloud Run. This field is optional and should be set only by users interested in authenticated push. + "googleOidc": { # Represents a config used to authenticate with a Google OIDC token using a Google Cloud service account. Use this authentication method to invoke your Cloud Run and Cloud Functions destinations or HTTP endpoints that support Google OIDC. # Optional. This authenticate method will apply Google OIDC tokens signed by a Google Cloud service account to the requests. "audience": "A String", # Optional. Audience to be used to generate the OIDC Token. The audience claim identifies the recipient that the JWT is intended for. If unspecified, the destination URI will be used. "serviceAccount": "A String", # Required. Service account email used to generate the OIDC Token. The principal who calls this API must have iam.serviceAccounts.actAs permission in the service account. See https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/understanding-service-accounts for more information. Eventarc service agents must have roles/roles/iam.serviceAccountTokenCreator role to allow the Pipeline to create OpenID tokens for authenticated requests. }, @@ -286,8 +286,8 @@

Method Details

"cryptoKeyName": "A String", # Optional. Resource name of a KMS crypto key (managed by the user) used to encrypt/decrypt the event data. If not set, an internal Google-owned key will be used to encrypt messages. It must match the pattern "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyring}/cryptoKeys/{key}". "destinations": [ # Required. List of destinations to which messages will be forwarded. Currently, exactly one destination is supported per Pipeline. { # Represents a target of an invocation over HTTP. - "authenticationConfig": { # Represents a config used to authenticate message requests. # Optional. An authentication config used to authenticate message requests, such that destinations can verify the source. For example, this can be used with private GCP destinations that require GCP credentials to access like Cloud Run. This field is optional and should be set only by users interested in authenticated push - "googleOidc": { # Represents a config used to authenticate with a Google OIDC token using a GCP service account. Use this authentication method to invoke your Cloud Run and Cloud Functions destinations or HTTP endpoints that support Google OIDC. # Optional. This authenticate method will apply Google OIDC tokens signed by a GCP service account to the requests. + "authenticationConfig": { # Represents a config used to authenticate message requests. # Optional. An authentication config used to authenticate message requests, such that destinations can verify the source. For example, this can be used with private Google Cloud destinations that require Google Cloud credentials for access like Cloud Run. This field is optional and should be set only by users interested in authenticated push. + "googleOidc": { # Represents a config used to authenticate with a Google OIDC token using a Google Cloud service account. Use this authentication method to invoke your Cloud Run and Cloud Functions destinations or HTTP endpoints that support Google OIDC. # Optional. This authenticate method will apply Google OIDC tokens signed by a Google Cloud service account to the requests. "audience": "A String", # Optional. Audience to be used to generate the OIDC Token. The audience claim identifies the recipient that the JWT is intended for. If unspecified, the destination URI will be used. "serviceAccount": "A String", # Required. Service account email used to generate the OIDC Token. The principal who calls this API must have iam.serviceAccounts.actAs permission in the service account. See https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/understanding-service-accounts for more information. Eventarc service agents must have roles/roles/iam.serviceAccountTokenCreator role to allow the Pipeline to create OpenID tokens for authenticated requests. }, @@ -432,8 +432,8 @@

Method Details

"cryptoKeyName": "A String", # Optional. Resource name of a KMS crypto key (managed by the user) used to encrypt/decrypt the event data. If not set, an internal Google-owned key will be used to encrypt messages. It must match the pattern "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyring}/cryptoKeys/{key}". "destinations": [ # Required. List of destinations to which messages will be forwarded. Currently, exactly one destination is supported per Pipeline. { # Represents a target of an invocation over HTTP. - "authenticationConfig": { # Represents a config used to authenticate message requests. # Optional. An authentication config used to authenticate message requests, such that destinations can verify the source. For example, this can be used with private GCP destinations that require GCP credentials to access like Cloud Run. This field is optional and should be set only by users interested in authenticated push - "googleOidc": { # Represents a config used to authenticate with a Google OIDC token using a GCP service account. Use this authentication method to invoke your Cloud Run and Cloud Functions destinations or HTTP endpoints that support Google OIDC. # Optional. This authenticate method will apply Google OIDC tokens signed by a GCP service account to the requests. + "authenticationConfig": { # Represents a config used to authenticate message requests. # Optional. An authentication config used to authenticate message requests, such that destinations can verify the source. For example, this can be used with private Google Cloud destinations that require Google Cloud credentials for access like Cloud Run. This field is optional and should be set only by users interested in authenticated push. + "googleOidc": { # Represents a config used to authenticate with a Google OIDC token using a Google Cloud service account. Use this authentication method to invoke your Cloud Run and Cloud Functions destinations or HTTP endpoints that support Google OIDC. # Optional. This authenticate method will apply Google OIDC tokens signed by a Google Cloud service account to the requests. "audience": "A String", # Optional. Audience to be used to generate the OIDC Token. The audience claim identifies the recipient that the JWT is intended for. If unspecified, the destination URI will be used. "serviceAccount": "A String", # Required. Service account email used to generate the OIDC Token. The principal who calls this API must have iam.serviceAccounts.actAs permission in the service account. See https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/understanding-service-accounts for more information. Eventarc service agents must have roles/roles/iam.serviceAccountTokenCreator role to allow the Pipeline to create OpenID tokens for authenticated requests. }, @@ -537,8 +537,8 @@

Method Details

"cryptoKeyName": "A String", # Optional. Resource name of a KMS crypto key (managed by the user) used to encrypt/decrypt the event data. If not set, an internal Google-owned key will be used to encrypt messages. It must match the pattern "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyring}/cryptoKeys/{key}". "destinations": [ # Required. List of destinations to which messages will be forwarded. Currently, exactly one destination is supported per Pipeline. { # Represents a target of an invocation over HTTP. - "authenticationConfig": { # Represents a config used to authenticate message requests. # Optional. An authentication config used to authenticate message requests, such that destinations can verify the source. For example, this can be used with private GCP destinations that require GCP credentials to access like Cloud Run. This field is optional and should be set only by users interested in authenticated push - "googleOidc": { # Represents a config used to authenticate with a Google OIDC token using a GCP service account. Use this authentication method to invoke your Cloud Run and Cloud Functions destinations or HTTP endpoints that support Google OIDC. # Optional. This authenticate method will apply Google OIDC tokens signed by a GCP service account to the requests. + "authenticationConfig": { # Represents a config used to authenticate message requests. # Optional. An authentication config used to authenticate message requests, such that destinations can verify the source. For example, this can be used with private Google Cloud destinations that require Google Cloud credentials for access like Cloud Run. This field is optional and should be set only by users interested in authenticated push. + "googleOidc": { # Represents a config used to authenticate with a Google OIDC token using a Google Cloud service account. Use this authentication method to invoke your Cloud Run and Cloud Functions destinations or HTTP endpoints that support Google OIDC. # Optional. This authenticate method will apply Google OIDC tokens signed by a Google Cloud service account to the requests. "audience": "A String", # Optional. Audience to be used to generate the OIDC Token. The audience claim identifies the recipient that the JWT is intended for. If unspecified, the destination URI will be used. "serviceAccount": "A String", # Required. Service account email used to generate the OIDC Token. The principal who calls this API must have iam.serviceAccounts.actAs permission in the service account. See https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/understanding-service-accounts for more information. Eventarc service agents must have roles/roles/iam.serviceAccountTokenCreator role to allow the Pipeline to create OpenID tokens for authenticated requests. }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/file_v1.projects.locations.instances.html b/docs/dyn/file_v1.projects.locations.instances.html index 94425d01e94..cd0dd3e7b82 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/file_v1.projects.locations.instances.html +++ b/docs/dyn/file_v1.projects.locations.instances.html @@ -144,6 +144,7 @@

Method Details

"ipRanges": [ # List of either an IPv4 addresses in the format `{octet1}.{octet2}.{octet3}.{octet4}` or CIDR ranges in the format `{octet1}.{octet2}.{octet3}.{octet4}/{mask size}` which may mount the file share. Overlapping IP ranges are not allowed, both within and across NfsExportOptions. An error will be returned. The limit is 64 IP ranges/addresses for each FileShareConfig among all NfsExportOptions. "A String", ], + "network": "A String", # Optional. The source VPC network for ip_ranges. Required for instances using Private Service Connect, optional otherwise. If provided, must be the same network specified in the `NetworkConfig.network` field. "squashMode": "A String", # Either NO_ROOT_SQUASH, for allowing root access on the exported directory, or ROOT_SQUASH, for not allowing root access. The default is NO_ROOT_SQUASH. }, ], @@ -167,6 +168,9 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], "network": "A String", # The name of the Google Compute Engine [VPC network](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/vpc) to which the instance is connected. + "pscConfig": { # Private Service Connect configuration. # Optional. Private Service Connect configuration. Should only be set when connect_mode is PRIVATE_SERVICE_CONNECT. + "endpointProject": "A String", # Optional. Consumer service project in which the Private Service Connect endpoint would be set up. This is optional, and only relevant in case the network is a shared VPC. If this is not specified, the endpoint would be setup in the VPC host project. + }, "reservedIpRange": "A String", # Optional, reserved_ip_range can have one of the following two types of values. * CIDR range value when using DIRECT_PEERING connect mode. * [Allocated IP address range](https://cloud.google.com/compute/docs/ip-addresses/reserve-static-internal-ip-address) when using PRIVATE_SERVICE_ACCESS connect mode. When the name of an allocated IP address range is specified, it must be one of the ranges associated with the private service access connection. When specified as a direct CIDR value, it must be a /29 CIDR block for Basic tier, a /24 CIDR block for High Scale tier, or a /26 CIDR block for Enterprise tier in one of the [internal IP address ranges](https://www.arin.net/reference/research/statistics/address_filters/) that identifies the range of IP addresses reserved for this instance. For example, 10.0.0.0/29, 192.168.0.0/24 or 192.168.0.0/26, respectively. The range you specify can't overlap with either existing subnets or assigned IP address ranges for other Filestore instances in the selected VPC network. }, ], @@ -313,6 +317,7 @@

Method Details

"ipRanges": [ # List of either an IPv4 addresses in the format `{octet1}.{octet2}.{octet3}.{octet4}` or CIDR ranges in the format `{octet1}.{octet2}.{octet3}.{octet4}/{mask size}` which may mount the file share. Overlapping IP ranges are not allowed, both within and across NfsExportOptions. An error will be returned. The limit is 64 IP ranges/addresses for each FileShareConfig among all NfsExportOptions. "A String", ], + "network": "A String", # Optional. The source VPC network for ip_ranges. Required for instances using Private Service Connect, optional otherwise. If provided, must be the same network specified in the `NetworkConfig.network` field. "squashMode": "A String", # Either NO_ROOT_SQUASH, for allowing root access on the exported directory, or ROOT_SQUASH, for not allowing root access. The default is NO_ROOT_SQUASH. }, ], @@ -336,6 +341,9 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], "network": "A String", # The name of the Google Compute Engine [VPC network](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/vpc) to which the instance is connected. + "pscConfig": { # Private Service Connect configuration. # Optional. Private Service Connect configuration. Should only be set when connect_mode is PRIVATE_SERVICE_CONNECT. + "endpointProject": "A String", # Optional. Consumer service project in which the Private Service Connect endpoint would be set up. This is optional, and only relevant in case the network is a shared VPC. If this is not specified, the endpoint would be setup in the VPC host project. + }, "reservedIpRange": "A String", # Optional, reserved_ip_range can have one of the following two types of values. * CIDR range value when using DIRECT_PEERING connect mode. * [Allocated IP address range](https://cloud.google.com/compute/docs/ip-addresses/reserve-static-internal-ip-address) when using PRIVATE_SERVICE_ACCESS connect mode. When the name of an allocated IP address range is specified, it must be one of the ranges associated with the private service access connection. When specified as a direct CIDR value, it must be a /29 CIDR block for Basic tier, a /24 CIDR block for High Scale tier, or a /26 CIDR block for Enterprise tier in one of the [internal IP address ranges](https://www.arin.net/reference/research/statistics/address_filters/) that identifies the range of IP addresses reserved for this instance. For example, 10.0.0.0/29, 192.168.0.0/24 or 192.168.0.0/26, respectively. The range you specify can't overlap with either existing subnets or assigned IP address ranges for other Filestore instances in the selected VPC network. }, ], @@ -423,6 +431,7 @@

Method Details

"ipRanges": [ # List of either an IPv4 addresses in the format `{octet1}.{octet2}.{octet3}.{octet4}` or CIDR ranges in the format `{octet1}.{octet2}.{octet3}.{octet4}/{mask size}` which may mount the file share. Overlapping IP ranges are not allowed, both within and across NfsExportOptions. An error will be returned. The limit is 64 IP ranges/addresses for each FileShareConfig among all NfsExportOptions. "A String", ], + "network": "A String", # Optional. The source VPC network for ip_ranges. Required for instances using Private Service Connect, optional otherwise. If provided, must be the same network specified in the `NetworkConfig.network` field. "squashMode": "A String", # Either NO_ROOT_SQUASH, for allowing root access on the exported directory, or ROOT_SQUASH, for not allowing root access. The default is NO_ROOT_SQUASH. }, ], @@ -446,6 +455,9 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], "network": "A String", # The name of the Google Compute Engine [VPC network](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/vpc) to which the instance is connected. + "pscConfig": { # Private Service Connect configuration. # Optional. Private Service Connect configuration. Should only be set when connect_mode is PRIVATE_SERVICE_CONNECT. + "endpointProject": "A String", # Optional. Consumer service project in which the Private Service Connect endpoint would be set up. This is optional, and only relevant in case the network is a shared VPC. If this is not specified, the endpoint would be setup in the VPC host project. + }, "reservedIpRange": "A String", # Optional, reserved_ip_range can have one of the following two types of values. * CIDR range value when using DIRECT_PEERING connect mode. * [Allocated IP address range](https://cloud.google.com/compute/docs/ip-addresses/reserve-static-internal-ip-address) when using PRIVATE_SERVICE_ACCESS connect mode. When the name of an allocated IP address range is specified, it must be one of the ranges associated with the private service access connection. When specified as a direct CIDR value, it must be a /29 CIDR block for Basic tier, a /24 CIDR block for High Scale tier, or a /26 CIDR block for Enterprise tier in one of the [internal IP address ranges](https://www.arin.net/reference/research/statistics/address_filters/) that identifies the range of IP addresses reserved for this instance. For example, 10.0.0.0/29, 192.168.0.0/24 or 192.168.0.0/26, respectively. The range you specify can't overlap with either existing subnets or assigned IP address ranges for other Filestore instances in the selected VPC network. }, ], @@ -542,6 +554,7 @@

Method Details

"ipRanges": [ # List of either an IPv4 addresses in the format `{octet1}.{octet2}.{octet3}.{octet4}` or CIDR ranges in the format `{octet1}.{octet2}.{octet3}.{octet4}/{mask size}` which may mount the file share. Overlapping IP ranges are not allowed, both within and across NfsExportOptions. An error will be returned. The limit is 64 IP ranges/addresses for each FileShareConfig among all NfsExportOptions. "A String", ], + "network": "A String", # Optional. The source VPC network for ip_ranges. Required for instances using Private Service Connect, optional otherwise. If provided, must be the same network specified in the `NetworkConfig.network` field. "squashMode": "A String", # Either NO_ROOT_SQUASH, for allowing root access on the exported directory, or ROOT_SQUASH, for not allowing root access. The default is NO_ROOT_SQUASH. }, ], @@ -565,6 +578,9 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], "network": "A String", # The name of the Google Compute Engine [VPC network](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/vpc) to which the instance is connected. + "pscConfig": { # Private Service Connect configuration. # Optional. Private Service Connect configuration. Should only be set when connect_mode is PRIVATE_SERVICE_CONNECT. + "endpointProject": "A String", # Optional. Consumer service project in which the Private Service Connect endpoint would be set up. This is optional, and only relevant in case the network is a shared VPC. If this is not specified, the endpoint would be setup in the VPC host project. + }, "reservedIpRange": "A String", # Optional, reserved_ip_range can have one of the following two types of values. * CIDR range value when using DIRECT_PEERING connect mode. * [Allocated IP address range](https://cloud.google.com/compute/docs/ip-addresses/reserve-static-internal-ip-address) when using PRIVATE_SERVICE_ACCESS connect mode. When the name of an allocated IP address range is specified, it must be one of the ranges associated with the private service access connection. When specified as a direct CIDR value, it must be a /29 CIDR block for Basic tier, a /24 CIDR block for High Scale tier, or a /26 CIDR block for Enterprise tier in one of the [internal IP address ranges](https://www.arin.net/reference/research/statistics/address_filters/) that identifies the range of IP addresses reserved for this instance. For example, 10.0.0.0/29, 192.168.0.0/24 or 192.168.0.0/26, respectively. The range you specify can't overlap with either existing subnets or assigned IP address ranges for other Filestore instances in the selected VPC network. }, ], diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebaseappcheck_v1.projects.apps.playIntegrityConfig.html b/docs/dyn/firebaseappcheck_v1.projects.apps.playIntegrityConfig.html index 2a18e81e184..2380928262f 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/firebaseappcheck_v1.projects.apps.playIntegrityConfig.html +++ b/docs/dyn/firebaseappcheck_v1.projects.apps.playIntegrityConfig.html @@ -105,6 +105,15 @@

Method Details

{ # Response message for the BatchGetPlayIntegrityConfigs method. "configs": [ # PlayIntegrityConfigs retrieved. { # An app's Play Integrity configuration object. This configuration controls certain properties of the `AppCheckToken` returned by ExchangePlayIntegrityToken, such as its ttl. Note that your registered SHA-256 certificate fingerprints are used to validate tokens issued by the Play Integrity API; please register them via the Firebase Console or programmatically via the [Firebase Management Service](https://firebase.google.com/docs/projects/api/reference/rest/v1beta1/projects.androidApps.sha/create). + "accountDetails": { # A settings object specifying account requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**account details** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#account-details-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. # Specifies account requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**account details** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#account-details-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. + "requireLicensed": True or False, # Specifies whether the caller must have received the [`LICENSED` verdict](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#account-details-field). For additional details about scenarios where your users will receive this `LICENSED` label, see [the default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default). If set to `true`, apps without the `LICENSED` app licensing verdict will be rejected. If set to `false`, any app licensing verdict is allowed. The default value is `false`. + }, + "appIntegrity": { # A settings object specifying application integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**application integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#application-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. # Specifies application integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**application integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#application-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. + "allowUnrecognizedVersion": True or False, # Specifies whether your running app is allowed to have the `UNRECOGNIZED_VERSION` [app recognition verdict](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#application-integrity-field). Note that the app recognition verdict `PLAY_RECOGNIZED` is a strong, comprehensive integrity signal that takes into account various other signals, including conditional and optional device integrity responses that you have opted into. If your app is published off-Play, this field should be set to `true` to allow instances of your app installed from off-Play sources to function. If set to `false`, only `PLAY_RECOGNIZED` verdicts are allowed, and both `UNRECOGNIZED_VERSION` and `UNEVALUATED` will be rejected. If set to `true`, any app recognition verdict is allowed. The default value is `false`. + }, + "deviceIntegrity": { # A settings object specifying device integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**device integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#device-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. Warning: There are also [conditional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#conditional) as well as [optional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#optional_device_information) responses that you can receive, but requires additional explicit opt-in from you. The App Check API is **not** responsible for any such opt-ins. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. # Specifies device integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**device integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#device-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. Warning: There are also [conditional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#conditional) as well as [optional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#optional_device_information) responses that you can receive, but requires additional explicit opt-in from you. The App Check API is **not** responsible for any such opt-ins. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. + "minDeviceRecognitionLevel": "A String", # Specifies the minimum device integrity level in order for the device to be considered valid. Any device with a device recognition verdict lower than this level will be rejected. If this is unspecified, the default level is `NO_INTEGRITY`. + }, "name": "A String", # Required. The relative resource name of the Play Integrity configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/playIntegrityConfig ``` "tokenTtl": "A String", # Specifies the duration for which App Check tokens exchanged from Play Integrity tokens will be valid. If unset, a default value of 1 hour is assumed. Must be between 30 minutes and 7 days, inclusive. }, @@ -132,6 +141,15 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # An app's Play Integrity configuration object. This configuration controls certain properties of the `AppCheckToken` returned by ExchangePlayIntegrityToken, such as its ttl. Note that your registered SHA-256 certificate fingerprints are used to validate tokens issued by the Play Integrity API; please register them via the Firebase Console or programmatically via the [Firebase Management Service](https://firebase.google.com/docs/projects/api/reference/rest/v1beta1/projects.androidApps.sha/create). + "accountDetails": { # A settings object specifying account requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**account details** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#account-details-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. # Specifies account requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**account details** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#account-details-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. + "requireLicensed": True or False, # Specifies whether the caller must have received the [`LICENSED` verdict](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#account-details-field). For additional details about scenarios where your users will receive this `LICENSED` label, see [the default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default). If set to `true`, apps without the `LICENSED` app licensing verdict will be rejected. If set to `false`, any app licensing verdict is allowed. The default value is `false`. + }, + "appIntegrity": { # A settings object specifying application integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**application integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#application-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. # Specifies application integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**application integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#application-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. + "allowUnrecognizedVersion": True or False, # Specifies whether your running app is allowed to have the `UNRECOGNIZED_VERSION` [app recognition verdict](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#application-integrity-field). Note that the app recognition verdict `PLAY_RECOGNIZED` is a strong, comprehensive integrity signal that takes into account various other signals, including conditional and optional device integrity responses that you have opted into. If your app is published off-Play, this field should be set to `true` to allow instances of your app installed from off-Play sources to function. If set to `false`, only `PLAY_RECOGNIZED` verdicts are allowed, and both `UNRECOGNIZED_VERSION` and `UNEVALUATED` will be rejected. If set to `true`, any app recognition verdict is allowed. The default value is `false`. + }, + "deviceIntegrity": { # A settings object specifying device integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**device integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#device-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. Warning: There are also [conditional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#conditional) as well as [optional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#optional_device_information) responses that you can receive, but requires additional explicit opt-in from you. The App Check API is **not** responsible for any such opt-ins. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. # Specifies device integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**device integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#device-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. Warning: There are also [conditional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#conditional) as well as [optional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#optional_device_information) responses that you can receive, but requires additional explicit opt-in from you. The App Check API is **not** responsible for any such opt-ins. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. + "minDeviceRecognitionLevel": "A String", # Specifies the minimum device integrity level in order for the device to be considered valid. Any device with a device recognition verdict lower than this level will be rejected. If this is unspecified, the default level is `NO_INTEGRITY`. + }, "name": "A String", # Required. The relative resource name of the Play Integrity configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/playIntegrityConfig ``` "tokenTtl": "A String", # Specifies the duration for which App Check tokens exchanged from Play Integrity tokens will be valid. If unset, a default value of 1 hour is assumed. Must be between 30 minutes and 7 days, inclusive. }
@@ -147,6 +165,15 @@

Method Details

The object takes the form of: { # An app's Play Integrity configuration object. This configuration controls certain properties of the `AppCheckToken` returned by ExchangePlayIntegrityToken, such as its ttl. Note that your registered SHA-256 certificate fingerprints are used to validate tokens issued by the Play Integrity API; please register them via the Firebase Console or programmatically via the [Firebase Management Service](https://firebase.google.com/docs/projects/api/reference/rest/v1beta1/projects.androidApps.sha/create). + "accountDetails": { # A settings object specifying account requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**account details** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#account-details-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. # Specifies account requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**account details** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#account-details-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. + "requireLicensed": True or False, # Specifies whether the caller must have received the [`LICENSED` verdict](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#account-details-field). For additional details about scenarios where your users will receive this `LICENSED` label, see [the default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default). If set to `true`, apps without the `LICENSED` app licensing verdict will be rejected. If set to `false`, any app licensing verdict is allowed. The default value is `false`. + }, + "appIntegrity": { # A settings object specifying application integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**application integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#application-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. # Specifies application integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**application integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#application-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. + "allowUnrecognizedVersion": True or False, # Specifies whether your running app is allowed to have the `UNRECOGNIZED_VERSION` [app recognition verdict](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#application-integrity-field). Note that the app recognition verdict `PLAY_RECOGNIZED` is a strong, comprehensive integrity signal that takes into account various other signals, including conditional and optional device integrity responses that you have opted into. If your app is published off-Play, this field should be set to `true` to allow instances of your app installed from off-Play sources to function. If set to `false`, only `PLAY_RECOGNIZED` verdicts are allowed, and both `UNRECOGNIZED_VERSION` and `UNEVALUATED` will be rejected. If set to `true`, any app recognition verdict is allowed. The default value is `false`. + }, + "deviceIntegrity": { # A settings object specifying device integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**device integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#device-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. Warning: There are also [conditional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#conditional) as well as [optional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#optional_device_information) responses that you can receive, but requires additional explicit opt-in from you. The App Check API is **not** responsible for any such opt-ins. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. # Specifies device integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**device integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#device-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. Warning: There are also [conditional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#conditional) as well as [optional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#optional_device_information) responses that you can receive, but requires additional explicit opt-in from you. The App Check API is **not** responsible for any such opt-ins. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. + "minDeviceRecognitionLevel": "A String", # Specifies the minimum device integrity level in order for the device to be considered valid. Any device with a device recognition verdict lower than this level will be rejected. If this is unspecified, the default level is `NO_INTEGRITY`. + }, "name": "A String", # Required. The relative resource name of the Play Integrity configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/playIntegrityConfig ``` "tokenTtl": "A String", # Specifies the duration for which App Check tokens exchanged from Play Integrity tokens will be valid. If unset, a default value of 1 hour is assumed. Must be between 30 minutes and 7 days, inclusive. } @@ -161,6 +188,15 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # An app's Play Integrity configuration object. This configuration controls certain properties of the `AppCheckToken` returned by ExchangePlayIntegrityToken, such as its ttl. Note that your registered SHA-256 certificate fingerprints are used to validate tokens issued by the Play Integrity API; please register them via the Firebase Console or programmatically via the [Firebase Management Service](https://firebase.google.com/docs/projects/api/reference/rest/v1beta1/projects.androidApps.sha/create). + "accountDetails": { # A settings object specifying account requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**account details** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#account-details-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. # Specifies account requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**account details** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#account-details-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. + "requireLicensed": True or False, # Specifies whether the caller must have received the [`LICENSED` verdict](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#account-details-field). For additional details about scenarios where your users will receive this `LICENSED` label, see [the default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default). If set to `true`, apps without the `LICENSED` app licensing verdict will be rejected. If set to `false`, any app licensing verdict is allowed. The default value is `false`. + }, + "appIntegrity": { # A settings object specifying application integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**application integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#application-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. # Specifies application integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**application integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#application-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. + "allowUnrecognizedVersion": True or False, # Specifies whether your running app is allowed to have the `UNRECOGNIZED_VERSION` [app recognition verdict](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#application-integrity-field). Note that the app recognition verdict `PLAY_RECOGNIZED` is a strong, comprehensive integrity signal that takes into account various other signals, including conditional and optional device integrity responses that you have opted into. If your app is published off-Play, this field should be set to `true` to allow instances of your app installed from off-Play sources to function. If set to `false`, only `PLAY_RECOGNIZED` verdicts are allowed, and both `UNRECOGNIZED_VERSION` and `UNEVALUATED` will be rejected. If set to `true`, any app recognition verdict is allowed. The default value is `false`. + }, + "deviceIntegrity": { # A settings object specifying device integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**device integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#device-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. Warning: There are also [conditional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#conditional) as well as [optional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#optional_device_information) responses that you can receive, but requires additional explicit opt-in from you. The App Check API is **not** responsible for any such opt-ins. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. # Specifies device integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**device integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#device-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. Warning: There are also [conditional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#conditional) as well as [optional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#optional_device_information) responses that you can receive, but requires additional explicit opt-in from you. The App Check API is **not** responsible for any such opt-ins. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. + "minDeviceRecognitionLevel": "A String", # Specifies the minimum device integrity level in order for the device to be considered valid. Any device with a device recognition verdict lower than this level will be rejected. If this is unspecified, the default level is `NO_INTEGRITY`. + }, "name": "A String", # Required. The relative resource name of the Play Integrity configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/playIntegrityConfig ``` "tokenTtl": "A String", # Specifies the duration for which App Check tokens exchanged from Play Integrity tokens will be valid. If unset, a default value of 1 hour is assumed. Must be between 30 minutes and 7 days, inclusive. }
diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebaseappcheck_v1.projects.apps.recaptchaEnterpriseConfig.html b/docs/dyn/firebaseappcheck_v1.projects.apps.recaptchaEnterpriseConfig.html index 2c914b3ba8f..4dd4d8315a8 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/firebaseappcheck_v1.projects.apps.recaptchaEnterpriseConfig.html +++ b/docs/dyn/firebaseappcheck_v1.projects.apps.recaptchaEnterpriseConfig.html @@ -106,6 +106,9 @@

Method Details

"configs": [ # RecaptchaEnterpriseConfigs retrieved. { # An app's reCAPTCHA Enterprise configuration object. This configuration is used by ExchangeRecaptchaEnterpriseToken to validate reCAPTCHA tokens issued to apps by reCAPTCHA Enterprise. It also controls certain properties of the returned `AppCheckToken`, such as its ttl. "name": "A String", # Required. The relative resource name of the reCAPTCHA Enterprise configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/recaptchaEnterpriseConfig ``` + "riskAnalysis": { # A settings object specifying risk tolerance and requirements for your application. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**`riskAnalysis`**](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha/docs/interpret-assessment-website#interpret_assessment) tuple in the assessment obtained from reCAPTCHA Enterprise. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. # Specifies risk tolerance and requirements for your application. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**`riskAnalysis`**](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha/docs/interpret-assessment-website#interpret_assessment) tuple in the assessment obtained from reCAPTCHA Enterprise. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. + "minValidScore": 3.14, # Specifies a minimum score required for a reCAPTCHA token to be considered valid. If its score is greater than or equal to this value, it will be accepted; otherwise, it will be rejected. The value must be between 0.0 and 1.0. The default value is 0.5. + }, "siteKey": "A String", # The score-based site key [created in reCAPTCHA Enterprise](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha-enterprise/docs/create-key#creating_a_site_key) used to [invoke reCAPTCHA and generate the reCAPTCHA tokens](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha-enterprise/docs/instrument-web-pages) for your application. Important: This is *not* the `site_secret` (as it is in reCAPTCHA v3), but rather your score-based reCAPTCHA Enterprise site key. "tokenTtl": "A String", # Specifies the duration for which App Check tokens exchanged from reCAPTCHA Enterprise tokens will be valid. If unset, a default value of 1 hour is assumed. Must be between 30 minutes and 7 days, inclusive. }, @@ -134,6 +137,9 @@

Method Details

{ # An app's reCAPTCHA Enterprise configuration object. This configuration is used by ExchangeRecaptchaEnterpriseToken to validate reCAPTCHA tokens issued to apps by reCAPTCHA Enterprise. It also controls certain properties of the returned `AppCheckToken`, such as its ttl. "name": "A String", # Required. The relative resource name of the reCAPTCHA Enterprise configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/recaptchaEnterpriseConfig ``` + "riskAnalysis": { # A settings object specifying risk tolerance and requirements for your application. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**`riskAnalysis`**](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha/docs/interpret-assessment-website#interpret_assessment) tuple in the assessment obtained from reCAPTCHA Enterprise. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. # Specifies risk tolerance and requirements for your application. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**`riskAnalysis`**](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha/docs/interpret-assessment-website#interpret_assessment) tuple in the assessment obtained from reCAPTCHA Enterprise. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. + "minValidScore": 3.14, # Specifies a minimum score required for a reCAPTCHA token to be considered valid. If its score is greater than or equal to this value, it will be accepted; otherwise, it will be rejected. The value must be between 0.0 and 1.0. The default value is 0.5. + }, "siteKey": "A String", # The score-based site key [created in reCAPTCHA Enterprise](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha-enterprise/docs/create-key#creating_a_site_key) used to [invoke reCAPTCHA and generate the reCAPTCHA tokens](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha-enterprise/docs/instrument-web-pages) for your application. Important: This is *not* the `site_secret` (as it is in reCAPTCHA v3), but rather your score-based reCAPTCHA Enterprise site key. "tokenTtl": "A String", # Specifies the duration for which App Check tokens exchanged from reCAPTCHA Enterprise tokens will be valid. If unset, a default value of 1 hour is assumed. Must be between 30 minutes and 7 days, inclusive. }
@@ -150,6 +156,9 @@

Method Details

{ # An app's reCAPTCHA Enterprise configuration object. This configuration is used by ExchangeRecaptchaEnterpriseToken to validate reCAPTCHA tokens issued to apps by reCAPTCHA Enterprise. It also controls certain properties of the returned `AppCheckToken`, such as its ttl. "name": "A String", # Required. The relative resource name of the reCAPTCHA Enterprise configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/recaptchaEnterpriseConfig ``` + "riskAnalysis": { # A settings object specifying risk tolerance and requirements for your application. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**`riskAnalysis`**](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha/docs/interpret-assessment-website#interpret_assessment) tuple in the assessment obtained from reCAPTCHA Enterprise. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. # Specifies risk tolerance and requirements for your application. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**`riskAnalysis`**](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha/docs/interpret-assessment-website#interpret_assessment) tuple in the assessment obtained from reCAPTCHA Enterprise. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. + "minValidScore": 3.14, # Specifies a minimum score required for a reCAPTCHA token to be considered valid. If its score is greater than or equal to this value, it will be accepted; otherwise, it will be rejected. The value must be between 0.0 and 1.0. The default value is 0.5. + }, "siteKey": "A String", # The score-based site key [created in reCAPTCHA Enterprise](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha-enterprise/docs/create-key#creating_a_site_key) used to [invoke reCAPTCHA and generate the reCAPTCHA tokens](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha-enterprise/docs/instrument-web-pages) for your application. Important: This is *not* the `site_secret` (as it is in reCAPTCHA v3), but rather your score-based reCAPTCHA Enterprise site key. "tokenTtl": "A String", # Specifies the duration for which App Check tokens exchanged from reCAPTCHA Enterprise tokens will be valid. If unset, a default value of 1 hour is assumed. Must be between 30 minutes and 7 days, inclusive. } @@ -165,6 +174,9 @@

Method Details

{ # An app's reCAPTCHA Enterprise configuration object. This configuration is used by ExchangeRecaptchaEnterpriseToken to validate reCAPTCHA tokens issued to apps by reCAPTCHA Enterprise. It also controls certain properties of the returned `AppCheckToken`, such as its ttl. "name": "A String", # Required. The relative resource name of the reCAPTCHA Enterprise configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/recaptchaEnterpriseConfig ``` + "riskAnalysis": { # A settings object specifying risk tolerance and requirements for your application. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**`riskAnalysis`**](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha/docs/interpret-assessment-website#interpret_assessment) tuple in the assessment obtained from reCAPTCHA Enterprise. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. # Specifies risk tolerance and requirements for your application. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**`riskAnalysis`**](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha/docs/interpret-assessment-website#interpret_assessment) tuple in the assessment obtained from reCAPTCHA Enterprise. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. + "minValidScore": 3.14, # Specifies a minimum score required for a reCAPTCHA token to be considered valid. If its score is greater than or equal to this value, it will be accepted; otherwise, it will be rejected. The value must be between 0.0 and 1.0. The default value is 0.5. + }, "siteKey": "A String", # The score-based site key [created in reCAPTCHA Enterprise](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha-enterprise/docs/create-key#creating_a_site_key) used to [invoke reCAPTCHA and generate the reCAPTCHA tokens](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha-enterprise/docs/instrument-web-pages) for your application. Important: This is *not* the `site_secret` (as it is in reCAPTCHA v3), but rather your score-based reCAPTCHA Enterprise site key. "tokenTtl": "A String", # Specifies the duration for which App Check tokens exchanged from reCAPTCHA Enterprise tokens will be valid. If unset, a default value of 1 hour is assumed. Must be between 30 minutes and 7 days, inclusive. }
diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebaseappcheck_v1.projects.apps.recaptchaV3Config.html b/docs/dyn/firebaseappcheck_v1.projects.apps.recaptchaV3Config.html index b6067ef7769..49c2bca27c4 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/firebaseappcheck_v1.projects.apps.recaptchaV3Config.html +++ b/docs/dyn/firebaseappcheck_v1.projects.apps.recaptchaV3Config.html @@ -105,6 +105,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Response message for the BatchGetRecaptchaV3Configs method. "configs": [ # RecaptchaV3Configs retrieved. { # An app's reCAPTCHA v3 configuration object. This configuration is used by ExchangeRecaptchaV3Token to validate reCAPTCHA tokens issued to apps by reCAPTCHA v3. It also controls certain properties of the returned `AppCheckToken`, such as its ttl. + "minValidScore": 3.14, # Specifies a minimum score required for a reCAPTCHA token to be considered valid. If its score is greater than or equal to this value, it will be accepted; otherwise, it will be rejected. The value must be between 0.0 and 1.0. The default value is 0.5. "name": "A String", # Required. The relative resource name of the reCAPTCHA v3 configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/recaptchaV3Config ``` "siteSecret": "A String", # Required. Input only. The site secret used to identify your service for reCAPTCHA v3 verification. For security reasons, this field will never be populated in any response. "siteSecretSet": True or False, # Output only. Whether the `site_secret` field was previously set. Since we will never return the `site_secret` field, this field is the only way to find out whether it was previously set. @@ -134,6 +135,7 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # An app's reCAPTCHA v3 configuration object. This configuration is used by ExchangeRecaptchaV3Token to validate reCAPTCHA tokens issued to apps by reCAPTCHA v3. It also controls certain properties of the returned `AppCheckToken`, such as its ttl. + "minValidScore": 3.14, # Specifies a minimum score required for a reCAPTCHA token to be considered valid. If its score is greater than or equal to this value, it will be accepted; otherwise, it will be rejected. The value must be between 0.0 and 1.0. The default value is 0.5. "name": "A String", # Required. The relative resource name of the reCAPTCHA v3 configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/recaptchaV3Config ``` "siteSecret": "A String", # Required. Input only. The site secret used to identify your service for reCAPTCHA v3 verification. For security reasons, this field will never be populated in any response. "siteSecretSet": True or False, # Output only. Whether the `site_secret` field was previously set. Since we will never return the `site_secret` field, this field is the only way to find out whether it was previously set. @@ -151,6 +153,7 @@

Method Details

The object takes the form of: { # An app's reCAPTCHA v3 configuration object. This configuration is used by ExchangeRecaptchaV3Token to validate reCAPTCHA tokens issued to apps by reCAPTCHA v3. It also controls certain properties of the returned `AppCheckToken`, such as its ttl. + "minValidScore": 3.14, # Specifies a minimum score required for a reCAPTCHA token to be considered valid. If its score is greater than or equal to this value, it will be accepted; otherwise, it will be rejected. The value must be between 0.0 and 1.0. The default value is 0.5. "name": "A String", # Required. The relative resource name of the reCAPTCHA v3 configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/recaptchaV3Config ``` "siteSecret": "A String", # Required. Input only. The site secret used to identify your service for reCAPTCHA v3 verification. For security reasons, this field will never be populated in any response. "siteSecretSet": True or False, # Output only. Whether the `site_secret` field was previously set. Since we will never return the `site_secret` field, this field is the only way to find out whether it was previously set. @@ -167,6 +170,7 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # An app's reCAPTCHA v3 configuration object. This configuration is used by ExchangeRecaptchaV3Token to validate reCAPTCHA tokens issued to apps by reCAPTCHA v3. It also controls certain properties of the returned `AppCheckToken`, such as its ttl. + "minValidScore": 3.14, # Specifies a minimum score required for a reCAPTCHA token to be considered valid. If its score is greater than or equal to this value, it will be accepted; otherwise, it will be rejected. The value must be between 0.0 and 1.0. The default value is 0.5. "name": "A String", # Required. The relative resource name of the reCAPTCHA v3 configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/recaptchaV3Config ``` "siteSecret": "A String", # Required. Input only. The site secret used to identify your service for reCAPTCHA v3 verification. For security reasons, this field will never be populated in any response. "siteSecretSet": True or False, # Output only. Whether the `site_secret` field was previously set. Since we will never return the `site_secret` field, this field is the only way to find out whether it was previously set. diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebaseappcheck_v1beta.projects.apps.playIntegrityConfig.html b/docs/dyn/firebaseappcheck_v1beta.projects.apps.playIntegrityConfig.html index 1c85851bc72..71205cf4216 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/firebaseappcheck_v1beta.projects.apps.playIntegrityConfig.html +++ b/docs/dyn/firebaseappcheck_v1beta.projects.apps.playIntegrityConfig.html @@ -105,6 +105,15 @@

Method Details

{ # Response message for the BatchGetPlayIntegrityConfigs method. "configs": [ # PlayIntegrityConfigs retrieved. { # An app's Play Integrity configuration object. This configuration controls certain properties of the `AppCheckToken` returned by ExchangePlayIntegrityToken, such as its ttl. Note that your registered SHA-256 certificate fingerprints are used to validate tokens issued by the Play Integrity API; please register them via the Firebase Console or programmatically via the [Firebase Management Service](https://firebase.google.com/docs/projects/api/reference/rest/v1beta1/projects.androidApps.sha/create). + "accountDetails": { # A settings object specifying account requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**account details** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#account-details-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. # Specifies account requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**account details** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#account-details-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. + "requireLicensed": True or False, # Specifies whether the caller must have received the [`LICENSED` verdict](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#account-details-field). For additional details about scenarios where your users will receive this `LICENSED` label, see [the default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default). If set to `true`, apps without the `LICENSED` app licensing verdict will be rejected. If set to `false`, any app licensing verdict is allowed. The default value is `false`. + }, + "appIntegrity": { # A settings object specifying application integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**application integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#application-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. # Specifies application integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**application integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#application-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. + "allowUnrecognizedVersion": True or False, # Specifies whether your running app is allowed to have the `UNRECOGNIZED_VERSION` [app recognition verdict](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#application-integrity-field). Note that the app recognition verdict `PLAY_RECOGNIZED` is a strong, comprehensive integrity signal that takes into account various other signals, including conditional and optional device integrity responses that you have opted into. If your app is published off-Play, this field should be set to `true` to allow instances of your app installed from off-Play sources to function. If set to `false`, only `PLAY_RECOGNIZED` verdicts are allowed, and both `UNRECOGNIZED_VERSION` and `UNEVALUATED` will be rejected. If set to `true`, any app recognition verdict is allowed. The default value is `false`. + }, + "deviceIntegrity": { # A settings object specifying device integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**device integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#device-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. Warning: There are also [conditional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#conditional) as well as [optional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#optional_device_information) responses that you can receive, but requires additional explicit opt-in from you. The App Check API is **not** responsible for any such opt-ins. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. # Specifies device integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**device integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#device-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. Warning: There are also [conditional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#conditional) as well as [optional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#optional_device_information) responses that you can receive, but requires additional explicit opt-in from you. The App Check API is **not** responsible for any such opt-ins. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. + "minDeviceRecognitionLevel": "A String", # Specifies the minimum device integrity level in order for the device to be considered valid. Any device with a device recognition verdict lower than this level will be rejected. If this is unspecified, the default level is `NO_INTEGRITY`. + }, "name": "A String", # Required. The relative resource name of the Play Integrity configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/playIntegrityConfig ``` "tokenTtl": "A String", # Specifies the duration for which App Check tokens exchanged from Play Integrity tokens will be valid. If unset, a default value of 1 hour is assumed. Must be between 30 minutes and 7 days, inclusive. }, @@ -132,6 +141,15 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # An app's Play Integrity configuration object. This configuration controls certain properties of the `AppCheckToken` returned by ExchangePlayIntegrityToken, such as its ttl. Note that your registered SHA-256 certificate fingerprints are used to validate tokens issued by the Play Integrity API; please register them via the Firebase Console or programmatically via the [Firebase Management Service](https://firebase.google.com/docs/projects/api/reference/rest/v1beta1/projects.androidApps.sha/create). + "accountDetails": { # A settings object specifying account requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**account details** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#account-details-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. # Specifies account requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**account details** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#account-details-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. + "requireLicensed": True or False, # Specifies whether the caller must have received the [`LICENSED` verdict](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#account-details-field). For additional details about scenarios where your users will receive this `LICENSED` label, see [the default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default). If set to `true`, apps without the `LICENSED` app licensing verdict will be rejected. If set to `false`, any app licensing verdict is allowed. The default value is `false`. + }, + "appIntegrity": { # A settings object specifying application integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**application integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#application-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. # Specifies application integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**application integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#application-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. + "allowUnrecognizedVersion": True or False, # Specifies whether your running app is allowed to have the `UNRECOGNIZED_VERSION` [app recognition verdict](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#application-integrity-field). Note that the app recognition verdict `PLAY_RECOGNIZED` is a strong, comprehensive integrity signal that takes into account various other signals, including conditional and optional device integrity responses that you have opted into. If your app is published off-Play, this field should be set to `true` to allow instances of your app installed from off-Play sources to function. If set to `false`, only `PLAY_RECOGNIZED` verdicts are allowed, and both `UNRECOGNIZED_VERSION` and `UNEVALUATED` will be rejected. If set to `true`, any app recognition verdict is allowed. The default value is `false`. + }, + "deviceIntegrity": { # A settings object specifying device integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**device integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#device-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. Warning: There are also [conditional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#conditional) as well as [optional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#optional_device_information) responses that you can receive, but requires additional explicit opt-in from you. The App Check API is **not** responsible for any such opt-ins. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. # Specifies device integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**device integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#device-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. Warning: There are also [conditional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#conditional) as well as [optional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#optional_device_information) responses that you can receive, but requires additional explicit opt-in from you. The App Check API is **not** responsible for any such opt-ins. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. + "minDeviceRecognitionLevel": "A String", # Specifies the minimum device integrity level in order for the device to be considered valid. Any device with a device recognition verdict lower than this level will be rejected. If this is unspecified, the default level is `NO_INTEGRITY`. + }, "name": "A String", # Required. The relative resource name of the Play Integrity configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/playIntegrityConfig ``` "tokenTtl": "A String", # Specifies the duration for which App Check tokens exchanged from Play Integrity tokens will be valid. If unset, a default value of 1 hour is assumed. Must be between 30 minutes and 7 days, inclusive. }
@@ -147,6 +165,15 @@

Method Details

The object takes the form of: { # An app's Play Integrity configuration object. This configuration controls certain properties of the `AppCheckToken` returned by ExchangePlayIntegrityToken, such as its ttl. Note that your registered SHA-256 certificate fingerprints are used to validate tokens issued by the Play Integrity API; please register them via the Firebase Console or programmatically via the [Firebase Management Service](https://firebase.google.com/docs/projects/api/reference/rest/v1beta1/projects.androidApps.sha/create). + "accountDetails": { # A settings object specifying account requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**account details** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#account-details-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. # Specifies account requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**account details** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#account-details-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. + "requireLicensed": True or False, # Specifies whether the caller must have received the [`LICENSED` verdict](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#account-details-field). For additional details about scenarios where your users will receive this `LICENSED` label, see [the default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default). If set to `true`, apps without the `LICENSED` app licensing verdict will be rejected. If set to `false`, any app licensing verdict is allowed. The default value is `false`. + }, + "appIntegrity": { # A settings object specifying application integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**application integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#application-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. # Specifies application integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**application integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#application-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. + "allowUnrecognizedVersion": True or False, # Specifies whether your running app is allowed to have the `UNRECOGNIZED_VERSION` [app recognition verdict](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#application-integrity-field). Note that the app recognition verdict `PLAY_RECOGNIZED` is a strong, comprehensive integrity signal that takes into account various other signals, including conditional and optional device integrity responses that you have opted into. If your app is published off-Play, this field should be set to `true` to allow instances of your app installed from off-Play sources to function. If set to `false`, only `PLAY_RECOGNIZED` verdicts are allowed, and both `UNRECOGNIZED_VERSION` and `UNEVALUATED` will be rejected. If set to `true`, any app recognition verdict is allowed. The default value is `false`. + }, + "deviceIntegrity": { # A settings object specifying device integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**device integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#device-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. Warning: There are also [conditional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#conditional) as well as [optional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#optional_device_information) responses that you can receive, but requires additional explicit opt-in from you. The App Check API is **not** responsible for any such opt-ins. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. # Specifies device integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**device integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#device-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. Warning: There are also [conditional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#conditional) as well as [optional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#optional_device_information) responses that you can receive, but requires additional explicit opt-in from you. The App Check API is **not** responsible for any such opt-ins. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. + "minDeviceRecognitionLevel": "A String", # Specifies the minimum device integrity level in order for the device to be considered valid. Any device with a device recognition verdict lower than this level will be rejected. If this is unspecified, the default level is `NO_INTEGRITY`. + }, "name": "A String", # Required. The relative resource name of the Play Integrity configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/playIntegrityConfig ``` "tokenTtl": "A String", # Specifies the duration for which App Check tokens exchanged from Play Integrity tokens will be valid. If unset, a default value of 1 hour is assumed. Must be between 30 minutes and 7 days, inclusive. } @@ -161,6 +188,15 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # An app's Play Integrity configuration object. This configuration controls certain properties of the `AppCheckToken` returned by ExchangePlayIntegrityToken, such as its ttl. Note that your registered SHA-256 certificate fingerprints are used to validate tokens issued by the Play Integrity API; please register them via the Firebase Console or programmatically via the [Firebase Management Service](https://firebase.google.com/docs/projects/api/reference/rest/v1beta1/projects.androidApps.sha/create). + "accountDetails": { # A settings object specifying account requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**account details** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#account-details-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. # Specifies account requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**account details** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#account-details-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. + "requireLicensed": True or False, # Specifies whether the caller must have received the [`LICENSED` verdict](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#account-details-field). For additional details about scenarios where your users will receive this `LICENSED` label, see [the default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default). If set to `true`, apps without the `LICENSED` app licensing verdict will be rejected. If set to `false`, any app licensing verdict is allowed. The default value is `false`. + }, + "appIntegrity": { # A settings object specifying application integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**application integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#application-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. # Specifies application integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**application integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#application-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. + "allowUnrecognizedVersion": True or False, # Specifies whether your running app is allowed to have the `UNRECOGNIZED_VERSION` [app recognition verdict](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#application-integrity-field). Note that the app recognition verdict `PLAY_RECOGNIZED` is a strong, comprehensive integrity signal that takes into account various other signals, including conditional and optional device integrity responses that you have opted into. If your app is published off-Play, this field should be set to `true` to allow instances of your app installed from off-Play sources to function. If set to `false`, only `PLAY_RECOGNIZED` verdicts are allowed, and both `UNRECOGNIZED_VERSION` and `UNEVALUATED` will be rejected. If set to `true`, any app recognition verdict is allowed. The default value is `false`. + }, + "deviceIntegrity": { # A settings object specifying device integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**device integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#device-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. Warning: There are also [conditional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#conditional) as well as [optional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#optional_device_information) responses that you can receive, but requires additional explicit opt-in from you. The App Check API is **not** responsible for any such opt-ins. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. # Specifies device integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**device integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#device-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. Warning: There are also [conditional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#conditional) as well as [optional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#optional_device_information) responses that you can receive, but requires additional explicit opt-in from you. The App Check API is **not** responsible for any such opt-ins. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. + "minDeviceRecognitionLevel": "A String", # Specifies the minimum device integrity level in order for the device to be considered valid. Any device with a device recognition verdict lower than this level will be rejected. If this is unspecified, the default level is `NO_INTEGRITY`. + }, "name": "A String", # Required. The relative resource name of the Play Integrity configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/playIntegrityConfig ``` "tokenTtl": "A String", # Specifies the duration for which App Check tokens exchanged from Play Integrity tokens will be valid. If unset, a default value of 1 hour is assumed. Must be between 30 minutes and 7 days, inclusive. }
diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebaseappcheck_v1beta.projects.apps.recaptchaConfig.html b/docs/dyn/firebaseappcheck_v1beta.projects.apps.recaptchaConfig.html index baada6efb57..caa2aec3e15 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/firebaseappcheck_v1beta.projects.apps.recaptchaConfig.html +++ b/docs/dyn/firebaseappcheck_v1beta.projects.apps.recaptchaConfig.html @@ -105,6 +105,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Response message for the BatchGetRecaptchaConfigs method. "configs": [ # RecaptchaConfigs retrieved. { # An app's reCAPTCHA v3 configuration object. This configuration is used by ExchangeRecaptchaToken to validate reCAPTCHA tokens issued to apps by reCAPTCHA v3. It also controls certain properties of the returned `AppCheckToken`, such as its ttl. + "minValidScore": 3.14, # Specifies a minimum score required for a reCAPTCHA token to be considered valid. If its score is greater than or equal to this value, it will be accepted; otherwise, it will be rejected. The value must be between 0.0 and 1.0. The default value is 0.5. "name": "A String", # Required. The relative resource name of the reCAPTCHA v3 configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/recaptchaConfig ``` "siteSecret": "A String", # Required. Input only. The site secret used to identify your service for reCAPTCHA v3 verification. For security reasons, this field will never be populated in any response. "siteSecretSet": True or False, # Output only. Whether the `site_secret` field was previously set. Since we will never return the `site_secret` field, this field is the only way to find out whether it was previously set. @@ -134,6 +135,7 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # An app's reCAPTCHA v3 configuration object. This configuration is used by ExchangeRecaptchaToken to validate reCAPTCHA tokens issued to apps by reCAPTCHA v3. It also controls certain properties of the returned `AppCheckToken`, such as its ttl. + "minValidScore": 3.14, # Specifies a minimum score required for a reCAPTCHA token to be considered valid. If its score is greater than or equal to this value, it will be accepted; otherwise, it will be rejected. The value must be between 0.0 and 1.0. The default value is 0.5. "name": "A String", # Required. The relative resource name of the reCAPTCHA v3 configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/recaptchaConfig ``` "siteSecret": "A String", # Required. Input only. The site secret used to identify your service for reCAPTCHA v3 verification. For security reasons, this field will never be populated in any response. "siteSecretSet": True or False, # Output only. Whether the `site_secret` field was previously set. Since we will never return the `site_secret` field, this field is the only way to find out whether it was previously set. @@ -151,6 +153,7 @@

Method Details

The object takes the form of: { # An app's reCAPTCHA v3 configuration object. This configuration is used by ExchangeRecaptchaToken to validate reCAPTCHA tokens issued to apps by reCAPTCHA v3. It also controls certain properties of the returned `AppCheckToken`, such as its ttl. + "minValidScore": 3.14, # Specifies a minimum score required for a reCAPTCHA token to be considered valid. If its score is greater than or equal to this value, it will be accepted; otherwise, it will be rejected. The value must be between 0.0 and 1.0. The default value is 0.5. "name": "A String", # Required. The relative resource name of the reCAPTCHA v3 configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/recaptchaConfig ``` "siteSecret": "A String", # Required. Input only. The site secret used to identify your service for reCAPTCHA v3 verification. For security reasons, this field will never be populated in any response. "siteSecretSet": True or False, # Output only. Whether the `site_secret` field was previously set. Since we will never return the `site_secret` field, this field is the only way to find out whether it was previously set. @@ -167,6 +170,7 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # An app's reCAPTCHA v3 configuration object. This configuration is used by ExchangeRecaptchaToken to validate reCAPTCHA tokens issued to apps by reCAPTCHA v3. It also controls certain properties of the returned `AppCheckToken`, such as its ttl. + "minValidScore": 3.14, # Specifies a minimum score required for a reCAPTCHA token to be considered valid. If its score is greater than or equal to this value, it will be accepted; otherwise, it will be rejected. The value must be between 0.0 and 1.0. The default value is 0.5. "name": "A String", # Required. The relative resource name of the reCAPTCHA v3 configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/recaptchaConfig ``` "siteSecret": "A String", # Required. Input only. The site secret used to identify your service for reCAPTCHA v3 verification. For security reasons, this field will never be populated in any response. "siteSecretSet": True or False, # Output only. Whether the `site_secret` field was previously set. Since we will never return the `site_secret` field, this field is the only way to find out whether it was previously set. diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebaseappcheck_v1beta.projects.apps.recaptchaEnterpriseConfig.html b/docs/dyn/firebaseappcheck_v1beta.projects.apps.recaptchaEnterpriseConfig.html index db1e5c4785b..1ea96552825 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/firebaseappcheck_v1beta.projects.apps.recaptchaEnterpriseConfig.html +++ b/docs/dyn/firebaseappcheck_v1beta.projects.apps.recaptchaEnterpriseConfig.html @@ -106,6 +106,9 @@

Method Details

"configs": [ # RecaptchaEnterpriseConfigs retrieved. { # An app's reCAPTCHA Enterprise configuration object. This configuration is used by ExchangeRecaptchaEnterpriseToken to validate reCAPTCHA tokens issued to apps by reCAPTCHA Enterprise. It also controls certain properties of the returned `AppCheckToken`, such as its ttl. "name": "A String", # Required. The relative resource name of the reCAPTCHA Enterprise configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/recaptchaEnterpriseConfig ``` + "riskAnalysis": { # A settings object specifying risk tolerance and requirements for your application. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**`riskAnalysis`**](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha/docs/interpret-assessment-website#interpret_assessment) tuple in the assessment obtained from reCAPTCHA Enterprise. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. # Specifies risk tolerance and requirements for your application. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**`riskAnalysis`**](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha/docs/interpret-assessment-website#interpret_assessment) tuple in the assessment obtained from reCAPTCHA Enterprise. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. + "minValidScore": 3.14, # Specifies a minimum score required for a reCAPTCHA token to be considered valid. If its score is greater than or equal to this value, it will be accepted; otherwise, it will be rejected. The value must be between 0.0 and 1.0. The default value is 0.5. + }, "siteKey": "A String", # The score-based site key [created in reCAPTCHA Enterprise](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha-enterprise/docs/create-key#creating_a_site_key) used to [invoke reCAPTCHA and generate the reCAPTCHA tokens](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha-enterprise/docs/instrument-web-pages) for your application. Important: This is *not* the `site_secret` (as it is in reCAPTCHA v3), but rather your score-based reCAPTCHA Enterprise site key. "tokenTtl": "A String", # Specifies the duration for which App Check tokens exchanged from reCAPTCHA Enterprise tokens will be valid. If unset, a default value of 1 hour is assumed. Must be between 30 minutes and 7 days, inclusive. }, @@ -134,6 +137,9 @@

Method Details

{ # An app's reCAPTCHA Enterprise configuration object. This configuration is used by ExchangeRecaptchaEnterpriseToken to validate reCAPTCHA tokens issued to apps by reCAPTCHA Enterprise. It also controls certain properties of the returned `AppCheckToken`, such as its ttl. "name": "A String", # Required. The relative resource name of the reCAPTCHA Enterprise configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/recaptchaEnterpriseConfig ``` + "riskAnalysis": { # A settings object specifying risk tolerance and requirements for your application. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**`riskAnalysis`**](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha/docs/interpret-assessment-website#interpret_assessment) tuple in the assessment obtained from reCAPTCHA Enterprise. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. # Specifies risk tolerance and requirements for your application. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**`riskAnalysis`**](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha/docs/interpret-assessment-website#interpret_assessment) tuple in the assessment obtained from reCAPTCHA Enterprise. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. + "minValidScore": 3.14, # Specifies a minimum score required for a reCAPTCHA token to be considered valid. If its score is greater than or equal to this value, it will be accepted; otherwise, it will be rejected. The value must be between 0.0 and 1.0. The default value is 0.5. + }, "siteKey": "A String", # The score-based site key [created in reCAPTCHA Enterprise](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha-enterprise/docs/create-key#creating_a_site_key) used to [invoke reCAPTCHA and generate the reCAPTCHA tokens](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha-enterprise/docs/instrument-web-pages) for your application. Important: This is *not* the `site_secret` (as it is in reCAPTCHA v3), but rather your score-based reCAPTCHA Enterprise site key. "tokenTtl": "A String", # Specifies the duration for which App Check tokens exchanged from reCAPTCHA Enterprise tokens will be valid. If unset, a default value of 1 hour is assumed. Must be between 30 minutes and 7 days, inclusive. }
@@ -150,6 +156,9 @@

Method Details

{ # An app's reCAPTCHA Enterprise configuration object. This configuration is used by ExchangeRecaptchaEnterpriseToken to validate reCAPTCHA tokens issued to apps by reCAPTCHA Enterprise. It also controls certain properties of the returned `AppCheckToken`, such as its ttl. "name": "A String", # Required. The relative resource name of the reCAPTCHA Enterprise configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/recaptchaEnterpriseConfig ``` + "riskAnalysis": { # A settings object specifying risk tolerance and requirements for your application. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**`riskAnalysis`**](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha/docs/interpret-assessment-website#interpret_assessment) tuple in the assessment obtained from reCAPTCHA Enterprise. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. # Specifies risk tolerance and requirements for your application. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**`riskAnalysis`**](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha/docs/interpret-assessment-website#interpret_assessment) tuple in the assessment obtained from reCAPTCHA Enterprise. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. + "minValidScore": 3.14, # Specifies a minimum score required for a reCAPTCHA token to be considered valid. If its score is greater than or equal to this value, it will be accepted; otherwise, it will be rejected. The value must be between 0.0 and 1.0. The default value is 0.5. + }, "siteKey": "A String", # The score-based site key [created in reCAPTCHA Enterprise](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha-enterprise/docs/create-key#creating_a_site_key) used to [invoke reCAPTCHA and generate the reCAPTCHA tokens](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha-enterprise/docs/instrument-web-pages) for your application. Important: This is *not* the `site_secret` (as it is in reCAPTCHA v3), but rather your score-based reCAPTCHA Enterprise site key. "tokenTtl": "A String", # Specifies the duration for which App Check tokens exchanged from reCAPTCHA Enterprise tokens will be valid. If unset, a default value of 1 hour is assumed. Must be between 30 minutes and 7 days, inclusive. } @@ -165,6 +174,9 @@

Method Details

{ # An app's reCAPTCHA Enterprise configuration object. This configuration is used by ExchangeRecaptchaEnterpriseToken to validate reCAPTCHA tokens issued to apps by reCAPTCHA Enterprise. It also controls certain properties of the returned `AppCheckToken`, such as its ttl. "name": "A String", # Required. The relative resource name of the reCAPTCHA Enterprise configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/recaptchaEnterpriseConfig ``` + "riskAnalysis": { # A settings object specifying risk tolerance and requirements for your application. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**`riskAnalysis`**](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha/docs/interpret-assessment-website#interpret_assessment) tuple in the assessment obtained from reCAPTCHA Enterprise. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. # Specifies risk tolerance and requirements for your application. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**`riskAnalysis`**](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha/docs/interpret-assessment-website#interpret_assessment) tuple in the assessment obtained from reCAPTCHA Enterprise. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended. + "minValidScore": 3.14, # Specifies a minimum score required for a reCAPTCHA token to be considered valid. If its score is greater than or equal to this value, it will be accepted; otherwise, it will be rejected. The value must be between 0.0 and 1.0. The default value is 0.5. + }, "siteKey": "A String", # The score-based site key [created in reCAPTCHA Enterprise](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha-enterprise/docs/create-key#creating_a_site_key) used to [invoke reCAPTCHA and generate the reCAPTCHA tokens](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha-enterprise/docs/instrument-web-pages) for your application. Important: This is *not* the `site_secret` (as it is in reCAPTCHA v3), but rather your score-based reCAPTCHA Enterprise site key. "tokenTtl": "A String", # Specifies the duration for which App Check tokens exchanged from reCAPTCHA Enterprise tokens will be valid. If unset, a default value of 1 hour is assumed. Must be between 30 minutes and 7 days, inclusive. }
diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebaseappcheck_v1beta.projects.apps.recaptchaV3Config.html b/docs/dyn/firebaseappcheck_v1beta.projects.apps.recaptchaV3Config.html index 291469578fa..a440c31ab5e 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/firebaseappcheck_v1beta.projects.apps.recaptchaV3Config.html +++ b/docs/dyn/firebaseappcheck_v1beta.projects.apps.recaptchaV3Config.html @@ -105,6 +105,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Response message for the BatchGetRecaptchaV3Configs method. "configs": [ # RecaptchaV3Configs retrieved. { # An app's reCAPTCHA v3 configuration object. This configuration is used by ExchangeRecaptchaV3Token to validate reCAPTCHA tokens issued to apps by reCAPTCHA v3. It also controls certain properties of the returned `AppCheckToken`, such as its ttl. + "minValidScore": 3.14, # Specifies a minimum score required for a reCAPTCHA token to be considered valid. If its score is greater than or equal to this value, it will be accepted; otherwise, it will be rejected. The value must be between 0.0 and 1.0. The default value is 0.5. "name": "A String", # Required. The relative resource name of the reCAPTCHA v3 configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/recaptchaV3Config ``` "siteSecret": "A String", # Required. Input only. The site secret used to identify your service for reCAPTCHA v3 verification. For security reasons, this field will never be populated in any response. "siteSecretSet": True or False, # Output only. Whether the `site_secret` field was previously set. Since we will never return the `site_secret` field, this field is the only way to find out whether it was previously set. @@ -134,6 +135,7 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # An app's reCAPTCHA v3 configuration object. This configuration is used by ExchangeRecaptchaV3Token to validate reCAPTCHA tokens issued to apps by reCAPTCHA v3. It also controls certain properties of the returned `AppCheckToken`, such as its ttl. + "minValidScore": 3.14, # Specifies a minimum score required for a reCAPTCHA token to be considered valid. If its score is greater than or equal to this value, it will be accepted; otherwise, it will be rejected. The value must be between 0.0 and 1.0. The default value is 0.5. "name": "A String", # Required. The relative resource name of the reCAPTCHA v3 configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/recaptchaV3Config ``` "siteSecret": "A String", # Required. Input only. The site secret used to identify your service for reCAPTCHA v3 verification. For security reasons, this field will never be populated in any response. "siteSecretSet": True or False, # Output only. Whether the `site_secret` field was previously set. Since we will never return the `site_secret` field, this field is the only way to find out whether it was previously set. @@ -151,6 +153,7 @@

Method Details

The object takes the form of: { # An app's reCAPTCHA v3 configuration object. This configuration is used by ExchangeRecaptchaV3Token to validate reCAPTCHA tokens issued to apps by reCAPTCHA v3. It also controls certain properties of the returned `AppCheckToken`, such as its ttl. + "minValidScore": 3.14, # Specifies a minimum score required for a reCAPTCHA token to be considered valid. If its score is greater than or equal to this value, it will be accepted; otherwise, it will be rejected. The value must be between 0.0 and 1.0. The default value is 0.5. "name": "A String", # Required. The relative resource name of the reCAPTCHA v3 configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/recaptchaV3Config ``` "siteSecret": "A String", # Required. Input only. The site secret used to identify your service for reCAPTCHA v3 verification. For security reasons, this field will never be populated in any response. "siteSecretSet": True or False, # Output only. Whether the `site_secret` field was previously set. Since we will never return the `site_secret` field, this field is the only way to find out whether it was previously set. @@ -167,6 +170,7 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # An app's reCAPTCHA v3 configuration object. This configuration is used by ExchangeRecaptchaV3Token to validate reCAPTCHA tokens issued to apps by reCAPTCHA v3. It also controls certain properties of the returned `AppCheckToken`, such as its ttl. + "minValidScore": 3.14, # Specifies a minimum score required for a reCAPTCHA token to be considered valid. If its score is greater than or equal to this value, it will be accepted; otherwise, it will be rejected. The value must be between 0.0 and 1.0. The default value is 0.5. "name": "A String", # Required. The relative resource name of the reCAPTCHA v3 configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/recaptchaV3Config ``` "siteSecret": "A String", # Required. Input only. The site secret used to identify your service for reCAPTCHA v3 verification. For security reasons, this field will never be populated in any response. "siteSecretSet": True or False, # Output only. Whether the `site_secret` field was previously set. Since we will never return the `site_secret` field, this field is the only way to find out whether it was previously set. diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebaseappdistribution_v1alpha.projects.apps.releases.tests.html b/docs/dyn/firebaseappdistribution_v1alpha.projects.apps.releases.tests.html index 84727ac047c..853c61953cb 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/firebaseappdistribution_v1alpha.projects.apps.releases.tests.html +++ b/docs/dyn/firebaseappdistribution_v1alpha.projects.apps.releases.tests.html @@ -154,9 +154,9 @@

Method Details

"goalDetails": { # Details for a goal step. # Output only. Details for a goal step. "goalActions": [ # Output only. The actions taken by the AI while attempting to accomplish the goal. { # An action taken by the AI agent while attempting to accomplish a goal. - "debugInfo": { # Information to help the customer understand why the agent took this action # Output only. Debug information explaining why the agent to the specific action - "annotatedScreenshotUri": "A String", # Output only. URI of the screenshot with elements labeled which was used by the agent - "jsonUri": "A String", # Output only. Structured data explaining the agent's choice + "debugInfo": { # Information to help the customer understand why the agent took this action. # Output only. Debug information explaining why the agent to the specific action. + "annotatedScreenshotUri": "A String", # Output only. URI of the screenshot with elements labeled which was used by the agent. + "jsonUri": "A String", # Output only. Structured data explaining the agent's choice. }, "deviceAction": { # A high level action taken by the AI on the device, potentially involving multiple taps, text entries, waits, etc. # Output only. A high level action taken by the AI on the device. "description": "A String", # Output only. A short description of the high level action taken by the AI agent. @@ -215,6 +215,7 @@

Method Details

], }, "explanation": "A String", # Output only. An explanation justifying why the action was taken. + "startTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the action started. "terminalAction": { # An action taken by the AI to end the goal. # Output only. An action taken by the AI to end the goal. "reason": "A String", # Output only. The reason why this goal was ended. "screenshot": { # A device screenshot taken during a test. # Output only. The screenshot used in the context of this terminal action. @@ -260,6 +261,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the test. + "videoStartTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the video started recording. "videoUri": "A String", # Output only. A URI to a video of the test run. }, ], @@ -316,9 +318,9 @@

Method Details

"goalDetails": { # Details for a goal step. # Output only. Details for a goal step. "goalActions": [ # Output only. The actions taken by the AI while attempting to accomplish the goal. { # An action taken by the AI agent while attempting to accomplish a goal. - "debugInfo": { # Information to help the customer understand why the agent took this action # Output only. Debug information explaining why the agent to the specific action - "annotatedScreenshotUri": "A String", # Output only. URI of the screenshot with elements labeled which was used by the agent - "jsonUri": "A String", # Output only. Structured data explaining the agent's choice + "debugInfo": { # Information to help the customer understand why the agent took this action. # Output only. Debug information explaining why the agent to the specific action. + "annotatedScreenshotUri": "A String", # Output only. URI of the screenshot with elements labeled which was used by the agent. + "jsonUri": "A String", # Output only. Structured data explaining the agent's choice. }, "deviceAction": { # A high level action taken by the AI on the device, potentially involving multiple taps, text entries, waits, etc. # Output only. A high level action taken by the AI on the device. "description": "A String", # Output only. A short description of the high level action taken by the AI agent. @@ -377,6 +379,7 @@

Method Details

], }, "explanation": "A String", # Output only. An explanation justifying why the action was taken. + "startTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the action started. "terminalAction": { # An action taken by the AI to end the goal. # Output only. An action taken by the AI to end the goal. "reason": "A String", # Output only. The reason why this goal was ended. "screenshot": { # A device screenshot taken during a test. # Output only. The screenshot used in the context of this terminal action. @@ -422,6 +425,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the test. + "videoStartTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the video started recording. "videoUri": "A String", # Output only. A URI to a video of the test run. }, ], @@ -484,9 +488,9 @@

Method Details

"goalDetails": { # Details for a goal step. # Output only. Details for a goal step. "goalActions": [ # Output only. The actions taken by the AI while attempting to accomplish the goal. { # An action taken by the AI agent while attempting to accomplish a goal. - "debugInfo": { # Information to help the customer understand why the agent took this action # Output only. Debug information explaining why the agent to the specific action - "annotatedScreenshotUri": "A String", # Output only. URI of the screenshot with elements labeled which was used by the agent - "jsonUri": "A String", # Output only. Structured data explaining the agent's choice + "debugInfo": { # Information to help the customer understand why the agent took this action. # Output only. Debug information explaining why the agent to the specific action. + "annotatedScreenshotUri": "A String", # Output only. URI of the screenshot with elements labeled which was used by the agent. + "jsonUri": "A String", # Output only. Structured data explaining the agent's choice. }, "deviceAction": { # A high level action taken by the AI on the device, potentially involving multiple taps, text entries, waits, etc. # Output only. A high level action taken by the AI on the device. "description": "A String", # Output only. A short description of the high level action taken by the AI agent. @@ -545,6 +549,7 @@

Method Details

], }, "explanation": "A String", # Output only. An explanation justifying why the action was taken. + "startTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the action started. "terminalAction": { # An action taken by the AI to end the goal. # Output only. An action taken by the AI to end the goal. "reason": "A String", # Output only. The reason why this goal was ended. "screenshot": { # A device screenshot taken during a test. # Output only. The screenshot used in the context of this terminal action. @@ -590,6 +595,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the test. + "videoStartTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the video started recording. "videoUri": "A String", # Output only. A URI to a video of the test run. }, ], @@ -662,9 +668,9 @@

Method Details

"goalDetails": { # Details for a goal step. # Output only. Details for a goal step. "goalActions": [ # Output only. The actions taken by the AI while attempting to accomplish the goal. { # An action taken by the AI agent while attempting to accomplish a goal. - "debugInfo": { # Information to help the customer understand why the agent took this action # Output only. Debug information explaining why the agent to the specific action - "annotatedScreenshotUri": "A String", # Output only. URI of the screenshot with elements labeled which was used by the agent - "jsonUri": "A String", # Output only. Structured data explaining the agent's choice + "debugInfo": { # Information to help the customer understand why the agent took this action. # Output only. Debug information explaining why the agent to the specific action. + "annotatedScreenshotUri": "A String", # Output only. URI of the screenshot with elements labeled which was used by the agent. + "jsonUri": "A String", # Output only. Structured data explaining the agent's choice. }, "deviceAction": { # A high level action taken by the AI on the device, potentially involving multiple taps, text entries, waits, etc. # Output only. A high level action taken by the AI on the device. "description": "A String", # Output only. A short description of the high level action taken by the AI agent. @@ -723,6 +729,7 @@

Method Details

], }, "explanation": "A String", # Output only. An explanation justifying why the action was taken. + "startTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the action started. "terminalAction": { # An action taken by the AI to end the goal. # Output only. An action taken by the AI to end the goal. "reason": "A String", # Output only. The reason why this goal was ended. "screenshot": { # A device screenshot taken during a test. # Output only. The screenshot used in the context of this terminal action. @@ -768,6 +775,7 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the test. + "videoStartTime": "A String", # Output only. The time at which the video started recording. "videoUri": "A String", # Output only. A URI to a video of the test run. }, ], diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebaseappdistribution_v1alpha.projects.apps.testCases.html b/docs/dyn/firebaseappdistribution_v1alpha.projects.apps.testCases.html index d9b12ce7af0..6ef081ce0ce 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/firebaseappdistribution_v1alpha.projects.apps.testCases.html +++ b/docs/dyn/firebaseappdistribution_v1alpha.projects.apps.testCases.html @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@

Method Details

], }, "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when the test case was created - "dependentTestCases": [ # Output only. Other test cases that depend on this test cse as a prerequisite. + "dependentTestCases": [ # Output only. Other test cases that depend on this test case as a prerequisite. "A String", ], "displayName": "A String", # Required. Display name of the test case. @@ -183,7 +183,7 @@

Method Details

], }, "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when the test case was created - "dependentTestCases": [ # Output only. Other test cases that depend on this test cse as a prerequisite. + "dependentTestCases": [ # Output only. Other test cases that depend on this test case as a prerequisite. "A String", ], "displayName": "A String", # Required. Display name of the test case. @@ -237,7 +237,7 @@

Method Details

], }, "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when the test case was created - "dependentTestCases": [ # Output only. Other test cases that depend on this test cse as a prerequisite. + "dependentTestCases": [ # Output only. Other test cases that depend on this test case as a prerequisite. "A String", ], "displayName": "A String", # Required. Display name of the test case. @@ -278,7 +278,7 @@

Method Details

], }, "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when the test case was created - "dependentTestCases": [ # Output only. Other test cases that depend on this test cse as a prerequisite. + "dependentTestCases": [ # Output only. Other test cases that depend on this test case as a prerequisite. "A String", ], "displayName": "A String", # Required. Display name of the test case. @@ -325,7 +325,7 @@

Method Details

], }, "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when the test case was created - "dependentTestCases": [ # Output only. Other test cases that depend on this test cse as a prerequisite. + "dependentTestCases": [ # Output only. Other test cases that depend on this test case as a prerequisite. "A String", ], "displayName": "A String", # Required. Display name of the test case. @@ -354,7 +354,7 @@

Method Details

], }, "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when the test case was created - "dependentTestCases": [ # Output only. Other test cases that depend on this test cse as a prerequisite. + "dependentTestCases": [ # Output only. Other test cases that depend on this test case as a prerequisite. "A String", ], "displayName": "A String", # Required. Display name of the test case. diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebaseapphosting_v1.projects.locations.backends.builds.html b/docs/dyn/firebaseapphosting_v1.projects.locations.backends.builds.html index 3cf676b7db5..60a9160cd51 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/firebaseapphosting_v1.projects.locations.backends.builds.html +++ b/docs/dyn/firebaseapphosting_v1.projects.locations.backends.builds.html @@ -158,6 +158,17 @@

Method Details

"name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the build. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{locationId}/backends/{backendId}/builds/{buildId}`. "reconciling": True or False, # Output only. A field that, if true, indicates that the build has an ongoing LRO. "source": { # The source for the build. # Required. Immutable. The source for the build. + "archive": { # The URI of an storage archive or a signed URL to use as the build source. # An archive source. + "author": { # Metadata for the user who started the build. # Optional. The author contained in the metadata of a version control change. + "displayName": "A String", # Output only. The user-chosen displayname. May be empty. + "email": "A String", # Output only. The account email linked to the EUC that created the build. May be a service account or other robot account. + "imageUri": "A String", # Output only. The URI of a profile photo associated with the user who created the build. + }, + "description": "A String", # Optional. An optional message that describes the uploaded version of the source code. + "externalSignedUri": "A String", # Signed URL to an archive in a storage bucket. + "rootDirectory": "A String", # Optional. Relative path in the archive. + "userStorageUri": "A String", # URI to an archive in Cloud Storage. The object must be a zipped (.zip) or gzipped archive file (.tar.gz) containing source to deploy. + }, "codebase": { # A codebase source, representing the state of the codebase that the build will be created at. # A codebase source. "author": { # Version control metadata for a user associated with a resolved codebase. Currently assumes a Git user. # Output only. The author contained in the metadata of a version control change. "displayName": "A String", # Output only. The 'name' field in a Git user's git.config. Required by Git. @@ -316,6 +327,17 @@

Method Details

"name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the build. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{locationId}/backends/{backendId}/builds/{buildId}`. "reconciling": True or False, # Output only. A field that, if true, indicates that the build has an ongoing LRO. "source": { # The source for the build. # Required. Immutable. The source for the build. + "archive": { # The URI of an storage archive or a signed URL to use as the build source. # An archive source. + "author": { # Metadata for the user who started the build. # Optional. The author contained in the metadata of a version control change. + "displayName": "A String", # Output only. The user-chosen displayname. May be empty. + "email": "A String", # Output only. The account email linked to the EUC that created the build. May be a service account or other robot account. + "imageUri": "A String", # Output only. The URI of a profile photo associated with the user who created the build. + }, + "description": "A String", # Optional. An optional message that describes the uploaded version of the source code. + "externalSignedUri": "A String", # Signed URL to an archive in a storage bucket. + "rootDirectory": "A String", # Optional. Relative path in the archive. + "userStorageUri": "A String", # URI to an archive in Cloud Storage. The object must be a zipped (.zip) or gzipped archive file (.tar.gz) containing source to deploy. + }, "codebase": { # A codebase source, representing the state of the codebase that the build will be created at. # A codebase source. "author": { # Version control metadata for a user associated with a resolved codebase. Currently assumes a Git user. # Output only. The author contained in the metadata of a version control change. "displayName": "A String", # Output only. The 'name' field in a Git user's git.config. Required by Git. @@ -412,6 +434,17 @@

Method Details

"name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the build. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{locationId}/backends/{backendId}/builds/{buildId}`. "reconciling": True or False, # Output only. A field that, if true, indicates that the build has an ongoing LRO. "source": { # The source for the build. # Required. Immutable. The source for the build. + "archive": { # The URI of an storage archive or a signed URL to use as the build source. # An archive source. + "author": { # Metadata for the user who started the build. # Optional. The author contained in the metadata of a version control change. + "displayName": "A String", # Output only. The user-chosen displayname. May be empty. + "email": "A String", # Output only. The account email linked to the EUC that created the build. May be a service account or other robot account. + "imageUri": "A String", # Output only. The URI of a profile photo associated with the user who created the build. + }, + "description": "A String", # Optional. An optional message that describes the uploaded version of the source code. + "externalSignedUri": "A String", # Signed URL to an archive in a storage bucket. + "rootDirectory": "A String", # Optional. Relative path in the archive. + "userStorageUri": "A String", # URI to an archive in Cloud Storage. The object must be a zipped (.zip) or gzipped archive file (.tar.gz) containing source to deploy. + }, "codebase": { # A codebase source, representing the state of the codebase that the build will be created at. # A codebase source. "author": { # Version control metadata for a user associated with a resolved codebase. Currently assumes a Git user. # Output only. The author contained in the metadata of a version control change. "displayName": "A String", # Output only. The 'name' field in a Git user's git.config. Required by Git. diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebaseapphosting_v1.projects.locations.backends.html b/docs/dyn/firebaseapphosting_v1.projects.locations.backends.html index a22ec778707..a71b039db9f 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/firebaseapphosting_v1.projects.locations.backends.html +++ b/docs/dyn/firebaseapphosting_v1.projects.locations.backends.html @@ -157,6 +157,7 @@

Method Details

"mode": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated: Use `environment` instead. "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the backend. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{locationId}/backends/{backendId}`. "reconciling": True or False, # Output only. A field that, if true, indicates that the system is working to make adjustments to the backend during a LRO. + "requestLogsDisabled": True or False, # Optional. A field that, if true, indicates that incoming request logs are disabled for this backend. Incoming request logs are enabled by default. "serviceAccount": "A String", # Required. The name of the service account used for Cloud Build and Cloud Run. Should have the role roles/firebaseapphosting.computeRunner or equivalent permissions. "servingLocality": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Specifies how App Hosting will serve the content for this backend. It will either be contained to a single region (REGIONAL_STRICT) or allowed to use App Hosting's global-replicated serving infrastructure (GLOBAL_ACCESS). "uid": "A String", # Output only. System-assigned, unique identifier. @@ -276,6 +277,7 @@

Method Details

"mode": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated: Use `environment` instead. "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the backend. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{locationId}/backends/{backendId}`. "reconciling": True or False, # Output only. A field that, if true, indicates that the system is working to make adjustments to the backend during a LRO. + "requestLogsDisabled": True or False, # Optional. A field that, if true, indicates that incoming request logs are disabled for this backend. Incoming request logs are enabled by default. "serviceAccount": "A String", # Required. The name of the service account used for Cloud Build and Cloud Run. Should have the role roles/firebaseapphosting.computeRunner or equivalent permissions. "servingLocality": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Specifies how App Hosting will serve the content for this backend. It will either be contained to a single region (REGIONAL_STRICT) or allowed to use App Hosting's global-replicated serving infrastructure (GLOBAL_ACCESS). "uid": "A String", # Output only. System-assigned, unique identifier. @@ -332,6 +334,7 @@

Method Details

"mode": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated: Use `environment` instead. "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the backend. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{locationId}/backends/{backendId}`. "reconciling": True or False, # Output only. A field that, if true, indicates that the system is working to make adjustments to the backend during a LRO. + "requestLogsDisabled": True or False, # Optional. A field that, if true, indicates that incoming request logs are disabled for this backend. Incoming request logs are enabled by default. "serviceAccount": "A String", # Required. The name of the service account used for Cloud Build and Cloud Run. Should have the role roles/firebaseapphosting.computeRunner or equivalent permissions. "servingLocality": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Specifies how App Hosting will serve the content for this backend. It will either be contained to a single region (REGIONAL_STRICT) or allowed to use App Hosting's global-replicated serving infrastructure (GLOBAL_ACCESS). "uid": "A String", # Output only. System-assigned, unique identifier. @@ -396,6 +399,7 @@

Method Details

"mode": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated: Use `environment` instead. "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the backend. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{locationId}/backends/{backendId}`. "reconciling": True or False, # Output only. A field that, if true, indicates that the system is working to make adjustments to the backend during a LRO. + "requestLogsDisabled": True or False, # Optional. A field that, if true, indicates that incoming request logs are disabled for this backend. Incoming request logs are enabled by default. "serviceAccount": "A String", # Required. The name of the service account used for Cloud Build and Cloud Run. Should have the role roles/firebaseapphosting.computeRunner or equivalent permissions. "servingLocality": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Specifies how App Hosting will serve the content for this backend. It will either be contained to a single region (REGIONAL_STRICT) or allowed to use App Hosting's global-replicated serving infrastructure (GLOBAL_ACCESS). "uid": "A String", # Output only. System-assigned, unique identifier. diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebaseapphosting_v1.projects.locations.backends.rollouts.html b/docs/dyn/firebaseapphosting_v1.projects.locations.backends.rollouts.html index cb1e69509a9..fb35d53cec3 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/firebaseapphosting_v1.projects.locations.backends.rollouts.html +++ b/docs/dyn/firebaseapphosting_v1.projects.locations.backends.rollouts.html @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@

Method Details

"annotations": { # Optional. Unstructured key value map that may be set by external tools to store and arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. "a_key": "A String", }, - "build": "A String", # Immutable. The name of a build that already exists. It doesn't have to be built; a rollout will wait for a build to be ready before updating traffic. + "build": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The name of a build that already exists. It doesn't have to be built; a rollout will wait for a build to be ready before updating traffic. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Time at which the rollout was created. "deleteTime": "A String", # Output only. Time at which the rollout was deleted. "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Human-readable name. 63 character limit. @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@

Method Details

"annotations": { # Optional. Unstructured key value map that may be set by external tools to store and arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. "a_key": "A String", }, - "build": "A String", # Immutable. The name of a build that already exists. It doesn't have to be built; a rollout will wait for a build to be ready before updating traffic. + "build": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The name of a build that already exists. It doesn't have to be built; a rollout will wait for a build to be ready before updating traffic. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Time at which the rollout was created. "deleteTime": "A String", # Output only. Time at which the rollout was deleted. "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Human-readable name. 63 character limit. @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@

Method Details

"annotations": { # Optional. Unstructured key value map that may be set by external tools to store and arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. "a_key": "A String", }, - "build": "A String", # Immutable. The name of a build that already exists. It doesn't have to be built; a rollout will wait for a build to be ready before updating traffic. + "build": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The name of a build that already exists. It doesn't have to be built; a rollout will wait for a build to be ready before updating traffic. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Time at which the rollout was created. "deleteTime": "A String", # Output only. Time at which the rollout was deleted. "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Human-readable name. 63 character limit. diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebaseapphosting_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/firebaseapphosting_v1.projects.locations.html index 42f773f1c00..321a11439f9 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/firebaseapphosting_v1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/firebaseapphosting_v1.projects.locations.html @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebaseapphosting_v1beta.projects.locations.backends.rollouts.html b/docs/dyn/firebaseapphosting_v1beta.projects.locations.backends.rollouts.html index 7c0e051cd43..b9850b76a06 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/firebaseapphosting_v1beta.projects.locations.backends.rollouts.html +++ b/docs/dyn/firebaseapphosting_v1beta.projects.locations.backends.rollouts.html @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@

Method Details

"annotations": { # Optional. Unstructured key value map that may be set by external tools to store and arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. "a_key": "A String", }, - "build": "A String", # Immutable. The name of a build that already exists. It doesn't have to be built; a rollout will wait for a build to be ready before updating traffic. + "build": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The name of a build that already exists. It doesn't have to be built; a rollout will wait for a build to be ready before updating traffic. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Time at which the rollout was created. "deleteTime": "A String", # Output only. Time at which the rollout was deleted. "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Human-readable name. 63 character limit. @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@

Method Details

"annotations": { # Optional. Unstructured key value map that may be set by external tools to store and arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. "a_key": "A String", }, - "build": "A String", # Immutable. The name of a build that already exists. It doesn't have to be built; a rollout will wait for a build to be ready before updating traffic. + "build": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The name of a build that already exists. It doesn't have to be built; a rollout will wait for a build to be ready before updating traffic. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Time at which the rollout was created. "deleteTime": "A String", # Output only. Time at which the rollout was deleted. "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Human-readable name. 63 character limit. @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@

Method Details

"annotations": { # Optional. Unstructured key value map that may be set by external tools to store and arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. "a_key": "A String", }, - "build": "A String", # Immutable. The name of a build that already exists. It doesn't have to be built; a rollout will wait for a build to be ready before updating traffic. + "build": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The name of a build that already exists. It doesn't have to be built; a rollout will wait for a build to be ready before updating traffic. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Time at which the rollout was created. "deleteTime": "A String", # Output only. Time at which the rollout was deleted. "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Human-readable name. 63 character limit. diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebaseapphosting_v1beta.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/firebaseapphosting_v1beta.projects.locations.html index 7d1309a59b6..0a4d0e9b741 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/firebaseapphosting_v1beta.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/firebaseapphosting_v1beta.projects.locations.html @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1.projects.locations.html index e228d0eb5d0..697dc7396f0 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1.projects.locations.html @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1.projects.locations.services.connectors.html b/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1.projects.locations.services.connectors.html index ea0329fd076..fead8d2127c 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1.projects.locations.services.connectors.html +++ b/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1.projects.locations.services.connectors.html @@ -92,6 +92,12 @@

Instance Methods

get(name, x__xgafv=None)

Gets details of a single Connector.

+

+ impersonateMutation(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Impersonate a mutation defined on a Firebase Data Connect connector. It grants the admin SDK access to mutations defined in the given connector. The caller can choose to impersonate a particular Firebase Auth user, or skip @auth completely.

+

+ impersonateQuery(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Impersonate a query defined on a Firebase Data Connect connector. It grants the admin SDK access to queries defined in the given connector. The caller can choose to impersonate a particular Firebase Auth user, or skip @auth completely.

list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

Lists Connectors in a given project and location.

@@ -353,6 +359,126 @@

Method Details

}
+
+ impersonateMutation(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Impersonate a mutation defined on a Firebase Data Connect connector. It grants the admin SDK access to mutations defined in the given connector. The caller can choose to impersonate a particular Firebase Auth user, or skip @auth completely.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the connector to find the predefined query/mutation, in the format: ``` projects/{project}/locations/{location}/services/{service}/connectors/{connector} ``` (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # The Impersonate request to Firebase Data Connect.
+  "extensions": { # GraphqlRequestExtensions contains additional information of `GraphqlRequest`. # Optional. Additional GraphQL request information.
+    "impersonate": { # Impersonation configures the Firebase Auth context to impersonate. # Optional. If set, impersonate a request with given Firebase Auth context and evaluate the auth policies on the operation. If omitted, bypass any defined auth policies.
+      "authClaims": { # Evaluate the auth policy with a customized JWT auth token. Should follow the Firebase Auth token format. https://firebase.google.com/docs/rules/rules-and-auth For example: a verified user may have auth_claims of {"sub": , "email_verified": true}
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+      },
+      "includeDebugDetails": True or False, # Optional. If set, include debug details in GraphQL error extensions.
+      "unauthenticated": True or False, # Evaluate the auth policy as an unauthenticated request. Can only be set to true.
+    },
+  },
+  "operationName": "A String", # Required. The name of the GraphQL operation name. Required because all Connector operations must be named. See https://graphql.org/learn/queries/#operation-name.
+  "variables": { # Optional. Values for GraphQL variables provided in this request.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+  },
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The GraphQL response from Firebase Data Connect. It strives to match the GraphQL over HTTP spec. Note: Firebase Data Connect always responds with `Content-Type: application/json`. https://github.com/graphql/graphql-over-http/blob/main/spec/GraphQLOverHTTP.md#body
+  "data": { # The result of the execution of the requested operation. If an error was raised before execution begins, the data entry should not be present in the result. (a request error: https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors.Request-Errors) If an error was raised during the execution that prevented a valid response, the data entry in the response should be null. (a field error: https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors.Error-Result-Format)
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+  },
+  "errors": [ # Errors of this response. If the data entry in the response is not present, the errors entry must be present. It conforms to https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors.
+    { # GraphqlError conforms to the GraphQL error spec. https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors Firebase Data Connect API surfaces `GraphqlError` in various APIs: - Upon compile error, `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector` return Code.Invalid_Argument with a list of `GraphqlError` in error details. - Upon query compile error, `ExecuteGraphql` and `ExecuteGraphqlRead` return Code.OK with a list of `GraphqlError` in response body. - Upon query execution error, `ExecuteGraphql`, `ExecuteGraphqlRead`, `ExecuteMutation` and `ExecuteQuery` all return Code.OK with a list of `GraphqlError` in response body.
+      "extensions": { # GraphqlErrorExtensions contains additional information of `GraphqlError`. # Additional error information.
+        "code": "A String", # Maps to canonical gRPC codes. If not specified, it represents `Code.INTERNAL`.
+        "debugDetails": "A String", # More detailed error message to assist debugging. It contains application business logic that are inappropriate to leak publicly. In the emulator, Data Connect API always includes it to assist local development and debugging. In the backend, ConnectorService always hides it. GraphqlService without impersonation always include it. GraphqlService with impersonation includes it only if explicitly opted-in with `include_debug_details` in `GraphqlRequestExtensions`.
+        "file": "A String", # The source file name where the error occurred. Included only for `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector`, it corresponds to `File.path` of the provided `Source`.
+        "resource": "A String", # Distinguish which schema or connector the error originates from. It should be set on errors from control plane APIs (e.g. `UpdateSchema`, `UpdateConnector`).
+      },
+      "locations": [ # The source locations where the error occurred. Locations should help developers and toolings identify the source of error quickly. Included in admin endpoints (`ExecuteGraphql`, `ExecuteGraphqlRead`, `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector`) to reference the provided GraphQL GQL document. Omitted in `ExecuteMutation` and `ExecuteQuery` since the caller shouldn't have access access the underlying GQL source.
+        { # SourceLocation references a location in a GraphQL source.
+          "column": 42, # Column number starting at 1.
+          "line": 42, # Line number starting at 1.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # The detailed error message. The message should help developer understand the underlying problem without leaking internal data.
+      "path": [ # The result field which could not be populated due to error. Clients can use path to identify whether a null result is intentional or caused by a runtime error. It should be a list of string or index from the root of GraphQL query document.
+        "",
+      ],
+    },
+  ],
+}
+
+ +
+ impersonateQuery(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Impersonate a query defined on a Firebase Data Connect connector. It grants the admin SDK access to queries defined in the given connector. The caller can choose to impersonate a particular Firebase Auth user, or skip @auth completely.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the connector to find the predefined query/mutation, in the format: ``` projects/{project}/locations/{location}/services/{service}/connectors/{connector} ``` (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # The Impersonate request to Firebase Data Connect.
+  "extensions": { # GraphqlRequestExtensions contains additional information of `GraphqlRequest`. # Optional. Additional GraphQL request information.
+    "impersonate": { # Impersonation configures the Firebase Auth context to impersonate. # Optional. If set, impersonate a request with given Firebase Auth context and evaluate the auth policies on the operation. If omitted, bypass any defined auth policies.
+      "authClaims": { # Evaluate the auth policy with a customized JWT auth token. Should follow the Firebase Auth token format. https://firebase.google.com/docs/rules/rules-and-auth For example: a verified user may have auth_claims of {"sub": , "email_verified": true}
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+      },
+      "includeDebugDetails": True or False, # Optional. If set, include debug details in GraphQL error extensions.
+      "unauthenticated": True or False, # Evaluate the auth policy as an unauthenticated request. Can only be set to true.
+    },
+  },
+  "operationName": "A String", # Required. The name of the GraphQL operation name. Required because all Connector operations must be named. See https://graphql.org/learn/queries/#operation-name.
+  "variables": { # Optional. Values for GraphQL variables provided in this request.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+  },
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The GraphQL response from Firebase Data Connect. It strives to match the GraphQL over HTTP spec. Note: Firebase Data Connect always responds with `Content-Type: application/json`. https://github.com/graphql/graphql-over-http/blob/main/spec/GraphQLOverHTTP.md#body
+  "data": { # The result of the execution of the requested operation. If an error was raised before execution begins, the data entry should not be present in the result. (a request error: https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors.Request-Errors) If an error was raised during the execution that prevented a valid response, the data entry in the response should be null. (a field error: https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors.Error-Result-Format)
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+  },
+  "errors": [ # Errors of this response. If the data entry in the response is not present, the errors entry must be present. It conforms to https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors.
+    { # GraphqlError conforms to the GraphQL error spec. https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors Firebase Data Connect API surfaces `GraphqlError` in various APIs: - Upon compile error, `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector` return Code.Invalid_Argument with a list of `GraphqlError` in error details. - Upon query compile error, `ExecuteGraphql` and `ExecuteGraphqlRead` return Code.OK with a list of `GraphqlError` in response body. - Upon query execution error, `ExecuteGraphql`, `ExecuteGraphqlRead`, `ExecuteMutation` and `ExecuteQuery` all return Code.OK with a list of `GraphqlError` in response body.
+      "extensions": { # GraphqlErrorExtensions contains additional information of `GraphqlError`. # Additional error information.
+        "code": "A String", # Maps to canonical gRPC codes. If not specified, it represents `Code.INTERNAL`.
+        "debugDetails": "A String", # More detailed error message to assist debugging. It contains application business logic that are inappropriate to leak publicly. In the emulator, Data Connect API always includes it to assist local development and debugging. In the backend, ConnectorService always hides it. GraphqlService without impersonation always include it. GraphqlService with impersonation includes it only if explicitly opted-in with `include_debug_details` in `GraphqlRequestExtensions`.
+        "file": "A String", # The source file name where the error occurred. Included only for `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector`, it corresponds to `File.path` of the provided `Source`.
+        "resource": "A String", # Distinguish which schema or connector the error originates from. It should be set on errors from control plane APIs (e.g. `UpdateSchema`, `UpdateConnector`).
+      },
+      "locations": [ # The source locations where the error occurred. Locations should help developers and toolings identify the source of error quickly. Included in admin endpoints (`ExecuteGraphql`, `ExecuteGraphqlRead`, `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector`) to reference the provided GraphQL GQL document. Omitted in `ExecuteMutation` and `ExecuteQuery` since the caller shouldn't have access access the underlying GQL source.
+        { # SourceLocation references a location in a GraphQL source.
+          "column": 42, # Column number starting at 1.
+          "line": 42, # Line number starting at 1.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # The detailed error message. The message should help developer understand the underlying problem without leaking internal data.
+      "path": [ # The result field which could not be populated due to error. Clients can use path to identify whether a null result is intentional or caused by a runtime error. It should be a list of string or index from the root of GraphQL query document.
+        "",
+      ],
+    },
+  ],
+}
+
+
list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)
Lists Connectors in a given project and location.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1.projects.locations.services.html b/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1.projects.locations.services.html
index c52e32101b1..9c5edae3961 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1.projects.locations.services.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1.projects.locations.services.html
@@ -102,6 +102,9 @@ 

Instance Methods

get(name, x__xgafv=None)

Gets details of a single Service.

+

+ introspectGraphql(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Execute introspection query against the Firebase Data Connect's generated GraphQL schema. GraphQL introspection query provides metadata such as what tables the schema have, what queries and mutations can be performed on the schema, and so on. Read more at https://graphql.org/learn/introspection. IntrospectGraphql can read schema metadata but cannot read rows from Cloud SQL instance, which can be done via ExecuteGraphqlRead.

list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

Lists Services in a given project and location.

@@ -367,6 +370,67 @@

Method Details

}
+
+ introspectGraphql(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Execute introspection query against the Firebase Data Connect's generated GraphQL schema. GraphQL introspection query provides metadata such as what tables the schema have, what queries and mutations can be performed on the schema, and so on. Read more at https://graphql.org/learn/introspection. IntrospectGraphql can read schema metadata but cannot read rows from Cloud SQL instance, which can be done via ExecuteGraphqlRead.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The relative resource name of Firebase Data Connect service, in the format: ``` projects/{project}/locations/{location}/services/{service} ``` (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # The GraphQL request to Firebase Data Connect. It strives to match the GraphQL over HTTP spec. https://github.com/graphql/graphql-over-http/blob/main/spec/GraphQLOverHTTP.md#post
+  "extensions": { # GraphqlRequestExtensions contains additional information of `GraphqlRequest`. # Optional. Additional GraphQL request information.
+    "impersonate": { # Impersonation configures the Firebase Auth context to impersonate. # Optional. If set, impersonate a request with given Firebase Auth context and evaluate the auth policies on the operation. If omitted, bypass any defined auth policies.
+      "authClaims": { # Evaluate the auth policy with a customized JWT auth token. Should follow the Firebase Auth token format. https://firebase.google.com/docs/rules/rules-and-auth For example: a verified user may have auth_claims of {"sub": , "email_verified": true}
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+      },
+      "includeDebugDetails": True or False, # Optional. If set, include debug details in GraphQL error extensions.
+      "unauthenticated": True or False, # Evaluate the auth policy as an unauthenticated request. Can only be set to true.
+    },
+  },
+  "operationName": "A String", # Optional. The name of the GraphQL operation name. Required only if `query` contains multiple operations. See https://graphql.org/learn/queries/#operation-name.
+  "query": "A String", # Required. The GraphQL query document source.
+  "variables": { # Optional. Values for GraphQL variables provided in this request.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+  },
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The GraphQL response from Firebase Data Connect. It strives to match the GraphQL over HTTP spec. Note: Firebase Data Connect always responds with `Content-Type: application/json`. https://github.com/graphql/graphql-over-http/blob/main/spec/GraphQLOverHTTP.md#body
+  "data": { # The result of the execution of the requested operation. If an error was raised before execution begins, the data entry should not be present in the result. (a request error: https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors.Request-Errors) If an error was raised during the execution that prevented a valid response, the data entry in the response should be null. (a field error: https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors.Error-Result-Format)
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+  },
+  "errors": [ # Errors of this response. If the data entry in the response is not present, the errors entry must be present. It conforms to https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors.
+    { # GraphqlError conforms to the GraphQL error spec. https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors Firebase Data Connect API surfaces `GraphqlError` in various APIs: - Upon compile error, `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector` return Code.Invalid_Argument with a list of `GraphqlError` in error details. - Upon query compile error, `ExecuteGraphql` and `ExecuteGraphqlRead` return Code.OK with a list of `GraphqlError` in response body. - Upon query execution error, `ExecuteGraphql`, `ExecuteGraphqlRead`, `ExecuteMutation` and `ExecuteQuery` all return Code.OK with a list of `GraphqlError` in response body.
+      "extensions": { # GraphqlErrorExtensions contains additional information of `GraphqlError`. # Additional error information.
+        "code": "A String", # Maps to canonical gRPC codes. If not specified, it represents `Code.INTERNAL`.
+        "debugDetails": "A String", # More detailed error message to assist debugging. It contains application business logic that are inappropriate to leak publicly. In the emulator, Data Connect API always includes it to assist local development and debugging. In the backend, ConnectorService always hides it. GraphqlService without impersonation always include it. GraphqlService with impersonation includes it only if explicitly opted-in with `include_debug_details` in `GraphqlRequestExtensions`.
+        "file": "A String", # The source file name where the error occurred. Included only for `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector`, it corresponds to `File.path` of the provided `Source`.
+        "resource": "A String", # Distinguish which schema or connector the error originates from. It should be set on errors from control plane APIs (e.g. `UpdateSchema`, `UpdateConnector`).
+      },
+      "locations": [ # The source locations where the error occurred. Locations should help developers and toolings identify the source of error quickly. Included in admin endpoints (`ExecuteGraphql`, `ExecuteGraphqlRead`, `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector`) to reference the provided GraphQL GQL document. Omitted in `ExecuteMutation` and `ExecuteQuery` since the caller shouldn't have access access the underlying GQL source.
+        { # SourceLocation references a location in a GraphQL source.
+          "column": 42, # Column number starting at 1.
+          "line": 42, # Line number starting at 1.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # The detailed error message. The message should help developer understand the underlying problem without leaking internal data.
+      "path": [ # The result field which could not be populated due to error. Clients can use path to identify whether a null result is intentional or caused by a runtime error. It should be a list of string or index from the root of GraphQL query document.
+        "",
+      ],
+    },
+  ],
+}
+
+
list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)
Lists Services in a given project and location.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1beta.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1beta.projects.locations.html
index 4f531490879..1fcc4f2477a 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1beta.projects.locations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1beta.projects.locations.html
@@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ 

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1beta.projects.locations.services.connectors.html b/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1beta.projects.locations.services.connectors.html index 3c7d672dfcc..bdfc69cfbe9 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1beta.projects.locations.services.connectors.html +++ b/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1beta.projects.locations.services.connectors.html @@ -92,6 +92,12 @@

Instance Methods

get(name, x__xgafv=None)

Gets details of a single Connector.

+

+ impersonateMutation(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Impersonate a mutation defined on a Firebase Data Connect connector. It grants the admin SDK access to mutations defined in the given connector. The caller can choose to impersonate a particular Firebase Auth user, or skip @auth completely.

+

+ impersonateQuery(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Impersonate a query defined on a Firebase Data Connect connector. It grants the admin SDK access to queries defined in the given connector. The caller can choose to impersonate a particular Firebase Auth user, or skip @auth completely.

list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

Lists Connectors in a given project and location.

@@ -353,6 +359,126 @@

Method Details

}
+
+ impersonateMutation(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Impersonate a mutation defined on a Firebase Data Connect connector. It grants the admin SDK access to mutations defined in the given connector. The caller can choose to impersonate a particular Firebase Auth user, or skip @auth completely.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the connector to find the predefined query/mutation, in the format: ``` projects/{project}/locations/{location}/services/{service}/connectors/{connector} ``` (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # The Impersonate request to Firebase Data Connect.
+  "extensions": { # GraphqlRequestExtensions contains additional information of `GraphqlRequest`. # Optional. Additional GraphQL request information.
+    "impersonate": { # Impersonation configures the Firebase Auth context to impersonate. # Optional. If set, impersonate a request with given Firebase Auth context and evaluate the auth policies on the operation. If omitted, bypass any defined auth policies.
+      "authClaims": { # Evaluate the auth policy with a customized JWT auth token. Should follow the Firebase Auth token format. https://firebase.google.com/docs/rules/rules-and-auth For example: a verified user may have auth_claims of {"sub": , "email_verified": true}
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+      },
+      "includeDebugDetails": True or False, # Optional. If set, include debug details in GraphQL error extensions.
+      "unauthenticated": True or False, # Evaluate the auth policy as an unauthenticated request. Can only be set to true.
+    },
+  },
+  "operationName": "A String", # Required. The name of the GraphQL operation name. Required because all Connector operations must be named. See https://graphql.org/learn/queries/#operation-name.
+  "variables": { # Optional. Values for GraphQL variables provided in this request.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+  },
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The GraphQL response from Firebase Data Connect. It strives to match the GraphQL over HTTP spec. Note: Firebase Data Connect always responds with `Content-Type: application/json`. https://github.com/graphql/graphql-over-http/blob/main/spec/GraphQLOverHTTP.md#body
+  "data": { # The result of the execution of the requested operation. If an error was raised before execution begins, the data entry should not be present in the result. (a request error: https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors.Request-Errors) If an error was raised during the execution that prevented a valid response, the data entry in the response should be null. (a field error: https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors.Error-Result-Format)
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+  },
+  "errors": [ # Errors of this response. If the data entry in the response is not present, the errors entry must be present. It conforms to https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors.
+    { # GraphqlError conforms to the GraphQL error spec. https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors Firebase Data Connect API surfaces `GraphqlError` in various APIs: - Upon compile error, `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector` return Code.Invalid_Argument with a list of `GraphqlError` in error details. - Upon query compile error, `ExecuteGraphql` and `ExecuteGraphqlRead` return Code.OK with a list of `GraphqlError` in response body. - Upon query execution error, `ExecuteGraphql`, `ExecuteGraphqlRead`, `ExecuteMutation` and `ExecuteQuery` all return Code.OK with a list of `GraphqlError` in response body.
+      "extensions": { # GraphqlErrorExtensions contains additional information of `GraphqlError`. # Additional error information.
+        "code": "A String", # Maps to canonical gRPC codes. If not specified, it represents `Code.INTERNAL`.
+        "debugDetails": "A String", # More detailed error message to assist debugging. It contains application business logic that are inappropriate to leak publicly. In the emulator, Data Connect API always includes it to assist local development and debugging. In the backend, ConnectorService always hides it. GraphqlService without impersonation always include it. GraphqlService with impersonation includes it only if explicitly opted-in with `include_debug_details` in `GraphqlRequestExtensions`.
+        "file": "A String", # The source file name where the error occurred. Included only for `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector`, it corresponds to `File.path` of the provided `Source`.
+        "resource": "A String", # Distinguish which schema or connector the error originates from. It should be set on errors from control plane APIs (e.g. `UpdateSchema`, `UpdateConnector`).
+      },
+      "locations": [ # The source locations where the error occurred. Locations should help developers and toolings identify the source of error quickly. Included in admin endpoints (`ExecuteGraphql`, `ExecuteGraphqlRead`, `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector`) to reference the provided GraphQL GQL document. Omitted in `ExecuteMutation` and `ExecuteQuery` since the caller shouldn't have access access the underlying GQL source.
+        { # SourceLocation references a location in a GraphQL source.
+          "column": 42, # Column number starting at 1.
+          "line": 42, # Line number starting at 1.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # The detailed error message. The message should help developer understand the underlying problem without leaking internal data.
+      "path": [ # The result field which could not be populated due to error. Clients can use path to identify whether a null result is intentional or caused by a runtime error. It should be a list of string or index from the root of GraphQL query document.
+        "",
+      ],
+    },
+  ],
+}
+
+ +
+ impersonateQuery(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Impersonate a query defined on a Firebase Data Connect connector. It grants the admin SDK access to queries defined in the given connector. The caller can choose to impersonate a particular Firebase Auth user, or skip @auth completely.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the connector to find the predefined query/mutation, in the format: ``` projects/{project}/locations/{location}/services/{service}/connectors/{connector} ``` (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # The Impersonate request to Firebase Data Connect.
+  "extensions": { # GraphqlRequestExtensions contains additional information of `GraphqlRequest`. # Optional. Additional GraphQL request information.
+    "impersonate": { # Impersonation configures the Firebase Auth context to impersonate. # Optional. If set, impersonate a request with given Firebase Auth context and evaluate the auth policies on the operation. If omitted, bypass any defined auth policies.
+      "authClaims": { # Evaluate the auth policy with a customized JWT auth token. Should follow the Firebase Auth token format. https://firebase.google.com/docs/rules/rules-and-auth For example: a verified user may have auth_claims of {"sub": , "email_verified": true}
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+      },
+      "includeDebugDetails": True or False, # Optional. If set, include debug details in GraphQL error extensions.
+      "unauthenticated": True or False, # Evaluate the auth policy as an unauthenticated request. Can only be set to true.
+    },
+  },
+  "operationName": "A String", # Required. The name of the GraphQL operation name. Required because all Connector operations must be named. See https://graphql.org/learn/queries/#operation-name.
+  "variables": { # Optional. Values for GraphQL variables provided in this request.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+  },
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The GraphQL response from Firebase Data Connect. It strives to match the GraphQL over HTTP spec. Note: Firebase Data Connect always responds with `Content-Type: application/json`. https://github.com/graphql/graphql-over-http/blob/main/spec/GraphQLOverHTTP.md#body
+  "data": { # The result of the execution of the requested operation. If an error was raised before execution begins, the data entry should not be present in the result. (a request error: https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors.Request-Errors) If an error was raised during the execution that prevented a valid response, the data entry in the response should be null. (a field error: https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors.Error-Result-Format)
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+  },
+  "errors": [ # Errors of this response. If the data entry in the response is not present, the errors entry must be present. It conforms to https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors.
+    { # GraphqlError conforms to the GraphQL error spec. https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors Firebase Data Connect API surfaces `GraphqlError` in various APIs: - Upon compile error, `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector` return Code.Invalid_Argument with a list of `GraphqlError` in error details. - Upon query compile error, `ExecuteGraphql` and `ExecuteGraphqlRead` return Code.OK with a list of `GraphqlError` in response body. - Upon query execution error, `ExecuteGraphql`, `ExecuteGraphqlRead`, `ExecuteMutation` and `ExecuteQuery` all return Code.OK with a list of `GraphqlError` in response body.
+      "extensions": { # GraphqlErrorExtensions contains additional information of `GraphqlError`. # Additional error information.
+        "code": "A String", # Maps to canonical gRPC codes. If not specified, it represents `Code.INTERNAL`.
+        "debugDetails": "A String", # More detailed error message to assist debugging. It contains application business logic that are inappropriate to leak publicly. In the emulator, Data Connect API always includes it to assist local development and debugging. In the backend, ConnectorService always hides it. GraphqlService without impersonation always include it. GraphqlService with impersonation includes it only if explicitly opted-in with `include_debug_details` in `GraphqlRequestExtensions`.
+        "file": "A String", # The source file name where the error occurred. Included only for `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector`, it corresponds to `File.path` of the provided `Source`.
+        "resource": "A String", # Distinguish which schema or connector the error originates from. It should be set on errors from control plane APIs (e.g. `UpdateSchema`, `UpdateConnector`).
+      },
+      "locations": [ # The source locations where the error occurred. Locations should help developers and toolings identify the source of error quickly. Included in admin endpoints (`ExecuteGraphql`, `ExecuteGraphqlRead`, `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector`) to reference the provided GraphQL GQL document. Omitted in `ExecuteMutation` and `ExecuteQuery` since the caller shouldn't have access access the underlying GQL source.
+        { # SourceLocation references a location in a GraphQL source.
+          "column": 42, # Column number starting at 1.
+          "line": 42, # Line number starting at 1.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # The detailed error message. The message should help developer understand the underlying problem without leaking internal data.
+      "path": [ # The result field which could not be populated due to error. Clients can use path to identify whether a null result is intentional or caused by a runtime error. It should be a list of string or index from the root of GraphQL query document.
+        "",
+      ],
+    },
+  ],
+}
+
+
list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)
Lists Connectors in a given project and location.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1beta.projects.locations.services.html b/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1beta.projects.locations.services.html
index 7aabbdb5b65..044fbf3ed06 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1beta.projects.locations.services.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1beta.projects.locations.services.html
@@ -102,6 +102,9 @@ 

Instance Methods

get(name, x__xgafv=None)

Gets details of a single Service.

+

+ introspectGraphql(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Execute introspection query against the Firebase Data Connect's generated GraphQL schema. GraphQL introspection query provides metadata such as what tables the schema have, what queries and mutations can be performed on the schema, and so on. Read more at https://graphql.org/learn/introspection. IntrospectGraphql can read schema metadata but cannot read rows from Cloud SQL instance, which can be done via ExecuteGraphqlRead.

list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

Lists Services in a given project and location.

@@ -367,6 +370,67 @@

Method Details

}
+
+ introspectGraphql(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Execute introspection query against the Firebase Data Connect's generated GraphQL schema. GraphQL introspection query provides metadata such as what tables the schema have, what queries and mutations can be performed on the schema, and so on. Read more at https://graphql.org/learn/introspection. IntrospectGraphql can read schema metadata but cannot read rows from Cloud SQL instance, which can be done via ExecuteGraphqlRead.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The relative resource name of Firebase Data Connect service, in the format: ``` projects/{project}/locations/{location}/services/{service} ``` (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # The GraphQL request to Firebase Data Connect. It strives to match the GraphQL over HTTP spec. https://github.com/graphql/graphql-over-http/blob/main/spec/GraphQLOverHTTP.md#post
+  "extensions": { # GraphqlRequestExtensions contains additional information of `GraphqlRequest`. # Optional. Additional GraphQL request information.
+    "impersonate": { # Impersonation configures the Firebase Auth context to impersonate. # Optional. If set, impersonate a request with given Firebase Auth context and evaluate the auth policies on the operation. If omitted, bypass any defined auth policies.
+      "authClaims": { # Evaluate the auth policy with a customized JWT auth token. Should follow the Firebase Auth token format. https://firebase.google.com/docs/rules/rules-and-auth For example: a verified user may have auth_claims of {"sub": , "email_verified": true}
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+      },
+      "includeDebugDetails": True or False, # Optional. If set, include debug details in GraphQL error extensions.
+      "unauthenticated": True or False, # Evaluate the auth policy as an unauthenticated request. Can only be set to true.
+    },
+  },
+  "operationName": "A String", # Optional. The name of the GraphQL operation name. Required only if `query` contains multiple operations. See https://graphql.org/learn/queries/#operation-name.
+  "query": "A String", # Required. The GraphQL query document source.
+  "variables": { # Optional. Values for GraphQL variables provided in this request.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+  },
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The GraphQL response from Firebase Data Connect. It strives to match the GraphQL over HTTP spec. Note: Firebase Data Connect always responds with `Content-Type: application/json`. https://github.com/graphql/graphql-over-http/blob/main/spec/GraphQLOverHTTP.md#body
+  "data": { # The result of the execution of the requested operation. If an error was raised before execution begins, the data entry should not be present in the result. (a request error: https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors.Request-Errors) If an error was raised during the execution that prevented a valid response, the data entry in the response should be null. (a field error: https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors.Error-Result-Format)
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+  },
+  "errors": [ # Errors of this response. If the data entry in the response is not present, the errors entry must be present. It conforms to https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors.
+    { # GraphqlError conforms to the GraphQL error spec. https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors Firebase Data Connect API surfaces `GraphqlError` in various APIs: - Upon compile error, `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector` return Code.Invalid_Argument with a list of `GraphqlError` in error details. - Upon query compile error, `ExecuteGraphql` and `ExecuteGraphqlRead` return Code.OK with a list of `GraphqlError` in response body. - Upon query execution error, `ExecuteGraphql`, `ExecuteGraphqlRead`, `ExecuteMutation` and `ExecuteQuery` all return Code.OK with a list of `GraphqlError` in response body.
+      "extensions": { # GraphqlErrorExtensions contains additional information of `GraphqlError`. # Additional error information.
+        "code": "A String", # Maps to canonical gRPC codes. If not specified, it represents `Code.INTERNAL`.
+        "debugDetails": "A String", # More detailed error message to assist debugging. It contains application business logic that are inappropriate to leak publicly. In the emulator, Data Connect API always includes it to assist local development and debugging. In the backend, ConnectorService always hides it. GraphqlService without impersonation always include it. GraphqlService with impersonation includes it only if explicitly opted-in with `include_debug_details` in `GraphqlRequestExtensions`.
+        "file": "A String", # The source file name where the error occurred. Included only for `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector`, it corresponds to `File.path` of the provided `Source`.
+        "resource": "A String", # Distinguish which schema or connector the error originates from. It should be set on errors from control plane APIs (e.g. `UpdateSchema`, `UpdateConnector`).
+      },
+      "locations": [ # The source locations where the error occurred. Locations should help developers and toolings identify the source of error quickly. Included in admin endpoints (`ExecuteGraphql`, `ExecuteGraphqlRead`, `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector`) to reference the provided GraphQL GQL document. Omitted in `ExecuteMutation` and `ExecuteQuery` since the caller shouldn't have access access the underlying GQL source.
+        { # SourceLocation references a location in a GraphQL source.
+          "column": 42, # Column number starting at 1.
+          "line": 42, # Line number starting at 1.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # The detailed error message. The message should help developer understand the underlying problem without leaking internal data.
+      "path": [ # The result field which could not be populated due to error. Clients can use path to identify whether a null result is intentional or caused by a runtime error. It should be a list of string or index from the root of GraphQL query document.
+        "",
+      ],
+    },
+  ],
+}
+
+
list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)
Lists Services in a given project and location.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebaseml_v2beta.projects.locations.publishers.models.html b/docs/dyn/firebaseml_v2beta.projects.locations.publishers.models.html
index 74928100989..b4de9ece610 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/firebaseml_v2beta.projects.locations.publishers.models.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/firebaseml_v2beta.projects.locations.publishers.models.html
@@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ 

Method Details

"a_key": "", # Properties of the object. }, "id": "A String", # Optional. The unique id of the function call. If populated, the client to execute the `function_call` and return the response with the matching `id`. - "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name]. + "name": "A String", # Optional. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name]. }, "functionResponse": { # The result output from a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function is used as context to the model. This should contain the result of a [FunctionCall] made based on model prediction. # Optional. The result output of a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function call. It is used as context to the model. "id": "A String", # Optional. The id of the function call this response is for. Populated by the client to match the corresponding function call `id`. @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "", # Properties of the object. }, "id": "A String", # Optional. The unique id of the function call. If populated, the client to execute the `function_call` and return the response with the matching `id`. - "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name]. + "name": "A String", # Optional. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name]. }, "functionResponse": { # The result output from a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function is used as context to the model. This should contain the result of a [FunctionCall] made based on model prediction. # Optional. The result output of a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function call. It is used as context to the model. "id": "A String", # Optional. The id of the function call this response is for. Populated by the client to match the corresponding function call `id`. @@ -383,13 +383,14 @@

Method Details

}, ], "googleMaps": { # Tool to retrieve public maps data for grounding, powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleMaps tool type. Tool to support Google Maps in Model. + "enableWidget": True or False, # Optional. If true, include the widget context token in the response. }, "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. "excludeDomains": [ # Optional. List of domains to be excluded from the search results. The default limit is 2000 domains. Example: ["amazon.com", "facebook.com"]. "A String", ], }, - "googleSearchRetrieval": { # Tool to retrieve public web data for grounding, powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearchRetrieval tool type. Specialized retrieval tool that is powered by Google search. + "googleSearchRetrieval": { # Tool to retrieve public web data for grounding, powered by Google. # Optional. Specialized retrieval tool that is powered by Google Search. "dynamicRetrievalConfig": { # Describes the options to customize dynamic retrieval. # Specifies the dynamic retrieval configuration for the given source. "dynamicThreshold": 3.14, # Optional. The threshold to be used in dynamic retrieval. If not set, a system default value is used. "mode": "A String", # The mode of the predictor to be used in dynamic retrieval. @@ -544,7 +545,7 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "", # Properties of the object. }, "id": "A String", # Optional. The unique id of the function call. If populated, the client to execute the `function_call` and return the response with the matching `id`. - "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name]. + "name": "A String", # Optional. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name]. }, "functionResponse": { # The result output from a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function is used as context to the model. This should contain the result of a [FunctionCall] made based on model prediction. # Optional. The result output of a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function call. It is used as context to the model. "id": "A String", # Optional. The id of the function call this response is for. Populated by the client to match the corresponding function call `id`. @@ -691,7 +692,7 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "", # Properties of the object. }, "id": "A String", # Optional. The unique id of the function call. If populated, the client to execute the `function_call` and return the response with the matching `id`. - "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name]. + "name": "A String", # Optional. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name]. }, "functionResponse": { # The result output from a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function is used as context to the model. This should contain the result of a [FunctionCall] made based on model prediction. # Optional. The result output of a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function call. It is used as context to the model. "id": "A String", # Optional. The id of the function call this response is for. Populated by the client to match the corresponding function call `id`. @@ -828,13 +829,14 @@

Method Details

}, ], "googleMaps": { # Tool to retrieve public maps data for grounding, powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleMaps tool type. Tool to support Google Maps in Model. + "enableWidget": True or False, # Optional. If true, include the widget context token in the response. }, "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. "excludeDomains": [ # Optional. List of domains to be excluded from the search results. The default limit is 2000 domains. Example: ["amazon.com", "facebook.com"]. "A String", ], }, - "googleSearchRetrieval": { # Tool to retrieve public web data for grounding, powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearchRetrieval tool type. Specialized retrieval tool that is powered by Google search. + "googleSearchRetrieval": { # Tool to retrieve public web data for grounding, powered by Google. # Optional. Specialized retrieval tool that is powered by Google Search. "dynamicRetrievalConfig": { # Describes the options to customize dynamic retrieval. # Specifies the dynamic retrieval configuration for the given source. "dynamicThreshold": 3.14, # Optional. The threshold to be used in dynamic retrieval. If not set, a system default value is used. "mode": "A String", # The mode of the predictor to be used in dynamic retrieval. @@ -985,7 +987,7 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "", # Properties of the object. }, "id": "A String", # Optional. The unique id of the function call. If populated, the client to execute the `function_call` and return the response with the matching `id`. - "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name]. + "name": "A String", # Optional. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name]. }, "functionResponse": { # The result output from a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function is used as context to the model. This should contain the result of a [FunctionCall] made based on model prediction. # Optional. The result output of a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function call. It is used as context to the model. "id": "A String", # Optional. The id of the function call this response is for. Populated by the client to match the corresponding function call `id`. @@ -1019,25 +1021,18 @@

Method Details

{ # Grounding chunk. "maps": { # Chunk from Google Maps. # Grounding chunk from Google Maps. "placeAnswerSources": { # Sources used to generate the place answer. # Sources used to generate the place answer. This includes review snippets and photos that were used to generate the answer, as well as uris to flag content. - "flagContentUri": "A String", # A link where users can flag a problem with the generated answer. "reviewSnippets": [ # Snippets of reviews that are used to generate the answer. { # Encapsulates a review snippet. - "authorAttribution": { # Author attribution for a photo or review. # This review's author. - "displayName": "A String", # Name of the author of the Photo or Review. - "photoUri": "A String", # Profile photo URI of the author of the Photo or Review. - "uri": "A String", # URI of the author of the Photo or Review. - }, - "flagContentUri": "A String", # A link where users can flag a problem with the review. "googleMapsUri": "A String", # A link to show the review on Google Maps. - "relativePublishTimeDescription": "A String", # A string of formatted recent time, expressing the review time relative to the current time in a form appropriate for the language and country. - "review": "A String", # A reference representing this place review which may be used to look up this place review again. + "reviewId": "A String", # Id of the review referencing the place. + "title": "A String", # Title of the review. }, ], }, "placeId": "A String", # This Place's resource name, in `places/{place_id}` format. Can be used to look up the Place. - "text": "A String", # Text of the chunk. - "title": "A String", # Title of the chunk. - "uri": "A String", # URI reference of the chunk. + "text": "A String", # Text of the place answer. + "title": "A String", # Title of the place. + "uri": "A String", # URI reference of the place. }, "retrievedContext": { # Chunk from context retrieved by the retrieval tools. # Grounding chunk from context retrieved by the retrieval tools. "documentName": "A String", # Output only. The full document name for the referenced Vertex AI Search document. @@ -1085,6 +1080,12 @@

Method Details

"renderedContent": "A String", # Optional. Web content snippet that can be embedded in a web page or an app webview. "sdkBlob": "A String", # Optional. Base64 encoded JSON representing array of tuple. }, + "sourceFlaggingUris": [ # Optional. Output only. List of source flagging uris. This is currently populated only for Google Maps grounding. + { # Source content flagging uri for a place or review. This is currently populated only for Google Maps grounding. + "flagContentUri": "A String", # A link where users can flag a problem with the source (place or review). + "sourceId": "A String", # Id of the place or review. + }, + ], "webSearchQueries": [ # Optional. Web search queries for the following-up web search. "A String", ], @@ -1133,10 +1134,10 @@

Method Details

], "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when the request is made to the server. "modelVersion": "A String", # Output only. The model version used to generate the response. - "promptFeedback": { # Content filter results for a prompt sent in the request. # Output only. Content filter results for a prompt sent in the request. Note: Sent only in the first stream chunk. Only happens when no candidates were generated due to content violations. - "blockReason": "A String", # Output only. Blocked reason. - "blockReasonMessage": "A String", # Output only. A readable block reason message. - "safetyRatings": [ # Output only. Safety ratings. + "promptFeedback": { # Content filter results for a prompt sent in the request. Note: This is sent only in the first stream chunk and only if no candidates were generated due to content violations. # Output only. Content filter results for a prompt sent in the request. Note: Sent only in the first stream chunk. Only happens when no candidates were generated due to content violations. + "blockReason": "A String", # Output only. The reason why the prompt was blocked. + "blockReasonMessage": "A String", # Output only. A readable message that explains the reason why the prompt was blocked. + "safetyRatings": [ # Output only. A list of safety ratings for the prompt. There is one rating per category. { # Safety rating corresponding to the generated content. "blocked": True or False, # Output only. Indicates whether the content was filtered out because of this rating. "category": "A String", # Output only. Harm category. @@ -1149,38 +1150,38 @@

Method Details

], }, "responseId": "A String", # Output only. response_id is used to identify each response. It is the encoding of the event_id. - "usageMetadata": { # Usage metadata about response(s). # Usage metadata about the response(s). - "cacheTokensDetails": [ # Output only. List of modalities of the cached content in the request input. + "usageMetadata": { # Usage metadata about the content generation request and response. This message provides a detailed breakdown of token usage and other relevant metrics. # Usage metadata about the response(s). + "cacheTokensDetails": [ # Output only. A detailed breakdown of the token count for each modality in the cached content. { # Represents token counting info for a single modality. "modality": "A String", # The modality associated with this token count. "tokenCount": 42, # Number of tokens. }, ], - "cachedContentTokenCount": 42, # Output only. Number of tokens in the cached part in the input (the cached content). - "candidatesTokenCount": 42, # Number of tokens in the response(s). - "candidatesTokensDetails": [ # Output only. List of modalities that were returned in the response. + "cachedContentTokenCount": 42, # Output only. The number of tokens in the cached content that was used for this request. + "candidatesTokenCount": 42, # The total number of tokens in the generated candidates. + "candidatesTokensDetails": [ # Output only. A detailed breakdown of the token count for each modality in the generated candidates. { # Represents token counting info for a single modality. "modality": "A String", # The modality associated with this token count. "tokenCount": 42, # Number of tokens. }, ], - "promptTokenCount": 42, # Number of tokens in the request. When `cached_content` is set, this is still the total effective prompt size meaning this includes the number of tokens in the cached content. - "promptTokensDetails": [ # Output only. List of modalities that were processed in the request input. + "promptTokenCount": 42, # The total number of tokens in the prompt. This includes any text, images, or other media provided in the request. When `cached_content` is set, this also includes the number of tokens in the cached content. + "promptTokensDetails": [ # Output only. A detailed breakdown of the token count for each modality in the prompt. { # Represents token counting info for a single modality. "modality": "A String", # The modality associated with this token count. "tokenCount": 42, # Number of tokens. }, ], - "thoughtsTokenCount": 42, # Output only. Number of tokens present in thoughts output. - "toolUsePromptTokenCount": 42, # Output only. Number of tokens present in tool-use prompt(s). - "toolUsePromptTokensDetails": [ # Output only. List of modalities that were processed for tool-use request inputs. + "thoughtsTokenCount": 42, # Output only. The number of tokens that were part of the model's generated "thoughts" output, if applicable. + "toolUsePromptTokenCount": 42, # Output only. The number of tokens in the results from tool executions, which are provided back to the model as input, if applicable. + "toolUsePromptTokensDetails": [ # Output only. A detailed breakdown by modality of the token counts from the results of tool executions, which are provided back to the model as input. { # Represents token counting info for a single modality. "modality": "A String", # The modality associated with this token count. "tokenCount": 42, # Number of tokens. }, ], - "totalTokenCount": 42, # Total token count for prompt, response candidates, and tool-use prompts (if present). - "trafficType": "A String", # Output only. Traffic type. This shows whether a request consumes Pay-As-You-Go or Provisioned Throughput quota. + "totalTokenCount": 42, # The total number of tokens for the entire request. This is the sum of `prompt_token_count`, `candidates_token_count`, `tool_use_prompt_token_count`, and `thoughts_token_count`. + "trafficType": "A String", # Output only. The traffic type for this request. }, }
@@ -1218,7 +1219,7 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "", # Properties of the object. }, "id": "A String", # Optional. The unique id of the function call. If populated, the client to execute the `function_call` and return the response with the matching `id`. - "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name]. + "name": "A String", # Optional. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name]. }, "functionResponse": { # The result output from a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function is used as context to the model. This should contain the result of a [FunctionCall] made based on model prediction. # Optional. The result output of a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function call. It is used as context to the model. "id": "A String", # Optional. The id of the function call this response is for. Populated by the client to match the corresponding function call `id`. @@ -1365,7 +1366,7 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "", # Properties of the object. }, "id": "A String", # Optional. The unique id of the function call. If populated, the client to execute the `function_call` and return the response with the matching `id`. - "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name]. + "name": "A String", # Optional. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name]. }, "functionResponse": { # The result output from a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function is used as context to the model. This should contain the result of a [FunctionCall] made based on model prediction. # Optional. The result output of a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function call. It is used as context to the model. "id": "A String", # Optional. The id of the function call this response is for. Populated by the client to match the corresponding function call `id`. @@ -1502,13 +1503,14 @@

Method Details

}, ], "googleMaps": { # Tool to retrieve public maps data for grounding, powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleMaps tool type. Tool to support Google Maps in Model. + "enableWidget": True or False, # Optional. If true, include the widget context token in the response. }, "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. "excludeDomains": [ # Optional. List of domains to be excluded from the search results. The default limit is 2000 domains. Example: ["amazon.com", "facebook.com"]. "A String", ], }, - "googleSearchRetrieval": { # Tool to retrieve public web data for grounding, powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearchRetrieval tool type. Specialized retrieval tool that is powered by Google search. + "googleSearchRetrieval": { # Tool to retrieve public web data for grounding, powered by Google. # Optional. Specialized retrieval tool that is powered by Google Search. "dynamicRetrievalConfig": { # Describes the options to customize dynamic retrieval. # Specifies the dynamic retrieval configuration for the given source. "dynamicThreshold": 3.14, # Optional. The threshold to be used in dynamic retrieval. If not set, a system default value is used. "mode": "A String", # The mode of the predictor to be used in dynamic retrieval. @@ -1659,7 +1661,7 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "", # Properties of the object. }, "id": "A String", # Optional. The unique id of the function call. If populated, the client to execute the `function_call` and return the response with the matching `id`. - "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name]. + "name": "A String", # Optional. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name]. }, "functionResponse": { # The result output from a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function is used as context to the model. This should contain the result of a [FunctionCall] made based on model prediction. # Optional. The result output of a [FunctionCall] that contains a string representing the [FunctionDeclaration.name] and a structured JSON object containing any output from the function call. It is used as context to the model. "id": "A String", # Optional. The id of the function call this response is for. Populated by the client to match the corresponding function call `id`. @@ -1693,25 +1695,18 @@

Method Details

{ # Grounding chunk. "maps": { # Chunk from Google Maps. # Grounding chunk from Google Maps. "placeAnswerSources": { # Sources used to generate the place answer. # Sources used to generate the place answer. This includes review snippets and photos that were used to generate the answer, as well as uris to flag content. - "flagContentUri": "A String", # A link where users can flag a problem with the generated answer. "reviewSnippets": [ # Snippets of reviews that are used to generate the answer. { # Encapsulates a review snippet. - "authorAttribution": { # Author attribution for a photo or review. # This review's author. - "displayName": "A String", # Name of the author of the Photo or Review. - "photoUri": "A String", # Profile photo URI of the author of the Photo or Review. - "uri": "A String", # URI of the author of the Photo or Review. - }, - "flagContentUri": "A String", # A link where users can flag a problem with the review. "googleMapsUri": "A String", # A link to show the review on Google Maps. - "relativePublishTimeDescription": "A String", # A string of formatted recent time, expressing the review time relative to the current time in a form appropriate for the language and country. - "review": "A String", # A reference representing this place review which may be used to look up this place review again. + "reviewId": "A String", # Id of the review referencing the place. + "title": "A String", # Title of the review. }, ], }, "placeId": "A String", # This Place's resource name, in `places/{place_id}` format. Can be used to look up the Place. - "text": "A String", # Text of the chunk. - "title": "A String", # Title of the chunk. - "uri": "A String", # URI reference of the chunk. + "text": "A String", # Text of the place answer. + "title": "A String", # Title of the place. + "uri": "A String", # URI reference of the place. }, "retrievedContext": { # Chunk from context retrieved by the retrieval tools. # Grounding chunk from context retrieved by the retrieval tools. "documentName": "A String", # Output only. The full document name for the referenced Vertex AI Search document. @@ -1759,6 +1754,12 @@

Method Details

"renderedContent": "A String", # Optional. Web content snippet that can be embedded in a web page or an app webview. "sdkBlob": "A String", # Optional. Base64 encoded JSON representing array of tuple. }, + "sourceFlaggingUris": [ # Optional. Output only. List of source flagging uris. This is currently populated only for Google Maps grounding. + { # Source content flagging uri for a place or review. This is currently populated only for Google Maps grounding. + "flagContentUri": "A String", # A link where users can flag a problem with the source (place or review). + "sourceId": "A String", # Id of the place or review. + }, + ], "webSearchQueries": [ # Optional. Web search queries for the following-up web search. "A String", ], @@ -1807,10 +1808,10 @@

Method Details

], "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when the request is made to the server. "modelVersion": "A String", # Output only. The model version used to generate the response. - "promptFeedback": { # Content filter results for a prompt sent in the request. # Output only. Content filter results for a prompt sent in the request. Note: Sent only in the first stream chunk. Only happens when no candidates were generated due to content violations. - "blockReason": "A String", # Output only. Blocked reason. - "blockReasonMessage": "A String", # Output only. A readable block reason message. - "safetyRatings": [ # Output only. Safety ratings. + "promptFeedback": { # Content filter results for a prompt sent in the request. Note: This is sent only in the first stream chunk and only if no candidates were generated due to content violations. # Output only. Content filter results for a prompt sent in the request. Note: Sent only in the first stream chunk. Only happens when no candidates were generated due to content violations. + "blockReason": "A String", # Output only. The reason why the prompt was blocked. + "blockReasonMessage": "A String", # Output only. A readable message that explains the reason why the prompt was blocked. + "safetyRatings": [ # Output only. A list of safety ratings for the prompt. There is one rating per category. { # Safety rating corresponding to the generated content. "blocked": True or False, # Output only. Indicates whether the content was filtered out because of this rating. "category": "A String", # Output only. Harm category. @@ -1823,38 +1824,38 @@

Method Details

], }, "responseId": "A String", # Output only. response_id is used to identify each response. It is the encoding of the event_id. - "usageMetadata": { # Usage metadata about response(s). # Usage metadata about the response(s). - "cacheTokensDetails": [ # Output only. List of modalities of the cached content in the request input. + "usageMetadata": { # Usage metadata about the content generation request and response. This message provides a detailed breakdown of token usage and other relevant metrics. # Usage metadata about the response(s). + "cacheTokensDetails": [ # Output only. A detailed breakdown of the token count for each modality in the cached content. { # Represents token counting info for a single modality. "modality": "A String", # The modality associated with this token count. "tokenCount": 42, # Number of tokens. }, ], - "cachedContentTokenCount": 42, # Output only. Number of tokens in the cached part in the input (the cached content). - "candidatesTokenCount": 42, # Number of tokens in the response(s). - "candidatesTokensDetails": [ # Output only. List of modalities that were returned in the response. + "cachedContentTokenCount": 42, # Output only. The number of tokens in the cached content that was used for this request. + "candidatesTokenCount": 42, # The total number of tokens in the generated candidates. + "candidatesTokensDetails": [ # Output only. A detailed breakdown of the token count for each modality in the generated candidates. { # Represents token counting info for a single modality. "modality": "A String", # The modality associated with this token count. "tokenCount": 42, # Number of tokens. }, ], - "promptTokenCount": 42, # Number of tokens in the request. When `cached_content` is set, this is still the total effective prompt size meaning this includes the number of tokens in the cached content. - "promptTokensDetails": [ # Output only. List of modalities that were processed in the request input. + "promptTokenCount": 42, # The total number of tokens in the prompt. This includes any text, images, or other media provided in the request. When `cached_content` is set, this also includes the number of tokens in the cached content. + "promptTokensDetails": [ # Output only. A detailed breakdown of the token count for each modality in the prompt. { # Represents token counting info for a single modality. "modality": "A String", # The modality associated with this token count. "tokenCount": 42, # Number of tokens. }, ], - "thoughtsTokenCount": 42, # Output only. Number of tokens present in thoughts output. - "toolUsePromptTokenCount": 42, # Output only. Number of tokens present in tool-use prompt(s). - "toolUsePromptTokensDetails": [ # Output only. List of modalities that were processed for tool-use request inputs. + "thoughtsTokenCount": 42, # Output only. The number of tokens that were part of the model's generated "thoughts" output, if applicable. + "toolUsePromptTokenCount": 42, # Output only. The number of tokens in the results from tool executions, which are provided back to the model as input, if applicable. + "toolUsePromptTokensDetails": [ # Output only. A detailed breakdown by modality of the token counts from the results of tool executions, which are provided back to the model as input. { # Represents token counting info for a single modality. "modality": "A String", # The modality associated with this token count. "tokenCount": 42, # Number of tokens. }, ], - "totalTokenCount": 42, # Total token count for prompt, response candidates, and tool-use prompts (if present). - "trafficType": "A String", # Output only. Traffic type. This shows whether a request consumes Pay-As-You-Go or Provisioned Throughput quota. + "totalTokenCount": 42, # The total number of tokens for the entire request. This is the sum of `prompt_token_count`, `candidates_token_count`, `tool_use_prompt_token_count`, and `thoughts_token_count`. + "trafficType": "A String", # Output only. The traffic type for this request. }, }
diff --git a/docs/dyn/firestore_v1.projects.databases.html b/docs/dyn/firestore_v1.projects.databases.html index 1c0d2ccd0a4..25ed0422728 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/firestore_v1.projects.databases.html +++ b/docs/dyn/firestore_v1.projects.databases.html @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@

Method Details

The object takes the form of: { # The request message for FirestoreAdmin.CloneDatabase. - "databaseId": "A String", # Required. The ID to use for the database, which will become the final component of the database's resource name. This database ID must not be associated with an existing database. This value should be 4-63 characters. Valid characters are /a-z-/ with first character a letter and the last a letter or a number. Must not be UUID-like /[0-9a-f]{8}(-[0-9a-f]{4}){3}-[0-9a-f]{12}/. "(default)" database ID is also valid. + "databaseId": "A String", # Required. The ID to use for the database, which will become the final component of the database's resource name. This database ID must not be associated with an existing database. This value should be 4-63 characters. Valid characters are /a-z-/ with first character a letter and the last a letter or a number. Must not be UUID-like /[0-9a-f]{8}(-[0-9a-f]{4}){3}-[0-9a-f]{12}/. "(default)" database ID is also valid if the database is Standard edition. "encryptionConfig": { # Encryption configuration for a new database being created from another source. The source could be a Backup . # Optional. Encryption configuration for the cloned database. If this field is not specified, the cloned database will use the same encryption configuration as the source database, namely use_source_encryption. "customerManagedEncryption": { # The configuration options for using CMEK (Customer Managed Encryption Key) encryption. # Use Customer Managed Encryption Keys (CMEK) for encryption. "kmsKeyName": "A String", # Required. Only keys in the same location as the database are allowed to be used for encryption. For Firestore's nam5 multi-region, this corresponds to Cloud KMS multi-region us. For Firestore's eur3 multi-region, this corresponds to Cloud KMS multi-region europe. See https://cloud.google.com/kms/docs/locations. The expected format is `projects/{project_id}/locations/{kms_location}/keyRings/{key_ring}/cryptoKeys/{crypto_key}`. @@ -289,7 +289,7 @@

Method Details

"versionRetentionPeriod": "A String", # Output only. The period during which past versions of data are retained in the database. Any read or query can specify a `read_time` within this window, and will read the state of the database at that time. If the PITR feature is enabled, the retention period is 7 days. Otherwise, the retention period is 1 hour. } - databaseId: string, Required. The ID to use for the database, which will become the final component of the database's resource name. This value should be 4-63 characters. Valid characters are /a-z-/ with first character a letter and the last a letter or a number. Must not be UUID-like /[0-9a-f]{8}(-[0-9a-f]{4}){3}-[0-9a-f]{12}/. "(default)" database ID is also valid. + databaseId: string, Required. The ID to use for the database, which will become the final component of the database's resource name. This value should be 4-63 characters. Valid characters are /a-z-/ with first character a letter and the last a letter or a number. Must not be UUID-like /[0-9a-f]{8}(-[0-9a-f]{4}){3}-[0-9a-f]{12}/. "(default)" database ID is also valid if the database is Standard edition. x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. Allowed values 1 - v1 error format @@ -648,7 +648,7 @@

Method Details

{ # The request message for FirestoreAdmin.RestoreDatabase. "backup": "A String", # Required. Backup to restore from. Must be from the same project as the parent. The restored database will be created in the same location as the source backup. Format is: `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location}/backups/{backup}` - "databaseId": "A String", # Required. The ID to use for the database, which will become the final component of the database's resource name. This database ID must not be associated with an existing database. This value should be 4-63 characters. Valid characters are /a-z-/ with first character a letter and the last a letter or a number. Must not be UUID-like /[0-9a-f]{8}(-[0-9a-f]{4}){3}-[0-9a-f]{12}/. "(default)" database ID is also valid. + "databaseId": "A String", # Required. The ID to use for the database, which will become the final component of the database's resource name. This database ID must not be associated with an existing database. This value should be 4-63 characters. Valid characters are /a-z-/ with first character a letter and the last a letter or a number. Must not be UUID-like /[0-9a-f]{8}(-[0-9a-f]{4}){3}-[0-9a-f]{12}/. "(default)" database ID is also valid if the database is Standard edition. "encryptionConfig": { # Encryption configuration for a new database being created from another source. The source could be a Backup . # Optional. Encryption configuration for the restored database. If this field is not specified, the restored database will use the same encryption configuration as the backup, namely use_source_encryption. "customerManagedEncryption": { # The configuration options for using CMEK (Customer Managed Encryption Key) encryption. # Use Customer Managed Encryption Keys (CMEK) for encryption. "kmsKeyName": "A String", # Required. Only keys in the same location as the database are allowed to be used for encryption. For Firestore's nam5 multi-region, this corresponds to Cloud KMS multi-region us. For Firestore's eur3 multi-region, this corresponds to Cloud KMS multi-region europe. See https://cloud.google.com/kms/docs/locations. The expected format is `projects/{project_id}/locations/{kms_location}/keyRings/{key_ring}/cryptoKeys/{crypto_key}`. diff --git a/docs/dyn/firestore_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/firestore_v1.projects.locations.html index e223736efde..90230bdeb9a 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/firestore_v1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/firestore_v1.projects.locations.html @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. A list of extra location types that should be used as conditions for controlling the visibility of the locations. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1.projects.locations.html index 315c8643618..04a1def72cf 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1.projects.locations.html @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1.projects.locations.memberships.html b/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1.projects.locations.memberships.html index 28671100b21..cc19dc6748a 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1.projects.locations.memberships.html +++ b/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1.projects.locations.memberships.html @@ -181,7 +181,8 @@

Method Details

], "resourceOptions": { # ResourceOptions represent options for Kubernetes resource generation. # Optional. Options for Kubernetes resource generation. "connectVersion": "A String", # Optional. The Connect agent version to use for connect_resources. Defaults to the latest GKE Connect version. The version must be a currently supported version, obsolete versions will be rejected. - "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. + "k8sGitVersion": "A String", # Optional. Git version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to gate the Connect Agent migration to svc.id.goog on GDC-SO 1.33.100 patch and above. + "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major and minor version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. "v1beta1Crd": True or False, # Optional. Use `apiextensions/v1beta1` instead of `apiextensions/v1` for CustomResourceDefinition resources. This option should be set for clusters with Kubernetes apiserver versions <1.16. }, }, @@ -381,7 +382,8 @@

Method Details

], "resourceOptions": { # ResourceOptions represent options for Kubernetes resource generation. # Optional. Options for Kubernetes resource generation. "connectVersion": "A String", # Optional. The Connect agent version to use for connect_resources. Defaults to the latest GKE Connect version. The version must be a currently supported version, obsolete versions will be rejected. - "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. + "k8sGitVersion": "A String", # Optional. Git version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to gate the Connect Agent migration to svc.id.goog on GDC-SO 1.33.100 patch and above. + "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major and minor version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. "v1beta1Crd": True or False, # Optional. Use `apiextensions/v1beta1` instead of `apiextensions/v1` for CustomResourceDefinition resources. This option should be set for clusters with Kubernetes apiserver versions <1.16. }, }, @@ -536,7 +538,8 @@

Method Details

], "resourceOptions": { # ResourceOptions represent options for Kubernetes resource generation. # Optional. Options for Kubernetes resource generation. "connectVersion": "A String", # Optional. The Connect agent version to use for connect_resources. Defaults to the latest GKE Connect version. The version must be a currently supported version, obsolete versions will be rejected. - "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. + "k8sGitVersion": "A String", # Optional. Git version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to gate the Connect Agent migration to svc.id.goog on GDC-SO 1.33.100 patch and above. + "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major and minor version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. "v1beta1Crd": True or False, # Optional. Use `apiextensions/v1beta1` instead of `apiextensions/v1` for CustomResourceDefinition resources. This option should be set for clusters with Kubernetes apiserver versions <1.16. }, }, @@ -650,7 +653,8 @@

Method Details

], "resourceOptions": { # ResourceOptions represent options for Kubernetes resource generation. # Optional. Options for Kubernetes resource generation. "connectVersion": "A String", # Optional. The Connect agent version to use for connect_resources. Defaults to the latest GKE Connect version. The version must be a currently supported version, obsolete versions will be rejected. - "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. + "k8sGitVersion": "A String", # Optional. Git version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to gate the Connect Agent migration to svc.id.goog on GDC-SO 1.33.100 patch and above. + "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major and minor version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. "v1beta1Crd": True or False, # Optional. Use `apiextensions/v1beta1` instead of `apiextensions/v1` for CustomResourceDefinition resources. This option should be set for clusters with Kubernetes apiserver versions <1.16. }, }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1.projects.locations.scopes.html b/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1.projects.locations.scopes.html index e7bdea45fee..45ad08cd07f 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1.projects.locations.scopes.html +++ b/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1.projects.locations.scopes.html @@ -410,7 +410,8 @@

Method Details

], "resourceOptions": { # ResourceOptions represent options for Kubernetes resource generation. # Optional. Options for Kubernetes resource generation. "connectVersion": "A String", # Optional. The Connect agent version to use for connect_resources. Defaults to the latest GKE Connect version. The version must be a currently supported version, obsolete versions will be rejected. - "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. + "k8sGitVersion": "A String", # Optional. Git version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to gate the Connect Agent migration to svc.id.goog on GDC-SO 1.33.100 patch and above. + "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major and minor version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. "v1beta1Crd": True or False, # Optional. Use `apiextensions/v1beta1` instead of `apiextensions/v1` for CustomResourceDefinition resources. This option should be set for clusters with Kubernetes apiserver versions <1.16. }, }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1alpha.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1alpha.projects.locations.html index a45fb77b8f6..efd816d3859 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1alpha.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1alpha.projects.locations.html @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1alpha.projects.locations.memberships.html b/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1alpha.projects.locations.memberships.html index 167aa44c157..140f7f62a81 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1alpha.projects.locations.memberships.html +++ b/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1alpha.projects.locations.memberships.html @@ -196,7 +196,8 @@

Method Details

], "resourceOptions": { # ResourceOptions represent options for Kubernetes resource generation. # Optional. Options for Kubernetes resource generation. "connectVersion": "A String", # Optional. The Connect agent version to use for connect_resources. Defaults to the latest GKE Connect version. The version must be a currently supported version, obsolete versions will be rejected. - "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. + "k8sGitVersion": "A String", # Optional. Git version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to gate the Connect Agent migration to svc.id.goog on GDC-SO 1.33.100 patch and above. + "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major and minor version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. "v1beta1Crd": True or False, # Optional. Use `apiextensions/v1beta1` instead of `apiextensions/v1` for CustomResourceDefinition resources. This option should be set for clusters with Kubernetes apiserver versions <1.16. }, }, @@ -418,7 +419,8 @@

Method Details

], "resourceOptions": { # ResourceOptions represent options for Kubernetes resource generation. # Optional. Options for Kubernetes resource generation. "connectVersion": "A String", # Optional. The Connect agent version to use for connect_resources. Defaults to the latest GKE Connect version. The version must be a currently supported version, obsolete versions will be rejected. - "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. + "k8sGitVersion": "A String", # Optional. Git version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to gate the Connect Agent migration to svc.id.goog on GDC-SO 1.33.100 patch and above. + "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major and minor version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. "v1beta1Crd": True or False, # Optional. Use `apiextensions/v1beta1` instead of `apiextensions/v1` for CustomResourceDefinition resources. This option should be set for clusters with Kubernetes apiserver versions <1.16. }, }, @@ -573,7 +575,8 @@

Method Details

], "resourceOptions": { # ResourceOptions represent options for Kubernetes resource generation. # Optional. Options for Kubernetes resource generation. "connectVersion": "A String", # Optional. The Connect agent version to use for connect_resources. Defaults to the latest GKE Connect version. The version must be a currently supported version, obsolete versions will be rejected. - "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. + "k8sGitVersion": "A String", # Optional. Git version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to gate the Connect Agent migration to svc.id.goog on GDC-SO 1.33.100 patch and above. + "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major and minor version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. "v1beta1Crd": True or False, # Optional. Use `apiextensions/v1beta1` instead of `apiextensions/v1` for CustomResourceDefinition resources. This option should be set for clusters with Kubernetes apiserver versions <1.16. }, }, @@ -684,7 +687,8 @@

Method Details

], "resourceOptions": { # ResourceOptions represent options for Kubernetes resource generation. # Optional. Options for Kubernetes resource generation. "connectVersion": "A String", # Optional. The Connect agent version to use for connect_resources. Defaults to the latest GKE Connect version. The version must be a currently supported version, obsolete versions will be rejected. - "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. + "k8sGitVersion": "A String", # Optional. Git version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to gate the Connect Agent migration to svc.id.goog on GDC-SO 1.33.100 patch and above. + "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major and minor version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. "v1beta1Crd": True or False, # Optional. Use `apiextensions/v1beta1` instead of `apiextensions/v1` for CustomResourceDefinition resources. This option should be set for clusters with Kubernetes apiserver versions <1.16. }, }, @@ -813,7 +817,8 @@

Method Details

], "resourceOptions": { # ResourceOptions represent options for Kubernetes resource generation. # Optional. Options for Kubernetes resource generation. "connectVersion": "A String", # Optional. The Connect agent version to use for connect_resources. Defaults to the latest GKE Connect version. The version must be a currently supported version, obsolete versions will be rejected. - "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. + "k8sGitVersion": "A String", # Optional. Git version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to gate the Connect Agent migration to svc.id.goog on GDC-SO 1.33.100 patch and above. + "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major and minor version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. "v1beta1Crd": True or False, # Optional. Use `apiextensions/v1beta1` instead of `apiextensions/v1` for CustomResourceDefinition resources. This option should be set for clusters with Kubernetes apiserver versions <1.16. }, }, @@ -1054,7 +1059,8 @@

Method Details

], "resourceOptions": { # ResourceOptions represent options for Kubernetes resource generation. # Optional. Options for Kubernetes resource generation. "connectVersion": "A String", # Optional. The Connect agent version to use for connect_resources. Defaults to the latest GKE Connect version. The version must be a currently supported version, obsolete versions will be rejected. - "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. + "k8sGitVersion": "A String", # Optional. Git version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to gate the Connect Agent migration to svc.id.goog on GDC-SO 1.33.100 patch and above. + "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major and minor version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. "v1beta1Crd": True or False, # Optional. Use `apiextensions/v1beta1` instead of `apiextensions/v1` for CustomResourceDefinition resources. This option should be set for clusters with Kubernetes apiserver versions <1.16. }, }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1alpha.projects.locations.scopes.html b/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1alpha.projects.locations.scopes.html index ec8b32b87eb..4d2f10e27c7 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1alpha.projects.locations.scopes.html +++ b/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1alpha.projects.locations.scopes.html @@ -410,7 +410,8 @@

Method Details

], "resourceOptions": { # ResourceOptions represent options for Kubernetes resource generation. # Optional. Options for Kubernetes resource generation. "connectVersion": "A String", # Optional. The Connect agent version to use for connect_resources. Defaults to the latest GKE Connect version. The version must be a currently supported version, obsolete versions will be rejected. - "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. + "k8sGitVersion": "A String", # Optional. Git version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to gate the Connect Agent migration to svc.id.goog on GDC-SO 1.33.100 patch and above. + "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major and minor version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. "v1beta1Crd": True or False, # Optional. Use `apiextensions/v1beta1` instead of `apiextensions/v1` for CustomResourceDefinition resources. This option should be set for clusters with Kubernetes apiserver versions <1.16. }, }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1beta.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1beta.projects.locations.html index cdb22c21aa9..a446756429f 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1beta.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1beta.projects.locations.html @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1beta.projects.locations.memberships.html b/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1beta.projects.locations.memberships.html index 9dcb0172ed7..27ab20de0fe 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1beta.projects.locations.memberships.html +++ b/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1beta.projects.locations.memberships.html @@ -181,7 +181,8 @@

Method Details

], "resourceOptions": { # ResourceOptions represent options for Kubernetes resource generation. # Optional. Options for Kubernetes resource generation. "connectVersion": "A String", # Optional. The Connect agent version to use for connect_resources. Defaults to the latest GKE Connect version. The version must be a currently supported version, obsolete versions will be rejected. - "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. + "k8sGitVersion": "A String", # Optional. Git version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to gate the Connect Agent migration to svc.id.goog on GDC-SO 1.33.100 patch and above. + "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major and minor version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. "v1beta1Crd": True or False, # Optional. Use `apiextensions/v1beta1` instead of `apiextensions/v1` for CustomResourceDefinition resources. This option should be set for clusters with Kubernetes apiserver versions <1.16. }, }, @@ -381,7 +382,8 @@

Method Details

], "resourceOptions": { # ResourceOptions represent options for Kubernetes resource generation. # Optional. Options for Kubernetes resource generation. "connectVersion": "A String", # Optional. The Connect agent version to use for connect_resources. Defaults to the latest GKE Connect version. The version must be a currently supported version, obsolete versions will be rejected. - "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. + "k8sGitVersion": "A String", # Optional. Git version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to gate the Connect Agent migration to svc.id.goog on GDC-SO 1.33.100 patch and above. + "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major and minor version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. "v1beta1Crd": True or False, # Optional. Use `apiextensions/v1beta1` instead of `apiextensions/v1` for CustomResourceDefinition resources. This option should be set for clusters with Kubernetes apiserver versions <1.16. }, }, @@ -536,7 +538,8 @@

Method Details

], "resourceOptions": { # ResourceOptions represent options for Kubernetes resource generation. # Optional. Options for Kubernetes resource generation. "connectVersion": "A String", # Optional. The Connect agent version to use for connect_resources. Defaults to the latest GKE Connect version. The version must be a currently supported version, obsolete versions will be rejected. - "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. + "k8sGitVersion": "A String", # Optional. Git version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to gate the Connect Agent migration to svc.id.goog on GDC-SO 1.33.100 patch and above. + "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major and minor version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. "v1beta1Crd": True or False, # Optional. Use `apiextensions/v1beta1` instead of `apiextensions/v1` for CustomResourceDefinition resources. This option should be set for clusters with Kubernetes apiserver versions <1.16. }, }, @@ -650,7 +653,8 @@

Method Details

], "resourceOptions": { # ResourceOptions represent options for Kubernetes resource generation. # Optional. Options for Kubernetes resource generation. "connectVersion": "A String", # Optional. The Connect agent version to use for connect_resources. Defaults to the latest GKE Connect version. The version must be a currently supported version, obsolete versions will be rejected. - "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. + "k8sGitVersion": "A String", # Optional. Git version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to gate the Connect Agent migration to svc.id.goog on GDC-SO 1.33.100 patch and above. + "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major and minor version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. "v1beta1Crd": True or False, # Optional. Use `apiextensions/v1beta1` instead of `apiextensions/v1` for CustomResourceDefinition resources. This option should be set for clusters with Kubernetes apiserver versions <1.16. }, }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1beta.projects.locations.scopes.html b/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1beta.projects.locations.scopes.html index d4b13030d52..eec71662bfe 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1beta.projects.locations.scopes.html +++ b/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1beta.projects.locations.scopes.html @@ -410,7 +410,8 @@

Method Details

], "resourceOptions": { # ResourceOptions represent options for Kubernetes resource generation. # Optional. Options for Kubernetes resource generation. "connectVersion": "A String", # Optional. The Connect agent version to use for connect_resources. Defaults to the latest GKE Connect version. The version must be a currently supported version, obsolete versions will be rejected. - "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. + "k8sGitVersion": "A String", # Optional. Git version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to gate the Connect Agent migration to svc.id.goog on GDC-SO 1.33.100 patch and above. + "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major and minor version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. "v1beta1Crd": True or False, # Optional. Use `apiextensions/v1beta1` instead of `apiextensions/v1` for CustomResourceDefinition resources. This option should be set for clusters with Kubernetes apiserver versions <1.16. }, }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1beta1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1beta1.projects.locations.html index 3ef3722a725..b27fd670277 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1beta1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1beta1.projects.locations.html @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1beta1.projects.locations.memberships.html b/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1beta1.projects.locations.memberships.html index fa8f55cf88c..0cd9f7132ca 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1beta1.projects.locations.memberships.html +++ b/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1beta1.projects.locations.memberships.html @@ -175,7 +175,8 @@

Method Details

], "resourceOptions": { # ResourceOptions represent options for Kubernetes resource generation. # Optional. Options for Kubernetes resource generation. "connectVersion": "A String", # Optional. The Connect agent version to use for connect_resources. Defaults to the latest GKE Connect version. The version must be a currently supported version, obsolete versions will be rejected. - "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. + "k8sGitVersion": "A String", # Optional. Git version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to gate the Connect Agent migration to svc.id.goog on GDC-SO 1.33.100 patch and above. + "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major and minor version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. "v1beta1Crd": True or False, # Optional. Use `apiextensions/v1beta1` instead of `apiextensions/v1` for CustomResourceDefinition resources. This option should be set for clusters with Kubernetes apiserver versions <1.16. }, }, @@ -399,7 +400,8 @@

Method Details

], "resourceOptions": { # ResourceOptions represent options for Kubernetes resource generation. # Optional. Options for Kubernetes resource generation. "connectVersion": "A String", # Optional. The Connect agent version to use for connect_resources. Defaults to the latest GKE Connect version. The version must be a currently supported version, obsolete versions will be rejected. - "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. + "k8sGitVersion": "A String", # Optional. Git version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to gate the Connect Agent migration to svc.id.goog on GDC-SO 1.33.100 patch and above. + "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major and minor version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. "v1beta1Crd": True or False, # Optional. Use `apiextensions/v1beta1` instead of `apiextensions/v1` for CustomResourceDefinition resources. This option should be set for clusters with Kubernetes apiserver versions <1.16. }, }, @@ -555,7 +557,8 @@

Method Details

], "resourceOptions": { # ResourceOptions represent options for Kubernetes resource generation. # Optional. Options for Kubernetes resource generation. "connectVersion": "A String", # Optional. The Connect agent version to use for connect_resources. Defaults to the latest GKE Connect version. The version must be a currently supported version, obsolete versions will be rejected. - "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. + "k8sGitVersion": "A String", # Optional. Git version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to gate the Connect Agent migration to svc.id.goog on GDC-SO 1.33.100 patch and above. + "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major and minor version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. "v1beta1Crd": True or False, # Optional. Use `apiextensions/v1beta1` instead of `apiextensions/v1` for CustomResourceDefinition resources. This option should be set for clusters with Kubernetes apiserver versions <1.16. }, }, @@ -670,7 +673,8 @@

Method Details

], "resourceOptions": { # ResourceOptions represent options for Kubernetes resource generation. # Optional. Options for Kubernetes resource generation. "connectVersion": "A String", # Optional. The Connect agent version to use for connect_resources. Defaults to the latest GKE Connect version. The version must be a currently supported version, obsolete versions will be rejected. - "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. + "k8sGitVersion": "A String", # Optional. Git version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to gate the Connect Agent migration to svc.id.goog on GDC-SO 1.33.100 patch and above. + "k8sVersion": "A String", # Optional. Major and minor version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`. "v1beta1Crd": True or False, # Optional. Use `apiextensions/v1beta1` instead of `apiextensions/v1` for CustomResourceDefinition resources. This option should be set for clusters with Kubernetes apiserver versions <1.16. }, }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/gkehub_v2.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/gkehub_v2.projects.locations.html index a4cc212be32..f1d532f2942 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/gkehub_v2.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/gkehub_v2.projects.locations.html @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/gkehub_v2alpha.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/gkehub_v2alpha.projects.locations.html index 501400bb159..d39cb2b9c7b 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/gkehub_v2alpha.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/gkehub_v2alpha.projects.locations.html @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/gkehub_v2beta.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/gkehub_v2beta.projects.locations.html index fd1e06f6787..5517ca74425 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/gkehub_v2beta.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/gkehub_v2beta.projects.locations.html @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/gkeonprem_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/gkeonprem_v1.projects.locations.html index 77d2d02c1e9..014dc638032 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/gkeonprem_v1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/gkeonprem_v1.projects.locations.html @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/gkeonprem_v1.projects.locations.vmwareAdminClusters.html b/docs/dyn/gkeonprem_v1.projects.locations.vmwareAdminClusters.html index 8980d1ab4e4..5234dbdea6e 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/gkeonprem_v1.projects.locations.vmwareAdminClusters.html +++ b/docs/dyn/gkeonprem_v1.projects.locations.vmwareAdminClusters.html @@ -316,6 +316,10 @@

Method Details

"address": "A String", # The registry address. "caCert": "A String", # When the container runtime pulls an image from private registry, the registry must prove its identity by presenting a certificate. The registry's certificate is signed by a certificate authority (CA). The container runtime uses the CA's certificate to validate the registry's certificate. }, + "proxy": { # VmwareAdminProxy represents configuration for admin cluster proxy. # Configuration for proxy. + "noProxy": "A String", # A comma-separated list of IP addresses, IP address ranges, host names, and domain names that should not go through the proxy server. When Google Distributed Cloud sends a request to one of these addresses, hosts, or domains, the request is sent directly. + "url": "A String", # The HTTP address of proxy server. + }, "reconciling": True or False, # Output only. If set, there are currently changes in flight to the VMware admin cluster. "state": "A String", # Output only. The current state of VMware admin cluster. "status": { # ResourceStatus describes why a cluster or node pool has a certain status. (e.g., ERROR or DEGRADED). # Output only. ResourceStatus representing detailed cluster state. @@ -653,6 +657,10 @@

Method Details

"address": "A String", # The registry address. "caCert": "A String", # When the container runtime pulls an image from private registry, the registry must prove its identity by presenting a certificate. The registry's certificate is signed by a certificate authority (CA). The container runtime uses the CA's certificate to validate the registry's certificate. }, + "proxy": { # VmwareAdminProxy represents configuration for admin cluster proxy. # Configuration for proxy. + "noProxy": "A String", # A comma-separated list of IP addresses, IP address ranges, host names, and domain names that should not go through the proxy server. When Google Distributed Cloud sends a request to one of these addresses, hosts, or domains, the request is sent directly. + "url": "A String", # The HTTP address of proxy server. + }, "reconciling": True or False, # Output only. If set, there are currently changes in flight to the VMware admin cluster. "state": "A String", # Output only. The current state of VMware admin cluster. "status": { # ResourceStatus describes why a cluster or node pool has a certain status. (e.g., ERROR or DEGRADED). # Output only. ResourceStatus representing detailed cluster state. @@ -959,6 +967,10 @@

Method Details

"address": "A String", # The registry address. "caCert": "A String", # When the container runtime pulls an image from private registry, the registry must prove its identity by presenting a certificate. The registry's certificate is signed by a certificate authority (CA). The container runtime uses the CA's certificate to validate the registry's certificate. }, + "proxy": { # VmwareAdminProxy represents configuration for admin cluster proxy. # Configuration for proxy. + "noProxy": "A String", # A comma-separated list of IP addresses, IP address ranges, host names, and domain names that should not go through the proxy server. When Google Distributed Cloud sends a request to one of these addresses, hosts, or domains, the request is sent directly. + "url": "A String", # The HTTP address of proxy server. + }, "reconciling": True or False, # Output only. If set, there are currently changes in flight to the VMware admin cluster. "state": "A String", # Output only. The current state of VMware admin cluster. "status": { # ResourceStatus describes why a cluster or node pool has a certain status. (e.g., ERROR or DEGRADED). # Output only. ResourceStatus representing detailed cluster state. @@ -1227,6 +1239,10 @@

Method Details

"address": "A String", # The registry address. "caCert": "A String", # When the container runtime pulls an image from private registry, the registry must prove its identity by presenting a certificate. The registry's certificate is signed by a certificate authority (CA). The container runtime uses the CA's certificate to validate the registry's certificate. }, + "proxy": { # VmwareAdminProxy represents configuration for admin cluster proxy. # Configuration for proxy. + "noProxy": "A String", # A comma-separated list of IP addresses, IP address ranges, host names, and domain names that should not go through the proxy server. When Google Distributed Cloud sends a request to one of these addresses, hosts, or domains, the request is sent directly. + "url": "A String", # The HTTP address of proxy server. + }, "reconciling": True or False, # Output only. If set, there are currently changes in flight to the VMware admin cluster. "state": "A String", # Output only. The current state of VMware admin cluster. "status": { # ResourceStatus describes why a cluster or node pool has a certain status. (e.g., ERROR or DEGRADED). # Output only. ResourceStatus representing detailed cluster state. diff --git a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.html b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.html index a3c741e6c60..1f4805b29c9 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.html +++ b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.html @@ -139,10 +139,10 @@

Instance Methods

Gets the contents of a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard read interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#read), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#read), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#read), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#read)). Also supports the FHIR standard conditional read interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#cread), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#cread), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#cread), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#cread)) specified by supplying an `If-Modified-Since` header with a date/time value or an `If-None-Match` header with an ETag value. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `read`, see [Getting a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#getting_a_fhir_resource).

search(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` "next", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).

+

Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` "next", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).

search_type(parent, resourceType, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` "next", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).

+

Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` "next", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).

update(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

Updates the entire contents of a resource. Implements the FHIR standard update interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#update), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#update), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#update), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#update)). If the specified resource does not exist and the FHIR store has enable_update_create set, creates the resource with the client-specified ID. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud Audit Logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. The resource must contain an `id` element having an identical value to the ID in the REST path of the request. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The conditional update interaction If-None-Match is supported, including the wildcard behaviour, as defined by the R5 spec. This functionality is supported in R4 and R5. For samples that show how to call `update`, see [Updating a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#updating_a_fhir_resource).

@@ -768,7 +768,7 @@

Method Details

search(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None) -
Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` "next", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).
+  
Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` "next", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. Name of the FHIR store to retrieve resources from. (required)
@@ -800,7 +800,7 @@ 

Method Details

search_type(parent, resourceType, body=None, x__xgafv=None) -
Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` "next", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).
+  
Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` "next", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. Name of the FHIR store to retrieve resources from. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1.projects.locations.html
index fbb99c62d7a..5cce1e8c6c9 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1.projects.locations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1.projects.locations.html
@@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ 

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. A list of extra location types that should be used as conditions for controlling the visibility of the locations. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.dicomStores.html b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.dicomStores.html index 25adb3d80b1..560f8b25347 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.dicomStores.html +++ b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.dicomStores.html @@ -141,6 +141,9 @@

Instance Methods

testIamPermissions(resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource. If the resource does not exist, this will return an empty set of permissions, not a `NOT_FOUND` error. Note: This operation is designed to be used for building permission-aware UIs and command-line tools, not for authorization checking. This operation may "fail open" without warning.

+

+ updateInstances(parent, dicomWebPath, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

UpdateInstances updates DICOM instances associated with study instance unique identifiers (SUID).

Method Details

close() @@ -1098,4 +1101,43 @@

Method Details

}
+
+ updateInstances(parent, dicomWebPath, body=None, x__xgafv=None) +
UpdateInstances updates DICOM instances associated with study instance unique identifiers (SUID).
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The name of the DICOM store that is being accessed. For example, `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/dicomStores/{dicom_store_id}`. (required)
+  dicomWebPath: string, Required. The path of the UpdateInstances DICOMweb request. For example, `studies/[{study_uid}]`. Note that the `study_uid` is optional. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Message that represents an arbitrary HTTP body. It should only be used for payload formats that can't be represented as JSON, such as raw binary or an HTML page. This message can be used both in streaming and non-streaming API methods in the request as well as the response. It can be used as a top-level request field, which is convenient if one wants to extract parameters from either the URL or HTTP template into the request fields and also want access to the raw HTTP body. Example: message GetResourceRequest { // A unique request id. string request_id = 1; // The raw HTTP body is bound to this field. google.api.HttpBody http_body = 2; } service ResourceService { rpc GetResource(GetResourceRequest) returns (google.api.HttpBody); rpc UpdateResource(google.api.HttpBody) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } Example with streaming methods: service CaldavService { rpc GetCalendar(stream google.api.HttpBody) returns (stream google.api.HttpBody); rpc UpdateCalendar(stream google.api.HttpBody) returns (stream google.api.HttpBody); } Use of this type only changes how the request and response bodies are handled, all other features will continue to work unchanged.
+  "contentType": "A String", # The HTTP Content-Type header value specifying the content type of the body.
+  "data": "A String", # The HTTP request/response body as raw binary.
+  "extensions": [ # Application specific response metadata. Must be set in the first response for streaming APIs.
+    {
+      "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+    },
+  ],
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Message that represents an arbitrary HTTP body. It should only be used for payload formats that can't be represented as JSON, such as raw binary or an HTML page. This message can be used both in streaming and non-streaming API methods in the request as well as the response. It can be used as a top-level request field, which is convenient if one wants to extract parameters from either the URL or HTTP template into the request fields and also want access to the raw HTTP body. Example: message GetResourceRequest { // A unique request id. string request_id = 1; // The raw HTTP body is bound to this field. google.api.HttpBody http_body = 2; } service ResourceService { rpc GetResource(GetResourceRequest) returns (google.api.HttpBody); rpc UpdateResource(google.api.HttpBody) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } Example with streaming methods: service CaldavService { rpc GetCalendar(stream google.api.HttpBody) returns (stream google.api.HttpBody); rpc UpdateCalendar(stream google.api.HttpBody) returns (stream google.api.HttpBody); } Use of this type only changes how the request and response bodies are handled, all other features will continue to work unchanged.
+  "contentType": "A String", # The HTTP Content-Type header value specifying the content type of the body.
+  "data": "A String", # The HTTP request/response body as raw binary.
+  "extensions": [ # Application specific response metadata. Must be set in the first response for streaming APIs.
+    {
+      "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+    },
+  ],
+}
+
+ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.dicomStores.studies.html b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.dicomStores.studies.html index 22f6f03b840..ff8946c73be 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.dicomStores.studies.html +++ b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.dicomStores.studies.html @@ -100,6 +100,12 @@

Instance Methods

storeInstances(parent, dicomWebPath, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

StoreInstances stores DICOM instances associated with study instance unique identifiers (SUID). See [Store Transaction](http://dicom.nema.org/medical/dicom/current/output/html/part18.html#sect_10.5). For details on the implementation of StoreInstances, see [Store transaction](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/dicom#store_transaction) in the Cloud Healthcare API conformance statement. For samples that show how to call StoreInstances, see [Store DICOM data](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/dicomweb#store-dicom).

+

+ updateInstances(parent, dicomWebPath, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

UpdateInstances updates DICOM instances associated with study instance unique identifiers (SUID).

+

+ updateMetadata(parent, dicomWebPath, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

UpdateStudyMetadata modifies the metadata of all instances in the given study. The request body must contain a JSON Patch document specifying the updates to be applied to the metadata of all instances within the study.

Method Details

close() @@ -285,4 +291,92 @@

Method Details

}
+
+ updateInstances(parent, dicomWebPath, body=None, x__xgafv=None) +
UpdateInstances updates DICOM instances associated with study instance unique identifiers (SUID).
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The name of the DICOM store that is being accessed. For example, `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/dicomStores/{dicom_store_id}`. (required)
+  dicomWebPath: string, Required. The path of the UpdateInstances DICOMweb request. For example, `studies/[{study_uid}]`. Note that the `study_uid` is optional. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Message that represents an arbitrary HTTP body. It should only be used for payload formats that can't be represented as JSON, such as raw binary or an HTML page. This message can be used both in streaming and non-streaming API methods in the request as well as the response. It can be used as a top-level request field, which is convenient if one wants to extract parameters from either the URL or HTTP template into the request fields and also want access to the raw HTTP body. Example: message GetResourceRequest { // A unique request id. string request_id = 1; // The raw HTTP body is bound to this field. google.api.HttpBody http_body = 2; } service ResourceService { rpc GetResource(GetResourceRequest) returns (google.api.HttpBody); rpc UpdateResource(google.api.HttpBody) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } Example with streaming methods: service CaldavService { rpc GetCalendar(stream google.api.HttpBody) returns (stream google.api.HttpBody); rpc UpdateCalendar(stream google.api.HttpBody) returns (stream google.api.HttpBody); } Use of this type only changes how the request and response bodies are handled, all other features will continue to work unchanged.
+  "contentType": "A String", # The HTTP Content-Type header value specifying the content type of the body.
+  "data": "A String", # The HTTP request/response body as raw binary.
+  "extensions": [ # Application specific response metadata. Must be set in the first response for streaming APIs.
+    {
+      "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+    },
+  ],
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Message that represents an arbitrary HTTP body. It should only be used for payload formats that can't be represented as JSON, such as raw binary or an HTML page. This message can be used both in streaming and non-streaming API methods in the request as well as the response. It can be used as a top-level request field, which is convenient if one wants to extract parameters from either the URL or HTTP template into the request fields and also want access to the raw HTTP body. Example: message GetResourceRequest { // A unique request id. string request_id = 1; // The raw HTTP body is bound to this field. google.api.HttpBody http_body = 2; } service ResourceService { rpc GetResource(GetResourceRequest) returns (google.api.HttpBody); rpc UpdateResource(google.api.HttpBody) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } Example with streaming methods: service CaldavService { rpc GetCalendar(stream google.api.HttpBody) returns (stream google.api.HttpBody); rpc UpdateCalendar(stream google.api.HttpBody) returns (stream google.api.HttpBody); } Use of this type only changes how the request and response bodies are handled, all other features will continue to work unchanged.
+  "contentType": "A String", # The HTTP Content-Type header value specifying the content type of the body.
+  "data": "A String", # The HTTP request/response body as raw binary.
+  "extensions": [ # Application specific response metadata. Must be set in the first response for streaming APIs.
+    {
+      "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+    },
+  ],
+}
+
+ +
+ updateMetadata(parent, dicomWebPath, body=None, x__xgafv=None) +
UpdateStudyMetadata modifies the metadata of all instances in the given study. The request body must contain a JSON Patch document specifying the updates to be applied to the metadata of all instances within the study.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The name of the DICOM store that is being accessed (for example, `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/dicomStores/{dicom_store_id}`). (required)
+  dicomWebPath: string, Required. The path of the UpdateStudyMetadata request (for example, `studies/{study_uid}`). (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Message that represents an arbitrary HTTP body. It should only be used for payload formats that can't be represented as JSON, such as raw binary or an HTML page. This message can be used both in streaming and non-streaming API methods in the request as well as the response. It can be used as a top-level request field, which is convenient if one wants to extract parameters from either the URL or HTTP template into the request fields and also want access to the raw HTTP body. Example: message GetResourceRequest { // A unique request id. string request_id = 1; // The raw HTTP body is bound to this field. google.api.HttpBody http_body = 2; } service ResourceService { rpc GetResource(GetResourceRequest) returns (google.api.HttpBody); rpc UpdateResource(google.api.HttpBody) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } Example with streaming methods: service CaldavService { rpc GetCalendar(stream google.api.HttpBody) returns (stream google.api.HttpBody); rpc UpdateCalendar(stream google.api.HttpBody) returns (stream google.api.HttpBody); } Use of this type only changes how the request and response bodies are handled, all other features will continue to work unchanged.
+  "contentType": "A String", # The HTTP Content-Type header value specifying the content type of the body.
+  "data": "A String", # The HTTP request/response body as raw binary.
+  "extensions": [ # Application specific response metadata. Must be set in the first response for streaming APIs.
+    {
+      "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+    },
+  ],
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  "response": { # The normal, successful response of the operation. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}
+
+ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.dicomStores.studies.series.html b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.dicomStores.studies.series.html index 814be8616b1..c760a72baf1 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.dicomStores.studies.series.html +++ b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.dicomStores.studies.series.html @@ -94,6 +94,9 @@

Instance Methods

searchForInstances(parent, dicomWebPath, x__xgafv=None)

SearchForInstances returns a list of matching instances. See [RetrieveTransaction](http://dicom.nema.org/medical/dicom/current/output/html/part18.html#sect_10.4). For details on the implementation of SearchForInstances, see [Search transaction](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/dicom#search_transaction) in the Cloud Healthcare API conformance statement. For samples that show how to call SearchForInstances, see [Search for DICOM data](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/dicomweb#search-dicom).

+

+ updateMetadata(parent, dicomWebPath, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

UpdateSeriesMetadata modifies the metadata of all instances in the given series. The request body must contain a JSON Patch document specifying the updates to be applied to the metadata of all instances within the series.

Method Details

close() @@ -214,4 +217,53 @@

Method Details

}
+
+ updateMetadata(parent, dicomWebPath, body=None, x__xgafv=None) +
UpdateSeriesMetadata modifies the metadata of all instances in the given series. The request body must contain a JSON Patch document specifying the updates to be applied to the metadata of all instances within the series.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The name of the DICOM store that is being accessed (for example, `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/dicomStores/{dicom_store_id}`). (required)
+  dicomWebPath: string, Required. The path of the UpdateSeriesMetadata request (for example, `studies/{study_uid}/series/{series_uid}`). (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Message that represents an arbitrary HTTP body. It should only be used for payload formats that can't be represented as JSON, such as raw binary or an HTML page. This message can be used both in streaming and non-streaming API methods in the request as well as the response. It can be used as a top-level request field, which is convenient if one wants to extract parameters from either the URL or HTTP template into the request fields and also want access to the raw HTTP body. Example: message GetResourceRequest { // A unique request id. string request_id = 1; // The raw HTTP body is bound to this field. google.api.HttpBody http_body = 2; } service ResourceService { rpc GetResource(GetResourceRequest) returns (google.api.HttpBody); rpc UpdateResource(google.api.HttpBody) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } Example with streaming methods: service CaldavService { rpc GetCalendar(stream google.api.HttpBody) returns (stream google.api.HttpBody); rpc UpdateCalendar(stream google.api.HttpBody) returns (stream google.api.HttpBody); } Use of this type only changes how the request and response bodies are handled, all other features will continue to work unchanged.
+  "contentType": "A String", # The HTTP Content-Type header value specifying the content type of the body.
+  "data": "A String", # The HTTP request/response body as raw binary.
+  "extensions": [ # Application specific response metadata. Must be set in the first response for streaming APIs.
+    {
+      "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+    },
+  ],
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  "response": { # The normal, successful response of the operation. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}
+
+ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.dicomStores.studies.series.instances.html b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.dicomStores.studies.series.instances.html index bb7d0f9dfab..5bd329f43e6 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.dicomStores.studies.series.instances.html +++ b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.dicomStores.studies.series.instances.html @@ -99,6 +99,9 @@

Instance Methods

retrieveRendered(parent, dicomWebPath, viewport=None, x__xgafv=None)

RetrieveRenderedInstance returns instance associated with the given study, series, and SOP Instance UID in an acceptable Rendered Media Type. See [RetrieveTransaction](http://dicom.nema.org/medical/dicom/current/output/html/part18.html#sect_10.4). For details on the implementation of RetrieveRenderedInstance, see [Rendered resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/dicom#rendered_resources) in the Cloud Healthcare API conformance statement. For samples that show how to call RetrieveRenderedInstance, see [Retrieve consumer image formats](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/dicomweb#retrieve-consumer).

+

+ updateMetadata(parent, dicomWebPath, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

UpdateInstanceMetadata modifies the metadata of a single instance. The request body must contain a JSON Patch document specifying the updates to be applied to the metadata of the instance.

Method Details

close() @@ -203,4 +206,43 @@

Method Details

}
+
+ updateMetadata(parent, dicomWebPath, body=None, x__xgafv=None) +
UpdateInstanceMetadata modifies the metadata of a single instance. The request body must contain a JSON Patch document specifying the updates to be applied to the metadata of the instance.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The name of the DICOM store that is being accessed (for example, `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/dicomStores/{dicom_store_id}`). (required)
+  dicomWebPath: string, Required. The path of the UpdateInstanceMetadata request (for example, `studies/{study_uid}/series/{series_uid}/instances/{instance_uid}`). (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Message that represents an arbitrary HTTP body. It should only be used for payload formats that can't be represented as JSON, such as raw binary or an HTML page. This message can be used both in streaming and non-streaming API methods in the request as well as the response. It can be used as a top-level request field, which is convenient if one wants to extract parameters from either the URL or HTTP template into the request fields and also want access to the raw HTTP body. Example: message GetResourceRequest { // A unique request id. string request_id = 1; // The raw HTTP body is bound to this field. google.api.HttpBody http_body = 2; } service ResourceService { rpc GetResource(GetResourceRequest) returns (google.api.HttpBody); rpc UpdateResource(google.api.HttpBody) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } Example with streaming methods: service CaldavService { rpc GetCalendar(stream google.api.HttpBody) returns (stream google.api.HttpBody); rpc UpdateCalendar(stream google.api.HttpBody) returns (stream google.api.HttpBody); } Use of this type only changes how the request and response bodies are handled, all other features will continue to work unchanged.
+  "contentType": "A String", # The HTTP Content-Type header value specifying the content type of the body.
+  "data": "A String", # The HTTP request/response body as raw binary.
+  "extensions": [ # Application specific response metadata. Must be set in the first response for streaming APIs.
+    {
+      "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+    },
+  ],
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Message that represents an arbitrary HTTP body. It should only be used for payload formats that can't be represented as JSON, such as raw binary or an HTML page. This message can be used both in streaming and non-streaming API methods in the request as well as the response. It can be used as a top-level request field, which is convenient if one wants to extract parameters from either the URL or HTTP template into the request fields and also want access to the raw HTTP body. Example: message GetResourceRequest { // A unique request id. string request_id = 1; // The raw HTTP body is bound to this field. google.api.HttpBody http_body = 2; } service ResourceService { rpc GetResource(GetResourceRequest) returns (google.api.HttpBody); rpc UpdateResource(google.api.HttpBody) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } Example with streaming methods: service CaldavService { rpc GetCalendar(stream google.api.HttpBody) returns (stream google.api.HttpBody); rpc UpdateCalendar(stream google.api.HttpBody) returns (stream google.api.HttpBody); } Use of this type only changes how the request and response bodies are handled, all other features will continue to work unchanged.
+  "contentType": "A String", # The HTTP Content-Type header value specifying the content type of the body.
+  "data": "A String", # The HTTP request/response body as raw binary.
+  "extensions": [ # Application specific response metadata. Must be set in the first response for streaming APIs.
+    {
+      "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+    },
+  ],
+}
+
+ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.html b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.html index 4786ad01547..f006bbbf06a 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.html +++ b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.html @@ -154,10 +154,10 @@

Instance Methods

Gets the contents of a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard read interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#read), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#read), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#read)), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#read)). Also supports the FHIR standard conditional read interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#cread), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#cread), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#cread)), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#cread)) specified by supplying an `If-Modified-Since` header with a date/time value or an `If-None-Match` header with an ETag value. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `read`, see [Getting a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#getting_a_fhir_resource).

search(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` "next", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).

+

Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` "next", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).

search_type(parent, resourceType, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` "next", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).

+

Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` "next", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).

update(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

Updates the entire contents of a resource. Implements the FHIR standard update interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#update), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#update), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#update), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#update)). If the specified resource does not exist and the FHIR store has enable_update_create set, creates the resource with the client-specified ID. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud Audit Logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. The resource must contain an `id` element having an identical value to the ID in the REST path of the request. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The conditional update interaction If-None-Match is supported, including the wildcard behaviour, as defined by the R5 spec. This functionality is supported in R4 and R5. For samples that show how to call `update`, see [Updating a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#updating_a_fhir_resource).

@@ -926,7 +926,7 @@

Method Details

search(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None) -
Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` "next", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).
+  
Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` "next", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. Name of the FHIR store to retrieve resources from. (required)
@@ -958,7 +958,7 @@ 

Method Details

search_type(parent, resourceType, body=None, x__xgafv=None) -
Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` "next", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).
+  
Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` "next", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. Name of the FHIR store to retrieve resources from. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.html b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.html
index 4c95e43d4db..87292d7c742 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.html
@@ -358,7 +358,7 @@ 

Method Details

"defaultSearchHandlingStrict": True or False, # If true, overrides the default search behavior for this FHIR store to `handling=strict` which returns an error for unrecognized search parameters. If false, uses the FHIR specification default `handling=lenient` which ignores unrecognized search parameters. The handling can always be changed from the default on an individual API call by setting the HTTP header `Prefer: handling=strict` or `Prefer: handling=lenient`. Defaults to false. "disableReferentialIntegrity": True or False, # Immutable. Whether to disable referential integrity in this FHIR store. This field is immutable after FHIR store creation. The default value is false, meaning that the API enforces referential integrity and fails the requests that result in inconsistent state in the FHIR store. When this field is set to true, the API skips referential integrity checks. Consequently, operations that rely on references, such as GetPatientEverything, do not return all the results if broken references exist. "disableResourceVersioning": True or False, # Immutable. Whether to disable resource versioning for this FHIR store. This field can not be changed after the creation of FHIR store. If set to false, all write operations cause historical versions to be recorded automatically. The historical versions can be fetched through the history APIs, but cannot be updated. If set to true, no historical versions are kept. The server sends errors for attempts to read the historical versions. Defaults to false. - "enableHistoryModifications": True or False, # Optional. Whether to allow ExecuteBundle to accept history bundles, and directly insert and overwrite historical resource versions into the FHIR store. If set to false, using history bundles fails with an error. Defaults to false. + "enableHistoryModifications": True or False, # Optional. Whether to allow the [ImportResourcesHistory] and [ExecuteBundle] APIs to accept history bundles, and directly insert and overwrite historical resource versions into the FHIR store. Changing resource histories creates resource interactions that have occurred in the past which clients might not allow. If set to false, [ImportResourcesHistory] and [ExecuteBundle] requests will return errors. "enableUpdateCreate": True or False, # Whether this FHIR store has the [updateCreate capability](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/capabilitystatement-definitions.html#CapabilityStatement.rest.resource.updateCreate). This determines if the client can use an Update operation to create a new resource with a client-specified ID. If false, all IDs are server-assigned through the Create operation and attempts to update a non-existent resource return errors. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud audit logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. Defaults to false. "labels": { # User-supplied key-value pairs used to organize FHIR stores. Label keys must be between 1 and 63 characters long, have a UTF-8 encoding of maximum 128 bytes, and must conform to the following PCRE regular expression: \p{Ll}\p{Lo}{0,62} Label values are optional, must be between 1 and 63 characters long, have a UTF-8 encoding of maximum 128 bytes, and must conform to the following PCRE regular expression: [\p{Ll}\p{Lo}\p{N}_-]{0,63} No more than 64 labels can be associated with a given store. "a_key": "A String", @@ -647,7 +647,7 @@

Method Details

"defaultSearchHandlingStrict": True or False, # If true, overrides the default search behavior for this FHIR store to `handling=strict` which returns an error for unrecognized search parameters. If false, uses the FHIR specification default `handling=lenient` which ignores unrecognized search parameters. The handling can always be changed from the default on an individual API call by setting the HTTP header `Prefer: handling=strict` or `Prefer: handling=lenient`. Defaults to false. "disableReferentialIntegrity": True or False, # Immutable. Whether to disable referential integrity in this FHIR store. This field is immutable after FHIR store creation. The default value is false, meaning that the API enforces referential integrity and fails the requests that result in inconsistent state in the FHIR store. When this field is set to true, the API skips referential integrity checks. Consequently, operations that rely on references, such as GetPatientEverything, do not return all the results if broken references exist. "disableResourceVersioning": True or False, # Immutable. Whether to disable resource versioning for this FHIR store. This field can not be changed after the creation of FHIR store. If set to false, all write operations cause historical versions to be recorded automatically. The historical versions can be fetched through the history APIs, but cannot be updated. If set to true, no historical versions are kept. The server sends errors for attempts to read the historical versions. Defaults to false. - "enableHistoryModifications": True or False, # Optional. Whether to allow ExecuteBundle to accept history bundles, and directly insert and overwrite historical resource versions into the FHIR store. If set to false, using history bundles fails with an error. Defaults to false. + "enableHistoryModifications": True or False, # Optional. Whether to allow the [ImportResourcesHistory] and [ExecuteBundle] APIs to accept history bundles, and directly insert and overwrite historical resource versions into the FHIR store. Changing resource histories creates resource interactions that have occurred in the past which clients might not allow. If set to false, [ImportResourcesHistory] and [ExecuteBundle] requests will return errors. "enableUpdateCreate": True or False, # Whether this FHIR store has the [updateCreate capability](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/capabilitystatement-definitions.html#CapabilityStatement.rest.resource.updateCreate). This determines if the client can use an Update operation to create a new resource with a client-specified ID. If false, all IDs are server-assigned through the Create operation and attempts to update a non-existent resource return errors. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud audit logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. Defaults to false. "labels": { # User-supplied key-value pairs used to organize FHIR stores. Label keys must be between 1 and 63 characters long, have a UTF-8 encoding of maximum 128 bytes, and must conform to the following PCRE regular expression: \p{Ll}\p{Lo}{0,62} Label values are optional, must be between 1 and 63 characters long, have a UTF-8 encoding of maximum 128 bytes, and must conform to the following PCRE regular expression: [\p{Ll}\p{Lo}\p{N}_-]{0,63} No more than 64 labels can be associated with a given store. "a_key": "A String", @@ -1370,7 +1370,7 @@

Method Details

"defaultSearchHandlingStrict": True or False, # If true, overrides the default search behavior for this FHIR store to `handling=strict` which returns an error for unrecognized search parameters. If false, uses the FHIR specification default `handling=lenient` which ignores unrecognized search parameters. The handling can always be changed from the default on an individual API call by setting the HTTP header `Prefer: handling=strict` or `Prefer: handling=lenient`. Defaults to false. "disableReferentialIntegrity": True or False, # Immutable. Whether to disable referential integrity in this FHIR store. This field is immutable after FHIR store creation. The default value is false, meaning that the API enforces referential integrity and fails the requests that result in inconsistent state in the FHIR store. When this field is set to true, the API skips referential integrity checks. Consequently, operations that rely on references, such as GetPatientEverything, do not return all the results if broken references exist. "disableResourceVersioning": True or False, # Immutable. Whether to disable resource versioning for this FHIR store. This field can not be changed after the creation of FHIR store. If set to false, all write operations cause historical versions to be recorded automatically. The historical versions can be fetched through the history APIs, but cannot be updated. If set to true, no historical versions are kept. The server sends errors for attempts to read the historical versions. Defaults to false. - "enableHistoryModifications": True or False, # Optional. Whether to allow ExecuteBundle to accept history bundles, and directly insert and overwrite historical resource versions into the FHIR store. If set to false, using history bundles fails with an error. Defaults to false. + "enableHistoryModifications": True or False, # Optional. Whether to allow the [ImportResourcesHistory] and [ExecuteBundle] APIs to accept history bundles, and directly insert and overwrite historical resource versions into the FHIR store. Changing resource histories creates resource interactions that have occurred in the past which clients might not allow. If set to false, [ImportResourcesHistory] and [ExecuteBundle] requests will return errors. "enableUpdateCreate": True or False, # Whether this FHIR store has the [updateCreate capability](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/capabilitystatement-definitions.html#CapabilityStatement.rest.resource.updateCreate). This determines if the client can use an Update operation to create a new resource with a client-specified ID. If false, all IDs are server-assigned through the Create operation and attempts to update a non-existent resource return errors. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud audit logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. Defaults to false. "labels": { # User-supplied key-value pairs used to organize FHIR stores. Label keys must be between 1 and 63 characters long, have a UTF-8 encoding of maximum 128 bytes, and must conform to the following PCRE regular expression: \p{Ll}\p{Lo}{0,62} Label values are optional, must be between 1 and 63 characters long, have a UTF-8 encoding of maximum 128 bytes, and must conform to the following PCRE regular expression: [\p{Ll}\p{Lo}\p{N}_-]{0,63} No more than 64 labels can be associated with a given store. "a_key": "A String", @@ -1835,7 +1835,7 @@

Method Details

"defaultSearchHandlingStrict": True or False, # If true, overrides the default search behavior for this FHIR store to `handling=strict` which returns an error for unrecognized search parameters. If false, uses the FHIR specification default `handling=lenient` which ignores unrecognized search parameters. The handling can always be changed from the default on an individual API call by setting the HTTP header `Prefer: handling=strict` or `Prefer: handling=lenient`. Defaults to false. "disableReferentialIntegrity": True or False, # Immutable. Whether to disable referential integrity in this FHIR store. This field is immutable after FHIR store creation. The default value is false, meaning that the API enforces referential integrity and fails the requests that result in inconsistent state in the FHIR store. When this field is set to true, the API skips referential integrity checks. Consequently, operations that rely on references, such as GetPatientEverything, do not return all the results if broken references exist. "disableResourceVersioning": True or False, # Immutable. Whether to disable resource versioning for this FHIR store. This field can not be changed after the creation of FHIR store. If set to false, all write operations cause historical versions to be recorded automatically. The historical versions can be fetched through the history APIs, but cannot be updated. If set to true, no historical versions are kept. The server sends errors for attempts to read the historical versions. Defaults to false. - "enableHistoryModifications": True or False, # Optional. Whether to allow ExecuteBundle to accept history bundles, and directly insert and overwrite historical resource versions into the FHIR store. If set to false, using history bundles fails with an error. Defaults to false. + "enableHistoryModifications": True or False, # Optional. Whether to allow the [ImportResourcesHistory] and [ExecuteBundle] APIs to accept history bundles, and directly insert and overwrite historical resource versions into the FHIR store. Changing resource histories creates resource interactions that have occurred in the past which clients might not allow. If set to false, [ImportResourcesHistory] and [ExecuteBundle] requests will return errors. "enableUpdateCreate": True or False, # Whether this FHIR store has the [updateCreate capability](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/capabilitystatement-definitions.html#CapabilityStatement.rest.resource.updateCreate). This determines if the client can use an Update operation to create a new resource with a client-specified ID. If false, all IDs are server-assigned through the Create operation and attempts to update a non-existent resource return errors. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud audit logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. Defaults to false. "labels": { # User-supplied key-value pairs used to organize FHIR stores. Label keys must be between 1 and 63 characters long, have a UTF-8 encoding of maximum 128 bytes, and must conform to the following PCRE regular expression: \p{Ll}\p{Lo}{0,62} Label values are optional, must be between 1 and 63 characters long, have a UTF-8 encoding of maximum 128 bytes, and must conform to the following PCRE regular expression: [\p{Ll}\p{Lo}\p{N}_-]{0,63} No more than 64 labels can be associated with a given store. "a_key": "A String", @@ -2142,7 +2142,7 @@

Method Details

"defaultSearchHandlingStrict": True or False, # If true, overrides the default search behavior for this FHIR store to `handling=strict` which returns an error for unrecognized search parameters. If false, uses the FHIR specification default `handling=lenient` which ignores unrecognized search parameters. The handling can always be changed from the default on an individual API call by setting the HTTP header `Prefer: handling=strict` or `Prefer: handling=lenient`. Defaults to false. "disableReferentialIntegrity": True or False, # Immutable. Whether to disable referential integrity in this FHIR store. This field is immutable after FHIR store creation. The default value is false, meaning that the API enforces referential integrity and fails the requests that result in inconsistent state in the FHIR store. When this field is set to true, the API skips referential integrity checks. Consequently, operations that rely on references, such as GetPatientEverything, do not return all the results if broken references exist. "disableResourceVersioning": True or False, # Immutable. Whether to disable resource versioning for this FHIR store. This field can not be changed after the creation of FHIR store. If set to false, all write operations cause historical versions to be recorded automatically. The historical versions can be fetched through the history APIs, but cannot be updated. If set to true, no historical versions are kept. The server sends errors for attempts to read the historical versions. Defaults to false. - "enableHistoryModifications": True or False, # Optional. Whether to allow ExecuteBundle to accept history bundles, and directly insert and overwrite historical resource versions into the FHIR store. If set to false, using history bundles fails with an error. Defaults to false. + "enableHistoryModifications": True or False, # Optional. Whether to allow the [ImportResourcesHistory] and [ExecuteBundle] APIs to accept history bundles, and directly insert and overwrite historical resource versions into the FHIR store. Changing resource histories creates resource interactions that have occurred in the past which clients might not allow. If set to false, [ImportResourcesHistory] and [ExecuteBundle] requests will return errors. "enableUpdateCreate": True or False, # Whether this FHIR store has the [updateCreate capability](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/capabilitystatement-definitions.html#CapabilityStatement.rest.resource.updateCreate). This determines if the client can use an Update operation to create a new resource with a client-specified ID. If false, all IDs are server-assigned through the Create operation and attempts to update a non-existent resource return errors. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud audit logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. Defaults to false. "labels": { # User-supplied key-value pairs used to organize FHIR stores. Label keys must be between 1 and 63 characters long, have a UTF-8 encoding of maximum 128 bytes, and must conform to the following PCRE regular expression: \p{Ll}\p{Lo}{0,62} Label values are optional, must be between 1 and 63 characters long, have a UTF-8 encoding of maximum 128 bytes, and must conform to the following PCRE regular expression: [\p{Ll}\p{Lo}\p{N}_-]{0,63} No more than 64 labels can be associated with a given store. "a_key": "A String", @@ -2431,7 +2431,7 @@

Method Details

"defaultSearchHandlingStrict": True or False, # If true, overrides the default search behavior for this FHIR store to `handling=strict` which returns an error for unrecognized search parameters. If false, uses the FHIR specification default `handling=lenient` which ignores unrecognized search parameters. The handling can always be changed from the default on an individual API call by setting the HTTP header `Prefer: handling=strict` or `Prefer: handling=lenient`. Defaults to false. "disableReferentialIntegrity": True or False, # Immutable. Whether to disable referential integrity in this FHIR store. This field is immutable after FHIR store creation. The default value is false, meaning that the API enforces referential integrity and fails the requests that result in inconsistent state in the FHIR store. When this field is set to true, the API skips referential integrity checks. Consequently, operations that rely on references, such as GetPatientEverything, do not return all the results if broken references exist. "disableResourceVersioning": True or False, # Immutable. Whether to disable resource versioning for this FHIR store. This field can not be changed after the creation of FHIR store. If set to false, all write operations cause historical versions to be recorded automatically. The historical versions can be fetched through the history APIs, but cannot be updated. If set to true, no historical versions are kept. The server sends errors for attempts to read the historical versions. Defaults to false. - "enableHistoryModifications": True or False, # Optional. Whether to allow ExecuteBundle to accept history bundles, and directly insert and overwrite historical resource versions into the FHIR store. If set to false, using history bundles fails with an error. Defaults to false. + "enableHistoryModifications": True or False, # Optional. Whether to allow the [ImportResourcesHistory] and [ExecuteBundle] APIs to accept history bundles, and directly insert and overwrite historical resource versions into the FHIR store. Changing resource histories creates resource interactions that have occurred in the past which clients might not allow. If set to false, [ImportResourcesHistory] and [ExecuteBundle] requests will return errors. "enableUpdateCreate": True or False, # Whether this FHIR store has the [updateCreate capability](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/capabilitystatement-definitions.html#CapabilityStatement.rest.resource.updateCreate). This determines if the client can use an Update operation to create a new resource with a client-specified ID. If false, all IDs are server-assigned through the Create operation and attempts to update a non-existent resource return errors. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud audit logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. Defaults to false. "labels": { # User-supplied key-value pairs used to organize FHIR stores. Label keys must be between 1 and 63 characters long, have a UTF-8 encoding of maximum 128 bytes, and must conform to the following PCRE regular expression: \p{Ll}\p{Lo}{0,62} Label values are optional, must be between 1 and 63 characters long, have a UTF-8 encoding of maximum 128 bytes, and must conform to the following PCRE regular expression: [\p{Ll}\p{Lo}\p{N}_-]{0,63} No more than 64 labels can be associated with a given store. "a_key": "A String", diff --git a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.html index e905544c372..ac8a95b7f19 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.html @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. A list of extra location types that should be used as conditions for controlling the visibility of the locations. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/iam_v1.locations.workforcePools.providers.html b/docs/dyn/iam_v1.locations.workforcePools.providers.html index 0cf1e34de28..dc4808d9291 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/iam_v1.locations.workforcePools.providers.html +++ b/docs/dyn/iam_v1.locations.workforcePools.providers.html @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@

Method Details

"detailedAuditLogging": True or False, # Optional. If true, populates additional debug information in Cloud Audit Logs for this provider. Logged attribute mappings and values can be found in `sts.googleapis.com` data access logs. Default value is false. "disabled": True or False, # Optional. Disables the workforce pool provider. You cannot use a disabled provider to exchange tokens. However, existing tokens still grant access. "displayName": "A String", # Optional. A user-specified display name for the provider. Cannot exceed 32 characters. - "expireTime": "A String", # Output only. Time after which the workload pool provider will be permanently purged and cannot be recovered. + "expireTime": "A String", # Output only. Time after which the workforce identity pool provider will be permanently purged and cannot be recovered. "extendedAttributesOauth2Client": { # Represents the OAuth 2.0 client credential configuration for retrieving additional user attributes that are not present in the initial authentication credentials from the identity provider, e.g. groups. See https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc6749#section-4.4 for more details on client credentials grant flow. # Optional. The configuration for OAuth 2.0 client used to get the extended group memberships for user identities. Only the `AZURE_AD_GROUPS_ID` attribute type is supported. Extended groups supports a subset of Google Cloud services. When the user accesses these services, extended group memberships override the mapped `google.groups` attribute. Extended group memberships cannot be used in attribute mapping or attribute condition expressions. To keep extended group memberships up to date, extended groups are retrieved when the user signs in and at regular intervals during the user's active session. Each user identity in the workforce identity pool must map to a unique Microsoft Entra ID user. "attributesType": "A String", # Required. Represents the IdP and type of claims that should be fetched. "clientId": "A String", # Required. The OAuth 2.0 client ID for retrieving extra attributes from the identity provider. Required to get the Access Token using client credentials grant flow. @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@

Method Details

"detailedAuditLogging": True or False, # Optional. If true, populates additional debug information in Cloud Audit Logs for this provider. Logged attribute mappings and values can be found in `sts.googleapis.com` data access logs. Default value is false. "disabled": True or False, # Optional. Disables the workforce pool provider. You cannot use a disabled provider to exchange tokens. However, existing tokens still grant access. "displayName": "A String", # Optional. A user-specified display name for the provider. Cannot exceed 32 characters. - "expireTime": "A String", # Output only. Time after which the workload pool provider will be permanently purged and cannot be recovered. + "expireTime": "A String", # Output only. Time after which the workforce identity pool provider will be permanently purged and cannot be recovered. "extendedAttributesOauth2Client": { # Represents the OAuth 2.0 client credential configuration for retrieving additional user attributes that are not present in the initial authentication credentials from the identity provider, e.g. groups. See https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc6749#section-4.4 for more details on client credentials grant flow. # Optional. The configuration for OAuth 2.0 client used to get the extended group memberships for user identities. Only the `AZURE_AD_GROUPS_ID` attribute type is supported. Extended groups supports a subset of Google Cloud services. When the user accesses these services, extended group memberships override the mapped `google.groups` attribute. Extended group memberships cannot be used in attribute mapping or attribute condition expressions. To keep extended group memberships up to date, extended groups are retrieved when the user signs in and at regular intervals during the user's active session. Each user identity in the workforce identity pool must map to a unique Microsoft Entra ID user. "attributesType": "A String", # Required. Represents the IdP and type of claims that should be fetched. "clientId": "A String", # Required. The OAuth 2.0 client ID for retrieving extra attributes from the identity provider. Required to get the Access Token using client credentials grant flow. @@ -363,7 +363,7 @@

Method Details

"detailedAuditLogging": True or False, # Optional. If true, populates additional debug information in Cloud Audit Logs for this provider. Logged attribute mappings and values can be found in `sts.googleapis.com` data access logs. Default value is false. "disabled": True or False, # Optional. Disables the workforce pool provider. You cannot use a disabled provider to exchange tokens. However, existing tokens still grant access. "displayName": "A String", # Optional. A user-specified display name for the provider. Cannot exceed 32 characters. - "expireTime": "A String", # Output only. Time after which the workload pool provider will be permanently purged and cannot be recovered. + "expireTime": "A String", # Output only. Time after which the workforce identity pool provider will be permanently purged and cannot be recovered. "extendedAttributesOauth2Client": { # Represents the OAuth 2.0 client credential configuration for retrieving additional user attributes that are not present in the initial authentication credentials from the identity provider, e.g. groups. See https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc6749#section-4.4 for more details on client credentials grant flow. # Optional. The configuration for OAuth 2.0 client used to get the extended group memberships for user identities. Only the `AZURE_AD_GROUPS_ID` attribute type is supported. Extended groups supports a subset of Google Cloud services. When the user accesses these services, extended group memberships override the mapped `google.groups` attribute. Extended group memberships cannot be used in attribute mapping or attribute condition expressions. To keep extended group memberships up to date, extended groups are retrieved when the user signs in and at regular intervals during the user's active session. Each user identity in the workforce identity pool must map to a unique Microsoft Entra ID user. "attributesType": "A String", # Required. Represents the IdP and type of claims that should be fetched. "clientId": "A String", # Required. The OAuth 2.0 client ID for retrieving extra attributes from the identity provider. Required to get the Access Token using client credentials grant flow. @@ -452,7 +452,7 @@

Method Details

"detailedAuditLogging": True or False, # Optional. If true, populates additional debug information in Cloud Audit Logs for this provider. Logged attribute mappings and values can be found in `sts.googleapis.com` data access logs. Default value is false. "disabled": True or False, # Optional. Disables the workforce pool provider. You cannot use a disabled provider to exchange tokens. However, existing tokens still grant access. "displayName": "A String", # Optional. A user-specified display name for the provider. Cannot exceed 32 characters. - "expireTime": "A String", # Output only. Time after which the workload pool provider will be permanently purged and cannot be recovered. + "expireTime": "A String", # Output only. Time after which the workforce identity pool provider will be permanently purged and cannot be recovered. "extendedAttributesOauth2Client": { # Represents the OAuth 2.0 client credential configuration for retrieving additional user attributes that are not present in the initial authentication credentials from the identity provider, e.g. groups. See https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc6749#section-4.4 for more details on client credentials grant flow. # Optional. The configuration for OAuth 2.0 client used to get the extended group memberships for user identities. Only the `AZURE_AD_GROUPS_ID` attribute type is supported. Extended groups supports a subset of Google Cloud services. When the user accesses these services, extended group memberships override the mapped `google.groups` attribute. Extended group memberships cannot be used in attribute mapping or attribute condition expressions. To keep extended group memberships up to date, extended groups are retrieved when the user signs in and at regular intervals during the user's active session. Each user identity in the workforce identity pool must map to a unique Microsoft Entra ID user. "attributesType": "A String", # Required. Represents the IdP and type of claims that should be fetched. "clientId": "A String", # Required. The OAuth 2.0 client ID for retrieving extra attributes from the identity provider. Required to get the Access Token using client credentials grant flow. diff --git a/docs/dyn/index.md b/docs/dyn/index.md index 929ad9ac558..e25dfecbacb 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/index.md +++ b/docs/dyn/index.md @@ -225,7 +225,6 @@ ## blogger -* [v2](http://googleapis.github.io/google-api-python-client/docs/dyn/blogger_v2.html) * [v3](http://googleapis.github.io/google-api-python-client/docs/dyn/blogger_v3.html) @@ -295,6 +294,10 @@ * [v1](http://googleapis.github.io/google-api-python-client/docs/dyn/cloudchannel_v1.html) +## cloudcommerceprocurement +* [v1](http://googleapis.github.io/google-api-python-client/docs/dyn/cloudcommerceprocurement_v1.html) + + ## cloudcontrolspartner * [v1](http://googleapis.github.io/google-api-python-client/docs/dyn/cloudcontrolspartner_v1.html) * [v1beta](http://googleapis.github.io/google-api-python-client/docs/dyn/cloudcontrolspartner_v1beta.html) @@ -325,6 +328,7 @@ ## cloudlocationfinder +* [v1](http://googleapis.github.io/google-api-python-client/docs/dyn/cloudlocationfinder_v1.html) * [v1alpha](http://googleapis.github.io/google-api-python-client/docs/dyn/cloudlocationfinder_v1alpha.html) diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.locations.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.locations.html index 8720b33e934..9d06fd05ae1 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.locations.html @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like "displayName=tokyo", and is documented in more detail in AIP-160 (https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the next_page_token field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.locations.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.locations.html index 6031f0f4ddf..b3ae3373533 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.locations.html @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like "displayName=tokyo", and is documented in more detail in AIP-160 (https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the next_page_token field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.locations.logScopes.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.locations.logScopes.html index 03fb5fd88a7..cd74477113b 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.locations.logScopes.html +++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.locations.logScopes.html @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@

Method Details

Creates a log scope.
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. The parent project in which to create the log scope "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/global" (required)
+  parent: string, Required. The parent resource in which to create the log scope: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/global" (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ 

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the log scope. "description": "A String", # Optional. Describes this log scope.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters. "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the log scope.Log scopes are only available in the global location. For example:projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope - "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources: projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. + "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources (organizations and folders are not supported.): projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. "A String", ], "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the log scope. @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the log scope. "description": "A String", # Optional. Describes this log scope.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters. "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the log scope.Log scopes are only available in the global location. For example:projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope - "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources: projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. + "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources (organizations and folders are not supported.): projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. "A String", ], "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the log scope. @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@

Method Details

Deletes a log scope.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. The resource name of the log scope to delete: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/logScopes/[LOG_SCOPE_ID]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope" (required)
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the log scope to delete: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope" (required)
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ 

Method Details

Gets a log scope.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. The resource name of the log scope: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/logScopes/[LOG_SCOPE_ID]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope" (required)
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the log scope: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope" (required)
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ 

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the log scope. "description": "A String", # Optional. Describes this log scope.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters. "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the log scope.Log scopes are only available in the global location. For example:projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope - "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources: projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. + "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources (organizations and folders are not supported.): projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. "A String", ], "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the log scope. @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the log scope. "description": "A String", # Optional. Describes this log scope.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters. "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the log scope.Log scopes are only available in the global location. For example:projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope - "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources: projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. + "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources (organizations and folders are not supported.): projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. "A String", ], "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the log scope. @@ -242,7 +242,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the log scope. "description": "A String", # Optional. Describes this log scope.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters. "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the log scope.Log scopes are only available in the global location. For example:projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope - "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources: projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. + "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources (organizations and folders are not supported.): projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. "A String", ], "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the log scope. @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the log scope. "description": "A String", # Optional. Describes this log scope.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters. "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the log scope.Log scopes are only available in the global location. For example:projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope - "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources: projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. + "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources (organizations and folders are not supported.): projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. "A String", ], "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the log scope. diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.locations.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.locations.html index 8568f46e0dc..8f61fed6594 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.locations.html @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like "displayName=tokyo", and is documented in more detail in AIP-160 (https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the next_page_token field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.locations.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.locations.html index c4b844eb181..28d74de869c 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.locations.html @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like "displayName=tokyo", and is documented in more detail in AIP-160 (https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the next_page_token field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.locations.logScopes.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.locations.logScopes.html index 11d8b125ba0..86c996389d0 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.locations.logScopes.html +++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.locations.logScopes.html @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@

Method Details

Creates a log scope.
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. The parent project in which to create the log scope "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/global" (required)
+  parent: string, Required. The parent resource in which to create the log scope: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/global" (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ 

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the log scope. "description": "A String", # Optional. Describes this log scope.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters. "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the log scope.Log scopes are only available in the global location. For example:projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope - "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources: projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. + "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources (organizations and folders are not supported.): projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. "A String", ], "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the log scope. @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the log scope. "description": "A String", # Optional. Describes this log scope.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters. "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the log scope.Log scopes are only available in the global location. For example:projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope - "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources: projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. + "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources (organizations and folders are not supported.): projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. "A String", ], "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the log scope. @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@

Method Details

Deletes a log scope.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. The resource name of the log scope to delete: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/logScopes/[LOG_SCOPE_ID]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope" (required)
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the log scope to delete: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope" (required)
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ 

Method Details

Gets a log scope.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. The resource name of the log scope: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/logScopes/[LOG_SCOPE_ID]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope" (required)
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the log scope: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope" (required)
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ 

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the log scope. "description": "A String", # Optional. Describes this log scope.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters. "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the log scope.Log scopes are only available in the global location. For example:projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope - "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources: projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. + "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources (organizations and folders are not supported.): projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. "A String", ], "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the log scope. @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the log scope. "description": "A String", # Optional. Describes this log scope.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters. "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the log scope.Log scopes are only available in the global location. For example:projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope - "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources: projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. + "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources (organizations and folders are not supported.): projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. "A String", ], "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the log scope. @@ -242,7 +242,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the log scope. "description": "A String", # Optional. Describes this log scope.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters. "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the log scope.Log scopes are only available in the global location. For example:projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope - "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources: projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. + "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources (organizations and folders are not supported.): projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. "A String", ], "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the log scope. @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the log scope. "description": "A String", # Optional. Describes this log scope.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters. "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the log scope.Log scopes are only available in the global location. For example:projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope - "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources: projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. + "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources (organizations and folders are not supported.): projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. "A String", ], "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the log scope. diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.locations.html index bd94d14c646..e7a61ad12aa 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.locations.html @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like "displayName=tokyo", and is documented in more detail in AIP-160 (https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the next_page_token field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.locations.logScopes.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.locations.logScopes.html index 77f80e35315..1fdc7fa5669 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.locations.logScopes.html +++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.locations.logScopes.html @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@

Method Details

Creates a log scope.
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. The parent project in which to create the log scope "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/global" (required)
+  parent: string, Required. The parent resource in which to create the log scope: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/global" (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ 

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the log scope. "description": "A String", # Optional. Describes this log scope.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters. "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the log scope.Log scopes are only available in the global location. For example:projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope - "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources: projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. + "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources (organizations and folders are not supported.): projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. "A String", ], "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the log scope. @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the log scope. "description": "A String", # Optional. Describes this log scope.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters. "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the log scope.Log scopes are only available in the global location. For example:projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope - "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources: projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. + "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources (organizations and folders are not supported.): projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. "A String", ], "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the log scope. @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@

Method Details

Deletes a log scope.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. The resource name of the log scope to delete: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/logScopes/[LOG_SCOPE_ID]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope" (required)
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the log scope to delete: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope" (required)
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ 

Method Details

Gets a log scope.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. The resource name of the log scope: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/logScopes/[LOG_SCOPE_ID]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope" (required)
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the log scope: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]" For example:"projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope" (required)
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ 

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the log scope. "description": "A String", # Optional. Describes this log scope.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters. "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the log scope.Log scopes are only available in the global location. For example:projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope - "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources: projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. + "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources (organizations and folders are not supported.): projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. "A String", ], "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the log scope. @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the log scope. "description": "A String", # Optional. Describes this log scope.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters. "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the log scope.Log scopes are only available in the global location. For example:projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope - "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources: projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. + "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources (organizations and folders are not supported.): projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. "A String", ], "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the log scope. @@ -242,7 +242,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the log scope. "description": "A String", # Optional. Describes this log scope.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters. "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the log scope.Log scopes are only available in the global location. For example:projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope - "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources: projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. + "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources (organizations and folders are not supported.): projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. "A String", ], "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the log scope. @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the log scope. "description": "A String", # Optional. Describes this log scope.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters. "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the log scope.Log scopes are only available in the global location. For example:projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope - "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources: projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. + "resourceNames": [ # Required. Names of one or more parent resources (organizations and folders are not supported.): projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total. "A String", ], "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the log scope. diff --git a/docs/dyn/managedkafka_v1.projects.locations.clusters.html b/docs/dyn/managedkafka_v1.projects.locations.clusters.html index 4d361a98c17..7f45536ab70 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/managedkafka_v1.projects.locations.clusters.html +++ b/docs/dyn/managedkafka_v1.projects.locations.clusters.html @@ -161,6 +161,9 @@

Method Details

], }, }, + "updateOptions": { # UpdateOptions specifies options that influence how a cluster update is applied. These options control the behavior of the update process, rather than defining the desired end-state of a cluster. # Optional. UpdateOptions represents options that control how updates to the cluster are applied. + "allowBrokerDownscaleOnClusterUpscale": True or False, # Optional. If true, allows an update operation that increases the total vCPU and/or memory allocation of the cluster to significantly decrease the per-broker vCPU and/or memory allocation. This can result in reduced performance and availability. By default, the update operation will fail if an upscale request results in a vCPU or memory allocation for the brokers that is smaller than 90% of the current broker size. + }, "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the cluster was last updated. } @@ -281,6 +284,9 @@

Method Details

], }, }, + "updateOptions": { # UpdateOptions specifies options that influence how a cluster update is applied. These options control the behavior of the update process, rather than defining the desired end-state of a cluster. # Optional. UpdateOptions represents options that control how updates to the cluster are applied. + "allowBrokerDownscaleOnClusterUpscale": True or False, # Optional. If true, allows an update operation that increases the total vCPU and/or memory allocation of the cluster to significantly decrease the per-broker vCPU and/or memory allocation. This can result in reduced performance and availability. By default, the update operation will fail if an upscale request results in a vCPU or memory allocation for the brokers that is smaller than 90% of the current broker size. + }, "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the cluster was last updated. }
@@ -341,6 +347,9 @@

Method Details

], }, }, + "updateOptions": { # UpdateOptions specifies options that influence how a cluster update is applied. These options control the behavior of the update process, rather than defining the desired end-state of a cluster. # Optional. UpdateOptions represents options that control how updates to the cluster are applied. + "allowBrokerDownscaleOnClusterUpscale": True or False, # Optional. If true, allows an update operation that increases the total vCPU and/or memory allocation of the cluster to significantly decrease the per-broker vCPU and/or memory allocation. This can result in reduced performance and availability. By default, the update operation will fail if an upscale request results in a vCPU or memory allocation for the brokers that is smaller than 90% of the current broker size. + }, "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the cluster was last updated. }, ], @@ -410,6 +419,9 @@

Method Details

], }, }, + "updateOptions": { # UpdateOptions specifies options that influence how a cluster update is applied. These options control the behavior of the update process, rather than defining the desired end-state of a cluster. # Optional. UpdateOptions represents options that control how updates to the cluster are applied. + "allowBrokerDownscaleOnClusterUpscale": True or False, # Optional. If true, allows an update operation that increases the total vCPU and/or memory allocation of the cluster to significantly decrease the per-broker vCPU and/or memory allocation. This can result in reduced performance and availability. By default, the update operation will fail if an upscale request results in a vCPU or memory allocation for the brokers that is smaller than 90% of the current broker size. + }, "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the cluster was last updated. } diff --git a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1.accounts.html b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1.accounts.html index 83bd78fd6d3..339672d177d 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1.accounts.html +++ b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1.accounts.html @@ -176,6 +176,9 @@

Instance Methods

get(name, x__xgafv=None)

Retrieves an account from your Merchant Center account. After inserting, updating, or deleting an account, it may take several minutes before changes take effect.

+

+ getAccountForGcpRegistration(x__xgafv=None)

+

Retrieves the merchant account that the calling GCP is registered with.

list(filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

Note: For the `accounts.list` method, quota and limits usage are charged for each user, and not for the Merchant Center ID or the advanced account ID. To list several sub-accounts, you should use the `accounts.listSubaccounts` method, which is more suitable for advanced accounts use case.

@@ -308,6 +311,24 @@

Method Details

}
+
+ getAccountForGcpRegistration(x__xgafv=None) +
Retrieves the merchant account that the calling GCP is registered with.
+
+Args:
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Response message for the GetAccountForGcpRegistration method.
+  "name": "A String", # The name of the merchant account id that the GCP is registered with.
+}
+
+
list(filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)
Note: For the `accounts.list` method, quota and limits usage are charged for each user, and not for the Merchant Center ID or the advanced account ID. To list several sub-accounts, you should use the `accounts.listSubaccounts` method, which is more suitable for advanced accounts use case.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1.accounts.programs.html b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1.accounts.programs.html
index dc9994479ca..5422a831867 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1.accounts.programs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1.accounts.programs.html
@@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ 

Method Details

Returns: An object of the form: - { # Defines participation in a given program for the specified account. Programs provide a mechanism for adding functionality to a Merchant Center accounts. A typical example of this is the [Free product listings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13889434) program, which enables products from a business's store to be shown across Google for free. The following list is the available set of program resource IDs accessible through the API: * `free-listings` * `shopping-ads` * `youtube-shopping-checkout` + { # Defines participation in a given program for the specified account. Programs provide a mechanism for adding functionality to a Merchant Center accounts. A typical example of this is the [Free product listings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13889434) program, which enables products from a business's store to be shown across Google for free. The following list is the available set of program resource IDs accessible through the API: * `checkout` * `free-listings` * `shopping-ads` * `youtube-shopping-checkout` "activeRegionCodes": [ # Output only. The regions in which the account is actively participating in the program. Active regions are defined as those where all program requirements affecting the regions have been met. Region codes are defined by [CLDR](https://cldr.unicode.org/). This is either a country where the program applies specifically to that country or `001` when the program applies globally. "A String", ], @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@

Method Details

Returns: An object of the form: - { # Defines participation in a given program for the specified account. Programs provide a mechanism for adding functionality to a Merchant Center accounts. A typical example of this is the [Free product listings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13889434) program, which enables products from a business's store to be shown across Google for free. The following list is the available set of program resource IDs accessible through the API: * `free-listings` * `shopping-ads` * `youtube-shopping-checkout` + { # Defines participation in a given program for the specified account. Programs provide a mechanism for adding functionality to a Merchant Center accounts. A typical example of this is the [Free product listings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13889434) program, which enables products from a business's store to be shown across Google for free. The following list is the available set of program resource IDs accessible through the API: * `checkout` * `free-listings` * `shopping-ads` * `youtube-shopping-checkout` "activeRegionCodes": [ # Output only. The regions in which the account is actively participating in the program. Active regions are defined as those where all program requirements affecting the regions have been met. Region codes are defined by [CLDR](https://cldr.unicode.org/). This is either a country where the program applies specifically to that country or `001` when the program applies globally. "A String", ], @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@

Method Details

Returns: An object of the form: - { # Defines participation in a given program for the specified account. Programs provide a mechanism for adding functionality to a Merchant Center accounts. A typical example of this is the [Free product listings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13889434) program, which enables products from a business's store to be shown across Google for free. The following list is the available set of program resource IDs accessible through the API: * `free-listings` * `shopping-ads` * `youtube-shopping-checkout` + { # Defines participation in a given program for the specified account. Programs provide a mechanism for adding functionality to a Merchant Center accounts. A typical example of this is the [Free product listings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13889434) program, which enables products from a business's store to be shown across Google for free. The following list is the available set of program resource IDs accessible through the API: * `checkout` * `free-listings` * `shopping-ads` * `youtube-shopping-checkout` "activeRegionCodes": [ # Output only. The regions in which the account is actively participating in the program. Active regions are defined as those where all program requirements affecting the regions have been met. Region codes are defined by [CLDR](https://cldr.unicode.org/). This is either a country where the program applies specifically to that country or `001` when the program applies globally. "A String", ], @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Response message for the ListPrograms method. "nextPageToken": "A String", # A token that can be sent as `page_token` to retrieve the next page. If this field is omitted, there are no subsequent pages. "programs": [ # The programs for the given account. - { # Defines participation in a given program for the specified account. Programs provide a mechanism for adding functionality to a Merchant Center accounts. A typical example of this is the [Free product listings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13889434) program, which enables products from a business's store to be shown across Google for free. The following list is the available set of program resource IDs accessible through the API: * `free-listings` * `shopping-ads` * `youtube-shopping-checkout` + { # Defines participation in a given program for the specified account. Programs provide a mechanism for adding functionality to a Merchant Center accounts. A typical example of this is the [Free product listings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13889434) program, which enables products from a business's store to be shown across Google for free. The following list is the available set of program resource IDs accessible through the API: * `checkout` * `free-listings` * `shopping-ads` * `youtube-shopping-checkout` "activeRegionCodes": [ # Output only. The regions in which the account is actively participating in the program. Active regions are defined as those where all program requirements affecting the regions have been met. Region codes are defined by [CLDR](https://cldr.unicode.org/). This is either a country where the program applies specifically to that country or `001` when the program applies globally. "A String", ], diff --git a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1.accounts.regions.html b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1.accounts.regions.html index acd7de2b80a..72351a95ab5 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1.accounts.regions.html +++ b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1.accounts.regions.html @@ -182,12 +182,12 @@

Method Details

Deletes multiple regions by name from your Merchant Center account. Executing this method requires admin access.
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. The account to create a region for. Format: `accounts/{account}` (required)
+  parent: string, Required. The account to delete one or more regions from. Format: `accounts/{account}` (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # Request message for the `BatchDeleteRegions` method.
-  "requests": [ # Required. The names of the regions to delete. A maximum of 1000 regions can be deleted in a batch.
+  "requests": [ # Required. The names of the regions to delete. A maximum of 100 regions can be deleted in a batch.
     { # Request message for the `DeleteRegion` method.
       "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the region to delete. Format: `accounts/{account}/regions/{region}`
     },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.html b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.html
index 7aa3171bbd5..8f462db7f1e 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.html
@@ -176,6 +176,9 @@ 

Instance Methods

get(name, x__xgafv=None)

Retrieves an account from your Merchant Center account. After inserting, updating, or deleting an account, it may take several minutes before changes take effect.

+

+ getAccountForGcpRegistration(x__xgafv=None)

+

Retrieves the merchant account that the calling GCP is registered with.

list(filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

Note: For the `accounts.list` method, quota and limits usage are charged for each user, and not for the Merchant Center ID or the advanced account ID. To list several sub-accounts, you should use the `accounts.listSubaccounts` method, which is more suitable for advanced accounts use case.

@@ -321,6 +324,24 @@

Method Details

}
+
+ getAccountForGcpRegistration(x__xgafv=None) +
Retrieves the merchant account that the calling GCP is registered with.
+
+Args:
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Response message for the GetAccountForGcpRegistration method.
+  "name": "A String", # The name of the merchant account id that the GCP is registered with.
+}
+
+
list(filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)
Note: For the `accounts.list` method, quota and limits usage are charged for each user, and not for the Merchant Center ID or the advanced account ID. To list several sub-accounts, you should use the `accounts.listSubaccounts` method, which is more suitable for advanced accounts use case.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.programs.html b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.programs.html
index 82be62c4919..a683d6832ec 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.programs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.programs.html
@@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ 

Method Details

Returns: An object of the form: - { # Defines participation in a given program for the specified account. Programs provide a mechanism for adding functionality to a Merchant Center accounts. A typical example of this is the [Free product listings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13889434) program, which enables products from a business's store to be shown across Google for free. The following list is the available set of program resource IDs accessible through the API: * `free-listings` * `shopping-ads` * `youtube-shopping-checkout` + { # Defines participation in a given program for the specified account. Programs provide a mechanism for adding functionality to a Merchant Center accounts. A typical example of this is the [Free product listings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13889434) program, which enables products from a business's store to be shown across Google for free. The following list is the available set of program resource IDs accessible through the API: * `checkout` * `free-listings` * `shopping-ads` * `youtube-shopping-checkout` "activeRegionCodes": [ # Output only. The regions in which the account is actively participating in the program. Active regions are defined as those where all program requirements affecting the regions have been met. Region codes are defined by [CLDR](https://cldr.unicode.org/). This is either a country where the program applies specifically to that country or `001` when the program applies globally. "A String", ], @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@

Method Details

Returns: An object of the form: - { # Defines participation in a given program for the specified account. Programs provide a mechanism for adding functionality to a Merchant Center accounts. A typical example of this is the [Free product listings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13889434) program, which enables products from a business's store to be shown across Google for free. The following list is the available set of program resource IDs accessible through the API: * `free-listings` * `shopping-ads` * `youtube-shopping-checkout` + { # Defines participation in a given program for the specified account. Programs provide a mechanism for adding functionality to a Merchant Center accounts. A typical example of this is the [Free product listings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13889434) program, which enables products from a business's store to be shown across Google for free. The following list is the available set of program resource IDs accessible through the API: * `checkout` * `free-listings` * `shopping-ads` * `youtube-shopping-checkout` "activeRegionCodes": [ # Output only. The regions in which the account is actively participating in the program. Active regions are defined as those where all program requirements affecting the regions have been met. Region codes are defined by [CLDR](https://cldr.unicode.org/). This is either a country where the program applies specifically to that country or `001` when the program applies globally. "A String", ], @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@

Method Details

Returns: An object of the form: - { # Defines participation in a given program for the specified account. Programs provide a mechanism for adding functionality to a Merchant Center accounts. A typical example of this is the [Free product listings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13889434) program, which enables products from a business's store to be shown across Google for free. The following list is the available set of program resource IDs accessible through the API: * `free-listings` * `shopping-ads` * `youtube-shopping-checkout` + { # Defines participation in a given program for the specified account. Programs provide a mechanism for adding functionality to a Merchant Center accounts. A typical example of this is the [Free product listings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13889434) program, which enables products from a business's store to be shown across Google for free. The following list is the available set of program resource IDs accessible through the API: * `checkout` * `free-listings` * `shopping-ads` * `youtube-shopping-checkout` "activeRegionCodes": [ # Output only. The regions in which the account is actively participating in the program. Active regions are defined as those where all program requirements affecting the regions have been met. Region codes are defined by [CLDR](https://cldr.unicode.org/). This is either a country where the program applies specifically to that country or `001` when the program applies globally. "A String", ], @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Response message for the ListPrograms method. "nextPageToken": "A String", # A token that can be sent as `page_token` to retrieve the next page. If this field is omitted, there are no subsequent pages. "programs": [ # The programs for the given account. - { # Defines participation in a given program for the specified account. Programs provide a mechanism for adding functionality to a Merchant Center accounts. A typical example of this is the [Free product listings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13889434) program, which enables products from a business's store to be shown across Google for free. The following list is the available set of program resource IDs accessible through the API: * `free-listings` * `shopping-ads` * `youtube-shopping-checkout` + { # Defines participation in a given program for the specified account. Programs provide a mechanism for adding functionality to a Merchant Center accounts. A typical example of this is the [Free product listings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13889434) program, which enables products from a business's store to be shown across Google for free. The following list is the available set of program resource IDs accessible through the API: * `checkout` * `free-listings` * `shopping-ads` * `youtube-shopping-checkout` "activeRegionCodes": [ # Output only. The regions in which the account is actively participating in the program. Active regions are defined as those where all program requirements affecting the regions have been met. Region codes are defined by [CLDR](https://cldr.unicode.org/). This is either a country where the program applies specifically to that country or `001` when the program applies globally. "A String", ], diff --git a/docs/dyn/migrationcenter_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/migrationcenter_v1.projects.locations.html index 634c3d54e0d..888a9f8ab5a 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/migrationcenter_v1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/migrationcenter_v1.projects.locations.html @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/migrationcenter_v1alpha1.projects.locations.assets.html b/docs/dyn/migrationcenter_v1alpha1.projects.locations.assets.html index d7d079d1bcd..9f4ed16439a 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/migrationcenter_v1alpha1.projects.locations.assets.html +++ b/docs/dyn/migrationcenter_v1alpha1.projects.locations.assets.html @@ -225,6 +225,38 @@

Method Details

"attributes": { # Generic asset attributes. "a_key": "A String", }, + "awsCloudFrontDistributionDetails": { # Details of an AWS CloudFront distribution. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS CloudFront distributions. + }, + "awsEcsClusterDetails": { # Details of an AWS ECS cluster. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS ECS clusters. + }, + "awsEfsFileSystemDetails": { # Details of an AWS EFS file system. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS EFS file systems. + }, + "awsEksClusterDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS EKS clusters. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS EKS clusters. + }, + "awsElbLoadBalancerDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS Load Balancers. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS Load Balancers. + }, + "awsLambdaFunctionDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS Lambda functions. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS Lambda functions. + }, + "awsRedshiftDetails": { # Details of an AWS Redshift cluster. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS Redshift + }, + "awsS3BucketDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS S3 buckets. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS S3 buckets. + "objectsMetadata": { # The metadata of the objects in the bucket. # Optional. The metadata of the objects in the bucket. + "totalObjects": { # Information about the total number of objects in the bucket. # Optional. The total number of objects in the bucket. + "value": 42, # Optional. The total number of objects in the bucket. + }, + }, + "storageClasses": [ # Optional. The storage classes in the bucket. + { # Details about storage class. + "totalBytes": "A String", # Optional. The total size of the storage class in bytes. + "type": "A String", # Required. Type of the storage class. + }, + ], + "versioning": { # Versioning configuration of the bucket. # Optional. Versioning configuration of the bucket. + "enabled": True or False, # Optional. Whether versioning is enabled. + }, + }, + "awsVpcDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS VPCs. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS VPCs. + }, "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the asset was created. "databaseDeploymentDetails": { # The details of a database deployment asset. # Output only. Asset information specific for database deployments. "aggregatedStats": { # Aggregated stats for the database deployment. # Output only. Aggregated stats for the database deployment. @@ -371,6 +403,17 @@

Method Details

"hidden": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the asset is hidden. "hideReason": "A String", # Optional. An optional reason for marking this asset as hidden. "hideTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the asset was marked as hidden. + "hostingProviderDetails": { # Details about the hosting platform of the asset. # Output only. Details about the hosting provider of the asset. + "aws": { # Details for AWS platform. # Optional. The AWS platform details. + "owningAccountId": "A String", # Optional. The AWS account ID owning the resource represented by this asset. + }, + "createTime": "A String", # Optional. The timestamp when resource was created in the hosting provider. + "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the asset. + "location": { # Location of a resource. # Optional. Location of the asset. + "region": "A String", # Optional. The name of the region. + }, + "originalId": "A String", # Optional. Unique identifier for the asset in the hosting provider. + }, "insightList": { # Message containing insights list. # Output only. The list of insights associated with the asset. "insights": [ # Output only. Insights of the list. { # An insight about an asset. @@ -795,6 +838,9 @@

Method Details

"sources": [ # Output only. The list of sources contributing to the asset. "A String", ], + "structuredAttributes": { # Optional. Generic structured asset attributes. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, "title": "A String", # Output only. Server generated human readable name of the asset. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the asset was last updated. "virtualMachineDetails": { # Details of a VirtualMachine. # Output only. Asset information specific for virtual machines. @@ -1083,6 +1129,38 @@

Method Details

"attributes": { # Generic asset attributes. "a_key": "A String", }, + "awsCloudFrontDistributionDetails": { # Details of an AWS CloudFront distribution. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS CloudFront distributions. + }, + "awsEcsClusterDetails": { # Details of an AWS ECS cluster. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS ECS clusters. + }, + "awsEfsFileSystemDetails": { # Details of an AWS EFS file system. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS EFS file systems. + }, + "awsEksClusterDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS EKS clusters. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS EKS clusters. + }, + "awsElbLoadBalancerDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS Load Balancers. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS Load Balancers. + }, + "awsLambdaFunctionDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS Lambda functions. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS Lambda functions. + }, + "awsRedshiftDetails": { # Details of an AWS Redshift cluster. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS Redshift + }, + "awsS3BucketDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS S3 buckets. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS S3 buckets. + "objectsMetadata": { # The metadata of the objects in the bucket. # Optional. The metadata of the objects in the bucket. + "totalObjects": { # Information about the total number of objects in the bucket. # Optional. The total number of objects in the bucket. + "value": 42, # Optional. The total number of objects in the bucket. + }, + }, + "storageClasses": [ # Optional. The storage classes in the bucket. + { # Details about storage class. + "totalBytes": "A String", # Optional. The total size of the storage class in bytes. + "type": "A String", # Required. Type of the storage class. + }, + ], + "versioning": { # Versioning configuration of the bucket. # Optional. Versioning configuration of the bucket. + "enabled": True or False, # Optional. Whether versioning is enabled. + }, + }, + "awsVpcDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS VPCs. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS VPCs. + }, "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the asset was created. "databaseDeploymentDetails": { # The details of a database deployment asset. # Output only. Asset information specific for database deployments. "aggregatedStats": { # Aggregated stats for the database deployment. # Output only. Aggregated stats for the database deployment. @@ -1229,6 +1307,17 @@

Method Details

"hidden": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the asset is hidden. "hideReason": "A String", # Optional. An optional reason for marking this asset as hidden. "hideTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the asset was marked as hidden. + "hostingProviderDetails": { # Details about the hosting platform of the asset. # Output only. Details about the hosting provider of the asset. + "aws": { # Details for AWS platform. # Optional. The AWS platform details. + "owningAccountId": "A String", # Optional. The AWS account ID owning the resource represented by this asset. + }, + "createTime": "A String", # Optional. The timestamp when resource was created in the hosting provider. + "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the asset. + "location": { # Location of a resource. # Optional. Location of the asset. + "region": "A String", # Optional. The name of the region. + }, + "originalId": "A String", # Optional. Unique identifier for the asset in the hosting provider. + }, "insightList": { # Message containing insights list. # Output only. The list of insights associated with the asset. "insights": [ # Output only. Insights of the list. { # An insight about an asset. @@ -1653,6 +1742,9 @@

Method Details

"sources": [ # Output only. The list of sources contributing to the asset. "A String", ], + "structuredAttributes": { # Optional. Generic structured asset attributes. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, "title": "A String", # Output only. Server generated human readable name of the asset. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the asset was last updated. "virtualMachineDetails": { # Details of a VirtualMachine. # Output only. Asset information specific for virtual machines. @@ -1973,6 +2065,38 @@

Method Details

"attributes": { # Generic asset attributes. "a_key": "A String", }, + "awsCloudFrontDistributionDetails": { # Details of an AWS CloudFront distribution. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS CloudFront distributions. + }, + "awsEcsClusterDetails": { # Details of an AWS ECS cluster. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS ECS clusters. + }, + "awsEfsFileSystemDetails": { # Details of an AWS EFS file system. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS EFS file systems. + }, + "awsEksClusterDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS EKS clusters. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS EKS clusters. + }, + "awsElbLoadBalancerDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS Load Balancers. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS Load Balancers. + }, + "awsLambdaFunctionDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS Lambda functions. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS Lambda functions. + }, + "awsRedshiftDetails": { # Details of an AWS Redshift cluster. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS Redshift + }, + "awsS3BucketDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS S3 buckets. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS S3 buckets. + "objectsMetadata": { # The metadata of the objects in the bucket. # Optional. The metadata of the objects in the bucket. + "totalObjects": { # Information about the total number of objects in the bucket. # Optional. The total number of objects in the bucket. + "value": 42, # Optional. The total number of objects in the bucket. + }, + }, + "storageClasses": [ # Optional. The storage classes in the bucket. + { # Details about storage class. + "totalBytes": "A String", # Optional. The total size of the storage class in bytes. + "type": "A String", # Required. Type of the storage class. + }, + ], + "versioning": { # Versioning configuration of the bucket. # Optional. Versioning configuration of the bucket. + "enabled": True or False, # Optional. Whether versioning is enabled. + }, + }, + "awsVpcDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS VPCs. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS VPCs. + }, "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the asset was created. "databaseDeploymentDetails": { # The details of a database deployment asset. # Output only. Asset information specific for database deployments. "aggregatedStats": { # Aggregated stats for the database deployment. # Output only. Aggregated stats for the database deployment. @@ -2119,6 +2243,17 @@

Method Details

"hidden": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the asset is hidden. "hideReason": "A String", # Optional. An optional reason for marking this asset as hidden. "hideTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the asset was marked as hidden. + "hostingProviderDetails": { # Details about the hosting platform of the asset. # Output only. Details about the hosting provider of the asset. + "aws": { # Details for AWS platform. # Optional. The AWS platform details. + "owningAccountId": "A String", # Optional. The AWS account ID owning the resource represented by this asset. + }, + "createTime": "A String", # Optional. The timestamp when resource was created in the hosting provider. + "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the asset. + "location": { # Location of a resource. # Optional. Location of the asset. + "region": "A String", # Optional. The name of the region. + }, + "originalId": "A String", # Optional. Unique identifier for the asset in the hosting provider. + }, "insightList": { # Message containing insights list. # Output only. The list of insights associated with the asset. "insights": [ # Output only. Insights of the list. { # An insight about an asset. @@ -2543,6 +2678,9 @@

Method Details

"sources": [ # Output only. The list of sources contributing to the asset. "A String", ], + "structuredAttributes": { # Optional. Generic structured asset attributes. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, "title": "A String", # Output only. Server generated human readable name of the asset. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the asset was last updated. "virtualMachineDetails": { # Details of a VirtualMachine. # Output only. Asset information specific for virtual machines. @@ -2844,6 +2982,38 @@

Method Details

"attributes": { # Generic asset attributes. "a_key": "A String", }, + "awsCloudFrontDistributionDetails": { # Details of an AWS CloudFront distribution. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS CloudFront distributions. + }, + "awsEcsClusterDetails": { # Details of an AWS ECS cluster. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS ECS clusters. + }, + "awsEfsFileSystemDetails": { # Details of an AWS EFS file system. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS EFS file systems. + }, + "awsEksClusterDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS EKS clusters. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS EKS clusters. + }, + "awsElbLoadBalancerDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS Load Balancers. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS Load Balancers. + }, + "awsLambdaFunctionDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS Lambda functions. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS Lambda functions. + }, + "awsRedshiftDetails": { # Details of an AWS Redshift cluster. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS Redshift + }, + "awsS3BucketDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS S3 buckets. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS S3 buckets. + "objectsMetadata": { # The metadata of the objects in the bucket. # Optional. The metadata of the objects in the bucket. + "totalObjects": { # Information about the total number of objects in the bucket. # Optional. The total number of objects in the bucket. + "value": 42, # Optional. The total number of objects in the bucket. + }, + }, + "storageClasses": [ # Optional. The storage classes in the bucket. + { # Details about storage class. + "totalBytes": "A String", # Optional. The total size of the storage class in bytes. + "type": "A String", # Required. Type of the storage class. + }, + ], + "versioning": { # Versioning configuration of the bucket. # Optional. Versioning configuration of the bucket. + "enabled": True or False, # Optional. Whether versioning is enabled. + }, + }, + "awsVpcDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS VPCs. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS VPCs. + }, "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the asset was created. "databaseDeploymentDetails": { # The details of a database deployment asset. # Output only. Asset information specific for database deployments. "aggregatedStats": { # Aggregated stats for the database deployment. # Output only. Aggregated stats for the database deployment. @@ -2990,6 +3160,17 @@

Method Details

"hidden": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the asset is hidden. "hideReason": "A String", # Optional. An optional reason for marking this asset as hidden. "hideTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the asset was marked as hidden. + "hostingProviderDetails": { # Details about the hosting platform of the asset. # Output only. Details about the hosting provider of the asset. + "aws": { # Details for AWS platform. # Optional. The AWS platform details. + "owningAccountId": "A String", # Optional. The AWS account ID owning the resource represented by this asset. + }, + "createTime": "A String", # Optional. The timestamp when resource was created in the hosting provider. + "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the asset. + "location": { # Location of a resource. # Optional. Location of the asset. + "region": "A String", # Optional. The name of the region. + }, + "originalId": "A String", # Optional. Unique identifier for the asset in the hosting provider. + }, "insightList": { # Message containing insights list. # Output only. The list of insights associated with the asset. "insights": [ # Output only. Insights of the list. { # An insight about an asset. @@ -3414,6 +3595,9 @@

Method Details

"sources": [ # Output only. The list of sources contributing to the asset. "A String", ], + "structuredAttributes": { # Optional. Generic structured asset attributes. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, "title": "A String", # Output only. Server generated human readable name of the asset. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the asset was last updated. "virtualMachineDetails": { # Details of a VirtualMachine. # Output only. Asset information specific for virtual machines. @@ -3717,6 +3901,38 @@

Method Details

"attributes": { # Generic asset attributes. "a_key": "A String", }, + "awsCloudFrontDistributionDetails": { # Details of an AWS CloudFront distribution. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS CloudFront distributions. + }, + "awsEcsClusterDetails": { # Details of an AWS ECS cluster. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS ECS clusters. + }, + "awsEfsFileSystemDetails": { # Details of an AWS EFS file system. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS EFS file systems. + }, + "awsEksClusterDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS EKS clusters. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS EKS clusters. + }, + "awsElbLoadBalancerDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS Load Balancers. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS Load Balancers. + }, + "awsLambdaFunctionDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS Lambda functions. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS Lambda functions. + }, + "awsRedshiftDetails": { # Details of an AWS Redshift cluster. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS Redshift + }, + "awsS3BucketDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS S3 buckets. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS S3 buckets. + "objectsMetadata": { # The metadata of the objects in the bucket. # Optional. The metadata of the objects in the bucket. + "totalObjects": { # Information about the total number of objects in the bucket. # Optional. The total number of objects in the bucket. + "value": 42, # Optional. The total number of objects in the bucket. + }, + }, + "storageClasses": [ # Optional. The storage classes in the bucket. + { # Details about storage class. + "totalBytes": "A String", # Optional. The total size of the storage class in bytes. + "type": "A String", # Required. Type of the storage class. + }, + ], + "versioning": { # Versioning configuration of the bucket. # Optional. Versioning configuration of the bucket. + "enabled": True or False, # Optional. Whether versioning is enabled. + }, + }, + "awsVpcDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS VPCs. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS VPCs. + }, "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the asset was created. "databaseDeploymentDetails": { # The details of a database deployment asset. # Output only. Asset information specific for database deployments. "aggregatedStats": { # Aggregated stats for the database deployment. # Output only. Aggregated stats for the database deployment. @@ -3863,6 +4079,17 @@

Method Details

"hidden": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the asset is hidden. "hideReason": "A String", # Optional. An optional reason for marking this asset as hidden. "hideTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the asset was marked as hidden. + "hostingProviderDetails": { # Details about the hosting platform of the asset. # Output only. Details about the hosting provider of the asset. + "aws": { # Details for AWS platform. # Optional. The AWS platform details. + "owningAccountId": "A String", # Optional. The AWS account ID owning the resource represented by this asset. + }, + "createTime": "A String", # Optional. The timestamp when resource was created in the hosting provider. + "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the asset. + "location": { # Location of a resource. # Optional. Location of the asset. + "region": "A String", # Optional. The name of the region. + }, + "originalId": "A String", # Optional. Unique identifier for the asset in the hosting provider. + }, "insightList": { # Message containing insights list. # Output only. The list of insights associated with the asset. "insights": [ # Output only. Insights of the list. { # An insight about an asset. @@ -4287,6 +4514,9 @@

Method Details

"sources": [ # Output only. The list of sources contributing to the asset. "A String", ], + "structuredAttributes": { # Optional. Generic structured asset attributes. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, "title": "A String", # Output only. Server generated human readable name of the asset. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the asset was last updated. "virtualMachineDetails": { # Details of a VirtualMachine. # Output only. Asset information specific for virtual machines. @@ -4570,6 +4800,38 @@

Method Details

"attributes": { # Generic asset attributes. "a_key": "A String", }, + "awsCloudFrontDistributionDetails": { # Details of an AWS CloudFront distribution. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS CloudFront distributions. + }, + "awsEcsClusterDetails": { # Details of an AWS ECS cluster. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS ECS clusters. + }, + "awsEfsFileSystemDetails": { # Details of an AWS EFS file system. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS EFS file systems. + }, + "awsEksClusterDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS EKS clusters. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS EKS clusters. + }, + "awsElbLoadBalancerDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS Load Balancers. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS Load Balancers. + }, + "awsLambdaFunctionDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS Lambda functions. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS Lambda functions. + }, + "awsRedshiftDetails": { # Details of an AWS Redshift cluster. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS Redshift + }, + "awsS3BucketDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS S3 buckets. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS S3 buckets. + "objectsMetadata": { # The metadata of the objects in the bucket. # Optional. The metadata of the objects in the bucket. + "totalObjects": { # Information about the total number of objects in the bucket. # Optional. The total number of objects in the bucket. + "value": 42, # Optional. The total number of objects in the bucket. + }, + }, + "storageClasses": [ # Optional. The storage classes in the bucket. + { # Details about storage class. + "totalBytes": "A String", # Optional. The total size of the storage class in bytes. + "type": "A String", # Required. Type of the storage class. + }, + ], + "versioning": { # Versioning configuration of the bucket. # Optional. Versioning configuration of the bucket. + "enabled": True or False, # Optional. Whether versioning is enabled. + }, + }, + "awsVpcDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS VPCs. # Output only. Asset information specific for AWS VPCs. + }, "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the asset was created. "databaseDeploymentDetails": { # The details of a database deployment asset. # Output only. Asset information specific for database deployments. "aggregatedStats": { # Aggregated stats for the database deployment. # Output only. Aggregated stats for the database deployment. @@ -4716,6 +4978,17 @@

Method Details

"hidden": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the asset is hidden. "hideReason": "A String", # Optional. An optional reason for marking this asset as hidden. "hideTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the asset was marked as hidden. + "hostingProviderDetails": { # Details about the hosting platform of the asset. # Output only. Details about the hosting provider of the asset. + "aws": { # Details for AWS platform. # Optional. The AWS platform details. + "owningAccountId": "A String", # Optional. The AWS account ID owning the resource represented by this asset. + }, + "createTime": "A String", # Optional. The timestamp when resource was created in the hosting provider. + "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the asset. + "location": { # Location of a resource. # Optional. Location of the asset. + "region": "A String", # Optional. The name of the region. + }, + "originalId": "A String", # Optional. Unique identifier for the asset in the hosting provider. + }, "insightList": { # Message containing insights list. # Output only. The list of insights associated with the asset. "insights": [ # Output only. Insights of the list. { # An insight about an asset. @@ -5140,6 +5413,9 @@

Method Details

"sources": [ # Output only. The list of sources contributing to the asset. "A String", ], + "structuredAttributes": { # Optional. Generic structured asset attributes. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, "title": "A String", # Output only. Server generated human readable name of the asset. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the asset was last updated. "virtualMachineDetails": { # Details of a VirtualMachine. # Output only. Asset information specific for virtual machines. @@ -5422,6 +5698,38 @@

Method Details

"attributes": { # Generic asset attributes. "a_key": "A String", }, + "awsCloudFrontDistributionDetails": { # Details of an AWS CloudFront distribution. # Asset information specific for AWS CloudFront distributions. + }, + "awsEcsClusterDetails": { # Details of an AWS ECS cluster. # Asset information specific for AWS ECS clusters. + }, + "awsEfsFileSystemDetails": { # Details of an AWS EFS file system. # Asset information specific for AWS EFS file systems. + }, + "awsEksClusterDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS EKS clusters. # Asset information specific for AWS EKS clusters. + }, + "awsElbLoadBalancerDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS Load Balancers. # Asset information specific for AWS Load Balancers. + }, + "awsLambdaFunctionDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS Lambda functions. # Asset information specific for AWS Lambda functions. + }, + "awsRedshiftDetails": { # Details of an AWS Redshift cluster. # Asset information specific for AWS Redshift clusters. + }, + "awsS3BucketDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS S3 buckets. # Asset information specific for AWS S3 buckets. + "objectsMetadata": { # The metadata of the objects in the bucket. # Optional. The metadata of the objects in the bucket. + "totalObjects": { # Information about the total number of objects in the bucket. # Optional. The total number of objects in the bucket. + "value": 42, # Optional. The total number of objects in the bucket. + }, + }, + "storageClasses": [ # Optional. The storage classes in the bucket. + { # Details about storage class. + "totalBytes": "A String", # Optional. The total size of the storage class in bytes. + "type": "A String", # Required. Type of the storage class. + }, + ], + "versioning": { # Versioning configuration of the bucket. # Optional. Versioning configuration of the bucket. + "enabled": True or False, # Optional. Whether versioning is enabled. + }, + }, + "awsVpcDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS VPCs. # Asset information specific for AWS VPCs. + }, "collectionType": "A String", # Optional. Frame collection type, if not specified the collection type will be based on the source type of the source the frame was reported on. "databaseDeploymentDetails": { # The details of a database deployment asset. # Asset information specific for database deployments. "aggregatedStats": { # Aggregated stats for the database deployment. # Output only. Aggregated stats for the database deployment. @@ -5565,6 +5873,17 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, + "hostingProviderDetails": { # Details about the hosting platform of the asset. # Optional. Details about the hosting provider of the asset. + "aws": { # Details for AWS platform. # Optional. The AWS platform details. + "owningAccountId": "A String", # Optional. The AWS account ID owning the resource represented by this asset. + }, + "createTime": "A String", # Optional. The timestamp when resource was created in the hosting provider. + "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the asset. + "location": { # Location of a resource. # Optional. Location of the asset. + "region": "A String", # Optional. The name of the region. + }, + "originalId": "A String", # Optional. Unique identifier for the asset in the hosting provider. + }, "labels": { # Labels as key value pairs. "a_key": "A String", }, @@ -5844,6 +6163,9 @@

Method Details

}, ], "reportTime": "A String", # The time the data was reported. + "structuredAttributes": { # Optional. Generic structured asset attributes. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, "traceToken": "A String", # Optional. Trace token is optionally provided to assist with debugging and traceability. "virtualMachineDetails": { # Details of a VirtualMachine. # Asset information specific for virtual machines. "coreCount": 42, # Number of logical CPU cores in the VirtualMachine. Must be non-negative. diff --git a/docs/dyn/migrationcenter_v1alpha1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/migrationcenter_v1alpha1.projects.locations.html index 9f96ea438be..09033c2535e 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/migrationcenter_v1alpha1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/migrationcenter_v1alpha1.projects.locations.html @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/migrationcenter_v1alpha1.projects.locations.sources.errorFrames.html b/docs/dyn/migrationcenter_v1alpha1.projects.locations.sources.errorFrames.html index 9f837515289..873ca1eac64 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/migrationcenter_v1alpha1.projects.locations.sources.errorFrames.html +++ b/docs/dyn/migrationcenter_v1alpha1.projects.locations.sources.errorFrames.html @@ -118,6 +118,38 @@

Method Details

"attributes": { # Generic asset attributes. "a_key": "A String", }, + "awsCloudFrontDistributionDetails": { # Details of an AWS CloudFront distribution. # Asset information specific for AWS CloudFront distributions. + }, + "awsEcsClusterDetails": { # Details of an AWS ECS cluster. # Asset information specific for AWS ECS clusters. + }, + "awsEfsFileSystemDetails": { # Details of an AWS EFS file system. # Asset information specific for AWS EFS file systems. + }, + "awsEksClusterDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS EKS clusters. # Asset information specific for AWS EKS clusters. + }, + "awsElbLoadBalancerDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS Load Balancers. # Asset information specific for AWS Load Balancers. + }, + "awsLambdaFunctionDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS Lambda functions. # Asset information specific for AWS Lambda functions. + }, + "awsRedshiftDetails": { # Details of an AWS Redshift cluster. # Asset information specific for AWS Redshift clusters. + }, + "awsS3BucketDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS S3 buckets. # Asset information specific for AWS S3 buckets. + "objectsMetadata": { # The metadata of the objects in the bucket. # Optional. The metadata of the objects in the bucket. + "totalObjects": { # Information about the total number of objects in the bucket. # Optional. The total number of objects in the bucket. + "value": 42, # Optional. The total number of objects in the bucket. + }, + }, + "storageClasses": [ # Optional. The storage classes in the bucket. + { # Details about storage class. + "totalBytes": "A String", # Optional. The total size of the storage class in bytes. + "type": "A String", # Required. Type of the storage class. + }, + ], + "versioning": { # Versioning configuration of the bucket. # Optional. Versioning configuration of the bucket. + "enabled": True or False, # Optional. Whether versioning is enabled. + }, + }, + "awsVpcDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS VPCs. # Asset information specific for AWS VPCs. + }, "collectionType": "A String", # Optional. Frame collection type, if not specified the collection type will be based on the source type of the source the frame was reported on. "databaseDeploymentDetails": { # The details of a database deployment asset. # Asset information specific for database deployments. "aggregatedStats": { # Aggregated stats for the database deployment. # Output only. Aggregated stats for the database deployment. @@ -261,6 +293,17 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, + "hostingProviderDetails": { # Details about the hosting platform of the asset. # Optional. Details about the hosting provider of the asset. + "aws": { # Details for AWS platform. # Optional. The AWS platform details. + "owningAccountId": "A String", # Optional. The AWS account ID owning the resource represented by this asset. + }, + "createTime": "A String", # Optional. The timestamp when resource was created in the hosting provider. + "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the asset. + "location": { # Location of a resource. # Optional. Location of the asset. + "region": "A String", # Optional. The name of the region. + }, + "originalId": "A String", # Optional. Unique identifier for the asset in the hosting provider. + }, "labels": { # Labels as key value pairs. "a_key": "A String", }, @@ -540,6 +583,9 @@

Method Details

}, ], "reportTime": "A String", # The time the data was reported. + "structuredAttributes": { # Optional. Generic structured asset attributes. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, "traceToken": "A String", # Optional. Trace token is optionally provided to assist with debugging and traceability. "virtualMachineDetails": { # Details of a VirtualMachine. # Asset information specific for virtual machines. "coreCount": 42, # Number of logical CPU cores in the VirtualMachine. Must be non-negative. @@ -843,6 +889,38 @@

Method Details

"attributes": { # Generic asset attributes. "a_key": "A String", }, + "awsCloudFrontDistributionDetails": { # Details of an AWS CloudFront distribution. # Asset information specific for AWS CloudFront distributions. + }, + "awsEcsClusterDetails": { # Details of an AWS ECS cluster. # Asset information specific for AWS ECS clusters. + }, + "awsEfsFileSystemDetails": { # Details of an AWS EFS file system. # Asset information specific for AWS EFS file systems. + }, + "awsEksClusterDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS EKS clusters. # Asset information specific for AWS EKS clusters. + }, + "awsElbLoadBalancerDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS Load Balancers. # Asset information specific for AWS Load Balancers. + }, + "awsLambdaFunctionDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS Lambda functions. # Asset information specific for AWS Lambda functions. + }, + "awsRedshiftDetails": { # Details of an AWS Redshift cluster. # Asset information specific for AWS Redshift clusters. + }, + "awsS3BucketDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS S3 buckets. # Asset information specific for AWS S3 buckets. + "objectsMetadata": { # The metadata of the objects in the bucket. # Optional. The metadata of the objects in the bucket. + "totalObjects": { # Information about the total number of objects in the bucket. # Optional. The total number of objects in the bucket. + "value": 42, # Optional. The total number of objects in the bucket. + }, + }, + "storageClasses": [ # Optional. The storage classes in the bucket. + { # Details about storage class. + "totalBytes": "A String", # Optional. The total size of the storage class in bytes. + "type": "A String", # Required. Type of the storage class. + }, + ], + "versioning": { # Versioning configuration of the bucket. # Optional. Versioning configuration of the bucket. + "enabled": True or False, # Optional. Whether versioning is enabled. + }, + }, + "awsVpcDetails": { # Asset information specific for AWS VPCs. # Asset information specific for AWS VPCs. + }, "collectionType": "A String", # Optional. Frame collection type, if not specified the collection type will be based on the source type of the source the frame was reported on. "databaseDeploymentDetails": { # The details of a database deployment asset. # Asset information specific for database deployments. "aggregatedStats": { # Aggregated stats for the database deployment. # Output only. Aggregated stats for the database deployment. @@ -986,6 +1064,17 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, + "hostingProviderDetails": { # Details about the hosting platform of the asset. # Optional. Details about the hosting provider of the asset. + "aws": { # Details for AWS platform. # Optional. The AWS platform details. + "owningAccountId": "A String", # Optional. The AWS account ID owning the resource represented by this asset. + }, + "createTime": "A String", # Optional. The timestamp when resource was created in the hosting provider. + "displayName": "A String", # Optional. Display name of the asset. + "location": { # Location of a resource. # Optional. Location of the asset. + "region": "A String", # Optional. The name of the region. + }, + "originalId": "A String", # Optional. Unique identifier for the asset in the hosting provider. + }, "labels": { # Labels as key value pairs. "a_key": "A String", }, @@ -1265,6 +1354,9 @@

Method Details

}, ], "reportTime": "A String", # The time the data was reported. + "structuredAttributes": { # Optional. Generic structured asset attributes. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, "traceToken": "A String", # Optional. Trace token is optionally provided to assist with debugging and traceability. "virtualMachineDetails": { # Details of a VirtualMachine. # Asset information specific for virtual machines. "coreCount": 42, # Number of logical CPU cores in the VirtualMachine. Must be non-negative. diff --git a/docs/dyn/ml_v1.projects.models.html b/docs/dyn/ml_v1.projects.models.html index 7b959030c8b..273bce57936 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/ml_v1.projects.models.html +++ b/docs/dyn/ml_v1.projects.models.html @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@

Method Details

"predictionClass": "A String", # Optional. The fully qualified name (module_name.class_name) of a class that implements the Predictor interface described in this reference field. The module containing this class should be included in a package provided to the [`packageUris` field](#Version.FIELDS.package_uris). Specify this field if and only if you are deploying a [custom prediction routine (beta)](/ml-engine/docs/tensorflow/custom-prediction-routines). If you specify this field, you must set [`runtimeVersion`](#Version.FIELDS.runtime_version) to 1.4 or greater and you must set `machineType` to a [legacy (MLS1) machine type](/ml-engine/docs/machine-types-online-prediction). The following code sample provides the Predictor interface: class Predictor(object): """Interface for constructing custom predictors.""" def predict(self, instances, **kwargs): """Performs custom prediction. Instances are the decoded values from the request. They have already been deserialized from JSON. Args: instances: A list of prediction input instances. **kwargs: A dictionary of keyword args provided as additional fields on the predict request body. Returns: A list of outputs containing the prediction results. This list must be JSON serializable. """ raise NotImplementedError() @classmethod def from_path(cls, model_dir): """Creates an instance of Predictor using the given path. Loading of the predictor should be done in this method. Args: model_dir: The local directory that contains the exported model file along with any additional files uploaded when creating the version resource. Returns: An instance implementing this Predictor class. """ raise NotImplementedError() Learn more about [the Predictor interface and custom prediction routines](/ml-engine/docs/tensorflow/custom-prediction-routines). "pythonVersion": "A String", # Required. The version of Python used in prediction. The following Python versions are available: * Python '3.7' is available when `runtime_version` is set to '1.15' or later. * Python '3.5' is available when `runtime_version` is set to a version from '1.4' to '1.14'. * Python '2.7' is available when `runtime_version` is set to '1.15' or earlier. Read more about the Python versions available for [each runtime version](/ml-engine/docs/runtime-version-list). "requestLoggingConfig": { # Configuration for logging request-response pairs to a BigQuery table. Online prediction requests to a model version and the responses to these requests are converted to raw strings and saved to the specified BigQuery table. Logging is constrained by [BigQuery quotas and limits](/bigquery/quotas). If your project exceeds BigQuery quotas or limits, AI Platform Prediction does not log request-response pairs, but it continues to serve predictions. If you are using [continuous evaluation](/ml-engine/docs/continuous-evaluation/), you do not need to specify this configuration manually. Setting up continuous evaluation automatically enables logging of request-response pairs. # Optional. *Only* specify this field in a projects.models.versions.patch request. Specifying it in a projects.models.versions.create request has no effect. Configures the request-response pair logging on predictions from this Version. - "bigqueryTableName": "A String", # Required. Fully qualified BigQuery table name in the following format: " project_id.dataset_name.table_name" The specified table must already exist, and the "Cloud ML Service Agent" for your project must have permission to write to it. The table must have the following [schema](/bigquery/docs/schemas): Field nameType Mode model STRING REQUIRED model_version STRING REQUIRED time TIMESTAMP REQUIRED raw_data STRING REQUIRED raw_prediction STRING NULLABLE groundtruth STRING NULLABLE + "bigqueryTableName": "A String", # Required. Fully qualified BigQuery table name in the following format: " project_id.dataset_name.table_name" The specified table must already exist, and the "Cloud ML Service Agent" for your project must have permission to write to it. The table must have the following [schema](/bigquery/docs/schemas): Field name Type Mode model STRING REQUIRED model_version STRING REQUIRED time TIMESTAMP REQUIRED raw_data STRING REQUIRED raw_prediction STRING NULLABLE groundtruth STRING NULLABLE "samplingPercentage": 3.14, # Percentage of requests to be logged, expressed as a fraction from 0 to 1. For example, if you want to log 10% of requests, enter `0.1`. The sampling window is the lifetime of the model version. Defaults to 0. }, "routes": { # Specifies HTTP paths served by a custom container. AI Platform Prediction sends requests to these paths on the container; the custom container must run an HTTP server that responds to these requests with appropriate responses. Read [Custom container requirements](/ai-platform/prediction/docs/custom-container-requirements) for details on how to create your container image to meet these requirements. # Optional. Specifies paths on a custom container's HTTP server where AI Platform Prediction sends certain requests. If you specify this field, then you must also specify the `container` field. If you specify the `container` field and do not specify this field, it defaults to the following: ```json { "predict": "/v1/models/MODEL/versions/VERSION:predict", "health": "/v1/models/MODEL/versions/VERSION" } ``` See RouteMap for more details about these default values. @@ -298,7 +298,7 @@

Method Details

"predictionClass": "A String", # Optional. The fully qualified name (module_name.class_name) of a class that implements the Predictor interface described in this reference field. The module containing this class should be included in a package provided to the [`packageUris` field](#Version.FIELDS.package_uris). Specify this field if and only if you are deploying a [custom prediction routine (beta)](/ml-engine/docs/tensorflow/custom-prediction-routines). If you specify this field, you must set [`runtimeVersion`](#Version.FIELDS.runtime_version) to 1.4 or greater and you must set `machineType` to a [legacy (MLS1) machine type](/ml-engine/docs/machine-types-online-prediction). The following code sample provides the Predictor interface: class Predictor(object): """Interface for constructing custom predictors.""" def predict(self, instances, **kwargs): """Performs custom prediction. Instances are the decoded values from the request. They have already been deserialized from JSON. Args: instances: A list of prediction input instances. **kwargs: A dictionary of keyword args provided as additional fields on the predict request body. Returns: A list of outputs containing the prediction results. This list must be JSON serializable. """ raise NotImplementedError() @classmethod def from_path(cls, model_dir): """Creates an instance of Predictor using the given path. Loading of the predictor should be done in this method. Args: model_dir: The local directory that contains the exported model file along with any additional files uploaded when creating the version resource. Returns: An instance implementing this Predictor class. """ raise NotImplementedError() Learn more about [the Predictor interface and custom prediction routines](/ml-engine/docs/tensorflow/custom-prediction-routines). "pythonVersion": "A String", # Required. The version of Python used in prediction. The following Python versions are available: * Python '3.7' is available when `runtime_version` is set to '1.15' or later. * Python '3.5' is available when `runtime_version` is set to a version from '1.4' to '1.14'. * Python '2.7' is available when `runtime_version` is set to '1.15' or earlier. Read more about the Python versions available for [each runtime version](/ml-engine/docs/runtime-version-list). "requestLoggingConfig": { # Configuration for logging request-response pairs to a BigQuery table. Online prediction requests to a model version and the responses to these requests are converted to raw strings and saved to the specified BigQuery table. Logging is constrained by [BigQuery quotas and limits](/bigquery/quotas). If your project exceeds BigQuery quotas or limits, AI Platform Prediction does not log request-response pairs, but it continues to serve predictions. If you are using [continuous evaluation](/ml-engine/docs/continuous-evaluation/), you do not need to specify this configuration manually. Setting up continuous evaluation automatically enables logging of request-response pairs. # Optional. *Only* specify this field in a projects.models.versions.patch request. Specifying it in a projects.models.versions.create request has no effect. Configures the request-response pair logging on predictions from this Version. - "bigqueryTableName": "A String", # Required. Fully qualified BigQuery table name in the following format: " project_id.dataset_name.table_name" The specified table must already exist, and the "Cloud ML Service Agent" for your project must have permission to write to it. The table must have the following [schema](/bigquery/docs/schemas): Field nameType Mode model STRING REQUIRED model_version STRING REQUIRED time TIMESTAMP REQUIRED raw_data STRING REQUIRED raw_prediction STRING NULLABLE groundtruth STRING NULLABLE + "bigqueryTableName": "A String", # Required. Fully qualified BigQuery table name in the following format: " project_id.dataset_name.table_name" The specified table must already exist, and the "Cloud ML Service Agent" for your project must have permission to write to it. The table must have the following [schema](/bigquery/docs/schemas): Field name Type Mode model STRING REQUIRED model_version STRING REQUIRED time TIMESTAMP REQUIRED raw_data STRING REQUIRED raw_prediction STRING NULLABLE groundtruth STRING NULLABLE "samplingPercentage": 3.14, # Percentage of requests to be logged, expressed as a fraction from 0 to 1. For example, if you want to log 10% of requests, enter `0.1`. The sampling window is the lifetime of the model version. Defaults to 0. }, "routes": { # Specifies HTTP paths served by a custom container. AI Platform Prediction sends requests to these paths on the container; the custom container must run an HTTP server that responds to these requests with appropriate responses. Read [Custom container requirements](/ai-platform/prediction/docs/custom-container-requirements) for details on how to create your container image to meet these requirements. # Optional. Specifies paths on a custom container's HTTP server where AI Platform Prediction sends certain requests. If you specify this field, then you must also specify the `container` field. If you specify the `container` field and do not specify this field, it defaults to the following: ```json { "predict": "/v1/models/MODEL/versions/VERSION:predict", "health": "/v1/models/MODEL/versions/VERSION" } ``` See RouteMap for more details about these default values. @@ -443,7 +443,7 @@

Method Details

"predictionClass": "A String", # Optional. The fully qualified name (module_name.class_name) of a class that implements the Predictor interface described in this reference field. The module containing this class should be included in a package provided to the [`packageUris` field](#Version.FIELDS.package_uris). Specify this field if and only if you are deploying a [custom prediction routine (beta)](/ml-engine/docs/tensorflow/custom-prediction-routines). If you specify this field, you must set [`runtimeVersion`](#Version.FIELDS.runtime_version) to 1.4 or greater and you must set `machineType` to a [legacy (MLS1) machine type](/ml-engine/docs/machine-types-online-prediction). The following code sample provides the Predictor interface: class Predictor(object): """Interface for constructing custom predictors.""" def predict(self, instances, **kwargs): """Performs custom prediction. Instances are the decoded values from the request. They have already been deserialized from JSON. Args: instances: A list of prediction input instances. **kwargs: A dictionary of keyword args provided as additional fields on the predict request body. Returns: A list of outputs containing the prediction results. This list must be JSON serializable. """ raise NotImplementedError() @classmethod def from_path(cls, model_dir): """Creates an instance of Predictor using the given path. Loading of the predictor should be done in this method. Args: model_dir: The local directory that contains the exported model file along with any additional files uploaded when creating the version resource. Returns: An instance implementing this Predictor class. """ raise NotImplementedError() Learn more about [the Predictor interface and custom prediction routines](/ml-engine/docs/tensorflow/custom-prediction-routines). "pythonVersion": "A String", # Required. The version of Python used in prediction. The following Python versions are available: * Python '3.7' is available when `runtime_version` is set to '1.15' or later. * Python '3.5' is available when `runtime_version` is set to a version from '1.4' to '1.14'. * Python '2.7' is available when `runtime_version` is set to '1.15' or earlier. Read more about the Python versions available for [each runtime version](/ml-engine/docs/runtime-version-list). "requestLoggingConfig": { # Configuration for logging request-response pairs to a BigQuery table. Online prediction requests to a model version and the responses to these requests are converted to raw strings and saved to the specified BigQuery table. Logging is constrained by [BigQuery quotas and limits](/bigquery/quotas). If your project exceeds BigQuery quotas or limits, AI Platform Prediction does not log request-response pairs, but it continues to serve predictions. If you are using [continuous evaluation](/ml-engine/docs/continuous-evaluation/), you do not need to specify this configuration manually. Setting up continuous evaluation automatically enables logging of request-response pairs. # Optional. *Only* specify this field in a projects.models.versions.patch request. Specifying it in a projects.models.versions.create request has no effect. Configures the request-response pair logging on predictions from this Version. - "bigqueryTableName": "A String", # Required. Fully qualified BigQuery table name in the following format: " project_id.dataset_name.table_name" The specified table must already exist, and the "Cloud ML Service Agent" for your project must have permission to write to it. The table must have the following [schema](/bigquery/docs/schemas): Field nameType Mode model STRING REQUIRED model_version STRING REQUIRED time TIMESTAMP REQUIRED raw_data STRING REQUIRED raw_prediction STRING NULLABLE groundtruth STRING NULLABLE + "bigqueryTableName": "A String", # Required. Fully qualified BigQuery table name in the following format: " project_id.dataset_name.table_name" The specified table must already exist, and the "Cloud ML Service Agent" for your project must have permission to write to it. The table must have the following [schema](/bigquery/docs/schemas): Field name Type Mode model STRING REQUIRED model_version STRING REQUIRED time TIMESTAMP REQUIRED raw_data STRING REQUIRED raw_prediction STRING NULLABLE groundtruth STRING NULLABLE "samplingPercentage": 3.14, # Percentage of requests to be logged, expressed as a fraction from 0 to 1. For example, if you want to log 10% of requests, enter `0.1`. The sampling window is the lifetime of the model version. Defaults to 0. }, "routes": { # Specifies HTTP paths served by a custom container. AI Platform Prediction sends requests to these paths on the container; the custom container must run an HTTP server that responds to these requests with appropriate responses. Read [Custom container requirements](/ai-platform/prediction/docs/custom-container-requirements) for details on how to create your container image to meet these requirements. # Optional. Specifies paths on a custom container's HTTP server where AI Platform Prediction sends certain requests. If you specify this field, then you must also specify the `container` field. If you specify the `container` field and do not specify this field, it defaults to the following: ```json { "predict": "/v1/models/MODEL/versions/VERSION:predict", "health": "/v1/models/MODEL/versions/VERSION" } ``` See RouteMap for more details about these default values. @@ -606,7 +606,7 @@

Method Details

"predictionClass": "A String", # Optional. The fully qualified name (module_name.class_name) of a class that implements the Predictor interface described in this reference field. The module containing this class should be included in a package provided to the [`packageUris` field](#Version.FIELDS.package_uris). Specify this field if and only if you are deploying a [custom prediction routine (beta)](/ml-engine/docs/tensorflow/custom-prediction-routines). If you specify this field, you must set [`runtimeVersion`](#Version.FIELDS.runtime_version) to 1.4 or greater and you must set `machineType` to a [legacy (MLS1) machine type](/ml-engine/docs/machine-types-online-prediction). The following code sample provides the Predictor interface: class Predictor(object): """Interface for constructing custom predictors.""" def predict(self, instances, **kwargs): """Performs custom prediction. Instances are the decoded values from the request. They have already been deserialized from JSON. Args: instances: A list of prediction input instances. **kwargs: A dictionary of keyword args provided as additional fields on the predict request body. Returns: A list of outputs containing the prediction results. This list must be JSON serializable. """ raise NotImplementedError() @classmethod def from_path(cls, model_dir): """Creates an instance of Predictor using the given path. Loading of the predictor should be done in this method. Args: model_dir: The local directory that contains the exported model file along with any additional files uploaded when creating the version resource. Returns: An instance implementing this Predictor class. """ raise NotImplementedError() Learn more about [the Predictor interface and custom prediction routines](/ml-engine/docs/tensorflow/custom-prediction-routines). "pythonVersion": "A String", # Required. The version of Python used in prediction. The following Python versions are available: * Python '3.7' is available when `runtime_version` is set to '1.15' or later. * Python '3.5' is available when `runtime_version` is set to a version from '1.4' to '1.14'. * Python '2.7' is available when `runtime_version` is set to '1.15' or earlier. Read more about the Python versions available for [each runtime version](/ml-engine/docs/runtime-version-list). "requestLoggingConfig": { # Configuration for logging request-response pairs to a BigQuery table. Online prediction requests to a model version and the responses to these requests are converted to raw strings and saved to the specified BigQuery table. Logging is constrained by [BigQuery quotas and limits](/bigquery/quotas). If your project exceeds BigQuery quotas or limits, AI Platform Prediction does not log request-response pairs, but it continues to serve predictions. If you are using [continuous evaluation](/ml-engine/docs/continuous-evaluation/), you do not need to specify this configuration manually. Setting up continuous evaluation automatically enables logging of request-response pairs. # Optional. *Only* specify this field in a projects.models.versions.patch request. Specifying it in a projects.models.versions.create request has no effect. Configures the request-response pair logging on predictions from this Version. - "bigqueryTableName": "A String", # Required. Fully qualified BigQuery table name in the following format: " project_id.dataset_name.table_name" The specified table must already exist, and the "Cloud ML Service Agent" for your project must have permission to write to it. The table must have the following [schema](/bigquery/docs/schemas): Field nameType Mode model STRING REQUIRED model_version STRING REQUIRED time TIMESTAMP REQUIRED raw_data STRING REQUIRED raw_prediction STRING NULLABLE groundtruth STRING NULLABLE + "bigqueryTableName": "A String", # Required. Fully qualified BigQuery table name in the following format: " project_id.dataset_name.table_name" The specified table must already exist, and the "Cloud ML Service Agent" for your project must have permission to write to it. The table must have the following [schema](/bigquery/docs/schemas): Field name Type Mode model STRING REQUIRED model_version STRING REQUIRED time TIMESTAMP REQUIRED raw_data STRING REQUIRED raw_prediction STRING NULLABLE groundtruth STRING NULLABLE "samplingPercentage": 3.14, # Percentage of requests to be logged, expressed as a fraction from 0 to 1. For example, if you want to log 10% of requests, enter `0.1`. The sampling window is the lifetime of the model version. Defaults to 0. }, "routes": { # Specifies HTTP paths served by a custom container. AI Platform Prediction sends requests to these paths on the container; the custom container must run an HTTP server that responds to these requests with appropriate responses. Read [Custom container requirements](/ai-platform/prediction/docs/custom-container-requirements) for details on how to create your container image to meet these requirements. # Optional. Specifies paths on a custom container's HTTP server where AI Platform Prediction sends certain requests. If you specify this field, then you must also specify the `container` field. If you specify the `container` field and do not specify this field, it defaults to the following: ```json { "predict": "/v1/models/MODEL/versions/VERSION:predict", "health": "/v1/models/MODEL/versions/VERSION" } ``` See RouteMap for more details about these default values. @@ -728,7 +728,7 @@

Method Details

"predictionClass": "A String", # Optional. The fully qualified name (module_name.class_name) of a class that implements the Predictor interface described in this reference field. The module containing this class should be included in a package provided to the [`packageUris` field](#Version.FIELDS.package_uris). Specify this field if and only if you are deploying a [custom prediction routine (beta)](/ml-engine/docs/tensorflow/custom-prediction-routines). If you specify this field, you must set [`runtimeVersion`](#Version.FIELDS.runtime_version) to 1.4 or greater and you must set `machineType` to a [legacy (MLS1) machine type](/ml-engine/docs/machine-types-online-prediction). The following code sample provides the Predictor interface: class Predictor(object): """Interface for constructing custom predictors.""" def predict(self, instances, **kwargs): """Performs custom prediction. Instances are the decoded values from the request. They have already been deserialized from JSON. Args: instances: A list of prediction input instances. **kwargs: A dictionary of keyword args provided as additional fields on the predict request body. Returns: A list of outputs containing the prediction results. This list must be JSON serializable. """ raise NotImplementedError() @classmethod def from_path(cls, model_dir): """Creates an instance of Predictor using the given path. Loading of the predictor should be done in this method. Args: model_dir: The local directory that contains the exported model file along with any additional files uploaded when creating the version resource. Returns: An instance implementing this Predictor class. """ raise NotImplementedError() Learn more about [the Predictor interface and custom prediction routines](/ml-engine/docs/tensorflow/custom-prediction-routines). "pythonVersion": "A String", # Required. The version of Python used in prediction. The following Python versions are available: * Python '3.7' is available when `runtime_version` is set to '1.15' or later. * Python '3.5' is available when `runtime_version` is set to a version from '1.4' to '1.14'. * Python '2.7' is available when `runtime_version` is set to '1.15' or earlier. Read more about the Python versions available for [each runtime version](/ml-engine/docs/runtime-version-list). "requestLoggingConfig": { # Configuration for logging request-response pairs to a BigQuery table. Online prediction requests to a model version and the responses to these requests are converted to raw strings and saved to the specified BigQuery table. Logging is constrained by [BigQuery quotas and limits](/bigquery/quotas). If your project exceeds BigQuery quotas or limits, AI Platform Prediction does not log request-response pairs, but it continues to serve predictions. If you are using [continuous evaluation](/ml-engine/docs/continuous-evaluation/), you do not need to specify this configuration manually. Setting up continuous evaluation automatically enables logging of request-response pairs. # Optional. *Only* specify this field in a projects.models.versions.patch request. Specifying it in a projects.models.versions.create request has no effect. Configures the request-response pair logging on predictions from this Version. - "bigqueryTableName": "A String", # Required. Fully qualified BigQuery table name in the following format: " project_id.dataset_name.table_name" The specified table must already exist, and the "Cloud ML Service Agent" for your project must have permission to write to it. The table must have the following [schema](/bigquery/docs/schemas): Field nameType Mode model STRING REQUIRED model_version STRING REQUIRED time TIMESTAMP REQUIRED raw_data STRING REQUIRED raw_prediction STRING NULLABLE groundtruth STRING NULLABLE + "bigqueryTableName": "A String", # Required. Fully qualified BigQuery table name in the following format: " project_id.dataset_name.table_name" The specified table must already exist, and the "Cloud ML Service Agent" for your project must have permission to write to it. The table must have the following [schema](/bigquery/docs/schemas): Field name Type Mode model STRING REQUIRED model_version STRING REQUIRED time TIMESTAMP REQUIRED raw_data STRING REQUIRED raw_prediction STRING NULLABLE groundtruth STRING NULLABLE "samplingPercentage": 3.14, # Percentage of requests to be logged, expressed as a fraction from 0 to 1. For example, if you want to log 10% of requests, enter `0.1`. The sampling window is the lifetime of the model version. Defaults to 0. }, "routes": { # Specifies HTTP paths served by a custom container. AI Platform Prediction sends requests to these paths on the container; the custom container must run an HTTP server that responds to these requests with appropriate responses. Read [Custom container requirements](/ai-platform/prediction/docs/custom-container-requirements) for details on how to create your container image to meet these requirements. # Optional. Specifies paths on a custom container's HTTP server where AI Platform Prediction sends certain requests. If you specify this field, then you must also specify the `container` field. If you specify the `container` field and do not specify this field, it defaults to the following: ```json { "predict": "/v1/models/MODEL/versions/VERSION:predict", "health": "/v1/models/MODEL/versions/VERSION" } ``` See RouteMap for more details about these default values. diff --git a/docs/dyn/ml_v1.projects.models.versions.html b/docs/dyn/ml_v1.projects.models.versions.html index 1e37b2af4d0..d4f111ae979 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/ml_v1.projects.models.versions.html +++ b/docs/dyn/ml_v1.projects.models.versions.html @@ -183,7 +183,7 @@

Method Details

"predictionClass": "A String", # Optional. The fully qualified name (module_name.class_name) of a class that implements the Predictor interface described in this reference field. The module containing this class should be included in a package provided to the [`packageUris` field](#Version.FIELDS.package_uris). Specify this field if and only if you are deploying a [custom prediction routine (beta)](/ml-engine/docs/tensorflow/custom-prediction-routines). If you specify this field, you must set [`runtimeVersion`](#Version.FIELDS.runtime_version) to 1.4 or greater and you must set `machineType` to a [legacy (MLS1) machine type](/ml-engine/docs/machine-types-online-prediction). The following code sample provides the Predictor interface: class Predictor(object): """Interface for constructing custom predictors.""" def predict(self, instances, **kwargs): """Performs custom prediction. Instances are the decoded values from the request. They have already been deserialized from JSON. Args: instances: A list of prediction input instances. **kwargs: A dictionary of keyword args provided as additional fields on the predict request body. Returns: A list of outputs containing the prediction results. This list must be JSON serializable. """ raise NotImplementedError() @classmethod def from_path(cls, model_dir): """Creates an instance of Predictor using the given path. Loading of the predictor should be done in this method. Args: model_dir: The local directory that contains the exported model file along with any additional files uploaded when creating the version resource. Returns: An instance implementing this Predictor class. """ raise NotImplementedError() Learn more about [the Predictor interface and custom prediction routines](/ml-engine/docs/tensorflow/custom-prediction-routines). "pythonVersion": "A String", # Required. The version of Python used in prediction. The following Python versions are available: * Python '3.7' is available when `runtime_version` is set to '1.15' or later. * Python '3.5' is available when `runtime_version` is set to a version from '1.4' to '1.14'. * Python '2.7' is available when `runtime_version` is set to '1.15' or earlier. Read more about the Python versions available for [each runtime version](/ml-engine/docs/runtime-version-list). "requestLoggingConfig": { # Configuration for logging request-response pairs to a BigQuery table. Online prediction requests to a model version and the responses to these requests are converted to raw strings and saved to the specified BigQuery table. Logging is constrained by [BigQuery quotas and limits](/bigquery/quotas). If your project exceeds BigQuery quotas or limits, AI Platform Prediction does not log request-response pairs, but it continues to serve predictions. If you are using [continuous evaluation](/ml-engine/docs/continuous-evaluation/), you do not need to specify this configuration manually. Setting up continuous evaluation automatically enables logging of request-response pairs. # Optional. *Only* specify this field in a projects.models.versions.patch request. Specifying it in a projects.models.versions.create request has no effect. Configures the request-response pair logging on predictions from this Version. - "bigqueryTableName": "A String", # Required. Fully qualified BigQuery table name in the following format: " project_id.dataset_name.table_name" The specified table must already exist, and the "Cloud ML Service Agent" for your project must have permission to write to it. The table must have the following [schema](/bigquery/docs/schemas): Field nameType Mode model STRING REQUIRED model_version STRING REQUIRED time TIMESTAMP REQUIRED raw_data STRING REQUIRED raw_prediction STRING NULLABLE groundtruth STRING NULLABLE + "bigqueryTableName": "A String", # Required. Fully qualified BigQuery table name in the following format: " project_id.dataset_name.table_name" The specified table must already exist, and the "Cloud ML Service Agent" for your project must have permission to write to it. The table must have the following [schema](/bigquery/docs/schemas): Field name Type Mode model STRING REQUIRED model_version STRING REQUIRED time TIMESTAMP REQUIRED raw_data STRING REQUIRED raw_prediction STRING NULLABLE groundtruth STRING NULLABLE "samplingPercentage": 3.14, # Percentage of requests to be logged, expressed as a fraction from 0 to 1. For example, if you want to log 10% of requests, enter `0.1`. The sampling window is the lifetime of the model version. Defaults to 0. }, "routes": { # Specifies HTTP paths served by a custom container. AI Platform Prediction sends requests to these paths on the container; the custom container must run an HTTP server that responds to these requests with appropriate responses. Read [Custom container requirements](/ai-platform/prediction/docs/custom-container-requirements) for details on how to create your container image to meet these requirements. # Optional. Specifies paths on a custom container's HTTP server where AI Platform Prediction sends certain requests. If you specify this field, then you must also specify the `container` field. If you specify the `container` field and do not specify this field, it defaults to the following: ```json { "predict": "/v1/models/MODEL/versions/VERSION:predict", "health": "/v1/models/MODEL/versions/VERSION" } ``` See RouteMap for more details about these default values. @@ -343,7 +343,7 @@

Method Details

"predictionClass": "A String", # Optional. The fully qualified name (module_name.class_name) of a class that implements the Predictor interface described in this reference field. The module containing this class should be included in a package provided to the [`packageUris` field](#Version.FIELDS.package_uris). Specify this field if and only if you are deploying a [custom prediction routine (beta)](/ml-engine/docs/tensorflow/custom-prediction-routines). If you specify this field, you must set [`runtimeVersion`](#Version.FIELDS.runtime_version) to 1.4 or greater and you must set `machineType` to a [legacy (MLS1) machine type](/ml-engine/docs/machine-types-online-prediction). The following code sample provides the Predictor interface: class Predictor(object): """Interface for constructing custom predictors.""" def predict(self, instances, **kwargs): """Performs custom prediction. Instances are the decoded values from the request. They have already been deserialized from JSON. Args: instances: A list of prediction input instances. **kwargs: A dictionary of keyword args provided as additional fields on the predict request body. Returns: A list of outputs containing the prediction results. This list must be JSON serializable. """ raise NotImplementedError() @classmethod def from_path(cls, model_dir): """Creates an instance of Predictor using the given path. Loading of the predictor should be done in this method. Args: model_dir: The local directory that contains the exported model file along with any additional files uploaded when creating the version resource. Returns: An instance implementing this Predictor class. """ raise NotImplementedError() Learn more about [the Predictor interface and custom prediction routines](/ml-engine/docs/tensorflow/custom-prediction-routines). "pythonVersion": "A String", # Required. The version of Python used in prediction. The following Python versions are available: * Python '3.7' is available when `runtime_version` is set to '1.15' or later. * Python '3.5' is available when `runtime_version` is set to a version from '1.4' to '1.14'. * Python '2.7' is available when `runtime_version` is set to '1.15' or earlier. Read more about the Python versions available for [each runtime version](/ml-engine/docs/runtime-version-list). "requestLoggingConfig": { # Configuration for logging request-response pairs to a BigQuery table. Online prediction requests to a model version and the responses to these requests are converted to raw strings and saved to the specified BigQuery table. Logging is constrained by [BigQuery quotas and limits](/bigquery/quotas). If your project exceeds BigQuery quotas or limits, AI Platform Prediction does not log request-response pairs, but it continues to serve predictions. If you are using [continuous evaluation](/ml-engine/docs/continuous-evaluation/), you do not need to specify this configuration manually. Setting up continuous evaluation automatically enables logging of request-response pairs. # Optional. *Only* specify this field in a projects.models.versions.patch request. Specifying it in a projects.models.versions.create request has no effect. Configures the request-response pair logging on predictions from this Version. - "bigqueryTableName": "A String", # Required. Fully qualified BigQuery table name in the following format: " project_id.dataset_name.table_name" The specified table must already exist, and the "Cloud ML Service Agent" for your project must have permission to write to it. The table must have the following [schema](/bigquery/docs/schemas): Field nameType Mode model STRING REQUIRED model_version STRING REQUIRED time TIMESTAMP REQUIRED raw_data STRING REQUIRED raw_prediction STRING NULLABLE groundtruth STRING NULLABLE + "bigqueryTableName": "A String", # Required. Fully qualified BigQuery table name in the following format: " project_id.dataset_name.table_name" The specified table must already exist, and the "Cloud ML Service Agent" for your project must have permission to write to it. The table must have the following [schema](/bigquery/docs/schemas): Field name Type Mode model STRING REQUIRED model_version STRING REQUIRED time TIMESTAMP REQUIRED raw_data STRING REQUIRED raw_prediction STRING NULLABLE groundtruth STRING NULLABLE "samplingPercentage": 3.14, # Percentage of requests to be logged, expressed as a fraction from 0 to 1. For example, if you want to log 10% of requests, enter `0.1`. The sampling window is the lifetime of the model version. Defaults to 0. }, "routes": { # Specifies HTTP paths served by a custom container. AI Platform Prediction sends requests to these paths on the container; the custom container must run an HTTP server that responds to these requests with appropriate responses. Read [Custom container requirements](/ai-platform/prediction/docs/custom-container-requirements) for details on how to create your container image to meet these requirements. # Optional. Specifies paths on a custom container's HTTP server where AI Platform Prediction sends certain requests. If you specify this field, then you must also specify the `container` field. If you specify the `container` field and do not specify this field, it defaults to the following: ```json { "predict": "/v1/models/MODEL/versions/VERSION:predict", "health": "/v1/models/MODEL/versions/VERSION" } ``` See RouteMap for more details about these default values. @@ -446,7 +446,7 @@

Method Details

"predictionClass": "A String", # Optional. The fully qualified name (module_name.class_name) of a class that implements the Predictor interface described in this reference field. The module containing this class should be included in a package provided to the [`packageUris` field](#Version.FIELDS.package_uris). Specify this field if and only if you are deploying a [custom prediction routine (beta)](/ml-engine/docs/tensorflow/custom-prediction-routines). If you specify this field, you must set [`runtimeVersion`](#Version.FIELDS.runtime_version) to 1.4 or greater and you must set `machineType` to a [legacy (MLS1) machine type](/ml-engine/docs/machine-types-online-prediction). The following code sample provides the Predictor interface: class Predictor(object): """Interface for constructing custom predictors.""" def predict(self, instances, **kwargs): """Performs custom prediction. Instances are the decoded values from the request. They have already been deserialized from JSON. Args: instances: A list of prediction input instances. **kwargs: A dictionary of keyword args provided as additional fields on the predict request body. Returns: A list of outputs containing the prediction results. This list must be JSON serializable. """ raise NotImplementedError() @classmethod def from_path(cls, model_dir): """Creates an instance of Predictor using the given path. Loading of the predictor should be done in this method. Args: model_dir: The local directory that contains the exported model file along with any additional files uploaded when creating the version resource. Returns: An instance implementing this Predictor class. """ raise NotImplementedError() Learn more about [the Predictor interface and custom prediction routines](/ml-engine/docs/tensorflow/custom-prediction-routines). "pythonVersion": "A String", # Required. The version of Python used in prediction. The following Python versions are available: * Python '3.7' is available when `runtime_version` is set to '1.15' or later. * Python '3.5' is available when `runtime_version` is set to a version from '1.4' to '1.14'. * Python '2.7' is available when `runtime_version` is set to '1.15' or earlier. Read more about the Python versions available for [each runtime version](/ml-engine/docs/runtime-version-list). "requestLoggingConfig": { # Configuration for logging request-response pairs to a BigQuery table. Online prediction requests to a model version and the responses to these requests are converted to raw strings and saved to the specified BigQuery table. Logging is constrained by [BigQuery quotas and limits](/bigquery/quotas). If your project exceeds BigQuery quotas or limits, AI Platform Prediction does not log request-response pairs, but it continues to serve predictions. If you are using [continuous evaluation](/ml-engine/docs/continuous-evaluation/), you do not need to specify this configuration manually. Setting up continuous evaluation automatically enables logging of request-response pairs. # Optional. *Only* specify this field in a projects.models.versions.patch request. Specifying it in a projects.models.versions.create request has no effect. Configures the request-response pair logging on predictions from this Version. - "bigqueryTableName": "A String", # Required. Fully qualified BigQuery table name in the following format: " project_id.dataset_name.table_name" The specified table must already exist, and the "Cloud ML Service Agent" for your project must have permission to write to it. The table must have the following [schema](/bigquery/docs/schemas): Field nameType Mode model STRING REQUIRED model_version STRING REQUIRED time TIMESTAMP REQUIRED raw_data STRING REQUIRED raw_prediction STRING NULLABLE groundtruth STRING NULLABLE + "bigqueryTableName": "A String", # Required. Fully qualified BigQuery table name in the following format: " project_id.dataset_name.table_name" The specified table must already exist, and the "Cloud ML Service Agent" for your project must have permission to write to it. The table must have the following [schema](/bigquery/docs/schemas): Field name Type Mode model STRING REQUIRED model_version STRING REQUIRED time TIMESTAMP REQUIRED raw_data STRING REQUIRED raw_prediction STRING NULLABLE groundtruth STRING NULLABLE "samplingPercentage": 3.14, # Percentage of requests to be logged, expressed as a fraction from 0 to 1. For example, if you want to log 10% of requests, enter `0.1`. The sampling window is the lifetime of the model version. Defaults to 0. }, "routes": { # Specifies HTTP paths served by a custom container. AI Platform Prediction sends requests to these paths on the container; the custom container must run an HTTP server that responds to these requests with appropriate responses. Read [Custom container requirements](/ai-platform/prediction/docs/custom-container-requirements) for details on how to create your container image to meet these requirements. # Optional. Specifies paths on a custom container's HTTP server where AI Platform Prediction sends certain requests. If you specify this field, then you must also specify the `container` field. If you specify the `container` field and do not specify this field, it defaults to the following: ```json { "predict": "/v1/models/MODEL/versions/VERSION:predict", "health": "/v1/models/MODEL/versions/VERSION" } ``` See RouteMap for more details about these default values. @@ -554,7 +554,7 @@

Method Details

"predictionClass": "A String", # Optional. The fully qualified name (module_name.class_name) of a class that implements the Predictor interface described in this reference field. The module containing this class should be included in a package provided to the [`packageUris` field](#Version.FIELDS.package_uris). Specify this field if and only if you are deploying a [custom prediction routine (beta)](/ml-engine/docs/tensorflow/custom-prediction-routines). If you specify this field, you must set [`runtimeVersion`](#Version.FIELDS.runtime_version) to 1.4 or greater and you must set `machineType` to a [legacy (MLS1) machine type](/ml-engine/docs/machine-types-online-prediction). The following code sample provides the Predictor interface: class Predictor(object): """Interface for constructing custom predictors.""" def predict(self, instances, **kwargs): """Performs custom prediction. Instances are the decoded values from the request. They have already been deserialized from JSON. Args: instances: A list of prediction input instances. **kwargs: A dictionary of keyword args provided as additional fields on the predict request body. Returns: A list of outputs containing the prediction results. This list must be JSON serializable. """ raise NotImplementedError() @classmethod def from_path(cls, model_dir): """Creates an instance of Predictor using the given path. Loading of the predictor should be done in this method. Args: model_dir: The local directory that contains the exported model file along with any additional files uploaded when creating the version resource. Returns: An instance implementing this Predictor class. """ raise NotImplementedError() Learn more about [the Predictor interface and custom prediction routines](/ml-engine/docs/tensorflow/custom-prediction-routines). "pythonVersion": "A String", # Required. The version of Python used in prediction. The following Python versions are available: * Python '3.7' is available when `runtime_version` is set to '1.15' or later. * Python '3.5' is available when `runtime_version` is set to a version from '1.4' to '1.14'. * Python '2.7' is available when `runtime_version` is set to '1.15' or earlier. Read more about the Python versions available for [each runtime version](/ml-engine/docs/runtime-version-list). "requestLoggingConfig": { # Configuration for logging request-response pairs to a BigQuery table. Online prediction requests to a model version and the responses to these requests are converted to raw strings and saved to the specified BigQuery table. Logging is constrained by [BigQuery quotas and limits](/bigquery/quotas). If your project exceeds BigQuery quotas or limits, AI Platform Prediction does not log request-response pairs, but it continues to serve predictions. If you are using [continuous evaluation](/ml-engine/docs/continuous-evaluation/), you do not need to specify this configuration manually. Setting up continuous evaluation automatically enables logging of request-response pairs. # Optional. *Only* specify this field in a projects.models.versions.patch request. Specifying it in a projects.models.versions.create request has no effect. Configures the request-response pair logging on predictions from this Version. - "bigqueryTableName": "A String", # Required. Fully qualified BigQuery table name in the following format: " project_id.dataset_name.table_name" The specified table must already exist, and the "Cloud ML Service Agent" for your project must have permission to write to it. The table must have the following [schema](/bigquery/docs/schemas): Field nameType Mode model STRING REQUIRED model_version STRING REQUIRED time TIMESTAMP REQUIRED raw_data STRING REQUIRED raw_prediction STRING NULLABLE groundtruth STRING NULLABLE + "bigqueryTableName": "A String", # Required. Fully qualified BigQuery table name in the following format: " project_id.dataset_name.table_name" The specified table must already exist, and the "Cloud ML Service Agent" for your project must have permission to write to it. The table must have the following [schema](/bigquery/docs/schemas): Field name Type Mode model STRING REQUIRED model_version STRING REQUIRED time TIMESTAMP REQUIRED raw_data STRING REQUIRED raw_prediction STRING NULLABLE groundtruth STRING NULLABLE "samplingPercentage": 3.14, # Percentage of requests to be logged, expressed as a fraction from 0 to 1. For example, if you want to log 10% of requests, enter `0.1`. The sampling window is the lifetime of the model version. Defaults to 0. }, "routes": { # Specifies HTTP paths served by a custom container. AI Platform Prediction sends requests to these paths on the container; the custom container must run an HTTP server that responds to these requests with appropriate responses. Read [Custom container requirements](/ai-platform/prediction/docs/custom-container-requirements) for details on how to create your container image to meet these requirements. # Optional. Specifies paths on a custom container's HTTP server where AI Platform Prediction sends certain requests. If you specify this field, then you must also specify the `container` field. If you specify the `container` field and do not specify this field, it defaults to the following: ```json { "predict": "/v1/models/MODEL/versions/VERSION:predict", "health": "/v1/models/MODEL/versions/VERSION" } ``` See RouteMap for more details about these default values. @@ -686,7 +686,7 @@

Method Details

"predictionClass": "A String", # Optional. The fully qualified name (module_name.class_name) of a class that implements the Predictor interface described in this reference field. The module containing this class should be included in a package provided to the [`packageUris` field](#Version.FIELDS.package_uris). Specify this field if and only if you are deploying a [custom prediction routine (beta)](/ml-engine/docs/tensorflow/custom-prediction-routines). If you specify this field, you must set [`runtimeVersion`](#Version.FIELDS.runtime_version) to 1.4 or greater and you must set `machineType` to a [legacy (MLS1) machine type](/ml-engine/docs/machine-types-online-prediction). The following code sample provides the Predictor interface: class Predictor(object): """Interface for constructing custom predictors.""" def predict(self, instances, **kwargs): """Performs custom prediction. Instances are the decoded values from the request. They have already been deserialized from JSON. Args: instances: A list of prediction input instances. **kwargs: A dictionary of keyword args provided as additional fields on the predict request body. Returns: A list of outputs containing the prediction results. This list must be JSON serializable. """ raise NotImplementedError() @classmethod def from_path(cls, model_dir): """Creates an instance of Predictor using the given path. Loading of the predictor should be done in this method. Args: model_dir: The local directory that contains the exported model file along with any additional files uploaded when creating the version resource. Returns: An instance implementing this Predictor class. """ raise NotImplementedError() Learn more about [the Predictor interface and custom prediction routines](/ml-engine/docs/tensorflow/custom-prediction-routines). "pythonVersion": "A String", # Required. The version of Python used in prediction. The following Python versions are available: * Python '3.7' is available when `runtime_version` is set to '1.15' or later. * Python '3.5' is available when `runtime_version` is set to a version from '1.4' to '1.14'. * Python '2.7' is available when `runtime_version` is set to '1.15' or earlier. Read more about the Python versions available for [each runtime version](/ml-engine/docs/runtime-version-list). "requestLoggingConfig": { # Configuration for logging request-response pairs to a BigQuery table. Online prediction requests to a model version and the responses to these requests are converted to raw strings and saved to the specified BigQuery table. Logging is constrained by [BigQuery quotas and limits](/bigquery/quotas). If your project exceeds BigQuery quotas or limits, AI Platform Prediction does not log request-response pairs, but it continues to serve predictions. If you are using [continuous evaluation](/ml-engine/docs/continuous-evaluation/), you do not need to specify this configuration manually. Setting up continuous evaluation automatically enables logging of request-response pairs. # Optional. *Only* specify this field in a projects.models.versions.patch request. Specifying it in a projects.models.versions.create request has no effect. Configures the request-response pair logging on predictions from this Version. - "bigqueryTableName": "A String", # Required. Fully qualified BigQuery table name in the following format: " project_id.dataset_name.table_name" The specified table must already exist, and the "Cloud ML Service Agent" for your project must have permission to write to it. The table must have the following [schema](/bigquery/docs/schemas): Field nameType Mode model STRING REQUIRED model_version STRING REQUIRED time TIMESTAMP REQUIRED raw_data STRING REQUIRED raw_prediction STRING NULLABLE groundtruth STRING NULLABLE + "bigqueryTableName": "A String", # Required. Fully qualified BigQuery table name in the following format: " project_id.dataset_name.table_name" The specified table must already exist, and the "Cloud ML Service Agent" for your project must have permission to write to it. The table must have the following [schema](/bigquery/docs/schemas): Field name Type Mode model STRING REQUIRED model_version STRING REQUIRED time TIMESTAMP REQUIRED raw_data STRING REQUIRED raw_prediction STRING NULLABLE groundtruth STRING NULLABLE "samplingPercentage": 3.14, # Percentage of requests to be logged, expressed as a fraction from 0 to 1. For example, if you want to log 10% of requests, enter `0.1`. The sampling window is the lifetime of the model version. Defaults to 0. }, "routes": { # Specifies HTTP paths served by a custom container. AI Platform Prediction sends requests to these paths on the container; the custom container must run an HTTP server that responds to these requests with appropriate responses. Read [Custom container requirements](/ai-platform/prediction/docs/custom-container-requirements) for details on how to create your container image to meet these requirements. # Optional. Specifies paths on a custom container's HTTP server where AI Platform Prediction sends certain requests. If you specify this field, then you must also specify the `container` field. If you specify the `container` field and do not specify this field, it defaults to the following: ```json { "predict": "/v1/models/MODEL/versions/VERSION:predict", "health": "/v1/models/MODEL/versions/VERSION" } ``` See RouteMap for more details about these default values. diff --git a/docs/dyn/netapp_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/netapp_v1.projects.locations.html index 3ece00c9c95..6e22182abd7 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/netapp_v1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/netapp_v1.projects.locations.html @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/netapp_v1.projects.locations.storagePools.html b/docs/dyn/netapp_v1.projects.locations.storagePools.html index 3b641e9769c..cb0a5b6c1e2 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/netapp_v1.projects.locations.storagePools.html +++ b/docs/dyn/netapp_v1.projects.locations.storagePools.html @@ -121,6 +121,7 @@

Method Details

"allowAutoTiering": True or False, # Optional. True if the storage pool supports Auto Tiering enabled volumes. Default is false. Auto-tiering can be enabled after storage pool creation but it can't be disabled once enabled. "availableThroughputMibps": 3.14, # Output only. Available throughput of the storage pool (in MiB/s). "capacityGib": "A String", # Required. Capacity in GIB of the pool + "coldTierSizeUsedGib": "A String", # Output only. Total cold tier data rounded down to the nearest GiB used by the storage pool. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Create time of the storage pool "customPerformanceEnabled": True or False, # Optional. True if using Independent Scaling of capacity and performance (Hyperdisk) By default set to false "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the storage pool @@ -128,6 +129,7 @@

Method Details

"encryptionType": "A String", # Output only. Specifies the current pool encryption key source. "globalAccessAllowed": True or False, # Deprecated. Used to allow SO pool to access AD or DNS server from other regions. "hotTierSizeGib": "A String", # Optional. Total hot tier capacity for the Storage Pool. It is applicable only to Flex service level. It should be less than the minimum storage pool size and cannot be more than the current storage pool size. It cannot be decreased once set. + "hotTierSizeUsedGib": "A String", # Output only. Total hot tier data rounded down to the nearest GiB used by the storage pool. "kmsConfig": "A String", # Optional. Specifies the KMS config to be used for volume encryption. "labels": { # Optional. Labels as key value pairs "a_key": "A String", @@ -234,6 +236,7 @@

Method Details

"allowAutoTiering": True or False, # Optional. True if the storage pool supports Auto Tiering enabled volumes. Default is false. Auto-tiering can be enabled after storage pool creation but it can't be disabled once enabled. "availableThroughputMibps": 3.14, # Output only. Available throughput of the storage pool (in MiB/s). "capacityGib": "A String", # Required. Capacity in GIB of the pool + "coldTierSizeUsedGib": "A String", # Output only. Total cold tier data rounded down to the nearest GiB used by the storage pool. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Create time of the storage pool "customPerformanceEnabled": True or False, # Optional. True if using Independent Scaling of capacity and performance (Hyperdisk) By default set to false "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the storage pool @@ -241,6 +244,7 @@

Method Details

"encryptionType": "A String", # Output only. Specifies the current pool encryption key source. "globalAccessAllowed": True or False, # Deprecated. Used to allow SO pool to access AD or DNS server from other regions. "hotTierSizeGib": "A String", # Optional. Total hot tier capacity for the Storage Pool. It is applicable only to Flex service level. It should be less than the minimum storage pool size and cannot be more than the current storage pool size. It cannot be decreased once set. + "hotTierSizeUsedGib": "A String", # Output only. Total hot tier data rounded down to the nearest GiB used by the storage pool. "kmsConfig": "A String", # Optional. Specifies the KMS config to be used for volume encryption. "labels": { # Optional. Labels as key value pairs "a_key": "A String", @@ -290,6 +294,7 @@

Method Details

"allowAutoTiering": True or False, # Optional. True if the storage pool supports Auto Tiering enabled volumes. Default is false. Auto-tiering can be enabled after storage pool creation but it can't be disabled once enabled. "availableThroughputMibps": 3.14, # Output only. Available throughput of the storage pool (in MiB/s). "capacityGib": "A String", # Required. Capacity in GIB of the pool + "coldTierSizeUsedGib": "A String", # Output only. Total cold tier data rounded down to the nearest GiB used by the storage pool. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Create time of the storage pool "customPerformanceEnabled": True or False, # Optional. True if using Independent Scaling of capacity and performance (Hyperdisk) By default set to false "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the storage pool @@ -297,6 +302,7 @@

Method Details

"encryptionType": "A String", # Output only. Specifies the current pool encryption key source. "globalAccessAllowed": True or False, # Deprecated. Used to allow SO pool to access AD or DNS server from other regions. "hotTierSizeGib": "A String", # Optional. Total hot tier capacity for the Storage Pool. It is applicable only to Flex service level. It should be less than the minimum storage pool size and cannot be more than the current storage pool size. It cannot be decreased once set. + "hotTierSizeUsedGib": "A String", # Output only. Total hot tier data rounded down to the nearest GiB used by the storage pool. "kmsConfig": "A String", # Optional. Specifies the KMS config to be used for volume encryption. "labels": { # Optional. Labels as key value pairs "a_key": "A String", @@ -353,6 +359,7 @@

Method Details

"allowAutoTiering": True or False, # Optional. True if the storage pool supports Auto Tiering enabled volumes. Default is false. Auto-tiering can be enabled after storage pool creation but it can't be disabled once enabled. "availableThroughputMibps": 3.14, # Output only. Available throughput of the storage pool (in MiB/s). "capacityGib": "A String", # Required. Capacity in GIB of the pool + "coldTierSizeUsedGib": "A String", # Output only. Total cold tier data rounded down to the nearest GiB used by the storage pool. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Create time of the storage pool "customPerformanceEnabled": True or False, # Optional. True if using Independent Scaling of capacity and performance (Hyperdisk) By default set to false "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the storage pool @@ -360,6 +367,7 @@

Method Details

"encryptionType": "A String", # Output only. Specifies the current pool encryption key source. "globalAccessAllowed": True or False, # Deprecated. Used to allow SO pool to access AD or DNS server from other regions. "hotTierSizeGib": "A String", # Optional. Total hot tier capacity for the Storage Pool. It is applicable only to Flex service level. It should be less than the minimum storage pool size and cannot be more than the current storage pool size. It cannot be decreased once set. + "hotTierSizeUsedGib": "A String", # Output only. Total hot tier data rounded down to the nearest GiB used by the storage pool. "kmsConfig": "A String", # Optional. Specifies the KMS config to be used for volume encryption. "labels": { # Optional. Labels as key value pairs "a_key": "A String", diff --git a/docs/dyn/netapp_v1.projects.locations.volumes.html b/docs/dyn/netapp_v1.projects.locations.volumes.html index dbe1f4de2d8..7f9691703be 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/netapp_v1.projects.locations.volumes.html +++ b/docs/dyn/netapp_v1.projects.locations.volumes.html @@ -148,6 +148,7 @@

Method Details

{ # An export policy rule describing various export options. "accessType": "A String", # Access type (ReadWrite, ReadOnly, None) "allowedClients": "A String", # Comma separated list of allowed clients IP addresses + "anonUid": "A String", # Optional. An integer representing the anonymous user ID. Range is 0 to 4294967295. Required when squash_mode is ROOT_SQUASH or ALL_SQUASH. "hasRootAccess": "A String", # Whether Unix root access will be granted. "kerberos5ReadOnly": True or False, # If enabled (true) the rule defines a read only access for clients matching the 'allowedClients' specification. It enables nfs clients to mount using 'authentication' kerberos security mode. "kerberos5ReadWrite": True or False, # If enabled (true) the rule defines read and write access for clients matching the 'allowedClients' specification. It enables nfs clients to mount using 'authentication' kerberos security mode. The 'kerberos5ReadOnly' value be ignored if this is enabled. @@ -157,10 +158,12 @@

Method Details

"kerberos5pReadWrite": True or False, # If enabled (true) the rule defines read and write access for clients matching the 'allowedClients' specification. It enables nfs clients to mount using 'privacy' kerberos security mode. The 'kerberos5pReadOnly' value be ignored if this is enabled. "nfsv3": True or False, # NFS V3 protocol. "nfsv4": True or False, # NFS V4 protocol. + "squashMode": "A String", # Optional. Defines how user identity squashing is applied for this export rule. This field is the preferred way to configure squashing behavior and takes precedence over `has_root_access` if both are provided. }, ], }, "hasReplication": True or False, # Output only. Indicates whether the volume is part of a replication relationship. + "hotTierSizeUsedGib": "A String", # Output only. Total hot tier data rounded down to the nearest GiB used by the Volume. This field is only used for flex Service Level "hybridReplicationParameters": { # The Hybrid Replication parameters for the volume. # Optional. The Hybrid Replication parameters for the volume. "clusterLocation": "A String", # Optional. Name of source cluster location associated with the Hybrid replication. This is a free-form field for the display purpose only. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the replication. @@ -355,6 +358,7 @@

Method Details

{ # An export policy rule describing various export options. "accessType": "A String", # Access type (ReadWrite, ReadOnly, None) "allowedClients": "A String", # Comma separated list of allowed clients IP addresses + "anonUid": "A String", # Optional. An integer representing the anonymous user ID. Range is 0 to 4294967295. Required when squash_mode is ROOT_SQUASH or ALL_SQUASH. "hasRootAccess": "A String", # Whether Unix root access will be granted. "kerberos5ReadOnly": True or False, # If enabled (true) the rule defines a read only access for clients matching the 'allowedClients' specification. It enables nfs clients to mount using 'authentication' kerberos security mode. "kerberos5ReadWrite": True or False, # If enabled (true) the rule defines read and write access for clients matching the 'allowedClients' specification. It enables nfs clients to mount using 'authentication' kerberos security mode. The 'kerberos5ReadOnly' value be ignored if this is enabled. @@ -364,10 +368,12 @@

Method Details

"kerberos5pReadWrite": True or False, # If enabled (true) the rule defines read and write access for clients matching the 'allowedClients' specification. It enables nfs clients to mount using 'privacy' kerberos security mode. The 'kerberos5pReadOnly' value be ignored if this is enabled. "nfsv3": True or False, # NFS V3 protocol. "nfsv4": True or False, # NFS V4 protocol. + "squashMode": "A String", # Optional. Defines how user identity squashing is applied for this export rule. This field is the preferred way to configure squashing behavior and takes precedence over `has_root_access` if both are provided. }, ], }, "hasReplication": True or False, # Output only. Indicates whether the volume is part of a replication relationship. + "hotTierSizeUsedGib": "A String", # Output only. Total hot tier data rounded down to the nearest GiB used by the Volume. This field is only used for flex Service Level "hybridReplicationParameters": { # The Hybrid Replication parameters for the volume. # Optional. The Hybrid Replication parameters for the volume. "clusterLocation": "A String", # Optional. Name of source cluster location associated with the Hybrid replication. This is a free-form field for the display purpose only. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the replication. @@ -507,6 +513,7 @@

Method Details

{ # An export policy rule describing various export options. "accessType": "A String", # Access type (ReadWrite, ReadOnly, None) "allowedClients": "A String", # Comma separated list of allowed clients IP addresses + "anonUid": "A String", # Optional. An integer representing the anonymous user ID. Range is 0 to 4294967295. Required when squash_mode is ROOT_SQUASH or ALL_SQUASH. "hasRootAccess": "A String", # Whether Unix root access will be granted. "kerberos5ReadOnly": True or False, # If enabled (true) the rule defines a read only access for clients matching the 'allowedClients' specification. It enables nfs clients to mount using 'authentication' kerberos security mode. "kerberos5ReadWrite": True or False, # If enabled (true) the rule defines read and write access for clients matching the 'allowedClients' specification. It enables nfs clients to mount using 'authentication' kerberos security mode. The 'kerberos5ReadOnly' value be ignored if this is enabled. @@ -516,10 +523,12 @@

Method Details

"kerberos5pReadWrite": True or False, # If enabled (true) the rule defines read and write access for clients matching the 'allowedClients' specification. It enables nfs clients to mount using 'privacy' kerberos security mode. The 'kerberos5pReadOnly' value be ignored if this is enabled. "nfsv3": True or False, # NFS V3 protocol. "nfsv4": True or False, # NFS V4 protocol. + "squashMode": "A String", # Optional. Defines how user identity squashing is applied for this export rule. This field is the preferred way to configure squashing behavior and takes precedence over `has_root_access` if both are provided. }, ], }, "hasReplication": True or False, # Output only. Indicates whether the volume is part of a replication relationship. + "hotTierSizeUsedGib": "A String", # Output only. Total hot tier data rounded down to the nearest GiB used by the Volume. This field is only used for flex Service Level "hybridReplicationParameters": { # The Hybrid Replication parameters for the volume. # Optional. The Hybrid Replication parameters for the volume. "clusterLocation": "A String", # Optional. Name of source cluster location associated with the Hybrid replication. This is a free-form field for the display purpose only. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the replication. @@ -660,6 +669,7 @@

Method Details

{ # An export policy rule describing various export options. "accessType": "A String", # Access type (ReadWrite, ReadOnly, None) "allowedClients": "A String", # Comma separated list of allowed clients IP addresses + "anonUid": "A String", # Optional. An integer representing the anonymous user ID. Range is 0 to 4294967295. Required when squash_mode is ROOT_SQUASH or ALL_SQUASH. "hasRootAccess": "A String", # Whether Unix root access will be granted. "kerberos5ReadOnly": True or False, # If enabled (true) the rule defines a read only access for clients matching the 'allowedClients' specification. It enables nfs clients to mount using 'authentication' kerberos security mode. "kerberos5ReadWrite": True or False, # If enabled (true) the rule defines read and write access for clients matching the 'allowedClients' specification. It enables nfs clients to mount using 'authentication' kerberos security mode. The 'kerberos5ReadOnly' value be ignored if this is enabled. @@ -669,10 +679,12 @@

Method Details

"kerberos5pReadWrite": True or False, # If enabled (true) the rule defines read and write access for clients matching the 'allowedClients' specification. It enables nfs clients to mount using 'privacy' kerberos security mode. The 'kerberos5pReadOnly' value be ignored if this is enabled. "nfsv3": True or False, # NFS V3 protocol. "nfsv4": True or False, # NFS V4 protocol. + "squashMode": "A String", # Optional. Defines how user identity squashing is applied for this export rule. This field is the preferred way to configure squashing behavior and takes precedence over `has_root_access` if both are provided. }, ], }, "hasReplication": True or False, # Output only. Indicates whether the volume is part of a replication relationship. + "hotTierSizeUsedGib": "A String", # Output only. Total hot tier data rounded down to the nearest GiB used by the Volume. This field is only used for flex Service Level "hybridReplicationParameters": { # The Hybrid Replication parameters for the volume. # Optional. The Hybrid Replication parameters for the volume. "clusterLocation": "A String", # Optional. Name of source cluster location associated with the Hybrid replication. This is a free-form field for the display purpose only. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the replication. diff --git a/docs/dyn/netapp_v1beta1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/netapp_v1beta1.projects.locations.html index 4887e461026..b2d6d3c69e3 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/netapp_v1beta1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/netapp_v1beta1.projects.locations.html @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/netapp_v1beta1.projects.locations.storagePools.html b/docs/dyn/netapp_v1beta1.projects.locations.storagePools.html index 2c2d7d9c32d..3b79e334ad9 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/netapp_v1beta1.projects.locations.storagePools.html +++ b/docs/dyn/netapp_v1beta1.projects.locations.storagePools.html @@ -121,6 +121,7 @@

Method Details

"allowAutoTiering": True or False, # Optional. True if the storage pool supports Auto Tiering enabled volumes. Default is false. Auto-tiering can be enabled after storage pool creation but it can't be disabled once enabled. "availableThroughputMibps": 3.14, # Output only. Available throughput of the storage pool (in MiB/s). "capacityGib": "A String", # Required. Capacity in GIB of the pool + "coldTierSizeUsedGib": "A String", # Output only. Total cold tier data rounded down to the nearest GiB used by the storage pool. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Create time of the storage pool "customPerformanceEnabled": True or False, # Optional. True if using Independent Scaling of capacity and performance (Hyperdisk) By default set to false "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the storage pool @@ -128,6 +129,7 @@

Method Details

"encryptionType": "A String", # Output only. Specifies the current pool encryption key source. "globalAccessAllowed": True or False, # Deprecated. Used to allow SO pool to access AD or DNS server from other regions. "hotTierSizeGib": "A String", # Optional. Total hot tier capacity for the Storage Pool. It is applicable only to Flex service level. It should be less than the minimum storage pool size and cannot be more than the current storage pool size. It cannot be decreased once set. + "hotTierSizeUsedGib": "A String", # Output only. Total hot tier data rounded down to the nearest GiB used by the storage pool. "kmsConfig": "A String", # Optional. Specifies the KMS config to be used for volume encryption. "labels": { # Optional. Labels as key value pairs "a_key": "A String", @@ -234,6 +236,7 @@

Method Details

"allowAutoTiering": True or False, # Optional. True if the storage pool supports Auto Tiering enabled volumes. Default is false. Auto-tiering can be enabled after storage pool creation but it can't be disabled once enabled. "availableThroughputMibps": 3.14, # Output only. Available throughput of the storage pool (in MiB/s). "capacityGib": "A String", # Required. Capacity in GIB of the pool + "coldTierSizeUsedGib": "A String", # Output only. Total cold tier data rounded down to the nearest GiB used by the storage pool. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Create time of the storage pool "customPerformanceEnabled": True or False, # Optional. True if using Independent Scaling of capacity and performance (Hyperdisk) By default set to false "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the storage pool @@ -241,6 +244,7 @@

Method Details

"encryptionType": "A String", # Output only. Specifies the current pool encryption key source. "globalAccessAllowed": True or False, # Deprecated. Used to allow SO pool to access AD or DNS server from other regions. "hotTierSizeGib": "A String", # Optional. Total hot tier capacity for the Storage Pool. It is applicable only to Flex service level. It should be less than the minimum storage pool size and cannot be more than the current storage pool size. It cannot be decreased once set. + "hotTierSizeUsedGib": "A String", # Output only. Total hot tier data rounded down to the nearest GiB used by the storage pool. "kmsConfig": "A String", # Optional. Specifies the KMS config to be used for volume encryption. "labels": { # Optional. Labels as key value pairs "a_key": "A String", @@ -290,6 +294,7 @@

Method Details

"allowAutoTiering": True or False, # Optional. True if the storage pool supports Auto Tiering enabled volumes. Default is false. Auto-tiering can be enabled after storage pool creation but it can't be disabled once enabled. "availableThroughputMibps": 3.14, # Output only. Available throughput of the storage pool (in MiB/s). "capacityGib": "A String", # Required. Capacity in GIB of the pool + "coldTierSizeUsedGib": "A String", # Output only. Total cold tier data rounded down to the nearest GiB used by the storage pool. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Create time of the storage pool "customPerformanceEnabled": True or False, # Optional. True if using Independent Scaling of capacity and performance (Hyperdisk) By default set to false "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the storage pool @@ -297,6 +302,7 @@

Method Details

"encryptionType": "A String", # Output only. Specifies the current pool encryption key source. "globalAccessAllowed": True or False, # Deprecated. Used to allow SO pool to access AD or DNS server from other regions. "hotTierSizeGib": "A String", # Optional. Total hot tier capacity for the Storage Pool. It is applicable only to Flex service level. It should be less than the minimum storage pool size and cannot be more than the current storage pool size. It cannot be decreased once set. + "hotTierSizeUsedGib": "A String", # Output only. Total hot tier data rounded down to the nearest GiB used by the storage pool. "kmsConfig": "A String", # Optional. Specifies the KMS config to be used for volume encryption. "labels": { # Optional. Labels as key value pairs "a_key": "A String", @@ -353,6 +359,7 @@

Method Details

"allowAutoTiering": True or False, # Optional. True if the storage pool supports Auto Tiering enabled volumes. Default is false. Auto-tiering can be enabled after storage pool creation but it can't be disabled once enabled. "availableThroughputMibps": 3.14, # Output only. Available throughput of the storage pool (in MiB/s). "capacityGib": "A String", # Required. Capacity in GIB of the pool + "coldTierSizeUsedGib": "A String", # Output only. Total cold tier data rounded down to the nearest GiB used by the storage pool. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Create time of the storage pool "customPerformanceEnabled": True or False, # Optional. True if using Independent Scaling of capacity and performance (Hyperdisk) By default set to false "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the storage pool @@ -360,6 +367,7 @@

Method Details

"encryptionType": "A String", # Output only. Specifies the current pool encryption key source. "globalAccessAllowed": True or False, # Deprecated. Used to allow SO pool to access AD or DNS server from other regions. "hotTierSizeGib": "A String", # Optional. Total hot tier capacity for the Storage Pool. It is applicable only to Flex service level. It should be less than the minimum storage pool size and cannot be more than the current storage pool size. It cannot be decreased once set. + "hotTierSizeUsedGib": "A String", # Output only. Total hot tier data rounded down to the nearest GiB used by the storage pool. "kmsConfig": "A String", # Optional. Specifies the KMS config to be used for volume encryption. "labels": { # Optional. Labels as key value pairs "a_key": "A String", diff --git a/docs/dyn/netapp_v1beta1.projects.locations.volumes.html b/docs/dyn/netapp_v1beta1.projects.locations.volumes.html index 6f3f7ffb31d..be144421f64 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/netapp_v1beta1.projects.locations.volumes.html +++ b/docs/dyn/netapp_v1beta1.projects.locations.volumes.html @@ -171,6 +171,7 @@

Method Details

{ # An export policy rule describing various export options. "accessType": "A String", # Access type (ReadWrite, ReadOnly, None) "allowedClients": "A String", # Comma separated list of allowed clients IP addresses + "anonUid": "A String", # Optional. An integer representing the anonymous user ID. Range is 0 to 4294967295. Required when squash_mode is ROOT_SQUASH or ALL_SQUASH. "hasRootAccess": "A String", # Whether Unix root access will be granted. "kerberos5ReadOnly": True or False, # If enabled (true) the rule defines a read only access for clients matching the 'allowedClients' specification. It enables nfs clients to mount using 'authentication' kerberos security mode. "kerberos5ReadWrite": True or False, # If enabled (true) the rule defines read and write access for clients matching the 'allowedClients' specification. It enables nfs clients to mount using 'authentication' kerberos security mode. The 'kerberos5ReadOnly' value be ignored if this is enabled. @@ -180,10 +181,12 @@

Method Details

"kerberos5pReadWrite": True or False, # If enabled (true) the rule defines read and write access for clients matching the 'allowedClients' specification. It enables nfs clients to mount using 'privacy' kerberos security mode. The 'kerberos5pReadOnly' value be ignored if this is enabled. "nfsv3": True or False, # NFS V3 protocol. "nfsv4": True or False, # NFS V4 protocol. + "squashMode": "A String", # Optional. Defines how user identity squashing is applied for this export rule. This field is the preferred way to configure squashing behavior and takes precedence over `has_root_access` if both are provided. }, ], }, "hasReplication": True or False, # Output only. Indicates whether the volume is part of a replication relationship. + "hotTierSizeUsedGib": "A String", # Output only. Total hot tier data rounded down to the nearest GiB used by the Volume. This field is only used for flex Service Level "hybridReplicationParameters": { # The Hybrid Replication parameters for the volume. # Optional. The Hybrid Replication parameters for the volume. "clusterLocation": "A String", # Optional. Name of source cluster location associated with the Hybrid replication. This is a free-form field for the display purpose only. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the replication. @@ -442,6 +445,7 @@

Method Details

{ # An export policy rule describing various export options. "accessType": "A String", # Access type (ReadWrite, ReadOnly, None) "allowedClients": "A String", # Comma separated list of allowed clients IP addresses + "anonUid": "A String", # Optional. An integer representing the anonymous user ID. Range is 0 to 4294967295. Required when squash_mode is ROOT_SQUASH or ALL_SQUASH. "hasRootAccess": "A String", # Whether Unix root access will be granted. "kerberos5ReadOnly": True or False, # If enabled (true) the rule defines a read only access for clients matching the 'allowedClients' specification. It enables nfs clients to mount using 'authentication' kerberos security mode. "kerberos5ReadWrite": True or False, # If enabled (true) the rule defines read and write access for clients matching the 'allowedClients' specification. It enables nfs clients to mount using 'authentication' kerberos security mode. The 'kerberos5ReadOnly' value be ignored if this is enabled. @@ -451,10 +455,12 @@

Method Details

"kerberos5pReadWrite": True or False, # If enabled (true) the rule defines read and write access for clients matching the 'allowedClients' specification. It enables nfs clients to mount using 'privacy' kerberos security mode. The 'kerberos5pReadOnly' value be ignored if this is enabled. "nfsv3": True or False, # NFS V3 protocol. "nfsv4": True or False, # NFS V4 protocol. + "squashMode": "A String", # Optional. Defines how user identity squashing is applied for this export rule. This field is the preferred way to configure squashing behavior and takes precedence over `has_root_access` if both are provided. }, ], }, "hasReplication": True or False, # Output only. Indicates whether the volume is part of a replication relationship. + "hotTierSizeUsedGib": "A String", # Output only. Total hot tier data rounded down to the nearest GiB used by the Volume. This field is only used for flex Service Level "hybridReplicationParameters": { # The Hybrid Replication parameters for the volume. # Optional. The Hybrid Replication parameters for the volume. "clusterLocation": "A String", # Optional. Name of source cluster location associated with the Hybrid replication. This is a free-form field for the display purpose only. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the replication. @@ -611,6 +617,7 @@

Method Details

{ # An export policy rule describing various export options. "accessType": "A String", # Access type (ReadWrite, ReadOnly, None) "allowedClients": "A String", # Comma separated list of allowed clients IP addresses + "anonUid": "A String", # Optional. An integer representing the anonymous user ID. Range is 0 to 4294967295. Required when squash_mode is ROOT_SQUASH or ALL_SQUASH. "hasRootAccess": "A String", # Whether Unix root access will be granted. "kerberos5ReadOnly": True or False, # If enabled (true) the rule defines a read only access for clients matching the 'allowedClients' specification. It enables nfs clients to mount using 'authentication' kerberos security mode. "kerberos5ReadWrite": True or False, # If enabled (true) the rule defines read and write access for clients matching the 'allowedClients' specification. It enables nfs clients to mount using 'authentication' kerberos security mode. The 'kerberos5ReadOnly' value be ignored if this is enabled. @@ -620,10 +627,12 @@

Method Details

"kerberos5pReadWrite": True or False, # If enabled (true) the rule defines read and write access for clients matching the 'allowedClients' specification. It enables nfs clients to mount using 'privacy' kerberos security mode. The 'kerberos5pReadOnly' value be ignored if this is enabled. "nfsv3": True or False, # NFS V3 protocol. "nfsv4": True or False, # NFS V4 protocol. + "squashMode": "A String", # Optional. Defines how user identity squashing is applied for this export rule. This field is the preferred way to configure squashing behavior and takes precedence over `has_root_access` if both are provided. }, ], }, "hasReplication": True or False, # Output only. Indicates whether the volume is part of a replication relationship. + "hotTierSizeUsedGib": "A String", # Output only. Total hot tier data rounded down to the nearest GiB used by the Volume. This field is only used for flex Service Level "hybridReplicationParameters": { # The Hybrid Replication parameters for the volume. # Optional. The Hybrid Replication parameters for the volume. "clusterLocation": "A String", # Optional. Name of source cluster location associated with the Hybrid replication. This is a free-form field for the display purpose only. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the replication. @@ -781,6 +790,7 @@

Method Details

{ # An export policy rule describing various export options. "accessType": "A String", # Access type (ReadWrite, ReadOnly, None) "allowedClients": "A String", # Comma separated list of allowed clients IP addresses + "anonUid": "A String", # Optional. An integer representing the anonymous user ID. Range is 0 to 4294967295. Required when squash_mode is ROOT_SQUASH or ALL_SQUASH. "hasRootAccess": "A String", # Whether Unix root access will be granted. "kerberos5ReadOnly": True or False, # If enabled (true) the rule defines a read only access for clients matching the 'allowedClients' specification. It enables nfs clients to mount using 'authentication' kerberos security mode. "kerberos5ReadWrite": True or False, # If enabled (true) the rule defines read and write access for clients matching the 'allowedClients' specification. It enables nfs clients to mount using 'authentication' kerberos security mode. The 'kerberos5ReadOnly' value be ignored if this is enabled. @@ -790,10 +800,12 @@

Method Details

"kerberos5pReadWrite": True or False, # If enabled (true) the rule defines read and write access for clients matching the 'allowedClients' specification. It enables nfs clients to mount using 'privacy' kerberos security mode. The 'kerberos5pReadOnly' value be ignored if this is enabled. "nfsv3": True or False, # NFS V3 protocol. "nfsv4": True or False, # NFS V4 protocol. + "squashMode": "A String", # Optional. Defines how user identity squashing is applied for this export rule. This field is the preferred way to configure squashing behavior and takes precedence over `has_root_access` if both are provided. }, ], }, "hasReplication": True or False, # Output only. Indicates whether the volume is part of a replication relationship. + "hotTierSizeUsedGib": "A String", # Output only. Total hot tier data rounded down to the nearest GiB used by the Volume. This field is only used for flex Service Level "hybridReplicationParameters": { # The Hybrid Replication parameters for the volume. # Optional. The Hybrid Replication parameters for the volume. "clusterLocation": "A String", # Optional. Name of source cluster location associated with the Hybrid replication. This is a free-form field for the display purpose only. "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the replication. diff --git a/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1.organizations.locations.html b/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1.organizations.locations.html index d4366192e90..7c153ffa1fa 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1.organizations.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1.organizations.locations.html @@ -79,6 +79,11 @@

Instance Methods

Returns the operations Resource.

+

+ vpcFlowLogsConfigs() +

+

Returns the vpcFlowLogsConfigs Resource.

+

close()

Close httplib2 connections.

@@ -130,7 +135,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1.organizations.locations.vpcFlowLogsConfigs.html b/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1.organizations.locations.vpcFlowLogsConfigs.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..48afb194e71 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1.organizations.locations.vpcFlowLogsConfigs.html @@ -0,0 +1,369 @@ + + + +

Network Management API . organizations . locations . vpcFlowLogsConfigs

+

Instance Methods

+

+ close()

+

Close httplib2 connections.

+

+ create(parent, body=None, vpcFlowLogsConfigId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Creates a new `VpcFlowLogsConfig`. If a configuration with the exact same settings already exists (even if the ID is different), the creation fails. Notes: 1. Creating a configuration with `state=DISABLED` will fail 2. The following fields are not considered as settings for the purpose of the check mentioned above, therefore - creating another configuration with the same fields but different values for the following fields will fail as well: * name * create_time * update_time * labels * description

+

+ delete(name, x__xgafv=None)

+

Deletes a specific `VpcFlowLogsConfig`.

+

+ get(name, x__xgafv=None)

+

Gets the details of a specific `VpcFlowLogsConfig`.

+

+ list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Lists all `VpcFlowLogsConfigs` in a given organization.

+

+ list_next()

+

Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+ patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Updates an existing `VpcFlowLogsConfig`. If a configuration with the exact same settings already exists (even if the ID is different), the creation fails. Notes: 1. Updating a configuration with `state=DISABLED` will fail 2. The following fields are not considered as settings for the purpose of the check mentioned above, therefore - updating another configuration with the same fields but different values for the following fields will fail as well: * name * create_time * update_time * labels * description

+

Method Details

+
+ close() +
Close httplib2 connections.
+
+ +
+ create(parent, body=None, vpcFlowLogsConfigId=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Creates a new `VpcFlowLogsConfig`. If a configuration with the exact same settings already exists (even if the ID is different), the creation fails. Notes: 1. Creating a configuration with `state=DISABLED` will fail 2. The following fields are not considered as settings for the purpose of the check mentioned above, therefore - creating another configuration with the same fields but different values for the following fields will fail as well: * name * create_time * update_time * labels * description
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent resource of the VpcFlowLogsConfig to create, in one of the following formats: - For project-level resources: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global` - For organization-level resources: `organizations/{organization_id}/locations/global` (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # A configuration to generate VPC Flow Logs.
+  "aggregationInterval": "A String", # Optional. The aggregation interval for the logs. Default value is INTERVAL_5_SEC.
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time the config was created.
+  "crossProjectMetadata": "A String", # Optional. Determines whether to include cross project annotations in the logs. This field is available only for organization configurations. If not specified in org configs will be set to CROSS_PROJECT_METADATA_ENABLED.
+  "description": "A String", # Optional. The user-supplied description of the VPC Flow Logs configuration. Maximum of 512 characters.
+  "filterExpr": "A String", # Optional. Export filter used to define which VPC Flow Logs should be logged.
+  "flowSampling": 3.14, # Optional. The value of the field must be in (0, 1]. The sampling rate of VPC Flow Logs where 1.0 means all collected logs are reported. Setting the sampling rate to 0.0 is not allowed. If you want to disable VPC Flow Logs, use the state field instead. Default value is 1.0.
+  "interconnectAttachment": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from the Interconnect Attachment. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/interconnectAttachments/{name}
+  "labels": { # Optional. Resource labels to represent user-provided metadata.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "metadata": "A String", # Optional. Configures whether all, none or a subset of metadata fields should be added to the reported VPC flow logs. Default value is INCLUDE_ALL_METADATA.
+  "metadataFields": [ # Optional. Custom metadata fields to include in the reported VPC flow logs. Can only be specified if "metadata" was set to CUSTOM_METADATA.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. Unique name of the configuration. The name can have one of the following forms: - For project-level configurations: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}` - For organization-level configurations: `organizations/{organization_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}`
+  "network": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from VMs, VPN tunnels and Interconnect Attachments within the network. Format: projects/{project_id}/global/networks/{name}
+  "state": "A String", # Optional. The state of the VPC Flow Log configuration. Default value is ENABLED. When creating a new configuration, it must be enabled. Setting state=DISABLED will pause the log generation for this config.
+  "subnet": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from VMs within the subnetwork. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/subnetworks/{name}
+  "targetResourceState": "A String", # Output only. Describes the state of the configured target resource for diagnostic purposes.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time the config was updated.
+  "vpnTunnel": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from the VPN Tunnel. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/vpnTunnels/{name}
+}
+
+  vpcFlowLogsConfigId: string, Required. ID of the `VpcFlowLogsConfig`.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  "response": { # The normal, successful response of the operation. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}
+
+ +
+ delete(name, x__xgafv=None) +
Deletes a specific `VpcFlowLogsConfig`.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the VpcFlowLogsConfig, in one of the following formats: - For a project-level resource: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}` - For an organization-level resource: `organizations/{organization_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}` (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  "response": { # The normal, successful response of the operation. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}
+
+ +
+ get(name, x__xgafv=None) +
Gets the details of a specific `VpcFlowLogsConfig`.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the VpcFlowLogsConfig, in one of the following formats: - For project-level resources: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}` - For organization-level resources: `organizations/{organization_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}` (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A configuration to generate VPC Flow Logs.
+  "aggregationInterval": "A String", # Optional. The aggregation interval for the logs. Default value is INTERVAL_5_SEC.
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time the config was created.
+  "crossProjectMetadata": "A String", # Optional. Determines whether to include cross project annotations in the logs. This field is available only for organization configurations. If not specified in org configs will be set to CROSS_PROJECT_METADATA_ENABLED.
+  "description": "A String", # Optional. The user-supplied description of the VPC Flow Logs configuration. Maximum of 512 characters.
+  "filterExpr": "A String", # Optional. Export filter used to define which VPC Flow Logs should be logged.
+  "flowSampling": 3.14, # Optional. The value of the field must be in (0, 1]. The sampling rate of VPC Flow Logs where 1.0 means all collected logs are reported. Setting the sampling rate to 0.0 is not allowed. If you want to disable VPC Flow Logs, use the state field instead. Default value is 1.0.
+  "interconnectAttachment": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from the Interconnect Attachment. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/interconnectAttachments/{name}
+  "labels": { # Optional. Resource labels to represent user-provided metadata.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "metadata": "A String", # Optional. Configures whether all, none or a subset of metadata fields should be added to the reported VPC flow logs. Default value is INCLUDE_ALL_METADATA.
+  "metadataFields": [ # Optional. Custom metadata fields to include in the reported VPC flow logs. Can only be specified if "metadata" was set to CUSTOM_METADATA.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. Unique name of the configuration. The name can have one of the following forms: - For project-level configurations: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}` - For organization-level configurations: `organizations/{organization_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}`
+  "network": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from VMs, VPN tunnels and Interconnect Attachments within the network. Format: projects/{project_id}/global/networks/{name}
+  "state": "A String", # Optional. The state of the VPC Flow Log configuration. Default value is ENABLED. When creating a new configuration, it must be enabled. Setting state=DISABLED will pause the log generation for this config.
+  "subnet": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from VMs within the subnetwork. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/subnetworks/{name}
+  "targetResourceState": "A String", # Output only. Describes the state of the configured target resource for diagnostic purposes.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time the config was updated.
+  "vpnTunnel": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from the VPN Tunnel. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/vpnTunnels/{name}
+}
+
+ +
+ list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Lists all `VpcFlowLogsConfigs` in a given organization.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent resource of the VpcFlowLogsConfig, in one of the following formats: - For project-level resourcs: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global` - For organization-level resources: `organizations/{organization_id}/locations/global` (required)
+  filter: string, Optional. Lists the `VpcFlowLogsConfigs` that match the filter expression. A filter expression must use the supported [CEL logic operators] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-flow-logs-records#supported_cel_logic_operators).
+  orderBy: string, Optional. Field to use to sort the list.
+  pageSize: integer, Optional. Number of `VpcFlowLogsConfigs` to return.
+  pageToken: string, Optional. Page token from an earlier query, as returned in `next_page_token`.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Response for the `ListVpcFlowLogsConfigs` method.
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # Page token to fetch the next set of configurations.
+  "unreachable": [ # Locations that could not be reached (when querying all locations with `-`).
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "vpcFlowLogsConfigs": [ # List of VPC Flow Log configurations.
+    { # A configuration to generate VPC Flow Logs.
+      "aggregationInterval": "A String", # Optional. The aggregation interval for the logs. Default value is INTERVAL_5_SEC.
+      "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time the config was created.
+      "crossProjectMetadata": "A String", # Optional. Determines whether to include cross project annotations in the logs. This field is available only for organization configurations. If not specified in org configs will be set to CROSS_PROJECT_METADATA_ENABLED.
+      "description": "A String", # Optional. The user-supplied description of the VPC Flow Logs configuration. Maximum of 512 characters.
+      "filterExpr": "A String", # Optional. Export filter used to define which VPC Flow Logs should be logged.
+      "flowSampling": 3.14, # Optional. The value of the field must be in (0, 1]. The sampling rate of VPC Flow Logs where 1.0 means all collected logs are reported. Setting the sampling rate to 0.0 is not allowed. If you want to disable VPC Flow Logs, use the state field instead. Default value is 1.0.
+      "interconnectAttachment": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from the Interconnect Attachment. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/interconnectAttachments/{name}
+      "labels": { # Optional. Resource labels to represent user-provided metadata.
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+      "metadata": "A String", # Optional. Configures whether all, none or a subset of metadata fields should be added to the reported VPC flow logs. Default value is INCLUDE_ALL_METADATA.
+      "metadataFields": [ # Optional. Custom metadata fields to include in the reported VPC flow logs. Can only be specified if "metadata" was set to CUSTOM_METADATA.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "name": "A String", # Identifier. Unique name of the configuration. The name can have one of the following forms: - For project-level configurations: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}` - For organization-level configurations: `organizations/{organization_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}`
+      "network": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from VMs, VPN tunnels and Interconnect Attachments within the network. Format: projects/{project_id}/global/networks/{name}
+      "state": "A String", # Optional. The state of the VPC Flow Log configuration. Default value is ENABLED. When creating a new configuration, it must be enabled. Setting state=DISABLED will pause the log generation for this config.
+      "subnet": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from VMs within the subnetwork. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/subnetworks/{name}
+      "targetResourceState": "A String", # Output only. Describes the state of the configured target resource for diagnostic purposes.
+      "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time the config was updated.
+      "vpnTunnel": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from the VPN Tunnel. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/vpnTunnels/{name}
+    },
+  ],
+}
+
+ +
+ list_next() +
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        
+
+ +
+ patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Updates an existing `VpcFlowLogsConfig`. If a configuration with the exact same settings already exists (even if the ID is different), the creation fails. Notes: 1. Updating a configuration with `state=DISABLED` will fail 2. The following fields are not considered as settings for the purpose of the check mentioned above, therefore - updating another configuration with the same fields but different values for the following fields will fail as well: * name * create_time * update_time * labels * description
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Identifier. Unique name of the configuration. The name can have one of the following forms: - For project-level configurations: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}` - For organization-level configurations: `organizations/{organization_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}` (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # A configuration to generate VPC Flow Logs.
+  "aggregationInterval": "A String", # Optional. The aggregation interval for the logs. Default value is INTERVAL_5_SEC.
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time the config was created.
+  "crossProjectMetadata": "A String", # Optional. Determines whether to include cross project annotations in the logs. This field is available only for organization configurations. If not specified in org configs will be set to CROSS_PROJECT_METADATA_ENABLED.
+  "description": "A String", # Optional. The user-supplied description of the VPC Flow Logs configuration. Maximum of 512 characters.
+  "filterExpr": "A String", # Optional. Export filter used to define which VPC Flow Logs should be logged.
+  "flowSampling": 3.14, # Optional. The value of the field must be in (0, 1]. The sampling rate of VPC Flow Logs where 1.0 means all collected logs are reported. Setting the sampling rate to 0.0 is not allowed. If you want to disable VPC Flow Logs, use the state field instead. Default value is 1.0.
+  "interconnectAttachment": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from the Interconnect Attachment. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/interconnectAttachments/{name}
+  "labels": { # Optional. Resource labels to represent user-provided metadata.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "metadata": "A String", # Optional. Configures whether all, none or a subset of metadata fields should be added to the reported VPC flow logs. Default value is INCLUDE_ALL_METADATA.
+  "metadataFields": [ # Optional. Custom metadata fields to include in the reported VPC flow logs. Can only be specified if "metadata" was set to CUSTOM_METADATA.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. Unique name of the configuration. The name can have one of the following forms: - For project-level configurations: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}` - For organization-level configurations: `organizations/{organization_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}`
+  "network": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from VMs, VPN tunnels and Interconnect Attachments within the network. Format: projects/{project_id}/global/networks/{name}
+  "state": "A String", # Optional. The state of the VPC Flow Log configuration. Default value is ENABLED. When creating a new configuration, it must be enabled. Setting state=DISABLED will pause the log generation for this config.
+  "subnet": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from VMs within the subnetwork. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/subnetworks/{name}
+  "targetResourceState": "A String", # Output only. Describes the state of the configured target resource for diagnostic purposes.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time the config was updated.
+  "vpnTunnel": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from the VPN Tunnel. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/vpnTunnels/{name}
+}
+
+  updateMask: string, Required. Mask of fields to update. At least one path must be supplied in this field. For example, to change the state of the configuration to ENABLED, specify `update_mask` = `"state"`, and the `vpc_flow_logs_config` would be: `vpc_flow_logs_config = { name = "projects/my-project/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/my-config" state = "ENABLED" }`
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  "response": { # The normal, successful response of the operation. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}
+
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1.projects.locations.global_.connectivityTests.html b/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1.projects.locations.global_.connectivityTests.html index 1f6c047ba1b..e432c4c968d 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1.projects.locations.global_.connectivityTests.html +++ b/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1.projects.locations.global_.connectivityTests.html @@ -360,6 +360,11 @@

Method Details

"googleServiceType": "A String", # Recognized type of a Google Service. "sourceIp": "A String", # Source IP address. }, + "hybridSubnet": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a hybrid subnet. # Display information of a hybrid subnet. + "displayName": "A String", # Name of a hybrid subnet. + "region": "A String", # Name of a Google Cloud region where the hybrid subnet is configured. + "uri": "A String", # URI of a hybrid subnet. + }, "instance": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a Compute Engine instance. # Display information of a Compute Engine instance. "displayName": "A String", # Name of a Compute Engine instance. "externalIp": "A String", # External IP address of the network interface. @@ -379,7 +384,9 @@

Method Details

"cloudRouterUri": "A String", # URI of the Cloud Router to be used for dynamic routing. "displayName": "A String", # Name of an Interconnect attachment. "interconnectUri": "A String", # URI of the Interconnect where the Interconnect attachment is configured. + "l2AttachmentMatchedIpAddress": "A String", # Appliance IP address that was matched for L2_DEDICATED attachments. "region": "A String", # Name of a Google Cloud region where the Interconnect attachment is configured. + "type": "A String", # The type of interconnect attachment this is. "uri": "A String", # URI of an Interconnect attachment. }, "loadBalancer": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a load balancer. # Display information of the load balancers. Deprecated in favor of the `load_balancer_backend_info` field, not used in new tests. @@ -686,6 +693,11 @@

Method Details

"googleServiceType": "A String", # Recognized type of a Google Service. "sourceIp": "A String", # Source IP address. }, + "hybridSubnet": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a hybrid subnet. # Display information of a hybrid subnet. + "displayName": "A String", # Name of a hybrid subnet. + "region": "A String", # Name of a Google Cloud region where the hybrid subnet is configured. + "uri": "A String", # URI of a hybrid subnet. + }, "instance": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a Compute Engine instance. # Display information of a Compute Engine instance. "displayName": "A String", # Name of a Compute Engine instance. "externalIp": "A String", # External IP address of the network interface. @@ -705,7 +717,9 @@

Method Details

"cloudRouterUri": "A String", # URI of the Cloud Router to be used for dynamic routing. "displayName": "A String", # Name of an Interconnect attachment. "interconnectUri": "A String", # URI of the Interconnect where the Interconnect attachment is configured. + "l2AttachmentMatchedIpAddress": "A String", # Appliance IP address that was matched for L2_DEDICATED attachments. "region": "A String", # Name of a Google Cloud region where the Interconnect attachment is configured. + "type": "A String", # The type of interconnect attachment this is. "uri": "A String", # URI of an Interconnect attachment. }, "loadBalancer": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a load balancer. # Display information of the load balancers. Deprecated in favor of the `load_balancer_backend_info` field, not used in new tests. @@ -1213,6 +1227,11 @@

Method Details

"googleServiceType": "A String", # Recognized type of a Google Service. "sourceIp": "A String", # Source IP address. }, + "hybridSubnet": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a hybrid subnet. # Display information of a hybrid subnet. + "displayName": "A String", # Name of a hybrid subnet. + "region": "A String", # Name of a Google Cloud region where the hybrid subnet is configured. + "uri": "A String", # URI of a hybrid subnet. + }, "instance": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a Compute Engine instance. # Display information of a Compute Engine instance. "displayName": "A String", # Name of a Compute Engine instance. "externalIp": "A String", # External IP address of the network interface. @@ -1232,7 +1251,9 @@

Method Details

"cloudRouterUri": "A String", # URI of the Cloud Router to be used for dynamic routing. "displayName": "A String", # Name of an Interconnect attachment. "interconnectUri": "A String", # URI of the Interconnect where the Interconnect attachment is configured. + "l2AttachmentMatchedIpAddress": "A String", # Appliance IP address that was matched for L2_DEDICATED attachments. "region": "A String", # Name of a Google Cloud region where the Interconnect attachment is configured. + "type": "A String", # The type of interconnect attachment this is. "uri": "A String", # URI of an Interconnect attachment. }, "loadBalancer": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a load balancer. # Display information of the load balancers. Deprecated in favor of the `load_balancer_backend_info` field, not used in new tests. @@ -1539,6 +1560,11 @@

Method Details

"googleServiceType": "A String", # Recognized type of a Google Service. "sourceIp": "A String", # Source IP address. }, + "hybridSubnet": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a hybrid subnet. # Display information of a hybrid subnet. + "displayName": "A String", # Name of a hybrid subnet. + "region": "A String", # Name of a Google Cloud region where the hybrid subnet is configured. + "uri": "A String", # URI of a hybrid subnet. + }, "instance": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a Compute Engine instance. # Display information of a Compute Engine instance. "displayName": "A String", # Name of a Compute Engine instance. "externalIp": "A String", # External IP address of the network interface. @@ -1558,7 +1584,9 @@

Method Details

"cloudRouterUri": "A String", # URI of the Cloud Router to be used for dynamic routing. "displayName": "A String", # Name of an Interconnect attachment. "interconnectUri": "A String", # URI of the Interconnect where the Interconnect attachment is configured. + "l2AttachmentMatchedIpAddress": "A String", # Appliance IP address that was matched for L2_DEDICATED attachments. "region": "A String", # Name of a Google Cloud region where the Interconnect attachment is configured. + "type": "A String", # The type of interconnect attachment this is. "uri": "A String", # URI of an Interconnect attachment. }, "loadBalancer": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a load balancer. # Display information of the load balancers. Deprecated in favor of the `load_balancer_backend_info` field, not used in new tests. @@ -2057,6 +2085,11 @@

Method Details

"googleServiceType": "A String", # Recognized type of a Google Service. "sourceIp": "A String", # Source IP address. }, + "hybridSubnet": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a hybrid subnet. # Display information of a hybrid subnet. + "displayName": "A String", # Name of a hybrid subnet. + "region": "A String", # Name of a Google Cloud region where the hybrid subnet is configured. + "uri": "A String", # URI of a hybrid subnet. + }, "instance": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a Compute Engine instance. # Display information of a Compute Engine instance. "displayName": "A String", # Name of a Compute Engine instance. "externalIp": "A String", # External IP address of the network interface. @@ -2076,7 +2109,9 @@

Method Details

"cloudRouterUri": "A String", # URI of the Cloud Router to be used for dynamic routing. "displayName": "A String", # Name of an Interconnect attachment. "interconnectUri": "A String", # URI of the Interconnect where the Interconnect attachment is configured. + "l2AttachmentMatchedIpAddress": "A String", # Appliance IP address that was matched for L2_DEDICATED attachments. "region": "A String", # Name of a Google Cloud region where the Interconnect attachment is configured. + "type": "A String", # The type of interconnect attachment this is. "uri": "A String", # URI of an Interconnect attachment. }, "loadBalancer": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a load balancer. # Display information of the load balancers. Deprecated in favor of the `load_balancer_backend_info` field, not used in new tests. @@ -2383,6 +2418,11 @@

Method Details

"googleServiceType": "A String", # Recognized type of a Google Service. "sourceIp": "A String", # Source IP address. }, + "hybridSubnet": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a hybrid subnet. # Display information of a hybrid subnet. + "displayName": "A String", # Name of a hybrid subnet. + "region": "A String", # Name of a Google Cloud region where the hybrid subnet is configured. + "uri": "A String", # URI of a hybrid subnet. + }, "instance": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a Compute Engine instance. # Display information of a Compute Engine instance. "displayName": "A String", # Name of a Compute Engine instance. "externalIp": "A String", # External IP address of the network interface. @@ -2402,7 +2442,9 @@

Method Details

"cloudRouterUri": "A String", # URI of the Cloud Router to be used for dynamic routing. "displayName": "A String", # Name of an Interconnect attachment. "interconnectUri": "A String", # URI of the Interconnect where the Interconnect attachment is configured. + "l2AttachmentMatchedIpAddress": "A String", # Appliance IP address that was matched for L2_DEDICATED attachments. "region": "A String", # Name of a Google Cloud region where the Interconnect attachment is configured. + "type": "A String", # The type of interconnect attachment this is. "uri": "A String", # URI of an Interconnect attachment. }, "loadBalancer": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a load balancer. # Display information of the load balancers. Deprecated in favor of the `load_balancer_backend_info` field, not used in new tests. @@ -2860,6 +2902,11 @@

Method Details

"googleServiceType": "A String", # Recognized type of a Google Service. "sourceIp": "A String", # Source IP address. }, + "hybridSubnet": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a hybrid subnet. # Display information of a hybrid subnet. + "displayName": "A String", # Name of a hybrid subnet. + "region": "A String", # Name of a Google Cloud region where the hybrid subnet is configured. + "uri": "A String", # URI of a hybrid subnet. + }, "instance": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a Compute Engine instance. # Display information of a Compute Engine instance. "displayName": "A String", # Name of a Compute Engine instance. "externalIp": "A String", # External IP address of the network interface. @@ -2879,7 +2926,9 @@

Method Details

"cloudRouterUri": "A String", # URI of the Cloud Router to be used for dynamic routing. "displayName": "A String", # Name of an Interconnect attachment. "interconnectUri": "A String", # URI of the Interconnect where the Interconnect attachment is configured. + "l2AttachmentMatchedIpAddress": "A String", # Appliance IP address that was matched for L2_DEDICATED attachments. "region": "A String", # Name of a Google Cloud region where the Interconnect attachment is configured. + "type": "A String", # The type of interconnect attachment this is. "uri": "A String", # URI of an Interconnect attachment. }, "loadBalancer": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a load balancer. # Display information of the load balancers. Deprecated in favor of the `load_balancer_backend_info` field, not used in new tests. @@ -3186,6 +3235,11 @@

Method Details

"googleServiceType": "A String", # Recognized type of a Google Service. "sourceIp": "A String", # Source IP address. }, + "hybridSubnet": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a hybrid subnet. # Display information of a hybrid subnet. + "displayName": "A String", # Name of a hybrid subnet. + "region": "A String", # Name of a Google Cloud region where the hybrid subnet is configured. + "uri": "A String", # URI of a hybrid subnet. + }, "instance": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a Compute Engine instance. # Display information of a Compute Engine instance. "displayName": "A String", # Name of a Compute Engine instance. "externalIp": "A String", # External IP address of the network interface. @@ -3205,7 +3259,9 @@

Method Details

"cloudRouterUri": "A String", # URI of the Cloud Router to be used for dynamic routing. "displayName": "A String", # Name of an Interconnect attachment. "interconnectUri": "A String", # URI of the Interconnect where the Interconnect attachment is configured. + "l2AttachmentMatchedIpAddress": "A String", # Appliance IP address that was matched for L2_DEDICATED attachments. "region": "A String", # Name of a Google Cloud region where the Interconnect attachment is configured. + "type": "A String", # The type of interconnect attachment this is. "uri": "A String", # URI of an Interconnect attachment. }, "loadBalancer": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a load balancer. # Display information of the load balancers. Deprecated in favor of the `load_balancer_backend_info` field, not used in new tests. diff --git a/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1.projects.locations.html index 698b0d5d240..880f56bb119 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1.projects.locations.html @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1.projects.locations.vpcFlowLogsConfigs.html b/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1.projects.locations.vpcFlowLogsConfigs.html index dd04efec170..93fbd12f9c3 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1.projects.locations.vpcFlowLogsConfigs.html +++ b/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1.projects.locations.vpcFlowLogsConfigs.html @@ -95,6 +95,18 @@

Instance Methods

patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)

Updates an existing `VpcFlowLogsConfig`. If a configuration with the exact same settings already exists (even if the ID is different), the creation fails. Notes: 1. Updating a configuration with `state=DISABLED` will fail. 2. The following fields are not considered as settings for the purpose of the check mentioned above, therefore - updating another configuration with the same fields but different values for the following fields will fail as well: * name * create_time * update_time * labels * description

+

+ queryOrgVpcFlowLogsConfigs(parent, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

QueryOrgVpcFlowLogsConfigs returns a list of all organization-level VPC Flow Logs configurations applicable to the specified project.

+

+ queryOrgVpcFlowLogsConfigs_next()

+

Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+ showEffectiveFlowLogsConfigs(parent, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, resource=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

ShowEffectiveFlowLogsConfigs returns a list of all VPC Flow Logs configurations applicable to a specified resource.

+

+ showEffectiveFlowLogsConfigs_next()

+

Retrieves the next page of results.

Method Details

close() @@ -113,6 +125,7 @@

Method Details

{ # A configuration to generate VPC Flow Logs. "aggregationInterval": "A String", # Optional. The aggregation interval for the logs. Default value is INTERVAL_5_SEC. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time the config was created. + "crossProjectMetadata": "A String", # Optional. Determines whether to include cross project annotations in the logs. This field is available only for organization configurations. If not specified in org configs will be set to CROSS_PROJECT_METADATA_ENABLED. "description": "A String", # Optional. The user-supplied description of the VPC Flow Logs configuration. Maximum of 512 characters. "filterExpr": "A String", # Optional. Export filter used to define which VPC Flow Logs should be logged. "flowSampling": 3.14, # Optional. The value of the field must be in (0, 1]. The sampling rate of VPC Flow Logs where 1.0 means all collected logs are reported. Setting the sampling rate to 0.0 is not allowed. If you want to disable VPC Flow Logs, use the state field instead. Default value is 1.0. @@ -125,7 +138,9 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], "name": "A String", # Identifier. Unique name of the configuration. The name can have one of the following forms: - For project-level configurations: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}` - For organization-level configurations: `organizations/{organization_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}` + "network": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from VMs, VPN tunnels and Interconnect Attachments within the network. Format: projects/{project_id}/global/networks/{name} "state": "A String", # Optional. The state of the VPC Flow Log configuration. Default value is ENABLED. When creating a new configuration, it must be enabled. Setting state=DISABLED will pause the log generation for this config. + "subnet": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from VMs within the subnetwork. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/subnetworks/{name} "targetResourceState": "A String", # Output only. Describes the state of the configured target resource for diagnostic purposes. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time the config was updated. "vpnTunnel": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from the VPN Tunnel. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/vpnTunnels/{name} @@ -213,6 +228,7 @@

Method Details

{ # A configuration to generate VPC Flow Logs. "aggregationInterval": "A String", # Optional. The aggregation interval for the logs. Default value is INTERVAL_5_SEC. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time the config was created. + "crossProjectMetadata": "A String", # Optional. Determines whether to include cross project annotations in the logs. This field is available only for organization configurations. If not specified in org configs will be set to CROSS_PROJECT_METADATA_ENABLED. "description": "A String", # Optional. The user-supplied description of the VPC Flow Logs configuration. Maximum of 512 characters. "filterExpr": "A String", # Optional. Export filter used to define which VPC Flow Logs should be logged. "flowSampling": 3.14, # Optional. The value of the field must be in (0, 1]. The sampling rate of VPC Flow Logs where 1.0 means all collected logs are reported. Setting the sampling rate to 0.0 is not allowed. If you want to disable VPC Flow Logs, use the state field instead. Default value is 1.0. @@ -225,7 +241,9 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], "name": "A String", # Identifier. Unique name of the configuration. The name can have one of the following forms: - For project-level configurations: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}` - For organization-level configurations: `organizations/{organization_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}` + "network": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from VMs, VPN tunnels and Interconnect Attachments within the network. Format: projects/{project_id}/global/networks/{name} "state": "A String", # Optional. The state of the VPC Flow Log configuration. Default value is ENABLED. When creating a new configuration, it must be enabled. Setting state=DISABLED will pause the log generation for this config. + "subnet": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from VMs within the subnetwork. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/subnetworks/{name} "targetResourceState": "A String", # Output only. Describes the state of the configured target resource for diagnostic purposes. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time the config was updated. "vpnTunnel": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from the VPN Tunnel. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/vpnTunnels/{name} @@ -259,6 +277,7 @@

Method Details

{ # A configuration to generate VPC Flow Logs. "aggregationInterval": "A String", # Optional. The aggregation interval for the logs. Default value is INTERVAL_5_SEC. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time the config was created. + "crossProjectMetadata": "A String", # Optional. Determines whether to include cross project annotations in the logs. This field is available only for organization configurations. If not specified in org configs will be set to CROSS_PROJECT_METADATA_ENABLED. "description": "A String", # Optional. The user-supplied description of the VPC Flow Logs configuration. Maximum of 512 characters. "filterExpr": "A String", # Optional. Export filter used to define which VPC Flow Logs should be logged. "flowSampling": 3.14, # Optional. The value of the field must be in (0, 1]. The sampling rate of VPC Flow Logs where 1.0 means all collected logs are reported. Setting the sampling rate to 0.0 is not allowed. If you want to disable VPC Flow Logs, use the state field instead. Default value is 1.0. @@ -271,7 +290,9 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], "name": "A String", # Identifier. Unique name of the configuration. The name can have one of the following forms: - For project-level configurations: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}` - For organization-level configurations: `organizations/{organization_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}` + "network": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from VMs, VPN tunnels and Interconnect Attachments within the network. Format: projects/{project_id}/global/networks/{name} "state": "A String", # Optional. The state of the VPC Flow Log configuration. Default value is ENABLED. When creating a new configuration, it must be enabled. Setting state=DISABLED will pause the log generation for this config. + "subnet": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from VMs within the subnetwork. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/subnetworks/{name} "targetResourceState": "A String", # Output only. Describes the state of the configured target resource for diagnostic purposes. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time the config was updated. "vpnTunnel": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from the VPN Tunnel. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/vpnTunnels/{name} @@ -306,6 +327,7 @@

Method Details

{ # A configuration to generate VPC Flow Logs. "aggregationInterval": "A String", # Optional. The aggregation interval for the logs. Default value is INTERVAL_5_SEC. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time the config was created. + "crossProjectMetadata": "A String", # Optional. Determines whether to include cross project annotations in the logs. This field is available only for organization configurations. If not specified in org configs will be set to CROSS_PROJECT_METADATA_ENABLED. "description": "A String", # Optional. The user-supplied description of the VPC Flow Logs configuration. Maximum of 512 characters. "filterExpr": "A String", # Optional. Export filter used to define which VPC Flow Logs should be logged. "flowSampling": 3.14, # Optional. The value of the field must be in (0, 1]. The sampling rate of VPC Flow Logs where 1.0 means all collected logs are reported. Setting the sampling rate to 0.0 is not allowed. If you want to disable VPC Flow Logs, use the state field instead. Default value is 1.0. @@ -318,7 +340,9 @@

Method Details

"A String", ], "name": "A String", # Identifier. Unique name of the configuration. The name can have one of the following forms: - For project-level configurations: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}` - For organization-level configurations: `organizations/{organization_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}` + "network": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from VMs, VPN tunnels and Interconnect Attachments within the network. Format: projects/{project_id}/global/networks/{name} "state": "A String", # Optional. The state of the VPC Flow Log configuration. Default value is ENABLED. When creating a new configuration, it must be enabled. Setting state=DISABLED will pause the log generation for this config. + "subnet": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from VMs within the subnetwork. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/subnetworks/{name} "targetResourceState": "A String", # Output only. Describes the state of the configured target resource for diagnostic purposes. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time the config was updated. "vpnTunnel": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from the VPN Tunnel. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/vpnTunnels/{name} @@ -354,4 +378,127 @@

Method Details

}
+
+ queryOrgVpcFlowLogsConfigs(parent, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None) +
QueryOrgVpcFlowLogsConfigs returns a list of all organization-level VPC Flow Logs configurations applicable to the specified project.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent resource of the VpcFlowLogsConfig, specified in the following format: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global` (required)
+  filter: string, Optional. Lists the `VpcFlowLogsConfigs` that match the filter expression. A filter expression must use the supported [CEL logic operators] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-flow-logs-records#supported_cel_logic_operators).
+  pageSize: integer, Optional. Number of `VpcFlowLogsConfigs` to return.
+  pageToken: string, Optional. Page token from an earlier query, as returned in `next_page_token`.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Response for the `QueryVpcFlowLogsConfigs` method.
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # Page token to fetch the next set of configurations.
+  "unreachable": [ # Locations that could not be reached (when querying all locations with `-`).
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "vpcFlowLogsConfigs": [ # List of VPC Flow Log configurations.
+    { # A configuration to generate VPC Flow Logs.
+      "aggregationInterval": "A String", # Optional. The aggregation interval for the logs. Default value is INTERVAL_5_SEC.
+      "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time the config was created.
+      "crossProjectMetadata": "A String", # Optional. Determines whether to include cross project annotations in the logs. This field is available only for organization configurations. If not specified in org configs will be set to CROSS_PROJECT_METADATA_ENABLED.
+      "description": "A String", # Optional. The user-supplied description of the VPC Flow Logs configuration. Maximum of 512 characters.
+      "filterExpr": "A String", # Optional. Export filter used to define which VPC Flow Logs should be logged.
+      "flowSampling": 3.14, # Optional. The value of the field must be in (0, 1]. The sampling rate of VPC Flow Logs where 1.0 means all collected logs are reported. Setting the sampling rate to 0.0 is not allowed. If you want to disable VPC Flow Logs, use the state field instead. Default value is 1.0.
+      "interconnectAttachment": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from the Interconnect Attachment. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/interconnectAttachments/{name}
+      "labels": { # Optional. Resource labels to represent user-provided metadata.
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+      "metadata": "A String", # Optional. Configures whether all, none or a subset of metadata fields should be added to the reported VPC flow logs. Default value is INCLUDE_ALL_METADATA.
+      "metadataFields": [ # Optional. Custom metadata fields to include in the reported VPC flow logs. Can only be specified if "metadata" was set to CUSTOM_METADATA.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "name": "A String", # Identifier. Unique name of the configuration. The name can have one of the following forms: - For project-level configurations: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}` - For organization-level configurations: `organizations/{organization_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}`
+      "network": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from VMs, VPN tunnels and Interconnect Attachments within the network. Format: projects/{project_id}/global/networks/{name}
+      "state": "A String", # Optional. The state of the VPC Flow Log configuration. Default value is ENABLED. When creating a new configuration, it must be enabled. Setting state=DISABLED will pause the log generation for this config.
+      "subnet": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from VMs within the subnetwork. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/subnetworks/{name}
+      "targetResourceState": "A String", # Output only. Describes the state of the configured target resource for diagnostic purposes.
+      "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time the config was updated.
+      "vpnTunnel": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from the VPN Tunnel. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/vpnTunnels/{name}
+    },
+  ],
+}
+
+ +
+ queryOrgVpcFlowLogsConfigs_next() +
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        
+
+ +
+ showEffectiveFlowLogsConfigs(parent, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, resource=None, x__xgafv=None) +
ShowEffectiveFlowLogsConfigs returns a list of all VPC Flow Logs configurations applicable to a specified resource.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent resource of the VpcFlowLogsConfig, specified in the following format: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global` (required)
+  filter: string, Optional. Lists the `EffectiveVpcFlowLogsConfigs` that match the filter expression. A filter expression must use the supported [CEL logic operators] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-flow-logs-records#supported_cel_logic_operators).
+  pageSize: integer, Optional. Number of `EffectiveVpcFlowLogsConfigs` to return. Default is 30.
+  pageToken: string, Optional. Page token from an earlier query, as returned in `next_page_token`.
+  resource: string, Required. The resource to get the effective VPC Flow Logs configuration for. The resource must belong to the same project as the parent. The resource must be a network, subnetwork, interconnect attachment, VPN tunnel, or a project.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Response for the `ShowEffectiveFlowLogsConfigs` method.
+  "effectiveFlowLogsConfigs": [ # List of Effective Vpc Flow Logs configurations.
+    { # A configuration to generate a response for GetEffectiveVpcFlowLogsConfig request.
+      "aggregationInterval": "A String", # The aggregation interval for the logs. Default value is INTERVAL_5_SEC.
+      "crossProjectMetadata": "A String", # Determines whether to include cross project annotations in the logs. This field is available only for organization configurations. If not specified in org configs will be set to CROSS_PROJECT_METADATA_ENABLED.
+      "filterExpr": "A String", # Export filter used to define which VPC Flow Logs should be logged.
+      "flowSampling": 3.14, # The value of the field must be in (0, 1]. The sampling rate of VPC Flow Logs where 1.0 means all collected logs are reported. Setting the sampling rate to 0.0 is not allowed. If you want to disable VPC Flow Logs, use the state field instead. Default value is 1.0.
+      "interconnectAttachment": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from the Interconnect Attachment. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/interconnectAttachments/{name}
+      "metadata": "A String", # Configures whether all, none or a subset of metadata fields should be added to the reported VPC flow logs. Default value is INCLUDE_ALL_METADATA.
+      "metadataFields": [ # Custom metadata fields to include in the reported VPC flow logs. Can only be specified if "metadata" was set to CUSTOM_METADATA.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "name": "A String", # Unique name of the configuration. The name can have one of the following forms: - For project-level configurations: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}` - For organization-level configurations: `organizations/{organization_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}` - For a Compute config, the name will be the path of the subnet: `projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/subnetworks/{subnet_id}`
+      "network": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from VMs, VPN tunnels and Interconnect Attachments within the network. Format: projects/{project_id}/global/networks/{name}
+      "scope": "A String", # Specifies the scope of the config (e.g., SUBNET, NETWORK, ORGANIZATION..).
+      "state": "A String", # The state of the VPC Flow Log configuration. Default value is ENABLED. When creating a new configuration, it must be enabled. Setting state=DISABLED will pause the log generation for this config.
+      "subnet": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from VMs within the subnetwork. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/subnetworks/{name}
+      "vpnTunnel": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from the VPN Tunnel. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/vpnTunnels/{name}
+    },
+  ],
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # Page token to fetch the next set of configurations.
+  "unreachable": [ # Locations that could not be reached (when querying all locations with `-`).
+    "A String",
+  ],
+}
+
+ +
+ showEffectiveFlowLogsConfigs_next() +
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        
+
+ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1beta1.organizations.locations.html b/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1beta1.organizations.locations.html index c92e2771cf5..1583ecfa07e 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1beta1.organizations.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1beta1.organizations.locations.html @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1beta1.projects.locations.global_.connectivityTests.html b/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1beta1.projects.locations.global_.connectivityTests.html index b3191fcd51a..df9027fdbc7 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1beta1.projects.locations.global_.connectivityTests.html +++ b/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1beta1.projects.locations.global_.connectivityTests.html @@ -143,6 +143,7 @@

Method Details

"forwardingRuleTarget": "A String", # Output only. Specifies the type of the target of the forwarding rule. "fqdn": "A String", # DNS endpoint of [Google Kubernetes Engine cluster control plane](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/cluster-architecture). Requires gke_master_cluster to be set, can't be used simultaneoulsly with ip_address or network. Applicable only to destination endpoint. "gkeMasterCluster": "A String", # A cluster URI for [Google Kubernetes Engine cluster control plane](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/cluster-architecture). + "gkePod": "A String", # A [GKE Pod](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/pod) URI. "instance": "A String", # A Compute Engine instance URI. "ipAddress": "A String", # The IP address of the endpoint, which can be an external or internal IP. "loadBalancerId": "A String", # Output only. ID of the load balancer the forwarding rule points to. Empty for forwarding rules not related to load balancers. @@ -361,6 +362,11 @@

Method Details

"googleServiceType": "A String", # Recognized type of a Google Service. "sourceIp": "A String", # Source IP address. }, + "hybridSubnet": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a hybrid subnet. # Display information of a hybrid subnet. + "displayName": "A String", # Name of a hybrid subnet. + "region": "A String", # Name of a Google Cloud region where the hybrid subnet is configured. + "uri": "A String", # URI of a hybrid subnet. + }, "instance": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a Compute Engine instance. # Display information of a Compute Engine instance. "displayName": "A String", # Name of a Compute Engine instance. "externalIp": "A String", # External IP address of the network interface. @@ -380,7 +386,9 @@

Method Details

"cloudRouterUri": "A String", # URI of the Cloud Router to be used for dynamic routing. "displayName": "A String", # Name of an Interconnect attachment. "interconnectUri": "A String", # URI of the Interconnect where the Interconnect attachment is configured. + "l2AttachmentMatchedIpAddress": "A String", # Appliance IP address that was matched for L2_DEDICATED attachments. "region": "A String", # Name of a Google Cloud region where the Interconnect attachment is configured. + "type": "A String", # The type of interconnect attachment this is. "uri": "A String", # URI of an Interconnect attachment. }, "loadBalancer": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a load balancer. # Display information of the load balancers. Deprecated in favor of the `load_balancer_backend_info` field, not used in new tests. @@ -687,6 +695,11 @@

Method Details

"googleServiceType": "A String", # Recognized type of a Google Service. "sourceIp": "A String", # Source IP address. }, + "hybridSubnet": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a hybrid subnet. # Display information of a hybrid subnet. + "displayName": "A String", # Name of a hybrid subnet. + "region": "A String", # Name of a Google Cloud region where the hybrid subnet is configured. + "uri": "A String", # URI of a hybrid subnet. + }, "instance": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a Compute Engine instance. # Display information of a Compute Engine instance. "displayName": "A String", # Name of a Compute Engine instance. "externalIp": "A String", # External IP address of the network interface. @@ -706,7 +719,9 @@

Method Details

"cloudRouterUri": "A String", # URI of the Cloud Router to be used for dynamic routing. "displayName": "A String", # Name of an Interconnect attachment. "interconnectUri": "A String", # URI of the Interconnect where the Interconnect attachment is configured. + "l2AttachmentMatchedIpAddress": "A String", # Appliance IP address that was matched for L2_DEDICATED attachments. "region": "A String", # Name of a Google Cloud region where the Interconnect attachment is configured. + "type": "A String", # The type of interconnect attachment this is. "uri": "A String", # URI of an Interconnect attachment. }, "loadBalancer": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a load balancer. # Display information of the load balancers. Deprecated in favor of the `load_balancer_backend_info` field, not used in new tests. @@ -884,6 +899,7 @@

Method Details

"forwardingRuleTarget": "A String", # Output only. Specifies the type of the target of the forwarding rule. "fqdn": "A String", # DNS endpoint of [Google Kubernetes Engine cluster control plane](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/cluster-architecture). Requires gke_master_cluster to be set, can't be used simultaneoulsly with ip_address or network. Applicable only to destination endpoint. "gkeMasterCluster": "A String", # A cluster URI for [Google Kubernetes Engine cluster control plane](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/cluster-architecture). + "gkePod": "A String", # A [GKE Pod](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/pod) URI. "instance": "A String", # A Compute Engine instance URI. "ipAddress": "A String", # The IP address of the endpoint, which can be an external or internal IP. "loadBalancerId": "A String", # Output only. ID of the load balancer the forwarding rule points to. Empty for forwarding rules not related to load balancers. @@ -998,6 +1014,7 @@

Method Details

"forwardingRuleTarget": "A String", # Output only. Specifies the type of the target of the forwarding rule. "fqdn": "A String", # DNS endpoint of [Google Kubernetes Engine cluster control plane](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/cluster-architecture). Requires gke_master_cluster to be set, can't be used simultaneoulsly with ip_address or network. Applicable only to destination endpoint. "gkeMasterCluster": "A String", # A cluster URI for [Google Kubernetes Engine cluster control plane](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/cluster-architecture). + "gkePod": "A String", # A [GKE Pod](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/pod) URI. "instance": "A String", # A Compute Engine instance URI. "ipAddress": "A String", # The IP address of the endpoint, which can be an external or internal IP. "loadBalancerId": "A String", # Output only. ID of the load balancer the forwarding rule points to. Empty for forwarding rules not related to load balancers. @@ -1216,6 +1233,11 @@

Method Details

"googleServiceType": "A String", # Recognized type of a Google Service. "sourceIp": "A String", # Source IP address. }, + "hybridSubnet": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a hybrid subnet. # Display information of a hybrid subnet. + "displayName": "A String", # Name of a hybrid subnet. + "region": "A String", # Name of a Google Cloud region where the hybrid subnet is configured. + "uri": "A String", # URI of a hybrid subnet. + }, "instance": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a Compute Engine instance. # Display information of a Compute Engine instance. "displayName": "A String", # Name of a Compute Engine instance. "externalIp": "A String", # External IP address of the network interface. @@ -1235,7 +1257,9 @@

Method Details

"cloudRouterUri": "A String", # URI of the Cloud Router to be used for dynamic routing. "displayName": "A String", # Name of an Interconnect attachment. "interconnectUri": "A String", # URI of the Interconnect where the Interconnect attachment is configured. + "l2AttachmentMatchedIpAddress": "A String", # Appliance IP address that was matched for L2_DEDICATED attachments. "region": "A String", # Name of a Google Cloud region where the Interconnect attachment is configured. + "type": "A String", # The type of interconnect attachment this is. "uri": "A String", # URI of an Interconnect attachment. }, "loadBalancer": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a load balancer. # Display information of the load balancers. Deprecated in favor of the `load_balancer_backend_info` field, not used in new tests. @@ -1542,6 +1566,11 @@

Method Details

"googleServiceType": "A String", # Recognized type of a Google Service. "sourceIp": "A String", # Source IP address. }, + "hybridSubnet": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a hybrid subnet. # Display information of a hybrid subnet. + "displayName": "A String", # Name of a hybrid subnet. + "region": "A String", # Name of a Google Cloud region where the hybrid subnet is configured. + "uri": "A String", # URI of a hybrid subnet. + }, "instance": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a Compute Engine instance. # Display information of a Compute Engine instance. "displayName": "A String", # Name of a Compute Engine instance. "externalIp": "A String", # External IP address of the network interface. @@ -1561,7 +1590,9 @@

Method Details

"cloudRouterUri": "A String", # URI of the Cloud Router to be used for dynamic routing. "displayName": "A String", # Name of an Interconnect attachment. "interconnectUri": "A String", # URI of the Interconnect where the Interconnect attachment is configured. + "l2AttachmentMatchedIpAddress": "A String", # Appliance IP address that was matched for L2_DEDICATED attachments. "region": "A String", # Name of a Google Cloud region where the Interconnect attachment is configured. + "type": "A String", # The type of interconnect attachment this is. "uri": "A String", # URI of an Interconnect attachment. }, "loadBalancer": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a load balancer. # Display information of the load balancers. Deprecated in favor of the `load_balancer_backend_info` field, not used in new tests. @@ -1739,6 +1770,7 @@

Method Details

"forwardingRuleTarget": "A String", # Output only. Specifies the type of the target of the forwarding rule. "fqdn": "A String", # DNS endpoint of [Google Kubernetes Engine cluster control plane](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/cluster-architecture). Requires gke_master_cluster to be set, can't be used simultaneoulsly with ip_address or network. Applicable only to destination endpoint. "gkeMasterCluster": "A String", # A cluster URI for [Google Kubernetes Engine cluster control plane](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/cluster-architecture). + "gkePod": "A String", # A [GKE Pod](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/pod) URI. "instance": "A String", # A Compute Engine instance URI. "ipAddress": "A String", # The IP address of the endpoint, which can be an external or internal IP. "loadBalancerId": "A String", # Output only. ID of the load balancer the forwarding rule points to. Empty for forwarding rules not related to load balancers. @@ -1844,6 +1876,7 @@

Method Details

"forwardingRuleTarget": "A String", # Output only. Specifies the type of the target of the forwarding rule. "fqdn": "A String", # DNS endpoint of [Google Kubernetes Engine cluster control plane](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/cluster-architecture). Requires gke_master_cluster to be set, can't be used simultaneoulsly with ip_address or network. Applicable only to destination endpoint. "gkeMasterCluster": "A String", # A cluster URI for [Google Kubernetes Engine cluster control plane](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/cluster-architecture). + "gkePod": "A String", # A [GKE Pod](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/pod) URI. "instance": "A String", # A Compute Engine instance URI. "ipAddress": "A String", # The IP address of the endpoint, which can be an external or internal IP. "loadBalancerId": "A String", # Output only. ID of the load balancer the forwarding rule points to. Empty for forwarding rules not related to load balancers. @@ -2062,6 +2095,11 @@

Method Details

"googleServiceType": "A String", # Recognized type of a Google Service. "sourceIp": "A String", # Source IP address. }, + "hybridSubnet": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a hybrid subnet. # Display information of a hybrid subnet. + "displayName": "A String", # Name of a hybrid subnet. + "region": "A String", # Name of a Google Cloud region where the hybrid subnet is configured. + "uri": "A String", # URI of a hybrid subnet. + }, "instance": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a Compute Engine instance. # Display information of a Compute Engine instance. "displayName": "A String", # Name of a Compute Engine instance. "externalIp": "A String", # External IP address of the network interface. @@ -2081,7 +2119,9 @@

Method Details

"cloudRouterUri": "A String", # URI of the Cloud Router to be used for dynamic routing. "displayName": "A String", # Name of an Interconnect attachment. "interconnectUri": "A String", # URI of the Interconnect where the Interconnect attachment is configured. + "l2AttachmentMatchedIpAddress": "A String", # Appliance IP address that was matched for L2_DEDICATED attachments. "region": "A String", # Name of a Google Cloud region where the Interconnect attachment is configured. + "type": "A String", # The type of interconnect attachment this is. "uri": "A String", # URI of an Interconnect attachment. }, "loadBalancer": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a load balancer. # Display information of the load balancers. Deprecated in favor of the `load_balancer_backend_info` field, not used in new tests. @@ -2388,6 +2428,11 @@

Method Details

"googleServiceType": "A String", # Recognized type of a Google Service. "sourceIp": "A String", # Source IP address. }, + "hybridSubnet": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a hybrid subnet. # Display information of a hybrid subnet. + "displayName": "A String", # Name of a hybrid subnet. + "region": "A String", # Name of a Google Cloud region where the hybrid subnet is configured. + "uri": "A String", # URI of a hybrid subnet. + }, "instance": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a Compute Engine instance. # Display information of a Compute Engine instance. "displayName": "A String", # Name of a Compute Engine instance. "externalIp": "A String", # External IP address of the network interface. @@ -2407,7 +2452,9 @@

Method Details

"cloudRouterUri": "A String", # URI of the Cloud Router to be used for dynamic routing. "displayName": "A String", # Name of an Interconnect attachment. "interconnectUri": "A String", # URI of the Interconnect where the Interconnect attachment is configured. + "l2AttachmentMatchedIpAddress": "A String", # Appliance IP address that was matched for L2_DEDICATED attachments. "region": "A String", # Name of a Google Cloud region where the Interconnect attachment is configured. + "type": "A String", # The type of interconnect attachment this is. "uri": "A String", # URI of an Interconnect attachment. }, "loadBalancer": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a load balancer. # Display information of the load balancers. Deprecated in favor of the `load_balancer_backend_info` field, not used in new tests. @@ -2585,6 +2632,7 @@

Method Details

"forwardingRuleTarget": "A String", # Output only. Specifies the type of the target of the forwarding rule. "fqdn": "A String", # DNS endpoint of [Google Kubernetes Engine cluster control plane](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/cluster-architecture). Requires gke_master_cluster to be set, can't be used simultaneoulsly with ip_address or network. Applicable only to destination endpoint. "gkeMasterCluster": "A String", # A cluster URI for [Google Kubernetes Engine cluster control plane](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/cluster-architecture). + "gkePod": "A String", # A [GKE Pod](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/pod) URI. "instance": "A String", # A Compute Engine instance URI. "ipAddress": "A String", # The IP address of the endpoint, which can be an external or internal IP. "loadBalancerId": "A String", # Output only. ID of the load balancer the forwarding rule points to. Empty for forwarding rules not related to load balancers. @@ -2649,6 +2697,7 @@

Method Details

"forwardingRuleTarget": "A String", # Output only. Specifies the type of the target of the forwarding rule. "fqdn": "A String", # DNS endpoint of [Google Kubernetes Engine cluster control plane](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/cluster-architecture). Requires gke_master_cluster to be set, can't be used simultaneoulsly with ip_address or network. Applicable only to destination endpoint. "gkeMasterCluster": "A String", # A cluster URI for [Google Kubernetes Engine cluster control plane](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/cluster-architecture). + "gkePod": "A String", # A [GKE Pod](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/pod) URI. "instance": "A String", # A Compute Engine instance URI. "ipAddress": "A String", # The IP address of the endpoint, which can be an external or internal IP. "loadBalancerId": "A String", # Output only. ID of the load balancer the forwarding rule points to. Empty for forwarding rules not related to load balancers. @@ -2867,6 +2916,11 @@

Method Details

"googleServiceType": "A String", # Recognized type of a Google Service. "sourceIp": "A String", # Source IP address. }, + "hybridSubnet": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a hybrid subnet. # Display information of a hybrid subnet. + "displayName": "A String", # Name of a hybrid subnet. + "region": "A String", # Name of a Google Cloud region where the hybrid subnet is configured. + "uri": "A String", # URI of a hybrid subnet. + }, "instance": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a Compute Engine instance. # Display information of a Compute Engine instance. "displayName": "A String", # Name of a Compute Engine instance. "externalIp": "A String", # External IP address of the network interface. @@ -2886,7 +2940,9 @@

Method Details

"cloudRouterUri": "A String", # URI of the Cloud Router to be used for dynamic routing. "displayName": "A String", # Name of an Interconnect attachment. "interconnectUri": "A String", # URI of the Interconnect where the Interconnect attachment is configured. + "l2AttachmentMatchedIpAddress": "A String", # Appliance IP address that was matched for L2_DEDICATED attachments. "region": "A String", # Name of a Google Cloud region where the Interconnect attachment is configured. + "type": "A String", # The type of interconnect attachment this is. "uri": "A String", # URI of an Interconnect attachment. }, "loadBalancer": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a load balancer. # Display information of the load balancers. Deprecated in favor of the `load_balancer_backend_info` field, not used in new tests. @@ -3193,6 +3249,11 @@

Method Details

"googleServiceType": "A String", # Recognized type of a Google Service. "sourceIp": "A String", # Source IP address. }, + "hybridSubnet": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a hybrid subnet. # Display information of a hybrid subnet. + "displayName": "A String", # Name of a hybrid subnet. + "region": "A String", # Name of a Google Cloud region where the hybrid subnet is configured. + "uri": "A String", # URI of a hybrid subnet. + }, "instance": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a Compute Engine instance. # Display information of a Compute Engine instance. "displayName": "A String", # Name of a Compute Engine instance. "externalIp": "A String", # External IP address of the network interface. @@ -3212,7 +3273,9 @@

Method Details

"cloudRouterUri": "A String", # URI of the Cloud Router to be used for dynamic routing. "displayName": "A String", # Name of an Interconnect attachment. "interconnectUri": "A String", # URI of the Interconnect where the Interconnect attachment is configured. + "l2AttachmentMatchedIpAddress": "A String", # Appliance IP address that was matched for L2_DEDICATED attachments. "region": "A String", # Name of a Google Cloud region where the Interconnect attachment is configured. + "type": "A String", # The type of interconnect attachment this is. "uri": "A String", # URI of an Interconnect attachment. }, "loadBalancer": { # For display only. Metadata associated with a load balancer. # Display information of the load balancers. Deprecated in favor of the `load_balancer_backend_info` field, not used in new tests. @@ -3390,6 +3453,7 @@

Method Details

"forwardingRuleTarget": "A String", # Output only. Specifies the type of the target of the forwarding rule. "fqdn": "A String", # DNS endpoint of [Google Kubernetes Engine cluster control plane](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/cluster-architecture). Requires gke_master_cluster to be set, can't be used simultaneoulsly with ip_address or network. Applicable only to destination endpoint. "gkeMasterCluster": "A String", # A cluster URI for [Google Kubernetes Engine cluster control plane](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/cluster-architecture). + "gkePod": "A String", # A [GKE Pod](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/pod) URI. "instance": "A String", # A Compute Engine instance URI. "ipAddress": "A String", # The IP address of the endpoint, which can be an external or internal IP. "loadBalancerId": "A String", # Output only. ID of the load balancer the forwarding rule points to. Empty for forwarding rules not related to load balancers. diff --git a/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1beta1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1beta1.projects.locations.html index f1cfb65837c..f2bc0a1c98d 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1beta1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1beta1.projects.locations.html @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1beta1.projects.locations.vpcFlowLogsConfigs.html b/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1beta1.projects.locations.vpcFlowLogsConfigs.html index d8f2af214f9..9ffa7f85201 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1beta1.projects.locations.vpcFlowLogsConfigs.html +++ b/docs/dyn/networkmanagement_v1beta1.projects.locations.vpcFlowLogsConfigs.html @@ -101,6 +101,12 @@

Instance Methods

queryOrgVpcFlowLogsConfigs_next()

Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+ showEffectiveFlowLogsConfigs(parent, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, resource=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

ShowEffectiveFlowLogsConfigs returns a list of all VPC Flow Logs configurations applicable to a specified resource.

+

+ showEffectiveFlowLogsConfigs_next()

+

Retrieves the next page of results.

Method Details

close() @@ -436,4 +442,63 @@

Method Details

+
+ showEffectiveFlowLogsConfigs(parent, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, resource=None, x__xgafv=None) +
ShowEffectiveFlowLogsConfigs returns a list of all VPC Flow Logs configurations applicable to a specified resource.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent resource of the VpcFlowLogsConfig, specified in the following format: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global` (required)
+  filter: string, Optional. Lists the `EffectiveVpcFlowLogsConfigs` that match the filter expression. A filter expression must use the supported [CEL logic operators] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-flow-logs-records#supported_cel_logic_operators).
+  pageSize: integer, Optional. Number of `EffectiveVpcFlowLogsConfigs` to return. Default is 30.
+  pageToken: string, Optional. Page token from an earlier query, as returned in `next_page_token`.
+  resource: string, Required. The resource to get the effective VPC Flow Logs configuration for. The resource must belong to the same project as the parent. The resource must be a network, subnetwork, interconnect attachment, VPN tunnel, or a project.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Response for the `ShowEffectiveFlowLogsConfigs` method.
+  "effectiveFlowLogsConfigs": [ # List of Effective Vpc Flow Logs configurations.
+    { # A configuration to generate a response for GetEffectiveVpcFlowLogsConfig request.
+      "aggregationInterval": "A String", # The aggregation interval for the logs. Default value is INTERVAL_5_SEC.
+      "crossProjectMetadata": "A String", # Determines whether to include cross project annotations in the logs. This field is available only for organization configurations. If not specified in org configs will be set to CROSS_PROJECT_METADATA_ENABLED.
+      "filterExpr": "A String", # Export filter used to define which VPC Flow Logs should be logged.
+      "flowSampling": 3.14, # The value of the field must be in (0, 1]. The sampling rate of VPC Flow Logs where 1.0 means all collected logs are reported. Setting the sampling rate to 0.0 is not allowed. If you want to disable VPC Flow Logs, use the state field instead. Default value is 1.0.
+      "interconnectAttachment": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from the Interconnect Attachment. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/interconnectAttachments/{name}
+      "metadata": "A String", # Configures whether all, none or a subset of metadata fields should be added to the reported VPC flow logs. Default value is INCLUDE_ALL_METADATA.
+      "metadataFields": [ # Custom metadata fields to include in the reported VPC flow logs. Can only be specified if "metadata" was set to CUSTOM_METADATA.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "name": "A String", # Unique name of the configuration. The name can have one of the following forms: - For project-level configurations: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}` - For organization-level configurations: `organizations/{organization_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}` - For a Compute config, the name will be the path of the subnet: `projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/subnetworks/{subnet_id}`
+      "network": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from VMs, VPN tunnels and Interconnect Attachments within the network. Format: projects/{project_id}/global/networks/{name}
+      "scope": "A String", # Specifies the scope of the config (e.g., SUBNET, NETWORK, ORGANIZATION..).
+      "state": "A String", # The state of the VPC Flow Log configuration. Default value is ENABLED. When creating a new configuration, it must be enabled. Setting state=DISABLED will pause the log generation for this config.
+      "subnet": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from VMs within the subnetwork. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/subnetworks/{name}
+      "vpnTunnel": "A String", # Traffic will be logged from the VPN Tunnel. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/vpnTunnels/{name}
+    },
+  ],
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # Page token to fetch the next set of configurations.
+  "unreachable": [ # Locations that could not be reached (when querying all locations with `-`).
+    "A String",
+  ],
+}
+
+ +
+ showEffectiveFlowLogsConfigs_next() +
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        
+
+ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/networksecurity_v1beta1.organizations.locations.securityProfileGroups.html b/docs/dyn/networksecurity_v1beta1.organizations.locations.securityProfileGroups.html index 78db7f95d07..a830295a02a 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/networksecurity_v1beta1.organizations.locations.securityProfileGroups.html +++ b/docs/dyn/networksecurity_v1beta1.organizations.locations.securityProfileGroups.html @@ -123,6 +123,7 @@

Method Details

"name": "A String", # Immutable. Identifier. Name of the SecurityProfileGroup resource. It matches pattern `projects|organizations/*/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/{security_profile_group}`. "threatPreventionProfile": "A String", # Optional. Reference to a SecurityProfile with the ThreatPrevention configuration. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Last resource update timestamp. + "urlFilteringProfile": "A String", # Optional. Reference to a SecurityProfile with the UrlFiltering configuration. } securityProfileGroupId: string, Required. Short name of the SecurityProfileGroup resource to be created. This value should be 1-63 characters long, containing only letters, numbers, hyphens, and underscores, and should not start with a number. E.g. "security_profile_group1". @@ -218,6 +219,7 @@

Method Details

"name": "A String", # Immutable. Identifier. Name of the SecurityProfileGroup resource. It matches pattern `projects|organizations/*/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/{security_profile_group}`. "threatPreventionProfile": "A String", # Optional. Reference to a SecurityProfile with the ThreatPrevention configuration. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Last resource update timestamp. + "urlFilteringProfile": "A String", # Optional. Reference to a SecurityProfile with the UrlFiltering configuration. }
@@ -253,6 +255,7 @@

Method Details

"name": "A String", # Immutable. Identifier. Name of the SecurityProfileGroup resource. It matches pattern `projects|organizations/*/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/{security_profile_group}`. "threatPreventionProfile": "A String", # Optional. Reference to a SecurityProfile with the ThreatPrevention configuration. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Last resource update timestamp. + "urlFilteringProfile": "A String", # Optional. Reference to a SecurityProfile with the UrlFiltering configuration. }, ], }
@@ -294,6 +297,7 @@

Method Details

"name": "A String", # Immutable. Identifier. Name of the SecurityProfileGroup resource. It matches pattern `projects|organizations/*/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/{security_profile_group}`. "threatPreventionProfile": "A String", # Optional. Reference to a SecurityProfile with the ThreatPrevention configuration. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Last resource update timestamp. + "urlFilteringProfile": "A String", # Optional. Reference to a SecurityProfile with the UrlFiltering configuration. } updateMask: string, Required. Field mask is used to specify the fields to be overwritten in the SecurityProfileGroup resource by the update. The fields specified in the update_mask are relative to the resource, not the full request. A field will be overwritten if it is in the mask. diff --git a/docs/dyn/networksecurity_v1beta1.organizations.locations.securityProfiles.html b/docs/dyn/networksecurity_v1beta1.organizations.locations.securityProfiles.html index feee2e402a7..3b5bf35717c 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/networksecurity_v1beta1.organizations.locations.securityProfiles.html +++ b/docs/dyn/networksecurity_v1beta1.organizations.locations.securityProfiles.html @@ -147,6 +147,17 @@

Method Details

}, "type": "A String", # Immutable. The single ProfileType that the SecurityProfile resource configures. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Last resource update timestamp. + "urlFilteringProfile": { # UrlFilteringProfile defines filters based on URL. # The URL filtering configuration for the SecurityProfile. + "urlFilters": [ # Optional. The list of filtering configs in which each config defines an action to take for some URL match. + { # A URL filter defines an action to take for some URL match. + "filteringAction": "A String", # Required. The action taken when this filter is applied. + "priority": 42, # Required. The priority of this filter within the URL Filtering Profile. Lower integers indicate higher priorities. The priority of a filter must be unique within a URL Filtering Profile. + "urls": [ # Required. The list of strings that a URL must match with for this filter to be applied. + "A String", + ], + }, + ], + }, } securityProfileId: string, Required. Short name of the SecurityProfile resource to be created. This value should be 1-63 characters long, containing only letters, numbers, hyphens, and underscores, and should not start with a number. E.g. "security_profile1". @@ -266,6 +277,17 @@

Method Details

}, "type": "A String", # Immutable. The single ProfileType that the SecurityProfile resource configures. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Last resource update timestamp. + "urlFilteringProfile": { # UrlFilteringProfile defines filters based on URL. # The URL filtering configuration for the SecurityProfile. + "urlFilters": [ # Optional. The list of filtering configs in which each config defines an action to take for some URL match. + { # A URL filter defines an action to take for some URL match. + "filteringAction": "A String", # Required. The action taken when this filter is applied. + "priority": 42, # Required. The priority of this filter within the URL Filtering Profile. Lower integers indicate higher priorities. The priority of a filter must be unique within a URL Filtering Profile. + "urls": [ # Required. The list of strings that a URL must match with for this filter to be applied. + "A String", + ], + }, + ], + }, }
@@ -325,6 +347,17 @@

Method Details

}, "type": "A String", # Immutable. The single ProfileType that the SecurityProfile resource configures. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Last resource update timestamp. + "urlFilteringProfile": { # UrlFilteringProfile defines filters based on URL. # The URL filtering configuration for the SecurityProfile. + "urlFilters": [ # Optional. The list of filtering configs in which each config defines an action to take for some URL match. + { # A URL filter defines an action to take for some URL match. + "filteringAction": "A String", # Required. The action taken when this filter is applied. + "priority": 42, # Required. The priority of this filter within the URL Filtering Profile. Lower integers indicate higher priorities. The priority of a filter must be unique within a URL Filtering Profile. + "urls": [ # Required. The list of strings that a URL must match with for this filter to be applied. + "A String", + ], + }, + ], + }, }, ], }
@@ -390,6 +423,17 @@

Method Details

}, "type": "A String", # Immutable. The single ProfileType that the SecurityProfile resource configures. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Last resource update timestamp. + "urlFilteringProfile": { # UrlFilteringProfile defines filters based on URL. # The URL filtering configuration for the SecurityProfile. + "urlFilters": [ # Optional. The list of filtering configs in which each config defines an action to take for some URL match. + { # A URL filter defines an action to take for some URL match. + "filteringAction": "A String", # Required. The action taken when this filter is applied. + "priority": 42, # Required. The priority of this filter within the URL Filtering Profile. Lower integers indicate higher priorities. The priority of a filter must be unique within a URL Filtering Profile. + "urls": [ # Required. The list of strings that a URL must match with for this filter to be applied. + "A String", + ], + }, + ], + }, } updateMask: string, Required. Field mask is used to specify the fields to be overwritten in the SecurityProfile resource by the update. The fields specified in the update_mask are relative to the resource, not the full request. A field will be overwritten if it is in the mask. diff --git a/docs/dyn/observability_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/observability_v1.projects.locations.html index a75c7e7a017..1b1e70330cc 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/observability_v1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/observability_v1.projects.locations.html @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.cloudExadataInfrastructures.html b/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.cloudExadataInfrastructures.html index f71706c065a..7ecbf27b065 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.cloudExadataInfrastructures.html +++ b/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.cloudExadataInfrastructures.html @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@

Instance Methods

get(name, x__xgafv=None)

Gets details of a single Exadata Infrastructure.

- list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+ list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

Lists Exadata Infrastructures in a given project and location.

list_next()

@@ -326,11 +326,13 @@

Method Details

- list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None) + list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)
Lists Exadata Infrastructures in a given project and location.
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The parent value for CloudExadataInfrastructure in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}. (required)
+  filter: string, Optional. An expression for filtering the results of the request.
+  orderBy: string, Optional. An expression for ordering the results of the request.
   pageSize: integer, Optional. The maximum number of items to return. If unspecified, at most 50 Exadata infrastructures will be returned. The maximum value is 1000; values above 1000 will be coerced to 1000.
   pageToken: string, Optional. A token identifying a page of results the server should return.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.cloudVmClusters.html b/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.cloudVmClusters.html
index 359d557520b..53f2ceaf62f 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.cloudVmClusters.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.cloudVmClusters.html
@@ -120,6 +120,10 @@ 

Method Details

"displayName": "A String", # Optional. User friendly name for this resource. "exadataInfrastructure": "A String", # Required. The name of the Exadata Infrastructure resource on which VM cluster resource is created, in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{region}/cloudExadataInfrastuctures/{cloud_extradata_infrastructure} "gcpOracleZone": "A String", # Output only. The GCP Oracle zone where Oracle CloudVmCluster is hosted. This will be the same as the gcp_oracle_zone of the CloudExadataInfrastructure. Example: us-east4-b-r2. + "identityConnector": { # The identity connector details which will allow OCI to securely access the resources in the customer project. # Output only. The identity connector details which will allow OCI to securely access the resources in the customer project. + "connectionState": "A String", # Output only. The connection state of the identity connector. + "serviceAgentEmail": "A String", # Output only. A google managed service account on which customers can grant roles to access resources in the customer project. Example: `p176944527254-55-75119d87fd8f@gcp-sa-oci.iam.gserviceaccount.com` + }, "labels": { # Optional. Labels or tags associated with the VM Cluster. "a_key": "A String", }, @@ -267,6 +271,10 @@

Method Details

"displayName": "A String", # Optional. User friendly name for this resource. "exadataInfrastructure": "A String", # Required. The name of the Exadata Infrastructure resource on which VM cluster resource is created, in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{region}/cloudExadataInfrastuctures/{cloud_extradata_infrastructure} "gcpOracleZone": "A String", # Output only. The GCP Oracle zone where Oracle CloudVmCluster is hosted. This will be the same as the gcp_oracle_zone of the CloudExadataInfrastructure. Example: us-east4-b-r2. + "identityConnector": { # The identity connector details which will allow OCI to securely access the resources in the customer project. # Output only. The identity connector details which will allow OCI to securely access the resources in the customer project. + "connectionState": "A String", # Output only. The connection state of the identity connector. + "serviceAgentEmail": "A String", # Output only. A google managed service account on which customers can grant roles to access resources in the customer project. Example: `p176944527254-55-75119d87fd8f@gcp-sa-oci.iam.gserviceaccount.com` + }, "labels": { # Optional. Labels or tags associated with the VM Cluster. "a_key": "A String", }, @@ -352,6 +360,10 @@

Method Details

"displayName": "A String", # Optional. User friendly name for this resource. "exadataInfrastructure": "A String", # Required. The name of the Exadata Infrastructure resource on which VM cluster resource is created, in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{region}/cloudExadataInfrastuctures/{cloud_extradata_infrastructure} "gcpOracleZone": "A String", # Output only. The GCP Oracle zone where Oracle CloudVmCluster is hosted. This will be the same as the gcp_oracle_zone of the CloudExadataInfrastructure. Example: us-east4-b-r2. + "identityConnector": { # The identity connector details which will allow OCI to securely access the resources in the customer project. # Output only. The identity connector details which will allow OCI to securely access the resources in the customer project. + "connectionState": "A String", # Output only. The connection state of the identity connector. + "serviceAgentEmail": "A String", # Output only. A google managed service account on which customers can grant roles to access resources in the customer project. Example: `p176944527254-55-75119d87fd8f@gcp-sa-oci.iam.gserviceaccount.com` + }, "labels": { # Optional. Labels or tags associated with the VM Cluster. "a_key": "A String", }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.databaseCharacterSets.html b/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.databaseCharacterSets.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..80301653ef5 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.databaseCharacterSets.html @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ + + + +

Oracle Database@Google Cloud API . projects . locations . databaseCharacterSets

+

Instance Methods

+

+ close()

+

Close httplib2 connections.

+

+ list(parent, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

List DatabaseCharacterSets for the given project and location.

+

+ list_next()

+

Retrieves the next page of results.

+

Method Details

+
+ close() +
Close httplib2 connections.
+
+ +
+ list(parent, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None) +
List DatabaseCharacterSets for the given project and location.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent value for DatabaseCharacterSets in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}. (required)
+  filter: string, Optional. An expression for filtering the results of the request. Only the **character_set_type** field is supported in the following format: `character_set_type="{characterSetType}"`. Accepted values include `DATABASE` and `NATIONAL`.
+  pageSize: integer, Optional. The maximum number of DatabaseCharacterSets to return. The service may return fewer than this value. If unspecified, at most 50 DatabaseCharacterSets will be returned. The maximum value is 1000; values above 1000 will be coerced to 1000.
+  pageToken: string, Optional. A page token, received from a previous `ListDatabaseCharacterSets` call. Provide this to retrieve the subsequent page. When paginating, all other parameters provided to `ListDatabaseCharacterSets` must match the call that provided the page token.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The response for `DatabaseCharacterSet.List`.
+  "databaseCharacterSets": [ # The list of DatabaseCharacterSets.
+    { # Details of the Database character set resource.
+      "characterSet": "A String", # Output only. The character set name for the Database which is the ID in the resource name.
+      "characterSetType": "A String", # Output only. The character set type for the Database.
+      "name": "A String", # Identifier. The name of the Database Character Set resource in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{region}/databaseCharacterSets/{database_character_set}
+    },
+  ],
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # A token identifying a page of results the server should return.
+}
+
+ +
+ list_next() +
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        
+
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.databases.html b/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.databases.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..183bf665e8e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.databases.html @@ -0,0 +1,221 @@ + + + +

Oracle Database@Google Cloud API . projects . locations . databases

+

Instance Methods

+

+ close()

+

Close httplib2 connections.

+

+ get(name, x__xgafv=None)

+

Gets details of a single Database.

+

+ list(parent, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Lists all the Databases for the given project, location and DbSystem.

+

+ list_next()

+

Retrieves the next page of results.

+

Method Details

+
+ close() +
Close httplib2 connections.
+
+ +
+ get(name, x__xgafv=None) +
Gets details of a single Database.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The name of the Database resource in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{region}/databases/{database} (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Details of the Database resource. https://docs.oracle.com/en-us/iaas/api/#/en/database/20160918/Database/
+  "adminPassword": "A String", # Required. The password for the default ADMIN user.
+  "characterSet": "A String", # Optional. The character set for the database. The default is AL32UTF8.
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The date and time that the Database was created.
+  "databaseId": "A String", # Optional. The database ID of the Database.
+  "dbHomeName": "A String", # Optional. The name of the DbHome resource associated with the Database.
+  "dbName": "A String", # Optional. The database name. The name must begin with an alphabetic character and can contain a maximum of eight alphanumeric characters. Special characters are not permitted.
+  "dbUniqueName": "A String", # Optional. The DB_UNIQUE_NAME of the Oracle Database being backed up.
+  "gcpOracleZone": "A String", # Output only. The GCP Oracle zone where the Database is created.
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The name of the Database resource in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{region}/databases/{database}
+  "ncharacterSet": "A String", # Optional. The national character set for the database. The default is AL16UTF16.
+  "ociUrl": "A String", # Output only. HTTPS link to OCI resources exposed to Customer via UI Interface.
+  "opsInsightsStatus": "A String", # Output only. The Status of Operations Insights for this Database.
+  "properties": { # The properties of a Database. # Optional. The properties of the Database.
+    "databaseManagementConfig": { # The configuration of the Database Management service. # Output only. The Database Management config.
+      "managementState": "A String", # Output only. The status of the Database Management service.
+      "managementType": "A String", # Output only. The Database Management type.
+    },
+    "dbBackupConfig": { # Backup Options for the Database. # Optional. Backup options for the Database.
+      "autoBackupEnabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, enables automatic backups on the database.
+      "autoFullBackupDay": "A String", # Optional. The day of the week on which the full backup should be performed on the database. If no value is provided, it will default to Sunday.
+      "autoFullBackupWindow": "A String", # Optional. The window in which the full backup should be performed on the database. If no value is provided, the default is anytime.
+      "autoIncrementalBackupWindow": "A String", # Optional. The window in which the incremental backup should be performed on the database. If no value is provided, the default is anytime except the auto full backup day.
+      "backupDeletionPolicy": "A String", # Optional. This defines when the backups will be deleted after Database termination.
+      "backupDestinationDetails": [ # Optional. Details of the database backup destinations.
+        { # The details of the database backup destination.
+          "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the database backup destination.
+        },
+      ],
+      "retentionPeriodDays": 42, # Optional. The number of days an automatic backup is retained before being automatically deleted. This value determines the earliest point in time to which a database can be restored. Min: 1, Max: 60.
+    },
+    "dbVersion": "A String", # Required. The Oracle Database version.
+    "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the Database.
+  },
+  "tdeWalletPassword": "A String", # Optional. The TDE wallet password for the database.
+}
+
+ +
+ list(parent, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Lists all the Databases for the given project, location and DbSystem.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent resource name in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{region} (required)
+  filter: string, Optional. An expression for filtering the results of the request. list for container databases is supported only with a valid dbSystem (full resource name) filter in this format: `dbSystem="projects/{project}/locations/{location}/dbSystems/{dbSystemId}"`
+  pageSize: integer, Optional. The maximum number of items to return. If unspecified, a maximum of 50 System Versions will be returned. The maximum value is 1000; values above 1000 will be reset to 1000.
+  pageToken: string, Optional. A token identifying the requested page of results to return. All fields except the filter should remain the same as in the request that provided this page token.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The response for `Database.List`.
+  "databases": [ # The list of Databases.
+    { # Details of the Database resource. https://docs.oracle.com/en-us/iaas/api/#/en/database/20160918/Database/
+      "adminPassword": "A String", # Required. The password for the default ADMIN user.
+      "characterSet": "A String", # Optional. The character set for the database. The default is AL32UTF8.
+      "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The date and time that the Database was created.
+      "databaseId": "A String", # Optional. The database ID of the Database.
+      "dbHomeName": "A String", # Optional. The name of the DbHome resource associated with the Database.
+      "dbName": "A String", # Optional. The database name. The name must begin with an alphabetic character and can contain a maximum of eight alphanumeric characters. Special characters are not permitted.
+      "dbUniqueName": "A String", # Optional. The DB_UNIQUE_NAME of the Oracle Database being backed up.
+      "gcpOracleZone": "A String", # Output only. The GCP Oracle zone where the Database is created.
+      "name": "A String", # Identifier. The name of the Database resource in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{region}/databases/{database}
+      "ncharacterSet": "A String", # Optional. The national character set for the database. The default is AL16UTF16.
+      "ociUrl": "A String", # Output only. HTTPS link to OCI resources exposed to Customer via UI Interface.
+      "opsInsightsStatus": "A String", # Output only. The Status of Operations Insights for this Database.
+      "properties": { # The properties of a Database. # Optional. The properties of the Database.
+        "databaseManagementConfig": { # The configuration of the Database Management service. # Output only. The Database Management config.
+          "managementState": "A String", # Output only. The status of the Database Management service.
+          "managementType": "A String", # Output only. The Database Management type.
+        },
+        "dbBackupConfig": { # Backup Options for the Database. # Optional. Backup options for the Database.
+          "autoBackupEnabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, enables automatic backups on the database.
+          "autoFullBackupDay": "A String", # Optional. The day of the week on which the full backup should be performed on the database. If no value is provided, it will default to Sunday.
+          "autoFullBackupWindow": "A String", # Optional. The window in which the full backup should be performed on the database. If no value is provided, the default is anytime.
+          "autoIncrementalBackupWindow": "A String", # Optional. The window in which the incremental backup should be performed on the database. If no value is provided, the default is anytime except the auto full backup day.
+          "backupDeletionPolicy": "A String", # Optional. This defines when the backups will be deleted after Database termination.
+          "backupDestinationDetails": [ # Optional. Details of the database backup destinations.
+            { # The details of the database backup destination.
+              "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the database backup destination.
+            },
+          ],
+          "retentionPeriodDays": 42, # Optional. The number of days an automatic backup is retained before being automatically deleted. This value determines the earliest point in time to which a database can be restored. Min: 1, Max: 60.
+        },
+        "dbVersion": "A String", # Required. The Oracle Database version.
+        "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the Database.
+      },
+      "tdeWalletPassword": "A String", # Optional. The TDE wallet password for the database.
+    },
+  ],
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # A token identifying a page of results the server should return.
+}
+
+ +
+ list_next() +
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        
+
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.dbSystemInitialStorageSizes.html b/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.dbSystemInitialStorageSizes.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9e05b448089 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.dbSystemInitialStorageSizes.html @@ -0,0 +1,148 @@ + + + +

Oracle Database@Google Cloud API . projects . locations . dbSystemInitialStorageSizes

+

Instance Methods

+

+ close()

+

Close httplib2 connections.

+

+ list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Lists all the DbSystemInitialStorageSizes for the given project and location.

+

+ list_next()

+

Retrieves the next page of results.

+

Method Details

+
+ close() +
Close httplib2 connections.
+
+ +
+ list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Lists all the DbSystemInitialStorageSizes for the given project and location.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent value for the DbSystemInitialStorageSize resource with the format: projects/{project}/locations/{location} (required)
+  pageSize: integer, Optional. The maximum number of items to return. If unspecified, a maximum of 50 System Versions will be returned. The maximum value is 1000; values above 1000 will be reset to 1000.
+  pageToken: string, Optional. A token identifying the requested page of results to return. All fields except the filter should remain the same as in the request that provided this page token.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The response for `DbSystemInitialStorageSizes.List`.
+  "dbSystemInitialStorageSizes": [ # The list of DbSystemInitialStorageSizes.
+    { # Summary of the DbSystem initial storage size.
+      "name": "A String", # Output only. The name of the resource.
+      "properties": { # The properties of a DbSystem initial storage size summary. # Output only. The properties of the DbSystem initial storage size summary.
+        "launchFromBackupStorageSizeDetails": [ # Output only. List of storage disk details available for launches from backup.
+          { # The initial storage size, in gigabytes, that is applicable for virtual machine DBSystem.
+            "dataStorageSizeInGbs": 42, # Output only. The data storage size, in gigabytes, that is applicable for virtual machine DBSystem.
+            "recoStorageSizeInGbs": 42, # Output only. The RECO/REDO storage size, in gigabytes, that is applicable for virtual machine DBSystem.
+          },
+        ],
+        "shapeType": "A String", # Output only. VM shape platform type
+        "storageManagement": "A String", # Output only. The storage option used in DB system.
+        "storageSizeDetails": [ # Output only. List of storage disk details.
+          { # The initial storage size, in gigabytes, that is applicable for virtual machine DBSystem.
+            "dataStorageSizeInGbs": 42, # Output only. The data storage size, in gigabytes, that is applicable for virtual machine DBSystem.
+            "recoStorageSizeInGbs": 42, # Output only. The RECO/REDO storage size, in gigabytes, that is applicable for virtual machine DBSystem.
+          },
+        ],
+      },
+    },
+  ],
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # A token identifying a page of results the server should return.
+}
+
+ +
+ list_next() +
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        
+
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.dbSystemShapes.html b/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.dbSystemShapes.html index 40ae8eac007..7971c403e1a 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.dbSystemShapes.html +++ b/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.dbSystemShapes.html @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@

Instance Methods

close()

Close httplib2 connections.

- list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+ list(parent, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

Lists the database system shapes available for the project and location.

list_next()

@@ -90,11 +90,12 @@

Method Details

- list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None) + list(parent, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)
Lists the database system shapes available for the project and location.
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The parent value for Database System Shapes in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}. (required)
+  filter: string, Optional. An expression for filtering the results of the request. Only the gcp_oracle_zone_id field is supported in this format: `gcp_oracle_zone_id="{gcp_oracle_zone_id}"`.
   pageSize: integer, Optional. The maximum number of items to return. If unspecified, at most 50 database system shapes will be returned. The maximum value is 1000; values above 1000 will be coerced to 1000.
   pageToken: string, Optional. A token identifying a page of results the server should return.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.dbSystems.html b/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.dbSystems.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b5972d12c00
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.dbSystems.html
@@ -0,0 +1,491 @@
+
+
+
+

Oracle Database@Google Cloud API . projects . locations . dbSystems

+

Instance Methods

+

+ close()

+

Close httplib2 connections.

+

+ create(parent, body=None, dbSystemId=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Creates a new DbSystem in a given project and location.

+

+ delete(name, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Deletes a single DbSystem.

+

+ get(name, x__xgafv=None)

+

Gets details of a single DbSystem.

+

+ list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Lists all the DbSystems for the given project and location.

+

+ list_next()

+

Retrieves the next page of results.

+

Method Details

+
+ close() +
Close httplib2 connections.
+
+ +
+ create(parent, body=None, dbSystemId=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Creates a new DbSystem in a given project and location.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The value for parent of the DbSystem in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Details of the DbSystem (BaseDB) resource. https://docs.oracle.com/en-us/iaas/api/#/en/database/20160918/DbSystem/
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The date and time that the DbSystem was created.
+  "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display name for the System db. The name does not have to be unique within your project.
+  "entitlementId": "A String", # Output only. The ID of the subscription entitlement associated with the DbSystem
+  "gcpOracleZone": "A String", # Optional. The GCP Oracle zone where Oracle DbSystem is hosted. Example: us-east4-b-r2. If not specified, the system will pick a zone based on availability.
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels or tags associated with the DbSystem.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The name of the DbSystem resource in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{region}/dbSystems/{db_system}
+  "ociUrl": "A String", # Output only. HTTPS link to OCI resources exposed to Customer via UI Interface.
+  "odbNetwork": "A String", # Optional. The name of the OdbNetwork associated with the DbSystem. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/odbNetworks/{odb_network} It is optional but if specified, this should match the parent ODBNetwork of the OdbSubnet.
+  "odbSubnet": "A String", # Required. The name of the OdbSubnet associated with the DbSystem for IP allocation. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/odbNetworks/{odb_network}/odbSubnets/{odb_subnet}
+  "properties": { # The properties of a DbSystem. # Optional. The properties of the DbSystem.
+    "computeCount": 42, # Required. The number of CPU cores to enable for the DbSystem.
+    "computeModel": "A String", # Optional. The compute model of the DbSystem.
+    "dataCollectionOptions": { # Data collection options for DbSystem. # Optional. Data collection options for diagnostics.
+      "isDiagnosticsEventsEnabled": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether to enable data collection for diagnostics.
+      "isIncidentLogsEnabled": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether to enable incident logs and trace collection.
+    },
+    "dataStorageSizeGb": 42, # Optional. The data storage size in GB that is currently available to DbSystems.
+    "databaseEdition": "A String", # Required. The database edition of the DbSystem.
+    "dbHome": { # Details of the Database Home resource. # Optional. Details for creating a Database Home.
+      "database": { # Details of the Database resource. https://docs.oracle.com/en-us/iaas/api/#/en/database/20160918/Database/ # Required. The Database resource.
+        "adminPassword": "A String", # Required. The password for the default ADMIN user.
+        "characterSet": "A String", # Optional. The character set for the database. The default is AL32UTF8.
+        "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The date and time that the Database was created.
+        "databaseId": "A String", # Optional. The database ID of the Database.
+        "dbHomeName": "A String", # Optional. The name of the DbHome resource associated with the Database.
+        "dbName": "A String", # Optional. The database name. The name must begin with an alphabetic character and can contain a maximum of eight alphanumeric characters. Special characters are not permitted.
+        "dbUniqueName": "A String", # Optional. The DB_UNIQUE_NAME of the Oracle Database being backed up.
+        "gcpOracleZone": "A String", # Output only. The GCP Oracle zone where the Database is created.
+        "name": "A String", # Identifier. The name of the Database resource in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{region}/databases/{database}
+        "ncharacterSet": "A String", # Optional. The national character set for the database. The default is AL16UTF16.
+        "ociUrl": "A String", # Output only. HTTPS link to OCI resources exposed to Customer via UI Interface.
+        "opsInsightsStatus": "A String", # Output only. The Status of Operations Insights for this Database.
+        "properties": { # The properties of a Database. # Optional. The properties of the Database.
+          "databaseManagementConfig": { # The configuration of the Database Management service. # Output only. The Database Management config.
+            "managementState": "A String", # Output only. The status of the Database Management service.
+            "managementType": "A String", # Output only. The Database Management type.
+          },
+          "dbBackupConfig": { # Backup Options for the Database. # Optional. Backup options for the Database.
+            "autoBackupEnabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, enables automatic backups on the database.
+            "autoFullBackupDay": "A String", # Optional. The day of the week on which the full backup should be performed on the database. If no value is provided, it will default to Sunday.
+            "autoFullBackupWindow": "A String", # Optional. The window in which the full backup should be performed on the database. If no value is provided, the default is anytime.
+            "autoIncrementalBackupWindow": "A String", # Optional. The window in which the incremental backup should be performed on the database. If no value is provided, the default is anytime except the auto full backup day.
+            "backupDeletionPolicy": "A String", # Optional. This defines when the backups will be deleted after Database termination.
+            "backupDestinationDetails": [ # Optional. Details of the database backup destinations.
+              { # The details of the database backup destination.
+                "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the database backup destination.
+              },
+            ],
+            "retentionPeriodDays": 42, # Optional. The number of days an automatic backup is retained before being automatically deleted. This value determines the earliest point in time to which a database can be restored. Min: 1, Max: 60.
+          },
+          "dbVersion": "A String", # Required. The Oracle Database version.
+          "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the Database.
+        },
+        "tdeWalletPassword": "A String", # Optional. The TDE wallet password for the database.
+      },
+      "dbVersion": "A String", # Required. A valid Oracle Database version. For a list of supported versions, use the ListDbVersions operation.
+      "displayName": "A String", # Optional. The display name for the Database Home. The name does not have to be unique within your project.
+      "isUnifiedAuditingEnabled": True or False, # Optional. Whether unified auditing is enabled for the Database Home.
+    },
+    "dbSystemOptions": { # Details of the DbSystem Options. # Optional. The options for the DbSystem.
+      "storageManagement": "A String", # Optional. The storage option used in DB system.
+    },
+    "domain": "A String", # Optional. The host domain name of the DbSystem.
+    "hostname": "A String", # Output only. The hostname of the DbSystem.
+    "hostnamePrefix": "A String", # Optional. Prefix for DB System host names.
+    "initialDataStorageSizeGb": 42, # Required. The initial data storage size in GB.
+    "licenseModel": "A String", # Required. The license model of the DbSystem.
+    "lifecycleState": "A String", # Output only. State of the DbSystem.
+    "memorySizeGb": 42, # Optional. The memory size in GB.
+    "nodeCount": 42, # Optional. The number of nodes in the DbSystem.
+    "ocid": "A String", # Output only. OCID of the DbSystem.
+    "privateIp": "A String", # Optional. The private IP address of the DbSystem.
+    "recoStorageSizeGb": 42, # Optional. The reco/redo storage size in GB.
+    "shape": "A String", # Required. Shape of DB System.
+    "sshPublicKeys": [ # Required. SSH public keys to be stored with the DbSystem.
+      "A String",
+    ],
+    "timeZone": { # Represents a time zone from the [IANA Time Zone Database](https://www.iana.org/time-zones). # Optional. Time zone of the DbSystem.
+      "id": "A String", # IANA Time Zone Database time zone. For example "America/New_York".
+      "version": "A String", # Optional. IANA Time Zone Database version number. For example "2019a".
+    },
+  },
+}
+
+  dbSystemId: string, Required. The ID of the DbSystem to create. This value is restricted to (^[a-z]([a-z0-9-]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?$) and must be a maximum of 63 characters in length. The value must start with a letter and end with a letter or a number.
+  requestId: string, Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  "response": { # The normal, successful response of the operation. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}
+
+ +
+ delete(name, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Deletes a single DbSystem.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The name of the DbSystem in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/dbSystems/{db_system}. (required)
+  requestId: string, Optional. An optional ID to identify the request. This value is used to identify duplicate requests. If you make a request with the same request ID and the original request is still in progress or completed, the server ignores the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  "response": { # The normal, successful response of the operation. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}
+
+ +
+ get(name, x__xgafv=None) +
Gets details of a single DbSystem.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The name of the DbSystem in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/dbSystems/{db_system}. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Details of the DbSystem (BaseDB) resource. https://docs.oracle.com/en-us/iaas/api/#/en/database/20160918/DbSystem/
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The date and time that the DbSystem was created.
+  "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display name for the System db. The name does not have to be unique within your project.
+  "entitlementId": "A String", # Output only. The ID of the subscription entitlement associated with the DbSystem
+  "gcpOracleZone": "A String", # Optional. The GCP Oracle zone where Oracle DbSystem is hosted. Example: us-east4-b-r2. If not specified, the system will pick a zone based on availability.
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels or tags associated with the DbSystem.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The name of the DbSystem resource in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{region}/dbSystems/{db_system}
+  "ociUrl": "A String", # Output only. HTTPS link to OCI resources exposed to Customer via UI Interface.
+  "odbNetwork": "A String", # Optional. The name of the OdbNetwork associated with the DbSystem. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/odbNetworks/{odb_network} It is optional but if specified, this should match the parent ODBNetwork of the OdbSubnet.
+  "odbSubnet": "A String", # Required. The name of the OdbSubnet associated with the DbSystem for IP allocation. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/odbNetworks/{odb_network}/odbSubnets/{odb_subnet}
+  "properties": { # The properties of a DbSystem. # Optional. The properties of the DbSystem.
+    "computeCount": 42, # Required. The number of CPU cores to enable for the DbSystem.
+    "computeModel": "A String", # Optional. The compute model of the DbSystem.
+    "dataCollectionOptions": { # Data collection options for DbSystem. # Optional. Data collection options for diagnostics.
+      "isDiagnosticsEventsEnabled": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether to enable data collection for diagnostics.
+      "isIncidentLogsEnabled": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether to enable incident logs and trace collection.
+    },
+    "dataStorageSizeGb": 42, # Optional. The data storage size in GB that is currently available to DbSystems.
+    "databaseEdition": "A String", # Required. The database edition of the DbSystem.
+    "dbHome": { # Details of the Database Home resource. # Optional. Details for creating a Database Home.
+      "database": { # Details of the Database resource. https://docs.oracle.com/en-us/iaas/api/#/en/database/20160918/Database/ # Required. The Database resource.
+        "adminPassword": "A String", # Required. The password for the default ADMIN user.
+        "characterSet": "A String", # Optional. The character set for the database. The default is AL32UTF8.
+        "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The date and time that the Database was created.
+        "databaseId": "A String", # Optional. The database ID of the Database.
+        "dbHomeName": "A String", # Optional. The name of the DbHome resource associated with the Database.
+        "dbName": "A String", # Optional. The database name. The name must begin with an alphabetic character and can contain a maximum of eight alphanumeric characters. Special characters are not permitted.
+        "dbUniqueName": "A String", # Optional. The DB_UNIQUE_NAME of the Oracle Database being backed up.
+        "gcpOracleZone": "A String", # Output only. The GCP Oracle zone where the Database is created.
+        "name": "A String", # Identifier. The name of the Database resource in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{region}/databases/{database}
+        "ncharacterSet": "A String", # Optional. The national character set for the database. The default is AL16UTF16.
+        "ociUrl": "A String", # Output only. HTTPS link to OCI resources exposed to Customer via UI Interface.
+        "opsInsightsStatus": "A String", # Output only. The Status of Operations Insights for this Database.
+        "properties": { # The properties of a Database. # Optional. The properties of the Database.
+          "databaseManagementConfig": { # The configuration of the Database Management service. # Output only. The Database Management config.
+            "managementState": "A String", # Output only. The status of the Database Management service.
+            "managementType": "A String", # Output only. The Database Management type.
+          },
+          "dbBackupConfig": { # Backup Options for the Database. # Optional. Backup options for the Database.
+            "autoBackupEnabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, enables automatic backups on the database.
+            "autoFullBackupDay": "A String", # Optional. The day of the week on which the full backup should be performed on the database. If no value is provided, it will default to Sunday.
+            "autoFullBackupWindow": "A String", # Optional. The window in which the full backup should be performed on the database. If no value is provided, the default is anytime.
+            "autoIncrementalBackupWindow": "A String", # Optional. The window in which the incremental backup should be performed on the database. If no value is provided, the default is anytime except the auto full backup day.
+            "backupDeletionPolicy": "A String", # Optional. This defines when the backups will be deleted after Database termination.
+            "backupDestinationDetails": [ # Optional. Details of the database backup destinations.
+              { # The details of the database backup destination.
+                "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the database backup destination.
+              },
+            ],
+            "retentionPeriodDays": 42, # Optional. The number of days an automatic backup is retained before being automatically deleted. This value determines the earliest point in time to which a database can be restored. Min: 1, Max: 60.
+          },
+          "dbVersion": "A String", # Required. The Oracle Database version.
+          "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the Database.
+        },
+        "tdeWalletPassword": "A String", # Optional. The TDE wallet password for the database.
+      },
+      "dbVersion": "A String", # Required. A valid Oracle Database version. For a list of supported versions, use the ListDbVersions operation.
+      "displayName": "A String", # Optional. The display name for the Database Home. The name does not have to be unique within your project.
+      "isUnifiedAuditingEnabled": True or False, # Optional. Whether unified auditing is enabled for the Database Home.
+    },
+    "dbSystemOptions": { # Details of the DbSystem Options. # Optional. The options for the DbSystem.
+      "storageManagement": "A String", # Optional. The storage option used in DB system.
+    },
+    "domain": "A String", # Optional. The host domain name of the DbSystem.
+    "hostname": "A String", # Output only. The hostname of the DbSystem.
+    "hostnamePrefix": "A String", # Optional. Prefix for DB System host names.
+    "initialDataStorageSizeGb": 42, # Required. The initial data storage size in GB.
+    "licenseModel": "A String", # Required. The license model of the DbSystem.
+    "lifecycleState": "A String", # Output only. State of the DbSystem.
+    "memorySizeGb": 42, # Optional. The memory size in GB.
+    "nodeCount": 42, # Optional. The number of nodes in the DbSystem.
+    "ocid": "A String", # Output only. OCID of the DbSystem.
+    "privateIp": "A String", # Optional. The private IP address of the DbSystem.
+    "recoStorageSizeGb": 42, # Optional. The reco/redo storage size in GB.
+    "shape": "A String", # Required. Shape of DB System.
+    "sshPublicKeys": [ # Required. SSH public keys to be stored with the DbSystem.
+      "A String",
+    ],
+    "timeZone": { # Represents a time zone from the [IANA Time Zone Database](https://www.iana.org/time-zones). # Optional. Time zone of the DbSystem.
+      "id": "A String", # IANA Time Zone Database time zone. For example "America/New_York".
+      "version": "A String", # Optional. IANA Time Zone Database version number. For example "2019a".
+    },
+  },
+}
+
+ +
+ list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Lists all the DbSystems for the given project and location.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent value for DbSystems in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}. (required)
+  filter: string, Optional. An expression for filtering the results of the request.
+  orderBy: string, Optional. An expression for ordering the results of the request.
+  pageSize: integer, Optional. The maximum number of items to return. If unspecified, at most 50 DbSystems will be returned. The maximum value is 1000; values above 1000 will be coerced to 1000.
+  pageToken: string, Optional. A token identifying a page of results the server should return.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The response for `DbSystem.List`.
+  "dbSystems": [ # The list of DbSystems.
+    { # Details of the DbSystem (BaseDB) resource. https://docs.oracle.com/en-us/iaas/api/#/en/database/20160918/DbSystem/
+      "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The date and time that the DbSystem was created.
+      "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display name for the System db. The name does not have to be unique within your project.
+      "entitlementId": "A String", # Output only. The ID of the subscription entitlement associated with the DbSystem
+      "gcpOracleZone": "A String", # Optional. The GCP Oracle zone where Oracle DbSystem is hosted. Example: us-east4-b-r2. If not specified, the system will pick a zone based on availability.
+      "labels": { # Optional. The labels or tags associated with the DbSystem.
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+      "name": "A String", # Identifier. The name of the DbSystem resource in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{region}/dbSystems/{db_system}
+      "ociUrl": "A String", # Output only. HTTPS link to OCI resources exposed to Customer via UI Interface.
+      "odbNetwork": "A String", # Optional. The name of the OdbNetwork associated with the DbSystem. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/odbNetworks/{odb_network} It is optional but if specified, this should match the parent ODBNetwork of the OdbSubnet.
+      "odbSubnet": "A String", # Required. The name of the OdbSubnet associated with the DbSystem for IP allocation. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/odbNetworks/{odb_network}/odbSubnets/{odb_subnet}
+      "properties": { # The properties of a DbSystem. # Optional. The properties of the DbSystem.
+        "computeCount": 42, # Required. The number of CPU cores to enable for the DbSystem.
+        "computeModel": "A String", # Optional. The compute model of the DbSystem.
+        "dataCollectionOptions": { # Data collection options for DbSystem. # Optional. Data collection options for diagnostics.
+          "isDiagnosticsEventsEnabled": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether to enable data collection for diagnostics.
+          "isIncidentLogsEnabled": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether to enable incident logs and trace collection.
+        },
+        "dataStorageSizeGb": 42, # Optional. The data storage size in GB that is currently available to DbSystems.
+        "databaseEdition": "A String", # Required. The database edition of the DbSystem.
+        "dbHome": { # Details of the Database Home resource. # Optional. Details for creating a Database Home.
+          "database": { # Details of the Database resource. https://docs.oracle.com/en-us/iaas/api/#/en/database/20160918/Database/ # Required. The Database resource.
+            "adminPassword": "A String", # Required. The password for the default ADMIN user.
+            "characterSet": "A String", # Optional. The character set for the database. The default is AL32UTF8.
+            "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The date and time that the Database was created.
+            "databaseId": "A String", # Optional. The database ID of the Database.
+            "dbHomeName": "A String", # Optional. The name of the DbHome resource associated with the Database.
+            "dbName": "A String", # Optional. The database name. The name must begin with an alphabetic character and can contain a maximum of eight alphanumeric characters. Special characters are not permitted.
+            "dbUniqueName": "A String", # Optional. The DB_UNIQUE_NAME of the Oracle Database being backed up.
+            "gcpOracleZone": "A String", # Output only. The GCP Oracle zone where the Database is created.
+            "name": "A String", # Identifier. The name of the Database resource in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{region}/databases/{database}
+            "ncharacterSet": "A String", # Optional. The national character set for the database. The default is AL16UTF16.
+            "ociUrl": "A String", # Output only. HTTPS link to OCI resources exposed to Customer via UI Interface.
+            "opsInsightsStatus": "A String", # Output only. The Status of Operations Insights for this Database.
+            "properties": { # The properties of a Database. # Optional. The properties of the Database.
+              "databaseManagementConfig": { # The configuration of the Database Management service. # Output only. The Database Management config.
+                "managementState": "A String", # Output only. The status of the Database Management service.
+                "managementType": "A String", # Output only. The Database Management type.
+              },
+              "dbBackupConfig": { # Backup Options for the Database. # Optional. Backup options for the Database.
+                "autoBackupEnabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, enables automatic backups on the database.
+                "autoFullBackupDay": "A String", # Optional. The day of the week on which the full backup should be performed on the database. If no value is provided, it will default to Sunday.
+                "autoFullBackupWindow": "A String", # Optional. The window in which the full backup should be performed on the database. If no value is provided, the default is anytime.
+                "autoIncrementalBackupWindow": "A String", # Optional. The window in which the incremental backup should be performed on the database. If no value is provided, the default is anytime except the auto full backup day.
+                "backupDeletionPolicy": "A String", # Optional. This defines when the backups will be deleted after Database termination.
+                "backupDestinationDetails": [ # Optional. Details of the database backup destinations.
+                  { # The details of the database backup destination.
+                    "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the database backup destination.
+                  },
+                ],
+                "retentionPeriodDays": 42, # Optional. The number of days an automatic backup is retained before being automatically deleted. This value determines the earliest point in time to which a database can be restored. Min: 1, Max: 60.
+              },
+              "dbVersion": "A String", # Required. The Oracle Database version.
+              "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the Database.
+            },
+            "tdeWalletPassword": "A String", # Optional. The TDE wallet password for the database.
+          },
+          "dbVersion": "A String", # Required. A valid Oracle Database version. For a list of supported versions, use the ListDbVersions operation.
+          "displayName": "A String", # Optional. The display name for the Database Home. The name does not have to be unique within your project.
+          "isUnifiedAuditingEnabled": True or False, # Optional. Whether unified auditing is enabled for the Database Home.
+        },
+        "dbSystemOptions": { # Details of the DbSystem Options. # Optional. The options for the DbSystem.
+          "storageManagement": "A String", # Optional. The storage option used in DB system.
+        },
+        "domain": "A String", # Optional. The host domain name of the DbSystem.
+        "hostname": "A String", # Output only. The hostname of the DbSystem.
+        "hostnamePrefix": "A String", # Optional. Prefix for DB System host names.
+        "initialDataStorageSizeGb": 42, # Required. The initial data storage size in GB.
+        "licenseModel": "A String", # Required. The license model of the DbSystem.
+        "lifecycleState": "A String", # Output only. State of the DbSystem.
+        "memorySizeGb": 42, # Optional. The memory size in GB.
+        "nodeCount": 42, # Optional. The number of nodes in the DbSystem.
+        "ocid": "A String", # Output only. OCID of the DbSystem.
+        "privateIp": "A String", # Optional. The private IP address of the DbSystem.
+        "recoStorageSizeGb": 42, # Optional. The reco/redo storage size in GB.
+        "shape": "A String", # Required. Shape of DB System.
+        "sshPublicKeys": [ # Required. SSH public keys to be stored with the DbSystem.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "timeZone": { # Represents a time zone from the [IANA Time Zone Database](https://www.iana.org/time-zones). # Optional. Time zone of the DbSystem.
+          "id": "A String", # IANA Time Zone Database time zone. For example "America/New_York".
+          "version": "A String", # Optional. IANA Time Zone Database version number. For example "2019a".
+        },
+      },
+    },
+  ],
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # A token identifying a page of results the server should return.
+}
+
+ +
+ list_next() +
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        
+
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.dbVersions.html b/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.dbVersions.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..28fb90b9fa9 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.dbVersions.html @@ -0,0 +1,140 @@ + + + +

Oracle Database@Google Cloud API . projects . locations . dbVersions

+

Instance Methods

+

+ close()

+

Close httplib2 connections.

+

+ list(parent, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

List DbVersions for the given project and location.

+

+ list_next()

+

Retrieves the next page of results.

+

Method Details

+
+ close() +
Close httplib2 connections.
+
+ +
+ list(parent, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None) +
List DbVersions for the given project and location.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent value for the DbVersion resource with the format: projects/{project}/locations/{location} (required)
+  filter: string, Optional. Filter expression that matches a subset of the DbVersions to show. The supported filter for dbSystem creation is `db_system_shape = {db_system_shape} AND storage_management = {storage_management}`. If no filter is provided, all DbVersions will be returned.
+  pageSize: integer, Optional. The maximum number of items to return. If unspecified, a maximum of 50 System Versions will be returned. The maximum value is 1000; values above 1000 will be reset to 1000.
+  pageToken: string, Optional. A token identifying the requested page of results to return. All fields except the filter should remain the same as in the request that provided this page token.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The response for `DbVersions.List`.
+  "dbVersions": [ # The list of DbVersions.
+    { # A valid Oracle Database version.
+      "name": "A String", # Output only. The name of the DbVersion resource in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{region}/dbVersions/{db_version}
+      "properties": { # The properties of a DbVersion. # Output only. The properties of the DbVersion.
+        "isLatestForMajorVersion": True or False, # Output only. True if this version of the Oracle Database software is the latest version for a release.
+        "isPreviewDbVersion": True or False, # Output only. True if this version of the Oracle Database software is the preview version.
+        "isUpgradeSupported": True or False, # Output only. True if this version of the Oracle Database software is supported for Upgrade.
+        "supportsPdb": True or False, # Output only. True if this version of the Oracle Database software supports pluggable databases.
+        "version": "A String", # Output only. A valid Oracle Database version.
+      },
+    },
+  ],
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # A token identifying a page of results the server should return.
+}
+
+ +
+ list_next() +
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        
+
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.giVersions.html b/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.giVersions.html index 27e70282993..9232b21131c 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.giVersions.html +++ b/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.giVersions.html @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@

Method Details

Args: parent: string, Required. The parent value for Grid Infrastructure Version in the following format: Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}. (required) - filter: string, Optional. An expression for filtering the results of the request. Only the shape and gi_version fields are supported in this format: `shape="{shape}"`. + filter: string, Optional. An expression for filtering the results of the request. Only the shape, gcp_oracle_zone and gi_version fields are supported in this format: `shape="{shape}"`. pageSize: integer, Optional. The maximum number of items to return. If unspecified, a maximum of 50 Oracle Grid Infrastructure (GI) versions will be returned. The maximum value is 1000; values above 1000 will be reset to 1000. pageToken: string, Optional. A token identifying a page of results the server should return. x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. diff --git a/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.html index 9e58b7a78d0..9753ba7d186 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.html @@ -104,11 +104,36 @@

Instance Methods

Returns the cloudVmClusters Resource.

+

+ databaseCharacterSets() +

+

Returns the databaseCharacterSets Resource.

+ +

+ databases() +

+

Returns the databases Resource.

+ +

+ dbSystemInitialStorageSizes() +

+

Returns the dbSystemInitialStorageSizes Resource.

+

dbSystemShapes()

Returns the dbSystemShapes Resource.

+

+ dbSystems() +

+

Returns the dbSystems Resource.

+ +

+ dbVersions() +

+

Returns the dbVersions Resource.

+

entitlements()

@@ -129,6 +154,11 @@

Instance Methods

Returns the operations Resource.

+

+ pluggableDatabases() +

+

Returns the pluggableDatabases Resource.

+

close()

Close httplib2 connections.

@@ -180,7 +210,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.odbNetworks.html b/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.odbNetworks.html index a5ca601f7e4..0aedff476ac 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.odbNetworks.html +++ b/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.odbNetworks.html @@ -115,6 +115,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Represents OdbNetwork resource. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The date and time that the OdbNetwork was created. "entitlementId": "A String", # Output only. The ID of the subscription entitlement associated with the OdbNetwork. + "gcpOracleZone": "A String", # Optional. The GCP Oracle zone where OdbNetwork is hosted. Example: us-east4-b-r2. If not specified, the system will pick a zone based on availability. "labels": { # Optional. Labels or tags associated with the resource. "a_key": "A String", }, @@ -207,6 +208,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Represents OdbNetwork resource. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The date and time that the OdbNetwork was created. "entitlementId": "A String", # Output only. The ID of the subscription entitlement associated with the OdbNetwork. + "gcpOracleZone": "A String", # Optional. The GCP Oracle zone where OdbNetwork is hosted. Example: us-east4-b-r2. If not specified, the system will pick a zone based on availability. "labels": { # Optional. Labels or tags associated with the resource. "a_key": "A String", }, @@ -240,6 +242,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Represents OdbNetwork resource. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The date and time that the OdbNetwork was created. "entitlementId": "A String", # Output only. The ID of the subscription entitlement associated with the OdbNetwork. + "gcpOracleZone": "A String", # Optional. The GCP Oracle zone where OdbNetwork is hosted. Example: us-east4-b-r2. If not specified, the system will pick a zone based on availability. "labels": { # Optional. Labels or tags associated with the resource. "a_key": "A String", }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.pluggableDatabases.html b/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.pluggableDatabases.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..84dcf580544 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/dyn/oracledatabase_v1.projects.locations.pluggableDatabases.html @@ -0,0 +1,235 @@ + + + +

Oracle Database@Google Cloud API . projects . locations . pluggableDatabases

+

Instance Methods

+

+ close()

+

Close httplib2 connections.

+

+ get(name, x__xgafv=None)

+

Gets details of a single PluggableDatabase.

+

+ list(parent, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Lists all the PluggableDatabases for the given project, location and Container Database.

+

+ list_next()

+

Retrieves the next page of results.

+

Method Details

+
+ close() +
Close httplib2 connections.
+
+ +
+ get(name, x__xgafv=None) +
Gets details of a single PluggableDatabase.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The name of the PluggableDatabase resource in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{region}/pluggableDatabases/{pluggable_database} (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The PluggableDatabase resource. https://docs.oracle.com/en-us/iaas/api/#/en/database/20160918/PluggableDatabase/
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The date and time that the PluggableDatabase was created.
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The name of the PluggableDatabase resource in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{region}/pluggableDatabases/{pluggable_database}
+  "ociUrl": "A String", # Output only. HTTPS link to OCI resources exposed to Customer via UI Interface.
+  "properties": { # The properties of a PluggableDatabase. # Optional. The properties of the PluggableDatabase.
+    "compartmentId": "A String", # Required. The OCID of the compartment.
+    "connectionStrings": { # The connection strings used to connect to the Oracle Database. # Optional. The Connection strings used to connect to the Oracle Database.
+      "allConnectionStrings": { # Optional. All connection strings to use to connect to the pluggable database.
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+      "pdbDefault": "A String", # Optional. The default connection string to use to connect to the pluggable database.
+      "pdbIpDefault": "A String", # Optional. The default connection string to use to connect to the pluggable database using IP.
+    },
+    "containerDatabaseOcid": "A String", # Required. The OCID of the CDB.
+    "databaseManagementConfig": { # The configuration of the Database Management service. # Output only. The configuration of the Database Management service.
+      "managementState": "A String", # Output only. The status of the Database Management service.
+      "managementType": "A String", # Output only. The Database Management type.
+    },
+    "definedTags": { # Optional. Defined tags for this resource. Each key is predefined and scoped to a namespace.
+      "a_key": { # Wrapper message for the value of a defined tag.
+        "tags": { # The tags within the namespace.
+          "a_key": "A String",
+        },
+      },
+    },
+    "freeformTags": { # Optional. Free-form tags for this resource. Each tag is a simple key-value pair with no predefined name, type, or namespace.
+      "a_key": "A String",
+    },
+    "isRestricted": True or False, # Optional. The restricted mode of the pluggable database. If a pluggable database is opened in restricted mode, the user needs both create a session and have restricted session privileges to connect to it.
+    "lifecycleDetails": "A String", # Output only. Additional information about the current lifecycle state.
+    "lifecycleState": "A String", # Output only. The current state of the pluggable database.
+    "ocid": "A String", # Output only. The OCID of the pluggable database.
+    "operationsInsightsState": "A String", # Output only. The status of Operations Insights for this Database.
+    "pdbName": "A String", # Required. The database name.
+    "pdbNodeLevelDetails": [ # Optional. Pluggable Database Node Level Details
+      { # The Pluggable Database Node Level Details.
+        "nodeName": "A String", # Required. The Node name of the Database home.
+        "openMode": "A String", # Required. The mode that the pluggable database is in to open it.
+        "pluggableDatabaseId": "A String", # Required. The OCID of the Pluggable Database.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+}
+
+ +
+ list(parent, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None) +
Lists all the PluggableDatabases for the given project, location and Container Database.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent, which owns this collection of PluggableDatabases. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location} (required)
+  filter: string, Optional. An expression for filtering the results of the request. List for pluggable databases is supported only with a valid container database (full resource name) filter in this format: `database="projects/{project}/locations/{location}/databases/{database}"`
+  pageSize: integer, Optional. The maximum number of PluggableDatabases to return. The service may return fewer than this value.
+  pageToken: string, Optional. A page token, received from a previous `ListPluggableDatabases` call. Provide this to retrieve the subsequent page. When paginating, all other parameters provided to `ListPluggableDatabases` must match the call that provided the page token.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The response for `PluggableDatabase.List`.
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # A token identifying a page of results the server should return.
+  "pluggableDatabases": [ # The list of PluggableDatabases.
+    { # The PluggableDatabase resource. https://docs.oracle.com/en-us/iaas/api/#/en/database/20160918/PluggableDatabase/
+      "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The date and time that the PluggableDatabase was created.
+      "name": "A String", # Identifier. The name of the PluggableDatabase resource in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{region}/pluggableDatabases/{pluggable_database}
+      "ociUrl": "A String", # Output only. HTTPS link to OCI resources exposed to Customer via UI Interface.
+      "properties": { # The properties of a PluggableDatabase. # Optional. The properties of the PluggableDatabase.
+        "compartmentId": "A String", # Required. The OCID of the compartment.
+        "connectionStrings": { # The connection strings used to connect to the Oracle Database. # Optional. The Connection strings used to connect to the Oracle Database.
+          "allConnectionStrings": { # Optional. All connection strings to use to connect to the pluggable database.
+            "a_key": "A String",
+          },
+          "pdbDefault": "A String", # Optional. The default connection string to use to connect to the pluggable database.
+          "pdbIpDefault": "A String", # Optional. The default connection string to use to connect to the pluggable database using IP.
+        },
+        "containerDatabaseOcid": "A String", # Required. The OCID of the CDB.
+        "databaseManagementConfig": { # The configuration of the Database Management service. # Output only. The configuration of the Database Management service.
+          "managementState": "A String", # Output only. The status of the Database Management service.
+          "managementType": "A String", # Output only. The Database Management type.
+        },
+        "definedTags": { # Optional. Defined tags for this resource. Each key is predefined and scoped to a namespace.
+          "a_key": { # Wrapper message for the value of a defined tag.
+            "tags": { # The tags within the namespace.
+              "a_key": "A String",
+            },
+          },
+        },
+        "freeformTags": { # Optional. Free-form tags for this resource. Each tag is a simple key-value pair with no predefined name, type, or namespace.
+          "a_key": "A String",
+        },
+        "isRestricted": True or False, # Optional. The restricted mode of the pluggable database. If a pluggable database is opened in restricted mode, the user needs both create a session and have restricted session privileges to connect to it.
+        "lifecycleDetails": "A String", # Output only. Additional information about the current lifecycle state.
+        "lifecycleState": "A String", # Output only. The current state of the pluggable database.
+        "ocid": "A String", # Output only. The OCID of the pluggable database.
+        "operationsInsightsState": "A String", # Output only. The status of Operations Insights for this Database.
+        "pdbName": "A String", # Required. The database name.
+        "pdbNodeLevelDetails": [ # Optional. Pluggable Database Node Level Details
+          { # The Pluggable Database Node Level Details.
+            "nodeName": "A String", # Required. The Node name of the Database home.
+            "openMode": "A String", # Required. The mode that the pluggable database is in to open it.
+            "pluggableDatabaseId": "A String", # Required. The OCID of the Pluggable Database.
+          },
+        ],
+      },
+    },
+  ],
+}
+
+ +
+ list_next() +
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        
+
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.caPools.html b/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.caPools.html index 6875f6c884f..4c8e49dce9c 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.caPools.html +++ b/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.caPools.html @@ -133,6 +133,9 @@

Method Details

The object takes the form of: { # A CaPool represents a group of CertificateAuthorities that form a trust anchor. A CaPool can be used to manage issuance policies for one or more CertificateAuthority resources and to rotate CA certificates in and out of the trust anchor. + "encryptionSpec": { # The configuration used for encrypting data at rest. # Optional. When EncryptionSpec is provided, the Subject, SubjectAltNames, and the PEM-encoded certificate fields will be encrypted at rest. + "cloudKmsKey": "A String", # The resource name for a Cloud KMS key in the format `projects/*/locations/*/keyRings/*/cryptoKeys/*`. + }, "issuancePolicy": { # Defines controls over all certificate issuance within a CaPool. # Optional. The IssuancePolicy to control how Certificates will be issued from this CaPool. "allowedIssuanceModes": { # IssuanceModes specifies the allowed ways in which Certificates may be requested from this CaPool. # Optional. If specified, then only methods allowed in the IssuanceModes may be used to issue Certificates. "allowConfigBasedIssuance": True or False, # Optional. When true, allows callers to create Certificates by specifying a CertificateConfig. @@ -383,6 +386,9 @@

Method Details

An object of the form: { # A CaPool represents a group of CertificateAuthorities that form a trust anchor. A CaPool can be used to manage issuance policies for one or more CertificateAuthority resources and to rotate CA certificates in and out of the trust anchor. + "encryptionSpec": { # The configuration used for encrypting data at rest. # Optional. When EncryptionSpec is provided, the Subject, SubjectAltNames, and the PEM-encoded certificate fields will be encrypted at rest. + "cloudKmsKey": "A String", # The resource name for a Cloud KMS key in the format `projects/*/locations/*/keyRings/*/cryptoKeys/*`. + }, "issuancePolicy": { # Defines controls over all certificate issuance within a CaPool. # Optional. The IssuancePolicy to control how Certificates will be issued from this CaPool. "allowedIssuanceModes": { # IssuanceModes specifies the allowed ways in which Certificates may be requested from this CaPool. # Optional. If specified, then only methods allowed in the IssuanceModes may be used to issue Certificates. "allowConfigBasedIssuance": True or False, # Optional. When true, allows callers to create Certificates by specifying a CertificateConfig. @@ -588,6 +594,9 @@

Method Details

{ # Response message for CertificateAuthorityService.ListCaPools. "caPools": [ # The list of CaPools. { # A CaPool represents a group of CertificateAuthorities that form a trust anchor. A CaPool can be used to manage issuance policies for one or more CertificateAuthority resources and to rotate CA certificates in and out of the trust anchor. + "encryptionSpec": { # The configuration used for encrypting data at rest. # Optional. When EncryptionSpec is provided, the Subject, SubjectAltNames, and the PEM-encoded certificate fields will be encrypted at rest. + "cloudKmsKey": "A String", # The resource name for a Cloud KMS key in the format `projects/*/locations/*/keyRings/*/cryptoKeys/*`. + }, "issuancePolicy": { # Defines controls over all certificate issuance within a CaPool. # Optional. The IssuancePolicy to control how Certificates will be issued from this CaPool. "allowedIssuanceModes": { # IssuanceModes specifies the allowed ways in which Certificates may be requested from this CaPool. # Optional. If specified, then only methods allowed in the IssuanceModes may be used to issue Certificates. "allowConfigBasedIssuance": True or False, # Optional. When true, allows callers to create Certificates by specifying a CertificateConfig. @@ -754,6 +763,9 @@

Method Details

The object takes the form of: { # A CaPool represents a group of CertificateAuthorities that form a trust anchor. A CaPool can be used to manage issuance policies for one or more CertificateAuthority resources and to rotate CA certificates in and out of the trust anchor. + "encryptionSpec": { # The configuration used for encrypting data at rest. # Optional. When EncryptionSpec is provided, the Subject, SubjectAltNames, and the PEM-encoded certificate fields will be encrypted at rest. + "cloudKmsKey": "A String", # The resource name for a Cloud KMS key in the format `projects/*/locations/*/keyRings/*/cryptoKeys/*`. + }, "issuancePolicy": { # Defines controls over all certificate issuance within a CaPool. # Optional. The IssuancePolicy to control how Certificates will be issued from this CaPool. "allowedIssuanceModes": { # IssuanceModes specifies the allowed ways in which Certificates may be requested from this CaPool. # Optional. If specified, then only methods allowed in the IssuanceModes may be used to issue Certificates. "allowConfigBasedIssuance": True or False, # Optional. When true, allows callers to create Certificates by specifying a CertificateConfig. diff --git a/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.html index 1f34afb9f31..b8ca782f2f5 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.html @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. A list of extra location types that should be used as conditions for controlling the visibility of the locations. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/privateca_v1beta1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/privateca_v1beta1.projects.locations.html index 30f4295635b..d13894bdd0b 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/privateca_v1beta1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/privateca_v1beta1.projects.locations.html @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. A list of extra location types that should be used as conditions for controlling the visibility of the locations. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/recommender_v1beta1.billingAccounts.locations.html b/docs/dyn/recommender_v1beta1.billingAccounts.locations.html index aa03d8ae232..996a9ac56f2 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/recommender_v1beta1.billingAccounts.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/recommender_v1beta1.billingAccounts.locations.html @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/recommender_v1beta1.folders.locations.html b/docs/dyn/recommender_v1beta1.folders.locations.html index bdf198894ca..4342e60dcf4 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/recommender_v1beta1.folders.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/recommender_v1beta1.folders.locations.html @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/recommender_v1beta1.organizations.locations.html b/docs/dyn/recommender_v1beta1.organizations.locations.html index 1a7b54336ae..ecc9f79a563 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/recommender_v1beta1.organizations.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/recommender_v1beta1.organizations.locations.html @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/recommender_v1beta1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/recommender_v1beta1.projects.locations.html index 931cedcd089..bf178ffdb08 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/recommender_v1beta1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/recommender_v1beta1.projects.locations.html @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/redis_v1.projects.locations.clusters.html b/docs/dyn/redis_v1.projects.locations.clusters.html index 71998805f49..77ddc2b1d2b 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/redis_v1.projects.locations.clusters.html +++ b/docs/dyn/redis_v1.projects.locations.clusters.html @@ -259,6 +259,9 @@

Method Details

], }, "kmsKey": "A String", # Optional. The KMS key used to encrypt the at-rest data of the cluster. + "labels": { # Optional. Labels to represent user-provided metadata. + "a_key": "A String", + }, "maintenancePolicy": { # Maintenance policy per cluster. # Optional. ClusterMaintenancePolicy determines when to allow or deny updates. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the policy was created i.e. Maintenance Window or Deny Period was assigned. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the policy was updated i.e. Maintenance Window or Deny Period was updated. @@ -522,6 +525,9 @@

Method Details

], }, "kmsKey": "A String", # Optional. The KMS key used to encrypt the at-rest data of the cluster. + "labels": { # Optional. Labels to represent user-provided metadata. + "a_key": "A String", + }, "maintenancePolicy": { # Maintenance policy per cluster. # Optional. ClusterMaintenancePolicy determines when to allow or deny updates. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the policy was created i.e. Maintenance Window or Deny Period was assigned. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the policy was updated i.e. Maintenance Window or Deny Period was updated. @@ -751,6 +757,9 @@

Method Details

], }, "kmsKey": "A String", # Optional. The KMS key used to encrypt the at-rest data of the cluster. + "labels": { # Optional. Labels to represent user-provided metadata. + "a_key": "A String", + }, "maintenancePolicy": { # Maintenance policy per cluster. # Optional. ClusterMaintenancePolicy determines when to allow or deny updates. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the policy was created i.e. Maintenance Window or Deny Period was assigned. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the policy was updated i.e. Maintenance Window or Deny Period was updated. @@ -963,6 +972,9 @@

Method Details

], }, "kmsKey": "A String", # Optional. The KMS key used to encrypt the at-rest data of the cluster. + "labels": { # Optional. Labels to represent user-provided metadata. + "a_key": "A String", + }, "maintenancePolicy": { # Maintenance policy per cluster. # Optional. ClusterMaintenancePolicy determines when to allow or deny updates. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the policy was created i.e. Maintenance Window or Deny Period was assigned. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the policy was updated i.e. Maintenance Window or Deny Period was updated. diff --git a/docs/dyn/redis_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/redis_v1.projects.locations.html index 5c185ba667b..ff1bee4c7fe 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/redis_v1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/redis_v1.projects.locations.html @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/redis_v1beta1.projects.locations.clusters.html b/docs/dyn/redis_v1beta1.projects.locations.clusters.html index 7925d397dd8..41accd1400d 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/redis_v1beta1.projects.locations.clusters.html +++ b/docs/dyn/redis_v1beta1.projects.locations.clusters.html @@ -259,6 +259,9 @@

Method Details

], }, "kmsKey": "A String", # Optional. The KMS key used to encrypt the at-rest data of the cluster. + "labels": { # Optional. Labels to represent user-provided metadata. + "a_key": "A String", + }, "maintenancePolicy": { # Maintenance policy per cluster. # Optional. ClusterMaintenancePolicy determines when to allow or deny updates. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the policy was created i.e. Maintenance Window or Deny Period was assigned. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the policy was updated i.e. Maintenance Window or Deny Period was updated. @@ -522,6 +525,9 @@

Method Details

], }, "kmsKey": "A String", # Optional. The KMS key used to encrypt the at-rest data of the cluster. + "labels": { # Optional. Labels to represent user-provided metadata. + "a_key": "A String", + }, "maintenancePolicy": { # Maintenance policy per cluster. # Optional. ClusterMaintenancePolicy determines when to allow or deny updates. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the policy was created i.e. Maintenance Window or Deny Period was assigned. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the policy was updated i.e. Maintenance Window or Deny Period was updated. @@ -751,6 +757,9 @@

Method Details

], }, "kmsKey": "A String", # Optional. The KMS key used to encrypt the at-rest data of the cluster. + "labels": { # Optional. Labels to represent user-provided metadata. + "a_key": "A String", + }, "maintenancePolicy": { # Maintenance policy per cluster. # Optional. ClusterMaintenancePolicy determines when to allow or deny updates. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the policy was created i.e. Maintenance Window or Deny Period was assigned. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the policy was updated i.e. Maintenance Window or Deny Period was updated. @@ -963,6 +972,9 @@

Method Details

], }, "kmsKey": "A String", # Optional. The KMS key used to encrypt the at-rest data of the cluster. + "labels": { # Optional. Labels to represent user-provided metadata. + "a_key": "A String", + }, "maintenancePolicy": { # Maintenance policy per cluster. # Optional. ClusterMaintenancePolicy determines when to allow or deny updates. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the policy was created i.e. Maintenance Window or Deny Period was assigned. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the policy was updated i.e. Maintenance Window or Deny Period was updated. diff --git a/docs/dyn/redis_v1beta1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/redis_v1beta1.projects.locations.html index bfc4717d97b..02a8232e164 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/redis_v1beta1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/redis_v1beta1.projects.locations.html @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/run_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/run_v1.projects.locations.html index 9dbc5e0522e..91c92220430 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/run_v1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/run_v1.projects.locations.html @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.jobs.executions.html b/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.jobs.executions.html index ccd44ae12fd..de5c6f4f433 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.jobs.executions.html +++ b/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.jobs.executions.html @@ -412,7 +412,7 @@

Method Details

}, "secret": { # The secret's value will be presented as the content of a file whose name is defined in the item path. If no items are defined, the name of the file is the secret. # Secret represents a secret that should populate this volume. "defaultMode": 42, # Integer representation of mode bits to use on created files by default. Must be a value between 0000 and 0777 (octal), defaulting to 0444. Directories within the path are not affected by this setting. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and as a result, other mode bits could be set. - "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. + "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path + VolumeMount.sub_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. { # VersionToPath maps a specific version of a secret to a relative file to mount to, relative to VolumeMount's mount_path. "mode": 42, # Integer octal mode bits to use on this file, must be a value between 01 and 0777 (octal). If 0 or not set, the Volume's default mode will be used. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. "path": "A String", # Required. The relative path of the secret in the container. @@ -637,7 +637,7 @@

Method Details

}, "secret": { # The secret's value will be presented as the content of a file whose name is defined in the item path. If no items are defined, the name of the file is the secret. # Secret represents a secret that should populate this volume. "defaultMode": 42, # Integer representation of mode bits to use on created files by default. Must be a value between 0000 and 0777 (octal), defaulting to 0444. Directories within the path are not affected by this setting. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and as a result, other mode bits could be set. - "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. + "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path + VolumeMount.sub_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. { # VersionToPath maps a specific version of a secret to a relative file to mount to, relative to VolumeMount's mount_path. "mode": 42, # Integer octal mode bits to use on this file, must be a value between 01 and 0777 (octal). If 0 or not set, the Volume's default mode will be used. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. "path": "A String", # Required. The relative path of the secret in the container. diff --git a/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.jobs.executions.tasks.html b/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.jobs.executions.tasks.html index 15a5e2d02ac..9016e89aae9 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.jobs.executions.tasks.html +++ b/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.jobs.executions.tasks.html @@ -291,7 +291,7 @@

Method Details

}, "secret": { # The secret's value will be presented as the content of a file whose name is defined in the item path. If no items are defined, the name of the file is the secret. # Secret represents a secret that should populate this volume. "defaultMode": 42, # Integer representation of mode bits to use on created files by default. Must be a value between 0000 and 0777 (octal), defaulting to 0444. Directories within the path are not affected by this setting. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and as a result, other mode bits could be set. - "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. + "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path + VolumeMount.sub_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. { # VersionToPath maps a specific version of a secret to a relative file to mount to, relative to VolumeMount's mount_path. "mode": 42, # Integer octal mode bits to use on this file, must be a value between 01 and 0777 (octal). If 0 or not set, the Volume's default mode will be used. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. "path": "A String", # Required. The relative path of the secret in the container. @@ -523,7 +523,7 @@

Method Details

}, "secret": { # The secret's value will be presented as the content of a file whose name is defined in the item path. If no items are defined, the name of the file is the secret. # Secret represents a secret that should populate this volume. "defaultMode": 42, # Integer representation of mode bits to use on created files by default. Must be a value between 0000 and 0777 (octal), defaulting to 0444. Directories within the path are not affected by this setting. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and as a result, other mode bits could be set. - "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. + "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path + VolumeMount.sub_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. { # VersionToPath maps a specific version of a secret to a relative file to mount to, relative to VolumeMount's mount_path. "mode": 42, # Integer octal mode bits to use on this file, must be a value between 01 and 0777 (octal). If 0 or not set, the Volume's default mode will be used. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. "path": "A String", # Required. The relative path of the secret in the container. diff --git a/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.jobs.html b/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.jobs.html index 3c8f003805c..748ef751ca8 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.jobs.html +++ b/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.jobs.html @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@

Method Details

}, "secret": { # The secret's value will be presented as the content of a file whose name is defined in the item path. If no items are defined, the name of the file is the secret. # Secret represents a secret that should populate this volume. "defaultMode": 42, # Integer representation of mode bits to use on created files by default. Must be a value between 0000 and 0777 (octal), defaulting to 0444. Directories within the path are not affected by this setting. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and as a result, other mode bits could be set. - "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. + "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path + VolumeMount.sub_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. { # VersionToPath maps a specific version of a secret to a relative file to mount to, relative to VolumeMount's mount_path. "mode": 42, # Integer octal mode bits to use on this file, must be a value between 01 and 0777 (octal). If 0 or not set, the Volume's default mode will be used. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. "path": "A String", # Required. The relative path of the secret in the container. @@ -633,7 +633,7 @@

Method Details

}, "secret": { # The secret's value will be presented as the content of a file whose name is defined in the item path. If no items are defined, the name of the file is the secret. # Secret represents a secret that should populate this volume. "defaultMode": 42, # Integer representation of mode bits to use on created files by default. Must be a value between 0000 and 0777 (octal), defaulting to 0444. Directories within the path are not affected by this setting. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and as a result, other mode bits could be set. - "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. + "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path + VolumeMount.sub_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. { # VersionToPath maps a specific version of a secret to a relative file to mount to, relative to VolumeMount's mount_path. "mode": 42, # Integer octal mode bits to use on this file, must be a value between 01 and 0777 (octal). If 0 or not set, the Volume's default mode will be used. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. "path": "A String", # Required. The relative path of the secret in the container. @@ -933,7 +933,7 @@

Method Details

}, "secret": { # The secret's value will be presented as the content of a file whose name is defined in the item path. If no items are defined, the name of the file is the secret. # Secret represents a secret that should populate this volume. "defaultMode": 42, # Integer representation of mode bits to use on created files by default. Must be a value between 0000 and 0777 (octal), defaulting to 0444. Directories within the path are not affected by this setting. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and as a result, other mode bits could be set. - "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. + "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path + VolumeMount.sub_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. { # VersionToPath maps a specific version of a secret to a relative file to mount to, relative to VolumeMount's mount_path. "mode": 42, # Integer octal mode bits to use on this file, must be a value between 01 and 0777 (octal). If 0 or not set, the Volume's default mode will be used. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. "path": "A String", # Required. The relative path of the secret in the container. @@ -1192,7 +1192,7 @@

Method Details

}, "secret": { # The secret's value will be presented as the content of a file whose name is defined in the item path. If no items are defined, the name of the file is the secret. # Secret represents a secret that should populate this volume. "defaultMode": 42, # Integer representation of mode bits to use on created files by default. Must be a value between 0000 and 0777 (octal), defaulting to 0444. Directories within the path are not affected by this setting. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and as a result, other mode bits could be set. - "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. + "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path + VolumeMount.sub_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. { # VersionToPath maps a specific version of a secret to a relative file to mount to, relative to VolumeMount's mount_path. "mode": 42, # Integer octal mode bits to use on this file, must be a value between 01 and 0777 (octal). If 0 or not set, the Volume's default mode will be used. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. "path": "A String", # Required. The relative path of the secret in the container. diff --git a/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.services.html b/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.services.html index 90dcc9b304e..3912e0da706 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.services.html +++ b/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.services.html @@ -350,7 +350,7 @@

Method Details

}, "secret": { # The secret's value will be presented as the content of a file whose name is defined in the item path. If no items are defined, the name of the file is the secret. # Secret represents a secret that should populate this volume. "defaultMode": 42, # Integer representation of mode bits to use on created files by default. Must be a value between 0000 and 0777 (octal), defaulting to 0444. Directories within the path are not affected by this setting. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and as a result, other mode bits could be set. - "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. + "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path + VolumeMount.sub_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. { # VersionToPath maps a specific version of a secret to a relative file to mount to, relative to VolumeMount's mount_path. "mode": 42, # Integer octal mode bits to use on this file, must be a value between 01 and 0777 (octal). If 0 or not set, the Volume's default mode will be used. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. "path": "A String", # Required. The relative path of the secret in the container. @@ -719,7 +719,7 @@

Method Details

}, "secret": { # The secret's value will be presented as the content of a file whose name is defined in the item path. If no items are defined, the name of the file is the secret. # Secret represents a secret that should populate this volume. "defaultMode": 42, # Integer representation of mode bits to use on created files by default. Must be a value between 0000 and 0777 (octal), defaulting to 0444. Directories within the path are not affected by this setting. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and as a result, other mode bits could be set. - "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. + "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path + VolumeMount.sub_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. { # VersionToPath maps a specific version of a secret to a relative file to mount to, relative to VolumeMount's mount_path. "mode": 42, # Integer octal mode bits to use on this file, must be a value between 01 and 0777 (octal). If 0 or not set, the Volume's default mode will be used. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. "path": "A String", # Required. The relative path of the secret in the container. @@ -1075,7 +1075,7 @@

Method Details

}, "secret": { # The secret's value will be presented as the content of a file whose name is defined in the item path. If no items are defined, the name of the file is the secret. # Secret represents a secret that should populate this volume. "defaultMode": 42, # Integer representation of mode bits to use on created files by default. Must be a value between 0000 and 0777 (octal), defaulting to 0444. Directories within the path are not affected by this setting. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and as a result, other mode bits could be set. - "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. + "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path + VolumeMount.sub_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. { # VersionToPath maps a specific version of a secret to a relative file to mount to, relative to VolumeMount's mount_path. "mode": 42, # Integer octal mode bits to use on this file, must be a value between 01 and 0777 (octal). If 0 or not set, the Volume's default mode will be used. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. "path": "A String", # Required. The relative path of the secret in the container. @@ -1388,7 +1388,7 @@

Method Details

}, "secret": { # The secret's value will be presented as the content of a file whose name is defined in the item path. If no items are defined, the name of the file is the secret. # Secret represents a secret that should populate this volume. "defaultMode": 42, # Integer representation of mode bits to use on created files by default. Must be a value between 0000 and 0777 (octal), defaulting to 0444. Directories within the path are not affected by this setting. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and as a result, other mode bits could be set. - "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. + "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path + VolumeMount.sub_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. { # VersionToPath maps a specific version of a secret to a relative file to mount to, relative to VolumeMount's mount_path. "mode": 42, # Integer octal mode bits to use on this file, must be a value between 01 and 0777 (octal). If 0 or not set, the Volume's default mode will be used. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. "path": "A String", # Required. The relative path of the secret in the container. diff --git a/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.services.revisions.html b/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.services.revisions.html index 45b8250c0d5..ec59b5c624a 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.services.revisions.html +++ b/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.services.revisions.html @@ -366,7 +366,7 @@

Method Details

}, "secret": { # The secret's value will be presented as the content of a file whose name is defined in the item path. If no items are defined, the name of the file is the secret. # Secret represents a secret that should populate this volume. "defaultMode": 42, # Integer representation of mode bits to use on created files by default. Must be a value between 0000 and 0777 (octal), defaulting to 0444. Directories within the path are not affected by this setting. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and as a result, other mode bits could be set. - "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. + "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path + VolumeMount.sub_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. { # VersionToPath maps a specific version of a secret to a relative file to mount to, relative to VolumeMount's mount_path. "mode": 42, # Integer octal mode bits to use on this file, must be a value between 01 and 0777 (octal). If 0 or not set, the Volume's default mode will be used. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. "path": "A String", # Required. The relative path of the secret in the container. @@ -594,7 +594,7 @@

Method Details

}, "secret": { # The secret's value will be presented as the content of a file whose name is defined in the item path. If no items are defined, the name of the file is the secret. # Secret represents a secret that should populate this volume. "defaultMode": 42, # Integer representation of mode bits to use on created files by default. Must be a value between 0000 and 0777 (octal), defaulting to 0444. Directories within the path are not affected by this setting. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and as a result, other mode bits could be set. - "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. + "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path + VolumeMount.sub_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. { # VersionToPath maps a specific version of a secret to a relative file to mount to, relative to VolumeMount's mount_path. "mode": 42, # Integer octal mode bits to use on this file, must be a value between 01 and 0777 (octal). If 0 or not set, the Volume's default mode will be used. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. "path": "A String", # Required. The relative path of the secret in the container. diff --git a/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.workerPools.html b/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.workerPools.html index 25ba9c087b9..e63bfdf5eeb 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.workerPools.html +++ b/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.workerPools.html @@ -329,7 +329,7 @@

Method Details

}, "secret": { # The secret's value will be presented as the content of a file whose name is defined in the item path. If no items are defined, the name of the file is the secret. # Secret represents a secret that should populate this volume. "defaultMode": 42, # Integer representation of mode bits to use on created files by default. Must be a value between 0000 and 0777 (octal), defaulting to 0444. Directories within the path are not affected by this setting. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and as a result, other mode bits could be set. - "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. + "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path + VolumeMount.sub_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. { # VersionToPath maps a specific version of a secret to a relative file to mount to, relative to VolumeMount's mount_path. "mode": 42, # Integer octal mode bits to use on this file, must be a value between 01 and 0777 (octal). If 0 or not set, the Volume's default mode will be used. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. "path": "A String", # Required. The relative path of the secret in the container. @@ -655,7 +655,7 @@

Method Details

}, "secret": { # The secret's value will be presented as the content of a file whose name is defined in the item path. If no items are defined, the name of the file is the secret. # Secret represents a secret that should populate this volume. "defaultMode": 42, # Integer representation of mode bits to use on created files by default. Must be a value between 0000 and 0777 (octal), defaulting to 0444. Directories within the path are not affected by this setting. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and as a result, other mode bits could be set. - "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. + "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path + VolumeMount.sub_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. { # VersionToPath maps a specific version of a secret to a relative file to mount to, relative to VolumeMount's mount_path. "mode": 42, # Integer octal mode bits to use on this file, must be a value between 01 and 0777 (octal). If 0 or not set, the Volume's default mode will be used. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. "path": "A String", # Required. The relative path of the secret in the container. @@ -968,7 +968,7 @@

Method Details

}, "secret": { # The secret's value will be presented as the content of a file whose name is defined in the item path. If no items are defined, the name of the file is the secret. # Secret represents a secret that should populate this volume. "defaultMode": 42, # Integer representation of mode bits to use on created files by default. Must be a value between 0000 and 0777 (octal), defaulting to 0444. Directories within the path are not affected by this setting. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and as a result, other mode bits could be set. - "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. + "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path + VolumeMount.sub_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. { # VersionToPath maps a specific version of a secret to a relative file to mount to, relative to VolumeMount's mount_path. "mode": 42, # Integer octal mode bits to use on this file, must be a value between 01 and 0777 (octal). If 0 or not set, the Volume's default mode will be used. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. "path": "A String", # Required. The relative path of the secret in the container. @@ -1238,7 +1238,7 @@

Method Details

}, "secret": { # The secret's value will be presented as the content of a file whose name is defined in the item path. If no items are defined, the name of the file is the secret. # Secret represents a secret that should populate this volume. "defaultMode": 42, # Integer representation of mode bits to use on created files by default. Must be a value between 0000 and 0777 (octal), defaulting to 0444. Directories within the path are not affected by this setting. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and as a result, other mode bits could be set. - "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. + "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path + VolumeMount.sub_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. { # VersionToPath maps a specific version of a secret to a relative file to mount to, relative to VolumeMount's mount_path. "mode": 42, # Integer octal mode bits to use on this file, must be a value between 01 and 0777 (octal). If 0 or not set, the Volume's default mode will be used. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. "path": "A String", # Required. The relative path of the secret in the container. diff --git a/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.workerPools.revisions.html b/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.workerPools.revisions.html index 3b27654ca65..7c8d47a1d98 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.workerPools.revisions.html +++ b/docs/dyn/run_v2.projects.locations.workerPools.revisions.html @@ -327,7 +327,7 @@

Method Details

}, "secret": { # The secret's value will be presented as the content of a file whose name is defined in the item path. If no items are defined, the name of the file is the secret. # Secret represents a secret that should populate this volume. "defaultMode": 42, # Integer representation of mode bits to use on created files by default. Must be a value between 0000 and 0777 (octal), defaulting to 0444. Directories within the path are not affected by this setting. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and as a result, other mode bits could be set. - "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. + "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path + VolumeMount.sub_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. { # VersionToPath maps a specific version of a secret to a relative file to mount to, relative to VolumeMount's mount_path. "mode": 42, # Integer octal mode bits to use on this file, must be a value between 01 and 0777 (octal). If 0 or not set, the Volume's default mode will be used. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. "path": "A String", # Required. The relative path of the secret in the container. @@ -555,7 +555,7 @@

Method Details

}, "secret": { # The secret's value will be presented as the content of a file whose name is defined in the item path. If no items are defined, the name of the file is the secret. # Secret represents a secret that should populate this volume. "defaultMode": 42, # Integer representation of mode bits to use on created files by default. Must be a value between 0000 and 0777 (octal), defaulting to 0444. Directories within the path are not affected by this setting. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and as a result, other mode bits could be set. - "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. + "items": [ # If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path + VolumeMount.sub_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version. { # VersionToPath maps a specific version of a secret to a relative file to mount to, relative to VolumeMount's mount_path. "mode": 42, # Integer octal mode bits to use on this file, must be a value between 01 and 0777 (octal). If 0 or not set, the Volume's default mode will be used. Notes * Internally, a umask of 0222 will be applied to any non-zero value. * This is an integer representation of the mode bits. So, the octal integer value should look exactly as the chmod numeric notation with a leading zero. Some examples: for chmod 640 (u=rw,g=r), set to 0640 (octal) or 416 (base-10). For chmod 755 (u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx), set to 0755 (octal) or 493 (base-10). * This might be in conflict with other options that affect the file mode, like fsGroup, and the result can be other mode bits set. "path": "A String", # Required. The relative path of the secret in the container. diff --git a/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.rollouts.html b/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.rollouts.html index 44fcb38a20a..627398ce472 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.rollouts.html +++ b/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.rollouts.html @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@

Method Details

"parentRollout": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The direct parent rollout that this rollout is stemming from. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollouts/{rollout_id}" "release": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of the Release that gets rolled out to target Units. Required if no other type of release is specified. "rolloutKind": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of the RolloutKind this rollout is stemming from and adhering to. - "rolloutOrchestrationStrategy": "A String", # Optional. The strategy used for executing this Rollout. This strategy will override whatever strategy is specified in the RolloutType. If not specified on creation, the strategy from RolloutType will be used. There are two supported values strategies which are used to control - "Google.Cloud.Simple.AllAtOnce" - "Google.Cloud.Simple.OneLocationAtATime" A rollout with one of these simple strategies will rollout across all locations defined in the targeted UnitKind's Saas Locations. + "rolloutOrchestrationStrategy": "A String", # Optional. The strategy used for executing this Rollout. This strategy will override whatever strategy is specified in the RolloutKind. If not specified on creation, the strategy from RolloutKind will be used. There are two supported values strategies which are used to control - "Google.Cloud.Simple.AllAtOnce" - "Google.Cloud.Simple.OneLocationAtATime" A rollout with one of these simple strategies will rollout across all locations defined in the targeted UnitKind's Saas Locations. "rootRollout": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The root rollout that this rollout is stemming from. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollouts/{rollout_id}" "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The time when the rollout started executing. Will be empty if the rollout hasn't started yet. "state": "A String", # Output only. Current state of the rollout. @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@

Method Details

], }, "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4. - "unitFilter": "A String", # Optional. CEL(https://github.com/google/cel-spec) formatted filter string against Unit. The filter will be applied to determine the eligible unit population. This filter can only reduce, but not expand the scope of the rollout. If not provided, the unit_filter from the RolloutType will be used. + "unitFilter": "A String", # Optional. CEL(https://github.com/google/cel-spec) formatted filter string against Unit. The filter will be applied to determine the eligible unit population. This filter can only reduce, but not expand the scope of the rollout. If not provided, the unit_filter from the RolloutKind will be used. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value. } @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@

Method Details

"parentRollout": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The direct parent rollout that this rollout is stemming from. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollouts/{rollout_id}" "release": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of the Release that gets rolled out to target Units. Required if no other type of release is specified. "rolloutKind": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of the RolloutKind this rollout is stemming from and adhering to. - "rolloutOrchestrationStrategy": "A String", # Optional. The strategy used for executing this Rollout. This strategy will override whatever strategy is specified in the RolloutType. If not specified on creation, the strategy from RolloutType will be used. There are two supported values strategies which are used to control - "Google.Cloud.Simple.AllAtOnce" - "Google.Cloud.Simple.OneLocationAtATime" A rollout with one of these simple strategies will rollout across all locations defined in the targeted UnitKind's Saas Locations. + "rolloutOrchestrationStrategy": "A String", # Optional. The strategy used for executing this Rollout. This strategy will override whatever strategy is specified in the RolloutKind. If not specified on creation, the strategy from RolloutKind will be used. There are two supported values strategies which are used to control - "Google.Cloud.Simple.AllAtOnce" - "Google.Cloud.Simple.OneLocationAtATime" A rollout with one of these simple strategies will rollout across all locations defined in the targeted UnitKind's Saas Locations. "rootRollout": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The root rollout that this rollout is stemming from. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollouts/{rollout_id}" "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The time when the rollout started executing. Will be empty if the rollout hasn't started yet. "state": "A String", # Output only. Current state of the rollout. @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@

Method Details

], }, "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4. - "unitFilter": "A String", # Optional. CEL(https://github.com/google/cel-spec) formatted filter string against Unit. The filter will be applied to determine the eligible unit population. This filter can only reduce, but not expand the scope of the rollout. If not provided, the unit_filter from the RolloutType will be used. + "unitFilter": "A String", # Optional. CEL(https://github.com/google/cel-spec) formatted filter string against Unit. The filter will be applied to determine the eligible unit population. This filter can only reduce, but not expand the scope of the rollout. If not provided, the unit_filter from the RolloutKind will be used. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value. }
@@ -255,7 +255,7 @@

Method Details

"parentRollout": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The direct parent rollout that this rollout is stemming from. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollouts/{rollout_id}" "release": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of the Release that gets rolled out to target Units. Required if no other type of release is specified. "rolloutKind": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of the RolloutKind this rollout is stemming from and adhering to. - "rolloutOrchestrationStrategy": "A String", # Optional. The strategy used for executing this Rollout. This strategy will override whatever strategy is specified in the RolloutType. If not specified on creation, the strategy from RolloutType will be used. There are two supported values strategies which are used to control - "Google.Cloud.Simple.AllAtOnce" - "Google.Cloud.Simple.OneLocationAtATime" A rollout with one of these simple strategies will rollout across all locations defined in the targeted UnitKind's Saas Locations. + "rolloutOrchestrationStrategy": "A String", # Optional. The strategy used for executing this Rollout. This strategy will override whatever strategy is specified in the RolloutKind. If not specified on creation, the strategy from RolloutKind will be used. There are two supported values strategies which are used to control - "Google.Cloud.Simple.AllAtOnce" - "Google.Cloud.Simple.OneLocationAtATime" A rollout with one of these simple strategies will rollout across all locations defined in the targeted UnitKind's Saas Locations. "rootRollout": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The root rollout that this rollout is stemming from. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollouts/{rollout_id}" "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The time when the rollout started executing. Will be empty if the rollout hasn't started yet. "state": "A String", # Output only. Current state of the rollout. @@ -270,7 +270,7 @@

Method Details

], }, "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4. - "unitFilter": "A String", # Optional. CEL(https://github.com/google/cel-spec) formatted filter string against Unit. The filter will be applied to determine the eligible unit population. This filter can only reduce, but not expand the scope of the rollout. If not provided, the unit_filter from the RolloutType will be used. + "unitFilter": "A String", # Optional. CEL(https://github.com/google/cel-spec) formatted filter string against Unit. The filter will be applied to determine the eligible unit population. This filter can only reduce, but not expand the scope of the rollout. If not provided, the unit_filter from the RolloutKind will be used. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value. }
@@ -316,7 +316,7 @@

Method Details

"parentRollout": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The direct parent rollout that this rollout is stemming from. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollouts/{rollout_id}" "release": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of the Release that gets rolled out to target Units. Required if no other type of release is specified. "rolloutKind": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of the RolloutKind this rollout is stemming from and adhering to. - "rolloutOrchestrationStrategy": "A String", # Optional. The strategy used for executing this Rollout. This strategy will override whatever strategy is specified in the RolloutType. If not specified on creation, the strategy from RolloutType will be used. There are two supported values strategies which are used to control - "Google.Cloud.Simple.AllAtOnce" - "Google.Cloud.Simple.OneLocationAtATime" A rollout with one of these simple strategies will rollout across all locations defined in the targeted UnitKind's Saas Locations. + "rolloutOrchestrationStrategy": "A String", # Optional. The strategy used for executing this Rollout. This strategy will override whatever strategy is specified in the RolloutKind. If not specified on creation, the strategy from RolloutKind will be used. There are two supported values strategies which are used to control - "Google.Cloud.Simple.AllAtOnce" - "Google.Cloud.Simple.OneLocationAtATime" A rollout with one of these simple strategies will rollout across all locations defined in the targeted UnitKind's Saas Locations. "rootRollout": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The root rollout that this rollout is stemming from. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollouts/{rollout_id}" "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The time when the rollout started executing. Will be empty if the rollout hasn't started yet. "state": "A String", # Output only. Current state of the rollout. @@ -331,7 +331,7 @@

Method Details

], }, "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4. - "unitFilter": "A String", # Optional. CEL(https://github.com/google/cel-spec) formatted filter string against Unit. The filter will be applied to determine the eligible unit population. This filter can only reduce, but not expand the scope of the rollout. If not provided, the unit_filter from the RolloutType will be used. + "unitFilter": "A String", # Optional. CEL(https://github.com/google/cel-spec) formatted filter string against Unit. The filter will be applied to determine the eligible unit population. This filter can only reduce, but not expand the scope of the rollout. If not provided, the unit_filter from the RolloutKind will be used. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value. }, ], @@ -384,7 +384,7 @@

Method Details

"parentRollout": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The direct parent rollout that this rollout is stemming from. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollouts/{rollout_id}" "release": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of the Release that gets rolled out to target Units. Required if no other type of release is specified. "rolloutKind": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of the RolloutKind this rollout is stemming from and adhering to. - "rolloutOrchestrationStrategy": "A String", # Optional. The strategy used for executing this Rollout. This strategy will override whatever strategy is specified in the RolloutType. If not specified on creation, the strategy from RolloutType will be used. There are two supported values strategies which are used to control - "Google.Cloud.Simple.AllAtOnce" - "Google.Cloud.Simple.OneLocationAtATime" A rollout with one of these simple strategies will rollout across all locations defined in the targeted UnitKind's Saas Locations. + "rolloutOrchestrationStrategy": "A String", # Optional. The strategy used for executing this Rollout. This strategy will override whatever strategy is specified in the RolloutKind. If not specified on creation, the strategy from RolloutKind will be used. There are two supported values strategies which are used to control - "Google.Cloud.Simple.AllAtOnce" - "Google.Cloud.Simple.OneLocationAtATime" A rollout with one of these simple strategies will rollout across all locations defined in the targeted UnitKind's Saas Locations. "rootRollout": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The root rollout that this rollout is stemming from. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollouts/{rollout_id}" "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The time when the rollout started executing. Will be empty if the rollout hasn't started yet. "state": "A String", # Output only. Current state of the rollout. @@ -399,7 +399,7 @@

Method Details

], }, "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4. - "unitFilter": "A String", # Optional. CEL(https://github.com/google/cel-spec) formatted filter string against Unit. The filter will be applied to determine the eligible unit population. This filter can only reduce, but not expand the scope of the rollout. If not provided, the unit_filter from the RolloutType will be used. + "unitFilter": "A String", # Optional. CEL(https://github.com/google/cel-spec) formatted filter string against Unit. The filter will be applied to determine the eligible unit population. This filter can only reduce, but not expand the scope of the rollout. If not provided, the unit_filter from the RolloutKind will be used. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value. } @@ -434,7 +434,7 @@

Method Details

"parentRollout": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The direct parent rollout that this rollout is stemming from. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollouts/{rollout_id}" "release": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of the Release that gets rolled out to target Units. Required if no other type of release is specified. "rolloutKind": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of the RolloutKind this rollout is stemming from and adhering to. - "rolloutOrchestrationStrategy": "A String", # Optional. The strategy used for executing this Rollout. This strategy will override whatever strategy is specified in the RolloutType. If not specified on creation, the strategy from RolloutType will be used. There are two supported values strategies which are used to control - "Google.Cloud.Simple.AllAtOnce" - "Google.Cloud.Simple.OneLocationAtATime" A rollout with one of these simple strategies will rollout across all locations defined in the targeted UnitKind's Saas Locations. + "rolloutOrchestrationStrategy": "A String", # Optional. The strategy used for executing this Rollout. This strategy will override whatever strategy is specified in the RolloutKind. If not specified on creation, the strategy from RolloutKind will be used. There are two supported values strategies which are used to control - "Google.Cloud.Simple.AllAtOnce" - "Google.Cloud.Simple.OneLocationAtATime" A rollout with one of these simple strategies will rollout across all locations defined in the targeted UnitKind's Saas Locations. "rootRollout": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The root rollout that this rollout is stemming from. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollouts/{rollout_id}" "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The time when the rollout started executing. Will be empty if the rollout hasn't started yet. "state": "A String", # Output only. Current state of the rollout. @@ -449,7 +449,7 @@

Method Details

], }, "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4. - "unitFilter": "A String", # Optional. CEL(https://github.com/google/cel-spec) formatted filter string against Unit. The filter will be applied to determine the eligible unit population. This filter can only reduce, but not expand the scope of the rollout. If not provided, the unit_filter from the RolloutType will be used. + "unitFilter": "A String", # Optional. CEL(https://github.com/google/cel-spec) formatted filter string against Unit. The filter will be applied to determine the eligible unit population. This filter can only reduce, but not expand the scope of the rollout. If not provided, the unit_filter from the RolloutKind will be used. "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value. }
diff --git a/docs/dyn/secretmanager_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/secretmanager_v1.projects.locations.html index 38d5b72aaba..ae3d786a0ae 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/secretmanager_v1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/secretmanager_v1.projects.locations.html @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. A list of extra location types that should be used as conditions for controlling the visibility of the locations. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/secretmanager_v1beta1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/secretmanager_v1beta1.projects.locations.html index 40237d26ec2..c2b45960207 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/secretmanager_v1beta1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/secretmanager_v1beta1.projects.locations.html @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. A list of extra location types that should be used as conditions for controlling the visibility of the locations. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/secretmanager_v1beta2.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/secretmanager_v1beta2.projects.locations.html index 34381b669ea..249941740e9 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/secretmanager_v1beta2.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/secretmanager_v1beta2.projects.locations.html @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. A list of extra location types that should be used as conditions for controlling the visibility of the locations. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/servicecontrol_v1.services.html b/docs/dyn/servicecontrol_v1.services.html index c9228eedd4a..3ca63e2ef29 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/servicecontrol_v1.services.html +++ b/docs/dyn/servicecontrol_v1.services.html @@ -478,6 +478,7 @@

Method Details

"projectNumber": "A String", # The Google cloud project number, e.g. 1234567890. A value of 0 indicates no project number is found. NOTE: This field is deprecated after Chemist support flexible consumer id. New code should not depend on this field anymore. "type": "A String", # The type of the consumer which should have been defined in [Google Resource Manager](https://cloud.google.com/resource-manager/). }, + "ignoreApiKeyUidAsCredentialId": True or False, # Whether or not the api key should be ignored in the credential_id during reporting. "unusedArguments": [ # A list of fields and label keys that are ignored by the server. The client doesn't need to send them for following requests to improve performance and allow better aggregation. "A String", ], diff --git a/docs/dyn/servicecontrol_v2.services.html b/docs/dyn/servicecontrol_v2.services.html index 7346f68ff17..d1f29db4a44 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/servicecontrol_v2.services.html +++ b/docs/dyn/servicecontrol_v2.services.html @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@

Instance Methods

Close httplib2 connections.

report(serviceName, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

This method provides telemetry reporting for services that are integrated with [Service Infrastructure](https://cloud.google.com/service-infrastructure). It reports a list of operations that have occurred on a service. It must be called after the operations have been executed. For more information, see [Telemetry Reporting](https://cloud.google.com/service-infrastructure/docs/telemetry-reporting). NOTE: The telemetry reporting has a hard limit of 1000 operations and 1MB per Report call. It is recommended to have no more than 100 operations per call. This method requires the `servicemanagement.services.report` permission on the specified service. For more information, see [Service Control API Access Control](https://cloud.google.com/service-infrastructure/docs/service-control/access-control).

+

This method provides telemetry reporting for services that are integrated with [Service Infrastructure](https://cloud.google.com/service-infrastructure). It reports a list of operations that have occurred on a service. It must be called after the operations have been executed. For more information, see [Telemetry Reporting](https://cloud.google.com/service-infrastructure/docs/telemetry-reporting). NOTE: The telemetry reporting has a hard limit of 100 operations and 1MB per Report call. This method requires the `servicemanagement.services.report` permission on the specified service. For more information, see [Service Control API Access Control](https://cloud.google.com/service-infrastructure/docs/service-control/access-control).

Method Details

check(serviceName, body=None, x__xgafv=None) @@ -135,6 +135,9 @@

Method Details

"claims": { # Structured claims presented with the credential. JWTs include `{key: value}` pairs for standard and private claims. The following is a subset of the standard required and optional claims that would typically be presented for a Google-based JWT: {'iss': 'accounts.google.com', 'sub': '113289723416554971153', 'aud': ['123456789012', 'pubsub.googleapis.com'], 'azp': '123456789012.apps.googleusercontent.com', 'email': 'jsmith@example.com', 'iat': 1353601026, 'exp': 1353604926} SAML assertions are similarly specified, but with an identity provider dependent structure. "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. }, + "oauth": { # This message defines attributes associated with OAuth credentials. # Attributes of the OAuth token associated with the request. + "clientId": "A String", # The optional OAuth client ID. This is the unique public identifier issued by an authorization server to a registered client application. Empty string is equivalent to no oauth client id. WARNING: This is for MCP tools/call and tools/list authorization and not for general use. + }, "presenter": "A String", # The authorized presenter of the credential. Reflects the optional Authorized Presenter (`azp`) claim within a JWT or the OAuth client id. For example, a Google Cloud Platform client id looks as follows: "123456789012.apps.googleusercontent.com". "principal": "A String", # The authenticated principal. Reflects the issuer (`iss`) and subject (`sub`) claims within a JWT. The issuer and subject should be `/` delimited, with `/` percent-encoded within the subject fragment. For Google accounts, the principal format is: "https://accounts.google.com/{id}" }, @@ -237,7 +240,7 @@

Method Details

report(serviceName, body=None, x__xgafv=None) -
This method provides telemetry reporting for services that are integrated with [Service Infrastructure](https://cloud.google.com/service-infrastructure). It reports a list of operations that have occurred on a service. It must be called after the operations have been executed. For more information, see [Telemetry Reporting](https://cloud.google.com/service-infrastructure/docs/telemetry-reporting). NOTE: The telemetry reporting has a hard limit of 1000 operations and 1MB per Report call. It is recommended to have no more than 100 operations per call. This method requires the `servicemanagement.services.report` permission on the specified service. For more information, see [Service Control API Access Control](https://cloud.google.com/service-infrastructure/docs/service-control/access-control).
+  
This method provides telemetry reporting for services that are integrated with [Service Infrastructure](https://cloud.google.com/service-infrastructure). It reports a list of operations that have occurred on a service. It must be called after the operations have been executed. For more information, see [Telemetry Reporting](https://cloud.google.com/service-infrastructure/docs/telemetry-reporting). NOTE: The telemetry reporting has a hard limit of 100 operations and 1MB per Report call. This method requires the `servicemanagement.services.report` permission on the specified service. For more information, see [Service Control API Access Control](https://cloud.google.com/service-infrastructure/docs/service-control/access-control).
 
 Args:
   serviceName: string, The service name as specified in its service configuration. For example, `"pubsub.googleapis.com"`. See [google.api.Service](https://cloud.google.com/service-management/reference/rpc/google.api#google.api.Service) for the definition of a service name. (required)
@@ -287,6 +290,9 @@ 

Method Details

"claims": { # Structured claims presented with the credential. JWTs include `{key: value}` pairs for standard and private claims. The following is a subset of the standard required and optional claims that would typically be presented for a Google-based JWT: {'iss': 'accounts.google.com', 'sub': '113289723416554971153', 'aud': ['123456789012', 'pubsub.googleapis.com'], 'azp': '123456789012.apps.googleusercontent.com', 'email': 'jsmith@example.com', 'iat': 1353601026, 'exp': 1353604926} SAML assertions are similarly specified, but with an identity provider dependent structure. "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. }, + "oauth": { # This message defines attributes associated with OAuth credentials. # Attributes of the OAuth token associated with the request. + "clientId": "A String", # The optional OAuth client ID. This is the unique public identifier issued by an authorization server to a registered client application. Empty string is equivalent to no oauth client id. WARNING: This is for MCP tools/call and tools/list authorization and not for general use. + }, "presenter": "A String", # The authorized presenter of the credential. Reflects the optional Authorized Presenter (`azp`) claim within a JWT or the OAuth client id. For example, a Google Cloud Platform client id looks as follows: "123456789012.apps.googleusercontent.com". "principal": "A String", # The authenticated principal. Reflects the issuer (`iss`) and subject (`sub`) claims within a JWT. The issuer and subject should be `/` delimited, with `/` percent-encoded within the subject fragment. For Google accounts, the principal format is: "https://accounts.google.com/{id}" }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/sts_v1.v1.html b/docs/dyn/sts_v1.v1.html index 0dd2f4c2b50..a82ef0e635e 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/sts_v1.v1.html +++ b/docs/dyn/sts_v1.v1.html @@ -100,8 +100,8 @@

Method Details

"options": "A String", # A set of features that Security Token Service supports, in addition to the standard OAuth 2.0 token exchange, formatted as a serialized JSON object of Options. The size of the parameter value must not exceed 4 * 1024 * 1024 characters (4 MB). "requestedTokenType": "A String", # Required. An identifier for the type of requested security token. Can be `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:access_token` or `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:access_boundary_intermediary_token`. "scope": "A String", # The OAuth 2.0 scopes to include on the resulting access token, formatted as a list of space-delimited, case-sensitive strings; for example, `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform`. Required when exchanging an external credential for a Google access token. For a list of OAuth 2.0 scopes, see [OAuth 2.0 Scopes for Google APIs](https://developers.google.com/identity/protocols/oauth2/scopes). - "subjectToken": "A String", # Required. The input token. This token is either an external credential issued by a workload identity pool provider, or a short-lived access token issued by Google. If the token is an OIDC JWT, it must use the JWT format defined in [RFC 7523](https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7523), and the `subject_token_type` must be either `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:jwt` or `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:id_token`. The following headers are required: - `kid`: The identifier of the signing key securing the JWT. - `alg`: The cryptographic algorithm securing the JWT. Must be `RS256` or `ES256`. The following payload fields are required. For more information, see [RFC 7523, Section 3](https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7523#section-3): - `iss`: The issuer of the token. The issuer must provide a discovery document at the URL `/.well-known/openid-configuration`, where `` is the value of this field. The document must be formatted according to section 4.2 of the [OIDC 1.0 Discovery specification](https://openid.net/specs/openid-connect-discovery-1_0.html#ProviderConfigurationResponse). - `iat`: The issue time, in seconds, since the Unix epoch. Must be in the past. - `exp`: The expiration time, in seconds, since the Unix epoch. Must be less than 48 hours after `iat`. Shorter expiration times are more secure. If possible, we recommend setting an expiration time less than 6 hours. - `sub`: The identity asserted in the JWT. - `aud`: For workload identity pools, this must be a value specified in the allowed audiences for the workload identity pool provider, or one of the audiences allowed by default if no audiences were specified. See https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/reference/rest/v1/projects.locations.workloadIdentityPools.providers#oidc. For workforce pools, this must match the client ID specified in the provider configuration. See https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/reference/rest/v1/locations.workforcePools.providers#oidc. Example header: ``` { "alg": "RS256", "kid": "us-east-11" } ``` Example payload: ``` { "iss": "https://accounts.google.com", "iat": 1517963104, "exp": 1517966704, "aud": "//iam.googleapis.com/projects/1234567890123/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/my-pool/providers/my-provider", "sub": "113475438248934895348", "my_claims": { "additional_claim": "value" } } ``` If `subject_token` is for AWS, it must be a serialized `GetCallerIdentity` token. This token contains the same information as a request to the AWS [`GetCallerIdentity()`](https://docs.aws.amazon.com/STS/latest/APIReference/API_GetCallerIdentity) method, as well as the AWS [signature](https://docs.aws.amazon.com/general/latest/gr/signing_aws_api_requests.html) for the request information. Use Signature Version 4. Format the request as URL-encoded JSON, and set the `subject_token_type` parameter to `urn:ietf:params:aws:token-type:aws4_request`. The following parameters are required: - `url`: The URL of the AWS STS endpoint for `GetCallerIdentity()`, such as `https://sts.amazonaws.com?Action=GetCallerIdentity&Version=2011-06-15`. Regional endpoints are also supported. - `method`: The HTTP request method: `POST`. - `headers`: The HTTP request headers, which must include: - `Authorization`: The request signature. - `x-amz-date`: The time you will send the request, formatted as an [ISO8601 Basic](https://docs.aws.amazon.com/general/latest/gr/sigv4_elements.html#sigv4_elements_date) string. This value is typically set to the current time and is used to help prevent replay attacks. - `host`: The hostname of the `url` field; for example, `sts.amazonaws.com`. - `x-goog-cloud-target-resource`: The full, canonical resource name of the workload identity pool provider, with or without an `https:` prefix. To help ensure data integrity, we recommend including this header in the `SignedHeaders` field of the signed request. For example: //iam.googleapis.com/projects//locations/global/workloadIdentityPools//providers/ https://iam.googleapis.com/projects//locations/global/workloadIdentityPools//providers/ If you are using temporary security credentials provided by AWS, you must also include the header `x-amz-security-token`, with the value set to the session token. The following example shows a `GetCallerIdentity` token: ``` { "headers": [ {"key": "x-amz-date", "value": "20200815T015049Z"}, {"key": "Authorization", "value": "AWS4-HMAC-SHA256+Credential=$credential,+SignedHeaders=host;x-amz-date;x-goog-cloud-target-resource,+Signature=$signature"}, {"key": "x-goog-cloud-target-resource", "value": "//iam.googleapis.com/projects//locations/global/workloadIdentityPools//providers/"}, {"key": "host", "value": "sts.amazonaws.com"} . ], "method": "POST", "url": "https://sts.amazonaws.com?Action=GetCallerIdentity&Version=2011-06-15" } ``` If the token is a SAML 2.0 assertion, it must use the format defined in [the SAML 2.0 spec](https://docs.oasis-open.org/security/saml/Post2.0/sstc-saml-tech-overview-2.0-cd-02.pdf), and the `subject_token_type` must be `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:saml2`. See [Verification of external credentials](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/using-workload-identity-federation#verification_of_external_credentials) for details on how SAML 2.0 assertions are validated during token exchanges. You can also use a Google-issued OAuth 2.0 access token with this field to obtain an access token with new security attributes applied, such as a Credential Access Boundary. In this case, set `subject_token_type` to `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:access_token`. If an access token already contains security attributes, you cannot apply additional security attributes. - "subjectTokenType": "A String", # Required. An identifier that indicates the type of the security token in the `subject_token` parameter. Supported values are `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:jwt`, `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:id_token`, `urn:ietf:params:aws:token-type:aws4_request`, `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:access_token`, and `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:saml2`. + "subjectToken": "A String", # Required. The input token. This token is either an external credential issued by a workload identity pool provider, or a short-lived access token issued by Google. If the token is an OIDC JWT, it must use the JWT format defined in [RFC 7523](https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7523), and the `subject_token_type` must be either `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:jwt` or `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:id_token`. The following headers are required: - `kid`: The identifier of the signing key securing the JWT. - `alg`: The cryptographic algorithm securing the JWT. Must be `RS256` or `ES256`. The following payload fields are required. For more information, see [RFC 7523, Section 3](https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7523#section-3): - `iss`: The issuer of the token. The issuer must provide a discovery document at the URL `/.well-known/openid-configuration`, where `` is the value of this field. The document must be formatted according to section 4.2 of the [OIDC 1.0 Discovery specification](https://openid.net/specs/openid-connect-discovery-1_0.html#ProviderConfigurationResponse). - `iat`: The issue time, in seconds, since the Unix epoch. Must be in the past. - `exp`: The expiration time, in seconds, since the Unix epoch. Must be less than 48 hours after `iat`. Shorter expiration times are more secure. If possible, we recommend setting an expiration time less than 6 hours. - `sub`: The identity asserted in the JWT. - `aud`: For workload identity pools, this must be a value specified in the allowed audiences for the workload identity pool provider, or one of the audiences allowed by default if no audiences were specified. See https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/reference/rest/v1/projects.locations.workloadIdentityPools.providers#oidc. For workforce pools, this must match the client ID specified in the provider configuration. See https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/reference/rest/v1/locations.workforcePools.providers#oidc. Example header: ``` { "alg": "RS256", "kid": "us-east-11" } ``` Example payload: ``` { "iss": "https://accounts.google.com", "iat": 1517963104, "exp": 1517966704, "aud": "//iam.googleapis.com/projects/1234567890123/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/my-pool/providers/my-provider", "sub": "113475438248934895348", "my_claims": { "additional_claim": "value" } } ``` If `subject_token` is for AWS, it must be a serialized `GetCallerIdentity` token. This token contains the same information as a request to the AWS [`GetCallerIdentity()`](https://docs.aws.amazon.com/STS/latest/APIReference/API_GetCallerIdentity) method, as well as the AWS [signature](https://docs.aws.amazon.com/general/latest/gr/signing_aws_api_requests.html) for the request information. Use Signature Version 4. Format the request as URL-encoded JSON, and set the `subject_token_type` parameter to `urn:ietf:params:aws:token-type:aws4_request`. The following parameters are required: - `url`: The URL of the AWS STS endpoint for `GetCallerIdentity()`, such as `https://sts.amazonaws.com?Action=GetCallerIdentity&Version=2011-06-15`. Regional endpoints are also supported. - `method`: The HTTP request method: `POST`. - `headers`: The HTTP request headers, which must include: - `Authorization`: The request signature. - `x-amz-date`: The time you will send the request, formatted as an [ISO8601 Basic](https://docs.aws.amazon.com/general/latest/gr/sigv4_elements.html#sigv4_elements_date) string. This value is typically set to the current time and is used to help prevent replay attacks. - `host`: The hostname of the `url` field; for example, `sts.amazonaws.com`. - `x-goog-cloud-target-resource`: The full, canonical resource name of the workload identity pool provider, with or without an `https:` prefix. To help ensure data integrity, we recommend including this header in the `SignedHeaders` field of the signed request. For example: //iam.googleapis.com/projects//locations/global/workloadIdentityPools//providers/ https://iam.googleapis.com/projects//locations/global/workloadIdentityPools//providers/ If you are using temporary security credentials provided by AWS, you must also include the header `x-amz-security-token`, with the value set to the session token. The following example shows a `GetCallerIdentity` token: ``` { "headers": [ {"key": "x-amz-date", "value": "20200815T015049Z"}, {"key": "Authorization", "value": "AWS4-HMAC-SHA256+Credential=$credential,+SignedHeaders=host;x-amz-date;x-goog-cloud-target-resource,+Signature=$signature"}, {"key": "x-goog-cloud-target-resource", "value": "//iam.googleapis.com/projects//locations/global/workloadIdentityPools//providers/"}, {"key": "host", "value": "sts.amazonaws.com"} . ], "method": "POST", "url": "https://sts.amazonaws.com?Action=GetCallerIdentity&Version=2011-06-15" } ``` If the token is a SAML 2.0 assertion, it must use the format defined in [the SAML 2.0 spec](https://docs.oasis-open.org/security/saml/Post2.0/sstc-saml-tech-overview-2.0-cd-02.pdf), and the `subject_token_type` must be `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:saml2`. See [Verification of external credentials](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/using-workload-identity-federation#verification_of_external_credentials) for details on how SAML 2.0 assertions are validated during token exchanges. You can also use a Google-issued OAuth 2.0 access token with this field to obtain an access token with new security attributes applied, such as a Credential Access Boundary. In this case, set `subject_token_type` to `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:access_token`. If an access token already contains security attributes, you cannot apply additional security attributes. If the request is for X.509 certificate-based authentication, the `subject_token` must be a JSON-formatted list of X.509 certificates in DER format, as defined in [RFC 7515](https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc7515#section-4.1.6). `subject_token_type` must be `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:mtls`. The following example shows a JSON-formatted list of X.509 certificate in DER format: ``` [\"MIIEYDCCA0i...\", \"MCIFFGAGTT0...\"] ``` + "subjectTokenType": "A String", # Required. An identifier that indicates the type of the security token in the `subject_token` parameter. Supported values are `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:jwt`, `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:id_token`, `urn:ietf:params:aws:token-type:aws4_request`, `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:access_token`, `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:mtls`, and `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:saml2`. } x__xgafv: string, V1 error format. diff --git a/docs/dyn/texttospeech_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/texttospeech_v1.projects.locations.html index 0610ef62f03..6d5e1947272 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/texttospeech_v1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/texttospeech_v1.projects.locations.html @@ -130,6 +130,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, + "prompt": "A String", # This is system instruction supported only for controllable voice models. If used, we will pass text to Flash TTS as is. Can only used with Flash TTS. What AI Studio calls Style Instructions. "ssml": "A String", # The SSML document to be synthesized. The SSML document must be valid and well-formed. Otherwise the RPC will fail and return google.rpc.Code.INVALID_ARGUMENT. For more information, see [SSML](https://cloud.google.com/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/texttospeech_v1.text.html b/docs/dyn/texttospeech_v1.text.html index f8aaf846040..d210a3e8610 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/texttospeech_v1.text.html +++ b/docs/dyn/texttospeech_v1.text.html @@ -127,6 +127,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, + "prompt": "A String", # This is system instruction supported only for controllable voice models. If used, we will pass text to Flash TTS as is. Can only used with Flash TTS. What AI Studio calls Style Instructions. "ssml": "A String", # The SSML document to be synthesized. The SSML document must be valid and well-formed. Otherwise the RPC will fail and return google.rpc.Code.INVALID_ARGUMENT. For more information, see [SSML](https://cloud.google.com/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/texttospeech_v1beta1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/texttospeech_v1beta1.projects.locations.html index 9c857c34a29..24110abfe0c 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/texttospeech_v1beta1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/texttospeech_v1beta1.projects.locations.html @@ -130,6 +130,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, + "prompt": "A String", # This is system instruction supported only for controllable voice models. If used, we will pass text to Flash TTS as is. Can only used with Flash TTS. What AI Studio calls Style Instructions. "ssml": "A String", # The SSML document to be synthesized. The SSML document must be valid and well-formed. Otherwise the RPC will fail and return google.rpc.Code.INVALID_ARGUMENT. For more information, see [SSML](https://cloud.google.com/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/texttospeech_v1beta1.text.html b/docs/dyn/texttospeech_v1beta1.text.html index 90384e54c33..f3012ab181b 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/texttospeech_v1beta1.text.html +++ b/docs/dyn/texttospeech_v1beta1.text.html @@ -130,6 +130,7 @@

Method Details

}, ], }, + "prompt": "A String", # This is system instruction supported only for controllable voice models. If used, we will pass text to Flash TTS as is. Can only used with Flash TTS. What AI Studio calls Style Instructions. "ssml": "A String", # The SSML document to be synthesized. The SSML document must be valid and well-formed. Otherwise the RPC will fail and return google.rpc.Code.INVALID_ARGUMENT. For more information, see [SSML](https://cloud.google.com/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/tpu_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/tpu_v1.projects.locations.html index 6e681fdec7e..76f30ade2ef 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/tpu_v1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/tpu_v1.projects.locations.html @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/tpu_v1alpha1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/tpu_v1alpha1.projects.locations.html index 7eda0c82941..ba1dd518457 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/tpu_v1alpha1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/tpu_v1alpha1.projects.locations.html @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/tpu_v2.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/tpu_v2.projects.locations.html index 0618e42e6b9..772e70e2b4d 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/tpu_v2.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/tpu_v2.projects.locations.html @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/tpu_v2.projects.locations.nodes.html b/docs/dyn/tpu_v2.projects.locations.nodes.html index e9994759754..13301e428cf 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/tpu_v2.projects.locations.nodes.html +++ b/docs/dyn/tpu_v2.projects.locations.nodes.html @@ -126,6 +126,11 @@

Method Details

}, "acceleratorType": "A String", # Optional. The type of hardware accelerators associated with this node. "apiVersion": "A String", # Output only. The API version that created this Node. + "bootDiskConfig": { # Sets the boot disk configuration for the TPU node. # Optional. Boot disk configuration. + "customerEncryptionKey": { # Defines the customer encryption key for disk encryption. # Optional. Customer encryption key for boot disk. + "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/KMS_PROJECT_ID/locations/REGION/keyRings/KEY_REGION/cryptoKeys/KEY The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/KMS_PROJECT_ID/locations/REGION/keyRings/KEY_REGION/cryptoKeys/KEY/cryptoKeyVersions/1 + }, + }, "cidrBlock": "A String", # The CIDR block that the TPU node will use when selecting an IP address. This CIDR block must be a /29 block; the Compute Engine networks API forbids a smaller block, and using a larger block would be wasteful (a node can only consume one IP address). Errors will occur if the CIDR block has already been used for a currently existing TPU node, the CIDR block conflicts with any subnetworks in the user's provided network, or the provided network is peered with another network that is using that CIDR block. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the node was created. "dataDisks": [ # The additional data disks for the Node. @@ -295,6 +300,11 @@

Method Details

}, "acceleratorType": "A String", # Optional. The type of hardware accelerators associated with this node. "apiVersion": "A String", # Output only. The API version that created this Node. + "bootDiskConfig": { # Sets the boot disk configuration for the TPU node. # Optional. Boot disk configuration. + "customerEncryptionKey": { # Defines the customer encryption key for disk encryption. # Optional. Customer encryption key for boot disk. + "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/KMS_PROJECT_ID/locations/REGION/keyRings/KEY_REGION/cryptoKeys/KEY The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/KMS_PROJECT_ID/locations/REGION/keyRings/KEY_REGION/cryptoKeys/KEY/cryptoKeyVersions/1 + }, + }, "cidrBlock": "A String", # The CIDR block that the TPU node will use when selecting an IP address. This CIDR block must be a /29 block; the Compute Engine networks API forbids a smaller block, and using a larger block would be wasteful (a node can only consume one IP address). Errors will occur if the CIDR block has already been used for a currently existing TPU node, the CIDR block conflicts with any subnetworks in the user's provided network, or the provided network is peered with another network that is using that CIDR block. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the node was created. "dataDisks": [ # The additional data disks for the Node. @@ -447,6 +457,11 @@

Method Details

}, "acceleratorType": "A String", # Optional. The type of hardware accelerators associated with this node. "apiVersion": "A String", # Output only. The API version that created this Node. + "bootDiskConfig": { # Sets the boot disk configuration for the TPU node. # Optional. Boot disk configuration. + "customerEncryptionKey": { # Defines the customer encryption key for disk encryption. # Optional. Customer encryption key for boot disk. + "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/KMS_PROJECT_ID/locations/REGION/keyRings/KEY_REGION/cryptoKeys/KEY The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/KMS_PROJECT_ID/locations/REGION/keyRings/KEY_REGION/cryptoKeys/KEY/cryptoKeyVersions/1 + }, + }, "cidrBlock": "A String", # The CIDR block that the TPU node will use when selecting an IP address. This CIDR block must be a /29 block; the Compute Engine networks API forbids a smaller block, and using a larger block would be wasteful (a node can only consume one IP address). Errors will occur if the CIDR block has already been used for a currently existing TPU node, the CIDR block conflicts with any subnetworks in the user's provided network, or the provided network is peered with another network that is using that CIDR block. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the node was created. "dataDisks": [ # The additional data disks for the Node. @@ -566,6 +581,11 @@

Method Details

}, "acceleratorType": "A String", # Optional. The type of hardware accelerators associated with this node. "apiVersion": "A String", # Output only. The API version that created this Node. + "bootDiskConfig": { # Sets the boot disk configuration for the TPU node. # Optional. Boot disk configuration. + "customerEncryptionKey": { # Defines the customer encryption key for disk encryption. # Optional. Customer encryption key for boot disk. + "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/KMS_PROJECT_ID/locations/REGION/keyRings/KEY_REGION/cryptoKeys/KEY The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/KMS_PROJECT_ID/locations/REGION/keyRings/KEY_REGION/cryptoKeys/KEY/cryptoKeyVersions/1 + }, + }, "cidrBlock": "A String", # The CIDR block that the TPU node will use when selecting an IP address. This CIDR block must be a /29 block; the Compute Engine networks API forbids a smaller block, and using a larger block would be wasteful (a node can only consume one IP address). Errors will occur if the CIDR block has already been used for a currently existing TPU node, the CIDR block conflicts with any subnetworks in the user's provided network, or the provided network is peered with another network that is using that CIDR block. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the node was created. "dataDisks": [ # The additional data disks for the Node. diff --git a/docs/dyn/tpu_v2.projects.locations.queuedResources.html b/docs/dyn/tpu_v2.projects.locations.queuedResources.html index 4ad3b748a51..58d66ef61a0 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/tpu_v2.projects.locations.queuedResources.html +++ b/docs/dyn/tpu_v2.projects.locations.queuedResources.html @@ -172,6 +172,11 @@

Method Details

}, "acceleratorType": "A String", # Optional. The type of hardware accelerators associated with this node. "apiVersion": "A String", # Output only. The API version that created this Node. + "bootDiskConfig": { # Sets the boot disk configuration for the TPU node. # Optional. Boot disk configuration. + "customerEncryptionKey": { # Defines the customer encryption key for disk encryption. # Optional. Customer encryption key for boot disk. + "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/KMS_PROJECT_ID/locations/REGION/keyRings/KEY_REGION/cryptoKeys/KEY The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/KMS_PROJECT_ID/locations/REGION/keyRings/KEY_REGION/cryptoKeys/KEY/cryptoKeyVersions/1 + }, + }, "cidrBlock": "A String", # The CIDR block that the TPU node will use when selecting an IP address. This CIDR block must be a /29 block; the Compute Engine networks API forbids a smaller block, and using a larger block would be wasteful (a node can only consume one IP address). Errors will occur if the CIDR block has already been used for a currently existing TPU node, the CIDR block conflicts with any subnetworks in the user's provided network, or the provided network is peered with another network that is using that CIDR block. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the node was created. "dataDisks": [ # The additional data disks for the Node. @@ -405,6 +410,11 @@

Method Details

}, "acceleratorType": "A String", # Optional. The type of hardware accelerators associated with this node. "apiVersion": "A String", # Output only. The API version that created this Node. + "bootDiskConfig": { # Sets the boot disk configuration for the TPU node. # Optional. Boot disk configuration. + "customerEncryptionKey": { # Defines the customer encryption key for disk encryption. # Optional. Customer encryption key for boot disk. + "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/KMS_PROJECT_ID/locations/REGION/keyRings/KEY_REGION/cryptoKeys/KEY The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/KMS_PROJECT_ID/locations/REGION/keyRings/KEY_REGION/cryptoKeys/KEY/cryptoKeyVersions/1 + }, + }, "cidrBlock": "A String", # The CIDR block that the TPU node will use when selecting an IP address. This CIDR block must be a /29 block; the Compute Engine networks API forbids a smaller block, and using a larger block would be wasteful (a node can only consume one IP address). Errors will occur if the CIDR block has already been used for a currently existing TPU node, the CIDR block conflicts with any subnetworks in the user's provided network, or the provided network is peered with another network that is using that CIDR block. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the node was created. "dataDisks": [ # The additional data disks for the Node. @@ -576,6 +586,11 @@

Method Details

}, "acceleratorType": "A String", # Optional. The type of hardware accelerators associated with this node. "apiVersion": "A String", # Output only. The API version that created this Node. + "bootDiskConfig": { # Sets the boot disk configuration for the TPU node. # Optional. Boot disk configuration. + "customerEncryptionKey": { # Defines the customer encryption key for disk encryption. # Optional. Customer encryption key for boot disk. + "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/KMS_PROJECT_ID/locations/REGION/keyRings/KEY_REGION/cryptoKeys/KEY The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/KMS_PROJECT_ID/locations/REGION/keyRings/KEY_REGION/cryptoKeys/KEY/cryptoKeyVersions/1 + }, + }, "cidrBlock": "A String", # The CIDR block that the TPU node will use when selecting an IP address. This CIDR block must be a /29 block; the Compute Engine networks API forbids a smaller block, and using a larger block would be wasteful (a node can only consume one IP address). Errors will occur if the CIDR block has already been used for a currently existing TPU node, the CIDR block conflicts with any subnetworks in the user's provided network, or the provided network is peered with another network that is using that CIDR block. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the node was created. "dataDisks": [ # The additional data disks for the Node. diff --git a/docs/dyn/tpu_v2alpha1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/tpu_v2alpha1.projects.locations.html index d9f118dcbc9..c6206b72ed2 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/tpu_v2alpha1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/tpu_v2alpha1.projects.locations.html @@ -185,7 +185,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/tpu_v2alpha1.projects.locations.nodes.html b/docs/dyn/tpu_v2alpha1.projects.locations.nodes.html index 0473ae82376..0cc1d6c3e90 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/tpu_v2alpha1.projects.locations.nodes.html +++ b/docs/dyn/tpu_v2alpha1.projects.locations.nodes.html @@ -142,6 +142,7 @@

Method Details

"provisionedIops": "A String", # Optional. Indicates how many IOPS to provision for the disk. This sets the number of I/O operations per second that the disk can handle. To learn more about IOPS, see [Provisioning persistent disk performance](https://cloud.google.com/compute/docs/disks/performance#provisioned-iops). "provisionedThroughput": "A String", # Optional. Indicates how much throughput to provision for the disk. This sets the number of throughput MB per second that the disk can handle. "sourceImage": "A String", # Optional. Image from which boot disk is to be created. If not specified, the default image for the runtime version will be used. Example: `projects/$PROJECT_ID/global/images/$IMAGE_NAME`. + "storagePool": "A String", # Optional. The storage pool in which the boot disk is created. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. }, "cidrBlock": "A String", # The CIDR block that the TPU node will use when selecting an IP address. This CIDR block must be a /29 block; the Compute Engine networks API forbids a smaller block, and using a larger block would be wasteful (a node can only consume one IP address). Errors will occur if the CIDR block has already been used for a currently existing TPU node, the CIDR block conflicts with any subnetworks in the user's provided network, or the provided network is peered with another network that is using that CIDR block. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the node was created. @@ -330,6 +331,7 @@

Method Details

"provisionedIops": "A String", # Optional. Indicates how many IOPS to provision for the disk. This sets the number of I/O operations per second that the disk can handle. To learn more about IOPS, see [Provisioning persistent disk performance](https://cloud.google.com/compute/docs/disks/performance#provisioned-iops). "provisionedThroughput": "A String", # Optional. Indicates how much throughput to provision for the disk. This sets the number of throughput MB per second that the disk can handle. "sourceImage": "A String", # Optional. Image from which boot disk is to be created. If not specified, the default image for the runtime version will be used. Example: `projects/$PROJECT_ID/global/images/$IMAGE_NAME`. + "storagePool": "A String", # Optional. The storage pool in which the boot disk is created. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. }, "cidrBlock": "A String", # The CIDR block that the TPU node will use when selecting an IP address. This CIDR block must be a /29 block; the Compute Engine networks API forbids a smaller block, and using a larger block would be wasteful (a node can only consume one IP address). Errors will occur if the CIDR block has already been used for a currently existing TPU node, the CIDR block conflicts with any subnetworks in the user's provided network, or the provided network is peered with another network that is using that CIDR block. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the node was created. @@ -499,6 +501,7 @@

Method Details

"provisionedIops": "A String", # Optional. Indicates how many IOPS to provision for the disk. This sets the number of I/O operations per second that the disk can handle. To learn more about IOPS, see [Provisioning persistent disk performance](https://cloud.google.com/compute/docs/disks/performance#provisioned-iops). "provisionedThroughput": "A String", # Optional. Indicates how much throughput to provision for the disk. This sets the number of throughput MB per second that the disk can handle. "sourceImage": "A String", # Optional. Image from which boot disk is to be created. If not specified, the default image for the runtime version will be used. Example: `projects/$PROJECT_ID/global/images/$IMAGE_NAME`. + "storagePool": "A String", # Optional. The storage pool in which the boot disk is created. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. }, "cidrBlock": "A String", # The CIDR block that the TPU node will use when selecting an IP address. This CIDR block must be a /29 block; the Compute Engine networks API forbids a smaller block, and using a larger block would be wasteful (a node can only consume one IP address). Errors will occur if the CIDR block has already been used for a currently existing TPU node, the CIDR block conflicts with any subnetworks in the user's provided network, or the provided network is peered with another network that is using that CIDR block. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the node was created. @@ -635,6 +638,7 @@

Method Details

"provisionedIops": "A String", # Optional. Indicates how many IOPS to provision for the disk. This sets the number of I/O operations per second that the disk can handle. To learn more about IOPS, see [Provisioning persistent disk performance](https://cloud.google.com/compute/docs/disks/performance#provisioned-iops). "provisionedThroughput": "A String", # Optional. Indicates how much throughput to provision for the disk. This sets the number of throughput MB per second that the disk can handle. "sourceImage": "A String", # Optional. Image from which boot disk is to be created. If not specified, the default image for the runtime version will be used. Example: `projects/$PROJECT_ID/global/images/$IMAGE_NAME`. + "storagePool": "A String", # Optional. The storage pool in which the boot disk is created. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. }, "cidrBlock": "A String", # The CIDR block that the TPU node will use when selecting an IP address. This CIDR block must be a /29 block; the Compute Engine networks API forbids a smaller block, and using a larger block would be wasteful (a node can only consume one IP address). Errors will occur if the CIDR block has already been used for a currently existing TPU node, the CIDR block conflicts with any subnetworks in the user's provided network, or the provided network is peered with another network that is using that CIDR block. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the node was created. diff --git a/docs/dyn/tpu_v2alpha1.projects.locations.queuedResources.html b/docs/dyn/tpu_v2alpha1.projects.locations.queuedResources.html index 5df90148a0a..2460f0ad1a5 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/tpu_v2alpha1.projects.locations.queuedResources.html +++ b/docs/dyn/tpu_v2alpha1.projects.locations.queuedResources.html @@ -194,6 +194,7 @@

Method Details

"provisionedIops": "A String", # Optional. Indicates how many IOPS to provision for the disk. This sets the number of I/O operations per second that the disk can handle. To learn more about IOPS, see [Provisioning persistent disk performance](https://cloud.google.com/compute/docs/disks/performance#provisioned-iops). "provisionedThroughput": "A String", # Optional. Indicates how much throughput to provision for the disk. This sets the number of throughput MB per second that the disk can handle. "sourceImage": "A String", # Optional. Image from which boot disk is to be created. If not specified, the default image for the runtime version will be used. Example: `projects/$PROJECT_ID/global/images/$IMAGE_NAME`. + "storagePool": "A String", # Optional. The storage pool in which the boot disk is created. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. }, "cidrBlock": "A String", # The CIDR block that the TPU node will use when selecting an IP address. This CIDR block must be a /29 block; the Compute Engine networks API forbids a smaller block, and using a larger block would be wasteful (a node can only consume one IP address). Errors will occur if the CIDR block has already been used for a currently existing TPU node, the CIDR block conflicts with any subnetworks in the user's provided network, or the provided network is peered with another network that is using that CIDR block. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the node was created. @@ -453,6 +454,7 @@

Method Details

"provisionedIops": "A String", # Optional. Indicates how many IOPS to provision for the disk. This sets the number of I/O operations per second that the disk can handle. To learn more about IOPS, see [Provisioning persistent disk performance](https://cloud.google.com/compute/docs/disks/performance#provisioned-iops). "provisionedThroughput": "A String", # Optional. Indicates how much throughput to provision for the disk. This sets the number of throughput MB per second that the disk can handle. "sourceImage": "A String", # Optional. Image from which boot disk is to be created. If not specified, the default image for the runtime version will be used. Example: `projects/$PROJECT_ID/global/images/$IMAGE_NAME`. + "storagePool": "A String", # Optional. The storage pool in which the boot disk is created. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. }, "cidrBlock": "A String", # The CIDR block that the TPU node will use when selecting an IP address. This CIDR block must be a /29 block; the Compute Engine networks API forbids a smaller block, and using a larger block would be wasteful (a node can only consume one IP address). Errors will occur if the CIDR block has already been used for a currently existing TPU node, the CIDR block conflicts with any subnetworks in the user's provided network, or the provided network is peered with another network that is using that CIDR block. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the node was created. @@ -650,6 +652,7 @@

Method Details

"provisionedIops": "A String", # Optional. Indicates how many IOPS to provision for the disk. This sets the number of I/O operations per second that the disk can handle. To learn more about IOPS, see [Provisioning persistent disk performance](https://cloud.google.com/compute/docs/disks/performance#provisioned-iops). "provisionedThroughput": "A String", # Optional. Indicates how much throughput to provision for the disk. This sets the number of throughput MB per second that the disk can handle. "sourceImage": "A String", # Optional. Image from which boot disk is to be created. If not specified, the default image for the runtime version will be used. Example: `projects/$PROJECT_ID/global/images/$IMAGE_NAME`. + "storagePool": "A String", # Optional. The storage pool in which the boot disk is created. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. }, "cidrBlock": "A String", # The CIDR block that the TPU node will use when selecting an IP address. This CIDR block must be a /29 block; the Compute Engine networks API forbids a smaller block, and using a larger block would be wasteful (a node can only consume one IP address). Errors will occur if the CIDR block has already been used for a currently existing TPU node, the CIDR block conflicts with any subnetworks in the user's provided network, or the provided network is peered with another network that is using that CIDR block. "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time when the node was created. diff --git a/docs/dyn/trafficdirector_v2.discovery.html b/docs/dyn/trafficdirector_v2.discovery.html index 0f60d68be96..4681ed84f8f 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/trafficdirector_v2.discovery.html +++ b/docs/dyn/trafficdirector_v2.discovery.html @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@

Method Details

"key": "A String", # If specified, use the key to retrieve the value in a Struct. }, ], - "value": { # Specifies the way to match a ProtobufWkt::Value. Primitive values and ListValue are supported. StructValue is not supported and is always not matched. [#next-free-field: 7] # The StructMatcher is matched if the value retrieved by path is matched to this value. + "value": { # Specifies the way to match a Protobuf::Value. Primitive values and ListValue are supported. StructValue is not supported and is always not matched. [#next-free-field: 7] # The StructMatcher is matched if the value retrieved by path is matched to this value. "boolMatch": True or False, # If specified, a match occurs if and only if the target value is a bool value and is equal to this field. "doubleMatch": { # Specifies the way to match a double value. # If specified, a match occurs if and only if the target value is a double value and is matched to this field. "exact": 3.14, # If specified, the input double value must be equal to the value specified here. diff --git a/docs/dyn/trafficdirector_v3.discovery.html b/docs/dyn/trafficdirector_v3.discovery.html index 3693b602692..434d16ef8bf 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/trafficdirector_v3.discovery.html +++ b/docs/dyn/trafficdirector_v3.discovery.html @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@

Method Details

"address": "A String", # The address for this socket. :ref:`Listeners ` will bind to the address. An empty address is not allowed. Specify ``0.0.0.0`` or ``::`` to bind to any address. [#comment:TODO(zuercher) reinstate when implemented: It is possible to distinguish a Listener address via the prefix/suffix matching in :ref:`FilterChainMatch `.] When used within an upstream :ref:`BindConfig `, the address controls the source address of outbound connections. For :ref:`clusters `, the cluster type determines whether the address must be an IP (``STATIC`` or ``EDS`` clusters) or a hostname resolved by DNS (``STRICT_DNS`` or ``LOGICAL_DNS`` clusters). Address resolution can be customized via :ref:`resolver_name `. "ipv4Compat": True or False, # When binding to an IPv6 address above, this enables `IPv4 compatibility `_. Binding to ``::`` will allow both IPv4 and IPv6 connections, with peer IPv4 addresses mapped into IPv6 space as ``::FFFF:``. "namedPort": "A String", # This is only valid if :ref:`resolver_name ` is specified below and the named resolver is capable of named port resolution. - "networkNamespaceFilepath": "A String", # Filepath that specifies the Linux network namespace this socket will be created in (see ``man 7 network_namespaces``). If this field is set, Envoy will create the socket in the specified network namespace. .. note:: Setting this parameter requires Envoy to run with the ``CAP_NET_ADMIN`` capability. .. note:: Currently only used for Listener sockets. .. attention:: Network namespaces are only configurable on Linux. Otherwise, this field has no effect. + "networkNamespaceFilepath": "A String", # Filepath that specifies the Linux network namespace this socket will be created in (see ``man 7 network_namespaces``). If this field is set, Envoy will create the socket in the specified network namespace. .. note:: Setting this parameter requires Envoy to run with the ``CAP_NET_ADMIN`` capability. .. attention:: Network namespaces are only configurable on Linux. Otherwise, this field has no effect. "portValue": 42, "protocol": "A String", "resolverName": "A String", # The name of the custom resolver. This must have been registered with Envoy. If this is empty, a context dependent default applies. If the address is a concrete IP address, no resolution will occur. If address is a hostname this should be set for resolution other than DNS. Specifying a custom resolver with ``STRICT_DNS`` or ``LOGICAL_DNS`` will generate an error at runtime. @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@

Method Details

"key": "A String", # If specified, use the key to retrieve the value in a Struct. }, ], - "value": { # Specifies the way to match a ProtobufWkt::Value. Primitive values and ListValue are supported. StructValue is not supported and is always not matched. [#next-free-field: 8] # The StructMatcher is matched if the value retrieved by path is matched to this value. + "value": { # Specifies the way to match a Protobuf::Value. Primitive values and ListValue are supported. StructValue is not supported and is always not matched. [#next-free-field: 8] # The StructMatcher is matched if the value retrieved by path is matched to this value. "boolMatch": True or False, # If specified, a match occurs if and only if the target value is a bool value and is equal to this field. "doubleMatch": { # Specifies the way to match a double value. # If specified, a match occurs if and only if the target value is a double value and is matched to this field. "exact": 3.14, # If specified, the input double value must be equal to the value specified here. @@ -323,7 +323,7 @@

Method Details

"address": "A String", # The address for this socket. :ref:`Listeners ` will bind to the address. An empty address is not allowed. Specify ``0.0.0.0`` or ``::`` to bind to any address. [#comment:TODO(zuercher) reinstate when implemented: It is possible to distinguish a Listener address via the prefix/suffix matching in :ref:`FilterChainMatch `.] When used within an upstream :ref:`BindConfig `, the address controls the source address of outbound connections. For :ref:`clusters `, the cluster type determines whether the address must be an IP (``STATIC`` or ``EDS`` clusters) or a hostname resolved by DNS (``STRICT_DNS`` or ``LOGICAL_DNS`` clusters). Address resolution can be customized via :ref:`resolver_name `. "ipv4Compat": True or False, # When binding to an IPv6 address above, this enables `IPv4 compatibility `_. Binding to ``::`` will allow both IPv4 and IPv6 connections, with peer IPv4 addresses mapped into IPv6 space as ``::FFFF:``. "namedPort": "A String", # This is only valid if :ref:`resolver_name ` is specified below and the named resolver is capable of named port resolution. - "networkNamespaceFilepath": "A String", # Filepath that specifies the Linux network namespace this socket will be created in (see ``man 7 network_namespaces``). If this field is set, Envoy will create the socket in the specified network namespace. .. note:: Setting this parameter requires Envoy to run with the ``CAP_NET_ADMIN`` capability. .. note:: Currently only used for Listener sockets. .. attention:: Network namespaces are only configurable on Linux. Otherwise, this field has no effect. + "networkNamespaceFilepath": "A String", # Filepath that specifies the Linux network namespace this socket will be created in (see ``man 7 network_namespaces``). If this field is set, Envoy will create the socket in the specified network namespace. .. note:: Setting this parameter requires Envoy to run with the ``CAP_NET_ADMIN`` capability. .. attention:: Network namespaces are only configurable on Linux. Otherwise, this field has no effect. "portValue": 42, "protocol": "A String", "resolverName": "A String", # The name of the custom resolver. This must have been registered with Envoy. If this is empty, a context dependent default applies. If the address is a concrete IP address, no resolution will occur. If address is a hostname this should be set for resolution other than DNS. Specifying a custom resolver with ``STRICT_DNS`` or ``LOGICAL_DNS`` will generate an error at runtime. diff --git a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.html index ca958f0b954..dd9c3a04f35 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.html @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.imageImports.html b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.imageImports.html index 44f4054945b..5a79bb7af94 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.imageImports.html +++ b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.imageImports.html @@ -131,6 +131,12 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "osAdaptationParameters": { # Parameters affecting the OS adaptation process. # Optional. Use to set the parameters relevant for the OS adaptation process. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "bootConversion": "A String", # Optional. By default the image will keep its existing boot option. Setting this property will trigger an internal process which will convert the image from using the existing boot option to another. The size of the boot disk might be increased to allow the conversion "generalize": True or False, # Optional. Set to true in order to generalize the imported image. The generalization process enables co-existence of multiple VMs created from the same image. For Windows, generalizing the image removes computer-specific information such as installed drivers and the computer security identifier (SID). "licenseType": "A String", # Optional. Choose which type of license to apply to the imported image. @@ -166,6 +172,12 @@

Method Details

}, ], "osAdaptationParameters": { # Parameters affecting the OS adaptation process. # Optional. Use to set the parameters relevant for the OS adaptation process. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "bootConversion": "A String", # Optional. By default the image will keep its existing boot option. Setting this property will trigger an internal process which will convert the image from using the existing boot option to another. The size of the boot disk might be increased to allow the conversion "generalize": True or False, # Optional. Set to true in order to generalize the imported image. The generalization process enables co-existence of multiple VMs created from the same image. For Windows, generalizing the image removes computer-specific information such as installed drivers and the computer security identifier (SID). "licenseType": "A String", # Optional. Choose which type of license to apply to the imported image. @@ -213,6 +225,12 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "osAdaptationParameters": { # Parameters affecting the OS adaptation process. # Optional. Use to set the parameters relevant for the OS adaptation process. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "bootConversion": "A String", # Optional. By default the image will keep its existing boot option. Setting this property will trigger an internal process which will convert the image from using the existing boot option to another. The size of the boot disk might be increased to allow the conversion "generalize": True or False, # Optional. Set to true in order to generalize the imported image. The generalization process enables co-existence of multiple VMs created from the same image. For Windows, generalizing the image removes computer-specific information such as installed drivers and the computer security identifier (SID). "licenseType": "A String", # Optional. Choose which type of license to apply to the imported image. @@ -257,6 +275,12 @@

Method Details

}, ], "osAdaptationParameters": { # Parameters affecting the OS adaptation process. # Optional. Use to set the parameters relevant for the OS adaptation process. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "bootConversion": "A String", # Optional. By default the image will keep its existing boot option. Setting this property will trigger an internal process which will convert the image from using the existing boot option to another. The size of the boot disk might be increased to allow the conversion "generalize": True or False, # Optional. Set to true in order to generalize the imported image. The generalization process enables co-existence of multiple VMs created from the same image. For Windows, generalizing the image removes computer-specific information such as installed drivers and the computer security identifier (SID). "licenseType": "A String", # Optional. Choose which type of license to apply to the imported image. @@ -420,6 +444,12 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "osAdaptationParameters": { # Parameters affecting the OS adaptation process. # Optional. Use to set the parameters relevant for the OS adaptation process. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "bootConversion": "A String", # Optional. By default the image will keep its existing boot option. Setting this property will trigger an internal process which will convert the image from using the existing boot option to another. The size of the boot disk might be increased to allow the conversion "generalize": True or False, # Optional. Set to true in order to generalize the imported image. The generalization process enables co-existence of multiple VMs created from the same image. For Windows, generalizing the image removes computer-specific information such as installed drivers and the computer security identifier (SID). "licenseType": "A String", # Optional. Choose which type of license to apply to the imported image. @@ -455,6 +485,12 @@

Method Details

}, ], "osAdaptationParameters": { # Parameters affecting the OS adaptation process. # Optional. Use to set the parameters relevant for the OS adaptation process. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "bootConversion": "A String", # Optional. By default the image will keep its existing boot option. Setting this property will trigger an internal process which will convert the image from using the existing boot option to another. The size of the boot disk might be increased to allow the conversion "generalize": True or False, # Optional. Set to true in order to generalize the imported image. The generalization process enables co-existence of multiple VMs created from the same image. For Windows, generalizing the image removes computer-specific information such as installed drivers and the computer security identifier (SID). "licenseType": "A String", # Optional. Choose which type of license to apply to the imported image. @@ -502,6 +538,12 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "osAdaptationParameters": { # Parameters affecting the OS adaptation process. # Optional. Use to set the parameters relevant for the OS adaptation process. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "bootConversion": "A String", # Optional. By default the image will keep its existing boot option. Setting this property will trigger an internal process which will convert the image from using the existing boot option to another. The size of the boot disk might be increased to allow the conversion "generalize": True or False, # Optional. Set to true in order to generalize the imported image. The generalization process enables co-existence of multiple VMs created from the same image. For Windows, generalizing the image removes computer-specific information such as installed drivers and the computer security identifier (SID). "licenseType": "A String", # Optional. Choose which type of license to apply to the imported image. @@ -546,6 +588,12 @@

Method Details

}, ], "osAdaptationParameters": { # Parameters affecting the OS adaptation process. # Optional. Use to set the parameters relevant for the OS adaptation process. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "bootConversion": "A String", # Optional. By default the image will keep its existing boot option. Setting this property will trigger an internal process which will convert the image from using the existing boot option to another. The size of the boot disk might be increased to allow the conversion "generalize": True or False, # Optional. Set to true in order to generalize the imported image. The generalization process enables co-existence of multiple VMs created from the same image. For Windows, generalizing the image removes computer-specific information such as installed drivers and the computer security identifier (SID). "licenseType": "A String", # Optional. Choose which type of license to apply to the imported image. @@ -649,6 +697,12 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "osAdaptationParameters": { # Parameters affecting the OS adaptation process. # Optional. Use to set the parameters relevant for the OS adaptation process. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "bootConversion": "A String", # Optional. By default the image will keep its existing boot option. Setting this property will trigger an internal process which will convert the image from using the existing boot option to another. The size of the boot disk might be increased to allow the conversion "generalize": True or False, # Optional. Set to true in order to generalize the imported image. The generalization process enables co-existence of multiple VMs created from the same image. For Windows, generalizing the image removes computer-specific information such as installed drivers and the computer security identifier (SID). "licenseType": "A String", # Optional. Choose which type of license to apply to the imported image. @@ -684,6 +738,12 @@

Method Details

}, ], "osAdaptationParameters": { # Parameters affecting the OS adaptation process. # Optional. Use to set the parameters relevant for the OS adaptation process. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "bootConversion": "A String", # Optional. By default the image will keep its existing boot option. Setting this property will trigger an internal process which will convert the image from using the existing boot option to another. The size of the boot disk might be increased to allow the conversion "generalize": True or False, # Optional. Set to true in order to generalize the imported image. The generalization process enables co-existence of multiple VMs created from the same image. For Windows, generalizing the image removes computer-specific information such as installed drivers and the computer security identifier (SID). "licenseType": "A String", # Optional. Choose which type of license to apply to the imported image. @@ -731,6 +791,12 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "osAdaptationParameters": { # Parameters affecting the OS adaptation process. # Optional. Use to set the parameters relevant for the OS adaptation process. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "bootConversion": "A String", # Optional. By default the image will keep its existing boot option. Setting this property will trigger an internal process which will convert the image from using the existing boot option to another. The size of the boot disk might be increased to allow the conversion "generalize": True or False, # Optional. Set to true in order to generalize the imported image. The generalization process enables co-existence of multiple VMs created from the same image. For Windows, generalizing the image removes computer-specific information such as installed drivers and the computer security identifier (SID). "licenseType": "A String", # Optional. Choose which type of license to apply to the imported image. @@ -775,6 +841,12 @@

Method Details

}, ], "osAdaptationParameters": { # Parameters affecting the OS adaptation process. # Optional. Use to set the parameters relevant for the OS adaptation process. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "bootConversion": "A String", # Optional. By default the image will keep its existing boot option. Setting this property will trigger an internal process which will convert the image from using the existing boot option to another. The size of the boot disk might be increased to allow the conversion "generalize": True or False, # Optional. Set to true in order to generalize the imported image. The generalization process enables co-existence of multiple VMs created from the same image. For Windows, generalizing the image removes computer-specific information such as installed drivers and the computer security identifier (SID). "licenseType": "A String", # Optional. Choose which type of license to apply to the imported image. diff --git a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.imageImports.imageImportJobs.html b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.imageImports.imageImportJobs.html index eede7d0777e..c67ddc6fc69 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.imageImports.imageImportJobs.html +++ b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.imageImports.imageImportJobs.html @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@

VM Migration API . cancel(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Initiates the cancellation of a running clone job.

+

Initiates the cancellation of a running ImageImportJob.

close()

Close httplib2 connections.

@@ -92,7 +92,7 @@

Instance Methods

Method Details

cancel(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None) -
Initiates the cancellation of a running clone job.
+  
Initiates the cancellation of a running ImageImportJob.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The image import job id. (required)
@@ -172,6 +172,12 @@ 

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "osAdaptationParameters": { # Parameters affecting the OS adaptation process. # Optional. Use to set the parameters relevant for the OS adaptation process. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "bootConversion": "A String", # Optional. By default the image will keep its existing boot option. Setting this property will trigger an internal process which will convert the image from using the existing boot option to another. The size of the boot disk might be increased to allow the conversion "generalize": True or False, # Optional. Set to true in order to generalize the imported image. The generalization process enables co-existence of multiple VMs created from the same image. For Windows, generalizing the image removes computer-specific information such as installed drivers and the computer security identifier (SID). "licenseType": "A String", # Optional. Choose which type of license to apply to the imported image. @@ -216,6 +222,12 @@

Method Details

}, ], "osAdaptationParameters": { # Parameters affecting the OS adaptation process. # Optional. Use to set the parameters relevant for the OS adaptation process. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "bootConversion": "A String", # Optional. By default the image will keep its existing boot option. Setting this property will trigger an internal process which will convert the image from using the existing boot option to another. The size of the boot disk might be increased to allow the conversion "generalize": True or False, # Optional. Set to true in order to generalize the imported image. The generalization process enables co-existence of multiple VMs created from the same image. For Windows, generalizing the image removes computer-specific information such as installed drivers and the computer security identifier (SID). "licenseType": "A String", # Optional. Choose which type of license to apply to the imported image. @@ -320,6 +332,12 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "osAdaptationParameters": { # Parameters affecting the OS adaptation process. # Optional. Use to set the parameters relevant for the OS adaptation process. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "bootConversion": "A String", # Optional. By default the image will keep its existing boot option. Setting this property will trigger an internal process which will convert the image from using the existing boot option to another. The size of the boot disk might be increased to allow the conversion "generalize": True or False, # Optional. Set to true in order to generalize the imported image. The generalization process enables co-existence of multiple VMs created from the same image. For Windows, generalizing the image removes computer-specific information such as installed drivers and the computer security identifier (SID). "licenseType": "A String", # Optional. Choose which type of license to apply to the imported image. @@ -364,6 +382,12 @@

Method Details

}, ], "osAdaptationParameters": { # Parameters affecting the OS adaptation process. # Optional. Use to set the parameters relevant for the OS adaptation process. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "bootConversion": "A String", # Optional. By default the image will keep its existing boot option. Setting this property will trigger an internal process which will convert the image from using the existing boot option to another. The size of the boot disk might be increased to allow the conversion "generalize": True or False, # Optional. Set to true in order to generalize the imported image. The generalization process enables co-existence of multiple VMs created from the same image. For Windows, generalizing the image removes computer-specific information such as installed drivers and the computer security identifier (SID). "licenseType": "A String", # Optional. Choose which type of license to apply to the imported image. diff --git a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.cloneJobs.html b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.cloneJobs.html index c924cd098df..8cb5a3fc36d 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.cloneJobs.html +++ b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.cloneJobs.html @@ -163,6 +163,12 @@

Method Details

}, }, "computeEngineTargetDetails": { # ComputeEngineTargetDetails is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Output only. Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], @@ -311,6 +317,12 @@

Method Details

}, }, "computeEngineTargetDetails": { # ComputeEngineTargetDetails is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Output only. Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], @@ -435,6 +447,12 @@

Method Details

}, }, "computeEngineTargetDetails": { # ComputeEngineTargetDetails is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Output only. Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], diff --git a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.cutoverJobs.html b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.cutoverJobs.html index 9c9687c7165..41e24474951 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.cutoverJobs.html +++ b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.cutoverJobs.html @@ -163,6 +163,12 @@

Method Details

}, }, "computeEngineTargetDetails": { # ComputeEngineTargetDetails is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Output only. Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], @@ -421,6 +427,12 @@

Method Details

}, }, "computeEngineTargetDetails": { # ComputeEngineTargetDetails is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Output only. Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], @@ -655,6 +667,12 @@

Method Details

}, }, "computeEngineTargetDetails": { # ComputeEngineTargetDetails is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Output only. Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], diff --git a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.html b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.html index da4fde7cc31..573d6406fd3 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.html +++ b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.html @@ -259,6 +259,12 @@

Method Details

"zone": "A String", # The zone in which to create the Persistent Disks. }, "computeEngineTargetDefaults": { # ComputeEngineTargetDefaults is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. AdaptationModifiers are the set of modifiers used during OS adaptation. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], @@ -475,6 +481,12 @@

Method Details

}, }, "computeEngineTargetDetails": { # ComputeEngineTargetDetails is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Output only. Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], @@ -579,6 +591,12 @@

Method Details

}, }, "computeEngineTargetDetails": { # ComputeEngineTargetDetails is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Output only. Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], @@ -1087,6 +1105,12 @@

Method Details

"zone": "A String", # The zone in which to create the Persistent Disks. }, "computeEngineTargetDefaults": { # ComputeEngineTargetDefaults is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. AdaptationModifiers are the set of modifiers used during OS adaptation. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], @@ -1303,6 +1327,12 @@

Method Details

}, }, "computeEngineTargetDetails": { # ComputeEngineTargetDetails is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Output only. Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], @@ -1407,6 +1437,12 @@

Method Details

}, }, "computeEngineTargetDetails": { # ComputeEngineTargetDetails is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Output only. Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], @@ -1774,6 +1810,12 @@

Method Details

"zone": "A String", # The zone in which to create the Persistent Disks. }, "computeEngineTargetDefaults": { # ComputeEngineTargetDefaults is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. AdaptationModifiers are the set of modifiers used during OS adaptation. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], @@ -1990,6 +2032,12 @@

Method Details

}, }, "computeEngineTargetDetails": { # ComputeEngineTargetDetails is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Output only. Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], @@ -2094,6 +2142,12 @@

Method Details

}, }, "computeEngineTargetDetails": { # ComputeEngineTargetDetails is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Output only. Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], @@ -2465,6 +2519,12 @@

Method Details

"zone": "A String", # The zone in which to create the Persistent Disks. }, "computeEngineTargetDefaults": { # ComputeEngineTargetDefaults is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. AdaptationModifiers are the set of modifiers used during OS adaptation. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], @@ -2681,6 +2741,12 @@

Method Details

}, }, "computeEngineTargetDetails": { # ComputeEngineTargetDetails is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Output only. Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], @@ -2785,6 +2851,12 @@

Method Details

}, }, "computeEngineTargetDetails": { # ComputeEngineTargetDetails is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Output only. Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], diff --git a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1alpha1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1alpha1.projects.locations.html index be9c8fcde5e..dfe2d45dc11 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1alpha1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1alpha1.projects.locations.html @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1alpha1.projects.locations.imageImports.html b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1alpha1.projects.locations.imageImports.html index 69b7f01a4be..8aa59c379c0 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1alpha1.projects.locations.imageImports.html +++ b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1alpha1.projects.locations.imageImports.html @@ -131,6 +131,12 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "osAdaptationParameters": { # Parameters affecting the OS adaptation process. # Optional. Use to set the parameters relevant for the OS adaptation process. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "bootConversion": "A String", # Optional. By default the image will keep its existing boot option. Setting this property will trigger an internal process which will convert the image from using the existing boot option to another. The size of the boot disk might be increased to allow the conversion "generalize": True or False, # Optional. Set to true in order to generalize the imported image. The generalization process enables co-existence of multiple VMs created from the same image. For Windows, generalizing the image removes computer-specific information such as installed drivers and the computer security identifier (SID). "licenseType": "A String", # Optional. Choose which type of license to apply to the imported image. @@ -166,6 +172,12 @@

Method Details

}, ], "osAdaptationParameters": { # Parameters affecting the OS adaptation process. # Optional. Use to set the parameters relevant for the OS adaptation process. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "bootConversion": "A String", # Optional. By default the image will keep its existing boot option. Setting this property will trigger an internal process which will convert the image from using the existing boot option to another. The size of the boot disk might be increased to allow the conversion "generalize": True or False, # Optional. Set to true in order to generalize the imported image. The generalization process enables co-existence of multiple VMs created from the same image. For Windows, generalizing the image removes computer-specific information such as installed drivers and the computer security identifier (SID). "licenseType": "A String", # Optional. Choose which type of license to apply to the imported image. @@ -213,6 +225,12 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "osAdaptationParameters": { # Parameters affecting the OS adaptation process. # Optional. Use to set the parameters relevant for the OS adaptation process. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "bootConversion": "A String", # Optional. By default the image will keep its existing boot option. Setting this property will trigger an internal process which will convert the image from using the existing boot option to another. The size of the boot disk might be increased to allow the conversion "generalize": True or False, # Optional. Set to true in order to generalize the imported image. The generalization process enables co-existence of multiple VMs created from the same image. For Windows, generalizing the image removes computer-specific information such as installed drivers and the computer security identifier (SID). "licenseType": "A String", # Optional. Choose which type of license to apply to the imported image. @@ -257,6 +275,12 @@

Method Details

}, ], "osAdaptationParameters": { # Parameters affecting the OS adaptation process. # Optional. Use to set the parameters relevant for the OS adaptation process. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "bootConversion": "A String", # Optional. By default the image will keep its existing boot option. Setting this property will trigger an internal process which will convert the image from using the existing boot option to another. The size of the boot disk might be increased to allow the conversion "generalize": True or False, # Optional. Set to true in order to generalize the imported image. The generalization process enables co-existence of multiple VMs created from the same image. For Windows, generalizing the image removes computer-specific information such as installed drivers and the computer security identifier (SID). "licenseType": "A String", # Optional. Choose which type of license to apply to the imported image. @@ -420,6 +444,12 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "osAdaptationParameters": { # Parameters affecting the OS adaptation process. # Optional. Use to set the parameters relevant for the OS adaptation process. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "bootConversion": "A String", # Optional. By default the image will keep its existing boot option. Setting this property will trigger an internal process which will convert the image from using the existing boot option to another. The size of the boot disk might be increased to allow the conversion "generalize": True or False, # Optional. Set to true in order to generalize the imported image. The generalization process enables co-existence of multiple VMs created from the same image. For Windows, generalizing the image removes computer-specific information such as installed drivers and the computer security identifier (SID). "licenseType": "A String", # Optional. Choose which type of license to apply to the imported image. @@ -455,6 +485,12 @@

Method Details

}, ], "osAdaptationParameters": { # Parameters affecting the OS adaptation process. # Optional. Use to set the parameters relevant for the OS adaptation process. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "bootConversion": "A String", # Optional. By default the image will keep its existing boot option. Setting this property will trigger an internal process which will convert the image from using the existing boot option to another. The size of the boot disk might be increased to allow the conversion "generalize": True or False, # Optional. Set to true in order to generalize the imported image. The generalization process enables co-existence of multiple VMs created from the same image. For Windows, generalizing the image removes computer-specific information such as installed drivers and the computer security identifier (SID). "licenseType": "A String", # Optional. Choose which type of license to apply to the imported image. @@ -502,6 +538,12 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "osAdaptationParameters": { # Parameters affecting the OS adaptation process. # Optional. Use to set the parameters relevant for the OS adaptation process. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "bootConversion": "A String", # Optional. By default the image will keep its existing boot option. Setting this property will trigger an internal process which will convert the image from using the existing boot option to another. The size of the boot disk might be increased to allow the conversion "generalize": True or False, # Optional. Set to true in order to generalize the imported image. The generalization process enables co-existence of multiple VMs created from the same image. For Windows, generalizing the image removes computer-specific information such as installed drivers and the computer security identifier (SID). "licenseType": "A String", # Optional. Choose which type of license to apply to the imported image. @@ -546,6 +588,12 @@

Method Details

}, ], "osAdaptationParameters": { # Parameters affecting the OS adaptation process. # Optional. Use to set the parameters relevant for the OS adaptation process. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "bootConversion": "A String", # Optional. By default the image will keep its existing boot option. Setting this property will trigger an internal process which will convert the image from using the existing boot option to another. The size of the boot disk might be increased to allow the conversion "generalize": True or False, # Optional. Set to true in order to generalize the imported image. The generalization process enables co-existence of multiple VMs created from the same image. For Windows, generalizing the image removes computer-specific information such as installed drivers and the computer security identifier (SID). "licenseType": "A String", # Optional. Choose which type of license to apply to the imported image. @@ -649,6 +697,12 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "osAdaptationParameters": { # Parameters affecting the OS adaptation process. # Optional. Use to set the parameters relevant for the OS adaptation process. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "bootConversion": "A String", # Optional. By default the image will keep its existing boot option. Setting this property will trigger an internal process which will convert the image from using the existing boot option to another. The size of the boot disk might be increased to allow the conversion "generalize": True or False, # Optional. Set to true in order to generalize the imported image. The generalization process enables co-existence of multiple VMs created from the same image. For Windows, generalizing the image removes computer-specific information such as installed drivers and the computer security identifier (SID). "licenseType": "A String", # Optional. Choose which type of license to apply to the imported image. @@ -684,6 +738,12 @@

Method Details

}, ], "osAdaptationParameters": { # Parameters affecting the OS adaptation process. # Optional. Use to set the parameters relevant for the OS adaptation process. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "bootConversion": "A String", # Optional. By default the image will keep its existing boot option. Setting this property will trigger an internal process which will convert the image from using the existing boot option to another. The size of the boot disk might be increased to allow the conversion "generalize": True or False, # Optional. Set to true in order to generalize the imported image. The generalization process enables co-existence of multiple VMs created from the same image. For Windows, generalizing the image removes computer-specific information such as installed drivers and the computer security identifier (SID). "licenseType": "A String", # Optional. Choose which type of license to apply to the imported image. @@ -731,6 +791,12 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "osAdaptationParameters": { # Parameters affecting the OS adaptation process. # Optional. Use to set the parameters relevant for the OS adaptation process. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "bootConversion": "A String", # Optional. By default the image will keep its existing boot option. Setting this property will trigger an internal process which will convert the image from using the existing boot option to another. The size of the boot disk might be increased to allow the conversion "generalize": True or False, # Optional. Set to true in order to generalize the imported image. The generalization process enables co-existence of multiple VMs created from the same image. For Windows, generalizing the image removes computer-specific information such as installed drivers and the computer security identifier (SID). "licenseType": "A String", # Optional. Choose which type of license to apply to the imported image. @@ -775,6 +841,12 @@

Method Details

}, ], "osAdaptationParameters": { # Parameters affecting the OS adaptation process. # Optional. Use to set the parameters relevant for the OS adaptation process. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "bootConversion": "A String", # Optional. By default the image will keep its existing boot option. Setting this property will trigger an internal process which will convert the image from using the existing boot option to another. The size of the boot disk might be increased to allow the conversion "generalize": True or False, # Optional. Set to true in order to generalize the imported image. The generalization process enables co-existence of multiple VMs created from the same image. For Windows, generalizing the image removes computer-specific information such as installed drivers and the computer security identifier (SID). "licenseType": "A String", # Optional. Choose which type of license to apply to the imported image. diff --git a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1alpha1.projects.locations.imageImports.imageImportJobs.html b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1alpha1.projects.locations.imageImports.imageImportJobs.html index aa8c5fb7dde..733eddfe7b7 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1alpha1.projects.locations.imageImports.imageImportJobs.html +++ b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1alpha1.projects.locations.imageImports.imageImportJobs.html @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@

VM Migration API . cancel(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Initiates the cancellation of a running clone job.

+

Initiates the cancellation of a running ImageImportJob.

close()

Close httplib2 connections.

@@ -92,7 +92,7 @@

Instance Methods

Method Details

cancel(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None) -
Initiates the cancellation of a running clone job.
+  
Initiates the cancellation of a running ImageImportJob.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The image import job id. (required)
@@ -172,6 +172,12 @@ 

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "osAdaptationParameters": { # Parameters affecting the OS adaptation process. # Optional. Use to set the parameters relevant for the OS adaptation process. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "bootConversion": "A String", # Optional. By default the image will keep its existing boot option. Setting this property will trigger an internal process which will convert the image from using the existing boot option to another. The size of the boot disk might be increased to allow the conversion "generalize": True or False, # Optional. Set to true in order to generalize the imported image. The generalization process enables co-existence of multiple VMs created from the same image. For Windows, generalizing the image removes computer-specific information such as installed drivers and the computer security identifier (SID). "licenseType": "A String", # Optional. Choose which type of license to apply to the imported image. @@ -216,6 +222,12 @@

Method Details

}, ], "osAdaptationParameters": { # Parameters affecting the OS adaptation process. # Optional. Use to set the parameters relevant for the OS adaptation process. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "bootConversion": "A String", # Optional. By default the image will keep its existing boot option. Setting this property will trigger an internal process which will convert the image from using the existing boot option to another. The size of the boot disk might be increased to allow the conversion "generalize": True or False, # Optional. Set to true in order to generalize the imported image. The generalization process enables co-existence of multiple VMs created from the same image. For Windows, generalizing the image removes computer-specific information such as installed drivers and the computer security identifier (SID). "licenseType": "A String", # Optional. Choose which type of license to apply to the imported image. @@ -320,6 +332,12 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "A String", }, "osAdaptationParameters": { # Parameters affecting the OS adaptation process. # Optional. Use to set the parameters relevant for the OS adaptation process. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "bootConversion": "A String", # Optional. By default the image will keep its existing boot option. Setting this property will trigger an internal process which will convert the image from using the existing boot option to another. The size of the boot disk might be increased to allow the conversion "generalize": True or False, # Optional. Set to true in order to generalize the imported image. The generalization process enables co-existence of multiple VMs created from the same image. For Windows, generalizing the image removes computer-specific information such as installed drivers and the computer security identifier (SID). "licenseType": "A String", # Optional. Choose which type of license to apply to the imported image. @@ -364,6 +382,12 @@

Method Details

}, ], "osAdaptationParameters": { # Parameters affecting the OS adaptation process. # Optional. Use to set the parameters relevant for the OS adaptation process. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "bootConversion": "A String", # Optional. By default the image will keep its existing boot option. Setting this property will trigger an internal process which will convert the image from using the existing boot option to another. The size of the boot disk might be increased to allow the conversion "generalize": True or False, # Optional. Set to true in order to generalize the imported image. The generalization process enables co-existence of multiple VMs created from the same image. For Windows, generalizing the image removes computer-specific information such as installed drivers and the computer security identifier (SID). "licenseType": "A String", # Optional. Choose which type of license to apply to the imported image. diff --git a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1alpha1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.cloneJobs.html b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1alpha1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.cloneJobs.html index 7ed95aa5c27..09979883891 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1alpha1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.cloneJobs.html +++ b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1alpha1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.cloneJobs.html @@ -163,6 +163,12 @@

Method Details

}, }, "computeEngineTargetDetails": { # ComputeEngineTargetDetails is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Output only. Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], @@ -420,6 +426,12 @@

Method Details

}, }, "computeEngineTargetDetails": { # ComputeEngineTargetDetails is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Output only. Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], @@ -653,6 +665,12 @@

Method Details

}, }, "computeEngineTargetDetails": { # ComputeEngineTargetDetails is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Output only. Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], diff --git a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1alpha1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.cutoverJobs.html b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1alpha1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.cutoverJobs.html index 1345462aa62..b8d9d3c1244 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1alpha1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.cutoverJobs.html +++ b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1alpha1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.cutoverJobs.html @@ -163,6 +163,12 @@

Method Details

}, }, "computeEngineTargetDetails": { # ComputeEngineTargetDetails is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Output only. Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], @@ -533,6 +539,12 @@

Method Details

}, }, "computeEngineTargetDetails": { # ComputeEngineTargetDetails is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Output only. Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], @@ -879,6 +891,12 @@

Method Details

}, }, "computeEngineTargetDetails": { # ComputeEngineTargetDetails is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Output only. Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], diff --git a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1alpha1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.html b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1alpha1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.html index 6fad305c8db..549288a2356 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1alpha1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.html +++ b/docs/dyn/vmmigration_v1alpha1.projects.locations.sources.migratingVms.html @@ -260,6 +260,12 @@

Method Details

"zone": "A String", # The zone in which to create the Persistent Disks. }, "computeEngineTargetDefaults": { # ComputeEngineTargetDefaults is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. AdaptationModifiers are the set of modifiers used during OS adaptation. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], @@ -533,6 +539,12 @@

Method Details

}, }, "computeEngineTargetDetails": { # ComputeEngineTargetDetails is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Output only. Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], @@ -746,6 +758,12 @@

Method Details

}, }, "computeEngineTargetDetails": { # ComputeEngineTargetDetails is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Output only. Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], @@ -1421,6 +1439,12 @@

Method Details

"zone": "A String", # The zone in which to create the Persistent Disks. }, "computeEngineTargetDefaults": { # ComputeEngineTargetDefaults is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. AdaptationModifiers are the set of modifiers used during OS adaptation. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], @@ -1694,6 +1718,12 @@

Method Details

}, }, "computeEngineTargetDetails": { # ComputeEngineTargetDetails is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Output only. Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], @@ -1907,6 +1937,12 @@

Method Details

}, }, "computeEngineTargetDetails": { # ComputeEngineTargetDetails is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Output only. Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], @@ -2441,6 +2477,12 @@

Method Details

"zone": "A String", # The zone in which to create the Persistent Disks. }, "computeEngineTargetDefaults": { # ComputeEngineTargetDefaults is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. AdaptationModifiers are the set of modifiers used during OS adaptation. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], @@ -2714,6 +2756,12 @@

Method Details

}, }, "computeEngineTargetDetails": { # ComputeEngineTargetDetails is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Output only. Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], @@ -2927,6 +2975,12 @@

Method Details

}, }, "computeEngineTargetDetails": { # ComputeEngineTargetDetails is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Output only. Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], @@ -3465,6 +3519,12 @@

Method Details

"zone": "A String", # The zone in which to create the Persistent Disks. }, "computeEngineTargetDefaults": { # ComputeEngineTargetDefaults is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. AdaptationModifiers are the set of modifiers used during OS adaptation. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], @@ -3738,6 +3798,12 @@

Method Details

}, }, "computeEngineTargetDetails": { # ComputeEngineTargetDetails is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Output only. Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], @@ -3951,6 +4017,12 @@

Method Details

}, }, "computeEngineTargetDetails": { # ComputeEngineTargetDetails is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project. # Output only. Details of the target VM in Compute Engine. + "adaptationModifiers": [ # Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process. + { # AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process. + "modifier": "A String", # Optional. The modifier name. + "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty. + }, + ], "additionalLicenses": [ # Additional licenses to assign to the VM. "A String", ], diff --git a/docs/dyn/walletobjects_v1.media.html b/docs/dyn/walletobjects_v1.media.html index e1b8b853431..9924fa2be15 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/walletobjects_v1.media.html +++ b/docs/dyn/walletobjects_v1.media.html @@ -591,6 +591,7 @@

Method Details

"diffObjectVersion": "A String", # Set if the http request info is diff encoded. The value of this field is the version number of the base revision. This is corresponding to Apiary's mediaDiffObjectVersion (//depot/google3/java/com/google/api/server/media/variable/DiffObjectVersionVariable.java). See go/esf-scotty-diff-upload for more information. "finalStatus": 42, # The existence of the final_status field indicates that this is the last call to the agent for this request_id. http://google3/uploader/agent/scotty_agent.proto?l=737&rcl=347601929 "notificationType": "A String", # The type of notification received from Scotty. + "physicalHeaders": "A String", # The physical headers provided by RequestReceivedParameters in Scotty request. type is uploader_service.KeyValuePairs. "requestId": "A String", # The Scotty request ID. "requestReceivedParamsServingInfo": "A String", # The partition of the Scotty server handling this request. type is uploader_service.RequestReceivedParamsServingInfo LINT.IfChange(request_received_params_serving_info_annotations) LINT.ThenChange() "totalBytes": "A String", # The total size of the file. diff --git a/docs/dyn/workloadmanager_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/workloadmanager_v1.projects.locations.html index 89085ed61da..8647dcd8ab2 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/workloadmanager_v1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/workloadmanager_v1.projects.locations.html @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@

Method Details

Args: name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required) - extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage. (repeated) + extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage. (repeated) filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160). pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default. pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page. diff --git a/docs/dyn/workloadmanager_v1.projects.locations.insights.html b/docs/dyn/workloadmanager_v1.projects.locations.insights.html index 637d8db3c39..457b321ec37 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/workloadmanager_v1.projects.locations.insights.html +++ b/docs/dyn/workloadmanager_v1.projects.locations.insights.html @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@

Method Details

"systemdServiceEnabled": "A String", # Output only. Whether the agent service is enabled in systemd. "systemdServiceRunning": "A String", # Output only. Whether the agent service is running in systemd. }, - "instanceId": "A String", # Required. The instance id where the insight is generated from + "instanceId": "A String", # Optional. The instance id where the insight is generated from "sapDiscovery": { # The schema of SAP system discovery data. # The insights data for SAP system discovery. This is a copy of SAP System proto and should get updated whenever that one changes. "applicationLayer": { # Message describing the system component. # Optional. An SAP system may run without an application layer. "applicationProperties": { # A set of properties describing an SAP Application layer. # Optional. The component is a SAP application. @@ -411,7 +411,7 @@

Method Details

}, "torsoValidation": { # The schema of torso workload validation data. # The insights data for workload validation of torso workloads. "agentVersion": "A String", # Required. agent_version lists the version of the agent that collected this data. - "instanceName": "A String", # Required. instance_name lists the human readable name of the instance that the data comes from. + "instanceName": "A String", # Optional. instance_name lists the human readable name of the instance that the data comes from. "projectId": "A String", # Required. project_id lists the human readable cloud project that the data comes from. "validationDetails": { # Required. validation_details contains the pairs of validation data: field name & field value. "a_key": "A String", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/aiplatform.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/aiplatform.v1.json index 05e3f101d9d..743e6bbb8cc 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/aiplatform.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/aiplatform.v1.json @@ -1294,6 +1294,34 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" ] }, +"generateSyntheticData": { +"description": "Generates synthetic data based on the provided configuration.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}:generateSyntheticData", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "aiplatform.projects.locations.generateSyntheticData", +"parameterOrder": [ +"location" +], +"parameters": { +"location": { +"description": "Required. The resource name of the Location to run the job. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}`", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+location}:generateSyntheticData", +"request": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1GenerateSyntheticDataRequest" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1GenerateSyntheticDataResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, "get": { "description": "Gets information about a location.", "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}", @@ -5094,6 +5122,452 @@ } } }, +"evaluationItems": { +"methods": { +"create": { +"description": "Creates an Evaluation Item.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/evaluationItems", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "aiplatform.projects.locations.evaluationItems.create", +"parameterOrder": [ +"parent" +], +"parameters": { +"parent": { +"description": "Required. The resource name of the Location to create the Evaluation Item in. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}`", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+parent}/evaluationItems", +"request": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationItem" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationItem" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"delete": { +"description": "Deletes an Evaluation Item.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/evaluationItems/{evaluationItemsId}", +"httpMethod": "DELETE", +"id": "aiplatform.projects.locations.evaluationItems.delete", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. The name of the EvaluationItem resource to be deleted. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationItems/{evaluation_item}`", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/evaluationItems/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}", +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleLongrunningOperation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"get": { +"description": "Gets an Evaluation Item.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/evaluationItems/{evaluationItemsId}", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "aiplatform.projects.locations.evaluationItems.get", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. The name of the EvaluationItem resource. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationItems/{evaluation_item}`", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/evaluationItems/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}", +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationItem" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"list": { +"description": "Lists Evaluation Items.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/evaluationItems", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "aiplatform.projects.locations.evaluationItems.list", +"parameterOrder": [ +"parent" +], +"parameters": { +"filter": { +"description": "Optional. Filter expression that matches a subset of the EvaluationItems to show. For field names both snake_case and camelCase are supported. For more information about filter syntax, see [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160).", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"orderBy": { +"description": "Optional. A comma-separated list of fields to order by, sorted in ascending order by default. Use `desc` after a field name for descending.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"pageSize": { +"description": "Optional. The maximum number of Evaluation Items to return.", +"format": "int32", +"location": "query", +"type": "integer" +}, +"pageToken": { +"description": "Optional. A page token, received from a previous `ListEvaluationItems` call. Provide this to retrieve the subsequent page.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"parent": { +"description": "Required. The resource name of the Location from which to list the Evaluation Items. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}`", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+parent}/evaluationItems", +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1ListEvaluationItemsResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +} +} +}, +"evaluationRuns": { +"methods": { +"cancel": { +"description": "Cancels an Evaluation Run. Attempts to cancel a running Evaluation Run asynchronously. Status of run can be checked via GetEvaluationRun.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/evaluationRuns/{evaluationRunsId}:cancel", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "aiplatform.projects.locations.evaluationRuns.cancel", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. The name of the EvaluationRun resource to be cancelled. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationRuns/{evaluation_run}`", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/evaluationRuns/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}:cancel", +"request": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1CancelEvaluationRunRequest" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleProtobufEmpty" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"create": { +"description": "Creates an Evaluation Run.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/evaluationRuns", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "aiplatform.projects.locations.evaluationRuns.create", +"parameterOrder": [ +"parent" +], +"parameters": { +"parent": { +"description": "Required. The resource name of the Location to create the Evaluation Run in. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}`", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+parent}/evaluationRuns", +"request": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRun" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRun" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"delete": { +"description": "Deletes an Evaluation Run.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/evaluationRuns/{evaluationRunsId}", +"httpMethod": "DELETE", +"id": "aiplatform.projects.locations.evaluationRuns.delete", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. The name of the EvaluationRun resource to be deleted. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationRuns/{evaluation_run}`", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/evaluationRuns/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}", +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleLongrunningOperation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"get": { +"description": "Gets an Evaluation Run.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/evaluationRuns/{evaluationRunsId}", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "aiplatform.projects.locations.evaluationRuns.get", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. The name of the EvaluationRun resource. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationRuns/{evaluation_run}`", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/evaluationRuns/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}", +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRun" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"list": { +"description": "Lists Evaluation Runs.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/evaluationRuns", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "aiplatform.projects.locations.evaluationRuns.list", +"parameterOrder": [ +"parent" +], +"parameters": { +"filter": { +"description": "Optional. Filter expression that matches a subset of the EvaluationRuns to show. For field names both snake_case and camelCase are supported. For more information about filter syntax, see [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160).", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"orderBy": { +"description": "Optional. A comma-separated list of fields to order by, sorted in ascending order by default. Use `desc` after a field name for descending.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"pageSize": { +"description": "Optional. The maximum number of Evaluation Runs to return.", +"format": "int32", +"location": "query", +"type": "integer" +}, +"pageToken": { +"description": "Optional. A page token, received from a previous `ListEvaluationRuns` call. Provide this to retrieve the subsequent page.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"parent": { +"description": "Required. The resource name of the Location from which to list the Evaluation Runs. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}`", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+parent}/evaluationRuns", +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1ListEvaluationRunsResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +} +} +}, +"evaluationSets": { +"methods": { +"create": { +"description": "Creates an Evaluation Set.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/evaluationSets", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "aiplatform.projects.locations.evaluationSets.create", +"parameterOrder": [ +"parent" +], +"parameters": { +"parent": { +"description": "Required. The resource name of the Location to create the Evaluation Set in. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}`", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+parent}/evaluationSets", +"request": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationSet" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationSet" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"delete": { +"description": "Deletes an Evaluation Set.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/evaluationSets/{evaluationSetsId}", +"httpMethod": "DELETE", +"id": "aiplatform.projects.locations.evaluationSets.delete", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. The name of the EvaluationSet resource to be deleted. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationSets/{evaluation_set}`", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/evaluationSets/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}", +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleLongrunningOperation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"get": { +"description": "Gets an Evaluation Set.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/evaluationSets/{evaluationSetsId}", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "aiplatform.projects.locations.evaluationSets.get", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. The name of the EvaluationSet resource. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationSets/{evaluation_set}`", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/evaluationSets/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}", +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationSet" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"list": { +"description": "Lists Evaluation Sets.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/evaluationSets", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "aiplatform.projects.locations.evaluationSets.list", +"parameterOrder": [ +"parent" +], +"parameters": { +"filter": { +"description": "Optional. Filter expression that matches a subset of the EvaluationSets to show. For field names both snake_case and camelCase are supported. For more information about filter syntax, see [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160).", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"orderBy": { +"description": "Optional. A comma-separated list of fields to order by, sorted in ascending order by default. Use `desc` after a field name for descending.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"pageSize": { +"description": "Optional. The maximum number of Evaluation Sets to return.", +"format": "int32", +"location": "query", +"type": "integer" +}, +"pageToken": { +"description": "Optional. A page token, received from a previous `ListEvaluationSets` call. Provide this to retrieve the subsequent page.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"parent": { +"description": "Required. The resource name of the Location from which to list the Evaluation Sets. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}`", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+parent}/evaluationSets", +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1ListEvaluationSetsResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"patch": { +"description": "Updates an Evaluation Set.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/evaluationSets/{evaluationSetsId}", +"httpMethod": "PATCH", +"id": "aiplatform.projects.locations.evaluationSets.patch", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Identifier. The resource name of the EvaluationSet. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationSets/{evaluation_set}`", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/evaluationSets/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"updateMask": { +"description": "Optional. The update mask applies to the resource. For the `FieldMask` definition, see google.protobuf.FieldMask.", +"format": "google-fieldmask", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}", +"request": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationSet" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationSet" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +} +} +}, "featureGroups": { "methods": { "create": { @@ -20319,7 +20793,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250825", +"revision": "20250902", "rootUrl": "https://aiplatform.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "CloudAiLargeModelsVisionGenerateVideoResponse": { @@ -22037,6 +22511,65 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1BigQueryRequestSet": { +"description": "The request set for the evaluation run.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1BigQueryRequestSet", +"properties": { +"candidateResponseColumns": { +"additionalProperties": { +"type": "string" +}, +"description": "Optional. Map of candidate name to candidate response column name. The column will be in evaluation_item.CandidateResponse format.", +"type": "object" +}, +"promptColumn": { +"description": "Optional. The name of the column that contains the requests to evaluate. This will be in evaluation_item.EvalPrompt format.", +"type": "string" +}, +"rubricsColumn": { +"description": "Optional. The name of the column that contains the rubrics. This will be in evaluation_rubric.RubricGroup format (cl/762595858).", +"type": "string" +}, +"samplingConfig": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1BigQueryRequestSetSamplingConfig", +"description": "Optional. The sampling config for the bigquery resource." +}, +"uri": { +"description": "Required. The URI of a BigQuery table. e.g. bq://projectId.bqDatasetId.bqTableId", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1BigQueryRequestSetSamplingConfig": { +"description": "The sampling config.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1BigQueryRequestSetSamplingConfig", +"properties": { +"samplingCount": { +"description": "Optional. The total number of logged data to import. If available data is less than the sampling count, all data will be imported. Default is 100.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, +"samplingDuration": { +"description": "Optional. How long to wait before sampling data from the BigQuery table. If not specified, defaults to 0.", +"format": "google-duration", +"type": "string" +}, +"samplingMethod": { +"description": "Optional. The sampling method to use.", +"enum": [ +"SAMPLING_METHOD_UNSPECIFIED", +"RANDOM" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unspecified sampling method.", +"Random sampling." +], +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1BigQuerySource": { "description": "The BigQuery location for the input content.", "id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1BigQuerySource", @@ -22303,6 +22836,12 @@ "properties": {}, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1CancelEvaluationRunRequest": { +"description": "Request message for EvaluationManagementService.CancelEvaluationRun.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1CancelEvaluationRunRequest", +"properties": {}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1CancelHyperparameterTuningJobRequest": { "description": "Request message for JobService.CancelHyperparameterTuningJob.", "id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1CancelHyperparameterTuningJobRequest", @@ -22388,13 +22927,13 @@ "Token generation stopped because the content contains forbidden terms.", "Token generation stopped for potentially containing prohibited content.", "Token generation stopped because the content potentially contains Sensitive Personally Identifiable Information (SPII).", -"The function call generated by the model is invalid.", +"The function call generated by the model is syntaxtically invalid (e.g. the function call generated is not parsable).", "The model response was blocked by Model Armor.", "Token generation stopped because generated images has safety violations.", "Image generation stopped because generated images has other prohibited content.", "Image generation stopped due to recitation.", "Image generation stopped because of other miscellaneous issue.", -"The tool call generated by the model is invalid." +"The function call generated by the model is semantically invalid (e.g. a function call is generated when function calling is not enabled or the function is not in the function declaration)." ], "readOnly": true, "type": "string" @@ -22431,6 +22970,60 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1CandidateResponse": { +"description": "Responses from model or agent.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1CandidateResponse", +"properties": { +"candidate": { +"description": "Required. The name of the candidate that produced the response.", +"type": "string" +}, +"text": { +"description": "Text response.", +"type": "string" +}, +"value": { +"description": "Fields and values that can be used to populate the response template.", +"type": "any" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1CandidateResult": { +"description": "Result for a single candidate.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1CandidateResult", +"properties": { +"additionalResults": { +"description": "Optional. Additional results for the metric.", +"type": "any" +}, +"candidate": { +"description": "Required. The candidate that is being evaluated. The value is the same as the candidate name in the EvaluationRequest.", +"type": "string" +}, +"explanation": { +"description": "Optional. The explanation for the metric.", +"type": "string" +}, +"metric": { +"description": "Required. The metric that was evaluated.", +"type": "string" +}, +"rubricVerdicts": { +"description": "Optional. The rubric verdicts for the metric.", +"items": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1RubricVerdict" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"score": { +"description": "Optional. The score for the metric.", +"format": "float", +"type": "number" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1CheckTrialEarlyStoppingStateMetatdata": { "description": "This message will be placed in the metadata field of a google.longrunning.Operation associated with a CheckTrialEarlyStoppingState request.", "id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1CheckTrialEarlyStoppingStateMetatdata", @@ -25817,6 +26410,639 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationItem": { +"description": "EvaluationItem is a single evaluation request or result. The content of an EvaluationItem is immutable - it cannot be updated once created. EvaluationItems can be deleted when no longer needed.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationItem", +"properties": { +"createTime": { +"description": "Output only. Timestamp when this item was created.", +"format": "google-datetime", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"displayName": { +"description": "Required. The display name of the EvaluationItem.", +"type": "string" +}, +"error": { +"$ref": "GoogleRpcStatus", +"description": "Output only. Error for the evaluation item.", +"readOnly": true +}, +"evaluationItemType": { +"description": "Required. The type of the EvaluationItem.", +"enum": [ +"EVALUATION_ITEM_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED", +"REQUEST", +"RESULT" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"The default value. This value is unused.", +"The EvaluationItem is a request to evaluate.", +"The EvaluationItem is the result of evaluation." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"evaluationRequest": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRequest", +"description": "The request to evaluate." +}, +"evaluationResponse": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationResult", +"description": "Output only. The response from evaluation.", +"readOnly": true +}, +"gcsUri": { +"description": "The GCS object where the request or response is stored.", +"type": "string" +}, +"labels": { +"additionalProperties": { +"type": "string" +}, +"description": "Optional. Labels for the EvaluationItem.", +"type": "object" +}, +"metadata": { +"description": "Optional. Metadata for the EvaluationItem.", +"type": "any" +}, +"name": { +"description": "Identifier. The resource name of the EvaluationItem. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationItems/{evaluation_item}`", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationPrompt": { +"description": "Prompt to be evaluated.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationPrompt", +"properties": { +"promptTemplateData": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationPromptPromptTemplateData", +"description": "Prompt template data." +}, +"text": { +"description": "Text prompt.", +"type": "string" +}, +"value": { +"description": "Fields and values that can be used to populate the prompt template.", +"type": "any" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationPromptPromptTemplateData": { +"description": "Message to hold a prompt template and the values to populate the template.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationPromptPromptTemplateData", +"properties": { +"values": { +"additionalProperties": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Content" +}, +"description": "The values for fields in the prompt template.", +"type": "object" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRequest": { +"description": "Single evaluation request.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRequest", +"properties": { +"candidateResponses": { +"description": "Optional. Responses from model under test and other baseline models for comparison.", +"items": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1CandidateResponse" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"goldenResponse": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1CandidateResponse", +"description": "Optional. The Ideal response or ground truth." +}, +"prompt": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationPrompt", +"description": "Required. The request/prompt to evaluate." +}, +"rubrics": { +"additionalProperties": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1RubricGroup" +}, +"description": "Optional. Named groups of rubrics associated with this prompt. The key is a user-defined name for the rubric group.", +"type": "object" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationResult": { +"description": "Evaluation result.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationResult", +"properties": { +"candidateResults": { +"description": "Optional. The results for the metric.", +"items": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1CandidateResult" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"evaluationRequest": { +"description": "Required. The request item that was evaluated. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationItems/{evaluation_item}", +"type": "string" +}, +"evaluationRun": { +"description": "Required. The evaluation run that was used to generate the result. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationRuns/{evaluation_run}", +"type": "string" +}, +"metadata": { +"description": "Optional. Metadata about the evaluation result.", +"type": "any" +}, +"metric": { +"description": "Required. The metric that was evaluated.", +"type": "string" +}, +"request": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRequest", +"description": "Required. The request that was evaluated." +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationResults": { +"description": "The results of the evaluation run.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationResults", +"properties": { +"evaluationSet": { +"description": "The evaluation set where item level results are stored.", +"type": "string" +}, +"summaryMetrics": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1SummaryMetrics", +"description": "Optional. The summary metrics for the evaluation run." +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRubricConfig": { +"description": "Configuration for a rubric group to be generated/saved for evaluation.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRubricConfig", +"properties": { +"predefinedRubricGenerationSpec": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunMetricPredefinedMetricSpec", +"description": "Dynamically generate rubrics using a predefined spec." +}, +"rubricGenerationSpec": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunMetricRubricGenerationSpec", +"description": "Dynamically generate rubrics using this specification." +}, +"rubricGroupKey": { +"description": "Required. The key used to save the generated rubrics. If a generation spec is provided, this key will be used for the name of the generated rubric group. Otherwise, this key will be used to look up the existing rubric group on the evaluation item. Note that if a rubric group key is specified on both a rubric config and an evaluation metric, the key from the metric will be used to select the rubrics for evaluation.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRun": { +"description": "EvaluationRun is a resource that represents a single evaluation run, which includes a set of prompts, model responses, evaluation configuration and the resulting metrics.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRun", +"properties": { +"completionTime": { +"description": "Output only. Time when the evaluation run was completed.", +"format": "google-datetime", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"createTime": { +"description": "Output only. Time when the evaluation run was created.", +"format": "google-datetime", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"dataSource": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunDataSource", +"description": "Required. The data source for the evaluation run." +}, +"displayName": { +"description": "Required. The display name of the Evaluation Run.", +"type": "string" +}, +"error": { +"$ref": "GoogleRpcStatus", +"description": "Output only. Only populated when the evaluation run's state is FAILED or CANCELLED.", +"readOnly": true +}, +"evaluationConfig": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunEvaluationConfig", +"description": "Required. The configuration used for the evaluation." +}, +"evaluationResults": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationResults", +"description": "Output only. The results of the evaluation run. Only populated when the evaluation run's state is SUCCEEDED.", +"readOnly": true +}, +"evaluationSetSnapshot": { +"description": "Output only. The specific evaluation set of the evaluation run. For runs with an evaluation set input, this will be that same set. For runs with BigQuery input, it's the sampled BigQuery dataset.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"inferenceConfigs": { +"additionalProperties": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunInferenceConfig" +}, +"description": "Optional. The candidate to inference config map for the evaluation run. The candidate can be up to 128 characters long and can consist of any UTF-8 characters.", +"type": "object" +}, +"labels": { +"additionalProperties": { +"type": "string" +}, +"description": "Optional. Labels for the evaluation run.", +"type": "object" +}, +"metadata": { +"description": "Optional. Metadata about the evaluation run, can be used by the caller to store additional tracking information about the evaluation run.", +"type": "any" +}, +"name": { +"description": "Identifier. The resource name of the EvaluationRun. This is a unique identifier. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationRuns/{evaluation_run}`", +"type": "string" +}, +"state": { +"description": "Output only. The state of the evaluation run.", +"enum": [ +"STATE_UNSPECIFIED", +"PENDING", +"RUNNING", +"SUCCEEDED", +"FAILED", +"CANCELLED", +"INFERENCE", +"GENERATING_RUBRICS" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unspecified state.", +"The evaluation run is pending.", +"The evaluation run is running.", +"The evaluation run has succeeded.", +"The evaluation run has failed.", +"The evaluation run has been cancelled.", +"The evaluation run is performing inference.", +"The evaluation run is performing rubric generation." +], +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunDataSource": { +"description": "The data source for the evaluation run.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunDataSource", +"properties": { +"bigqueryRequestSet": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1BigQueryRequestSet", +"description": "Evaluation data in bigquery." +}, +"evaluationSet": { +"description": "The EvaluationSet resource name. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationSets/{evaluation_set}`", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunEvaluationConfig": { +"description": "The Evalution configuration used for the evaluation run.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunEvaluationConfig", +"properties": { +"autoraterConfig": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunEvaluationConfigAutoraterConfig", +"description": "Optional. The autorater config for the evaluation run." +}, +"metrics": { +"description": "Required. The metrics to be calculated in the evaluation run.", +"items": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunMetric" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"outputConfig": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunEvaluationConfigOutputConfig", +"description": "Optional. The output config for the evaluation run." +}, +"promptTemplate": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunEvaluationConfigPromptTemplate", +"description": "The prompt template used for inference. The values for variables in the prompt template are defined in EvaluationItem.EvaluationPrompt.PromptTemplateData.values." +}, +"rubricConfigs": { +"description": "Optional. The rubric configs for the evaluation run. They are used to generate rubrics which can be used by rubric-based metrics. Multiple rubric configs can be specified for rubric generation but only one rubric config can be used for a rubric-based metric. If more than one rubric config is provided, the evaluation metric must specify a rubric group key. Note that if a generation spec is specified on both a rubric config and an evaluation metric, the rubrics generated for the metric will be used for evaluation.", +"items": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRubricConfig" +}, +"type": "array" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunEvaluationConfigAutoraterConfig": { +"description": "The autorater config used for the evaluation run.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunEvaluationConfigAutoraterConfig", +"properties": { +"autoraterModel": { +"description": "Optional. The fully qualified name of the publisher model or tuned autorater endpoint to use. Publisher model format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/publishers/*/models/*` Tuned model endpoint format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/endpoints/{endpoint}`", +"type": "string" +}, +"generationConfig": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1GenerationConfig", +"description": "Optional. Configuration options for model generation and outputs." +}, +"sampleCount": { +"description": "Optional. Number of samples for each instance in the dataset. If not specified, the default is 4. Minimum value is 1, maximum value is 32.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunEvaluationConfigOutputConfig": { +"description": "The output config for the evaluation run.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunEvaluationConfigOutputConfig", +"properties": { +"bigqueryDestination": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1BigQueryDestination", +"description": "BigQuery destination for evaluation output." +}, +"gcsDestination": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1GcsDestination", +"description": "Cloud Storage destination for evaluation output." +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunEvaluationConfigPromptTemplate": { +"description": "Prompt template used for inference.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunEvaluationConfigPromptTemplate", +"properties": { +"gcsUri": { +"description": "Prompt template stored in Cloud Storage. Format: \"gs://my-bucket/file-name.txt\".", +"type": "string" +}, +"promptTemplate": { +"description": "Inline prompt template. Template variables should be in the format \"{var_name}\". Example: \"Translate the following from {source_lang} to {target_lang}: {text}\"", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunInferenceConfig": { +"description": "An inference config used for model inference during the evaluation run.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunInferenceConfig", +"properties": { +"generationConfig": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1GenerationConfig", +"description": "Optional. Generation config." +}, +"model": { +"description": "Required. The fully qualified name of the publisher model or endpoint to use. Publisher model format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/publishers/*/models/*` Endpoint format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/endpoints/{endpoint}`", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunMetric": { +"description": "The metric used for evaluation runs.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunMetric", +"properties": { +"computationBasedMetricSpec": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunMetricComputationBasedMetricSpec", +"description": "Spec for a computation based metric." +}, +"llmBasedMetricSpec": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunMetricLLMBasedMetricSpec", +"description": "Spec for an LLM based metric." +}, +"metric": { +"description": "Required. The name of the metric.", +"type": "string" +}, +"predefinedMetricSpec": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunMetricPredefinedMetricSpec", +"description": "Spec for a pre-defined metric." +}, +"rubricBasedMetricSpec": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunMetricRubricBasedMetricSpec", +"description": "Spec for rubric based metric." +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunMetricComputationBasedMetricSpec": { +"description": "Specification for a computation based metric.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunMetricComputationBasedMetricSpec", +"properties": { +"parameters": { +"additionalProperties": { +"description": "Properties of the object.", +"type": "any" +}, +"description": "Optional. A map of parameters for the metric, e.g. {\"rouge_type\": \"rougeL\"}.", +"type": "object" +}, +"type": { +"description": "Required. The type of the computation based metric.", +"enum": [ +"COMPUTATION_BASED_METRIC_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED", +"EXACT_MATCH", +"BLEU", +"ROUGE" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unspecified computation based metric type.", +"Exact match metric.", +"BLEU metric.", +"ROUGE metric." +], +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunMetricLLMBasedMetricSpec": { +"description": "Specification for an LLM based metric.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunMetricLLMBasedMetricSpec", +"properties": { +"additionalConfig": { +"additionalProperties": { +"description": "Properties of the object.", +"type": "any" +}, +"description": "Optional. Optional additional configuration for the metric.", +"type": "object" +}, +"judgeAutoraterConfig": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunEvaluationConfigAutoraterConfig", +"description": "Optional. Optional configuration for the judge LLM (Autorater)." +}, +"metricPromptTemplate": { +"description": "Required. Template for the prompt sent to the judge model.", +"type": "string" +}, +"predefinedRubricGenerationSpec": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunMetricPredefinedMetricSpec", +"description": "Dynamically generate rubrics using a predefined spec." +}, +"rubricGenerationSpec": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunMetricRubricGenerationSpec", +"description": "Dynamically generate rubrics using this specification." +}, +"rubricGroupKey": { +"description": "Use a pre-defined group of rubrics associated with the input. Refers to a key in the rubric_groups map of EvaluationInstance.", +"type": "string" +}, +"systemInstruction": { +"description": "Optional. System instructions for the judge model.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunMetricPredefinedMetricSpec": { +"description": "Specification for a pre-defined metric.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunMetricPredefinedMetricSpec", +"properties": { +"metricSpecName": { +"description": "Required. The name of a pre-defined metric, such as \"instruction_following_v1\" or \"text_quality_v1\".", +"type": "string" +}, +"parameters": { +"additionalProperties": { +"description": "Properties of the object.", +"type": "any" +}, +"description": "Optional. The parameters needed to run the pre-defined metric.", +"type": "object" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunMetricRubricBasedMetricSpec": { +"description": "Specification for a metric that is based on rubrics.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunMetricRubricBasedMetricSpec", +"properties": { +"inlineRubrics": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunMetricRubricBasedMetricSpecRepeatedRubrics", +"description": "Use rubrics provided directly in the spec." +}, +"judgeAutoraterConfig": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunEvaluationConfigAutoraterConfig", +"description": "Optional. Optional configuration for the judge LLM (Autorater). The definition of AutoraterConfig needs to be provided." +}, +"metricPromptTemplate": { +"description": "Optional. Template for the prompt used by the judge model to evaluate against rubrics.", +"type": "string" +}, +"rubricGenerationSpec": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunMetricRubricGenerationSpec", +"description": "Dynamically generate rubrics for evaluation using this specification." +}, +"rubricGroupKey": { +"description": "Use a pre-defined group of rubrics associated with the input content. This refers to a key in the `rubric_groups` map of `RubricEnhancedContents`.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunMetricRubricBasedMetricSpecRepeatedRubrics": { +"description": "Defines a list of rubrics, used when providing rubrics inline.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunMetricRubricBasedMetricSpecRepeatedRubrics", +"properties": { +"rubrics": { +"description": "The list of rubrics.", +"items": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Rubric" +}, +"type": "array" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunMetricRubricGenerationSpec": { +"description": "Specification for how rubrics should be generated.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunMetricRubricGenerationSpec", +"properties": { +"modelConfig": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRunEvaluationConfigAutoraterConfig", +"description": "Optional. Configuration for the model used in rubric generation. Configs including sampling count and base model can be specified here. Flipping is not supported for rubric generation." +}, +"promptTemplate": { +"description": "Optional. Template for the prompt used to generate rubrics. The details should be updated based on the most-recent recipe requirements.", +"type": "string" +}, +"rubricContentType": { +"description": "Optional. The type of rubric content to be generated.", +"enum": [ +"RUBRIC_CONTENT_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED", +"PROPERTY", +"NL_QUESTION_ANSWER", +"PYTHON_CODE_ASSERTION" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"The content type to generate is not specified.", +"Generate rubrics based on properties.", +"Generate rubrics in an NL question answer format.", +"Generate rubrics in a unit test format." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"rubricTypeOntology": { +"description": "Optional. An optional, pre-defined list of allowed types for generated rubrics. If this field is provided, it implies `include_rubric_type` should be true, and the generated rubric types should be chosen from this ontology.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationSet": { +"description": "EvaluationSet is a collection of related EvaluationItems that are evaluated together.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationSet", +"properties": { +"createTime": { +"description": "Output only. Timestamp when this item was created.", +"format": "google-datetime", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"displayName": { +"description": "Required. The display name of the EvaluationSet.", +"type": "string" +}, +"evaluationItems": { +"description": "Required. The EvaluationItems that are part of this dataset.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"metadata": { +"description": "Optional. Metadata for the EvaluationSet.", +"type": "any" +}, +"name": { +"description": "Identifier. The resource name of the EvaluationSet. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/evaluationSets/{evaluation_set}`", +"type": "string" +}, +"updateTime": { +"description": "Output only. Timestamp when this item was last updated.", +"format": "google-datetime", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Event": { "description": "An edge describing the relationship between an Artifact and an Execution in a lineage graph.", "id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Event", @@ -29004,6 +30230,50 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1GenerateSyntheticDataRequest": { +"description": "Request message for DataFoundryService.GenerateSyntheticData.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1GenerateSyntheticDataRequest", +"properties": { +"count": { +"description": "Required. The number of synthetic examples to generate. For this stateless API, the count is limited to a small number.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, +"examples": { +"description": "Optional. A list of few-shot examples to guide the model's output style and format.", +"items": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1SyntheticExample" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"outputFieldSpecs": { +"description": "Required. The schema of the desired output, defined by a list of fields.", +"items": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1OutputFieldSpec" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"taskDescription": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1TaskDescriptionStrategy", +"description": "Generate data from a high-level task description." +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1GenerateSyntheticDataResponse": { +"description": "The response containing the generated data.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1GenerateSyntheticDataResponse", +"properties": { +"syntheticExamples": { +"description": "A list of generated synthetic examples.", +"items": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1SyntheticExample" +}, +"type": "array" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1GenerateVideoResponse": { "description": "Generate video response.", "id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1GenerateVideoResponse", @@ -30858,6 +32128,60 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1ListEvaluationItemsResponse": { +"description": "Response message for EvaluationManagementService.ListEvaluationItems.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1ListEvaluationItemsResponse", +"properties": { +"evaluationItems": { +"description": "List of EvaluationItems in the requested page.", +"items": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationItem" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"nextPageToken": { +"description": "A token to retrieve the next page of results.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1ListEvaluationRunsResponse": { +"description": "Response message for EvaluationManagementService.ListEvaluationRuns.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1ListEvaluationRunsResponse", +"properties": { +"evaluationRuns": { +"description": "List of EvaluationRuns in the requested page.", +"items": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationRun" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"nextPageToken": { +"description": "A token to retrieve the next page of results.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1ListEvaluationSetsResponse": { +"description": "Response message for EvaluationManagementService.ListEvaluationSets.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1ListEvaluationSetsResponse", +"properties": { +"evaluationSets": { +"description": "List of EvaluationSets in the requested page.", +"items": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1EvaluationSet" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"nextPageToken": { +"description": "A token to retrieve the next page of results.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1ListExecutionsResponse": { "description": "Response message for MetadataService.ListExecutions.", "id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1ListExecutionsResponse", @@ -31983,20 +33307,28 @@ false "description": "Result for a single metric on a single instance.", "id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1MetricResult", "properties": { +"error": { +"$ref": "GoogleRpcStatus", +"description": "Output only. The error status for the metric result.", +"readOnly": true +}, "explanation": { -"description": "The explanation for the metric result.", +"description": "Output only. The explanation for the metric result.", +"readOnly": true, "type": "string" }, "rubricVerdicts": { -"description": "For rubric-based metrics, the verdicts for each rubric.", +"description": "Output only. For rubric-based metrics, the verdicts for each rubric.", "items": { "$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1RubricVerdict" }, +"readOnly": true, "type": "array" }, "score": { -"description": "The score for the metric. Please refer to each metric's documentation for the meaning of the score.", +"description": "Output only. The score for the metric. Please refer to each metric's documentation for the meaning of the score.", "format": "float", +"readOnly": true, "type": "number" } }, @@ -34933,6 +36265,39 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1OutputFieldSpec": { +"description": "Defines a specification for a single output field.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1OutputFieldSpec", +"properties": { +"fieldName": { +"description": "Required. The name of the output field.", +"type": "string" +}, +"fieldType": { +"description": "Optional. The data type of the field. Defaults to CONTENT if not set.", +"enum": [ +"FIELD_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED", +"CONTENT", +"TEXT", +"IMAGE", +"AUDIO" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Field type is unspecified.", +"Arbitrary content field type.", +"Text field type.", +"Image field type.", +"Audio field type." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"guidance": { +"description": "Optional. Optional, but recommended. Additional guidance specific to this field to provide targeted instructions for the LLM to generate the content of a single output field. While the LLM can sometimes infer content from the field name, providing explicit guidance is preferred.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1PSCAutomationConfig": { "description": "PSC config that is used to automatically create PSC endpoints in the user projects.", "id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1PSCAutomationConfig", @@ -38241,6 +39606,13 @@ false "description": "Optional. Used to perform consistent read-modify-write updates. If not set, a blind \"overwrite\" update happens.", "type": "string" }, +"labels": { +"additionalProperties": { +"type": "string" +}, +"description": "Labels for the ReasoningEngine.", +"type": "object" +}, "name": { "description": "Identifier. The resource name of the ReasoningEngine. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/reasoningEngines/{reasoning_engine}`", "type": "string" @@ -45342,6 +46714,30 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1SummaryMetrics": { +"description": "The summary metrics for the evaluation run.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1SummaryMetrics", +"properties": { +"failedItems": { +"description": "Optional. The number of items that failed to be evaluated.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, +"metrics": { +"additionalProperties": { +"type": "any" +}, +"description": "Optional. Map of metric name to metric value.", +"type": "object" +}, +"totalItems": { +"description": "Optional. The total number of items that were evaluated.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1SupervisedHyperParameters": { "description": "Hyperparameters for SFT.", "id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1SupervisedHyperParameters", @@ -45593,6 +46989,35 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1SyntheticExample": { +"description": "Represents a single synthetic example, composed of multiple fields. Used for providing few-shot examples in the request and for returning generated examples in the response.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1SyntheticExample", +"properties": { +"fields": { +"description": "Required. A list of fields that constitute an example.", +"items": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1SyntheticField" +}, +"type": "array" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1SyntheticField": { +"description": "Represents a single named field within a SyntheticExample.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1SyntheticField", +"properties": { +"content": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Content", +"description": "Required. The content of the field." +}, +"fieldName": { +"description": "Optional. The name of the field.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1TFRecordDestination": { "description": "The storage details for TFRecord output content.", "id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1TFRecordDestination", @@ -45604,6 +47029,17 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1TaskDescriptionStrategy": { +"description": "Defines a generation strategy based on a high-level task description.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1TaskDescriptionStrategy", +"properties": { +"taskDescription": { +"description": "Required. A high-level description of the synthetic data to be generated.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Tensor": { "description": "A tensor value type.", "id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Tensor", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/aiplatform.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/aiplatform.v1beta1.json index b001d7c722e..ebba728d36c 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/aiplatform.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/aiplatform.v1beta1.json @@ -20231,6 +20231,11 @@ "location": "query", "type": "string" }, +"orderBy": { +"description": "Optional. The standard list order by string. If not specified, the default order is `create_time desc`. If specified, the default sorting order of provided fields is ascending. More detail in [AIP-132](https://google.aip.dev/132). Supported fields: * `create_time` * `update_time`", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, "pageSize": { "description": "Optional. The standard list page size.", "format": "int32", @@ -25695,6 +25700,11 @@ "location": "query", "type": "string" }, +"orderBy": { +"description": "Optional. The standard list order by string. If not specified, the default order is `create_time desc`. If specified, the default sorting order of provided fields is ascending. More detail in [AIP-132](https://google.aip.dev/132). Supported fields: * `create_time` * `update_time`", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, "pageSize": { "description": "Optional. The standard list page size.", "format": "int32", @@ -26026,7 +26036,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250825", +"revision": "20250902", "rootUrl": "https://aiplatform.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "CloudAiLargeModelsVisionGenerateVideoResponse": { @@ -28431,13 +28441,13 @@ "Token generation stopped because the content contains forbidden terms.", "Token generation stopped for potentially containing prohibited content.", "Token generation stopped because the content potentially contains Sensitive Personally Identifiable Information (SPII).", -"The function call generated by the model is invalid.", +"The function call generated by the model is syntaxtically invalid (e.g. the function call generated is not parsable).", "The model response was blocked by Model Armor.", "Token generation stopped because generated images has safety violations.", "Image generation stopped because generated images has other prohibited content.", "Image generation stopped due to recitation.", "Image generation stopped because of other miscellaneous issue.", -"The tool call generated by the model is invalid." +"The function call generated by the model is semantically invalid (e.g. a function call is generated when function calling is not enabled or the function is not in the function declaration)." ], "readOnly": true, "type": "string" @@ -31109,6 +31119,10 @@ "$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1DedicatedResources", "description": "A description of resources that are dedicated to the DeployedModel, and that need a higher degree of manual configuration." }, +"disableContainerLogging": { +"description": "For custom-trained Models and AutoML Tabular Models, the container of the DeployedModel instances will send `stderr` and `stdout` streams to Cloud Logging by default. Please note that the logs incur cost, which are subject to [Cloud Logging pricing](https://cloud.google.com/logging/pricing). User can disable container logging by setting this flag to true.", +"type": "boolean" +}, "disableExplanations": { "description": "If true, deploy the model without explainable feature, regardless the existence of Model.explanation_spec or explanation_spec.", "type": "boolean" @@ -40634,7 +40648,7 @@ false "type": "string" }, "expireTime": { -"description": "Optional. Timestamp of when this resource is considered expired. This is *always* provided on output, regardless of what `expiration` was sent on input.", +"description": "Optional. Timestamp of when this resource is considered expired. This is *always* provided on output when `expiration` is set on input, regardless of whether `expire_time` or `ttl` was provided.", "format": "google-datetime", "type": "string" }, @@ -41011,20 +41025,28 @@ false "description": "Result for a single metric on a single instance.", "id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1MetricResult", "properties": { +"error": { +"$ref": "GoogleRpcStatus", +"description": "Output only. The error status for the metric result.", +"readOnly": true +}, "explanation": { -"description": "The explanation for the metric result.", +"description": "Output only. The explanation for the metric result.", +"readOnly": true, "type": "string" }, "rubricVerdicts": { -"description": "For rubric-based metrics, the verdicts for each rubric.", +"description": "Output only. For rubric-based metrics, the verdicts for each rubric.", "items": { "$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1RubricVerdict" }, +"readOnly": true, "type": "array" }, "score": { -"description": "The score for the metric. Please refer to each metric's documentation for the meaning of the score.", +"description": "Output only. The score for the metric. Please refer to each metric's documentation for the meaning of the score.", "format": "float", +"readOnly": true, "type": "number" } }, @@ -46378,6 +46400,10 @@ false "$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1EvaluationConfig", "description": "Optional. Evaluation Config for Preference Optimization Job." }, +"exportLastCheckpointOnly": { +"description": "Optional. If set to true, disable intermediate checkpoints for Preference Optimization and only the last checkpoint will be exported. Otherwise, enable intermediate checkpoints for Preference Optimization. Default is false.", +"type": "boolean" +}, "hyperParameters": { "$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1PreferenceOptimizationHyperParameters", "description": "Optional. Hyperparameters for Preference Optimization." @@ -48834,6 +48860,13 @@ false "description": "Optional. Used to perform consistent read-modify-write updates. If not set, a blind \"overwrite\" update happens.", "type": "string" }, +"labels": { +"additionalProperties": { +"type": "string" +}, +"description": "Labels for the ReasoningEngine.", +"type": "object" +}, "name": { "description": "Identifier. The resource name of the ReasoningEngine. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/reasoningEngines/{reasoning_engine}`", "type": "string" @@ -50507,11 +50540,6 @@ false "description": "Required. The display name of the SandboxEnvironment.", "type": "string" }, -"metadata": { -"description": "Output only. Additional information about the SandboxEnvironment.", -"readOnly": true, -"type": "any" -}, "name": { "description": "Identifier. The name of the SandboxEnvironment.", "type": "string" @@ -50579,20 +50607,6 @@ false ], "type": "string" }, -"dependencies": { -"description": "Optional. The additional dependencies to install in the code execution environment. For example, \"pandas==2.2.3\".", -"items": { -"type": "string" -}, -"type": "array" -}, -"env": { -"description": "Optional. The environment variables to set in the code execution environment.", -"items": { -"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1EnvVar" -}, -"type": "array" -}, "machineConfig": { "description": "The machine config of the code execution environment.", "enum": [ @@ -59992,12 +60006,14 @@ false "enum": [ "TUNING_TASK_UNSPECIFIED", "TUNING_TASK_I2V", -"TUNING_TASK_T2V" +"TUNING_TASK_T2V", +"TUNING_TASK_R2V" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Default value. This value is unused.", "Tuning task for image to video.", -"Tuning task for text to video." +"Tuning task for text to video.", +"Tuning task for reference to video." ], "type": "string" } diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/alloydb.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/alloydb.v1.json index a73a3c75e8b..70b968e6425 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/alloydb.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/alloydb.v1.json @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -1622,7 +1622,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250820", +"revision": "20250904", "rootUrl": "https://alloydb.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuthorizedNetwork": { @@ -4252,7 +4252,7 @@ false "type": "object" }, "StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainDatabaseResourceFeed": { -"description": "DatabaseResourceFeed is the top level proto to be used to ingest different database resource level events into Condor platform. Next ID: 11", +"description": "DatabaseResourceFeed is the top level proto to be used to ingest different database resource level events into Condor platform. Next ID: 12", "id": "StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainDatabaseResourceFeed", "properties": { "backupdrMetadata": { @@ -4263,6 +4263,10 @@ false "$ref": "StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainConfigBasedSignalData", "description": "Config based signal data is used to ingest signals that are generated based on the configuration of the database resource." }, +"databaseResourceSignalData": { +"$ref": "StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainDatabaseResourceSignalData", +"description": "Database resource signal data is used to ingest signals from database resource signal feeds." +}, "feedTimestamp": { "description": "Required. Timestamp when feed is generated.", "format": "google-datetime", @@ -4802,7 +4806,7 @@ false "type": "object" }, "StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainDatabaseResourceMetadata": { -"description": "Common model for database resource instance metadata. Next ID: 26", +"description": "Common model for database resource instance metadata. Next ID: 27", "id": "StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainDatabaseResourceMetadata", "properties": { "availabilityConfiguration": { @@ -4855,12 +4859,14 @@ false "enum": [ "EDITION_UNSPECIFIED", "EDITION_ENTERPRISE", -"EDITION_ENTERPRISE_PLUS" +"EDITION_ENTERPRISE_PLUS", +"EDITION_STANDARD" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Default, to make it consistent with instance edition enum.", "Represents the enterprise edition.", -"Represents the enterprise plus edition." +"Represents the enterprise plus edition.", +"Represents the standard edition." ], "type": "string" }, @@ -5005,6 +5011,10 @@ false "userLabelSet": { "$ref": "StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainUserLabels", "description": "User-provided labels associated with the resource" +}, +"zone": { +"description": "The resource zone. This is only applicable for zonal resources and will be empty for regional and multi-regional resources.", +"type": "string" } }, "type": "object" @@ -5381,6 +5391,67 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainDatabaseResourceSignalData": { +"description": "Database resource signal data. This is used to send signals to Condor which are based on the DB/Instance/Fleet level configurations. These will be used to send signals for all inventory types. Next ID: 7", +"id": "StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainDatabaseResourceSignalData", +"properties": { +"fullResourceName": { +"description": "Required. Full Resource name of the source resource.", +"type": "string" +}, +"lastRefreshTime": { +"description": "Required. Last time signal was refreshed", +"format": "google-datetime", +"type": "string" +}, +"resourceId": { +"$ref": "StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainDatabaseResourceId", +"description": "Database resource id." +}, +"signalBoolValue": { +"description": "Signal data for boolean signals.", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"signalState": { +"description": "Required. Output only. Signal state of the signal", +"enum": [ +"SIGNAL_STATE_UNSPECIFIED", +"ACTIVE", +"INACTIVE", +"DISMISSED" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unspecified signal state.", +"Signal is active and requires attention.", +"Signal is inactive and does not require attention.", +"Signal is dismissed by the user and should not be shown to the user again." +], +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"signalType": { +"description": "Required. Signal type of the signal", +"enum": [ +"SIGNAL_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED", +"SIGNAL_TYPE_OUTDATED_MINOR_VERSION", +"SIGNAL_TYPE_DATABASE_AUDITING_DISABLED", +"SIGNAL_TYPE_NO_ROOT_PASSWORD", +"SIGNAL_TYPE_EXPOSED_TO_PUBLIC_ACCESS", +"SIGNAL_TYPE_UNENCRYPTED_CONNECTIONS" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unspecified signal type.", +"Outdated Minor Version", +"Represents database auditing is disabled.", +"Represents if a database has a password configured for the root account or not.", +"Represents if a resource is exposed to public access.", +"Represents if a resources requires all incoming connections to use SSL or not." +], +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainEntitlement": { "description": "Proto representing the access that a user has to a specific feature/service. NextId: 3.", "id": "StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainEntitlement", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/alloydb.v1alpha.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/alloydb.v1alpha.json index b1d01ed4b60..afcf52ebc7f 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/alloydb.v1alpha.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/alloydb.v1alpha.json @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -1622,7 +1622,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250820", +"revision": "20250904", "rootUrl": "https://alloydb.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuthorizedNetwork": { @@ -4420,7 +4420,7 @@ false "type": "object" }, "StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainDatabaseResourceFeed": { -"description": "DatabaseResourceFeed is the top level proto to be used to ingest different database resource level events into Condor platform. Next ID: 11", +"description": "DatabaseResourceFeed is the top level proto to be used to ingest different database resource level events into Condor platform. Next ID: 12", "id": "StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainDatabaseResourceFeed", "properties": { "backupdrMetadata": { @@ -4431,6 +4431,10 @@ false "$ref": "StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainConfigBasedSignalData", "description": "Config based signal data is used to ingest signals that are generated based on the configuration of the database resource." }, +"databaseResourceSignalData": { +"$ref": "StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainDatabaseResourceSignalData", +"description": "Database resource signal data is used to ingest signals from database resource signal feeds." +}, "feedTimestamp": { "description": "Required. Timestamp when feed is generated.", "format": "google-datetime", @@ -4970,7 +4974,7 @@ false "type": "object" }, "StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainDatabaseResourceMetadata": { -"description": "Common model for database resource instance metadata. Next ID: 26", +"description": "Common model for database resource instance metadata. Next ID: 27", "id": "StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainDatabaseResourceMetadata", "properties": { "availabilityConfiguration": { @@ -5023,12 +5027,14 @@ false "enum": [ "EDITION_UNSPECIFIED", "EDITION_ENTERPRISE", -"EDITION_ENTERPRISE_PLUS" +"EDITION_ENTERPRISE_PLUS", +"EDITION_STANDARD" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Default, to make it consistent with instance edition enum.", "Represents the enterprise edition.", -"Represents the enterprise plus edition." +"Represents the enterprise plus edition.", +"Represents the standard edition." ], "type": "string" }, @@ -5173,6 +5179,10 @@ false "userLabelSet": { "$ref": "StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainUserLabels", "description": "User-provided labels associated with the resource" +}, +"zone": { +"description": "The resource zone. This is only applicable for zonal resources and will be empty for regional and multi-regional resources.", +"type": "string" } }, "type": "object" @@ -5549,6 +5559,67 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainDatabaseResourceSignalData": { +"description": "Database resource signal data. This is used to send signals to Condor which are based on the DB/Instance/Fleet level configurations. These will be used to send signals for all inventory types. Next ID: 7", +"id": "StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainDatabaseResourceSignalData", +"properties": { +"fullResourceName": { +"description": "Required. Full Resource name of the source resource.", +"type": "string" +}, +"lastRefreshTime": { +"description": "Required. Last time signal was refreshed", +"format": "google-datetime", +"type": "string" +}, +"resourceId": { +"$ref": "StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainDatabaseResourceId", +"description": "Database resource id." +}, +"signalBoolValue": { +"description": "Signal data for boolean signals.", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"signalState": { +"description": "Required. Output only. Signal state of the signal", +"enum": [ +"SIGNAL_STATE_UNSPECIFIED", +"ACTIVE", +"INACTIVE", +"DISMISSED" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unspecified signal state.", +"Signal is active and requires attention.", +"Signal is inactive and does not require attention.", +"Signal is dismissed by the user and should not be shown to the user again." +], +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"signalType": { +"description": "Required. Signal type of the signal", +"enum": [ +"SIGNAL_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED", +"SIGNAL_TYPE_OUTDATED_MINOR_VERSION", +"SIGNAL_TYPE_DATABASE_AUDITING_DISABLED", +"SIGNAL_TYPE_NO_ROOT_PASSWORD", +"SIGNAL_TYPE_EXPOSED_TO_PUBLIC_ACCESS", +"SIGNAL_TYPE_UNENCRYPTED_CONNECTIONS" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unspecified signal type.", +"Outdated Minor Version", +"Represents database auditing is disabled.", +"Represents if a database has a password configured for the root account or not.", +"Represents if a resource is exposed to public access.", +"Represents if a resources requires all incoming connections to use SSL or not." +], +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainEntitlement": { "description": "Proto representing the access that a user has to a specific feature/service. NextId: 3.", "id": "StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainEntitlement", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/alloydb.v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/alloydb.v1beta.json index b9d17c4c769..3b34e4ee837 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/alloydb.v1beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/alloydb.v1beta.json @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -1619,7 +1619,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250820", +"revision": "20250904", "rootUrl": "https://alloydb.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuthorizedNetwork": { @@ -4396,7 +4396,7 @@ false "type": "object" }, "StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainDatabaseResourceFeed": { -"description": "DatabaseResourceFeed is the top level proto to be used to ingest different database resource level events into Condor platform. Next ID: 11", +"description": "DatabaseResourceFeed is the top level proto to be used to ingest different database resource level events into Condor platform. Next ID: 12", "id": "StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainDatabaseResourceFeed", "properties": { "backupdrMetadata": { @@ -4407,6 +4407,10 @@ false "$ref": "StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainConfigBasedSignalData", "description": "Config based signal data is used to ingest signals that are generated based on the configuration of the database resource." }, +"databaseResourceSignalData": { +"$ref": "StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainDatabaseResourceSignalData", +"description": "Database resource signal data is used to ingest signals from database resource signal feeds." +}, "feedTimestamp": { "description": "Required. Timestamp when feed is generated.", "format": "google-datetime", @@ -4946,7 +4950,7 @@ false "type": "object" }, "StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainDatabaseResourceMetadata": { -"description": "Common model for database resource instance metadata. Next ID: 26", +"description": "Common model for database resource instance metadata. Next ID: 27", "id": "StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainDatabaseResourceMetadata", "properties": { "availabilityConfiguration": { @@ -4999,12 +5003,14 @@ false "enum": [ "EDITION_UNSPECIFIED", "EDITION_ENTERPRISE", -"EDITION_ENTERPRISE_PLUS" +"EDITION_ENTERPRISE_PLUS", +"EDITION_STANDARD" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Default, to make it consistent with instance edition enum.", "Represents the enterprise edition.", -"Represents the enterprise plus edition." +"Represents the enterprise plus edition.", +"Represents the standard edition." ], "type": "string" }, @@ -5149,6 +5155,10 @@ false "userLabelSet": { "$ref": "StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainUserLabels", "description": "User-provided labels associated with the resource" +}, +"zone": { +"description": "The resource zone. This is only applicable for zonal resources and will be empty for regional and multi-regional resources.", +"type": "string" } }, "type": "object" @@ -5525,6 +5535,67 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainDatabaseResourceSignalData": { +"description": "Database resource signal data. This is used to send signals to Condor which are based on the DB/Instance/Fleet level configurations. These will be used to send signals for all inventory types. Next ID: 7", +"id": "StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainDatabaseResourceSignalData", +"properties": { +"fullResourceName": { +"description": "Required. Full Resource name of the source resource.", +"type": "string" +}, +"lastRefreshTime": { +"description": "Required. Last time signal was refreshed", +"format": "google-datetime", +"type": "string" +}, +"resourceId": { +"$ref": "StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainDatabaseResourceId", +"description": "Database resource id." +}, +"signalBoolValue": { +"description": "Signal data for boolean signals.", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"signalState": { +"description": "Required. Output only. Signal state of the signal", +"enum": [ +"SIGNAL_STATE_UNSPECIFIED", +"ACTIVE", +"INACTIVE", +"DISMISSED" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unspecified signal state.", +"Signal is active and requires attention.", +"Signal is inactive and does not require attention.", +"Signal is dismissed by the user and should not be shown to the user again." +], +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"signalType": { +"description": "Required. Signal type of the signal", +"enum": [ +"SIGNAL_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED", +"SIGNAL_TYPE_OUTDATED_MINOR_VERSION", +"SIGNAL_TYPE_DATABASE_AUDITING_DISABLED", +"SIGNAL_TYPE_NO_ROOT_PASSWORD", +"SIGNAL_TYPE_EXPOSED_TO_PUBLIC_ACCESS", +"SIGNAL_TYPE_UNENCRYPTED_CONNECTIONS" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unspecified signal type.", +"Outdated Minor Version", +"Represents database auditing is disabled.", +"Represents if a database has a password configured for the root account or not.", +"Represents if a resource is exposed to public access.", +"Represents if a resources requires all incoming connections to use SSL or not." +], +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainEntitlement": { "description": "Proto representing the access that a user has to a specific feature/service. NextId: 3.", "id": "StorageDatabasecenterPartnerapiV1mainEntitlement", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/analyticshub.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/analyticshub.v1.json index 4367aeb7eea..845647c5df1 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/analyticshub.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/analyticshub.v1.json @@ -1247,7 +1247,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250807", +"revision": "20250901", "rootUrl": "https://analyticshub.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "ApproveQueryTemplateRequest": { @@ -1358,6 +1358,21 @@ "description": "Optional. Resource name of the dataset source for this listing. e.g. `projects/myproject/datasets/123`", "type": "string" }, +"effectiveReplicas": { +"description": "Output only. Server-owned effective state of replicas. Contains both primary and secondary replicas. Each replica includes a system-computed (output-only) state and primary designation.", +"items": { +"$ref": "Replica" +}, +"readOnly": true, +"type": "array" +}, +"replicaLocations": { +"description": "Optional. A list of regions where the publisher has created shared dataset replicas.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, "restrictedExportPolicy": { "$ref": "RestrictedExportPolicy", "description": "Optional. If set, restricted export policy will be propagated and enforced on the linked dataset." @@ -1585,6 +1600,13 @@ "location": { "description": "Required. The geographic location where the dataset should reside. See https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/locations for supported locations.", "type": "string" +}, +"replicaLocations": { +"description": "Optional. The geographic locations where the dataset should be replicated. See [BigQuery locations](https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/locations) for supported locations.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" } }, "type": "object" @@ -2438,6 +2460,46 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"Replica": { +"description": "Represents the state of a replica of a shared dataset. It includes the geographic location of the replica and system-computed, output-only fields indicating its replication state and whether it is the primary replica.", +"id": "Replica", +"properties": { +"location": { +"description": "Output only. The geographic location where the replica resides. See [BigQuery locations](https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/locations) for supported locations. Eg. \"us-central1\".", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"primaryState": { +"description": "Output only. Indicates that this replica is the primary replica.", +"enum": [ +"PRIMARY_STATE_UNSPECIFIED", +"PRIMARY_REPLICA" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Default value. This value is unused.", +"The replica is the primary replica." +], +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"replicaState": { +"description": "Output only. Assigned by Analytics Hub based on real BigQuery replication state.", +"enum": [ +"REPLICA_STATE_UNSPECIFIED", +"READY_TO_USE", +"UNAVAILABLE" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Default value. This value is unused.", +"The replica is backfilled and ready to use.", +"The replica is unavailable, does not exist, or has not been backfilled yet." +], +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "RestrictedExportConfig": { "description": "Restricted export config, used to configure restricted export on linked dataset.", "id": "RestrictedExportConfig", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/analyticshub.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/analyticshub.v1beta1.json index d63847725a7..2677d9ca625 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/analyticshub.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/analyticshub.v1beta1.json @@ -695,7 +695,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250623", +"revision": "20250901", "rootUrl": "https://analyticshub.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuditConfig": { @@ -871,6 +871,13 @@ "location": { "description": "Required. The geographic location where the dataset should reside. See https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/locations for supported locations.", "type": "string" +}, +"replicaLocations": { +"description": "Optional. The geographic locations where the dataset should be replicated. See [BigQuery locations](https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/locations) for supported locations.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" } }, "type": "object" diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/androidmanagement.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/androidmanagement.v1.json index 45625eb0755..fbadf698202 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/androidmanagement.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/androidmanagement.v1.json @@ -1260,7 +1260,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250829", +"revision": "20250909", "rootUrl": "https://androidmanagement.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AdbShellCommandEvent": { @@ -3049,7 +3049,7 @@ "type": "array" }, "appliedPasswordPolicies": { -"description": "The password requirements currently applied to the device. The applied requirements may be slightly different from those specified in passwordPolicies in some cases. fieldPath is set based on passwordPolicies.", +"description": "The password requirements currently applied to the device. This field exists because the applied requirements may be slightly different from those specified in passwordPolicies in some cases. Note that this field does not provide information about password compliance. For non-compliance information, see nonComplianceDetails. NonComplianceDetail.fieldPath, is set based on passwordPolicies, not based on this field.", "items": { "$ref": "PasswordRequirements" }, @@ -4161,7 +4161,7 @@ false "type": "string" }, "serialNumber": { -"description": "The device serial number.", +"description": "The device serial number. However, for personally-owned devices running Android 12 and above, this is the same as the enterpriseSpecificId.", "type": "string" }, "skinShutdownTemperatures": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/androidpublisher.v3.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/androidpublisher.v3.json index 18f019fcb7c..a2233540634 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/androidpublisher.v3.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/androidpublisher.v3.json @@ -4985,6 +4985,40 @@ }, "subscriptionsv2": { "methods": { +"cancel": { +"description": "Cancel a subscription purchase for the user.", +"flatPath": "androidpublisher/v3/applications/{packageName}/purchases/subscriptionsv2/tokens/{token}:cancel", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "androidpublisher.purchases.subscriptionsv2.cancel", +"parameterOrder": [ +"packageName", +"token" +], +"parameters": { +"packageName": { +"description": "Required. The package of the application for which this subscription was purchased (for example, 'com.some.thing').", +"location": "path", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"token": { +"description": "Required. The token provided to the user's device when the subscription was purchased.", +"location": "path", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "androidpublisher/v3/applications/{packageName}/purchases/subscriptionsv2/tokens/{token}:cancel", +"request": { +"$ref": "CancelSubscriptionPurchaseRequest" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "CancelSubscriptionPurchaseResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/androidpublisher" +] +}, "get": { "description": "Get metadata about a subscription", "flatPath": "androidpublisher/v3/applications/{packageName}/purchases/subscriptionsv2/tokens/{token}", @@ -5521,7 +5555,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250828", +"revision": "20250904", "rootUrl": "https://androidpublisher.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Abi": { @@ -6174,6 +6208,10 @@ "$ref": "SubscriptionItemPriceChangeDetails", "description": "The information of the last price change for the item since subscription signup." }, +"priceStepUpConsentDetails": { +"$ref": "PriceStepUpConsentDetails", +"description": "The information of the latest price step-up consent." +}, "recurringPrice": { "$ref": "Money", "description": "The current recurring price of the auto renewing plan. Note that the price does not take into account discounts and does not include taxes for tax-exclusive pricing, please call orders.get API instead if transaction details are needed." @@ -6736,6 +6774,23 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"CancelSubscriptionPurchaseRequest": { +"description": "Request for the purchases.subscriptionsv2.cancel API.", +"id": "CancelSubscriptionPurchaseRequest", +"properties": { +"cancellationContext": { +"$ref": "CancellationContext", +"description": "Required. Additional details around the subscription revocation." +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"CancelSubscriptionPurchaseResponse": { +"description": "Response for the purchases.subscriptionsv2.cancel API.", +"id": "CancelSubscriptionPurchaseResponse", +"properties": {}, +"type": "object" +}, "CancelSurveyResult": { "description": "Result of the cancel survey when the subscription was canceled by the user.", "id": "CancelSurveyResult", @@ -6790,6 +6845,27 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"CancellationContext": { +"description": "Cancellation context of the purchases.subscriptionsv2.cancel API.", +"id": "CancellationContext", +"properties": { +"cancellationType": { +"description": "Required. The type of cancellation for the purchased subscription.", +"enum": [ +"CANCELLATION_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED", +"USER_REQUESTED_STOP_RENEWALS", +"DEVELOPER_REQUESTED_STOP_PAYMENTS" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Cancellation type unspecified.", +"Cancellation requested by the user, and the subscription can be restored. It only stops the subscription's next renewal. For an installment subscription, users still need to finish the commitment period. For more details on renewals and payments, see https://developer.android.com/google/play/billing/subscriptions#installments", +"Cancellation requested by the developer, and the subscription cannot be restored. It stops the subscription's next payment. For an installment subscription, users will not need to pay the next payment and finish the commitment period. For more details on renewals and payments, see https://developer.android.com/google/play/billing/subscriptions#installments" +], +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "CancellationEvent": { "description": "Details of when the order was canceled.", "id": "CancellationEvent", @@ -9831,6 +9907,39 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"PriceStepUpConsentDetails": { +"description": "Information related to a price step-up that requires user consent.", +"id": "PriceStepUpConsentDetails", +"properties": { +"consentDeadlineTime": { +"description": "The deadline by which the user must provide consent. If consent is not provided by this time, the subscription will be canceled.", +"format": "google-datetime", +"type": "string" +}, +"newPrice": { +"$ref": "Money", +"description": "The new price which requires user consent." +}, +"state": { +"description": "Output only. The state of the price step-up consent.", +"enum": [ +"CONSENT_STATE_UNSPECIFIED", +"PENDING", +"CONFIRMED", +"COMPLETED" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unspecified consent state.", +"The user has not yet provided consent.", +"The user has consented, and the new price is waiting to take effect.", +"The user has consented, and the new price has taken effect." +], +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "ProcessedEvent": { "description": "Details of when the order was processed.", "id": "ProcessedEvent", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/apigee.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/apigee.v1.json index addcf057ae2..ab38b613ba4 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/apigee.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/apigee.v1.json @@ -9592,6 +9592,163 @@ } } }, +"securityFeedback": { +"methods": { +"create": { +"description": "Creates a new report containing customer feedback.", +"flatPath": "v1/organizations/{organizationsId}/securityFeedback", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "apigee.organizations.securityFeedback.create", +"parameterOrder": [ +"parent" +], +"parameters": { +"parent": { +"description": "Required. Name of the organization. Use the following structure in your request: `organizations/{org}`.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^organizations/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"securityFeedbackId": { +"description": "Optional. The id for this feedback report. If not provided, it will be set to a system-generated UUID.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+parent}/securityFeedback", +"request": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudApigeeV1SecurityFeedback" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudApigeeV1SecurityFeedback" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"delete": { +"description": "Deletes a specific feedback report. Used for \"undo\" of a feedback submission.", +"flatPath": "v1/organizations/{organizationsId}/securityFeedback/{securityFeedbackId}", +"httpMethod": "DELETE", +"id": "apigee.organizations.securityFeedback.delete", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. Name of the SecurityFeedback to delete. Use the following structure in your request: `organizations/{org}/securityFeedback/{feedback_id}`", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^organizations/[^/]+/securityFeedback/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}", +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleProtobufEmpty" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"get": { +"description": "Gets a specific customer feedback report.", +"flatPath": "v1/organizations/{organizationsId}/securityFeedback/{securityFeedbackId}", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "apigee.organizations.securityFeedback.get", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. Name of the SecurityFeedback. Format: `organizations/{org}/securityFeedback/{feedback_id}` Example: organizations/apigee-organization-name/securityFeedback/feedback-id", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^organizations/[^/]+/securityFeedback/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}", +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudApigeeV1SecurityFeedback" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"list": { +"description": "Lists all feedback reports which have already been submitted.", +"flatPath": "v1/organizations/{organizationsId}/securityFeedback", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "apigee.organizations.securityFeedback.list", +"parameterOrder": [ +"parent" +], +"parameters": { +"pageSize": { +"description": "Optional. The maximum number of feedback reports to return. The service may return fewer than this value. LINT.IfChange(documented_page_size_limits) If unspecified, at most 10 feedback reports will be returned. The maximum value is 100; values above 100 will be coerced to 100. LINT.ThenChange( //depot/google3/edge/sense/boq/service/v1/securityfeedback/securityfeedback_rpc.go:page_size_limits )", +"format": "int32", +"location": "query", +"type": "integer" +}, +"pageToken": { +"description": "Optional. A page token, received from a previous `ListSecurityFeedback` call. Provide this to retrieve the subsequent page. When paginating, all other parameters provided to `ListSecurityFeedback` must match the call that provided the page token.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"parent": { +"description": "Required. Name of the organization. Format: `organizations/{org}`. Example: organizations/apigee-organization-name/securityFeedback", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^organizations/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+parent}/securityFeedback", +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudApigeeV1ListSecurityFeedbackResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"patch": { +"description": "Updates a specific feedback report.", +"flatPath": "v1/organizations/{organizationsId}/securityFeedback/{securityFeedbackId}", +"httpMethod": "PATCH", +"id": "apigee.organizations.securityFeedback.patch", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Output only. Identifier. The feedback name is intended to be a system-generated uuid.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^organizations/[^/]+/securityFeedback/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"updateMask": { +"description": "Optional. The list of fields to update.", +"format": "google-fieldmask", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}", +"request": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudApigeeV1SecurityFeedback" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudApigeeV1SecurityFeedback" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +} +} +}, "securityMonitoringConditions": { "methods": { "create": { @@ -11127,7 +11284,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250808", +"revision": "20250908", "rootUrl": "https://apigee.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "EdgeConfigstoreBundleBadBundle": { @@ -11316,7 +11473,7 @@ "properties": { "adjustment": { "$ref": "GoogleTypeMoney", -"description": "* A positive value of `adjustment` means that that the API provider wants to adjust the balance for an under-charged developer i.e. the balance of the developer will decrease. * A negative value of `adjustment` means that that the API provider wants to adjust the balance for an over-charged developer i.e. the balance of the developer will increase." +"description": "* A positive value of `adjustment` means that that the API provider wants to adjust the balance for an under-charged developer i.e. the balance of the developer will decrease. * A negative value of `adjustment` means that that the API provider wants to adjust the balance for an over-charged developer i.e. the balance of the developer will increase. NOTE: An adjustment cannot increase the balance of the developer beyond the balance as of the most recent credit. For example, if a developer's balance is updated to be $100, and they spend $10, a negative adjustment can only increase the balance of the developer to $100." } }, "type": "object" @@ -12512,7 +12669,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "scope": { -"description": "Required. Scope of the resources for the computation. For Apigee, the environment is the scope of the resources.", +"description": "Optional. Scope of the resources for the computation. For Apigee, the environment is the scope of the resources.", "type": "string" } }, @@ -15844,6 +16001,24 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudApigeeV1ListSecurityFeedbackResponse": { +"description": "Response for ListSecurityFeedback", +"id": "GoogleCloudApigeeV1ListSecurityFeedbackResponse", +"properties": { +"nextPageToken": { +"description": "A token that can be sent as `page_token` in `ListSecurityFeedbackRequest` to retrieve the next page. If this field is omitted, there are no subsequent pages.", +"type": "string" +}, +"securityFeedback": { +"description": "List of SecurityFeedback reports.", +"items": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudApigeeV1SecurityFeedback" +}, +"type": "array" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudApigeeV1ListSecurityIncidentsResponse": { "description": "Response for ListSecurityIncidents.", "id": "GoogleCloudApigeeV1ListSecurityIncidentsResponse", @@ -18419,6 +18594,107 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudApigeeV1SecurityFeedback": { +"description": "Represents a feedback report from an Advanced API Security customer.", +"id": "GoogleCloudApigeeV1SecurityFeedback", +"properties": { +"comment": { +"description": "Optional. Optional text the user can provide for additional, unstructured context.", +"type": "string" +}, +"createTime": { +"description": "Output only. The time when this specific feedback id was created.", +"format": "google-datetime", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"displayName": { +"description": "Optional. The display name of the feedback.", +"type": "string" +}, +"feedbackContexts": { +"description": "Required. One or more attribute/value pairs for constraining the feedback.", +"items": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudApigeeV1SecurityFeedbackFeedbackContext" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"feedbackType": { +"description": "Required. The type of feedback being submitted.", +"enum": [ +"FEEDBACK_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED", +"EXCLUDED_DETECTION" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unspecified feedback type.", +"Feedback identifying attributes to be excluded from detections." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"name": { +"description": "Output only. Identifier. The feedback name is intended to be a system-generated uuid.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"reason": { +"description": "Optional. The reason for the feedback.", +"enum": [ +"REASON_UNSPECIFIED", +"INTERNAL_SYSTEM", +"NON_RISK_CLIENT", +"NAT", +"PENETRATION_TEST", +"OTHER" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unspecified reason.", +"The feedback is created for an internal system.", +"The feedback is created for a non-risk client.", +"The feedback is created for to label NAT.", +"The feedback is created for a penetration test.", +"The feedback is created for other reasons." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"updateTime": { +"description": "Output only. The time when this specific feedback id was updated.", +"format": "google-datetime", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudApigeeV1SecurityFeedbackFeedbackContext": { +"description": "FeedbackContext captures the intent of the submitted feedback.", +"id": "GoogleCloudApigeeV1SecurityFeedbackFeedbackContext", +"properties": { +"attribute": { +"description": "Required. The attribute the user is providing feedback about.", +"enum": [ +"ATTRIBUTE_UNSPECIFIED", +"ATTRIBUTE_ENVIRONMENTS", +"ATTRIBUTE_IP_ADDRESS_RANGES", +"ATTRIBUTE_API_KEYS" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unspecified attribute.", +"Values will be a list of environments.", +"Values will be a list of IP addresses. This could be either IPv4 or IPv6.", +"Values will be a list of API keys." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"values": { +"description": "Required. The values of the attribute the user is providing feedback about.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudApigeeV1SecurityIncident": { "description": "Represents an SecurityIncident resource.", "id": "GoogleCloudApigeeV1SecurityIncident", @@ -18523,7 +18799,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "scope": { -"description": "Required. Scope of the security monitoring condition. For Apigee, the environment is the scope of the resources.", +"description": "Optional. Scope of the security monitoring condition. For Apigee, the environment is the scope of the resources.", "type": "string" }, "totalDeployedResources": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/apihub.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/apihub.v1.json index e54a2e8828a..aa4446323d1 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/apihub.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/apihub.v1.json @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ ] }, "delete": { -"description": "Deletes the API hub instance.", +"description": "Deletes the API hub instance. Deleting the API hub instance will also result in the removal of all associated runtime project attachments and the host project registration.", "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/apiHubInstances/{apiHubInstancesId}", "httpMethod": "DELETE", "id": "apihub.projects.locations.apiHubInstances.delete", @@ -2741,6 +2741,34 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" ] }, +"manageSourceData": { +"description": "Manages data for a given plugin instance.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/plugins/{pluginsId}/instances/{instancesId}:manageSourceData", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "apihub.projects.locations.plugins.instances.manageSourceData", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. The name of the plugin instance for which data needs to be managed. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/plugins/{plugin}/instances/{instance}`", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/plugins/[^/]+/instances/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}:manageSourceData", +"request": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudApihubV1ManagePluginInstanceSourceDataRequest" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudApihubV1ManagePluginInstanceSourceDataResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, "patch": { "description": "Updates a plugin instance in the API hub. The following fields in the plugin_instance can be updated currently: * display_name * schedule_cron_expression The update_mask should be used to specify the fields being updated. To update the auth_config and additional_config of the plugin instance, use the ApplyPluginInstanceConfig method.", "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/plugins/{pluginsId}/instances/{instancesId}", @@ -2946,7 +2974,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250829", +"revision": "20250912", "rootUrl": "https://apihub.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Empty": { @@ -5140,6 +5168,60 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudApihubV1ManagePluginInstanceSourceDataRequest": { +"description": "The ManagePluginInstanceSourceData method's request.", +"id": "GoogleCloudApihubV1ManagePluginInstanceSourceDataRequest", +"properties": { +"action": { +"description": "Required. Action to be performed.", +"enum": [ +"ACTION_UNSPECIFIED", +"UPLOAD", +"DELETE" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Default unspecified action.", +"Upload or upsert data.", +"Delete data." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"data": { +"description": "Required. Data to be managed.", +"format": "byte", +"type": "string" +}, +"dataType": { +"description": "Required. Type of data to be managed.", +"enum": [ +"DATA_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED", +"PROXY_DEPLOYMENT_MANIFEST", +"ENVIRONMENT_MANIFEST", +"PROXY_BUNDLE", +"SHARED_FLOW_BUNDLE" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Default unspecified type.", +"Proxy deployment manifest.", +"Environment manifest.", +"Proxy bundle.", +"Shared flow bundle." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"relativePath": { +"description": "Required. Relative path of data being managed for a given plugin instance.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudApihubV1ManagePluginInstanceSourceDataResponse": { +"description": "The ManagePluginInstanceSourceData method's response.", +"id": "GoogleCloudApihubV1ManagePluginInstanceSourceDataResponse", +"properties": {}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudApihubV1MatchResult": { "description": "MatchResult represents the result of matching a discovered API operation with a catalog API operation.", "id": "GoogleCloudApihubV1MatchResult", @@ -5378,7 +5460,7 @@ "id": "GoogleCloudApihubV1Plugin", "properties": { "actionsConfig": { -"description": "Required. The configuration of actions supported by the plugin.", +"description": "Optional. The configuration of actions supported by the plugin. **REQUIRED**: This field must be provided when creating or updating a Plugin. The server will reject requests if this field is missing.", "items": { "$ref": "GoogleCloudApihubV1PluginActionConfig" }, diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/authorizedbuyersmarketplace.v1alpha.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/authorizedbuyersmarketplace.v1alpha.json index 5adbf9e05c1..1addb9a36d6 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/authorizedbuyersmarketplace.v1alpha.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/authorizedbuyersmarketplace.v1alpha.json @@ -1550,7 +1550,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250828", +"revision": "20250910", "rootUrl": "https://authorizedbuyersmarketplace.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AcceptProposalRequest": { @@ -1974,7 +1974,7 @@ "properties": { "cpmFee": { "$ref": "Money", -"description": "Required. This will be charged when other accounts use this data segment. For example, when other accounts add this data segment to a deal or auction package. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed." +"description": "Optional. A fixed fee charged per thousand impressions. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed." }, "createTime": { "description": "Output only. Time the data segment was created.", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/authorizedbuyersmarketplace.v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/authorizedbuyersmarketplace.v1beta.json index 6db1c7989ae..c2e3f47d54c 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/authorizedbuyersmarketplace.v1beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/authorizedbuyersmarketplace.v1beta.json @@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250616", +"revision": "20250910", "rootUrl": "https://authorizedbuyersmarketplace.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "ActivateDataSegmentRequest": { @@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ "properties": { "cpmFee": { "$ref": "Money", -"description": "Required. This will be charged when other accounts use this data segment. For example, when other accounts add this data segment to a deal or auction package. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed." +"description": "Optional. A fixed fee charged per thousand impressions. Once set, the currency code cannot be changed." }, "createTime": { "description": "Output only. Time the data segment was created.", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/backupdr.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/backupdr.v1.json index b494d95975a..1e899920d2e 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/backupdr.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/backupdr.v1.json @@ -2117,7 +2117,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250825", +"revision": "20250902", "rootUrl": "https://backupdr.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AbandonBackupRequest": { @@ -3190,7 +3190,7 @@ "id": "BackupRule", "properties": { "backupRetentionDays": { -"description": "Required. Configures the duration for which backup data will be kept. It is defined in \u201cdays\u201d. The value should be greater than or equal to minimum enforced retention of the backup vault. Minimum value is 1 and maximum value is 36159 for custom retention on-demand backup. Minimum and maximum values are workload specific for all other rules.", +"description": "Required. Configures the duration for which backup data will be kept. It is defined in \u201cdays\u201d. The value should be greater than or equal to minimum enforced retention of the backup vault. Minimum value is 1 and maximum value is 36159 for custom retention on-demand backup. Minimum and maximum values are workload specific for all other rules. Note: Longer retention can lead to higher storage costs post introductory trial. We recommend starting with a short duration of 3 days or less.", "format": "int32", "type": "integer" }, @@ -3241,7 +3241,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "backupMinimumEnforcedRetentionDuration": { -"description": "Required. The default and minimum enforced retention for each backup within the backup vault. The enforced retention for each backup can be extended.", +"description": "Required. The default and minimum enforced retention for each backup within the backup vault. The enforced retention for each backup can be extended. Note: Longer minimum enforced retention period impacts potential storage costs post introductory trial. We recommend starting with a short duration of 3 days or less.", "format": "google-duration", "type": "string" }, @@ -5030,11 +5030,13 @@ "enum": [ "FEATURE_UNSPECIFIED", "MANAGEMENT_SERVER", -"COMPUTE_INSTANCE" +"COMPUTE_INSTANCE", +"PROTECTION_SUMMARY" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "", "", +"", "" ], "type": "string" @@ -5583,12 +5585,16 @@ "enum": [ "RESOURCE_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED", "CLOUD_SQL_INSTANCE", -"COMPUTE_ENGINE_VM" +"COMPUTE_ENGINE_VM", +"COMPUTE_ENGINE_DISK", +"COMPUTE_ENGINE_REGIONAL_DISK" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Resource type not set.", "Cloud SQL instance.", -"Compute Engine VM." +"Compute Engine VM.", +"Compute Engine Disk.", +"Compute Engine Regional Disk." ], "readOnly": true, "type": "string" @@ -6069,6 +6075,21 @@ "description": "Represents a Trial for a project.", "id": "Trial", "properties": { +"endReason": { +"description": "Output only. The reason for ending the trial.", +"enum": [ +"END_REASON_UNSPECIFIED", +"MOVE_TO_PAID", +"DISCONTINUED" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"End reason not set.", +"Trial is deliberately ended by the user to transition to paid usage.", +"Trial is discontinued before expiration." +], +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, "endTime": { "description": "Output only. The time when the trial will expire.", "format": "google-datetime", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/bigquerydatatransfer.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/bigquerydatatransfer.v1.json index 4bab3906220..a082935839c 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/bigquerydatatransfer.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/bigquerydatatransfer.v1.json @@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -1488,7 +1488,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250813", +"revision": "20250906", "rootUrl": "https://bigquerydatatransfer.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "CheckValidCredsRequest": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/bigqueryreservation.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/bigqueryreservation.v1.json index f1a6b3a8d28..9a1bde43e1a 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/bigqueryreservation.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/bigqueryreservation.v1.json @@ -1267,7 +1267,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250620", +"revision": "20250907", "rootUrl": "https://bigqueryreservation.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Assignment": { @@ -1290,7 +1290,10 @@ "QUERY", "ML_EXTERNAL", "BACKGROUND", -"CONTINUOUS" +"CONTINUOUS", +"BACKGROUND_CHANGE_DATA_CAPTURE", +"BACKGROUND_COLUMN_METADATA_INDEX", +"BACKGROUND_SEARCH_INDEX_REFRESH" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Invalid type. Requests with this value will be rejected with error code `google.rpc.Code.INVALID_ARGUMENT`.", @@ -1298,7 +1301,10 @@ "Query jobs from the project will use the reservation.", "BigQuery ML jobs that use services external to BigQuery for model training. These jobs will not utilize idle slots from other reservations.", "Background jobs that BigQuery runs for the customers in the background.", -"Continuous SQL jobs will use this reservation. Reservations with continuous assignments cannot be mixed with non-continuous assignments." +"Continuous SQL jobs will use this reservation. Reservations with continuous assignments cannot be mixed with non-continuous assignments.", +"Finer granularity background jobs for capturing changes in a source database and streaming them into BigQuery. Reservations with this job type take priority over a default BACKGROUND reservation assignment (if it exists).", +"Finer granularity background jobs for refreshing cached metadata for BigQuery tables. Reservations with this job type take priority over a default BACKGROUND reservation assignment (if it exists).", +"Finer granularity background jobs for refreshing search indexes upon BigQuery table columns. Reservations with this job type take priority over a default BACKGROUND reservation assignment (if it exists)." ], "type": "string" }, @@ -1633,7 +1639,7 @@ false "id": "FailoverReservationRequest", "properties": { "failoverMode": { -"description": "Optional. failover mode for the failover operation.", +"description": "Optional. A parameter that determines how writes that are pending replication are handled after a failover is initiated. If not specified, HARD failover mode is used by default.", "enum": [ "FAILOVER_MODE_UNSPECIFIED", "SOFT", @@ -1641,7 +1647,7 @@ false ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Invalid value.", -"When customers initiate a soft failover, BigQuery will wait until all committed writes are replicated to the secondary.", +"When customers initiate a soft failover, BigQuery will wait until all committed writes are replicated to the secondary. This mode requires both regions to be available for the failover to succeed and prevents data loss.", "When customers initiate a hard failover, BigQuery will not wait until all committed writes are replicated to the secondary. There can be data loss for hard failover." ], "type": "string" diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/bigtableadmin.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/bigtableadmin.v2.json index 3b3ca9d38a6..8033a6a605d 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/bigtableadmin.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/bigtableadmin.v2.json @@ -1786,7 +1786,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "name": { -"description": "Identifier. The unique name of the materialized view. Format: `projects/{project}/instances/{instance}/materializedViews/{materialized_view}`", +"description": "Identifier. The unique name of the materialized view. Format: `projects/{project}/instances/{instance}/materializedViews/{materialized_view}` Views: `SCHEMA_VIEW`, `REPLICATION_VIEW`, `FULL`.", "location": "path", "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/instances/[^/]+/materializedViews/[^/]+$", "required": true, @@ -3077,7 +3077,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250821", +"revision": "20250828", "rootUrl": "https://bigtableadmin.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AppProfile": { @@ -4941,19 +4941,19 @@ "id": "MaterializedView", "properties": { "deletionProtection": { -"description": "Set to true to make the MaterializedView protected against deletion.", +"description": "Set to true to make the MaterializedView protected against deletion. Views: `SCHEMA_VIEW`, `REPLICATION_VIEW`, `FULL`.", "type": "boolean" }, "etag": { -"description": "Optional. The etag for this materialized view. This may be sent on update requests to ensure that the client has an up-to-date value before proceeding. The server returns an ABORTED error on a mismatched etag.", +"description": "Optional. The etag for this materialized view. This may be sent on update requests to ensure that the client has an up-to-date value before proceeding. The server returns an ABORTED error on a mismatched etag. Views: `SCHEMA_VIEW`, `REPLICATION_VIEW`, `FULL`.", "type": "string" }, "name": { -"description": "Identifier. The unique name of the materialized view. Format: `projects/{project}/instances/{instance}/materializedViews/{materialized_view}`", +"description": "Identifier. The unique name of the materialized view. Format: `projects/{project}/instances/{instance}/materializedViews/{materialized_view}` Views: `SCHEMA_VIEW`, `REPLICATION_VIEW`, `FULL`.", "type": "string" }, "query": { -"description": "Required. Immutable. The materialized view's select query.", +"description": "Required. Immutable. The materialized view's select query. Views: `SCHEMA_VIEW`, `FULL`.", "type": "string" } }, diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/chat.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/chat.v1.json index be1806aff5c..44c0b6bdb52 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/chat.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/chat.v1.json @@ -1528,7 +1528,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250821", +"revision": "20250909", "rootUrl": "https://chat.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AccessSettings": { @@ -2075,7 +2075,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "invokedFunction": { -"description": "Name of the invoked function associated with the widget. Only set for Chat apps.", +"description": "Name of the function to invoke. This field doesn't populate for Google Workspace Add-ons that extend Google Chat. Instead, to receive function data like identifiers, add-ons that extend Chat should use the `parameters` field. See [Build interactive interfaces for Chat apps](https://developers.google.com/workspace/add-ons/chat/build).", "type": "string" }, "parameters": { @@ -2326,12 +2326,12 @@ ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Default value for the enum. DO NOT USE.", -"A user sends the Chat app a message, or invokes the Chat app in a space, such as any of the following examples: * Any message in a direct message (DM) space with the Chat app. * A message in a multi-person space where a person @mentions the Chat app, or uses one of its [slash commands](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/commands#types). * If you've configured link previews for your Chat app, a user posts a message that contains a link that matches the configured URL pattern.", +"A user sends the Chat app a message, or invokes the Chat app in a space. Examples of message events include: * Any message in a direct message (DM) space with the Chat app. * A message in a multi-person space where a person @mentions the Chat app, or uses one of its [slash commands](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/commands#types). * If you've configured link previews for your Chat app, a user posts a message that contains a link that matches the configured URL pattern.", "A user adds the Chat app to a space, or a Google Workspace administrator installs the Chat app in direct message spaces for users in their organization. Chat apps typically respond to this interaction event by posting a welcome message in the space. When administrators install Chat apps, the `space.adminInstalled` field is set to `true` and users can't uninstall them. To learn about Chat apps installed by administrators, see Google Workspace Admin Help's documentation, [Install Marketplace apps in your domain](https://support.google.com/a/answer/172482).", "A user removes the Chat app from a space, or a Google Workspace administrator uninstalls the Chat app for a user in their organization. Chat apps can't respond with messages to this event, because they have already been removed. When administrators uninstall Chat apps, the `space.adminInstalled` field is set to `false`. If a user installed the Chat app before the administrator, the Chat app remains installed for the user and the Chat app doesn't receive a `REMOVED_FROM_SPACE` interaction event.", "A user clicks an interactive element of a card or dialog from a Chat app, such as a button. To receive an interaction event, the button must trigger another interaction with the Chat app. For example, a Chat app doesn't receive a `CARD_CLICKED` interaction event if a user clicks a button that opens a link to a website, but receives interaction events in the following examples: * The user clicks a `Send feedback` button on a card, which opens a dialog for the user to input information. * The user clicks a `Submit` button after inputting information into a card or dialog. If a user clicks a button to open, submit, or cancel a dialog, the `CARD_CLICKED` interaction event's `isDialogEvent` field is set to `true` and includes a [`DialogEventType`](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/api/reference/rest/v1/DialogEventType).", -"A user updates a widget in a card message or dialog.", -"A user uses a Chat app [quick command](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/commands#types)." +"A user updates a widget in a card message or dialog. This event is triggered when a user interacts with a widget that has an associated action.", +"A user uses a Chat app [command](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/commands#types), including slash commands and quick commands." ], "type": "string" }, diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/classroom.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/classroom.v1.json index af757d82635..c6f0718610d 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/classroom.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/classroom.v1.json @@ -720,7 +720,7 @@ ] }, "modifyAssignees": { -"description": "Modifies assignee mode and options of an announcement. Only a teacher of the course that contains the announcement may call this method. This method returns the following error codes: * `PERMISSION_DENIED` if the requesting user is not permitted to access the requested course or course work or for access errors. * `INVALID_ARGUMENT` if the request is malformed. * `NOT_FOUND` if the requested course or course work does not exist.", +"description": "Modifies assignee mode and options of an announcement. Only a teacher of the course that contains the announcement may call this method. This method returns the following error codes: * `PERMISSION_DENIED` if the requesting user is not permitted to access the requested course or course work or for access errors. * `INVALID_ARGUMENT` if the request is malformed. * `NOT_FOUND` if the requested course or course work does not exist. * `FAILED_PRECONDITION` for the following request error: * EmptyAssignees", "flatPath": "v1/courses/{courseId}/announcements/{id}:modifyAssignees", "httpMethod": "POST", "id": "classroom.courses.announcements.modifyAssignees", @@ -1240,7 +1240,7 @@ ] }, "modifyAssignees": { -"description": "Modifies assignee mode and options of a coursework. Only a teacher of the course that contains the coursework may call this method. This method returns the following error codes: * `PERMISSION_DENIED` if the requesting user is not permitted to access the requested course or course work or for access errors. * `INVALID_ARGUMENT` if the request is malformed. * `NOT_FOUND` if the requested course or course work does not exist.", +"description": "Modifies assignee mode and options of a coursework. Only a teacher of the course that contains the coursework may call this method. This method returns the following error codes: * `PERMISSION_DENIED` if the requesting user is not permitted to access the requested course or course work or for access errors. * `INVALID_ARGUMENT` if the request is malformed. * `NOT_FOUND` if the requested course or course work does not exist. * `FAILED_PRECONDITION` for the following request error: * EmptyAssignees", "flatPath": "v1/courses/{courseId}/courseWork/{id}:modifyAssignees", "httpMethod": "POST", "id": "classroom.courses.courseWork.modifyAssignees", @@ -4107,7 +4107,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250810", +"revision": "20250827", "rootUrl": "https://classroom.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AddOnAttachment": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudbuild.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudbuild.v1.json index 52a313a7296..268e581b1df 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudbuild.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudbuild.v1.json @@ -2573,7 +2573,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250801", +"revision": "20250903", "rootUrl": "https://cloudbuild.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "ApprovalConfig": { @@ -4911,7 +4911,7 @@ false "id": "NpmPackage", "properties": { "packagePath": { -"description": "Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package", +"description": "Optional. Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package Only one of `archive` or `package_path` can be specified.", "type": "string" }, "repository": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudbuild.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudbuild.v2.json index 15fa1cada38..45ac5d659de 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudbuild.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudbuild.v2.json @@ -371,7 +371,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -1087,7 +1087,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250814", +"revision": "20250903", "rootUrl": "https://cloudbuild.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuditConfig": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudcommerceprocurement.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudcommerceprocurement.v1.json index 11c978f50d2..82aa1f365dd 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudcommerceprocurement.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudcommerceprocurement.v1.json @@ -1,882 +1,930 @@ { - "auth": { - "oauth2": { - "scopes": { - "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform": { - "description": "See, edit, configure, and delete your Google Cloud Platform data" - } - } - } - }, - "basePath": "", - "baseUrl": "https://cloudcommerceprocurement.googleapis.com/", - "batchPath": "batch", - "canonicalName": "Cloud Commerce Partner Procurement Service", - "description": "Partner API for the Cloud Commerce Procurement Service.", - "discoveryVersion": "v1", - "documentationLink": "https://cloud.google.com/marketplace/docs/partners/", - "fullyEncodeReservedExpansion": true, - "icons": { - "x16": "http://www.google.com/images/icons/product/search-16.gif", - "x32": "http://www.google.com/images/icons/product/search-32.gif" - }, - "id": "cloudcommerceprocurement:v1", - "kind": "discovery#restDescription", - "mtlsRootUrl": "https://cloudcommerceprocurement.mtls.googleapis.com/", - "name": "cloudcommerceprocurement", - "ownerDomain": "google.com", - "ownerName": "Google", - "parameters": { - "$.xgafv": { - "description": "V1 error format.", - "enum": [ - "1", - "2" - ], - "enumDescriptions": [ - "v1 error format", - "v2 error format" - ], - "location": "query", - "type": "string" - }, - "access_token": { - "description": "OAuth access token.", - "location": "query", - "type": "string" - }, - "alt": { - "default": "json", - "description": "Data format for response.", - "enum": [ - "json", - "media", - "proto" - ], - "enumDescriptions": [ - "Responses with Content-Type of application/json", - "Media download with context-dependent Content-Type", - "Responses with Content-Type of application/x-protobuf" - ], - "location": "query", - "type": "string" - }, - "callback": { - "description": "JSONP", - "location": "query", - "type": "string" - }, - "fields": { - "description": "Selector specifying which fields to include in a partial response.", - "location": "query", - "type": "string" - }, - "key": { - "description": "API key. Your API key identifies your project and provides you with API access, quota, and reports. Required unless you provide an OAuth 2.0 token.", - "location": "query", - "type": "string" - }, - "oauth_token": { - "description": "OAuth 2.0 token for the current user.", - "location": "query", - "type": "string" - }, - "prettyPrint": { - "default": "true", - "description": "Returns response with indentations and line breaks.", - "location": "query", - "type": "boolean" - }, - "quotaUser": { - "description": "Available to use for quota purposes for server-side applications. Can be any arbitrary string assigned to a user, but should not exceed 40 characters.", - "location": "query", - "type": "string" - }, - "uploadType": { - "description": "Legacy upload protocol for media (e.g. \"media\", \"multipart\").", - "location": "query", - "type": "string" - }, - "upload_protocol": { - "description": "Upload protocol for media (e.g. \"raw\", \"multipart\").", - "location": "query", - "type": "string" - } - }, - "protocol": "rest", - "resources": { - "providers": { - "resources": { - "accounts": { - "methods": { - "approve": { - "description": "Grants an approval on an Account.", - "flatPath": "v1/providers/{providersId}/accounts/{accountsId}:approve", - "httpMethod": "POST", - "id": "cloudcommerceprocurement.providers.accounts.approve", - "parameterOrder": [ - "name" - ], - "parameters": { - "name": { - "description": "The resource name of the account. Required.", - "location": "path", - "pattern": "^providers/[^/]+/accounts/[^/]+$", - "required": true, - "type": "string" - } - }, - "path": "v1/{+name}:approve", - "request": { - "$ref": "ApproveAccountRequest" - }, - "response": { - "$ref": "Empty" - }, - "scopes": [ - "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" - ] - }, - "get": { - "description": "Gets a requested Account resource.", - "flatPath": "v1/providers/{providersId}/accounts/{accountsId}", - "httpMethod": "GET", - "id": "cloudcommerceprocurement.providers.accounts.get", - "parameterOrder": [ - "name" - ], - "parameters": { - "name": { - "description": "The name of the account to retrieve.", - "location": "path", - "pattern": "^providers/[^/]+/accounts/[^/]+$", - "required": true, - "type": "string" - } - }, - "path": "v1/{+name}", - "response": { - "$ref": "Account" - }, - "scopes": [ - "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" - ] - }, - "list": { - "description": "Lists Accounts that the provider has access to.", - "flatPath": "v1/providers/{providersId}/accounts", - "httpMethod": "GET", - "id": "cloudcommerceprocurement.providers.accounts.list", - "parameterOrder": [ - "parent" - ], - "parameters": { - "pageSize": { - "description": "The maximum number of entries that are requested. Default size is 200.", - "format": "int32", - "location": "query", - "type": "integer" - }, - "pageToken": { - "description": "The token for fetching the next page.", - "location": "query", - "type": "string" - }, - "parent": { - "description": "The parent resource name.", - "location": "path", - "pattern": "^providers/[^/]+$", - "required": true, - "type": "string" - } - }, - "path": "v1/{+parent}/accounts", - "response": { - "$ref": "ListAccountsResponse" - }, - "scopes": [ - "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" - ] - }, - "reject": { - "description": "Rejects an approval on an Account.", - "flatPath": "v1/providers/{providersId}/accounts/{accountsId}:reject", - "httpMethod": "POST", - "id": "cloudcommerceprocurement.providers.accounts.reject", - "parameterOrder": [ - "name" - ], - "parameters": { - "name": { - "description": "The resource name of the account. Required.", - "location": "path", - "pattern": "^providers/[^/]+/accounts/[^/]+$", - "required": true, - "type": "string" - } - }, - "path": "v1/{+name}:reject", - "request": { - "$ref": "RejectAccountRequest" - }, - "response": { - "$ref": "Empty" - }, - "scopes": [ - "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" - ] - }, - "reset": { - "description": "Resets an Account and cancel all associated Entitlements. Partner can only reset accounts they own rather than customer accounts.", - "flatPath": "v1/providers/{providersId}/accounts/{accountsId}:reset", - "httpMethod": "POST", - "id": "cloudcommerceprocurement.providers.accounts.reset", - "parameterOrder": [ - "name" - ], - "parameters": { - "name": { - "description": "The resource name of the account. Required.", - "location": "path", - "pattern": "^providers/[^/]+/accounts/[^/]+$", - "required": true, - "type": "string" - } - }, - "path": "v1/{+name}:reset", - "request": { - "$ref": "ResetAccountRequest" - }, - "response": { - "$ref": "Empty" - }, - "scopes": [ - "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" - ] - } - } - }, - "entitlements": { - "methods": { - "approve": { - "description": "Approves an entitlement that is in the EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED state. This method is invoked by the provider to approve the creation of the entitlement resource.", - "flatPath": "v1/providers/{providersId}/entitlements/{entitlementsId}:approve", - "httpMethod": "POST", - "id": "cloudcommerceprocurement.providers.entitlements.approve", - "parameterOrder": [ - "name" - ], - "parameters": { - "name": { - "description": "The resource name of the entitlement. Required.", - "location": "path", - "pattern": "^providers/[^/]+/entitlements/[^/]+$", - "required": true, - "type": "string" - } - }, - "path": "v1/{+name}:approve", - "request": { - "$ref": "ApproveEntitlementRequest" - }, - "response": { - "$ref": "Empty" - }, - "scopes": [ - "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" - ] - }, - "approvePlanChange": { - "description": "Approves an entitlement plan change that is in the EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL state. This method is invoked by the provider to approve the plan change on the entitlement resource.", - "flatPath": "v1/providers/{providersId}/entitlements/{entitlementsId}:approvePlanChange", - "httpMethod": "POST", - "id": "cloudcommerceprocurement.providers.entitlements.approvePlanChange", - "parameterOrder": [ - "name" - ], - "parameters": { - "name": { - "description": "The resource name of the entitlement. Required.", - "location": "path", - "pattern": "^providers/[^/]+/entitlements/[^/]+$", - "required": true, - "type": "string" - } - }, - "path": "v1/{+name}:approvePlanChange", - "request": { - "$ref": "ApproveEntitlementPlanChangeRequest" - }, - "response": { - "$ref": "Empty" - }, - "scopes": [ - "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" - ] - }, - "get": { - "description": "Gets a requested Entitlement resource.", - "flatPath": "v1/providers/{providersId}/entitlements/{entitlementsId}", - "httpMethod": "GET", - "id": "cloudcommerceprocurement.providers.entitlements.get", - "parameterOrder": [ - "name" - ], - "parameters": { - "name": { - "description": "The name of the entitlement to retrieve.", - "location": "path", - "pattern": "^providers/[^/]+/entitlements/[^/]+$", - "required": true, - "type": "string" - } - }, - "path": "v1/{+name}", - "response": { - "$ref": "Entitlement" - }, - "scopes": [ - "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" - ] - }, - "list": { - "description": "Lists Entitlements for which the provider has read access.", - "flatPath": "v1/providers/{providersId}/entitlements", - "httpMethod": "GET", - "id": "cloudcommerceprocurement.providers.entitlements.list", - "parameterOrder": [ - "parent" - ], - "parameters": { - "filter": { - "description": "The filter that can be used to limit the list request. The filter is a query string that can match a selected set of attributes with string values. For example `account=E-1234-5678-ABCD-EFGH`, `state=pending_cancellation`, and `plan!=foo-plan`. Supported query attributes are * `account` * `customer_billing_account` with value in the format of: `billingAccounts/{id}` * `product_external_name` * `quote_external_name` * `offer` * `new_pending_offer` * `plan` * `newPendingPlan` or `new_pending_plan` * `state` * `consumers.project` Note that the consumers match works on repeated structures, so equality (`consumers.project=projects/123456789`) is not supported. Set membership can be expressed with the `:` operator. For example, `consumers.project:projects/123456789` finds entitlements with at least one consumer with project field equal to `projects/123456789`. Also note that the state name match is case-insensitive and query can omit the prefix \"ENTITLEMENT_\". For example, `state=active` is equivalent to `state=ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE`. If the query contains some special characters other than letters, underscore, or digits, the phrase must be quoted with double quotes. For example, `product=\"providerId:productId\"`, where the product name needs to be quoted because it contains special character colon. Queries can be combined with `AND`, `OR`, and `NOT` to form more complex queries. They can also be grouped to force a desired evaluation order. For example, `state=active AND (account=E-1234 OR account=5678) AND NOT (product=foo-product)`. Connective `AND` can be omitted between two predicates. For example `account=E-1234 state=active` is equivalent to `account=E-1234 AND state=active`.", - "location": "query", - "type": "string" - }, - "pageSize": { - "description": "The maximum number of entries that are requested.", - "format": "int32", - "location": "query", - "type": "integer" - }, - "pageToken": { - "description": "The token for fetching the next page.", - "location": "query", - "type": "string" - }, - "parent": { - "description": "The parent resource name.", - "location": "path", - "pattern": "^providers/[^/]+$", - "required": true, - "type": "string" - } - }, - "path": "v1/{+parent}/entitlements", - "response": { - "$ref": "ListEntitlementsResponse" - }, - "scopes": [ - "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" - ] - }, - "patch": { - "description": "Updates an existing Entitlement.", - "flatPath": "v1/providers/{providersId}/entitlements/{entitlementsId}", - "httpMethod": "PATCH", - "id": "cloudcommerceprocurement.providers.entitlements.patch", - "parameterOrder": [ - "name" - ], - "parameters": { - "name": { - "description": "The name of the entitlement to update.", - "location": "path", - "pattern": "^providers/[^/]+/entitlements/[^/]+$", - "required": true, - "type": "string" - }, - "updateMask": { - "description": "The update mask that applies to the resource. See the [FieldMask definition] (https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#fieldmask) for more details.", - "format": "google-fieldmask", - "location": "query", - "type": "string" - } - }, - "path": "v1/{+name}", - "request": { - "$ref": "Entitlement" - }, - "response": { - "$ref": "Entitlement" - }, - "scopes": [ - "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" - ] - }, - "reject": { - "description": "Rejects an entitlement that is in the EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED state. This method is invoked by the provider to reject the creation of the entitlement resource.", - "flatPath": "v1/providers/{providersId}/entitlements/{entitlementsId}:reject", - "httpMethod": "POST", - "id": "cloudcommerceprocurement.providers.entitlements.reject", - "parameterOrder": [ - "name" - ], - "parameters": { - "name": { - "description": "The resource name of the entitlement. Required.", - "location": "path", - "pattern": "^providers/[^/]+/entitlements/[^/]+$", - "required": true, - "type": "string" - } - }, - "path": "v1/{+name}:reject", - "request": { - "$ref": "RejectEntitlementRequest" - }, - "response": { - "$ref": "Empty" - }, - "scopes": [ - "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" - ] - }, - "rejectPlanChange": { - "description": "Rejects an entitlement plan change that is in the EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL state. This method is invoked by the provider to reject the plan change on the entitlement resource.", - "flatPath": "v1/providers/{providersId}/entitlements/{entitlementsId}:rejectPlanChange", - "httpMethod": "POST", - "id": "cloudcommerceprocurement.providers.entitlements.rejectPlanChange", - "parameterOrder": [ - "name" - ], - "parameters": { - "name": { - "description": "The resource name of the entitlement. Required.", - "location": "path", - "pattern": "^providers/[^/]+/entitlements/[^/]+$", - "required": true, - "type": "string" - } - }, - "path": "v1/{+name}:rejectPlanChange", - "request": { - "$ref": "RejectEntitlementPlanChangeRequest" - }, - "response": { - "$ref": "Empty" - }, - "scopes": [ - "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" - ] - }, - "suspend": { - "description": "Requests suspension of an active Entitlement. This is not yet supported.", - "flatPath": "v1/providers/{providersId}/entitlements/{entitlementsId}:suspend", - "httpMethod": "POST", - "id": "cloudcommerceprocurement.providers.entitlements.suspend", - "parameterOrder": [ - "name" - ], - "parameters": { - "name": { - "description": "The name of the entitlement to suspend.", - "location": "path", - "pattern": "^providers/[^/]+/entitlements/[^/]+$", - "required": true, - "type": "string" - } - }, - "path": "v1/{+name}:suspend", - "request": { - "$ref": "SuspendEntitlementRequest" - }, - "response": { - "$ref": "Empty" - }, - "scopes": [ - "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" - ] - } - } - } - } - } - }, - "revision": "20210410", - "rootUrl": "https://cloudcommerceprocurement.googleapis.com/", - "schemas": { - "Account": { - "description": "Represents an account that was established by the customer on the service provider's system.", - "id": "Account", - "properties": { - "approvals": { - "description": "Output only. The approvals for this account. These approvals are used to track actions that are permitted or have been completed by a customer within the context of the provider. This might include a sign up flow or a provisioning step, for example, that the provider can admit to having happened.", - "items": { - "$ref": "Approval" - }, - "type": "array" - }, - "createTime": { - "description": "Output only. The creation timestamp.", - "format": "google-datetime", - "type": "string" - }, - "inputProperties": { - "additionalProperties": { - "description": "Properties of the object.", - "type": "any" - }, - "description": "Output only. The custom properties that were collected from the user to create this account.", - "type": "object" - }, - "name": { - "description": "Output only. The resource name of the account. Account names have the form `accounts/{account_id}`.", - "type": "string" - }, - "provider": { - "description": "Output only. The identifier of the service provider that this account was created against. Each service provider is assigned a unique provider value when they onboard with Cloud Commerce platform.", - "type": "string" - }, - "state": { - "description": "Output only. The state of the account. This is used to decide whether the customer is in good standing with the provider and is able to make purchases. An account might not be able to make a purchase if the billing account is suspended, for example.", - "enum": [ - "ACCOUNT_STATE_UNSPECIFIED", - "ACCOUNT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED", - "ACCOUNT_ACTIVE" - ], - "enumDescriptions": [ - "Default state of the account. It's only set to this value when the account is first created and has not been initialized.", - "The customer has requested the creation of the account resource, and the provider notification message is dispatched. This state has been deprecated, as accounts now immediately transition to AccountState.ACCOUNT_ACTIVE.", - "The account is active and ready for use. The next possible states are: - Account getting deleted: After the user invokes delete from another API." - ], - "type": "string" - }, - "updateTime": { - "description": "Output only. The last update timestamp.", - "format": "google-datetime", - "type": "string" - } - }, - "type": "object" - }, - "Approval": { - "description": "An approval for some action on an account.", - "id": "Approval", - "properties": { - "name": { - "description": "Output only. The name of the approval.", - "type": "string" - }, - "reason": { - "description": "Output only. An explanation for the state of the approval.", - "type": "string" - }, - "state": { - "description": "Output only. The state of the approval.", - "enum": [ - "STATE_UNSPECIFIED", - "PENDING", - "APPROVED", - "REJECTED" - ], - "enumDescriptions": [ - "Sentinel value; do not use.", - "The approval is pending response from the provider. The approval state can transition to Account.Approval.State.APPROVED or Account.Approval.State.REJECTED.", - "The approval has been granted by the provider.", - "The approval has been rejected by the provider. A provider may choose to approve a previously rejected approval, so is it possible to transition to Account.Approval.State.APPROVED." - ], - "type": "string" - }, - "updateTime": { - "description": "Optional. The last update timestamp of the approval.", - "format": "google-datetime", - "type": "string" - } - }, - "type": "object" - }, - "ApproveAccountRequest": { - "description": "Request message for PartnerProcurementService.ApproveAccount.", - "id": "ApproveAccountRequest", - "properties": { - "approvalName": { - "description": "The name of the approval being approved. If absent and there is only one approval possible, that approval will be granted. If absent and there are many approvals possible, the request will fail with a 400 Bad Request. Optional.", - "type": "string" - }, - "properties": { - "additionalProperties": { - "type": "string" - }, - "description": "Set of properties that should be associated with the account. Optional.", - "type": "object" - }, - "reason": { - "description": "Free form text string explaining the approval reason. Optional. Max allowed length: 256 bytes. Longer strings will be truncated.", - "type": "string" - } - }, - "type": "object" - }, - "ApproveEntitlementPlanChangeRequest": { - "description": "Request message for [PartnerProcurementService.ApproveEntitlementPlanChange[].", - "id": "ApproveEntitlementPlanChangeRequest", - "properties": { - "pendingPlanName": { - "description": "Name of the pending plan that is being approved. Required.", - "type": "string" - } - }, - "type": "object" - }, - "ApproveEntitlementRequest": { - "description": "Request message for [PartnerProcurementService.ApproveEntitlement[].", - "id": "ApproveEntitlementRequest", - "properties": { - "properties": { - "additionalProperties": { - "type": "string" - }, - "description": "Set of properties that should be associated with the entitlement. Optional.", - "type": "object" - } - }, - "type": "object" - }, - "Consumer": { - "description": "A resource using (consuming) this entitlement.", - "id": "Consumer", - "properties": { - "project": { - "description": "A project name with format `projects/`.", - "type": "string" - } - }, - "type": "object" - }, - "Empty": { - "description": "A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } The JSON representation for `Empty` is empty JSON object `{}`.", - "id": "Empty", - "properties": {}, - "type": "object" - }, - "Entitlement": { - "description": "Represents a procured product of a customer. Next Id: 23", - "id": "Entitlement", - "properties": { - "account": { - "description": "Output only. The resource name of the account that this entitlement is based on, if any.", - "type": "string" - }, - "consumers": { - "description": "Output only. The resources using this entitlement, if applicable.", - "items": { - "$ref": "Consumer" - }, - "type": "array" - }, - "createTime": { - "description": "Output only. The creation timestamp.", - "format": "google-datetime", - "type": "string" - }, - "inputProperties": { - "additionalProperties": { - "description": "Properties of the object.", - "type": "any" - }, - "description": "Output only. The custom properties that were collected from the user to create this entitlement.", - "type": "object" - }, - "messageToUser": { - "description": "Provider-supplied message that is displayed to the end user. Currently this is used to communicate progress and ETA for provisioning. This field can be updated only when a user is waiting for an action from the provider, i.e. entitlement state is EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED or EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL. This field is cleared automatically when the entitlement state changes.", - "type": "string" - }, - "name": { - "description": "Output only. The resource name of the entitlement. Entitlement names have the form `providers/{provider_id}/entitlements/{entitlement_id}`.", - "type": "string" - }, - "newPendingOffer": { - "description": "Output only. The name of the offer the entitlement is switching to upon a pending plan change. Only exists if the pending plan change is moving to an offer. Format: 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/privateOffers/{offer-id}' OR 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/standardOffers/{offer-id}', depending on whether the offer is private or public.", - "readOnly": true, - "type": "string" - }, - "newPendingPlan": { - "description": "Output only. The identifier of the pending new plan. Required if the product has plans and the entitlement has a pending plan change.", - "type": "string" - }, - "offer": { - "description": "Output only. The name of the offer that was procured. Field is empty if order was not made using an offer. Format: 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/privateOffers/{offer-id}' OR 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/standardOffers/{offer-id}', depending on whether the offer is private or public.", - "readOnly": true, - "type": "string" - }, - "offerEndTime": { - "description": "Output only. End time for the Offer association corresponding to this entitlement. The field is only populated if the entitlement is currently associated with an Offer.", - "format": "google-datetime", - "readOnly": true, - "type": "string" - }, - "plan": { - "description": "Output only. The identifier of the plan that was procured. Required if the product has plans.", - "type": "string" - }, - "product": { - "description": "Output only. The identifier of the entity that was purchased. This may actually represent a product, quote, or offer.", - "type": "string" - }, - "productExternalName": { - "description": "Output only. The identifier of the product that was procured.", - "readOnly": true, - "type": "string" - }, - "provider": { - "description": "Output only. The identifier of the service provider that this entitlement was created against. Each service provider is assigned a unique provider value when they onboard with Cloud Commerce platform.", - "type": "string" - }, - "quoteExternalName": { - "description": "Output only. The identifier of the quote that was used to procure. Empty if the order is not purchased using a quote.", - "readOnly": true, - "type": "string" - }, - "state": { - "description": "Output only. The state of the entitlement.", - "enum": [ - "ENTITLEMENT_STATE_UNSPECIFIED", - "ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED", - "ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE", - "ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION", - "ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED", - "ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE", - "ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL", - "ENTITLEMENT_SUSPENDED" - ], - "enumDescriptions": [ - "Default state of the entitlement. It's only set to this value when the entitlement is first created and has not been initialized.", - "Indicates that the entitlement is being created and the backend has sent a notification to the provider for the activation approval. If the provider approves, then the entitlement will transition to the EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE state. Otherwise, the entitlement will be removed. Plan changes are not allowed in this state. Instead the entitlement is cancelled and re-created with a new plan name.", - "Indicates that the entitlement is active. The procured item is now usable and any associated billing events will start occurring. In this state, the customer can decide to cancel the entitlement, which would change the state to EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION, and then EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED. The user can also request a change of plan, which will transition the state to EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE, and then back to EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE.", - "Indicates that the entitlement was cancelled by the customer. The entitlement typically stays in this state if the entitlement/plan allows use of the underlying resource until the end of the current billing cycle. Once the billing cycle completes, the resource will transition to EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state. The resource cannot be modified during this state.", - "Indicates that the entitlement was cancelled. The entitlement can now be deleted.", - "Indicates that the entitlement is currently active, but there is a pending plan change that is requested by the customer. The entitlement typically stays in this state, if the entitlement/plan requires the completion of the current billing cycle before the plan can be changed. Once the billing cycle completes, the resource will transition to EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE, with its plan changed.", - "Indicates that the entitlement is currently active, but there is a plan change request pending provider approval. If the provider approves the plan change, then the entitlement will transition either to EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE or EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE depending on whether current plan requires that the billing cycle completes. If the provider rejects the plan change, then the pending plan change request is removed and the entitlement stays in EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE state with the old plan.", - "Indicates that the entitlement is suspended either by Google or provider request. This can be triggered for various external reasons (e.g. expiration of credit card on the billing account, violation of terms-of-service of the provider etc.). As such, any remediating action needs to be taken externally, before the entitlement can be activated. This is not yet supported." - ], - "type": "string" - }, - "subscriptionEndTime": { - "description": "Output only. End time for the subscription corresponding to this entitlement.", - "format": "google-datetime", - "readOnly": true, - "type": "string" - }, - "updateTime": { - "description": "Output only. The last update timestamp.", - "format": "google-datetime", - "type": "string" - }, - "usageReportingId": { - "description": "Output only. The consumerId to use when reporting usage through the Service Control API. See the consumerId field at [Reporting Metrics](https://cloud.google.com/service-control/reporting-metrics) for more details. This field is present only if the product has usage-based billing configured.", - "type": "string" - } - }, - "type": "object" - }, - "ListAccountsResponse": { - "description": "Response message for [PartnerProcurementService.ListAccounts[].", - "id": "ListAccountsResponse", - "properties": { - "accounts": { - "description": "The list of accounts in this response.", - "items": { - "$ref": "Account" - }, - "type": "array" - }, - "nextPageToken": { - "description": "The token for fetching the next page.", - "type": "string" - } - }, - "type": "object" - }, - "ListEntitlementsResponse": { - "description": "Response message for PartnerProcurementService.ListEntitlements.", - "id": "ListEntitlementsResponse", - "properties": { - "entitlements": { - "description": "The list of entitlements in this response.", - "items": { - "$ref": "Entitlement" - }, - "type": "array" - }, - "nextPageToken": { - "description": "The token for fetching the next page.", - "type": "string" - } - }, - "type": "object" - }, - "RejectAccountRequest": { - "description": "Request message for PartnerProcurementService.RejectAccount.", - "id": "RejectAccountRequest", - "properties": { - "approvalName": { - "description": "The name of the approval being rejected. If absent and there is only one approval possible, that approval will be rejected. If absent and there are many approvals possible, the request will fail with a 400 Bad Request. Optional.", - "type": "string" - }, - "reason": { - "description": "Free form text string explaining the rejection reason. Max allowed length: 256 bytes. Longer strings will be truncated.", - "type": "string" - } - }, - "type": "object" - }, - "RejectEntitlementPlanChangeRequest": { - "description": "Request message for PartnerProcurementService.RejectEntitlementPlanChange.", - "id": "RejectEntitlementPlanChangeRequest", - "properties": { - "pendingPlanName": { - "description": "Name of the pending plan that is being rejected. Required.", - "type": "string" - }, - "reason": { - "description": "Free form text string explaining the rejection reason. Max allowed length: 256 bytes. Longer strings will be truncated.", - "type": "string" - } - }, - "type": "object" - }, - "RejectEntitlementRequest": { - "description": "Request message for PartnerProcurementService.RejectEntitlement.", - "id": "RejectEntitlementRequest", - "properties": { - "reason": { - "description": "Free form text string explaining the rejection reason. Max allowed length: 256 bytes. Longer strings will be truncated.", - "type": "string" - } - }, - "type": "object" - }, - "ResetAccountRequest": { - "description": "Request message for for PartnerProcurementService.ResetAccount.", - "id": "ResetAccountRequest", - "properties": {}, - "type": "object" - }, - "SuspendEntitlementRequest": { - "description": "Request message for ParterProcurementService.SuspendEntitlement. This is not yet supported.", - "id": "SuspendEntitlementRequest", - "properties": { - "reason": { - "description": "A free-form reason string, explaining the reason for suspension request.", - "type": "string" - } - }, - "type": "object" - } - }, - "servicePath": "", - "title": "Cloud Commerce Partner Procurement API", - "version": "v1", - "version_module": true +"auth": { +"oauth2": { +"scopes": { +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform": { +"description": "See, edit, configure, and delete your Google Cloud data and see the email address for your Google Account." +} +} +} +}, +"basePath": "", +"baseUrl": "https://cloudcommerceprocurement.googleapis.com/", +"batchPath": "batch", +"canonicalName": "Cloud Commerce Partner Procurement Service", +"description": "Partner API for the Cloud Commerce Procurement Service.", +"discoveryVersion": "v1", +"documentationLink": "https://cloud.google.com/marketplace/docs/partners/", +"fullyEncodeReservedExpansion": true, +"icons": { +"x16": "http://www.google.com/images/icons/product/search-16.gif", +"x32": "http://www.google.com/images/icons/product/search-32.gif" +}, +"id": "cloudcommerceprocurement:v1", +"kind": "discovery#restDescription", +"mtlsRootUrl": "https://cloudcommerceprocurement.mtls.googleapis.com/", +"name": "cloudcommerceprocurement", +"ownerDomain": "google.com", +"ownerName": "Google", +"parameters": { +"$.xgafv": { +"description": "V1 error format.", +"enum": [ +"1", +"2" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"v1 error format", +"v2 error format" +], +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"access_token": { +"description": "OAuth access token.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"alt": { +"default": "json", +"description": "Data format for response.", +"enum": [ +"json", +"media", +"proto" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Responses with Content-Type of application/json", +"Media download with context-dependent Content-Type", +"Responses with Content-Type of application/x-protobuf" +], +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"callback": { +"description": "JSONP", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"fields": { +"description": "Selector specifying which fields to include in a partial response.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"key": { +"description": "API key. Your API key identifies your project and provides you with API access, quota, and reports. Required unless you provide an OAuth 2.0 token.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"oauth_token": { +"description": "OAuth 2.0 token for the current user.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"prettyPrint": { +"default": "true", +"description": "Returns response with indentations and line breaks.", +"location": "query", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"quotaUser": { +"description": "Available to use for quota purposes for server-side applications. Can be any arbitrary string assigned to a user, but should not exceed 40 characters.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"uploadType": { +"description": "Legacy upload protocol for media (e.g. \"media\", \"multipart\").", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"upload_protocol": { +"description": "Upload protocol for media (e.g. \"raw\", \"multipart\").", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"protocol": "rest", +"resources": { +"providers": { +"resources": { +"accounts": { +"methods": { +"approve": { +"description": "Grants an approval on an Account.", +"flatPath": "v1/providers/{providersId}/accounts/{accountsId}:approve", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "cloudcommerceprocurement.providers.accounts.approve", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. The resource name of the account, with the format `providers/{providerId}/accounts/{accountId}`.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^providers/[^/]+/accounts/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}:approve", +"request": { +"$ref": "ApproveAccountRequest" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "Empty" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"get": { +"description": "Gets a requested Account resource.", +"flatPath": "v1/providers/{providersId}/accounts/{accountsId}", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "cloudcommerceprocurement.providers.accounts.get", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. The name of the account to retrieve.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^providers/[^/]+/accounts/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}", +"response": { +"$ref": "Account" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"list": { +"description": "Lists Accounts that the provider has access to.", +"flatPath": "v1/providers/{providersId}/accounts", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "cloudcommerceprocurement.providers.accounts.list", +"parameterOrder": [ +"parent" +], +"parameters": { +"pageSize": { +"description": "The maximum number of entries that are requested. The default page size is 25 and the maximum page size is 200.", +"format": "int32", +"location": "query", +"type": "integer" +}, +"pageToken": { +"description": "The token for fetching the next page.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"parent": { +"description": "Required. The parent resource name.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^providers/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+parent}/accounts", +"response": { +"$ref": "ListAccountsResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"reject": { +"description": "Rejects an approval on an Account.", +"flatPath": "v1/providers/{providersId}/accounts/{accountsId}:reject", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "cloudcommerceprocurement.providers.accounts.reject", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. The resource name of the account.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^providers/[^/]+/accounts/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}:reject", +"request": { +"$ref": "RejectAccountRequest" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "Empty" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"reset": { +"description": "Resets an Account and cancels all associated Entitlements. Partner can only reset accounts they own rather than customer accounts.", +"flatPath": "v1/providers/{providersId}/accounts/{accountsId}:reset", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "cloudcommerceprocurement.providers.accounts.reset", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. The resource name of the account.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^providers/[^/]+/accounts/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}:reset", +"request": { +"$ref": "ResetAccountRequest" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "Empty" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +} +} +}, +"entitlements": { +"methods": { +"approve": { +"description": "Approves an entitlement that is in the EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED state. This method is invoked by the provider to approve the creation of the entitlement resource.", +"flatPath": "v1/providers/{providersId}/entitlements/{entitlementsId}:approve", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "cloudcommerceprocurement.providers.entitlements.approve", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. The resource name of the entitlement, with the format `providers/{providerId}/entitlements/{entitlementId}`.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^providers/[^/]+/entitlements/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}:approve", +"request": { +"$ref": "ApproveEntitlementRequest" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "Empty" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"approvePlanChange": { +"description": "Approves an entitlement plan change that is in the EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL state. This method is invoked by the provider to approve the plan change on the entitlement resource.", +"flatPath": "v1/providers/{providersId}/entitlements/{entitlementsId}:approvePlanChange", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "cloudcommerceprocurement.providers.entitlements.approvePlanChange", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. The resource name of the entitlement.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^providers/[^/]+/entitlements/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}:approvePlanChange", +"request": { +"$ref": "ApproveEntitlementPlanChangeRequest" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "Empty" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"get": { +"description": "Gets a requested Entitlement resource.", +"flatPath": "v1/providers/{providersId}/entitlements/{entitlementsId}", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "cloudcommerceprocurement.providers.entitlements.get", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. The name of the entitlement to retrieve.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^providers/[^/]+/entitlements/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}", +"response": { +"$ref": "Entitlement" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"list": { +"description": "Lists Entitlements for which the provider has read access.", +"flatPath": "v1/providers/{providersId}/entitlements", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "cloudcommerceprocurement.providers.entitlements.list", +"parameterOrder": [ +"parent" +], +"parameters": { +"filter": { +"description": "The filter that can be used to limit the list request. The filter is a query string that can match a selected set of attributes with string values. For example `account=E-1234-5678-ABCD-EFGH`, `state=pending_cancellation`, and `plan!=foo-plan`. Supported query attributes are * `account` * `customer_billing_account` with value in the format of: `billingAccounts/{id}` * `product_external_name` * `quote_external_name` * `offer` * `new_pending_offer` * `plan` * `newPendingPlan` or `new_pending_plan` * `state` * `services` * `consumers.project` * `change_history.new_offer` Note that the consumers and change_history.new_offer match works on repeated structures, so equality (`consumers.project=projects/123456789`) is not supported. Set membership can be expressed with the `:` operator. For example, `consumers.project:projects/123456789` finds entitlements with at least one consumer with project field equal to `projects/123456789`. `change_history.new_offer` retrieves all entitlements that were once associated or are currently active with the offer. Also note that the state name match is case-insensitive and query can omit the prefix \"ENTITLEMENT_\". For example, `state=active` is equivalent to `state=ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE`. If the query contains some special characters other than letters, underscore, or digits, the phrase must be quoted with double quotes. For example, `product=\"providerId:productId\"`, where the product name needs to be quoted because it contains special character colon. Queries can be combined with `AND`, `OR`, and `NOT` to form more complex queries. They can also be grouped to force a desired evaluation order. For example, `state=active AND (account=E-1234 OR account=5678) AND NOT (product=foo-product)`. Connective `AND` can be omitted between two predicates. For example `account=E-1234 state=active` is equivalent to `account=E-1234 AND state=active`.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"pageSize": { +"description": "The maximum number of entries that are requested. The default page size is 200.", +"format": "int32", +"location": "query", +"type": "integer" +}, +"pageToken": { +"description": "The token for fetching the next page.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"parent": { +"description": "Required. The parent resource name.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^providers/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+parent}/entitlements", +"response": { +"$ref": "ListEntitlementsResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"patch": { +"description": "Updates an existing Entitlement.", +"flatPath": "v1/providers/{providersId}/entitlements/{entitlementsId}", +"httpMethod": "PATCH", +"id": "cloudcommerceprocurement.providers.entitlements.patch", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. The name of the entitlement to update.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^providers/[^/]+/entitlements/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"updateMask": { +"description": "The update mask that applies to the resource. See the [FieldMask definition] (https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#fieldmask) for more details.", +"format": "google-fieldmask", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}", +"request": { +"$ref": "Entitlement" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "Entitlement" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"reject": { +"description": "Rejects an entitlement that is in the EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED state. This method is invoked by the provider to reject the creation of the entitlement resource.", +"flatPath": "v1/providers/{providersId}/entitlements/{entitlementsId}:reject", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "cloudcommerceprocurement.providers.entitlements.reject", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. The resource name of the entitlement.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^providers/[^/]+/entitlements/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}:reject", +"request": { +"$ref": "RejectEntitlementRequest" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "Empty" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"rejectPlanChange": { +"description": "Rejects an entitlement plan change that is in the EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL state. This method is invoked by the provider to reject the plan change on the entitlement resource.", +"flatPath": "v1/providers/{providersId}/entitlements/{entitlementsId}:rejectPlanChange", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "cloudcommerceprocurement.providers.entitlements.rejectPlanChange", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. The resource name of the entitlement.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^providers/[^/]+/entitlements/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}:rejectPlanChange", +"request": { +"$ref": "RejectEntitlementPlanChangeRequest" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "Empty" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"suspend": { +"description": "Requests suspension of an active Entitlement. This is not yet supported.", +"flatPath": "v1/providers/{providersId}/entitlements/{entitlementsId}:suspend", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "cloudcommerceprocurement.providers.entitlements.suspend", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. The name of the entitlement to suspend.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^providers/[^/]+/entitlements/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}:suspend", +"request": { +"$ref": "SuspendEntitlementRequest" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "Empty" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +} +} +} +} +} +}, +"revision": "20250907", +"rootUrl": "https://cloudcommerceprocurement.googleapis.com/", +"schemas": { +"Account": { +"description": "Represents an account that was established by the customer on the service provider's system.", +"id": "Account", +"properties": { +"approvals": { +"description": "Output only. The approvals for this account. These approvals are used to track actions that are permitted or have been completed by a customer within the context of the provider. This might include a sign up flow or a provisioning step, for example, that the provider can admit to having happened.", +"items": { +"$ref": "Approval" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"createTime": { +"description": "Output only. The creation timestamp.", +"format": "google-datetime", +"type": "string" +}, +"inputProperties": { +"additionalProperties": { +"description": "Properties of the object.", +"type": "any" +}, +"deprecated": true, +"description": "Output only. The custom properties that were collected from the user to create this account.", +"type": "object" +}, +"name": { +"description": "Output only. The resource name of the account. Account names have the form `accounts/{account_id}`.", +"type": "string" +}, +"provider": { +"description": "Output only. The identifier of the service provider that this account was created against. Each service provider is assigned a unique provider value when they onboard with Cloud Commerce platform.", +"type": "string" +}, +"state": { +"description": "Output only. The state of the account. This is used to decide whether the customer is in good standing with the provider and is able to make purchases. An account might not be able to make a purchase if the billing account is suspended, for example.", +"enum": [ +"ACCOUNT_STATE_UNSPECIFIED", +"ACCOUNT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED", +"ACCOUNT_ACTIVE" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Default state of the account. It's only set to this value when the account is first created and has not been initialized.", +"The customer has requested the creation of the account resource, and the provider notification message is dispatched. This state has been deprecated, as accounts now immediately transition to AccountState.ACCOUNT_ACTIVE.", +"The account is active and ready for use. The next possible states are: - Account getting deleted: After the user invokes delete from another API." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"updateTime": { +"description": "Output only. The last update timestamp.", +"format": "google-datetime", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"Approval": { +"description": "An approval for some action on an account.", +"id": "Approval", +"properties": { +"name": { +"description": "Output only. The name of the approval.", +"type": "string" +}, +"reason": { +"description": "Output only. An explanation for the state of the approval.", +"type": "string" +}, +"state": { +"description": "Output only. The state of the approval.", +"enum": [ +"STATE_UNSPECIFIED", +"PENDING", +"APPROVED", +"REJECTED" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Sentinel value; do not use.", +"The approval is pending response from the provider. The approval state can transition to Account.Approval.State.APPROVED or Account.Approval.State.REJECTED.", +"The approval has been granted by the provider.", +"The approval has been rejected by the provider. A provider may choose to approve a previously rejected approval, so is it possible to transition to Account.Approval.State.APPROVED." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"updateTime": { +"description": "Optional. The last update timestamp of the approval.", +"format": "google-datetime", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"ApproveAccountRequest": { +"description": "Request message for PartnerProcurementService.ApproveAccount.", +"id": "ApproveAccountRequest", +"properties": { +"approvalName": { +"description": "The name of the approval being approved. If absent and there is only one approval possible, that approval will be granted. If absent and there are many approvals possible, the request will fail with a 400 Bad Request. Optional.", +"type": "string" +}, +"properties": { +"additionalProperties": { +"type": "string" +}, +"description": "Set of properties that should be associated with the account. Optional.", +"type": "object" +}, +"reason": { +"description": "Free form text string explaining the approval reason. Optional. Max allowed length: 256 bytes. Longer strings will be truncated.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"ApproveEntitlementPlanChangeRequest": { +"description": "Request message for [PartnerProcurementService.ApproveEntitlementPlanChange[].", +"id": "ApproveEntitlementPlanChangeRequest", +"properties": { +"pendingPlanName": { +"description": "Required. Name of the pending plan that's being approved.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"ApproveEntitlementRequest": { +"description": "Request message for [PartnerProcurementService.ApproveEntitlement[].", +"id": "ApproveEntitlementRequest", +"properties": { +"entitlementMigrated": { +"description": "Optional. The resource name of the entitlement that was migrated, with the format `providers/{provider_id}/entitlements/{entitlement_id}`. Should only be sent when resources have been migrated from entitlement_migrated to the new entitlement. Optional.", +"type": "string" +}, +"properties": { +"additionalProperties": { +"type": "string" +}, +"deprecated": true, +"description": "Set of properties that should be associated with the entitlement. Optional.", +"type": "object" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"Consumer": { +"description": "A resource using (consuming) this entitlement.", +"id": "Consumer", +"properties": { +"project": { +"description": "A project name with format `projects/`.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"Empty": { +"description": "A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); }", +"id": "Empty", +"properties": {}, +"type": "object" +}, +"Entitlement": { +"description": "Represents a procured product of a customer.", +"id": "Entitlement", +"properties": { +"account": { +"description": "Output only. The resource name of the account that this entitlement is based on, if any.", +"type": "string" +}, +"cancellationReason": { +"description": "Output only. The reason the entitlement was cancelled. If this entitlement wasn't cancelled, this field is empty. Possible values include \"unknown\", \"expired\", \"user-cancelled\", \"account-closed\", \"billing-disabled\" (if the customer has manually disabled billing to their resources), \"user-aborted\", and \"migrated\" (if the entitlement has migrated across products). Values of this field are subject to change, and we recommend that you don't build your technical integration to rely on these fields.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"consumers": { +"description": "Output only. The resources using this entitlement, if applicable.", +"items": { +"$ref": "Consumer" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"createTime": { +"description": "Output only. The creation timestamp.", +"format": "google-datetime", +"type": "string" +}, +"entitlementBenefitIds": { +"description": "Output only. The entitlement benefit IDs associated with the purchase.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"readOnly": true, +"type": "array" +}, +"inputProperties": { +"additionalProperties": { +"description": "Properties of the object.", +"type": "any" +}, +"deprecated": true, +"description": "Output only. The custom properties that were collected from the user to create this entitlement.", +"type": "object" +}, +"messageToUser": { +"description": "Provider-supplied message that is displayed to the end user. Currently this is used to communicate progress and ETA for provisioning. This field can be updated only when a user is waiting for an action from the provider, i.e. entitlement state is EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED or EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL. This field is cleared automatically when the entitlement state changes.", +"type": "string" +}, +"name": { +"description": "Output only. The resource name of the entitlement. Entitlement names have the form `providers/{provider_id}/entitlements/{entitlement_id}`.", +"type": "string" +}, +"newOfferEndTime": { +"description": "Output only. The end time of the new offer. If the offer was has a term duration instead of a specified end date, this field is empty. This field is populated even if the entitlement isn't active yet. If there's no upcoming offer, the field is empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED, ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE, or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION state, then this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE state, then this field will be populated with the expected end time of the upcoming offer (in the future) if the upcoming offer has a specified end date. Otherwise, this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this field will be empty.", +"format": "google-datetime", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"newOfferStartTime": { +"description": "Output only. The timestamp when the new offer becomes effective. This field is populated even if the entitlement isn't active yet. If there's no upcoming offer, the field is empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED state, this field will not be populated when the entitlement is not yet approved. But after the entitlement is approved, then this field will be populated with effective time of the upcoming offer. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION state, this field will not be populated. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL state, this field will not be populated since the entitlement change is waiting on approval. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE state, this field will be populated with the expected effective time of the upcoming offer (in the future). * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this field will be empty.", +"format": "google-datetime", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"newPendingOffer": { +"description": "Output only. The name of the offer the entitlement is switching to upon a pending plan change. Only exists if the pending plan change is moving to an offer. This field isn't populated for entitlements which aren't active yet. Format: 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/privateOffers/{offer}' OR 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/standardOffers/{offer}', depending on whether the offer is private or public. The {service} in the name is the listing service of the offer. It could be either the product service that the offer is referencing, or a generic private offer parent service. We recommend that you don't build your integration to rely on the meaning of this {service} part. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED, ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION state, then this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE state, then this field will be populated with the upcoming offer. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this will be empty.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"newPendingOfferDuration": { +"description": "Output only. The duration of the new offer, in ISO 8601 duration format. This field isn't populated for entitlements which aren't active yet, only for pending offer changes. If the offer was has a specified end date instead of a duration, this field is empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED, ENTITLEENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE, or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION state, then this field is empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE state, then this field will be populated with the duration of the upcoming offer, if the upcoming offer is does not have a specified end date. Otherwise, this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this field will be empty.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"newPendingPlan": { +"description": "Output only. The identifier of the pending new plan. Required if the product has plans and the entitlement has a pending plan change.", +"type": "string" +}, +"offer": { +"description": "Output only. The name of the offer that was procured. Field is empty if order was not made using an offer. Format: 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/privateOffers/{offer}' OR 'projects/{project}/services/{service}/standardOffers/{offer}', depending on whether the offer is private or public. The {service} in the name is the listing service of the offer. It could be either the product service that the offer is referencing, or a generic private offer parent service. We recommend that you don't build your integration to rely on the meaning of this {service} part. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED state, this field will be populated with the upcoming offer. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE, ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION, ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE, or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL state, this field will be populated with the current offer. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this field will be populated with the latest offer the order was associated with.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"offerDuration": { +"description": "Output only. The offer duration of the current offer in ISO 8601 duration format. Field is empty if entitlement was not made using an offer. If the offer has a specified end date instead of a duration, this field is empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED state, then this field will be populated with the duration of the upcoming offer, if the upcoming offer does not have a specified end date. Otherwise, this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE, ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION, ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE, or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL state, then this field will be populated with the duration of the current offer if the current offer is does not have a specific end date. Otherwise, this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this field will be populated with the duration of the latest offer the order was associated with if that offer does not have a specific end date. Otherwise, this field will be empty.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"offerEndTime": { +"description": "Output only. End time for the Offer associated with this entitlement. Note that this field value can change over time. This occurs naturally even if the offer is not changed, due to auto renewal. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED state, then: * If the entitlement is not yet approved, then this field will be populated with the expected end time of the upcoming offer (in the future) if the upcoming offer has a specified end date. Otherwise this field will be empty. * If the entitlement is approved, then this field will always be populated with the expected end time of the upcoming offer (in the future). This means both this field, and the offer_duration field, can co-exist. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION state, then this field will be populated with the actual expected end time of the current offer (in the futre). Meaning, this field will be set, regardless of whether the offer has a specific end date or a duration. This means both this field, and the offer_duration field, can co-exist. * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL or ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE state: * If the current offer has already ended and became pure PAYG, then this field reflects the ACTUAL end time of the current offer (in the past). * Otherwise, then this is the EXPECTED end date of the current offer (in the future). * If the entitlement is in ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state, then this field will be populated with the ACTUAL end time of the latest offer the order was associated with (in the past). If the entitlement was cancelled before any offer started, then this field will be empty.", +"format": "google-datetime", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"orderId": { +"description": "Output only. The order ID of this entitlement, without any `orders/` resource name prefix.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"plan": { +"description": "Output only. The identifier of the plan that was procured. Required if the product has plans.", +"type": "string" +}, +"product": { +"deprecated": true, +"description": "Output only. The identifier of the entity that was purchased. This may actually represent a product, quote, or offer. We strongly recommend that you use the following more explicit fields: productExternalName, quoteExternalName, or offer.", +"type": "string" +}, +"productExternalName": { +"description": "Output only. The identifier of the product that was procured.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"provider": { +"description": "Output only. The identifier of the service provider that this entitlement was created against. Each service provider is assigned a unique provider value when they onboard with Cloud Commerce platform.", +"type": "string" +}, +"quoteExternalName": { +"description": "Output only. The identifier of the quote that was used to procure. Empty if the order is not purchased using a quote.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"state": { +"description": "Output only. The state of the entitlement.", +"enum": [ +"ENTITLEMENT_STATE_UNSPECIFIED", +"ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVATION_REQUESTED", +"ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE", +"ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION", +"ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED", +"ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE", +"ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE_APPROVAL", +"ENTITLEMENT_SUSPENDED" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Default state of the entitlement. It's only set to this value when the entitlement is first created and has not been initialized.", +"Indicates that the entitlement has been created but has not yet become active. The entitlement will remain in this state until it becomes active. If the entitlement requires provider approval, a notification is sent to the provider for the activation approval. If the provider does not approve, the entitlement is removed. If approved, the entitlement transitions to the EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE state after a delay, either a generally short processing delay or, if applicable, until the scheduled start time of the purchased offer. Plan changes are not allowed in this state. Instead, customers are expected to cancel the corresponding order and place a new order.", +"Indicates that the entitlement is active. The procured item is now usable and any associated billing events will start occurring. Entitlements in this state WILL renew. The analogous state for an unexpired but non-renewing entitlement is ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION. In this state, the customer can decide to cancel the entitlement, which would change the state to EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_CANCELLATION, and then EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED. The user can also request a change of plan, which will transition the state to EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE, and then back to EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE.", +"Indicates that the entitlement will expire at the end of its term. This could mean the customer has elected not to renew this entitlement or the customer elected to cancel an entitlement that only expires at term end. The entitlement typically stays in this state if the entitlement/plan allows use of the underlying resource until the end of the current billing cycle. Once the billing cycle completes, the resource will transition to EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_CANCELLED state. The resource cannot be modified during this state.", +"Indicates that the entitlement was cancelled. The entitlement can now be deleted.", +"Indicates that the entitlement is currently active, but there is a pending plan change that is requested by the customer. The entitlement typically stays in this state, if the entitlement/plan requires the completion of the current billing cycle before the plan can be changed. Once the billing cycle completes, the resource will transition to EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE, with its plan changed.", +"Indicates that the entitlement is currently active, but there is a plan change request pending provider approval. If the provider approves the plan change, then the entitlement will transition either to EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE or EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_PENDING_PLAN_CHANGE depending on whether current plan requires that the billing cycle completes. If the provider rejects the plan change, then the pending plan change request is removed and the entitlement stays in EntitlementState.ENTITLEMENT_ACTIVE state with the old plan.", +"Indicates that the entitlement is suspended either by Google or provider request. This can be triggered for various external reasons (e.g. expiration of credit card on the billing account, violation of terms-of-service of the provider etc.). As such, any remediating action needs to be taken externally, before the entitlement can be activated. This is not yet supported." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"subscriptionEndTime": { +"description": "Output only. End time for the subscription corresponding to this entitlement.", +"format": "google-datetime", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"updateTime": { +"description": "Output only. The last update timestamp.", +"format": "google-datetime", +"type": "string" +}, +"usageReportingId": { +"description": "Output only. The consumerId to use when reporting usage through the Service Control API. See the consumerId field at [Reporting Metrics](https://cloud.google.com/service-control/reporting-metrics) for more details. This field is present only if the product has usage-based billing configured.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"ListAccountsResponse": { +"description": "Response message for [PartnerProcurementService.ListAccounts[].", +"id": "ListAccountsResponse", +"properties": { +"accounts": { +"description": "The list of accounts in this response.", +"items": { +"$ref": "Account" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"nextPageToken": { +"description": "The token for fetching the next page.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"ListEntitlementsResponse": { +"description": "Response message for PartnerProcurementService.ListEntitlements.", +"id": "ListEntitlementsResponse", +"properties": { +"entitlements": { +"description": "The list of entitlements in this response.", +"items": { +"$ref": "Entitlement" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"nextPageToken": { +"description": "The token for fetching the next page.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"RejectAccountRequest": { +"description": "Request message for PartnerProcurementService.RejectAccount.", +"id": "RejectAccountRequest", +"properties": { +"approvalName": { +"description": "The name of the approval being rejected. If absent and there is only one approval possible, that approval will be rejected. If absent and there are many approvals possible, the request will fail with a 400 Bad Request. Optional.", +"type": "string" +}, +"reason": { +"description": "Free form text string explaining the rejection reason. Max allowed length: 256 bytes. Longer strings will be truncated.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"RejectEntitlementPlanChangeRequest": { +"description": "Request message for PartnerProcurementService.RejectEntitlementPlanChange.", +"id": "RejectEntitlementPlanChangeRequest", +"properties": { +"pendingPlanName": { +"description": "Required. Name of the pending plan that is being rejected.", +"type": "string" +}, +"reason": { +"description": "Free form text string explaining the rejection reason. Max allowed length: 256 bytes. Longer strings will be truncated.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"RejectEntitlementRequest": { +"description": "Request message for PartnerProcurementService.RejectEntitlement.", +"id": "RejectEntitlementRequest", +"properties": { +"reason": { +"description": "Free form text string explaining the rejection reason. Max allowed length: 256 bytes. Longer strings will be truncated.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"ResetAccountRequest": { +"description": "Request message for PartnerProcurementService.ResetAccount.", +"id": "ResetAccountRequest", +"properties": {}, +"type": "object" +}, +"SuspendEntitlementRequest": { +"description": "Request message for ParterProcurementService.SuspendEntitlement. This is not yet supported.", +"id": "SuspendEntitlementRequest", +"properties": { +"reason": { +"description": "A free-form reason string, explaining the reason for suspension request.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +} +}, +"servicePath": "", +"title": "Cloud Commerce Partner Procurement API", +"version": "v1", +"version_module": true } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudfunctions.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudfunctions.v1.json index ff89d8de3af..134cdc8a9c2 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudfunctions.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudfunctions.v1.json @@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -558,7 +558,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250814", +"revision": "20250908", "rootUrl": "https://cloudfunctions.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuditConfig": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudfunctions.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudfunctions.v2.json index 8223ce4f949..5bd25d29fa1 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudfunctions.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudfunctions.v2.json @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -750,7 +750,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250814", +"revision": "20250908", "rootUrl": "https://cloudfunctions.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AbortFunctionUpgradeRequest": { @@ -2140,6 +2140,7 @@ "enum": [ "UPGRADE_STATE_UNSPECIFIED", "ELIGIBLE_FOR_2ND_GEN_UPGRADE", +"INELIGIBLE_FOR_UPGRADE_UNTIL_REDEPLOYMENT", "UPGRADE_OPERATION_IN_PROGRESS", "SETUP_FUNCTION_UPGRADE_CONFIG_SUCCESSFUL", "SETUP_FUNCTION_UPGRADE_CONFIG_ERROR", @@ -2151,7 +2152,8 @@ ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Unspecified state. Most functions are in this upgrade state.", -"Functions in this state are eligible for 1st Gen -> 2nd Gen upgrade.", +"Functions in this state are eligible for 1st Gen upgrade.", +"Functions in this state are ineligible for 1st Gen upgrade until redeployment with newer runtime.", "An upgrade related operation is in progress.", "SetupFunctionUpgradeConfig API was successful and a 2nd Gen function has been created based on 1st Gen function instance.", "SetupFunctionUpgradeConfig API was un-successful.", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudfunctions.v2alpha.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudfunctions.v2alpha.json index 551bd7f12e5..9ed71c27552 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudfunctions.v2alpha.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudfunctions.v2alpha.json @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -750,7 +750,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250814", +"revision": "20250908", "rootUrl": "https://cloudfunctions.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AbortFunctionUpgradeRequest": { @@ -2140,6 +2140,7 @@ "enum": [ "UPGRADE_STATE_UNSPECIFIED", "ELIGIBLE_FOR_2ND_GEN_UPGRADE", +"INELIGIBLE_FOR_UPGRADE_UNTIL_REDEPLOYMENT", "UPGRADE_OPERATION_IN_PROGRESS", "SETUP_FUNCTION_UPGRADE_CONFIG_SUCCESSFUL", "SETUP_FUNCTION_UPGRADE_CONFIG_ERROR", @@ -2151,7 +2152,8 @@ ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Unspecified state. Most functions are in this upgrade state.", -"Functions in this state are eligible for 1st Gen -> 2nd Gen upgrade.", +"Functions in this state are eligible for 1st Gen upgrade.", +"Functions in this state are ineligible for 1st Gen upgrade until redeployment with newer runtime.", "An upgrade related operation is in progress.", "SetupFunctionUpgradeConfig API was successful and a 2nd Gen function has been created based on 1st Gen function instance.", "SetupFunctionUpgradeConfig API was un-successful.", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudfunctions.v2beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudfunctions.v2beta.json index c3f624de4e9..5bc7cd67038 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudfunctions.v2beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudfunctions.v2beta.json @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -750,7 +750,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250814", +"revision": "20250908", "rootUrl": "https://cloudfunctions.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AbortFunctionUpgradeRequest": { @@ -2140,6 +2140,7 @@ "enum": [ "UPGRADE_STATE_UNSPECIFIED", "ELIGIBLE_FOR_2ND_GEN_UPGRADE", +"INELIGIBLE_FOR_UPGRADE_UNTIL_REDEPLOYMENT", "UPGRADE_OPERATION_IN_PROGRESS", "SETUP_FUNCTION_UPGRADE_CONFIG_SUCCESSFUL", "SETUP_FUNCTION_UPGRADE_CONFIG_ERROR", @@ -2151,7 +2152,8 @@ ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Unspecified state. Most functions are in this upgrade state.", -"Functions in this state are eligible for 1st Gen -> 2nd Gen upgrade.", +"Functions in this state are eligible for 1st Gen upgrade.", +"Functions in this state are ineligible for 1st Gen upgrade until redeployment with newer runtime.", "An upgrade related operation is in progress.", "SetupFunctionUpgradeConfig API was successful and a 2nd Gen function has been created based on 1st Gen function instance.", "SetupFunctionUpgradeConfig API was un-successful.", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudlocationfinder.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudlocationfinder.v1.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c5b4e833617 --- /dev/null +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudlocationfinder.v1.json @@ -0,0 +1,472 @@ +{ +"auth": { +"oauth2": { +"scopes": { +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform": { +"description": "See, edit, configure, and delete your Google Cloud data and see the email address for your Google Account." +} +} +} +}, +"basePath": "", +"baseUrl": "https://cloudlocationfinder.googleapis.com/", +"batchPath": "batch", +"canonicalName": "Cloud Location Finder", +"description": "", +"discoveryVersion": "v1", +"documentationLink": "https://cloud.google.com/location-finder/docs", +"fullyEncodeReservedExpansion": true, +"icons": { +"x16": "http://www.google.com/images/icons/product/search-16.gif", +"x32": "http://www.google.com/images/icons/product/search-32.gif" +}, +"id": "cloudlocationfinder:v1", +"kind": "discovery#restDescription", +"mtlsRootUrl": "https://cloudlocationfinder.mtls.googleapis.com/", +"name": "cloudlocationfinder", +"ownerDomain": "google.com", +"ownerName": "Google", +"parameters": { +"$.xgafv": { +"description": "V1 error format.", +"enum": [ +"1", +"2" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"v1 error format", +"v2 error format" +], +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"access_token": { +"description": "OAuth access token.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"alt": { +"default": "json", +"description": "Data format for response.", +"enum": [ +"json", +"media", +"proto" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Responses with Content-Type of application/json", +"Media download with context-dependent Content-Type", +"Responses with Content-Type of application/x-protobuf" +], +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"callback": { +"description": "JSONP", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"fields": { +"description": "Selector specifying which fields to include in a partial response.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"key": { +"description": "API key. Your API key identifies your project and provides you with API access, quota, and reports. Required unless you provide an OAuth 2.0 token.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"oauth_token": { +"description": "OAuth 2.0 token for the current user.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"prettyPrint": { +"default": "true", +"description": "Returns response with indentations and line breaks.", +"location": "query", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"quotaUser": { +"description": "Available to use for quota purposes for server-side applications. Can be any arbitrary string assigned to a user, but should not exceed 40 characters.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"uploadType": { +"description": "Legacy upload protocol for media (e.g. \"media\", \"multipart\").", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"upload_protocol": { +"description": "Upload protocol for media (e.g. \"raw\", \"multipart\").", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"protocol": "rest", +"resources": { +"projects": { +"resources": { +"locations": { +"methods": { +"get": { +"description": "Gets information about a location.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "cloudlocationfinder.projects.locations.get", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Resource name for the location.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}", +"response": { +"$ref": "Location" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"list": { +"description": "Lists information about the supported locations for this service.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "cloudlocationfinder.projects.locations.list", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"extraLocationTypes": { +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", +"location": "query", +"repeated": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"filter": { +"description": "A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `\"displayName=tokyo\"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160).", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"name": { +"description": "The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"pageSize": { +"description": "The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default.", +"format": "int32", +"location": "query", +"type": "integer" +}, +"pageToken": { +"description": "A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}/locations", +"response": { +"$ref": "ListLocationsResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +} +}, +"resources": { +"cloudLocations": { +"methods": { +"get": { +"description": "Retrieves a resource containing information about a cloud location.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/cloudLocations/{cloudLocationsId}", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "cloudlocationfinder.projects.locations.cloudLocations.get", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. Name of the resource.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/cloudLocations/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}", +"response": { +"$ref": "CloudLocation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"list": { +"description": "Lists cloud locations under a given project and location.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/cloudLocations", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "cloudlocationfinder.projects.locations.cloudLocations.list", +"parameterOrder": [ +"parent" +], +"parameters": { +"filter": { +"description": "Optional. A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. The expression is in the form of field=value. For example, 'cloud_location_type=CLOUD_LOCATION_TYPE_REGION'. Multiple filter queries are space-separated. For example, 'cloud_location_type=CLOUD_LOCATION_TYPE_REGION territory_code=\"US\"' By default, each expression is an AND expression. However, you can include AND and OR expressions explicitly.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"pageSize": { +"description": "Optional. The maximum number of cloud locations to return per page. The service might return fewer cloud locations than this value. If unspecified, server will pick an appropriate default.", +"format": "int32", +"location": "query", +"type": "integer" +}, +"pageToken": { +"description": "Optional. A token identifying a page of results the server should return. Provide page token returned by a previous 'ListCloudLocations' call to retrieve the next page of results. When paginating, all other parameters provided to 'ListCloudLocations' must match the call that provided the page token.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"parent": { +"description": "Required. The parent, which owns this collection of cloud locations. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+parent}/cloudLocations", +"response": { +"$ref": "ListCloudLocationsResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"search": { +"description": "Searches for cloud locations from a given source location.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/cloudLocations:search", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "cloudlocationfinder.projects.locations.cloudLocations.search", +"parameterOrder": [ +"parent" +], +"parameters": { +"pageSize": { +"description": "Optional. The maximum number of cloud locations to return. The service might return fewer cloud locations than this value. If unspecified, server will pick an appropriate default.", +"format": "int32", +"location": "query", +"type": "integer" +}, +"pageToken": { +"description": "Optional. A token identifying a page of results the server should return. Provide Page token returned by a previous 'ListCloudLocations' call to retrieve the next page of results. When paginating, all other parameters provided to 'ListCloudLocations' must match the call that provided the page token.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"parent": { +"description": "Required. The parent, which owns this collection of cloud locations. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"query": { +"description": "Optional. The query string in search query syntax. While filter is used to filter the search results by attributes, query is used to specify the search requirements.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"sourceCloudLocation": { +"description": "Required. The source cloud location to search from. Example search can be searching nearby cloud locations from the source cloud location by latency.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+parent}/cloudLocations:search", +"response": { +"$ref": "SearchCloudLocationsResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +} +} +} +} +} +} +} +}, +"revision": "20250905", +"rootUrl": "https://cloudlocationfinder.googleapis.com/", +"schemas": { +"CloudLocation": { +"description": "Represents resource cloud locations.", +"id": "CloudLocation", +"properties": { +"carbonFreeEnergyPercentage": { +"description": "Optional. The carbon free energy percentage of the cloud location. This represents the average percentage of time customers' application will be running on carbon-free energy. See https://cloud.google.com/sustainability/region-carbon for more details. There is a difference between default value 0 and unset value. 0 means the carbon free energy percentage is 0%, while unset value means the carbon footprint data is not available.", +"format": "float", +"type": "number" +}, +"cloudLocationType": { +"description": "Optional. The type of the cloud location.", +"enum": [ +"CLOUD_LOCATION_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED", +"CLOUD_LOCATION_TYPE_REGION", +"CLOUD_LOCATION_TYPE_ZONE", +"CLOUD_LOCATION_TYPE_REGION_EXTENSION", +"CLOUD_LOCATION_TYPE_GDCC_ZONE" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unspecified type.", +"CloudLocation type for region.", +"CloudLocation type for zone.", +"CloudLocation type for region extension.", +"CloudLocation type for Google Distributed Cloud Connected Zone." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"cloudProvider": { +"description": "Optional. The provider of the cloud location. Values can be Google Cloud or third-party providers, including AWS, Azure, or Oracle Cloud Infrastructure.", +"enum": [ +"CLOUD_PROVIDER_UNSPECIFIED", +"CLOUD_PROVIDER_GCP", +"CLOUD_PROVIDER_AWS", +"CLOUD_PROVIDER_AZURE", +"CLOUD_PROVIDER_OCI" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unspecified type.", +"Cloud provider type for Google Cloud.", +"Cloud provider type for AWS.", +"Cloud provider type for Azure.", +"Cloud provider type for OCI." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"containingCloudLocation": { +"description": "Output only. The containing cloud location in the strict nesting hierarchy. For example, the containing cloud location of a zone is a region.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"displayName": { +"description": "Optional. The human-readable name of the cloud location. Example: us-east-2, us-east1.", +"type": "string" +}, +"name": { +"description": "Identifier. Name of the cloud location. Unique name of the cloud location including project and location using the form: `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location}/cloudLocations/{cloud_location}`", +"type": "string" +}, +"territoryCode": { +"description": "Optional. The two-letter ISO 3166-1 alpha-2 code of the cloud location. Examples: US, JP, KR.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"ListCloudLocationsResponse": { +"description": "Message for response to listing cloud locations.", +"id": "ListCloudLocationsResponse", +"properties": { +"cloudLocations": { +"description": "Output only. List of cloud locations.", +"items": { +"$ref": "CloudLocation" +}, +"readOnly": true, +"type": "array" +}, +"nextPageToken": { +"description": "Output only. The continuation token, used to page through large result sets. Provide this value in a subsequent request as page_token in subsequent requests to retrieve the next page. If this field is not present, there are no subsequent results.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"ListLocationsResponse": { +"description": "The response message for Locations.ListLocations.", +"id": "ListLocationsResponse", +"properties": { +"locations": { +"description": "A list of locations that matches the specified filter in the request.", +"items": { +"$ref": "Location" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"nextPageToken": { +"description": "The standard List next-page token.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"Location": { +"description": "A resource that represents a Google Cloud location.", +"id": "Location", +"properties": { +"displayName": { +"description": "The friendly name for this location, typically a nearby city name. For example, \"Tokyo\".", +"type": "string" +}, +"labels": { +"additionalProperties": { +"type": "string" +}, +"description": "Cross-service attributes for the location. For example {\"cloud.googleapis.com/region\": \"us-east1\"}", +"type": "object" +}, +"locationId": { +"description": "The canonical id for this location. For example: `\"us-east1\"`.", +"type": "string" +}, +"metadata": { +"additionalProperties": { +"description": "Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.", +"type": "any" +}, +"description": "Service-specific metadata. For example the available capacity at the given location.", +"type": "object" +}, +"name": { +"description": "Resource name for the location, which may vary between implementations. For example: `\"projects/example-project/locations/us-east1\"`", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"SearchCloudLocationsResponse": { +"description": "Message for response to searching cloud locations.", +"id": "SearchCloudLocationsResponse", +"properties": { +"cloudLocations": { +"description": "Output only. List of cloud locations.", +"items": { +"$ref": "CloudLocation" +}, +"readOnly": true, +"type": "array" +}, +"nextPageToken": { +"description": "Output only. The continuation token, used to page through large result sets. Provide this value in a subsequent request as page_token in subsequent requests to retrieve the next page. If this field is not present, there are no subsequent results.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +} +}, +"servicePath": "", +"title": "Cloud Location Finder API", +"version": "v1", +"version_module": true +} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudlocationfinder.v1alpha.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudlocationfinder.v1alpha.json index c0140e50355..b5b9abdafa3 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudlocationfinder.v1alpha.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudlocationfinder.v1alpha.json @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250814", +"revision": "20250905", "rootUrl": "https://cloudlocationfinder.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "CloudLocation": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.alpha.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.alpha.json index 53ecc9f607d..79a020101f4 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.alpha.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.alpha.json @@ -1246,6 +1246,72 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" ] }, +"aggregatedList": { +"description": "Retrieves the list of all BackendBucket resources, regional and global, available to the specified project. To prevent failure, Google recommends that you set the `returnPartialSuccess` parameter to `true`.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/aggregated/backendBuckets", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "compute.backendBuckets.aggregatedList", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project" +], +"parameters": { +"filter": { +"description": "A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. These two types of filter expressions cannot be mixed in one request. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `>`, `<`, `<=`, `>=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") OR (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Broadwell\") AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq 'single quoted literal'` `fieldname eq \"double quoted literal\"` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne \"literal\")` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name \"instance\", you would use `name ne .*instance`. You cannot combine constraints on multiple fields using regular expressions.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"includeAllScopes": { +"description": "Indicates whether every visible scope for each scope type (zone, region, global) should be included in the response. For new resource types added after this field, the flag has no effect as new resource types will always include every visible scope for each scope type in response. For resource types which predate this field, if this flag is omitted or false, only scopes of the scope types where the resource type is expected to be found will be included.", +"location": "query", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"maxResults": { +"default": "500", +"description": "The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)", +"format": "uint32", +"location": "query", +"minimum": "0", +"type": "integer" +}, +"orderBy": { +"description": "Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy=\"creationTimestamp desc\"`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"pageToken": { +"description": "Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"project": { +"description": "Name of the project scoping this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"returnPartialSuccess": { +"description": "Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false. For example, when partial success behavior is enabled, aggregatedList for a single zone scope either returns all resources in the zone or no resources, with an error code.", +"location": "query", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"serviceProjectNumber": { +"description": "The Shared VPC service project id or service project number for which aggregated list request is invoked for subnetworks list-usable api.", +"format": "int64", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/aggregated/backendBuckets", +"response": { +"$ref": "BackendBucketAggregatedList" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" +] +}, "delete": { "description": "Deletes the specified BackendBucket resource.", "flatPath": "projects/{project}/global/backendBuckets/{backendBucket}", @@ -3963,6 +4029,52 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" ] }, +"updateKmskey": { +"description": "Rotates the customer-managed encryption key to the latest version for the specified persistent disk.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/zones/{zone}/disks/{disk}/updateKmsKey", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "compute.disks.updateKmskey", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"zone", +"disk" +], +"parameters": { +"disk": { +"description": "Name of the Disk resource, should conform to RFC1035.", +"location": "path", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"requestId": { +"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"zone": { +"description": "The name of the zone for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/zones/{zone}/disks/{disk}/updateKmsKey", +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" +] +}, "waitForReplicationCatchUp": { "description": "Wait for replication to catch up on the secondary disk.", "flatPath": "projects/{project}/zones/{zone}/disks/{disk}/waitForReplicationCatchUp", @@ -4434,7 +4546,7 @@ }, "forceStartProgressiveRollout": { "description": "Starts a brand new progressive rollout of hierarchical firewall policy. This API will return an error when there is an ongoing progressive rollout.", -"flatPath": "locations/global/firewallPolicies/{firewallPoliciesId}/forceStartProgressiveRollout", +"flatPath": "locations/global/firewallPolicies/{firewallPolicy}/forceStartProgressiveRollout", "httpMethod": "POST", "id": "compute.firewallPolicies.forceStartProgressiveRollout", "parameterOrder": [ @@ -4449,7 +4561,7 @@ "type": "string" } }, -"path": "locations/global/{+firewallPolicy}/forceStartProgressiveRollout", +"path": "locations/global/firewallPolicies/{firewallPolicy}/forceStartProgressiveRollout", "response": { "$ref": "Operation" }, @@ -4701,6 +4813,11 @@ "httpMethod": "GET", "id": "compute.firewallPolicies.listAssociations", "parameters": { +"includeInheritedPolicies": { +"description": "If set to \"true\", the response will contain a list of all associations for the containing folders and the containing organization of the target. The parameter has no effect if the target is an organization.", +"location": "query", +"type": "boolean" +}, "targetResource": { "description": "The target resource to list associations. It is an organization, or a folder.", "location": "query", @@ -6467,6 +6584,100 @@ } } }, +"globalFolderOperations": { +"methods": { +"get": { +"description": "Retrieves the specified Operations resource.", +"flatPath": "folders/{foldersId}/global/operations/{operation}", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "compute.globalFolderOperations.get", +"parameterOrder": [ +"folder", +"operation" +], +"parameters": { +"folder": { +"description": "Folder ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "folders/[0-9]{0,20}", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"operation": { +"description": "Name of the Operations resource to return.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "{+folder}/global/operations/{operation}", +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" +] +}, +"list": { +"description": "Retrieves a list of Operation resources contained within the specified folder.", +"flatPath": "folders/{foldersId}/global/operations", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "compute.globalFolderOperations.list", +"parameterOrder": [ +"folder" +], +"parameters": { +"filter": { +"description": "A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. These two types of filter expressions cannot be mixed in one request. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `>`, `<`, `<=`, `>=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") OR (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Broadwell\") AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq 'single quoted literal'` `fieldname eq \"double quoted literal\"` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne \"literal\")` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name \"instance\", you would use `name ne .*instance`. You cannot combine constraints on multiple fields using regular expressions.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"folder": { +"description": "Folder ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "folders/[0-9]{0,20}", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"maxResults": { +"default": "500", +"description": "The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)", +"format": "uint32", +"location": "query", +"minimum": "0", +"type": "integer" +}, +"orderBy": { +"description": "Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy=\"creationTimestamp desc\"`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"pageToken": { +"description": "Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"returnPartialSuccess": { +"description": "Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false. For example, when partial success behavior is enabled, aggregatedList for a single zone scope either returns all resources in the zone or no resources, with an error code.", +"location": "query", +"type": "boolean" +} +}, +"path": "{+folder}/global/operations", +"response": { +"$ref": "OperationList" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" +] +} +} +}, "globalForwardingRules": { "methods": { "delete": { @@ -7651,69 +7862,87 @@ } } }, -"haControllers": { +"globalVmExtensionPolicies": { "methods": { -"delete": { -"description": "Deletes an HaController in the specified project.", -"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/haControllers/{haController}", -"httpMethod": "DELETE", -"id": "compute.haControllers.delete", +"aggregatedList": { +"description": "Retrieves the list of all VM Extension Policy resources available to the specified project. To prevent failure, it's recommended that you set the `returnPartialSuccess` parameter to `true`.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/aggregated/vmExtensionPolicies", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "compute.globalVmExtensionPolicies.aggregatedList", "parameterOrder": [ -"project", -"region", -"haController" +"project" ], "parameters": { -"haController": { -"description": "Name of the HaController resource to delete.", -"location": "path", -"required": true, +"filter": { +"description": "A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. These two types of filter expressions cannot be mixed in one request. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `>`, `<`, `<=`, `>=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") OR (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Broadwell\") AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq 'single quoted literal'` `fieldname eq \"double quoted literal\"` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne \"literal\")` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name \"instance\", you would use `name ne .*instance`. You cannot combine constraints on multiple fields using regular expressions.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"includeAllScopes": { +"description": "Indicates whether every visible scope for each scope type (zone, region, global) should be included in the response. For new resource types added after this field, the flag has no effect as new resource types will always include every visible scope for each scope type in response. For resource types which predate this field, if this flag is omitted or false, only scopes of the scope types where the resource type is expected to be found will be included.", +"location": "query", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"maxResults": { +"default": "500", +"description": "The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)", +"format": "uint32", +"location": "query", +"minimum": "0", +"type": "integer" +}, +"orderBy": { +"description": "Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy=\"creationTimestamp desc\"`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"pageToken": { +"description": "Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.", +"location": "query", "type": "string" }, "project": { -"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"description": "Name of the project scoping this request.", "location": "path", "pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", "required": true, "type": "string" }, -"region": { -"description": "Name of the region for this request.", -"location": "path", -"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", -"required": true, -"type": "string" +"returnPartialSuccess": { +"description": "Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false. For example, when partial success behavior is enabled, aggregatedList for a single zone scope either returns all resources in the zone or no resources, with an error code.", +"location": "query", +"type": "boolean" }, -"requestId": { -"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed.", +"serviceProjectNumber": { +"description": "The Shared VPC service project id or service project number for which aggregated list request is invoked for subnetworks list-usable api.", +"format": "int64", "location": "query", "type": "string" } }, -"path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/haControllers/{haController}", +"path": "projects/{project}/aggregated/vmExtensionPolicies", "response": { -"$ref": "Operation" +"$ref": "VmExtensionPolicyAggregatedListResponse" }, "scopes": [ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", -"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" ] }, -"failover": { -"description": "Fails over a VM targeted by the specified HaController to the selected zone.", -"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/haControllers/{haController}/failover", -"httpMethod": "POST", -"id": "compute.haControllers.failover", +"delete": { +"description": "Purge scoped resources (zonal policies) from a global VM extension policy, and then delete the global VM extension policy. Purge of the scoped resources is a pre-condition of the global VM extension policy deletion. The deletion of the global VM extension policy happens after the purge rollout is done, so it's not a part of the LRO. It's an automatic process that triggers in the backend.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/global/vmExtensionPolicies/{globalVmExtensionPolicy}", +"httpMethod": "PATCH", +"id": "compute.globalVmExtensionPolicies.delete", "parameterOrder": [ "project", -"region", -"haController" +"globalVmExtensionPolicy" ], "parameters": { -"haController": { -"description": "ID of the HaController resource to update.", +"globalVmExtensionPolicy": { +"description": "Name of the global VM extension policy to purge scoped resources for.", "location": "path", -"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", "required": true, "type": "string" }, @@ -7724,23 +7953,43 @@ "required": true, "type": "string" }, -"region": { -"description": "Name of the region for this request.", -"location": "path", -"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", -"required": true, +"requestId": { +"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", +"location": "query", "type": "string" }, -"requestId": { -"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed.", +"rolloutInput.conflictBehavior": { +"description": "Optional. [Optional] Specifies the behavior of the Rollout if a conflict is detected in a project during a Rollout. It can be one of the following values: 1) empty : don't overwrite the local value if conflict happens. This is the default behavior. 2) \"overwrite\" : Overwrite the local value with the rollout value. The concept of \"conflict\" applies to: 1) Insert action. If the zonal policy already exists when Insert happens, it's a conflict. 2) Update action. If the zonal policy was updated out of band by a zonal API, it's a conflict.", "location": "query", "type": "string" -} }, -"path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/haControllers/{haController}/failover", -"request": { -"$ref": "HaControllersFailoverRequest" +"rolloutInput.name": { +"description": "Optional. The name of the rollout plan. Ex. projects//locations/global/rolloutPlans/.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"rolloutInput.predefinedRolloutPlan": { +"description": "Optional. Predefined rollout plan.", +"enum": [ +"FAST_ROLLOUT", +"ROLLOUT_PLAN_UNSPECIFIED", +"SLOW_ROLLOUT" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"", +"", +"" +], +"location": "query", +"type": "string" }, +"rolloutInput.retryUuid": { +"description": "Optional. The UUID of the retry action. Only set it if this is a retry for an existing resource. This is for the user re-populate the resource without changes. An error will be returned if the retry_uuid is set but the resource get modified.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/global/vmExtensionPolicies/{globalVmExtensionPolicy}", "response": { "$ref": "Operation" }, @@ -7750,18 +7999,17 @@ ] }, "get": { -"description": "Returns all the details of a specific HaController.", -"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/haControllers/{haController}", +"description": "Gets details of a global VM extension policy.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/global/vmExtensionPolicies/{globalVmExtensionPolicy}", "httpMethod": "GET", -"id": "compute.haControllers.get", +"id": "compute.globalVmExtensionPolicies.get", "parameterOrder": [ "project", -"region", -"haController" +"globalVmExtensionPolicy" ], "parameters": { -"haController": { -"description": "Name of the HaController resource to return.", +"globalVmExtensionPolicy": { +"description": "Name of the GlobalVmExtensionPolicy resource to return.", "location": "path", "pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", "required": true, @@ -7773,18 +8021,11 @@ "pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", "required": true, "type": "string" -}, -"region": { -"description": "Name of the region for this request.", -"location": "path", -"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", -"required": true, -"type": "string" } }, -"path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/haControllers/{haController}", +"path": "projects/{project}/global/vmExtensionPolicies/{globalVmExtensionPolicy}", "response": { -"$ref": "HaController" +"$ref": "GlobalVmExtensionPolicy" }, "scopes": [ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", @@ -7793,13 +8034,12 @@ ] }, "insert": { -"description": "Creates HaController in the specified project.", -"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/haControllers", +"description": "Creates a new project level GlobalVmExtensionPolicy.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/global/vmExtensionPolicies", "httpMethod": "POST", -"id": "compute.haControllers.insert", +"id": "compute.globalVmExtensionPolicies.insert", "parameterOrder": [ -"project", -"region" +"project" ], "parameters": { "project": { @@ -7809,22 +8049,15 @@ "required": true, "type": "string" }, -"region": { -"description": "Name of the region for this request.", -"location": "path", -"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", -"required": true, -"type": "string" -}, "requestId": { -"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed.", +"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" } }, -"path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/haControllers", +"path": "projects/{project}/global/vmExtensionPolicies", "request": { -"$ref": "HaController" +"$ref": "GlobalVmExtensionPolicy" }, "response": { "$ref": "Operation" @@ -7835,13 +8068,294 @@ ] }, "list": { -"description": "Lists all HaControllers in the specified project in the specified region.", -"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/haControllers", +"description": "Lists global VM extension policies.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/global/vmExtensionPolicies", "httpMethod": "GET", -"id": "compute.haControllers.list", +"id": "compute.globalVmExtensionPolicies.list", "parameterOrder": [ -"project", -"region" +"project" +], +"parameters": { +"filter": { +"description": "A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. These two types of filter expressions cannot be mixed in one request. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `>`, `<`, `<=`, `>=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") OR (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Broadwell\") AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq 'single quoted literal'` `fieldname eq \"double quoted literal\"` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne \"literal\")` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name \"instance\", you would use `name ne .*instance`. You cannot combine constraints on multiple fields using regular expressions.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"maxResults": { +"default": "500", +"description": "The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)", +"format": "uint32", +"location": "query", +"minimum": "0", +"type": "integer" +}, +"orderBy": { +"description": "Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy=\"creationTimestamp desc\"`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"pageToken": { +"description": "Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"returnPartialSuccess": { +"description": "Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false. For example, when partial success behavior is enabled, aggregatedList for a single zone scope either returns all resources in the zone or no resources, with an error code.", +"location": "query", +"type": "boolean" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/global/vmExtensionPolicies", +"response": { +"$ref": "GlobalVmExtensionPolicyList" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" +] +}, +"update": { +"description": "Updates a global VM extension policy.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/global/vmExtensionPolicies/{globalVmExtensionPolicy}", +"httpMethod": "PATCH", +"id": "compute.globalVmExtensionPolicies.update", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"globalVmExtensionPolicy" +], +"parameters": { +"globalVmExtensionPolicy": { +"description": "Name of the global VM extension policy to update.", +"location": "path", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"requestId": { +"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/global/vmExtensionPolicies/{globalVmExtensionPolicy}", +"request": { +"$ref": "GlobalVmExtensionPolicy" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" +] +} +} +}, +"haControllers": { +"methods": { +"delete": { +"description": "Deletes an HaController in the specified project.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/haControllers/{haController}", +"httpMethod": "DELETE", +"id": "compute.haControllers.delete", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"region", +"haController" +], +"parameters": { +"haController": { +"description": "Name of the HaController resource to delete.", +"location": "path", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"region": { +"description": "Name of the region for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"requestId": { +"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/haControllers/{haController}", +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" +] +}, +"failover": { +"description": "Fails over a VM targeted by the specified HaController to the selected zone.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/haControllers/{haController}/failover", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "compute.haControllers.failover", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"region", +"haController" +], +"parameters": { +"haController": { +"description": "ID of the HaController resource to update.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"region": { +"description": "Name of the region for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"requestId": { +"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/haControllers/{haController}/failover", +"request": { +"$ref": "HaControllersFailoverRequest" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" +] +}, +"get": { +"description": "Returns all the details of a specific HaController.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/haControllers/{haController}", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "compute.haControllers.get", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"region", +"haController" +], +"parameters": { +"haController": { +"description": "Name of the HaController resource to return.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"region": { +"description": "Name of the region for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/haControllers/{haController}", +"response": { +"$ref": "HaController" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" +] +}, +"insert": { +"description": "Creates HaController in the specified project.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/haControllers", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "compute.haControllers.insert", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"region" +], +"parameters": { +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"region": { +"description": "Name of the region for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"requestId": { +"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/haControllers", +"request": { +"$ref": "HaController" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" +] +}, +"list": { +"description": "Lists all HaControllers in the specified project in the specified region.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/haControllers", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "compute.haControllers.list", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"region" ], "parameters": { "filter": { @@ -10042,6 +10556,47 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" ] }, +"getAvailableAcceleratorTopologies": { +"description": "Returns information about available accelerator topologies for a given MIG.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/zones/{zone}/instanceGroupManagers/{resourceId}/getAvailableAcceleratorTopologies", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "compute.instanceGroupManagers.getAvailableAcceleratorTopologies", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"zone", +"resourceId" +], +"parameters": { +"project": { +"description": "Required. Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"resourceId": { +"description": "Required. The name of the managed instance group. It should conform to RFC1035.", +"location": "path", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"zone": { +"description": "Required. The name of the zone where the managed instance group is located. Name should conform to RFC1035.", +"location": "path", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/zones/{zone}/instanceGroupManagers/{resourceId}/getAvailableAcceleratorTopologies", +"response": { +"$ref": "InstanceGroupManagersGetAvailableAcceleratorTopologiesResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" +] +}, "insert": { "description": "Creates a managed instance group using the information that you specify in the request. After the group is created, instances in the group are created using the specified instance template. This operation is marked as DONE when the group is created even if the instances in the group have not yet been created. You must separately verify the status of the individual instances with the listmanagedinstances method. A managed instance group can have up to 1000 VM instances per group. Please contact Cloud Support if you need an increase in this limit.", "flatPath": "projects/{project}/zones/{zone}/instanceGroupManagers", @@ -29095,6 +29650,52 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" ] }, +"updateKmsKey": { +"description": "Rotates the customer-managed encryption key to the latest version for the specified persistent disk.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/disks/{disk}/updateKmsKey", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "compute.regionDisks.updateKmsKey", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"region", +"disk" +], +"parameters": { +"disk": { +"description": "Name of the Disk resource, should conform to RFC1035.", +"location": "path", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"region": { +"description": "The name of the region for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"requestId": { +"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/disks/{disk}/updateKmsKey", +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" +] +}, "waitForReplicationCatchUp": { "description": "Wait for replication to catch up on the secondary disk.", "flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/disks/{disk}/waitForReplicationCatchUp", @@ -35072,13 +35673,113 @@ } } }, -"regionNotificationEndpoints": { +"regionNetworkPolicies": { "methods": { +"addAssociation": { +"description": "Inserts an association for the specified network policy.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/networkPolicies/{networkPolicy}/addAssociation", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "compute.regionNetworkPolicies.addAssociation", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"region", +"networkPolicy" +], +"parameters": { +"networkPolicy": { +"description": "Name of the network policy resource to update.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"region": { +"description": "Name of the region of this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"requestId": { +"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/networkPolicies/{networkPolicy}/addAssociation", +"request": { +"$ref": "NetworkPolicyAssociation" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" +] +}, +"addTrafficClassificationRule": { +"description": "Inserts a rule into a network policy.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/networkPolicies/{networkPolicy}/addTrafficClassificationRule", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "compute.regionNetworkPolicies.addTrafficClassificationRule", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"region", +"networkPolicy" +], +"parameters": { +"networkPolicy": { +"description": "Name of the network policy resource to update.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"region": { +"description": "Name of the region of this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"requestId": { +"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/networkPolicies/{networkPolicy}/addTrafficClassificationRule", +"request": { +"$ref": "NetworkPolicyTrafficClassificationRule" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" +] +}, "aggregatedList": { -"description": "Retrieves the list of all NotificationEndpoint resources, regional and global, available to the specified project.", -"flatPath": "projects/{project}/aggregated/notificationEndpoints", +"description": "Retrieves an aggregated list of network policies. To prevent failure, Google recommends that you set the `returnPartialSuccess` parameter to `true`.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/aggregated/networkPolicies", "httpMethod": "GET", -"id": "compute.regionNotificationEndpoints.aggregatedList", +"id": "compute.regionNetworkPolicies.aggregatedList", "parameterOrder": [ "project" ], @@ -35112,7 +35813,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "project": { -"description": "Name of the project scoping this request.", +"description": "Project ID for this request.", "location": "path", "pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", "required": true, @@ -35130,9 +35831,9 @@ "type": "string" } }, -"path": "projects/{project}/aggregated/notificationEndpoints", +"path": "projects/{project}/aggregated/networkPolicies", "response": { -"$ref": "NotificationEndpointAggregatedList" +"$ref": "NetworkPolicyAggregatedList" }, "scopes": [ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", @@ -35141,18 +35842,18 @@ ] }, "delete": { -"description": "Deletes the specified NotificationEndpoint in the given region", -"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/notificationEndpoints/{notificationEndpoint}", +"description": "Deletes the specified policy.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/networkPolicies/{networkPolicy}", "httpMethod": "DELETE", -"id": "compute.regionNotificationEndpoints.delete", +"id": "compute.regionNetworkPolicies.delete", "parameterOrder": [ "project", "region", -"notificationEndpoint" +"networkPolicy" ], "parameters": { -"notificationEndpoint": { -"description": "Name of the NotificationEndpoint resource to delete.", +"networkPolicy": { +"description": "Name of the network policy resource to delete.", "location": "path", "pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", "required": true, @@ -35166,7 +35867,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "region": { -"description": "Name of the region scoping this request.", +"description": "Name of the region of this request.", "location": "path", "pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", "required": true, @@ -35178,7 +35879,7 @@ "type": "string" } }, -"path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/notificationEndpoints/{notificationEndpoint}", +"path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/networkPolicies/{networkPolicy}", "response": { "$ref": "Operation" }, @@ -35188,18 +35889,18 @@ ] }, "get": { -"description": "Returns the specified NotificationEndpoint resource in the given region.", -"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/notificationEndpoints/{notificationEndpoint}", +"description": "Returns the specified network policy.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/networkPolicies/{networkPolicy}", "httpMethod": "GET", -"id": "compute.regionNotificationEndpoints.get", +"id": "compute.regionNetworkPolicies.get", "parameterOrder": [ "project", "region", -"notificationEndpoint" +"networkPolicy" ], "parameters": { -"notificationEndpoint": { -"description": "Name of the NotificationEndpoint resource to return.", +"networkPolicy": { +"description": "Name of the network policy resource to return.", "location": "path", "pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", "required": true, @@ -35213,16 +35914,113 @@ "type": "string" }, "region": { -"description": "Name of the region scoping this request.", +"description": "Name of the region of this request.", "location": "path", "pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", "required": true, "type": "string" } }, -"path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/notificationEndpoints/{notificationEndpoint}", +"path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/networkPolicies/{networkPolicy}", "response": { -"$ref": "NotificationEndpoint" +"$ref": "NetworkPolicy" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" +] +}, +"getAssociation": { +"description": "Gets an association with the specified name.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/networkPolicies/{networkPolicy}/getAssociation", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "compute.regionNetworkPolicies.getAssociation", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"region", +"networkPolicy" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "The name of the association to get from the network policy.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"networkPolicy": { +"description": "Name of the network policy to which the queried association belongs.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"region": { +"description": "Name of the region of this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/networkPolicies/{networkPolicy}/getAssociation", +"response": { +"$ref": "NetworkPolicyAssociation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" +] +}, +"getTrafficClassificationRule": { +"description": "Gets a rule of the specified priority.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/networkPolicies/{networkPolicy}/getTrafficClassificationRule", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "compute.regionNetworkPolicies.getTrafficClassificationRule", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"region", +"networkPolicy" +], +"parameters": { +"networkPolicy": { +"description": "Name of the network policy to which the queried rule belongs.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"priority": { +"description": "The priority of the rule to get from the network policy.", +"format": "int32", +"location": "query", +"type": "integer" +}, +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"region": { +"description": "Name of the region of this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/networkPolicies/{networkPolicy}/getTrafficClassificationRule", +"response": { +"$ref": "NetworkPolicyTrafficClassificationRule" }, "scopes": [ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", @@ -35231,10 +36029,10 @@ ] }, "insert": { -"description": "Create a NotificationEndpoint in the specified project in the given region using the parameters that are included in the request.", -"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/notificationEndpoints", +"description": "Creates a new policy in the specified project using the data included in the request.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/networkPolicies", "httpMethod": "POST", -"id": "compute.regionNotificationEndpoints.insert", +"id": "compute.regionNetworkPolicies.insert", "parameterOrder": [ "project", "region" @@ -35248,7 +36046,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "region": { -"description": "Name of the region scoping this request.", +"description": "Name of the region of this request.", "location": "path", "pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", "required": true, @@ -35260,9 +36058,9 @@ "type": "string" } }, -"path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/notificationEndpoints", +"path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/networkPolicies", "request": { -"$ref": "NotificationEndpoint" +"$ref": "NetworkPolicy" }, "response": { "$ref": "Operation" @@ -35273,10 +36071,486 @@ ] }, "list": { -"description": "Lists the NotificationEndpoints for a project in the given region.", -"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/notificationEndpoints", +"description": "Lists all the policies that have been configured for the specified project in the given region.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/networkPolicies", "httpMethod": "GET", -"id": "compute.regionNotificationEndpoints.list", +"id": "compute.regionNetworkPolicies.list", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"region" +], +"parameters": { +"filter": { +"description": "A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. These two types of filter expressions cannot be mixed in one request. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `>`, `<`, `<=`, `>=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") OR (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Broadwell\") AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq 'single quoted literal'` `fieldname eq \"double quoted literal\"` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne \"literal\")` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name \"instance\", you would use `name ne .*instance`. You cannot combine constraints on multiple fields using regular expressions.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"maxResults": { +"default": "500", +"description": "The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)", +"format": "uint32", +"location": "query", +"minimum": "0", +"type": "integer" +}, +"orderBy": { +"description": "Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy=\"creationTimestamp desc\"`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"pageToken": { +"description": "Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"region": { +"description": "Name of the region of this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"returnPartialSuccess": { +"description": "Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false. For example, when partial success behavior is enabled, aggregatedList for a single zone scope either returns all resources in the zone or no resources, with an error code.", +"location": "query", +"type": "boolean" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/networkPolicies", +"response": { +"$ref": "NetworkPolicyList" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" +] +}, +"patch": { +"description": "Patches the specified policy with the data included in the request.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/networkPolicies/{networkPolicy}", +"httpMethod": "PATCH", +"id": "compute.regionNetworkPolicies.patch", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"region", +"networkPolicy" +], +"parameters": { +"networkPolicy": { +"description": "Name of the network policy resource to update.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"region": { +"description": "Name of the region of this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"requestId": { +"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/networkPolicies/{networkPolicy}", +"request": { +"$ref": "NetworkPolicy" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" +] +}, +"patchTrafficClassificationRule": { +"description": "Patches a rule of the specified priority.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/networkPolicies/{networkPolicy}/patchTrafficClassificationRule", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "compute.regionNetworkPolicies.patchTrafficClassificationRule", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"region", +"networkPolicy" +], +"parameters": { +"networkPolicy": { +"description": "Name of the network policy resource to update.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"priority": { +"description": "The priority of the rule to patch.", +"format": "int32", +"location": "query", +"type": "integer" +}, +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"region": { +"description": "Name of the region of this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"requestId": { +"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/networkPolicies/{networkPolicy}/patchTrafficClassificationRule", +"request": { +"$ref": "NetworkPolicyTrafficClassificationRule" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" +] +}, +"removeAssociation": { +"description": "Removes an association for the specified network policy.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/networkPolicies/{networkPolicy}/removeAssociation", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "compute.regionNetworkPolicies.removeAssociation", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"region", +"networkPolicy" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Name for the association that will be removed.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"networkPolicy": { +"description": "Name of the network policy resource to update.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"region": { +"description": "Name of the region of this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"requestId": { +"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/networkPolicies/{networkPolicy}/removeAssociation", +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" +] +}, +"removeTrafficClassificationRule": { +"description": "Deletes a rule of the specified priority.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/networkPolicies/{networkPolicy}/removeTrafficClassificationRule", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "compute.regionNetworkPolicies.removeTrafficClassificationRule", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"region", +"networkPolicy" +], +"parameters": { +"networkPolicy": { +"description": "Name of the network policy resource to update.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"priority": { +"description": "The priority of the rule to remove from the network policy.", +"format": "int32", +"location": "query", +"type": "integer" +}, +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"region": { +"description": "Name of the region of this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"requestId": { +"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/networkPolicies/{networkPolicy}/removeTrafficClassificationRule", +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" +] +} +} +}, +"regionNotificationEndpoints": { +"methods": { +"aggregatedList": { +"description": "Retrieves the list of all NotificationEndpoint resources, regional and global, available to the specified project.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/aggregated/notificationEndpoints", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "compute.regionNotificationEndpoints.aggregatedList", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project" +], +"parameters": { +"filter": { +"description": "A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. These two types of filter expressions cannot be mixed in one request. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `>`, `<`, `<=`, `>=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") OR (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Broadwell\") AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq 'single quoted literal'` `fieldname eq \"double quoted literal\"` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne \"literal\")` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name \"instance\", you would use `name ne .*instance`. You cannot combine constraints on multiple fields using regular expressions.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"includeAllScopes": { +"description": "Indicates whether every visible scope for each scope type (zone, region, global) should be included in the response. For new resource types added after this field, the flag has no effect as new resource types will always include every visible scope for each scope type in response. For resource types which predate this field, if this flag is omitted or false, only scopes of the scope types where the resource type is expected to be found will be included.", +"location": "query", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"maxResults": { +"default": "500", +"description": "The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)", +"format": "uint32", +"location": "query", +"minimum": "0", +"type": "integer" +}, +"orderBy": { +"description": "Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy=\"creationTimestamp desc\"`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"pageToken": { +"description": "Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"project": { +"description": "Name of the project scoping this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"returnPartialSuccess": { +"description": "Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false. For example, when partial success behavior is enabled, aggregatedList for a single zone scope either returns all resources in the zone or no resources, with an error code.", +"location": "query", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"serviceProjectNumber": { +"description": "The Shared VPC service project id or service project number for which aggregated list request is invoked for subnetworks list-usable api.", +"format": "int64", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/aggregated/notificationEndpoints", +"response": { +"$ref": "NotificationEndpointAggregatedList" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" +] +}, +"delete": { +"description": "Deletes the specified NotificationEndpoint in the given region", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/notificationEndpoints/{notificationEndpoint}", +"httpMethod": "DELETE", +"id": "compute.regionNotificationEndpoints.delete", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"region", +"notificationEndpoint" +], +"parameters": { +"notificationEndpoint": { +"description": "Name of the NotificationEndpoint resource to delete.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"region": { +"description": "Name of the region scoping this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"requestId": { +"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/notificationEndpoints/{notificationEndpoint}", +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" +] +}, +"get": { +"description": "Returns the specified NotificationEndpoint resource in the given region.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/notificationEndpoints/{notificationEndpoint}", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "compute.regionNotificationEndpoints.get", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"region", +"notificationEndpoint" +], +"parameters": { +"notificationEndpoint": { +"description": "Name of the NotificationEndpoint resource to return.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"region": { +"description": "Name of the region scoping this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/notificationEndpoints/{notificationEndpoint}", +"response": { +"$ref": "NotificationEndpoint" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" +] +}, +"insert": { +"description": "Create a NotificationEndpoint in the specified project in the given region using the parameters that are included in the request.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/notificationEndpoints", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "compute.regionNotificationEndpoints.insert", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"region" +], +"parameters": { +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"region": { +"description": "Name of the region scoping this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"requestId": { +"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/notificationEndpoints", +"request": { +"$ref": "NotificationEndpoint" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" +] +}, +"list": { +"description": "Lists the NotificationEndpoints for a project in the given region.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/notificationEndpoints", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "compute.regionNotificationEndpoints.list", "parameterOrder": [ "project", "region" @@ -36572,6 +37846,53 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" ] +}, +"updateKmsKey": { +"description": "Rotates the customer-managed encryption key to the latest version for the specified snapshot.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/snapshots/{snapshot}/updateKmsKey", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "compute.regionSnapshots.updateKmsKey", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"region", +"snapshot" +], +"parameters": { +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"region": { +"description": "Name of the region for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"requestId": { +"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"snapshot": { +"description": "Name of the snapshot resource to update. Should conform to RFC1035.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/snapshots/{snapshot}/updateKmsKey", +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" +] } } }, @@ -43527,85 +44848,15 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" ] -} -} }, -"sslCertificates": { -"methods": { -"aggregatedList": { -"description": "Retrieves the list of all SslCertificate resources, regional and global, available to the specified project. To prevent failure, Google recommends that you set the `returnPartialSuccess` parameter to `true`.", -"flatPath": "projects/{project}/aggregated/sslCertificates", -"httpMethod": "GET", -"id": "compute.sslCertificates.aggregatedList", -"parameterOrder": [ -"project" -], -"parameters": { -"filter": { -"description": "A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. These two types of filter expressions cannot be mixed in one request. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `>`, `<`, `<=`, `>=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") OR (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Broadwell\") AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq 'single quoted literal'` `fieldname eq \"double quoted literal\"` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne \"literal\")` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name \"instance\", you would use `name ne .*instance`. You cannot combine constraints on multiple fields using regular expressions.", -"location": "query", -"type": "string" -}, -"includeAllScopes": { -"description": "Indicates whether every visible scope for each scope type (zone, region, global) should be included in the response. For new resource types added after this field, the flag has no effect as new resource types will always include every visible scope for each scope type in response. For resource types which predate this field, if this flag is omitted or false, only scopes of the scope types where the resource type is expected to be found will be included.", -"location": "query", -"type": "boolean" -}, -"maxResults": { -"default": "500", -"description": "The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)", -"format": "uint32", -"location": "query", -"minimum": "0", -"type": "integer" -}, -"orderBy": { -"description": "Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy=\"creationTimestamp desc\"`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.", -"location": "query", -"type": "string" -}, -"pageToken": { -"description": "Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.", -"location": "query", -"type": "string" -}, -"project": { -"description": "Name of the project scoping this request.", -"location": "path", -"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", -"required": true, -"type": "string" -}, -"returnPartialSuccess": { -"description": "Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false. For example, when partial success behavior is enabled, aggregatedList for a single zone scope either returns all resources in the zone or no resources, with an error code.", -"location": "query", -"type": "boolean" -}, -"serviceProjectNumber": { -"description": "The Shared VPC service project id or service project number for which aggregated list request is invoked for subnetworks list-usable api.", -"format": "int64", -"location": "query", -"type": "string" -} -}, -"path": "projects/{project}/aggregated/sslCertificates", -"response": { -"$ref": "SslCertificateAggregatedList" -}, -"scopes": [ -"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", -"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", -"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" -] -}, -"delete": { -"description": "Deletes the specified SslCertificate resource.", -"flatPath": "projects/{project}/global/sslCertificates/{sslCertificate}", -"httpMethod": "DELETE", -"id": "compute.sslCertificates.delete", +"updateKmsKey": { +"description": "Rotates the customer-managed encryption key to the latest version for the specified snapshot.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/global/snapshots/{snapshot}/updateKmsKey", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "compute.snapshots.updateKmsKey", "parameterOrder": [ "project", -"sslCertificate" +"snapshot" ], "parameters": { "project": { @@ -43620,84 +44871,15 @@ "location": "query", "type": "string" }, -"sslCertificate": { -"description": "Name of the SslCertificate resource to delete.", -"location": "path", -"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", -"required": true, -"type": "string" -} -}, -"path": "projects/{project}/global/sslCertificates/{sslCertificate}", -"response": { -"$ref": "Operation" -}, -"scopes": [ -"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", -"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" -] -}, -"get": { -"description": "Returns the specified SslCertificate resource.", -"flatPath": "projects/{project}/global/sslCertificates/{sslCertificate}", -"httpMethod": "GET", -"id": "compute.sslCertificates.get", -"parameterOrder": [ -"project", -"sslCertificate" -], -"parameters": { -"project": { -"description": "Project ID for this request.", -"location": "path", -"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", -"required": true, -"type": "string" -}, -"sslCertificate": { -"description": "Name of the SslCertificate resource to return.", +"snapshot": { +"description": "Name of the snapshot resource to update. Should conform to RFC1035.", "location": "path", "pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", "required": true, "type": "string" } }, -"path": "projects/{project}/global/sslCertificates/{sslCertificate}", -"response": { -"$ref": "SslCertificate" -}, -"scopes": [ -"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", -"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", -"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" -] -}, -"insert": { -"description": "Creates a SslCertificate resource in the specified project using the data included in the request.", -"flatPath": "projects/{project}/global/sslCertificates", -"httpMethod": "POST", -"id": "compute.sslCertificates.insert", -"parameterOrder": [ -"project" -], -"parameters": { -"project": { -"description": "Project ID for this request.", -"location": "path", -"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", -"required": true, -"type": "string" -}, -"requestId": { -"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", -"location": "query", -"type": "string" -} -}, -"path": "projects/{project}/global/sslCertificates", -"request": { -"$ref": "SslCertificate" -}, +"path": "projects/{project}/global/snapshots/{snapshot}/updateKmsKey", "response": { "$ref": "Operation" }, @@ -43705,109 +44887,287 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" ] -}, -"list": { -"description": "Retrieves the list of SslCertificate resources available to the specified project.", -"flatPath": "projects/{project}/global/sslCertificates", -"httpMethod": "GET", -"id": "compute.sslCertificates.list", -"parameterOrder": [ -"project" -], -"parameters": { -"filter": { -"description": "A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. These two types of filter expressions cannot be mixed in one request. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `>`, `<`, `<=`, `>=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") OR (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Broadwell\") AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq 'single quoted literal'` `fieldname eq \"double quoted literal\"` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne \"literal\")` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name \"instance\", you would use `name ne .*instance`. You cannot combine constraints on multiple fields using regular expressions.", -"location": "query", -"type": "string" -}, -"maxResults": { -"default": "500", -"description": "The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)", -"format": "uint32", -"location": "query", -"minimum": "0", -"type": "integer" -}, -"orderBy": { -"description": "Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy=\"creationTimestamp desc\"`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.", -"location": "query", -"type": "string" -}, -"pageToken": { -"description": "Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.", -"location": "query", -"type": "string" -}, -"project": { -"description": "Project ID for this request.", -"location": "path", -"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", -"required": true, -"type": "string" -}, -"returnPartialSuccess": { -"description": "Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false. For example, when partial success behavior is enabled, aggregatedList for a single zone scope either returns all resources in the zone or no resources, with an error code.", -"location": "query", -"type": "boolean" -} -}, -"path": "projects/{project}/global/sslCertificates", -"response": { -"$ref": "SslCertificateList" -}, -"scopes": [ -"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", -"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", -"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" -] -}, -"testIamPermissions": { -"description": "Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource.", -"flatPath": "projects/{project}/global/sslCertificates/{resource}/testIamPermissions", -"httpMethod": "POST", -"id": "compute.sslCertificates.testIamPermissions", -"parameterOrder": [ -"project", -"resource" -], -"parameters": { -"project": { -"description": "Project ID for this request.", -"location": "path", -"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", -"required": true, -"type": "string" -}, -"resource": { -"description": "Name or id of the resource for this request.", -"location": "path", -"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9_]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", -"required": true, -"type": "string" -} -}, -"path": "projects/{project}/global/sslCertificates/{resource}/testIamPermissions", -"request": { -"$ref": "TestPermissionsRequest" -}, -"response": { -"$ref": "TestPermissionsResponse" -}, -"scopes": [ -"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", -"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", -"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" -] } } }, -"sslPolicies": { +"sslCertificates": { "methods": { "aggregatedList": { -"description": "Retrieves the list of all SslPolicy resources, regional and global, available to the specified project. To prevent failure, Google recommends that you set the `returnPartialSuccess` parameter to `true`.", -"flatPath": "projects/{project}/aggregated/sslPolicies", +"description": "Retrieves the list of all SslCertificate resources, regional and global, available to the specified project. To prevent failure, Google recommends that you set the `returnPartialSuccess` parameter to `true`.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/aggregated/sslCertificates", "httpMethod": "GET", -"id": "compute.sslPolicies.aggregatedList", +"id": "compute.sslCertificates.aggregatedList", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project" +], +"parameters": { +"filter": { +"description": "A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. These two types of filter expressions cannot be mixed in one request. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `>`, `<`, `<=`, `>=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") OR (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Broadwell\") AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq 'single quoted literal'` `fieldname eq \"double quoted literal\"` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne \"literal\")` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name \"instance\", you would use `name ne .*instance`. You cannot combine constraints on multiple fields using regular expressions.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"includeAllScopes": { +"description": "Indicates whether every visible scope for each scope type (zone, region, global) should be included in the response. For new resource types added after this field, the flag has no effect as new resource types will always include every visible scope for each scope type in response. For resource types which predate this field, if this flag is omitted or false, only scopes of the scope types where the resource type is expected to be found will be included.", +"location": "query", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"maxResults": { +"default": "500", +"description": "The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)", +"format": "uint32", +"location": "query", +"minimum": "0", +"type": "integer" +}, +"orderBy": { +"description": "Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy=\"creationTimestamp desc\"`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"pageToken": { +"description": "Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"project": { +"description": "Name of the project scoping this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"returnPartialSuccess": { +"description": "Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false. For example, when partial success behavior is enabled, aggregatedList for a single zone scope either returns all resources in the zone or no resources, with an error code.", +"location": "query", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"serviceProjectNumber": { +"description": "The Shared VPC service project id or service project number for which aggregated list request is invoked for subnetworks list-usable api.", +"format": "int64", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/aggregated/sslCertificates", +"response": { +"$ref": "SslCertificateAggregatedList" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" +] +}, +"delete": { +"description": "Deletes the specified SslCertificate resource.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/global/sslCertificates/{sslCertificate}", +"httpMethod": "DELETE", +"id": "compute.sslCertificates.delete", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"sslCertificate" +], +"parameters": { +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"requestId": { +"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"sslCertificate": { +"description": "Name of the SslCertificate resource to delete.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/global/sslCertificates/{sslCertificate}", +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" +] +}, +"get": { +"description": "Returns the specified SslCertificate resource.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/global/sslCertificates/{sslCertificate}", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "compute.sslCertificates.get", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"sslCertificate" +], +"parameters": { +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"sslCertificate": { +"description": "Name of the SslCertificate resource to return.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/global/sslCertificates/{sslCertificate}", +"response": { +"$ref": "SslCertificate" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" +] +}, +"insert": { +"description": "Creates a SslCertificate resource in the specified project using the data included in the request.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/global/sslCertificates", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "compute.sslCertificates.insert", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project" +], +"parameters": { +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"requestId": { +"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/global/sslCertificates", +"request": { +"$ref": "SslCertificate" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" +] +}, +"list": { +"description": "Retrieves the list of SslCertificate resources available to the specified project.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/global/sslCertificates", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "compute.sslCertificates.list", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project" +], +"parameters": { +"filter": { +"description": "A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. These two types of filter expressions cannot be mixed in one request. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `>`, `<`, `<=`, `>=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") OR (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Broadwell\") AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq 'single quoted literal'` `fieldname eq \"double quoted literal\"` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne \"literal\")` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name \"instance\", you would use `name ne .*instance`. You cannot combine constraints on multiple fields using regular expressions.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"maxResults": { +"default": "500", +"description": "The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)", +"format": "uint32", +"location": "query", +"minimum": "0", +"type": "integer" +}, +"orderBy": { +"description": "Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy=\"creationTimestamp desc\"`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"pageToken": { +"description": "Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"returnPartialSuccess": { +"description": "Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false. For example, when partial success behavior is enabled, aggregatedList for a single zone scope either returns all resources in the zone or no resources, with an error code.", +"location": "query", +"type": "boolean" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/global/sslCertificates", +"response": { +"$ref": "SslCertificateList" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" +] +}, +"testIamPermissions": { +"description": "Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/global/sslCertificates/{resource}/testIamPermissions", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "compute.sslCertificates.testIamPermissions", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"resource" +], +"parameters": { +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"resource": { +"description": "Name or id of the resource for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9_]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/global/sslCertificates/{resource}/testIamPermissions", +"request": { +"$ref": "TestPermissionsRequest" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "TestPermissionsResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" +] +} +} +}, +"sslPolicies": { +"methods": { +"aggregatedList": { +"description": "Retrieves the list of all SslPolicy resources, regional and global, available to the specified project. To prevent failure, Google recommends that you set the `returnPartialSuccess` parameter to `true`.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/aggregated/sslPolicies", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "compute.sslPolicies.aggregatedList", "parameterOrder": [ "project" ], @@ -44436,6 +45796,7 @@ "storagePool": { "description": "Name of the storage pool to delete.", "location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", "required": true, "type": "string" }, @@ -51140,7 +52501,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250810", +"revision": "20250902", "rootUrl": "https://compute.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AWSV4Signature": { @@ -54254,153 +55615,23 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, -"BackendBucketCdnPolicy": { -"description": "Message containing Cloud CDN configuration for a backend bucket.", -"id": "BackendBucketCdnPolicy", -"properties": { -"bypassCacheOnRequestHeaders": { -"description": "Bypass the cache when the specified request headers are matched - e.g. Pragma or Authorization headers. Up to 5 headers can be specified. The cache is bypassed for all cdnPolicy.cacheMode settings.", -"items": { -"$ref": "BackendBucketCdnPolicyBypassCacheOnRequestHeader" -}, -"type": "array" -}, -"cacheKeyPolicy": { -"$ref": "BackendBucketCdnPolicyCacheKeyPolicy", -"description": "The CacheKeyPolicy for this CdnPolicy." -}, -"cacheMode": { -"description": "Specifies the cache setting for all responses from this backend. The possible values are: USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS Requires the origin to set valid caching headers to cache content. Responses without these headers will not be cached at Google's edge, and will require a full trip to the origin on every request, potentially impacting performance and increasing load on the origin server. FORCE_CACHE_ALL Cache all content, ignoring any \"private\", \"no-store\" or \"no-cache\" directives in Cache-Control response headers. Warning: this may result in Cloud CDN caching private, per-user (user identifiable) content. CACHE_ALL_STATIC Automatically cache static content, including common image formats, media (video and audio), and web assets (JavaScript and CSS). Requests and responses that are marked as uncacheable, as well as dynamic content (including HTML), will not be cached. If no value is provided for cdnPolicy.cacheMode, it defaults to CACHE_ALL_STATIC.", -"enum": [ -"CACHE_ALL_STATIC", -"FORCE_CACHE_ALL", -"INVALID_CACHE_MODE", -"USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS" -], -"enumDescriptions": [ -"Automatically cache static content, including common image formats, media (video and audio), and web assets (JavaScript and CSS). Requests and responses that are marked as uncacheable, as well as dynamic content (including HTML), will not be cached.", -"Cache all content, ignoring any \"private\", \"no-store\" or \"no-cache\" directives in Cache-Control response headers. Warning: this may result in Cloud CDN caching private, per-user (user identifiable) content.", -"", -"Requires the origin to set valid caching headers to cache content. Responses without these headers will not be cached at Google's edge, and will require a full trip to the origin on every request, potentially impacting performance and increasing load on the origin server." -], -"type": "string" -}, -"clientTtl": { -"description": "Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a \"public\" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a \"public\" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year).", -"format": "int32", -"type": "integer" -}, -"defaultTtl": { -"description": "Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of \"0\" means \"always revalidate\". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL.", -"format": "int32", -"type": "integer" -}, -"maxTtl": { -"description": "Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of \"0\" means \"always revalidate\". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL.", -"format": "int32", -"type": "integer" -}, -"negativeCaching": { -"description": "Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy.", -"type": "boolean" -}, -"negativeCachingPolicy": { -"description": "Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists.", -"items": { -"$ref": "BackendBucketCdnPolicyNegativeCachingPolicy" -}, -"type": "array" -}, -"requestCoalescing": { -"description": "If true then Cloud CDN will combine multiple concurrent cache fill requests into a small number of requests to the origin.", -"type": "boolean" -}, -"serveWhileStale": { -"description": "Serve existing content from the cache (if available) when revalidating content with the origin, or when an error is encountered when refreshing the cache. This setting defines the default \"max-stale\" duration for any cached responses that do not specify a max-stale directive. Stale responses that exceed the TTL configured here will not be served. The default limit (max-stale) is 86400s (1 day), which will allow stale content to be served up to this limit beyond the max-age (or s-maxage) of a cached response. The maximum allowed value is 604800 (1 week). Set this to zero (0) to disable serve-while-stale.", -"format": "int32", -"type": "integer" -}, -"signedUrlCacheMaxAgeSec": { -"description": "Maximum number of seconds the response to a signed URL request will be considered fresh. After this time period, the response will be revalidated before being served. Defaults to 1hr (3600s). When serving responses to signed URL requests, Cloud CDN will internally behave as though all responses from this backend had a \"Cache-Control: public, max-age=[TTL]\" header, regardless of any existing Cache-Control header. The actual headers served in responses will not be altered.", -"format": "int64", -"type": "string" -}, -"signedUrlKeyNames": { -"description": "[Output Only] Names of the keys for signing request URLs.", -"items": { -"type": "string" -}, -"type": "array" -} -}, -"type": "object" -}, -"BackendBucketCdnPolicyBypassCacheOnRequestHeader": { -"description": "Bypass the cache when the specified request headers are present, e.g. Pragma or Authorization headers. Values are case insensitive. The presence of such a header overrides the cache_mode setting.", -"id": "BackendBucketCdnPolicyBypassCacheOnRequestHeader", -"properties": { -"headerName": { -"description": "The header field name to match on when bypassing cache. Values are case-insensitive.", -"type": "string" -} -}, -"type": "object" -}, -"BackendBucketCdnPolicyCacheKeyPolicy": { -"description": "Message containing what to include in the cache key for a request for Cloud CDN.", -"id": "BackendBucketCdnPolicyCacheKeyPolicy", -"properties": { -"includeHttpHeaders": { -"description": "Allows HTTP request headers (by name) to be used in the cache key.", -"items": { -"type": "string" -}, -"type": "array" -}, -"queryStringWhitelist": { -"description": "Names of query string parameters to include in cache keys. Default parameters are always included. '&' and '=' will be percent encoded and not treated as delimiters.", -"items": { -"type": "string" -}, -"type": "array" -} -}, -"type": "object" -}, -"BackendBucketCdnPolicyNegativeCachingPolicy": { -"description": "Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes.", -"id": "BackendBucketCdnPolicyNegativeCachingPolicy", -"properties": { -"code": { -"description": "The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once.", -"format": "int32", -"type": "integer" -}, -"ttl": { -"description": "The TTL (in seconds) for which to cache responses with the corresponding status code. The maximum allowed value is 1800s (30 minutes), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL.", -"format": "int32", -"type": "integer" -} -}, -"type": "object" -}, -"BackendBucketList": { -"description": "Contains a list of BackendBucket resources.", -"id": "BackendBucketList", +"BackendBucketAggregatedList": { +"id": "BackendBucketAggregatedList", "properties": { "id": { "description": "[Output Only] Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.", "type": "string" }, "items": { -"description": "A list of BackendBucket resources.", -"items": { -"$ref": "BackendBucket" +"additionalProperties": { +"$ref": "BackendBucketsScopedList", +"description": "Name of the scope containing this set of BackendBuckets." }, -"type": "array" +"description": "A list of BackendBucketsScopedList resources.", +"type": "object" }, "kind": { -"default": "compute#backendBucketList", +"default": "compute#backendBucketAggregatedList", "description": "Type of resource.", "type": "string" }, @@ -54539,8 +55770,139 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, -"BackendBucketListUsable": { -"id": "BackendBucketListUsable", +"BackendBucketCdnPolicy": { +"description": "Message containing Cloud CDN configuration for a backend bucket.", +"id": "BackendBucketCdnPolicy", +"properties": { +"bypassCacheOnRequestHeaders": { +"description": "Bypass the cache when the specified request headers are matched - e.g. Pragma or Authorization headers. Up to 5 headers can be specified. The cache is bypassed for all cdnPolicy.cacheMode settings.", +"items": { +"$ref": "BackendBucketCdnPolicyBypassCacheOnRequestHeader" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"cacheKeyPolicy": { +"$ref": "BackendBucketCdnPolicyCacheKeyPolicy", +"description": "The CacheKeyPolicy for this CdnPolicy." +}, +"cacheMode": { +"description": "Specifies the cache setting for all responses from this backend. The possible values are: USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS Requires the origin to set valid caching headers to cache content. Responses without these headers will not be cached at Google's edge, and will require a full trip to the origin on every request, potentially impacting performance and increasing load on the origin server. FORCE_CACHE_ALL Cache all content, ignoring any \"private\", \"no-store\" or \"no-cache\" directives in Cache-Control response headers. Warning: this may result in Cloud CDN caching private, per-user (user identifiable) content. CACHE_ALL_STATIC Automatically cache static content, including common image formats, media (video and audio), and web assets (JavaScript and CSS). Requests and responses that are marked as uncacheable, as well as dynamic content (including HTML), will not be cached. If no value is provided for cdnPolicy.cacheMode, it defaults to CACHE_ALL_STATIC.", +"enum": [ +"CACHE_ALL_STATIC", +"FORCE_CACHE_ALL", +"INVALID_CACHE_MODE", +"USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Automatically cache static content, including common image formats, media (video and audio), and web assets (JavaScript and CSS). Requests and responses that are marked as uncacheable, as well as dynamic content (including HTML), will not be cached.", +"Cache all content, ignoring any \"private\", \"no-store\" or \"no-cache\" directives in Cache-Control response headers. Warning: this may result in Cloud CDN caching private, per-user (user identifiable) content.", +"", +"Requires the origin to set valid caching headers to cache content. Responses without these headers will not be cached at Google's edge, and will require a full trip to the origin on every request, potentially impacting performance and increasing load on the origin server." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"clientTtl": { +"description": "Specifies a separate client (e.g. browser client) maximum TTL. This is used to clamp the max-age (or Expires) value sent to the client. With FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the lesser of client_ttl and default_ttl is used for the response max-age directive, along with a \"public\" directive. For cacheable content in CACHE_ALL_STATIC mode, client_ttl clamps the max-age from the origin (if specified), or else sets the response max-age directive to the lesser of the client_ttl and default_ttl, and also ensures a \"public\" cache-control directive is present. If a client TTL is not specified, a default value (1 hour) will be used. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year).", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, +"defaultTtl": { +"description": "Specifies the default TTL for cached content served by this origin for responses that do not have an existing valid TTL (max-age or s-maxage). Setting a TTL of \"0\" means \"always revalidate\". The value of defaultTTL cannot be set to a value greater than that of maxTTL, but can be equal. When the cacheMode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, the defaultTTL will overwrite the TTL set in all responses. The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, +"maxTtl": { +"description": "Specifies the maximum allowed TTL for cached content served by this origin. Cache directives that attempt to set a max-age or s-maxage higher than this, or an Expires header more than maxTTL seconds in the future will be capped at the value of maxTTL, as if it were the value of an s-maxage Cache-Control directive. Headers sent to the client will not be modified. Setting a TTL of \"0\" means \"always revalidate\". The maximum allowed value is 31,622,400s (1 year), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, +"negativeCaching": { +"description": "Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy.", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"negativeCachingPolicy": { +"description": "Sets a cache TTL for the specified HTTP status code. negative_caching must be enabled to configure negative_caching_policy. Omitting the policy and leaving negative_caching enabled will use Cloud CDN's default cache TTLs. Note that when specifying an explicit negative_caching_policy, you should take care to specify a cache TTL for all response codes that you wish to cache. Cloud CDN will not apply any default negative caching when a policy exists.", +"items": { +"$ref": "BackendBucketCdnPolicyNegativeCachingPolicy" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"requestCoalescing": { +"description": "If true then Cloud CDN will combine multiple concurrent cache fill requests into a small number of requests to the origin.", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"serveWhileStale": { +"description": "Serve existing content from the cache (if available) when revalidating content with the origin, or when an error is encountered when refreshing the cache. This setting defines the default \"max-stale\" duration for any cached responses that do not specify a max-stale directive. Stale responses that exceed the TTL configured here will not be served. The default limit (max-stale) is 86400s (1 day), which will allow stale content to be served up to this limit beyond the max-age (or s-maxage) of a cached response. The maximum allowed value is 604800 (1 week). Set this to zero (0) to disable serve-while-stale.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, +"signedUrlCacheMaxAgeSec": { +"description": "Maximum number of seconds the response to a signed URL request will be considered fresh. After this time period, the response will be revalidated before being served. Defaults to 1hr (3600s). When serving responses to signed URL requests, Cloud CDN will internally behave as though all responses from this backend had a \"Cache-Control: public, max-age=[TTL]\" header, regardless of any existing Cache-Control header. The actual headers served in responses will not be altered.", +"format": "int64", +"type": "string" +}, +"signedUrlKeyNames": { +"description": "[Output Only] Names of the keys for signing request URLs.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"BackendBucketCdnPolicyBypassCacheOnRequestHeader": { +"description": "Bypass the cache when the specified request headers are present, e.g. Pragma or Authorization headers. Values are case insensitive. The presence of such a header overrides the cache_mode setting.", +"id": "BackendBucketCdnPolicyBypassCacheOnRequestHeader", +"properties": { +"headerName": { +"description": "The header field name to match on when bypassing cache. Values are case-insensitive.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"BackendBucketCdnPolicyCacheKeyPolicy": { +"description": "Message containing what to include in the cache key for a request for Cloud CDN.", +"id": "BackendBucketCdnPolicyCacheKeyPolicy", +"properties": { +"includeHttpHeaders": { +"description": "Allows HTTP request headers (by name) to be used in the cache key.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"queryStringWhitelist": { +"description": "Names of query string parameters to include in cache keys. Default parameters are always included. '&' and '=' will be percent encoded and not treated as delimiters.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"BackendBucketCdnPolicyNegativeCachingPolicy": { +"description": "Specify CDN TTLs for response error codes.", +"id": "BackendBucketCdnPolicyNegativeCachingPolicy", +"properties": { +"code": { +"description": "The HTTP status code to define a TTL against. Only HTTP status codes 300, 301, 302, 307, 308, 404, 405, 410, 421, 451 and 501 are can be specified as values, and you cannot specify a status code more than once.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, +"ttl": { +"description": "The TTL (in seconds) for which to cache responses with the corresponding status code. The maximum allowed value is 1800s (30 minutes), noting that infrequently accessed objects may be evicted from the cache before the defined TTL.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"BackendBucketList": { +"description": "Contains a list of BackendBucket resources.", +"id": "BackendBucketList", "properties": { "id": { "description": "[Output Only] Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.", @@ -54554,8 +55916,162 @@ false "type": "array" }, "kind": { -"default": "compute#usableBackendBucketList", -"description": "[Output Only] Type of resource. Always compute#usableBackendBucketList for lists of usable backend buckets.", +"default": "compute#backendBucketList", +"description": "Type of resource.", +"type": "string" +}, +"nextPageToken": { +"description": "[Output Only] This token allows you to get the next page of results for list requests. If the number of results is larger than maxResults, use the nextPageToken as a value for the query parameter pageToken in the next list request. Subsequent list requests will have their own nextPageToken to continue paging through the results.", +"type": "string" +}, +"selfLink": { +"description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.", +"type": "string" +}, +"warning": { +"description": "[Output Only] Informational warning message.", +"properties": { +"code": { +"description": "[Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.", +"enum": [ +"CLEANUP_FAILED", +"DEPRECATED_RESOURCE_USED", +"DEPRECATED_TYPE_USED", +"DISK_SIZE_LARGER_THAN_IMAGE_SIZE", +"EXPERIMENTAL_TYPE_USED", +"EXTERNAL_API_WARNING", +"FIELD_VALUE_OVERRIDEN", +"INJECTED_KERNELS_DEPRECATED", +"INVALID_HEALTH_CHECK_FOR_DYNAMIC_WIEGHTED_LB", +"LARGE_DEPLOYMENT_WARNING", +"LIST_OVERHEAD_QUOTA_EXCEED", +"MISSING_TYPE_DEPENDENCY", +"NEXT_HOP_ADDRESS_NOT_ASSIGNED", +"NEXT_HOP_CANNOT_IP_FORWARD", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_HAS_NO_IPV6_INTERFACE", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_FOUND", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_ON_NETWORK", +"NEXT_HOP_NOT_RUNNING", +"NOT_CRITICAL_ERROR", +"NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE", +"PARTIAL_SUCCESS", +"QUOTA_INFO_UNAVAILABLE", +"REQUIRED_TOS_AGREEMENT", +"RESOURCE_IN_USE_BY_OTHER_RESOURCE_WARNING", +"RESOURCE_NOT_DELETED", +"SCHEMA_VALIDATION_IGNORED", +"SINGLE_INSTANCE_PROPERTY_TEMPLATE", +"UNDECLARED_PROPERTIES", +"UNREACHABLE" +], +"enumDeprecated": [ +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +true, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Warning about failed cleanup of transient changes made by a failed operation.", +"A link to a deprecated resource was created.", +"When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as deprecated", +"The user created a boot disk that is larger than image size.", +"When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as experimental", +"Warning that is present in an external api call", +"Warning that value of a field has been overridden. Deprecated unused field.", +"The operation involved use of an injected kernel, which is deprecated.", +"A WEIGHTED_MAGLEV backend service is associated with a health check that is not of type HTTP/HTTPS/HTTP2.", +"When deploying a deployment with a exceedingly large number of resources", +"Resource can't be retrieved due to list overhead quota exceed which captures the amount of resources filtered out by user-defined list filter.", +"A resource depends on a missing type", +"The route's nextHopIp address is not assigned to an instance on the network.", +"The route's next hop instance cannot ip forward.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not have an ipv6 interface on the same network as the route.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not exist.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that is not on the same network as the route.", +"The route's next hop instance does not have a status of RUNNING.", +"Error which is not critical. We decided to continue the process despite the mentioned error.", +"No results are present on a particular list page.", +"Success is reported, but some results may be missing due to errors", +"Quota information is not available to client requests (e.g: regions.list).", +"The user attempted to use a resource that requires a TOS they have not accepted.", +"Warning that a resource is in use.", +"One or more of the resources set to auto-delete could not be deleted because they were in use.", +"When a resource schema validation is ignored.", +"Instance template used in instance group manager is valid as such, but its application does not make a lot of sense, because it allows only single instance in instance group.", +"When undeclared properties in the schema are present", +"A given scope cannot be reached." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"data": { +"description": "[Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: \"data\": [ { \"key\": \"scope\", \"value\": \"zones/us-east1-d\" } ", +"items": { +"properties": { +"key": { +"description": "[Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).", +"type": "string" +}, +"value": { +"description": "[Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"message": { +"description": "[Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"BackendBucketListUsable": { +"id": "BackendBucketListUsable", +"properties": { +"id": { +"description": "[Output Only] Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.", +"type": "string" +}, +"items": { +"description": "A list of BackendBucket resources.", +"items": { +"$ref": "BackendBucket" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"kind": { +"default": "compute#usableBackendBucketList", +"description": "[Output Only] Type of resource. Always compute#usableBackendBucketList for lists of usable backend buckets.", "type": "string" }, "nextPageToken": { @@ -54717,6 +56233,143 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"BackendBucketsScopedList": { +"id": "BackendBucketsScopedList", +"properties": { +"backendBuckets": { +"description": "A list of BackendBuckets contained in this scope.", +"items": { +"$ref": "BackendBucket" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"warning": { +"description": "Informational warning which replaces the list of backend services when the list is empty.", +"properties": { +"code": { +"description": "[Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.", +"enum": [ +"CLEANUP_FAILED", +"DEPRECATED_RESOURCE_USED", +"DEPRECATED_TYPE_USED", +"DISK_SIZE_LARGER_THAN_IMAGE_SIZE", +"EXPERIMENTAL_TYPE_USED", +"EXTERNAL_API_WARNING", +"FIELD_VALUE_OVERRIDEN", +"INJECTED_KERNELS_DEPRECATED", +"INVALID_HEALTH_CHECK_FOR_DYNAMIC_WIEGHTED_LB", +"LARGE_DEPLOYMENT_WARNING", +"LIST_OVERHEAD_QUOTA_EXCEED", +"MISSING_TYPE_DEPENDENCY", +"NEXT_HOP_ADDRESS_NOT_ASSIGNED", +"NEXT_HOP_CANNOT_IP_FORWARD", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_HAS_NO_IPV6_INTERFACE", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_FOUND", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_ON_NETWORK", +"NEXT_HOP_NOT_RUNNING", +"NOT_CRITICAL_ERROR", +"NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE", +"PARTIAL_SUCCESS", +"QUOTA_INFO_UNAVAILABLE", +"REQUIRED_TOS_AGREEMENT", +"RESOURCE_IN_USE_BY_OTHER_RESOURCE_WARNING", +"RESOURCE_NOT_DELETED", +"SCHEMA_VALIDATION_IGNORED", +"SINGLE_INSTANCE_PROPERTY_TEMPLATE", +"UNDECLARED_PROPERTIES", +"UNREACHABLE" +], +"enumDeprecated": [ +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +true, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Warning about failed cleanup of transient changes made by a failed operation.", +"A link to a deprecated resource was created.", +"When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as deprecated", +"The user created a boot disk that is larger than image size.", +"When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as experimental", +"Warning that is present in an external api call", +"Warning that value of a field has been overridden. Deprecated unused field.", +"The operation involved use of an injected kernel, which is deprecated.", +"A WEIGHTED_MAGLEV backend service is associated with a health check that is not of type HTTP/HTTPS/HTTP2.", +"When deploying a deployment with a exceedingly large number of resources", +"Resource can't be retrieved due to list overhead quota exceed which captures the amount of resources filtered out by user-defined list filter.", +"A resource depends on a missing type", +"The route's nextHopIp address is not assigned to an instance on the network.", +"The route's next hop instance cannot ip forward.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not have an ipv6 interface on the same network as the route.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not exist.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that is not on the same network as the route.", +"The route's next hop instance does not have a status of RUNNING.", +"Error which is not critical. We decided to continue the process despite the mentioned error.", +"No results are present on a particular list page.", +"Success is reported, but some results may be missing due to errors", +"Quota information is not available to client requests (e.g: regions.list).", +"The user attempted to use a resource that requires a TOS they have not accepted.", +"Warning that a resource is in use.", +"One or more of the resources set to auto-delete could not be deleted because they were in use.", +"When a resource schema validation is ignored.", +"Instance template used in instance group manager is valid as such, but its application does not make a lot of sense, because it allows only single instance in instance group.", +"When undeclared properties in the schema are present", +"A given scope cannot be reached." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"data": { +"description": "[Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: \"data\": [ { \"key\": \"scope\", \"value\": \"zones/us-east1-d\" } ", +"items": { +"properties": { +"key": { +"description": "[Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).", +"type": "string" +}, +"value": { +"description": "[Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"message": { +"description": "[Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "BackendCustomMetric": { "description": "Custom Metrics are used for CUSTOM_METRICS balancing_mode.", "id": "BackendCustomMetric", @@ -55335,7 +56988,7 @@ false "type": "integer" }, "negativeCaching": { -"description": "Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy.", +"description": "Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy.", "type": "boolean" }, "negativeCachingPolicy": { @@ -57156,7 +58809,13 @@ false "type": "number" }, "spotPreemption": { -"description": "The preemption score indicates the likelihood that your Spot VMs is preempted. For more information about the preemption process, see Preemption of Spot VMs. The score range is 0.0 through 1.0. Higher is better.", +"deprecated": true, +"description": "[Deprecated] Use uptime_score field instead. The preemption score indicates the likelihood that your Spot VMs is preempted. For more information about the preemption process, see Preemption of Spot VMs. The score range is 0.0 through 1.0. Higher is better.", +"format": "double", +"type": "number" +}, +"uptimeScore": { +"description": "The uptime score indicates the availability of your Spot VMs. For more information about the preemption process, see Preemption of Spot VMs. The score range is 0.0 through 1.0. Higher is better.", "format": "double", "type": "number" } @@ -57473,6 +59132,7 @@ false "GENERAL_PURPOSE_N4D", "GENERAL_PURPOSE_T2D", "GRAPHICS_OPTIMIZED", +"GRAPHICS_OPTIMIZED_G4", "MEMORY_OPTIMIZED", "MEMORY_OPTIMIZED_M3", "MEMORY_OPTIMIZED_M4", @@ -57517,6 +59177,7 @@ false "", "", "", +"", "Note for internal users: When adding a new enum Type for v1, make sure to also add it in the comment for the `optional Type type` definition. This ensures that the public documentation displays the new enum Type." ], "type": "string" @@ -61838,6 +63499,18 @@ false "description": "[Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies.", "type": "string" }, +"policySource": { +"description": "[Output Only] Source of this Firewall Policy. USER_DEFINED if created by a Cloud user, or SYSTEM if created by managed services like GKE.", +"enum": [ +"SYSTEM", +"USER_DEFINED" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"", +"" +], +"type": "string" +}, "policyType": { "description": "The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used.", "enum": [ @@ -64540,6 +66213,388 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"GlobalVmExtensionPolicy": { +"description": "Message describing GlobalVmExtensionPolicy object.", +"id": "GlobalVmExtensionPolicy", +"properties": { +"creationTimestamp": { +"description": "[Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.", +"type": "string" +}, +"description": { +"description": "An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.", +"type": "string" +}, +"extensionPolicies": { +"additionalProperties": { +"$ref": "GlobalVmExtensionPolicyExtensionPolicy" +}, +"description": "Required. Map from extension (eg: \"cloudops\") to its policy configuration. The key is the name of the extension.", +"type": "object" +}, +"id": { +"description": "[Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.", +"format": "uint64", +"type": "string" +}, +"instanceSelectors": { +"description": "Optional. Selector to target VMs for a policy. There is a logical \"AND\" between instance_selectors.", +"items": { +"$ref": "GlobalVmExtensionPolicyInstanceSelector" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"kind": { +"default": "compute#globalVmExtensionPolicy", +"description": "[Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#globalVmExtensionPolicy for globalVmExtensionPolicies.", +"type": "string" +}, +"name": { +"description": "Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", +"type": "string" +}, +"priority": { +"description": "Optional. Used to resolve conflicts when multiple policies are active for the same extension. Defaults to 0. Larger the number, higher the priority. When the priority is the same, the policy with the newer create time has higher priority.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, +"rolloutOperation": { +"$ref": "GlobalVmExtensionPolicyRolloutOperation", +"description": "Required. The rollout strategy and status." +}, +"scopedResourceStatus": { +"description": "[Output Only] The scoped resource status. It's only for tracking the purging status of the policy.", +"enum": [ +"SCOPED_RESOURCE_STATUS_DELETING", +"SCOPED_RESOURCE_STATUS_UNSPECIFIED" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"The zonal policies are being deleted.", +"Default value. This value is unused." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"selfLink": { +"description": "[Output Only] Server-defined fully-qualified URL for this resource.", +"type": "string" +}, +"selfLinkWithId": { +"description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource's resource id.", +"type": "string" +}, +"updateTimestamp": { +"description": "[Output Only] Update timestamp in RFC3339 text format.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GlobalVmExtensionPolicyExtensionPolicy": { +"description": "Policy for a single extension.", +"id": "GlobalVmExtensionPolicyExtensionPolicy", +"properties": { +"pinnedVersion": { +"description": "Optional. The version pinning for the extension. If empty, the extension will be installed with the latest version released by the extension producer.", +"type": "string" +}, +"stringConfig": { +"description": "Optional. String configuration. Any string payload that the extension understands.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GlobalVmExtensionPolicyInstanceSelector": { +"description": "Selector to target VMs for a zone VM extension policy.", +"id": "GlobalVmExtensionPolicyInstanceSelector", +"properties": { +"labelSelector": { +"$ref": "GlobalVmExtensionPolicyLabelSelector", +"description": "Optional. Labels within the LabelSelector are OR'd." +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GlobalVmExtensionPolicyLabelSelector": { +"description": "A LabelSelector is applicable for a VM only if it matches all labels in the LabelSelector.", +"id": "GlobalVmExtensionPolicyLabelSelector", +"properties": { +"inclusionLabels": { +"additionalProperties": { +"type": "string" +}, +"description": "Optional. Labels as key value pairs. A VM should contain all the pairs specified in this map to be selected; Labels within the LabelSelector are OR'ed.", +"type": "object" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GlobalVmExtensionPolicyList": { +"description": "Response to list global VM extension policy resources.", +"id": "GlobalVmExtensionPolicyList", +"properties": { +"etag": { +"type": "string" +}, +"id": { +"description": "[Output Only] Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.", +"type": "string" +}, +"items": { +"description": "A list of GlobalVmExtensionPolicy resources.", +"items": { +"$ref": "GlobalVmExtensionPolicy" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"kind": { +"default": "compute#globalVmExtensionPolicyList", +"description": "Type of resource.", +"type": "string" +}, +"nextPageToken": { +"description": "[Output Only] This token allows you to get the next page of results for list requests. If the number of results is larger than maxResults, use the nextPageToken as a value for the query parameter pageToken in the next list request. Subsequent list requests will have their own nextPageToken to continue paging through the results.", +"type": "string" +}, +"selfLink": { +"description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.", +"type": "string" +}, +"unreachables": { +"description": "[Output Only] Unreachable resources.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"warning": { +"description": "[Output Only] Informational warning message.", +"properties": { +"code": { +"description": "[Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.", +"enum": [ +"CLEANUP_FAILED", +"DEPRECATED_RESOURCE_USED", +"DEPRECATED_TYPE_USED", +"DISK_SIZE_LARGER_THAN_IMAGE_SIZE", +"EXPERIMENTAL_TYPE_USED", +"EXTERNAL_API_WARNING", +"FIELD_VALUE_OVERRIDEN", +"INJECTED_KERNELS_DEPRECATED", +"INVALID_HEALTH_CHECK_FOR_DYNAMIC_WIEGHTED_LB", +"LARGE_DEPLOYMENT_WARNING", +"LIST_OVERHEAD_QUOTA_EXCEED", +"MISSING_TYPE_DEPENDENCY", +"NEXT_HOP_ADDRESS_NOT_ASSIGNED", +"NEXT_HOP_CANNOT_IP_FORWARD", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_HAS_NO_IPV6_INTERFACE", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_FOUND", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_ON_NETWORK", +"NEXT_HOP_NOT_RUNNING", +"NOT_CRITICAL_ERROR", +"NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE", +"PARTIAL_SUCCESS", +"QUOTA_INFO_UNAVAILABLE", +"REQUIRED_TOS_AGREEMENT", +"RESOURCE_IN_USE_BY_OTHER_RESOURCE_WARNING", +"RESOURCE_NOT_DELETED", +"SCHEMA_VALIDATION_IGNORED", +"SINGLE_INSTANCE_PROPERTY_TEMPLATE", +"UNDECLARED_PROPERTIES", +"UNREACHABLE" +], +"enumDeprecated": [ +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +true, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Warning about failed cleanup of transient changes made by a failed operation.", +"A link to a deprecated resource was created.", +"When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as deprecated", +"The user created a boot disk that is larger than image size.", +"When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as experimental", +"Warning that is present in an external api call", +"Warning that value of a field has been overridden. Deprecated unused field.", +"The operation involved use of an injected kernel, which is deprecated.", +"A WEIGHTED_MAGLEV backend service is associated with a health check that is not of type HTTP/HTTPS/HTTP2.", +"When deploying a deployment with a exceedingly large number of resources", +"Resource can't be retrieved due to list overhead quota exceed which captures the amount of resources filtered out by user-defined list filter.", +"A resource depends on a missing type", +"The route's nextHopIp address is not assigned to an instance on the network.", +"The route's next hop instance cannot ip forward.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not have an ipv6 interface on the same network as the route.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not exist.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that is not on the same network as the route.", +"The route's next hop instance does not have a status of RUNNING.", +"Error which is not critical. We decided to continue the process despite the mentioned error.", +"No results are present on a particular list page.", +"Success is reported, but some results may be missing due to errors", +"Quota information is not available to client requests (e.g: regions.list).", +"The user attempted to use a resource that requires a TOS they have not accepted.", +"Warning that a resource is in use.", +"One or more of the resources set to auto-delete could not be deleted because they were in use.", +"When a resource schema validation is ignored.", +"Instance template used in instance group manager is valid as such, but its application does not make a lot of sense, because it allows only single instance in instance group.", +"When undeclared properties in the schema are present", +"A given scope cannot be reached." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"data": { +"description": "[Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: \"data\": [ { \"key\": \"scope\", \"value\": \"zones/us-east1-d\" } ", +"items": { +"properties": { +"key": { +"description": "[Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).", +"type": "string" +}, +"value": { +"description": "[Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"message": { +"description": "[Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GlobalVmExtensionPolicyRolloutOperation": { +"description": "Represents the rollout operation", +"id": "GlobalVmExtensionPolicyRolloutOperation", +"properties": { +"rolloutInput": { +"$ref": "GlobalVmExtensionPolicyRolloutOperationRolloutInput", +"description": "Required. The rollout input which defines the rollout plan." +}, +"rolloutStatus": { +"$ref": "GlobalVmExtensionPolicyRolloutOperationRolloutStatus", +"description": "[Output Only] The rollout status of the policy." +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GlobalVmExtensionPolicyRolloutOperationRolloutInput": { +"id": "GlobalVmExtensionPolicyRolloutOperationRolloutInput", +"properties": { +"conflictBehavior": { +"description": "Optional. [Optional] Specifies the behavior of the Rollout if a conflict is detected in a project during a Rollout. It can be one of the following values: 1) empty : don't overwrite the local value if conflict happens. This is the default behavior. 2) \"overwrite\" : Overwrite the local value with the rollout value. The concept of \"conflict\" applies to: 1) Insert action. If the zonal policy already exists when Insert happens, it's a conflict. 2) Update action. If the zonal policy was updated out of band by a zonal API, it's a conflict.", +"type": "string" +}, +"name": { +"description": "Optional. The name of the rollout plan. Ex. projects//locations/global/rolloutPlans/.", +"type": "string" +}, +"predefinedRolloutPlan": { +"description": "Optional. Predefined rollout plan.", +"enum": [ +"FAST_ROLLOUT", +"ROLLOUT_PLAN_UNSPECIFIED", +"SLOW_ROLLOUT" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"", +"", +"" +], +"type": "string" +}, +"retryUuid": { +"description": "Optional. The UUID of the retry action. Only set it if this is a retry for an existing resource. This is for the user re-populate the resource without changes. An error will be returned if the retry_uuid is set but the resource get modified.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GlobalVmExtensionPolicyRolloutOperationRolloutStatus": { +"id": "GlobalVmExtensionPolicyRolloutOperationRolloutStatus", +"properties": { +"currentRollouts": { +"description": "[Output Only] The current rollouts for the latest version of the resource. There should be only one current rollout, but for scalability, we make it repeated.", +"items": { +"$ref": "GlobalVmExtensionPolicyRolloutOperationRolloutStatusRolloutMetadata" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"previousRollout": { +"$ref": "GlobalVmExtensionPolicyRolloutOperationRolloutStatusRolloutMetadata", +"description": "[Output Only] The last completed rollout resource. This field will not be populated until the first rollout is completed." +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GlobalVmExtensionPolicyRolloutOperationRolloutStatusRolloutMetadata": { +"id": "GlobalVmExtensionPolicyRolloutOperationRolloutStatusRolloutMetadata", +"properties": { +"rollout": { +"description": "[Output Only] The name of the rollout. Ex. projects//locations/global/rollouts/.", +"type": "string" +}, +"rolloutPlan": { +"description": "[Output Only] The name of the rollout plan. Ex. projects//locations/global/rolloutPlans/.", +"type": "string" +}, +"state": { +"description": "[Output Only] The overall state of the rollout.", +"enum": [ +"STATE_CANCELLED", +"STATE_COMPLETED", +"STATE_FAILED", +"STATE_PAUSED", +"STATE_PROCESSING", +"STATE_UNKNOWN", +"STATE_UNSPECIFIED" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Iteration was explicitly cancelled.", +"Iteration completed, with all actions being successful.", +"Iteration completed, with failures.", +"The rollout is paused.", +"Iteration is in progress.", +"Impossible to determine current state of the iteration.", +"Default value. This value is unused." +], +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GroupMaintenanceInfo": { "description": "Maintenance Info for ReservationBlocks.", "id": "GroupMaintenanceInfo", @@ -64928,6 +66983,13 @@ false "description": "HaController handles failover for a VM Instance.", "id": "HaController", "properties": { +"backendServices": { +"description": "Advanced configuration option. If specified, these Backend Services need to be pre-created and configured as managed.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, "creationTimestamp": { "description": "[Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.", "type": "string" @@ -64968,6 +67030,10 @@ false "pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", "type": "string" }, +"networkingAutoConfiguration": { +"$ref": "HaControllerNetworkingAutoConfiguration", +"description": "Basic networking configuration. Required backend services and forwarding rules will be automatically created with default parameters." +}, "region": { "description": "[Output Only] URL of the region where the resource resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.", "type": "string" @@ -65006,6 +67072,45 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"HaControllerNetworkingAutoConfiguration": { +"description": "Basic networking configuration. Required backend services and forwarding rules will be automatically created with default parameters.", +"id": "HaControllerNetworkingAutoConfiguration", +"properties": { +"internal": { +"$ref": "HaControllerNetworkingAutoConfigurationInternal", +"description": "Internal networking configuration" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"HaControllerNetworkingAutoConfigurationInternal": { +"description": "Internal networking configuration", +"id": "HaControllerNetworkingAutoConfigurationInternal", +"properties": { +"ipAddress": { +"description": "Optional. IP addresses will be automatically allocated according to StackType if not provided.", +"type": "string" +}, +"ipv6Address": { +"type": "string" +}, +"stackType": { +"description": "Determine which IP addresses to automatically create. Field and option naming consistent with NetworkInterface configuration on Instances.", +"enum": [ +"IPV4_IPV6", +"IPV4_ONLY", +"IPV6_ONLY" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"The HA Controller Networking Endpoint will be assigned with both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses.", +"The HA Controller Networking Endpoint will only be assigned with IPv4 address.", +"The HA Controller Networking Endpoint will only be assigned with IPv6 address." +], +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "HaControllerStatus": { "description": "Contains information about current status of the HaController.", "id": "HaControllerStatus", @@ -65014,6 +67119,10 @@ false "$ref": "HaControllerStatusFailoverProgress", "description": "[Output Only] Contains the details of the ongoing failover. This message is not displayed if failover is NOT in progress." }, +"lastFailoverInfo": { +"$ref": "HaControllerStatusFailoverProgress", +"description": "[Output Only] Contains the details of the last successful failover." +}, "ongoingFailover": { "description": "[Output Only] Indicates if the failover is currently in-progress.", "type": "boolean" @@ -65044,6 +67153,11 @@ false "description": "Contains information about the current failover operation.", "id": "HaControllerStatusFailoverProgress", "properties": { +"failoverCompleteTimestamp": { +"description": "[Output Only] Timestamp of the failover completion. Filled only if the failover is completed, in lastFailoverInfo.", +"format": "google-datetime", +"type": "string" +}, "failoverTrigger": { "description": "[Output Only] Indicates if failover has been triggered automatically or manually.", "enum": [ @@ -69430,6 +71544,7 @@ false "description": "[Output Only] The status of the instance. One of the following values: PROVISIONING, STAGING, RUNNING, STOPPING, SUSPENDING, SUSPENDED, REPAIRING, and TERMINATED. For more information about the status of the instance, see Instance life cycle.", "enum": [ "DEPROVISIONING", +"PENDING", "PENDING_STOP", "PROVISIONING", "REPAIRING", @@ -69443,6 +71558,7 @@ false ], "enumDescriptions": [ "The instance is halted and we are performing tear down tasks like network deprogramming, releasing quota, IP, tearing down disks etc.", +"For Flex Start provisioning instance is waiting for available capacity from Dynamic Workload Scheduler (DWS).", "The instance is gracefully shutting down.", "Resources are being allocated for the instance.", "The instance is in repair.", @@ -71773,6 +73889,42 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"InstanceGroupManagersGetAvailableAcceleratorTopologiesResponse": { +"id": "InstanceGroupManagersGetAvailableAcceleratorTopologiesResponse", +"properties": { +"acceleratorTopologiesInfo": { +"additionalProperties": { +"$ref": "InstanceGroupManagersGetAvailableAcceleratorTopologiesResponseAcceleratorTopologyInfo" +}, +"description": "The accelerator topology information returned per id of the topology location.", +"type": "object" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"InstanceGroupManagersGetAvailableAcceleratorTopologiesResponseAcceleratorTopologyInfo": { +"id": "InstanceGroupManagersGetAvailableAcceleratorTopologiesResponseAcceleratorTopologyInfo", +"properties": { +"acceleratorTopology": { +"description": "Topology in the format of: \"16x16\", \"4x4x4\", etc.", +"type": "string" +}, +"acceleratorTopologyHealth": { +"enum": [ +"DEGRADED", +"HEALTHY", +"UNHEALTHY" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"All VM are in RUNNING state, but there is an issue with the inter-chip connectivity that makes this part of the infrastructure ready to use as a working inter-chip connected group only in a degraded mode. This is allowed only for Instances configured with ICI resiliency", +"All VM are in RUNNING state, there are no issues with the inter-chip connectivity.", +"Some VMs may not be in RUNNING state, or there is an issue with the inter-chip connectivity that makes this part of the infrastructure unsuitable for forming a working inter-chip connected group." +], +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "InstanceGroupManagersListErrorsResponse": { "id": "InstanceGroupManagersListErrorsResponse", "properties": { @@ -73808,6 +75960,7 @@ false "description": "[Output Only] The status of the instance.", "enum": [ "DEPROVISIONING", +"PENDING", "PENDING_STOP", "PROVISIONING", "REPAIRING", @@ -73821,6 +75974,7 @@ false ], "enumDescriptions": [ "The instance is halted and we are performing tear down tasks like network deprogramming, releasing quota, IP, tearing down disks etc.", +"For Flex Start provisioning instance is waiting for available capacity from Dynamic Workload Scheduler (DWS).", "The instance is gracefully shutting down.", "Resources are being allocated for the instance.", "The instance is in repair.", @@ -76634,7 +78788,7 @@ false "type": "string" }, "status": { -"description": "Whether this Attachment is active, and if so, whether BGP is up. This is based on the statuses available in the Pantheon UI here: http://google3/java/com/google/cloud/boq/clientapi/gce/hybrid/api/interconnect_models.proto", +"description": "Whether this Attachment is active, and if so, whether BGP is up.", "enum": [ "ATTACHMENT_STATUS_UNKNOWN", "CONNECTION_DISABLED", @@ -78667,6 +80821,11 @@ false "format": "int32", "type": "integer" }, +"maxLagSize400Gbps": { +"description": "[Output Only] The maximum number of 400 Gbps ports supported in a link aggregation group (LAG). When linkType is 400 Gbps, requestedLinkCount cannot exceed max_lag_size_400_gbps.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, "name": { "description": "[Output Only] Name of the resource.", "type": "string" @@ -81181,6 +83340,7 @@ false "description": "[Output Only] The status of the instance. This field is empty when the instance does not exist.", "enum": [ "DEPROVISIONING", +"PENDING", "PENDING_STOP", "PROVISIONING", "REPAIRING", @@ -81194,6 +83354,7 @@ false ], "enumDescriptions": [ "The instance is halted and we are performing tear down tasks like network deprogramming, releasing quota, IP, tearing down disks etc.", +"For Flex Start provisioning instance is waiting for available capacity from Dynamic Workload Scheduler (DWS).", "The instance is gracefully shutting down.", "Resources are being allocated for the instance.", "The instance is in repair.", @@ -84843,237 +87004,915 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, -"NetworkParams": { -"description": "Additional network parameters.", -"id": "NetworkParams", -"properties": { -"resourceManagerTags": { -"additionalProperties": { -"type": "string" -}, -"description": "Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {\"tagKeys/333\" : \"tagValues/444\", \"tagKeys/123\" : \"tagValues/456\"} * {\"123/environment\" : \"production\", \"345/abc\" : \"xyz\"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {\"123/environment\" : \"tagValues/444\"} is invalid.", -"type": "object" -} -}, -"type": "object" -}, -"NetworkPeering": { -"description": "A network peering attached to a network resource. The message includes the peering name, peer network, peering state, and a flag indicating whether Google Compute Engine should automatically create routes for the peering.", -"id": "NetworkPeering", +"NetworkParams": { +"description": "Additional network parameters.", +"id": "NetworkParams", +"properties": { +"resourceManagerTags": { +"additionalProperties": { +"type": "string" +}, +"description": "Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {\"tagKeys/333\" : \"tagValues/444\", \"tagKeys/123\" : \"tagValues/456\"} * {\"123/environment\" : \"production\", \"345/abc\" : \"xyz\"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {\"123/environment\" : \"tagValues/444\"} is invalid.", +"type": "object" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"NetworkPeering": { +"description": "A network peering attached to a network resource. The message includes the peering name, peer network, peering state, and a flag indicating whether Google Compute Engine should automatically create routes for the peering.", +"id": "NetworkPeering", +"properties": { +"advertisePeerSubnetsViaRouters": { +"description": "Whether Cloud Routers in this network can automatically advertise subnets from the peer network.", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"autoCreateRoutes": { +"description": "This field will be deprecated soon. Use the exchange_subnet_routes field instead. Indicates whether full mesh connectivity is created and managed automatically between peered networks. Currently this field should always be true since Google Compute Engine will automatically create and manage subnetwork routes between two networks when peering state is ACTIVE.", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"connectionStatus": { +"$ref": "NetworkPeeringConnectionStatus", +"description": "[Output Only] The effective state of the peering connection as a whole." +}, +"exchangeSubnetRoutes": { +"description": "Indicates whether full mesh connectivity is created and managed automatically between peered networks. Currently this field should always be true since Google Compute Engine will automatically create and manage subnetwork routes between two networks when peering state is ACTIVE.", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"exportCustomRoutes": { +"description": "Whether to export the custom routes to peer network. The default value is false.", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"exportSubnetRoutesWithPublicIp": { +"description": "Whether subnet routes with public IP range are exported. The default value is true, all subnet routes are exported. IPv4 special-use ranges are always exported to peers and are not controlled by this field.", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"importCustomRoutes": { +"description": "Whether to import the custom routes from peer network. The default value is false.", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"importSubnetRoutesWithPublicIp": { +"description": "Whether subnet routes with public IP range are imported. The default value is false. IPv4 special-use ranges are always imported from peers and are not controlled by this field.", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"name": { +"description": "Name of this peering. Provided by the client when the peering is created. The name must comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?`. The first character must be a lowercase letter, and all the following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.", +"type": "string" +}, +"network": { +"description": "The URL of the peer network. It can be either full URL or partial URL. The peer network may belong to a different project. If the partial URL does not contain project, it is assumed that the peer network is in the same project as the current network.", +"type": "string" +}, +"peerMtu": { +"description": "[Output Only] Maximum Transmission Unit in bytes of the peer network.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, +"stackType": { +"description": "Which IP version(s) of traffic and routes are allowed to be imported or exported between peer networks. The default value is IPV4_ONLY.", +"enum": [ +"IPV4_IPV6", +"IPV4_ONLY" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"This Peering will allow IPv4 traffic and routes to be exchanged. Additionally if the matching peering is IPV4_IPV6, IPv6 traffic and routes will be exchanged as well.", +"This Peering will only allow IPv4 traffic and routes to be exchanged, even if the matching peering is IPV4_IPV6." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"state": { +"description": "[Output Only] State for the peering, either `ACTIVE` or `INACTIVE`. The peering is `ACTIVE` when there's a matching configuration in the peer network.", +"enum": [ +"ACTIVE", +"INACTIVE" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Matching configuration exists on the peer.", +"There is no matching configuration on the peer, including the case when peer does not exist." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"stateDetails": { +"description": "[Output Only] Details about the current state of the peering.", +"type": "string" +}, +"updateStrategy": { +"description": "The update strategy determines the semantics for updates and deletes to the peering connection configuration.", +"enum": [ +"CONSENSUS", +"INDEPENDENT", +"UNSPECIFIED" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Updates are reflected in the local peering but aren't applied to the peering connection until a complementary change is made to the matching peering. To delete a peering with the consensus update strategy, both the peerings must request the deletion of the peering before the peering can be deleted.", +"In this mode, changes to the peering configuration can be unilaterally altered by changing either side of the peering. This is the default value if the field is unspecified.", +"Peerings with update strategy UNSPECIFIED are created with update strategy INDEPENDENT." +], +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"NetworkPeeringConnectionStatus": { +"description": "[Output Only] Describes the state of a peering connection, not just the local peering. This field provides information about the effective settings for the connection as a whole, including pending delete/update requests for CONSENSUS peerings.", +"id": "NetworkPeeringConnectionStatus", +"properties": { +"consensusState": { +"$ref": "NetworkPeeringConnectionStatusConsensusState", +"description": "The consensus state contains information about the status of update and delete for a consensus peering connection." +}, +"trafficConfiguration": { +"$ref": "NetworkPeeringConnectionStatusTrafficConfiguration", +"description": "The active connectivity settings for the peering connection based on the settings of the network peerings." +}, +"updateStrategy": { +"description": "The update strategy determines the update/delete semantics for this peering connection.", +"enum": [ +"CONSENSUS", +"INDEPENDENT", +"UNSPECIFIED" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Updates are reflected in the local peering but aren't applied to the peering connection until a complementary change is made to the matching peering. To delete a peering with the consensus update strategy, both the peerings must request the deletion of the peering before the peering can be deleted.", +"In this mode, changes to the peering configuration can be unilaterally altered by changing either side of the peering. This is the default value if the field is unspecified.", +"Peerings with update strategy UNSPECIFIED are created with update strategy INDEPENDENT." +], +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"NetworkPeeringConnectionStatusConsensusState": { +"description": "The status of update/delete for a consensus peering connection. Only set when connection_status.update_strategy is CONSENSUS or a network peering is proposing to update the strategy to CONSENSUS.", +"id": "NetworkPeeringConnectionStatusConsensusState", +"properties": { +"deleteStatus": { +"description": "The status of the delete request.", +"enum": [ +"DELETE_ACKNOWLEDGED", +"DELETE_STATUS_UNSPECIFIED", +"LOCAL_DELETE_REQUESTED", +"PEER_DELETE_REQUESTED" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Both network admins have agreed this consensus peering connection can be deleted.", +"", +"Network admin has requested deletion of this peering connection.", +"The peer network admin has requested deletion of this peering connection." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"updateStatus": { +"description": "The status of the update request.", +"enum": [ +"IN_SYNC", +"PENDING_LOCAL_ACKNOWLEDMENT", +"PENDING_PEER_ACKNOWLEDGEMENT", +"UPDATE_STATUS_UNSPECIFIED" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"No pending configuration update proposals to the peering connection.", +"The peer network admin has made an updatePeering call. The change is awaiting acknowledgment from this peering's network admin.", +"The local network admin has made an updatePeering call. The change is awaiting acknowledgment from the peer network admin.", +"" +], +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"NetworkPeeringConnectionStatusTrafficConfiguration": { +"id": "NetworkPeeringConnectionStatusTrafficConfiguration", +"properties": { +"exportCustomRoutesToPeer": { +"description": "Whether custom routes are being exported to the peer network.", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"exportSubnetRoutesWithPublicIpToPeer": { +"description": "Whether subnet routes with public IP ranges are being exported to the peer network.", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"importCustomRoutesFromPeer": { +"description": "Whether custom routes are being imported from the peer network.", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"importSubnetRoutesWithPublicIpFromPeer": { +"description": "Whether subnet routes with public IP ranges are being imported from the peer network.", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"stackType": { +"description": "Which IP version(s) of traffic and routes are being imported or exported between peer networks.", +"enum": [ +"IPV4_IPV6", +"IPV4_ONLY" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"This Peering will allow IPv4 traffic and routes to be exchanged. Additionally if the matching peering is IPV4_IPV6, IPv6 traffic and routes will be exchanged as well.", +"This Peering will only allow IPv4 traffic and routes to be exchanged, even if the matching peering is IPV4_IPV6." +], +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"NetworkPerformanceConfig": { +"id": "NetworkPerformanceConfig", +"properties": { +"externalIpEgressBandwidthTier": { +"enum": [ +"DEFAULT", +"TIER_1" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"", +"" +], +"type": "string" +}, +"totalEgressBandwidthTier": { +"enum": [ +"DEFAULT", +"TIER_1" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"", +"" +], +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"NetworkPoliciesScopedList": { +"id": "NetworkPoliciesScopedList", +"properties": { +"networkPolicies": { +"description": "A list of network policies contained in this scope.", +"items": { +"$ref": "NetworkPolicy" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"warning": { +"description": "Informational warning which replaces the list of network policies when the list is empty.", +"properties": { +"code": { +"description": "[Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.", +"enum": [ +"CLEANUP_FAILED", +"DEPRECATED_RESOURCE_USED", +"DEPRECATED_TYPE_USED", +"DISK_SIZE_LARGER_THAN_IMAGE_SIZE", +"EXPERIMENTAL_TYPE_USED", +"EXTERNAL_API_WARNING", +"FIELD_VALUE_OVERRIDEN", +"INJECTED_KERNELS_DEPRECATED", +"INVALID_HEALTH_CHECK_FOR_DYNAMIC_WIEGHTED_LB", +"LARGE_DEPLOYMENT_WARNING", +"LIST_OVERHEAD_QUOTA_EXCEED", +"MISSING_TYPE_DEPENDENCY", +"NEXT_HOP_ADDRESS_NOT_ASSIGNED", +"NEXT_HOP_CANNOT_IP_FORWARD", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_HAS_NO_IPV6_INTERFACE", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_FOUND", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_ON_NETWORK", +"NEXT_HOP_NOT_RUNNING", +"NOT_CRITICAL_ERROR", +"NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE", +"PARTIAL_SUCCESS", +"QUOTA_INFO_UNAVAILABLE", +"REQUIRED_TOS_AGREEMENT", +"RESOURCE_IN_USE_BY_OTHER_RESOURCE_WARNING", +"RESOURCE_NOT_DELETED", +"SCHEMA_VALIDATION_IGNORED", +"SINGLE_INSTANCE_PROPERTY_TEMPLATE", +"UNDECLARED_PROPERTIES", +"UNREACHABLE" +], +"enumDeprecated": [ +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +true, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Warning about failed cleanup of transient changes made by a failed operation.", +"A link to a deprecated resource was created.", +"When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as deprecated", +"The user created a boot disk that is larger than image size.", +"When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as experimental", +"Warning that is present in an external api call", +"Warning that value of a field has been overridden. Deprecated unused field.", +"The operation involved use of an injected kernel, which is deprecated.", +"A WEIGHTED_MAGLEV backend service is associated with a health check that is not of type HTTP/HTTPS/HTTP2.", +"When deploying a deployment with a exceedingly large number of resources", +"Resource can't be retrieved due to list overhead quota exceed which captures the amount of resources filtered out by user-defined list filter.", +"A resource depends on a missing type", +"The route's nextHopIp address is not assigned to an instance on the network.", +"The route's next hop instance cannot ip forward.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not have an ipv6 interface on the same network as the route.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not exist.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that is not on the same network as the route.", +"The route's next hop instance does not have a status of RUNNING.", +"Error which is not critical. We decided to continue the process despite the mentioned error.", +"No results are present on a particular list page.", +"Success is reported, but some results may be missing due to errors", +"Quota information is not available to client requests (e.g: regions.list).", +"The user attempted to use a resource that requires a TOS they have not accepted.", +"Warning that a resource is in use.", +"One or more of the resources set to auto-delete could not be deleted because they were in use.", +"When a resource schema validation is ignored.", +"Instance template used in instance group manager is valid as such, but its application does not make a lot of sense, because it allows only single instance in instance group.", +"When undeclared properties in the schema are present", +"A given scope cannot be reached." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"data": { +"description": "[Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: \"data\": [ { \"key\": \"scope\", \"value\": \"zones/us-east1-d\" } ", +"items": { +"properties": { +"key": { +"description": "[Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).", +"type": "string" +}, +"value": { +"description": "[Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"message": { +"description": "[Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"NetworkPolicy": { +"description": "Represents a Network Policy resource.", +"id": "NetworkPolicy", +"properties": { +"associations": { +"description": "[Output Only] A list of associations that belong to this network policy.", +"items": { +"$ref": "NetworkPolicyAssociation" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"creationTimestamp": { +"description": "[Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.", +"type": "string" +}, +"description": { +"description": "An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.", +"type": "string" +}, +"id": { +"description": "[Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.", +"format": "uint64", +"type": "string" +}, +"kind": { +"default": "compute#networkPolicy", +"description": "[Output only] Type of the resource. Always compute#networkPolicy for network policies", +"type": "string" +}, +"name": { +"description": "Name of the resource.", +"type": "string" +}, +"region": { +"description": "[Output Only] URL of the region where the regional network policy resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.", +"type": "string" +}, +"ruleTupleCount": { +"description": "[Output Only] Total count of all network policy rule tuples. A network policy can not exceed a set number of tuples.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, +"selfLink": { +"description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.", +"type": "string" +}, +"selfLinkWithId": { +"description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.", +"type": "string" +}, +"trafficClassificationRules": { +"description": "[Output Only] A list of traffic classification rules that belong to this policy.", +"items": { +"$ref": "NetworkPolicyTrafficClassificationRule" +}, +"type": "array" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"NetworkPolicyAggregatedList": { +"id": "NetworkPolicyAggregatedList", +"properties": { +"id": { +"description": "[Output Only] Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.", +"type": "string" +}, +"items": { +"additionalProperties": { +"$ref": "NetworkPoliciesScopedList", +"description": "Name of the scope containing this set of addresses." +}, +"description": "A list of NetworkPoliciesScopedList resources.", +"type": "object" +}, +"kind": { +"default": "compute#networkPolicyAggregatedList", +"description": "[Output Only] Type of resource. Always compute#networkPolicyAggregatedList for lists of network policies.", +"type": "string" +}, +"nextPageToken": { +"description": "[Output Only] This token allows you to get the next page of results for list requests. If the number of results is larger than maxResults, use the nextPageToken as a value for the query parameter pageToken in the next list request. Subsequent list requests will have their own nextPageToken to continue paging through the results.", +"type": "string" +}, +"selfLink": { +"description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.", +"type": "string" +}, +"unreachables": { +"description": "[Output Only] Unreachable resources.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"warning": { +"description": "[Output Only] Informational warning message.", +"properties": { +"code": { +"description": "[Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.", +"enum": [ +"CLEANUP_FAILED", +"DEPRECATED_RESOURCE_USED", +"DEPRECATED_TYPE_USED", +"DISK_SIZE_LARGER_THAN_IMAGE_SIZE", +"EXPERIMENTAL_TYPE_USED", +"EXTERNAL_API_WARNING", +"FIELD_VALUE_OVERRIDEN", +"INJECTED_KERNELS_DEPRECATED", +"INVALID_HEALTH_CHECK_FOR_DYNAMIC_WIEGHTED_LB", +"LARGE_DEPLOYMENT_WARNING", +"LIST_OVERHEAD_QUOTA_EXCEED", +"MISSING_TYPE_DEPENDENCY", +"NEXT_HOP_ADDRESS_NOT_ASSIGNED", +"NEXT_HOP_CANNOT_IP_FORWARD", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_HAS_NO_IPV6_INTERFACE", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_FOUND", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_ON_NETWORK", +"NEXT_HOP_NOT_RUNNING", +"NOT_CRITICAL_ERROR", +"NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE", +"PARTIAL_SUCCESS", +"QUOTA_INFO_UNAVAILABLE", +"REQUIRED_TOS_AGREEMENT", +"RESOURCE_IN_USE_BY_OTHER_RESOURCE_WARNING", +"RESOURCE_NOT_DELETED", +"SCHEMA_VALIDATION_IGNORED", +"SINGLE_INSTANCE_PROPERTY_TEMPLATE", +"UNDECLARED_PROPERTIES", +"UNREACHABLE" +], +"enumDeprecated": [ +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +true, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Warning about failed cleanup of transient changes made by a failed operation.", +"A link to a deprecated resource was created.", +"When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as deprecated", +"The user created a boot disk that is larger than image size.", +"When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as experimental", +"Warning that is present in an external api call", +"Warning that value of a field has been overridden. Deprecated unused field.", +"The operation involved use of an injected kernel, which is deprecated.", +"A WEIGHTED_MAGLEV backend service is associated with a health check that is not of type HTTP/HTTPS/HTTP2.", +"When deploying a deployment with a exceedingly large number of resources", +"Resource can't be retrieved due to list overhead quota exceed which captures the amount of resources filtered out by user-defined list filter.", +"A resource depends on a missing type", +"The route's nextHopIp address is not assigned to an instance on the network.", +"The route's next hop instance cannot ip forward.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not have an ipv6 interface on the same network as the route.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not exist.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that is not on the same network as the route.", +"The route's next hop instance does not have a status of RUNNING.", +"Error which is not critical. We decided to continue the process despite the mentioned error.", +"No results are present on a particular list page.", +"Success is reported, but some results may be missing due to errors", +"Quota information is not available to client requests (e.g: regions.list).", +"The user attempted to use a resource that requires a TOS they have not accepted.", +"Warning that a resource is in use.", +"One or more of the resources set to auto-delete could not be deleted because they were in use.", +"When a resource schema validation is ignored.", +"Instance template used in instance group manager is valid as such, but its application does not make a lot of sense, because it allows only single instance in instance group.", +"When undeclared properties in the schema are present", +"A given scope cannot be reached." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"data": { +"description": "[Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: \"data\": [ { \"key\": \"scope\", \"value\": \"zones/us-east1-d\" } ", +"items": { +"properties": { +"key": { +"description": "[Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).", +"type": "string" +}, +"value": { +"description": "[Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"message": { +"description": "[Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"NetworkPolicyAssociation": { +"id": "NetworkPolicyAssociation", +"properties": { +"attachmentTarget": { +"description": "The target that the network policy is attached to.", +"type": "string" +}, +"name": { +"description": "The name for an association.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"NetworkPolicyList": { +"id": "NetworkPolicyList", +"properties": { +"id": { +"description": "[Output Only] Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.", +"type": "string" +}, +"items": { +"description": "A list of NetworkPolicy resources.", +"items": { +"$ref": "NetworkPolicy" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"kind": { +"default": "compute#networkPolicyList", +"description": "[Output Only] Type of resource. Always compute#networkPolicyList for lists of network policies.", +"type": "string" +}, +"nextPageToken": { +"description": "[Output Only] This token allows you to get the next page of results for list requests. If the number of results is larger than maxResults, use the nextPageToken as a value for the query parameter pageToken in the next list request. Subsequent list requests will have their own nextPageToken to continue paging through the results.", +"type": "string" +}, +"warning": { +"description": "[Output Only] Informational warning message.", +"properties": { +"code": { +"description": "[Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.", +"enum": [ +"CLEANUP_FAILED", +"DEPRECATED_RESOURCE_USED", +"DEPRECATED_TYPE_USED", +"DISK_SIZE_LARGER_THAN_IMAGE_SIZE", +"EXPERIMENTAL_TYPE_USED", +"EXTERNAL_API_WARNING", +"FIELD_VALUE_OVERRIDEN", +"INJECTED_KERNELS_DEPRECATED", +"INVALID_HEALTH_CHECK_FOR_DYNAMIC_WIEGHTED_LB", +"LARGE_DEPLOYMENT_WARNING", +"LIST_OVERHEAD_QUOTA_EXCEED", +"MISSING_TYPE_DEPENDENCY", +"NEXT_HOP_ADDRESS_NOT_ASSIGNED", +"NEXT_HOP_CANNOT_IP_FORWARD", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_HAS_NO_IPV6_INTERFACE", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_FOUND", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_ON_NETWORK", +"NEXT_HOP_NOT_RUNNING", +"NOT_CRITICAL_ERROR", +"NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE", +"PARTIAL_SUCCESS", +"QUOTA_INFO_UNAVAILABLE", +"REQUIRED_TOS_AGREEMENT", +"RESOURCE_IN_USE_BY_OTHER_RESOURCE_WARNING", +"RESOURCE_NOT_DELETED", +"SCHEMA_VALIDATION_IGNORED", +"SINGLE_INSTANCE_PROPERTY_TEMPLATE", +"UNDECLARED_PROPERTIES", +"UNREACHABLE" +], +"enumDeprecated": [ +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +true, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Warning about failed cleanup of transient changes made by a failed operation.", +"A link to a deprecated resource was created.", +"When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as deprecated", +"The user created a boot disk that is larger than image size.", +"When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as experimental", +"Warning that is present in an external api call", +"Warning that value of a field has been overridden. Deprecated unused field.", +"The operation involved use of an injected kernel, which is deprecated.", +"A WEIGHTED_MAGLEV backend service is associated with a health check that is not of type HTTP/HTTPS/HTTP2.", +"When deploying a deployment with a exceedingly large number of resources", +"Resource can't be retrieved due to list overhead quota exceed which captures the amount of resources filtered out by user-defined list filter.", +"A resource depends on a missing type", +"The route's nextHopIp address is not assigned to an instance on the network.", +"The route's next hop instance cannot ip forward.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not have an ipv6 interface on the same network as the route.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not exist.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that is not on the same network as the route.", +"The route's next hop instance does not have a status of RUNNING.", +"Error which is not critical. We decided to continue the process despite the mentioned error.", +"No results are present on a particular list page.", +"Success is reported, but some results may be missing due to errors", +"Quota information is not available to client requests (e.g: regions.list).", +"The user attempted to use a resource that requires a TOS they have not accepted.", +"Warning that a resource is in use.", +"One or more of the resources set to auto-delete could not be deleted because they were in use.", +"When a resource schema validation is ignored.", +"Instance template used in instance group manager is valid as such, but its application does not make a lot of sense, because it allows only single instance in instance group.", +"When undeclared properties in the schema are present", +"A given scope cannot be reached." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"data": { +"description": "[Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: \"data\": [ { \"key\": \"scope\", \"value\": \"zones/us-east1-d\" } ", +"items": { +"properties": { +"key": { +"description": "[Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).", +"type": "string" +}, +"value": { +"description": "[Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"message": { +"description": "[Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"NetworkPolicyTrafficClassificationRule": { +"description": "Represents a traffic classification rule that describes one or more match conditions along with the action to be taken when traffic matches this condition.", +"id": "NetworkPolicyTrafficClassificationRule", "properties": { -"advertisePeerSubnetsViaRouters": { -"description": "Whether Cloud Routers in this network can automatically advertise subnets from the peer network.", -"type": "boolean" -}, -"autoCreateRoutes": { -"description": "This field will be deprecated soon. Use the exchange_subnet_routes field instead. Indicates whether full mesh connectivity is created and managed automatically between peered networks. Currently this field should always be true since Google Compute Engine will automatically create and manage subnetwork routes between two networks when peering state is ACTIVE.", -"type": "boolean" -}, -"connectionStatus": { -"$ref": "NetworkPeeringConnectionStatus", -"description": "[Output Only] The effective state of the peering connection as a whole." -}, -"exchangeSubnetRoutes": { -"description": "Indicates whether full mesh connectivity is created and managed automatically between peered networks. Currently this field should always be true since Google Compute Engine will automatically create and manage subnetwork routes between two networks when peering state is ACTIVE.", -"type": "boolean" +"action": { +"$ref": "NetworkPolicyTrafficClassificationRuleAction", +"description": "The Action to perform when the client connection triggers the rule." }, -"exportCustomRoutes": { -"description": "Whether to export the custom routes to peer network. The default value is false.", -"type": "boolean" +"description": { +"description": "An optional description for this resource.", +"type": "string" }, -"exportSubnetRoutesWithPublicIp": { -"description": "Whether subnet routes with public IP range are exported. The default value is true, all subnet routes are exported. IPv4 special-use ranges are always exported to peers and are not controlled by this field.", +"disabled": { +"description": "Denotes whether the network policy rule is disabled. When set to true, the network policy rule is not enforced and traffic behaves as if it did not exist. If this is unspecified, the network policy rule will be enabled.", "type": "boolean" }, -"importCustomRoutes": { -"description": "Whether to import the custom routes from peer network. The default value is false.", -"type": "boolean" +"kind": { +"default": "compute#networkPolicyTrafficClassificationRule", +"description": "[Output only] Type of the resource. Always compute#networkPolicyTrafficClassificationRule for network policy traffic classification rules", +"type": "string" }, -"importSubnetRoutesWithPublicIp": { -"description": "Whether subnet routes with public IP range are imported. The default value is false. IPv4 special-use ranges are always imported from peers and are not controlled by this field.", -"type": "boolean" +"match": { +"$ref": "NetworkPolicyTrafficClassificationRuleMatcher", +"description": "A match condition that outgoing traffic is evaluated against. If it evaluates to true, the corresponding 'action' is enforced." }, -"name": { -"description": "Name of this peering. Provided by the client when the peering is created. The name must comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?`. The first character must be a lowercase letter, and all the following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.", -"type": "string" +"priority": { +"description": "An integer indicating the priority of a rule in the list. The priority must be a positive value between 1 and 2147482647. The priority values from 2147482648 to 2147483647 (1000) are reserved for system default network policy rules. Rules are evaluated from highest to lowest priority where 1 is the highest priority and 2147483647 is the lowest priority.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" }, -"network": { -"description": "The URL of the peer network. It can be either full URL or partial URL. The peer network may belong to a different project. If the partial URL does not contain project, it is assumed that the peer network is in the same project as the current network.", +"ruleName": { +"description": "An optional name for the rule. This field is not a unique identifier and can be updated.", "type": "string" }, -"peerMtu": { -"description": "[Output Only] Maximum Transmission Unit in bytes of the peer network.", +"ruleTupleCount": { +"description": "[Output Only] Calculation of the complexity of a single network policy rule.", "format": "int32", "type": "integer" }, -"stackType": { -"description": "Which IP version(s) of traffic and routes are allowed to be imported or exported between peer networks. The default value is IPV4_ONLY.", -"enum": [ -"IPV4_IPV6", -"IPV4_ONLY" -], -"enumDescriptions": [ -"This Peering will allow IPv4 traffic and routes to be exchanged. Additionally if the matching peering is IPV4_IPV6, IPv6 traffic and routes will be exchanged as well.", -"This Peering will only allow IPv4 traffic and routes to be exchanged, even if the matching peering is IPV4_IPV6." -], -"type": "string" +"targetSecureTags": { +"description": "A list of secure tags that controls which instances the traffic classification rule applies to. If targetSecureTag are specified, then the traffic classification rule applies only to instances in the VPC network that have one of those EFFECTIVE secure tags, if all the targetSecureTag are in INEFFECTIVE state, then this rule will be ignored. targetSecureTag may not be set at the same time as targetServiceAccounts. If neither targetServiceAccounts nor targetSecureTag are specified, the traffic classification rule applies to all instances on the specified network. Maximum number of target label tags allowed is 256.", +"items": { +"$ref": "NetworkPolicyTrafficClassificationRuleSecureTag" }, -"state": { -"description": "[Output Only] State for the peering, either `ACTIVE` or `INACTIVE`. The peering is `ACTIVE` when there's a matching configuration in the peer network.", -"enum": [ -"ACTIVE", -"INACTIVE" -], -"enumDescriptions": [ -"Matching configuration exists on the peer.", -"There is no matching configuration on the peer, including the case when peer does not exist." -], -"type": "string" +"type": "array" }, -"stateDetails": { -"description": "[Output Only] Details about the current state of the peering.", +"targetServiceAccounts": { +"description": "A list of service accounts indicating the sets of instances that are applied with this rule.", +"items": { "type": "string" }, -"updateStrategy": { -"description": "The update strategy determines the semantics for updates and deletes to the peering connection configuration.", -"enum": [ -"CONSENSUS", -"INDEPENDENT", -"UNSPECIFIED" -], -"enumDescriptions": [ -"Updates are reflected in the local peering but aren't applied to the peering connection until a complementary change is made to the matching peering. To delete a peering with the consensus update strategy, both the peerings must request the deletion of the peering before the peering can be deleted.", -"In this mode, changes to the peering configuration can be unilaterally altered by changing either side of the peering. This is the default value if the field is unspecified.", -"Peerings with update strategy UNSPECIFIED are created with update strategy INDEPENDENT." -], -"type": "string" +"type": "array" } }, "type": "object" }, -"NetworkPeeringConnectionStatus": { -"description": "[Output Only] Describes the state of a peering connection, not just the local peering. This field provides information about the effective settings for the connection as a whole, including pending delete/update requests for CONSENSUS peerings.", -"id": "NetworkPeeringConnectionStatus", +"NetworkPolicyTrafficClassificationRuleAction": { +"id": "NetworkPolicyTrafficClassificationRuleAction", "properties": { -"consensusState": { -"$ref": "NetworkPeeringConnectionStatusConsensusState", -"description": "The consensus state contains information about the status of update and delete for a consensus peering connection." -}, -"trafficConfiguration": { -"$ref": "NetworkPeeringConnectionStatusTrafficConfiguration", -"description": "The active connectivity settings for the peering connection based on the settings of the network peerings." -}, -"updateStrategy": { -"description": "The update strategy determines the update/delete semantics for this peering connection.", +"fieldType": { +"description": "The field type could be one of: TRAFFIC_CLASS or DSCP.", "enum": [ -"CONSENSUS", -"INDEPENDENT", -"UNSPECIFIED" +"DSCP", +"FIELD_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED", +"TRAFFIC_CLASS" ], "enumDescriptions": [ -"Updates are reflected in the local peering but aren't applied to the peering connection until a complementary change is made to the matching peering. To delete a peering with the consensus update strategy, both the peerings must request the deletion of the peering before the peering can be deleted.", -"In this mode, changes to the peering configuration can be unilaterally altered by changing either side of the peering. This is the default value if the field is unspecified.", -"Peerings with update strategy UNSPECIFIED are created with update strategy INDEPENDENT." +"", +"", +"" ], "type": "string" +}, +"fieldValue": { +"description": "For field_type = TRAFFIC_CLASS: 1 to 6. For field_type = DSCP: 0 to 63.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, +"type": { +"description": "Always \"apply_traffic_classification\" for traffic classification rules.", +"type": "string" } }, "type": "object" }, -"NetworkPeeringConnectionStatusConsensusState": { -"description": "The status of update/delete for a consensus peering connection. Only set when connection_status.update_strategy is CONSENSUS or a network peering is proposing to update the strategy to CONSENSUS.", -"id": "NetworkPeeringConnectionStatusConsensusState", +"NetworkPolicyTrafficClassificationRuleMatcher": { +"description": "Represents a match condition that incoming traffic is evaluated against. Exactly one field must be specified.", +"id": "NetworkPolicyTrafficClassificationRuleMatcher", "properties": { -"deleteStatus": { -"description": "The status of the delete request.", -"enum": [ -"DELETE_ACKNOWLEDGED", -"DELETE_STATUS_UNSPECIFIED", -"LOCAL_DELETE_REQUESTED", -"PEER_DELETE_REQUESTED" -], -"enumDescriptions": [ -"Both network admins have agreed this consensus peering connection can be deleted.", -"", -"Network admin has requested deletion of this peering connection.", -"The peer network admin has requested deletion of this peering connection." -], +"destIpRanges": { +"description": "CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.", +"items": { "type": "string" }, -"updateStatus": { -"description": "The status of the update request.", -"enum": [ -"IN_SYNC", -"PENDING_LOCAL_ACKNOWLEDMENT", -"PENDING_PEER_ACKNOWLEDGEMENT", -"UPDATE_STATUS_UNSPECIFIED" -], -"enumDescriptions": [ -"No pending configuration update proposals to the peering connection.", -"The peer network admin has made an updatePeering call. The change is awaiting acknowledgment from this peering's network admin.", -"The local network admin has made an updatePeering call. The change is awaiting acknowledgment from the peer network admin.", -"" -], +"type": "array" +}, +"layer4Configs": { +"description": "Pairs of IP protocols and ports that the rule should match.", +"items": { +"$ref": "NetworkPolicyTrafficClassificationRuleMatcherLayer4Config" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"srcIpRanges": { +"description": "CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.", +"items": { "type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" } }, "type": "object" }, -"NetworkPeeringConnectionStatusTrafficConfiguration": { -"id": "NetworkPeeringConnectionStatusTrafficConfiguration", +"NetworkPolicyTrafficClassificationRuleMatcherLayer4Config": { +"id": "NetworkPolicyTrafficClassificationRuleMatcherLayer4Config", "properties": { -"exportCustomRoutesToPeer": { -"description": "Whether custom routes are being exported to the peer network.", -"type": "boolean" -}, -"exportSubnetRoutesWithPublicIpToPeer": { -"description": "Whether subnet routes with public IP ranges are being exported to the peer network.", -"type": "boolean" -}, -"importCustomRoutesFromPeer": { -"description": "Whether custom routes are being imported from the peer network.", -"type": "boolean" -}, -"importSubnetRoutesWithPublicIpFromPeer": { -"description": "Whether subnet routes with public IP ranges are being imported from the peer network.", -"type": "boolean" +"ipProtocol": { +"description": "The IP protocol to which this rule applies. The protocol type is required when creating a traffic classification rule. This value can either be one of the following well known protocol strings (tcp, udp, icmp, esp, ah, ipip, sctp), or the IP protocol number.", +"type": "string" }, -"stackType": { -"description": "Which IP version(s) of traffic and routes are being imported or exported between peer networks.", -"enum": [ -"IPV4_IPV6", -"IPV4_ONLY" -], -"enumDescriptions": [ -"This Peering will allow IPv4 traffic and routes to be exchanged. Additionally if the matching peering is IPV4_IPV6, IPv6 traffic and routes will be exchanged as well.", -"This Peering will only allow IPv4 traffic and routes to be exchanged, even if the matching peering is IPV4_IPV6." -], +"ports": { +"description": "An optional list of ports to which this rule applies. This field is only applicable for UDP or TCP protocol. Each entry must be either an integer or a range. If not specified, this rule applies to connections through any port. Example inputs include: [\"22\"], [\"80\",\"443\"], and [\"12345-12349\"].", +"items": { "type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" } }, "type": "object" }, -"NetworkPerformanceConfig": { -"id": "NetworkPerformanceConfig", +"NetworkPolicyTrafficClassificationRuleSecureTag": { +"id": "NetworkPolicyTrafficClassificationRuleSecureTag", "properties": { -"externalIpEgressBandwidthTier": { -"enum": [ -"DEFAULT", -"TIER_1" -], -"enumDescriptions": [ -"", -"" -], +"name": { +"description": "Name of the secure tag, created with TagManager's TagValue API.", +"pattern": "tagValues/[0-9]+", "type": "string" }, -"totalEgressBandwidthTier": { +"state": { +"description": "[Output Only] State of the secure tag, either `EFFECTIVE` or `INEFFECTIVE`. A secure tag is `INEFFECTIVE` when it is deleted or its network is deleted.", "enum": [ -"DEFAULT", -"TIER_1" +"EFFECTIVE", +"INEFFECTIVE", +"STATE_UNSPECIFIED" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "", +"", "" ], "type": "string" @@ -85620,11 +88459,13 @@ false "rdmaSubtype": { "enum": [ "FALCON", -"ROCE" +"ROCE", +"ROCE_METAL" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "RDMA over Falcon.", -"RDMA over Converged Ethernet (RoCE)." +"RDMA over Converged Ethernet (RoCE).", +"RDMA over RoCE for Bare Metal." ], "type": "string" }, @@ -98820,6 +101661,10 @@ false "$ref": "ResourceStatusPhysicalHostTopology", "description": "[Output Only] A series of fields containing the global name of the Compute Engine cluster, as well as the ID of the block, sub-block, and host on which the running instance is located." }, +"reservationConsumptionInfo": { +"$ref": "ResourceStatusReservationConsumptionInfo", +"description": "[Output Only] Reservation information that the instance is consuming from." +}, "scheduling": { "$ref": "ResourceStatusScheduling" }, @@ -99010,6 +101855,24 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"ResourceStatusReservationConsumptionInfo": { +"id": "ResourceStatusReservationConsumptionInfo", +"properties": { +"consumedReservation": { +"description": "The full resource name of the reservation that this instance is consuming from.", +"type": "string" +}, +"consumedReservationBlock": { +"description": "The full resource name of the reservation block that this instance is consuming from.", +"type": "string" +}, +"consumedReservationSubBlock": { +"description": "The full resource name of the reservation sub-block that this instance is consuming from.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "ResourceStatusScheduling": { "id": "ResourceStatusScheduling", "properties": { @@ -100928,7 +103791,7 @@ false "additionalProperties": { "type": "string" }, -"description": "Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {\"tagKeys/333\" : \"tagValues/444\", \"tagKeys/123\" : \"tagValues/456\"} * {\"123/environment\" : \"production\", \"345/abc\" : \"xyz\"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {\"123/environment\" : \"tagValues/444\"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {\"tagKeys/333\" : \"tagValues/444\", \"123/env\" : \"prod\"} is invalid.", +"description": "Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {\"tagKeys/333\" : \"tagValues/444\", \"tagKeys/123\" : \"tagValues/456\"} * {\"123/environment\" : \"production\", \"345/abc\" : \"xyz\"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {\"123/environment\" : \"tagValues/444\"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {\"tagKeys/333\" : \"tagValues/444\", \"123/env\" : \"prod\"} is invalid.", "type": "object" } }, @@ -102215,6 +105078,10 @@ false "description": "Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.", "type": "boolean" }, +"preemptionNoticeDuration": { +"$ref": "Duration", +"description": "Specifies the Metadata Service preemption notice duration before the GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off signal is triggered for Spot VMs only. If not specified, there will be no wait before the G2 Soft Off signal is triggered." +}, "provisioningModel": { "description": "Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.", "enum": [ @@ -103352,7 +106219,7 @@ false }, "ruleManagedProtectionTier": { "deprecated": true, -"description": "[Output Only] The minimum managed protection tier required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead.", +"description": "[Output Only] The minimum Cloud Armor subscription required for this rule. [Deprecated] Use requiredManagedProtectionTiers instead.", "enum": [ "CAMP_PLUS_ANNUAL", "CAMP_PLUS_PAYGO", @@ -103432,7 +106299,7 @@ false }, "expr": { "$ref": "Expr", -"description": "User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies." +"description": "User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies." }, "exprOptions": { "$ref": "SecurityPolicyRuleMatcherExprOptions", @@ -104414,6 +107281,10 @@ false "description": "The url of a connected endpoint.", "type": "string" }, +"endpointWithId": { +"description": "The url of a connected endpoint with resource id.", +"type": "string" +}, "natIps": { "description": "NAT IPs of the connected PSC endpoint and those of other endpoints propagated from it.", "items": { @@ -104462,6 +107333,10 @@ false "format": "uint32", "type": "integer" }, +"endpointUrl": { +"description": "The URL for the PSC endpoint to accept", +"type": "string" +}, "networkUrl": { "description": "The network URL for the network to set the limit for.", "type": "string" @@ -107295,12 +110170,14 @@ false "enum": [ "TLS_1_0", "TLS_1_1", -"TLS_1_2" +"TLS_1_2", +"TLS_1_3" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "TLS 1.0", "TLS 1.1", -"TLS 1.2" +"TLS 1.2", +"TLS 1.3" ], "type": "string" }, @@ -114378,6 +117255,8 @@ false "enum": [ "FAILURE_DISK", "FAILURE_GPU", +"FAILURE_GPU_MULTIPLE_FAULTY_HOSTS_CUSTOMER_REPORTED", +"FAILURE_GPU_NVLINK_SWITCH_CUSTOMER_REPORTED", "FAILURE_GPU_TEMPERATURE", "FAILURE_GPU_XID", "FAILURE_INFRA", @@ -114386,6 +117265,7 @@ false "FAILURE_NETWORK", "FAILURE_NVLINK", "FAILURE_REDUNDANT_HARDWARE_FAULT", +"FAILURE_TPU", "INFRASTRUCTURE_RELOCATION", "MAINTENANCE_REASON_UNKNOWN", "PLANNED_NETWORK_UPDATE", @@ -114394,6 +117274,8 @@ false "enumDescriptions": [ "Maintenance due to disk errors.", "Maintenance due to GPU errors.", +"Maintenance due to customer reported multiple faulty hosts via R&R Subblock API.", +"Maintenance due to customer reported NVLink switch failure via R&R Subblock API.", "Maintenance due to high GPU temperature.", "Maintenance due to GPU xid failure.", "Maintenance due to infrastructure errors.", @@ -114402,6 +117284,7 @@ false "Maintenance due to network errors.", "Maintenance due to NVLink failure.", "Maintenance due to redundant hardware fault.", +"Maintenance due to TPU errors.", "Maintenance due to infrastructure relocation.", "Unknown maintenance reason. Do not use this value.", "Maintenance due to planned network update.", @@ -115717,6 +118600,143 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"VmExtensionPoliciesScopedList": { +"id": "VmExtensionPoliciesScopedList", +"properties": { +"vmExtensionPolicies": { +"description": "List of VmExtensionPolicy resources contained in this scope.", +"items": { +"$ref": "VmExtensionPolicy" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"warning": { +"description": "Informational warning which replaces the list of backend services when the list is empty.", +"properties": { +"code": { +"description": "[Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.", +"enum": [ +"CLEANUP_FAILED", +"DEPRECATED_RESOURCE_USED", +"DEPRECATED_TYPE_USED", +"DISK_SIZE_LARGER_THAN_IMAGE_SIZE", +"EXPERIMENTAL_TYPE_USED", +"EXTERNAL_API_WARNING", +"FIELD_VALUE_OVERRIDEN", +"INJECTED_KERNELS_DEPRECATED", +"INVALID_HEALTH_CHECK_FOR_DYNAMIC_WIEGHTED_LB", +"LARGE_DEPLOYMENT_WARNING", +"LIST_OVERHEAD_QUOTA_EXCEED", +"MISSING_TYPE_DEPENDENCY", +"NEXT_HOP_ADDRESS_NOT_ASSIGNED", +"NEXT_HOP_CANNOT_IP_FORWARD", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_HAS_NO_IPV6_INTERFACE", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_FOUND", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_ON_NETWORK", +"NEXT_HOP_NOT_RUNNING", +"NOT_CRITICAL_ERROR", +"NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE", +"PARTIAL_SUCCESS", +"QUOTA_INFO_UNAVAILABLE", +"REQUIRED_TOS_AGREEMENT", +"RESOURCE_IN_USE_BY_OTHER_RESOURCE_WARNING", +"RESOURCE_NOT_DELETED", +"SCHEMA_VALIDATION_IGNORED", +"SINGLE_INSTANCE_PROPERTY_TEMPLATE", +"UNDECLARED_PROPERTIES", +"UNREACHABLE" +], +"enumDeprecated": [ +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +true, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Warning about failed cleanup of transient changes made by a failed operation.", +"A link to a deprecated resource was created.", +"When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as deprecated", +"The user created a boot disk that is larger than image size.", +"When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as experimental", +"Warning that is present in an external api call", +"Warning that value of a field has been overridden. Deprecated unused field.", +"The operation involved use of an injected kernel, which is deprecated.", +"A WEIGHTED_MAGLEV backend service is associated with a health check that is not of type HTTP/HTTPS/HTTP2.", +"When deploying a deployment with a exceedingly large number of resources", +"Resource can't be retrieved due to list overhead quota exceed which captures the amount of resources filtered out by user-defined list filter.", +"A resource depends on a missing type", +"The route's nextHopIp address is not assigned to an instance on the network.", +"The route's next hop instance cannot ip forward.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not have an ipv6 interface on the same network as the route.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not exist.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that is not on the same network as the route.", +"The route's next hop instance does not have a status of RUNNING.", +"Error which is not critical. We decided to continue the process despite the mentioned error.", +"No results are present on a particular list page.", +"Success is reported, but some results may be missing due to errors", +"Quota information is not available to client requests (e.g: regions.list).", +"The user attempted to use a resource that requires a TOS they have not accepted.", +"Warning that a resource is in use.", +"One or more of the resources set to auto-delete could not be deleted because they were in use.", +"When a resource schema validation is ignored.", +"Instance template used in instance group manager is valid as such, but its application does not make a lot of sense, because it allows only single instance in instance group.", +"When undeclared properties in the schema are present", +"A given scope cannot be reached." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"data": { +"description": "[Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: \"data\": [ { \"key\": \"scope\", \"value\": \"zones/us-east1-d\" } ", +"items": { +"properties": { +"key": { +"description": "[Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).", +"type": "string" +}, +"value": { +"description": "[Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"message": { +"description": "[Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "VmExtensionPolicy": { "description": "Represents a VM extension policy.", "id": "VmExtensionPolicy", @@ -115762,6 +118782,11 @@ false "type": "boolean" }, "name": { +"annotations": { +"required": [ +"compute.zoneVmExtensionPolicies.insert" +] +}, "description": "Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.", "pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", "type": "string" @@ -115800,6 +118825,172 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"VmExtensionPolicyAggregatedListResponse": { +"description": "Response for the aggregated list of VM extension policies.", +"id": "VmExtensionPolicyAggregatedListResponse", +"properties": { +"etag": { +"type": "string" +}, +"id": { +"description": "[Output Only] Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.", +"type": "string" +}, +"items": { +"additionalProperties": { +"$ref": "VmExtensionPoliciesScopedList", +"description": "Name of the scope containing this set of VmExtensionPolicies." +}, +"description": "A list of VmExtensionPoliciesScopedList resources.", +"type": "object" +}, +"kind": { +"default": "compute#VmExtensionPolicyAggregatedList", +"description": "[Output Only] Type of resource. Always compute#VmExtensionPolicyAggregatedList for lists of VmExtensionPolicies.", +"type": "string" +}, +"nextPageToken": { +"description": "[Output Only] This token allows you to get the next page of results for list requests. If the number of results is larger than maxResults, use the nextPageToken as a value for the query parameter pageToken in the next list request. Subsequent list requests will have their own nextPageToken to continue paging through the results.", +"type": "string" +}, +"selfLink": { +"description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.", +"type": "string" +}, +"unreachables": { +"description": "[Output Only] Unreachable resources.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"warning": { +"description": "[Output Only] Informational warning message.", +"properties": { +"code": { +"description": "[Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.", +"enum": [ +"CLEANUP_FAILED", +"DEPRECATED_RESOURCE_USED", +"DEPRECATED_TYPE_USED", +"DISK_SIZE_LARGER_THAN_IMAGE_SIZE", +"EXPERIMENTAL_TYPE_USED", +"EXTERNAL_API_WARNING", +"FIELD_VALUE_OVERRIDEN", +"INJECTED_KERNELS_DEPRECATED", +"INVALID_HEALTH_CHECK_FOR_DYNAMIC_WIEGHTED_LB", +"LARGE_DEPLOYMENT_WARNING", +"LIST_OVERHEAD_QUOTA_EXCEED", +"MISSING_TYPE_DEPENDENCY", +"NEXT_HOP_ADDRESS_NOT_ASSIGNED", +"NEXT_HOP_CANNOT_IP_FORWARD", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_HAS_NO_IPV6_INTERFACE", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_FOUND", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_ON_NETWORK", +"NEXT_HOP_NOT_RUNNING", +"NOT_CRITICAL_ERROR", +"NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE", +"PARTIAL_SUCCESS", +"QUOTA_INFO_UNAVAILABLE", +"REQUIRED_TOS_AGREEMENT", +"RESOURCE_IN_USE_BY_OTHER_RESOURCE_WARNING", +"RESOURCE_NOT_DELETED", +"SCHEMA_VALIDATION_IGNORED", +"SINGLE_INSTANCE_PROPERTY_TEMPLATE", +"UNDECLARED_PROPERTIES", +"UNREACHABLE" +], +"enumDeprecated": [ +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +true, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Warning about failed cleanup of transient changes made by a failed operation.", +"A link to a deprecated resource was created.", +"When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as deprecated", +"The user created a boot disk that is larger than image size.", +"When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as experimental", +"Warning that is present in an external api call", +"Warning that value of a field has been overridden. Deprecated unused field.", +"The operation involved use of an injected kernel, which is deprecated.", +"A WEIGHTED_MAGLEV backend service is associated with a health check that is not of type HTTP/HTTPS/HTTP2.", +"When deploying a deployment with a exceedingly large number of resources", +"Resource can't be retrieved due to list overhead quota exceed which captures the amount of resources filtered out by user-defined list filter.", +"A resource depends on a missing type", +"The route's nextHopIp address is not assigned to an instance on the network.", +"The route's next hop instance cannot ip forward.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not have an ipv6 interface on the same network as the route.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not exist.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that is not on the same network as the route.", +"The route's next hop instance does not have a status of RUNNING.", +"Error which is not critical. We decided to continue the process despite the mentioned error.", +"No results are present on a particular list page.", +"Success is reported, but some results may be missing due to errors", +"Quota information is not available to client requests (e.g: regions.list).", +"The user attempted to use a resource that requires a TOS they have not accepted.", +"Warning that a resource is in use.", +"One or more of the resources set to auto-delete could not be deleted because they were in use.", +"When a resource schema validation is ignored.", +"Instance template used in instance group manager is valid as such, but its application does not make a lot of sense, because it allows only single instance in instance group.", +"When undeclared properties in the schema are present", +"A given scope cannot be reached." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"data": { +"description": "[Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: \"data\": [ { \"key\": \"scope\", \"value\": \"zones/us-east1-d\" } ", +"items": { +"properties": { +"key": { +"description": "[Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).", +"type": "string" +}, +"value": { +"description": "[Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"message": { +"description": "[Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "VmExtensionPolicyExtensionPolicy": { "description": "Configuration for a specific VM extension.", "id": "VmExtensionPolicyExtensionPolicy", @@ -117872,14 +121063,14 @@ false "id": "WireProperties", "properties": { "bandwidthAllocation": { -"description": "The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. For example, with a four-wire box-and-cross group, when one Interconnect connection is down, the unmetered bandwidth of the two down wires is reallocated to the remaining up wires. ", +"description": "The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: this is the default behavior, which configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. ", "enum": [ "ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE", "SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group.", -"Configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. For example, with a four-wire box-and-cross group, when one Interconnect connection is down, the unmetered bandwidth of the two down wires is reallocated to the remaining up wires." +"This is the default behavior. Configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group." ], "type": "string" }, diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.beta.json index 3c72dd63cc4..955cbe757e2 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.beta.json @@ -37980,6 +37980,11 @@ "pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", "required": true, "type": "string" +}, +"showNatIps": { +"description": "Indicates whether NAT IPs should be included in the response.", +"location": "query", +"type": "boolean" } }, "path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/serviceAttachments/{serviceAttachment}", @@ -39650,6 +39655,7 @@ "storagePool": { "description": "Name of the storage pool to delete.", "location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", "required": true, "type": "string" }, @@ -45747,7 +45753,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250810", +"revision": "20250902", "rootUrl": "https://compute.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AWSV4Signature": { @@ -47050,6 +47056,21 @@ false "description": "This reservation type is specified by total resource amounts (e.g. total count of CPUs) and can account for multiple instance SKUs. In other words, one can create instances of varying shapes against this reservation.", "id": "AllocationAggregateReservation", "properties": { +"hostCount": { +"description": "Count of reserved hosts of specified VM family. The host has fixed number of accelerators based on the accelerator/vm-family selected.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, +"inUseHostCount": { +"description": "Number of hosts currently in use. If there is one or more Instances running on the host, it is considered in use.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, +"inUseInstanceCount": { +"description": "Number of instances currently in use in this reservation.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, "inUseResources": { "description": "[Output only] List of resources currently in use.", "items": { @@ -48725,7 +48746,7 @@ false "type": "integer" }, "negativeCaching": { -"description": "Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy.", +"description": "Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy.", "type": "boolean" }, "negativeCachingPolicy": { @@ -49735,7 +49756,7 @@ false "type": "integer" }, "negativeCaching": { -"description": "Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy.", +"description": "Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy.", "type": "boolean" }, "negativeCachingPolicy": { @@ -50972,6 +50993,14 @@ false }, "type": "array" }, +"asns32": { +"description": "[Output only] ASNs in the path segment. This field is for better support of 32 bit ASNs as the other asns field suffers from overflow when the ASN is larger. When type is SEQUENCE, these are ordered.", +"items": { +"format": "uint32", +"type": "integer" +}, +"type": "array" +}, "type": { "description": "[Output only] Type of AS-PATH segment (SEQUENCE or SET)", "enum": [ @@ -55157,6 +55186,18 @@ false "description": "[Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies.", "type": "string" }, +"policySource": { +"description": "[Output Only] Source of this Firewall Policy. USER_DEFINED if created by a Cloud user, or SYSTEM if created by managed services like GKE.", +"enum": [ +"SYSTEM", +"USER_DEFINED" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"", +"" +], +"type": "string" +}, "policyType": { "description": "The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used.", "enum": [ @@ -55442,6 +55483,13 @@ false "description": "A fully-qualified URL of a SecurityProfile resource instance. Example: https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/v1/projects/{project}/locations/{location}/securityProfileGroups/my-security-profile-group Must be specified if action is one of 'apply_security_profile_group' or 'mirror'. Cannot be specified for other actions.", "type": "string" }, +"targetForwardingRules": { +"description": "A list of forwarding rules to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which load balancers get this rule. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/forwardingRules/forwardingRule - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/global/ forwardingRules/forwardingRule - projects/project/regions/region/forwardingRules/ forwardingRule ", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, "targetResources": { "description": "A list of network resource URLs to which this rule applies. This field allows you to control which network's VMs get this rule. If this field is left blank, all VMs within the organization will receive the rule.", "items": { @@ -55463,6 +55511,18 @@ false }, "type": "array" }, +"targetType": { +"description": "Target types of the firewall policy rule. Default value is INSTANCES.", +"enum": [ +"INSTANCES", +"INTERNAL_MANAGED_LB" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"", +"" +], +"type": "string" +}, "tlsInspect": { "description": "Boolean flag indicating if the traffic should be TLS decrypted. Can be set only if action = 'apply_security_profile_group' and cannot be set for other actions.", "type": "boolean" @@ -56570,6 +56630,20 @@ false ], "type": "string" }, +"protectionTier": { +"description": "Protection tier for the workload.", +"enum": [ +"CAPACITY_OPTIMIZED", +"PROTECTION_TIER_UNSPECIFIED", +"STANDARD" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"CAPACITY_OPTIMIZED capacity leverages redundancies (e.g. power, cooling) at the data center during normal operating conditions. In the event of infrastructure failures at data center (e.g. power and/or cooling failures), this workload may be disrupted. As a consequence, it has a weaker availability SLO than STANDARD.", +"Unspecified protection tier.", +"STANDARD protection for workload that should be protected by redundancies (e.g. power, cooling) at the data center level. In the event of infrastructure failures at data center (e.g. power and/or cooling failures), this workload is expected to continue as normal using the redundancies." +], +"type": "string" +}, "reservationMode": { "description": "The reservation mode which determines reservation-termination behavior and expected pricing.", "enum": [ @@ -60650,6 +60724,7 @@ false "description": "[Output Only] The status of the instance. One of the following values: PROVISIONING, STAGING, RUNNING, STOPPING, SUSPENDING, SUSPENDED, REPAIRING, and TERMINATED. For more information about the status of the instance, see Instance life cycle.", "enum": [ "DEPROVISIONING", +"PENDING", "PENDING_STOP", "PROVISIONING", "REPAIRING", @@ -60663,6 +60738,7 @@ false ], "enumDescriptions": [ "The instance is halted and we are performing tear down tasks like network deprogramming, releasing quota, IP, tearing down disks etc.", +"For Flex Start provisioning instance is waiting for available capacity from Dynamic Workload Scheduler (DWS).", "The instance is gracefully shutting down.", "Resources are being allocated for the instance.", "The instance is in repair.", @@ -64058,6 +64134,10 @@ false "description": "Additional instance params.", "id": "InstanceParams", "properties": { +"requestValidForDuration": { +"$ref": "Duration", +"description": "Relative deadline for waiting for capacity. Relevant only for Instances.Insert API." +}, "resourceManagerTags": { "additionalProperties": { "type": "string" @@ -64828,6 +64908,7 @@ false "description": "[Output Only] The status of the instance.", "enum": [ "DEPROVISIONING", +"PENDING", "PENDING_STOP", "PROVISIONING", "REPAIRING", @@ -64841,6 +64922,7 @@ false ], "enumDescriptions": [ "The instance is halted and we are performing tear down tasks like network deprogramming, releasing quota, IP, tearing down disks etc.", +"For Flex Start provisioning instance is waiting for available capacity from Dynamic Workload Scheduler (DWS).", "The instance is gracefully shutting down.", "Resources are being allocated for the instance.", "The instance is in repair.", @@ -67237,7 +67319,7 @@ false "type": "string" }, "status": { -"description": "Whether this Attachment is active, and if so, whether BGP is up. This is based on the statuses available in the Pantheon UI here: http://google3/java/com/google/cloud/boq/clientapi/gce/hybrid/api/interconnect_models.proto", +"description": "Whether this Attachment is active, and if so, whether BGP is up.", "enum": [ "ATTACHMENT_STATUS_UNKNOWN", "CONNECTION_DISABLED", @@ -69164,6 +69246,11 @@ false "format": "int32", "type": "integer" }, +"maxLagSize400Gbps": { +"description": "[Output Only] The maximum number of 400 Gbps ports supported in a link aggregation group (LAG). When linkType is 400 Gbps, requestedLinkCount cannot exceed max_lag_size_400_gbps.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, "name": { "description": "[Output Only] Name of the resource.", "type": "string" @@ -70811,6 +70898,7 @@ false "description": "[Output Only] The status of the instance. This field is empty when the instance does not exist.", "enum": [ "DEPROVISIONING", +"PENDING", "PENDING_STOP", "PROVISIONING", "REPAIRING", @@ -70824,6 +70912,7 @@ false ], "enumDescriptions": [ "The instance is halted and we are performing tear down tasks like network deprogramming, releasing quota, IP, tearing down disks etc.", +"For Flex Start provisioning instance is waiting for available capacity from Dynamic Workload Scheduler (DWS).", "The instance is gracefully shutting down.", "Resources are being allocated for the instance.", "The instance is in repair.", @@ -74278,6 +74367,10 @@ false "pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", "type": "string" }, +"profileType": { +"$ref": "NetworkProfileProfileType", +"description": "[Output Only] Type of the network profile." +}, "selfLink": { "description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.", "type": "string" @@ -74705,6 +74798,56 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"NetworkProfileProfileType": { +"id": "NetworkProfileProfileType", +"properties": { +"networkType": { +"enum": [ +"RDMA", +"ULL", +"VPC" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"RDMA network.", +"ULL network.", +"VPC network." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"rdmaSubtype": { +"enum": [ +"FALCON", +"ROCE" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"RDMA over Falcon.", +"RDMA over Converged Ethernet (RoCE)." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"ullSubtype": { +"enum": [ +"OPERATOR", +"PARTICIPANT" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Exchange operator.", +"Exchange participant." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"vpcSubtype": { +"enum": [ +"REGIONAL" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Regionally bound VPC network." +], +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "NetworkProfilesListResponse": { "description": "Contains a list of network profiles.", "id": "NetworkProfilesListResponse", @@ -83492,6 +83635,11 @@ false "format": "int32", "type": "integer" }, +"inUseHostCount": { +"description": "Number of hosts currently in use. If there is one or more Instances running on the host, it is considered in use.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, "kind": { "default": "compute#reservationBlock", "description": "[Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservationBlock for reservation blocks.", @@ -83983,6 +84131,11 @@ false "format": "int32", "type": "integer" }, +"inUseHostCount": { +"description": "Number of hosts currently in use. If there is one or more Instances running on the host, it is considered in use.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, "kind": { "default": "compute#reservationSubBlock", "description": "[Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservationSubBlock for reservation subBlocks.", @@ -87182,7 +87335,7 @@ false "additionalProperties": { "type": "string" }, -"description": "Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {\"tagKeys/333\" : \"tagValues/444\", \"tagKeys/123\" : \"tagValues/456\"} * {\"123/environment\" : \"production\", \"345/abc\" : \"xyz\"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {\"123/environment\" : \"tagValues/444\"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {\"tagKeys/333\" : \"tagValues/444\", \"123/env\" : \"prod\"} is invalid.", +"description": "Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {\"tagKeys/333\" : \"tagValues/444\", \"tagKeys/123\" : \"tagValues/456\"} * {\"123/environment\" : \"production\", \"345/abc\" : \"xyz\"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {\"123/environment\" : \"tagValues/444\"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {\"tagKeys/333\" : \"tagValues/444\", \"123/env\" : \"prod\"} is invalid.", "type": "object" } }, @@ -89388,7 +89541,7 @@ false }, "expr": { "$ref": "Expr", -"description": "User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies." +"description": "User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies." }, "exprOptions": { "$ref": "SecurityPolicyRuleMatcherExprOptions", @@ -90279,6 +90432,13 @@ false "description": "The url of a connected endpoint.", "type": "string" }, +"natIps": { +"description": "NAT IPs of the connected PSC endpoint and those of other endpoints propagated from it.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, "propagatedConnectionCount": { "description": "The number of consumer Network Connectivity Center spokes that the connected Private Service Connect endpoint has propagated to.", "format": "uint32", @@ -99698,6 +99858,8 @@ false "enum": [ "FAILURE_DISK", "FAILURE_GPU", +"FAILURE_GPU_MULTIPLE_FAULTY_HOSTS_CUSTOMER_REPORTED", +"FAILURE_GPU_NVLINK_SWITCH_CUSTOMER_REPORTED", "FAILURE_GPU_TEMPERATURE", "FAILURE_GPU_XID", "FAILURE_INFRA", @@ -99714,6 +99876,8 @@ false "enumDescriptions": [ "Maintenance due to disk errors.", "Maintenance due to GPU errors.", +"Maintenance due to customer reported multiple faulty hosts via R&R Subblock API.", +"Maintenance due to customer reported NVLink switch failure via R&R Subblock API.", "Maintenance due to high GPU temperature.", "Maintenance due to GPU xid failure.", "Maintenance due to infrastructure errors.", @@ -102771,6 +102935,18 @@ false "description": "The properties of a wire.", "id": "WireProperties", "properties": { +"bandwidthAllocation": { +"description": "The configuration of the bandwidth allocation, one of the following: - ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE: configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group. - SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP: this is the default behavior, which configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group. ", +"enum": [ +"ALLOCATE_PER_WIRE", +"SHARED_WITH_WIRE_GROUP" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Configures a separate unmetered bandwidth allocation (and associated charges) for each wire in the group.", +"This is the default behavior. Configures one unmetered bandwidth allocation for the wire group. The unmetered bandwidth is divided equally across each wire in the group, but dynamic throttling reallocates unused unmetered bandwidth from unused or underused wires to other wires in the group." +], +"type": "string" +}, "bandwidthUnmetered": { "description": "The unmetered bandwidth in Gigabits per second, using decimal units. `10` is 10 Gbps, `100` is 100 Gbps.", "format": "int64", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.v1.json index b3fbd4f5243..278a17e0565 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.v1.json @@ -661,6 +661,52 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" ] +}, +"testIamPermissions": { +"description": "Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/addresses/{resource}/testIamPermissions", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "compute.addresses.testIamPermissions", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"region", +"resource" +], +"parameters": { +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"region": { +"description": "The name of the region for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"resource": { +"description": "Name or id of the resource for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/addresses/{resource}/testIamPermissions", +"request": { +"$ref": "TestPermissionsRequest" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "TestPermissionsResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" +] } } }, @@ -5106,6 +5152,44 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" ] +}, +"testIamPermissions": { +"description": "Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/global/addresses/{resource}/testIamPermissions", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "compute.globalAddresses.testIamPermissions", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"resource" +], +"parameters": { +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"resource": { +"description": "Name or id of the resource for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9_]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/global/addresses/{resource}/testIamPermissions", +"request": { +"$ref": "TestPermissionsRequest" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "TestPermissionsResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" +] } } }, @@ -9539,6 +9623,52 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" ] +}, +"testIamPermissions": { +"description": "Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/zones/{zone}/instanceGroups/{resource}/testIamPermissions", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "compute.instanceGroups.testIamPermissions", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"zone", +"resource" +], +"parameters": { +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"resource": { +"description": "Name or id of the resource for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"zone": { +"description": "The name of the zone for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/zones/{zone}/instanceGroups/{resource}/testIamPermissions", +"request": { +"$ref": "TestPermissionsRequest" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "TestPermissionsResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" +] } } }, @@ -10036,6 +10166,55 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" ] }, +"addNetworkInterface": { +"description": "Adds one dynamic network interface to an active instance.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/zones/{zone}/instances/{instance}/addNetworkInterface", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "compute.instances.addNetworkInterface", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"zone", +"instance" +], +"parameters": { +"instance": { +"description": "The instance name for this request stored as resource_id. Name should conform to RFC1035 or be an unsigned long integer.", +"location": "path", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"requestId": { +"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"zone": { +"description": "The name of the zone for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/zones/{zone}/instances/{instance}/addNetworkInterface", +"request": { +"$ref": "NetworkInterface" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" +] +}, "addResourcePolicies": { "description": "Adds existing resource policies to an instance. You can only add one policy right now which will be applied to this instance for scheduling live migrations.", "flatPath": "projects/{project}/zones/{zone}/instances/{instance}/addResourcePolicies", @@ -10357,6 +10536,59 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" ] }, +"deleteNetworkInterface": { +"description": "Deletes one dynamic network interface from an active instance. InstancesDeleteNetworkInterfaceRequest indicates: - instance from which to delete, using project+zone+resource_id fields; - dynamic network interface to be deleted, using network_interface_name field;", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/zones/{zone}/instances/{instance}/deleteNetworkInterface", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "compute.instances.deleteNetworkInterface", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"zone", +"instance", +"networkInterfaceName" +], +"parameters": { +"instance": { +"description": "The instance name for this request stored as resource_id. Name should conform to RFC1035 or be an unsigned long integer.", +"location": "path", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"networkInterfaceName": { +"description": "The name of the dynamic network interface to be deleted from the instance.", +"location": "query", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"requestId": { +"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"zone": { +"description": "The name of the zone for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/zones/{zone}/instances/{instance}/deleteNetworkInterface", +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" +] +}, "detachDisk": { "description": "Detaches a disk from an instance.", "flatPath": "projects/{project}/zones/{zone}/instances/{instance}/detachDisk", @@ -25273,6 +25505,52 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" ] +}, +"testIamPermissions": { +"description": "Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/instanceGroups/{resource}/testIamPermissions", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "compute.regionInstanceGroups.testIamPermissions", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"region", +"resource" +], +"parameters": { +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"region": { +"description": "The name of the region for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"resource": { +"description": "Name or id of the resource for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/instanceGroups/{resource}/testIamPermissions", +"request": { +"$ref": "TestPermissionsRequest" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "TestPermissionsResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" +] } } }, @@ -33063,6 +33341,11 @@ "pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", "required": true, "type": "string" +}, +"showNatIps": { +"description": "Indicates whether NAT IPs should be included in the response.", +"location": "query", +"type": "boolean" } }, "path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/serviceAttachments/{serviceAttachment}", @@ -34591,6 +34874,7 @@ "storagePool": { "description": "Name of the storage pool to delete.", "location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", "required": true, "type": "string" }, @@ -36968,6 +37252,52 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" ] +}, +"testIamPermissions": { +"description": "Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/zones/{zone}/targetInstances/{resource}/testIamPermissions", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "compute.targetInstances.testIamPermissions", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"zone", +"resource" +], +"parameters": { +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"resource": { +"description": "Name or id of the resource for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"zone": { +"description": "The name of the zone for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/zones/{zone}/targetInstances/{resource}/testIamPermissions", +"request": { +"$ref": "TestPermissionsRequest" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "TestPermissionsResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" +] } } }, @@ -37584,6 +37914,52 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" ] +}, +"testIamPermissions": { +"description": "Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/targetPools/{resource}/testIamPermissions", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "compute.targetPools.testIamPermissions", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"region", +"resource" +], +"parameters": { +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"region": { +"description": "The name of the region for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"resource": { +"description": "Name or id of the resource for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/targetPools/{resource}/testIamPermissions", +"request": { +"$ref": "TestPermissionsRequest" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "TestPermissionsResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" +] } } }, @@ -39996,7 +40372,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250810", +"revision": "20250902", "rootUrl": "https://compute.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AWSV4Signature": { @@ -42878,7 +43254,7 @@ false "type": "integer" }, "negativeCaching": { -"description": "Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy.", +"description": "Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy.", "type": "boolean" }, "negativeCachingPolicy": { @@ -43726,7 +44102,7 @@ false "type": "integer" }, "negativeCaching": { -"description": "Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 421 (Misdirected Request), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy.", +"description": "Negative caching allows per-status code TTLs to be set, in order to apply fine-grained caching for common errors or redirects. This can reduce the load on your origin and improve end-user experience by reducing response latency. When the cache mode is set to CACHE_ALL_STATIC or USE_ORIGIN_HEADERS, negative caching applies to responses with the specified response code that lack any Cache-Control, Expires, or Pragma: no-cache directives. When the cache mode is set to FORCE_CACHE_ALL, negative caching applies to all responses with the specified response code, and override any caching headers. By default, Cloud CDN will apply the following default TTLs to these status codes: HTTP 300 (Multiple Choice), 301, 308 (Permanent Redirects): 10m HTTP 404 (Not Found), 410 (Gone), 451 (Unavailable For Legal Reasons): 120s HTTP 405 (Method Not Found), 501 (Not Implemented): 60s. These defaults can be overridden in negative_caching_policy.", "type": "boolean" }, "negativeCachingPolicy": { @@ -52846,6 +53222,7 @@ false "description": "[Output Only] The status of the instance. One of the following values: PROVISIONING, STAGING, RUNNING, STOPPING, SUSPENDING, SUSPENDED, REPAIRING, and TERMINATED. For more information about the status of the instance, see Instance life cycle.", "enum": [ "DEPROVISIONING", +"PENDING", "PROVISIONING", "REPAIRING", "RUNNING", @@ -52858,6 +53235,7 @@ false ], "enumDescriptions": [ "The instance is halted and we are performing tear down tasks like network deprogramming, releasing quota, IP, tearing down disks etc.", +"For Flex Start provisioning instance is waiting for available capacity from Dynamic Workload Scheduler (DWS).", "Resources are being allocated for the instance.", "The instance is in repair.", "The instance is running.", @@ -55988,6 +56366,10 @@ false "description": "Additional instance params.", "id": "InstanceParams", "properties": { +"requestValidForDuration": { +"$ref": "Duration", +"description": "Relative deadline for waiting for capacity. Relevant only for Instances.Insert API." +}, "resourceManagerTags": { "additionalProperties": { "type": "string" @@ -56729,6 +57111,7 @@ false "description": "[Output Only] The status of the instance.", "enum": [ "DEPROVISIONING", +"PENDING", "PROVISIONING", "REPAIRING", "RUNNING", @@ -56741,6 +57124,7 @@ false ], "enumDescriptions": [ "The instance is halted and we are performing tear down tasks like network deprogramming, releasing quota, IP, tearing down disks etc.", +"For Flex Start provisioning instance is waiting for available capacity from Dynamic Workload Scheduler (DWS).", "Resources are being allocated for the instance.", "The instance is in repair.", "The instance is running.", @@ -59066,7 +59450,7 @@ false "type": "string" }, "status": { -"description": "Whether this Attachment is active, and if so, whether BGP is up. This is based on the statuses available in the Pantheon UI here: http://google3/java/com/google/cloud/boq/clientapi/gce/hybrid/api/interconnect_models.proto", +"description": "Whether this Attachment is active, and if so, whether BGP is up.", "enum": [ "ATTACHMENT_STATUS_UNKNOWN", "CONNECTION_DISABLED", @@ -62615,6 +62999,7 @@ false "description": "[Output Only] The status of the instance. This field is empty when the instance does not exist.", "enum": [ "DEPROVISIONING", +"PENDING", "PROVISIONING", "REPAIRING", "RUNNING", @@ -62627,6 +63012,7 @@ false ], "enumDescriptions": [ "The instance is halted and we are performing tear down tasks like network deprogramming, releasing quota, IP, tearing down disks etc.", +"For Flex Start provisioning instance is waiting for available capacity from Dynamic Workload Scheduler (DWS).", "Resources are being allocated for the instance.", "The instance is in repair.", "The instance is running.", @@ -65169,6 +65555,10 @@ false ], "type": "string" }, +"parentNicName": { +"description": "Name of the parent network interface of a dynamic network interface.", +"type": "string" +}, "queueCount": { "description": "The networking queue count that's specified by users for the network interface. Both Rx and Tx queues will be set to this number. It'll be empty if not specified by the users.", "format": "int32", @@ -65191,6 +65581,11 @@ false "subnetwork": { "description": "The URL of the Subnetwork resource for this instance. If the network resource is in legacy mode, do not specify this field. If the network is in auto subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is optional. If the network is in custom subnet mode, specifying the subnetwork is required. If you specify this field, you can specify the subnetwork as a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /subnetworks/subnetwork - regions/region/subnetworks/subnetwork ", "type": "string" +}, +"vlan": { +"description": "VLAN tag of a dynamic network interface, must be an integer in the range from 2 to 255 inclusively.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" } }, "type": "object" @@ -65608,6 +66003,10 @@ false "pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", "type": "string" }, +"profileType": { +"$ref": "NetworkProfileProfileType", +"description": "[Output Only] Type of the network profile." +}, "selfLink": { "description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.", "type": "string" @@ -66035,6 +66434,56 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"NetworkProfileProfileType": { +"id": "NetworkProfileProfileType", +"properties": { +"networkType": { +"enum": [ +"RDMA", +"ULL", +"VPC" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"RDMA network.", +"ULL network.", +"VPC network." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"rdmaSubtype": { +"enum": [ +"FALCON", +"ROCE" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"RDMA over Falcon.", +"RDMA over Converged Ethernet (RoCE)." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"ullSubtype": { +"enum": [ +"OPERATOR", +"PARTICIPANT" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Exchange operator.", +"Exchange participant." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"vpcSubtype": { +"enum": [ +"REGIONAL" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Regionally bound VPC network." +], +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "NetworkProfilesListResponse": { "description": "Contains a list of network profiles.", "id": "NetworkProfilesListResponse", @@ -76778,6 +77227,10 @@ false "description": "URI of the network to which this router belongs.", "type": "string" }, +"params": { +"$ref": "RouterParams", +"description": "Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload." +}, "region": { "description": "[Output Only] URI of the region where the router resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.", "type": "string" @@ -77774,6 +78227,20 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"RouterParams": { +"description": "Additional router parameters.", +"id": "RouterParams", +"properties": { +"resourceManagerTags": { +"additionalProperties": { +"type": "string" +}, +"description": "Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {\"tagKeys/333\" : \"tagValues/444\", \"tagKeys/123\" : \"tagValues/456\"} * {\"123/environment\" : \"production\", \"345/abc\" : \"xyz\"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {\"123/environment\" : \"tagValues/444\"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {\"tagKeys/333\" : \"tagValues/444\", \"123/env\" : \"prod\"} is invalid.", +"type": "object" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "RouterStatus": { "id": "RouterStatus", "properties": { @@ -78835,17 +79302,23 @@ false "provisioningModel": { "description": "Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.", "enum": [ +"FLEX_START", "RESERVATION_BOUND", "SPOT", "STANDARD" ], "enumDescriptions": [ +"Instance is provisioned using the Flex Start provisioning model and has a limited runtime.", "Bound to the lifecycle of the reservation in which it is provisioned.", "Heavily discounted, no guaranteed runtime.", "Standard provisioning with user controlled runtime, no discounts." ], "type": "string" }, +"skipGuestOsShutdown": { +"description": "Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs.", +"type": "boolean" +}, "terminationTime": { "description": "Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.", "type": "string" @@ -79775,7 +80248,7 @@ false }, "expr": { "$ref": "Expr", -"description": "User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require Cloud Armor Managed Protection Plus tier and are only supported in Global Security Policies." +"description": "User defined CEVAL expression. A CEVAL expression is used to specify match criteria such as origin.ip, source.region_code and contents in the request header. Expressions containing `evaluateThreatIntelligence` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are not supported in Edge Policies nor in Regional Policies. Expressions containing `evaluatePreconfiguredExpr('sourceiplist-*')` require a Cloud Armor Enterprise subscription and are only supported in Global Security Policies." }, "exprOptions": { "$ref": "SecurityPolicyRuleMatcherExprOptions", @@ -80588,6 +81061,13 @@ false "description": "The url of a connected endpoint.", "type": "string" }, +"natIps": { +"description": "NAT IPs of the connected PSC endpoint and those of other endpoints propagated from it.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, "propagatedConnectionCount": { "description": "The number of consumer Network Connectivity Center spokes that the connected Private Service Connect endpoint has propagated to.", "format": "uint32", @@ -89287,6 +89767,8 @@ false "enum": [ "FAILURE_DISK", "FAILURE_GPU", +"FAILURE_GPU_MULTIPLE_FAULTY_HOSTS_CUSTOMER_REPORTED", +"FAILURE_GPU_NVLINK_SWITCH_CUSTOMER_REPORTED", "FAILURE_GPU_TEMPERATURE", "FAILURE_GPU_XID", "FAILURE_INFRA", @@ -89303,6 +89785,8 @@ false "enumDescriptions": [ "Maintenance due to disk errors.", "Maintenance due to GPU errors.", +"Maintenance due to customer reported multiple faulty hosts via R&R Subblock API.", +"Maintenance due to customer reported NVLink switch failure via R&R Subblock API.", "Maintenance due to high GPU temperature.", "Maintenance due to GPU xid failure.", "Maintenance due to infrastructure errors.", @@ -91267,6 +91751,10 @@ false "description": "Represents a Cloud VPN Tunnel resource. For more information about VPN, read the the Cloud VPN Overview.", "id": "VpnTunnel", "properties": { +"cipherSuite": { +"$ref": "VpnTunnelCipherSuite", +"description": "User specified list of ciphers to use for the phase 1 and phase 2 of the IKE protocol." +}, "creationTimestamp": { "description": "[Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.", "type": "string" @@ -91579,6 +92067,18 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"VpnTunnelCipherSuite": { +"id": "VpnTunnelCipherSuite", +"properties": { +"phase1": { +"$ref": "VpnTunnelPhase1Algorithms" +}, +"phase2": { +"$ref": "VpnTunnelPhase2Algorithms" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "VpnTunnelList": { "description": "Contains a list of VpnTunnel resources.", "id": "VpnTunnelList", @@ -91734,6 +92234,60 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"VpnTunnelPhase1Algorithms": { +"id": "VpnTunnelPhase1Algorithms", +"properties": { +"dh": { +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"encryption": { +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"integrity": { +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"prf": { +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"VpnTunnelPhase2Algorithms": { +"id": "VpnTunnelPhase2Algorithms", +"properties": { +"encryption": { +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"integrity": { +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"pfs": { +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "VpnTunnelsScopedList": { "id": "VpnTunnelsScopedList", "properties": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/connectors.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/connectors.v1.json index 146b2d38fe6..1743147ad73 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/connectors.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/connectors.v1.json @@ -2757,7 +2757,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250813", +"revision": "20250826", "rootUrl": "https://connectors.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuditConfig": { @@ -3214,7 +3214,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "locationType": { -"description": "Optional. Location Tyep denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections.", +"description": "Optional. Location Type denotes where this value should be sent in BYOC connections.", "enum": [ "LOCATION_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED", "HEADER", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/connectors.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/connectors.v2.json index 34ed55762b9..51c3f92b730 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/connectors.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/connectors.v2.json @@ -769,7 +769,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250813", +"revision": "20250826", "rootUrl": "https://connectors.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AccessCredentials": { @@ -2710,6 +2710,13 @@ false "description": "Message representing a single tool.", "id": "Tool", "properties": { +"dependsOn": { +"description": "List of tool names that this tool depends on.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, "description": { "description": "Description of the tool.", "type": "string" diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/contactcenterinsights.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/contactcenterinsights.v1.json index b14e53a69e5..71b537431cb 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/contactcenterinsights.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/contactcenterinsights.v1.json @@ -697,7 +697,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "authorizedViewSetId": { -"description": "Optional. A unique ID for the new AuthorizedViewSet. This ID will become the final component of the AuthorizedViewSet's resource name. If no ID is specified, a server-generated ID will be used. This value should be 4-64 characters and must match the regular expression `^[a-z]([a-z0-9-]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?$`. See aip.dev/122#resource-id-segments", +"description": "Optional. A unique ID for the new AuthorizedViewSet. This ID will become the final component of the AuthorizedViewSet's resource name. If no ID is specified, a server-generated ID will be used. This value should be 4-64 characters and must match the regular expression `^[a-z]([a-z0-9-]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?$`. See https://google.aip.dev/122#resource-id-segments", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, @@ -869,7 +869,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "authorizedViewId": { -"description": "Optional. A unique ID for the new AuthorizedView. This ID will become the final component of the AuthorizedView's resource name. If no ID is specified, a server-generated ID will be used. This value should be 4-64 characters and must match the regular expression `^[a-z]([a-z0-9-]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?$`. See aip.dev/122#resource-id-segments", +"description": "Optional. A unique ID for the new AuthorizedView. This ID will become the final component of the AuthorizedView's resource name. If no ID is specified, a server-generated ID will be used. This value should be 4-64 characters and must match the regular expression `^[a-z]([a-z0-9-]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?$`. See https://google.aip.dev/122#resource-id-segments", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, @@ -5638,7 +5638,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250825", +"revision": "20250909", "rootUrl": "https://contactcenterinsights.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudContactcenterinsightsV1Analysis": { @@ -9461,12 +9461,16 @@ true "enum": [ "PREDEFINED_QUESTION_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED", "CONVERSATION_OUTCOME", -"CONVERSATION_OUTCOME_ESCALATION_INITIATOR_ROLE" +"CONVERSATION_OUTCOME_ESCALATION_INITIATOR_ROLE", +"CONVERSATION_OUTCOME_CUSTOMER_SATISFACTION", +"CONVERSATION_OUTCOME_AGENT_HELPFULNESS" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "The type of the predefined question is unspecified.", "A prebuilt classifier classfying the outcome of the conversation. For example, if the customer issue mentioned in a conversation has been resolved or not.", -"A prebuilt classifier classfying the initiator of the conversation escalation. For example, if it was initiated by the customer or the agent." +"A prebuilt classifier classfying the initiator of the conversation escalation. For example, if it was initiated by the customer or the agent.", +"A prebuilt classifier classfying whether the customer is satisfied with the agent's response.", +"A prebuilt classifier classfying whether the agent is helpful to the customer." ], "type": "string" } @@ -10354,7 +10358,7 @@ true "additionalProperties": { "type": "string" }, -"description": "A map that maps a notification trigger to a Pub/Sub topic. Each time a specified trigger occurs, Insights will notify the corresponding Pub/Sub topic. Keys are notification triggers. Supported keys are: * \"all-triggers\": Notify each time any of the supported triggers occurs. * \"create-analysis\": Notify each time an analysis is created. * \"create-conversation\": Notify each time a conversation is created. * \"export-insights-data\": Notify each time an export is complete. * \"ingest-conversations\": Notify each time an IngestConversations LRO is complete. * \"update-conversation\": Notify each time a conversation is updated via UpdateConversation. * \"upload-conversation\": Notify when an UploadConversation LRO is complete. Values are Pub/Sub topics. The format of each Pub/Sub topic is: projects/{project}/topics/{topic}", +"description": "A map that maps a notification trigger to a Pub/Sub topic. Each time a specified trigger occurs, Insights will notify the corresponding Pub/Sub topic. Keys are notification triggers. Supported keys are: * \"all-triggers\": Notify each time any of the supported triggers occurs. * \"create-analysis\": Notify each time an analysis is created. * \"create-conversation\": Notify each time a conversation is created. * \"export-insights-data\": Notify each time an export is complete. * \"ingest-conversations\": Notify each time an IngestConversations LRO is complete. * \"update-conversation\": Notify each time a conversation is updated via UpdateConversation. * \"upload-conversation\": Notify when an UploadConversation LRO is complete. * \"update-or-analyze-conversation\": Notify when an analysis for a conversation is completed or when the conversation is updated. The message will contain the conversation with transcript, analysis and other metadata. Values are Pub/Sub topics. The format of each Pub/Sub topic is: projects/{project}/topics/{topic}", "type": "object" }, "redactionConfig": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/containeranalysis.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/containeranalysis.v1.json index 6f6028c4ab6..a3314bccaad 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/containeranalysis.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/containeranalysis.v1.json @@ -1715,7 +1715,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250813", +"revision": "20250829", "rootUrl": "https://containeranalysis.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AliasContext": { @@ -2986,7 +2986,7 @@ "id": "ContaineranalysisGoogleDevtoolsCloudbuildV1ArtifactsNpmPackage", "properties": { "packagePath": { -"description": "Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package", +"description": "Optional. Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package Only one of `archive` or `package_path` can be specified.", "type": "string" }, "repository": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/containeranalysis.v1alpha1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/containeranalysis.v1alpha1.json index 8321d07e582..86c6b639fea 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/containeranalysis.v1alpha1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/containeranalysis.v1alpha1.json @@ -1452,7 +1452,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250813", +"revision": "20250829", "rootUrl": "https://containeranalysis.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AnalysisCompleted": { @@ -2530,7 +2530,7 @@ "id": "ContaineranalysisGoogleDevtoolsCloudbuildV1ArtifactsNpmPackage", "properties": { "packagePath": { -"description": "Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package", +"description": "Optional. Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package Only one of `archive` or `package_path` can be specified.", "type": "string" }, "repository": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/containeranalysis.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/containeranalysis.v1beta1.json index fb4692ce4df..c2ea3b9eb3d 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/containeranalysis.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/containeranalysis.v1beta1.json @@ -1771,7 +1771,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250813", +"revision": "20250905", "rootUrl": "https://containeranalysis.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AliasContext": { @@ -2912,7 +2912,7 @@ "id": "ContaineranalysisGoogleDevtoolsCloudbuildV1ArtifactsNpmPackage", "properties": { "packagePath": { -"description": "Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package", +"description": "Optional. Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package Only one of `archive` or `package_path` can be specified.", "type": "string" }, "repository": { @@ -4458,7 +4458,8 @@ false "SPDX_FILE", "SPDX_RELATIONSHIP", "VULNERABILITY_ASSESSMENT", -"SBOM_REFERENCE" +"SBOM_REFERENCE", +"SECRET" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Default value. This value is unused.", @@ -4475,7 +4476,8 @@ false "This represents an SPDX File.", "This represents an SPDX Relationship.", "This represents a Vulnerability Assessment.", -"This represents an SBOM Reference." +"This represents an SBOM Reference.", +"This represents a secret." ], "type": "string" } @@ -4746,6 +4748,17 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"FileLocation": { +"description": "Indicates the location at which a package was found.", +"id": "FileLocation", +"properties": { +"filePath": { +"description": "For jars that are contained inside .war files, this filepath can indicate the path to war file combined with the path to jar file.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "FileNote": { "description": "FileNote represents an SPDX File Information section: https://spdx.github.io/spdx-spec/4-file-information/", "id": "FileNote", @@ -5698,7 +5711,8 @@ false "SPDX_FILE", "SPDX_RELATIONSHIP", "VULNERABILITY_ASSESSMENT", -"SBOM_REFERENCE" +"SBOM_REFERENCE", +"SECRET" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Default value. This value is unused.", @@ -5715,7 +5729,8 @@ false "This represents an SPDX File.", "This represents an SPDX Relationship.", "This represents a Vulnerability Assessment.", -"This represents an SBOM Reference." +"This represents an SBOM Reference.", +"This represents a secret." ], "type": "string" }, @@ -5753,6 +5768,10 @@ false "$ref": "SBOMReferenceNote", "description": "A note describing an SBOM reference." }, +"secret": { +"$ref": "SecretNote", +"description": "A note describing a secret." +}, "shortDescription": { "description": "A one sentence description of this note.", "type": "string" @@ -5843,7 +5862,8 @@ false "SPDX_FILE", "SPDX_RELATIONSHIP", "VULNERABILITY_ASSESSMENT", -"SBOM_REFERENCE" +"SBOM_REFERENCE", +"SECRET" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Default value. This value is unused.", @@ -5860,7 +5880,8 @@ false "This represents an SPDX File.", "This represents an SPDX Relationship.", "This represents a Vulnerability Assessment.", -"This represents an SBOM Reference." +"This represents an SBOM Reference.", +"This represents a secret." ], "type": "string" }, @@ -5888,6 +5909,10 @@ false "$ref": "SBOMReferenceOccurrence", "description": "Describes a specific SBOM reference occurrences." }, +"secret": { +"$ref": "SecretOccurrence", +"description": "Describes a secret." +}, "spdxFile": { "$ref": "FileOccurrence", "description": "Describes a specific SPDX File." @@ -6770,6 +6795,90 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"SecretLocation": { +"description": "The location of the secret.", +"id": "SecretLocation", +"properties": { +"fileLocation": { +"$ref": "FileLocation", +"description": "The secret is found from a file." +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"SecretNote": { +"description": "The note representing a secret.", +"id": "SecretNote", +"properties": {}, +"type": "object" +}, +"SecretOccurrence": { +"description": "The occurrence provides details of a secret.", +"id": "SecretOccurrence", +"properties": { +"kind": { +"description": "Required. Type of secret.", +"enum": [ +"SECRET_KIND_UNSPECIFIED", +"SECRET_KIND_UNKNOWN", +"SECRET_KIND_GCP_SERVICE_ACCOUNT_KEY" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unspecified", +"The secret kind is unknown.", +"A GCP service account key per: https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/creating-managing-service-account-keys" +], +"type": "string" +}, +"locations": { +"description": "Optional. Locations where the secret is detected.", +"items": { +"$ref": "SecretLocation" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"statuses": { +"description": "Optional. Status of the secret.", +"items": { +"$ref": "SecretStatus" +}, +"type": "array" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"SecretStatus": { +"description": "The status of the secret with a timestamp.", +"id": "SecretStatus", +"properties": { +"message": { +"description": "Optional. Optional message about the status code.", +"type": "string" +}, +"status": { +"description": "Optional. The status of the secret.", +"enum": [ +"STATUS_UNSPECIFIED", +"UNKNOWN", +"VALID", +"INVALID" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unspecified", +"The status of the secret is unknown.", +"The secret is valid.", +"The secret is invalid." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"updateTime": { +"description": "Optional. The time the secret status was last updated.", +"format": "google-datetime", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "SetIamPolicyRequest": { "description": "Request message for `SetIamPolicy` method.", "id": "SetIamPolicyRequest", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dataform.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dataform.v1beta1.json index 51e10dad8e3..b40b14d8526 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dataform.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dataform.v1beta1.json @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -2462,7 +2462,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250817", +"revision": "20250907", "rootUrl": "https://dataform.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "ActionErrorTable": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datafusion.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datafusion.v1.json index 2d877d8fd38..d7eb80e7661 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datafusion.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datafusion.v1.json @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. A list of extra location types that should be used as conditions for controlling the visibility of the locations.", +"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -743,7 +743,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250610", +"revision": "20250901", "rootUrl": "https://datafusion.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Accelerator": { @@ -998,11 +998,13 @@ "items": { "enum": [ "DISABLED_REASON_UNSPECIFIED", -"KMS_KEY_ISSUE" +"KMS_KEY_ISSUE", +"PROJECT_STATE_OFF" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "This is an unknown reason for disabling.", -"The KMS key used by the instance is either revoked or denied access to" +"The KMS key used by the instance is either revoked or denied access to", +"The consumer project is in a non-ACTIVE state." ], "type": "string" }, @@ -1125,7 +1127,8 @@ "UPDATING", "AUTO_UPDATING", "AUTO_UPGRADING", -"DISABLED" +"DISABLED", +"ENABLING" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Instance does not have a state yet", @@ -1138,7 +1141,8 @@ "Instance is being updated on customer request", "Instance is being auto-updated", "Instance is being auto-upgraded", -"Instance is disabled" +"Instance is disabled", +"Instance is being enabled." ], "readOnly": true, "type": "string" diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datafusion.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datafusion.v1beta1.json index 85de3e79aa6..f6164856f31 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datafusion.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datafusion.v1beta1.json @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. A list of extra location types that should be used as conditions for controlling the visibility of the locations.", +"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -941,7 +941,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250610", +"revision": "20250901", "rootUrl": "https://datafusion.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Accelerator": { @@ -1211,11 +1211,13 @@ "items": { "enum": [ "DISABLED_REASON_UNSPECIFIED", -"KMS_KEY_ISSUE" +"KMS_KEY_ISSUE", +"PROJECT_STATE_OFF" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "This is an unknown reason for disabling.", -"The KMS key used by the instance is either revoked or denied access to" +"The KMS key used by the instance is either revoked or denied access to", +"The consumer project is in a non-ACTIVE state." ], "type": "string" }, @@ -1338,7 +1340,8 @@ "UPDATING", "AUTO_UPDATING", "AUTO_UPGRADING", -"DISABLED" +"DISABLED", +"ENABLING" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Instance does not have a state yet", @@ -1351,7 +1354,8 @@ "Instance is being updated on customer request", "Instance is being auto-updated", "Instance is being auto-upgraded", -"Instance is disabled" +"Instance is disabled", +"Instance is being enabled." ], "readOnly": true, "type": "string" diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datamigration.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datamigration.v1.json index b0181eb499e..e4fdd35bd90 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datamigration.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datamigration.v1.json @@ -2345,7 +2345,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250815", +"revision": "20250826", "rootUrl": "https://datamigration.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AlloyDbConnectionProfile": { @@ -6482,10 +6482,19 @@ "description": "If the source is a Cloud SQL database, use this field to provide the Cloud SQL instance ID of the source.", "type": "string" }, +"cloudSqlProjectId": { +"description": "Optional. The project id of the Cloud SQL instance. If not provided, the project id of the connection profile will be used.", +"type": "string" +}, "database": { "description": "Required. The name of the specific database within the host.", "type": "string" }, +"dbmPort": { +"description": "Optional. The Database Mirroring (DBM) port of the source SQL Server instance.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, "forwardSshConnectivity": { "$ref": "ForwardSshTunnelConnectivity", "description": "Forward SSH tunnel connectivity." @@ -6531,6 +6540,21 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"SqlServerDagConfig": { +"description": "Configuration for distributed availability group (DAG) for the SQL Server homogeneous migration.", +"id": "SqlServerDagConfig", +"properties": { +"linkedServer": { +"description": "Required. The name of the linked server that points to the source SQL Server instance. Only used by DAG migrations.", +"type": "string" +}, +"sourceAg": { +"description": "Required. The name of the source availability group. Only used by DAG migrations.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "SqlServerDatabaseBackup": { "description": "Specifies the backup details for a single database in Cloud Storage for homogeneous migration to Cloud SQL for SQL Server.", "id": "SqlServerDatabaseBackup", @@ -6573,6 +6597,10 @@ "description": "Required. Pattern that describes the default backup naming strategy. The specified pattern should ensure lexicographical order of backups. The pattern must define one of the following capture group sets: Capture group set #1 yy/yyyy - year, 2 or 4 digits mm - month number, 1-12 dd - day of month, 1-31 hh - hour of day, 00-23 mi - minutes, 00-59 ss - seconds, 00-59 Example: For backup file TestDB_20230802_155400.trn, use pattern: (?.*)_backup_(?\\d{4})(?\\d{2})(?\\d{2})_(?\\d{2})(?\\d{2})(?\\d{2}).trn Capture group set #2 timestamp - unix timestamp Example: For backup file TestDB.1691448254.trn, use pattern: (?.*)\\.(?\\d*).trn or (?.*)\\.(?\\d*).trn", "type": "string" }, +"dagConfig": { +"$ref": "SqlServerDagConfig", +"description": "Optional. Configuration for distributed availability group (DAG) for the SQL Server homogeneous migration." +}, "databaseBackups": { "description": "Required. Backup details per database in Cloud Storage.", "items": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dataplex.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dataplex.v1.json index 3925599164b..b1e55ca76ae 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dataplex.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dataplex.v1.json @@ -771,7 +771,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -7149,7 +7149,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250825", +"revision": "20250907", "rootUrl": "https://dataplex.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Empty": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datastore.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datastore.v1.json index d0345d0e713..5f08e37375c 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datastore.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datastore.v1.json @@ -22,6 +22,11 @@ "description": "Regional Endpoint", "endpointUrl": "https://datastore.us-east7.rep.googleapis.com/", "location": "us-east7" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://batch-datastore.us-east7.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "us-east7" } ], "fullyEncodeReservedExpansion": true, @@ -661,7 +666,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250811", +"revision": "20250830", "rootUrl": "https://datastore.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Aggregation": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datastore.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datastore.v1beta1.json index de7363fe87e..e9c3200248a 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datastore.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datastore.v1beta1.json @@ -22,6 +22,11 @@ "description": "Regional Endpoint", "endpointUrl": "https://datastore.us-east7.rep.googleapis.com/", "location": "us-east7" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://batch-datastore.us-east7.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "us-east7" } ], "fullyEncodeReservedExpansion": true, @@ -175,7 +180,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250811", +"revision": "20250830", "rootUrl": "https://datastore.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleDatastoreAdminV1CommonMetadata": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datastore.v1beta3.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datastore.v1beta3.json index fcb04c2df84..e5e71db314d 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datastore.v1beta3.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datastore.v1beta3.json @@ -22,6 +22,11 @@ "description": "Regional Endpoint", "endpointUrl": "https://datastore.us-east7.rep.googleapis.com/", "location": "us-east7" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://batch-datastore.us-east7.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "us-east7" } ], "fullyEncodeReservedExpansion": true, @@ -343,7 +348,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250811", +"revision": "20250830", "rootUrl": "https://datastore.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Aggregation": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datastream.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datastream.v1.json index fcf5efd07a2..a93aa680ad4 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datastream.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/datastream.v1.json @@ -1261,7 +1261,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250817", +"revision": "20250827", "rootUrl": "https://datastream.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AppendOnly": { @@ -2155,6 +2155,18 @@ "properties": {}, "type": "object" }, +"MongodbChangeStreamPosition": { +"description": "MongoDB change stream position", +"id": "MongodbChangeStreamPosition", +"properties": { +"startTime": { +"description": "Required. The timestamp (in epoch seconds) to start change stream from.", +"format": "google-datetime", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "MongodbCluster": { "description": "MongoDB Cluster structure.", "id": "MongodbCluster", @@ -3547,6 +3559,10 @@ "description": "CDC strategy to start replicating from a specific position in the source.", "id": "SpecificStartPosition", "properties": { +"mongodbChangeStreamPosition": { +"$ref": "MongodbChangeStreamPosition", +"description": "MongoDB change stream position to start replicating from." +}, "mysqlGtidPosition": { "$ref": "MysqlGtidPosition", "description": "MySQL GTID set to start replicating from." diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/deploymentmanager.alpha.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/deploymentmanager.alpha.json index 450ddde8d7e..2f52cc0095d 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/deploymentmanager.alpha.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/deploymentmanager.alpha.json @@ -1676,7 +1676,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250822", +"revision": "20250828", "rootUrl": "https://deploymentmanager.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AsyncOptions": { @@ -2271,6 +2271,7 @@ "description": "REQUIRED: The complete policy to be applied to the 'resource'. The size of the policy is limited to a few 10s of KB. An empty policy is in general a valid policy but certain services (like Projects) might reject them." }, "updateMask": { +"description": "Update mask for the policy.", "format": "google-fieldmask", "type": "string" } diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/deploymentmanager.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/deploymentmanager.v2.json index 4b7e7a5878b..436e68b6c30 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/deploymentmanager.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/deploymentmanager.v2.json @@ -1028,7 +1028,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250822", +"revision": "20250828", "rootUrl": "https://deploymentmanager.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuditConfig": { @@ -1385,6 +1385,7 @@ "description": "REQUIRED: The complete policy to be applied to the 'resource'. The size of the policy is limited to a few 10s of KB. An empty policy is in general a valid policy but certain services (like Projects) might reject them." }, "updateMask": { +"description": "Update mask for the policy.", "format": "google-fieldmask", "type": "string" } diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/deploymentmanager.v2beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/deploymentmanager.v2beta.json index 548f8b72eb5..b8e5bf24f8e 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/deploymentmanager.v2beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/deploymentmanager.v2beta.json @@ -1636,7 +1636,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250822", +"revision": "20250828", "rootUrl": "https://deploymentmanager.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AsyncOptions": { @@ -2197,6 +2197,7 @@ "description": "REQUIRED: The complete policy to be applied to the 'resource'. The size of the policy is limited to a few 10s of KB. An empty policy is in general a valid policy but certain services (like Projects) might reject them." }, "updateMask": { +"description": "Update mask for the policy.", "format": "google-fieldmask", "type": "string" } diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/developerconnect.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/developerconnect.v1.json index b9ee7607ab1..717afe1fc21 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/developerconnect.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/developerconnect.v1.json @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -1601,7 +1601,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250821", +"revision": "20250904", "rootUrl": "https://developerconnect.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AccountConnector": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dfareporting.v4.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dfareporting.v4.json index 224e8bbde89..57b097e46aa 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dfareporting.v4.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dfareporting.v4.json @@ -10266,7 +10266,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250828", +"revision": "20250902", "rootUrl": "https://dfareporting.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Account": { @@ -18875,6 +18875,10 @@ "$ref": "DimensionValue", "description": "Dimension value for the ID of the advertiser. This is a read-only, auto-generated field." }, +"allowOnYoutube": { +"description": "Optional. Whether the placement is enabled for YouTube integration.", +"type": "boolean" +}, "campaignId": { "description": "Campaign ID of this placement. This field is a required field on insertion.", "format": "int64", @@ -19137,6 +19141,10 @@ "wrappingOptOut": { "description": "Whether this placement opts out of tag wrapping.", "type": "boolean" +}, +"youtubeSettings": { +"$ref": "YoutubeSettings", +"description": "Optional. YouTube settings for the placement. The placement must be enabled for YouTube to use this field." } }, "type": "object" @@ -22670,6 +22678,105 @@ } }, "type": "object" +}, +"YoutubeSettings": { +"description": "Contains the YouTube settings.", +"id": "YoutubeSettings", +"properties": { +"businessLogoCreativeIds": { +"description": "Optional. The IDs of the creatives to use for the business logo. Currently only one creative is supported.", +"items": { +"format": "int64", +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"businessName": { +"description": "Optional. The business name.", +"type": "string" +}, +"callToActions": { +"description": "Optional. The call to actions. Currently only one call to action is supported.", +"items": { +"enum": [ +"CALL_TO_ACTION_UNKNOWN", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_LEARN_MORE", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_GET_QUOTE", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_APPLY_NOW", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_SIGN_UP", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_CONTACT_US", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_SUBSCRIBE", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_DOWNLOAD", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_BOOK_NOW", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_GET_OFFER", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_SHOP_NOW", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_VISIT_STORE", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_CALL_NOW", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_VIEW_MENU", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_TEST_DRIVE", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_SCHEDULE_NOW", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_BUY_NOW", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_DONATE_NOW", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_ORDER_NOW", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_PLAY_NOW", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_SEE_MORE", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_START_NOW", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_VISIT_SITE", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_WATCH_NOW" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"" +], +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"descriptions": { +"description": "Optional. The descriptions. Currently only one description is supported.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"headlines": { +"description": "Optional. The headlines associated with the call to actions. Currently only one headline is supported.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"longHeadlines": { +"description": "Optional. The long headlines. Currently only one long headline is supported.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +} +}, +"type": "object" } }, "servicePath": "dfareporting/v4/", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dfareporting.v5.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dfareporting.v5.json index 12aa876a85a..544cec7326e 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dfareporting.v5.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dfareporting.v5.json @@ -9806,7 +9806,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250828", +"revision": "20250902", "rootUrl": "https://dfareporting.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Account": { @@ -18057,6 +18057,10 @@ "$ref": "DimensionValue", "description": "Dimension value for the ID of the advertiser. This is a read-only, auto-generated field." }, +"allowOnYoutube": { +"description": "Optional. Whether the placement is enabled for YouTube integration.", +"type": "boolean" +}, "campaignId": { "description": "Campaign ID of this placement. This field is a required field on insertion.", "format": "int64", @@ -18319,6 +18323,10 @@ "wrappingOptOut": { "description": "Whether this placement opts out of tag wrapping.", "type": "boolean" +}, +"youtubeSettings": { +"$ref": "YoutubeSettings", +"description": "Optional. YouTube settings for the placement. The placement must be enabled for YouTube to use this field." } }, "type": "object" @@ -21541,6 +21549,105 @@ } }, "type": "object" +}, +"YoutubeSettings": { +"description": "Contains the YouTube settings.", +"id": "YoutubeSettings", +"properties": { +"businessLogoCreativeIds": { +"description": "Optional. The IDs of the creatives to use for the business logo. Currently only one creative is supported.", +"items": { +"format": "int64", +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"businessName": { +"description": "Optional. The business name.", +"type": "string" +}, +"callToActions": { +"description": "Optional. The call to actions. Currently only one call to action is supported.", +"items": { +"enum": [ +"CALL_TO_ACTION_UNKNOWN", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_LEARN_MORE", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_GET_QUOTE", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_APPLY_NOW", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_SIGN_UP", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_CONTACT_US", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_SUBSCRIBE", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_DOWNLOAD", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_BOOK_NOW", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_GET_OFFER", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_SHOP_NOW", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_VISIT_STORE", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_CALL_NOW", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_VIEW_MENU", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_TEST_DRIVE", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_SCHEDULE_NOW", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_BUY_NOW", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_DONATE_NOW", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_ORDER_NOW", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_PLAY_NOW", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_SEE_MORE", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_START_NOW", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_VISIT_SITE", +"CALL_TO_ACTION_WATCH_NOW" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"" +], +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"descriptions": { +"description": "Optional. The descriptions. Currently only one description is supported.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"headlines": { +"description": "Optional. The headlines associated with the call to actions. Currently only one headline is supported.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"longHeadlines": { +"description": "Optional. The long headlines. Currently only one long headline is supported.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +} +}, +"type": "object" } }, "servicePath": "dfareporting/v5/", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dialogflow.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dialogflow.v2.json index 01c37373545..af2cc920513 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dialogflow.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dialogflow.v2.json @@ -4407,7 +4407,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. A list of extra location types that should be used as conditions for controlling the visibility of the locations.", +"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -8962,7 +8962,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250812", +"revision": "20250902", "rootUrl": "https://dialogflow.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3AdvancedSettings": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dialogflow.v3.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dialogflow.v3.json index 309f42990d9..e699c525e40 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dialogflow.v3.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dialogflow.v3.json @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. A list of extra location types that should be used as conditions for controlling the visibility of the locations.", +"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -5309,7 +5309,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250812", +"revision": "20250902", "rootUrl": "https://dialogflow.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3Action": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/discoveryengine.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/discoveryengine.v1.json index ce67a0db1c9..6b43af3b92e 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/discoveryengine.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/discoveryengine.v1.json @@ -7344,7 +7344,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250824", +"revision": "20250908", "rootUrl": "https://discoveryengine.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GdataBlobstore2Info": { @@ -9782,6 +9782,10 @@ }, "type": "array" }, +"customerPolicyEnforcementResult": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1AssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResult", +"description": "Optional. The field contains information about the various policy checks' results like the banned phrases or the Model Armor checks. This field is populated only if the assist call was skipped due to a policy violation." +}, "name": { "description": "Immutable. Identifier. Resource name of the `AssistAnswer`. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/collections/{collection}/engines/{engine}/sessions/{session}/assistAnswers/{assist_answer}` This field must be a UTF-8 encoded string with a length limit of 1024 characters.", "type": "string" @@ -9814,6 +9818,78 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1AssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResult": { +"description": "Customer policy enforcement results. Contains the results of the various policy checks, like the banned phrases or the Model Armor checks.", +"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1AssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResult", +"properties": { +"policyResults": { +"description": "Customer policy enforcement results. Populated only if the assist call was skipped due to a policy violation. It contains results from those filters that blocked the processing of the query.", +"items": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1AssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResultPolicyEnforcementResult" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"verdict": { +"description": "Final verdict of the customer policy enforcement. If only one policy blocked the processing, the verdict is BLOCK.", +"enum": [ +"UNSPECIFIED", +"ALLOW", +"BLOCK" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unknown value.", +"There was no policy violation.", +"Processing was blocked by the customer policy." +], +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1AssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResultBannedPhraseEnforcementResult": { +"description": "Customer policy enforcement result for the banned phrase policy.", +"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1AssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResultBannedPhraseEnforcementResult", +"properties": { +"bannedPhrases": { +"description": "The banned phrases that were found in the query or the answer.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1AssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResultModelArmorEnforcementResult": { +"description": "Customer policy enforcement result for the Model Armor policy.", +"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1AssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResultModelArmorEnforcementResult", +"properties": { +"error": { +"$ref": "GoogleRpcStatus", +"description": "The error returned by Model Armor if the policy enforcement failed for some reason." +}, +"modelArmorViolation": { +"description": "The Model Armor violation that was found.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1AssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResultPolicyEnforcementResult": { +"description": "Customer policy enforcement result for a single policy type.", +"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1AssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResultPolicyEnforcementResult", +"properties": { +"bannedPhraseEnforcementResult": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1AssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResultBannedPhraseEnforcementResult", +"description": "The policy enforcement result for the banned phrase policy." +}, +"modelArmorEnforcementResult": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1AssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResultModelArmorEnforcementResult", +"description": "The policy enforcement result for the Model Armor policy." +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1AssistAnswerReply": { "description": "One part of the multi-part response of the assist call.", "id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1AssistAnswerReply", @@ -9996,6 +10072,10 @@ "$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1AssistantCustomerPolicyBannedPhrase" }, "type": "array" +}, +"modelArmorConfig": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1AssistantCustomerPolicyModelArmorConfig", +"description": "Optional. Model Armor configuration to be used for sanitizing user prompts and assistant responses." } }, "type": "object" @@ -10029,6 +10109,35 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1AssistantCustomerPolicyModelArmorConfig": { +"description": "Configuration for customer defined Model Armor templates to be used for sanitizing user prompts and assistant responses.", +"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1AssistantCustomerPolicyModelArmorConfig", +"properties": { +"failureMode": { +"description": "Optional. Defines the failure mode for Model Armor sanitization.", +"enum": [ +"FAILURE_MODE_UNSPECIFIED", +"FAIL_OPEN", +"FAIL_CLOSED" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unspecified failure mode, default behavior is `FAIL_CLOSED`.", +"In case of a Model Armor processing failure, the request is allowed to proceed without any changes.", +"In case of a Model Armor processing failure, the request is rejected." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"responseTemplate": { +"description": "Optional. The resource name of the Model Armor template for sanitizing assistant responses. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/templates/{template_id}` If not specified, no sanitization will be applied to the assistant response.", +"type": "string" +}, +"userPromptTemplate": { +"description": "Optional. The resource name of the Model Armor template for sanitizing user prompts. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/templates/{template_id}` If not specified, no sanitization will be applied to the user prompt.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1AssistantGenerationConfig": { "description": "Configuration for the generation of the assistant response.", "id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1AssistantGenerationConfig", @@ -18262,12 +18371,14 @@ false "enum": [ "BLOCKING_REASON_UNSPECIFIED", "ALLOWLIST_STATIC_IP", -"ALLOWLIST_IN_SERVICE_ATTACHMENT" +"ALLOWLIST_IN_SERVICE_ATTACHMENT", +"ALLOWLIST_SERVICE_ACCOUNT" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Default value.", "Connector requires customer to allowlist static IPs.", -"Connector requires customer to allowlist our project in their service attachment." +"Connector requires customer to allowlist our project in their service attachment.", +"Connector requires customer to allowlist service account in their project." ], "type": "string" }, @@ -18370,6 +18481,10 @@ false "readOnly": true, "type": "array" }, +"federatedConfig": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaDataConnectorFederatedConfig", +"description": "Optional. Any params and credentials used specifically for hybrid connectors supporting FEDERATED mode. This field should only be set if the connector is a hybrid connector and we want to enable FEDERATED mode." +}, "hybridIngestionDisabled": { "description": "Optional. If the connector is a hybrid connector, determines whether ingestion is enabled and appropriate resources are provisioned during connector creation. If the connector is not a hybrid connector, this field is ignored.", "type": "boolean" @@ -18465,6 +18580,13 @@ false "format": "google-duration", "type": "string" }, +"removeParamKeys": { +"description": "Optional. Specifies keys to be removed from the 'params' field. This is only active when 'params' is included in the 'update_mask' in an UpdateDataConnectorRequest. Deletion takes precedence if a key is both in 'remove_param_keys' and present in the 'params' field of the request.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, "state": { "description": "Output only. State of the connector.", "enum": [ @@ -18552,6 +18674,29 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaDataConnectorFederatedConfig": { +"description": "Any params and credentials used specifically for hybrid connectors supporting FEDERATED mode.", +"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaDataConnectorFederatedConfig", +"properties": { +"additionalParams": { +"additionalProperties": { +"description": "Properties of the object.", +"type": "any" +}, +"description": "Optional. Any additional parameters needed for FEDERATED.", +"type": "object" +}, +"authParams": { +"additionalProperties": { +"description": "Properties of the object.", +"type": "any" +}, +"description": "Optional. Any authentication parameters specific to FEDERATED.", +"type": "object" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaDataConnectorRealtimeSyncConfig": { "description": "The configuration for realtime sync to store additional params for realtime sync.", "id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaDataConnectorRealtimeSyncConfig", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/discoveryengine.v1alpha.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/discoveryengine.v1alpha.json index 68f6a21876f..6348ebb6a4a 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/discoveryengine.v1alpha.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/discoveryengine.v1alpha.json @@ -8481,7 +8481,7 @@ "notebooks": { "methods": { "batchDelete": { -"description": "Batch deletes Notebooks. Needs a side channel with the user's EUC.", +"description": "Batch deletes Notebooks.", "flatPath": "v1alpha/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/notebooks:batchDelete", "httpMethod": "POST", "id": "discoveryengine.projects.locations.notebooks.batchDelete", @@ -8509,7 +8509,7 @@ ] }, "create": { -"description": "Creates a notebook. Needs a side channel with the user's EUC.", +"description": "Creates a notebook.", "flatPath": "v1alpha/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/notebooks", "httpMethod": "POST", "id": "discoveryengine.projects.locations.notebooks.create", @@ -8537,7 +8537,7 @@ ] }, "get": { -"description": "Gets a notebook. Needs a side channel with the user's EUC.", +"description": "Gets a notebook.", "flatPath": "v1alpha/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/notebooks/{notebooksId}", "httpMethod": "GET", "id": "discoveryengine.projects.locations.notebooks.get", @@ -8562,7 +8562,7 @@ ] }, "listRecentlyViewed": { -"description": "Lists the recently viewed notebooks. Needs a side channel with the user's EUC.", +"description": "Lists the notebooks ordered by last view time.", "flatPath": "v1alpha/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/notebooks:listRecentlyViewed", "httpMethod": "GET", "id": "discoveryengine.projects.locations.notebooks.listRecentlyViewed", @@ -8571,7 +8571,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "pageSize": { -"description": "Optional. Maximum number of Notebooks to return. If unspecified, defaults to \"200\". The maximum allowed value is \"500\". If this field is negative, will use the default value.", +"description": "Optional. Maximum number of Notebooks to return. If unspecified, defaults to \"500\". The maximum allowed value is \"500\". If this field is negative, will use the default value.", "format": "int32", "location": "query", "type": "integer" @@ -8598,7 +8598,7 @@ ] }, "share": { -"description": "Shares a notebook to other accounts. Needs a side channel with the user's EUC.", +"description": "Shares a notebook to other accounts.", "flatPath": "v1alpha/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/notebooks/{notebooksId}:share", "httpMethod": "POST", "id": "discoveryengine.projects.locations.notebooks.share", @@ -8630,7 +8630,7 @@ "audioOverviews": { "methods": { "create": { -"description": "Generates a new audio overview. Needs a side channel with the user's EUC.", +"description": "Generates a new audio overview.", "flatPath": "v1alpha/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/notebooks/{notebooksId}/audioOverviews", "httpMethod": "POST", "id": "discoveryengine.projects.locations.notebooks.audioOverviews.create", @@ -8658,7 +8658,7 @@ ] }, "delete": { -"description": "Deletes an audio overview. Needs a side channel with the user's EUC.", +"description": "Deletes an audio overview.", "flatPath": "v1alpha/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/notebooks/{notebooksId}/audioOverviews/{audioOverviewsId}", "httpMethod": "DELETE", "id": "discoveryengine.projects.locations.notebooks.audioOverviews.delete", @@ -9676,7 +9676,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250824", +"revision": "20250908", "rootUrl": "https://discoveryengine.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "ApiservingMediaRequestInfo": { @@ -10820,6 +10820,10 @@ "$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1AssistantCustomerPolicyBannedPhrase" }, "type": "array" +}, +"modelArmorConfig": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1AssistantCustomerPolicyModelArmorConfig", +"description": "Optional. Model Armor configuration to be used for sanitizing user prompts and assistant responses." } }, "type": "object" @@ -10853,6 +10857,35 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1AssistantCustomerPolicyModelArmorConfig": { +"description": "Configuration for customer defined Model Armor templates to be used for sanitizing user prompts and assistant responses.", +"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1AssistantCustomerPolicyModelArmorConfig", +"properties": { +"failureMode": { +"description": "Optional. Defines the failure mode for Model Armor sanitization.", +"enum": [ +"FAILURE_MODE_UNSPECIFIED", +"FAIL_OPEN", +"FAIL_CLOSED" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unspecified failure mode, default behavior is `FAIL_CLOSED`.", +"In case of a Model Armor processing failure, the request is allowed to proceed without any changes.", +"In case of a Model Armor processing failure, the request is rejected." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"responseTemplate": { +"description": "Optional. The resource name of the Model Armor template for sanitizing assistant responses. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/templates/{template_id}` If not specified, no sanitization will be applied to the assistant response.", +"type": "string" +}, +"userPromptTemplate": { +"description": "Optional. The resource name of the Model Armor template for sanitizing user prompts. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/templates/{template_id}` If not specified, no sanitization will be applied to the user prompt.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1AssistantGenerationConfig": { "description": "Configuration for the generation of the assistant response.", "id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1AssistantGenerationConfig", @@ -15298,6 +15331,10 @@ }, "type": "array" }, +"customerPolicyEnforcementResult": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaAssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResult", +"description": "Optional. The field contains information about the various policy checks' results like the banned phrases or the Model Armor checks. This field is populated only if the assist call was skipped due to a policy violation." +}, "name": { "description": "Immutable. Identifier. Resource name of the `AssistAnswer`. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/collections/{collection}/engines/{engine}/sessions/{session}/assistAnswers/{assist_answer}` This field must be a UTF-8 encoded string with a length limit of 1024 characters.", "type": "string" @@ -15330,6 +15367,78 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaAssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResult": { +"description": "Customer policy enforcement results. Contains the results of the various policy checks, like the banned phrases or the Model Armor checks.", +"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaAssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResult", +"properties": { +"policyResults": { +"description": "Customer policy enforcement results. Populated only if the assist call was skipped due to a policy violation. It contains results from those filters that blocked the processing of the query.", +"items": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaAssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResultPolicyEnforcementResult" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"verdict": { +"description": "Final verdict of the customer policy enforcement. If only one policy blocked the processing, the verdict is BLOCK.", +"enum": [ +"UNSPECIFIED", +"ALLOW", +"BLOCK" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unknown value.", +"There was no policy violation.", +"Processing was blocked by the customer policy." +], +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaAssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResultBannedPhraseEnforcementResult": { +"description": "Customer policy enforcement result for the banned phrase policy.", +"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaAssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResultBannedPhraseEnforcementResult", +"properties": { +"bannedPhrases": { +"description": "The banned phrases that were found in the query or the answer.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaAssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResultModelArmorEnforcementResult": { +"description": "Customer policy enforcement result for the Model Armor policy.", +"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaAssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResultModelArmorEnforcementResult", +"properties": { +"error": { +"$ref": "GoogleRpcStatus", +"description": "The error returned by Model Armor if the policy enforcement failed for some reason." +}, +"modelArmorViolation": { +"description": "The Model Armor violation that was found.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaAssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResultPolicyEnforcementResult": { +"description": "Customer policy enforcement result for a single policy type.", +"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaAssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResultPolicyEnforcementResult", +"properties": { +"bannedPhraseEnforcementResult": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaAssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResultBannedPhraseEnforcementResult", +"description": "The policy enforcement result for the banned phrase policy." +}, +"modelArmorEnforcementResult": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaAssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResultModelArmorEnforcementResult", +"description": "The policy enforcement result for the Model Armor policy." +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaAssistAnswerReply": { "description": "One part of the multi-part response of the assist call.", "id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaAssistAnswerReply", @@ -15512,6 +15621,10 @@ "$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaAssistantCustomerPolicyBannedPhrase" }, "type": "array" +}, +"modelArmorConfig": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaAssistantCustomerPolicyModelArmorConfig", +"description": "Optional. Model Armor configuration to be used for sanitizing user prompts and assistant responses." } }, "type": "object" @@ -15545,6 +15658,35 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaAssistantCustomerPolicyModelArmorConfig": { +"description": "Configuration for customer defined Model Armor templates to be used for sanitizing user prompts and assistant responses.", +"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaAssistantCustomerPolicyModelArmorConfig", +"properties": { +"failureMode": { +"description": "Optional. Defines the failure mode for Model Armor sanitization.", +"enum": [ +"FAILURE_MODE_UNSPECIFIED", +"FAIL_OPEN", +"FAIL_CLOSED" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unspecified failure mode, default behavior is `FAIL_CLOSED`.", +"In case of a Model Armor processing failure, the request is allowed to proceed without any changes.", +"In case of a Model Armor processing failure, the request is rejected." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"responseTemplate": { +"description": "Optional. The resource name of the Model Armor template for sanitizing assistant responses. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/templates/{template_id}` If not specified, no sanitization will be applied to the assistant response.", +"type": "string" +}, +"userPromptTemplate": { +"description": "Optional. The resource name of the Model Armor template for sanitizing user prompts. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/templates/{template_id}` If not specified, no sanitization will be applied to the user prompt.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaAssistantGenerationConfig": { "description": "Configuration for the generation of the assistant response.", "id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaAssistantGenerationConfig", @@ -17695,12 +17837,14 @@ "enum": [ "BLOCKING_REASON_UNSPECIFIED", "ALLOWLIST_STATIC_IP", -"ALLOWLIST_IN_SERVICE_ATTACHMENT" +"ALLOWLIST_IN_SERVICE_ATTACHMENT", +"ALLOWLIST_SERVICE_ACCOUNT" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Default value.", "Connector requires customer to allowlist static IPs.", -"Connector requires customer to allowlist our project in their service attachment." +"Connector requires customer to allowlist our project in their service attachment.", +"Connector requires customer to allowlist service account in their project." ], "type": "string" }, @@ -17803,6 +17947,10 @@ "readOnly": true, "type": "array" }, +"federatedConfig": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaDataConnectorFederatedConfig", +"description": "Optional. Any params and credentials used specifically for hybrid connectors supporting FEDERATED mode. This field should only be set if the connector is a hybrid connector and we want to enable FEDERATED mode." +}, "hybridIngestionDisabled": { "description": "Optional. If the connector is a hybrid connector, determines whether ingestion is enabled and appropriate resources are provisioned during connector creation. If the connector is not a hybrid connector, this field is ignored.", "type": "boolean" @@ -17898,6 +18046,13 @@ "format": "google-duration", "type": "string" }, +"removeParamKeys": { +"description": "Optional. Specifies keys to be removed from the 'params' field. This is only active when 'params' is included in the 'update_mask' in an UpdateDataConnectorRequest. Deletion takes precedence if a key is both in 'remove_param_keys' and present in the 'params' field of the request.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, "state": { "description": "Output only. State of the connector.", "enum": [ @@ -17985,6 +18140,29 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaDataConnectorFederatedConfig": { +"description": "Any params and credentials used specifically for hybrid connectors supporting FEDERATED mode.", +"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaDataConnectorFederatedConfig", +"properties": { +"additionalParams": { +"additionalProperties": { +"description": "Properties of the object.", +"type": "any" +}, +"description": "Optional. Any additional parameters needed for FEDERATED.", +"type": "object" +}, +"authParams": { +"additionalProperties": { +"description": "Properties of the object.", +"type": "any" +}, +"description": "Optional. Any authentication parameters specific to FEDERATED.", +"type": "object" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaDataConnectorRealtimeSyncConfig": { "description": "The configuration for realtime sync to store additional params for realtime sync.", "id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaDataConnectorRealtimeSyncConfig", @@ -26074,6 +26252,11 @@ false "readOnly": true, "type": "boolean" }, +"disableLocationContext": { +"description": "Optional. Output only. Whether to disable user location context.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "boolean" +}, "googleSearchGroundingEnabled": { "deprecated": true, "description": "Whether or not the Google search grounding toggle is shown. Deprecated. Use web_grounding_type instead.", @@ -26181,6 +26364,23 @@ false "readOnly": true, "type": "string" }, +"dataStoreConfigType": { +"description": "Output only. The type of the data store config.", +"enum": [ +"DATA_STORE_CONFIG_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED", +"ALLOW_DB_CONFIG", +"THIRD_PARTY_OAUTH_CONFIG", +"NOTEBOOKLM_CONFIG" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Default value. This value is unused.", +"The data store is connected to AlloyDB", +"The data store is a connected to a third party data source.", +"The data store is a connected to NotebookLM Enterprise." +], +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, "displayName": { "description": "The display name of the data store.", "type": "string" @@ -30096,7 +30296,7 @@ false "PROJECT_ROLE_NOT_SHARED" ], "enumDescriptions": [ -"Unknown role - do not use.", +"Unknown role.", "The user owns the project.", "The user has writer permissions on the project.", "The user has reader permissions on the project.", @@ -30139,7 +30339,7 @@ false "type": "string" }, "languageCode": { -"description": "The language code of the generated audio overview. Use the BCP 47 language code (e.g. \"en\", \"es\", \"hi\", etc.). Examples: google3/i18n/identifiers/tools/language_code_constants.txt", +"description": "The language code of the generated audio overview. Use the BCP 47 language code (e.g. \"en\", \"es\", \"hi\", etc.).", "type": "string" }, "mimeType": { @@ -30296,6 +30496,229 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReason": { +"description": "Failure reason containing details about why a source failed to ingest.", +"id": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReason", +"properties": { +"audioTranscriptionError": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonAudioTranscriptionError", +"description": "An audio file transcription specific error." +}, +"domainBlocked": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonDomainBlocked", +"description": "Error if the user tries to add a source from a blocked domain." +}, +"googleDriveError": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonGoogleDriveError", +"description": "A google drive specific error." +}, +"ingestionError": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonIngestionError", +"description": "Indicates an error occurred while ingesting the source." +}, +"paywallError": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonPaywallError", +"description": "Indicates that the source is paywalled and cannot be ingested." +}, +"sourceEmpty": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonSourceEmpty", +"description": "Indicates that the source is empty." +}, +"sourceLimitExceeded": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonSourceLimitExceeded", +"description": "Error if the user tries to update beyond their limits." +}, +"sourceTooLong": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonSourceTooLong", +"description": "Indicates source word count exceeded the user's limit." +}, +"sourceUnreachable": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonSourceUnreachable", +"description": "Indicates that the source is unreachable." +}, +"unknown": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonUnknown", +"description": "Indicates an unknown error occurred." +}, +"uploadError": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonUploadError", +"description": "Indicates an error occurred while uploading the source." +}, +"youtubeError": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonYoutubeError", +"description": "A youtube specific error." +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonAudioTranscriptionError": { +"description": "An audio file transcription specific error.", +"id": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonAudioTranscriptionError", +"properties": { +"languageDetectionFailed": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonAudioTranscriptionErrorLanguageDetectionFailed", +"description": "Could not detect language of the file (it may not be speech)." +}, +"noAudioDetected": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonAudioTranscriptionErrorNoAudioDetected", +"description": "No audio was detected in the input file (it may have been a video)." +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonAudioTranscriptionErrorLanguageDetectionFailed": { +"description": "Could not detect language of the file (it may not be speech).", +"id": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonAudioTranscriptionErrorLanguageDetectionFailed", +"properties": {}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonAudioTranscriptionErrorNoAudioDetected": { +"description": "No audio was detected in the input file.", +"id": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonAudioTranscriptionErrorNoAudioDetected", +"properties": {}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonDomainBlocked": { +"description": "Error to indicate that the source was removed because the domain was blocked.", +"id": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonDomainBlocked", +"properties": {}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonGoogleDriveError": { +"description": "A google drive specific error.", +"id": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonGoogleDriveError", +"properties": { +"downloadPrevented": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonGoogleDriveErrorDownloadPrevented", +"description": "The user was prevented from downloading the file." +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonGoogleDriveErrorDownloadPrevented": { +"description": "The user was prevented from downloading the file.", +"id": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonGoogleDriveErrorDownloadPrevented", +"properties": {}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonIngestionError": { +"description": "Indicates an error occurred while ingesting the source.", +"id": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonIngestionError", +"properties": {}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonPaywallError": { +"description": "Indicates that the source is paywalled and cannot be ingested.", +"id": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonPaywallError", +"properties": {}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonSourceEmpty": { +"description": "Indicates that the source is empty.", +"id": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonSourceEmpty", +"properties": {}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonSourceLimitExceeded": { +"description": "Indicates that the user does not have space for this source.", +"id": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonSourceLimitExceeded", +"properties": {}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonSourceTooLong": { +"description": "Indicates source word count exceeded the user's limit.", +"id": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonSourceTooLong", +"properties": { +"wordCount": { +"description": "The number of words in the source.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, +"wordLimit": { +"description": "The word count limit for the current user at the time of the upload.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonSourceUnreachable": { +"description": "Indicates that the source is unreachable. This is primarily used for sources that are added via URL.", +"id": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonSourceUnreachable", +"properties": { +"errorDetails": { +"description": "Describes why the source is unreachable.", +"enum": [ +"ERROR_REASON_UNSPECIFIED", +"ERROR_REASON_INVALID_URL", +"ERROR_REASON_NOT_ACCESSIBLE", +"ERROR_REASON_NOT_REACHABLE", +"ERROR_REASON_URL_NOT_FOUND", +"ERROR_REASON_TRANSIENT_ERROR", +"ERROR_REASON_FETCH_FAILED", +"ERROR_REASON_NOT_SUPPORTED" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Default", +"The source URL is invalid.", +"The source URL is not accessible.", +"The source URL is not reachable.", +"The source URL returned 404.", +"The source URL not reachable due to a transient network error or host timeout etc.", +"The source URL could not be fetched due to an internal error.", +"The URL is not yet supported. Examples include: the fetched content exceeds the trawler fetch max size, the fetched content is a type we do not yet support, etc." +], +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonUnknown": { +"description": "Indicates an unknown error occurred.", +"id": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonUnknown", +"properties": {}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonUploadError": { +"description": "Indicates an error occurred while uploading the source.", +"id": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonUploadError", +"properties": {}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonYoutubeError": { +"description": "A youtube specific error.", +"id": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonYoutubeError", +"properties": { +"videoDeleted": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonYoutubeErrorVideoDeleted", +"description": "Error to indicate that the source was removed because the video was deleted." +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonYoutubeErrorVideoDeleted": { +"description": "Error to indicate that the source was removed because the video was deleted.", +"id": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReasonYoutubeErrorVideoDeleted", +"properties": {}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaGoogleDocsSourceMetadata": { +"description": "Metadata about a google doc source.", +"id": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaGoogleDocsSourceMetadata", +"properties": { +"documentId": { +"description": "Output only. The document id of the google doc.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"revisionId": { +"description": "Output only. Revision id for the doc.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaListRecentlyViewedNotebooksResponse": { "description": "Response for NotebookService.ListRecentlyViewedNotebooks method.", "id": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaListRecentlyViewedNotebooksResponse", @@ -30330,16 +30753,26 @@ false }, "metadata": { "$ref": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaNotebookMetadata", -"description": "The metadata of the notebook." +"description": "Output only. The metadata of the notebook.", +"readOnly": true }, "name": { "description": "Identifier. The identifier of the notebook. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/notebooks/{notebook_id}`. This field must be a UTF-8 encoded string.", "type": "string" }, "notebookId": { -"description": "Optional. Notebook id, which is the last segment of the notebook's resource name. This is to make it similar with notebooklm API.", +"description": "Output only. Notebook id, which is the last segment of the notebook's resource name.", +"readOnly": true, "type": "string" }, +"sources": { +"description": "Output only. List of sources in the notebook. This is an output only field.", +"items": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaSource" +}, +"readOnly": true, +"type": "array" +}, "title": { "description": "Optional. The title of the notebook.", "type": "string" @@ -30402,15 +30835,22 @@ false "properties": { "metadata": { "$ref": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaSourceMetadata", -"description": "Metadata about the source." +"description": "Output only. Metadata about the source.", +"readOnly": true }, "name": { "description": "Identifier. The full resource name of the source. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/notebooks/{notebook}/sources/{source_id}`. This field must be a UTF-8 encoded string with a length limit of 1024 characters.", "type": "string" }, +"settings": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaSourceSettings", +"description": "Output only. Status of the source, and any failure reasons.", +"readOnly": true +}, "sourceId": { "$ref": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaSourceId", -"description": "Optional. Source id, which is the last segment of the source's resource name. This is to make it similar with notebooklm API." +"description": "Optional. Output only. Source id, which is the last segment of the source's resource name.", +"readOnly": true }, "title": { "description": "Optional. Title of the source.", @@ -30438,6 +30878,10 @@ false "$ref": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaAgentspaceMetadata", "description": "Metadata for an agentspace source." }, +"googleDocsMetadata": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaGoogleDocsSourceMetadata", +"description": "Metadata for a google doc source." +}, "sourceAddedTimestamp": { "description": "The timestamp the source was added.", "format": "google-datetime", @@ -30452,6 +30896,41 @@ false "description": "The word count of the source.", "format": "int32", "type": "integer" +}, +"youtubeMetadata": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaYoutubeMetadata", +"description": "Metadata for a youtube video source." +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaSourceSettings": { +"description": "Allows extension of Source Settings in the BatchCreateSources (Formerly AddSource request).", +"id": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaSourceSettings", +"properties": { +"failureReason": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaFailureReason", +"description": "Failure reason containing details about why a source failed to ingest." +}, +"status": { +"description": "Status of the source.", +"enum": [ +"SOURCE_STATUS_UNSPECIFIED", +"SOURCE_STATUS_PENDING", +"SOURCE_STATUS_COMPLETE", +"SOURCE_STATUS_ERROR", +"SOURCE_STATUS_PENDING_DELETION", +"SOURCE_STATUS_TENTATIVE" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unspecified status.", +"The source is pending addition.", +"Source addition is complete and successful.", +"Source addition has permanently failed.", +"The source is pending deletion.", +"The user is attempting to add a source, but we have not yet uploaded it or checked user limits. Does not count towards the user's source limit." +], +"type": "string" } }, "type": "object" @@ -30545,11 +31024,11 @@ false "type": "string" }, "mimeType": { -"description": "The mime type of the selected document. This can be used to differentiate type of content selected in the drive picker.", +"description": "The mime type of the selected document. This can be used to differentiate type of content selected in the drive picker. Use application/vnd.google-apps.document for Google Docs or application/vnd.google-apps.presentation for Google Slides.", "type": "string" }, "sourceName": { -"description": "Should track this from Drive Picker.", +"description": "The name to be displayed for the source.", "type": "string" } }, @@ -30560,11 +31039,11 @@ false "id": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaUserContentTextContent", "properties": { "content": { -"description": "The content of the text source.", +"description": "The name to be displayed for the source.", "type": "string" }, "sourceName": { -"description": "The name of the text source.", +"description": "The display name of the text source.", "type": "string" } }, @@ -30586,7 +31065,7 @@ false "id": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaUserContentWebContent", "properties": { "sourceName": { -"description": "The name of the web source.", +"description": "The name to be displayed for the source.", "type": "string" }, "url": { @@ -30596,6 +31075,23 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaYoutubeMetadata": { +"description": "Metadata about a youtube video source.", +"id": "GoogleCloudNotebooklmV1alphaYoutubeMetadata", +"properties": { +"channelName": { +"description": "Output only. The channel name of the youtube video.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"videoId": { +"description": "Output only. The id of the youtube video.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleLongrunningCancelOperationRequest": { "description": "The request message for Operations.CancelOperation.", "id": "GoogleLongrunningCancelOperationRequest", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/discoveryengine.v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/discoveryengine.v1beta.json index 338f3e7b3ba..71cc1c7b1ae 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/discoveryengine.v1beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/discoveryengine.v1beta.json @@ -8200,7 +8200,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250824", +"revision": "20250908", "rootUrl": "https://discoveryengine.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GdataBlobstore2Info": { @@ -9182,6 +9182,10 @@ "$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1AssistantCustomerPolicyBannedPhrase" }, "type": "array" +}, +"modelArmorConfig": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1AssistantCustomerPolicyModelArmorConfig", +"description": "Optional. Model Armor configuration to be used for sanitizing user prompts and assistant responses." } }, "type": "object" @@ -9215,6 +9219,35 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1AssistantCustomerPolicyModelArmorConfig": { +"description": "Configuration for customer defined Model Armor templates to be used for sanitizing user prompts and assistant responses.", +"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1AssistantCustomerPolicyModelArmorConfig", +"properties": { +"failureMode": { +"description": "Optional. Defines the failure mode for Model Armor sanitization.", +"enum": [ +"FAILURE_MODE_UNSPECIFIED", +"FAIL_OPEN", +"FAIL_CLOSED" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unspecified failure mode, default behavior is `FAIL_CLOSED`.", +"In case of a Model Armor processing failure, the request is allowed to proceed without any changes.", +"In case of a Model Armor processing failure, the request is rejected." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"responseTemplate": { +"description": "Optional. The resource name of the Model Armor template for sanitizing assistant responses. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/templates/{template_id}` If not specified, no sanitization will be applied to the assistant response.", +"type": "string" +}, +"userPromptTemplate": { +"description": "Optional. The resource name of the Model Armor template for sanitizing user prompts. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/templates/{template_id}` If not specified, no sanitization will be applied to the user prompt.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1AssistantGenerationConfig": { "description": "Configuration for the generation of the assistant response.", "id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1AssistantGenerationConfig", @@ -13491,12 +13524,14 @@ "enum": [ "BLOCKING_REASON_UNSPECIFIED", "ALLOWLIST_STATIC_IP", -"ALLOWLIST_IN_SERVICE_ATTACHMENT" +"ALLOWLIST_IN_SERVICE_ATTACHMENT", +"ALLOWLIST_SERVICE_ACCOUNT" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Default value.", "Connector requires customer to allowlist static IPs.", -"Connector requires customer to allowlist our project in their service attachment." +"Connector requires customer to allowlist our project in their service attachment.", +"Connector requires customer to allowlist service account in their project." ], "type": "string" }, @@ -13599,6 +13634,10 @@ "readOnly": true, "type": "array" }, +"federatedConfig": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaDataConnectorFederatedConfig", +"description": "Optional. Any params and credentials used specifically for hybrid connectors supporting FEDERATED mode. This field should only be set if the connector is a hybrid connector and we want to enable FEDERATED mode." +}, "hybridIngestionDisabled": { "description": "Optional. If the connector is a hybrid connector, determines whether ingestion is enabled and appropriate resources are provisioned during connector creation. If the connector is not a hybrid connector, this field is ignored.", "type": "boolean" @@ -13694,6 +13733,13 @@ "format": "google-duration", "type": "string" }, +"removeParamKeys": { +"description": "Optional. Specifies keys to be removed from the 'params' field. This is only active when 'params' is included in the 'update_mask' in an UpdateDataConnectorRequest. Deletion takes precedence if a key is both in 'remove_param_keys' and present in the 'params' field of the request.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, "state": { "description": "Output only. State of the connector.", "enum": [ @@ -13781,6 +13827,29 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaDataConnectorFederatedConfig": { +"description": "Any params and credentials used specifically for hybrid connectors supporting FEDERATED mode.", +"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaDataConnectorFederatedConfig", +"properties": { +"additionalParams": { +"additionalProperties": { +"description": "Properties of the object.", +"type": "any" +}, +"description": "Optional. Any additional parameters needed for FEDERATED.", +"type": "object" +}, +"authParams": { +"additionalProperties": { +"description": "Properties of the object.", +"type": "any" +}, +"description": "Optional. Any authentication parameters specific to FEDERATED.", +"type": "object" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaDataConnectorRealtimeSyncConfig": { "description": "The configuration for realtime sync to store additional params for realtime sync.", "id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaDataConnectorRealtimeSyncConfig", @@ -19465,6 +19534,10 @@ false }, "type": "array" }, +"customerPolicyEnforcementResult": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaAssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResult", +"description": "Optional. The field contains information about the various policy checks' results like the banned phrases or the Model Armor checks. This field is populated only if the assist call was skipped due to a policy violation." +}, "name": { "description": "Immutable. Identifier. Resource name of the `AssistAnswer`. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/collections/{collection}/engines/{engine}/sessions/{session}/assistAnswers/{assist_answer}` This field must be a UTF-8 encoded string with a length limit of 1024 characters.", "type": "string" @@ -19497,6 +19570,78 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaAssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResult": { +"description": "Customer policy enforcement results. Contains the results of the various policy checks, like the banned phrases or the Model Armor checks.", +"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaAssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResult", +"properties": { +"policyResults": { +"description": "Customer policy enforcement results. Populated only if the assist call was skipped due to a policy violation. It contains results from those filters that blocked the processing of the query.", +"items": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaAssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResultPolicyEnforcementResult" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"verdict": { +"description": "Final verdict of the customer policy enforcement. If only one policy blocked the processing, the verdict is BLOCK.", +"enum": [ +"UNSPECIFIED", +"ALLOW", +"BLOCK" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unknown value.", +"There was no policy violation.", +"Processing was blocked by the customer policy." +], +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaAssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResultBannedPhraseEnforcementResult": { +"description": "Customer policy enforcement result for the banned phrase policy.", +"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaAssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResultBannedPhraseEnforcementResult", +"properties": { +"bannedPhrases": { +"description": "The banned phrases that were found in the query or the answer.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaAssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResultModelArmorEnforcementResult": { +"description": "Customer policy enforcement result for the Model Armor policy.", +"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaAssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResultModelArmorEnforcementResult", +"properties": { +"error": { +"$ref": "GoogleRpcStatus", +"description": "The error returned by Model Armor if the policy enforcement failed for some reason." +}, +"modelArmorViolation": { +"description": "The Model Armor violation that was found.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaAssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResultPolicyEnforcementResult": { +"description": "Customer policy enforcement result for a single policy type.", +"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaAssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResultPolicyEnforcementResult", +"properties": { +"bannedPhraseEnforcementResult": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaAssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResultBannedPhraseEnforcementResult", +"description": "The policy enforcement result for the banned phrase policy." +}, +"modelArmorEnforcementResult": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaAssistAnswerCustomerPolicyEnforcementResultModelArmorEnforcementResult", +"description": "The policy enforcement result for the Model Armor policy." +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaAssistAnswerReply": { "description": "One part of the multi-part response of the assist call.", "id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaAssistAnswerReply", @@ -19679,6 +19824,10 @@ false "$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaAssistantCustomerPolicyBannedPhrase" }, "type": "array" +}, +"modelArmorConfig": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaAssistantCustomerPolicyModelArmorConfig", +"description": "Optional. Model Armor configuration to be used for sanitizing user prompts and assistant responses." } }, "type": "object" @@ -19712,6 +19861,35 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaAssistantCustomerPolicyModelArmorConfig": { +"description": "Configuration for customer defined Model Armor templates to be used for sanitizing user prompts and assistant responses.", +"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaAssistantCustomerPolicyModelArmorConfig", +"properties": { +"failureMode": { +"description": "Optional. Defines the failure mode for Model Armor sanitization.", +"enum": [ +"FAILURE_MODE_UNSPECIFIED", +"FAIL_OPEN", +"FAIL_CLOSED" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unspecified failure mode, default behavior is `FAIL_CLOSED`.", +"In case of a Model Armor processing failure, the request is allowed to proceed without any changes.", +"In case of a Model Armor processing failure, the request is rejected." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"responseTemplate": { +"description": "Optional. The resource name of the Model Armor template for sanitizing assistant responses. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/templates/{template_id}` If not specified, no sanitization will be applied to the assistant response.", +"type": "string" +}, +"userPromptTemplate": { +"description": "Optional. The resource name of the Model Armor template for sanitizing user prompts. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/templates/{template_id}` If not specified, no sanitization will be applied to the user prompt.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaAssistantGenerationConfig": { "description": "Configuration for the generation of the assistant response.", "id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaAssistantGenerationConfig", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/displayvideo.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/displayvideo.v2.json index 5b3ba4b6325..54be12b5a68 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/displayvideo.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/displayvideo.v2.json @@ -9081,7 +9081,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250819", +"revision": "20250909", "rootUrl": "https://displayvideo.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "ActivateManualTriggerRequest": { @@ -9587,7 +9587,8 @@ "APP_PLATFORM_ANDROID_TV", "APP_PLATFORM_GENERIC_CTV", "APP_PLATFORM_LG_TV", -"APP_PLATFORM_VIZIO_TV" +"APP_PLATFORM_VIZIO_TV", +"APP_PLATFORM_VIDAA" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Default value when app platform is not specified in this version. This enum is a placeholder for default value and does not represent a real platform option.", @@ -9602,7 +9603,8 @@ "The app platform is Android TV.", "The app platform is a CTV platform that is not explicitly listed elsewhere.", "The app platform is LG TV.", -"The app platform is VIZIO TV." +"The app platform is VIZIO TV.", +"The app platform is Vidaa." ], "type": "string" }, diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/displayvideo.v3.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/displayvideo.v3.json index 0edb92e3b6d..8e21201e052 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/displayvideo.v3.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/displayvideo.v3.json @@ -9268,7 +9268,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250819", +"revision": "20250909", "rootUrl": "https://displayvideo.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "ActiveViewVideoViewabilityMetricConfig": { @@ -10871,7 +10871,8 @@ "APP_PLATFORM_ANDROID_TV", "APP_PLATFORM_GENERIC_CTV", "APP_PLATFORM_LG_TV", -"APP_PLATFORM_VIZIO_TV" +"APP_PLATFORM_VIZIO_TV", +"APP_PLATFORM_VIDAA" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Default value when app platform is not specified in this version. This enum is a placeholder for default value and does not represent a real platform option.", @@ -10886,7 +10887,8 @@ "The app platform is Android TV.", "The app platform is a CTV platform that is not explicitly listed elsewhere.", "The app platform is LG TV.", -"The app platform is VIZIO TV." +"The app platform is VIZIO TV.", +"The app platform is Vidaa." ], "type": "string" }, diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/displayvideo.v4.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/displayvideo.v4.json index 0e2a4b12527..b27a6f45c8f 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/displayvideo.v4.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/displayvideo.v4.json @@ -9302,7 +9302,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250819", +"revision": "20250909", "rootUrl": "https://displayvideo.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "ActiveViewVideoViewabilityMetricConfig": { @@ -10905,7 +10905,8 @@ "APP_PLATFORM_ANDROID_TV", "APP_PLATFORM_GENERIC_CTV", "APP_PLATFORM_LG_TV", -"APP_PLATFORM_VIZIO_TV" +"APP_PLATFORM_VIZIO_TV", +"APP_PLATFORM_VIDAA" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Default value when app platform is not specified in this version. This enum is a placeholder for default value and does not represent a real platform option.", @@ -10920,7 +10921,8 @@ "The app platform is Android TV.", "The app platform is a CTV platform that is not explicitly listed elsewhere.", "The app platform is LG TV.", -"The app platform is VIZIO TV." +"The app platform is VIZIO TV.", +"The app platform is Vidaa." ], "type": "string" }, diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dns.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dns.v1.json index a0f00f2d8fc..6a51b19b274 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dns.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dns.v1.json @@ -807,7 +807,7 @@ "policies": { "methods": { "create": { -"description": "Creates a new Policy.", +"description": "Creates a new policy.", "flatPath": "dns/v1/projects/{project}/policies", "httpMethod": "POST", "id": "dns.policies.create", @@ -840,7 +840,7 @@ ] }, "delete": { -"description": "Deletes a previously created Policy. Fails if the policy is still being referenced by a network.", +"description": "Deletes a previously created policy. Fails if the policy is still being referenced by a network.", "flatPath": "dns/v1/projects/{project}/policies/{policy}", "httpMethod": "DELETE", "id": "dns.policies.delete", @@ -874,7 +874,7 @@ ] }, "get": { -"description": "Fetches the representation of an existing Policy.", +"description": "Fetches the representation of an existing policy.", "flatPath": "dns/v1/projects/{project}/policies/{policy}", "httpMethod": "GET", "id": "dns.policies.get", @@ -913,7 +913,7 @@ ] }, "list": { -"description": "Enumerates all Policies associated with a project.", +"description": "Enumerates all policies associated with a project.", "flatPath": "dns/v1/projects/{project}/policies", "httpMethod": "GET", "id": "dns.policies.list", @@ -951,7 +951,7 @@ ] }, "patch": { -"description": "Applies a partial update to an existing Policy.", +"description": "Applies a partial update to an existing policy.", "flatPath": "dns/v1/projects/{project}/policies/{policy}", "httpMethod": "PATCH", "id": "dns.policies.patch", @@ -991,7 +991,7 @@ ] }, "update": { -"description": "Updates an existing Policy.", +"description": "Updates an existing policy.", "flatPath": "dns/v1/projects/{project}/policies/{policy}", "httpMethod": "PUT", "id": "dns.policies.update", @@ -1237,7 +1237,7 @@ "type": "integer" }, "name": { -"description": "Restricts the list to return only records with this fully qualified domain name.", +"description": "Restricts the list to return only records with this fully qualified domain name. Mutually exclusive with the {@code filter} field.", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, @@ -1253,7 +1253,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "type": { -"description": "Restricts the list to return only records of this type. If present, the \"name\" parameter must also be present.", +"description": "Restricts the list to return only records of this type. If present, the \"name\" parameter must also be present. Mutually exclusive with the {@code filter} field.", "location": "query", "type": "string" } @@ -1824,7 +1824,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250411", +"revision": "20250828", "rootUrl": "https://dns.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Change": { @@ -2759,7 +2759,7 @@ }, "dns64Config": { "$ref": "PolicyDns64Config", -"description": "Configurations related to DNS64 for this Policy." +"description": "Configurations related to DNS64 for this policy." }, "enableInboundForwarding": { "description": "Allows networks bound to this policy to receive DNS queries sent by VMs or applications over VPN connections. When enabled, a virtual IP address is allocated from each of the subnetworks that are bound to this policy.", @@ -2858,7 +2858,7 @@ "id": "PolicyDns64ConfigScope", "properties": { "allQueries": { -"description": "Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally at the network level.", +"description": "Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally for all networks bound to the policy.", "type": "boolean" }, "kind": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dns.v1beta2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dns.v1beta2.json index 953491e83fa..5014c18f62a 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dns.v1beta2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dns.v1beta2.json @@ -807,7 +807,7 @@ "policies": { "methods": { "create": { -"description": "Creates a new Policy.", +"description": "Creates a new policy.", "flatPath": "dns/v1beta2/projects/{project}/policies", "httpMethod": "POST", "id": "dns.policies.create", @@ -840,7 +840,7 @@ ] }, "delete": { -"description": "Deletes a previously created Policy. Fails if the policy is still being referenced by a network.", +"description": "Deletes a previously created policy. Fails if the policy is still being referenced by a network.", "flatPath": "dns/v1beta2/projects/{project}/policies/{policy}", "httpMethod": "DELETE", "id": "dns.policies.delete", @@ -874,7 +874,7 @@ ] }, "get": { -"description": "Fetches the representation of an existing Policy.", +"description": "Fetches the representation of an existing policy.", "flatPath": "dns/v1beta2/projects/{project}/policies/{policy}", "httpMethod": "GET", "id": "dns.policies.get", @@ -913,7 +913,7 @@ ] }, "list": { -"description": "Enumerates all Policies associated with a project.", +"description": "Enumerates all policies associated with a project.", "flatPath": "dns/v1beta2/projects/{project}/policies", "httpMethod": "GET", "id": "dns.policies.list", @@ -951,7 +951,7 @@ ] }, "patch": { -"description": "Applies a partial update to an existing Policy.", +"description": "Applies a partial update to an existing policy.", "flatPath": "dns/v1beta2/projects/{project}/policies/{policy}", "httpMethod": "PATCH", "id": "dns.policies.patch", @@ -991,7 +991,7 @@ ] }, "update": { -"description": "Updates an existing Policy.", +"description": "Updates an existing policy.", "flatPath": "dns/v1beta2/projects/{project}/policies/{policy}", "httpMethod": "PUT", "id": "dns.policies.update", @@ -1234,7 +1234,7 @@ "type": "integer" }, "name": { -"description": "Restricts the list to return only records with this fully qualified domain name.", +"description": "Restricts the list to return only records with this fully qualified domain name. Mutually exclusive with the {@code filter} field.", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, @@ -1250,7 +1250,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "type": { -"description": "Restricts the list to return only records of this type. If present, the \"name\" parameter must also be present.", +"description": "Restricts the list to return only records of this type. If present, the \"name\" parameter must also be present. Mutually exclusive with the {@code filter} field.", "location": "query", "type": "string" } @@ -1821,7 +1821,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250411", +"revision": "20250828", "rootUrl": "https://dns.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Change": { @@ -2756,7 +2756,7 @@ }, "dns64Config": { "$ref": "PolicyDns64Config", -"description": "Configurations related to DNS64 for this Policy." +"description": "Configurations related to DNS64 for this policy." }, "enableInboundForwarding": { "description": "Allows networks bound to this policy to receive DNS queries sent by VMs or applications over VPN connections. When enabled, a virtual IP address is allocated from each of the subnetworks that are bound to this policy.", @@ -2855,7 +2855,7 @@ "id": "PolicyDns64ConfigScope", "properties": { "allQueries": { -"description": "Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally at the network level.", +"description": "Controls whether DNS64 is enabled globally for all networks bound to the policy.", "type": "boolean" }, "kind": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/documentai.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/documentai.v1.json index 81faf621bbd..2ddd33f860d 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/documentai.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/documentai.v1.json @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -1048,7 +1048,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250820", +"revision": "20250908", "rootUrl": "https://documentai.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "CloudAiDocumentaiLabHifiaToolsValidationValidatorInput": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/documentai.v1beta3.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/documentai.v1beta3.json index f92a299294d..1c6eb0ced37 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/documentai.v1beta3.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/documentai.v1beta3.json @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -1290,7 +1290,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250820", +"revision": "20250908", "rootUrl": "https://documentai.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "CloudAiDocumentaiLabHifiaToolsValidationValidatorInput": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/drive.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/drive.v2.json index 594589d6d90..cbd4363bcf4 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/drive.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/drive.v2.json @@ -1696,7 +1696,7 @@ "supportsMediaUpload": true }, "list": { -"description": " Lists the user's files. This method accepts the `q` parameter, which is a search query combining one or more search terms. For more information, see the [Search for files & folders](/workspace/drive/api/guides/search-files) guide. *Note:* This method returns *all* files by default, including trashed files. If you don't want trashed files to appear in the list, use the `trashed=false` query parameter to remove trashed files from the results.", +"description": " Lists the user's files. For more information, see [Search for files and folders](/workspace/drive/api/guides/search-files). This method accepts the `q` parameter, which is a search query combining one or more search terms. This method returns *all* files by default, including trashed files. If you don't want trashed files to appear in the list, use the `trashed=false` query parameter to remove trashed files from the results.", "flatPath": "files", "httpMethod": "GET", "id": "drive.files.list", @@ -2202,7 +2202,7 @@ ] }, "update": { -"description": " Updates a file's metadata and/or content. When calling this method, only populate fields in the request that you want to modify. When updating fields, some fields might be changed automatically, such as `modifiedDate`. This method supports patch semantics. This method supports an */upload* URI and accepts uploaded media with the following characteristics: - *Maximum file size:* 5,120 GB - *Accepted Media MIME types:*`*/*` Note: Specify a valid MIME type, rather than the literal `*/*` value. The literal `*/*` is only used to indicate that any valid MIME type can be uploaded. For more information on uploading files, see [Upload file data](/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-uploads).", +"description": " Updates a file's metadata, content, or both. When calling this method, only populate fields in the request that you want to modify. When updating fields, some fields might be changed automatically, such as `modifiedDate`. This method supports patch semantics. This method supports an */upload* URI and accepts uploaded media with the following characteristics: - *Maximum file size:* 5,120 GB - *Accepted Media MIME types:* `*/*` (Specify a valid MIME type, rather than the literal `*/*` value. The literal `*/*` is only used to indicate that any valid MIME type can be uploaded. For more information, see [Google Workspace and Google Drive supported MIME types](/workspace/drive/api/guides/mime-types).) For more information on uploading files, see [Upload file data](/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-uploads).", "flatPath": "files/{fileId}", "httpMethod": "PUT", "id": "drive.files.update", @@ -3893,7 +3893,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250826", +"revision": "20250829", "rootUrl": "https://www.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "About": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/drive.v3.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/drive.v3.json index 389f7b4a6ba..680ea7398a8 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/drive.v3.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/drive.v3.json @@ -1047,7 +1047,7 @@ "files": { "methods": { "copy": { -"description": "Creates a copy of a file and applies any requested updates with patch semantics.", +"description": "Creates a copy of a file and applies any requested updates with patch semantics. For more information, see [Create and manage files](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/create-file).", "flatPath": "files/{fileId}/copy", "httpMethod": "POST", "id": "drive.files.copy", @@ -1057,7 +1057,8 @@ "parameters": { "enforceSingleParent": { "default": "false", -"description": "Deprecated. Copying files into multiple folders is no longer supported. Use shortcuts instead.", +"deprecated": true, +"description": "Deprecated: Copying files into multiple folders is no longer supported. Use shortcuts instead.", "location": "query", "type": "boolean" }, @@ -1079,13 +1080,13 @@ "type": "string" }, "includePermissionsForView": { -"description": "Specifies which additional view's permissions to include in the response. Only 'published' is supported.", +"description": "Specifies which additional view's permissions to include in the response. Only `published` is supported.", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, "keepRevisionForever": { "default": "false", -"description": "Whether to set the 'keepForever' field in the new head revision. This is only applicable to files with binary content in Google Drive. Only 200 revisions for the file can be kept forever. If the limit is reached, try deleting pinned revisions.", +"description": "Whether to set the `keepForever` field in the new head revision. This is only applicable to files with binary content in Google Drive. Only 200 revisions for the file can be kept forever. If the limit is reached, try deleting pinned revisions.", "location": "query", "type": "boolean" }, @@ -1123,7 +1124,7 @@ ] }, "create": { -"description": " Creates a new file. This method supports an */upload* URI and accepts uploaded media with the following characteristics: - *Maximum file size:* 5,120 GB - *Accepted Media MIME types:*`*/*` Note: Specify a valid MIME type, rather than the literal `*/*` value. The literal `*/*` is only used to indicate that any valid MIME type can be uploaded. For more information on uploading files, see [Upload file data](/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-uploads). Apps creating shortcuts with `files.create` must specify the MIME type `application/vnd.google-apps.shortcut`. Apps should specify a file extension in the `name` property when inserting files with the API. For example, an operation to insert a JPEG file should specify something like `\"name\": \"cat.jpg\"` in the metadata. Subsequent `GET` requests include the read-only `fileExtension` property populated with the extension originally specified in the `title` property. When a Google Drive user requests to download a file, or when the file is downloaded through the sync client, Drive builds a full filename (with extension) based on the title. In cases where the extension is missing, Drive attempts to determine the extension based on the file's MIME type.", +"description": " Creates a file. For more information, see [Create and manage files](/workspace/drive/api/guides/create-file). This method supports an */upload* URI and accepts uploaded media with the following characteristics: - *Maximum file size:* 5,120 GB - *Accepted Media MIME types:* `*/*` (Specify a valid MIME type, rather than the literal `*/*` value. The literal `*/*` is only used to indicate that any valid MIME type can be uploaded. For more information, see [Google Workspace and Google Drive supported MIME types](/workspace/drive/api/guides/mime-types).) For more information on uploading files, see [Upload file data](/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-uploads). Apps creating shortcuts with the `create` method must specify the MIME type `application/vnd.google-apps.shortcut`. Apps should specify a file extension in the `name` property when inserting files with the API. For example, an operation to insert a JPEG file should specify something like `\"name\": \"cat.jpg\"` in the metadata. Subsequent `GET` requests include the read-only `fileExtension` property populated with the extension originally specified in the `name` property. When a Google Drive user requests to download a file, or when the file is downloaded through the sync client, Drive builds a full filename (with extension) based on the name. In cases where the extension is missing, Drive attempts to determine the extension based on the file's MIME type.", "flatPath": "files", "httpMethod": "POST", "id": "drive.files.create", @@ -1147,7 +1148,8 @@ "parameters": { "enforceSingleParent": { "default": "false", -"description": "Deprecated. Creating files in multiple folders is no longer supported.", +"deprecated": true, +"description": "Deprecated: Creating files in multiple folders is no longer supported.", "location": "query", "type": "boolean" }, @@ -1163,13 +1165,13 @@ "type": "string" }, "includePermissionsForView": { -"description": "Specifies which additional view's permissions to include in the response. Only 'published' is supported.", +"description": "Specifies which additional view's permissions to include in the response. Only `published` is supported.", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, "keepRevisionForever": { "default": "false", -"description": "Whether to set the 'keepForever' field in the new head revision. This is only applicable to files with binary content in Google Drive. Only 200 revisions for the file can be kept forever. If the limit is reached, try deleting pinned revisions.", +"description": "Whether to set the `keepForever` field in the new head revision. This is only applicable to files with binary content in Google Drive. Only 200 revisions for the file can be kept forever. If the limit is reached, try deleting pinned revisions.", "location": "query", "type": "boolean" }, @@ -1213,7 +1215,7 @@ "supportsMediaUpload": true }, "delete": { -"description": "Permanently deletes a file owned by the user without moving it to the trash. If the file belongs to a shared drive, the user must be an `organizer` on the parent folder. If the target is a folder, all descendants owned by the user are also deleted.", +"description": "Permanently deletes a file owned by the user without moving it to the trash. For more information, see [Trash or delete files and folders](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/delete). If the file belongs to a shared drive, the user must be an `organizer` on the parent folder. If the target is a folder, all descendants owned by the user are also deleted.", "flatPath": "files/{fileId}", "httpMethod": "DELETE", "id": "drive.files.delete", @@ -1224,7 +1226,7 @@ "enforceSingleParent": { "default": "false", "deprecated": true, -"description": "Deprecated: If an item is not in a shared drive and its last parent is deleted but the item itself is not, the item will be placed under its owner's root.", +"description": "Deprecated: If an item isn't in a shared drive and its last parent is deleted but the item itself isn't, the item will be placed under its owner's root.", "location": "query", "type": "boolean" }, @@ -1256,7 +1258,7 @@ ] }, "download": { -"description": "Downloads content of a file. Operations are valid for 24 hours from the time of creation.", +"description": "Downloads the content of a file. For more information, see [Download and export files](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-downloads). Operations are valid for 24 hours from the time of creation.", "flatPath": "files/{fileId}/download", "httpMethod": "POST", "id": "drive.files.download", @@ -1271,7 +1273,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "mimeType": { -"description": "Optional. The MIME type the file should be downloaded as. This field can only be set when downloading Google Workspace documents. See [Export MIME types for Google Workspace documents](/drive/api/guides/ref-export-formats) for the list of supported MIME types. If not set, a Google Workspace document is downloaded with a default MIME type. The default MIME type might change in the future.", +"description": "Optional. The MIME type the file should be downloaded as. This field can only be set when downloading Google Workspace documents. For a list of supported MIME types, see [Export MIME types for Google Workspace documents](/workspace/drive/api/guides/ref-export-formats). If not set, a Google Workspace document is downloaded with a default MIME type. The default MIME type might change in the future.", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, @@ -1292,7 +1294,7 @@ ] }, "emptyTrash": { -"description": "Permanently deletes all of the user's trashed files.", +"description": "Permanently deletes all of the user's trashed files. For more information, see [Trash or delete files and folders](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/delete).", "flatPath": "files/trash", "httpMethod": "DELETE", "id": "drive.files.emptyTrash", @@ -1306,7 +1308,7 @@ "enforceSingleParent": { "default": "false", "deprecated": true, -"description": "Deprecated: If an item is not in a shared drive and its last parent is deleted but the item itself is not, the item will be placed under its owner's root.", +"description": "Deprecated: If an item isn't in a shared drive and its last parent is deleted but the item itself isn't, the item will be placed under its owner's root.", "location": "query", "type": "boolean" } @@ -1317,7 +1319,7 @@ ] }, "export": { -"description": "Exports a Google Workspace document to the requested MIME type and returns exported byte content. Note that the exported content is limited to 10MB.", +"description": "Exports a Google Workspace document to the requested MIME type and returns exported byte content. For more information, see [Download and export files](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-downloads). Note that the exported content is limited to 10 MB.", "flatPath": "files/{fileId}/export", "httpMethod": "GET", "id": "drive.files.export", @@ -1333,7 +1335,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "mimeType": { -"description": "Required. The MIME type of the format requested for this export.", +"description": "Required. The MIME type of the format requested for this export. For a list of supported MIME types, see [Export MIME types for Google Workspace documents](/workspace/drive/api/guides/ref-export-formats).", "location": "query", "required": true, "type": "string" @@ -1350,7 +1352,7 @@ "useMediaDownloadService": true }, "generateIds": { -"description": "Generates a set of file IDs which can be provided in create or copy requests.", +"description": "Generates a set of file IDs which can be provided in create or copy requests. For more information, see [Create and manage files](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/create-file).", "flatPath": "files/generateIds", "httpMethod": "GET", "id": "drive.files.generateIds", @@ -1367,13 +1369,13 @@ }, "space": { "default": "drive", -"description": "The space in which the IDs can be used to create new files. Supported values are 'drive' and 'appDataFolder'. (Default: 'drive')", +"description": "The space in which the IDs can be used to create files. Supported values are `drive` and `appDataFolder`. (Default: `drive`.) For more information, see [File organization](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/about-files#file-organization).", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, "type": { "default": "files", -"description": "The type of items which the IDs can be used for. Supported values are 'files' and 'shortcuts'. Note that 'shortcuts' are only supported in the `drive` 'space'. (Default: 'files')", +"description": "The type of items which the IDs can be used for. Supported values are `files` and `shortcuts`. Note that `shortcuts` are only supported in the `drive` `space`. (Default: `files`.) For more information, see [File organization](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/about-files#file-organization).", "location": "query", "type": "string" } @@ -1389,7 +1391,7 @@ ] }, "get": { -"description": " Gets a file's metadata or content by ID. If you provide the URL parameter `alt=media`, then the response includes the file contents in the response body. Downloading content with `alt=media` only works if the file is stored in Drive. To download Google Docs, Sheets, and Slides use [`files.export`](/workspace/drive/api/reference/rest/v3/files/export) instead. For more information, see [Download & export files](/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-downloads).", +"description": " Gets a file's metadata or content by ID. For more information, see [Search for files and folders](/workspace/drive/api/guides/search-files). If you provide the URL parameter `alt=media`, then the response includes the file contents in the response body. Downloading content with `alt=media` only works if the file is stored in Drive. To download Google Docs, Sheets, and Slides use [`files.export`](/workspace/drive/api/reference/rest/v3/files/export) instead. For more information, see [Download and export files](/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-downloads).", "flatPath": "files/{fileId}", "httpMethod": "GET", "id": "drive.files.get", @@ -1415,7 +1417,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "includePermissionsForView": { -"description": "Specifies which additional view's permissions to include in the response. Only 'published' is supported.", +"description": "Specifies which additional view's permissions to include in the response. Only `published` is supported.", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, @@ -1452,20 +1454,20 @@ "useMediaDownloadService": true }, "list": { -"description": " Lists the user's files. This method accepts the `q` parameter, which is a search query combining one or more search terms. For more information, see the [Search for files & folders](/workspace/drive/api/guides/search-files) guide. *Note:* This method returns *all* files by default, including trashed files. If you don't want trashed files to appear in the list, use the `trashed=false` query parameter to remove trashed files from the results.", +"description": " Lists the user's files. For more information, see [Search for files and folders](/workspace/drive/api/guides/search-files). This method accepts the `q` parameter, which is a search query combining one or more search terms. This method returns *all* files by default, including trashed files. If you don't want trashed files to appear in the list, use the `trashed=false` query parameter to remove trashed files from the results.", "flatPath": "files", "httpMethod": "GET", "id": "drive.files.list", "parameterOrder": [], "parameters": { "corpora": { -"description": "Bodies of items (files/documents) to which the query applies. Supported bodies are 'user', 'domain', 'drive', and 'allDrives'. Prefer 'user' or 'drive' to 'allDrives' for efficiency. By default, corpora is set to 'user'. However, this can change depending on the filter set through the 'q' parameter.", +"description": "Bodies of items (files or documents) to which the query applies. Supported bodies are: * `user` * `domain` * `drive` * `allDrives` Prefer `user` or `drive` to `allDrives` for efficiency. By default, corpora is set to `user`. However, this can change depending on the filter set through the `q` parameter. For more information, see [File organization](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/about-files#file-organization).", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, "corpus": { "deprecated": true, -"description": "Deprecated: The source of files to list. Use 'corpora' instead.", +"description": "Deprecated: The source of files to list. Use `corpora` instead.", "enum": [ "domain", "user" @@ -1494,7 +1496,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "includePermissionsForView": { -"description": "Specifies which additional view's permissions to include in the response. Only 'published' is supported.", +"description": "Specifies which additional view's permissions to include in the response. Only `published` is supported.", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, @@ -1506,7 +1508,7 @@ "type": "boolean" }, "orderBy": { -"description": "A comma-separated list of sort keys. Valid keys are: * `createdTime`: When the file was created. * `folder`: The folder ID. This field is sorted using alphabetical ordering. * `modifiedByMeTime`: The last time the file was modified by the user. * `modifiedTime`: The last time the file was modified by anyone. * `name`: The name of the file. This field is sorted using alphabetical ordering, so 1, 12, 2, 22. * `name_natural`: The name of the file. This field is sorted using natural sort ordering, so 1, 2, 12, 22. * `quotaBytesUsed`: The number of storage quota bytes used by the file. * `recency`: The most recent timestamp from the file's date-time fields. * `sharedWithMeTime`: When the file was shared with the user, if applicable. * `starred`: Whether the user has starred the file. * `viewedByMeTime`: The last time the file was viewed by the user. Each key sorts ascending by default, but can be reversed with the 'desc' modifier. Example usage: `?orderBy=folder,modifiedTime desc,name`.", +"description": "A comma-separated list of sort keys. Valid keys are: * `createdTime`: When the file was created. * `folder`: The folder ID. This field is sorted using alphabetical ordering. * `modifiedByMeTime`: The last time the file was modified by the user. * `modifiedTime`: The last time the file was modified by anyone. * `name`: The name of the file. This field is sorted using alphabetical ordering, so 1, 12, 2, 22. * `name_natural`: The name of the file. This field is sorted using natural sort ordering, so 1, 2, 12, 22. * `quotaBytesUsed`: The number of storage quota bytes used by the file. * `recency`: The most recent timestamp from the file's date-time fields. * `sharedWithMeTime`: When the file was shared with the user, if applicable. * `starred`: Whether the user has starred the file. * `viewedByMeTime`: The last time the file was viewed by the user. Each key sorts ascending by default, but can be reversed with the `desc` modifier. Example usage: `?orderBy=folder,modifiedTime desc,name`.", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, @@ -1520,18 +1522,18 @@ "type": "integer" }, "pageToken": { -"description": "The token for continuing a previous list request on the next page. This should be set to the value of 'nextPageToken' from the previous response.", +"description": "The token for continuing a previous list request on the next page. This should be set to the value of `nextPageToken` from the previous response.", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, "q": { -"description": "A query for filtering the file results. See the \"Search for files & folders\" guide for supported syntax.", +"description": "A query for filtering the file results. For supported syntax, see [Search for files and folders](/workspace/drive/api/guides/search-files).", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, "spaces": { "default": "drive", -"description": "A comma-separated list of spaces to query within the corpora. Supported values are 'drive' and 'appDataFolder'.", +"description": "A comma-separated list of spaces to query within the corpora. Supported values are `drive` and `appDataFolder`. For more information, see [File organization](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/about-files#file-organization).", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, @@ -1571,7 +1573,7 @@ ] }, "listLabels": { -"description": "Lists the labels on a file.", +"description": "Lists the labels on a file. For more information, see [List labels on a file](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/list-labels).", "flatPath": "files/{fileId}/listLabels", "httpMethod": "GET", "id": "drive.files.listLabels", @@ -1595,7 +1597,7 @@ "type": "integer" }, "pageToken": { -"description": "The token for continuing a previous list request on the next page. This should be set to the value of 'nextPageToken' from the previous response.", +"description": "The token for continuing a previous list request on the next page. This should be set to the value of `nextPageToken` from the previous response.", "location": "query", "type": "string" } @@ -1614,7 +1616,7 @@ ] }, "modifyLabels": { -"description": "Modifies the set of labels applied to a file. Returns a list of the labels that were added or modified.", +"description": "Modifies the set of labels applied to a file. For more information, see [Set a label field on a file](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/set-label). Returns a list of the labels that were added or modified.", "flatPath": "files/{fileId}/modifyLabels", "httpMethod": "POST", "id": "drive.files.modifyLabels", @@ -1643,7 +1645,7 @@ ] }, "update": { -"description": " Updates a file's metadata and/or content. When calling this method, only populate fields in the request that you want to modify. When updating fields, some fields might be changed automatically, such as `modifiedDate`. This method supports patch semantics. This method supports an */upload* URI and accepts uploaded media with the following characteristics: - *Maximum file size:* 5,120 GB - *Accepted Media MIME types:*`*/*` Note: Specify a valid MIME type, rather than the literal `*/*` value. The literal `*/*` is only used to indicate that any valid MIME type can be uploaded. For more information on uploading files, see [Upload file data](/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-uploads).", +"description": " Updates a file's metadata, content, or both. When calling this method, only populate fields in the request that you want to modify. When updating fields, some fields might be changed automatically, such as `modifiedDate`. This method supports patch semantics. This method supports an */upload* URI and accepts uploaded media with the following characteristics: - *Maximum file size:* 5,120 GB - *Accepted Media MIME types:* `*/*` (Specify a valid MIME type, rather than the literal `*/*` value. The literal `*/*` is only used to indicate that any valid MIME type can be uploaded. For more information, see [Google Workspace and Google Drive supported MIME types](/workspace/drive/api/guides/mime-types).) For more information on uploading files, see [Upload file data](/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-uploads).", "flatPath": "files/{fileId}", "httpMethod": "PATCH", "id": "drive.files.update", @@ -1691,13 +1693,13 @@ "type": "string" }, "includePermissionsForView": { -"description": "Specifies which additional view's permissions to include in the response. Only 'published' is supported.", +"description": "Specifies which additional view's permissions to include in the response. Only `published` is supported.", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, "keepRevisionForever": { "default": "false", -"description": "Whether to set the 'keepForever' field in the new head revision. This is only applicable to files with binary content in Google Drive. Only 200 revisions for the file can be kept forever. If the limit is reached, try deleting pinned revisions.", +"description": "Whether to set the `keepForever` field in the new head revision. This is only applicable to files with binary content in Google Drive. Only 200 revisions for the file can be kept forever. If the limit is reached, try deleting pinned revisions.", "location": "query", "type": "boolean" }, @@ -1748,7 +1750,7 @@ "supportsMediaUpload": true }, "watch": { -"description": "Subscribes to changes to a file.", +"description": "Subscribes to changes to a file. For more information, see [Notifications for resource changes](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/push).", "flatPath": "files/{fileId}/watch", "httpMethod": "POST", "id": "drive.files.watch", @@ -1774,7 +1776,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "includePermissionsForView": { -"description": "Specifies which additional view's permissions to include in the response. Only 'published' is supported.", +"description": "Specifies which additional view's permissions to include in the response. Only `published` is supported.", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, @@ -1887,7 +1889,7 @@ "type": "boolean" }, "sendNotificationEmail": { -"description": "Whether to send a notification email when sharing to users or groups. This defaults to true for users and groups, and is not allowed for other requests. It must not be disabled for ownership transfers.", +"description": "Whether to send a notification email when sharing to users or groups. This defaults to `true` for users and groups, and is not allowed for other requests. It must not be disabled for ownership transfers.", "location": "query", "type": "boolean" }, @@ -2718,7 +2720,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250819", +"revision": "20250829", "rootUrl": "https://www.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "About": { @@ -3337,7 +3339,7 @@ }, "restrictingUser": { "$ref": "User", -"description": "Output only. The user who set the content restriction. Only populated if `readOnly` is true." +"description": "Output only. The user who set the content restriction. Only populated if `readOnly=true`." }, "restrictionTime": { "description": "The time at which the content restriction was set (formatted RFC 3339 timestamp). Only populated if readOnly is true.", @@ -3364,7 +3366,7 @@ "type": "boolean" }, "restrictedForWriters": { -"description": "Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If true, download is also restricted for readers.", +"description": "Whether download and copy is restricted for writers. If `true`, download is also restricted for readers.", "type": "boolean" } }, @@ -3380,7 +3382,7 @@ }, "itemDownloadRestriction": { "$ref": "DownloadRestriction", -"description": "The download restriction of the file applied directly by the owner or organizer. This does not take into account shared drive settings or DLP rules." +"description": "The download restriction of the file applied directly by the owner or organizer. This doesn't take into account shared drive settings or DLP rules." } }, "type": "object" @@ -3610,18 +3612,18 @@ "type": "object" }, "capabilities": { -"description": "Output only. Capabilities the current user has on this file. Each capability corresponds to a fine-grained action that a user may take.", +"description": "Output only. Capabilities the current user has on this file. Each capability corresponds to a fine-grained action that a user may take. For more information, see [Understand file capabilities](https://developers.google.com/workspace/drive/api/guides/manage-sharing#capabilities).", "properties": { "canAcceptOwnership": { "description": "Output only. Whether the current user is the pending owner of the file. Not populated for shared drive files.", "type": "boolean" }, "canAddChildren": { -"description": "Output only. Whether the current user can add children to this folder. This is always false when the item is not a folder.", +"description": "Output only. Whether the current user can add children to this folder. This is always `false` when the item isn't a folder.", "type": "boolean" }, "canAddFolderFromAnotherDrive": { -"description": "Output only. Whether the current user can add a folder from another drive (different shared drive or My Drive) to this folder. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives.", +"description": "Output only. Whether the current user can add a folder from another drive (different shared drive or My Drive) to this folder. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives.", "type": "boolean" }, "canAddMyDriveParent": { @@ -3637,7 +3639,7 @@ "type": "boolean" }, "canChangeSecurityUpdateEnabled": { -"description": "Output only. Whether the current user can change the securityUpdateEnabled field on link share metadata.", +"description": "Output only. Whether the current user can change the `securityUpdateEnabled` field on link share metadata.", "type": "boolean" }, "canChangeViewersCanCopyContent": { @@ -3650,7 +3652,7 @@ "type": "boolean" }, "canCopy": { -"description": "Output only. Whether the current user can copy this file. For an item in a shared drive, whether the current user can copy non-folder descendants of this item, or this item itself if it is not a folder.", +"description": "Output only. Whether the current user can copy this file. For an item in a shared drive, whether the current user can copy non-folder descendants of this item, or this item if it's not a folder.", "type": "boolean" }, "canDelete": { @@ -3658,7 +3660,7 @@ "type": "boolean" }, "canDeleteChildren": { -"description": "Output only. Whether the current user can delete children of this folder. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives.", +"description": "Output only. Whether the current user can delete children of this folder. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives.", "type": "boolean" }, "canDisableInheritedPermissions": { @@ -3678,7 +3680,7 @@ "type": "boolean" }, "canListChildren": { -"description": "Output only. Whether the current user can list the children of this folder. This is always false when the item is not a folder.", +"description": "Output only. Whether the current user can list the children of this folder. This is always `false` when the item isn't a folder.", "type": "boolean" }, "canModifyContent": { @@ -3687,7 +3689,7 @@ }, "canModifyContentRestriction": { "deprecated": true, -"description": "Deprecated: Output only. Use one of `canModifyEditorContentRestriction`, `canModifyOwnerContentRestriction` or `canRemoveContentRestriction`.", +"description": "Deprecated: Output only. Use one of `canModifyEditorContentRestriction`, `canModifyOwnerContentRestriction`, or `canRemoveContentRestriction`.", "type": "boolean" }, "canModifyEditorContentRestriction": { @@ -3703,7 +3705,7 @@ "type": "boolean" }, "canMoveChildrenOutOfDrive": { -"description": "Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder outside of the shared drive. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives.", +"description": "Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder outside of the shared drive. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives.", "type": "boolean" }, "canMoveChildrenOutOfTeamDrive": { @@ -3712,7 +3714,7 @@ "type": "boolean" }, "canMoveChildrenWithinDrive": { -"description": "Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder within this drive. This is false when the item is not a folder. Note that a request to move the child may still fail depending on the current user's access to the child and to the destination folder.", +"description": "Output only. Whether the current user can move children of this folder within this drive. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Note that a request to move the child may still fail depending on the current user's access to the child and to the destination folder.", "type": "boolean" }, "canMoveChildrenWithinTeamDrive": { @@ -3726,7 +3728,7 @@ "type": "boolean" }, "canMoveItemOutOfDrive": { -"description": "Output only. Whether the current user can move this item outside of this drive by changing its parent. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that is being added.", +"description": "Output only. Whether the current user can move this item outside of this drive by changing its parent. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that's being added.", "type": "boolean" }, "canMoveItemOutOfTeamDrive": { @@ -3735,7 +3737,7 @@ "type": "boolean" }, "canMoveItemWithinDrive": { -"description": "Output only. Whether the current user can move this item within this drive. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that is being added and the parent that is being removed.", +"description": "Output only. Whether the current user can move this item within this drive. Note that a request to change the parent of the item may still fail depending on the new parent that's being added and the parent that is being removed.", "type": "boolean" }, "canMoveItemWithinTeamDrive": { @@ -3757,7 +3759,7 @@ "type": "boolean" }, "canReadRevisions": { -"description": "Output only. Whether the current user can read the revisions resource of this file. For a shared drive item, whether revisions of non-folder descendants of this item, or this item itself if it is not a folder, can be read.", +"description": "Output only. Whether the current user can read the revisions resource of this file. For a shared drive item, whether revisions of non-folder descendants of this item, or this item if it's not a folder, can be read.", "type": "boolean" }, "canReadTeamDrive": { @@ -3766,11 +3768,11 @@ "type": "boolean" }, "canRemoveChildren": { -"description": "Output only. Whether the current user can remove children from this folder. This is always false when the item is not a folder. For a folder in a shared drive, use `canDeleteChildren` or `canTrashChildren` instead.", +"description": "Output only. Whether the current user can remove children from this folder. This is always `false` when the item isn't a folder. For a folder in a shared drive, use `canDeleteChildren` or `canTrashChildren` instead.", "type": "boolean" }, "canRemoveContentRestriction": { -"description": "Output only. Whether there is a content restriction on the file that can be removed by the current user.", +"description": "Output only. Whether there's a content restriction on the file that can be removed by the current user.", "type": "boolean" }, "canRemoveMyDriveParent": { @@ -3790,7 +3792,7 @@ "type": "boolean" }, "canTrashChildren": { -"description": "Output only. Whether the current user can trash children of this folder. This is false when the item is not a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives.", +"description": "Output only. Whether the current user can trash children of this folder. This is `false` when the item isn't a folder. Only populated for items in shared drives.", "type": "boolean" }, "canUntrash": { @@ -3804,14 +3806,14 @@ "description": "Additional information about the content of the file. These fields are never populated in responses.", "properties": { "indexableText": { -"description": "Text to be indexed for the file to improve fullText queries. This is limited to 128KB in length and may contain HTML elements.", +"description": "Text to be indexed for the file to improve fullText queries. This is limited to 128 KB in length and may contain HTML elements.", "type": "string" }, "thumbnail": { "description": "A thumbnail for the file. This will only be used if Google Drive cannot generate a standard thumbnail.", "properties": { "image": { -"description": "The thumbnail data encoded with URL-safe Base64 (RFC 4648 section 5).", +"description": "The thumbnail data encoded with URL-safe Base64 ([RFC 4648 section 5](https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc4648#section-5)).", "format": "byte", "type": "string" }, @@ -3833,7 +3835,7 @@ "type": "array" }, "copyRequiresWriterPermission": { -"description": "Whether the options to copy, print, or download this file, should be disabled for readers and commenters.", +"description": "Whether the options to copy, print, or download this file should be disabled for readers and commenters.", "type": "boolean" }, "createdTime": { @@ -3870,11 +3872,11 @@ "type": "string" }, "folderColorRgb": { -"description": "The color for a folder or a shortcut to a folder as an RGB hex string. The supported colors are published in the `folderColorPalette` field of the About resource. If an unsupported color is specified, the closest color in the palette is used instead.", +"description": "The color for a folder or a shortcut to a folder as an RGB hex string. The supported colors are published in the `folderColorPalette` field of the [`about`](/workspace/drive/api/reference/rest/v3/about) resource. If an unsupported color is specified, the closest color in the palette is used instead.", "type": "string" }, "fullFileExtension": { -"description": "Output only. The full file extension extracted from the `name` field. May contain multiple concatenated extensions, such as \"tar.gz\". This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. This is automatically updated when the `name` field changes, however it is not cleared if the new name does not contain a valid extension.", +"description": "Output only. The full file extension extracted from the `name` field. May contain multiple concatenated extensions, such as \"tar.gz\". This is only available for files with binary content in Google Drive. This is automatically updated when the `name` field changes, however it's not cleared if the new name doesn't contain a valid extension.", "type": "string" }, "hasAugmentedPermissions": { @@ -3882,7 +3884,7 @@ "type": "boolean" }, "hasThumbnail": { -"description": "Output only. Whether this file has a thumbnail. This does not indicate whether the requesting app has access to the thumbnail. To check access, look for the presence of the thumbnailLink field.", +"description": "Output only. Whether this file has a thumbnail. This doesn't indicate whether the requesting app has access to the thumbnail. To check access, look for the presence of the thumbnailLink field.", "type": "boolean" }, "headRevisionId": { @@ -4063,7 +4065,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "mimeType": { -"description": "The MIME type of the file. Google Drive attempts to automatically detect an appropriate value from uploaded content, if no value is provided. The value cannot be changed unless a new revision is uploaded. If a file is created with a Google Doc MIME type, the uploaded content is imported, if possible. The supported import formats are published in the About resource.", +"description": "The MIME type of the file. Google Drive attempts to automatically detect an appropriate value from uploaded content, if no value is provided. The value cannot be changed unless a new revision is uploaded. If a file is created with a Google Doc MIME type, the uploaded content is imported, if possible. The supported import formats are published in the [`about`](/workspace/drive/api/reference/rest/v3/about) resource.", "type": "string" }, "modifiedByMe": { @@ -4081,7 +4083,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "name": { -"description": "The name of the file. This is not necessarily unique within a folder. Note that for immutable items such as the top level folders of shared drives, My Drive root folder, and Application Data folder the name is constant.", +"description": "The name of the file. This isn't necessarily unique within a folder. Note that for immutable items such as the top-level folders of shared drives, the My Drive root folder, and the Application Data folder, the name is constant.", "type": "string" }, "originalFilename": { @@ -4137,11 +4139,11 @@ "type": "string" }, "sha1Checksum": { -"description": "Output only. The SHA1 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it is not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files.", +"description": "Output only. The SHA1 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it's not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files.", "type": "string" }, "sha256Checksum": { -"description": "Output only. The SHA256 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it is not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files.", +"description": "Output only. The SHA256 checksum associated with this file, if available. This field is only populated for files with content stored in Google Drive; it's not populated for Docs Editors or shortcut files.", "type": "string" }, "shared": { @@ -4169,19 +4171,19 @@ "type": "string" }, "targetResourceKey": { -"description": "Output only. The ResourceKey for the target file.", +"description": "Output only. The `resourceKey` for the target file.", "type": "string" } }, "type": "object" }, "size": { -"description": "Output only. Size in bytes of blobs and first party editor files. Won't be populated for files that have no size, like shortcuts and folders.", +"description": "Output only. Size in bytes of blobs and Google Workspace editor files. Won't be populated for files that have no size, like shortcuts and folders.", "format": "int64", "type": "string" }, "spaces": { -"description": "Output only. The list of spaces which contain the file. The currently supported values are 'drive', 'appDataFolder' and 'photos'.", +"description": "Output only. The list of spaces which contain the file. The currently supported values are `drive`, `appDataFolder`, and `photos`.", "items": { "type": "string" }, @@ -4197,7 +4199,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "thumbnailLink": { -"description": "Output only. A short-lived link to the file's thumbnail, if available. Typically lasts on the order of hours. Not intended for direct usage on web applications due to [Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS)](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/CORS) policies, consider using a proxy server. Only populated when the requesting app can access the file's content. If the file isn't shared publicly, the URL returned in `Files.thumbnailLink` must be fetched using a credentialed request.", +"description": "Output only. A short-lived link to the file's thumbnail, if available. Typically lasts on the order of hours. Not intended for direct usage on web applications due to [Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS)](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/CORS) policies. Consider using a proxy server. Only populated when the requesting app can access the file's content. If the file isn't shared publicly, the URL returned in `files.thumbnailLink` must be fetched using a credentialed request.", "type": "string" }, "thumbnailVersion": { @@ -4278,14 +4280,14 @@ "id": "FileList", "properties": { "files": { -"description": "The list of files. If nextPageToken is populated, then this list may be incomplete and an additional page of results should be fetched.", +"description": "The list of files. If `nextPageToken` is populated, then this list may be incomplete and an additional page of results should be fetched.", "items": { "$ref": "File" }, "type": "array" }, "incompleteSearch": { -"description": "Whether the search process was incomplete. If true, then some search results might be missing, since all documents were not searched. This can occur when searching multiple drives with the 'allDrives' corpora, but all corpora couldn't be searched. When this happens, it's suggested that clients narrow their query by choosing a different corpus such as 'user' or 'drive'.", +"description": "Whether the search process was incomplete. If true, then some search results might be missing, since all documents were not searched. This can occur when searching multiple drives with the `allDrives` corpora, but all corpora couldn't be searched. When this happens, it's suggested that clients narrow their query by choosing a different corpus such as `user` or `drive`.", "type": "boolean" }, "kind": { @@ -4414,7 +4416,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "kind": { -"description": "This is always drive#labelFieldModification.", +"description": "This is always `\"drive#labelFieldModification\"`.", "type": "string" }, "setDateValues": { @@ -4448,7 +4450,7 @@ "type": "array" }, "setUserValues": { -"description": "Replaces a `user` field with these new values. The values must be valid email addresses.", +"description": "Replaces a `user` field with these new values. The values must be a valid email addresses.", "items": { "type": "string" }, @@ -4466,7 +4468,7 @@ "id": "LabelList", "properties": { "kind": { -"description": "This is always drive#labelList", +"description": "This is always `\"drive#labelList\"`.", "type": "string" }, "labels": { @@ -4484,7 +4486,7 @@ "type": "object" }, "LabelModification": { -"description": "A modification to a label on a file. A LabelModification can be used to apply a label to a file, update an existing label on a file, or remove a label from a file.", +"description": "A modification to a label on a file. A `LabelModification` can be used to apply a label to a file, update an existing label on a file, or remove a label from a file.", "id": "LabelModification", "properties": { "fieldModifications": { @@ -4495,7 +4497,7 @@ "type": "array" }, "kind": { -"description": "This is always drive#labelModification.", +"description": "This is always `\"drive#labelModification\"`.", "type": "string" }, "labelId": { @@ -4537,7 +4539,7 @@ "id": "ModifyLabelsRequest", "properties": { "kind": { -"description": "This is always drive#modifyLabelsRequest.", +"description": "This is always `\"drive#modifyLabelsRequest\"`.", "type": "string" }, "labelModifications": { @@ -4551,11 +4553,11 @@ "type": "object" }, "ModifyLabelsResponse": { -"description": "Response to a ModifyLabels request. This contains only those labels which were added or updated by the request.", +"description": "Response to a `ModifyLabels` request. This contains only those labels which were added or updated by the request.", "id": "ModifyLabelsResponse", "properties": { "kind": { -"description": "This is always drive#modifyLabelsResponse", +"description": "This is always `\"drive#modifyLabelsResponse\"`.", "type": "string" }, "modifiedLabels": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/eventarc.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/eventarc.v1.json index f9192fa8faa..4a2969352b2 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/eventarc.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/eventarc.v1.json @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -2466,7 +2466,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250815", +"revision": "20250905", "rootUrl": "https://eventarc.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuditConfig": { @@ -2999,7 +2999,7 @@ "properties": { "authenticationConfig": { "$ref": "GoogleCloudEventarcV1PipelineDestinationAuthenticationConfig", -"description": "Optional. An authentication config used to authenticate message requests, such that destinations can verify the source. For example, this can be used with private GCP destinations that require GCP credentials to access like Cloud Run. This field is optional and should be set only by users interested in authenticated push" +"description": "Optional. An authentication config used to authenticate message requests, such that destinations can verify the source. For example, this can be used with private Google Cloud destinations that require Google Cloud credentials for access like Cloud Run. This field is optional and should be set only by users interested in authenticated push." }, "httpEndpoint": { "$ref": "GoogleCloudEventarcV1PipelineDestinationHttpEndpoint", @@ -3034,7 +3034,7 @@ "properties": { "googleOidc": { "$ref": "GoogleCloudEventarcV1PipelineDestinationAuthenticationConfigOidcToken", -"description": "Optional. This authenticate method will apply Google OIDC tokens signed by a GCP service account to the requests." +"description": "Optional. This authenticate method will apply Google OIDC tokens signed by a Google Cloud service account to the requests." }, "oauthToken": { "$ref": "GoogleCloudEventarcV1PipelineDestinationAuthenticationConfigOAuthToken", @@ -3059,7 +3059,7 @@ "type": "object" }, "GoogleCloudEventarcV1PipelineDestinationAuthenticationConfigOidcToken": { -"description": "Represents a config used to authenticate with a Google OIDC token using a GCP service account. Use this authentication method to invoke your Cloud Run and Cloud Functions destinations or HTTP endpoints that support Google OIDC.", +"description": "Represents a config used to authenticate with a Google OIDC token using a Google Cloud service account. Use this authentication method to invoke your Cloud Run and Cloud Functions destinations or HTTP endpoints that support Google OIDC.", "id": "GoogleCloudEventarcV1PipelineDestinationAuthenticationConfigOidcToken", "properties": { "audience": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/file.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/file.v1.json index 7ec234fa02f..2894e9db058 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/file.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/file.v1.json @@ -908,7 +908,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250819", +"revision": "20250825", "rootUrl": "https://file.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Backup": { @@ -1874,12 +1874,14 @@ "enum": [ "CONNECT_MODE_UNSPECIFIED", "DIRECT_PEERING", -"PRIVATE_SERVICE_ACCESS" +"PRIVATE_SERVICE_ACCESS", +"PRIVATE_SERVICE_CONNECT" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Not set.", "Connect via direct peering to the Filestore service.", -"Connect to your Filestore instance using Private Service Access. Private services access provides an IP address range for multiple Google Cloud services, including Filestore." +"Connect to your Filestore instance using Private Service Access. Private services access provides an IP address range for multiple Google Cloud services, including Filestore.", +"Connect to your Filestore instance using Private Service Connect. A connection policy must exist in the region for the VPC network and the google-cloud-filestore service class." ], "type": "string" }, @@ -1910,6 +1912,10 @@ "description": "The name of the Google Compute Engine [VPC network](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/vpc) to which the instance is connected.", "type": "string" }, +"pscConfig": { +"$ref": "PscConfig", +"description": "Optional. Private Service Connect configuration. Should only be set when connect_mode is PRIVATE_SERVICE_CONNECT." +}, "reservedIpRange": { "description": "Optional, reserved_ip_range can have one of the following two types of values. * CIDR range value when using DIRECT_PEERING connect mode. * [Allocated IP address range](https://cloud.google.com/compute/docs/ip-addresses/reserve-static-internal-ip-address) when using PRIVATE_SERVICE_ACCESS connect mode. When the name of an allocated IP address range is specified, it must be one of the ranges associated with the private service access connection. When specified as a direct CIDR value, it must be a /29 CIDR block for Basic tier, a /24 CIDR block for High Scale tier, or a /26 CIDR block for Enterprise tier in one of the [internal IP address ranges](https://www.arin.net/reference/research/statistics/address_filters/) that identifies the range of IP addresses reserved for this instance. For example, 10.0.0.0/29, 192.168.0.0/24 or 192.168.0.0/26, respectively. The range you specify can't overlap with either existing subnets or assigned IP address ranges for other Filestore instances in the selected VPC network.", "type": "string" @@ -1952,6 +1958,10 @@ }, "type": "array" }, +"network": { +"description": "Optional. The source VPC network for ip_ranges. Required for instances using Private Service Connect, optional otherwise. If provided, must be the same network specified in the `NetworkConfig.network` field.", +"type": "string" +}, "squashMode": { "description": "Either NO_ROOT_SQUASH, for allowing root access on the exported directory, or ROOT_SQUASH, for not allowing root access. The default is NO_ROOT_SQUASH.", "enum": [ @@ -2111,6 +2121,17 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"PscConfig": { +"description": "Private Service Connect configuration.", +"id": "PscConfig", +"properties": { +"endpointProject": { +"description": "Optional. Consumer service project in which the Private Service Connect endpoint would be set up. This is optional, and only relevant in case the network is a shared VPC. If this is not specified, the endpoint would be setup in the VPC host project.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "ReplicaConfig": { "description": "Replica configuration for the instance.", "id": "ReplicaConfig", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseappcheck.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseappcheck.v1.json index a11345df90b..b8deba59e7f 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseappcheck.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseappcheck.v1.json @@ -1661,7 +1661,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20240930", +"revision": "20250901", "rootUrl": "https://firebaseappcheck.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1AppAttestConfig": { @@ -2174,6 +2174,18 @@ "description": "An app's Play Integrity configuration object. This configuration controls certain properties of the `AppCheckToken` returned by ExchangePlayIntegrityToken, such as its ttl. Note that your registered SHA-256 certificate fingerprints are used to validate tokens issued by the Play Integrity API; please register them via the Firebase Console or programmatically via the [Firebase Management Service](https://firebase.google.com/docs/projects/api/reference/rest/v1beta1/projects.androidApps.sha/create).", "id": "GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1PlayIntegrityConfig", "properties": { +"accountDetails": { +"$ref": "GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1PlayIntegrityConfigAccountDetails", +"description": "Specifies account requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**account details** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#account-details-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended." +}, +"appIntegrity": { +"$ref": "GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1PlayIntegrityConfigAppIntegrity", +"description": "Specifies application integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**application integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#application-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended." +}, +"deviceIntegrity": { +"$ref": "GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1PlayIntegrityConfigDeviceIntegrity", +"description": "Specifies device integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**device integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#device-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. Warning: There are also [conditional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#conditional) as well as [optional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#optional_device_information) responses that you can receive, but requires additional explicit opt-in from you. The App Check API is **not** responsible for any such opt-ins. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended." +}, "name": { "description": "Required. The relative resource name of the Play Integrity configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/playIntegrityConfig ```", "type": "string" @@ -2186,6 +2198,53 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1PlayIntegrityConfigAccountDetails": { +"description": "A settings object specifying account requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**account details** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#account-details-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended.", +"id": "GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1PlayIntegrityConfigAccountDetails", +"properties": { +"requireLicensed": { +"description": "Specifies whether the caller must have received the [`LICENSED` verdict](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#account-details-field). For additional details about scenarios where your users will receive this `LICENSED` label, see [the default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default). If set to `true`, apps without the `LICENSED` app licensing verdict will be rejected. If set to `false`, any app licensing verdict is allowed. The default value is `false`.", +"type": "boolean" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1PlayIntegrityConfigAppIntegrity": { +"description": "A settings object specifying application integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**application integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#application-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended.", +"id": "GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1PlayIntegrityConfigAppIntegrity", +"properties": { +"allowUnrecognizedVersion": { +"description": "Specifies whether your running app is allowed to have the `UNRECOGNIZED_VERSION` [app recognition verdict](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#application-integrity-field). Note that the app recognition verdict `PLAY_RECOGNIZED` is a strong, comprehensive integrity signal that takes into account various other signals, including conditional and optional device integrity responses that you have opted into. If your app is published off-Play, this field should be set to `true` to allow instances of your app installed from off-Play sources to function. If set to `false`, only `PLAY_RECOGNIZED` verdicts are allowed, and both `UNRECOGNIZED_VERSION` and `UNEVALUATED` will be rejected. If set to `true`, any app recognition verdict is allowed. The default value is `false`.", +"type": "boolean" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1PlayIntegrityConfigDeviceIntegrity": { +"description": "A settings object specifying device integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**device integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#device-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. Warning: There are also [conditional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#conditional) as well as [optional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#optional_device_information) responses that you can receive, but requires additional explicit opt-in from you. The App Check API is **not** responsible for any such opt-ins. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended.", +"id": "GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1PlayIntegrityConfigDeviceIntegrity", +"properties": { +"minDeviceRecognitionLevel": { +"description": "Specifies the minimum device integrity level in order for the device to be considered valid. Any device with a device recognition verdict lower than this level will be rejected. If this is unspecified, the default level is `NO_INTEGRITY`.", +"enum": [ +"DEVICE_RECOGNITION_LEVEL_UNSPECIFIED", +"NO_INTEGRITY", +"MEETS_BASIC_INTEGRITY", +"MEETS_DEVICE_INTEGRITY", +"MEETS_STRONG_INTEGRITY" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Default value. Do not specify this value directly. When this default value is detected in a configuration, the `NO_INTEGRITY` default level takes effect.", +"If this level is set, no explicit device integrity label requirements will be checked. However, because Play Integrity's other features may perform (and require) their own intrinsic device integrity checks, your `app_integrity` and `account_details` settings may still cause some device integrity checks to be performed.", +"This level corresponds to the `MEETS_BASIC_INTEGRITY` [optional device recognition label](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#optional-device-labels). This value represents the most basic level of device integrity, and is the minimum allowed in App Check's standard implementation of Play Integrity. Warning: Because this is an optional response, you **must** first explicitly [opt in your app in the Play Console](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#optional) in order to receive this label. Without this opt-in, **your app may break** for any user whose device is eligible for `MEETS_BASIC_INTEGRITY` but not `MEETS_DEVICE_INTEGRITY`. This API is **not** responsible for any such opt-ins.", +"This level corresponds to the `MEETS_DEVICE_INTEGRITY` [device recognition verdict](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#device-integrity-field). Any app integrated with Play Integrity will automatically be eligible to receive this label without any additional action from you. At this level, devices that have the `MEETS_BASIC_INTEGRITY` label but **not** the `MEETS_DEVICE_INTEGRITY` label will be rejected.", +"This level corresponds to the `MEETS_STRONG_INTEGRITY` [optional device recognition label](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#optional-device-labels). This value represents the highest level of device integrity. At this level, devices that have the `MEETS_BASIC_INTEGRITY` or `MEETS_DEVICE_INTEGRITY` but **not** the `MEETS_STRONG_INTEGRITY` label will be rejected. Warning: Because this is an optional response, you **must** first explicitly [opt in your app in the Play Console](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#optional) in order to receive this label. Without this opt-in, **your app may break** for any user whose device is eligible for `MEETS_STRONG_INTEGRITY`. This API is **not** responsible for any such opt-ins." +], +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1PublicJwk": { "description": "A JWK as specified by [section 4 of RFC 7517](https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7517#section-4) and [section 6.3.1 of RFC 7518](https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7518#section-6.3.1).", "id": "GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1PublicJwk", @@ -2239,6 +2298,10 @@ "description": "Required. The relative resource name of the reCAPTCHA Enterprise configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/recaptchaEnterpriseConfig ```", "type": "string" }, +"riskAnalysis": { +"$ref": "GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1RecaptchaEnterpriseConfigRiskAnalysis", +"description": "Specifies risk tolerance and requirements for your application. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**`riskAnalysis`**](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha/docs/interpret-assessment-website#interpret_assessment) tuple in the assessment obtained from reCAPTCHA Enterprise. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended." +}, "siteKey": { "description": "The score-based site key [created in reCAPTCHA Enterprise](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha-enterprise/docs/create-key#creating_a_site_key) used to [invoke reCAPTCHA and generate the reCAPTCHA tokens](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha-enterprise/docs/instrument-web-pages) for your application. Important: This is *not* the `site_secret` (as it is in reCAPTCHA v3), but rather your score-based reCAPTCHA Enterprise site key.", "type": "string" @@ -2251,10 +2314,27 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1RecaptchaEnterpriseConfigRiskAnalysis": { +"description": "A settings object specifying risk tolerance and requirements for your application. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**`riskAnalysis`**](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha/docs/interpret-assessment-website#interpret_assessment) tuple in the assessment obtained from reCAPTCHA Enterprise. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended.", +"id": "GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1RecaptchaEnterpriseConfigRiskAnalysis", +"properties": { +"minValidScore": { +"description": "Specifies a minimum score required for a reCAPTCHA token to be considered valid. If its score is greater than or equal to this value, it will be accepted; otherwise, it will be rejected. The value must be between 0.0 and 1.0. The default value is 0.5.", +"format": "float", +"type": "number" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1RecaptchaV3Config": { "description": "An app's reCAPTCHA v3 configuration object. This configuration is used by ExchangeRecaptchaV3Token to validate reCAPTCHA tokens issued to apps by reCAPTCHA v3. It also controls certain properties of the returned `AppCheckToken`, such as its ttl.", "id": "GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1RecaptchaV3Config", "properties": { +"minValidScore": { +"description": "Specifies a minimum score required for a reCAPTCHA token to be considered valid. If its score is greater than or equal to this value, it will be accepted; otherwise, it will be rejected. The value must be between 0.0 and 1.0. The default value is 0.5.", +"format": "float", +"type": "number" +}, "name": { "description": "Required. The relative resource name of the reCAPTCHA v3 configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/recaptchaV3Config ```", "type": "string" diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseappcheck.v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseappcheck.v1beta.json index 5af296d0c75..540dd9b8ba3 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseappcheck.v1beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseappcheck.v1beta.json @@ -1823,7 +1823,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20240930", +"revision": "20250901", "rootUrl": "https://firebaseappcheck.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1betaAppAttestConfig": { @@ -2390,6 +2390,18 @@ "description": "An app's Play Integrity configuration object. This configuration controls certain properties of the `AppCheckToken` returned by ExchangePlayIntegrityToken, such as its ttl. Note that your registered SHA-256 certificate fingerprints are used to validate tokens issued by the Play Integrity API; please register them via the Firebase Console or programmatically via the [Firebase Management Service](https://firebase.google.com/docs/projects/api/reference/rest/v1beta1/projects.androidApps.sha/create).", "id": "GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1betaPlayIntegrityConfig", "properties": { +"accountDetails": { +"$ref": "GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1betaPlayIntegrityConfigAccountDetails", +"description": "Specifies account requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**account details** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#account-details-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended." +}, +"appIntegrity": { +"$ref": "GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1betaPlayIntegrityConfigAppIntegrity", +"description": "Specifies application integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**application integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#application-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended." +}, +"deviceIntegrity": { +"$ref": "GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1betaPlayIntegrityConfigDeviceIntegrity", +"description": "Specifies device integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**device integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#device-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. Warning: There are also [conditional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#conditional) as well as [optional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#optional_device_information) responses that you can receive, but requires additional explicit opt-in from you. The App Check API is **not** responsible for any such opt-ins. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended." +}, "name": { "description": "Required. The relative resource name of the Play Integrity configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/playIntegrityConfig ```", "type": "string" @@ -2402,6 +2414,53 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1betaPlayIntegrityConfigAccountDetails": { +"description": "A settings object specifying account requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**account details** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#account-details-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended.", +"id": "GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1betaPlayIntegrityConfigAccountDetails", +"properties": { +"requireLicensed": { +"description": "Specifies whether the caller must have received the [`LICENSED` verdict](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#account-details-field). For additional details about scenarios where your users will receive this `LICENSED` label, see [the default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default). If set to `true`, apps without the `LICENSED` app licensing verdict will be rejected. If set to `false`, any app licensing verdict is allowed. The default value is `false`.", +"type": "boolean" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1betaPlayIntegrityConfigAppIntegrity": { +"description": "A settings object specifying application integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**application integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#application-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended.", +"id": "GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1betaPlayIntegrityConfigAppIntegrity", +"properties": { +"allowUnrecognizedVersion": { +"description": "Specifies whether your running app is allowed to have the `UNRECOGNIZED_VERSION` [app recognition verdict](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#application-integrity-field). Note that the app recognition verdict `PLAY_RECOGNIZED` is a strong, comprehensive integrity signal that takes into account various other signals, including conditional and optional device integrity responses that you have opted into. If your app is published off-Play, this field should be set to `true` to allow instances of your app installed from off-Play sources to function. If set to `false`, only `PLAY_RECOGNIZED` verdicts are allowed, and both `UNRECOGNIZED_VERSION` and `UNEVALUATED` will be rejected. If set to `true`, any app recognition verdict is allowed. The default value is `false`.", +"type": "boolean" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1betaPlayIntegrityConfigDeviceIntegrity": { +"description": "A settings object specifying device integrity requirements for Android devices running your app. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**device integrity** field](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#device-integrity-field) obtained from the Play Integrity API. See the [default responses table](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#default) for a quick summary. Warning: There are also [conditional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#conditional) as well as [optional](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#optional_device_information) responses that you can receive, but requires additional explicit opt-in from you. The App Check API is **not** responsible for any such opt-ins. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended.", +"id": "GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1betaPlayIntegrityConfigDeviceIntegrity", +"properties": { +"minDeviceRecognitionLevel": { +"description": "Specifies the minimum device integrity level in order for the device to be considered valid. Any device with a device recognition verdict lower than this level will be rejected. If this is unspecified, the default level is `NO_INTEGRITY`.", +"enum": [ +"DEVICE_RECOGNITION_LEVEL_UNSPECIFIED", +"NO_INTEGRITY", +"MEETS_BASIC_INTEGRITY", +"MEETS_DEVICE_INTEGRITY", +"MEETS_STRONG_INTEGRITY" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Default value. Do not specify this value directly. When this default value is detected in a configuration, the `NO_INTEGRITY` default level takes effect.", +"If this level is set, no explicit device integrity label requirements will be checked. However, because Play Integrity's other features may perform (and require) their own intrinsic device integrity checks, your `app_integrity` and `account_details` settings may still cause some device integrity checks to be performed.", +"This level corresponds to the `MEETS_BASIC_INTEGRITY` [optional device recognition label](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#optional-device-labels). This value represents the most basic level of device integrity, and is the minimum allowed in App Check's standard implementation of Play Integrity. Warning: Because this is an optional response, you **must** first explicitly [opt in your app in the Play Console](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#optional) in order to receive this label. Without this opt-in, **your app may break** for any user whose device is eligible for `MEETS_BASIC_INTEGRITY` but not `MEETS_DEVICE_INTEGRITY`. This API is **not** responsible for any such opt-ins.", +"This level corresponds to the `MEETS_DEVICE_INTEGRITY` [device recognition verdict](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#device-integrity-field). Any app integrated with Play Integrity will automatically be eligible to receive this label without any additional action from you. At this level, devices that have the `MEETS_BASIC_INTEGRITY` label but **not** the `MEETS_DEVICE_INTEGRITY` label will be rejected.", +"This level corresponds to the `MEETS_STRONG_INTEGRITY` [optional device recognition label](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/verdicts#optional-device-labels). This value represents the highest level of device integrity. At this level, devices that have the `MEETS_BASIC_INTEGRITY` or `MEETS_DEVICE_INTEGRITY` but **not** the `MEETS_STRONG_INTEGRITY` label will be rejected. Warning: Because this is an optional response, you **must** first explicitly [opt in your app in the Play Console](https://developer.android.com/google/play/integrity/setup#optional) in order to receive this label. Without this opt-in, **your app may break** for any user whose device is eligible for `MEETS_STRONG_INTEGRITY`. This API is **not** responsible for any such opt-ins." +], +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1betaPublicJwk": { "description": "A JWK as specified by [section 4 of RFC 7517](https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7517#section-4) and [section 6.3.1 of RFC 7518](https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7518#section-6.3.1).", "id": "GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1betaPublicJwk", @@ -2452,6 +2511,11 @@ "description": "An app's reCAPTCHA v3 configuration object. This configuration is used by ExchangeRecaptchaToken to validate reCAPTCHA tokens issued to apps by reCAPTCHA v3. It also controls certain properties of the returned `AppCheckToken`, such as its ttl.", "id": "GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1betaRecaptchaConfig", "properties": { +"minValidScore": { +"description": "Specifies a minimum score required for a reCAPTCHA token to be considered valid. If its score is greater than or equal to this value, it will be accepted; otherwise, it will be rejected. The value must be between 0.0 and 1.0. The default value is 0.5.", +"format": "float", +"type": "number" +}, "name": { "description": "Required. The relative resource name of the reCAPTCHA v3 configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/recaptchaConfig ```", "type": "string" @@ -2481,6 +2545,10 @@ "description": "Required. The relative resource name of the reCAPTCHA Enterprise configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/recaptchaEnterpriseConfig ```", "type": "string" }, +"riskAnalysis": { +"$ref": "GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1betaRecaptchaEnterpriseConfigRiskAnalysis", +"description": "Specifies risk tolerance and requirements for your application. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**`riskAnalysis`**](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha/docs/interpret-assessment-website#interpret_assessment) tuple in the assessment obtained from reCAPTCHA Enterprise. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended." +}, "siteKey": { "description": "The score-based site key [created in reCAPTCHA Enterprise](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha-enterprise/docs/create-key#creating_a_site_key) used to [invoke reCAPTCHA and generate the reCAPTCHA tokens](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha-enterprise/docs/instrument-web-pages) for your application. Important: This is *not* the `site_secret` (as it is in reCAPTCHA v3), but rather your score-based reCAPTCHA Enterprise site key.", "type": "string" @@ -2493,10 +2561,27 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1betaRecaptchaEnterpriseConfigRiskAnalysis": { +"description": "A settings object specifying risk tolerance and requirements for your application. These settings correspond to requirements on the [**`riskAnalysis`**](https://cloud.google.com/recaptcha/docs/interpret-assessment-website#interpret_assessment) tuple in the assessment obtained from reCAPTCHA Enterprise. The default values for these settings work for most apps, and are recommended.", +"id": "GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1betaRecaptchaEnterpriseConfigRiskAnalysis", +"properties": { +"minValidScore": { +"description": "Specifies a minimum score required for a reCAPTCHA token to be considered valid. If its score is greater than or equal to this value, it will be accepted; otherwise, it will be rejected. The value must be between 0.0 and 1.0. The default value is 0.5.", +"format": "float", +"type": "number" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1betaRecaptchaV3Config": { "description": "An app's reCAPTCHA v3 configuration object. This configuration is used by ExchangeRecaptchaV3Token to validate reCAPTCHA tokens issued to apps by reCAPTCHA v3. It also controls certain properties of the returned `AppCheckToken`, such as its ttl.", "id": "GoogleFirebaseAppcheckV1betaRecaptchaV3Config", "properties": { +"minValidScore": { +"description": "Specifies a minimum score required for a reCAPTCHA token to be considered valid. If its score is greater than or equal to this value, it will be accepted; otherwise, it will be rejected. The value must be between 0.0 and 1.0. The default value is 0.5.", +"format": "float", +"type": "number" +}, "name": { "description": "Required. The relative resource name of the reCAPTCHA v3 configuration object, in the format: ``` projects/{project_number}/apps/{app_id}/recaptchaV3Config ```", "type": "string" diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseappdistribution.v1alpha.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseappdistribution.v1alpha.json index 1a2aeacf58b..d4e7a6170de 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseappdistribution.v1alpha.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseappdistribution.v1alpha.json @@ -807,7 +807,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250825", +"revision": "20250912", "rootUrl": "https://firebaseappdistribution.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AndroidxCrawlerOutputPoint": { @@ -1316,6 +1316,12 @@ "readOnly": true, "type": "string" }, +"videoStartTime": { +"description": "Output only. The time at which the video started recording.", +"format": "google-datetime", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, "videoUri": { "description": "Output only. A URI to a video of the test run.", "readOnly": true, @@ -1606,7 +1612,7 @@ "properties": { "debugInfo": { "$ref": "GoogleFirebaseAppdistroV1alphaGoalActionDebugInfo", -"description": "Output only. Debug information explaining why the agent to the specific action", +"description": "Output only. Debug information explaining why the agent to the specific action.", "readOnly": true }, "deviceAction": { @@ -1619,6 +1625,12 @@ "readOnly": true, "type": "string" }, +"startTime": { +"description": "Output only. The time at which the action started.", +"format": "google-datetime", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, "terminalAction": { "$ref": "GoogleFirebaseAppdistroV1alphaTerminalAction", "description": "Output only. An action taken by the AI to end the goal.", @@ -1628,16 +1640,16 @@ "type": "object" }, "GoogleFirebaseAppdistroV1alphaGoalActionDebugInfo": { -"description": "Information to help the customer understand why the agent took this action", +"description": "Information to help the customer understand why the agent took this action.", "id": "GoogleFirebaseAppdistroV1alphaGoalActionDebugInfo", "properties": { "annotatedScreenshotUri": { -"description": "Output only. URI of the screenshot with elements labeled which was used by the agent", +"description": "Output only. URI of the screenshot with elements labeled which was used by the agent.", "readOnly": true, "type": "string" }, "jsonUri": { -"description": "Output only. Structured data explaining the agent's choice", +"description": "Output only. Structured data explaining the agent's choice.", "readOnly": true, "type": "string" } @@ -1983,7 +1995,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "dependentTestCases": { -"description": "Output only. Other test cases that depend on this test cse as a prerequisite.", +"description": "Output only. Other test cases that depend on this test case as a prerequisite.", "items": { "type": "string" }, diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseapphosting.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseapphosting.v1.json index b5ae57509bd..828bc121ad2 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseapphosting.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseapphosting.v1.json @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -1101,9 +1101,36 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250814", +"revision": "20250904", "rootUrl": "https://firebaseapphosting.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { +"ArchiveSource": { +"description": "The URI of an storage archive or a signed URL to use as the build source.", +"id": "ArchiveSource", +"properties": { +"author": { +"$ref": "SourceUserMetadata", +"description": "Optional. The author contained in the metadata of a version control change." +}, +"description": { +"description": "Optional. An optional message that describes the uploaded version of the source code.", +"type": "string" +}, +"externalSignedUri": { +"description": "Signed URL to an archive in a storage bucket.", +"type": "string" +}, +"rootDirectory": { +"description": "Optional. Relative path in the archive.", +"type": "string" +}, +"userStorageUri": { +"description": "URI to an archive in Cloud Storage. The object must be a zipped (.zip) or gzipped archive file (.tar.gz) containing source to deploy.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "Backend": { "description": "A backend is the primary resource of App Hosting.", "id": "Backend", @@ -1177,6 +1204,10 @@ "readOnly": true, "type": "boolean" }, +"requestLogsDisabled": { +"description": "Optional. A field that, if true, indicates that incoming request logs are disabled for this backend. Incoming request logs are enabled by default.", +"type": "boolean" +}, "serviceAccount": { "description": "Required. The name of the service account used for Cloud Build and Cloud Run. Should have the role roles/firebaseapphosting.computeRunner or equivalent permissions.", "type": "string" @@ -1332,6 +1363,10 @@ "description": "The source for the build.", "id": "BuildSource", "properties": { +"archive": { +"$ref": "ArchiveSource", +"description": "An archive source." +}, "codebase": { "$ref": "CodebaseSource", "description": "A codebase source." @@ -2331,7 +2366,7 @@ "type": "object" }, "build": { -"description": "Immutable. The name of a build that already exists. It doesn't have to be built; a rollout will wait for a build to be ready before updating traffic.", +"description": "Required. Immutable. The name of a build that already exists. It doesn't have to be built; a rollout will wait for a build to be ready before updating traffic.", "type": "string" }, "createTime": { @@ -2490,6 +2525,28 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"SourceUserMetadata": { +"description": "Metadata for the user who started the build.", +"id": "SourceUserMetadata", +"properties": { +"displayName": { +"description": "Output only. The user-chosen displayname. May be empty.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"email": { +"description": "Output only. The account email linked to the EUC that created the build. May be a service account or other robot account.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"imageUri": { +"description": "Output only. The URI of a profile photo associated with the user who created the build.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "Status": { "description": "The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors).", "id": "Status", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseapphosting.v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseapphosting.v1beta.json index ab34ac0a023..93160efb37c 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseapphosting.v1beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseapphosting.v1beta.json @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -1098,7 +1098,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250814", +"revision": "20250904", "rootUrl": "https://firebaseapphosting.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "ArchiveSource": { @@ -2385,7 +2385,7 @@ "type": "object" }, "build": { -"description": "Immutable. The name of a build that already exists. It doesn't have to be built; a rollout will wait for a build to be ready before updating traffic.", +"description": "Required. Immutable. The name of a build that already exists. It doesn't have to be built; a rollout will wait for a build to be ready before updating traffic.", "type": "string" }, "createTime": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasedataconnect.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasedataconnect.v1.json index 92e4cbf9a87..0d0274c2d76 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasedataconnect.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasedataconnect.v1.json @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -482,6 +482,34 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" ] }, +"introspectGraphql": { +"description": "Execute introspection query against the Firebase Data Connect's generated GraphQL schema. GraphQL introspection query provides metadata such as what tables the schema have, what queries and mutations can be performed on the schema, and so on. Read more at https://graphql.org/learn/introspection. IntrospectGraphql can read schema metadata but cannot read rows from Cloud SQL instance, which can be done via ExecuteGraphqlRead.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/services/{servicesId}:introspectGraphql", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "firebasedataconnect.projects.locations.services.introspectGraphql", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. The relative resource name of Firebase Data Connect service, in the format: ``` projects/{project}/locations/{location}/services/{service} ```", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/services/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}:introspectGraphql", +"request": { +"$ref": "GraphqlRequest" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "GraphqlResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, "list": { "description": "Lists Services in a given project and location.", "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/services", @@ -755,6 +783,62 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" ] }, +"impersonateMutation": { +"description": "Impersonate a mutation defined on a Firebase Data Connect connector. It grants the admin SDK access to mutations defined in the given connector. The caller can choose to impersonate a particular Firebase Auth user, or skip @auth completely.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/services/{servicesId}/connectors/{connectorsId}:impersonateMutation", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "firebasedataconnect.projects.locations.services.connectors.impersonateMutation", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. The resource name of the connector to find the predefined query/mutation, in the format: ``` projects/{project}/locations/{location}/services/{service}/connectors/{connector} ```", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/services/[^/]+/connectors/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}:impersonateMutation", +"request": { +"$ref": "ImpersonateRequest" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "GraphqlResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"impersonateQuery": { +"description": "Impersonate a query defined on a Firebase Data Connect connector. It grants the admin SDK access to queries defined in the given connector. The caller can choose to impersonate a particular Firebase Auth user, or skip @auth completely.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/services/{servicesId}/connectors/{connectorsId}:impersonateQuery", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "firebasedataconnect.projects.locations.services.connectors.impersonateQuery", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. The resource name of the connector to find the predefined query/mutation, in the format: ``` projects/{project}/locations/{location}/services/{service}/connectors/{connector} ```", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/services/[^/]+/connectors/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}:impersonateQuery", +"request": { +"$ref": "ImpersonateRequest" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "GraphqlResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, "list": { "description": "Lists Connectors in a given project and location.", "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/services/{servicesId}/connectors", @@ -1076,7 +1160,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250824", +"revision": "20250907", "rootUrl": "https://firebasedataconnect.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "CancelOperationRequest": { @@ -1420,6 +1504,29 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"ImpersonateRequest": { +"description": "The Impersonate request to Firebase Data Connect.", +"id": "ImpersonateRequest", +"properties": { +"extensions": { +"$ref": "GraphqlRequestExtensions", +"description": "Optional. Additional GraphQL request information." +}, +"operationName": { +"description": "Required. The name of the GraphQL operation name. Required because all Connector operations must be named. See https://graphql.org/learn/queries/#operation-name.", +"type": "string" +}, +"variables": { +"additionalProperties": { +"description": "Properties of the object.", +"type": "any" +}, +"description": "Optional. Values for GraphQL variables provided in this request.", +"type": "object" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "Impersonation": { "description": "Impersonation configures the Firebase Auth context to impersonate.", "id": "Impersonation", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasedataconnect.v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasedataconnect.v1beta.json index 6e5be92590a..fb04ff1d287 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasedataconnect.v1beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasedataconnect.v1beta.json @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -482,6 +482,34 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" ] }, +"introspectGraphql": { +"description": "Execute introspection query against the Firebase Data Connect's generated GraphQL schema. GraphQL introspection query provides metadata such as what tables the schema have, what queries and mutations can be performed on the schema, and so on. Read more at https://graphql.org/learn/introspection. IntrospectGraphql can read schema metadata but cannot read rows from Cloud SQL instance, which can be done via ExecuteGraphqlRead.", +"flatPath": "v1beta/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/services/{servicesId}:introspectGraphql", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "firebasedataconnect.projects.locations.services.introspectGraphql", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. The relative resource name of Firebase Data Connect service, in the format: ``` projects/{project}/locations/{location}/services/{service} ```", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/services/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1beta/{+name}:introspectGraphql", +"request": { +"$ref": "GraphqlRequest" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "GraphqlResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, "list": { "description": "Lists Services in a given project and location.", "flatPath": "v1beta/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/services", @@ -755,6 +783,62 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" ] }, +"impersonateMutation": { +"description": "Impersonate a mutation defined on a Firebase Data Connect connector. It grants the admin SDK access to mutations defined in the given connector. The caller can choose to impersonate a particular Firebase Auth user, or skip @auth completely.", +"flatPath": "v1beta/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/services/{servicesId}/connectors/{connectorsId}:impersonateMutation", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "firebasedataconnect.projects.locations.services.connectors.impersonateMutation", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. The resource name of the connector to find the predefined query/mutation, in the format: ``` projects/{project}/locations/{location}/services/{service}/connectors/{connector} ```", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/services/[^/]+/connectors/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1beta/{+name}:impersonateMutation", +"request": { +"$ref": "ImpersonateRequest" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "GraphqlResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"impersonateQuery": { +"description": "Impersonate a query defined on a Firebase Data Connect connector. It grants the admin SDK access to queries defined in the given connector. The caller can choose to impersonate a particular Firebase Auth user, or skip @auth completely.", +"flatPath": "v1beta/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/services/{servicesId}/connectors/{connectorsId}:impersonateQuery", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "firebasedataconnect.projects.locations.services.connectors.impersonateQuery", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. The resource name of the connector to find the predefined query/mutation, in the format: ``` projects/{project}/locations/{location}/services/{service}/connectors/{connector} ```", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/services/[^/]+/connectors/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1beta/{+name}:impersonateQuery", +"request": { +"$ref": "ImpersonateRequest" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "GraphqlResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, "list": { "description": "Lists Connectors in a given project and location.", "flatPath": "v1beta/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/services/{servicesId}/connectors", @@ -1076,7 +1160,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250824", +"revision": "20250907", "rootUrl": "https://firebasedataconnect.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "CancelOperationRequest": { @@ -1420,6 +1504,29 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"ImpersonateRequest": { +"description": "The Impersonate request to Firebase Data Connect.", +"id": "ImpersonateRequest", +"properties": { +"extensions": { +"$ref": "GraphqlRequestExtensions", +"description": "Optional. Additional GraphQL request information." +}, +"operationName": { +"description": "Required. The name of the GraphQL operation name. Required because all Connector operations must be named. See https://graphql.org/learn/queries/#operation-name.", +"type": "string" +}, +"variables": { +"additionalProperties": { +"description": "Properties of the object.", +"type": "any" +}, +"description": "Optional. Values for GraphQL variables provided in this request.", +"type": "object" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "Impersonation": { "description": "Impersonation configures the Firebase Auth context to impersonate.", "id": "Impersonation", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseml.v2beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseml.v2beta.json index b5cd97152df..934e4862361 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseml.v2beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseml.v2beta.json @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250827", +"revision": "20250909", "rootUrl": "https://firebaseml.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Date": { @@ -844,7 +844,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "name": { -"description": "Required. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name].", +"description": "Optional. The name of the function to call. Matches [FunctionDeclaration.name].", "type": "string" } }, @@ -1032,11 +1032,11 @@ "type": "object" }, "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1GenerateContentResponsePromptFeedback": { -"description": "Content filter results for a prompt sent in the request.", +"description": "Content filter results for a prompt sent in the request. Note: This is sent only in the first stream chunk and only if no candidates were generated due to content violations.", "id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1GenerateContentResponsePromptFeedback", "properties": { "blockReason": { -"description": "Output only. Blocked reason.", +"description": "Output only. The reason why the prompt was blocked.", "enum": [ "BLOCKED_REASON_UNSPECIFIED", "SAFETY", @@ -1047,24 +1047,24 @@ "IMAGE_SAFETY" ], "enumDescriptions": [ -"Unspecified blocked reason.", -"Candidates blocked due to safety.", -"Candidates blocked due to other reason.", -"Candidates blocked due to the terms which are included from the terminology blocklist.", -"Candidates blocked due to prohibited content.", -"The user prompt was blocked by Model Armor.", -"Candidates blocked due to unsafe image generation content." +"The blocked reason is unspecified.", +"The prompt was blocked for safety reasons.", +"The prompt was blocked for other reasons. For example, it may be due to the prompt's language, or because it contains other harmful content.", +"The prompt was blocked because it contains a term from the terminology blocklist.", +"The prompt was blocked because it contains prohibited content.", +"The prompt was blocked by Model Armor.", +"The prompt was blocked because it contains content that is unsafe for image generation." ], "readOnly": true, "type": "string" }, "blockReasonMessage": { -"description": "Output only. A readable block reason message.", +"description": "Output only. A readable message that explains the reason why the prompt was blocked.", "readOnly": true, "type": "string" }, "safetyRatings": { -"description": "Output only. Safety ratings.", +"description": "Output only. A list of safety ratings for the prompt. There is one rating per category.", "items": { "$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1SafetyRating" }, @@ -1075,11 +1075,11 @@ "type": "object" }, "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1GenerateContentResponseUsageMetadata": { -"description": "Usage metadata about response(s).", +"description": "Usage metadata about the content generation request and response. This message provides a detailed breakdown of token usage and other relevant metrics.", "id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1GenerateContentResponseUsageMetadata", "properties": { "cacheTokensDetails": { -"description": "Output only. List of modalities of the cached content in the request input.", +"description": "Output only. A detailed breakdown of the token count for each modality in the cached content.", "items": { "$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1ModalityTokenCount" }, @@ -1087,18 +1087,18 @@ "type": "array" }, "cachedContentTokenCount": { -"description": "Output only. Number of tokens in the cached part in the input (the cached content).", +"description": "Output only. The number of tokens in the cached content that was used for this request.", "format": "int32", "readOnly": true, "type": "integer" }, "candidatesTokenCount": { -"description": "Number of tokens in the response(s).", +"description": "The total number of tokens in the generated candidates.", "format": "int32", "type": "integer" }, "candidatesTokensDetails": { -"description": "Output only. List of modalities that were returned in the response.", +"description": "Output only. A detailed breakdown of the token count for each modality in the generated candidates.", "items": { "$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1ModalityTokenCount" }, @@ -1106,12 +1106,12 @@ "type": "array" }, "promptTokenCount": { -"description": "Number of tokens in the request. When `cached_content` is set, this is still the total effective prompt size meaning this includes the number of tokens in the cached content.", +"description": "The total number of tokens in the prompt. This includes any text, images, or other media provided in the request. When `cached_content` is set, this also includes the number of tokens in the cached content.", "format": "int32", "type": "integer" }, "promptTokensDetails": { -"description": "Output only. List of modalities that were processed in the request input.", +"description": "Output only. A detailed breakdown of the token count for each modality in the prompt.", "items": { "$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1ModalityTokenCount" }, @@ -1119,19 +1119,19 @@ "type": "array" }, "thoughtsTokenCount": { -"description": "Output only. Number of tokens present in thoughts output.", +"description": "Output only. The number of tokens that were part of the model's generated \"thoughts\" output, if applicable.", "format": "int32", "readOnly": true, "type": "integer" }, "toolUsePromptTokenCount": { -"description": "Output only. Number of tokens present in tool-use prompt(s).", +"description": "Output only. The number of tokens in the results from tool executions, which are provided back to the model as input, if applicable.", "format": "int32", "readOnly": true, "type": "integer" }, "toolUsePromptTokensDetails": { -"description": "Output only. List of modalities that were processed for tool-use request inputs.", +"description": "Output only. A detailed breakdown by modality of the token counts from the results of tool executions, which are provided back to the model as input.", "items": { "$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1ModalityTokenCount" }, @@ -1139,12 +1139,12 @@ "type": "array" }, "totalTokenCount": { -"description": "Total token count for prompt, response candidates, and tool-use prompts (if present).", +"description": "The total number of tokens for the entire request. This is the sum of `prompt_token_count`, `candidates_token_count`, `tool_use_prompt_token_count`, and `thoughts_token_count`.", "format": "int32", "type": "integer" }, "trafficType": { -"description": "Output only. Traffic type. This shows whether a request consumes Pay-As-You-Go or Provisioned Throughput quota.", +"description": "Output only. The traffic type for this request.", "enum": [ "TRAFFIC_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED", "ON_DEMAND", @@ -1152,7 +1152,7 @@ ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Unspecified request traffic type.", -"Type for Pay-As-You-Go traffic.", +"The request was processed using Pay-As-You-Go quota.", "Type for Provisioned Throughput traffic." ], "readOnly": true, @@ -1211,6 +1211,7 @@ }, "modelConfig": { "$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1GenerationConfigModelConfig", +"deprecated": true, "description": "Optional. Config for model selection." }, "presencePenalty": { @@ -1386,7 +1387,12 @@ "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1GoogleMaps": { "description": "Tool to retrieve public maps data for grounding, powered by Google.", "id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1GoogleMaps", -"properties": {}, +"properties": { +"enableWidget": { +"description": "Optional. If true, include the widget context token in the response.", +"type": "boolean" +} +}, "type": "object" }, "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1GoogleSearchRetrieval": { @@ -1432,15 +1438,15 @@ "type": "string" }, "text": { -"description": "Text of the chunk.", +"description": "Text of the place answer.", "type": "string" }, "title": { -"description": "Title of the chunk.", +"description": "Title of the place.", "type": "string" }, "uri": { -"description": "URI reference of the chunk.", +"description": "URI reference of the place.", "type": "string" } }, @@ -1450,10 +1456,6 @@ "description": "Sources used to generate the place answer.", "id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1GroundingChunkMapsPlaceAnswerSources", "properties": { -"flagContentUri": { -"description": "A link where users can flag a problem with the generated answer.", -"type": "string" -}, "reviewSnippets": { "description": "Snippets of reviews that are used to generate the answer.", "items": { @@ -1464,47 +1466,20 @@ }, "type": "object" }, -"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1GroundingChunkMapsPlaceAnswerSourcesAuthorAttribution": { -"description": "Author attribution for a photo or review.", -"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1GroundingChunkMapsPlaceAnswerSourcesAuthorAttribution", -"properties": { -"displayName": { -"description": "Name of the author of the Photo or Review.", -"type": "string" -}, -"photoUri": { -"description": "Profile photo URI of the author of the Photo or Review.", -"type": "string" -}, -"uri": { -"description": "URI of the author of the Photo or Review.", -"type": "string" -} -}, -"type": "object" -}, "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1GroundingChunkMapsPlaceAnswerSourcesReviewSnippet": { "description": "Encapsulates a review snippet.", "id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1GroundingChunkMapsPlaceAnswerSourcesReviewSnippet", "properties": { -"authorAttribution": { -"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1GroundingChunkMapsPlaceAnswerSourcesAuthorAttribution", -"description": "This review's author." -}, -"flagContentUri": { -"description": "A link where users can flag a problem with the review.", -"type": "string" -}, "googleMapsUri": { "description": "A link to show the review on Google Maps.", "type": "string" }, -"relativePublishTimeDescription": { -"description": "A string of formatted recent time, expressing the review time relative to the current time in a form appropriate for the language and country.", +"reviewId": { +"description": "Id of the review referencing the place.", "type": "string" }, -"review": { -"description": "A reference representing this place review which may be used to look up this place review again.", +"title": { +"description": "Title of the review.", "type": "string" } }, @@ -1596,6 +1571,14 @@ "$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1SearchEntryPoint", "description": "Optional. Google search entry for the following-up web searches." }, +"sourceFlaggingUris": { +"description": "Optional. Output only. List of source flagging uris. This is currently populated only for Google Maps grounding.", +"items": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1GroundingMetadataSourceFlaggingUri" +}, +"readOnly": true, +"type": "array" +}, "webSearchQueries": { "description": "Optional. Web search queries for the following-up web search.", "items": { @@ -1606,6 +1589,21 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1GroundingMetadataSourceFlaggingUri": { +"description": "Source content flagging uri for a place or review. This is currently populated only for Google Maps grounding.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1GroundingMetadataSourceFlaggingUri", +"properties": { +"flagContentUri": { +"description": "A link where users can flag a problem with the source (place or review).", +"type": "string" +}, +"sourceId": { +"description": "Id of the place or review.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1GroundingSupport": { "description": "Grounding support.", "id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1GroundingSupport", @@ -2420,7 +2418,8 @@ false }, "googleSearchRetrieval": { "$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1GoogleSearchRetrieval", -"description": "Optional. GoogleSearchRetrieval tool type. Specialized retrieval tool that is powered by Google search." +"deprecated": true, +"description": "Optional. Specialized retrieval tool that is powered by Google Search." }, "retrieval": { "$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1Retrieval", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firestore.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firestore.v1.json index 267d133ceed..afbbad26fcc 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firestore.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firestore.v1.json @@ -23,6 +23,11 @@ "description": "Regional Endpoint", "endpointUrl": "https://firestore.us-east7.rep.googleapis.com/", "location": "us-east7" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://batch-firestore.us-east7.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "us-east7" } ], "fullyEncodeReservedExpansion": true, @@ -187,7 +192,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "databaseId": { -"description": "Required. The ID to use for the database, which will become the final component of the database's resource name. This value should be 4-63 characters. Valid characters are /a-z-/ with first character a letter and the last a letter or a number. Must not be UUID-like /[0-9a-f]{8}(-[0-9a-f]{4}){3}-[0-9a-f]{12}/. \"(default)\" database ID is also valid.", +"description": "Required. The ID to use for the database, which will become the final component of the database's resource name. This value should be 4-63 characters. Valid characters are /a-z-/ with first character a letter and the last a letter or a number. Must not be UUID-like /[0-9a-f]{8}(-[0-9a-f]{4}){3}-[0-9a-f]{12}/. \"(default)\" database ID is also valid if the database is Standard edition.", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, @@ -1824,7 +1829,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. A list of extra location types that should be used as conditions for controlling the visibility of the locations.", +"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -1956,7 +1961,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250811", +"revision": "20250830", "rootUrl": "https://firestore.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Aggregation": { @@ -2933,7 +2938,7 @@ "id": "GoogleFirestoreAdminV1CloneDatabaseRequest", "properties": { "databaseId": { -"description": "Required. The ID to use for the database, which will become the final component of the database's resource name. This database ID must not be associated with an existing database. This value should be 4-63 characters. Valid characters are /a-z-/ with first character a letter and the last a letter or a number. Must not be UUID-like /[0-9a-f]{8}(-[0-9a-f]{4}){3}-[0-9a-f]{12}/. \"(default)\" database ID is also valid.", +"description": "Required. The ID to use for the database, which will become the final component of the database's resource name. This database ID must not be associated with an existing database. This value should be 4-63 characters. Valid characters are /a-z-/ with first character a letter and the last a letter or a number. Must not be UUID-like /[0-9a-f]{8}(-[0-9a-f]{4}){3}-[0-9a-f]{12}/. \"(default)\" database ID is also valid if the database is Standard edition.", "type": "string" }, "encryptionConfig": { @@ -3532,9 +3537,9 @@ ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Unspecified. It will use database default setting. This value is input only.", -"In order for an index entry to be added, the document must contain all fields specified in the index. This is the only allowed value for indexes having ApiScope `ANY_API` and `DATASTORE_MODE_API`.", -"In order for an index entry to be added, the document must contain at least one of the fields specified in the index. Non-existent fields are treated as having a NULL value when generating index entries.", -"An index entry will be added regardless of whether the document contains any of the fields specified in the index. Non-existent fields are treated as having a NULL value when generating index entries." +"An index entry will only exist if ALL fields are present in the document. This is both the default and only allowed value for Standard Edition databases (for both Cloud Firestore `ANY_API` and Cloud Datastore `DATASTORE_MODE_API`). Take for example the following document: ``` { \"__name__\": \"...\", \"a\": 1, \"b\": 2, \"c\": 3 } ``` an index on `(a ASC, b ASC, c ASC, __name__ ASC)` will generate an index entry for this document since `a`, 'b', `c`, and `__name__` are all present but an index of `(a ASC, d ASC, __name__ ASC)` will not generate an index entry for this document since `d` is missing. This means that such indexes can only be used to serve a query when the query has either implicit or explicit requirements that all fields from the index are present.", +"An index entry will exist if ANY field are present in the document. This is used as the definition of a sparse index for Enterprise Edition databases. Take for example the following document: ``` { \"__name__\": \"...\", \"a\": 1, \"b\": 2, \"c\": 3 } ``` an index on `(a ASC, d ASC)` will generate an index entry for this document since `a` is present, and will fill in an `unset` value for `d`. An index on `(d ASC, e ASC)` will not generate any index entry as neither `d` nor `e` are present. An index that contains `__name__` will generate an index entry for all documents since Firestore guarantees that all documents have a `__name__` field.", +"An index entry will exist regardless of if the fields are present or not. This is the default density for an Enterprise Edition database. The index will store `unset` values for fields that are not present in the document." ], "type": "string" }, @@ -3973,7 +3978,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "databaseId": { -"description": "Required. The ID to use for the database, which will become the final component of the database's resource name. This database ID must not be associated with an existing database. This value should be 4-63 characters. Valid characters are /a-z-/ with first character a letter and the last a letter or a number. Must not be UUID-like /[0-9a-f]{8}(-[0-9a-f]{4}){3}-[0-9a-f]{12}/. \"(default)\" database ID is also valid.", +"description": "Required. The ID to use for the database, which will become the final component of the database's resource name. This database ID must not be associated with an existing database. This value should be 4-63 characters. Valid characters are /a-z-/ with first character a letter and the last a letter or a number. Must not be UUID-like /[0-9a-f]{8}(-[0-9a-f]{4}){3}-[0-9a-f]{12}/. \"(default)\" database ID is also valid if the database is Standard edition.", "type": "string" }, "encryptionConfig": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firestore.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firestore.v1beta1.json index 29a97441f06..174c775b828 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firestore.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firestore.v1beta1.json @@ -23,6 +23,11 @@ "description": "Regional Endpoint", "endpointUrl": "https://firestore.us-east7.rep.googleapis.com/", "location": "us-east7" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://batch-firestore.us-east7.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "us-east7" } ], "fullyEncodeReservedExpansion": true, @@ -957,7 +962,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250811", +"revision": "20250830", "rootUrl": "https://firestore.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Aggregation": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firestore.v1beta2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firestore.v1beta2.json index 8f794cbbd81..b835cdbb170 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firestore.v1beta2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firestore.v1beta2.json @@ -23,6 +23,11 @@ "description": "Regional Endpoint", "endpointUrl": "https://firestore.us-east7.rep.googleapis.com/", "location": "us-east7" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://batch-firestore.us-east7.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "us-east7" } ], "fullyEncodeReservedExpansion": true, @@ -422,7 +427,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250811", +"revision": "20250830", "rootUrl": "https://firestore.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Empty": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkehub.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkehub.v1.json index 2d77fb0022f..cbed262da8b 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkehub.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkehub.v1.json @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -2117,7 +2117,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250815", +"revision": "20250907", "rootUrl": "https://gkehub.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AppDevExperienceFeatureSpec": { @@ -2510,8 +2510,7 @@ "IN_PROGRESS", "SOAKING", "FORCED_SOAKING", -"COMPLETE", -"FORCED_COMPLETE" +"COMPLETE" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Required by https://linter.aip.dev/126/unspecified.", @@ -2520,8 +2519,7 @@ "The upgrade is in progress. At the scope level, this means the upgrade is in progress for at least one cluster in the scope.", "The upgrade has finished and is soaking until the soaking time is up. At the scope level, this means at least one cluster is in soaking while the rest are either soaking or complete.", "A cluster will be forced to enter soaking if an upgrade doesn't finish within a certain limit, despite it's actual status.", -"The upgrade has passed all post conditions (soaking). At the scope level, this means all eligible clusters are in COMPLETE status.", -"The upgrade was forced into soaking and the soaking time has passed. This is the equivalent of COMPLETE status for upgrades that were forced into soaking." +"The upgrade has passed all post conditions (soaking). At the scope level, this means all eligible clusters are in COMPLETE status." ], "type": "string" }, @@ -6083,8 +6081,12 @@ "description": "Optional. The Connect agent version to use for connect_resources. Defaults to the latest GKE Connect version. The version must be a currently supported version, obsolete versions will be rejected.", "type": "string" }, +"k8sGitVersion": { +"description": "Optional. Git version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to gate the Connect Agent migration to svc.id.goog on GDC-SO 1.33.100 patch and above.", +"type": "string" +}, "k8sVersion": { -"description": "Optional. Major version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`.", +"description": "Optional. Major and minor version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`.", "type": "string" }, "v1beta1Crd": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkehub.v1alpha.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkehub.v1alpha.json index f074568e40a..6f4ff5e06f7 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkehub.v1alpha.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkehub.v1alpha.json @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -2261,7 +2261,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250815", +"revision": "20250907", "rootUrl": "https://gkehub.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AppDevExperienceFeatureSpec": { @@ -2750,8 +2750,7 @@ "IN_PROGRESS", "SOAKING", "FORCED_SOAKING", -"COMPLETE", -"FORCED_COMPLETE" +"COMPLETE" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Required by https://linter.aip.dev/126/unspecified.", @@ -2760,8 +2759,7 @@ "The upgrade is in progress. At the scope level, this means the upgrade is in progress for at least one cluster in the scope.", "The upgrade has finished and is soaking until the soaking time is up. At the scope level, this means at least one cluster is in soaking while the rest are either soaking or complete.", "A cluster will be forced to enter soaking if an upgrade doesn't finish within a certain limit, despite it's actual status.", -"The upgrade has passed all post conditions (soaking). At the scope level, this means all eligible clusters are in COMPLETE status.", -"The upgrade was forced into soaking and the soaking time has passed. This is the equivalent of COMPLETE status for upgrades that were forced into soaking." +"The upgrade has passed all post conditions (soaking). At the scope level, this means all eligible clusters are in COMPLETE status." ], "type": "string" }, @@ -6597,8 +6595,12 @@ "description": "Optional. The Connect agent version to use for connect_resources. Defaults to the latest GKE Connect version. The version must be a currently supported version, obsolete versions will be rejected.", "type": "string" }, +"k8sGitVersion": { +"description": "Optional. Git version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to gate the Connect Agent migration to svc.id.goog on GDC-SO 1.33.100 patch and above.", +"type": "string" +}, "k8sVersion": { -"description": "Optional. Major version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`.", +"description": "Optional. Major and minor version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`.", "type": "string" }, "v1beta1Crd": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkehub.v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkehub.v1beta.json index 5e40de2f383..6fc105c3d4d 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkehub.v1beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkehub.v1beta.json @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -2117,7 +2117,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250815", +"revision": "20250907", "rootUrl": "https://gkehub.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AppDevExperienceFeatureSpec": { @@ -2510,8 +2510,7 @@ "IN_PROGRESS", "SOAKING", "FORCED_SOAKING", -"COMPLETE", -"FORCED_COMPLETE" +"COMPLETE" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Required by https://linter.aip.dev/126/unspecified.", @@ -2520,8 +2519,7 @@ "The upgrade is in progress. At the scope level, this means the upgrade is in progress for at least one cluster in the scope.", "The upgrade has finished and is soaking until the soaking time is up. At the scope level, this means at least one cluster is in soaking while the rest are either soaking or complete.", "A cluster will be forced to enter soaking if an upgrade doesn't finish within a certain limit, despite it's actual status.", -"The upgrade has passed all post conditions (soaking). At the scope level, this means all eligible clusters are in COMPLETE status.", -"The upgrade was forced into soaking and the soaking time has passed. This is the equivalent of COMPLETE status for upgrades that were forced into soaking." +"The upgrade has passed all post conditions (soaking). At the scope level, this means all eligible clusters are in COMPLETE status." ], "type": "string" }, @@ -6209,8 +6207,12 @@ "description": "Optional. The Connect agent version to use for connect_resources. Defaults to the latest GKE Connect version. The version must be a currently supported version, obsolete versions will be rejected.", "type": "string" }, +"k8sGitVersion": { +"description": "Optional. Git version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to gate the Connect Agent migration to svc.id.goog on GDC-SO 1.33.100 patch and above.", +"type": "string" +}, "k8sVersion": { -"description": "Optional. Major version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`.", +"description": "Optional. Major and minor version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`.", "type": "string" }, "v1beta1Crd": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkehub.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkehub.v1beta1.json index b1bf0156a16..d094898a927 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkehub.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkehub.v1beta1.json @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -718,7 +718,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250815", +"revision": "20250907", "rootUrl": "https://gkehub.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "ApplianceCluster": { @@ -1527,8 +1527,12 @@ "description": "Optional. The Connect agent version to use for connect_resources. Defaults to the latest GKE Connect version. The version must be a currently supported version, obsolete versions will be rejected.", "type": "string" }, +"k8sGitVersion": { +"description": "Optional. Git version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to gate the Connect Agent migration to svc.id.goog on GDC-SO 1.33.100 patch and above.", +"type": "string" +}, "k8sVersion": { -"description": "Optional. Major version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`.", +"description": "Optional. Major and minor version of the Kubernetes cluster. This is only used to determine which version to use for the CustomResourceDefinition resources, `apiextensions/v1beta1` or`apiextensions/v1`.", "type": "string" }, "v1beta1Crd": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkehub.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkehub.v2.json index 053d153a287..6abd3ae13f5 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkehub.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkehub.v2.json @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -477,7 +477,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250815", +"revision": "20250907", "rootUrl": "https://gkehub.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AppDevExperienceState": { @@ -626,8 +626,7 @@ "IN_PROGRESS", "SOAKING", "FORCED_SOAKING", -"COMPLETE", -"FORCED_COMPLETE" +"COMPLETE" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Required by https://linter.aip.dev/126/unspecified.", @@ -636,8 +635,7 @@ "The upgrade is in progress. At the scope level, this means the upgrade is in progress for at least one cluster in the scope.", "The upgrade has finished and is soaking until the soaking time is up. At the scope level, this means at least one cluster is in soaking while the rest are either soaking or complete.", "A cluster will be forced to enter soaking if an upgrade doesn't finish within a certain limit, despite it's actual status.", -"The upgrade has passed all post conditions (soaking). At the scope level, this means all eligible clusters are in COMPLETE status.", -"The upgrade was forced into soaking and the soaking time has passed. This is the equivalent of COMPLETE status for upgrades that were forced into soaking." +"The upgrade has passed all post conditions (soaking). At the scope level, this means all eligible clusters are in COMPLETE status." ], "type": "string" }, diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkehub.v2alpha.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkehub.v2alpha.json index ddd4fc98f76..20be31722bc 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkehub.v2alpha.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkehub.v2alpha.json @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -477,7 +477,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250815", +"revision": "20250907", "rootUrl": "https://gkehub.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AppDevExperienceState": { @@ -626,8 +626,7 @@ "IN_PROGRESS", "SOAKING", "FORCED_SOAKING", -"COMPLETE", -"FORCED_COMPLETE" +"COMPLETE" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Required by https://linter.aip.dev/126/unspecified.", @@ -636,8 +635,7 @@ "The upgrade is in progress. At the scope level, this means the upgrade is in progress for at least one cluster in the scope.", "The upgrade has finished and is soaking until the soaking time is up. At the scope level, this means at least one cluster is in soaking while the rest are either soaking or complete.", "A cluster will be forced to enter soaking if an upgrade doesn't finish within a certain limit, despite it's actual status.", -"The upgrade has passed all post conditions (soaking). At the scope level, this means all eligible clusters are in COMPLETE status.", -"The upgrade was forced into soaking and the soaking time has passed. This is the equivalent of COMPLETE status for upgrades that were forced into soaking." +"The upgrade has passed all post conditions (soaking). At the scope level, this means all eligible clusters are in COMPLETE status." ], "type": "string" }, diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkehub.v2beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkehub.v2beta.json index f174715055e..aa0bb9d11e7 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkehub.v2beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkehub.v2beta.json @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -477,7 +477,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250815", +"revision": "20250907", "rootUrl": "https://gkehub.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AppDevExperienceState": { @@ -626,8 +626,7 @@ "IN_PROGRESS", "SOAKING", "FORCED_SOAKING", -"COMPLETE", -"FORCED_COMPLETE" +"COMPLETE" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Required by https://linter.aip.dev/126/unspecified.", @@ -636,8 +635,7 @@ "The upgrade is in progress. At the scope level, this means the upgrade is in progress for at least one cluster in the scope.", "The upgrade has finished and is soaking until the soaking time is up. At the scope level, this means at least one cluster is in soaking while the rest are either soaking or complete.", "A cluster will be forced to enter soaking if an upgrade doesn't finish within a certain limit, despite it's actual status.", -"The upgrade has passed all post conditions (soaking). At the scope level, this means all eligible clusters are in COMPLETE status.", -"The upgrade was forced into soaking and the soaking time has passed. This is the equivalent of COMPLETE status for upgrades that were forced into soaking." +"The upgrade has passed all post conditions (soaking). At the scope level, this means all eligible clusters are in COMPLETE status." ], "type": "string" }, diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkeonprem.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkeonprem.v1.json index cbdf3c9db74..578cfcca108 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkeonprem.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkeonprem.v1.json @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -3105,7 +3105,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250813", +"revision": "20250908", "rootUrl": "https://gkeonprem.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Authorization": { @@ -5695,6 +5695,10 @@ "$ref": "VmwareAdminPrivateRegistryConfig", "description": "Configuration for registry." }, +"proxy": { +"$ref": "VmwareAdminProxy", +"description": "Configuration for proxy." +}, "reconciling": { "description": "Output only. If set, there are currently changes in flight to the VMware admin cluster.", "readOnly": true, @@ -5940,6 +5944,21 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"VmwareAdminProxy": { +"description": "VmwareAdminProxy represents configuration for admin cluster proxy.", +"id": "VmwareAdminProxy", +"properties": { +"noProxy": { +"description": "A comma-separated list of IP addresses, IP address ranges, host names, and domain names that should not go through the proxy server. When Google Distributed Cloud sends a request to one of these addresses, hosts, or domains, the request is sent directly.", +"type": "string" +}, +"url": { +"description": "The HTTP address of proxy server.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "VmwareAdminSeesawConfig": { "description": "VmwareSeesawConfig represents configuration parameters for an already existing Seesaw load balancer. IMPORTANT: Please note that the Anthos On-Prem API will not generate or update Seesaw configurations it can only bind a pre-existing configuration to a new user cluster. IMPORTANT: When attempting to create a user cluster with a pre-existing Seesaw load balancer you will need to follow some preparation steps before calling the 'CreateVmwareCluster' API method. First you will need to create the user cluster's namespace via kubectl. The namespace will need to use the following naming convention : -gke-onprem-mgmt or -gke-onprem-mgmt depending on whether you used the 'VmwareCluster.local_name' to disambiguate collisions; for more context see the documentation of 'VmwareCluster.local_name'. Once the namespace is created you will need to create a secret resource via kubectl. This secret will contain copies of your Seesaw credentials. The Secret must be called 'user-cluster-creds' and contain Seesaw's SSH and Cert credentials. The credentials must be keyed with the following names: 'seesaw-ssh-private-key', 'seesaw-ssh-public-key', 'seesaw-ssh-ca-key', 'seesaw-ssh-ca-cert'.", "id": "VmwareAdminSeesawConfig", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/groupsmigration.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/groupsmigration.v1.json index b37910d5831..46b02e8c374 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/groupsmigration.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/groupsmigration.v1.json @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20240701", +"revision": "20250901", "rootUrl": "https://groupsmigration.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Groups": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/healthcare.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/healthcare.v1.json index 537c2813d5b..7ddf695c1a0 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/healthcare.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/healthcare.v1.json @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. A list of extra location types that should be used as conditions for controlling the visibility of the locations.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -4198,7 +4198,7 @@ ] }, "search": { -"description": "Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` \"next\", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).", +"description": "Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` \"next\", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).", "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/_search", "httpMethod": "POST", "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.search", @@ -4227,7 +4227,7 @@ ] }, "search-type": { -"description": "Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` \"next\", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).", +"description": "Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` \"next\", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).", "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/{resourceType}/_search", "httpMethod": "POST", "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.search-type", @@ -5132,7 +5132,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250724", +"revision": "20250904", "rootUrl": "https://healthcare.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AccessDeterminationLogConfig": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/healthcare.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/healthcare.v1beta1.json index 491ca126b66..aa9311f9d88 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/healthcare.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/healthcare.v1beta1.json @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. A list of extra location types that should be used as conditions for controlling the visibility of the locations.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -2246,6 +2246,43 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-healthcare", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" ] +}, +"updateInstances": { +"description": "UpdateInstances updates DICOM instances associated with study instance unique identifiers (SUID).", +"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/dicomStores/{dicomStoresId}/dicomWeb/studies", +"httpMethod": "PUT", +"id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.dicomStores.updateInstances", +"parameterOrder": [ +"parent", +"dicomWebPath" +], +"parameters": { +"dicomWebPath": { +"description": "Required. The path of the UpdateInstances DICOMweb request. For example, `studies/[{study_uid}]`. Note that the `study_uid` is optional.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^studies$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"parent": { +"description": "Required. The name of the DICOM store that is being accessed. For example, `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/dicomStores/{dicom_store_id}`.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/datasets/[^/]+/dicomStores/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1beta1/{+parent}/dicomWeb/{+dicomWebPath}", +"request": { +"$ref": "HttpBody" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "HttpBody" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-healthcare", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] } }, "resources": { @@ -2583,6 +2620,80 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-healthcare", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" ] +}, +"updateInstances": { +"description": "UpdateInstances updates DICOM instances associated with study instance unique identifiers (SUID).", +"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/dicomStores/{dicomStoresId}/dicomWeb/studies/{studiesId}", +"httpMethod": "PUT", +"id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.dicomStores.studies.updateInstances", +"parameterOrder": [ +"parent", +"dicomWebPath" +], +"parameters": { +"dicomWebPath": { +"description": "Required. The path of the UpdateInstances DICOMweb request. For example, `studies/[{study_uid}]`. Note that the `study_uid` is optional.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^studies/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"parent": { +"description": "Required. The name of the DICOM store that is being accessed. For example, `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/dicomStores/{dicom_store_id}`.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/datasets/[^/]+/dicomStores/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1beta1/{+parent}/dicomWeb/{+dicomWebPath}", +"request": { +"$ref": "HttpBody" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "HttpBody" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-healthcare", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"updateMetadata": { +"description": "UpdateStudyMetadata modifies the metadata of all instances in the given study. The request body must contain a JSON Patch document specifying the updates to be applied to the metadata of all instances within the study.", +"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/dicomStores/{dicomStoresId}/dicomWeb/studies/{studiesId}/metadata", +"httpMethod": "PATCH", +"id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.dicomStores.studies.updateMetadata", +"parameterOrder": [ +"parent", +"dicomWebPath" +], +"parameters": { +"dicomWebPath": { +"description": "Required. The path of the UpdateStudyMetadata request (for example, `studies/{study_uid}`).", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^studies/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"parent": { +"description": "Required. The name of the DICOM store that is being accessed (for example, `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/dicomStores/{dicom_store_id}`).", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/datasets/[^/]+/dicomStores/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1beta1/{+parent}/dicomWeb/{+dicomWebPath}/metadata", +"request": { +"$ref": "HttpBody" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-healthcare", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] } }, "resources": { @@ -2723,6 +2834,43 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-healthcare", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" ] +}, +"updateMetadata": { +"description": "UpdateSeriesMetadata modifies the metadata of all instances in the given series. The request body must contain a JSON Patch document specifying the updates to be applied to the metadata of all instances within the series.", +"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/dicomStores/{dicomStoresId}/dicomWeb/studies/{studiesId}/series/{seriesId}/metadata", +"httpMethod": "PATCH", +"id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.dicomStores.studies.series.updateMetadata", +"parameterOrder": [ +"parent", +"dicomWebPath" +], +"parameters": { +"dicomWebPath": { +"description": "Required. The path of the UpdateSeriesMetadata request (for example, `studies/{study_uid}/series/{series_uid}`).", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^studies/[^/]+/series/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"parent": { +"description": "Required. The name of the DICOM store that is being accessed (for example, `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/dicomStores/{dicom_store_id}`).", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/datasets/[^/]+/dicomStores/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1beta1/{+parent}/dicomWeb/{+dicomWebPath}/metadata", +"request": { +"$ref": "HttpBody" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-healthcare", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] } }, "resources": { @@ -2868,6 +3016,43 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-healthcare", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" ] +}, +"updateMetadata": { +"description": "UpdateInstanceMetadata modifies the metadata of a single instance. The request body must contain a JSON Patch document specifying the updates to be applied to the metadata of the instance.", +"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/dicomStores/{dicomStoresId}/dicomWeb/studies/{studiesId}/series/{seriesId}/instances/{instancesId}/metadata", +"httpMethod": "PATCH", +"id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.dicomStores.studies.series.instances.updateMetadata", +"parameterOrder": [ +"parent", +"dicomWebPath" +], +"parameters": { +"dicomWebPath": { +"description": "Required. The path of the UpdateInstanceMetadata request (for example, `studies/{study_uid}/series/{series_uid}/instances/{instance_uid}`).", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^studies/[^/]+/series/[^/]+/instances/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"parent": { +"description": "Required. The name of the DICOM store that is being accessed (for example, `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/dicomStores/{dicom_store_id}`).", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/datasets/[^/]+/dicomStores/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1beta1/{+parent}/dicomWeb/{+dicomWebPath}/metadata", +"request": { +"$ref": "HttpBody" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "HttpBody" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-healthcare", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] } }, "resources": { @@ -4507,7 +4692,7 @@ ] }, "search": { -"description": "Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` \"next\", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).", +"description": "Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` \"next\", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).", "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/_search", "httpMethod": "POST", "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.search", @@ -4536,7 +4721,7 @@ ] }, "search-type": { -"description": "Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` \"next\", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).", +"description": "Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` \"next\", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).", "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/{resourceType}/_search", "httpMethod": "POST", "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.search-type", @@ -5494,7 +5679,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250724", +"revision": "20250904", "rootUrl": "https://healthcare.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AccessDeterminationLogConfig": { @@ -7383,7 +7568,7 @@ "type": "boolean" }, "enableHistoryModifications": { -"description": "Optional. Whether to allow ExecuteBundle to accept history bundles, and directly insert and overwrite historical resource versions into the FHIR store. If set to false, using history bundles fails with an error. Defaults to false.", +"description": "Optional. Whether to allow the [ImportResourcesHistory] and [ExecuteBundle] APIs to accept history bundles, and directly insert and overwrite historical resource versions into the FHIR store. Changing resource histories creates resource interactions that have occurred in the past which clients might not allow. If set to false, [ImportResourcesHistory] and [ExecuteBundle] requests will return errors.", "type": "boolean" }, "enableUpdateCreate": { @@ -9789,6 +9974,18 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"UpdateSeriesMetadataResponse": { +"description": "UpdateSeriesMetadataResponse is the LRO response for UpdateSeriesMetadata.", +"id": "UpdateSeriesMetadataResponse", +"properties": {}, +"type": "object" +}, +"UpdateStudyMetadataResponse": { +"description": "UpdateStudyMetadataResponse is the LRO response for UpdateStudyMetadata.", +"id": "UpdateStudyMetadataResponse", +"properties": {}, +"type": "object" +}, "UserDataMapping": { "description": "Maps a resource to the associated user and Attributes.", "id": "UserDataMapping", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/iam.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/iam.v1.json index 8a52bba40dc..c7e27fe8624 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/iam.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/iam.v1.json @@ -4155,7 +4155,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250825", +"revision": "20250905", "rootUrl": "https://iam.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AccessRestrictions": { @@ -6322,7 +6322,7 @@ false "type": "string" }, "expireTime": { -"description": "Output only. Time after which the workload pool provider will be permanently purged and cannot be recovered.", +"description": "Output only. Time after which the workforce identity pool provider will be permanently purged and cannot be recovered.", "format": "google-datetime", "readOnly": true, "type": "string" diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/logging.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/logging.v2.json index 7fa695870a8..1ad16a555d0 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/logging.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/logging.v2.json @@ -30,11 +30,126 @@ "endpoints": [ { "description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://logging.africa-south1.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "africa-south1" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://logging.asia-east1.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "asia-east1" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://logging.asia-east2.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "asia-east2" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://logging.asia-northeast1.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "asia-northeast1" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://logging.asia-northeast2.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "asia-northeast2" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://logging.asia-northeast3.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "asia-northeast3" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://logging.asia-south1.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "asia-south1" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://logging.asia-south2.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "asia-south2" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://logging.asia-southeast1.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "asia-southeast1" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://logging.asia-southeast2.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "asia-southeast2" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://logging.australia-southeast1.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "australia-southeast1" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://logging.australia-southeast2.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "australia-southeast2" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://logging.europe-central2.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "europe-central2" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://logging.europe-north1.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "europe-north1" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://logging.europe-north2.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "europe-north2" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://logging.europe-southwest1.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "europe-southwest1" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://logging.europe-west1.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "europe-west1" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://logging.europe-west10.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "europe-west10" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://logging.europe-west12.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "europe-west12" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://logging.europe-west15.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "europe-west15" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://logging.europe-west2.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "europe-west2" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", "endpointUrl": "https://logging.europe-west3.rep.googleapis.com/", "location": "europe-west3" }, { "description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://logging.europe-west4.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "europe-west4" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://logging.europe-west6.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "europe-west6" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", "endpointUrl": "https://logging.europe-west8.rep.googleapis.com/", "location": "europe-west8" }, @@ -45,11 +160,46 @@ }, { "description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://logging.me-central1.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "me-central1" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", "endpointUrl": "https://logging.me-central2.rep.googleapis.com/", "location": "me-central2" }, { "description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://logging.me-west1.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "me-west1" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://logging.northamerica-northeast1.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "northamerica-northeast1" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://logging.northamerica-northeast2.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "northamerica-northeast2" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://logging.northamerica-south1.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "northamerica-south1" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://logging.southamerica-east1.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "southamerica-east1" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://logging.southamerica-west1.rep.googleapis.com/", +"location": "southamerica-west1" +}, +{ +"description": "Regional Endpoint", "endpointUrl": "https://logging.us-central1.rep.googleapis.com/", "location": "us-central1" }, @@ -470,7 +620,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -2302,7 +2452,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -3066,7 +3216,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "parent": { -"description": "Required. The parent project in which to create the log scope \"projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" For example:\"projects/my-project/locations/global\"", +"description": "Required. The parent resource in which to create the log scope: \"projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" \"organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" \"folders/[FOLDER_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" For example:\"projects/my-project/locations/global\"", "location": "path", "pattern": "^folders/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", "required": true, @@ -3095,7 +3245,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "name": { -"description": "Required. The resource name of the log scope to delete: \"projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/logScopes/[LOG_SCOPE_ID]\" For example:\"projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope\"", +"description": "Required. The resource name of the log scope to delete: \"projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" \"organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" \"folders/[FOLDER_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" For example:\"projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope\"", "location": "path", "pattern": "^folders/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/logScopes/[^/]+$", "required": true, @@ -3121,7 +3271,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "name": { -"description": "Required. The resource name of the log scope: \"projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/logScopes/[LOG_SCOPE_ID]\" For example:\"projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope\"", +"description": "Required. The resource name of the log scope: \"projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" \"organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" \"folders/[FOLDER_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" For example:\"projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope\"", "location": "path", "pattern": "^folders/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/logScopes/[^/]+$", "required": true, @@ -3889,7 +4039,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -5132,7 +5282,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -5896,7 +6046,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "parent": { -"description": "Required. The parent project in which to create the log scope \"projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" For example:\"projects/my-project/locations/global\"", +"description": "Required. The parent resource in which to create the log scope: \"projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" \"organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" \"folders/[FOLDER_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" For example:\"projects/my-project/locations/global\"", "location": "path", "pattern": "^organizations/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", "required": true, @@ -5925,7 +6075,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "name": { -"description": "Required. The resource name of the log scope to delete: \"projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/logScopes/[LOG_SCOPE_ID]\" For example:\"projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope\"", +"description": "Required. The resource name of the log scope to delete: \"projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" \"organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" \"folders/[FOLDER_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" For example:\"projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope\"", "location": "path", "pattern": "^organizations/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/logScopes/[^/]+$", "required": true, @@ -5951,7 +6101,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "name": { -"description": "Required. The resource name of the log scope: \"projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/logScopes/[LOG_SCOPE_ID]\" For example:\"projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope\"", +"description": "Required. The resource name of the log scope: \"projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" \"organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" \"folders/[FOLDER_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" For example:\"projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope\"", "location": "path", "pattern": "^organizations/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/logScopes/[^/]+$", "required": true, @@ -6940,7 +7090,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -7704,7 +7854,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "parent": { -"description": "Required. The parent project in which to create the log scope \"projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" For example:\"projects/my-project/locations/global\"", +"description": "Required. The parent resource in which to create the log scope: \"projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" \"organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" \"folders/[FOLDER_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" For example:\"projects/my-project/locations/global\"", "location": "path", "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", "required": true, @@ -7733,7 +7883,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "name": { -"description": "Required. The resource name of the log scope to delete: \"projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/logScopes/[LOG_SCOPE_ID]\" For example:\"projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope\"", +"description": "Required. The resource name of the log scope to delete: \"projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" \"organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" \"folders/[FOLDER_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" For example:\"projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope\"", "location": "path", "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/logScopes/[^/]+$", "required": true, @@ -7759,7 +7909,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "name": { -"description": "Required. The resource name of the log scope: \"projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/logScopes/[LOG_SCOPE_ID]\" For example:\"projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope\"", +"description": "Required. The resource name of the log scope: \"projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" \"organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" \"folders/[FOLDER_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]\" For example:\"projects/my-project/locations/global/logScopes/my-log-scope\"", "location": "path", "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/logScopes/[^/]+$", "required": true, @@ -8962,7 +9112,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250822", +"revision": "20250905", "rootUrl": "https://logging.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AppHub": { @@ -10512,7 +10662,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "resourceNames": { -"description": "Required. Names of one or more parent resources: projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total.", +"description": "Required. Names of one or more parent resources (organizations and folders are not supported.): projects/[PROJECT_ID]May alternatively be one or more views: projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]/views/[VIEW_ID]A log scope can include a maximum of 5 projects and a maximum of 100 resources in total.", "items": { "type": "string" }, diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/managedkafka.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/managedkafka.v1.json index 96920e22844..7efb0d43c20 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/managedkafka.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/managedkafka.v1.json @@ -2934,7 +2934,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250814", +"revision": "20250901", "rootUrl": "https://managedkafka.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AccessConfig": { @@ -3180,6 +3180,10 @@ "$ref": "TlsConfig", "description": "Optional. TLS configuration for the Kafka cluster." }, +"updateOptions": { +"$ref": "UpdateOptions", +"description": "Optional. UpdateOptions represents options that control how updates to the cluster are applied." +}, "updateTime": { "description": "Output only. The time when the cluster was last updated.", "format": "google-datetime", @@ -4260,6 +4264,17 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"UpdateOptions": { +"description": "UpdateOptions specifies options that influence how a cluster update is applied. These options control the behavior of the update process, rather than defining the desired end-state of a cluster.", +"id": "UpdateOptions", +"properties": { +"allowBrokerDownscaleOnClusterUpscale": { +"description": "Optional. If true, allows an update operation that increases the total vCPU and/or memory allocation of the cluster to significantly decrease the per-broker vCPU and/or memory allocation. This can result in reduced performance and availability. By default, the update operation will fail if an upscale request results in a vCPU or memory allocation for the brokers that is smaller than 90% of the current broker size.", +"type": "boolean" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "UpdateSchemaConfigRequest": { "description": "Request for updating schema config. On a SchemaSubject-level SchemaConfig, an unset field will be removed from the SchemaConfig.", "id": "UpdateSchemaConfigRequest", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/merchantapi.accounts_v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/merchantapi.accounts_v1.json index 975b3e2d9cf..ffbb75d83c8 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/merchantapi.accounts_v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/merchantapi.accounts_v1.json @@ -180,6 +180,21 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/content" ] }, +"getAccountForGcpRegistration": { +"description": "Retrieves the merchant account that the calling GCP is registered with.", +"flatPath": "accounts/v1/accounts:getAccountForGcpRegistration", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "merchantapi.accounts.getAccountForGcpRegistration", +"parameterOrder": [], +"parameters": {}, +"path": "accounts/v1/accounts:getAccountForGcpRegistration", +"response": { +"$ref": "GetAccountForGcpRegistrationResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/content" +] +}, "list": { "description": "Note: For the `accounts.list` method, quota and limits usage are charged for each user, and not for the Merchant Center ID or the advanced account ID. To list several sub-accounts, you should use the `accounts.listSubaccounts` method, which is more suitable for advanced accounts use case.", "flatPath": "accounts/v1/accounts", @@ -1543,7 +1558,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "parent": { -"description": "Required. The account to create a region for. Format: `accounts/{account}`", +"description": "Required. The account to delete one or more regions from. Format: `accounts/{account}`", "location": "path", "pattern": "^accounts/[^/]+$", "required": true, @@ -2361,7 +2376,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250826", +"revision": "20250909", "rootUrl": "https://merchantapi.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "About": { @@ -2806,7 +2821,7 @@ "id": "BatchDeleteRegionsRequest", "properties": { "requests": { -"description": "Required. The names of the regions to delete. A maximum of 1000 regions can be deleted in a batch.", +"description": "Required. The names of the regions to delete. A maximum of 100 regions can be deleted in a batch.", "items": { "$ref": "DeleteRegionRequest" }, @@ -3486,6 +3501,17 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"GetAccountForGcpRegistrationResponse": { +"description": "Response message for the GetAccountForGcpRegistration method.", +"id": "GetAccountForGcpRegistrationResponse", +"properties": { +"name": { +"description": "The name of the merchant account id that the GCP is registered with.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "Handshake": { "description": "The current status of establishing of the service. (for example, pending approval or approved).", "id": "Handshake", @@ -4753,7 +4779,7 @@ false "type": "object" }, "Program": { -"description": "Defines participation in a given program for the specified account. Programs provide a mechanism for adding functionality to a Merchant Center accounts. A typical example of this is the [Free product listings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13889434) program, which enables products from a business's store to be shown across Google for free. The following list is the available set of program resource IDs accessible through the API: * `free-listings` * `shopping-ads` * `youtube-shopping-checkout`", +"description": "Defines participation in a given program for the specified account. Programs provide a mechanism for adding functionality to a Merchant Center accounts. A typical example of this is the [Free product listings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13889434) program, which enables products from a business's store to be shown across Google for free. The following list is the available set of program resource IDs accessible through the API: * `checkout` * `free-listings` * `shopping-ads` * `youtube-shopping-checkout`", "id": "Program", "properties": { "activeRegionCodes": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/merchantapi.accounts_v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/merchantapi.accounts_v1beta.json index ecbabca1b34..3f022423774 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/merchantapi.accounts_v1beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/merchantapi.accounts_v1beta.json @@ -180,6 +180,21 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/content" ] }, +"getAccountForGcpRegistration": { +"description": "Retrieves the merchant account that the calling GCP is registered with.", +"flatPath": "accounts/v1beta/accounts:getAccountForGcpRegistration", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "merchantapi.accounts.getAccountForGcpRegistration", +"parameterOrder": [], +"parameters": {}, +"path": "accounts/v1beta/accounts:getAccountForGcpRegistration", +"response": { +"$ref": "GetAccountForGcpRegistrationResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/content" +] +}, "list": { "description": "Note: For the `accounts.list` method, quota and limits usage are charged for each user, and not for the Merchant Center ID or the advanced account ID. To list several sub-accounts, you should use the `accounts.listSubaccounts` method, which is more suitable for advanced accounts use case.", "flatPath": "accounts/v1beta/accounts", @@ -2311,7 +2326,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250826", +"revision": "20250909", "rootUrl": "https://merchantapi.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "About": { @@ -3363,6 +3378,17 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"GetAccountForGcpRegistrationResponse": { +"description": "Response message for the GetAccountForGcpRegistration method.", +"id": "GetAccountForGcpRegistrationResponse", +"properties": { +"name": { +"description": "The name of the merchant account id that the GCP is registered with.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "Handshake": { "description": "The current status of establishing of the service. (for example, pending approval or approved).", "id": "Handshake", @@ -4630,7 +4656,7 @@ false "type": "object" }, "Program": { -"description": "Defines participation in a given program for the specified account. Programs provide a mechanism for adding functionality to a Merchant Center accounts. A typical example of this is the [Free product listings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13889434) program, which enables products from a business's store to be shown across Google for free. The following list is the available set of program resource IDs accessible through the API: * `free-listings` * `shopping-ads` * `youtube-shopping-checkout`", +"description": "Defines participation in a given program for the specified account. Programs provide a mechanism for adding functionality to a Merchant Center accounts. A typical example of this is the [Free product listings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13889434) program, which enables products from a business's store to be shown across Google for free. The following list is the available set of program resource IDs accessible through the API: * `checkout` * `free-listings` * `shopping-ads` * `youtube-shopping-checkout`", "id": "Program", "properties": { "activeRegionCodes": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/merchantapi.issueresolution_v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/merchantapi.issueresolution_v1beta.json index d16752b4f60..89654e6a9e4 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/merchantapi.issueresolution_v1beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/merchantapi.issueresolution_v1beta.json @@ -268,7 +268,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250621", +"revision": "20250830", "rootUrl": "https://merchantapi.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Action": { @@ -653,14 +653,16 @@ false "REVIEW_PRODUCT_ISSUE_IN_MERCHANT_CENTER", "REVIEW_ACCOUNT_ISSUE_IN_MERCHANT_CENTER", "LEGAL_APPEAL_IN_HELP_CENTER", -"VERIFY_IDENTITY_IN_MERCHANT_CENTER" +"VERIFY_IDENTITY_IN_MERCHANT_CENTER", +"VERIFY_BUSINESS_VIDEO_IN_MERCHANT_CENTER" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Default value. Will never be provided by the API.", "Redirect to Merchant Center where the business can request a review for issue related to their product.", "Redirect to Merchant Center where the business can request a review for issue related to their account.", "Redirect to the form in Help Center where the business can request a legal appeal for the issue.", -"Redirect to Merchant Center where the business can perform identity verification." +"Redirect to Merchant Center where the business can perform identity verification.", +"Redirect to Merchant Center where the business can perform business video verification." ], "type": "string" }, diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/migrationcenter.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/migrationcenter.v1.json index 2f3ffebeabb..26b2e16328c 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/migrationcenter.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/migrationcenter.v1.json @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -2407,7 +2407,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250814", +"revision": "20250904", "rootUrl": "https://migrationcenter.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AddAssetsToGroupRequest": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/migrationcenter.v1alpha1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/migrationcenter.v1alpha1.json index 69d555ab97e..cf1354693bd 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/migrationcenter.v1alpha1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/migrationcenter.v1alpha1.json @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -2554,7 +2554,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250814", +"revision": "20250910", "rootUrl": "https://migrationcenter.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AddAssetsToGroupRequest": { @@ -2785,6 +2785,51 @@ "description": "Generic asset attributes.", "type": "object" }, +"awsCloudFrontDistributionDetails": { +"$ref": "AwsCloudFrontDistributionDetails", +"description": "Output only. Asset information specific for AWS CloudFront distributions.", +"readOnly": true +}, +"awsEcsClusterDetails": { +"$ref": "AwsEcsClusterDetails", +"description": "Output only. Asset information specific for AWS ECS clusters.", +"readOnly": true +}, +"awsEfsFileSystemDetails": { +"$ref": "AwsEfsFileSystemDetails", +"description": "Output only. Asset information specific for AWS EFS file systems.", +"readOnly": true +}, +"awsEksClusterDetails": { +"$ref": "AwsEksClusterDetails", +"description": "Output only. Asset information specific for AWS EKS clusters.", +"readOnly": true +}, +"awsElbLoadBalancerDetails": { +"$ref": "AwsElbLoadBalancerDetails", +"description": "Output only. Asset information specific for AWS Load Balancers.", +"readOnly": true +}, +"awsLambdaFunctionDetails": { +"$ref": "AwsLambdaFunctionDetails", +"description": "Output only. Asset information specific for AWS Lambda functions.", +"readOnly": true +}, +"awsRedshiftDetails": { +"$ref": "AwsRedshiftDetails", +"description": "Output only. Asset information specific for AWS Redshift", +"readOnly": true +}, +"awsS3BucketDetails": { +"$ref": "AwsS3BucketDetails", +"description": "Output only. Asset information specific for AWS S3 buckets.", +"readOnly": true +}, +"awsVpcDetails": { +"$ref": "AwsVpcDetails", +"description": "Output only. Asset information specific for AWS VPCs.", +"readOnly": true +}, "createTime": { "description": "Output only. The timestamp when the asset was created.", "format": "google-datetime", @@ -2815,6 +2860,11 @@ "readOnly": true, "type": "string" }, +"hostingProviderDetails": { +"$ref": "HostingProviderDetails", +"description": "Output only. Details about the hosting provider of the asset.", +"readOnly": true +}, "insightList": { "$ref": "InsightList", "description": "Output only. The list of insights associated with the asset.", @@ -2849,6 +2899,14 @@ "readOnly": true, "type": "array" }, +"structuredAttributes": { +"additionalProperties": { +"description": "Properties of the object.", +"type": "any" +}, +"description": "Optional. Generic structured asset attributes.", +"type": "object" +}, "title": { "description": "Output only. Server generated human readable name of the asset.", "readOnly": true, @@ -2879,6 +2937,42 @@ "description": "Generic asset attributes.", "type": "object" }, +"awsCloudFrontDistributionDetails": { +"$ref": "AwsCloudFrontDistributionDetails", +"description": "Asset information specific for AWS CloudFront distributions." +}, +"awsEcsClusterDetails": { +"$ref": "AwsEcsClusterDetails", +"description": "Asset information specific for AWS ECS clusters." +}, +"awsEfsFileSystemDetails": { +"$ref": "AwsEfsFileSystemDetails", +"description": "Asset information specific for AWS EFS file systems." +}, +"awsEksClusterDetails": { +"$ref": "AwsEksClusterDetails", +"description": "Asset information specific for AWS EKS clusters." +}, +"awsElbLoadBalancerDetails": { +"$ref": "AwsElbLoadBalancerDetails", +"description": "Asset information specific for AWS Load Balancers." +}, +"awsLambdaFunctionDetails": { +"$ref": "AwsLambdaFunctionDetails", +"description": "Asset information specific for AWS Lambda functions." +}, +"awsRedshiftDetails": { +"$ref": "AwsRedshiftDetails", +"description": "Asset information specific for AWS Redshift clusters." +}, +"awsS3BucketDetails": { +"$ref": "AwsS3BucketDetails", +"description": "Asset information specific for AWS S3 buckets." +}, +"awsVpcDetails": { +"$ref": "AwsVpcDetails", +"description": "Asset information specific for AWS VPCs." +}, "collectionType": { "description": "Optional. Frame collection type, if not specified the collection type will be based on the source type of the source the frame was reported on.", "enum": [ @@ -2907,6 +3001,10 @@ "$ref": "DatabaseDetails", "description": "Asset information specific for logical databases." }, +"hostingProviderDetails": { +"$ref": "HostingProviderDetails", +"description": "Optional. Details about the hosting provider of the asset." +}, "labels": { "additionalProperties": { "type": "string" @@ -2930,6 +3028,14 @@ "format": "google-datetime", "type": "string" }, +"structuredAttributes": { +"additionalProperties": { +"description": "Properties of the object.", +"type": "any" +}, +"description": "Optional. Generic structured asset attributes.", +"type": "object" +}, "traceToken": { "description": "Optional. Trace token is optionally provided to assist with debugging and traceability.", "type": "string" @@ -3136,6 +3242,12 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"AwsCloudFrontDistributionDetails": { +"description": "Details of an AWS CloudFront distribution.", +"id": "AwsCloudFrontDistributionDetails", +"properties": {}, +"type": "object" +}, "AwsEc2PlatformDetails": { "description": "AWS EC2 specific details.", "id": "AwsEc2PlatformDetails", @@ -3165,12 +3277,150 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"AwsEcsClusterDetails": { +"description": "Details of an AWS ECS cluster.", +"id": "AwsEcsClusterDetails", +"properties": {}, +"type": "object" +}, +"AwsEfsFileSystemDetails": { +"description": "Details of an AWS EFS file system.", +"id": "AwsEfsFileSystemDetails", +"properties": {}, +"type": "object" +}, +"AwsEksClusterDetails": { +"description": "Asset information specific for AWS EKS clusters.", +"id": "AwsEksClusterDetails", +"properties": {}, +"type": "object" +}, +"AwsElbLoadBalancerDetails": { +"description": "Asset information specific for AWS Load Balancers.", +"id": "AwsElbLoadBalancerDetails", +"properties": {}, +"type": "object" +}, +"AwsLambdaFunctionDetails": { +"description": "Asset information specific for AWS Lambda functions.", +"id": "AwsLambdaFunctionDetails", +"properties": {}, +"type": "object" +}, "AwsRds": { "description": "Specific details for an AWS RDS database deployment.", "id": "AwsRds", "properties": {}, "type": "object" }, +"AwsRedshiftDetails": { +"description": "Details of an AWS Redshift cluster.", +"id": "AwsRedshiftDetails", +"properties": {}, +"type": "object" +}, +"AwsS3BucketDetails": { +"description": "Asset information specific for AWS S3 buckets.", +"id": "AwsS3BucketDetails", +"properties": { +"objectsMetadata": { +"$ref": "AwsS3BucketDetailsObjectsMetadata", +"description": "Optional. The metadata of the objects in the bucket." +}, +"storageClasses": { +"description": "Optional. The storage classes in the bucket.", +"items": { +"$ref": "AwsS3BucketDetailsStorageClass" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"versioning": { +"$ref": "AwsS3BucketDetailsVersioning", +"description": "Optional. Versioning configuration of the bucket." +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"AwsS3BucketDetailsObjectsMetadata": { +"description": "The metadata of the objects in the bucket.", +"id": "AwsS3BucketDetailsObjectsMetadata", +"properties": { +"totalObjects": { +"$ref": "AwsS3BucketDetailsObjectsMetadataTotalObjects", +"description": "Optional. The total number of objects in the bucket." +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"AwsS3BucketDetailsObjectsMetadataTotalObjects": { +"description": "Information about the total number of objects in the bucket.", +"id": "AwsS3BucketDetailsObjectsMetadataTotalObjects", +"properties": { +"value": { +"description": "Optional. The total number of objects in the bucket.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"AwsS3BucketDetailsStorageClass": { +"description": "Details about storage class.", +"id": "AwsS3BucketDetailsStorageClass", +"properties": { +"totalBytes": { +"description": "Optional. The total size of the storage class in bytes.", +"format": "int64", +"type": "string" +}, +"type": { +"description": "Required. Type of the storage class.", +"enum": [ +"STORAGE_CLASS_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED", +"STANDARD", +"INTELLIGENT_TIERING", +"STANDARD_IA", +"ONE_ZONE_IA", +"GLACIER", +"DEEP_ARCHIVE", +"GLACIER_IR", +"REDUCED_REDUNDANCY", +"EXPRESS_ONEZONE" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unspecified storage class type.", +"General Purpose", +"Represents Intelligent-Tiering's auto-tiering", +"Standard-Infrequent Access", +"One Zone-Infrequent Access", +"S3 Glacier Flexible Retrieval", +"S3 Glacier Deep Archive", +"S3 Glacier Instant Retrieval", +"S3 Reduced Redundancy Storage (Legacy)", +"S3 Express One Zone" +], +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"AwsS3BucketDetailsVersioning": { +"description": "Versioning configuration of the bucket.", +"id": "AwsS3BucketDetailsVersioning", +"properties": { +"enabled": { +"description": "Optional. Whether versioning is enabled.", +"type": "boolean" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"AwsVpcDetails": { +"description": "Asset information specific for AWS VPCs.", +"id": "AwsVpcDetails", +"properties": {}, +"type": "object" +}, "AzureVmPlatformDetails": { "description": "Azure VM specific details.", "id": "AzureVmPlatformDetails", @@ -5223,6 +5473,45 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"HostingProviderDetails": { +"description": "Details about the hosting platform of the asset.", +"id": "HostingProviderDetails", +"properties": { +"aws": { +"$ref": "HostingProviderDetailsAws", +"description": "Optional. The AWS platform details." +}, +"createTime": { +"description": "Optional. The timestamp when resource was created in the hosting provider.", +"format": "google-datetime", +"type": "string" +}, +"displayName": { +"description": "Optional. Display name of the asset.", +"type": "string" +}, +"location": { +"$ref": "ResourceLocation", +"description": "Optional. Location of the asset." +}, +"originalId": { +"description": "Optional. Unique identifier for the asset in the hosting provider.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"HostingProviderDetailsAws": { +"description": "Details for AWS platform.", +"id": "HostingProviderDetailsAws", +"properties": { +"owningAccountId": { +"description": "Optional. The AWS account ID owning the resource represented by this asset.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "HostsEntry": { "description": "Single /etc/hosts entry.", "id": "HostsEntry", @@ -7895,6 +8184,17 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"ResourceLocation": { +"description": "Location of a resource.", +"id": "ResourceLocation", +"properties": { +"region": { +"description": "Optional. The name of the region.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "RunAssetsExportJobRequest": { "description": "A request to run an assets export job.", "id": "RunAssetsExportJobRequest", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/ml.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/ml.v1.json index 18b7ffebe05..5c808037db2 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/ml.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/ml.v1.json @@ -1486,7 +1486,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250503", +"revision": "20250823", "rootUrl": "https://ml.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleApi__HttpBody": { @@ -2993,7 +2993,7 @@ "id": "GoogleCloudMlV1__RequestLoggingConfig", "properties": { "bigqueryTableName": { -"description": "Required. Fully qualified BigQuery table name in the following format: \" project_id.dataset_name.table_name\" The specified table must already exist, and the \"Cloud ML Service Agent\" for your project must have permission to write to it. The table must have the following [schema](/bigquery/docs/schemas): Field nameType Mode model STRING REQUIRED model_version STRING REQUIRED time TIMESTAMP REQUIRED raw_data STRING REQUIRED raw_prediction STRING NULLABLE groundtruth STRING NULLABLE ", +"description": "Required. Fully qualified BigQuery table name in the following format: \" project_id.dataset_name.table_name\" The specified table must already exist, and the \"Cloud ML Service Agent\" for your project must have permission to write to it. The table must have the following [schema](/bigquery/docs/schemas): Field name Type Mode model STRING REQUIRED model_version STRING REQUIRED time TIMESTAMP REQUIRED raw_data STRING REQUIRED raw_prediction STRING NULLABLE groundtruth STRING NULLABLE ", "type": "string" }, "samplingPercentage": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/netapp.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/netapp.v1.json index 25b54e4daa3..3d1b6acc95c 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/netapp.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/netapp.v1.json @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -2270,7 +2270,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250817", +"revision": "20250908", "rootUrl": "https://netapp.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "ActiveDirectory": { @@ -3900,6 +3900,11 @@ "description": "Comma separated list of allowed clients IP addresses", "type": "string" }, +"anonUid": { +"description": "Optional. An integer representing the anonymous user ID. Range is 0 to 4294967295. Required when squash_mode is ROOT_SQUASH or ALL_SQUASH.", +"format": "int64", +"type": "string" +}, "hasRootAccess": { "description": "Whether Unix root access will be granted.", "type": "string" @@ -3935,6 +3940,22 @@ "nfsv4": { "description": "NFS V4 protocol.", "type": "boolean" +}, +"squashMode": { +"description": "Optional. Defines how user identity squashing is applied for this export rule. This field is the preferred way to configure squashing behavior and takes precedence over `has_root_access` if both are provided.", +"enum": [ +"SQUASH_MODE_UNSPECIFIED", +"NO_ROOT_SQUASH", +"ROOT_SQUASH", +"ALL_SQUASH" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Defaults to NO_ROOT_SQUASH.", +"The root user (UID 0) retains full access. Other users are unaffected.", +"The root user (UID 0) is squashed to anonymous user ID. Other users are unaffected.", +"All users are squashed to anonymous user ID." +], +"type": "string" } }, "type": "object" @@ -4089,6 +4110,12 @@ "format": "int64", "type": "string" }, +"coldTierSizeUsedGib": { +"description": "Output only. Total cold tier data rounded down to the nearest GiB used by the storage pool.", +"format": "int64", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, "createTime": { "description": "Output only. Create time of the storage pool", "format": "google-datetime", @@ -4132,6 +4159,12 @@ "format": "int64", "type": "string" }, +"hotTierSizeUsedGib": { +"description": "Output only. Total hot tier data rounded down to the nearest GiB used by the storage pool.", +"format": "int64", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, "kmsConfig": { "description": "Optional. Specifies the KMS config to be used for volume encryption.", "type": "string" @@ -4472,6 +4505,12 @@ "readOnly": true, "type": "boolean" }, +"hotTierSizeUsedGib": { +"description": "Output only. Total hot tier data rounded down to the nearest GiB used by the Volume. This field is only used for flex Service Level", +"format": "int64", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, "hybridReplicationParameters": { "$ref": "HybridReplicationParameters", "description": "Optional. The Hybrid Replication parameters for the volume." diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/netapp.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/netapp.v1beta1.json index 692e4f12288..c080ec51597 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/netapp.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/netapp.v1beta1.json @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -2326,7 +2326,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250817", +"revision": "20250908", "rootUrl": "https://netapp.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "ActiveDirectory": { @@ -2820,7 +2820,7 @@ "Default unspecified state.", "State indicating waiting for cluster peering to be established.", "State indicating waiting for SVM peering to be established.", -"State indiciating successful establishment of peering with origin volumes's ONTAP cluster.", +"State indicating successful establishment of peering with origin volumes's ONTAP cluster.", "Terminal state wherein peering with origin volume's ONTAP cluster has failed." ], "readOnly": true, @@ -4088,6 +4088,11 @@ "description": "Comma separated list of allowed clients IP addresses", "type": "string" }, +"anonUid": { +"description": "Optional. An integer representing the anonymous user ID. Range is 0 to 4294967295. Required when squash_mode is ROOT_SQUASH or ALL_SQUASH.", +"format": "int64", +"type": "string" +}, "hasRootAccess": { "description": "Whether Unix root access will be granted.", "type": "string" @@ -4123,6 +4128,22 @@ "nfsv4": { "description": "NFS V4 protocol.", "type": "boolean" +}, +"squashMode": { +"description": "Optional. Defines how user identity squashing is applied for this export rule. This field is the preferred way to configure squashing behavior and takes precedence over `has_root_access` if both are provided.", +"enum": [ +"SQUASH_MODE_UNSPECIFIED", +"NO_ROOT_SQUASH", +"ROOT_SQUASH", +"ALL_SQUASH" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Defaults to NO_ROOT_SQUASH.", +"The root user (UID 0) retains full access. Other users are unaffected.", +"The root user (UID 0) is squashed to anonymous user ID. Other users are unaffected.", +"All users are squashed to anonymous user ID." +], +"type": "string" } }, "type": "object" @@ -4277,6 +4298,12 @@ "format": "int64", "type": "string" }, +"coldTierSizeUsedGib": { +"description": "Output only. Total cold tier data rounded down to the nearest GiB used by the storage pool.", +"format": "int64", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, "createTime": { "description": "Output only. Create time of the storage pool", "format": "google-datetime", @@ -4320,6 +4347,12 @@ "format": "int64", "type": "string" }, +"hotTierSizeUsedGib": { +"description": "Output only. Total hot tier data rounded down to the nearest GiB used by the storage pool.", +"format": "int64", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, "kmsConfig": { "description": "Optional. Specifies the KMS config to be used for volume encryption.", "type": "string" @@ -4664,6 +4697,12 @@ "readOnly": true, "type": "boolean" }, +"hotTierSizeUsedGib": { +"description": "Output only. Total hot tier data rounded down to the nearest GiB used by the Volume. This field is only used for flex Service Level", +"format": "int64", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, "hybridReplicationParameters": { "$ref": "HybridReplicationParameters", "description": "Optional. The Hybrid Replication parameters for the volume." diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networkmanagement.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networkmanagement.v1.json index 400d7e4d1ed..db860d5eb5f 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networkmanagement.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networkmanagement.v1.json @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -305,6 +305,173 @@ ] } } +}, +"vpcFlowLogsConfigs": { +"methods": { +"create": { +"description": "Creates a new `VpcFlowLogsConfig`. If a configuration with the exact same settings already exists (even if the ID is different), the creation fails. Notes: 1. Creating a configuration with `state=DISABLED` will fail 2. The following fields are not considered as settings for the purpose of the check mentioned above, therefore - creating another configuration with the same fields but different values for the following fields will fail as well: * name * create_time * update_time * labels * description", +"flatPath": "v1/organizations/{organizationsId}/locations/{locationsId}/vpcFlowLogsConfigs", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "networkmanagement.organizations.locations.vpcFlowLogsConfigs.create", +"parameterOrder": [ +"parent" +], +"parameters": { +"parent": { +"description": "Required. The parent resource of the VpcFlowLogsConfig to create, in one of the following formats: - For project-level resources: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global` - For organization-level resources: `organizations/{organization_id}/locations/global`", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^organizations/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"vpcFlowLogsConfigId": { +"description": "Required. ID of the `VpcFlowLogsConfig`.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+parent}/vpcFlowLogsConfigs", +"request": { +"$ref": "VpcFlowLogsConfig" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"delete": { +"description": "Deletes a specific `VpcFlowLogsConfig`.", +"flatPath": "v1/organizations/{organizationsId}/locations/{locationsId}/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpcFlowLogsConfigsId}", +"httpMethod": "DELETE", +"id": "networkmanagement.organizations.locations.vpcFlowLogsConfigs.delete", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. The resource name of the VpcFlowLogsConfig, in one of the following formats: - For a project-level resource: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}` - For an organization-level resource: `organizations/{organization_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}`", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^organizations/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}", +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"get": { +"description": "Gets the details of a specific `VpcFlowLogsConfig`.", +"flatPath": "v1/organizations/{organizationsId}/locations/{locationsId}/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpcFlowLogsConfigsId}", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "networkmanagement.organizations.locations.vpcFlowLogsConfigs.get", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. The resource name of the VpcFlowLogsConfig, in one of the following formats: - For project-level resources: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}` - For organization-level resources: `organizations/{organization_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}`", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^organizations/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}", +"response": { +"$ref": "VpcFlowLogsConfig" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"list": { +"description": "Lists all `VpcFlowLogsConfigs` in a given organization.", +"flatPath": "v1/organizations/{organizationsId}/locations/{locationsId}/vpcFlowLogsConfigs", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "networkmanagement.organizations.locations.vpcFlowLogsConfigs.list", +"parameterOrder": [ +"parent" +], +"parameters": { +"filter": { +"description": "Optional. Lists the `VpcFlowLogsConfigs` that match the filter expression. A filter expression must use the supported [CEL logic operators] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-flow-logs-records#supported_cel_logic_operators).", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"orderBy": { +"description": "Optional. Field to use to sort the list.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"pageSize": { +"description": "Optional. Number of `VpcFlowLogsConfigs` to return.", +"format": "int32", +"location": "query", +"type": "integer" +}, +"pageToken": { +"description": "Optional. Page token from an earlier query, as returned in `next_page_token`.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"parent": { +"description": "Required. The parent resource of the VpcFlowLogsConfig, in one of the following formats: - For project-level resourcs: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global` - For organization-level resources: `organizations/{organization_id}/locations/global`", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^organizations/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+parent}/vpcFlowLogsConfigs", +"response": { +"$ref": "ListVpcFlowLogsConfigsResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"patch": { +"description": "Updates an existing `VpcFlowLogsConfig`. If a configuration with the exact same settings already exists (even if the ID is different), the creation fails. Notes: 1. Updating a configuration with `state=DISABLED` will fail 2. The following fields are not considered as settings for the purpose of the check mentioned above, therefore - updating another configuration with the same fields but different values for the following fields will fail as well: * name * create_time * update_time * labels * description", +"flatPath": "v1/organizations/{organizationsId}/locations/{locationsId}/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpcFlowLogsConfigsId}", +"httpMethod": "PATCH", +"id": "networkmanagement.organizations.locations.vpcFlowLogsConfigs.patch", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Identifier. Unique name of the configuration. The name can have one of the following forms: - For project-level configurations: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}` - For organization-level configurations: `organizations/{organization_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}`", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^organizations/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"updateMask": { +"description": "Required. Mask of fields to update. At least one path must be supplied in this field. For example, to change the state of the configuration to ENABLED, specify `update_mask` = `\"state\"`, and the `vpc_flow_logs_config` would be: `vpc_flow_logs_config = { name = \"projects/my-project/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/my-config\" state = \"ENABLED\" }`", +"format": "google-fieldmask", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}", +"request": { +"$ref": "VpcFlowLogsConfig" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +} +} } } } @@ -349,7 +516,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -1281,6 +1448,93 @@ "scopes": [ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" ] +}, +"queryOrgVpcFlowLogsConfigs": { +"description": "QueryOrgVpcFlowLogsConfigs returns a list of all organization-level VPC Flow Logs configurations applicable to the specified project.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/vpcFlowLogsConfigs:queryOrgVpcFlowLogsConfigs", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "networkmanagement.projects.locations.vpcFlowLogsConfigs.queryOrgVpcFlowLogsConfigs", +"parameterOrder": [ +"parent" +], +"parameters": { +"filter": { +"description": "Optional. Lists the `VpcFlowLogsConfigs` that match the filter expression. A filter expression must use the supported [CEL logic operators] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-flow-logs-records#supported_cel_logic_operators).", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"pageSize": { +"description": "Optional. Number of `VpcFlowLogsConfigs` to return.", +"format": "int32", +"location": "query", +"type": "integer" +}, +"pageToken": { +"description": "Optional. Page token from an earlier query, as returned in `next_page_token`.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"parent": { +"description": "Required. The parent resource of the VpcFlowLogsConfig, specified in the following format: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global`", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+parent}/vpcFlowLogsConfigs:queryOrgVpcFlowLogsConfigs", +"response": { +"$ref": "QueryOrgVpcFlowLogsConfigsResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"showEffectiveFlowLogsConfigs": { +"description": "ShowEffectiveFlowLogsConfigs returns a list of all VPC Flow Logs configurations applicable to a specified resource.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/vpcFlowLogsConfigs:showEffectiveFlowLogsConfigs", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "networkmanagement.projects.locations.vpcFlowLogsConfigs.showEffectiveFlowLogsConfigs", +"parameterOrder": [ +"parent" +], +"parameters": { +"filter": { +"description": "Optional. Lists the `EffectiveVpcFlowLogsConfigs` that match the filter expression. A filter expression must use the supported [CEL logic operators] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-flow-logs-records#supported_cel_logic_operators).", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"pageSize": { +"description": "Optional. Number of `EffectiveVpcFlowLogsConfigs` to return. Default is 30.", +"format": "int32", +"location": "query", +"type": "integer" +}, +"pageToken": { +"description": "Optional. Page token from an earlier query, as returned in `next_page_token`.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"parent": { +"description": "Required. The parent resource of the VpcFlowLogsConfig, specified in the following format: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global`", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"resource": { +"description": "Required. The resource to get the effective VPC Flow Logs configuration for. The resource must belong to the same project as the parent. The resource must be a network, subnetwork, interconnect attachment, VPN tunnel, or a project.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+parent}/vpcFlowLogsConfigs:showEffectiveFlowLogsConfigs", +"response": { +"$ref": "ShowEffectiveFlowLogsConfigsResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] } } } @@ -1289,7 +1543,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250813", +"revision": "20250905", "rootUrl": "https://networkmanagement.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AbortInfo": { @@ -1951,7 +2205,10 @@ false "NO_MATCHING_NAT64_GATEWAY", "LOAD_BALANCER_BACKEND_IP_VERSION_MISMATCH", "NO_KNOWN_ROUTE_FROM_NCC_NETWORK_TO_DESTINATION", -"CLOUD_NAT_PROTOCOL_UNSUPPORTED" +"CLOUD_NAT_PROTOCOL_UNSUPPORTED", +"L2_INTERCONNECT_UNSUPPORTED_PROTOCOL", +"L2_INTERCONNECT_UNSUPPORTED_PORT", +"L2_INTERCONNECT_DESTINATION_IP_MISMATCH" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Cause is unspecified.", @@ -2047,7 +2304,10 @@ false "Packet with destination IP address within the reserved NAT64 range is dropped due to no matching NAT gateway in the subnet.", "Packet is dropped due to being sent to a backend of a passthrough load balancer that doesn't use the same IP version as the frontend.", "Packet from the unknown NCC network is dropped due to no known route from the source network to the destination IP address.", -"Packet is dropped by Cloud NAT due to using an unsupported protocol." +"Packet is dropped by Cloud NAT due to using an unsupported protocol.", +"Packet is dropped due to using an unsupported protocol (any other than UDP) for L2 Interconnect.", +"Packet is dropped due to using an unsupported port (any other than 6081) for L2 Interconnect.", +"Packet is dropped due to destination IP not matching the appliance mapping IPs configured on the L2 Interconnect attachment." ], "type": "string" }, @@ -2089,6 +2349,137 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"EffectiveVpcFlowLogsConfig": { +"description": "A configuration to generate a response for GetEffectiveVpcFlowLogsConfig request.", +"id": "EffectiveVpcFlowLogsConfig", +"properties": { +"aggregationInterval": { +"description": "The aggregation interval for the logs. Default value is INTERVAL_5_SEC.", +"enum": [ +"AGGREGATION_INTERVAL_UNSPECIFIED", +"INTERVAL_5_SEC", +"INTERVAL_30_SEC", +"INTERVAL_1_MIN", +"INTERVAL_5_MIN", +"INTERVAL_10_MIN", +"INTERVAL_15_MIN" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"If not specified, will default to INTERVAL_5_SEC.", +"Aggregate logs in 5s intervals.", +"Aggregate logs in 30s intervals.", +"Aggregate logs in 1m intervals.", +"Aggregate logs in 5m intervals.", +"Aggregate logs in 10m intervals.", +"Aggregate logs in 15m intervals." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"crossProjectMetadata": { +"description": "Determines whether to include cross project annotations in the logs. This field is available only for organization configurations. If not specified in org configs will be set to CROSS_PROJECT_METADATA_ENABLED.", +"enum": [ +"CROSS_PROJECT_METADATA_UNSPECIFIED", +"CROSS_PROJECT_METADATA_ENABLED", +"CROSS_PROJECT_METADATA_DISABLED" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"If not specified, the default is CROSS_PROJECT_METADATA_ENABLED.", +"When CROSS_PROJECT_METADATA_ENABLED, metadata from other projects will be included in the logs.", +"When CROSS_PROJECT_METADATA_DISABLED, metadata from other projects will not be included in the logs." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"filterExpr": { +"description": "Export filter used to define which VPC Flow Logs should be logged.", +"type": "string" +}, +"flowSampling": { +"description": "The value of the field must be in (0, 1]. The sampling rate of VPC Flow Logs where 1.0 means all collected logs are reported. Setting the sampling rate to 0.0 is not allowed. If you want to disable VPC Flow Logs, use the state field instead. Default value is 1.0.", +"format": "float", +"type": "number" +}, +"interconnectAttachment": { +"description": "Traffic will be logged from the Interconnect Attachment. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/interconnectAttachments/{name}", +"type": "string" +}, +"metadata": { +"description": "Configures whether all, none or a subset of metadata fields should be added to the reported VPC flow logs. Default value is INCLUDE_ALL_METADATA.", +"enum": [ +"METADATA_UNSPECIFIED", +"INCLUDE_ALL_METADATA", +"EXCLUDE_ALL_METADATA", +"CUSTOM_METADATA" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"If not specified, will default to INCLUDE_ALL_METADATA.", +"Include all metadata fields.", +"Exclude all metadata fields.", +"Include only custom fields (specified in metadata_fields)." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"metadataFields": { +"description": "Custom metadata fields to include in the reported VPC flow logs. Can only be specified if \"metadata\" was set to CUSTOM_METADATA.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"name": { +"description": "Unique name of the configuration. The name can have one of the following forms: - For project-level configurations: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}` - For organization-level configurations: `organizations/{organization_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}` - For a Compute config, the name will be the path of the subnet: `projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/subnetworks/{subnet_id}`", +"type": "string" +}, +"network": { +"description": "Traffic will be logged from VMs, VPN tunnels and Interconnect Attachments within the network. Format: projects/{project_id}/global/networks/{name}", +"type": "string" +}, +"scope": { +"description": "Specifies the scope of the config (e.g., SUBNET, NETWORK, ORGANIZATION..).", +"enum": [ +"SCOPE_UNSPECIFIED", +"SUBNET", +"COMPUTE_API_SUBNET", +"NETWORK", +"VPN_TUNNEL", +"INTERCONNECT_ATTACHMENT", +"ORGANIZATION" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Scope is unspecified.", +"Target resource is a subnet (Network Management API).", +"Target resource is a subnet, and the config originates from the Compute API.", +"Target resource is a network.", +"Target resource is a VPN tunnel.", +"Target resource is an interconnect attachment.", +"Configuration applies to an entire organization." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"state": { +"description": "The state of the VPC Flow Log configuration. Default value is ENABLED. When creating a new configuration, it must be enabled. Setting state=DISABLED will pause the log generation for this config.", +"enum": [ +"STATE_UNSPECIFIED", +"ENABLED", +"DISABLED" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"If not specified, will default to ENABLED.", +"When ENABLED, this configuration will generate logs.", +"When DISABLED, this configuration will not generate logs." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"subnet": { +"description": "Traffic will be logged from VMs within the subnetwork. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/subnetworks/{name}", +"type": "string" +}, +"vpnTunnel": { +"description": "Traffic will be logged from the VPN Tunnel. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/vpnTunnels/{name}", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "Empty": { "description": "A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); }", "id": "Empty", @@ -2629,6 +3020,25 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"HybridSubnetInfo": { +"description": "For display only. Metadata associated with a hybrid subnet.", +"id": "HybridSubnetInfo", +"properties": { +"displayName": { +"description": "Name of a hybrid subnet.", +"type": "string" +}, +"region": { +"description": "Name of a Google Cloud region where the hybrid subnet is configured.", +"type": "string" +}, +"uri": { +"description": "URI of a hybrid subnet.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "InstanceInfo": { "description": "For display only. Metadata associated with a Compute Engine instance.", "id": "InstanceInfo", @@ -2711,10 +3121,32 @@ false "description": "URI of the Interconnect where the Interconnect attachment is configured.", "type": "string" }, +"l2AttachmentMatchedIpAddress": { +"description": "Appliance IP address that was matched for L2_DEDICATED attachments.", +"type": "string" +}, "region": { "description": "Name of a Google Cloud region where the Interconnect attachment is configured.", "type": "string" }, +"type": { +"description": "The type of interconnect attachment this is.", +"enum": [ +"TYPE_UNSPECIFIED", +"DEDICATED", +"PARTNER", +"PARTNER_PROVIDER", +"L2_DEDICATED" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unspecified type.", +"Attachment to a dedicated interconnect.", +"Attachment to a partner interconnect, created by the customer.", +"Attachment to a partner interconnect, created by the partner.", +"Attachment to a L2 interconnect, created by the customer." +], +"type": "string" +}, "uri": { "description": "URI of an Interconnect attachment.", "type": "string" @@ -3312,14 +3744,16 @@ false "INTERNAL_TO_EXTERNAL", "EXTERNAL_TO_INTERNAL", "CLOUD_NAT", -"PRIVATE_SERVICE_CONNECT" +"PRIVATE_SERVICE_CONNECT", +"GKE_POD_IP_MASQUERADING" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Type is unspecified.", "From Compute Engine instance's internal address to external address.", "From Compute Engine instance's external address to internal address.", "Cloud NAT Gateway.", -"Private service connect NAT." +"Private service connect NAT.", +"GKE Pod IP address masquerading." ], "type": "string" } @@ -3856,6 +4290,31 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"QueryOrgVpcFlowLogsConfigsResponse": { +"description": "Response for the `QueryVpcFlowLogsConfigs` method.", +"id": "QueryOrgVpcFlowLogsConfigsResponse", +"properties": { +"nextPageToken": { +"description": "Page token to fetch the next set of configurations.", +"type": "string" +}, +"unreachable": { +"description": "Locations that could not be reached (when querying all locations with `-`).", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"vpcFlowLogsConfigs": { +"description": "List of VPC Flow Log configurations.", +"items": { +"$ref": "VpcFlowLogsConfig" +}, +"type": "array" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "ReachabilityDetails": { "description": "Results of the configuration analysis from the last run of the test.", "id": "ReachabilityDetails", @@ -4186,6 +4645,31 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"ShowEffectiveFlowLogsConfigsResponse": { +"description": "Response for the `ShowEffectiveFlowLogsConfigs` method.", +"id": "ShowEffectiveFlowLogsConfigsResponse", +"properties": { +"effectiveFlowLogsConfigs": { +"description": "List of Effective Vpc Flow Logs configurations.", +"items": { +"$ref": "EffectiveVpcFlowLogsConfig" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"nextPageToken": { +"description": "Page token to fetch the next set of configurations.", +"type": "string" +}, +"unreachable": { +"description": "Locations that could not be reached (when querying all locations with `-`).", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "SingleEdgeResponse": { "description": "Probing results for a single edge device.", "id": "SingleEdgeResponse", @@ -4328,6 +4812,10 @@ false "$ref": "GoogleServiceInfo", "description": "Display information of a Google service" }, +"hybridSubnet": { +"$ref": "HybridSubnetInfo", +"description": "Display information of a hybrid subnet." +}, "instance": { "$ref": "InstanceInfo", "description": "Display information of a Compute Engine instance." @@ -4408,6 +4896,7 @@ false "ARRIVE_AT_INSTANCE", "ARRIVE_AT_INTERNAL_LOAD_BALANCER", "ARRIVE_AT_EXTERNAL_LOAD_BALANCER", +"ARRIVE_AT_HYBRID_SUBNET", "ARRIVE_AT_VPN_GATEWAY", "ARRIVE_AT_VPN_TUNNEL", "ARRIVE_AT_INTERCONNECT_ATTACHMENT", @@ -4459,6 +4948,7 @@ false, false, false, false, +false, false ], "enumDescriptions": [ @@ -4486,13 +4976,14 @@ false "Forwarding state: arriving at a Compute Engine instance.", "Forwarding state: arriving at a Compute Engine internal load balancer.", "Forwarding state: arriving at a Compute Engine external load balancer.", +"Forwarding state: arriving at a hybrid subnet. Appropriate routing configuration will be determined here.", "Forwarding state: arriving at a Cloud VPN gateway.", "Forwarding state: arriving at a Cloud VPN tunnel.", "Forwarding state: arriving at an interconnect attachment.", "Forwarding state: arriving at a VPC connector.", "Forwarding state: for packets originating from a serverless endpoint forwarded through Direct VPC egress.", "Forwarding state: for packets originating from a serverless endpoint forwarded through public (external) connectivity.", -"Transition state: packet header translated.", +"Transition state: packet header translated. The `nat` field is populated with the translation information.", "Transition state: original connection is terminated and a new proxied connection is initiated.", "Final state: packet could be delivered.", "Final state: packet could be dropped.", @@ -4634,6 +5125,20 @@ false "readOnly": true, "type": "string" }, +"crossProjectMetadata": { +"description": "Optional. Determines whether to include cross project annotations in the logs. This field is available only for organization configurations. If not specified in org configs will be set to CROSS_PROJECT_METADATA_ENABLED.", +"enum": [ +"CROSS_PROJECT_METADATA_UNSPECIFIED", +"CROSS_PROJECT_METADATA_ENABLED", +"CROSS_PROJECT_METADATA_DISABLED" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"If not specified, the default is CROSS_PROJECT_METADATA_ENABLED.", +"When CROSS_PROJECT_METADATA_ENABLED, metadata from other projects will be included in the logs.", +"When CROSS_PROJECT_METADATA_DISABLED, metadata from other projects will not be included in the logs." +], +"type": "string" +}, "description": { "description": "Optional. The user-supplied description of the VPC Flow Logs configuration. Maximum of 512 characters.", "type": "string" @@ -4685,6 +5190,10 @@ false "description": "Identifier. Unique name of the configuration. The name can have one of the following forms: - For project-level configurations: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}` - For organization-level configurations: `organizations/{organization_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}`", "type": "string" }, +"network": { +"description": "Traffic will be logged from VMs, VPN tunnels and Interconnect Attachments within the network. Format: projects/{project_id}/global/networks/{name}", +"type": "string" +}, "state": { "description": "Optional. The state of the VPC Flow Log configuration. Default value is ENABLED. When creating a new configuration, it must be enabled. Setting state=DISABLED will pause the log generation for this config.", "enum": [ @@ -4699,6 +5208,10 @@ false ], "type": "string" }, +"subnet": { +"description": "Traffic will be logged from VMs within the subnetwork. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/subnetworks/{name}", +"type": "string" +}, "targetResourceState": { "description": "Output only. Describes the state of the configured target resource for diagnostic purposes.", "enum": [ diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networkmanagement.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networkmanagement.v1beta1.json index 19e34d07a2f..bce8d83c978 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networkmanagement.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networkmanagement.v1beta1.json @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -520,7 +520,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -1173,6 +1173,52 @@ "scopes": [ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" ] +}, +"showEffectiveFlowLogsConfigs": { +"description": "ShowEffectiveFlowLogsConfigs returns a list of all VPC Flow Logs configurations applicable to a specified resource.", +"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/vpcFlowLogsConfigs:showEffectiveFlowLogsConfigs", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "networkmanagement.projects.locations.vpcFlowLogsConfigs.showEffectiveFlowLogsConfigs", +"parameterOrder": [ +"parent" +], +"parameters": { +"filter": { +"description": "Optional. Lists the `EffectiveVpcFlowLogsConfigs` that match the filter expression. A filter expression must use the supported [CEL logic operators] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-flow-logs-records#supported_cel_logic_operators).", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"pageSize": { +"description": "Optional. Number of `EffectiveVpcFlowLogsConfigs` to return. Default is 30.", +"format": "int32", +"location": "query", +"type": "integer" +}, +"pageToken": { +"description": "Optional. Page token from an earlier query, as returned in `next_page_token`.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"parent": { +"description": "Required. The parent resource of the VpcFlowLogsConfig, specified in the following format: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global`", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"resource": { +"description": "Required. The resource to get the effective VPC Flow Logs configuration for. The resource must belong to the same project as the parent. The resource must be a network, subnetwork, interconnect attachment, VPN tunnel, or a project.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1beta1/{+parent}/vpcFlowLogsConfigs:showEffectiveFlowLogsConfigs", +"response": { +"$ref": "ShowEffectiveFlowLogsConfigsResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] } } } @@ -1181,7 +1227,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250813", +"revision": "20250905", "rootUrl": "https://networkmanagement.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AbortInfo": { @@ -1843,7 +1889,10 @@ false "NO_MATCHING_NAT64_GATEWAY", "LOAD_BALANCER_BACKEND_IP_VERSION_MISMATCH", "NO_KNOWN_ROUTE_FROM_NCC_NETWORK_TO_DESTINATION", -"CLOUD_NAT_PROTOCOL_UNSUPPORTED" +"CLOUD_NAT_PROTOCOL_UNSUPPORTED", +"L2_INTERCONNECT_UNSUPPORTED_PROTOCOL", +"L2_INTERCONNECT_UNSUPPORTED_PORT", +"L2_INTERCONNECT_DESTINATION_IP_MISMATCH" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Cause is unspecified.", @@ -1939,7 +1988,10 @@ false "Packet with destination IP address within the reserved NAT64 range is dropped due to no matching NAT gateway in the subnet.", "Packet is dropped due to being sent to a backend of a passthrough load balancer that doesn't use the same IP version as the frontend.", "Packet from the unknown NCC network is dropped due to no known route from the source network to the destination IP address.", -"Packet is dropped by Cloud NAT due to using an unsupported protocol." +"Packet is dropped by Cloud NAT due to using an unsupported protocol.", +"Packet is dropped due to using an unsupported protocol (any other than UDP) for L2 Interconnect.", +"Packet is dropped due to using an unsupported port (any other than 6081) for L2 Interconnect.", +"Packet is dropped due to destination IP not matching the appliance mapping IPs configured on the L2 Interconnect attachment." ], "type": "string" }, @@ -1981,6 +2033,137 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"EffectiveVpcFlowLogsConfig": { +"description": "A configuration to generate a response for GetEffectiveVpcFlowLogsConfig request.", +"id": "EffectiveVpcFlowLogsConfig", +"properties": { +"aggregationInterval": { +"description": "The aggregation interval for the logs. Default value is INTERVAL_5_SEC.", +"enum": [ +"AGGREGATION_INTERVAL_UNSPECIFIED", +"INTERVAL_5_SEC", +"INTERVAL_30_SEC", +"INTERVAL_1_MIN", +"INTERVAL_5_MIN", +"INTERVAL_10_MIN", +"INTERVAL_15_MIN" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"If not specified, will default to INTERVAL_5_SEC.", +"Aggregate logs in 5s intervals.", +"Aggregate logs in 30s intervals.", +"Aggregate logs in 1m intervals.", +"Aggregate logs in 5m intervals.", +"Aggregate logs in 10m intervals.", +"Aggregate logs in 15m intervals." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"crossProjectMetadata": { +"description": "Determines whether to include cross project annotations in the logs. This field is available only for organization configurations. If not specified in org configs will be set to CROSS_PROJECT_METADATA_ENABLED.", +"enum": [ +"CROSS_PROJECT_METADATA_UNSPECIFIED", +"CROSS_PROJECT_METADATA_ENABLED", +"CROSS_PROJECT_METADATA_DISABLED" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"If not specified, the default is CROSS_PROJECT_METADATA_ENABLED.", +"When CROSS_PROJECT_METADATA_ENABLED, metadata from other projects will be included in the logs.", +"When CROSS_PROJECT_METADATA_DISABLED, metadata from other projects will not be included in the logs." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"filterExpr": { +"description": "Export filter used to define which VPC Flow Logs should be logged.", +"type": "string" +}, +"flowSampling": { +"description": "The value of the field must be in (0, 1]. The sampling rate of VPC Flow Logs where 1.0 means all collected logs are reported. Setting the sampling rate to 0.0 is not allowed. If you want to disable VPC Flow Logs, use the state field instead. Default value is 1.0.", +"format": "float", +"type": "number" +}, +"interconnectAttachment": { +"description": "Traffic will be logged from the Interconnect Attachment. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/interconnectAttachments/{name}", +"type": "string" +}, +"metadata": { +"description": "Configures whether all, none or a subset of metadata fields should be added to the reported VPC flow logs. Default value is INCLUDE_ALL_METADATA.", +"enum": [ +"METADATA_UNSPECIFIED", +"INCLUDE_ALL_METADATA", +"EXCLUDE_ALL_METADATA", +"CUSTOM_METADATA" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"If not specified, will default to INCLUDE_ALL_METADATA.", +"Include all metadata fields.", +"Exclude all metadata fields.", +"Include only custom fields (specified in metadata_fields)." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"metadataFields": { +"description": "Custom metadata fields to include in the reported VPC flow logs. Can only be specified if \"metadata\" was set to CUSTOM_METADATA.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"name": { +"description": "Unique name of the configuration. The name can have one of the following forms: - For project-level configurations: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}` - For organization-level configurations: `organizations/{organization_id}/locations/global/vpcFlowLogsConfigs/{vpc_flow_logs_config_id}` - For a Compute config, the name will be the path of the subnet: `projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/subnetworks/{subnet_id}`", +"type": "string" +}, +"network": { +"description": "Traffic will be logged from VMs, VPN tunnels and Interconnect Attachments within the network. Format: projects/{project_id}/global/networks/{name}", +"type": "string" +}, +"scope": { +"description": "Specifies the scope of the config (e.g., SUBNET, NETWORK, ORGANIZATION..).", +"enum": [ +"SCOPE_UNSPECIFIED", +"SUBNET", +"COMPUTE_API_SUBNET", +"NETWORK", +"VPN_TUNNEL", +"INTERCONNECT_ATTACHMENT", +"ORGANIZATION" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Scope is unspecified.", +"Target resource is a subnet (Network Management API).", +"Target resource is a subnet, and the config originates from the Compute API.", +"Target resource is a network.", +"Target resource is a VPN tunnel.", +"Target resource is an interconnect attachment.", +"Configuration applies to an entire organization." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"state": { +"description": "The state of the VPC Flow Log configuration. Default value is ENABLED. When creating a new configuration, it must be enabled. Setting state=DISABLED will pause the log generation for this config.", +"enum": [ +"STATE_UNSPECIFIED", +"ENABLED", +"DISABLED" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"If not specified, will default to ENABLED.", +"When ENABLED, this configuration will generate logs.", +"When DISABLED, this configuration will not generate logs." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"subnet": { +"description": "Traffic will be logged from VMs within the subnetwork. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/subnetworks/{name}", +"type": "string" +}, +"vpnTunnel": { +"description": "Traffic will be logged from the VPN Tunnel. Format: projects/{project_id}/regions/{region}/vpnTunnels/{name}", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "Empty": { "description": "A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); }", "id": "Empty", @@ -2042,6 +2225,10 @@ false "description": "A cluster URI for [Google Kubernetes Engine cluster control plane](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/cluster-architecture).", "type": "string" }, +"gkePod": { +"description": "A [GKE Pod](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/concepts/pod) URI.", +"type": "string" +}, "instance": { "description": "A Compute Engine instance URI.", "type": "string" @@ -2460,6 +2647,25 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"HybridSubnetInfo": { +"description": "For display only. Metadata associated with a hybrid subnet.", +"id": "HybridSubnetInfo", +"properties": { +"displayName": { +"description": "Name of a hybrid subnet.", +"type": "string" +}, +"region": { +"description": "Name of a Google Cloud region where the hybrid subnet is configured.", +"type": "string" +}, +"uri": { +"description": "URI of a hybrid subnet.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "InstanceInfo": { "description": "For display only. Metadata associated with a Compute Engine instance.", "id": "InstanceInfo", @@ -2542,10 +2748,32 @@ false "description": "URI of the Interconnect where the Interconnect attachment is configured.", "type": "string" }, +"l2AttachmentMatchedIpAddress": { +"description": "Appliance IP address that was matched for L2_DEDICATED attachments.", +"type": "string" +}, "region": { "description": "Name of a Google Cloud region where the Interconnect attachment is configured.", "type": "string" }, +"type": { +"description": "The type of interconnect attachment this is.", +"enum": [ +"TYPE_UNSPECIFIED", +"DEDICATED", +"PARTNER", +"PARTNER_PROVIDER", +"L2_DEDICATED" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unspecified type.", +"Attachment to a dedicated interconnect.", +"Attachment to a partner interconnect, created by the customer.", +"Attachment to a partner interconnect, created by the partner.", +"Attachment to a L2 interconnect, created by the customer." +], +"type": "string" +}, "uri": { "description": "URI of an Interconnect attachment.", "type": "string" @@ -2931,14 +3159,16 @@ false "INTERNAL_TO_EXTERNAL", "EXTERNAL_TO_INTERNAL", "CLOUD_NAT", -"PRIVATE_SERVICE_CONNECT" +"PRIVATE_SERVICE_CONNECT", +"GKE_POD_IP_MASQUERADING" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Type is unspecified.", "From Compute Engine instance's internal address to external address.", "From Compute Engine instance's external address to internal address.", "Cloud NAT Gateway.", -"Private service connect NAT." +"Private service connect NAT.", +"GKE Pod IP address masquerading." ], "type": "string" } @@ -3566,6 +3796,31 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"ShowEffectiveFlowLogsConfigsResponse": { +"description": "Response for the `ShowEffectiveFlowLogsConfigs` method.", +"id": "ShowEffectiveFlowLogsConfigsResponse", +"properties": { +"effectiveFlowLogsConfigs": { +"description": "List of Effective Vpc Flow Logs configurations.", +"items": { +"$ref": "EffectiveVpcFlowLogsConfig" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"nextPageToken": { +"description": "Page token to fetch the next set of configurations.", +"type": "string" +}, +"unreachable": { +"description": "Locations that could not be reached (when querying all locations with `-`).", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "SingleEdgeResponse": { "description": "Probing results for a single edge device.", "id": "SingleEdgeResponse", @@ -3708,6 +3963,10 @@ false "$ref": "GoogleServiceInfo", "description": "Display information of a Google service" }, +"hybridSubnet": { +"$ref": "HybridSubnetInfo", +"description": "Display information of a hybrid subnet." +}, "instance": { "$ref": "InstanceInfo", "description": "Display information of a Compute Engine instance." @@ -3788,6 +4047,7 @@ false "ARRIVE_AT_INSTANCE", "ARRIVE_AT_INTERNAL_LOAD_BALANCER", "ARRIVE_AT_EXTERNAL_LOAD_BALANCER", +"ARRIVE_AT_HYBRID_SUBNET", "ARRIVE_AT_VPN_GATEWAY", "ARRIVE_AT_VPN_TUNNEL", "ARRIVE_AT_INTERCONNECT_ATTACHMENT", @@ -3839,6 +4099,7 @@ false, false, false, false, +false, false ], "enumDescriptions": [ @@ -3866,13 +4127,14 @@ false "Forwarding state: arriving at a Compute Engine instance.", "Forwarding state: arriving at a Compute Engine internal load balancer. Deprecated in favor of the `ANALYZE_LOAD_BALANCER_BACKEND` state, not used in new tests.", "Forwarding state: arriving at a Compute Engine external load balancer. Deprecated in favor of the `ANALYZE_LOAD_BALANCER_BACKEND` state, not used in new tests.", +"Forwarding state: arriving at a hybrid subnet. Appropriate routing configuration will be determined here.", "Forwarding state: arriving at a Cloud VPN gateway.", "Forwarding state: arriving at a Cloud VPN tunnel.", "Forwarding state: arriving at an interconnect attachment.", "Forwarding state: arriving at a VPC connector.", "Forwarding state: for packets originating from a serverless endpoint forwarded through Direct VPC egress.", "Forwarding state: for packets originating from a serverless endpoint forwarded through public (external) connectivity.", -"Transition state: packet header translated.", +"Transition state: packet header translated. The `nat` field is populated with the translation information.", "Transition state: original connection is terminated and a new proxied connection is initiated.", "Final state: packet could be delivered.", "Final state: packet could be dropped.", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networksecurity.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networksecurity.v1beta1.json index 548274acc3d..d079015d127 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networksecurity.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networksecurity.v1beta1.json @@ -5513,7 +5513,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250822", +"revision": "20250903", "rootUrl": "https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AddAddressGroupItemsRequest": { @@ -8862,13 +8862,15 @@ "PROFILE_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED", "THREAT_PREVENTION", "CUSTOM_MIRRORING", -"CUSTOM_INTERCEPT" +"CUSTOM_INTERCEPT", +"URL_FILTERING" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Profile type not specified.", "Profile type for threat prevention.", "Profile type for packet mirroring v2", -"Profile type for TPPI." +"Profile type for TPPI.", +"Profile type for URL filtering." ], "type": "string" }, @@ -8877,6 +8879,10 @@ "format": "google-datetime", "readOnly": true, "type": "string" +}, +"urlFilteringProfile": { +"$ref": "UrlFilteringProfile", +"description": "The URL filtering configuration for the SecurityProfile." } }, "type": "object" @@ -8934,6 +8940,10 @@ "format": "google-datetime", "readOnly": true, "type": "string" +}, +"urlFilteringProfile": { +"description": "Optional. Reference to a SecurityProfile with the UrlFiltering configuration.", +"type": "string" } }, "type": "object" @@ -9237,6 +9247,53 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"UrlFilter": { +"description": "A URL filter defines an action to take for some URL match.", +"id": "UrlFilter", +"properties": { +"filteringAction": { +"description": "Required. The action taken when this filter is applied.", +"enum": [ +"URL_FILTERING_ACTION_UNSPECIFIED", +"ALLOW", +"DENY" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Filtering action not specified.", +"The connection matching this filter will be allowed to transmit.", +"The connection matching this filter will be dropped." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"priority": { +"description": "Required. The priority of this filter within the URL Filtering Profile. Lower integers indicate higher priorities. The priority of a filter must be unique within a URL Filtering Profile.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, +"urls": { +"description": "Required. The list of strings that a URL must match with for this filter to be applied.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"UrlFilteringProfile": { +"description": "UrlFilteringProfile defines filters based on URL.", +"id": "UrlFilteringProfile", +"properties": { +"urlFilters": { +"description": "Optional. The list of filtering configs in which each config defines an action to take for some URL match.", +"items": { +"$ref": "UrlFilter" +}, +"type": "array" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "UrlList": { "description": "UrlList proto helps users to set reusable, independently manageable lists of hosts, host patterns, URLs, URL patterns.", "id": "UrlList", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/observability.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/observability.v1.json index 0a4f48500f8..bcf62e3e70a 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/observability.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/observability.v1.json @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -531,7 +531,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250822", +"revision": "20250904", "rootUrl": "https://observability.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "CancelOperationRequest": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/oracledatabase.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/oracledatabase.v1.json index c5f1c632b4b..b64eb0137de 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/oracledatabase.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/oracledatabase.v1.json @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -733,6 +733,16 @@ "parent" ], "parameters": { +"filter": { +"description": "Optional. An expression for filtering the results of the request.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"orderBy": { +"description": "Optional. An expression for ordering the results of the request.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, "pageSize": { "description": "Optional. The maximum number of items to return. If unspecified, at most 50 Exadata infrastructures will be returned. The maximum value is 1000; values above 1000 will be coerced to 1000.", "format": "int32", @@ -989,39 +999,44 @@ } } }, -"dbSystemShapes": { +"databaseCharacterSets": { "methods": { "list": { -"description": "Lists the database system shapes available for the project and location.", -"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/dbSystemShapes", +"description": "List DatabaseCharacterSets for the given project and location.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/databaseCharacterSets", "httpMethod": "GET", -"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.dbSystemShapes.list", +"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.databaseCharacterSets.list", "parameterOrder": [ "parent" ], "parameters": { +"filter": { +"description": "Optional. An expression for filtering the results of the request. Only the **character_set_type** field is supported in the following format: `character_set_type=\"{characterSetType}\"`. Accepted values include `DATABASE` and `NATIONAL`.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, "pageSize": { -"description": "Optional. The maximum number of items to return. If unspecified, at most 50 database system shapes will be returned. The maximum value is 1000; values above 1000 will be coerced to 1000.", +"description": "Optional. The maximum number of DatabaseCharacterSets to return. The service may return fewer than this value. If unspecified, at most 50 DatabaseCharacterSets will be returned. The maximum value is 1000; values above 1000 will be coerced to 1000.", "format": "int32", "location": "query", "type": "integer" }, "pageToken": { -"description": "Optional. A token identifying a page of results the server should return.", +"description": "Optional. A page token, received from a previous `ListDatabaseCharacterSets` call. Provide this to retrieve the subsequent page. When paginating, all other parameters provided to `ListDatabaseCharacterSets` must match the call that provided the page token.", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, "parent": { -"description": "Required. The parent value for Database System Shapes in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}.", +"description": "Required. The parent value for DatabaseCharacterSets in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}.", "location": "path", "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", "required": true, "type": "string" } }, -"path": "v1/{+parent}/dbSystemShapes", +"path": "v1/{+parent}/databaseCharacterSets", "response": { -"$ref": "ListDbSystemShapesResponse" +"$ref": "ListDatabaseCharacterSetsResponse" }, "scopes": [ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" @@ -1029,39 +1044,69 @@ } } }, -"entitlements": { +"databases": { "methods": { +"get": { +"description": "Gets details of a single Database.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/databases/{databasesId}", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.databases.get", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. The name of the Database resource in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{region}/databases/{database}", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/databases/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}", +"response": { +"$ref": "Database" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, "list": { -"description": "Lists the entitlements in a given project.", -"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/entitlements", +"description": "Lists all the Databases for the given project, location and DbSystem.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/databases", "httpMethod": "GET", -"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.entitlements.list", +"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.databases.list", "parameterOrder": [ "parent" ], "parameters": { +"filter": { +"description": "Optional. An expression for filtering the results of the request. list for container databases is supported only with a valid dbSystem (full resource name) filter in this format: `dbSystem=\"projects/{project}/locations/{location}/dbSystems/{dbSystemId}\"`", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, "pageSize": { -"description": "Optional. The maximum number of items to return. If unspecified, a maximum of 50 entitlements will be returned. The maximum value is 1000.", +"description": "Optional. The maximum number of items to return. If unspecified, a maximum of 50 System Versions will be returned. The maximum value is 1000; values above 1000 will be reset to 1000.", "format": "int32", "location": "query", "type": "integer" }, "pageToken": { -"description": "Optional. A token identifying a page of results the server should return.", +"description": "Optional. A token identifying the requested page of results to return. All fields except the filter should remain the same as in the request that provided this page token.", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, "parent": { -"description": "Required. The parent value for the entitlement in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}.", +"description": "Required. The parent resource name in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{region}", "location": "path", "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", "required": true, "type": "string" } }, -"path": "v1/{+parent}/entitlements", +"path": "v1/{+parent}/databases", "response": { -"$ref": "ListEntitlementsResponse" +"$ref": "ListDatabasesResponse" }, "scopes": [ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" @@ -1069,24 +1114,64 @@ } } }, -"giVersions": { +"dbSystemInitialStorageSizes": { "methods": { "list": { -"description": "Lists all the valid Oracle Grid Infrastructure (GI) versions for the given project and location.", -"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/giVersions", +"description": "Lists all the DbSystemInitialStorageSizes for the given project and location.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/dbSystemInitialStorageSizes", "httpMethod": "GET", -"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.giVersions.list", +"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.dbSystemInitialStorageSizes.list", +"parameterOrder": [ +"parent" +], +"parameters": { +"pageSize": { +"description": "Optional. The maximum number of items to return. If unspecified, a maximum of 50 System Versions will be returned. The maximum value is 1000; values above 1000 will be reset to 1000.", +"format": "int32", +"location": "query", +"type": "integer" +}, +"pageToken": { +"description": "Optional. A token identifying the requested page of results to return. All fields except the filter should remain the same as in the request that provided this page token.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"parent": { +"description": "Required. The parent value for the DbSystemInitialStorageSize resource with the format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+parent}/dbSystemInitialStorageSizes", +"response": { +"$ref": "ListDbSystemInitialStorageSizesResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +} +} +}, +"dbSystemShapes": { +"methods": { +"list": { +"description": "Lists the database system shapes available for the project and location.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/dbSystemShapes", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.dbSystemShapes.list", "parameterOrder": [ "parent" ], "parameters": { "filter": { -"description": "Optional. An expression for filtering the results of the request. Only the shape and gi_version fields are supported in this format: `shape=\"{shape}\"`.", +"description": "Optional. An expression for filtering the results of the request. Only the gcp_oracle_zone_id field is supported in this format: `gcp_oracle_zone_id=\"{gcp_oracle_zone_id}\"`.", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, "pageSize": { -"description": "Optional. The maximum number of items to return. If unspecified, a maximum of 50 Oracle Grid Infrastructure (GI) versions will be returned. The maximum value is 1000; values above 1000 will be reset to 1000.", +"description": "Optional. The maximum number of items to return. If unspecified, at most 50 database system shapes will be returned. The maximum value is 1000; values above 1000 will be coerced to 1000.", "format": "int32", "location": "query", "type": "integer" @@ -1097,16 +1182,16 @@ "type": "string" }, "parent": { -"description": "Required. The parent value for Grid Infrastructure Version in the following format: Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}.", +"description": "Required. The parent value for Database System Shapes in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}.", "location": "path", "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", "required": true, "type": "string" } }, -"path": "v1/{+parent}/giVersions", +"path": "v1/{+parent}/dbSystemShapes", "response": { -"$ref": "ListGiVersionsResponse" +"$ref": "ListDbSystemShapesResponse" }, "scopes": [ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" @@ -1114,38 +1199,38 @@ } } }, -"odbNetworks": { +"dbSystems": { "methods": { "create": { -"description": "Creates a new ODB Network in a given project and location.", -"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/odbNetworks", +"description": "Creates a new DbSystem in a given project and location.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/dbSystems", "httpMethod": "POST", -"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.odbNetworks.create", +"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.dbSystems.create", "parameterOrder": [ "parent" ], "parameters": { -"odbNetworkId": { -"description": "Required. The ID of the OdbNetwork to create. This value is restricted to (^[a-z]([a-z0-9-]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?$) and must be a maximum of 63 characters in length. The value must start with a letter and end with a letter or a number.", +"dbSystemId": { +"description": "Required. The ID of the DbSystem to create. This value is restricted to (^[a-z]([a-z0-9-]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?$) and must be a maximum of 63 characters in length. The value must start with a letter and end with a letter or a number.", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, "parent": { -"description": "Required. The parent value for the OdbNetwork in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}.", +"description": "Required. The value for parent of the DbSystem in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}.", "location": "path", "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", "required": true, "type": "string" }, "requestId": { -"description": "Optional. An optional ID to identify the request. This value is used to identify duplicate requests. If you make a request with the same request ID and the original request is still in progress or completed, the server ignores the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", +"description": "Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", "location": "query", "type": "string" } }, -"path": "v1/{+parent}/odbNetworks", +"path": "v1/{+parent}/dbSystems", "request": { -"$ref": "OdbNetwork" +"$ref": "DbSystem" }, "response": { "$ref": "Operation" @@ -1155,18 +1240,18 @@ ] }, "delete": { -"description": "Deletes a single ODB Network.", -"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/odbNetworks/{odbNetworksId}", +"description": "Deletes a single DbSystem.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/dbSystems/{dbSystemsId}", "httpMethod": "DELETE", -"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.odbNetworks.delete", +"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.dbSystems.delete", "parameterOrder": [ "name" ], "parameters": { "name": { -"description": "Required. The name of the resource in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/odbNetworks/{odb_network}.", +"description": "Required. The name of the DbSystem in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/dbSystems/{db_system}.", "location": "path", -"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/odbNetworks/[^/]+$", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/dbSystems/[^/]+$", "required": true, "type": "string" }, @@ -1185,35 +1270,35 @@ ] }, "get": { -"description": "Gets details of a single ODB Network.", -"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/odbNetworks/{odbNetworksId}", +"description": "Gets details of a single DbSystem.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/dbSystems/{dbSystemsId}", "httpMethod": "GET", -"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.odbNetworks.get", +"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.dbSystems.get", "parameterOrder": [ "name" ], "parameters": { "name": { -"description": "Required. The name of the OdbNetwork in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/odbNetworks/{odb_network}.", +"description": "Required. The name of the DbSystem in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/dbSystems/{db_system}.", "location": "path", -"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/odbNetworks/[^/]+$", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/dbSystems/[^/]+$", "required": true, "type": "string" } }, "path": "v1/{+name}", "response": { -"$ref": "OdbNetwork" +"$ref": "DbSystem" }, "scopes": [ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" ] }, "list": { -"description": "Lists the ODB Networks in a given project and location.", -"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/odbNetworks", +"description": "Lists all the DbSystems for the given project and location.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/dbSystems", "httpMethod": "GET", -"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.odbNetworks.list", +"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.dbSystems.list", "parameterOrder": [ "parent" ], @@ -1229,7 +1314,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "pageSize": { -"description": "Optional. The maximum number of items to return. If unspecified, at most 50 ODB Networks will be returned. The maximum value is 1000; values above 1000 will be coerced to 1000.", +"description": "Optional. The maximum number of items to return. If unspecified, at most 50 DbSystems will be returned. The maximum value is 1000; values above 1000 will be coerced to 1000.", "format": "int32", "location": "query", "type": "integer" @@ -1240,139 +1325,126 @@ "type": "string" }, "parent": { -"description": "Required. The parent value for the ODB Network in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}.", +"description": "Required. The parent value for DbSystems in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}.", "location": "path", "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", "required": true, "type": "string" } }, -"path": "v1/{+parent}/odbNetworks", +"path": "v1/{+parent}/dbSystems", "response": { -"$ref": "ListOdbNetworksResponse" +"$ref": "ListDbSystemsResponse" }, "scopes": [ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" ] } +} }, -"resources": { -"odbSubnets": { +"dbVersions": { "methods": { -"create": { -"description": "Creates a new ODB Subnet in a given ODB Network.", -"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/odbNetworks/{odbNetworksId}/odbSubnets", -"httpMethod": "POST", -"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.odbNetworks.odbSubnets.create", +"list": { +"description": "List DbVersions for the given project and location.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/dbVersions", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.dbVersions.list", "parameterOrder": [ "parent" ], "parameters": { -"odbSubnetId": { -"description": "Required. The ID of the OdbSubnet to create. This value is restricted to (^[a-z]([a-z0-9-]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?$) and must be a maximum of 63 characters in length. The value must start with a letter and end with a letter or a number.", +"filter": { +"description": "Optional. Filter expression that matches a subset of the DbVersions to show. The supported filter for dbSystem creation is `db_system_shape = {db_system_shape} AND storage_management = {storage_management}`. If no filter is provided, all DbVersions will be returned.", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, -"parent": { -"description": "Required. The parent value for the OdbSubnet in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/odbNetworks/{odb_network}.", -"location": "path", -"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/odbNetworks/[^/]+$", -"required": true, -"type": "string" +"pageSize": { +"description": "Optional. The maximum number of items to return. If unspecified, a maximum of 50 System Versions will be returned. The maximum value is 1000; values above 1000 will be reset to 1000.", +"format": "int32", +"location": "query", +"type": "integer" }, -"requestId": { -"description": "Optional. An optional ID to identify the request. This value is used to identify duplicate requests. If you make a request with the same request ID and the original request is still in progress or completed, the server ignores the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", +"pageToken": { +"description": "Optional. A token identifying the requested page of results to return. All fields except the filter should remain the same as in the request that provided this page token.", "location": "query", "type": "string" -} -}, -"path": "v1/{+parent}/odbSubnets", -"request": { -"$ref": "OdbSubnet" -}, -"response": { -"$ref": "Operation" -}, -"scopes": [ -"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" -] }, -"delete": { -"description": "Deletes a single ODB Subnet.", -"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/odbNetworks/{odbNetworksId}/odbSubnets/{odbSubnetsId}", -"httpMethod": "DELETE", -"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.odbNetworks.odbSubnets.delete", -"parameterOrder": [ -"name" -], -"parameters": { -"name": { -"description": "Required. The name of the resource in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{region}/odbNetworks/{odb_network}/odbSubnets/{odb_subnet}.", +"parent": { +"description": "Required. The parent value for the DbVersion resource with the format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}", "location": "path", -"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/odbNetworks/[^/]+/odbSubnets/[^/]+$", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", "required": true, "type": "string" -}, -"requestId": { -"description": "Optional. An optional ID to identify the request. This value is used to identify duplicate requests. If you make a request with the same request ID and the original request is still in progress or completed, the server ignores the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", -"location": "query", -"type": "string" } }, -"path": "v1/{+name}", +"path": "v1/{+parent}/dbVersions", "response": { -"$ref": "Operation" +"$ref": "ListDbVersionsResponse" }, "scopes": [ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" ] +} +} }, -"get": { -"description": "Gets details of a single ODB Subnet.", -"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/odbNetworks/{odbNetworksId}/odbSubnets/{odbSubnetsId}", +"entitlements": { +"methods": { +"list": { +"description": "Lists the entitlements in a given project.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/entitlements", "httpMethod": "GET", -"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.odbNetworks.odbSubnets.get", +"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.entitlements.list", "parameterOrder": [ -"name" +"parent" ], "parameters": { -"name": { -"description": "Required. The name of the OdbSubnet in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/odbNetworks/{odb_network}/odbSubnets/{odb_subnet}.", +"pageSize": { +"description": "Optional. The maximum number of items to return. If unspecified, a maximum of 50 entitlements will be returned. The maximum value is 1000.", +"format": "int32", +"location": "query", +"type": "integer" +}, +"pageToken": { +"description": "Optional. A token identifying a page of results the server should return.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"parent": { +"description": "Required. The parent value for the entitlement in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}.", "location": "path", -"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/odbNetworks/[^/]+/odbSubnets/[^/]+$", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", "required": true, "type": "string" } }, -"path": "v1/{+name}", +"path": "v1/{+parent}/entitlements", "response": { -"$ref": "OdbSubnet" +"$ref": "ListEntitlementsResponse" }, "scopes": [ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" ] +} +} }, +"giVersions": { +"methods": { "list": { -"description": "Lists all the ODB Subnets in a given ODB Network.", -"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/odbNetworks/{odbNetworksId}/odbSubnets", +"description": "Lists all the valid Oracle Grid Infrastructure (GI) versions for the given project and location.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/giVersions", "httpMethod": "GET", -"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.odbNetworks.odbSubnets.list", +"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.giVersions.list", "parameterOrder": [ "parent" ], "parameters": { "filter": { -"description": "Optional. An expression for filtering the results of the request.", -"location": "query", -"type": "string" -}, -"orderBy": { -"description": "Optional. An expression for ordering the results of the request.", +"description": "Optional. An expression for filtering the results of the request. Only the shape, gcp_oracle_zone and gi_version fields are supported in this format: `shape=\"{shape}\"`.", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, "pageSize": { -"description": "Optional. The maximum number of items to return. If unspecified, at most 50 ODB Networks will be returned. The maximum value is 1000; values above 1000 will be coerced to 1000.", +"description": "Optional. The maximum number of items to return. If unspecified, a maximum of 50 Oracle Grid Infrastructure (GI) versions will be returned. The maximum value is 1000; values above 1000 will be reset to 1000.", "format": "int32", "location": "query", "type": "integer" @@ -1383,28 +1455,314 @@ "type": "string" }, "parent": { -"description": "Required. The parent value for the OdbSubnet in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/odbNetworks/{odb_network}.", +"description": "Required. The parent value for Grid Infrastructure Version in the following format: Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}.", "location": "path", -"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/odbNetworks/[^/]+$", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", "required": true, "type": "string" } }, -"path": "v1/{+parent}/odbSubnets", +"path": "v1/{+parent}/giVersions", "response": { -"$ref": "ListOdbSubnetsResponse" +"$ref": "ListGiVersionsResponse" }, "scopes": [ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" ] } } -} -} }, -"operations": { +"odbNetworks": { "methods": { -"cancel": { +"create": { +"description": "Creates a new ODB Network in a given project and location.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/odbNetworks", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.odbNetworks.create", +"parameterOrder": [ +"parent" +], +"parameters": { +"odbNetworkId": { +"description": "Required. The ID of the OdbNetwork to create. This value is restricted to (^[a-z]([a-z0-9-]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?$) and must be a maximum of 63 characters in length. The value must start with a letter and end with a letter or a number.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"parent": { +"description": "Required. The parent value for the OdbNetwork in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"requestId": { +"description": "Optional. An optional ID to identify the request. This value is used to identify duplicate requests. If you make a request with the same request ID and the original request is still in progress or completed, the server ignores the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+parent}/odbNetworks", +"request": { +"$ref": "OdbNetwork" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"delete": { +"description": "Deletes a single ODB Network.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/odbNetworks/{odbNetworksId}", +"httpMethod": "DELETE", +"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.odbNetworks.delete", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. The name of the resource in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/odbNetworks/{odb_network}.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/odbNetworks/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"requestId": { +"description": "Optional. An optional ID to identify the request. This value is used to identify duplicate requests. If you make a request with the same request ID and the original request is still in progress or completed, the server ignores the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}", +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"get": { +"description": "Gets details of a single ODB Network.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/odbNetworks/{odbNetworksId}", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.odbNetworks.get", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. The name of the OdbNetwork in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/odbNetworks/{odb_network}.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/odbNetworks/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}", +"response": { +"$ref": "OdbNetwork" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"list": { +"description": "Lists the ODB Networks in a given project and location.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/odbNetworks", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.odbNetworks.list", +"parameterOrder": [ +"parent" +], +"parameters": { +"filter": { +"description": "Optional. An expression for filtering the results of the request.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"orderBy": { +"description": "Optional. An expression for ordering the results of the request.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"pageSize": { +"description": "Optional. The maximum number of items to return. If unspecified, at most 50 ODB Networks will be returned. The maximum value is 1000; values above 1000 will be coerced to 1000.", +"format": "int32", +"location": "query", +"type": "integer" +}, +"pageToken": { +"description": "Optional. A token identifying a page of results the server should return.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"parent": { +"description": "Required. The parent value for the ODB Network in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+parent}/odbNetworks", +"response": { +"$ref": "ListOdbNetworksResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +} +}, +"resources": { +"odbSubnets": { +"methods": { +"create": { +"description": "Creates a new ODB Subnet in a given ODB Network.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/odbNetworks/{odbNetworksId}/odbSubnets", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.odbNetworks.odbSubnets.create", +"parameterOrder": [ +"parent" +], +"parameters": { +"odbSubnetId": { +"description": "Required. The ID of the OdbSubnet to create. This value is restricted to (^[a-z]([a-z0-9-]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?$) and must be a maximum of 63 characters in length. The value must start with a letter and end with a letter or a number.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"parent": { +"description": "Required. The parent value for the OdbSubnet in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/odbNetworks/{odb_network}.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/odbNetworks/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"requestId": { +"description": "Optional. An optional ID to identify the request. This value is used to identify duplicate requests. If you make a request with the same request ID and the original request is still in progress or completed, the server ignores the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+parent}/odbSubnets", +"request": { +"$ref": "OdbSubnet" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"delete": { +"description": "Deletes a single ODB Subnet.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/odbNetworks/{odbNetworksId}/odbSubnets/{odbSubnetsId}", +"httpMethod": "DELETE", +"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.odbNetworks.odbSubnets.delete", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. The name of the resource in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{region}/odbNetworks/{odb_network}/odbSubnets/{odb_subnet}.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/odbNetworks/[^/]+/odbSubnets/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"requestId": { +"description": "Optional. An optional ID to identify the request. This value is used to identify duplicate requests. If you make a request with the same request ID and the original request is still in progress or completed, the server ignores the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}", +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"get": { +"description": "Gets details of a single ODB Subnet.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/odbNetworks/{odbNetworksId}/odbSubnets/{odbSubnetsId}", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.odbNetworks.odbSubnets.get", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. The name of the OdbSubnet in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/odbNetworks/{odb_network}/odbSubnets/{odb_subnet}.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/odbNetworks/[^/]+/odbSubnets/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}", +"response": { +"$ref": "OdbSubnet" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"list": { +"description": "Lists all the ODB Subnets in a given ODB Network.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/odbNetworks/{odbNetworksId}/odbSubnets", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.odbNetworks.odbSubnets.list", +"parameterOrder": [ +"parent" +], +"parameters": { +"filter": { +"description": "Optional. An expression for filtering the results of the request.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"orderBy": { +"description": "Optional. An expression for ordering the results of the request.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"pageSize": { +"description": "Optional. The maximum number of items to return. If unspecified, at most 50 ODB Networks will be returned. The maximum value is 1000; values above 1000 will be coerced to 1000.", +"format": "int32", +"location": "query", +"type": "integer" +}, +"pageToken": { +"description": "Optional. A token identifying a page of results the server should return.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"parent": { +"description": "Required. The parent value for the OdbSubnet in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/odbNetworks/{odb_network}.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/odbNetworks/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+parent}/odbSubnets", +"response": { +"$ref": "ListOdbSubnetsResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +} +} +} +} +}, +"operations": { +"methods": { +"cancel": { "description": "Starts asynchronous cancellation on a long-running operation. The server makes a best effort to cancel the operation, but success is not guaranteed. If the server doesn't support this method, it returns `google.rpc.Code.UNIMPLEMENTED`. Clients can use Operations.GetOperation or other methods to check whether the cancellation succeeded or whether the operation completed despite cancellation. On successful cancellation, the operation is not deleted; instead, it becomes an operation with an Operation.error value with a google.rpc.Status.code of `1`, corresponding to `Code.CANCELLED`.", "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/operations/{operationsId}:cancel", "httpMethod": "POST", @@ -1449,75 +1807,145 @@ "type": "string" } }, -"path": "v1/{+name}", +"path": "v1/{+name}", +"response": { +"$ref": "Empty" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"get": { +"description": "Gets the latest state of a long-running operation. Clients can use this method to poll the operation result at intervals as recommended by the API service.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/operations/{operationsId}", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.operations.get", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "The name of the operation resource.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/operations/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}", +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"list": { +"description": "Lists operations that match the specified filter in the request. If the server doesn't support this method, it returns `UNIMPLEMENTED`.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/operations", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.operations.list", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"filter": { +"description": "The standard list filter.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"name": { +"description": "The name of the operation's parent resource.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"pageSize": { +"description": "The standard list page size.", +"format": "int32", +"location": "query", +"type": "integer" +}, +"pageToken": { +"description": "The standard list page token.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}/operations", "response": { -"$ref": "Empty" +"$ref": "ListOperationsResponse" }, "scopes": [ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" ] +} +} }, +"pluggableDatabases": { +"methods": { "get": { -"description": "Gets the latest state of a long-running operation. Clients can use this method to poll the operation result at intervals as recommended by the API service.", -"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/operations/{operationsId}", +"description": "Gets details of a single PluggableDatabase.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/pluggableDatabases/{pluggableDatabasesId}", "httpMethod": "GET", -"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.operations.get", +"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.pluggableDatabases.get", "parameterOrder": [ "name" ], "parameters": { "name": { -"description": "The name of the operation resource.", +"description": "Required. The name of the PluggableDatabase resource in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{region}/pluggableDatabases/{pluggable_database}", "location": "path", -"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/operations/[^/]+$", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/pluggableDatabases/[^/]+$", "required": true, "type": "string" } }, "path": "v1/{+name}", "response": { -"$ref": "Operation" +"$ref": "PluggableDatabase" }, "scopes": [ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" ] }, "list": { -"description": "Lists operations that match the specified filter in the request. If the server doesn't support this method, it returns `UNIMPLEMENTED`.", -"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/operations", +"description": "Lists all the PluggableDatabases for the given project, location and Container Database.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/pluggableDatabases", "httpMethod": "GET", -"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.operations.list", +"id": "oracledatabase.projects.locations.pluggableDatabases.list", "parameterOrder": [ -"name" +"parent" ], "parameters": { "filter": { -"description": "The standard list filter.", +"description": "Optional. An expression for filtering the results of the request. List for pluggable databases is supported only with a valid container database (full resource name) filter in this format: `database=\"projects/{project}/locations/{location}/databases/{database}\"`", "location": "query", "type": "string" }, -"name": { -"description": "The name of the operation's parent resource.", -"location": "path", -"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", -"required": true, -"type": "string" -}, "pageSize": { -"description": "The standard list page size.", +"description": "Optional. The maximum number of PluggableDatabases to return. The service may return fewer than this value.", "format": "int32", "location": "query", "type": "integer" }, "pageToken": { -"description": "The standard list page token.", +"description": "Optional. A page token, received from a previous `ListPluggableDatabases` call. Provide this to retrieve the subsequent page. When paginating, all other parameters provided to `ListPluggableDatabases` must match the call that provided the page token.", "location": "query", "type": "string" +}, +"parent": { +"description": "Required. The parent, which owns this collection of PluggableDatabases. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" } }, -"path": "v1/{+name}/operations", +"path": "v1/{+parent}/pluggableDatabases", "response": { -"$ref": "ListOperationsResponse" +"$ref": "ListPluggableDatabasesResponse" }, "scopes": [ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" @@ -1530,7 +1958,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250825", +"revision": "20250914", "rootUrl": "https://oracledatabase.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AllConnectionStrings": { @@ -2593,6 +3021,33 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"BackupDestinationDetails": { +"description": "The details of the database backup destination.", +"id": "BackupDestinationDetails", +"properties": { +"type": { +"description": "Optional. The type of the database backup destination.", +"enum": [ +"BACKUP_DESTINATION_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED", +"NFS", +"RECOVERY_APPLIANCE", +"OBJECT_STORE", +"LOCAL", +"DBRS" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Default unspecified value.", +"Backup destination type is NFS.", +"Backup destination type is Recovery Appliance.", +"Backup destination type is Object Store.", +"Backup destination type is Local.", +"Backup destination type is DBRS." +], +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "CancelOperationRequest": { "description": "The request message for Operations.CancelOperation.", "id": "CancelOperationRequest", @@ -2902,6 +3357,11 @@ "readOnly": true, "type": "string" }, +"identityConnector": { +"$ref": "IdentityConnector", +"description": "Output only. The identity connector details which will allow OCI to securely access the resources in the customer project.", +"readOnly": true +}, "labels": { "additionalProperties": { "type": "string" @@ -3184,6 +3644,138 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"DataCollectionOptionsDbSystem": { +"description": "Data collection options for DbSystem.", +"id": "DataCollectionOptionsDbSystem", +"properties": { +"isDiagnosticsEventsEnabled": { +"description": "Optional. Indicates whether to enable data collection for diagnostics.", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"isIncidentLogsEnabled": { +"description": "Optional. Indicates whether to enable incident logs and trace collection.", +"type": "boolean" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"Database": { +"description": "Details of the Database resource. https://docs.oracle.com/en-us/iaas/api/#/en/database/20160918/Database/", +"id": "Database", +"properties": { +"adminPassword": { +"description": "Required. The password for the default ADMIN user.", +"type": "string" +}, +"characterSet": { +"description": "Optional. The character set for the database. The default is AL32UTF8.", +"type": "string" +}, +"createTime": { +"description": "Output only. The date and time that the Database was created.", +"format": "google-datetime", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"databaseId": { +"description": "Optional. The database ID of the Database.", +"type": "string" +}, +"dbHomeName": { +"description": "Optional. The name of the DbHome resource associated with the Database.", +"type": "string" +}, +"dbName": { +"description": "Optional. The database name. The name must begin with an alphabetic character and can contain a maximum of eight alphanumeric characters. Special characters are not permitted.", +"type": "string" +}, +"dbUniqueName": { +"description": "Optional. The DB_UNIQUE_NAME of the Oracle Database being backed up.", +"type": "string" +}, +"gcpOracleZone": { +"description": "Output only. The GCP Oracle zone where the Database is created.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"name": { +"description": "Identifier. The name of the Database resource in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{region}/databases/{database}", +"type": "string" +}, +"ncharacterSet": { +"description": "Optional. The national character set for the database. The default is AL16UTF16.", +"type": "string" +}, +"ociUrl": { +"description": "Output only. HTTPS link to OCI resources exposed to Customer via UI Interface.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"opsInsightsStatus": { +"description": "Output only. The Status of Operations Insights for this Database.", +"enum": [ +"OPERATIONS_INSIGHTS_STATUS_UNSPECIFIED", +"ENABLING", +"ENABLED", +"DISABLING", +"NOT_ENABLED", +"FAILED_ENABLING", +"FAILED_DISABLING" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Default unspecified value.", +"Indicates that the operations insights are being enabled.", +"Indicates that the operations insights are enabled.", +"Indicates that the operations insights are being disabled.", +"Indicates that the operations insights are not enabled.", +"Indicates that the operations insights failed to enable.", +"Indicates that the operations insights failed to disable." +], +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"properties": { +"$ref": "DatabaseProperties", +"description": "Optional. The properties of the Database." +}, +"tdeWalletPassword": { +"description": "Optional. The TDE wallet password for the database.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"DatabaseCharacterSet": { +"description": "Details of the Database character set resource.", +"id": "DatabaseCharacterSet", +"properties": { +"characterSet": { +"description": "Output only. The character set name for the Database which is the ID in the resource name.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"characterSetType": { +"description": "Output only. The character set type for the Database.", +"enum": [ +"CHARACTER_SET_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED", +"DATABASE", +"NATIONAL" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Character set type is not specified.", +"Character set type is set to database.", +"Character set type is set to national." +], +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"name": { +"description": "Identifier. The name of the Database Character Set resource in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{region}/databaseCharacterSets/{database_character_set}", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "DatabaseConnectionStringProfile": { "description": "The connection string profile to allow clients to group. https://docs.oracle.com/en-us/iaas/api/#/en/database/20160918/datatypes/DatabaseConnectionStringProfile", "id": "DatabaseConnectionStringProfile", @@ -3290,16 +3882,268 @@ ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Default unspecified value.", -"Server", -"Mutual" +"Server", +"Mutual" +], +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"value": { +"description": "Output only. The value of the connection string.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"DatabaseManagementConfig": { +"description": "The configuration of the Database Management service.", +"id": "DatabaseManagementConfig", +"properties": { +"managementState": { +"description": "Output only. The status of the Database Management service.", +"enum": [ +"MANAGEMENT_STATE_UNSPECIFIED", +"ENABLING", +"ENABLED", +"DISABLING", +"DISABLED", +"UPDATING", +"FAILED_ENABLING", +"FAILED_DISABLING", +"FAILED_UPDATING" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"The status is not specified.", +"The Database Management service is enabling.", +"The Database Management service is enabled.", +"The Database Management service is disabling.", +"The Database Management service is disabled.", +"The Database Management service is updating.", +"The Database Management service failed to enable.", +"The Database Management service failed to disable.", +"The Database Management service failed to update." +], +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"managementType": { +"description": "Output only. The Database Management type.", +"enum": [ +"MANAGEMENT_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED", +"BASIC", +"ADVANCED" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"The type is not specified.", +"Basic Database Management.", +"Advanced Database Management." +], +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"DatabaseProperties": { +"description": "The properties of a Database.", +"id": "DatabaseProperties", +"properties": { +"databaseManagementConfig": { +"$ref": "DatabaseManagementConfig", +"description": "Output only. The Database Management config.", +"readOnly": true +}, +"dbBackupConfig": { +"$ref": "DbBackupConfig", +"description": "Optional. Backup options for the Database." +}, +"dbVersion": { +"description": "Required. The Oracle Database version.", +"type": "string" +}, +"state": { +"description": "Output only. State of the Database.", +"enum": [ +"DATABASE_LIFECYCLE_STATE_UNSPECIFIED", +"PROVISIONING", +"AVAILABLE", +"UPDATING", +"BACKUP_IN_PROGRESS", +"UPGRADING", +"CONVERTING", +"TERMINATING", +"TERMINATED", +"RESTORE_FAILED", +"FAILED" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Default unspecified value.", +"Indicates that the resource is in provisioning state.", +"Indicates that the resource is in available state.", +"Indicates that the resource is in updating state.", +"Indicates that the resource is in backup in progress state.", +"Indicates that the resource is in upgrading state.", +"Indicates that the resource is in converting state.", +"Indicates that the resource is in terminating state.", +"Indicates that the resource is in terminated state.", +"Indicates that the resource is in restore failed state.", +"Indicates that the resource is in failed state." +], +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"DbBackupConfig": { +"description": "Backup Options for the Database.", +"id": "DbBackupConfig", +"properties": { +"autoBackupEnabled": { +"description": "Optional. If set to true, enables automatic backups on the database.", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"autoFullBackupDay": { +"description": "Optional. The day of the week on which the full backup should be performed on the database. If no value is provided, it will default to Sunday.", +"enum": [ +"DAY_OF_WEEK_UNSPECIFIED", +"MONDAY", +"TUESDAY", +"WEDNESDAY", +"THURSDAY", +"FRIDAY", +"SATURDAY", +"SUNDAY" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"The day of the week is unspecified.", +"Monday", +"Tuesday", +"Wednesday", +"Thursday", +"Friday", +"Saturday", +"Sunday" +], +"type": "string" +}, +"autoFullBackupWindow": { +"description": "Optional. The window in which the full backup should be performed on the database. If no value is provided, the default is anytime.", +"enum": [ +"BACKUP_WINDOW_UNSPECIFIED", +"SLOT_ONE", +"SLOT_TWO", +"SLOT_THREE", +"SLOT_FOUR", +"SLOT_FIVE", +"SLOT_SIX", +"SLOT_SEVEN", +"SLOT_EIGHT", +"SLOT_NINE", +"SLOT_TEN", +"SLOT_ELEVEN", +"SLOT_TWELVE" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Default unspecified value.", +"12:00 AM - 2:00 AM", +"2:00 AM - 4:00 AM", +"4:00 AM - 6:00 AM", +"6:00 AM - 8:00 AM", +"8:00 AM - 10:00 AM", +"10:00 AM - 12:00 PM", +"12:00 PM - 2:00 PM", +"2:00 PM - 4:00 PM", +"4:00 PM - 6:00 PM", +"6:00 PM - 8:00 PM", +"8:00 PM - 10:00 PM", +"10:00 PM - 12:00 AM" +], +"type": "string" +}, +"autoIncrementalBackupWindow": { +"description": "Optional. The window in which the incremental backup should be performed on the database. If no value is provided, the default is anytime except the auto full backup day.", +"enum": [ +"BACKUP_WINDOW_UNSPECIFIED", +"SLOT_ONE", +"SLOT_TWO", +"SLOT_THREE", +"SLOT_FOUR", +"SLOT_FIVE", +"SLOT_SIX", +"SLOT_SEVEN", +"SLOT_EIGHT", +"SLOT_NINE", +"SLOT_TEN", +"SLOT_ELEVEN", +"SLOT_TWELVE" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Default unspecified value.", +"12:00 AM - 2:00 AM", +"2:00 AM - 4:00 AM", +"4:00 AM - 6:00 AM", +"6:00 AM - 8:00 AM", +"8:00 AM - 10:00 AM", +"10:00 AM - 12:00 PM", +"12:00 PM - 2:00 PM", +"2:00 PM - 4:00 PM", +"4:00 PM - 6:00 PM", +"6:00 PM - 8:00 PM", +"8:00 PM - 10:00 PM", +"10:00 PM - 12:00 AM" +], +"type": "string" +}, +"backupDeletionPolicy": { +"description": "Optional. This defines when the backups will be deleted after Database termination.", +"enum": [ +"BACKUP_DELETION_POLICY_UNSPECIFIED", +"DELETE_IMMEDIATELY", +"DELETE_AFTER_RETENTION_PERIOD" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Default unspecified value.", +"Keeps the backup for predefined time i.e. 72 hours and then delete permanently.", +"Keeps the backups as per the policy defined for database backups." ], -"readOnly": true, "type": "string" }, -"value": { -"description": "Output only. The value of the connection string.", -"readOnly": true, +"backupDestinationDetails": { +"description": "Optional. Details of the database backup destinations.", +"items": { +"$ref": "BackupDestinationDetails" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"retentionPeriodDays": { +"description": "Optional. The number of days an automatic backup is retained before being automatically deleted. This value determines the earliest point in time to which a database can be restored. Min: 1, Max: 60.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"DbHome": { +"description": "Details of the Database Home resource.", +"id": "DbHome", +"properties": { +"database": { +"$ref": "Database", +"description": "Required. The Database resource." +}, +"dbVersion": { +"description": "Required. A valid Oracle Database version. For a list of supported versions, use the ListDbVersions operation.", +"type": "string" +}, +"displayName": { +"description": "Optional. The display name for the Database Home. The name does not have to be unique within your project.", "type": "string" +}, +"isUnifiedAuditingEnabled": { +"description": "Optional. Whether unified auditing is enabled for the Database Home.", +"type": "boolean" } }, "type": "object" @@ -3489,6 +4333,310 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"DbSystem": { +"description": "Details of the DbSystem (BaseDB) resource. https://docs.oracle.com/en-us/iaas/api/#/en/database/20160918/DbSystem/", +"id": "DbSystem", +"properties": { +"createTime": { +"description": "Output only. The date and time that the DbSystem was created.", +"format": "google-datetime", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"displayName": { +"description": "Required. The display name for the System db. The name does not have to be unique within your project.", +"type": "string" +}, +"entitlementId": { +"description": "Output only. The ID of the subscription entitlement associated with the DbSystem", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"gcpOracleZone": { +"description": "Optional. The GCP Oracle zone where Oracle DbSystem is hosted. Example: us-east4-b-r2. If not specified, the system will pick a zone based on availability.", +"type": "string" +}, +"labels": { +"additionalProperties": { +"type": "string" +}, +"description": "Optional. The labels or tags associated with the DbSystem.", +"type": "object" +}, +"name": { +"description": "Identifier. The name of the DbSystem resource in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{region}/dbSystems/{db_system}", +"type": "string" +}, +"ociUrl": { +"description": "Output only. HTTPS link to OCI resources exposed to Customer via UI Interface.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"odbNetwork": { +"description": "Optional. The name of the OdbNetwork associated with the DbSystem. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/odbNetworks/{odb_network} It is optional but if specified, this should match the parent ODBNetwork of the OdbSubnet.", +"type": "string" +}, +"odbSubnet": { +"description": "Required. The name of the OdbSubnet associated with the DbSystem for IP allocation. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/odbNetworks/{odb_network}/odbSubnets/{odb_subnet}", +"type": "string" +}, +"properties": { +"$ref": "DbSystemProperties", +"description": "Optional. The properties of the DbSystem." +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"DbSystemInitialStorageSize": { +"description": "Summary of the DbSystem initial storage size.", +"id": "DbSystemInitialStorageSize", +"properties": { +"name": { +"description": "Output only. The name of the resource.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"properties": { +"$ref": "DbSystemInitialStorageSizeProperties", +"description": "Output only. The properties of the DbSystem initial storage size summary.", +"readOnly": true +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"DbSystemInitialStorageSizeProperties": { +"description": "The properties of a DbSystem initial storage size summary.", +"id": "DbSystemInitialStorageSizeProperties", +"properties": { +"launchFromBackupStorageSizeDetails": { +"description": "Output only. List of storage disk details available for launches from backup.", +"items": { +"$ref": "StorageSizeDetails" +}, +"readOnly": true, +"type": "array" +}, +"shapeType": { +"description": "Output only. VM shape platform type", +"enum": [ +"SHAPE_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED", +"STANDARD_X86" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unspecified shape type.", +"Standard X86." +], +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"storageManagement": { +"description": "Output only. The storage option used in DB system.", +"enum": [ +"STORAGE_MANAGEMENT_UNSPECIFIED", +"ASM", +"LVM" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unspecified storage management.", +"Automatic Storage Management.", +"Logical Volume Management." +], +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"storageSizeDetails": { +"description": "Output only. List of storage disk details.", +"items": { +"$ref": "StorageSizeDetails" +}, +"readOnly": true, +"type": "array" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"DbSystemOptions": { +"description": "Details of the DbSystem Options.", +"id": "DbSystemOptions", +"properties": { +"storageManagement": { +"description": "Optional. The storage option used in DB system.", +"enum": [ +"STORAGE_MANAGEMENT_UNSPECIFIED", +"ASM", +"LVM" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"The storage management is unspecified.", +"Automatic storage management.", +"Logical Volume management." +], +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"DbSystemProperties": { +"description": "The properties of a DbSystem.", +"id": "DbSystemProperties", +"properties": { +"computeCount": { +"description": "Required. The number of CPU cores to enable for the DbSystem.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, +"computeModel": { +"description": "Optional. The compute model of the DbSystem.", +"enum": [ +"COMPUTE_MODEL_UNSPECIFIED", +"ECPU", +"OCPU" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"The compute model is unspecified.", +"The compute model is virtual.", +"The compute model is physical." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"dataCollectionOptions": { +"$ref": "DataCollectionOptionsDbSystem", +"description": "Optional. Data collection options for diagnostics." +}, +"dataStorageSizeGb": { +"description": "Optional. The data storage size in GB that is currently available to DbSystems.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, +"databaseEdition": { +"description": "Required. The database edition of the DbSystem.", +"enum": [ +"DB_SYSTEM_DATABASE_EDITION_UNSPECIFIED", +"STANDARD_EDITION", +"ENTERPRISE_EDITION", +"ENTERPRISE_EDITION_HIGH_PERFORMANCE" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"The database edition is unspecified.", +"The database edition is Standard.", +"The database edition is Enterprise.", +"The database edition is Enterprise Edition." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"dbHome": { +"$ref": "DbHome", +"description": "Optional. Details for creating a Database Home." +}, +"dbSystemOptions": { +"$ref": "DbSystemOptions", +"description": "Optional. The options for the DbSystem." +}, +"domain": { +"description": "Optional. The host domain name of the DbSystem.", +"type": "string" +}, +"hostname": { +"description": "Output only. The hostname of the DbSystem.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"hostnamePrefix": { +"description": "Optional. Prefix for DB System host names.", +"type": "string" +}, +"initialDataStorageSizeGb": { +"description": "Required. The initial data storage size in GB.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, +"licenseModel": { +"description": "Required. The license model of the DbSystem.", +"enum": [ +"LICENSE_MODEL_UNSPECIFIED", +"LICENSE_INCLUDED", +"BRING_YOUR_OWN_LICENSE" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"The license model is unspecified.", +"The license model is included.", +"The license model is bring your own license." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"lifecycleState": { +"description": "Output only. State of the DbSystem.", +"enum": [ +"DB_SYSTEM_LIFECYCLE_STATE_UNSPECIFIED", +"PROVISIONING", +"AVAILABLE", +"UPDATING", +"TERMINATING", +"TERMINATED", +"FAILED", +"MIGRATED", +"MAINTENANCE_IN_PROGRESS", +"NEEDS_ATTENTION", +"UPGRADING" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Default unspecified value.", +"Indicates that the resource is in provisioning state.", +"Indicates that the resource is in available state.", +"Indicates that the resource is in updating state.", +"Indicates that the resource is in terminating state.", +"Indicates that the resource is in terminated state.", +"Indicates that the resource is in failed state.", +"Indicates that the resource has been migrated.", +"Indicates that the resource is in maintenance in progress state.", +"Indicates that the resource needs attention.", +"Indicates that the resource is upgrading." +], +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"memorySizeGb": { +"description": "Optional. The memory size in GB.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, +"nodeCount": { +"description": "Optional. The number of nodes in the DbSystem.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, +"ocid": { +"description": "Output only. OCID of the DbSystem.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"privateIp": { +"description": "Optional. The private IP address of the DbSystem.", +"type": "string" +}, +"recoStorageSizeGb": { +"description": "Optional. The reco/redo storage size in GB.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, +"shape": { +"description": "Required. Shape of DB System.", +"type": "string" +}, +"sshPublicKeys": { +"description": "Required. SSH public keys to be stored with the DbSystem.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"timeZone": { +"$ref": "TimeZone", +"description": "Optional. Time zone of the DbSystem." +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "DbSystemShape": { "description": "Details of the Database System Shapes resource. https://docs.oracle.com/en-us/iaas/api/#/en/database/20160918/DbSystemShapeSummary/", "id": "DbSystemShape", @@ -3528,28 +4676,91 @@ "format": "int32", "type": "integer" }, -"minMemoryPerNodeGb": { -"description": "Optional. Minimum memory per node in gigabytes.", -"format": "int32", -"type": "integer" +"minMemoryPerNodeGb": { +"description": "Optional. Minimum memory per node in gigabytes.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, +"minNodeCount": { +"description": "Optional. Minimum number of database servers.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, +"minStorageCount": { +"description": "Optional. Minimum number of storage servers.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, +"name": { +"description": "Identifier. The name of the Database System Shape resource with the format: projects/{project}/locations/{region}/dbSystemShapes/{db_system_shape}", +"type": "string" +}, +"shape": { +"description": "Optional. shape", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"DbVersion": { +"description": "A valid Oracle Database version.", +"id": "DbVersion", +"properties": { +"name": { +"description": "Output only. The name of the DbVersion resource in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{region}/dbVersions/{db_version}", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"properties": { +"$ref": "DbVersionProperties", +"description": "Output only. The properties of the DbVersion.", +"readOnly": true +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"DbVersionProperties": { +"description": "The properties of a DbVersion.", +"id": "DbVersionProperties", +"properties": { +"isLatestForMajorVersion": { +"description": "Output only. True if this version of the Oracle Database software is the latest version for a release.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "boolean" +}, +"isPreviewDbVersion": { +"description": "Output only. True if this version of the Oracle Database software is the preview version.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "boolean" }, -"minNodeCount": { -"description": "Optional. Minimum number of database servers.", -"format": "int32", -"type": "integer" +"isUpgradeSupported": { +"description": "Output only. True if this version of the Oracle Database software is supported for Upgrade.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "boolean" }, -"minStorageCount": { -"description": "Optional. Minimum number of storage servers.", -"format": "int32", -"type": "integer" +"supportsPdb": { +"description": "Output only. True if this version of the Oracle Database software supports pluggable databases.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "boolean" }, -"name": { -"description": "Identifier. The name of the Database System Shape resource with the format: projects/{project}/locations/{region}/dbSystemShapes/{db_system_shape}", +"version": { +"description": "Output only. A valid Oracle Database version.", +"readOnly": true, "type": "string" +} }, -"shape": { -"description": "Optional. shape", +"type": "object" +}, +"DefinedTagValue": { +"description": "Wrapper message for the value of a defined tag.", +"id": "DefinedTagValue", +"properties": { +"tags": { +"additionalProperties": { "type": "string" +}, +"description": "The tags within the namespace.", +"type": "object" } }, "type": "object" @@ -3658,6 +4869,37 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"IdentityConnector": { +"description": "The identity connector details which will allow OCI to securely access the resources in the customer project.", +"id": "IdentityConnector", +"properties": { +"connectionState": { +"description": "Output only. The connection state of the identity connector.", +"enum": [ +"CONNECTION_STATE_UNSPECIFIED", +"CONNECTED", +"PARTIALLY_CONNECTED", +"DISCONNECTED", +"UNKNOWN" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Default unspecified value.", +"The identity pool connection is connected.", +"The identity pool connection is partially connected.", +"The identity pool connection is disconnected.", +"The identity pool connection is in an unknown state." +], +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"serviceAgentEmail": { +"description": "Output only. A google managed service account on which customers can grant roles to access resources in the customer project. Example: `p176944527254-55-75119d87fd8f@gcp-sa-oci.iam.gserviceaccount.com`", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "ListAutonomousDatabaseBackupsResponse": { "description": "The response for `AutonomousDatabaseBackup.List`.", "id": "ListAutonomousDatabaseBackupsResponse", @@ -3766,6 +5008,42 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"ListDatabaseCharacterSetsResponse": { +"description": "The response for `DatabaseCharacterSet.List`.", +"id": "ListDatabaseCharacterSetsResponse", +"properties": { +"databaseCharacterSets": { +"description": "The list of DatabaseCharacterSets.", +"items": { +"$ref": "DatabaseCharacterSet" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"nextPageToken": { +"description": "A token identifying a page of results the server should return.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"ListDatabasesResponse": { +"description": "The response for `Database.List`.", +"id": "ListDatabasesResponse", +"properties": { +"databases": { +"description": "The list of Databases.", +"items": { +"$ref": "Database" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"nextPageToken": { +"description": "A token identifying a page of results the server should return.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "ListDbNodesResponse": { "description": "The response for `DbNode.List`.", "id": "ListDbNodesResponse", @@ -3802,6 +5080,24 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"ListDbSystemInitialStorageSizesResponse": { +"description": "The response for `DbSystemInitialStorageSizes.List`.", +"id": "ListDbSystemInitialStorageSizesResponse", +"properties": { +"dbSystemInitialStorageSizes": { +"description": "The list of DbSystemInitialStorageSizes.", +"items": { +"$ref": "DbSystemInitialStorageSize" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"nextPageToken": { +"description": "A token identifying a page of results the server should return.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "ListDbSystemShapesResponse": { "description": "The response for `DbSystemShape.List`.", "id": "ListDbSystemShapesResponse", @@ -3820,6 +5116,42 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"ListDbSystemsResponse": { +"description": "The response for `DbSystem.List`.", +"id": "ListDbSystemsResponse", +"properties": { +"dbSystems": { +"description": "The list of DbSystems.", +"items": { +"$ref": "DbSystem" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"nextPageToken": { +"description": "A token identifying a page of results the server should return.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"ListDbVersionsResponse": { +"description": "The response for `DbVersions.List`.", +"id": "ListDbVersionsResponse", +"properties": { +"dbVersions": { +"description": "The list of DbVersions.", +"items": { +"$ref": "DbVersion" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"nextPageToken": { +"description": "A token identifying a page of results the server should return.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "ListEntitlementsResponse": { "description": "The response for `Entitlement.List`.", "id": "ListEntitlementsResponse", @@ -3942,6 +5274,24 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"ListPluggableDatabasesResponse": { +"description": "The response for `PluggableDatabase.List`.", +"id": "ListPluggableDatabasesResponse", +"properties": { +"nextPageToken": { +"description": "A token identifying a page of results the server should return.", +"type": "string" +}, +"pluggableDatabases": { +"description": "The list of PluggableDatabases.", +"items": { +"$ref": "PluggableDatabase" +}, +"type": "array" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "Location": { "description": "A resource that represents a Google Cloud location.", "id": "Location", @@ -4135,6 +5485,10 @@ "readOnly": true, "type": "string" }, +"gcpOracleZone": { +"description": "Optional. The GCP Oracle zone where OdbNetwork is hosted. Example: us-east4-b-r2. If not specified, the system will pick a zone based on availability.", +"type": "string" +}, "labels": { "additionalProperties": { "type": "string" @@ -4318,6 +5672,210 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"PluggableDatabase": { +"description": "The PluggableDatabase resource. https://docs.oracle.com/en-us/iaas/api/#/en/database/20160918/PluggableDatabase/", +"id": "PluggableDatabase", +"properties": { +"createTime": { +"description": "Output only. The date and time that the PluggableDatabase was created.", +"format": "google-datetime", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"name": { +"description": "Identifier. The name of the PluggableDatabase resource in the following format: projects/{project}/locations/{region}/pluggableDatabases/{pluggable_database}", +"type": "string" +}, +"ociUrl": { +"description": "Output only. HTTPS link to OCI resources exposed to Customer via UI Interface.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"properties": { +"$ref": "PluggableDatabaseProperties", +"description": "Optional. The properties of the PluggableDatabase." +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"PluggableDatabaseConnectionStrings": { +"description": "The connection strings used to connect to the Oracle Database.", +"id": "PluggableDatabaseConnectionStrings", +"properties": { +"allConnectionStrings": { +"additionalProperties": { +"type": "string" +}, +"description": "Optional. All connection strings to use to connect to the pluggable database.", +"type": "object" +}, +"pdbDefault": { +"description": "Optional. The default connection string to use to connect to the pluggable database.", +"type": "string" +}, +"pdbIpDefault": { +"description": "Optional. The default connection string to use to connect to the pluggable database using IP.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"PluggableDatabaseNodeLevelDetails": { +"description": "The Pluggable Database Node Level Details.", +"id": "PluggableDatabaseNodeLevelDetails", +"properties": { +"nodeName": { +"description": "Required. The Node name of the Database home.", +"type": "string" +}, +"openMode": { +"description": "Required. The mode that the pluggable database is in to open it.", +"enum": [ +"PLUGGABLE_DATABASE_OPEN_MODE_UNSPECIFIED", +"READ_ONLY", +"READ_WRITE", +"MOUNTED", +"MIGRATE" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"The open mode is unspecified.", +"The pluggable database is opened in read-only mode.", +"The pluggable database is opened in read-write mode.", +"The pluggable database is mounted.", +"The pluggable database is migrated." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"pluggableDatabaseId": { +"description": "Required. The OCID of the Pluggable Database.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"PluggableDatabaseProperties": { +"description": "The properties of a PluggableDatabase.", +"id": "PluggableDatabaseProperties", +"properties": { +"compartmentId": { +"description": "Required. The OCID of the compartment.", +"type": "string" +}, +"connectionStrings": { +"$ref": "PluggableDatabaseConnectionStrings", +"description": "Optional. The Connection strings used to connect to the Oracle Database." +}, +"containerDatabaseOcid": { +"description": "Required. The OCID of the CDB.", +"type": "string" +}, +"databaseManagementConfig": { +"$ref": "DatabaseManagementConfig", +"description": "Output only. The configuration of the Database Management service.", +"readOnly": true +}, +"definedTags": { +"additionalProperties": { +"$ref": "DefinedTagValue" +}, +"description": "Optional. Defined tags for this resource. Each key is predefined and scoped to a namespace.", +"type": "object" +}, +"freeformTags": { +"additionalProperties": { +"type": "string" +}, +"description": "Optional. Free-form tags for this resource. Each tag is a simple key-value pair with no predefined name, type, or namespace.", +"type": "object" +}, +"isRestricted": { +"description": "Optional. The restricted mode of the pluggable database. If a pluggable database is opened in restricted mode, the user needs both create a session and have restricted session privileges to connect to it.", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"lifecycleDetails": { +"description": "Output only. Additional information about the current lifecycle state.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"lifecycleState": { +"description": "Output only. The current state of the pluggable database.", +"enum": [ +"PLUGGABLE_DATABASE_LIFECYCLE_STATE_UNSPECIFIED", +"PROVISIONING", +"AVAILABLE", +"TERMINATING", +"TERMINATED", +"UPDATING", +"FAILED", +"RELOCATING", +"RELOCATED", +"REFRESHING", +"RESTORE_IN_PROGRESS", +"RESTORE_FAILED", +"BACKUP_IN_PROGRESS", +"DISABLED" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"The lifecycle state is unspecified.", +"The pluggable database is provisioning.", +"The pluggable database is available.", +"The pluggable database is terminating.", +"The pluggable database is terminated.", +"The pluggable database is updating.", +"The pluggable database is in a failed state.", +"The pluggable database is relocating.", +"The pluggable database is relocated.", +"The pluggable database is refreshing.", +"The pluggable database is restoring.", +"The pluggable database restore failed.", +"The pluggable database is backing up.", +"The pluggable database is disabled." +], +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"ocid": { +"description": "Output only. The OCID of the pluggable database.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"operationsInsightsState": { +"description": "Output only. The status of Operations Insights for this Database.", +"enum": [ +"OPERATIONS_INSIGHTS_STATE_UNSPECIFIED", +"ENABLING", +"ENABLED", +"DISABLING", +"NOT_ENABLED", +"FAILED_ENABLING", +"FAILED_DISABLING" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"The status is not specified.", +"Operations Insights is enabling.", +"Operations Insights is enabled.", +"Operations Insights is disabling.", +"Operations Insights is not enabled.", +"Operations Insights failed to enable.", +"Operations Insights failed to disable." +], +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"pdbName": { +"description": "Required. The database name.", +"type": "string" +}, +"pdbNodeLevelDetails": { +"description": "Optional. Pluggable Database Node Level Details", +"items": { +"$ref": "PluggableDatabaseNodeLevelDetails" +}, +"type": "array" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "RestartAutonomousDatabaseRequest": { "description": "The request for `AutonomousDatabase.Restart`.", "id": "RestartAutonomousDatabaseRequest", @@ -4432,6 +5990,25 @@ "properties": {}, "type": "object" }, +"StorageSizeDetails": { +"description": "The initial storage size, in gigabytes, that is applicable for virtual machine DBSystem.", +"id": "StorageSizeDetails", +"properties": { +"dataStorageSizeInGbs": { +"description": "Output only. The data storage size, in gigabytes, that is applicable for virtual machine DBSystem.", +"format": "int32", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "integer" +}, +"recoStorageSizeInGbs": { +"description": "Output only. The RECO/REDO storage size, in gigabytes, that is applicable for virtual machine DBSystem.", +"format": "int32", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "integer" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "SwitchoverAutonomousDatabaseRequest": { "description": "The request for `OracleDatabase.SwitchoverAutonomousDatabase`.", "id": "SwitchoverAutonomousDatabaseRequest", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/privateca.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/privateca.v1.json index ea465080d6f..b837643e7c5 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/privateca.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/privateca.v1.json @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. A list of extra location types that should be used as conditions for controlling the visibility of the locations.", +"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -1611,7 +1611,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250528", +"revision": "20250901", "rootUrl": "https://privateca.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AccessUrls": { @@ -1797,6 +1797,10 @@ "description": "A CaPool represents a group of CertificateAuthorities that form a trust anchor. A CaPool can be used to manage issuance policies for one or more CertificateAuthority resources and to rotate CA certificates in and out of the trust anchor.", "id": "CaPool", "properties": { +"encryptionSpec": { +"$ref": "EncryptionSpec", +"description": "Optional. When EncryptionSpec is provided, the Subject, SubjectAltNames, and the PEM-encoded certificate fields will be encrypted at rest." +}, "issuancePolicy": { "$ref": "IssuancePolicy", "description": "Optional. The IssuancePolicy to control how Certificates will be issued from this CaPool." @@ -2423,6 +2427,17 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"EncryptionSpec": { +"description": "The configuration used for encrypting data at rest.", +"id": "EncryptionSpec", +"properties": { +"cloudKmsKey": { +"description": "The resource name for a Cloud KMS key in the format `projects/*/locations/*/keyRings/*/cryptoKeys/*`.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "Expr": { "description": "Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: \"Summary size limit\" description: \"Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars\" expression: \"document.summary.size() < 100\" Example (Equality): title: \"Requestor is owner\" description: \"Determines if requestor is the document owner\" expression: \"document.owner == request.auth.claims.email\" Example (Logic): title: \"Public documents\" description: \"Determine whether the document should be publicly visible\" expression: \"document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'\" Example (Data Manipulation): title: \"Notification string\" description: \"Create a notification string with a timestamp.\" expression: \"'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)\" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information.", "id": "Expr", @@ -3122,37 +3137,6 @@ }, "type": "object" }, -"ReconciliationOperationMetadata": { -"description": "Operation metadata returned by the CLH during resource state reconciliation.", -"id": "ReconciliationOperationMetadata", -"properties": { -"deleteResource": { -"deprecated": true, -"description": "DEPRECATED. Use exclusive_action instead.", -"type": "boolean" -}, -"exclusiveAction": { -"description": "Excluisive action returned by the CLH.", -"enum": [ -"UNKNOWN_REPAIR_ACTION", -"DELETE", -"RETRY" -], -"enumDeprecated": [ -false, -true, -false -], -"enumDescriptions": [ -"Unknown repair action.", -"The resource has to be deleted. When using this bit, the CLH should fail the operation. DEPRECATED. Instead use DELETE_RESOURCE OperationSignal in SideChannel.", -"This resource could not be repaired but the repair should be tried again at a later time. This can happen if there is a dependency that needs to be resolved first- e.g. if a parent resource must be repaired before a child resource." -], -"type": "string" -} -}, -"type": "object" -}, "RelativeDistinguishedName": { "description": "RelativeDistinguishedName specifies a relative distinguished name which will be used to build a distinguished name.", "id": "RelativeDistinguishedName", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/privateca.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/privateca.v1beta1.json index a3a090b771d..1a6a7cb7441 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/privateca.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/privateca.v1beta1.json @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. A list of extra location types that should be used as conditions for controlling the visibility of the locations.", +"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -586,7 +586,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250326", +"revision": "20250901", "rootUrl": "https://privateca.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuditConfig": { @@ -830,37 +830,6 @@ }, "type": "object" }, -"ReconciliationOperationMetadata": { -"description": "Operation metadata returned by the CLH during resource state reconciliation.", -"id": "ReconciliationOperationMetadata", -"properties": { -"deleteResource": { -"deprecated": true, -"description": "DEPRECATED. Use exclusive_action instead.", -"type": "boolean" -}, -"exclusiveAction": { -"description": "Excluisive action returned by the CLH.", -"enum": [ -"UNKNOWN_REPAIR_ACTION", -"DELETE", -"RETRY" -], -"enumDeprecated": [ -false, -true, -false -], -"enumDescriptions": [ -"Unknown repair action.", -"The resource has to be deleted. When using this bit, the CLH should fail the operation. DEPRECATED. Instead use DELETE_RESOURCE OperationSignal in SideChannel.", -"This resource could not be repaired but the repair should be tried again at a later time. This can happen if there is a dependency that needs to be resolved first- e.g. if a parent resource must be repaired before a child resource." -], -"type": "string" -} -}, -"type": "object" -}, "SetIamPolicyRequest": { "description": "Request message for `SetIamPolicy` method.", "id": "SetIamPolicyRequest", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/recommender.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/recommender.v1beta1.json index 7dc03f416e0..aec3798f91b 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/recommender.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/recommender.v1beta1.json @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -596,7 +596,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -972,7 +972,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -1449,7 +1449,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -1944,7 +1944,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250817", +"revision": "20250907", "rootUrl": "https://recommender.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudLocationListLocationsResponse": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/redis.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/redis.v1.json index c569c839fe8..89fb289b7ab 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/redis.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/redis.v1.json @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -1073,7 +1073,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250825", +"revision": "20250909", "rootUrl": "https://redis.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AOFConfig": { @@ -1592,6 +1592,13 @@ "description": "Optional. The KMS key used to encrypt the at-rest data of the cluster.", "type": "string" }, +"labels": { +"additionalProperties": { +"type": "string" +}, +"description": "Optional. Labels to represent user-provided metadata.", +"type": "object" +}, "maintenancePolicy": { "$ref": "ClusterMaintenancePolicy", "description": "Optional. ClusterMaintenancePolicy determines when to allow or deny updates." @@ -2012,7 +2019,7 @@ "type": "object" }, "DatabaseResourceFeed": { -"description": "DatabaseResourceFeed is the top level proto to be used to ingest different database resource level events into Condor platform. Next ID: 11", +"description": "DatabaseResourceFeed is the top level proto to be used to ingest different database resource level events into Condor platform. Next ID: 13", "id": "DatabaseResourceFeed", "properties": { "backupdrMetadata": { @@ -2023,6 +2030,10 @@ "$ref": "ConfigBasedSignalData", "description": "Config based signal data is used to ingest signals that are generated based on the configuration of the database resource." }, +"databaseResourceSignalData": { +"$ref": "DatabaseResourceSignalData", +"description": "Database resource signal data is used to ingest signals from database resource signal feeds." +}, "feedTimestamp": { "description": "Required. Timestamp when feed is generated.", "format": "google-datetime", @@ -2037,7 +2048,8 @@ "SECURITY_FINDING_DATA", "RECOMMENDATION_SIGNAL_DATA", "CONFIG_BASED_SIGNAL_DATA", -"BACKUPDR_METADATA" +"BACKUPDR_METADATA", +"DATABASE_RESOURCE_SIGNAL_DATA" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "", @@ -2046,7 +2058,8 @@ "Database resource security health signal data", "Database resource recommendation signal data", "Database config based signal data", -"Database resource metadata from BackupDR" +"Database resource metadata from BackupDR", +"Database resource signal data" ], "type": "string" }, @@ -2562,7 +2575,7 @@ false "type": "object" }, "DatabaseResourceMetadata": { -"description": "Common model for database resource instance metadata. Next ID: 26", +"description": "Common model for database resource instance metadata. Next ID: 27", "id": "DatabaseResourceMetadata", "properties": { "availabilityConfiguration": { @@ -2615,12 +2628,14 @@ false "enum": [ "EDITION_UNSPECIFIED", "EDITION_ENTERPRISE", -"EDITION_ENTERPRISE_PLUS" +"EDITION_ENTERPRISE_PLUS", +"EDITION_STANDARD" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Default, to make it consistent with instance edition enum.", "Represents the enterprise edition.", -"Represents the enterprise plus edition." +"Represents the enterprise plus edition.", +"Represents the standard edition." ], "type": "string" }, @@ -2765,6 +2780,10 @@ false "userLabelSet": { "$ref": "UserLabels", "description": "User-provided labels associated with the resource" +}, +"zone": { +"description": "The resource zone. This is only applicable for zonal resources and will be empty for regional and multi-regional resources.", +"type": "string" } }, "type": "object" @@ -3141,6 +3160,67 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"DatabaseResourceSignalData": { +"description": "Database resource signal data. This is used to send signals to Condor which are based on the DB/Instance/Fleet level configurations. These will be used to send signals for all inventory types. Next ID: 7", +"id": "DatabaseResourceSignalData", +"properties": { +"fullResourceName": { +"description": "Required. Full Resource name of the source resource.", +"type": "string" +}, +"lastRefreshTime": { +"description": "Required. Last time signal was refreshed", +"format": "google-datetime", +"type": "string" +}, +"resourceId": { +"$ref": "DatabaseResourceId", +"description": "Database resource id." +}, +"signalBoolValue": { +"description": "Signal data for boolean signals.", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"signalState": { +"description": "Required. Output only. Signal state of the signal", +"enum": [ +"SIGNAL_STATE_UNSPECIFIED", +"ACTIVE", +"INACTIVE", +"DISMISSED" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unspecified signal state.", +"Signal is active and requires attention.", +"Signal is inactive and does not require attention.", +"Signal is dismissed by the user and should not be shown to the user again." +], +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"signalType": { +"description": "Required. Signal type of the signal", +"enum": [ +"SIGNAL_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED", +"SIGNAL_TYPE_OUTDATED_MINOR_VERSION", +"SIGNAL_TYPE_DATABASE_AUDITING_DISABLED", +"SIGNAL_TYPE_NO_ROOT_PASSWORD", +"SIGNAL_TYPE_EXPOSED_TO_PUBLIC_ACCESS", +"SIGNAL_TYPE_UNENCRYPTED_CONNECTIONS" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unspecified signal type.", +"Outdated Minor Version", +"Represents database auditing is disabled.", +"Represents if a database has a password configured for the root account or not.", +"Represents if a resource is exposed to public access.", +"Represents if a resources requires all incoming connections to use SSL or not." +], +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "DiscoveryEndpoint": { "description": "Endpoints on each network, for Redis clients to connect to the cluster.", "id": "DiscoveryEndpoint", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/redis.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/redis.v1beta1.json index bdfcc7dc594..d53575e6268 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/redis.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/redis.v1beta1.json @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -1073,7 +1073,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250825", +"revision": "20250909", "rootUrl": "https://redis.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AOFConfig": { @@ -1592,6 +1592,13 @@ "description": "Optional. The KMS key used to encrypt the at-rest data of the cluster.", "type": "string" }, +"labels": { +"additionalProperties": { +"type": "string" +}, +"description": "Optional. Labels to represent user-provided metadata.", +"type": "object" +}, "maintenancePolicy": { "$ref": "ClusterMaintenancePolicy", "description": "Optional. ClusterMaintenancePolicy determines when to allow or deny updates." @@ -2012,7 +2019,7 @@ "type": "object" }, "DatabaseResourceFeed": { -"description": "DatabaseResourceFeed is the top level proto to be used to ingest different database resource level events into Condor platform. Next ID: 11", +"description": "DatabaseResourceFeed is the top level proto to be used to ingest different database resource level events into Condor platform. Next ID: 13", "id": "DatabaseResourceFeed", "properties": { "backupdrMetadata": { @@ -2023,6 +2030,10 @@ "$ref": "ConfigBasedSignalData", "description": "Config based signal data is used to ingest signals that are generated based on the configuration of the database resource." }, +"databaseResourceSignalData": { +"$ref": "DatabaseResourceSignalData", +"description": "Database resource signal data is used to ingest signals from database resource signal feeds." +}, "feedTimestamp": { "description": "Required. Timestamp when feed is generated.", "format": "google-datetime", @@ -2037,7 +2048,8 @@ "SECURITY_FINDING_DATA", "RECOMMENDATION_SIGNAL_DATA", "CONFIG_BASED_SIGNAL_DATA", -"BACKUPDR_METADATA" +"BACKUPDR_METADATA", +"DATABASE_RESOURCE_SIGNAL_DATA" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "", @@ -2046,7 +2058,8 @@ "Database resource security health signal data", "Database resource recommendation signal data", "Database config based signal data", -"Database resource metadata from BackupDR" +"Database resource metadata from BackupDR", +"Database resource signal data" ], "type": "string" }, @@ -2562,7 +2575,7 @@ false "type": "object" }, "DatabaseResourceMetadata": { -"description": "Common model for database resource instance metadata. Next ID: 26", +"description": "Common model for database resource instance metadata. Next ID: 27", "id": "DatabaseResourceMetadata", "properties": { "availabilityConfiguration": { @@ -2615,12 +2628,14 @@ false "enum": [ "EDITION_UNSPECIFIED", "EDITION_ENTERPRISE", -"EDITION_ENTERPRISE_PLUS" +"EDITION_ENTERPRISE_PLUS", +"EDITION_STANDARD" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Default, to make it consistent with instance edition enum.", "Represents the enterprise edition.", -"Represents the enterprise plus edition." +"Represents the enterprise plus edition.", +"Represents the standard edition." ], "type": "string" }, @@ -2765,6 +2780,10 @@ false "userLabelSet": { "$ref": "UserLabels", "description": "User-provided labels associated with the resource" +}, +"zone": { +"description": "The resource zone. This is only applicable for zonal resources and will be empty for regional and multi-regional resources.", +"type": "string" } }, "type": "object" @@ -3141,6 +3160,67 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"DatabaseResourceSignalData": { +"description": "Database resource signal data. This is used to send signals to Condor which are based on the DB/Instance/Fleet level configurations. These will be used to send signals for all inventory types. Next ID: 7", +"id": "DatabaseResourceSignalData", +"properties": { +"fullResourceName": { +"description": "Required. Full Resource name of the source resource.", +"type": "string" +}, +"lastRefreshTime": { +"description": "Required. Last time signal was refreshed", +"format": "google-datetime", +"type": "string" +}, +"resourceId": { +"$ref": "DatabaseResourceId", +"description": "Database resource id." +}, +"signalBoolValue": { +"description": "Signal data for boolean signals.", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"signalState": { +"description": "Required. Output only. Signal state of the signal", +"enum": [ +"SIGNAL_STATE_UNSPECIFIED", +"ACTIVE", +"INACTIVE", +"DISMISSED" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unspecified signal state.", +"Signal is active and requires attention.", +"Signal is inactive and does not require attention.", +"Signal is dismissed by the user and should not be shown to the user again." +], +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"signalType": { +"description": "Required. Signal type of the signal", +"enum": [ +"SIGNAL_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED", +"SIGNAL_TYPE_OUTDATED_MINOR_VERSION", +"SIGNAL_TYPE_DATABASE_AUDITING_DISABLED", +"SIGNAL_TYPE_NO_ROOT_PASSWORD", +"SIGNAL_TYPE_EXPOSED_TO_PUBLIC_ACCESS", +"SIGNAL_TYPE_UNENCRYPTED_CONNECTIONS" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Unspecified signal type.", +"Outdated Minor Version", +"Represents database auditing is disabled.", +"Represents if a database has a password configured for the root account or not.", +"Represents if a resource is exposed to public access.", +"Represents if a resources requires all incoming connections to use SSL or not." +], +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "DiscoveryEndpoint": { "description": "Endpoints on each network, for Redis clients to connect to the cluster.", "id": "DiscoveryEndpoint", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/retail.v2alpha.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/retail.v2alpha.json index 8bf9f295db7..aeeddf619cb 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/retail.v2alpha.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/retail.v2alpha.json @@ -2859,7 +2859,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250807", +"revision": "20250828", "rootUrl": "https://retail.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleApiHttpBody": { @@ -4700,9 +4700,9 @@ ], "enumDescriptions": [ "Default value.", -"Disable Conversational Filtering.", -"Enabled Conversational Filtering with default Conversational Search.", -"Enabled Conversational Filtering without default Conversational Search." +"Disables Conversational Filtering when using Conversational Search.", +"Enables Conversational Filtering when using Conversational Search.", +"Enables Conversational Filtering without Conversational Search." ], "type": "string" }, diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/run.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/run.v1.json index 7ab03570095..efa5c2dd2c0 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/run.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/run.v1.json @@ -188,6 +188,11 @@ }, { "description": "Locational Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://us-central2-run.googleapis.com/", +"location": "us-central2" +}, +{ +"description": "Locational Endpoint", "endpointUrl": "https://us-east1-run.googleapis.com/", "location": "us-east1" }, @@ -203,6 +208,11 @@ }, { "description": "Locational Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://us-east7-run.googleapis.com/", +"location": "us-east7" +}, +{ +"description": "Locational Endpoint", "endpointUrl": "https://us-south1-run.googleapis.com/", "location": "us-south1" }, @@ -225,6 +235,11 @@ "description": "Locational Endpoint", "endpointUrl": "https://us-west4-run.googleapis.com/", "location": "us-west4" +}, +{ +"description": "Locational Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://us-west8-run.googleapis.com/", +"location": "us-west8" } ], "fullyEncodeReservedExpansion": true, @@ -1727,7 +1742,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -2887,7 +2902,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250822", +"revision": "20250905", "rootUrl": "https://run.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Addressable": { @@ -4707,7 +4722,7 @@ false "id": "GoogleDevtoolsCloudbuildV1NpmPackage", "properties": { "packagePath": { -"description": "Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package", +"description": "Optional. Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package Only one of `archive` or `package_path` can be specified.", "type": "string" }, "repository": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/run.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/run.v2.json index 48c0e5f8492..565922d71e9 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/run.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/run.v2.json @@ -188,6 +188,11 @@ }, { "description": "Locational Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://us-central2-run.googleapis.com/", +"location": "us-central2" +}, +{ +"description": "Locational Endpoint", "endpointUrl": "https://us-east1-run.googleapis.com/", "location": "us-east1" }, @@ -203,6 +208,11 @@ }, { "description": "Locational Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://us-east7-run.googleapis.com/", +"location": "us-east7" +}, +{ +"description": "Locational Endpoint", "endpointUrl": "https://us-south1-run.googleapis.com/", "location": "us-south1" }, @@ -225,6 +235,11 @@ "description": "Locational Endpoint", "endpointUrl": "https://us-west4-run.googleapis.com/", "location": "us-west4" +}, +{ +"description": "Locational Endpoint", +"endpointUrl": "https://us-west8-run.googleapis.com/", +"location": "us-west8" } ], "fullyEncodeReservedExpansion": true, @@ -1922,7 +1937,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250818", +"revision": "20250905", "rootUrl": "https://run.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudRunV2BinaryAuthorization": { @@ -3762,7 +3777,7 @@ "type": "integer" }, "items": { -"description": "If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version.", +"description": "If unspecified, the volume will expose a file whose name is the secret, relative to VolumeMount.mount_path + VolumeMount.sub_path. If specified, the key will be used as the version to fetch from Cloud Secret Manager and the path will be the name of the file exposed in the volume. When items are defined, they must specify a path and a version.", "items": { "$ref": "GoogleCloudRunV2VersionToPath" }, @@ -5920,7 +5935,7 @@ false "id": "GoogleDevtoolsCloudbuildV1NpmPackage", "properties": { "packagePath": { -"description": "Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package", +"description": "Optional. Path to the package.json. e.g. workspace/path/to/package Only one of `archive` or `package_path` can be specified.", "type": "string" }, "repository": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/saasservicemgmt.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/saasservicemgmt.v1beta1.json index 5e05f024e53..1cc4f01b9ab 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/saasservicemgmt.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/saasservicemgmt.v1beta1.json @@ -1804,7 +1804,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250818", +"revision": "20250903", "rootUrl": "https://saasservicemgmt.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Aggregate": { @@ -2349,7 +2349,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "rolloutOrchestrationStrategy": { -"description": "Optional. The strategy used for executing this Rollout. This strategy will override whatever strategy is specified in the RolloutType. If not specified on creation, the strategy from RolloutType will be used. There are two supported values strategies which are used to control - \"Google.Cloud.Simple.AllAtOnce\" - \"Google.Cloud.Simple.OneLocationAtATime\" A rollout with one of these simple strategies will rollout across all locations defined in the targeted UnitKind's Saas Locations.", +"description": "Optional. The strategy used for executing this Rollout. This strategy will override whatever strategy is specified in the RolloutKind. If not specified on creation, the strategy from RolloutKind will be used. There are two supported values strategies which are used to control - \"Google.Cloud.Simple.AllAtOnce\" - \"Google.Cloud.Simple.OneLocationAtATime\" A rollout with one of these simple strategies will rollout across all locations defined in the targeted UnitKind's Saas Locations.", "type": "string" }, "rootRollout": { @@ -2414,7 +2414,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "unitFilter": { -"description": "Optional. CEL(https://github.com/google/cel-spec) formatted filter string against Unit. The filter will be applied to determine the eligible unit population. This filter can only reduce, but not expand the scope of the rollout. If not provided, the unit_filter from the RolloutType will be used.", +"description": "Optional. CEL(https://github.com/google/cel-spec) formatted filter string against Unit. The filter will be applied to determine the eligible unit population. This filter can only reduce, but not expand the scope of the rollout. If not provided, the unit_filter from the RolloutKind will be used.", "type": "string" }, "updateTime": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/secretmanager.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/secretmanager.v1.json index 45f96928580..f68cb902e33 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/secretmanager.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/secretmanager.v1.json @@ -326,7 +326,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. A list of extra location types that should be used as conditions for controlling the visibility of the locations.", +"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -1296,7 +1296,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250704", +"revision": "20250902", "rootUrl": "https://secretmanager.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AccessSecretVersionResponse": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/secretmanager.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/secretmanager.v1beta1.json index 24d83f7a0c9..abb3674d993 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/secretmanager.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/secretmanager.v1beta1.json @@ -326,7 +326,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. A list of extra location types that should be used as conditions for controlling the visibility of the locations.", +"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -816,7 +816,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250704", +"revision": "20250902", "rootUrl": "https://secretmanager.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AccessSecretVersionResponse": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/secretmanager.v1beta2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/secretmanager.v1beta2.json index a97c6aab895..3c9acc51883 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/secretmanager.v1beta2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/secretmanager.v1beta2.json @@ -326,7 +326,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. A list of extra location types that should be used as conditions for controlling the visibility of the locations.", +"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -1296,7 +1296,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250704", +"revision": "20250902", "rootUrl": "https://secretmanager.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AccessSecretVersionResponse": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/securitycenter.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/securitycenter.v1.json index 3207a016350..5de0bd1da46 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/securitycenter.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/securitycenter.v1.json @@ -5938,7 +5938,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250815", +"revision": "20250905", "rootUrl": "https://securitycenter.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Access": { @@ -10900,7 +10900,7 @@ "description": "Fields related to Backup and DR findings." }, "canonicalName": { -"description": "Output only. The canonical name of the finding. The following list shows some examples: + `organizations/{organization_id}/sources/{source_id}/findings/{finding_id}` + `organizations/{organization_id}/sources/{source_id}/locations/{location_id}/findings/{finding_id}` + `folders/{folder_id}/sources/{source_id}/findings/{finding_id}` + `folders/{folder_id}/sources/{source_id}/locations/{location_id}/findings/{finding_id}` + `projects/{project_id}/sources/{source_id}/findings/{finding_id}` + `projects/{project_id}/sources/{source_id}/locations/{location_id}/findings/{finding_id}` The prefix is the closest CRM ancestor of the resource associated with the finding.", +"description": "Output only. The canonical name of the finding. The following list shows some examples: + `organizations/{organization_id}/sources/{source_id}/locations/{location_id}/findings/{finding_id}` + `folders/{folder_id}/sources/{source_id}/locations/{location_id}/findings/{finding_id}` + `projects/{project_id}/sources/{source_id}/locations/{location_id}/findings/{finding_id}` The prefix is the closest CRM ancestor of the resource associated with the finding.", "readOnly": true, "type": "string" }, @@ -11738,6 +11738,10 @@ "description": "A resource associated with the an issue.", "id": "GoogleCloudSecuritycenterV2IssueResource", "properties": { +"application": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudSecuritycenterV2IssueResourceApplication", +"description": "The AppHub application associated with the resource, if any. Only populated for the primary resource." +}, "awsMetadata": { "$ref": "GoogleCloudSecuritycenterV2IssueResourceAwsMetadata", "description": "The AWS metadata of the resource associated with the issue. Only populated for AWS resources." @@ -11781,6 +11785,17 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudSecuritycenterV2IssueResourceApplication": { +"description": "The AppHub application associated with the resource, if any.", +"id": "GoogleCloudSecuritycenterV2IssueResourceApplication", +"properties": { +"name": { +"description": "The resource name of an Application. Format: `projects/{host-project-id}/locations/{location}/applications/{application-id}`", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudSecuritycenterV2IssueResourceAwsMetadata": { "description": "The AWS metadata of a resource associated with an issue.", "id": "GoogleCloudSecuritycenterV2IssueResourceAwsMetadata", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/securitycenter.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/securitycenter.v1beta1.json index 84b1bfccf0b..950afda1f7c 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/securitycenter.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/securitycenter.v1beta1.json @@ -913,7 +913,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250815", +"revision": "20250905", "rootUrl": "https://securitycenter.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Access": { @@ -5570,7 +5570,7 @@ "description": "Fields related to Backup and DR findings." }, "canonicalName": { -"description": "Output only. The canonical name of the finding. The following list shows some examples: + `organizations/{organization_id}/sources/{source_id}/findings/{finding_id}` + `organizations/{organization_id}/sources/{source_id}/locations/{location_id}/findings/{finding_id}` + `folders/{folder_id}/sources/{source_id}/findings/{finding_id}` + `folders/{folder_id}/sources/{source_id}/locations/{location_id}/findings/{finding_id}` + `projects/{project_id}/sources/{source_id}/findings/{finding_id}` + `projects/{project_id}/sources/{source_id}/locations/{location_id}/findings/{finding_id}` The prefix is the closest CRM ancestor of the resource associated with the finding.", +"description": "Output only. The canonical name of the finding. The following list shows some examples: + `organizations/{organization_id}/sources/{source_id}/locations/{location_id}/findings/{finding_id}` + `folders/{folder_id}/sources/{source_id}/locations/{location_id}/findings/{finding_id}` + `projects/{project_id}/sources/{source_id}/locations/{location_id}/findings/{finding_id}` The prefix is the closest CRM ancestor of the resource associated with the finding.", "readOnly": true, "type": "string" }, @@ -6408,6 +6408,10 @@ "description": "A resource associated with the an issue.", "id": "GoogleCloudSecuritycenterV2IssueResource", "properties": { +"application": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudSecuritycenterV2IssueResourceApplication", +"description": "The AppHub application associated with the resource, if any. Only populated for the primary resource." +}, "awsMetadata": { "$ref": "GoogleCloudSecuritycenterV2IssueResourceAwsMetadata", "description": "The AWS metadata of the resource associated with the issue. Only populated for AWS resources." @@ -6451,6 +6455,17 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudSecuritycenterV2IssueResourceApplication": { +"description": "The AppHub application associated with the resource, if any.", +"id": "GoogleCloudSecuritycenterV2IssueResourceApplication", +"properties": { +"name": { +"description": "The resource name of an Application. Format: `projects/{host-project-id}/locations/{location}/applications/{application-id}`", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudSecuritycenterV2IssueResourceAwsMetadata": { "description": "The AWS metadata of a resource associated with an issue.", "id": "GoogleCloudSecuritycenterV2IssueResourceAwsMetadata", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/securitycenter.v1beta2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/securitycenter.v1beta2.json index 9e985d6b33a..28c7341acba 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/securitycenter.v1beta2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/securitycenter.v1beta2.json @@ -2003,7 +2003,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250815", +"revision": "20250905", "rootUrl": "https://securitycenter.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Access": { @@ -6563,7 +6563,7 @@ "description": "Fields related to Backup and DR findings." }, "canonicalName": { -"description": "Output only. The canonical name of the finding. The following list shows some examples: + `organizations/{organization_id}/sources/{source_id}/findings/{finding_id}` + `organizations/{organization_id}/sources/{source_id}/locations/{location_id}/findings/{finding_id}` + `folders/{folder_id}/sources/{source_id}/findings/{finding_id}` + `folders/{folder_id}/sources/{source_id}/locations/{location_id}/findings/{finding_id}` + `projects/{project_id}/sources/{source_id}/findings/{finding_id}` + `projects/{project_id}/sources/{source_id}/locations/{location_id}/findings/{finding_id}` The prefix is the closest CRM ancestor of the resource associated with the finding.", +"description": "Output only. The canonical name of the finding. The following list shows some examples: + `organizations/{organization_id}/sources/{source_id}/locations/{location_id}/findings/{finding_id}` + `folders/{folder_id}/sources/{source_id}/locations/{location_id}/findings/{finding_id}` + `projects/{project_id}/sources/{source_id}/locations/{location_id}/findings/{finding_id}` The prefix is the closest CRM ancestor of the resource associated with the finding.", "readOnly": true, "type": "string" }, @@ -7401,6 +7401,10 @@ "description": "A resource associated with the an issue.", "id": "GoogleCloudSecuritycenterV2IssueResource", "properties": { +"application": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudSecuritycenterV2IssueResourceApplication", +"description": "The AppHub application associated with the resource, if any. Only populated for the primary resource." +}, "awsMetadata": { "$ref": "GoogleCloudSecuritycenterV2IssueResourceAwsMetadata", "description": "The AWS metadata of the resource associated with the issue. Only populated for AWS resources." @@ -7444,6 +7448,17 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudSecuritycenterV2IssueResourceApplication": { +"description": "The AppHub application associated with the resource, if any.", +"id": "GoogleCloudSecuritycenterV2IssueResourceApplication", +"properties": { +"name": { +"description": "The resource name of an Application. Format: `projects/{host-project-id}/locations/{location}/applications/{application-id}`", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudSecuritycenterV2IssueResourceAwsMetadata": { "description": "The AWS metadata of a resource associated with an issue.", "id": "GoogleCloudSecuritycenterV2IssueResourceAwsMetadata", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicecontrol.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicecontrol.v1.json index f7b2852fef8..5da15afabdb 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicecontrol.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicecontrol.v1.json @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250411", +"revision": "20250820", "rootUrl": "https://servicecontrol.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AllocateInfo": { @@ -418,6 +418,10 @@ "description": "Structured claims presented with the credential. JWTs include `{key: value}` pairs for standard and private claims. The following is a subset of the standard required and optional claims that would typically be presented for a Google-based JWT: {'iss': 'accounts.google.com', 'sub': '113289723416554971153', 'aud': ['123456789012', 'pubsub.googleapis.com'], 'azp': '123456789012.apps.googleusercontent.com', 'email': 'jsmith@example.com', 'iat': 1353601026, 'exp': 1353604926} SAML assertions are similarly specified, but with an identity provider dependent structure.", "type": "object" }, +"oauth": { +"$ref": "Oauth", +"description": "Attributes of the OAuth token associated with the request." +}, "presenter": { "description": "The authorized presenter of the credential. Reflects the optional Authorized Presenter (`azp`) claim within a JWT or the OAuth client id. For example, a Google Cloud Platform client id looks as follows: \"123456789012.apps.googleusercontent.com\".", "type": "string" @@ -437,6 +441,18 @@ "description": "The authority selector specified by the requestor, if any. It is not guaranteed that the principal was allowed to use this authority.", "type": "string" }, +"loggableShortLivedCredential": { +"additionalProperties": { +"description": "Properties of the object.", +"type": "any" +}, +"description": "Converted from \"identity_cloudgaia.AuditLoggableShortLivedCredential\" proto. This message will be used by security, detection and response team. For context please refer to go/cg:short-lived-credential-logging. When the JSON object represented here has a proto equivalent, the proto name will be indicated in the `@type` property.", +"type": "object" +}, +"oauthInfo": { +"$ref": "OAuthInfo", +"description": "OAuth authentication information such as the OAuth client ID." +}, "principalEmail": { "description": "The email address of the authenticated user (or service account on behalf of third party principal) making the request. For third party identity callers, the `principal_subject` field is populated instead of this field. For privacy reasons, the principal email address is sometimes redacted. For more information, see [Caller identities in audit logs](https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/audit#user-id).", "type": "string" @@ -558,7 +574,7 @@ "INJECTED_ERROR" ], "enumDescriptions": [ -"This is never used in `CheckResponse`.", +"This is the default value if error code is not explicitly set. It should not be used directly.", "The consumer's project id, network container, or resource container was not found. Same as google.rpc.Code.NOT_FOUND.", "The consumer doesn't have access to the specified resource. Same as google.rpc.Code.PERMISSION_DENIED.", "Quota check failed. Same as google.rpc.Code.RESOURCE_EXHAUSTED.", @@ -625,6 +641,10 @@ "$ref": "ConsumerInfo", "description": "Consumer info of this check." }, +"ignoreApiKeyUidAsCredentialId": { +"description": "Whether or not the api key should be ignored in the credential_id during reporting.", +"type": "boolean" +}, "unusedArguments": { "description": "A list of fields and label keys that are ignored by the server. The client doesn't need to send them for following requests to improve performance and allow better aggregation.", "items": { @@ -1185,6 +1205,28 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"OAuthInfo": { +"description": "OAuth related information about the request.", +"id": "OAuthInfo", +"properties": { +"oauthClientId": { +"description": "The OAuth client ID of the 1P or 3P application acting on behalf of the user.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"Oauth": { +"description": "This message defines attributes associated with OAuth credentials.", +"id": "Oauth", +"properties": { +"clientId": { +"description": "The optional OAuth client ID. This is the unique public identifier issued by an authorization server to a registered client application. Empty string is equivalent to no oauth client id. WARNING: This is for MCP tools/call and tools/list authorization and not for general use.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "Operation": { "description": "Represents information regarding an operation.", "id": "Operation", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicecontrol.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicecontrol.v2.json index a3144581f1c..3dc4e87cf33 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicecontrol.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicecontrol.v2.json @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ ] }, "report": { -"description": "This method provides telemetry reporting for services that are integrated with [Service Infrastructure](https://cloud.google.com/service-infrastructure). It reports a list of operations that have occurred on a service. It must be called after the operations have been executed. For more information, see [Telemetry Reporting](https://cloud.google.com/service-infrastructure/docs/telemetry-reporting). NOTE: The telemetry reporting has a hard limit of 1000 operations and 1MB per Report call. It is recommended to have no more than 100 operations per call. This method requires the `servicemanagement.services.report` permission on the specified service. For more information, see [Service Control API Access Control](https://cloud.google.com/service-infrastructure/docs/service-control/access-control).", +"description": "This method provides telemetry reporting for services that are integrated with [Service Infrastructure](https://cloud.google.com/service-infrastructure). It reports a list of operations that have occurred on a service. It must be called after the operations have been executed. For more information, see [Telemetry Reporting](https://cloud.google.com/service-infrastructure/docs/telemetry-reporting). NOTE: The telemetry reporting has a hard limit of 100 operations and 1MB per Report call. This method requires the `servicemanagement.services.report` permission on the specified service. For more information, see [Service Control API Access Control](https://cloud.google.com/service-infrastructure/docs/service-control/access-control).", "flatPath": "v2/services/{serviceName}:report", "httpMethod": "POST", "id": "servicecontrol.services.report", @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250425", +"revision": "20250820", "rootUrl": "https://servicecontrol.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Api": { @@ -359,6 +359,10 @@ "description": "Structured claims presented with the credential. JWTs include `{key: value}` pairs for standard and private claims. The following is a subset of the standard required and optional claims that would typically be presented for a Google-based JWT: {'iss': 'accounts.google.com', 'sub': '113289723416554971153', 'aud': ['123456789012', 'pubsub.googleapis.com'], 'azp': '123456789012.apps.googleusercontent.com', 'email': 'jsmith@example.com', 'iat': 1353601026, 'exp': 1353604926} SAML assertions are similarly specified, but with an identity provider dependent structure.", "type": "object" }, +"oauth": { +"$ref": "Oauth", +"description": "Attributes of the OAuth token associated with the request." +}, "presenter": { "description": "The authorized presenter of the credential. Reflects the optional Authorized Presenter (`azp`) claim within a JWT or the OAuth client id. For example, a Google Cloud Platform client id looks as follows: \"123456789012.apps.googleusercontent.com\".", "type": "string" @@ -378,6 +382,18 @@ "description": "The authority selector specified by the requestor, if any. It is not guaranteed that the principal was allowed to use this authority.", "type": "string" }, +"loggableShortLivedCredential": { +"additionalProperties": { +"description": "Properties of the object.", +"type": "any" +}, +"description": "Converted from \"identity_cloudgaia.AuditLoggableShortLivedCredential\" proto. This message will be used by security, detection and response team. For context please refer to go/cg:short-lived-credential-logging. When the JSON object represented here has a proto equivalent, the proto name will be indicated in the `@type` property.", +"type": "object" +}, +"oauthInfo": { +"$ref": "OAuthInfo", +"description": "OAuth authentication information such as the OAuth client ID." +}, "principalEmail": { "description": "The email address of the authenticated user (or service account on behalf of third party principal) making the request. For third party identity callers, the `principal_subject` field is populated instead of this field. For privacy reasons, the principal email address is sometimes redacted. For more information, see [Caller identities in audit logs](https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/audit#user-id).", "type": "string" @@ -524,6 +540,28 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"OAuthInfo": { +"description": "OAuth related information about the request.", +"id": "OAuthInfo", +"properties": { +"oauthClientId": { +"description": "The OAuth client ID of the 1P or 3P application acting on behalf of the user.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"Oauth": { +"description": "This message defines attributes associated with OAuth credentials.", +"id": "Oauth", +"properties": { +"clientId": { +"description": "The optional OAuth client ID. This is the unique public identifier issued by an authorization server to a registered client application. Empty string is equivalent to no oauth client id. WARNING: This is for MCP tools/call and tools/list authorization and not for general use.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "OrgPolicyViolationInfo": { "description": "Represents OrgPolicy Violation information.", "id": "OrgPolicyViolationInfo", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/sts.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/sts.v1.json index 0e022995586..3d87237303a 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/sts.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/sts.v1.json @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250813", +"revision": "20250827", "rootUrl": "https://sts.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleIamV1Binding": { @@ -424,11 +424,11 @@ "type": "string" }, "subjectToken": { -"description": "Required. The input token. This token is either an external credential issued by a workload identity pool provider, or a short-lived access token issued by Google. If the token is an OIDC JWT, it must use the JWT format defined in [RFC 7523](https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7523), and the `subject_token_type` must be either `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:jwt` or `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:id_token`. The following headers are required: - `kid`: The identifier of the signing key securing the JWT. - `alg`: The cryptographic algorithm securing the JWT. Must be `RS256` or `ES256`. The following payload fields are required. For more information, see [RFC 7523, Section 3](https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7523#section-3): - `iss`: The issuer of the token. The issuer must provide a discovery document at the URL `/.well-known/openid-configuration`, where `` is the value of this field. The document must be formatted according to section 4.2 of the [OIDC 1.0 Discovery specification](https://openid.net/specs/openid-connect-discovery-1_0.html#ProviderConfigurationResponse). - `iat`: The issue time, in seconds, since the Unix epoch. Must be in the past. - `exp`: The expiration time, in seconds, since the Unix epoch. Must be less than 48 hours after `iat`. Shorter expiration times are more secure. If possible, we recommend setting an expiration time less than 6 hours. - `sub`: The identity asserted in the JWT. - `aud`: For workload identity pools, this must be a value specified in the allowed audiences for the workload identity pool provider, or one of the audiences allowed by default if no audiences were specified. See https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/reference/rest/v1/projects.locations.workloadIdentityPools.providers#oidc. For workforce pools, this must match the client ID specified in the provider configuration. See https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/reference/rest/v1/locations.workforcePools.providers#oidc. Example header: ``` { \"alg\": \"RS256\", \"kid\": \"us-east-11\" } ``` Example payload: ``` { \"iss\": \"https://accounts.google.com\", \"iat\": 1517963104, \"exp\": 1517966704, \"aud\": \"//iam.googleapis.com/projects/1234567890123/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/my-pool/providers/my-provider\", \"sub\": \"113475438248934895348\", \"my_claims\": { \"additional_claim\": \"value\" } } ``` If `subject_token` is for AWS, it must be a serialized `GetCallerIdentity` token. This token contains the same information as a request to the AWS [`GetCallerIdentity()`](https://docs.aws.amazon.com/STS/latest/APIReference/API_GetCallerIdentity) method, as well as the AWS [signature](https://docs.aws.amazon.com/general/latest/gr/signing_aws_api_requests.html) for the request information. Use Signature Version 4. Format the request as URL-encoded JSON, and set the `subject_token_type` parameter to `urn:ietf:params:aws:token-type:aws4_request`. The following parameters are required: - `url`: The URL of the AWS STS endpoint for `GetCallerIdentity()`, such as `https://sts.amazonaws.com?Action=GetCallerIdentity&Version=2011-06-15`. Regional endpoints are also supported. - `method`: The HTTP request method: `POST`. - `headers`: The HTTP request headers, which must include: - `Authorization`: The request signature. - `x-amz-date`: The time you will send the request, formatted as an [ISO8601 Basic](https://docs.aws.amazon.com/general/latest/gr/sigv4_elements.html#sigv4_elements_date) string. This value is typically set to the current time and is used to help prevent replay attacks. - `host`: The hostname of the `url` field; for example, `sts.amazonaws.com`. - `x-goog-cloud-target-resource`: The full, canonical resource name of the workload identity pool provider, with or without an `https:` prefix. To help ensure data integrity, we recommend including this header in the `SignedHeaders` field of the signed request. For example: //iam.googleapis.com/projects//locations/global/workloadIdentityPools//providers/ https://iam.googleapis.com/projects//locations/global/workloadIdentityPools//providers/ If you are using temporary security credentials provided by AWS, you must also include the header `x-amz-security-token`, with the value set to the session token. The following example shows a `GetCallerIdentity` token: ``` { \"headers\": [ {\"key\": \"x-amz-date\", \"value\": \"20200815T015049Z\"}, {\"key\": \"Authorization\", \"value\": \"AWS4-HMAC-SHA256+Credential=$credential,+SignedHeaders=host;x-amz-date;x-goog-cloud-target-resource,+Signature=$signature\"}, {\"key\": \"x-goog-cloud-target-resource\", \"value\": \"//iam.googleapis.com/projects//locations/global/workloadIdentityPools//providers/\"}, {\"key\": \"host\", \"value\": \"sts.amazonaws.com\"} . ], \"method\": \"POST\", \"url\": \"https://sts.amazonaws.com?Action=GetCallerIdentity&Version=2011-06-15\" } ``` If the token is a SAML 2.0 assertion, it must use the format defined in [the SAML 2.0 spec](https://docs.oasis-open.org/security/saml/Post2.0/sstc-saml-tech-overview-2.0-cd-02.pdf), and the `subject_token_type` must be `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:saml2`. See [Verification of external credentials](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/using-workload-identity-federation#verification_of_external_credentials) for details on how SAML 2.0 assertions are validated during token exchanges. You can also use a Google-issued OAuth 2.0 access token with this field to obtain an access token with new security attributes applied, such as a Credential Access Boundary. In this case, set `subject_token_type` to `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:access_token`. If an access token already contains security attributes, you cannot apply additional security attributes.", +"description": "Required. The input token. This token is either an external credential issued by a workload identity pool provider, or a short-lived access token issued by Google. If the token is an OIDC JWT, it must use the JWT format defined in [RFC 7523](https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7523), and the `subject_token_type` must be either `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:jwt` or `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:id_token`. The following headers are required: - `kid`: The identifier of the signing key securing the JWT. - `alg`: The cryptographic algorithm securing the JWT. Must be `RS256` or `ES256`. The following payload fields are required. For more information, see [RFC 7523, Section 3](https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7523#section-3): - `iss`: The issuer of the token. The issuer must provide a discovery document at the URL `/.well-known/openid-configuration`, where `` is the value of this field. The document must be formatted according to section 4.2 of the [OIDC 1.0 Discovery specification](https://openid.net/specs/openid-connect-discovery-1_0.html#ProviderConfigurationResponse). - `iat`: The issue time, in seconds, since the Unix epoch. Must be in the past. - `exp`: The expiration time, in seconds, since the Unix epoch. Must be less than 48 hours after `iat`. Shorter expiration times are more secure. If possible, we recommend setting an expiration time less than 6 hours. - `sub`: The identity asserted in the JWT. - `aud`: For workload identity pools, this must be a value specified in the allowed audiences for the workload identity pool provider, or one of the audiences allowed by default if no audiences were specified. See https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/reference/rest/v1/projects.locations.workloadIdentityPools.providers#oidc. For workforce pools, this must match the client ID specified in the provider configuration. See https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/reference/rest/v1/locations.workforcePools.providers#oidc. Example header: ``` { \"alg\": \"RS256\", \"kid\": \"us-east-11\" } ``` Example payload: ``` { \"iss\": \"https://accounts.google.com\", \"iat\": 1517963104, \"exp\": 1517966704, \"aud\": \"//iam.googleapis.com/projects/1234567890123/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/my-pool/providers/my-provider\", \"sub\": \"113475438248934895348\", \"my_claims\": { \"additional_claim\": \"value\" } } ``` If `subject_token` is for AWS, it must be a serialized `GetCallerIdentity` token. This token contains the same information as a request to the AWS [`GetCallerIdentity()`](https://docs.aws.amazon.com/STS/latest/APIReference/API_GetCallerIdentity) method, as well as the AWS [signature](https://docs.aws.amazon.com/general/latest/gr/signing_aws_api_requests.html) for the request information. Use Signature Version 4. Format the request as URL-encoded JSON, and set the `subject_token_type` parameter to `urn:ietf:params:aws:token-type:aws4_request`. The following parameters are required: - `url`: The URL of the AWS STS endpoint for `GetCallerIdentity()`, such as `https://sts.amazonaws.com?Action=GetCallerIdentity&Version=2011-06-15`. Regional endpoints are also supported. - `method`: The HTTP request method: `POST`. - `headers`: The HTTP request headers, which must include: - `Authorization`: The request signature. - `x-amz-date`: The time you will send the request, formatted as an [ISO8601 Basic](https://docs.aws.amazon.com/general/latest/gr/sigv4_elements.html#sigv4_elements_date) string. This value is typically set to the current time and is used to help prevent replay attacks. - `host`: The hostname of the `url` field; for example, `sts.amazonaws.com`. - `x-goog-cloud-target-resource`: The full, canonical resource name of the workload identity pool provider, with or without an `https:` prefix. To help ensure data integrity, we recommend including this header in the `SignedHeaders` field of the signed request. For example: //iam.googleapis.com/projects//locations/global/workloadIdentityPools//providers/ https://iam.googleapis.com/projects//locations/global/workloadIdentityPools//providers/ If you are using temporary security credentials provided by AWS, you must also include the header `x-amz-security-token`, with the value set to the session token. The following example shows a `GetCallerIdentity` token: ``` { \"headers\": [ {\"key\": \"x-amz-date\", \"value\": \"20200815T015049Z\"}, {\"key\": \"Authorization\", \"value\": \"AWS4-HMAC-SHA256+Credential=$credential,+SignedHeaders=host;x-amz-date;x-goog-cloud-target-resource,+Signature=$signature\"}, {\"key\": \"x-goog-cloud-target-resource\", \"value\": \"//iam.googleapis.com/projects//locations/global/workloadIdentityPools//providers/\"}, {\"key\": \"host\", \"value\": \"sts.amazonaws.com\"} . ], \"method\": \"POST\", \"url\": \"https://sts.amazonaws.com?Action=GetCallerIdentity&Version=2011-06-15\" } ``` If the token is a SAML 2.0 assertion, it must use the format defined in [the SAML 2.0 spec](https://docs.oasis-open.org/security/saml/Post2.0/sstc-saml-tech-overview-2.0-cd-02.pdf), and the `subject_token_type` must be `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:saml2`. See [Verification of external credentials](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/using-workload-identity-federation#verification_of_external_credentials) for details on how SAML 2.0 assertions are validated during token exchanges. You can also use a Google-issued OAuth 2.0 access token with this field to obtain an access token with new security attributes applied, such as a Credential Access Boundary. In this case, set `subject_token_type` to `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:access_token`. If an access token already contains security attributes, you cannot apply additional security attributes. If the request is for X.509 certificate-based authentication, the `subject_token` must be a JSON-formatted list of X.509 certificates in DER format, as defined in [RFC 7515](https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc7515#section-4.1.6). `subject_token_type` must be `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:mtls`. The following example shows a JSON-formatted list of X.509 certificate in DER format: ``` [\\\"MIIEYDCCA0i...\\\", \\\"MCIFFGAGTT0...\\\"] ```", "type": "string" }, "subjectTokenType": { -"description": "Required. An identifier that indicates the type of the security token in the `subject_token` parameter. Supported values are `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:jwt`, `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:id_token`, `urn:ietf:params:aws:token-type:aws4_request`, `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:access_token`, and `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:saml2`.", +"description": "Required. An identifier that indicates the type of the security token in the `subject_token` parameter. Supported values are `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:jwt`, `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:id_token`, `urn:ietf:params:aws:token-type:aws4_request`, `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:access_token`, `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:mtls`, and `urn:ietf:params:oauth:token-type:saml2`.", "type": "string" } }, diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/texttospeech.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/texttospeech.v1.json index 790e8a879a2..0ab86b7467b 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/texttospeech.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/texttospeech.v1.json @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250805", +"revision": "20250903", "rootUrl": "https://texttospeech.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AdvancedVoiceOptions": { @@ -622,6 +622,10 @@ "$ref": "MultiSpeakerMarkup", "description": "The multi-speaker input to be synthesized. Only applicable for multi-speaker synthesis." }, +"prompt": { +"description": "This is system instruction supported only for controllable voice models. If used, we will pass text to Flash TTS as is. Can only used with Flash TTS. What AI Studio calls Style Instructions.", +"type": "string" +}, "ssml": { "description": "The SSML document to be synthesized. The SSML document must be valid and well-formed. Otherwise the RPC will fail and return google.rpc.Code.INVALID_ARGUMENT. For more information, see [SSML](https://cloud.google.com/text-to-speech/docs/ssml).", "type": "string" diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/texttospeech.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/texttospeech.v1beta1.json index 1c2cb52128d..ff524f4c246 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/texttospeech.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/texttospeech.v1beta1.json @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250805", +"revision": "20250903", "rootUrl": "https://texttospeech.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AdvancedVoiceOptions": { @@ -555,6 +555,10 @@ "$ref": "MultiSpeakerMarkup", "description": "The multi-speaker input to be synthesized. Only applicable for multi-speaker synthesis." }, +"prompt": { +"description": "This is system instruction supported only for controllable voice models. If used, we will pass text to Flash TTS as is. Can only used with Flash TTS. What AI Studio calls Style Instructions.", +"type": "string" +}, "ssml": { "description": "The SSML document to be synthesized. The SSML document must be valid and well-formed. Otherwise the RPC will fail and return google.rpc.Code.INVALID_ARGUMENT. For more information, see [SSML](https://cloud.google.com/text-to-speech/docs/ssml).", "type": "string" diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/tpu.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/tpu.v1.json index e49fb8ce68c..fe014e0b2d4 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/tpu.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/tpu.v1.json @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -665,7 +665,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250815", +"revision": "20250903", "rootUrl": "https://tpu.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AcceleratorType": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/tpu.v1alpha1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/tpu.v1alpha1.json index 10cac263833..dd5bc8c430d 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/tpu.v1alpha1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/tpu.v1alpha1.json @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -675,7 +675,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250815", +"revision": "20250903", "rootUrl": "https://tpu.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AcceleratorType": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/tpu.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/tpu.v2.json index 7aa3570015f..3abe5976056 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/tpu.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/tpu.v2.json @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -893,7 +893,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250815", +"revision": "20250903", "rootUrl": "https://tpu.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AcceleratorConfig": { @@ -1000,12 +1000,34 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"BootDiskConfig": { +"description": "Sets the boot disk configuration for the TPU node.", +"id": "BootDiskConfig", +"properties": { +"customerEncryptionKey": { +"$ref": "CustomerEncryptionKey", +"description": "Optional. Customer encryption key for boot disk." +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "CreatingData": { "description": "Further data for the creating state.", "id": "CreatingData", "properties": {}, "type": "object" }, +"CustomerEncryptionKey": { +"description": "Defines the customer encryption key for disk encryption.", +"id": "CustomerEncryptionKey", +"properties": { +"kmsKeyName": { +"description": "The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: \"kmsKeyName\": \"projects/KMS_PROJECT_ID/locations/REGION/keyRings/KEY_REGION/cryptoKeys/KEY The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: \"kmsKeyName\": \"projects/KMS_PROJECT_ID/locations/REGION/keyRings/KEY_REGION/cryptoKeys/KEY/cryptoKeyVersions/1 ", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "DeletingData": { "description": "Further data for the deleting state.", "id": "DeletingData", @@ -1421,6 +1443,10 @@ "readOnly": true, "type": "string" }, +"bootDiskConfig": { +"$ref": "BootDiskConfig", +"description": "Optional. Boot disk configuration." +}, "cidrBlock": { "description": "The CIDR block that the TPU node will use when selecting an IP address. This CIDR block must be a /29 block; the Compute Engine networks API forbids a smaller block, and using a larger block would be wasteful (a node can only consume one IP address). Errors will occur if the CIDR block has already been used for a currently existing TPU node, the CIDR block conflicts with any subnetworks in the user's provided network, or the provided network is peered with another network that is using that CIDR block.", "type": "string" diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/tpu.v2alpha1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/tpu.v2alpha1.json index 31165713e3e..95db60ae29e 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/tpu.v2alpha1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/tpu.v2alpha1.json @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -1027,7 +1027,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250815", +"revision": "20250903", "rootUrl": "https://tpu.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AcceleratorConfig": { @@ -1177,6 +1177,10 @@ "sourceImage": { "description": "Optional. Image from which boot disk is to be created. If not specified, the default image for the runtime version will be used. Example: `projects/$PROJECT_ID/global/images/$IMAGE_NAME`.", "type": "string" +}, +"storagePool": { +"description": "Optional. The storage pool in which the boot disk is created. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource.", +"type": "string" } }, "type": "object" diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/trafficdirector.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/trafficdirector.v2.json index 69d763c6ab5..d7ee93a5c92 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/trafficdirector.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/trafficdirector.v2.json @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20240625", +"revision": "20250908", "rootUrl": "https://trafficdirector.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Address": { @@ -918,7 +918,7 @@ "type": "object" }, "ValueMatcher": { -"description": "Specifies the way to match a ProtobufWkt::Value. Primitive values and ListValue are supported. StructValue is not supported and is always not matched. [#next-free-field: 7]", +"description": "Specifies the way to match a Protobuf::Value. Primitive values and ListValue are supported. StructValue is not supported and is always not matched. [#next-free-field: 7]", "id": "ValueMatcher", "properties": { "boolMatch": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/trafficdirector.v3.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/trafficdirector.v3.json index 235e5335190..4da1f10af9a 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/trafficdirector.v3.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/trafficdirector.v3.json @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250618", +"revision": "20250908", "rootUrl": "https://trafficdirector.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Address": { @@ -1118,7 +1118,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "networkNamespaceFilepath": { -"description": "Filepath that specifies the Linux network namespace this socket will be created in (see ``man 7 network_namespaces``). If this field is set, Envoy will create the socket in the specified network namespace. .. note:: Setting this parameter requires Envoy to run with the ``CAP_NET_ADMIN`` capability. .. note:: Currently only used for Listener sockets. .. attention:: Network namespaces are only configurable on Linux. Otherwise, this field has no effect.", +"description": "Filepath that specifies the Linux network namespace this socket will be created in (see ``man 7 network_namespaces``). If this field is set, Envoy will create the socket in the specified network namespace. .. note:: Setting this parameter requires Envoy to run with the ``CAP_NET_ADMIN`` capability. .. attention:: Network namespaces are only configurable on Linux. Otherwise, this field has no effect.", "type": "string" }, "portValue": { @@ -1321,7 +1321,7 @@ "type": "object" }, "ValueMatcher": { -"description": "Specifies the way to match a ProtobufWkt::Value. Primitive values and ListValue are supported. StructValue is not supported and is always not matched. [#next-free-field: 8]", +"description": "Specifies the way to match a Protobuf::Value. Primitive values and ListValue are supported. StructValue is not supported and is always not matched. [#next-free-field: 8]", "id": "ValueMatcher", "properties": { "boolMatch": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/vmmigration.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/vmmigration.v1.json index 57dea9a0516..74b8f49c677 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/vmmigration.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/vmmigration.v1.json @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -567,7 +567,7 @@ "imageImportJobs": { "methods": { "cancel": { -"description": "Initiates the cancellation of a running clone job.", +"description": "Initiates the cancellation of a running ImageImportJob.", "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/imageImports/{imageImportsId}/imageImportJobs/{imageImportJobsId}:cancel", "httpMethod": "POST", "id": "vmmigration.projects.locations.imageImports.imageImportJobs.cancel", @@ -2543,7 +2543,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250824", +"revision": "20250911", "rootUrl": "https://vmmigration.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AccessKeyCredentials": { @@ -2565,6 +2565,21 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"AdaptationModifier": { +"description": "AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process.", +"id": "AdaptationModifier", +"properties": { +"modifier": { +"description": "Optional. The modifier name.", +"type": "string" +}, +"value": { +"description": "Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "AdaptingOSStep": { "description": "AdaptingOSStep contains specific step details.", "id": "AdaptingOSStep", @@ -3565,6 +3580,13 @@ "description": "ComputeEngineTargetDefaults is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project.", "id": "ComputeEngineTargetDefaults", "properties": { +"adaptationModifiers": { +"description": "Optional. AdaptationModifiers are the set of modifiers used during OS adaptation.", +"items": { +"$ref": "AdaptationModifier" +}, +"type": "array" +}, "additionalLicenses": { "description": "Additional licenses to assign to the VM.", "items": { @@ -3728,6 +3750,13 @@ "description": "ComputeEngineTargetDetails is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project.", "id": "ComputeEngineTargetDetails", "properties": { +"adaptationModifiers": { +"description": "Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process.", +"items": { +"$ref": "AdaptationModifier" +}, +"type": "array" +}, "additionalLicenses": { "description": "Additional licenses to assign to the VM.", "items": { @@ -4832,6 +4861,13 @@ "description": "Parameters affecting the OS adaptation process.", "id": "ImageImportOsAdaptationParameters", "properties": { +"adaptationModifiers": { +"description": "Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process.", +"items": { +"$ref": "AdaptationModifier" +}, +"type": "array" +}, "bootConversion": { "description": "Optional. By default the image will keep its existing boot option. Setting this property will trigger an internal process which will convert the image from using the existing boot option to another. The size of the boot disk might be increased to allow the conversion", "enum": [ diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/vmmigration.v1alpha1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/vmmigration.v1alpha1.json index 821674e87f0..fdfc86717cc 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/vmmigration.v1alpha1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/vmmigration.v1alpha1.json @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -567,7 +567,7 @@ "imageImportJobs": { "methods": { "cancel": { -"description": "Initiates the cancellation of a running clone job.", +"description": "Initiates the cancellation of a running ImageImportJob.", "flatPath": "v1alpha1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/imageImports/{imageImportsId}/imageImportJobs/{imageImportJobsId}:cancel", "httpMethod": "POST", "id": "vmmigration.projects.locations.imageImports.imageImportJobs.cancel", @@ -2543,7 +2543,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250824", +"revision": "20250911", "rootUrl": "https://vmmigration.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AccessKeyCredentials": { @@ -2565,6 +2565,21 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"AdaptationModifier": { +"description": "AdaptationModifier a modifier to be used for configuration of the OS adaptation process.", +"id": "AdaptationModifier", +"properties": { +"modifier": { +"description": "Optional. The modifier name.", +"type": "string" +}, +"value": { +"description": "Optional. The value of the modifier. The actual value depends on the modifier and can also be empty.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "AdaptingOSStep": { "description": "AdaptingOSStep contains specific step details.", "id": "AdaptingOSStep", @@ -3577,6 +3592,13 @@ "description": "ComputeEngineTargetDefaults is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project.", "id": "ComputeEngineTargetDefaults", "properties": { +"adaptationModifiers": { +"description": "Optional. AdaptationModifiers are the set of modifiers used during OS adaptation.", +"items": { +"$ref": "AdaptationModifier" +}, +"type": "array" +}, "additionalLicenses": { "description": "Additional licenses to assign to the VM.", "items": { @@ -3740,6 +3762,13 @@ "description": "ComputeEngineTargetDetails is a collection of details for creating a VM in a target Compute Engine project.", "id": "ComputeEngineTargetDetails", "properties": { +"adaptationModifiers": { +"description": "Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process.", +"items": { +"$ref": "AdaptationModifier" +}, +"type": "array" +}, "additionalLicenses": { "description": "Additional licenses to assign to the VM.", "items": { @@ -4867,6 +4896,13 @@ "description": "Parameters affecting the OS adaptation process.", "id": "ImageImportOsAdaptationParameters", "properties": { +"adaptationModifiers": { +"description": "Optional. Modifiers to be used as configuration of the OS adaptation process.", +"items": { +"$ref": "AdaptationModifier" +}, +"type": "array" +}, "bootConversion": { "description": "Optional. By default the image will keep its existing boot option. Setting this property will trigger an internal process which will convert the image from using the existing boot option to another. The size of the boot disk might be increased to allow the conversion", "enum": [ diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/walletobjects.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/walletobjects.v1.json index ef40a48ecae..1ee79e6d60b 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/walletobjects.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/walletobjects.v1.json @@ -2711,7 +2711,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250804", +"revision": "20250909", "rootUrl": "https://walletobjects.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "ActivationOptions": { @@ -7332,6 +7332,11 @@ true ], "type": "string" }, +"physicalHeaders": { +"description": "The physical headers provided by RequestReceivedParameters in Scotty request. type is uploader_service.KeyValuePairs.", +"format": "byte", +"type": "string" +}, "requestId": { "description": "The Scotty request ID.", "type": "string" diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/workloadmanager.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/workloadmanager.v1.json index 80b085ef9f7..0eecd5109a0 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/workloadmanager.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/workloadmanager.v1.json @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ ], "parameters": { "extraLocationTypes": { -"description": "Optional. Do not use this field. It is unsupported and is ignored unless explicitly documented otherwise. This is primarily for internal usage.", +"description": "Optional. Unless explicitly documented otherwise, don't use this unsupported field which is primarily intended for internal usage.", "location": "query", "repeated": true, "type": "string" @@ -879,7 +879,7 @@ true } } }, -"revision": "20250820", +"revision": "20250903", "rootUrl": "https://workloadmanager.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AgentCommand": { @@ -1687,7 +1687,7 @@ true "description": "The insights data for the agent status." }, "instanceId": { -"description": "Required. The instance id where the insight is generated from", +"description": "Optional. The instance id where the insight is generated from", "type": "string" }, "sapDiscovery": { @@ -3241,7 +3241,7 @@ true "type": "string" }, "instanceName": { -"description": "Required. instance_name lists the human readable name of the instance that the data comes from.", +"description": "Optional. instance_name lists the human readable name of the instance that the data comes from.", "type": "string" }, "projectId": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/version.py b/googleapiclient/version.py index 10665e7b554..a5b67aa2634 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/version.py +++ b/googleapiclient/version.py @@ -12,4 +12,4 @@ # See the License for the specific language governing permissions and # limitations under the License. -__version__ = "2.181.0" +__version__ = "2.182.0"